Ir6800c Series SM

Service Manual
iR C6800 Series
Sep 8 2007
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual. The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Introduction
Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol
Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.
Introduction
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal. The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power. 2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'. In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads. The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins. All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."
Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction 1.1 System Construction ..................................................................................................................................1- 1
1.1.1 System Configuration with Pickup/Delivery Accessories......................................................................................... 1- 1 1.1.2 System Configuration with Pickup/Delivery Accessories......................................................................................... 1- 1 1.1.3 System Configuration with Pickup/Delivery Accessories......................................................................................... 1- 2 1.1.4 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories............................................................................... 1- 2 1.1.5 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories....................................................................................................... 1- 4 1.1.6 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories............................................................................... 1- 6 1.1.7 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories............................................................................... 1- 6 1.1.8 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories....................................................................................................... 1- 7 1.1.9 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories....................................................................................................... 1- 8
1.2 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................1- 9

1.2.1 Names of Parts........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 9
1.2.1.1 External View ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 9 1.2.1.2 Cross Section......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 10
1.2.2 Using the Machine................................................................................................................................................. 1- 11

1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch ................................................................................................................................................ 1- 11 1.2.2.2 Points to Note About Turing Off the Main Power Switch ....................................................................................................... 1- 12 1.2.2.3 Points to Note About Turing Off the Main Power Switch ....................................................................................................... 1- 14 1.2.2.4 Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 16 1.2.2.5 Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 16 1.2.2.6 Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 17
1.2.3 User Mode Items ................................................................................................................................................... 1- 18

1.2.3.1 Common Settings .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 18 1.2.3.2 Common Settings .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 18 1.2.3.3 Timer Settings........................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 20 1.2.3.4 Timer Settings........................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 20 1.2.3.5 Adjustment and Cleaning...................................................................................................................................................... 1- 20 1.2.3.6 Adjustment and Cleaning...................................................................................................................................................... 1- 20 1.2.3.7 Report Settings ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 21 1.2.3.8 Report Settings ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 21 1.2.3.9 System Settings ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 22 1.2.3.10 System Settings ................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 22 1.2.3.11 Copy Settings....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 24 1.2.3.12 Copy Settings....................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 24 1.2.3.13 Communications Settings .................................................................................................................................................... 1- 24 1.2.3.14 Communications Settings .................................................................................................................................................... 1- 25 1.2.3.15 Mail Box Settings ................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 26 1.2.3.16 Mail Box Settings ................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 26 1.2.3.17 Printer Settings..................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 26 1.2.3.18 Address Book Settings......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 27 1.2.3.19 Address Book Settings......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 27
1.2.4 User Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 1- 27

1.2.4.1 Cleaning................................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 27 1.2.4.2 Inspection............................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 28
1.2.5 Safety .................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 29

1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light ........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 29 1.2.5.2 Regulations by the us Center for Devices and Radiological Health....................................................................................... 1- 29 1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit ......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 30 1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 31
1.2.6 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 31

1.2.6.1 Specifications......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 31 1.2.6.2 Specifications......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 33
1.2.7 Function List .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 34
Contents
1.2.7.1 Print Speed ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 34 1.2.7.2 Paper Type ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 36 1.2.7.3 Print Speed ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 42 1.2.7.4 Paper Type ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 43 1.2.7.5 Accessories............................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 44
1.2.8 RDS Specification ..................................................................................................................................................1- 44

1.2.8.1 Embedded RDS(e-RDS)........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 44 1.2.8.2 Embedded RDS(e-RDS)........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 45
Chapter 2 Installation 2.1 Making Pre-Checks .................................................................................................................................... 2- 1

2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation...............................................................................................................................2- 1 2.1.2 Combination Table of Accessories ..........................................................................................................................2- 2 2.1.3 Installation Environment...........................................................................................................................................2- 4 2.1.4 Checking the Contents.............................................................................................................................................2- 4
2.2 Unpacking and Installation ......................................................................................................................... 2- 7

2.2.1 Unpacking and installation procedure......................................................................................................................2- 7 2.2.2 Turning Off the Host Machine ..................................................................................................................................2- 7 2.2.3 Unpacking ................................................................................................................................................................2- 7 2.2.4 Installation pickup assembly ..................................................................................................................................2- 10 2.2.5 Installation of Scanner ...........................................................................................................................................2- 11 2.2.6 Locking primary transfer roller ...............................................................................................................................2- 11 2.2.7 Before attaching developing assembly ..................................................................................................................2- 11 2.2.8 Attaching color developing assemblies..................................................................................................................2- 15 2.2.9 Attaching the Black Developing Assembly.............................................................................................................2- 19 2.2.10 Attaching the Process Unit...................................................................................................................................2- 21 2.2.11 Installing the Fixing Assembly..............................................................................................................................2- 25 2.2.12 Setting the Black Toner Container .......................................................................................................................2- 26 2.2.13 Checking the Environment Switch .......................................................................................................................2- 26 2.2.14 Turning On the Main Power Switch......................................................................................................................2- 27 2.2.15 Setting the Paper Cassette ..................................................................................................................................2- 27 2.2.16 Changing Paper Size of the Deck (Left/Right) .....................................................................................................2- 28 2.2.17 Setting Color Toner Container .............................................................................................................................2- 29 2.2.18 Supplying Black Toner .........................................................................................................................................2- 29 2.2.19 ITB Cleaning ........................................................................................................................................................2- 30 2.2.20 Supplying Color Toner .........................................................................................................................................2- 30 2.2.21 Setting the Auto Gradation Correction .................................................................................................................2- 30 2.2.22 Checking the Image/Operation ............................................................................................................................2- 30 2.2.23 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration ...................................................................................................................2- 30 2.2.24 Adjusting the Left Edge Margin on Image ............................................................................................................2- 32 2.2.25 Adjusting the Lead Edge Margin of Image ...........................................................................................................2- 34 2.2.26 Securing the Machine in Place.............................................................................................................................2- 35 2.2.27 When the Machine is Not Connecting to the Network..........................................................................................2- 35 2.2.28 Attaching the Shutdown Label .............................................................................................................................2- 35
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ................................................................................................. 2- 36

2.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................2- 36 2.3.2 Checking Network Connection...............................................................................................................................2- 36 2.3.3 Procedure for Ping Operation ................................................................................................................................2- 36 2.3.4 Checking with Remote Host Address ....................................................................................................................2- 36
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network ................................................................................................................... 2- 37

2.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................2- 37 2.4.2 Checking Connection Status of Network Cable .....................................................................................................2- 37 2.4.3 Checking with Loopback Address..........................................................................................................................2- 37 2.4.4 Checking with Local Host Address ........................................................................................................................2- 37
2.5 Relocating the Machine ............................................................................................................................ 2- 37
Contents
2.5.1 Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 2- 37
2.6 Installing the Card Reader ........................................................................................................................2- 38

2.6.1 Points to Note About Installation ........................................................................................................................... 2- 38 2.6.2 Checking the Contents .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 38 2.6.3 Turning Off the Host Machine................................................................................................................................ 2- 39 2.6.4 Installation Procedure ........................................................................................................................................... 2- 39 2.6.5 Using with NetSpot Accountant (NSA) .................................................................................................................. 2- 41
2.7 Installing the NE Controller-A1 .................................................................................................................2- 41

2.7.1 NE Controller-A1 Installation Procedure................................................................................................................ 2- 41
2.8 Installing the Original Tray ........................................................................................................................2- 42

2.8.1 Checking the Contents .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 42 2.8.2 Installation Procedure............................................................................................................................................ 2- 43 2.8.3 Checking the Contents .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 44 2.8.4 Attachment ............................................................................................................................................................ 2- 44
2.9 Installing the Key Switch Unit ...................................................................................................................2- 44

2.9.1 Checking the Contents .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 44 2.9.2 Turning Off the Host Machine................................................................................................................................ 2- 45 2.9.3 Installation Procedure............................................................................................................................................ 2- 45 2.9.4 Checking After Installation..................................................................................................................................... 2- 47
2.10 Installing the Reader Heater ...................................................................................................................2- 47

2.10.1 Checking the Parts .............................................................................................................................................. 2- 47 2.10.2 Turning Off the Host Machine.............................................................................................................................. 2- 48 2.10.3 Installation Procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 48
2.11 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit ............................................................................................................2- 52

2.11.1 Points to Note About Installation.......................................................................................................................... 2- 52 2.11.2 Checking Items in the Package ........................................................................................................................... 2- 52 2.11.3 Checking Items in the Package ........................................................................................................................... 2- 53 2.11.4 Turning Off the Host Machine.............................................................................................................................. 2- 54 2.11.5 Installation Procedure ......................................................................................................................................... 2- 54
Chapter 3 Basic Operation 3.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................3- 1

3.1.1 Functional Construction........................................................................................................................................... 3- 1 3.1.2 Arrangement of the Major PCBs.............................................................................................................................. 3- 2 3.1.3 Arrangement of the Major PCBs.............................................................................................................................. 3- 2 3.1.4 DC Controller........................................................................................................................................................... 3- 3
3.2 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................3- 5

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On............................................................................................................. 3- 5 3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Control During Printing (full-color) ............................................................................................ 3- 5 3.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operation During Printing (mono color) .................................................................................... 3- 6
Chapter 4 Main Controller 4.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................4- 1

4.1.1 Functional Construction........................................................................................................................................... 4- 1 4.1.2 Functional Construction........................................................................................................................................... 4- 2 4.1.3 Functional Construction........................................................................................................................................... 4- 3
4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry........................................................................................................4- 4

4.2.1 Main Controller PCB (main)..................................................................................................................................... 4- 4 4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (main)..................................................................................................................................... 4- 6 4.2.3 Main Controller PCB (sub)....................................................................................................................................... 4- 7 4.2.4 Expansion Bus PCB ................................................................................................................................................ 4- 7 4.2.5 SRAM PCB.............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 8 4.2.6 SRAM PCB.............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 8 4.2.7 HDD......................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 9
Contents
4.3 Start-Up Sequence ................................................................................................................................... 4- 10

4.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................4- 10 4.3.2 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................4- 11 4.3.3 Start-Up Sequence ................................................................................................................................................4- 11 4.3.4 Start-Up Sequence ................................................................................................................................................4- 13
4.4 Actions when HDD Error .......................................................................................................................... 4- 14

4.4.1 E602 in Detail.........................................................................................................................................................4- 14 4.4.2 E602 in Detail ........................................................................................................................................................4- 17 4.4.3 E609 in Detail.........................................................................................................................................................4- 21
4.5 Image Processing..................................................................................................................................... 4- 21

4.5.1 Overview of the Flow of Image Data......................................................................................................................4- 21 4.5.2 Overview of the Flow of Image Data......................................................................................................................4- 21 4.5.3 Construction of the Image Processing Modules ....................................................................................................4- 22 4.5.4 Construction of Image Processing Modules ..........................................................................................................4- 23 4.5.5 Reader Input Image Processing ............................................................................................................................4- 24 4.5.6 Reader Input Image Processing ............................................................................................................................4- 24 4.5.7 Compression/Decompression and Editing Blocks .................................................................................................4- 25 4.5.8 Compression, Decompression, and Edit Processing Blocks .................................................................................4- 26 4.5.9 Printer Output Image Processing...........................................................................................................................4- 27 4.5.10 Printer Output Image Processing .........................................................................................................................4- 28
4.6 Flow of Image Data .................................................................................................................................. 4- 29

4.6.1 Flow of Image Data (copier function) .....................................................................................................................4- 29 4.6.2 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions ..............................................................................................................4- 30 4.6.3 Flow of Image Data (Box function).........................................................................................................................4- 30 4.6.4 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions...................................................................................................................4- 31 4.6.5 Flow of Image Data (SEND function).....................................................................................................................4- 31 4.6.6 Flow of Image Data for SEND Functions ...............................................................................................................4- 32 4.6.7 Flow of Image Data (fax transmission) ..................................................................................................................4- 32 4.6.8 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions.............................................................................................4- 33 4.6.9 Image Data Flow for Fax Reception Functions......................................................................................................4- 33 4.6.10 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions ................................................................................................4- 34 4.6.11 Flow of Image Data (PDL function) ......................................................................................................................4- 34 4.6.12 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions ................................................................................................................4- 35
4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................................. 4- 36

4.7.1 Controller Box ........................................................................................................................................................4- 36
4.7.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Controller Box ........................................................................................................................ 4- 36 4.7.1.2 Preparation for Removing the Controller Box ........................................................................................................................ 4- 36 4.7.1.3 Removing the Controller Box ................................................................................................................................................. 4- 36 4.7.1.4 Removing the Controller Box ................................................................................................................................................. 4- 37
4.7.2 Main Controller PCB (main) ...................................................................................................................................4- 38

4.7.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB (main) ................................................................................................... 4- 38 4.7.2.2 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB (main) ................................................................................................... 4- 38 4.7.2.3 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)............................................................................................................................ 4- 38 4.7.2.4 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) ................................................................................................................... 4- 39 4.7.2.5 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)............................................................................................................................ 4- 39 4.7.2.6 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main) ................................................................................................................... 4- 41
4.7.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) .....................................................................................................................................4- 41

4.7.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ..................................................................................................... 4- 41 4.7.3.2 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ..................................................................................................... 4- 42 4.7.3.3 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)............................................................................................................................ 4- 42 4.7.3.4 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub).............................................................................................................................. 4- 43
4.7.4 Expansion Bus PCB...............................................................................................................................................4- 43

4.7.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Expansion Bus PCB............................................................................................................... 4- 43 4.7.4.2 Removing the Expansion Bus PCB ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 43 4.7.4.3 After Replacing the Expansion PCB ...................................................................................................................................... 4- 44
4.7.5 SRAM PCB ............................................................................................................................................................4- 44

4.7.5.1 Preparation for Removing the SRAM PCB ............................................................................................................................ 4- 44
Contents
4.7.5.2 Removing the SRAM Board................................................................................................................................................... 4- 44
4.7.6 UFR Board............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 44

4.7.6.1 Preparation for Removing the UFR Board ............................................................................................................................. 4- 44 4.7.6.2 Removing the UFR Board...................................................................................................................................................... 4- 44
4.7.7 Ethernet Board ...................................................................................................................................................... 4- 45

4.7.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Ethernet Board....................................................................................................................... 4- 45 4.7.7.2 Removing the Ethernet Board................................................................................................................................................ 4- 45
4.7.8 HDD....................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 45
4.7.8.1 Preparation for Removing the HDD ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 45 4.7.8.2 Making a Backup of Data (reference only)............................................................................................................................. 4- 45 4.7.8.3 Handling the HDD .................................................................................................................................................................. 4- 46 4.7.8.4 Preparation for Removing the HDD ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 47 4.7.8.5 Removing the HDD ................................................................................................................................................................ 4- 47 4.7.8.6 After Replacing the HDD........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 47 4.7.8.7 After Replacing the HDD........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 48 4.7.8.8 Removing the HDD ................................................................................................................................................................ 4- 48
4.7.9 Controller Fan........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 48

4.7.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Controller Fan ........................................................................................................................ 4- 48 4.7.9.2 Preparation for Removing the Controller Fan ........................................................................................................................ 4- 48 4.7.9.3 Removing the Controller Fan ................................................................................................................................................. 4- 48 4.7.9.4 Removing the Controller Fan ................................................................................................................................................. 4- 48
Chapter 5 Original Exposure System 5.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................5- 1

5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ............................................................................................... 5- 1 5.1.2 Major Components .................................................................................................................................................. 5- 1 5.1.3 Construction of the Control System......................................................................................................................... 5- 3 5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB............................................................................................................................................ 5- 3
5.2 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................5- 4

5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On............................................................................................................. 5- 4 5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key................................................................. 5- 4
5.3 Various Control Mechanisms......................................................................................................................5- 6

5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System..................................................................................................................... 5- 6
5.3.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 6 5.3.1.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor ................................................................................................................................................. 5- 6
5.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction ........................................................................................................................................... 5- 7

5.3.2.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction.......................................................................................................... 5- 7 5.3.2.2 Changing the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction ........................................................................................................... 5- 7
5.3.3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp ............................................................................................................................... 5- 7

5.3.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 7 5.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 8 5.3.3.3 Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp .................................................................................................................................. 5- 8
5.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals ................................................................................................................................ 5- 8

5.3.4.1 Identifying the Size of Originals ............................................................................................................................................... 5- 8 5.3.4.2 Points of Measurement Used for Original Size Identification................................................................................................... 5- 8 5.3.4.3 Overview of Operation ........................................................................................................................................................... 5- 10
5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control ................................................................................................................................................ 5- 11

5.3.5.1 Stream Reading Dust Detection Control................................................................................................................................ 5- 11 5.3.5.2 White Plate Dust Detection Control ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 13
5.3.6 Image Processing.................................................................................................................................................. 5- 13

5.3.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 13 5.3.6.2 CCD Drive.............................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 14 5.3.6.3 CCD Gain Correction, Offset Correction................................................................................................................................ 5- 15 5.3.6.4 CCD Output A/D Conversion ................................................................................................................................................. 5- 15 5.3.6.5 Outline of Shading Correction................................................................................................................................................ 5- 15 5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment............................................................................................................................................................... 5- 15 5.3.6.7 Shading Correction ................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 15
5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................................5- 15
Contents
5.4.1 Copyboard Glass ...................................................................................................................................................5- 15

5.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass ............................................................................................................................................ 5- 15
5.4.2 Exposure Lamp......................................................................................................................................................5- 16

5.4.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Scanning Lamp ...................................................................................................................... 5- 16 5.4.2.2 Removing the Scanning Lamp............................................................................................................................................... 5- 17
5.4.3 Reader Controller PCB ..........................................................................................................................................5- 18

5.4.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Reader Controller PCB .......................................................................................................... 5- 18 5.4.3.2 Removing the Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................... 5- 19 5.4.3.3 After Replacing the Reader Controller ................................................................................................................................... 5- 19
5.4.4 Interface PCB.........................................................................................................................................................5- 21

5.4.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Interface PCB......................................................................................................................... 5- 21 5.4.4.2 Removing the Interface PCB ................................................................................................................................................. 5- 21 5.4.4.3 Points to Note When Attaching the Interface PCB................................................................................................................. 5- 22
5.4.5 Inverter PCB ..........................................................................................................................................................5- 22

5.4.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Inverter PCB .......................................................................................................................... 5- 22 5.4.5.2 Removing the Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................................................... 5- 23 5.4.5.3 After Replacing the Inverter PCB........................................................................................................................................... 5- 23
5.4.6 CCD Unit................................................................................................................................................................5- 23

5.4.6.1 Preparation for Removing the CCD Unit................................................................................................................................ 5- 23 5.4.6.2 Removing the CCD Unit......................................................................................................................................................... 5- 25 5.4.6.3 After Replacing the CCD Unit ................................................................................................................................................ 5- 25
5.4.7 Scanner Motor .......................................................................................................................................................5- 26

5.4.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................................... 5- 26 5.4.7.2 Removing the Scanner Motor ................................................................................................................................................ 5- 26 5.4.7.3 Attaching the Scanner Motor ................................................................................................................................................. 5- 27
5.4.8 ADF Open/Close Sensor .......................................................................................................................................5- 28

5.4.8.1 Preparation for Removing the ADF Open /Close Sensor ...................................................................................................... 5- 28 5.4.8.2 Removing the ADF Open/Closed Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 5- 28
5.4.9 Scanner HP Sensor ...............................................................................................................................................5- 28

5.4.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor........................................................................................ 5- 28 5.4.9.2 Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor ................................................................................................................ 5- 28
5.4.10 Original Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................5- 29

5.4.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Original Size Sensor ............................................................................................................ 5- 29 5.4.10.2 Removing the Original Size Sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 5- 31
5.4.11 Cooling Fan..........................................................................................................................................................5- 31

5.4.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Cooling Fan.......................................................................................................................... 5- 31 5.4.11.2 Removing the Cooling Fan................................................................................................................................................... 5- 31
5.4.12 Scanner Drive Cable ............................................................................................................................................5- 31

5.4.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Scanner Drive Cable ............................................................................................................ 5- 31 5.4.12.2 Removing the Scanner Drive Cable..................................................................................................................................... 5- 33 5.4.12.3 Attaching the Scanner Drive Cable ...................................................................................................................................... 5- 38 5.4.12.4 Adjusting the Position of the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base.......................................................................................................... 5- 39
Chapter 6 Laser Exposure 6.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 6- 1

6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ...............................................................................................6- 1 6.1.2 Major Components...................................................................................................................................................6- 1 6.1.3 Construction of the Control System .........................................................................................................................6- 2
6.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 6- 3

6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation ..................................................................................................................................6- 3
6.3 Various Control........................................................................................................................................... 6- 3

6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing ...................................................................................................................6- 3
6.3.1.1 Turning On and Off the Laser Unit........................................................................................................................................... 6- 3 6.3.1.2 Controlling the Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction ................................................................................................... 6- 4 6.3.1.3 Controlling the Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction..................................................................................................... 6- 5
6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light.....................................................................................................................6- 6

6.3.2.1 APC Control ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6- 6 6.3.2.2 PWM Control............................................................................................................................................................................ 6- 6
Contents
6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor....................................................................................................................... 6- 6

6.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 6- 6
6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter................................................................................................................................... 6- 7

6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter ................................................................................................................................................... 6- 7
6.4 Parts Replacement Procedure ...................................................................................................................6- 8

6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 6- 8
6.4.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Laser Scanner Unit .................................................................................................................. 6- 8 6.4.1.2 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 6- 8 6.4.1.3 Points to Note When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit ......................................................................................................... 6- 9 6.4.1.4 Cleaning the Laser Scanner Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 6- 9
Chapter 7 Image Formation 7.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................7- 1

7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System ....................................................................................................... 7- 1 7.1.2 Major Components .................................................................................................................................................. 7- 2 7.1.3 Charging System ..................................................................................................................................................... 7- 3
7.2 Image Formation Process ..........................................................................................................................7- 4

7.2.1 Image Formation Process ....................................................................................................................................... 7- 4
7.3 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................7- 5

7.3.1 At Time of Power-On ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 5 7.3.2 During Copying/Printing (normal speed) ................................................................................................................. 7- 6 7.3.3 During Copying/Printing (2/3 speed, 1/3 speed)...................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.4 Image Stabilization Control.........................................................................................................................7- 7

7.4.1 Overview of Image Stabilization Control.................................................................................................................. 7- 7 7.4.2 Timing of Image Stabilization Control...................................................................................................................... 7- 8 7.4.3 Potential Control ...................................................................................................................................................... 7- 9 7.4.4 ATVC Control ........................................................................................................................................................ 7- 12 7.4.5 ATR Control........................................................................................................................................................... 7- 14 7.4.6 ACR Control (Auto Carrier Refresh Control) ......................................................................................................... 7- 16 7.4.7 D-max Control ....................................................................................................................................................... 7- 16 7.4.8 D-half Control ........................................................................................................................................................ 7- 18 7.4.9 PASCAL control .................................................................................................................................................... 7- 20
7.5 Charging Meachanism..............................................................................................................................7- 22

7.5.1 Controlling the Primary Charging Bias .................................................................................................................. 7- 22 7.5.2 Controlling the Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism ....................................................................... 7- 23 7.5.3 Controlling the Pre-Transfer Charging Bias........................................................................................................... 7- 24 7.5.4 Controlling the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism ............................................................... 7- 25 7.5.5 Pre-Exposure LED................................................................................................................................................. 7- 26
7.6 Developing Rotary ....................................................................................................................................7- 26

7.6.1 Overview of the Developing Rotary ....................................................................................................................... 7- 26 7.6.2 Controlling the Developing Rotary......................................................................................................................... 7- 27
7.7 Developing Unit ........................................................................................................................................7- 30

7.7.1 Construction of the Color Developing Assembly ................................................................................................... 7- 30 7.7.2 Controlling the Color Developing Assembly Drive Mechanism ............................................................................. 7- 30 7.7.3 Controlling the Color Developing Bias................................................................................................................... 7- 31 7.7.4 Color Toner Supply................................................................................................................................................ 7- 32 7.7.5 Detecting the Level of Color Toner........................................................................................................................ 7- 33 7.7.6 Construction of the Black Developing Assembly ................................................................................................... 7- 35 7.7.7 Controlling the Black Developing Assembly Drive Mechanism ............................................................................. 7- 35 7.7.8 Black Toner Supply ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 36 7.7.9 Controlling the Black Developing Bias................................................................................................................... 7- 37
7.8 Transfer Device ........................................................................................................................................7- 38

7.8.1 Overview of the Transfer Assembly....................................................................................................................... 7- 38 7.8.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias ................................................................................................................................. 7- 39 7.8.3 Overview of the Primary Transfer Assembly ......................................................................................................... 7- 40
Contents
7.8.4 Controlling the ITB Cleaner Shifting Mechanism ...................................................................................................7- 40 7.8.5 Checking the ITB Cleaner Position ........................................................................................................................7- 41 7.8.6 Overview of the Secondary Transfer Assembly.....................................................................................................7- 42 7.8.7 Controlling the Movement of the Secondary Transfer Roller .................................................................................7- 43 7.8.8 Checking the Location of the Secondary Transfer Roller ......................................................................................7- 44 7.8.9 Detecting the ITB Home Position...........................................................................................................................7- 45 7.8.10 Separation............................................................................................................................................................7- 47
7.9 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning ................................................................................................................. 7- 47

7.9.1 Overview of the Drum Cleaning Unit......................................................................................................................7- 47 7.9.2 Controlling the Drum Cleaning Unit Drive Mechanism...........................................................................................7- 48
7.10 Waste Toner Collection Mechanism ....................................................................................................... 7- 48

7.10.1 Collection of Waste Toner....................................................................................................................................7- 48 7.10.2 Detecting the State of the Waste Toner Bottle (full).............................................................................................7- 49
7.11 Parts Replacement Procedure ............................................................................................................... 7- 51

7.11.1 Process Unit.........................................................................................................................................................7- 51
7.11.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Process Unit......................................................................................................................... 7- 51 7.11.1.2 Removing the Process Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 7- 54 7.11.1.3 Points to Note When Attaching the Process Unit................................................................................................................. 7- 56
7.11.2 Pre-exposure LED Array ......................................................................................................................................7- 56

7.11.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Pre-exposure LED Array ...................................................................................................... 7- 56 7.11.2.2 Removing the Pre-Exposure LED Unit................................................................................................................................. 7- 60
7.11.3 Primary Charging Assembly.................................................................................................................................7- 60

7.11.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Parimary Charging Assembly............................................................................................... 7- 60 7.11.3.2 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly ......................................................................................................................... 7- 61
7.11.4 Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Motor .......................................................................................................7- 62

7.11.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor ............................................................................... 7- 62 7.11.4.2 Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor ........................................................................................................ 7- 63
7.11.5 Pre-transfer Charging Assembly ..........................................................................................................................7- 63

7.11.5.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly.................................................................................................................. 7- 63
7.11.6 Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Motor.................................................................................................7- 64

7.11.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor........................................................................ 7- 64 7.11.6.2 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor ................................................................................................ 7- 64
7.11.7 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit .....................................................................................................................7- 64

7.11.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit ..................................................................................... 7- 64 7.11.7.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit .............................................................................................................. 7- 68 7.11.7.3 Points to Note When Attaching the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit ............................................................................. 7- 69
7.11.8 Photosensitive Drum ............................................................................................................................................7- 69

7.11.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum ............................................................................................................ 7- 69 7.11.8.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum..................................................................................................................................... 7- 75 7.11.8.3 Replacing the Photosensitive Drum ..................................................................................................................................... 7- 76
7.11.9 Drum Motor ..........................................................................................................................................................7- 76

7.11.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum Motor .......................................................................................................................... 7- 76 7.11.9.2 Removing the Drum Motor ................................................................................................................................................... 7- 77
7.11.10 Drum Heater.......................................................................................................................................................7- 78

7.11.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum Motor ........................................................................................................................ 7- 78 7.11.10.2 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater.............................................................................................................. 7- 79 7.11.10.3 Removing the Drum Heater................................................................................................................................................ 7- 80
7.11.11 Drum Heater PCB ..............................................................................................................................................7- 80

7.11.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum Heater PCB .............................................................................................................. 7- 80 7.11.11.2 Removing the Drum Heater PCB ....................................................................................................................................... 7- 88 7.11.11.3 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater PCB ..................................................................................................... 7- 89
7.11.12 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade.................................................................................................................7- 90

7.11.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade................................................................................. 7- 90 7.11.12.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade.......................................................................................................... 7- 94 7.11.12.3 Points to Note When Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade........................................................................ 7- 94
7.11.13 Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Edge Scraper......................................................................................................7- 95

7.11.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Edge Scraper...................................................................... 7- 95 7.11.13.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Edge Scraper .............................................................................................. 7- 99
7.11.14 Hopper Assembly ...............................................................................................................................................7- 99
Contents
7.11.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Assembly ............................................................................................................... 7- 99 7.11.14.2 Releasing the Hopper Assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 7- 100 7.11.14.3 Removing the Hopper Assembly...................................................................................................................................... 7- 101
7.11.15 Hopper Supply Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 7- 101

7.11.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Black Toner Supply Motor ................................................................................................ 7- 101 7.11.15.2 Removing the Black Toner Supply Motor......................................................................................................................... 7- 103
7.11.16 Hopper Strring Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 7- 103

7.11.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper String Motor ......................................................................................................... 7- 103 7.11.16.2 Removing the Hopper Stirring Motor................................................................................................................................ 7- 105
7.11.17 Color Developing Assembly............................................................................................................................. 7- 105

7.11.17.1 Preparation for Removing the Color Developing Unit ...................................................................................................... 7- 105 7.11.17.2 Removing the Color Developing Unit ............................................................................................................................... 7- 109 7.11.17.3 When Replacing the Color Developing Unit ..................................................................................................................... 7- 111 7.11.17.4 Replacing the Starter of the Color Developing Unit.......................................................................................................... 7- 112
7.11.18 Black Developing Assembly............................................................................................................................. 7- 113

7.11.18.1 Preparation for Removing the Black Developing Assembly ............................................................................................. 7- 113 7.11.18.2 Removing the Black Developing Unit ............................................................................................................................... 7- 117 7.11.18.3 Points to Note About Replacing the Black Developing Unit ............................................................................................. 7- 118
7.11.19 Black Developing Cylinder ............................................................................................................................... 7- 119

7.11.19.1 Preparation for Removing the Black Developing Cylinder ............................................................................................... 7- 119 7.11.19.2 Removing the Black Developing Cylinder ........................................................................................................................ 7- 123 7.11.19.3 Points to Note When Handling the Black Developing Cylinder ........................................................................................ 7- 124 7.11.19.4 Points to Note When Mounting the Polarity Positioning Plate.......................................................................................... 7- 124
7.11.20 Black Developing Clutch .................................................................................................................................. 7- 125

7.11.20.1 Preparation for Removing the Black Developing Clutch .................................................................................................. 7- 125 7.11.20.2 Removing the Black Developing Clutch ........................................................................................................................... 7- 125
7.11.21 Color Toner Supply Clutch............................................................................................................................... 7- 126

7.11.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Color Toner Supply Clutch ............................................................................................... 7- 126 7.11.21.2 Removing the Color Toner Supply Clutch ........................................................................................................................ 7- 127
7.11.22 Color Developing Clutch .................................................................................................................................. 7- 128

7.11.22.1 Preparation for Removing the Color Developing Clutch................................................................................................... 7- 128 7.11.22.2 Removing the Color Developing Clutch ........................................................................................................................... 7- 129
7.11.23 Cleaning Assembly Scoop-Up Sheet............................................................................................................... 7- 129

7.11.23.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Scoop-Up Sheet.............................................................. 7- 129 7.11.23.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Scoop-Up Sheet ...................................................................................... 7- 134 7.11.23.3 Attaching the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Scoop-Up Sheet ......................................................................................... 7- 135
7.11.24 Secondary Transfer Unit .................................................................................................................................. 7- 135

7.11.24.1 Removing the Secondary Transfer Unit ........................................................................................................................... 7- 135
7.11.25 ITB Cleaning Unit............................................................................................................................................. 7- 136

7.11.25.1 Preparation for Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit ............................................................................................................. 7- 136 7.11.25.2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 7- 139
7.11.26 ITB Cleaner End Scraper................................................................................................................................. 7- 139

7.11.26.1 Preparation for Removing the ITB Cleaner End Scraper ................................................................................................. 7- 139 7.11.26.2 Removing the ITB Cleaner End Scraper .......................................................................................................................... 7- 143 7.11.26.3 Attaching the ITB Cleaner End Scraper ........................................................................................................................... 7- 143
7.11.27 Intermediate Transfer Unit ............................................................................................................................... 7- 143

7.11.27.1 Preparation for Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit................................................................................................ 7- 143 7.11.27.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ........................................................................................................................ 7- 145 7.11.27.3 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit ................................................................................................... 7- 145 7.11.27.4 Points to Note When Replacing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ...................................................................................... 7- 146
7.11.28 Intermediate Transfer Belt ............................................................................................................................... 7- 146

7.11.28.1 Preparation for Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt................................................................................................ 7- 146 7.11.28.2 Removing the ITB............................................................................................................................................................. 7- 150 7.11.28.3 Points to Note When Attaching the ITB............................................................................................................................ 7- 150
7.11.29 ITB Home Position Sensor PCB ...................................................................................................................... 7- 151

7.11.29.1 Removing the ITB Home Position Sensor (right, left)....................................................................................................... 7- 151
7.11.30 Secondary Transfer Roller Shift Motor............................................................................................................. 7- 151

7.11.30.1 Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller Shift Motor...................................................................................................... 7- 151
7.11.31 Primary Transfer Roller.................................................................................................................................... 7- 151

7.11.31.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Transfer Roller .................................................................................................... 7- 151
Contents
7.11.31.2 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller ............................................................................................................................. 7- 156 7.11.31.3 Points to Note When Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller ........................................................................................... 7- 157
7.11.32 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller ..................................................................................................................7- 158

7.11.32.1 Preparation for Removing the Secondary Transfer Internal Roller .................................................................................. 7- 158 7.11.32.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Inside Roller.............................................................................................................. 7- 162
7.11.33 Secondary Transfer Roller ...............................................................................................................................7- 163

7.11.33.1 Preparation for Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller ............................................................................................... 7- 163 7.11.33.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller ........................................................................................................................ 7- 164
7.11.34 ITB Cleaning Blade ..........................................................................................................................................7- 164

7.11.34.1 Preparation for Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade .......................................................................................................... 7- 164 7.11.34.2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade ................................................................................................................................... 7- 167 7.11.34.3 When Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade ......................................................................................................................... 7- 167
7.11.35 ITB Scoop-up Sheet .........................................................................................................................................7- 169

7.11.35.1 Preparation for Removing the Scoop-Up Sheet ............................................................................................................... 7- 169 7.11.35.2 Removing the ITB Scoop-Up Sheet ................................................................................................................................. 7- 172
7.11.36 Intermediate Transfer Belt Static Eliminator.....................................................................................................7- 172

7.11.36.1 Preparation for Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt Static Eliminator..................................................................... 7- 172 7.11.36.2 Removing the ITB Static Eliminator.................................................................................................................................. 7- 177
7.11.37 Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator...............................................................................................................7- 177

7.11.37.1 Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Holder ............................................................................................ 7- 177
7.11.38 Potential Sensor Unit........................................................................................................................................7- 177

7.11.38.1 Preparation for Removing the Potential Sensor ............................................................................................................... 7- 177 7.11.38.2 Removing the Potential Sensor........................................................................................................................................ 7- 182
7.11.39 ATR Sensor Unit ..............................................................................................................................................7- 182

7.11.39.1 Preparation for Removing the ATR Sensor Unit .............................................................................................................. 7- 182 7.11.39.2 Removing the ATR Sensor Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 7- 187
7.11.40 Patch Image Sensor.........................................................................................................................................7- 187

7.11.40.1 Preparation for Removing the Patch Image Sensor......................................................................................................... 7- 187 7.11.40.2 Removing the Patch Image Reading Sensor ................................................................................................................... 7- 191
7.11.41 Idle Roller .........................................................................................................................................................7- 191

7.11.41.1 Preparation for Removing the Idle Roller ......................................................................................................................... 7- 191 7.11.41.2 Removing the Idle Roller .................................................................................................................................................. 7- 195 7.11.41.3 Detaching the Idle Roller .................................................................................................................................................. 7- 196
7.11.42 Patch Image Reading Sensor Shutter Solenoid...............................................................................................7- 196

7.11.42.1 Preparation for Removing the Patch Image Reading Sensor Shutter Solenoid............................................................... 7- 196 7.11.42.2 Removing the Patch Image Reading Sensor Shutter Solenoid........................................................................................ 7- 200
7.11.43 Charging Wire ..................................................................................................................................................7- 200

7.11.43.1 Outline .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7- 200 7.11.43.2 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Primary Charging Assembly...................................................................................... 7- 200 7.11.43.3 Stringing the Charging Wires ........................................................................................................................................... 7- 200 7.11.43.4 Stringing the Grid. ............................................................................................................................................................ 7- 201 7.11.43.5 Adjusting the Primary Charging Wire ............................................................................................................................... 7- 201
Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System 8.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 8- 1

8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ...............................................................................................8- 1 8.1.2 Major Divisions of the Machine ................................................................................................................................8- 1 8.1.3 Arrangement of Rollers ............................................................................................................................................8- 2 8.1.4 Diagram of the Paper Path ......................................................................................................................................8- 3 8.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors ..........................................................................................................................................8- 4 8.1.6 Arrangement of Solenoids .......................................................................................................................................8- 5 8.1.7 Arrangement of Drive Mechanisms..........................................................................................................................8- 6
8.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 7

8.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation (in response to a press on the Start key) .................................................................8- 7 8.2.2 Interval Acceleration ................................................................................................................................................8- 9 8.2.3 Stopping the Paper Before Registration ................................................................................................................8- 12
8.3 Detecting Jams......................................................................................................................................... 8- 12

8.3.1 Delay Jams ............................................................................................................................................................8- 12
Contents
8.3.1.1 Cassette/Deck Pickup Assembly (right deck, left deck, cassette 3/4) ................................................................................... 8- 12 8.3.1.2 Delay Jam (source of paper other than cassette/deck) ......................................................................................................... 8- 13
8.3.2 Stationary Jams..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 13

8.3.2.1 Common Stationary Jam ....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 13 8.3.2.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On.................................................................................................................................................. 8- 14
8.3.3 Other Jams ............................................................................................................................................................ 8- 15

8.3.3.1 Wrong Paper Size.................................................................................................................................................................. 8- 15 8.3.3.2 Wrong Material....................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 15
8.4 Cassette ...................................................................................................................................................8- 15

8.4.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 15 8.4.2 Identifying Paper Sizes.......................................................................................................................................... 8- 15 8.4.3 Setting the Universal Cassette .............................................................................................................................. 8- 17 8.4.4 Checking the Level of Remaining Paper ............................................................................................................... 8- 17
8.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ..............................................................................................................................8- 19

8.5.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 19 8.5.2 Basic Sequence..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 20 8.5.3 Movement of the Lifter........................................................................................................................................... 8- 20
8.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit .........................................................................................................................8- 21

8.6.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 21 8.6.2 Basic Sequence..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 22 8.6.3 Identifying the Size of Paper.................................................................................................................................. 8- 22 8.6.4 Identifying the Last Sheet ...................................................................................................................................... 8- 23
8.7 Deck .........................................................................................................................................................8- 24

8.7.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 24 8.7.2 Basic Sequence..................................................................................................................................................... 8- 25 8.7.3 Identifying the Size of Paper.................................................................................................................................. 8- 25 8.7.4 Checking the Level of Remaining Paper ............................................................................................................... 8- 26
8.8 Registration Unit .......................................................................................................................................8- 27

8.8.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 27
8.9 Duplex Feeding Unit .................................................................................................................................8- 27

8.9.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 8- 27 8.9.2 Detecting the Horizontal Registration Position ...................................................................................................... 8- 30 8.9.3 A5, 5 Sheets in Circulation .................................................................................................................................... 8- 32 8.9.4 A3, 3 Sheets in Circulation .................................................................................................................................... 8- 33
8.10 Delivery ...................................................................................................................................................8- 34

8.10.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................. 8- 34 8.10.2 Face-Up Delivery ................................................................................................................................................. 8- 35 8.10.3 Face-Down Delivery ............................................................................................................................................ 8- 35
8.11 Parts Replacement Procedure................................................................................................................8- 38

8.11.1 Cassette Pickup Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 38
8.11.1.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit..................................................................................................................................... 8- 38
8.11.2 Cassette Pickup Motor......................................................................................................................................... 8- 38

8.11.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Pick-up Motor........................................................................................................ 8- 38 8.11.2.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor.................................................................................................................................. 8- 38
8.11.3 Cassette Lifter Motor ........................................................................................................................................... 8- 38

8.11.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Lifter Motor............................................................................................................ 8- 38 8.11.3.2 Removing the Cassette Lifter Motor..................................................................................................................................... 8- 39
8.11.4 Left Deck Lifter Motor .......................................................................................................................................... 8- 39

8.11.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Lift Deck Lifter Motor ............................................................................................................ 8- 39 8.11.4.2 Removing the Left Deck Lifter Motor.................................................................................................................................... 8- 39
8.11.5 Right Deck Lifter Motor ........................................................................................................................................ 8- 39

8.11.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Right Deck Lifter Motor ........................................................................................................ 8- 39 8.11.5.2 Removing the Right Deck Lifter Motor ................................................................................................................................. 8- 40
8.11.6 Left Deck Pickup Motor........................................................................................................................................ 8- 40

8.11.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Left Deck Pickup Motor ....................................................................................................... 8- 40 8.11.6.2 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Motor................................................................................................................................. 8- 40
8.11.7 Right Deck Pickup Motor ..................................................................................................................................... 8- 40
Contents
8.11.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Right Deck Pickup Motor...................................................................................................... 8- 40 8.11.7.2 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Motor .............................................................................................................................. 8- 41
8.11.8 Vertical Path Motor...............................................................................................................................................8- 41

8.11.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Vertical Path Motor............................................................................................................... 8- 41 8.11.8.2 Removing the Vertical Path Motor ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 41
8.11.9 Right Deck Pull-Off Motor ....................................................................................................................................8- 41

8.11.9.1 Preparation for Removeing the Right Deck Pull-Off Motor ................................................................................................. 8- 41 8.11.9.2 Removing Right Deck Pull-Off Motor ................................................................................................................................... 8- 42
8.11.10 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ...................................................................................................................8- 42

8.11.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ................................................................................... 8- 42 8.11.10.2 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ............................................................................................................ 8- 42
8.11.11 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor............................................................................................................................8- 43

8.11.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Sensor............................................................................................ 8- 43 8.11.11.2 Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Sensor .................................................................................................................... 8- 44
8.11.12 Right Deck Pickup Assembly .............................................................................................................................8- 44

8.11.12.1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit ............................................................................................................................... 8- 44
8.11.13 Left Deck Pickup Assembly................................................................................................................................8- 45

8.11.13.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit.................................................................................................................................. 8- 45
8.11.14 Right Deck Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller ........................................................................................................8- 46

8.11.14.1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers ...................................................................................... 8- 46
8.11.15 Left Deck Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller ..........................................................................................................8- 46

8.11.15.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup, Feed, and Separation Roller .......................................................................................... 8- 46
8.11.16 Cassette Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller ...........................................................................................................8- 47

8.11.16.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers ......................................................................................... 8- 47
8.11.17 Manual Feed Unit ...............................................................................................................................................8- 47

8.11.17.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit........................................................................................................................................ 8- 47
8.11.18 Manual Feed Roller ............................................................................................................................................8- 48

8.11.18.1 Removing the Manual Feed Roller..................................................................................................................................... 8- 48
8.11.19 Manual Feed Separation Roller..........................................................................................................................8- 48

8.11.19.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller.......................................................................................... 8- 48 8.11.19.2 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller .................................................................................................................. 8- 49
8.11.20 Manual Feed Pre-Regustration Motor ................................................................................................................8- 49

8.11.20.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Feed Pre-Regustration Motor ................................................................................ 8- 49 8.11.20.2 Manual Feed Pre-Registration Motor ................................................................................................................................. 8- 51
8.11.21 Horizontal Registration Assembly ......................................................................................................................8- 51

8.11.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Horizontal Registration Unit................................................................................................ 8- 51 8.11.21.2 Removing the Horizontal Registration Unit ........................................................................................................................ 8- 52
8.11.22 Registration Motor ..............................................................................................................................................8- 53

8.11.22.1 Preparation for Removing the Registration Motor .............................................................................................................. 8- 53 8.11.22.2 Removing the Registration Motor....................................................................................................................................... 8- 54
8.11.23 Horizontal Registration Motor.............................................................................................................................8- 54

8.11.23.1 Preparation for Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor............................................................................................. 8- 54 8.11.23.2 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor...................................................................................................................... 8- 56
8.11.24 Duplex Reversal Motor.......................................................................................................................................8- 56

8.11.24.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Reversal Motor .................................................................................................. 8- 56 8.11.24.2 Removing the Duplexing Reversal Motor........................................................................................................................... 8- 56
8.11.25 Duplex Left Motor ...............................................................................................................................................8- 56

8.11.25.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Left Motor .......................................................................................................... 8- 56 8.11.25.2 Removing the Duplex Left Motor........................................................................................................................................ 8- 57
8.11.26 Duplex Middle Motor ..........................................................................................................................................8- 57

8.11.26.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Middle Motor...................................................................................................... 8- 57 8.11.26.2 Removing the Duplexing Middle Motor .............................................................................................................................. 8- 58
8.11.27 Duplex Right Motor.............................................................................................................................................8- 58

8.11.27.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Right Motor........................................................................................................ 8- 58 8.11.27.2 Removing the Duplexing Right Motor................................................................................................................................. 8- 59
8.11.28 Outside Delivery Motor.......................................................................................................................................8- 59

8.11.28.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Delivery Motor....................................................................................................... 8- 59 8.11.28.2 Removing the Outside Delivery Motor................................................................................................................................ 8- 61
Contents
Chapter 9 Fixing System 9.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................9- 1

9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ............................................................................................... 9- 1 9.1.2 Major Components .................................................................................................................................................. 9- 1 9.1.3 Construction of the Control System......................................................................................................................... 9- 3
9.2 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................9- 4

9.2.1 Sequence of Operation at Power-On ...................................................................................................................... 9- 4 9.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation (printing)................................................................................................................... 9- 5
9.3 Various Control Mechanisms......................................................................................................................9- 6

9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller ............................................................................................................... 9- 6
9.3.1.1 Controlling the Speed According to Paper Type...................................................................................................................... 9- 6 9.3.1.2 Controlling the Speed for Large Volume Printing (down-sequence)........................................................................................ 9- 6 9.3.1.3 Interval Rotation....................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 7
9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature............................................................................................................... 9- 8

9.3.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9- 8 9.3.2.2 At Power-On ............................................................................................................................................................................ 9- 8 9.3.2.3 In Standby................................................................................................................................................................................ 9- 9 9.3.2.4 When Producing Mono Color (Black) Single-Sided Prints ....................................................................................................... 9- 9 9.3.2.5 When Producing Mono Color (Black) Double-Sided Prints.................................................................................................... 9- 10 9.3.2.6 When Producing Full Color Prints.......................................................................................................................................... 9- 10 9.3.2.7 With Power Save Mode Enabled ........................................................................................................................................... 9- 11 9.3.2.8 Controlling the Overheating at the End of the Roller ............................................................................................................. 9- 11
9.3.3 External Heat Roller Drive Control ........................................................................................................................ 9- 11

9.3.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 9- 11
9.4 Fixing Cleaning Web Mechanisms ...........................................................................................................9- 12

9.4.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 9- 12 9.4.2 Web Retaining Mechanism.................................................................................................................................... 9- 13
9.5 Protective Functions .................................................................................................................................9- 14

9.5.1 Detecting Overheating Using Thermistors............................................................................................................. 9- 14 9.5.2 Cutting Off the Power Using Thermal Switches .................................................................................................... 9- 14 9.5.3 Errors..................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 15
9.6 Parts Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................................9- 15

9.6.1 Fixing Unit.............................................................................................................................................................. 9- 15
9.6.1.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly.............................................................................................................................................. 9- 15 9.6.1.2 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Assembly ............................................................................................................. 9- 16
9.6.2 Fixing Roller........................................................................................................................................................... 9- 16

9.6.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Roller ........................................................................................................................... 9- 16 9.6.2.2 Removing the Fixing Roller.................................................................................................................................................... 9- 18 9.6.2.3 Points to Note When Removing the Fixing Roller.................................................................................................................. 9- 19
9.6.3 Pressure Roller...................................................................................................................................................... 9- 19

9.6.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Pressure Roller ...................................................................................................................... 9- 19 9.6.3.2 Removing the Pressure Roller ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 20 9.6.3.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Pressure Roller .............................................................................................................. 9- 21
9.6.4 External Heat Roller .............................................................................................................................................. 9- 21

9.6.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Heating Roller Heater ............................................................................................... 9- 21 9.6.4.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller.................................................................................................................................... 9- 23
9.6.5 Fixing Thermistor (Upper)...................................................................................................................................... 9- 23

9.6.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Upper Thermistor ........................................................................................................ 9- 23 9.6.5.2 Removing the Fixing Upper Thermistor ................................................................................................................................. 9- 24 9.6.5.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Upper Thermistor................................................................................................. 9- 25
9.6.6 Fixing Thermistor (Lower)...................................................................................................................................... 9- 25

9.6.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Lower Thermistor ........................................................................................................ 9- 25 9.6.6.2 Removing the Fixing Lower Thermistor ................................................................................................................................. 9- 26 9.6.6.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Lower Thermistor................................................................................................. 9- 26
9.6.7 External Heat Thermistor....................................................................................................................................... 9- 27

9.6.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Heating Roller Thermistor......................................................................................... 9- 27 9.6.7.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Thermistor ................................................................................................................. 9- 27 9.6.7.3 Points to Note When Mounting the External Heat Thermistor ............................................................................................... 9- 28
Contents
9.6.8 Fixing Thermal Switch............................................................................................................................................9- 28

9.6.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch............................................................................................................ 9- 28 9.6.8.2 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch .................................................................................................................................... 9- 29 9.6.8.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Thermal Switch.................................................................................................... 9- 30
9.6.9 Fixing Locking Thermal Switch ..............................................................................................................................9- 30

9.6.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Pressure Thermal Switch ............................................................................................ 9- 30 9.6.9.2 Removing the Fixing Pressure Thermal Switch ..................................................................................................................... 9- 31 9.6.9.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Pressure Thermal Switch .................................................................................... 9- 31
9.6.10 Thermal Switch ....................................................................................................................................................9- 31

9.6.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Thermal Switch .................................................................................................................... 9- 31 9.6.10.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch ........................................................................................................ 9- 32 9.6.10.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch ....................................................................... 9- 32
9.6.11 Upper Fixing Heater .............................................................................................................................................9- 33

9.6.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Upper Heater ............................................................................................................. 9- 33 9.6.11.2 Removing the Fixing Upper Heater...................................................................................................................................... 9- 34
9.6.12 Lower Fixing Roller ..............................................................................................................................................9- 34

9.6.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Lower Heater ............................................................................................................. 9- 34 9.6.12.2 Removing the Fixing Lower Heater...................................................................................................................................... 9- 35
9.6.13 Fixing Locking Heater ..........................................................................................................................................9- 36

9.6.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Heating Roller Heater ............................................................................................. 9- 36 9.6.13.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Heater ...................................................................................................................... 9- 37
9.6.14 Fixing Web ...........................................................................................................................................................9- 38

9.6.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Web ........................................................................................................................... 9- 38 9.6.14.2 Removing the Fixing Web .................................................................................................................................................... 9- 39 9.6.14.3 Attaching the Fixing Web ..................................................................................................................................................... 9- 40 9.6.14.4 When Replacing the Fixing Web.......................................................................................................................................... 9- 40
9.6.15 Fixing Motor .........................................................................................................................................................9- 40

9.6.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Motor ......................................................................................................................... 9- 40 9.6.15.2 Removing the Fixing Motor .................................................................................................................................................. 9- 40
9.6.16 External Heater Shift Motor..................................................................................................................................9- 40

9.6.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Heating Shift Motor ................................................................................................. 9- 40 9.6.16.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Shift Motor ............................................................................................................... 9- 41
9.6.17 Upper Separation Claw ........................................................................................................................................9- 41

9.6.17.1 Removing the Delivery Upper Separation Claw................................................................................................................... 9- 41
9.6.18 Lower Separation Claw ........................................................................................................................................9- 42

9.6.18.1 Removing the Delivery Lower Separation Claw................................................................................................................... 9- 42
Chapter 10 Externals and Controls 10.1 Control Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 10- 1

10.1.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................10- 1 10.1.2 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................10- 1 10.1.3 LCD Processing ...................................................................................................................................................10- 2 10.1.4 LCD Contrast Adjustment ....................................................................................................................................10- 2 10.1.5 Control Panel CPU...............................................................................................................................................10- 2
10.2 Counters ................................................................................................................................................. 10- 2

10.2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................10- 2 10.2.2 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................10- 3 10.2.3 Increasing the Count ............................................................................................................................................10- 5
10.3 Fans........................................................................................................................................................ 10- 5

10.3.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................10- 5 10.3.2 Sequence of Operations ......................................................................................................................................10- 6
10.4 Power Supply ......................................................................................................................................... 10- 7

10.4.1 Power Supply .......................................................................................................................................................10- 7
10.4.1.1 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer Unit..................................................................................................................... 10- 7 10.4.1.2 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer Unit..................................................................................................................... 10- 8 10.4.1.3 Power to the Environment Heater ...................................................................................................................................... 10- 10
10.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................................10- 11
Contents
10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Power Supply PCB................................................................................................................. 10- 11 10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the DC/DC Converter PCB 1 ................................................................................................................... 10- 12 10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the DC/DC Converter PCB 1 ................................................................................................................... 10- 12 10.4.2.4 Rated Output of the DC/DC Converter PCB 2 ................................................................................................................... 10- 12
10.4.3 Protection Function............................................................................................................................................ 10- 12

10.4.3.1 Protection of the Power Supply PCB ................................................................................................................................. 10- 12 10.4.3.2 Protection by a Fuse .......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 12
10.4.4 Backup Battery .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 13

10.4.4.1 Backup Battery................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 13
10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function .................................................................................................................................... 10- 14

10.4.5.1 SNMP setup ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 14
10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure..............................................................................................................10- 16

10.5.1 External Covers ................................................................................................................................................. 10- 16
10.5.1.1 Upper Right Cover ............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 16 10.5.1.2 Right Cover (Upper Rear) .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 16 10.5.1.3 Right Cover (Lower Rear) .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 16 10.5.1.4 Right Cover (Lower Front).................................................................................................................................................. 10- 16 10.5.1.5 Right Cover (Lower Middle) ............................................................................................................................................... 10- 16 10.5.1.6 Upper Left Cover................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 16 10.5.1.7 Left Lower Cover................................................................................................................................................................ 10- 17 10.5.1.8 Left Middle Cover ............................................................................................................................................................... 10- 17 10.5.1.9 Rear Upper Cover .............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 17 10.5.1.10 Rear Lower Cover ............................................................................................................................................................ 10- 18 10.5.1.11 Reader Right Cover.......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 18 10.5.1.12 Reader Left Cover ............................................................................................................................................................ 10- 18 10.5.1.13 Reader Front Cover.......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 18 10.5.1.14 Reader Rear Cover .......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 19 10.5.1.15 Delivery Cover.................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 20
10.5.2 Hopper Drive Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 20

10.5.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Assembly ..................................................................................................... 10- 20 10.5.2.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Assembly .............................................................................................................................. 10- 22
10.5.3 Power Cord Base............................................................................................................................................... 10- 22

10.5.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Power Cord Base ............................................................................................................... 10- 22 10.5.3.2 Removing the Power Cord Base........................................................................................................................................ 10- 22
10.5.4 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................................... 10- 23

10.5.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Control Panel .................................................................................................................... 10- 23 10.5.4.2 Removing the Control Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 24
10.5.5 DC Controller PCB............................................................................................................................................. 10- 24

10.5.5.1 Preparation for Removing the DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................................. 10- 24 10.5.5.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB...................................................................................................................................... 10- 24 10.5.5.3 Points to Note When Mounting the DC Controller PCB ..................................................................................................... 10- 24
10.5.6 Printer Power Supply PCB................................................................................................................................. 10- 25

10.5.6.1 Preparation for Removing the DC Power Supply Unit ....................................................................................................... 10- 25 10.5.6.2 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit ................................................................................................................................ 10- 25
10.5.7 Leakage Breaker ............................................................................................................................................... 10- 25

10.5.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Leakage Breaker................................................................................................................ 10- 25 10.5.7.2 Removing the Leakage Breaker......................................................................................................................................... 10- 26
10.5.8 Fixing Relay ....................................................................................................................................................... 10- 26

10.5.8.1 Preparation for Removing the DC/DC converter PCB2 ..................................................................................................... 10- 26 10.5.8.2 Removing the DC/DC converter PCB2 .............................................................................................................................. 10- 26
10.5.9 Relay PCB ......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 26

10.5.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Relay PCB.......................................................................................................................... 10- 26 10.5.9.2 Removing the Relay PCB .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 26
10.5.10 DC Relay.......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 27

10.5.10.1 Preparation for Removing the DC Relay .......................................................................................................................... 10- 27 10.5.10.2 Removing the DC Relay................................................................................................................................................... 10- 27
10.5.11 HV1 PCB.......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 27

10.5.11.1 Preparation for Removing the HV1 PCB .......................................................................................................................... 10- 27 10.5.11.2 Removing the HV1 PCB................................................................................................................................................... 10- 27
10.5.12 HV2 PCB.......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 28
Contents
10.5.13 HV3 PCB ..........................................................................................................................................................10- 28

10.5.14 Fixing/Feed Driver PCB....................................................................................................................................10- 29

10.5.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing/Feed Driver PCB.................................................................................................... 10- 29 10.5.14.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeding Driver PCB........................................................................................................................ 10- 30
10.5.15 Pickup Driver PCB............................................................................................................................................10- 30

10.5.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Pickup Driver PCB............................................................................................................ 10- 30 10.5.15.2 Removing the Pickup Driver PCB .................................................................................................................................... 10- 31
10.5.16 Switch PCB ......................................................................................................................................................10- 31

10.5.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Switch PCB ...................................................................................................................... 10- 31 10.5.16.2 Removing the Switch PCB ............................................................................................................................................... 10- 31
10.5.17 Primary Exhaust Fan........................................................................................................................................10- 31

10.5.17.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Exhaust Fan........................................................................................................ 10- 31 10.5.17.2 Removing the Primary Exhaust Fan................................................................................................................................. 10- 32
10.5.18 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan...............................................................................................................................10- 33

10.5.18.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan............................................................................................... 10- 33 10.5.18.2 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan........................................................................................................................ 10- 34
10.5.19 Power Supply Cooing Fan................................................................................................................................10- 35

10.5.19.1 Preparation for Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan............................................................................................... 10- 35 10.5.19.2 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan........................................................................................................................ 10- 35
10.5.20 Delivery Cooling Fan 1 .....................................................................................................................................10- 35

10.5.20.1 Preparation for Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 1 ..................................................................................................... 10- 35 10.5.20.2 Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 1.............................................................................................................................. 10- 35
10.5.21 Delivery Cooling Fan 2 .....................................................................................................................................10- 36

10.5.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 2 ..................................................................................................... 10- 36 10.5.21.2 Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 2.............................................................................................................................. 10- 36
10.5.22 Ozone Filter......................................................................................................................................................10- 36

10.5.22.1 Removing the Ozone Filter............................................................................................................................................... 10- 36 10.5.22.2 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Ozone Filter .......................................................................................................... 10- 37
10.5.23 Toner Filter .......................................................................................................................................................10- 37

10.5.23.1 Removing the Toner Filter................................................................................................................................................ 10- 37
10.5.24 Sub Toner Filter................................................................................................................................................10- 37

10.5.24.1 Preparation for Removing the Sub Toner Filter................................................................................................................ 10- 37 10.5.24.2 Removing the Sub Toner Filter ........................................................................................................................................ 10- 38
Chapter 11 MEAP 11.1 MEAP ..................................................................................................................................................... 11- 1

11.1.1 Checking the Operating Environment. .................................................................................................................11- 1 11.1.2 Setting Up the Network ........................................................................................................................................11- 4 11.1.3 Setting the method to login to SMS......................................................................................................................11- 5 11.1.4 Login to SMS........................................................................................................................................................11- 8 11.1.5 Checking Application List ...................................................................................................................................11- 10 11.1.6 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application........................................................................................................11- 11 11.1.7 Checking the Platform Information.....................................................................................................................11- 12 11.1.8 MEAP Specifications..........................................................................................................................................11- 13 11.1.9 Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS .................................................................11- 15 11.1.10 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application ..................................................................................11- 15 11.1.11 Reference (Application System Information)....................................................................................................11- 16 11.1.12 Installing an Application....................................................................................................................................11- 17 11.1.13 MEAP Enterprise Service Manager..................................................................................................................11- 20 11.1.14 Adding a License File .......................................................................................................................................11- 20 11.1.15 Disabling a License File (suspending a license) ..............................................................................................11- 22 11.1.16 Downloading/Removing an Invalidated License File........................................................................................11- 24 11.1.17 Reusable license ..............................................................................................................................................11- 26
Contents
11.1.18 License for forwarding...................................................................................................................................... 11- 27 11.1.19 Uninstalling an Application............................................................................................................................... 11- 29 11.1.20 Changing Login Services ................................................................................................................................. 11- 30 11.1.21 Initializing the Password .................................................................................................................................. 11- 34 11.1.22 Creating a Backup for MEAP Application Area, Formatting the Hard Disk, Restoring the MEAP Application Area with the Backup, Using the SST (Service Support Tool) ......................................................................................... 11- 35 11.1.23 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive......................................................................................................................... 11- 37 11.1.24 MEAP Safe Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 11- 37 11.1.25 Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2)............................................................................................ 11- 38 11.1.26 Reference material........................................................................................................................................... 11- 41 11.1.27 Option for exclusive individual measure .......................................................................................................... 11- 42
Chapter 12 RDS 12.1 RDS ........................................................................................................................................................12- 1

12.1.1 Application operation mode ................................................................................................................................. 12- 1 12.1.2 Service Center URL and Port Specification......................................................................................................... 12- 1 12.1.3 Communication test ............................................................................................................................................. 12- 1 12.1.4 Communication log .............................................................................................................................................. 12- 1 12.1.5 Detailed Communication log ............................................................................................................................... 12- 1 12.1.6 SOAP communication function ............................................................................................................................ 12- 1 12.1.7 Resend at SOAP transmission error.................................................................................................................... 12- 2 12.1.8 e-RDS setting screen........................................................................................................................................... 12- 2 12.1.9 Sleep operation.................................................................................................................................................... 12- 5 12.1.10 Network Setting(Maintenance)........................................................................................................................... 12- 5 12.1.11 e-RDS Setting .................................................................................................................................................... 12- 5 12.1.12 Trouble shoot ..................................................................................................................................................... 12- 6 12.1.13 Error message ................................................................................................................................................... 12- 6
Chapter 13 Maintenance and Inspection 13.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ....................................................................................................................13- 1

13.1.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................. 13- 1 13.1.2 Reader Unit.......................................................................................................................................................... 13- 1 13.1.3 Printer Unit........................................................................................................................................................... 13- 1
13.2 Durables and Consumables ...................................................................................................................13- 2

13.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................. 13- 2 13.2.2 Reader Unit.......................................................................................................................................................... 13- 2 13.2.3 Printer Unit........................................................................................................................................................... 13- 2
13.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure....................................................................................................13- 3

13.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure................................................................................................................. 13- 3 13.3.2 Scheduled Servicing (reader unit) ....................................................................................................................... 13- 4 13.3.3 Scheduled Servicing (printer unit)........................................................................................................................ 13- 4 13.3.4 Shifting the Photosensitive Drum Phase ............................................................................................................. 13- 9
13.4 Cleaning................................................................................................................................................13- 15
13.4.1 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Rear Guide................................................................................................... 13- 15 13.4.2 Cleaning the Registration Roller, Registration Guide, and Transparency Sensor ............................................. 13- 15
Chapter 14 Standards and Adjustments 14.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure........................................................................................................14- 1

14.1.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 1 ................................................................................................................. 14- 1 14.1.2 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 2 ................................................................................................................. 14- 1 14.1.3 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 3 ................................................................................................................. 14- 2 14.1.4 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 4 ................................................................................................................. 14- 3 14.1.5 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 5 ................................................................................................................. 14- 4
Contents
14.1.6 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 6..................................................................................................................14- 5 14.1.7 Potential Control Conversion Table .....................................................................................................................14- 6
14.2 Image Adjustments ............................................................................................................................... 14- 11

14.2.1 Image Position ...................................................................................................................................................14- 11 14.2.2 Checking the Image Position .............................................................................................................................14- 11 14.2.3 Cassette .............................................................................................................................................................14- 11 14.2.4 Manual Feed Tray ..............................................................................................................................................14- 12 14.2.5 Front Deck..........................................................................................................................................................14- 12
14.3 Scanning System.................................................................................................................................. 14- 13

14.3.1 After Replacing the CCD Unit ............................................................................................................................14- 13 14.3.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass................................................................................................................14- 13 14.3.3 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or Initializing the RAM...................................................................14- 14
14.4 Laser Exposure System ....................................................................................................................... 14- 14

14.4.1 After Replacing the Laser Scanner ....................................................................................................................14- 14
14.5 Image Formation System ..................................................................................................................... 14- 14

14.5.1 After Replacing the Black Developing Unit ........................................................................................................14- 14 14.5.2 Points to Note When Attaching the Polarity Positioning Plate ...........................................................................14- 14 14.5.3 Replacing the Color Developing Unit .................................................................................................................14- 15 14.5.4 Replacing the Starter of the Color Developing Unit ...........................................................................................14- 16 14.5.5 After Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly ...............................................................................................14- 18 14.5.6 After Replacing the Primary Charging Wire .......................................................................................................14- 18 14.5.7 After Replacing the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire ...............................................................................................14- 18 14.5.8 After Replacing the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire ...............................................................................................14- 18 14.5.9 After Replacing the Waste Toner Box................................................................................................................14- 18 14.5.10 After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade...........................................................................................................14- 18 14.5.11 After Repacking the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade ..............................................................................14- 19 14.5.12 Replace the Photosensitive Drum ....................................................................................................................14- 20 14.5.13 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater............................................................................................14- 20 14.5.14 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater PCB ...................................................................................14- 21 14.5.15 After Repacking the ITB ..................................................................................................................................14- 22 14.5.16 After Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller.....................................................................................................14- 22
14.6 Fixing System ....................................................................................................................................... 14- 23

14.6.1 Points to Note When Attaching the Fixing Assembly .........................................................................................14- 23 14.6.2 After Replacing the Fixing Roller........................................................................................................................14- 23 14.6.3 After Replacing the Fixing Web..........................................................................................................................14- 23 14.6.4 Position of the Fixing inlet Guide........................................................................................................................14- 23 14.6.5 Points to Note When Attaching the Pressure Roller ..........................................................................................14- 24 14.6.6 Adjusting the Nip Pressure of the Pressure Roller ............................................................................................14- 24 14.6.7 Adjusting the Position of the Feeding Web Solenoid (SL2) ...............................................................................14- 24 14.6.8 Points to Note About the Position of the Fixing Thermal Switch ........................................................................14- 24 14.6.9 Points to Note When Mounting the Shift Thermal Switch ..................................................................................14- 24 14.6.10 Points to Note When Mounting the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch....................................................14- 25 14.6.11 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Upper Thermistor ...........................................................................14- 25 14.6.12 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Lower Thermistor ...........................................................................14- 25 14.6.13 Points to Note When Mounting the External Heat Thermistor..........................................................................14- 25
14.7 Electrical Components.......................................................................................................................... 14- 25

14.7.1 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB .....................................................................................................14- 25 14.7.2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB .............................................................................................................14- 26 14.7.3 Points to Note When Mounting the DC Controller PCB/ DC Controller Box ......................................................14- 26 14.7.4 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main)................................................................................................14- 27 14.7.5 After Repacking the SRAM Board......................................................................................................................14- 27 14.7.6 After Replacing the HDD....................................................................................................................................14- 27 14.7.7 When Replacing the HV2 PCB ..........................................................................................................................14- 27 14.7.8 When Replacing the ATR Sensor/Patch Image Read Sensor ...........................................................................14- 28
14.8 Pickup/Feeding System ........................................................................................................................ 14- 28
Contents
14.8.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration After Replacing the Pickup Cassette ...................................................... 14- 28 14.8.2 Adjusting the Manual Feed Pickup Horizontal Registration............................................................................... 14- 28 14.8.3 Adjusting the Front Deck Pickup Horizontal Registration .................................................................................. 14- 28 14.8.4 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value.......................................................................................................... 14- 30
Chapter 15 Correcting Faulty Images 15.1 Making lnitial Checks ..............................................................................................................................15- 1

15.1.1 Checking the Site Environment ........................................................................................................................... 15- 1 15.1.2 Checking the Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 15- 1 15.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ....................................................................................................................... 15- 1 15.1.4 Checking the Durables ........................................................................................................................................ 15- 1 15.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts........................................................................................................... 15- 1 15.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks .......................................................................................................... 15- 1 15.1.7 Others .................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 2
15.2 Test Print ................................................................................................................................................15- 2

15.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................. 15- 2 15.2.2 Test Print TYPE ................................................................................................................................................... 15- 2 15.2.3 Selecting Test Print TYPE ................................................................................................................................... 15- 2 15.2.4 16-Gradation (TYPE=4) ....................................................................................................................................... 15- 3 15.2.5 Full Page Halftone (TYPE=5) .............................................................................................................................. 15- 3 15.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) ..................................................................................................................................................... 15- 4 15.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripes (TYPE=10) ................................................................................................................ 15- 4 15.2.8 64-Gradation (TYPE=12) ..................................................................................................................................... 15- 5 15.2.9 Full Color 16-Gradation (TYPE=14)..................................................................................................................... 15- 5
15.3 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................15- 6

15.3.1 Symptoms............................................................................................................................................................ 15- 6
15.3.1.1 Symptoms ............................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 6 15.3.1.2 Maintenance Recommendations for Components Around the Photosensitive Drum/Intermediate Transfer Unit in the Event of an Image Fault ............................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 7
15.3.2 Image Faults ...................................................................................................................................................... 15- 10

15.3.2.1 Solid Image ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 10 15.3.2.2 Light Image / Weak Density ............................................................................................................................................... 15- 13 15.3.2.3 Foggy Image ...................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 18 15.3.2.4 Uneven Density.................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 21 15.3.2.5 Out of Focus....................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 29 15.3.2.6 Partially Blank/Streaked ..................................................................................................................................................... 15- 31 15.3.2.7 Smudged/Streaked ............................................................................................................................................................ 15- 38 15.3.2.8 Ghost / Memory.................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 48 15.3.2.9 Faulty Color Reproduction ................................................................................................................................................. 15- 48
15.3.3 Faulty Feeding ................................................................................................................................................... 15- 51

15.3.3.1 Skew Feed ......................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 51 15.3.3.2 Fold/Rip.............................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 55 15.3.3.3 Ripple/Curl ......................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 58 15.3.3.4 Wrap................................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 58
15.3.4 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................................................ 15- 59

15.3.4.1 No Power ........................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 59 15.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related........................................................................................................................................................ 15- 61 15.3.4.3 Counter Malfunction ........................................................................................................................................................... 15- 62 15.3.4.4 Malfunction/Faulty Detection.............................................................................................................................................. 15- 62 15.3.4.5 Noise .................................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 66 15.3.4.6 User Warning Message...................................................................................................................................................... 15- 69 15.3.4.7 Other Defect....................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 72 15.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment................................................................................................................................................ 15- 73
15.3.5 Printing/scanning ............................................................................................................................................... 15- 74

15.3.5.1 No Output........................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 74 15.3.5.2 Installation Failure .............................................................................................................................................................. 15- 74 15.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result ......................................................................................................................................... 15- 74
Contents
15.3.6 Network ..............................................................................................................................................................15- 75

15.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure.................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 75 15.3.6.2 Connection Problem........................................................................................................................................................... 15- 75
15.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related .................................................................................................................................15- 75

15.3.7.1 Transmission Problem ....................................................................................................................................................... 15- 75 15.3.7.2 Reception Problem............................................................................................................................................................. 15- 76 15.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect ................................................................................................................................................... 15- 76 15.3.7.4 Setting/Registration Defect ................................................................................................................................................ 15- 77
15.3.8 Jam (Main Unit)..................................................................................................................................................15- 77

15.3.8.1 1700 Jam Code: Explanation of 1700 Jam Code............................................................................................................... 15- 77 15.3.8.2 0103/0104 Jam Code Neuissiedler large-size/RA3 pickup fault ........................................................................................ 15- 77 15.3.8.3 0101 Jam Code: Only occurs with right paper deck, upon installation............................................................................... 15- 78 15.3.8.4 0109/0110 Jam Code: Vertical Path Roller does not rotate ............................................................................................... 15- 78 15.3.8.5 0109 Jam Code: Occurs only during duplex copy/print...................................................................................................... 15- 78 15.3.8.6 010A Jam Code: Occurs only with machines that are equipped with Side Paper Deck-D1 .............................................. 15- 78 15.3.8.7 010A Jam Code: Rotational failure of Manual feed pre-registration motor (M6) due to DC Controller PCB failure ........... 15- 80 15.3.8.8 010C Jam Code: Occurs during feeding B5/STMT paper (small size), Due to rotational failure of paper feeder fan........ 15- 80 15.3.8.9 020E Jam Code: Cogged timing belt in Finisher-R1 is detached....................................................................................... 15- 81 15.3.8.10 0216 Jam Code: Malfunction of Registration Sensor Flag ............................................................................................... 15- 81 15.3.8.11 0A0A/020A Jam Code: Sometimes jam occurrence indication remains displaying ......................................................... 15- 81 15.3.8.12 0A0C Jam Code: Stationary jam at power-on at Inside Delivery Sensor PS12 ............................................................... 15- 81 15.3.8.13 0A0C Jam Code: Stationary jam at Inside Delivery Sensor PS12, .................................................................................. 15- 82 15.3.8.14 0A15 Jam Code: Stationary jam at power-on at Fixing Inlet Sensor PS11 ...................................................................... 15- 82 15.3.8.15 0A16 Jam Code: Stationary jam at power-on at Left Deck Stationary Sensor PS47 ....................................................... 15- 82
15.3.9 Jam (Document Feeder) ....................................................................................................................................15- 82

15.3.9.1 Original feeding failure: How to set service mode items after clearing RAM, DADF-M1 ................................................... 15- 82
15.3.10 Jam (FIN) .........................................................................................................................................................15- 82

15.3.10.1 1101 Jam Code: Because Finisher Controller PCB is faulty, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2........................................ 15- 82 15.3.10.2 1104/1101 Jam Code: Troubleshooting, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2....................................................................... 15- 82 15.3.10.3 1104 Jam Code: Because compression spring for 1st delivery roller comes off, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2 ......... 15- 83 15.3.10.4 1104/1101 Jam Code: Because compression spring for inlet roller is not properly installed, Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2 15- 84 15.3.10.5 1104 Jam Code: Because grounding plate of swing guide unit is not properly positioned, Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2 .. 15- 84 15.3.10.6 1200 Jam Code: Timing Jam due to soil of Inlet Path Sensor PI33 ................................................................................. 15- 85
15.3.11 Error Code........................................................................................................................................................15- 85

15.3.11.1 E001-0001/E001-0003 Error Code: When turning Energy Save Mode off....................................................................... 15- 85 15.3.11.2 E001-0001/E001-0002/E001-0003 Error Code: Because fixing drawer (AC Driver cable) has poor contact .................. 15- 85 15.3.11.3 E001-0002 Error Code: Abnormal (rumbling) sound occurs when fixing roller is rotating................................................ 15- 85 15.3.11.4 E003-0041/E003-0042/E003-0043 Error Code: Because fixing drawer (AC Driver cable) has poor contact .................. 15- 86 15.3.11.5 E004-0002 Error Code: Fixing Sub Heater is broken....................................................................................................... 15- 86 15.3.11.6 E005-0000 Error Code: How to clear error code.............................................................................................................. 15- 86 15.3.11.7 E006-0001 Error Code: Because fixing drawer (AC Driver cable) has poor contact........................................................ 15- 86 15.3.11.8 E006-0001 Error Code: Due to deformation of fixing roller .............................................................................................. 15- 87 15.3.11.9 E008-0001 Error Code: Necessary steps upon indication ............................................................................................... 15- 87 15.3.11.10 E009-00FF Error Code: Because of broken 24T gear in fixing drive unit....................................................................... 15- 87 15.3.11.11 E514-8001/E514-8002 Error Code / Misalignment in staple/sort/group mode: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2........... 15- 87 15.3.11.12 E013-0001 Error Code: How to clear waste toner full detection..................................................................................... 15- 87 15.3.11.13 E013-0001 Error Code: How to change the waste toner detection timing...................................................................... 15- 88 15.3.11.14 E014-0001 Error Code/abnormal noise: Detachment of fixing roller occurs because C-ring (stop ring) is detached .... 15- 88 15.3.11.15 E020-0XD2 Error Code: Claws of color developing assembly cover are not securely snapped into place.................... 15- 88 15.3.11.16 E020-03A0 Error Code: When making continuous or intermittent copy of color image ................................................. 15- 88 15.3.11.17 E020-0xA9/0xA0 Error Code: Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 15- 89 15.3.11.18 E020-0xA8/0xA2 Error Code: Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 15- 91 15.3.11.19 E020-0281 Error Code: When auto gradation adjustment is performed upon installation ............................................. 15- 92 15.3.11.20 E020-03A0/E020-03A1/E020-03A2/E020-03A3 Error Code: Because output voltage from DC Power Relay PCB is not enough ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 92 15.3.11.21 E020-03A0 Error Code: Displayed after replacement of DC Controller PCB ................................................................. 15- 93 15.3.11.22 E020-00FF Error Code: Because of DC Controller PCB failure ..................................................................................... 15- 93 15.3.11.23 E020-03A0 Error Code: Because J119 connector on DC power relay PCB is disconnected ........................................ 15- 93 15.3.11.24 E020-00FF Error Code: Because hopper stirring motor (M23) causes rotation failure .................................................. 15- 93
Contents
15.3.11.25 E021-0001 Error Code: Rotational failure of Developing Rotary Motor due to faulty DC Controller PCB ...................... 15- 93 15.3.11.26 E043-0001 Error Code: Abnormal noise from Paper Pick-up Ass'y of Side Paper Deck ............................................... 15- 93 15.3.11.27 E061-0007 Error Code: Because potential sensor connector is disconnected upon installation ................................... 15- 94 15.3.11.28 E061-0001/E061-0003 Error Code: Because potential sensor PCB is faulty................................................................. 15- 94 15.3.11.29 E070-0001 Error Code: ITB Home Position detection error ........................................................................................... 15- 94 15.3.11.30 E070-0001 Error Code: ITB home position cannot be detected after replacement of ITB ............................................. 15- 94 15.3.11.31 E070-0003 Error Code: Because of poor contact of leaf spring of static-charge eliminator in ITB Transfer Ass'y, after replacement of primary transfer roller ........................................................................................................................................ 15- 94 15.3.11.32 E070-0101 Error Code: Reflecting surface for ITB HP detection is soiled ..................................................................... 15- 95 15.3.11.33 E070 Error Code: Difference between sub codes 0001 and 0002 and their function..................................................... 15- 95 15.3.11.34 E073-0001 Error Code: Because of deformation of release arm of Fixing Feeder Ass'y ............................................... 15- 95 15.3.11.35 E077-0001 Error Code: Secondary transfer outside roller shift motor (M20) does not run ............................................ 15- 95 15.3.11.36 E077-0001 Error Code: Secondary Transfer Outside Roller repeats up-and-down movement upon power-on ............ 15- 95 15.3.11.37 E079/E009 Error Code: Because of broken 24T gear.................................................................................................... 15- 96 15.3.11.38 E079-0002 Error Code: Due to pinched drawer cable2 of fixing feeder assembly......................................................... 15- 96 15.3.11.39 E079-0002 Error Code: Points to note when performing service work on drawer cable of fixing feeder assembly ....... 15- 97 15.3.11.40 E020/E021/E061/E070/E078/E820 Error Code / Poor contact of connectors around process unit ............................... 15- 97 15.3.11.41 E020-03A0/E020-01A2 Error Code ............................................................................................................................. 15- 100 15.3.11.42 E061-0001 Error Code ................................................................................................................................................. 15- 100 15.3.11.43 E070-0102 Error Code ................................................................................................................................................. 15- 101 15.3.11.44 E070-0101/E070-0102/E070-0201/E070-0202/E070-0302 Error Code ....................................................................... 15- 101 15.3.11.45 E542-8001 Error Code ................................................................................................................................................. 15- 102 15.3.11.46 E100 Error Code: Because of deformation of laser shutter lever ................................................................................. 15- 103 15.3.11.47 E100-0002 Error Code: Fine lines appear on front side of image in sub scanning direction because laser scanner assembly is faulty ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 103 15.3.11.48 0111 Jam Code: Occurs when copying in duplex mode .............................................................................................. 15- 103 15.3.11.49 0111 Jam Code: Because tension spring of reverse driven roller comes off ............................................................... 15- 103 15.3.11.50 E197 Error Code: Release arm of Fixing Feeder Ass'y was deformed ........................................................................ 15- 104 15.3.11.51 E248-0000 Error Code: Upon installation..................................................................................................................... 15- 104 15.3.11.52 E505 Error Code: Alignment/staple position adjustment backup data error, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2 ............ 15- 104 15.3.11.53 E540-8003 Error Code: Occurs when Upper Tray ascends because of Back End Assist Plate coming off................. 15- 104 15.3.11.54 E540-8002/E540-8001 Error Code: Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2 ........................................................................ 15- 104 15.3.11.55 E602-0001 Error Code: Unable to enter Download mode because Main Controller PCB is faulty .............................. 15- 104 15.3.11.56 E602-0113 Error Code: Because hard disk (HDD) is faulty ......................................................................................... 15- 105 15.3.11.57 E719-0011 Error Code: After clearing error code, "Enter the Dept. ID and Password using the numeric keys." appears, Card Reader-C1................................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 105 15.3.11.58 E733-0001/E732-0001 Error Code: Occurs when progress bar is completed after power-on ..................................... 15- 105 15.3.11.59 E747-00FF Error Code ................................................................................................................................................. 15- 105 15.3.11.60 E800-0001 Error Code: Installation of Fixing Feeder Ass'y is not properly detected ................................................... 15- 105 15.3.11.61 E800-0001 Error Code: Because of deformation of release arm of Fixing Feeder Ass'y ............................................. 15- 105 15.3.11.62 E800-0001/E227-0001 Error Code: Because DC power supply is faulty ..................................................................... 15- 106 15.3.11.63 E820-0002 Error Code: Because of rotational failure of process unit cooling fan (FM7) ............................................. 15- 106 15.3.11.64 E824-000 Error Code: Because of rotational failure of primary charging suction fan (FM1) ........................................ 15- 106 15.3.11.65 1200/1104 Jam Code due to unintended rotation of shutter open/close clutch (CL31): Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2 .. 15106
15.3.12 FAX # Code ................................................................................................................................................... 15- 107

15.3.12.1 #801 Error Code: Upon installation, machine can send data to shared folder on PC with Windows2000 but can't do so to shared folder on PC with WindowsXP...................................................................................................................................... 15- 107
15.3.13 Specifications-Related FAQ........................................................................................................................... 15- 107

15.3.13.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 15- 107 15.3.13.2 FAQ on Send Specifications .......................................................................................................................................... 15- 116 15.3.13.3 FAQ on LIPS Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 15- 118 15.3.13.4 FAQ on UFR Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 15- 118 15.3.13.5 FAQ on G3FAX Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 15- 119 15.3.13.6 FAQ on I-FAX Specifications.......................................................................................................................................... 15- 121 15.3.13.7 FAQ on Remote UI Specifications.................................................................................................................................. 15- 122
15.4 Outline of Electrical Components........................................................................................................15- 123

15.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid................................................................................................................................................ 15- 123
15.4.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids ................................................................................................................................................... 15- 123
15.4.2 Motor................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 125

15.4.2.1 Motors .............................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 125
Contents
15.4.3 Fan ...................................................................................................................................................................15- 128

15.4.3.1 Fans ................................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 128
15.4.4 Sensor..............................................................................................................................................................15- 130

15.4.4.1 Sensors ............................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 130
15.4.5 Switch...............................................................................................................................................................15- 136

15.4.5.1 Switches........................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 136
15.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ............................................................................................................................15- 137

15.4.6.1 Heaters, Lamps, and Others ............................................................................................................................................ 15- 137
15.4.7 PCBs ................................................................................................................................................................15- 140

15.4.7.1 PCB.................................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 140 15.4.7.2 PCB.................................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 143
15.4.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB.............................................15- 145
15.4.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emiting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB.............................................................. 15- 145 15.4.8.2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker...................................................................................................................... 15- 145 15.4.8.3 Main Controller PCB (main) ............................................................................................................................................. 15- 146 15.4.8.4 DC Controller PCB ........................................................................................................................................................... 15- 146 15.4.8.5 HV1 PCB.......................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 147 15.4.8.6 HV2 PCB.......................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 147 15.4.8.7 HV3 PCB.......................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 148
Chapter 16 Self Diagnosis 16.1 Error Code Table .................................................................................................................................... 16- 1

16.1.1 Error Code............................................................................................................................................................16- 1 16.1.2 Error Code............................................................................................................................................................16- 3
16.2 Error Code Details .................................................................................................................................. 16- 4

16.2.1 Error Code in Detail..............................................................................................................................................16- 4 16.2.2 E602 in Detail ....................................................................................................................................................16- 18 16.2.3 Error Code in Detail............................................................................................................................................16- 22 16.2.4 Error Code in Detail............................................................................................................................................16- 39
16.3 Error Codes (SEND) ............................................................................................................................. 16- 56

16.3.1 Self-Diagnostic Display ......................................................................................................................................16- 56 16.3.2 List of Error Codes without Messages ...............................................................................................................16- 57
16.4 Jam Codes ........................................................................................................................................... 16- 61

16.4.1 Jam Code (printer unit) ......................................................................................................................................16- 61 16.4.2 Jam Code (finisher-related)................................................................................................................................16- 62 16.4.3 Jam Code (ADF-related) ....................................................................................................................................16- 63
16.5 Alarm Codes ......................................................................................................................................... 16- 64

16.5.1 Alarm Code ........................................................................................................................................................16- 64
Chapter 17 Service Mode 17.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 17- 1

17.1.1 Construction of Service Mode ..............................................................................................................................17- 1 17.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ....................................................................................................................17- 1 17.1.3 Exiting service modes ..........................................................................................................................................17- 2 17.1.4 Back-Up ...............................................................................................................................................................17- 2 17.1.5 Initial Screen ........................................................................................................................................................17- 3 17.1.6 Main/intermediate Item Screen ............................................................................................................................17- 3 17.1.7 Sub- Item Screen .................................................................................................................................................17- 3
17.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) ............................................................................................................ 17- 4

17.2.1 COPIER ...............................................................................................................................................................17- 4
17.2.1.1 COPIER List......................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 4 17.2.1.2 COPIER List....................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 14 17.2.1.3 COPIER List....................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 24
17.2.2 FEEDER.............................................................................................................................................................17- 34
17.2.2.1 FEEDER List ...................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 34
Contents
17.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode) ..........................................................................................................................17- 35

17.3.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 35 17.3.2 DC-CON ............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 36 17.3.3 DC-CON ............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 39 17.3.4 R-CON ............................................................................................................................................................... 17- 42 17.3.5 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 43 17.3.6 SORTER............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 43 17.3.7 MN-CONT.......................................................................................................................................................... 17- 48
17.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode).................................................................................................................17- 49

17.4.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 17- 49
17.4.1.1 COPIER List....................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 49 17.4.1.2 COPIER List....................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 63
17.4.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 77

17.4.2.1 FEEDER List ...................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 77
17.4.3 SORTER............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 78

17.4.3.1 SORTER List...................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 78
17.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode).............................................................................................17- 78

17.5.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 17- 78
17.5.1.1 COPIER LIst....................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 78 17.5.1.2 COPIER List....................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 89 17.5.1.3 COPIER List..................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 103
17.5.2 FEEDER .......................................................................................................................................................... 17- 116

17.5.2.1 FEEDER List .................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 116
17.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode) .....................................................................................................17- 118

17.6.1 COPIER ........................................................................................................................................................... 17- 118
17.6.1.1 COPIER List..................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 118 17.6.1.2 COPIER List..................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 156 17.6.1.3 COPIER List..................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 184
17.6.2 FEEDER .......................................................................................................................................................... 17- 220

17.6.2.1 FEEDER List .................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 220
17.6.3 SORTER.......................................................................................................................................................... 17- 220

17.6.3.1 SORTER List.................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 220
17.6.4 BOARD ............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 221

17.6.4.1 BOARD List...................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 221 17.6.4.2 BOARD List...................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 221
17.7 TEST (Test Print Mode) ......................................................................................................................17- 222

17.7.1 COPIER ........................................................................................................................................................... 17- 222
17.7.1.1 COPIER List..................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 222 17.7.1.2 COPIER List..................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 223 17.7.1.3 COPIER List..................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 225
17.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ................................................................................................................17- 227

17.8.1 COPIER ........................................................................................................................................................... 17- 227
17.8.1.1 COPIER List..................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 227 17.8.1.2 COPIER List..................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 233
Chapter 18 Upgrading 18.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................18- 1

18.1.1 Outline of the Version Upgrade ........................................................................................................................... 18- 1 18.1.2 Overview of Upgrading Work............................................................................................................................... 18- 1 18.1.3 Outline of the Functions and Operations ............................................................................................................. 18- 2 18.1.4 Outline of the Service Support Tool..................................................................................................................... 18- 5 18.1.5 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use ....................................................................................... 18- 8
18.2 Making Preparations .............................................................................................................................18- 11

18.2.1 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST)......................................................................................... 18- 11 18.2.2 Copying the System Software (SST -> USB) .................................................................................................... 18- 14 18.2.3 Registering the System software ....................................................................................................................... 18- 17
Contents
18.2.4 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST) .........................................................................................18- 20 18.2.5 Making Connections...........................................................................................................................................18- 22 18.2.6 Copying the System Software (SST -> USB).....................................................................................................18- 26 18.2.7 Making Connections (SST in use)......................................................................................................................18- 30 18.2.8 Making Connections (SST in use)......................................................................................................................18- 32 18.2.9 Making Connections (USB device in use)..........................................................................................................18- 33 18.2.10 Making Connections (USB device in use) ........................................................................................................18- 33
18.3 Formatting the HDD.............................................................................................................................. 18- 34

18.3.1 Formatting All Partitions .....................................................................................................................................18- 34 18.3.2 Formatting All Partitions .....................................................................................................................................18- 35 18.3.3 Formatting Selected Partitions ...........................................................................................................................18- 36 18.3.4 Formatting Selected Partitions ...........................................................................................................................18- 37 18.3.5 Formatting the Procedure ..................................................................................................................................18- 39 18.3.6 Formatting the Partitions ....................................................................................................................................18- 44
18.4 Downloading System Software............................................................................................................. 18- 45

18.4.1 Batch Downloading ............................................................................................................................................18- 45
18.4.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 45 18.4.1.2 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 46 18.4.1.3 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 47 18.4.1.4 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 51
18.4.2 Downloading the System Software ....................................................................................................................18- 59

18.4.2.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 59 18.4.2.2 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 60 18.4.2.3 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 60 18.4.2.4 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 66 18.4.2.5 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 69
18.4.3 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module ...................................................................................................18- 73

18.4.3.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 73 18.4.3.2 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 75 18.4.3.3 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 76 18.4.3.4 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 81
18.4.4 Downloading the SDICT.....................................................................................................................................18- 83

18.4.4.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 83 18.4.4.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 83
18.4.5 Downloading the MEAPCONT ...........................................................................................................................18- 83

18.4.6 Downloading the KEY ........................................................................................................................................18- 83

18.4.7 Downloading the TTS.........................................................................................................................................18- 83

18.4.8 Downloading the BROWSER.............................................................................................................................18- 84

18.4.9 Downloading the BOOT Software ......................................................................................................................18- 85

18.4.9.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 85 18.4.9.2 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 85 18.4.9.3 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 86 18.4.9.4 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 91
18.4.10 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software......................................................................................................18- 92

18.4.10.1 Outline .............................................................................................................................................................................. 18- 92 18.4.10.2 Outline .............................................................................................................................................................................. 18- 92 18.4.10.3 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................................................... 18- 94 18.4.10.4 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................................................... 18- 99 18.4.10.5 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................................................... 18- 99
18.4.11 Downloading the FAX Software .......................................................................................................................18- 99

18.4.11.1 Outline .............................................................................................................................................................................. 18- 99
Contents
18.4.11.2 Downloading Procedure ................................................................................................................................................. 18- 100
18.5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data .........................................................................................18- 105

18.5.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................. 18- 105 18.5.2 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................. 18- 106 18.5.3 Uploading Procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 18- 106 18.5.4 Uploading Procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 18- 111 18.5.5 Downloading Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 18- 115 18.5.6 Downloading Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 18- 119
18.6 Version Upgrade using USB ...............................................................................................................18- 120

18.6.1 Overview of Menus and Functions .................................................................................................................. 18- 120 18.6.2 Downloading/Writing the System Software (auto) ........................................................................................... 18- 122 18.6.3 Downloading the System Software (Confirmation execution when version is downed the same version) ...... 18- 122 18.6.4 Downloading the System Software (all overwriting) ........................................................................................ 18- 123 18.6.5 Formatting the HDD......................................................................................................................................... 18- 125 18.6.6 Other Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 18- 125
Chapter 19 Service Tools 19.1 Service Tools ..........................................................................................................................................19- 1

19.1.1 Special Tools ....................................................................................................................................................... 19- 1 19.1.2 Solvents and Oils................................................................................................................................................. 19- 2
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
Contents
Contents
1.1 System Construction ......................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 System Configuration with Pickup/Delivery Accessories ........................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 System Configuration with Pickup/Delivery Accessories ........................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.3 System Configuration with Pickup/Delivery Accessories ........................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.4 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories.................................................................................................. 1-2 1.1.5 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories.......................................................................................................................... 1-4 1.1.6 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories.................................................................................................. 1-6 1.1.7 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories.................................................................................................. 1-6 1.1.8 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories.......................................................................................................................... 1-7 1.1.9 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories.......................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2 Product Specifications....................................................................................................................................................1-9

1.2.1 Names of Parts ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-9
1.2.1.1 External View..................................................................................................................................................................................................1-9 1.2.1.2 Cross Section.................................................................................................................................................................................................1-10
1.2.2 Using the Machine ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11

1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch.......................................................................................................................................................................1-11 1.2.2.2 Points to Note About Turing Off the Main Power Switch............................................................................................................................1-12 1.2.2.3 Points to Note About Turing Off the Main Power Switch............................................................................................................................1-14 1.2.2.4 Control Panel.................................................................................................................................................................................................1-16 1.2.2.5 Control Panel.................................................................................................................................................................................................1-16 1.2.2.6 Control Panel.................................................................................................................................................................................................1-17
1.2.3 User Mode Items........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-18

1.2.3.1 Common Settings ..........................................................................................................................................................................................1-18 1.2.3.2 Common Settings ..........................................................................................................................................................................................1-18 1.2.3.3 Timer Settings ...............................................................................................................................................................................................1-20 1.2.3.4 Timer Settings ...............................................................................................................................................................................................1-20 1.2.3.5 Adjustment and Cleaning .............................................................................................................................................................................1-20 1.2.3.6 Adjustment and Cleaning .............................................................................................................................................................................1-20 1.2.3.7 Report Settings ..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-21 1.2.3.8 Report Settings ..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-21 1.2.3.9 System Settings .............................................................................................................................................................................................1-22 1.2.3.10 System Settings ...........................................................................................................................................................................................1-22 1.2.3.11 Copy Settings ..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-24 1.2.3.12 Copy Settings ..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-24 1.2.3.13 Communications Settings............................................................................................................................................................................1-24 1.2.3.14 Communications Settings............................................................................................................................................................................1-25 1.2.3.15 Mail Box Settings........................................................................................................................................................................................1-26 1.2.3.16 Mail Box Settings........................................................................................................................................................................................1-26 1.2.3.17 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................................1-26 1.2.3.18 Address Book Settings ................................................................................................................................................................................1-27 1.2.3.19 Address Book Settings ................................................................................................................................................................................1-27
1.2.4 User Maintenance ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-27

1.2.4.1 Cleaning ........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-27 1.2.4.2 Inspection ......................................................................................................................................................................................................1-28
1.2.5 Safety ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-29

1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light...............................................................................................................................................................................1-29 1.2.5.2 Regulations by the us Center for Devices and Radiological Health .............................................................................................................1-29 1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................1-30 1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-31
1.2.6 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-31

1.2.6.1 Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................................1-31 1.2.6.2 Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................................1-33
1.2.7 Function List .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-34

1.2.7.1 Print Speed ....................................................................................................................................................................................................1-34
Contents
1.2.7.2 Paper Type .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-36 1.2.7.3 Print Speed .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-42 1.2.7.4 Paper Type .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-43 1.2.7.5 Accessories ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-44
1.2.8 RDS Specification...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-44

1.2.8.1 Embedded RDS(e-RDS) ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-44 1.2.8.2 Embedded RDS(e-RDS) ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1-45
Chapter 1
1.1 System Construction

1.1.1 System Configuration with Pickup/Delivery Accessories
0018-0759
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci
[1a] [3]
[7] [9] [1b]
[8] [5]
[2a] [3] [4] [2b]
[6]
F-1-1
[1a] Finisher-R1 [1b] Finisher-AC1 [2a] Saddle Finisher-R2 [2b] Saddle Finisher-AC2 [3] Additionary Finisher Tray-A1 [4] Puncher Unit-M1(or N1,P1) [5] Stapler-J1 [6] Stapler-D3 [7] Shift Tray-C1 [8] Copy Tray-K1 [9] Side Paper Deck-U1

0002-5061
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The machine may be configured as follows with pickup/delivery accessories.
[5] [3] [1] [7]
[6] [3] [2]
[4]
F-1-2
1-1
Chapter 1 [1] Finisher-R1 [2] Saddle Finisher-R2 [3] Additionary Finisher Tray-A1 [4] Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1 [5] Shift Tray-C1 [6] Copy Tray-K1 [7] Side Paper Deck-U1 * If any of the accessories [1] through [3] is used, the accessories [5] and [6] cannot be attached as part of the system.

0011-4063
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C

[7] [3] [1] [9]
[8] [3] [2] [5]
[4] [6]
F-1-3
[1] Finisher-R1 [2] Saddle Finisher-R2 [3] Additionary Finisher Tray-A1 [4] Puncher Unit-L1 [5] Stapler-J1 [6] Stapler-D3 [7] Shift Tray-C1 [8] Copy Tray-K1 [9] Side Paper Deck-U1
1.1.4 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories

0018-2404
1-2
Chapter 1
[23]
[24] [21]
[11]
[15] [25] [19]*
[22]
[18]
[20]*
[1]-[10], [12]-[14], [16], [17]

F-1-4
*can be installed in one of two items.

T-1-1 Name Send function [1] [2] [3] [4] Print function [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Security [10] [11] Copy function [12] [13] Operations support [14] [15] Web Certification FAX Others [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] Color Universal Send kit-K1 Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature Set-A1 Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set-A1 Digital User Signature PDF kit-A1 Color UFR ll/PCL Printer kit-Z1 Color UFR ll Printer kit-Z1 Color PS Printer kit-Z1 Direct Printing Kit-F1 Encrypted Secure Print Software-C1 HDD Data Erase kit-A1 HDD Data Encription kit-B1 Secure Watermark-A1 Barcode Printing kit-A1 Remote Operator's Software kit-A2 Voice Guicance kit-C1 Web Access Software-E1 Access Management System kit-A1 SUPER G3 FAX Board-U2 Document Tray-K1 Document Tray-M1 Accessibility Handle-A1 Key Switch Unit-A2 License Certification
1-3
1-4
Chapter 1
External Controller
2. Brief explanation of the functions
AMS Attachment kit Card Reader
MEAP LogON
iR C6880/5880 iR C6880i/5880i
IMGCONT
(service mode)
[25]
[24]
[23]
1.Relationship of Printing/Transmission accessories @Relationship of each function is shown in the following.
Remote Operation
Option License Certification option MEAP
1.1.5 Functions of Printing/Transmitting Accessories
Color Network Unit
Name Card Reader-C1
Card Reader Attachment-C2
Web Access
Voice Guidance
Color Network Printer Unit-G1
F-1-5
Secure Watermark
HDD data Encryption
SEND (standard for i model) UFR ll UFR ll/ High PCL compression PDF Trace & smooth PDF Barcode Print PS& Direct Print
Direct Print
Encrypted Secure Print
HDD data Erase
Encryption PDF
User SearchDevice Signature Signature able PDF PDF PDF
License Certification
0018-2409
Chapter 1
T-1-2 Option SEND Color Universal Send kit-K1 Overview With this option, the transmission function is available. It enables to send a scanned document as e-mail or a FAX document, as well as saving it in the file server or the box. 3 licenses are packed with this option, and the following PDF functions are available. [High-compression PDF Function] The function enables to compress the PDF data to approx. one-tenth. [Searchable PDF Function] The function enables to computerize a paper document to a searchable PDF. By dividing the scanned data into text and image automatically, it enables the OCR processing for the text area. [Trace/Smooth PDF Function] The function enables to extract the outline of text and figure. To use this option, the Color Universal Send kit-K1 is required.
Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature set-A1
Universal Send PDF Security Feature set-A1
2 licenses are packed with this option, and the following PDF functions are available. [Encrypted PDF Function] The function enables to encrypt the PDF and set password for safe transmission when sending the PDF that the e-mail address or the file server is set as the destination. [Device Signature PDF Function] The function enables to prove with which device the document is scanned to the receiver when sending the PDF that the e-mail address or the file server is set as the destination. Signature is added using the device certificate and the key pair in the device. To use this option, the Color Universal Send kit-K1 is required.
Digital User Signature PDF kit-A1 The function enables to prove which user adds the signature to the document to the receiver when sending the PDF that the e-mail address or the file server is set as the destination. With the personal authentication with SSO and IC card, signature is added using the certificate and the key pair in the device or the IC card. To use this option, the Color Universal Send kit-K1 is required. PRINT Color UFR ll Printer Kit-Z1 Color PS Printer Kit-Z1 Canon-specific UFR II (Ultra Fast Rendering) printing system is available. PS function is available. To use this option, the Color UFR ll/PCL Printer kit-Z1 is required for iRC6800. Color UFR ll/PCL Printer Kit-Z1 As well as Canon-specific UFR II (Ultra Fast Rendering) printing system, this option enables to perform the output corresponding to PCL. The function enables to print by transmitting the file from the host machine and making printer recognize the file itself without printer driver.(You don't need to open the file to print.) To use this option, the Color UFR ll/PCL Printer Kit-Z1, or Color UFR ll Printer Kit-Z1 is required for iRC6880. The Direct Print function from Web browser becomes enabled when the Color Network Printer Unit is connected. Barcode Printing kit-A1 This option enables to convert the number entered on PC into the barcode using the barcode font and output it. To use this option, the Color UFR ll/PCL Printer Kit-Z1 is required. Encrypted Secure Print Software- The function enables to enhance the security of the print data by encrypting the data put on the network. C1 At output, user name and password are required. (Standard function)
Direct Printing Kit-F1
Security
HDD Data Erase kit-A1 HDD Data Encryption kit-B1
This option enables to erase a temporary data (e.g., scanned data and PDL data) generated in the HDD automatically and completely at the job end. This option provides the function that prevents the data leakage by encrypting the all data recorded in the HDD of the host machine (including the address table, job history, scanned data, and temporary data, such as PDL data) in case the HDD is taken out The function enables to embed the text that emerges on the background of the output, and make a copy/ print it as a latent image. By operating the server function on the host machine, the operation executed on the control panel screen of the host machine is available from the PC (remote operation).
COPY
Secure Watermark-A1
Operations support
Remote Operator's Software kitA2
Voice Guidance kit-B1 Web Web Access Software-E1
The function enables to read out the operation (copy, fax, send function) The function enables to display HTML and Flash contents obtained from WEB server on the LCD control panel of the host machine. To print Web page and PDF, the Direct Printing Kit-F1, or Color PS Printer Kit-Z1 is required.
1-5
Chapter 1
Option Certification Access Management System kitA1 Color Network Printer Unit-G1 Overview This function executes the user authentication on the host machine, and restricts the access control to each function (e.g., copy, print, box, and transmission) in accordance with the user group privilege set beforehand. It connects the iR machine and the print server (computer) so that enables to add the function printing Adobe PostScript 3 effectively. Moreover, it enables to perform high-speed network communication, raster processing, and printing optimally. The Direct Print function from Web browser becomes enabled when the Color Network Printer Unit is connected.
External Controller

0002-7413
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories:
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
[5]
[8]
[6]
[10]
[9]
F-1-6
[7]
[1] iR Security Kit [2] SEND Expansion Kit D1P/D1U (dongle for extended functions) [3] Image Conversion Board-A2 [4] USB Interface Board-A3, or TokenRing Board (optional for 120V model) [5] UFR Board (standard for N model) [6] Ethernet Board (standard) [7] Super G3 Fax Board-P1 [8] PS Print Sever Unit-D1 [9] Color iR 256 MB Expansion RAM (optional for 100V) [10] PDL Expansion Kit (LIPS) C1 (for 100V model, LIPS model boot ROM)

0011-6916
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C
1-6
Chapter 1
[20]
[21]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[13]
[17] [16] [15] [19]
[18]
[14]
F-1-7
[1] Color UFR II Printer Kit-L1 [2] Color Multi-PDL Printer Kit-L1 [3] Barcode Printing Kit-A1 (Licence) [4] Direct Printing Kit-D1 (Licence) [5] iR Security Kit-A2 (Licence) [6] Remote Operator's Software kit-A1 (Licence) [7] Canon Color Universal Send Kit-E1 (Licence) [8] PDF High Compression Kit-A1 (Licence) [9] Universal Send PDF Encryption Kit-B1 (Licence) [10] Universal Send Serchable PDF Kit-A1 (Licence) [11] Web Access Software-D1 (Licence) [12] Encrypted Printing Software-A3 (Licence) [13] Security Expansion Board-E1 [14] SUPERG3 FAX Board-U1 [15] C NW P.UNIT-G1 UKE or C NW P.UNIT-G1 EFIGS [16] Voice Guidance Kit-A2 [17] Key Switch Unit-A1/A2 [18] Document Tray-K1 [19] Card Reader-C1 [20] Card Reader Attachment-C1

0006-4753
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1. table of functions expected of printing/transmitting accessories

T-1-3 UFR Printer/Scanner Kit-C1 GDI-UFR printing SEND function Faxing Local printing yes* yes* SEND Expansion KitDIP/DIU yes Image Conversion Board-A2 yes yes USB Interface BoardA3 yes Super G3 Fax Board-P1 yes -
2. brief explanation of the functions expected of the accessories - UFR Printer/Scanner-C1 adds the GDI-UFR printing function and a scanning function in combination with ScanGear. - SEND Function Expansion DIU-DIP/DIU adds a transmission function; the setup work calls for a PC, requiring the selection of DIP (parallel port) or DIU (USB port) depending on the type of connection offered by the PC. - Image Conversion Board-A2 needed when a transmission/fax function is added. - USB Interface Board-A3 adds a printing function by connection to a PC in a local configuration (USB); requires a UFR board. - Super G3 Fax Board-P1 adds the G3 fax function.
1-7
Chapter 1

0011-6739
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories:

T-1-4
Functions
Remot Univer Univer Securit Canon Canon Encryp Color Barcod e PDF sal sal Color Direct C NW C NW y iR Voice SUPE Color Web ted Multie Operat High Send Send UFR II Printin P.UNI P.UNI Expans Securit Guidan RG3 Univer Access Printin PDL Printin or's Compr PDF Sercha Printer g Kit- T-G1 T-G1 ion y Kit- ce KitFAX sal Softwa g Printer g KitSoftwa ession Encryp ble Kit-L1 D1 UKE EFIGS BoardA2 A2 Board- Send re-D1 Softwa Kit-L1 A1 re kitKit-A1 tion PDF E1 U1 Kit-E1 re-A3 A1 Kit-B1 Kit-A1
UFR II print function UFR II/PCL/ PS print function bar code print function
Y PDF direct print function Y
PS print server function encryption board function HDD encryption + full deletion function voice guidance function remote operation function G3 fax 1-line function
transmission function highcompression PDF generation function encryption PDF generation function searchable PDF generation function
1-8
Chapter 1
Web browser function (display only) Web browser function (content/ PDF print) secure print extension function (encryption) Y Y
Y: optional. N: exclusive.
1.2 Product Specifications

1.2.1 Names of Parts 1.2.1.1 External View
0002-7878
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci
[10] [9] [1]
[8] [2]
[7] [3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
F-1-8
[1] Original pickup tray [2] Manual feed tray [3] Main power switch [4] Right front paper deck [5] Cassette [6] Left front paper deck [7] Front cover [8] Black toner supply cover [9] Control panel LCD (touch panel) [10] Feeder
1-9
Chapter 1
[1]
[2]
[8] [7]
[3]
[4] [6]
F-1-9
[5]
[1] Copyboard glass [2] Color toner container grip [3] Color toner access cover [4] Fixing transport unit [5] breaker [6] Test button
1.2.1.2 Cross Section

0002-8944
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[8] [54] [53] [52] [51] [50] [49] [48] [47] [46] [45] [44] [43] [42] [41] [40] [39] [38] [37] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [55] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36]
F-1-10
1-10
Chapter 1
[1] Delivery reversing flapper [2] Delivery reversing lower roller [3] No. 1 registration lower roller [4] Separation roller [5] Pickup roller [6] Black toner developing assembly [7] Black developing cylinder [8] Copyboard glass [9] CCD unit [10] Laser/scanner assembly [11] Primary charging assembly [12] Photosensitive drum [13] Drum cleaner assembly [14] Primary transfer roller [15] ITB (intermediate transfer belt) [16] Patch image read sensor [17] Pre-transfer charging assembly [18] ITB drive roller [19] Tension roller [20] Manual feed roller [21] Manual feed separation roller [22] Manual feed pull-off roller [23] Registration roller [24] Secondary transfer outside roller [25] Right deck feed roller [26] Right deck separation roller [27] Right deck pickup roller [28] Right deck [29] Cassette 3 pickup roller [30] Cassette 3 feed roller [31] Cassette 3 separation roller [32] Cassette 3 [33] Cassette 4 feed roller [34] Cassette 4 separation roller [35] Cassette pickup roller [36] Cassette 4 [37] Left deck [38] Left deck separation roller [39] Left deck feed roller [40] Left deck pickup roller [41] Feeding assembly [42] ITB cleaner assembly [43] Pressure roller [44] Fixing roller [45] External heating roller [46] Fixing web [47] Color toner cartridge [48] Color developing assembly [49] Developing rotary assembly [50] No. 3 mirror [51] No. 1 mirror [52] No. 2 mirror [53] ADF reading glass [54] Scanning lamp [55] ITB inside cleaner end scraper
1.2.2 Using the Machine 1.2.2.1 Turning On the Power Switch

0002-9498
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power switch. the machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in power save mode, low power mode, sleep mode).
1-11
Chapter 1
[2]
ON
[1]
[3]
F-1-11
[1] Control panel power switch [2] Main power switch [3] Main power indicator lamp
Do not turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated, during which access is made to the HDD. If deprived of power, the HDD can suffer a fault (E602).
Starting up. Please wait.
F-1-12
1.2.2.2 Points to Note About Turing Off the Main Power Switch
0002-9561
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN
Be sure to turn off the control panel power switch [2] before turning off the main power switch [1].
1-12
Chapter 1
[1]
[2]
F-1-13
When Sending Data to the Printer or Using the Fax Unit Be sure that the Execution/Memory lamp [2] on the control panel is off before operating the main power switch. (Turning off the main power while a job is under way can cause loss of the data being processed.)
[1]
OFF
[2]
F-1-14
When Downloading Is Under Way Do not turn off the control panel switch [2] or the main power switch [1]. (Turning off the main power switch while downloading is under way can disable the machine.)
1-13
Chapter 1
[1]
[2]
F-1-15
1.2.2.3 Points to Note About Turing Off the Main Power Switch
0010-8624
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Before turning off the main power switch [1], press the control panel power switch [2] more than 3 second, and do shutdown sequence.
[1]
[2]
F-1-16
When Sending Data to the Printer or Using the Fax Unit Be sure that the Execution/Memory lamp [2] on the control panel is off before operating the main power switch. (Turning off the main power while a job is under way can cause loss of the data being processed.)
1-14
Chapter 1
[1]
OFF
[2]
F-1-17
When Downloading Is Under Way Do not turn off the control panel switch [2] or the main power switch [1]. (Turning off the main power switch while downloading is under way can disable the machine.)
[1]
[2]
F-1-18
1-15
Chapter 1
[1]
[2]
F-1-19
1.2.2.4 Control Panel

0002-9566
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[7] [8]
[9]
[17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12]

F-1-20
[11]
[10]
[1] Control panel LCD (touch panel) [2] User mode key [3] Guide key [4] Reset key [5] Keypad [6] Power Save key [7] Control panel power switch [8] Counter key [9] Clip recess [10] Stop key [11] Start key [12] Main power indicator lamp [13] Error indicator lamp [14] Execute/Memory indicator lamp [15] Clear key [16] ID key [17] Screen contrast dial

0011-3804
1-16
Chapter 1
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[7] [8]
[9]
[17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12]

F-1-21
[11]
[10]
[1] Control panel LCD (touch panel) [2] User mode key [3] Guide key [4] Reset key [5] Keypad [6] Power Save key [7] Control panel power switch [8] Counter key [9] Clip recess [10] Stop key [11] Start key [12] Main power indicator lamp [13] Error indicator lamp [14] Execute/Memory indicator lamp [15] Clear key [16] ID key [17] Screen contrast dial

0018-2989
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[7] [8]
[9]
[17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12]

F-1-22
[11]
[10]
[1] Control panel LCD (touch panel) [2] User mode key [3] Help key [4] Reset key [5] Keypad [6] Power Save key [7] Control panel power switch [8] Counter key [9] Clip recess [10] Stop key [11] Start key [12] Main power indicator lamp [13] Error indicator lamp [14] Execute/Memory indicator lamp [15] Clear key [16] ID key [17] Screen contrast dial
1-17
Chapter 1
1.2.3 User Mode Items 1.2.3.1 Common Settings

0002-9584
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN * Factory setting.

T-1-5 Item initial function Description initial function: *copy, transmit/fax, box system initial screen: ON/*OFF priority on system device: *ON/OFF function after auto-clear buzzer ON/OFF *return, do not return input sound: *ON/OFF input invalid sound: ON/*OFF supply alert sound: ON/*OFF warning sound: *ON/OFF job end sound: *ON/OFF paper level message auto color (w/ BW selected) inch input cassette auto select ON/OFF *ON/OFF priority on text/*on photo inch input (on/*off; on if 230-V model) copier: *manual off, other on printer: *all on box: *manual off, other on reception/fax: *manual off, other on other: *manual off, other on paper type registration change power save mode power consumption in sleep LTRR/STMT original distinction special tray setup (indicated only if w/ finisher) priority on output yes *-10%, -25%, -50%, no return time *low, high manual, *on at LTRR, on at STMT yes copier: *1/2/3 printer: 1/*2/3 box: 1/2/*3 reception/fax: 1/2/*3 other: 1/2/*3 manual feed paper standard mode registration local print standard mode on (paper size select, paper type select), *off paper select: *auto, cassette 1 thorough 5 print quantity: *1 to 2000 sorter (if w/ finisher): non-sort, *sort, rotation sort, group, rotation group
sorter (w/ finisher): non-sort, sort, *shift sort, group, shift group, rotation group, staple
double-sided print: on (left/right spread, top/bottom spread), *off file delete after printing: ON/*OFF file merge: ON/*OFF display language screen color reversal between-job shift (indicated if w/ finisher) read area cleaning message gamma level during remote scan (indicated if w/ UFR Printer & Scanner Kit-B1) ON/*OFF ON/*OFF *ON/OFF *ON/OFF gamma1.0/gamma1.4/*gamma1.8/gamma2.2
function limit mode (indicated if w/ finisher)
ON/*OFF
common settings initialize
ON/*OFF
1.2.3.2 Common Settings

0011-3806
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci *1 Indicates the default setting.
1-18
Chapter 1 *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
T-1-6 Item Initial Function Settings Select Initial Function: Copy*1, Send, Mail Box, MEAP Set [System Monitor] as the Initial Function: On, Off*1 Set [Device] as the default screen for [System Monitor]: On*1, Off Auto Clear Setting Function Order Settings Audible Tones Initial Function*1, Selected Function Function Order Settings, Settings for Function Group Order: Group A, MEAP Entry Tone: On*1, Off Invalid Entry Tone: On, Off*1 Restock Supplies Tone: On, Off* Error Tone: On*1, Off Job Done Tone: On*1, Off Display Remaining Paper Message Text/photo priority when ACS is set to Black Auto-switch Orig. Image for Color Mode Selectn Display the Black Mode Shortcut Key Inch Entry Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS Register Paper Type On*1, Off Text Priority*1, Photo Priority On*1, Off On, Off*1 On*1, Off Copy, Printer, Mail Box, Receive/Fax, Other: (Stack Bypass: On, Off*1, All Other Paper Sources: On*1, Off) Copy: Consider Paper Type: On, Off*1 Paper Drawers 1 and 2, and paper Deck-U1: Plain*1, Recycled, Color, Pre-punched, Heavy 1, Heavy 2 Paper Drawers 3 and 4: Plain*1, Recycled, Color, Pre-punched, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Transparency, Tab Paper 1, Tab Paper 2 Energy Saver Mode Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode LTRR/STMT Original Selection Tray Designation*2 -10%*1, -25%, -50%, None Low*1, High Distinguish Manually, Use LTRR Format*1, Use STMT Format If the optional Finisher-R1 or SaddleFinisher-R2 is Attached Tray A: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer*1, Receive/Fax*1, Other*1 Tray B: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer*1, Receive/Fax*1, Other*1 Tray Home Position: Tray A*1, Tray B, Off If the optional Additional Finisher Tray-A1 is attached to the Finisher-R1 or Saddle Finisher-R2 Tray A: Copy, Mail Box, Printer, Receive/Fax*1, Other*1 Tray B: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer*1, Receive/Fax, Other Tray C: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer*1, Receive/Fax, Other Tray Home Position: Tray A*1, Tray B, Tray C, Off Printing Priority Copy: 1*1, 2, 3 Printer: 1, 2*1, 3 Mail Box, Receive/Fax, Other: 1, 2, 3*1 Register Form for Form Composition Image Priority for Form Composition Register Characters for Page No./Watermark Stack Bypass Standard Settings Registering Irregular Size for Stack Bypass Standard Local Print Settings Register, Erase, Check Print, Details Auto*1, Original Priority, Form Priority Register, Edit, Erase On, Off*1 Register/Edit, Erase, Register Name Paper Select: All Paper Sources, Auto*1 Copies: 1*1 to 9,999 sets Finisher: If the Optional Copy tray-K1 Is Attached: Do Not Collate, Collate*1, Rotate Collate, Group, Rotate Group If the Optional Finisher-R1 or Saddle Finisher-R2 Is Attached: Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), (Double: Left, Right) If the Optional Finisher-R1 or Saddle Finisher-R2, and Puncher Unit-M1 Are Attached: Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), (Double: Left, Right), Hole Punch Two-sided Print: On (Book Type, Calendar Type), Off* Erase Document After Printing: On, Off*1 Merge Documents: On, Off*1 Language Switch Reversed Display (Color) Offset Jobs*2 Job Separator between Jobs Job Separator between Copies On, Off*1 On, Off*1 On*1, Off On, Off*1 On, Off*1
1-19
Chapter 1
Item Job Duration Display Settings Copy: On, Off*1 Mail Box: On, Off*1 Other: On, Off*1 Cleaning Display for the Original Scanning Area Gamma Value for Remote Scans*3 Limited Functions Mode*3 Erase Remaining Toner Error Message Shutdown Mode Initialize Common Settings On*1, Off Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*1, Gamma 2.2 On, Off*1 On, Off*1 Press [Start] Initialize
1.2.3.3 Timer Settings

0002-9585

T-1-7 Mode date/time auto sleep time auto clear time weekly timer Description enable time zone, *daylight saving 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 1 hr, 90 min, 2, 3, 4 hr 0=no; 1... *2... 9 min (in 1-min increment) 00:00 to 23:59 (1-min increment) from Sunday to Saturday
low power mode shift time length
10, *15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min, 1 hr, 90 min, 2, 3, 4 hr
1.2.3.4 Timer Settings

0011-3816
T-1-8 Time Fine Adjustment Auto Sleep Time Auto Clear Time Time Until Unit Quiets Down Daily Timer Settings Low-power Mode Time 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., 1 hour*1, 90 min., 2, 3, 4 hours 0 (Off) to 9 minutes, in one minute increments; 2 min.*1 0(Off), to 9 minutes, in one minutes increments; 1 min.*1 Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments 10, 15*1, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., 1 hour, 90 min., 2, 3, 4 hours
1.2.3.5 Adjustment and Cleaning

0002-9586

T-1-9 Item zoom fine adjustment center bind staple edging (if w/ saddle finisher) center bind position change (if w/ saddle finisher) auto gradation correct density correct roller cleaning (transfer roller) wire cleaning feeder cleaning toner replacement (if enabled in service mode) Description XY individually; -1.0 to +1.0% (in 0.1%-increments), *0% start key size: A3, 11X17/B4/A4R, LTRR full correction (read test print x 3 times); quick correction (no test print) copy, transmit; 9 steps each (set to 5 at time of shipment) copy/box, BW transmit, color transmit; 9 steps each (set to 5 at time of shipment) start key start key start key yellow, magenta, cyan
1.2.3.6 Adjustment and Cleaning

0011-3818
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci *1 Indicates the default setting. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
T-1-10 Item Zoom Fine Adjustment Settings X, Y: -1.0% to +1.0%, in 0.1%
1-20
Chapter 1
Item Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning*2 Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment*2 Auto Gradation Adjustment Exposure Recalibration Numbering/Date/ Watermark Position Adjust. Feeder Cleaning Wire Cleaning Roller Cleaning Settings increments; 0.0%*1 Press [Start] All paper sizes: -2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in 0.25 mm increments; 0.00 mm*1 Full Adjust: Automatic after the machine prints and scans three sets of test prints Quick Adjust: Press [Start] Copy/Inbox, Send (B&W), Send (Color): Light, Dark: 1 to 9 levels; 5*1 X, Y: -5/16" to +5/16" (-8 mm to +8 mm); 0 mm*1 Press [Start] Press [Start] Press [Start]
1.2.3.7 Report Settings

0002-9587

T-1-11 Item transmit (specifications) Description transmission result report: *only if error, on, off transmitted original display: *on, off communications control report timed auto print every 100 communications: *on, off as specified: on, *off *00:00 to 2:59 send/receive separate: yes, *no fax (specifications) fax transmission results report: *only if error, on, off transmitted original display: *on, off fax communications control report auto print every 40 communications: *ON/OFF specified time: ON/*OFF time: *00:00 to 23:59 transmission/reception separate: (toggle) on, *off fax reception results report fax box reception report list print (transmit) only if error, on, *off *ON/OFF address list: address list 1 to 10, one-touch button list print: keys, *no
user data list (transmit) user data list (fax)
yes, *no yes, *no
1.2.3.8 Report Settings

0011-3822
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci *1 Indicates the default setting. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached. *3 The Activity Report and Fax Activity Report do not appear when the optional iR Security Kit is activated.
T-1-12 Item Settings: Send TX Report For Error Only*1, On, Off Report with TX Image: On*1, Off Report with Color TX Image: On, Off*1 Activity Report*3 Auto Print Daily Activity Report Time Send/Receive Separate Settings: Fax*2 Fax TX Report Fax Activity Report*3 Auto Print Daily Activity Report Time On*1, Off On, Off*1 For Error Only*1, On, Off Report with TX Image: On*1, Off On*1, Off On, Off*1 Timer Setting: 00:00 to 23:59 On, Off*1 Settings
1-21
Chapter 1
Item Send/Receive Separate Fax RX Report Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report Print List: Send Address Book List User's Data List Print List: Fax*3 User's Data List Print List: Network Print List: Printer*3 Print List Address Book 1 to 10; Address Book 1*1, One-touch Buttons, Print List Print List Settings Timer Setting: 00:00 to 23:59 On, Off*1 For Error Only, On, Off*1 On*1, Off
1.2.3.9 System Settings

0002-9588
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN * Factory setting

T-1-13 Item system administrator info group ID communications control setup remote UI address book limit device information setup transfer setup bulletin delete auto on-line/offline shift LDAP server register limit to function with control key Off Description yes using ID, address ON/*OFF yes using e-mail, fax, box *ON/OFF ID No., access NO.: ON/*OFF device name, location reception method/condition: on, off; settings delete auto on-line shift: ON/*OFF auto off-line shift: ON/*OFF register, detail: edit, delete/list print *limit some, limit all
1.2.3.10 System Settings

0011-3827
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci *1 Indicates the default setting. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached. *4 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information. *5 The machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely, depending on the status and type of installed MEAP applications (e.g., there still may be applications running in the background consuming power).
T-1-14 Item System Manager Settings System Manager ID System Password System Manager E-mail Address Contact Information Comment Dept. ID Management Dept. ID Management Register Dept. ID/Password Page Totals Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs*2 Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs*2 Allow Black Copy/Inbox Print Jobs Allow Black Printer Jobs Communications Settings E-mail/I-Fax Settings Maximum Data Size for Sending Full Mode TX Timeout Divided Data RX Timeout Default Subject Print MDN/DSN on Receipt Always send notice for RX errors Use Send Via Server Fax Settings*2 0 (Off), 1 to 99 MB; 3 MB*1 1 to 99 hours; 24 hours*1 0 to 99 hours; 24 hours*1 40 characters maximum; Attached Image*1 On, Off*1 On*1, Off On, Off*1 On, Off*1 Register, Edit, Erase, Limit Functions Clear, Print List, Clear All Totals On*1, Off On*1, Off On, Off*1 On, Off*1 Seven digit number maximum Seven digit number maximum 32 characters maximum 64 characters maximum 32 characters maximum 32 characters maximum Settings
1-22
Chapter 1
Item Send Start Speed Receive Start Speed Receive Password PIN Code Access Memory RX Inbox Settings Memory RX Inbox Password Use Fax Memory Lock Use I-Fax Memory Lock Memory Lock Start Time Memory Lock End Time Remote UI Restrict Access to Destinations*2 Address Book Password Access Number Management Restrict New Addresses Allow Fax Driver TX*2 E-mail/I-Fax Domain Sending Restriction Seven digit number On, Off*1 On, Off*1 On*1, Off Restrict Sending to Domain; On, Off*1 Register/Edit, Erase Device Information Settings Device Name Location Network Settings Forwarding Settings Clear Message Board Auto Online/Offline*2 Auto Online Auto Offline Date & Time Settings On, Off*1 On, Off*1 Date and Time Setting (12 digit number) Time Zone: GMT -12:00 to GMT +12:00; GMT -05:00*1 Daylight Saving Time: On*1, Off Limit Functions with the Security Key Off*2 License Registration Register LDAP Server MEAP Settings*5 Use HTTP Print System Information Copy Set Numbering Option Settings Display Remaining Toner Error Message Display Dept.ID/ User Name Device Information Delivery Settings Transmitting Settings Register Destinations Auto Delivery Settings Auto Search/Register, Register, Details, Erase, Print List Everyday, Select Days, Off*1 Add. Functions Settings Value: On (Network Settings: Include, Exclude*1), Off*1 Dept. ID: On, Off*1 Address Book: On, Off*1 Details Manual Delivery Add. Functions Settings Value: On (Network Settings: Include, Exclude*1), Off*1 Dept. ID: On, Off*1 Address Book: On, Off*1 Details, Manual delivery Start Receiving Settings Restrictions for Receiving Device Info. Restore Data Receive Limit for Each Function On, Off*1 Add. Functns Set. Value, Dept. ID, Address Book Press [Start] Add. Functions Settings Value: On*1, Off Dept. ID: On*1, Off Address Book: On*1, Off Communication Log Initialize All Data/ Settings Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords Details, Print List, Report Settings Initialize On*1, Off On*1, Off Use SSL*4: On, Off*1 Print Copy Set Num. Op: On (Dept. ID: On, Off; Date: On, Off; Characters: On, Off), Off*1 On, Off*1 On*1, Off Partial Functions*1, All Functions 24 characters maximum Register, Edit, Erase, Print List Receive Type, E-mail Priority, Edit, Erase, Print List Validate/Invalidate, Register (Registered Forwarding Settings), Forward w/o Conditions Clear 32 characters maximum 32 characters maximum Seven digit number On, Off*1 On, Off*1 Everyday, Select Days, Off* Everyday, Select Days, Off* On*1, Off Use SSL*4: On, Off*1 Settings 33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps 33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps 20 digits maximum On, Off*1
1-23
Chapter 1
1.2.3.11 Copy Settings

0002-9589

T-1-15 Item preference key 1 preference key 2 auto sort copy wait time indication auto vertical/horizontal rotation standard mode change copier settings initialize Description *no setting (magnification, sorter, page separation may be enabled) *no setting (magnification, sorter, page separation may be enabled) *ON/OFF ON/*OFF *ON/OFF register, initialize yes, no
1.2.3.12 Copy Settings

0011-3831
T-1-16 Item Screen Display Setting Settings Regular Copy Only*1, Regular and Express Copy, Express Copy Only Regular Copy Screen Priority: On*1, Off Paper Select Key Size for Express Copy Screen Large*1: Four paper sources maximum (Stack Bypass, Stack bypass Settings, 1: Paper Drawer 1, 2: Paper Drawer 2, 3: Paper Drawer 3, 4: Paper Drawer 4, 5: Paper Deck-U1), Small Standard Key 1, 2 Settings for Regular Screen Standard Key Settings for Express Copy Screen Auto Collate*2 Image Orientation Priority Auto Orientation Standard Settings Initialize Copy Settings Various modes; No Settings*1 Displayed Standard Keys: Up to 5 Set Keys*1, Up to 10 Set Keys, Settings: Various modes; No Settings*1 On*1, Off On, Off*1 On*1, Off Store, Initialize Initialize
1.2.3.13 Communications Settings

0002-9590

T-1-17 Item common transmission setup Description source register (99 max.) user abbreviation (various settings) FTP transmission (ON/*OFF) error file clear (*ON/OFF) transfer error file (print always, save and print, *off) retry (*3 times; between 0 and 5) transmission function change (read: 150x150; file: TIFF/JPEG) routine task register (M1 through M9) PDF image level (data size, *average, priority on image) transmission screen (default, one-touch, *new) transmission source record (*attach, do not attach) color transmission gamma (y1.0, y1.4, y1.8, *y2.2) transmission function initialize (yes, no) common reception functions setup double-sided print (*on, off) cassette (all, *on, off) image reduce (*on, off) reception info (add, *do not add) 2-on-1 (ON/*OFF) fax basic setup user telephone No. (No. input) line type (*20 pps, 10 pps, touch tone) volume adjust (alarm sound, communication sound) volume adjust (alarm sound, communication sound) fax transmission function setup ECM (*ON/OFF) pause time length (*2 sec; between 1 and 15 sec) auto redial (*ON/OFF)
1-24
Chapter 1
Item fax reception function setup fax reception function setup Description ECM (*ON/OFF) reception mode (*auto reception, fax/tel switch-over, modem dial-in)
ring (ON/*OFF) remote reception (ON/*OFF) auto reception switch-over (ON/*OFF)
1.2.3.14 Communications Settings

0011-3834
T-1-18 Item Common Settings: TX Settings Sender's Names (TTI)*2 Unit Name Erase Failed TX Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors Retry Times Edit Standard Send Settings Register Favorites Button Confirmation Display for the File Format Image Level for PDF (Compct)*2 01 to 99, Register/Edit, Erase 24 characters maximum On*1, Off Always Print, Store/Print, Off* 0 to 5 times; 3 times*1 Scanning Mode, File Format, Divide into Pages, Stamp Register/Edit, Erase (M1 to M18) On*1, Off Image Level in Text/Photo or Photo Mode: Data Size Priority, Normal*1, Image Priority Image Level in Text Mode: Data Size Priority, Normal*1, Image Priority PDF(OCR) Settings*2 Smart Scan: On*1, Off Num. of Char. for Doc. Name Setting: 1 to 24 characters; 24 characters*1 Default Screen for Send TX Terminal ID On*1 (Printing Position: Inside, Outside*1; Display Destination Name: On*1, Off; Telephone # Mark*2: FAX*1, TEL), Off Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs Initialize TX Settings Common Settings: RX Settings Two-sided Print Select Cassette On, Off*1 Switch A: On*1, Off Switch B: On*1, Off Switch C: On*1, Off Switch D: On*1, Off Receive Reduction On*1: RX Reduction: Auto*1, Fixed Reduction Reduce % Reduce Direction: Vertical & Horizontal, Vertical Only*1 Off Received Page Footer 2 On 1 Log Gamma Value for YCbCr Received Jobs Fax Settings: User Settings*2 Unit Telephone # Tel Line Type Volume Control Fax Settings: TX Settings*2 ECM TX Pause Time Auto Redial On*1, Off 1 to 15 seconds; 2 seconds*1 On*1: Option: Redial Times: 1 to 10 times; 2 times*1 20 digits maximum Pulse, Tone*1 Alarm Volume: 0 to 8 levels; 4*1 Monitor Volume: 0 to 8 levels; 4* On, Off*1 On, Off*1 Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*1, Gamma 2.2 Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*1, Gamma 2.2 Initialize Favorites Buttons, One-touch Buttons, New Address*1 Settings
1-25
Chapter 1
Item Settings Redial Interval: 2 to 99 minutes; 2 minutes*1 TX Error Resend Error and 1st Page* All pages, Off Off Check Dial Tone Before Sending Fax Settings: RX Settings*2 ECM RX On*1, Off On, Off*1
1.2.3.15 Mail Box Settings

0002-9591

T-1-19 Item box function setup Description user box setup, register (99 max.) read-in setup (register, initialize) fax box setup, register (49 max.)
1.2.3.16 Mail Box Settings

0011-3844
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci *1 Indicates the default setting. *4 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information.
T-1-20 Item User Inboxes Settings Settings Inbox No.: 00 to 99 Register Inbox Name: 24 characters maximum Password: Seven digits maximum Time until Doc. Auto Erase: 0 (Off), 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3*1, 7, 30 days URL Send Settings Initialize*4 Standard Scan Settings Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings Store, Initialize Inbox No.: 00 to 49 Register Inbox Name: 24 characters maximum Password: Seven digits maximum URL Send Settings Initialize*4
1.2.3.17 Printer Settings

0002-9592
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci * Factory setting.
T-1-21 Item setting Description copy count (1 to 2000: *1) double-sided (double-sided, *single-sided) blank paper save (*yes, no) pickup (A4, plain; no switch-over) print adjust (super smooth, toner density, toner save) layout (lengthwise bind margin; margin 0; between -30 and + 30 m) layout (horizontal correction 0, vertical correction 0; between -50 and +50 mm) error skip (yes, *no) print delete time length (*1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 24 hr) time-out (*x sec; between 5 and 300) RIP (yes, *no) sorter (*no, rotation sort, rotation group) transparency interleaf (*no, blank paper interleaf, printed paper interleaf) printer operation mode (*auto, or one of 6) emulation (*no, or 1 or 4) auto switch-over (LIPS, ESC-P, 15577, HP-GL, all) color mode (*auto, full color, mono color)
1-26
Chapter 1
Item Description gradation (gradation; *standard, zoom 1, zoom 2) gradation (graphics: *yes, image, *yes) halftone (text: resolution, gradation, *error diffusion) halftone (graphics: *resolution, gradation, error diffusion) halftone (image: resolution, *gradation, error diffusion) printer initialize (yes, no) LIPS, emulation (12 items) utility printer initialize (yes, no)
1.2.3.18 Address Book Settings

0002-9593

T-1-22 Item address register address list name register one-touch button register Description various times register various items
1.2.3.19 Address Book Settings

0011-3856
T-1-23 Item Register Address Register Address Book Name One-touch Buttons Settings Register New Address, Edit, Erase Address Book 1 to 10; Address Book 1*1, Register Name (16 characters maximum) Register/Edit (from 001 to 200), Erase
- If an SDL or SSO login service is selected for authentication, the system control setup mode is not available to a general user (user type). - If an SDL or SSO login service is selected for authentication, the system control setup mode is available to an administrator (user type; it is important that the appropriate fields be filled in when a dialog box appears asking for a system control department ID and system control ID No.).
1.2.4 User Maintenance 1.2.4.1 Cleaning

0011-4413
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine has some components that must be cleaned by the user on a periodical basis (about once a month); advise the user on how to clean such components: 1. Feeder(back) (Copyboard Cover) Wipe the copyboard cover [1] using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent (well wrung); then, dry wipe it with a soft cloth.
[1]
F-1-23
2. Rubber roller (Platen Roller) Wipe the platen roller [1] using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent (well wrung); thereafter, dry wipe it with a soft cloth.
1-27
Chapter 1
[1]
F-1-24
3. Copyboard Glass, Original reading area(ADF Reading Glass) Wipe the copyboard glass [1] and the DF reading glass [2] using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent (well wrung); thereafter, dry wipe them with a soft cloth.
[2]
[1]
F-1-25
4. DF Glass Retainer, Edge Guide Wipe the DF glass retainer [1] and the edge guide [2] using a cloth moistened with water or solution of mild detergent (well wrung); thereafter, dry wipe them with a soft cloth.
[1]
[2]
F-1-26
5. Vertical Size Plate Clean the vertical size plate [1] using a cloth moistened with water or solution of middle detergent (well wrung); thereafter, dry wipe it with a soft cloth.
[1]
F-1-27
1.2.4.2 Inspection
0003-4230
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine is equipped with a breaker to protect against over-current and leakage current, and it is important to check the operation of the leakage breaker to ensure a higher level of safety. Advise the user to check the breaker as follows on a periodical basis (about once a month) and keep a record of the checks: 1) Turn on the main power switch. 2) Press the test button [1] of the breaker using the tip of a ball-point pen or the like.
1-28
Chapter 1
[1]
F-1-28
3) Check that the breaker switch [1] has shifted to the OFF side, thus cutting off the power.
ON I side
OFF side
[1]
F-1-29
4) Turn off the main power switch. 5) Shift the breaker switch [1] back to the ON side.
[1]
OFF ON ( side) (I side)
F-1-30
After the check, be sure that the breaker switch has shifted fully to the ON side. If it has stopped between the ON and the OFF sides, push it over to the OFF side and then back to the ON side. 6) Turn on the main power switch.
1.2.5 Safety 1.2.5.1 Safety of the Laser Light

0002-9596
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Laser light can prove to be hazardous to the human body. The machine's laser unit is fully enclosed in a protective housing and external covers so that its light will not escape outside as long as the machine is used normally.
1.2.5.2 Regulations by the us Center for Devices and Radiological Health

0002-9598
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drug Administration put input force a set of regulations to govern laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products that are manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products is prohibited inside the US without indicating compliance with the regulations. The following label is used to indicate certification under CDRH regulations, and all laser products sold inside the US are required to bear the label.
1-29
Chapter 1
F-1-31
The text on the label may differ from model to model.
1.2.5.3 Handling the Laser Unit

0002-9599
Points to Note When Servicing Areas Around the Laser Scanner System - do not put an item with a high reflectance (e.g., screwdriver) into the laser path. - remove watches and rings before starting the work (they tend to reflect the laser beam, possibly exposing the eye). The light from the machine's laser unit is red. The covers of the machine that can reflect the laser beam are identified by a warning label (attached as shown). If you must remove any of these covers, be sure to work while paying full attention to the laser light. The machine's laser unit is not designed for adjusting in the field.
1-30
Chapter 1
F-1-32
1.2.5.4 Safety of Toner

0002-9601
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. About Toner The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
2. Toner on Clothing or Skin - If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it off with water. - Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth. - Do not bring toner into contact with plastic material. It tends to react easily.
1.2.6 Product Specifications 1.2.6.1 Specifications

0002-5126
Copyboard Body Light source type Lens type Photosensitive medium Image reading method Reproduction method Exposure method Copy density adjustment function Charging method Development method Development method (color) Development method (mono) Attraction method Transfer method Transfer method (primary transfer) Transfer method (secondary transfer) Separation method Pickup method Cassette pickup method Paper deck pickup method Multifeeder pickup method Drum cleaning method Trasnsfer cleaning method Fixing method
fixed console xenon lamp fixed focus, lens array A-Si drum (1 pc.) light-receiving element (RGB line CCD) by laser beam, indirect electro-photographic by laser auto or manual by corona toner projection dry, 2-component, toner projection dry, 1-component, toner projection no by intermediate transfer belt by charging roller by charging roller by curvature separation + static eliminator from cassette, manual feeder, paper deck separation retard separation retard separation retard by blade + magenta roller by blade by roller + external heating roller
1-31
Chapter 1
Delivery method Contrast adjustment function Toner level detection function Toner type Toner supply type Original type Maximum original size Original size detection function Reproduction ratio face-down, face-up auto yes (Bk: piezoelectric; CMY: optical) Bk: magnetic, negative toner; CMY: non-magnetic negative toner from toner cartridge (CMY: 240 g), from toner bottle (Bk: 2000 g) sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.) 297 x 432 mm by fixed sensor in combination with CCD: in relation to opening/closing of copyboard cover 100% (1:1), reduce (1:0.250, 1:0.500, 1:0.611, 1:0.707, 1:0.816, 1:0.865), enlarge (1:1.154, 1:1.224, 1:1.414, 1:2.000, 1:4.000), between (1:0.250 to 4.000) (25% and 400%, in 1%-increments) 8 min 50 sec or less at power-on (at 20 deg C room temperature) maximum image guarantee area: 305x466.5 mm; maximum print area: 314.5 x 466.5 mm (single-side) maximum print area: 310.0 x 466.5 mm (double-side) 40 +1.5/-1.0mm (2nd side: 4.0 +1.5/-1.0mm) 2.0+1.5/-1.5mm 2.5 +1.5/-1.5mm (2nd side: 2.5 +2.5/-2.0mm) 4.0 +1.5/-1.0mm (w/ ADF: 4.5 +1.8/-1.8mm) 2.0 +1.5/-1.5mm(w/ ADF: 2.0 +1.8/-1.8mm) 2.5 +1.5/-1.5mm (w/ ADF: 2.5 +2.5/-2.0mm) reader unit: 256; engine unit: 256 600600dpi 1200 (equivalent) x 600 dpi (North American model only); 9600 (equivalent) x 600 dpi (non-North American models) mono color: 53 sec (A4, plain paper; 64 to 105 g/m2) full color: 12.2 sec (A4, plain paper; 64 to 105 g/m2) mono color: 68 prints/min (A4; 64 to 209 g/m2) full color: 15.5 prints/ min (A4, plain paper; 64 to 105 g/m2) cassette 3/4: A5R, B5, B5R, A4, A4R, B4, A3, 279x432 mm (11x17), 305x457 mm (12x18), 330x483 mm (13x19), 320x450 mm (SRA3), LGL, LTR, LTRR, Executive (horizontal) STMTR front deck, side deck: B5, A4, LTR 100x148 mm (min.) to 330x483 mm (max.) cassette 3/4: Plain (;64 to 105 g/m2), Heavy (209 g/m2 max.), Recycled (64 to 105 g/m2), Color (80 g/m2), Tab Paper (80 g/m2), transparency Plain (64 to 105 g/m2), Heavy (250 g/m2 max.), Recycled (64 to 105 g/ m2), Color (80 g/m2), Postcard, Transparency, Tracing Paper, Labels deck left/right: plain (64 to 105 g/m2), Heavy (209 g/m2 max.), Recycled (80 g/m2), Color (80 g/mm2), Labels (80 g/m2) plain (64 to 105 g/m2), Recycled (80 g/m2), Color (80 gm/2), Heavy (163 g/m2 max.), Heavy (163 g/2 max.; 209 g/m2 for color print; 209 g/ m2 for black-and-white print) 600 sheets (64g/m2) 550 sheets (80g/m2) 100 sheets(64, 80g/m2) 1700 sheets (64g/m2) 1500 sheets (80g/m2) through path 250 sheets (A4, plain paper, 80 g/m2), 50 sheets (transparency) 9999 prints max. main controller: RAM512 MB (768 MB max.) 40GB default: 15 min (between 10 and 240 min) default: 60 min (between 10 and 240 min) yes 15 to 30 deg C 25% to 80% 810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.0 atm) standby: 55 dB or less; printing: 78 dB or less (Sound power level) 100V/120V/230V standby: 450 Wh (reference only); continuous printing: 1300 Wh (reference only) 0.035 ppm or less (max.; 0.02 ppm or less on average) 975 (W) x 1100 (L) x 1570 (H) mm 230 kg (approx.; excluding toner cartridge)
Warm-up time Print area
Image margin (leading edge) Image margin (trailing edge) Image margin (left/right) Non-image width (leading edge) Non-image width (trailing edge) Non-image width (left/right) Number of gradations Reading resolution Printing resolution First print time Print speed (A4) Cassette paper size
Paper deck paper size Multifeeder paper size Cassette paper type Multifeeder tray paper type Paper deck paper type Duplex paper type
Cassette capacity Multifeeder tray capacity Paper deck capacity Duplex method Delivery tray stack Continuous reproduction Memory Hard disk Low-power mode Auto power off Auto gradation correction Operating environment (temperature range) Operating environment (humidity range) Operating environment (atmospheric pressure) Noise Power supply rating Power consumption Ozone Dimensions Weight
Power consumption (maximum) 1500 W or less
1-32
Chapter 1
1.2.6.2 Specifications
0011-4230
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci
Copyboard Body Light source type Lens type Photosensitive medium Image reading method Reproduction method Exposure method Copy density adjustment function Charging method Development method Development method (color) Development method (mono) Attraction method Transfer method Transfer method (primary transfer) Transfer method (secondary transfer) Separation method Pickup method Cassette pickup method Paper deck pickup method Multifeeder pickup method Drum cleaning method Trasnsfer cleaning method Fixing method Delivery method Contrast adjustment function Toner level detection function Toner type Toner supply type Original type Maximum original size Original size detection function Reproduction ratio
fixed console xenon lamp fixed focus, lens array A-Si drum (1 pc.) light-receiving element (RGB line CCD) by laser beam, indirect electro-photographic by laser auto or manual by corona dry, toner projection dry, 2-component, toner projection dry, 1-component, toner projection no by intermediate transfer belt(ITB)+roller by roller by roller by curvature separation + static eliminator from cassette, manual feeder, paper deck separation retard separation retard Abridged retard by blade + magenta roller by blade by roller + external heating roller face-down, face-up auto yes (Bk: piezoelectric; CMY: optical) Bk: magnetic, negative toner; CMY: non-magnetic negative toner from toner cartridge (CMY: 240 g), from toner bottle (Bk: 2000 g) sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.) 297 x 432 mm by fixed sensor in combination with CCD: in relation to opening/closing of copyboard cover 100% (1:1), reduce (1:0.250, 1:0.500, 1:0.611, 1:0.707, 1:0.816, 1:0.865), enlarge (1:1.154, 1:1.224, 1:1.414, 1:2.000, 1:4.000), between (1:0.250 to 4.000) (25% and 400%, in 1%-increments) 8 min 30 sec or less at power-on (at 20 deg C room temperature) maximum image guarantee area: 305x466.5 mm; maximum print area: 314.5 x 466.5 mm (single-side) maximum print area: 310.0 x 466.5 mm (double-side) 40 +1.5/-1.0mm 2.0+1.5/-1.5mm 2.5 +1.5/-1.5mm (2nd side: 2.5 +2.5/-2.0mm) 4.0 +1.5/-1.0mm (w/ ADF: 4.5 +1.8/-1.8mm) 2.0 +1.5/-1.5mm(w/ ADF: 2.0 +1.8/-1.8mm) 2.5 +1.5/-1.5mm (w/ ADF: 2.5 +2.5/-2.0mm) reader unit: 256; engine unit: 256 600X600dpi 1200 (equivalent) x 600 dpi (North American model only); 9600 (equivalent) x 600 dpi (non-North American models) mono color: 53 sec (A4, plain paper; 64 to 105 g/m2) full color: 12.2 sec (A4, plain paper; 64 to 105 g/m2) mono color: 68 prints/min (A4; 64 to 209 g/m2) full color: 15.5 prints/min (A4, plain paper; 64 to 105 g/m2) cassette 3/4: A5R, B5, B5R, A4, A4R, B4, A3, 279x432 mm (11x17), 305x457 mm (12x18), 330x483 mm (13x19), 320x450 mm (SRA3),LDR, LGL, LTR, LTRR, Executive (horizontal) STMTR
Warm-up time Print area
Image margin (leading edge) Image margin (trailing edge) Image margin (left/right) Non-image width (leading edge) Non-image width (trailing edge) Non-image width (left/right) Number of gradations Reading resolution Printing resolution First print time Print speed (A4) Cassette paper size
Paper deck paper size Multifeeder paper size Cassette paper type
front deck, side deck: B5, A4, LTR 100x148 mm (min.) to 330x483 mm (max.) cassette 3/4: Plain (;64 to 105 g/m2), Heavy (209 g/m2 max.), Recycled (64 to 105 g/m2), Color (80 g/m2), Tab Paper (80 g/m2), transparency
1-33
Chapter 1
Multifeeder tray paper type Paper deck paper type Duplex paper type Plain (64 to 105 g/m2), Heavy (250 g/m2 max.), Recycled (64 to 105 g/ m2), Color (80 g/m2),Postcard, Transparency, Tracing Paper, Labels deck left/right: plain (64 to 105 g/m2), Heavy (209 g/m2 max.), Recycled (80 g/m2), Color (80 g/mm2), Labels (80 g/m2) plain (64 to 105 g/m2), Recycled (80 g/m2), Color (80 gm/2), Heavy (163 g/m2 max.), Heavy (163 g/2 max.; 209 g/m2 for color print; 209 g/ m2 for black-and-white print) 600 sheets (64g/m2) 550 sheets (80g/m2) 100 sheets(64, 80g/m2) 1700 sheets (64g/m2) 1500 sheets (80g/m2) through path 250 sheets (A4, plain paper, 80 g/m2), 50 sheets (transparency) 9999 prints max. main controller: RAM512 MB (1 GB max.) 80GB default: 15 min (between 10 and 240 min) default: 60 min (between 10 and 240 min) yes 15 to 30 deg C 25% to 80% 810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.0 atm) standby: 55 dB or less; printing: 78 dB or less (Sound power level) 100V/120V/230V standby: 450 Wh (reference only); continuous printing: 1300 Wh (reference only) 0.035 ppm or less (max.; 0.02 ppm or less on average) 975 (W) x 1100 (L) x 1570 (H) mm 230 kg (approx.; excluding toner cartridge)
Cassette capacity Multifeeder tray capacity Paper deck capacity Duplex method Delivery tray stack Continuous reproduction Memory Hard disk Low-power mode Auto power off Auto gradation correction Operating environment (temperature range) Operating environment (humidity range) Operating environment (atmospheric pressure) Noise Power supply rating Power consumption Ozone Dimensions Weight
Power consumption (maximum) 1500 W or less
1.2.7 Function List 1.2.7.1 Print Speed

0011-7214
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN
T-1-24
Cassette/deck (single-sided) Paper type Paper size Color Plain paper mode (64 A3 to 105 g/m2) 279mm432mm(11"17 ") Mono
Manual feeder (singe-sided)
Cassette/deck (double-sided)
Color
Mono
Color
Mono
7.8
28
7.8
20
3.9
17
7.8
28
7.8
20
3.9
17
305mm458mm(12"18 ")
5.2
25
5.2
17
2.6
15
330mm482mm(13"19 ")
5.2
25
5.2
17
2.6
15
B4, LGL A4R, LTRR, B5R
7.8 7.8
34 42
7.8 7.8
23 29
3.9 3.9
18 19
A4, LTR, B5 15.5 A5R 15.5 68 68 7.8 7.8 35 35 7.8 7.8 34 34
1-34
Chapter 1
Cassette/deck (single-sided) Paper type Paper size Color Heavy paper mode 1 (105 to 163 g/m2) A3 279mm432mm(11"17 ") 4.0 Mono 21
Color 4.0
Mono 20
Color 2.0
Mono 10
4.0
21
4.0
20
2.0
10
305mm458mm(12"18 ") 330mm482mm(13"19 ") B4, LGL A4R, LTRR, B5R
3.0
18
3.0
17
1.5
3.0
17
3.0
17
1.5
4.0
25
4.0
23
2.0
12
4.0 A4, LTR, B5 A5R Heavy paper mode 2 (164 to 209 g/m2) A3 279mm432mm(11"17 ")
31
4.0
29
2.0
15
8.4 8.4 2.8
41 42 21
4.0 4.0 2.8
35 35 20
4.2 4.2 ---
20 21 10
2.8
20
2.8
20
---
10
305mm458mm(12"18 ")
2.3
18
2.3
17
---
330mm482mm(13"19 ") B4, LGL A4R, LTRR, B5R
2.3
17
2.3
17
---
2.8 2.8
22 27
2.8 2.8
22 27
-----
11 13
A4, LTR, B5 6.2 A5R Heavy paper mode 3 (210 to 253 g/m2) A3 279mm432mm(11"17 ") 6.2 --40 36 --2.8 2.8 2.8 35 35 20 ------20 18 ---
---
---
2.8
20
---
---
305mm458mm(12"18 ") 330mm482mm(13"19 ") B4, LGL A4R, LTRR, B5R
---
---
2.3
17
---
---
---
---
2.3
17
---
---
---
---
2.8
22
---
---
--A4, LTR, B5 --A5R Transparency A4, LTR --2.8
---
2.8
27
---
---
----40
2.8 2.8 2.8
35 35 35
-------
-------
1-35
Chapter 1
Cassette/deck (single-sided) Paper type Paper size Color Postcard 2-pane postcard Gvn postcard Tab sheet A4, LTR 4.0 (Under 163g/ m2) 2.8 (164g/m2 to 203g/m2) ----Mono -----
Color 2.8 2.8
Mono 35 35
Color -----
Mono -----
42
---
---
---
---
(unit: prints/min)
1.2.7.2 Paper Type

0011-7215

T-1-25
Source of paper
Paper type
Paper size
Cassette
Deck (left/right)
Manual feeder
1-36
Chapter 1
Plain paper (64 to 105g/m2) Eco paper Recycled paper Heavy paper mode1,2 (106 to 209g/m2) A3, B4, A4R, 279mmno432mm(11"no17"), LGL,LTRR yes no yes
A4AB5ALTR
yes
yes
yes
B5R
yes
no
yes
A5R
yes
no
yes
305mmno457mm(12"no18"),330 mmno482mm(13"no19"),SRA3 yes no yes
Exective
yes
no
yes
Exective-R
no
no
no
Heavy paper mode 3 (210 to 250g/2m)
A3, B4, A4R,279mmno432mm(11"no17" ), LGL, LTRR no no yes
305mmno457mm(12"no18")A3 30mmno482mm(13"no19")AS RA3 no no yes
1-37
Chapter 1
Special paper trans-parency A4ALTR
yes
no
yes
Postcard
gvn postcard, 2-pane postcard no no yes
label sheet
A4AA4RALTRALTRRA B4 no no yes
index paper
A4ALTR
yes
no
no
tracing paper
A3AB4AA4RAA4AB5R AB5 no no yes
1-38
Chapter 1
T-1-26
1-39
Chapter 1
pTCY
JZbg
fbLiE j
i64`105g/uj [h1A2 i106`209g/uj
A3AB4AA4 RA279mm4 32mm(11"17") ALGLALTR R
A4AB5ALT R
B5R
A5R
305mm457mm (12"18")A33 0mm482mm(1 3"19")
Exective
Exective-R
1-40
Chapter 1
pTCY
JZbg
fbLiE j
[h3 i210`250g/uj
A3AB4AA4 RA279mm4 32mm(11"17") ALGLALTR R
305mm457mm (12"18")A33 0mm482mm(1 3"19")
OHPtB A4ALTR
nKL
nKL AnKL
A4AA4RAL TRALTRR
CfbN X
A4ALTR
A3AB4AA4 RAA4AB5R AB5
1-41
Chapter 1
1.2.7.3 Print Speed

0011-4362
T-1-27
Cassette/deck (single-sided) Paper type Paper size Color Plain paper mode (64 A3 to 105 g/m2) 279mmX432mm(11"X17 ") Mono
Color
Mono
Color
Mono
7.8
28
7.8
20
3.9
17
7.8
28
7.8
20
3.9
17
305mmX458mm(12"X18 ")
5.2
25
5.2
17
2.6
15
330mmX482mm(13"X19 ")
5.2
25
5.2
17
2.6
15
B4, LGL A4R, LTRR, B5R
7.8 7.8
34 42
7.8 7.8
23 29
3.9 3.9
18 19
A4, LTR, B5 15.5 A5R Heavy paper mode 1 (105 to 163 g/m2) A3 279mmX432mm(11"X17 ") 15.5 4.0 68(58*) 68(58*) 21 7.8 7.8 4.0 35 35 20 7.8 7.8 2.0 34(29*) 34(29*) 10
4.0
21
4.0
20
2.0
10
305mmX458mm(12"X18 ") 330mmX482mm(13"X19 ") B4, LGL A4R, LTRR, B5R
3.0
18
3.0
17
1.5
3.0
17
3.0
17
1.5
4.0
25
4.0
23
2.0
12
4.0 A4, LTR, B5 A5R
31
4.0
29
2.0
15
8.4 8.4
41 42
4.0 4.0
35 35
4.2 4.2
20 21
1-42
Chapter 1
Cassette/deck (single-sided) Paper type Paper size Color Heavy paper mode 2 (164 to 209 g/m2) A3 279mmX432mm(11"X17 ") 2.8 Mono 21
Color 2.8
Mono 20
Color ---
Mono 10
2.8
20
2.8
20
---
10
305mmX458mm(12"X18 ")
2.3
18
2.3
17
---
330mmX482mm(13"X19 ") B4, LGL A4R, LTRR, B5R
2.3
17
2.3
17
---
2.8 2.8
22 27
2.8 2.8
22 27
-----
11 13
A4, LTR, B5 6.2 A5R Heavy paper mode 3 (210 to 253 g/m2) A3 279mmX432mm(11"X17 ") 6.2 --40 36 --2.8 2.8 2.8 35 35 20 ------20 18 ---
---
---
2.8
20
---
---
305mmX458mm(12"X18 ") 330mmX482mm(13"X19 ") B4, LGL A4R, LTRR, B5R
---
---
2.3
17
---
---
---
---
2.3
17
---
---
---
---
2.8
22
---
---
--A4, LTR, B5 --A5R Transparency Postcard A4, LTR 2-pane postcard Gvn postcard Tab sheet A4, LTR 4.0 (Under 163g/ m2) 2.8 (164g/m2 to 203g/m2) --2.8 -----
---
2.8
27
---
---
----40(20*) -----
2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8
35 35 35(20*) 35 35
-----------
-----------
42
---
---
---
---
(unit: prints/min) *iRC5800/5800N/iRC5870/iRC5870N
1.2.7.4 Paper Type

0011-4364
T-1-28 Source of paper Paper type Paper size Cassette Deck (left/right) Manual feeder
1-43
Chapter 1
Plain paper (64 to 105g/m2) Eco paper Recycled paper Heavy paper mode1,2 (106 to 209g/m2) A3, B4, A4R, 279mmno432mm(11"no17"), LGL,LTRR A4, B5, LTR B5R A5R 305mmno457mm(12"no18"),330mmno48 2mm(13"no19"),SRA3 Exective Exective-R Heavy paper mode 3 (210 to 250g/2m) A3, B4, A4R,279mmno432mm(11"no17"), LGL, LTRR 305mmno457mm(12"no18"), 330mmno482mm(13"no19"), SRA3 Special paper trans-parency Postcard label sheet index paper tracing paper A4, LTR gvn postcard, 2-pane postcard A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR, B4 A4, LTR A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5 yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes no no yes no no yes no no no no no no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes no yes
1.2.7.5 Accessories
0003-5843
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C The following accessories are offered for the machine: (1) Finisher-R1 (2) Saddle Finisher-R2 (3) Additional Finisher Tray-A1 (Japanese model only) (4) Puncher Unit-L1 (5) Side paper Deck-U1 (6) Shift Tray -C1 (7) Image Conversion Board-A2 (8) Super G3 Fax Board-P1 (9) PDL Expansion Kt (LIPS)-C1 (Japanese model only) (10) Color Network Printer Expansion Kit-C1 (non-Japanese model only) (11) SEND Expansion Kit-D1P (12) SEND Expansion Kit-D1U (Japanese and European models only) (13) UFR & Scanner Kit-C1 (14) Color Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit-C1 (non-Japanese model only) (15) Card Reader-C1 (16) Card Reader Attaching Kit-C1 (17) Delivery Tray-K1 (18) Original Holder-K1 (19) Stamp Unit-A1 (20) Key Switch Unit-A2 (21) Security Kit-A1P/A1U (22) 256-MB Expansion RAM-A2 (23) USB Interface Board-A3 (24) TokenRing Interface Adapter iN-TR2 (US model only) (25) Color imagePass-D1 (US model) Color Network Printer unit-D1 (Other model)
1.2.8 RDS Specification 1.2.8.1 Embedded RDS(e-RDS)

0011-6869
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Product Overview Embedded RDS (hereafter, e-RDS) is a front-end module of e-Maintenance system built into the network module of the device controller.
Product package composition/commodity composition It is built in the network module of the device. Feature It is built into the network module of the device controller, and the front-end module of e-Maintenance system is achieved without needing hardware other than the device. In a past e-Maintenance system, software for e-Maintenance was installed in special hardware such as a small box Linux computer or Windows PC in the front end. (RDS Agent or RDS server). The e-Maintenance system can be introduced without putting a strain in the user by being built in the device controller. Moreover, the serviceman's loads for the installation are greatly reduced. e-RDS transmits device information on counter, trouble, and articles of consumption, etc. by using the SOAP protocol for the back end server of e-Maintenance system (hereafter, UGW). List of Supported Devices
1-44
Chapter 1
e-RDS Supported version Model name iR2270, iR2870, iR3570, iR4570 Version number v31.01 Point of correction #1, #2
e-RDS Full supported version Version number v32.02 #3 Point of correction
iR2230, iR2830, iR3530 (Make sure that the device can be connected on network)
v5.xx
#1, #2
v20.25
#3
iR5570, iR6570 iR85+, iR8070 iR105, iR9070
v12.04 v10.40
#1, #2 #1, #2
v20.65 v11.05
#3 #3
iR C3170 series iR C2570 series USA: imageRunner C3170 Color imageRunner C3170N EU, Other: iR 2570C / iR 2570CN iR 3170C / iR 3170CN
v10.15
#2
v20.29
#3
iR C6870, iR C5870 USA: imageRunner C3170 Color imageRunner C3170N EU: iR 5870C / iR 5870Ci iR 6870C / iR 6870Ci Other: iR C5870 / iR 5C870i iR C6870 / iR C6870i
From the first mass production machine
Title #1 e-RDS Proxy server connection trouble #2 e-RDS freeze #3 e-RDS Parts counter trouble
Description It cannot connect a proxy server via e-RDS At rare intervals, the e-RDS gets into the freezing, and does not send the billing counter data. The e-RDS sends the wrong value of parts counter sometimes.
1.2.8.2 Embedded RDS(e-RDS)

0011-6893
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Product Overview Embedded RDS (hereafter, e-RDS) is a front-end module of e-Maintenance system built into the network module of the device controller.
Product package composition/commodity composition It is built in the network module of the device. Feature It is built into the network module of the device controller, and the front-end module of e-Maintenance system is achieved without needing hardware other than the device. In a past e-Maintenance system, software for e-Maintenance was installed in special hardware such as a small box Linux computer or Windows PC in the front end. (RDS Agent or RDS server). The e-Maintenance system can be introduced without putting a strain in the user by being built in the device controller. Moreover, the serviceman's loads for the installation are greatly reduced. e-RDS transmits device information on counter, trouble, and articles of consumption, etc. by using the SOAP protocol for the back end server of e-Maintenance system (hereafter, UGW). USA
Product name imageRunner C3170 Color imageRunner C3170N imageRUNNER C6870U imageRUNNER C5870U
1-45
Chapter 1
Product name iR2230 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR6570 iR8070 iR85+ iR9070 iR105+
EU
Product name iR 2570C / iR 2570CN iR 3170C / iR 3170CN iR 5870C / iR 5870Ci iR 6870C / iR 6870Ci iR2230 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR6570 iR8070 iR85+ iR9070 iR105+
Other areas
Product name iR 2570C / iR 2570CN iR 3170C / iR 3170CN iR C5870 / iR 5C870i iR C6870 / iR C6870i iR2230 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR6570 iR8070 iR85+ iR9070 iR105+
List of Supported Devices
1-46
Chapter 2 Installation
Contents
Contents
2.1 Making Pre-Checks........................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation .................................................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.2 Combination Table of Accessories .............................................................................................................................................. 2-2 2.1.3 Installation Environment.............................................................................................................................................................. 2-4 2.1.4 Checking the Contents ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.2 Unpacking and Installation ............................................................................................................................................2-7

2.2.1 Unpacking and installation procedure ......................................................................................................................................... 2-7 2.2.2 Turning Off the Host Machine..................................................................................................................................................... 2-7 2.2.3 Unpacking .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-7 2.2.4 Installation pickup assembly...................................................................................................................................................... 2-10 2.2.5 Installation of Scanner ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-11 2.2.6 Locking primary transfer roller.................................................................................................................................................. 2-11 2.2.7 Before attaching developing assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 2-11 2.2.8 Attaching color developing assemblies ..................................................................................................................................... 2-15 2.2.9 Attaching the Black Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 2-19 2.2.10 Attaching the Process Unit....................................................................................................................................................... 2-21 2.2.11 Installing the Fixing Assembly ................................................................................................................................................ 2-25 2.2.12 Setting the Black Toner Container........................................................................................................................................... 2-26 2.2.13 Checking the Environment Switch .......................................................................................................................................... 2-26 2.2.14 Turning On the Main Power Switch ........................................................................................................................................ 2-27 2.2.15 Setting the Paper Cassette ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-27 2.2.16 Changing Paper Size of the Deck (Left/Right) ........................................................................................................................ 2-28 2.2.17 Setting Color Toner Container................................................................................................................................................. 2-29 2.2.18 Supplying Black Toner ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-29 2.2.19 ITB Cleaning............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-30 2.2.20 Supplying Color Toner ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-30 2.2.21 Setting the Auto Gradation Correction .................................................................................................................................... 2-30 2.2.22 Checking the Image/Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 2-30 2.2.23 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration ..................................................................................................................................... 2-30 2.2.24 Adjusting the Left Edge Margin on Image .............................................................................................................................. 2-32 2.2.25 Adjusting the Lead Edge Margin of Image.............................................................................................................................. 2-34 2.2.26 Securing the Machine in Place................................................................................................................................................. 2-35 2.2.27 When the Machine is Not Connecting to the Network ............................................................................................................ 2-35 2.2.28 Attaching the Shutdown Label................................................................................................................................................. 2-35
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ....................................................................................................................2-36

2.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-36 2.3.2 Checking Network Connection.................................................................................................................................................. 2-36 2.3.3 Procedure for Ping Operation .................................................................................................................................................... 2-36 2.3.4 Checking with Remote Host Address ........................................................................................................................................ 2-36
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network ......................................................................................................................................2-37

2.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-37 2.4.2 Checking Connection Status of Network Cable ........................................................................................................................ 2-37 2.4.3 Checking with Loopback Address ............................................................................................................................................. 2-37 2.4.4 Checking with Local Host Address ........................................................................................................................................... 2-37
2.5 Relocating the Machine ...............................................................................................................................................2-37

2.5.1 Relocating the Machine ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-37
2.6 Installing the Card Reader............................................................................................................................................2-38

2.6.1 Points to Note About Installation............................................................................................................................................... 2-38 2.6.2 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-38 2.6.3 Turning Off the Host Machine................................................................................................................................................... 2-39
Contents
2.6.4 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-39 2.6.5 Using with NetSpot Accountant (NSA)..................................................................................................................................... 2-41
2.7 Installing the NE Controller-A1 .................................................................................................................................. 2-41

2.7.1 NE Controller-A1 Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 2-41
2.8 Installing the Original Tray ......................................................................................................................................... 2-42

2.8.1 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-42 2.8.2 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-43 2.8.3 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-44 2.8.4 Attachment................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-44
2.9 Installing the Key Switch Unit .................................................................................................................................... 2-44

2.9.1 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-44 2.9.2 Turning Off the Host Machine................................................................................................................................................... 2-45 2.9.3 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-45 2.9.4 Checking After Installation........................................................................................................................................................ 2-47
2.10 Installing the Reader Heater ...................................................................................................................................... 2-47

2.10.1 Checking the Parts ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-47 2.10.2 Turning Off the Host Machine................................................................................................................................................. 2-48 2.10.3 Installation Procedure .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-48
2.11 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit ............................................................................................................................. 2-52

2.11.1 Points to Note About Installation............................................................................................................................................. 2-52 2.11.2 Checking Items in the Package ................................................................................................................................................ 2-52 2.11.3 Checking Items in the Package ................................................................................................................................................ 2-53 2.11.4 Turning Off the Host Machine................................................................................................................................................. 2-54 2.11.5 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-54
Chapter 2
2.1 Making Pre-Checks

2.1.1 Selecting the Site of Installation
0002-6395
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The conditions of the installation space include the following. Preliminary inspection of the planned installation space would be desired before shipping the machine to the customer. 1. The power cable can be plugged exclusively in an outlet that can supply the required power and the machine can be connected to the grounding wire. The required power is: 100V and 15A or more for 100V machines; 120V or 127V and 16A or more for 120V machines, and; 220 or 240V and 8A or more for 230V machines. Grounding target 1) Grounding terminal of power outlet 2) Grounding terminal finished to category D
Never connect the grounding wires to the gas pipes.
2. The temperature and humidity are within the range shown in the following figure. The area near the faucet, water heater, moisture chamber and refrigerator should be especially avoided.
(%RH) 100 90 85 [B] 75 70 [A] [C]
50
25 20 15 10 5 0 10 7.5 15 20 23
F-2-1
25 27.5
30 32.5
35
40 (degC)
<Assured environmental zone> [A]: A zone. All quality standard items are satisfied. [B]: B zone. Some quality standard items are inferior to those in A zone or not satisfied. [C]: C zone. Copying operation is performed normally without any safety issues, malfunction, and errors in display. 3. The area near the origin of fire, with full of dust and where ammonia gas generates should be avoided. In the case that the space is exposed to direct light, it is better to hang a curtain on the window. 4. Although the ozone level generating in using this equipment does not affect human bodies, long-hours operation in a poorly-ventilated room may cause some odor to be sensed. Ventilation should be done to keep a comfortable work environment. 5. The foot of the host machine should not get off the floor. The host machine should be kept in a horizontal status. 6. The host machine should be separated from the wall by 100 mm or more to keep a space sufficient for machine operation. - When installing without accessories
2-1
Chapter 2
100 mm or more
500 mm
1,676 mm
500 mm
500 mm
F-2-2
- When installing with Saddle Finisher AC2 + Puncher Unit L1 + Paper Deck U1
100 mm or more
1,288 mm
1,942 mm 1,191 mm 500 mm 112 mm 2,054 mm 500 mm 500 mm
F-2-3
7. When unloading the host machine, face to the side with nail holes [1]on the slope plate. The space specified in the figure should be secured on the side with nail holes on the slope plate (left). The delivery assembly is positioned on the side with nail holes on the slope plate (left) and the front of the host machine faces in the direction of the arrow as shown in the figure.
[1]
F-2-4
2.1.2 Combination Table of Accessories

0018-0426
2-2
1,288 mm
Chapter 2
The following table shows the combination of accessories that are set at the right side of the host machine. When setting the accessories indicated in the table, refer to the table below and check the combination before the setup.
T-2-1 Document Tray Voice Guidance Kit Card Reader
Document Tray Voice Guidance Kit Card Reader yes: Available no: Unavailable
no yes
no yes
yes yes -
2-3
Chapter 2
2.1.3 Installation Environment

0002-6399
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Check that the environment of the site meets the following requirements:
(%RH)
80 75 60
[1]
40
25 20 10 0 (32) 10 (50) 15 (59) [2]

F-2-5
20 (68)
30 C (86) (F)
[1] Humidity [2] Temperature
2.1.4 Checking the Contents

0002-6404
2-4
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
F-2-6
[24]
[25]
[26]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Black toner bottle (black; only for 100/230V AU model) Color toner cartridge(cyan, magenta, yellow; only for 100V/230V AU model) Black developing assembly (black) Color developing assembly (cyan, magenta, yellow)
1 pc. 1 pc. each 1 pc. 1 pc. each
[5] [6] [7] [8] [9]* [10]
Black developing assembly locking plate Process unit cover Touch pen Service book case Cassette size label* ADF size label
1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 2 pc. 1 pc.
2-5
Chapter 2
[11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25]** [26] Grounding cord (100-V model only) QR sheet (100-V model only) Power cord (230-V model only) Service book User's Manual Grip Pickup assembly face place Delivery assembly face plate Binding screw (M4X8) RS tightening screw (M4X8) Left deck locking plate No Copy label (non-100-V model) Glass Cleaning instructions label (non-100-V model) Glass Cleaning instructions label (non-100-V model) Shut-down warning label Binding screw (M4X6) 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 2 pc. 2 pc. 2 pc. 2 pc. 3 pc. 1 pc. 3 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc.
* Found inside the cassette 3 (upper cassette). ** The shut-down warning label is used for iR C6870/C5870 Series only.
2-6
Chapter 2
2.2 Unpacking and Installation

2.2.1 Unpacking and installation procedure
0002-6409
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Take into account the following points when installing this equipment.
- When transferring the host machine from a low-temperature to a warm place and installing it, dew condensation may occur around the fixing/feed assembly, leading to image faulty reproduction. Therefore, the host machine is unpacked and left for 1 hour or more to make it accustom to room temperature (Dew condensation: The phenomenon where water drops accumulate on the surface of metal when a metal material is moved from a low-temperature to a warm area and the moisture in the air surrounding the metal is quickly cooled) - Since the machine weighs about 230kg, it requires 4 or more people for installation works. - Turn the 2 adjusters (in front) on the host machine base clockwise to unlock. Adjusters may be dropped due to vibration while transporting the machine. Be careful not to lose them.
F-2-7
2) Press down the stopper with the flat-blade screwdriver to fit the 2 grips [2] into the respective grip slots [1] on the side of pickup assembly.
2.2.2 Turning Off the Host Machine

0011-3879
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci iR C6800/C5800 Turning Off the Main Power [1] Turn off the control panel power switch. [2] Turn off the main power switch. [3] Disconnect the power cable (from the power outlet). iR C6870/C5870 Turning Off the Main Power When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's hard disk: [1] Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. [2] Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off. [3] Turn off the main power switch. [4] Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).
[1]
2.2.3 Unpacking
0002-6411
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Unpack the machine and pull down the plastic cover.
[2]
F-2-8
3) Hold the grips on the side of the delivery assembly (front / rear) and lift up the machine to remove the pads [1] to the direction of the arrow. cover aside in the direction of the arrow at this time. (host machine weight: about 230kg)
Do not lift up the host machine too far to keep in balance.
2-7
Chapter 2 then fit the pin holes on the skid and the slope plate, and fit the 2 pins [2] into the holes.
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-2-9 F-2-12
4) Hold the grip of the pickup assembly side (front/rear) of the host machine, and then lift the host machine to remove the 2 pads [1] and the plastic bag.
Check if the casters [1] are on the skid [2] and not getting on to the edge [3] of the skid.
Do not lift up the host machine too far to keep in balance.
[1] [2]
[3]
[1]
F-2-10
5) Move the host machine to the direction of the arrow to take out the 2 slope plates [2] stored in the center of the skid [1].
8) Hold the grips on the side of the delivery assembly to slide the machine down along the slope. 9) Remove the packing tapes from the host machine. 10) Press down each stopper with the flat-blade screwdriver to remove the 2 grips [2] from the respective grip slots [1].
[2]
[1]
F-2-11
6) Remove the 2 pins taped on the back of the slope plates. 7) Turn back the slope plates [1] to attach as shown in the figure below. And
2-8
Chapter 2
[1]
[1]
F-2-15
13) Remove the lower rear right cover [1]. - 2 screws [2]
[1]
[2]
F-2-13
[2]
11) Attach the 2 pickup assembly face plates [1] to the grip slots.
F-2-16
14) Insert the 2 grips [1] into the compartments [2].
[1]
F-2-14
[2] [1]
12) Remove the 3 shipping tags [1] from the lower rear right cover.
[2]
F-2-17
[1]
15) Attach the lower rear right cover. 16) Attach the 2 delivery assembly face plates [1].
2-9
Chapter 2 2) Close the upper right covers and the lower right cover. 3) Press the release button on the left deck to slide out the popped-out left deck.
Since the pressure plate is not attached yet, the release button may not work to make the deck popped out. In case, slide out the deck manually.
4) Open the front cover. 5) Fit the left deck pressure plate [1] to the hole [A] of the left deck rear side plate to attach. - 1 screw (RS tightening; M4X8) [2]
[1]
F-2-18
[1] [2]
0002-6414
2.2.4 Installation pickup assembly

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the upper right covers [1] and the lower right covers [2] to remove the 3 pressure release spacers [3] from the right deck and pickup slots of each cassette.
[1] [3]
[2]
F-2-19 F-2-20
To avoid breaking the pickup assembly, press the lever [1] on the pressure release spacer to the direction of [A] and remove it to the direction of [B].
1.After mounting the left deck locking plate [1], lightly pull on the deck cable [2] to be sure that the cable is free.
[2]
[1]
[A]
[1]
2.Check that the deck wire [1] is not trapped with the left deck locking plate [2].
[B]
2-10
Chapter 2
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-2-22
6) Close the left deck.
2.2.7 Before attaching developing assembly

0002-6569 0002-6566
2.2.5 Installation of Scanner

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the DADF and remove the packing materials. 2) Close the DADF. 3) Remove the scanning system fixing screw [1].
[1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the upper right cover [1]. 2) Remove the right cover (upper) [2]. - 2 screws [3]
[2]
[3] [1]
F-2-23
3) Press the right deck release button [1] to slide out the popped-out right deck.
F-2-21
Ask the user to keep the scanning system fixing screw for the use when moving the host machine.
2.2.6 Locking primary transfer roller

0002-6568
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Pull up the primary transfer roller lock lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to lock the roller. Fix the primary transfer roller lock lever [1] with the screw (binding; M4X8) [2].
[1]
[2]
F-2-24
4) Remove the front cover strap [1]. - 1 screw [2]
2-11
Chapter 2
[1]
F-2-27
8) Remove the 3 screws [1] and close the black toner supply cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-2-25
5) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the front cover hinge to open the front cover [2] further.
[2]
F-2-28
[1]
9) Open the hopper assembly [1].
[2]
F-2-29
[1]
10) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] on the upper right side and open the wire saddle [2].
[1]
F-2-26
6) Close the right deck. 7) Open the black toner supply cover [1].
2-12
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-2-32
13) Remove the drum rotation stop tool [2] of the process unit cover [1].
[1]
[2]
F-2-33 F-2-30
11) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] on the upper left side.
14) Press the drum fixing member [1] with the drum rotation stop tool [2] removed in the previous step. Remove the drum fixing screw [3] using the screwdriver.
[1]
Before removing the screw, fit the protrusion [4] of the drum rotation stop tool to the cut-off [5] of the drum fringe.
[1]
[1] [3] [2]

F-2-31
12) Free the connector cable [1] on the high-pressure side from the 2 edge saddles [2]. And the hang the disconnected cable on the cable hook [3].
[5]
After freeing the connector cable [1] on the high-pressure side from the 2 edge saddles [2], hang the cable on the cable hook [3] to avoid the cable [1] being caught during the work.
[4]
F-2-34
15) Use longnose pliers and the like to remove the drum fixing member [1].
2-13
Chapter 2
[1]
[1]
F-2-35
16) Remove the 3 screws [1].
F-2-38
19) Press the 2 claws [1] to slide out the fixing / feed assembly [2] fully until it stops.
[1] [1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-2-39 F-2-36
20) Slightly lift the both ends [1] of the process unit to slide out the process unit [2].
17) Move down the fixing / feed release lever [1] to the direction of the arrow.
[1]
- When sliding out the process unit, be careful not to deform the connecting plate [1] at the left end. - If the both ends are lifted too far, the process unit may not be moved.
F-2-37
18) Slide out the fixing / feed assembly [1].
2-14
Chapter 2
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-2-41
2.2.8 Attaching color developing assemblies

0002-6670
Before handling the color developing assemblies, make sure no foreign materials (specially metals) are attached to hands. Foreign materials attached on the cylinder of the developing assembly may cause faulty images.
[2]
F-2-40
21) After sliding out the process unit, place an A3 sheet [1] between the photosensitive drum and the developing rotary to avoid damages and/or to block light on the photosensitive drum.
1) Unpack the color developing assemblies (yellow, magenta and cyan). 2) Press the lever [1] of the developing rotary solenoid once and turn the developing rotary [2] anticlockwise manually.
- If the developing rotary is turned clockwise after attached in position, the toner blocking sheet on the sleeve may be torn due to interference with the photosensitive drum. Be sure to turn the developing rotary anticlockwise. - The developing rotary will not be fixed in the correct position if the lever of the developing rotary solenoid is kept pressing. Press the lever only once, slightly turn the developing rotary and free it.
2-15
Chapter 2
[1] [2]
[1]
F-2-42
F-2-44
3) Turn the developing rotary until the partition [1] reaches in the perpendicular position (the position to attach the developing assembly).
5) Open the 2 developing assembly fixing arms [1]. - 2 screws [2]
[1]
When rotating the developing rotary, be sure to fix the develop assembly fixing arms with screws.
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-2-43
4) Remove the protection sheet [1] attached on the toner supply mouth of the developing rotary.
F-2-45
6) Check the identification mark [1] attached on the developing rotary to prepare the target color developing assembly. The figure below shows the cyan developing assembly as an example.
2-16
Chapter 2 the protection tapes [1] from 2 positions to remove the protection film [2].
M Y C
[1]
[1]
M Y C
[2]
F-2-49
10) Turn the color developing assembly to the direction of the arrow. Remove the tapes [1] from 2 positions to remove the 2 sponges [2].
F-2-46
7) Put an A3 sheet [1] on the level table to place the target color developing assembly [2].
[1]
Be sure to remove sponges [2].
[1]
[2]
F-2-47
8) Place the color developing assembly on the sheet with the developing cylinder facing upward. Remove the tapes [1] from the 2 positions to the direction of [A] and hold the both ends of protection sheet [2] to open the assembly in the direction of [B].
Do not touch the developing cylinder [1] with hands.
[2]
F-2-50
[1]
11) Turn the developing cylinder gear [1] manually for 5 or 6 times to the direction of the arrow to check the lines or damages on the cylinder [2]. By doing this, the starter in the unit can also even out.
After removing sponges, do not face the toner supply mouth [1] downward.This is to avoid toner or starter accidentally spilling out.
[2]
[1]
[A]
[B] [1]
F-2-48
9) Turn the color developing assembly to the direction of the arrow. Remove
2-17
Chapter 2 15) If the developing cylinder [1] faces in the position of [A] as shown in the figure below, turn the developing rotary until the cylinder facing to the position of [B].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[A]
F-2-51
12) Attach the color developer [1] to the developing rotary. Firstly fit the front sides of the color developing assembly and the developing rotary. Next fit the rear sides to attach.
[1]
Hold the both ends of the color developing assembly so as to attach it to the host machine easily.
[1] [B]
F-2-54
16) Loosen the screw [2] that fixes the torque limiter [1] of the developing rotary and move the limiter to the direction of the arrow to release.
[2] [1]
F-2-52
13) Close the 2 developing assembly fixing arms [1] in the direction of the arrow to attach. - 2 screws [2]
[2]
[2]
F-2-55
17) Fix the torque limiter [1]. - 1 screw [2]

[2] [1]
[1]
[1]
F-2-56
If the torque limiter is not released in the step above, the pressure plate for the black developing assembly cannot be attached. Be sure to perform this step.
F-2-53
14) Repeat the steps 2) through 13) to attach the other 2 color developing assemblies to the developing rotary.
2-18
Chapter 2
2.2.9 Attaching the Black Developing Assembly

0002-6683
[1]
[2]
Before handling the black developing assembly, make sure no foreign materials (specially metals) are attached to hands. Foreign materials attached on the cylinder of the developing assembly may cause faulty images.
1) Detach the connecting plate [1]. - 2 screws [2]

[1] [2]
F-2-58
4) Turn the developing cylinder gear [1] with your hand and check if there is any scar on the cylinder [2].
In order to prevent a blade mark on the developing cylinder, be careful not to push the area [3] of the developing cylinder cover shown in the figure below.
[1]
[2] [3]
F-2-57 F-2-59
2) Hold the long side of the black developing assembly with both hands and take it out of the packaging. 3) Put a A3 paper [1] on a flat table and place the black developing assembly [2] onto it.
5) Remove the tape [2] that fixes the high-voltage cable [1].
[2]
[1]
- The potential sensor is attached to the black developing assembly. Be careful not to touch the detection window [1] of the potential sensor shown in the figure below. - In order to prevent breakage of the potential sensor, be careful not to cause damage by such actions as dropping the black developing assembly.
F-2-60
6) Hold the both ends of the black developing assembly [1], keep the black developing assembly in a horizontal position and attach it while pushing it in an obliquely downward direction shown in the figure below.
When attaching the black developing assembly to the machine, be sure to put the high-voltage cable [1] on the upper part of the black developing assembly as shown in the figure.
[1]
2-19
Chapter 2 7) Route the cable [1] with the tube of the black developing assembly through the area [2] shown in the figure below. 8) Set the high-voltage cable [3] of the black developing assembly at the side of the toner supply mouth [4].
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
- At this time, be sure to fit the boss [2] at the rear side of the developing assembly in the left guide [3] at the rear side of the machine. - Be sure to fit the rib [4] at the front side of the developing assembly in the right guide [5] at the front side of the machine.
[1]
F-2-62
9) Connect the connector [1] at the inside front side.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-2-63
10) Attach the connecting plate [1]. - 2 screws [2]
[5]
[4]
F-2-61
2-20
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
[1] [2]
F-2-64
11) Remove the paper that has been put between the photosensitive drum and the developing rotary. 12) Insert the protrusion [1] of the black developing assembly pressure plate into the positioning hole [2] at the rear side of the machine in the direction of the arrow.
F-2-66
14) Put back the process unit and the fixing/feed assembly.
- Be sure to close the process unit with the front cover opened. - Be careful not to get the cable at the right side of the front of the machine caught in the process unit.
[2]
[1]
If the process unit cannot be attached surely to the rear end, perform the step described below. After pulling out the process unit, turn a little the developing rotary drive gear situated at the machine. After that, close the process unit.
2.2.10 Attaching the Process Unit

0002-6689
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) After attaching the resistor [1] for the high-voltage cable at upper left of the front side, fix it with the 4 wire saddles [2] and route it through the edge saddle [3]. 2) Fix the cable with the cable guide [4] and insert it into the connector [5]. 3) Connect the connector [6].
F-2-65
13) Attach the black developing assembly pressure plate [1]. - 1 screw (binding; M4X6) [2]
2-21
Chapter 2
[4]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[6]
F-2-69 F-2-67
4) After connecting the 3 connectors [1], route the cable through the 4 cable guides [2] and the 2 wire saddles [3].
6) Fix the cable [1] of the black developing assembly with the 6 harness guides [2]. 7) Connect the connector [3].
[2] [1] [2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-2-68
[3]
5) Connect the 4 connectors [1] at upper right of the front side and fix it with the wire saddle [2].
F-2-70
8) Fix the process unit [1]. - 3 screws [2]
Using the RS tightening screw for the area of aluminum die casting may cause broken thread. Be sure to use the binding screw for this area.
2-22
Chapter 2
[2]
[2]
[1]
As shown in the figure below, be sure to fit the protrusion [5] of the drum antirotation tool into the cut-off [6] of the drum flange and tighten the screw.
[2]
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
F-2-71
9) After fixing the drum fixing member [2] to the drum flange [1], push it from above with the drum antirotation tool [3]. Tighten the drum fixing screw [4] using a screwdriver.
[6]
- If the photosensitive drum rotates clockwise during this operation, the scoop-up sheet may be soiled and toner splash may occur. Be sure to tighten the drum fixing screw while holding the drum antirotation tool. - Be sure to check that the protrusion [1] of the drum fixing member exists between the mark "-" and "--" of the drum flange.
[5]
F-2-72
- For use in transferring the machine, be sure to keep the drum antirotation tool [2] at the back of the process unit cover [1].
[1]
[2]
[1]
10) Loosen the screw [1], move the charging assembly fixing member [2] to upper right and fix it with the screw. 11) Disconnect the connector [3] and detach the primary charging assembly [4]. Check the primary charging wire and the shield plate, and remove any soil or paper dusts attached there using alcohol solution.
2-23
Chapter 2
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-2-75
[1]
17) Close the black toner replacement cover [1]. 18) Push the release button of the right deck and pull out the right deck. 19) Attach the front cover hinge [1]. - 2 screws [2]
[2]
F-2-73
12) Detach the pre-transfer charging assembly [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 1 screw [3] Check the pre-transfer charging wire and the shield plate, and remove any soil or paper dusts attached there using alcohol solution.
[3] [1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-2-76
20) Attach the front cover strap. 21) Close the right deck. 22) Pull out the fixing/feed assembly. 23) Open the color toner insertion slot cover [1].
F-2-74
13) Attach the pre-transfer charging assembly and the primary charging assembly in the reverse procedure to detaching them. 14) Close the hopper assembly. 15) Open the black toner replacement cover. 16) After fitting the hopper assembly [1] in the emboss of the machine and tightening the screws, attach it. - 3 screws [2]
2-24
Chapter 2 3) Open the middle cover [1].
[1]
[1]
F-2-80
4) Remove the shipping tag [1].

[1]
F-2-77
24) Attach the process unit cover [1]. - 2 screws (RS tightening; M4X8) [2]
[2]
F-2-81
5) Remove the 2 fixing nip pressure release screws [1].
[1]
F-2-78
25) Close the color toner insertion slot cover. 26) Attach the right cover (upper). 27) Close the upper right cover.
2.2.11 Installing the Fixing Assembly

0002-6697
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Push the 2 claws and pull out the fixing/feed assembly until it stops. 2) Open the reverse delivery cover [1].
[1] [1]
F-2-82
6) Check if there is a slack on the fixing web. If any, perform step 7 and 8 described below. 7) Remove the 3 screws [1] and the fixing knob [2], and then detach the fixing front cover [3].
[1]
F-2-79
2-25
Chapter 2
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-2-83
[1]
F-2-85
8) Turn the gear [1] with your hand counterclockwise seen from the front side of the machine, and remove the slack on the web.
3) After holding the black toner container [1] as shown in the figure, turn the cap [2] in the direction of the arrow to remove the cap from the black toner container.
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-2-86
4) Hold the black toner container with its mouth [1] on the right side, keep it in a horizontal position and set it to the supply case [2] of the machine.
[2]
[1]
F-2-84 F-2-87
9) Attach the fixing front cover and the fixing knob. 10) Close the middle cover. 11) Close the reverse delivery cover. 12) Put back the fixing/feed assembly. 13) After locking the release lever, close the front cover.
5) Raise the lock lever [1] in the direction of the arrow and attach the black toner container [2].
[1]
2.2.12 Setting the Black Toner Container

0002-6699
When turning on the main power with the black toner container not installed to the machine, the black toner meter displayed on the control panel indicates 25% or less of the remaining level. Before turning on the main power, be sure to check that the black toner container has been attached to the machine.
[2]
F-2-88
6) Close the black toner replacement cover.
2.2.13 Checking the Environment Switch

0002-6701
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Make a setting of the environment switch according to the installation environment. If the installation environment is in high humidity, turn ON the environment switch [1].(The drum heater turns on regardless of the setting of the main power switch [2].)
1) Take out the black toner container from the packaging. 2) After opening the black toner replacement cover [1], tilt the lock lever [2] in the direction of the arrow.
2-26
Chapter 2
ON
ON
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-2-90
F-2-89
2) The message 'Set the toner container' is displayed on the control panel. 3) Just after the screen is displayed on the control panel, select '1' in the following service mode (Warm-up rotation disabled: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF) to prevent warm-up rotation from starting. 4) Exit service mode.
In the factory settings, the environment switch is off.
2.2.14 Turning On the Main Power Switch

0003-1015
Be sure to execute this mode after turning on the power in order to prevent warm-up rotation from starting. If turning off/on the power during installation, the warm-up rotation starts and an error in the image stabilization control may occur.
- Before turning on the main power, be sure to remove the packaging in the cassette. - For 230V model, after taking out the included power cord, connect the one end of the power cord to the inlet of the machine and the other to the outlet. - The developing rotary runs after the main power is turned on. Be sure not to use the door switch actuator.
2.2.15 Setting the Paper Cassette

0002-6732
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Push the cassette release button and pull out the cassette forward. 2) Check the paper type that is used by a user and check to see that the size configuration selection switch [1] of the cassette matches this paper size configuration. If the selection switch position differs, set it to the corresponding paper size configuration. 3) Turn the paper size registration dial [2] to set it to the paper size that will be set.
1) Connect the power plug of the machine to the outlet and turn on the main power [1].
2-27
Chapter 2 9) Open the front cover and take out the color toner container replacement supply tab [1] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
[2]
F-2-94
10) Remove the color toner container replacement supply tab labels (2pc.) from the paper size label boards (2pc.). 11) Affix the 2 color toner container replacement supply tab labels [2] to the color toner container replacement supply tab [1].
[2]
[1]
F-2-91
4) Hold the lever [1] of the side guide plate and adjust the side guide plate to the specified size. 5) Hold the lever [2] of the trailing edge guide plate and detach it. Adjust the trailing edge guide plate for the specified size according to the indication at the bottom of the cassette.
[2]
[2] [1]
F-2-95
12) Attach the color toner container replacement supply tab.
2.2.16 Changing Paper Size of the Deck (Left/Right)

0002-6733
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Push the release button of the right deck and pull out the right deck. 2) Remove the 3 screws [4] of the trailing edge guide plate [1], the left guide plate [2] and the right guide plate [3], and then fix each guide plate to the position of the user's request.
[2] [1]
[1]
F-2-92
6) Affix the paper size label [1] of the paper size that has been set.
[4]
[3]
[1]
F-2-93
7) After setting the paper on the cassette, close the cassette. 8) Make the setting also for the other cassette.
F-2-96
2-28
Chapter 2 Factory settings: A4 size (100/230V), LTR size (120V) 3) After setting the paper on the right deck, close the deck. 4) Affix the paper size label [1] of the paper size that has been set.
[1]
[1]
F-2-99
6) Insert the yellow toner container [1].
F-2-97
5) Make the setting also for the left deck. 6) In the case that size change is implemented, make a registration of the front deck paper size in service mode. Right deck : COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C1 Left deck : COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C2 A4=0, B5=1, LTR=2 7) Push Reset twice to exit service mode.
2.2.17 Setting Color Toner Container

0002-6703
[1]
F-2-100
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Take out the color toner container (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan) from the attached package. 2) Hold the color toner container (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan) with both hands as shown in the figure, and shake it up and down for 10 times.
7) Turn the lock lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to attach the yellow toner container [2].
Use the color toner container replacement supply tab if necessary.
Do not touch the shutter or turn the knob when shaking the color toner container. Otherwise, toner can be leaked.
[2]
[1]
F-2-101
8) Close the color toner supply cover. 9) Close the front cover. 10) 'Set the toner container' is displayed on the control panel. 11) Repeat step 4) through 9) to attach the cyan toner container to the host machine. 12) 'Set the toner container' is displayed on the control panel. 13) Repeat step 4) through 9) to attach the magenta toner container to the host machine.
2.2.18 Supplying Black Toner

0002-6727
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Check that warm-up is complete. <By setting paper to the machine, 'Copy is available' is displayed on the control panel.
If executing "TONER-S (next step)" before the completion of warm-up, NG will be indicated.
F-2-98
3) 'Set the toner container' is displayed on the control panel. 4) Open the front cover. 5) Open the color toner supply cover [1].
2) Get in Service Mode. Select the following: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > to execute TONER-S (10 min on average, 13 min maximum).
2-29
Chapter 2
Countdown is performed on the screen while this mode is executed. 'OK!' is displayed on the screen once the mode is complete.
3) Press the reset key once.
2.2.19 ITB Cleaning

0002-6728
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Get in Service Mode. Select the following: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > to execute TBLT-CLN (approximately 20 sec).
'OK!' is displayed on the screen once this mode is complete.
2) Press ' ' key. 3) Select the following: Adjustment/Cleaning > Auto Gradation Adjustment > Full Adjust > to press 'Test Print 1' key. Test print 1 is printed out. Test print 1 is printed out. 4) Follow the instruction on the control panel to set the test print 1 on the copyboard glass. 5) Press 'Start Scan' key. Test print 1 is scanned. Test print 1 is scanned. 6) Once the display for test print removal is shown, remove the test print 1 from the copyboard glass. 7) Press 'Test Print 2' key. Test print 2 is printed out. 8) Follow the instruction on the control panel to set the test print 2 on the copyboard glass. 9) Press 'Start Scan' key. Test print 2 is scanned. 10) Once the display for test print removal is shown, remove the test print 2 from the copyboard glass. 11) Press 'Test Print 3' key. Test print 3 is printed out. 12) Follow the instruction on the control panel to set the test print 3 on the copyboard glass. 13) Press 'Start Scan' key. Test print 3 is scanned. 14) Once the scanning is complete, press 'Additional Functions' key once to exit from Additional Functions.
2) Press the reset key once.
2.2.22 Checking the Image/Operation

0002-6730 0002-6729
2.2.20 Supplying Color Toner

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Get in Service Mode. Select the following: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > to execute INISET-3 (approximately 14 min).
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) After setting the test chart on the copyboard glass, check the image by picking up paper from each cassette/deck. - Check that there is no abnormal sound - Check the image according to each magnification ratio. - Check that the operation by the specified print count is normal. - Check that the image picked up from each cassette/deck is in the specified value. There are two types of specification value as follows. Left edge margin of the image: 2.5 -/+ 1.5mm Lead edge margin of the image: 4 + 1.5/ -1.0mm
- Do not turn off the power switch while the machine is in operation. - If turning off the power while the machine is in operation, toner can be deposited on the ITB, causing image fault. In such case, get in Service Mode and select the following: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING >to execute TBLT-CLN, and then execute 'INISET-3'. - Countdown is performed on the screen while this mode is in operation. 'OK!' is displayed once the mode is complete.
If the image is out of the specification value, see the sections for 'Adjusting the Left Edge Margin on Image' and 'Adjusting the Lead Edge Margin on Image'
2.2.23 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration

0002-6734
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Adjust the horizontal registration as follows according to the source of paper:
MEMO: -ATVC control is executed with this mode. ATVC control can take time depending on the environment. In such case, the count on the screen may be repeated between 890 and 820.
1. Cassette 3 1) Press the cassette release button, and slide out the cassette 3 to the front. 2) Open the upper right cover and the lower right cover. 3) Insert a screwdriver through the hole in the front right stay; then, loosen the screw [1] to adjust the position of the adjusting plate [2].
[2]
2) Press the reset key once. 3) Get in Service Mode. Select the following: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > to execute SPLY-H-3 (approximately 45 sec).
- Do not turn off the power switch while the machine is in operation. - 'OK!' is displayed on the screen once this mode is complete.
[1]
4) Exit from Service Mode.
F-2-102
2.2.21 Setting the Auto Gradation Correction

0002-6731
- move the adjusting plate toward the rear to decrease the left margin. - move the adjusting screw toward the front to increase the left margin. 4) Check that the horizontal registration (left/right margin; L1) of the copy on paper from cassette 3 is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Clean the surface of the scanning glass on the copyboard of the machine.
2-30
Chapter 2
image
L1
[1] [2]
F-2-103
[1] Paper feed direction 5) Tighten the screw. 6) Close the upper right cover and the lower right cover. 7) Fit the cassette 3 back in. 2. Cassette 4 1) Perform the steps given for the cassette 3 to adjust the horizontal registration for the cassettes 4. 3. Left Deck 1) Press the release button, and slide out the left deck. 2) Remove the left face cover [1] using a flat-blade screwdriver.
F-2-107
Turn the screwdriver counterclockwise so as to decrease the horizontal registration (left/right margin) [1]. Turn the screwdriver clockwise so as to increase the horizontal registration (left/right margin) [2]. A full turn of the screwdriver moves the horizontal registration (left/right margin) by 1.0 mm. 6) Tighten the 2 screws you loosened in step 3). 7) Attach the left face cover you removed in step 2) back on the machine. 8) Close the left deck. 4. Right Deck 1) Press the release button, and slide out the right deck. 2) Open the upper right cover and the lower right cover. 3) Loosen the 2 screws [1], and insert a screwdriver [2] through the hole in the front right stay; then, turn the adjusting screw to adjust the horizontal registration.
[1]
F-2-104
3) Loosen the 2 screws [1], and insert a screwdriver through the hole in the front left stay; then, turn the adjusting screw to adjust the horizontal registration.
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-2-108
4) Check that the horizontal registration (left/right marking; L1) of the copy made on paper from the right deck is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
image
L1
[2]
F-2-105 F-2-109
4) Make a copy using the left deck as the source of paper; then, check that the horizontal registration (left/right; L1) is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
[1] Paper feed direction 5) If the output is not as indicated, make the following adjustments:
image
L1
[1]
F-2-106
[2]
[1] Paper feed direction 5) If the output is not as indicated, make the following adjustments:
F-2-110
Turn the screwdriver counterclockwise so as to decrease the horizontal registration (left/right margin) [1]. Turn the screwdriver clockwise so as to increase the horizontal
2-31
Chapter 2 registration (left/right margin) [2]. A full turn of the screwdriver will move the horizontal registration (left/ right margin) by 1.0 mm. 6) Tighten the 2 screws you loosened in step 3). 7) Close the right deck. 5. Manual Feed Tray 1) Loosen the 2 screws [1], and move the slide guide [2] to adjust the horizontal registration.
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-2-111
2) Check to see that the horizontal registration (left/right margin; L1) of the copy made on paper from the manual feed tray is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
[1]
F-2-113
image
L1
4) Tighten the screw that was loosened in the previous step. 5) Close the upper right cover and the lower right cover. 6) Close cassette 3. 7) Check that the left edge margin of the copied image from cassette 3 is: L1 = 2.5 -/+ 1.5mm.
F-2-112
[1] Paper feed direction 3) Tighten the screws you loosened in step 1) to attach the slide guide in place.
L1
image
2.2.24 Adjusting the Left Edge Margin on Image

0018-0673
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Adjusting method of cassette 3 1) Press the release button of cassette 3 to pull out cassette 3 toward the front. 2) Open the upper right cover and the lower right cover. 3) Insert a screwdriver into the hole of the front right stay, and loosen the screw [1] to adjust the position of the adjustment plate [2]. Move the adjustment plate toward the rear = left edge margin is reduced Move the adjustment plate toward the front = left edge margin is increased.
F-2-114
2. Adjusting method of cassette 4 1) As in the case of the adjusting method of cassette 3, be sure to adjust the left edge margin on the image for cassette 4. 3. Adjusting method of the left deck 1) Press the release button of the left deck to pull out the left deck. 2) Using a screwdriver, remove the left face cover [1].
2-32
Chapter 2
[1]
F-2-115
[1]
[2]
3) After loosening the 2 screws [1], insert a screwdriver [2] into the hole of the front left stay.
F-2-117
5) Tighten the 2 screws that were loosened in step 3). 6) Attach the left face cover. 7) Close the left deck. 8) Check that the left edge margin of the copied image from the left deck is: L1 = 2.5 -/+ 1.5mm
image
L1
[1]
[2]
F-2-118
4. Adjusting method of the right deck 1) Press the release button of the right deck to pull out the right deck. 2) Open the upper right cover and the lower right cover. 3) After loosening the 2 screws [1], insert a screwdriver [2] into the hole of the front right stay.
F-2-116
4) Insert a screwdriver [1] into the hole of the front left stay, and adjust the left edge margin by turning the adjustment screw. Turn the screwdriver counterclockwise (in the direction of [1]) = Left edge margin is reduced. Turn the screwdriver clockwise (in the direction of [2]) = Left edge margin is increased. By making a full turn of the screwdriver, the left edge margin varies by 1.0mm
2-33
Chapter 2 7) Close the right deck. 8) Check that the left edge margin of the copied image from the right deck is: L1 = 2.5 -/+ 1.5mm
image
L1
F-2-121
5. Adjusting method of the manual feed tray 1) Open the manual feed tray. 2) Loosen the screw [1] and move the attaching position of the slide guide [2] to adjust the horizontal registration.
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-2-119
4) Insert a screwdriver [1] into the hole of the front right stay, and adjust the left edge margin by turning the adjustment screw. Turn the screwdriver counterclockwise (in the direction of [1]) = Left edge margin is reduced. Turn the screwdriver clockwise (in the direction of [2]) = Left edge margin is increased. By making a full turn of the screwdriver, the left edge margin varies by 1.0mm
[1]
F-2-122
3) Tighten the screw that was loosened in step 1). 4) Check that the left edge margin of the copied image from the manual tray is: L1 = 2.5 -/+ 1.5mm
image
L1
F-2-123
5) Close the manual feed tray.
2.2.25 Adjusting the Lead Edge Margin of Image

0002-6735
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Get in Service Mode to select the following: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST 2) Change the setting value for adjustment. (1-increment of the setting shifts by 0.1mm. Larger the value, the more the image shifts to the lead edge direction) 3) Check that the lead edge margin of the image picked up from each cassette/deck is: L1 = 4.0 + 1.5/ - 1.0mm
[1] [2]
F-2-120
5) Tighten the 2 screws that were loosened in step 3). 6) Close the upper right cover and the lower right cover.
2-34
Chapter 2
L2
A4 A3
[1]
Image
[2]
F-2-124
[1] Paper's feeding direction
2.2.26 Securing the Machine in Place

0002-6736
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) If the machine is already at its site of installation, attach it using the 2 adjusters. 2) Remove the double-sided tape from the back of the service book case [1]; then, attach the case by matching its right edge against the line marking [3] found on the right side of the bottom plate [2] of the machine.
F-2-127
[1]
4) Attach the touch pen [1] on the control panel.

[1]
Be sure to match the front edge of the service book case against the front edge of the base plate of the machine.
F-2-128
5) Clean up the area around the machine, and fill out the service book. 6) Make necessary settings in user mode (date, time) and service mode (COPIER>OPTION>USER).
[1]
When shipped from the factory, the 230-V model is set to English for its language of display. If needed, change the setting. 7) Perform the following service mode item, and store the output away in the service book case: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT.
[2] [3]
F-2-125
In the course of installing the machine, be sure to record the various adjustment values indicated by P-PRINT (printout) to the Service Label attached behind the front cover.
Areas to Avoid - inside the machine (behind the front cover) - louver - grip slot 3) As appropriate, attach the 3 included labels ([1], [2], [3]) to the locations indicated in the figure: [1] Do Not Copy label (non-Japanese model) [2] Cleaning Instructions label (non-Japans model) [3] ADF size label
2.2.27 When the Machine is Not Connecting to the Network

0005-3940
MEMO; A message 'check the network connection' is displayed on the control panel when the machine is not connecting to the network. Set the value to '0' to hide. Service Mode (level 2) to select the following: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > NWERR-SW
[2]
[1]
F-2-126
2.2.28 Attaching the Shutdown Label

0011-7812
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci For iR C6880/C5880/C6870/C5870 only, 1) Attach the shutdown label [1] in appropriate language to the position described in the figure.
Attaching the ADF Size Label Spread the ADF size guide plate [1] fully; then, match segment A of the plate and the A4/A3 marking of the label [2].
2-35
Chapter 2
[1]
F-2-129
2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network

2.3.1 Overview
0002-6738
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Perform this item only when connecting the host machine to the network. If the user's network environment is TCP/IP, use Ping function to check that the network setting is properly executed. If the user's network environment is IPX/SPX or Apple Talk, this checking is not necessary.
2.3.2 Checking Network Connection

0017-9408
Perform this item only when connecting to the network.
1) Follow the instructions on the shutdown sequence screen to turn OFF the main power. 2) Connect the network cable with the host machine to turn ON the main power. 3) Inform the system administrator at the installation site that the host machine installation is complete and request the network settings of the host machine.
To make the network settings, the following Additional Functions item needs to be set [ON]. > System Settings > Network Settings > Change Settings/Display Connection Confirm.
If resetting the IP address, you need to turn OFF and then ON the main power to activate.
4) Follow the instructions on the shutdown sequence screen to turn OFF the main power. 5) Turn ON the main power switch.
2.3.3 Procedure for Ping Operation

0002-6739
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Select the following: > System Settings > Network Settings > TCP/IP Settings > IPv4 Settings > PING Command 2) Using the numeric key on the control panel, enter the IP address of the host machine that was set in Network Connection, and then press 'Execute' key. If IP address is valid, 'Reply from the host' is displayed. If not, 'No reply from the host' is displayed. The IP address you set is confirmed to be valid with the display of 'Reply from the host'.
2.3.4 Checking with Remote Host Address

0002-6747
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci You can check whether the connection to the network is successful or failed by executing Ping with the remote host address.
2-36
Chapter 2
MEMO: Remote host address: the IP address of the PC terminal connecting/ operating with the TCP/IP network environment that connects the host machine.
1) Inform the system administrator that you will check the network connection using Ping. 2) Check the remote host address with the system administrator. 3) Enter the remote host address to Ping. 4) In the case of 'Reply from the host', connection to the network is working. 5) In the case of 'No reply from the host', connection to the network is not working so execute the troubleshooting in the following page.
2.4 Troubleshooting the Network

2.4.1 Overview
0002-6749
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Perform this item only when connecting the host machine to the network. In the case of connection failure to the network, there can be the following causes: - TCP/IP setting of the machine is faulty - User network is faulty Detailed checking method is described in the next section.
2.4.2 Checking Connection Status of Network Cable

0002-6750
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Check if the network cable is properly connecting to the Ethernet port. - If the connection is working, go through the following check. - If the connection is not working, reconnect the cable and then check with the remote host address again.
2.4.3 Checking with Loopback Address

0002-6751
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Because the loopback address is returned just before the main controller PCB, you can check whether the TCP/IP setting of the machine is successful or failed by executing Ping with this loopback address. 1) Enter the loopback address (127.0.0.1) to Ping. - In the case of 'No reply from the host', check the TCP/IP setting of the machine again, and then execute Ping again. - In the case of 'Reply from the host', go through the following check.
2.4.4 Checking with Local Host Address

0002-6752
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Local host address is the IP address of the machine. Thus, you can check whether the PCB is working or faulty by executing Ping with this local host address since the reply is returned from the main controller PCB. 1) Enter the IP address of the machine to Ping. - In the case of 'No reply from the host', check and perform the following to execute Ping again. - Faulty IP address of the host machine: Check the IP address setting of the host machine again/Check with the system administrator that the allocated IP address is valid - Connection failure of the network PCB: Check the connection of the network PCB connector - Faulty network PCB: Replace the network PCB - In the case of 'Reply from the host', the user's network environment can be the problem, so inform the status to the system administrator and ask for a measure.
2.5 Relocating the Machine

2.5.1 Relocating the Machine
0002-6757
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci If you need to move the machine after installation, be sure to go through the following: 1) Remove all paper from the left/right deck and the cassettes. 2) Turn off the main power switch, and remove the power plug. If the grounding wire is connected, remove it. 3) Attach the scanner using the scanner fixing screw stored away from the time of installation. 4) Remove the black toner bottle, all color developing assemblies, and all color toner cartridges, and put them in separate boxes. 5) Tape the toner supply mouths of the developing rotary in place as soon as developing assemblies have been removed. Also, be sure to attach the developing assembly fixing arm using a screw.
[1]
F-2-130
2-37
Chapter 2 6) Tape the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever in place to protect against vibration. 7) Attach the covers, decks, and cassettes using tape. 8) Place A3 copy paper on the copyboard glass, and tape the ADF in place.
- If you must use a flight of stairs, keep the following in mind. - The machine weighs about 230 kg; be sure to work in a group of 4 persons. - Check that the 2 adjusters on the bottom plate of the machine are released; moreover, be sure not to lose them, as they tend to slip out because of the movement of the machine during relocation. - If a side paper deck or a finisher (accessory) is installed, be sure to remove it before starting to move the machine.
2.6 Installing the Card Reader

2.6.1 Points to Note About Installation
0002-6804
You need a Card Reader Attaching Kit-C2 for the installation.
When installing the equipment, see the Combination Table for Accessory Installation.

0003-0860
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci <Card Reader-C1>
[1] [2] [3]
F-2-131 [1] Card Reader 1 pc.
2-38
Chapter 2
[2] [3] RS tightening screw (M4x10) Toothed washer 1 pc. 1 pc.
<Card Reader Attaching Kit-C2>

[1] [2] [3] [4]
F-2-132 [1] [2]* [3]* [4] Card reader mount Joint plate Screw (Bind; M4X6) Screw (RS tight; M4X10) *Not use in this machine 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 2 pc.

0018-0749
Turning Off the Main Power When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's hard disk: 1) Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. 2) Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off. 3) Turn off the main power switch. 4) Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).
2.6.4 Installation Procedure

0002-6753
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Make the following selections in the host machine's service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD; then, enter a number (1 to 2001). - Use the lowest number of the cards that will be used by the usered. - As many as 1000 cards, starting with the number you enter, will be registered. 2) Turn off the host machine's main power switch. 3) Detach the right cover (upper) [1]. - 2 screws [2]
[1]
F-2-133
[2]
4) Attach the card reader base [1]. - 2 screws (RS tightening; M4X10) [2]
2-39
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
F-2-134
5) Insert the harness [1] of the card reader through the hole [2] in the card reader base.
[1]
6) Attach the card reader [1] to the card reader base [2]. - 1 screw (RS tightening; M4X10) [3] - 1 toothed washer [3]
[2]
F-2-135
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-2-136
7) Route the card reader harness through the wire saddle, and connect the connector [1].
2-40
Chapter 2
[1]
F-2-137
8) Cut the section [1] of the right cover (upper) indicated in the figure using nippers.
[1]
F-2-138
9) Attach the right cover (upper) you removed in step 3). 10) Turn on the main power switch, and check that a message has appeared asking for a control card. 11) Insert a control card, and check that the machine is ready to make copies.
2.6.5 Using with NetSpot Accountant (NSA)

0002-6799
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Make the following selections in Additional Function: system control settings>group ID control>count control; then, check IDs 00000001 thorough 00001000 have been created (i.e., if you entered '1' as the first number in service mode): COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD). 2) Make the following selections in Additional Function: system control settings>network settings>TCP/IP settings>IP address; then set up the following: IP address, gateway address, subnet mask.
Take care. If you fail to register [system control group] and [system control ID No.], you will not be able to perform 'register card to device' as part of NSA setup work.
3) Under [system administrator info] of Additional Function, enter any number for [system control group] and [system control ID No.]. 4) Turn off the control panel switch. 5) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
2.7 Installing the NE Controller-A1

2.7.1 NE Controller-A1 Installation Procedure
0003-6957
Installation procedure on the iR C6800 series is only described here. Regarding setting methods, operation check and notes, refer to the installation manual supplied with this machine.
1) Detach the upper cover of controller (Refer to the installation manual). 2) Connect the plug of AC adapter to the controller (Refer to the installation manual). 3) Unscrew 4 screws [1] and detach the blanking plate [2] of the rear cover (upper).
2-41
Chapter 2
[2]
[1]
F-2-139
4) Connect the cable [1] of controller to the connector [2] of the copier.
[2] [1]
F-2-140
5) Mount the controller [1] on the rear cover (upper) using 4 screws supplied with the controller.
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-2-141
6) Take the slack out of the cables between the iR host machine and the controller, make bundles of them at the side of host machine, and fix them with the cable clamp [1].
[1]
F-2-142
7) Make necessary settings and check operations by following the installation manual for NE controller-A1.
2.8 Installing the Original Tray

0017-6889
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci <Document Tray-M1>
2-42
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
F-2-143 [1] [2] [3]* Document tray Stepped screw (M4X31) Stepped screw (M4X33)
[3]
1pc. 2pc. 2pc.
* Not used for this host machine

0017-6892
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Fix the 2 stepped screws (M4X31) [2] to the right cover (upper) [1].
[1]
[2]
F-2-144
2) Place the document tray [1] onto the stepped screws that have been fixed in step 1.
[1]
F-2-145
2-43
Chapter 2
If the document tray is difficult to set, loosen the 2 stepped screws and then fix them again.

0002-6801
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci <Document Tray-K1>
[1]
F-2-146 [1] [2] Original holder Stepped screw (M4) 1 pc. 2 pc.
[2]
2.8.4 Attachment
0002-6754
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Attach the 2 stepped screws [2] in the right cover (upper) [1].
[1]
[2]
F-2-147
2) Hook the original holder [1] on the stepped screws you attached in step 1).
[1]
F-2-148
2.9 Installing the Key Switch Unit

0003-1366
2-44
Chapter 2 <Key Switch Unit-A2>

[1] [2] [3]
F-2-149 [1] [2] [3] Key switch unit Control key Screw (binding; M4X6) 1pc. 1pc. 1pc.

0017-7049
How to turn off the main power switch When turning off the main power, be sure to follow the steps described below to protect the hard disk of this product. 1) Press the power switch on the control panel for 3 seconds or more. 2) Perform the shutdown sequence displayed on the screen with the touch panel so that the main power switch can be turned off. 3) Turn off the main power switch. 4) Disconnect the power plug.

0002-6756
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Free the reader power cable [1]. 2) Detach the right cover (upper rear) [2]. - 2 screws [3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-2-150
3) Cut the point [1] at the right cover (upper rear) that is shown in the figure with nippers.
2-45
Chapter 2
[1]
F-2-151
4) Detach the control SW support plate [1]. - 2 screws [2]

[2] [1]
[2]
F-2-152
5) Attach the key switch unit [1] to the control SW support plate [2] in the direction of the arrow. - 1 screw (binding; M4X6) [3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-2-153
6) Route the harness [1] of the key switch unit through the edge saddle [2].
[2]
[1]
F-2-154
7) Connect the connector [1] of the key switch unit.
2-46
Chapter 2
[1]
F-2-155
8) Attach the parts that have been detached. - Control SW support plate - Right cover (upper rear) 9) Insert the reader power cable. 10) Connect the power plug and the turn on the main power switch.
2.9.4 Checking After Installation

0017-7294
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Enter service mode. Select COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > KEY and enter '1'. 2) Exit service mode. 3) Perform the shutdown sequence to turn off the power. 4) Turn on the main power switch. 5) Check to see that the message 'Please set the control key' is displayed on the control panel screen. 6) Insert the control key and check to see that making a copy is possible.
2.10 Installing the Reader Heater

2.10.1 Checking the Parts
0011-7561
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Prepare the following parts because each part of the Cassette Heater is assigned as service part. <Reader Heater>
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
F-2-156 T-2-2
[5]
No. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Name Mirror heater Lens heater Cable clamp Heater harness retainer RS tightening screw (M4x8)
Part No. FK2-0229-000 FK2-0228-000 WT2-0507-000 FC5-2945-000 XB3-6400-805
Qty. 1 pc. 1 pc. 2 pc. 1 pc. 4 pc.
2-47
Chapter 2

0011-7568
How to Turn Off the Main Power When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following steps to protect the hard disk: 1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more. 2) Follow the instructions on the shutdown sequence screen to let the main power switch be ready to turn off. 3) Turn off the power switch. 4) Disconnect the power plug.

0011-7565
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the DADF. 2) Detach the glass retainer [1]. - 2 screws [2] 3) Remove the copyboard glass [3].
[2] [3]
[1]
F-2-157
When removing the copyboard glass, be sure to take care not to touch the glass surface. (Soil attached there may cause black lines on the image.) If soiling is found, clean it using lint-free paper and alcohol solution.
4) Pick the cut-up (bend) [A] of the mirror stay shown in the figure, and move the No. 1 mirror base [1] fully to the right.
2-48
Chapter 2
[1]
[A]
F-2-158
5) Fit the front side of the mirror heater [1] to the side plate, and connect the connector [2]; then, secure it in place using 2 screws [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-2-159
6) Secure the heater harness retainer [1]. - 1 screw (RS tigtening; M4X8) [2]
2-49
Chapter 2
[2]
[1]
F-2-160
7) Move the No. 1 mirror base [1] fully back to the left.
[1]
F-2-161
8) Insert the cable clamp [1] into the hole [2] of the frame.
[1]
[2]
F-2-162
9) Attach the lens heater [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 1 cable clamp [3] - 1 screw (RS tightening; M4X8) [4]
2-50
Chapter 2
[2] [3]
[4] [1]
F-2-163
Move it fully so that there is no gap in the direction of [A], and tighten the screw. At this time, take care so that the claw of the heater [1] will not open. Also, check to be sure that the bottom of the heater is firmly in contact.
[A]
[1]
10) If the cable is slack, fit the cable clamp [1] as shown, and fix the cable [2] in place using the cable clamp.
[2]
[1]
F-2-164
If the vertical size sensor kit exits, check to be sure that the cable is fitted to the 2 clamps [A] as shown in the figure.
2-51
Chapter 2
[A]
11) Mount the copyboard glass and the glass retainer by reversing the steps used to remove them. 12) Close the DADF. 13) Turn on the environment switch [1].
ON
ON
[1]
F-2-165
2.11 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit

2.11.1 Points to Note About Installation
0018-0745
When installing the equipment, see the Combination Table for Accessory Installation.
2.11.2 Checking Items in the Package

0011-5499
2-52
Chapter 2
<Voice Guidance Kit-B1>
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
F-2-166
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[1] [3] [5] [7]* [9] [11] [13]* [15]*
Speaker unit (upper) Cable (1300mm) Cord guide (4 cord guide to be used) Voice Guidance Board Face Plate Binding screw (M3X6) Binding screw (M4X40) Binding screw (M4X16) Clamp
1pc. 1pc. 7pc. 1pc. 2pc. 2pc. 1pc. 1pc.
[2] [4]* [6] [8] [10] [12]* [14]
Speaker unit (lower) Cable (1850mm) Voice Guidance Board Voice Guidance Board Face Plate Binding screw (M4X6) Binding screw (M3X16) Ferrite core
1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc.
*Not to be used for this machine
Please see the table below for CD/guides.
Voice Guidance Guide Voice Guidance Guide CD
1 pc. 1 pc.
2.11.3 Checking Items in the Package

0018-3213
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci <Voice Guidance Kit-C1>
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
F-2-167
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[1] [3] [5] [7]* [9]
Speaker unit (upper) Cable (1300mm) Cord guide (4 cord guide to be used) Voice Guidance Board Face Plate Binding screw (M3X6)
1pc. 1pc. 7pc. 1pc. 2pc.
[2] [4]* [6] [8] [10]
Speaker unit (lower) Cable (1850mm) Voice Guidance Board Voice Guidance Board Face Plate Binding screw (M4X6)
1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc.
2-53
Chapter 2
[11] [13]* [15]* Binding screw (M4X40) Binding screw (M4X16) Clamp 2pc. 1pc. 1pc. [12]* [14] Binding screw (M3X16) Ferrite core 1pc. 1pc.
*Not to be used for this machine
Please see the table below for CD/guides.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Voice Guidance Guide (E) Voice Guidance Guide (F) Voice Guidance Guide (I) Voice Guidance Guide (G) Voice Guidance Guide CD Sheet,FCC/IC(Class A)

0011-5500
Turning Off the Main Power When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's hard disk: 1) Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. 2) Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off. 3) Turn off the main power switch. 4) Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).

0011-5502
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Installation Procedure 1) Open four cable clamps [1] to release a reader communication cable [2].
[2]
[1]
F-2-168
2) Detach the rear cover (upper) [1]. - 7 screws [2]
2-54
Chapter 2
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-2-169
3) Detach the controller box cover [1]. - 16 screws [2]

[1] [2]
[2]
[2]
[2]
F-2-170
4) Attach the voice board face plate [2] to the voice board [1]. - 2 screws (binding; M3X6) [3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-2-171
5) The slide switch SW1 found on the voice guidance board is set to 33 MHz at time of shipment; be sure to set it to 66 MHz for use on this machine.
2-55
Chapter 2
66MHz
F-2-172
Checking the slide switch SW1 on the voice guidance board The slide switch (SW1) on the Voice Guidance Board-A1 is provided as a means of switching frequencies (33 MHz/66 MHz) to suit the transfer speed of the PCI bus. It is important for the switch setting to suit the transfer speed so that the voice will be free of interruption. For the machine, 66MHz is the correct position of the switch.
33MHz
66MHz
6) Detach the face plate [1]. - 2 screws [2]

[2]
[1]
F-2-173
7) Attach the voice board [1]. - 2 screws [2] removed in step 6)
Be sure to insert the board in the vertical direction to the connector.
2-56
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
[1]
8) Attach the controller box cover. 9) Attach the rear cover (upper). 10) Insert the reader communication cable and fix it with cable clamp. 11) Mount the speaker unit (lower) [1] on the upper right cover of main body with two screws (Bind; M4X40).
[1]
[2]
F-2-174
12) Mount the speaker unit (upper) [1] on the speaker unit (lower) mounted at the previous step, and fix it using a screw (Bind; M4X6) [2] from beneath.
2-57
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
F-2-175
13) Remove a cord guide cover [1].

[1]
F-2-176
14) Peel off the release paper of cord guide [1] and affix them as shown in the figure. Right side --- 1 position
[1]
F-2-177
Back --- 3 positions
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-2-178
15) Plug the cable [2] into the speaker unit [1].
2-58
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
F-2-179
16) Run the cable [1] through the cord guide [2] and mount the cord guide cover [3].
Be sure that there is no slack of the cable.
Right side --- 1 position
[2]
[3]
F-2-180
[1]
Back --- 3 positions

[1] [2]
[2]
[2]
F-2-181
[3]
17) Mount the ferrite core [1] on the cable. The length [2] should be less than 50mm.
[1]
[2]
F-2-182
18) Plug the cable [1] into the terminal [2] of voice board.
2-59
Chapter 2
[1]
[2]
F-2-183
19) Plug the power plug of the host machine. 20) Turn on the main power switch. 21) Check if the voice board is recognized. Enter service mode. COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS > PCI1 If 'voice board' is indicated for PCI1, the board is correctly recognized by the machine. Exit service mode. 3. Making Settings After Installation To make use of the Voice Guidance Kit after turning on the host machine, you need to make the following settings in Additional Function: 1) Additional Function > System Setting > Voice Guide Manegement Setting > Use Voice Guide. 2) Check to see that ON is displayed. 4. Checking the Operation - To Enable 1) Hold down the Reset key 3 sec or more. 2) See that the copy count on the screen is enclosed in red, indicating 'Voice Guidance' is ready for use. - To Disable 1) Hold down the Reset key for 3 sec or more.
2-60
Chapter 3 Basic Operation
Contents
Contents
3.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Functional Construction............................................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2 Arrangement of the Major PCBs ................................................................................................................................................. 3-2 3.1.3 Arrangement of the Major PCBs ................................................................................................................................................. 3-2 3.1.4 DC Controller............................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................3-5

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On.................................................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Control During Printing (full-color).............................................................................................................. 3-5 3.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operation During Printing (mono color)....................................................................................................... 3-6
Chapter 3
3.1 Construction
3.1.1 Functional Construction
0002-9602
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine is broadly divided into the following 3: reader unit, printer unit, and system unit. Of these 3, the printer unit serves as the core of the machine, and consists of the following 5 functional blocks: laser exposure system, image formation system, pickup/feed system, fixing/delivery system, printer control system.
Reader [A] [4] [B] [5] Printer [G] [22] [F] System [H] [23] [21] [E] [16] [I] [17] [14] [15] [13] [J] [20] [8] [9] [11] [10] [12] [7] [6] [C] [D] [3] [1] [2]
[18] [19]
HDD
F-3-1
1. Reader Unit [A]Original Exposure System [1] original [2] scanning lamp [3] optical system [4] CCD/analog processor PCB [B]Reader Control System [5] reader controller PCB 2. Printer Unit [C]Laser Exposure System [6] laser/scanner unit [D]Image Formation System [7] photosensitive drum [8] Bk developing assembly [9] M developing assembly [10]Y developing assembly [11]C developing assembly [12]intermediate transfer belt (ITB) [E] Pickup/Feeding System [13] pickup control assembly [14] transfer assembly [15] lower feeding assembly [16] left deck [17] right deck [18] cassette 3 [19] cassette 4 [F] Fixing/Delivery System [20] fixing assembly [21] reversing assembly [G] Printer Control System [22] DC controller PCB 3. System Unit [H] System Control Block [23] Main controller PCB 4. Accessory [I] optional board
3-1
Chapter 3 [J] side paper deck
3.1.2 Arrangement of the Major PCBs

0002-9608
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN Arrangement of the Major PCBs

[3]
J1810 J1802 J116 J115 J123
[4]
J119
J121 J122
J250
[5]
J252, 253 J251
[6]
J127 J1105 J1130 J1135 J1203 J1301 J1204
[7]
J2118
J1212 J1201, 1202
[1]
J1101
[2]
J1102,1134 J1104 J1111B J1133 J1119B J1115,1116
J1901,1902
[8]
J353 J1501 J1601,1603 J1701
[9] [10] [11] [12]
J1402,1403
[13]
J1119 J1302
[14]
F-3-2
[1] Main controller PCB [2] DC controller PCB [3] AC driver PCB [4] main DC power supply PCB [5] Sub DC power supply PCB 1 [6] Sub DC power supply PCB 2 [7] Control panel CPU PCB [8] Laser drive PCB [9] BD PCB [10] HVT1 PCB [11] HVT2 PCB [12] HVT3 PCB [13] Pickup driver PCB [14] Fixing/feeding driver PCB The arrows $ in the figure indicate connections of PCB, not the direction of signals.
3.1.3 Arrangement of the Major PCBs

0011-6747
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Arrangement of the Major PCBs
3-2
Chapter 3
J691, 693
J682 J682
J111 J122
[15]
J681
[4]
J115 J123 J119
J121
J250 J252, 253
[5]
J251
J1802
[3]
J1810
[6]
J127 J1105 J1130 J1135
[7]
J2118 J1004, 1005, 1006 J1201, 1202
J1212 J1301 J1204
[1]
J1101 J1102,1134 J1104 J1111B J1133 J1119B J1901,1902 J353 J1501 J1601,1603 J1701
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[2]
J1115,1116
J1402,1403
[13] [14]
J1119
J1302
F-3-3
[1] Main controller PCB [2] DC controller PCB [3] AC driver PCB [4] main DC power supply PCB [5] Sub DC power supply PCB 1 [6] Sub DC power supply PCB 2 [7] Control panel CPU PCB [8] Laser drive PCB [9] BD PCB [10] HVT1 PCB [11] HVT2 PCB [12] HVT3 PCB [13] Pickup driver PCB [14] Fixing/feeding driver PCB [15] All nigit power supply PCB
The arrows in the figure indicate connections of PCB, not the direction of signals.
3.1.4 DC Controller
0002-9609
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the functional construction of the DC controller PCB:
3-3
Chapter 3
IC21 IC29 IC35
IC40 IC47
IC41
BAT1
F-3-4
BAT1 (lithium battery) serves as the backup battery for RAM. IC21 (PWM IC) converts image data from ASIC1 into data processed by pulse width modulation. IC29 (ASIC1) controls the laser driver, high-voltage mechanisms, fixing control mechanisms, and motors. IC35 (CPU) controls printing sequence, high-voltage mechanisms, finisher, interface with the controller, and various loads (sensor, clutch, solenoid). IC40 (Flash ROM) stores firmware. IC41 (ASIC2) controls communication between finisher and CPU. IC47 (RAM) stores settings data (e.g., service mode).
BATI [4] IC47 IC40

(Flash-ROM)
IC35 (CPU) [5]
[1]
IC41
(ASIC2)
[2]
IC21
(PWM-IC)
[6]
[3] IC29 (ASIC1)
[7]
[8]
[9]
F-3-5
[1] Finisher (accessory) [2] Side paper deck (accessory) [3] Motors
3-4
Chapter 3 [4] Main controller PCB [5] Loads (sensor, clutch, solenoid) [6] Laser drive PCB [7] BD PCB [8] HVT [9] Fixing assembly
3.2 Basic Sequence

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On
0005-0125
T-3-1 Period WMUP (warm-up) SREADY (scanner ready) WMUPR (warm-up rotation) PSTBY (print standby) Description with the drive system at rest, until the temperature of the external heating roller reaches 190 deg C. from when shading correction ends unit the Start key is pressed or the main power switch is turned off. with the drive system starting up, until the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 200 deg C, that of the pressure roller reaches 140 deg C, and that of the external heating roller reaches 225 deg C. the machine is ready to accept the copy/print request signal.
Main switch ON Scanner motor (M501) Scanning lamp (LA1)

Scanner HP sensor (PS501) Shading position *1 Shading position
Shading correction
SREADY
STBY
Shading position Gain adjustment Offset adjustment
:forward :reverse
Main switch ON WMUP

About 510sec Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub heater (H2) Shift heater (H3) *1 225 degrees *4 *1 *2 200 degrees *3 170 degrees
WMUPR
PSTBY
Outside heating roller heater (H4) Fixing motor (M4)

Outside heating roller shift motor (M22)
Drum/ITB motor (M2)

Developing rotary motor (M5) Developing motor (M2) Auto adjustment *6
*5
F-3-6
*1: the fixing main heater and the pressure heater go on alternately. *2: if the temperature of the fixing roller is 200 deg C, that of the pressure roller is 140 deg C, and that of the external heating roller is 225 deg C, the alternate activation is ended. *3: the pressure heater is subject to activation control. *4: if the temperature of the external roller is 190 deg C or higher, the fixing motor starts up. *5: the motor rotates and stops for auto adjustment. *6: the image stabilization control mechanism is executed only if the surface temperature the fixing roller is lower than 100 deg C. - potential control - primary transfer ATVC - secondary transfer ATVC - D-max control - D-half control (when the power is turned on with its color print counter reading 500 or higher.
3.2.2 Basic Sequence of Control During Printing (full-color)

0004-7828
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci A4, Full-color (1 print), Right deck
3-5
Chapter 3
T-3-2 Period PSTBY (print standby) PINTR (initial rotation) PRINT LSTR (last rotation) Description the machine is ready to receive the coy/print request signal. from when the machine has received the print request signal to when it discharges paper. from when all toner has been transferred to paper and the paper is delivered. from when the paper has been delivered to when all drive has been stopped.
reading: book, 1 A4 original printing: A4, plain paper, single-sided, full color, 1 print
Start key ON PSTBY PINTR [1] PRINT LSTR PSTBY
Laser scanner motor(M1) PVREQ signal Laser

Drum/ITB motor (M2) Primary charging bias
M [1]
Bk
Grid bias
Developing rotary motor (M5) Black developing bias Color developing bias
Pre-transfer charging bias Primary transfer bias Secondary transfer bias Right deck pickup motor (M17) Deck (right) pickup solenoid (SL6) Right deck pull-off motor (M14)
Manual feed pre -registration motor (M6)
[2] [3] M Y C Bk
[4] [6]
[5]
Registration motor (M8) Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub heater (H2) Shift heater (H3) Outside heating roller heater (H4) 200 degrees 170 degrees 225 degrees 200 degrees 170 degrees
Fixing motor (M4)

[7] [9] [10]
[8]
F-3-7
[1] used to stabilize the rotation. [2] developing rotary shifts to home position>point of M development>point of Y development>point of C development>home position [3] preparation for black development [4] transfer to paper [5] cleaning of the secondary transfer outside roller [6] pickup from the right deck [7] maintenance operation of the fixing roller [8] anti-deformation operation of the fixing roller (every 30 min after the stop of the fixing roller) [9] external heating roller brought into contact with the fixing roller [10] external heating roller moved away from the fixing roller
3.2.3 Basic Sequence of Operation During Printing (mono color)

0004-7834
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci A4, Mono color (1 print), Right deck
T-3-3 Period PSTBY (print standby) PINTR (initial rotation) Description The machine is ready to accept the copy/print request signal. from when the machine has received the print request signal to when it generates the image signal.
3-6
Chapter 3
Period PRINT LSTR (last rotation) Description from when all toner has been transferred to paper and the paper is delivered. from when the paper has been delivered to when all drive has been stopped.
reading: book, 1 A4 original printing: A4, plain paper, single-sided, mono color, 1 print
Start key ON PSTBY
Laser scanner motor(M1) PVREQ signal Laser

Drum/ITB motor (M2) Primary charging bias
PINTR [1]
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
Bk [1]
Grid bias
Developing rotary motor (M5) Black developing bias Color developing bias
Pre-transfer charging bias Primary transfer bias Secondary transfer bias Right deck pickup motor (M17) Deck (right) pickup solenoid (SL6) Right deck pull-off motor (M14)
Manual feed pre -registration motor (M6)
[2]
Bk
[3] [5]
[4]
Registration motor (M8) Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub heater (H2) Shift heater (H3) Outside heating roller heater (H4) 200 degrees 170 degrees 225 degrees 200 degrees 170 degrees
Fixing motor (M4)

[6] [8] [9]
[7]
F-3-8
[1] period used to stabilize rotation [2] preparation for development [3] transfer to paper [4] cleaning of the secondary transfer outside roller [5] pickup from the right deck [6] maintenance operation of the fixing roller [7] anti-deformation operation of the fixing roller
3-7
Chapter 4 Main Controller
Contents
Contents
4.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Functional Construction............................................................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.2 Functional Construction............................................................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.1.3 Functional Construction............................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry .........................................................................................................................4-4

4.2.1 Main Controller PCB (main) ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-4 4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (main) ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-6 4.2.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.2.4 Expansion Bus PCB..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.2.5 SRAM PCB.................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-8 4.2.6 SRAM PCB.................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-8 4.2.7 HDD ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-9
4.3 Start-Up Sequence........................................................................................................................................................4-10

4.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-10 4.3.2 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.3.3 Start-Up Sequence ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.3.4 Start-Up Sequence ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.4 Actions when HDD Error ............................................................................................................................................4-14

4.4.1 E602 in Detail ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-14 4.4.2 E602 in Detail ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.4.3 E609 in Detail ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-21
4.5 Image Processing .........................................................................................................................................................4-21

4.5.1 Overview of the Flow of Image Data ........................................................................................................................................ 4-21 4.5.2 Overview of the Flow of Image Data ........................................................................................................................................ 4-21 4.5.3 Construction of the Image Processing Modules ........................................................................................................................ 4-22 4.5.4 Construction of Image Processing Modules .............................................................................................................................. 4-23 4.5.5 Reader Input Image Processing ................................................................................................................................................. 4-24 4.5.6 Reader Input Image Processing ................................................................................................................................................. 4-24 4.5.7 Compression/Decompression and Editing Blocks..................................................................................................................... 4-25 4.5.8 Compression, Decompression, and Edit Processing Blocks...................................................................................................... 4-26 4.5.9 Printer Output Image Processing ............................................................................................................................................... 4-27 4.5.10 Printer Output Image Processing ............................................................................................................................................. 4-28
4.6 Flow of Image Data......................................................................................................................................................4-29

4.6.1 Flow of Image Data (copier function) ....................................................................................................................................... 4-29 4.6.2 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions ................................................................................................................................. 4-30 4.6.3 Flow of Image Data (Box function)........................................................................................................................................... 4-30 4.6.4 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 4-31 4.6.5 Flow of Image Data (SEND function) ....................................................................................................................................... 4-31 4.6.6 Flow of Image Data for SEND Functions.................................................................................................................................. 4-32 4.6.7 Flow of Image Data (fax transmission) ..................................................................................................................................... 4-32 4.6.8 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions ............................................................................................................... 4-33 4.6.9 Image Data Flow for Fax Reception Functions ......................................................................................................................... 4-33 4.6.10 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions................................................................................................................... 4-34 4.6.11 Flow of Image Data (PDL function) ........................................................................................................................................ 4-34 4.6.12 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions .................................................................................................................................. 4-35
4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure.......................................................................................................................................4-36

4.7.1 Controller Box ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-36
4.7.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Controller Box ..............................................................................................................................................4-36 4.7.1.2 Preparation for Removing the Controller Box ..............................................................................................................................................4-36 4.7.1.3 Removing the Controller Box .......................................................................................................................................................................4-36
Contents
4.7.1.4 Removing the Controller Box....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-37
4.7.2 Main Controller PCB (main) ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-38

4.7.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)........................................................................................................................ 4-38 4.7.2.2 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)........................................................................................................................ 4-38 4.7.2.3 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)................................................................................................................................................. 4-38 4.7.2.4 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main)........................................................................................................................................ 4-39 4.7.2.5 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)................................................................................................................................................. 4-39 4.7.2.6 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main)........................................................................................................................................ 4-41
4.7.3 Main Controller PCB (sub)........................................................................................................................................................ 4-41

4.7.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) .......................................................................................................................... 4-41 4.7.3.2 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) .......................................................................................................................... 4-42 4.7.3.3 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)................................................................................................................................................. 4-42 4.7.3.4 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub) ................................................................................................................................................... 4-43
4.7.4 Expansion Bus PCB................................................................................................................................................................... 4-43

4.7.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Expansion Bus PCB ..................................................................................................................................... 4-43 4.7.4.2 Removing the Expansion Bus PCB .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-43 4.7.4.3 After Replacing the Expansion PCB ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-44
4.7.5 SRAM PCB................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-44

4.7.5.1 Preparation for Removing the SRAM PCB .................................................................................................................................................. 4-44 4.7.5.2 Removing the SRAM Board......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-44
4.7.6 UFR Board ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-44

4.7.6.1 Preparation for Removing the UFR Board ................................................................................................................................................... 4-44 4.7.6.2 Removing the UFR Board ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-44
4.7.7 Ethernet Board ........................................................................................................................................................................... 4-45

4.7.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Ethernet Board ............................................................................................................................................. 4-45 4.7.7.2 Removing the Ethernet Board....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-45
4.7.8 HDD........................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-45

4.7.8.1 Preparation for Removing the HDD ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-45 4.7.8.2 Making a Backup of Data (reference only) .................................................................................................................................................. 4-45 4.7.8.3 Handling the HDD ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-46 4.7.8.4 Preparation for Removing the HDD ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-47 4.7.8.5 Removing the HDD ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-47 4.7.8.6 After Replacing the HDD ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-47 4.7.8.7 After Replacing the HDD ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-48 4.7.8.8 Removing the HDD ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-48
4.7.9 Controller Fan ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-48

4.7.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Controller Fan .............................................................................................................................................. 4-48 4.7.9.2 Preparation for Removing the Controller Fan .............................................................................................................................................. 4-48 4.7.9.3 Removing the Controller Fan ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-48 4.7.9.4 Removing the Controller Fan ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-48
Chapter 4
4.1 Construction
0018-2988
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The main controller block of the device has the following functions and mechanisms:
T-4-1 PCB [1] Main controller PCB (main) Description system control, memory control, printer output image processing control, color space conversion, rotation for electronic sorting, binary processing, resolution conversion
[2]
Main controller PCB (sub PE-A) image processing for printer output (color space compression, background removal, LOG conversion, direct mapping, color balance, zoom fine adjustment, gradation conversion, screen processing, framing, add-on)
[3] [4]
Rely PCB (Gu-short) Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A)
bus connection (when EFI controller not connected) scanner interface, scanner image processing (resolution conversion, image rotation, compression/expansion)
[5] [6]
Main controller PCB (sub LAN- LAN connection, HDD controller, HDD power supply bar-C) SRAM PCB SRAM mount
[7]
DDR-SDRAM
program-related data retention, image data retention boot program retention system software storage, image data storage, Box/fax function image data retention
BOOT ROM BOOT ROM HDD HDD
[B]
HDD
[7]
[6] BOOT ROM
F-4-1
4-1
Chapter 4
T-4-2 [A] [B] [C] Reader unit DC controller PCB Printer unit

0003-2433
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The machine's main controller block consists of the following components that serve specific functions:
T-4-3 Item Main controller PCB (main) Description controls the system, memory, and printer output image processing.
Main controller PCB (sub) Expansion bus PCB
processes reader input images. controls the color LCD and card reader interface.
SRAM PCB Image memory (SDRAM) BOOTROM HDD
retains service mode settings and HDD control data using SRAM. stores image data temporarily. stores the boot program. stores the system software; retains Box/fax function image data.
4-2
Chapter 4
Reader unit
SRAM PCB
Expansion bus PCB Main controller PCB (sub) Main controller PCB (main) Reader input image processing HDD
DC control PCB
BOOT ROM Printer unit Image memory (SDRAM)
- system control - printer output image processing
F-4-2

0011-2727
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C The main controller block of the device has the following functions and mechanisms:
T-4-4 PCB [1] Main controller PCB (main) Description system control, memory control, printer output image processing control
[2]
Main controller PCB (sub R-A)
color space conversion, rotation for electronic sorting, binary processing, resolution conversion
[3]
Main controller PCB (sub PE-A) image processing for printer output (color space compression, background removal, LOG conversion, direct mapping, color balance, zoom fine adjustment, gradation conversion, screen processing, framing, add-on)
[4]
Rely PCB (Gu-short) main controller PCB (sub O-A)
bus connection (when EFI controller not connected) EFI controller connection scanner interface, scanner image processing (resolution conversion, image rotation, compression/expansion)
[5]
Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A)
[6] [7]
Main controller PCB (sub LAN- LAN connection, HDD controller, HDD power supply bar-A) SRAM PCB SRAM mount
4-3
Chapter 4
PCB DDRSDRAM DDR-SDRAM Description program-related data retention, image data retention boot program retention system software storage, image data storage, Box/fax function image data retention
BOOT ROM BOOT ROM HDD HDD
[B]
HDD
[8]
[7] BOOT ROM
F-4-3 T-4-5 [A] [B] [C] Reader unit DC controller PCB Printer unit
4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry

4.2.1 Main Controller PCB (main)
0002-0606
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The following shows the major control functions of the main controller PCB (main) grouped according to jack/IC:
4-4
Chapter 4
J1101 IC31 J1102 J1103 J1104 J1105 IC35 J1106 IC15 IC9
HDD0
IC23 J1112 J1107
IC12
IC3 IC2
J1108
F-4-4 T-4-6 Jack No. J1101 J1102 J1103 J1104 J1105 J1106 J1107 J1108 Description expansion bus PCB slot main controller PCB (sub) connection slot image conversion board connection slot USB interface board/TokenRing connection slot UFR board/OPEN I/F board connection slot Ethernet board connection slot image memory (SDRAM, 512 MB; standard) image memory (SDRAM, 256 MB; optional for 100-V model or standard for 120/230-V model)
J1112 HDD0
boot ROM connection slot hard disk connection connector
T-4-7 IC No. IC9 Description controls the processing of images coming from IC12 for output to the printer.
IC12
controls image input/output functions, image rotation function, resolution conversion function, and binary processing function.
4-5
Chapter 4
IC No. IC15 Description controls the conversion of 4-bit serial image data coming from IC9 into 8-bit parallel image data; keeps track of video count.
IC23
CPU: system control raster JPEG compression/decompression network controller PCI bus controller ROM/RAM controller serial communication controller
IC31 IC35
I/O processing of signals HDD controller
4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (main)

0011-3880
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following show the major jacks found on the main controller PCB (main):
J1009 J1008 J1010 J1011 J1012 J1013
IC2
J1003
IC10 IC1 J1024 J1001
IC11
J1034
J1002
F-4-5 T-4-8 J No. J1001 Description image memory (512 MB DDR-SDRAM standard)
J1002 J1034 J1003 J1009 J1008
image memory (512 MB DDR-SDRAM standard) boot ROM connection slot SRAM PCB connection slot main controller PCB (sub R-A) connection slot main controller (sub PE-A) connection slot
4-6
Chapter 4
J No. Description
J1010 J1011 J1012 J1013 J1024
main controller PCB (sub O-A, optional) connection slot, or relay PCB (Gu-short) connection slot main controller board (sub SJ-A) connection slot Optional board connection slot main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A) connection slot reserved
4.2.3 Main Controller PCB (sub)

0002-0688
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The following shows the major functions of the main controller PCB (sub) grouped according to jack/IC:
IC17
J1302
IC15
F-4-6 T-4-9 Jack No. J1302 Description connector for reader unit communication
T-4-10 IC No. IC15 IC17 Description controls image processing of input image data from the reader unit. controls indication of images read by the scanner.
4.2.4 Expansion Bus PCB

0002-0689
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The following shows the major functions of the expansion bus PCB grouped according to jack/IC:
J1403
IC8 IC10
IC12
F-4-7 T-4-11 Jack No. J1403 Description connector for the SRAM PCB.
4-7
Chapter 4
Jack No. Description
T-4-12 IC No. IC8 IC10 Description LCD controller NE controller, coin vendor, interface ASIC for card reader connection
BAT
backup battery for SRAM
4.2.5 SRAM PCB

0002-0690
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The following is a discussion of the major control functions of the SRAM indicated with reference to ICs:
Face
Back
IC3
IC2 BAT1 IC1

F-4-8 T-4-13 IC No. IC1,2,3 (SRAM) Description retains control information on the image data stored on the HDD; retains service mode settings data and Additional Function settings data
4.2.6 SRAM PCB

0011-2729
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the principal control mechanisms of the SRAM PCB according to IC: Face
BAT1
F-4-9
Back
IC2
IC1
F-4-10
4-8
Chapter 4
T-4-14 IC No. IC1,2(SRAM) Description stores the following: control information on the image data stored on the HDD, service mode settings data, user mode settings data
4.2.7 HDD
0003-3826
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN As many as 9 partitions (units or blocks of division) are created on the HDD, and each partition is assigned a specific task.
T-4-15 Partition DOSDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV Description stores general-use data. stores image data. stores thumbnail display data for image data. stores image data. stores general-use files temporarily (e.g., PDL spool). stores PDL-related files (font, registration form, ICCProfile, PDL color correction information file).
DOSDEV4 BOOTDEV DOSDEV5
stores user data (address book, transfer settings). stores system software. for future expansion.
DOSDEV
HDD
FSTDEV DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 BOOTDEV DOSDEV5
F-4-11
The following shows the construction of the machine's system software:

T-4-16 System software Function Location Remarks
System
system module (overall control)
HDD (BOOTDEV)
Language
language module (LCD indication control) HDD (BOOTDEV)
RUI
language module (remote UI control)
HDD (BOOTDEV)
4-9
Chapter 4
System software Function Location Remarks
Boot
machine startup
BootROM
DIMM
G3FAX
G3 fax control
G3 fax board
DIMM
Dcon
DC controller control reader controller control
DC control PCB
hardwired flash ROM
Rcon
reader controller PCB
hardwired flash ROM
RCON
DCON
G3FAX
G3 fax unit DC controller PCB
BOOT
Main controller PCB (main)
HDD
SYSTEM Language RUI BOOTDEV
F-4-12
4.3 Start-Up Sequence

4.3.1 Overview
0000-7737
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The system software used to control the operation of the machine is stored on the HDD. When the machine is started up, the CPU on the main controller PCB reads the system software from the HDD into the image memory (SDRAM) of the main controller PCB for use as instructed by the boot program of the boot ROM. The following screen remains on the control panel white the CPU is reading the system memory from the HDD into the image memory (SDRAM), with the bar indicating the progress of the startup sequence.
4-10
Chapter 4
Progress bar
F-4-13
Never turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated. The CPU is accessing the HDD, and turning off the power can cause a fault (E602) on the HDD.
4.3.2 Overview
0011-2730
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The system software used to control the operation of the machine is stored on the HDD. When the machine is started up, the CPU on the main controller PCB reads the system software from the HDD into the image memory (DDR-SDRAM) of the main controller PCB for use as instructed by the boot program of the boot ROM. The following screen remains on the control panel white the CPU is reading the system memory from the HDD into the image memory (DDR-SDRAM), with the bar indicating the progress of the startup sequence.
Progress bar
F-4-14
Never turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated. The CPU is accessing the HDD, and turning off the power can cause a fault (E602) on the HDD.
4.3.3 Start-Up Sequence

0011-2731
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1.Boot Program (interval 1) The boot program is executed by the CPU on the main controller PCB when the main power switch is turned on, making checks on the image memory (DDRSDRAM) and the HDD condition. 2.Control Program 1 (interval 2) 1)The individual devices (i.e., hardware components on the controller PCB) are checked and initialized. 2)If the engine was not previously turned off appropriately (i.e., by performing its shut-down sequence), the system files are repaired as necessary. (The engine may need an extra time when starting up.) 3)The individual program modules are initialized. 3.Control Program 2 (interval 3) 1)The individual software modules are initialized, and the printer and screen configurations are established. 2)The start-up sequence ends when the printer and scanner are correctly recognized. The engine becomes ready to accept a job when the start-up sequence ends normally. (Its control panel displays the control screen, and the Start key LED changes from red to green.)
4-11
Chapter 4
2
F-4-15
CPU
System software
HDD ROM Main controller PCB (main) : access to the program at time of execution. : flow of system program operations.
F-4-16
4-12
Chapter 4
CPU
HDD
ROM
: access to the program at time of execution.

F-4-17
4.3.4 Start-Up Sequence

0000-7741
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1. Boot ROM Area a. Self-Diagnostic Program (interval 1) When the main power switch is turned on, the CPU of the main controller PCB runs a self-diagnostic program, which checks the condition of the image memory (SDRAM) and the HDD. If a fault is found, the machine will indicate its presence by an error code. b. Boot Program (interval 2) When the self-diagnostic program ends normally, the CPU on the main controller PCB executes the boot program to read the system software from the HDD, writing it to the system area of the image memory (SDRAM). 2. Image Memory (SDRAM) Area> (interval 3) The machine initializes its various parts using the system software written into memory by the boot program (i.e., I/F settings for the main controller). When all ends normally, the machine becomes ready for a job (indicating the Operation screen on the control panel, and changing the Start LED key from red to green).
2
F-4-18
4-13
Chapter 4
- Self diagnosis program being executed
Image memory (SDRAM)

System area Image data area
CPU
HDD
Self diagnosis program BootROM Main controller PCB (main) : access to program at time of execution. F-4-19 Boot program
- Boot Program in Execution
Image memory (SDRAM) System area Image data area
CPU
System software
Self diagnosis program Boot ROM
Boot program
HDD
Main controller PCB (main) : access to program at time of execution : flow of system program
F-4-20
4.4 Actions when HDD Error

4.4.1 E602 in Detail
0002-3236
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN If the machine suffers a fault associated with E602-xxyy, it calls for different remedial actions as identified by the sub code.
if E602-xxyy is indicated, be sure always to turn off and then on the machine (so that it will run auto recovery sequence).
4-14
Chapter 4
T-4-17 xx Partition yy Description
00
HDD as a whole
01
The machine cannot recognize the HDD. The machine cannot find BOOTDEV at time of startup. Remedy: Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the 2 types of cables (power, IDE) connecting to the HDD; then, turn on the power. When doing so, check to see if the HDD rotates and if the power is supplied.
NG
02
The machine cannot find the system software for the CPU of the main controller (main) in BOOT DEV.
Remedy:
E
03
NG
The machine detects a read error sector while it is reading data from BOOTDEV.
Remedy:
H
06
NG
NG
The machine cannot find the system software for the CPU of the main controller (sub) in BOOTDEV.
Remedy:
E
07
NG
The machine cannot find an appropriate ICCProfile in BOOTDEV/PDLDEV.
Remedy:
NG
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 FF
DOSDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 BOOTDEV DOSDEV5 not identified
01, 02
The machine has encountered a read error or a file system error while starting up. Remedy:
NG
NG
if xxyy is 0701, 0702. Remedy: Ask the user to use the RUI to collect address book data, transfer settings, and user mode data.
NG
NG
if xxyy is 0801, 0802. Remedy:
NG
NG
if xxyy is FF01, FF02.
4-15
Chapter 4
xx Partition yy Description
Remedy:
A
03
NG
NG
The machine has encountered an HDD contact fault or, operating system error. Remedy: Turn off the main power, and check the 2 types of cable (power, IDE) connecting to the HDD; then, turn on the main power. While doing so, check to see if the HDD rotates and if power is supplied.
NG
NG
11,21
The machine has encountered an HDD contact fault.
Remedy: Turn off the main power, and check the 2 types of cable (power, IDE) connecting to the HDD; then,turn on the power. While doing so, check to see if the HDD rotates and if the power is supplied.
NG
13,25
The machine has encountered a read error. Remedy:
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
10,12,14,2 The machine has encountered a system error or a packet data error. 2,23, 24 Remedy:
NG
A: 1) Make the following selections, and enter '1': COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE. 2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to perform: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HDCHECK*. 3) When done, turn off and then on the main power. B: 1) Find the appropriate CHK-TYPE from the table 'HDD Format' ; then, make the followingselections, and type: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE. 2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to perform: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR. 3) When done, turn off and then on the main power. C: 1)** Start up the machine in normal mode (i.e., turn on the main power while pressing the 1 and 7 keys ; then, make the following selections, and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD). 2) Perform formatting of DOSDEV4 using the Service Support Tool. 3) When done, turn off and then on the main power. D: 1) Replace the main controller (main) board. 2) Remove the image memory (SDRAM) and the boot ROM from the previous board, and attach them on the new board. E: 1)** Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the power while pressing the 2 and 8 keys). 2) Format the HDD (ALL) using the Service Support Tool, and download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI). 3) When done, turn off and then on the main power. F:
4-16
Chapter 4 1)** Replace the HDD, and start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while pressing the 2 and 8 keys). 2) Format the HDD (ALL) using the Service Support Tool, and download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI). 3) When done, turn off and then on the main power. G: 1) Make the following selections, and enter '1': COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE. 2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to perform: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR. 3) When done, turn off and then on the main power. H: 1) Turn off the main power; then, turn on the main power while pressing the 1 and 9 keys (so that the machine will automatically start its remedial program*, turning the control panel solid black). 2) When done (i.e., when the control panel turns white), turn off and then on the main power.
If the machine does not run its remedial program in response to the foregoing step, go to E. I: 1) Find the appropriate CHK-TYPE in the table "HDD Format"; then, make the following selections and enter CHK-TYPE. 2) Make the selections, and press the OK key to perform: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK*. 3) When done, turn off and then on the main power. J: 1) Make the following selections, and enter '4': OPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE. 2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key to perform: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK (1 to 5 min). 3) When done, turn off and then on the main power. * Takes about 30 to 50 min. ** As necessary, ask the user to use the RUI to collect address book data, transfer settings, and user mode settings.
T-4-19 HDD Format Partition DOSDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV CHK-TYPE 1 1 1 1 2 3 PDL spool PDL-related file (font, registration form, ICCProfile) Typical data item deleted all relating to images (reservation, Box, fax); mode memory, routine task button
DOSDEV4 BOOTDEV DOSDEV5 non specific
4 4 5 0
user data (address book, transfer settings), system software

0011-2732
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Related Service Mode CHK-TYPE =COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE (Specifies the partitions to be formatted by HD-CLEAR) HD-CHECK =COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK (Performs Write Abort repairs for the entire HDD when CHK-TYPE = 0) HD-CLEAR =COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR (Formats the partitions specified by CHK-TYPE) E602-XXYY XX='00'
4-17
Chapter 4
T-4-20 XX YY Description Remedial action 1. Turn off the main switch, and check the HDD cable. Thereafter, turn on the main switch. 2. Check to see if the HDD rotates at power-up. Check to see if 5V/12V power is being supplied. 3. If the foregoing fails to correct the fault, replace the HDD and reinstall the system software. If the fault still persists, replace the main board.
01
The HDD is not recognized. The boot partition (BOOTDEV) is not found at time of start-up.
02
1. Start up in safe mode; then, execute full formatting using the SST, reinstall the system software (System, There is no system software for the main Lang, RUI), and turn off and then on the main switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD. Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. CPU. 1. Locate the sector that shows WriteAbort, and repair it. <in the case of black-and-white E code> 1-1 Go through the following, as service mode cannot be started: 1-2 Turn off the power; then, while holding down the 1 and 9 keys, turn on the power so that the WriteAbort sector repair routine will start automatically, causing the screen to go solid black. 1-3 Allow for some time (40 to 50 min). A progress indictor will appear. When the screen turns solid white, the repair is over. <in the case of spanner icon indication> 1-1 Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HD-CHECK (40 to 50 min); then, turn off the main switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main switch. 3. If the fault still persists, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software. 1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software. 1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
00 03
WriteAbort has been detected in BootDevice.
06
The system software of the sub CPU is missing.
07
ICCProfile is missing.
XX='01 to FF
XX YY YY=10, YY=00, YY=11, YY=13, 12,14,22 YY=05 01,02,04 21 25 ,23,24 During normal operation HDD formatting
YY=03 CHK Partition in TYP question E
At time of start-up Description
XX
HDD formattin HDD HDD g by formattin Items formattin normal g by safe deleted g by HD- mode + mode + Remedy Remedy Remedy Remedy Remedy Remedy (typical) CLEAR SST SST
4-18
Chapter 4
image data storage area (e.g., Box)
01 02
FSTDEV
*1 *1
*5 *5
*9 *9
*10 *10
*11 *11
*12 *12 FSTDEV possible selected (3 (3 partitions partitions simultane simultane ous) ous)
IMG_MNG image management data
03
image data storage area (for FSTCDEV Chasing)
*1
*5
*9
*10
*11
*12
all stored data (e.g., Box)
04 2 05
general-purpose data APL_GEN storage area general-purpose data storage area (temporary TMP_GEN file)
*1
*5
*9
*10
*11
*12
General
*1
*5
*9
*10
*11
*12
06 07
TMP_FAX fax (temporary file) TMP_PSS PSS (temporary file)
*1 *1
*5 *5
*9 *9
*10 *10
*11 *11
*12 *12
APL_GE possible N (4 selected partitions (4 General simultane partitions ous) simultane ous) FAX PSS
3 08
PDLDEV
PDL-related file storage area (font, registration form, ICCProfile, PDL function color correction information file)
possible *1 *5 *9 *10 *11 *12 UserFont IccProfil e
PDLDE V selected
09 10 11 5 6
BOOTDEV Firmware storage area (Booktable, MEAP, Key, certificate, PDF dictionary, RUI content, voice dictionary (ICC profile, PS test data)) APL_MEA P MEAP APL_SEN D Not identified address book, filter HDD full sector fault check and repair
Not possible
Not possible
*3 *1 *2
*8 *5 *5
*9 *9 *9
*10 *10 *10
*11 *11 *11
*12 *12 *12
System MEAP SEND possible Not possible possible Not possible
0 FF
*4
*7
*9
*10
*11
*12
YY *1 03
Description WriteAbort(start-up)
Remedial action 1. Indicate the partition in question for CHK-TYPE; then, execute HDD-CHECK (several min to several 10s of min); then, turn off and then on the power. 2. If the foregoing fails, indicate the partition for CHK-TYPE, and execute HDD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then on the main power switch.
*2
03
WriteAbort(start-up)
1. If possible, ask the user to make a backup of the data (address book) using the remote UI. 2. Indicate the partition in question for CHK-TYPE, and execute HDD_CHECK (several min to several 10s of min); then, turn off and then on the main power switch. 3. If the foregoing fails, start download mode, and execute full formatting and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main power switch.
*3
03
Recovery on the boot partition always calls for the use of SST in safe mode: 1. Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HDD-CHECK (several 10s of min); then, turn off and then on the power. 2. If the foregoing fails, start download mode, and execute full formatting and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main power switch.
*4
03
1. Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HDD-CHECK (several 10s of min); then, turn off and then on the power. 2. If the foregoing fails, use CHK-TYPE-1, 2, 3, 5 to execute HDD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then on the power.
4-19
Chapter 4
YY *5 05 Description file system error Remedial action 1. Indicate the partition for CHK-TYPE, and execute HDD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then on the main switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
*6
05
file system error
HDD-CLEAR cannot be executed in service mode so as to prevent inadvertent deletion of data for address book, filter, and the like. 1. If possible, ask the user to make a backup of the data for address book using the remote UI. 2. Start in service mode, and start download mode. Execute full formatting using the SST, and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main power switch.
*7
05
file system error
This error seldom occurs. 1. Using CHK-TYPE=1, 2, 3, 5, execute HDD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then on the power. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
*8
05
file system error
Repair of the boot partition always calls for the use of the SST in safe mode. 1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main power switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
*9
00,01, HDD contact fault, or v x Works 02,04 system error
1. Check the cable and power supply connectors. 2. If the foregoing fails, start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and then on the main power switch. 3. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
*10
11,21
HDD contact fault
This error seldom occurs in the course of normal read/write operations. 1. Check the cable and power connectors. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
*11
13,25
WriteAbort
The text file on the HDD (e.g., Box) may be damaged. 1. Indicate the partition for CHK-TYPE, and execute HDD-CHECK (several min to several 10s of min); then, turn off and then on the power. 2. If the forgoing fails, indicate the partition for CHK-TYPE, and execute HDD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then on the main switch. (In the case of BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2, or APL_SEND, execute formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software.) 3. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
*12
10,12, system error, or packet data error 14 22,23, 24
This error occurs in response to corruption of data or a bug in software. 1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main power switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD; replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.
E602-XXYY XX="20"
T-4-21 XX YY 00 01 20 02 Description Remedial action
Authentication error between the main unit 1. Remove and insert the encryption board, and turn the power OFF/ON. and encryption board 2. After clearing the encryption key (*), perform HDD formatting and system reinstallation work by SST. The encryption board cannot be recognized. Failure in the encryption board / HDD 1. After clearing the encryption key (*), perform HDD formatting and system reinstallation work by SST. 1. Remove and insert the encryption board, and turn the power OFF/ON. 2. After clearing the encryption key (*), perform HDD formatting and system reinstallation work by SST. 3. After replacing the encryption board, perform HDD formatting and system reinstallation work by SST. 4. After replacing the HDD, perform HDD formatting and system reinstallation work by SST. 5. Replace the main controller PCB.
*: Clearing of the encryption key can be performed from the service mode "COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>KEY-CLR (Level 2)". After this operation, the HDD becomes unformatted, and if the machine is activated in this condition, E602-0001 is displayed. Therefore, it is necessary to perform HDD formatting and system
4-20
Chapter 4 reinstallation work by SST.

0005-9582
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN E609 is an HDD error associated with the HDD from Samsung. See below for its cause and remedy.
T-4-22 Code E609 Detail Possible Cause/Description Samsung HDD-related error code 0000 at time of start-up, there is no increase in temperature to a specific level. Replace the HDD. Remedy
0001 at time of sleep recovery, the temperature does not reach a specific level.
Turn off and then on the main power supply. If resetting fails, replace the HDD.
4.5 Image Processing

4.5.1 Overview of the Flow of Image Data
0003-2506

Other iR machine
Original
A Copy Scan - SEND - FAX - PullScan - E-Mail - PDL Print - BOX
A Print output
A Image data
PC
F-4-21
4.5.2 Overview of the Flow of Image Data

0011-2733
4-21
Chapter 4
Other iR machine
Original
A Copy Scan - SEND - FAX - PullScan - E-Mail - PDL Print - BOX
A Print output
A Image data
PC
F-4-22
4.5.3 Construction of the Image Processing Modules

0003-2509
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The machine's major image processing mechanisms are carried out by the main controller PCB(main). The following shows the construction of the modules associated with these mechanisms:
Reader controller PCB Reader unit Interface PCB
Reader Input Image Processing Block Processes image data collected by the reader unit.
SRAM PCB
Expansion bus PCB Main controller PCB (sub)
DC control PCB
Processes image data from the reader unit for output to the printer.
SDRAM
HDD
- image memory - program temporary storage
F-4-23
4-22
Chapter 4
4.5.4 Construction of Image Processing Modules

0011-2734
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The device uses a main controller (main) and other 4 types of main controllers (sub) to process image data. The modules associated with image processing are as follows:
[1]
[A]
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[B]
[6]
HDD
BOOT ROM
[C]
[8] [7]
F-4-24 T-4-23 PCB Main controller PCB (main) [1] Main controller PCB (sub R-A) [2] color space conversion, resolution conversion, binary processing, image merge, image shift, rotation, compression expansion Description system control, memory control, printer output image processing control
Main controller PCB (sub PE-A)
printer output image processing (color space compression, background removal, LGO conversion, direct mapping, color balance, zoom fine-adjustment, gradation conversion, screen processing, framing, add-on)
[3]
Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A) [4]
scanner interface, scanner image processing (resolution conversion, image rotation, compression expansion)
Main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A)
LAN connection, HDD controller, HDD power supply, USB-Host, USB-Device
[5]
4-23
Chapter 4
PCB Reader unit [A] Reader controller PCB [B] Main controller PCB (main) [C] DC controller PCB [D] Description
4.5.5 Reader Input Image Processing

0003-2928
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The image data (RGB data) from the CCD unit is processed by the main controller PCB (sub).
Reader unit RGB 24 Main controller PCB (sub) IC15 Processing that takes the place of conventional input masking; executes color correction for the CCD RGB filters.
RGB phase correction black character identification Input y correction
IC17
Input direct mapping ACS identification
Hereafter, Bk signals only in the case of mono color mode.
- edge emphasis - smoothing Image area image signal generation - anti-see-through (BE) - Bk generation (mono color)
- framing - blanking - frame erasing
RGB IC12

F-4-25
4.5.6 Reader Input Image Processing

0011-2735
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The image data (RGB data) collected by the CCD is processed by the main controller PCB (sub SJ-A, sub R-A, sub PE-A).
4-24
Chapter 4
Reader unit RGB 24 Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A, sub R-A, sub PE-A)
Processing taking the place of conventional masking. Executes color correction for the CCD RGB filters.
RGB phase correction Input gamma correction Input direct mapping
If mono-color mode, only Bk signals hereafter.
- Edge enhancement - Smoothing - See-though prevention (BE) - Bk generation (mono-color mode)
- Framing - Blanking - Frame erasing CMYK

F-4-26
4.5.7 Compression/Decompression and Editing Blocks

0000-7753
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN IC12 is used to compress/decompress and edit various data.
4-25
Chapter 4
Reader unit RGB Main controller PCB (sub) 24
RGB Main controller PCB (main)
24
4-image area signal
IC9 Y M C Bk PDL input IC12 JPEG compression

Resolution conversion/ magnification
PC
JPEG decompression
Rotation IC23
Color conversion
JPEG compression
Binary processing
JPEG decompression
SDRAM
HDD
for fax transmission
F-4-27
4.5.8 Compression, Decompression, and Edit Processing Blocks

0011-2736
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The main controller PCB processes data for compression, decompression, and editing.
4-26
Chapter 4
Reader unit RGB Main controller PCB (main + sub) 24
4 Image area signal
JPEG compression JPEG decompression Resolution conversion Magnification processing Rotation
PDL input IC1
Color conversion PC JPEG compression Binary processing
JPEG decompression DDR-SDRAM
HDD
F-4-28
4.5.9 Printer Output Image Processing

0000-7754
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN Main controller PCB processes image data from the Reader unit for output to the printer.
4-27
Chapter 4
Reader unit
RGB Main controller PCB (sub)
24
RGB If ACS identifies the original as being black-and-white, the machine generates the Bk signal here. (Otherwise, the data is let to pass through the block.) Main controller PCB (man)
24
area signal
RGB
24
area signal
If color mode is selected, the Bk signal is generated here.
- background removal (AE) - Bk generation

RGB-to-CMY conversion output direct mapping
The text area is subjected to UCR processing.
CMYK
- F value adjustment - color balance correction output gamma correction Best screen selection Smoothing - framing - blanking
Y,M,C,Bk 24 area signal
The correction LUT is prepared as part of PASCAL control.
To DC controller PCB
Y,M,C,Bk
- image data serial/ parallel conversion - video count
F-4-29
4.5.10 Printer Output Image Processing

0011-2737
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The main controller processes the image data arriving from the reader unit for output to the printer unit.
4-28
Chapter 4
Reader unit
RGB Main controller PCB (main + sub (R-A)/ (sub PE-A) RGB
24
Here, the Bk signal is generated if an ACS session identifies the original as being black-and-white. (Otherwise, it is let through.)
24
Image area signal
In color mode, the Bk signal is generated here.
- Background removal - Bk generation RGB->CMY conversion Output direct mapping
For the text area, UCR processing is executed.
CMYK - F value adjustment - Color balance correction Output gamma correction Optimum screen selection Smoothing - Framing - Blanking CMYK 32 Image area signal
A correction LUT is prepared as part of PASCAL control.
To DC controller PCB
Y,M,C,Bk
- Image data serial/parallel conversion - Video count
F-4-30
4.6 Flow of Image Data

4.6.1 Flow of Image Data (copier function)
0000-7755
4-29
Chapter 4
Reader unit RGB 24
Main controller PCB (sub) RGB 24

image area signal
Main controller PCB (main) DC controller PCB JPEG compression

JPEG decompression
Magnification
Rotation
Color conversion
SDRAM HDD
F-4-31
4.6.2 Flow of Image Data for Copier Functions

0011-2738
Reader unit Main controller PCB (main) + (sub R-A) + (sub PE-A) RGB DC controller PCB JPEG decompression JPEG compression 24 Image signal
Magnification Rotation Color conversion
DDR-SDRAM HDD
F-4-32
4.6.3 Flow of Image Data (Box function)

0000-7757
4-30
Chapter 4
Reader unit RGB 24

image area signal
Main controller PCB (main) DC controller PCB

JPEG decompression JPEG compression
Decompression conversion
Rotation
SDRAM HDD
F-4-33
4.6.4 Flow of Image Data for Box Functions

0011-2739
Reader unit Main controller PCB (main) + (sub SJ-A) + (sub R-A) + (sub PE-A)
RGB DC controller PCB JPEG decompression JPEG compression
24
Image area signal
Resolution conversion Rotation
DDR-SDRAM HDD
F-4-34
4.6.5 Flow of Image Data (SEND function)

0000-7760
4-31
Chapter 4
Reader unit RGB 24

image area signal

JPEG decompression Resolution conversion Rotation JPEG compression
for B/Wimage
Binary processing
MMR compression
HDD SDRAM
Image conversion board
Ethernet board
F-4-35
4.6.6 Flow of Image Data for SEND Functions

0011-2740
Reader unit Main controller PCB (main) + (sub SJ-A) + (sub R-A) + (sub PE-A)
RGB
24
Image signal Resolution conversion Rotation
For black-and-white image
JPEG decompression JPEG compression Binary processing MMR compression
HDD DDR-SDRAM

F-4-36
4.6.7 Flow of Image Data (fax transmission)

0000-7764
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The following shows the flow of image data when fax transmission functions are used:
4-32
Chapter 4
Reader unit RGB 24
Main controller PCB (sub) RGB Main controller PCB (main) JPEG compression
JPEG decompression MMR compression
image area signal
Resolution conversion Rotation Binary processing HDD
SDRAM
Fax board
F-4-37
4.6.8 Flow of Image Data for Fax Transmission Functions

0011-2741
Reader unit
Main controller PCB (main) + (sub SJ-A) + (sub R-A) + (sub PE-A))
RGB JPEG compression
Image area signal Resolution conversion
JPEG decompression Rotation MMR compression Binary processing
HDD SDRAM
Fax unit
F-4-38
4.6.9 Image Data Flow for Fax Reception Functions

0000-7766
4-33
Chapter 4
DC controller PCB
Main controller PCB (main) Resolution conversion Rotation
HDD SDRAM
Fax board
F-4-39
4.6.10 Flow of Image Data for Fax Reception Functions

0011-2742
DC controller PCB
Main controller PCB (main + sub) Resolution conversion Rotation
HDD SDRAM
Fax unit
F-4-40
4.6.11 Flow of Image Data (PDL function)

0000-7770
4-34
Chapter 4
Display list data GDI-UFR Reader unit LIPS data LIPS PS pint server unit*1
CMYK RGB RGB
PS data PS
Main controller PCB (sub)
Open interface board*1

CMYK RGB
UFR board
Printer output image processing block
DC controller PCB
IC9
IC12 JPEG compression IC23 JPEG compression
SDRAM
HDD
F-4-41
4.6.12 Flow of Image Data for PDL Functions

0011-2743
Direct Print Expansion Kit-D1 DISPLAY LIST data

JPEGTIFF/PDF
LIPS LX LIPS data LIPS V/PS Expansion Kit-D1 PS Print Server Unit-G1
CMYK RGB RGB
PS data PS
Main controller PCB (sub 0-A)
Main controller PCB (main + sub) DC controller PCB JPEG compression JPEG decompression
DDR-SDRAM HDD
F-4-42
4-35
Chapter 4
4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure

4.7.1 Controller Box 4.7.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Controller Box
0011-0830
[2]
[1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the Left Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 3) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)] 4) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 5) Remove the Controller Box Cover. 5-1) Remove the controller box cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-4-45
[1]
[1]
4.7.1.3 Removing the Controller Box

0011-6627
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1)Slide it in the direction of the arrow to detach the connector [1]; then,detach the main controller box [2]. - 2 edge saddle[3] - 1 clamps[4] - 10 connectors [5] - 9 screws[6]
[2]
F-4-43
[1]
F-4-44
4.7.1.2 Preparation for Removing the Controller Box

0011-6486
F-4-46
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Left Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 3) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)] 4) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 5) Remove the Controller Box Cover. 5-1) Remove the controller box cover [2]. - 16 screws [1]
F-4-47
4-36
Chapter 4
[1]
[1]
F-4-52 F-4-48
3) Remove the 9 screws [1] used to attach the main controller box.
[1]
0002-9795
4.7.1.4 Removing the Controller Box

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the 9 connectors [1].
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-4-53
F-4-49
[1]
F-4-54
[1] [1]
F-4-50
2) Remove the harness from the 3 harness retainers [1].
[1]
F-4-55
4) Move the main controller box [1] toward the delivery side to remove.
F-4-51
4-37
Chapter 4
[1]
[1]
F-4-56 F-4-59
During removal/attaching, be sure to take care not to damage the connector [2] found at the joint to the DC controller PCB.
4.7.2.2 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)

0011-6488
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 2) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)] 3) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 4) Remove the Controller Box Cover. 4-1) Remove the controller box cover [2]. - 16 screws [1]
[2] [1]
[2]
F-4-57
4.7.2 Main Controller PCB (main) 4.7.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)
0011-0971
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 2) Reove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)] 3) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 4) Remove the Controller Box Cover. 4-1) Remove the controller box cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-4-60
4.7.2.3 Removing the Main Controller PCB (main)

0011-6487
[1]
[1]
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Disconnect the connector [1] of the controller fan. *The main controller box has already been detached.
[2]
F-4-58
4-38
Chapter 4
F-4-61
F-4-65
2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] of the main controller PCB (sub LANbar-A).
6) Detach main controller PCB [1] in upward direction. - 1 BOOTROM PCB - 1 SRAM PCB - 1 COUNTER PCB
F-4-62
3) Remove the 10 screws [1] from the side of the controller box. *The main controller box has already been detached.
F-4-66
4.7.2.4 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main)

0011-6489
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When you have mounted the main controller PCB (main), be sure to put back all the PCBs you have so far removed: [1] BootROM [2] Image memory (DDR-SDRAM) [3] Main controller PCB (sub R-A) [4] Main controller PCB (sub PE-A) [5] Relay PCB (Gu-short) [6] Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A) [7] Main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A) [8] HDD
F-4-63
4) Remove the 5 PCBs [1] from the main controller PCB (main). *The main controller box has already been detached. main controller PCB (sub R-A) main controller PCB (sub PE-A) relay PCB (Gu-short) main controller PCB (sub SJ-A) main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A)

0003-6139
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the connector [1] of the controller fan.
[1]
F-4-67 F-4-64
2) Remove the boot ROM [1] and the image memory (SDRAM) [2]. 3) Remove the 2 connectors [3].
5) Detach the main controller PCB [1] in upward direction. E8 screws [2]
4-39
Chapter 4
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-4-68
F-4-72
4) Remove the 2 screws each [1] [3] [5], and remove the following: - expansion bus PCB [2] - main controller PCB (sub) [4] - Ethernet board [6]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-4-73
7) Remove the 9 screws [1] used to attach the main controller box.
[4]
[1]
[6]
F-4-69
[5]
5) Remove the 9 connectors [1].

[1]
[1]
[1]
F-4-74
F-4-70
[1]
F-4-75
[1]
F-4-71
6) Remove the harness from the 3 harness retainers [1].
4-40
Chapter 4
[1]
[1]
F-4-76
8) Move the main controller box [1] toward the delivery side.
F-4-80
4.7.2.6 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main)

0003-6168
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN After attaching the main controller PCB (main), be sure to attach all PCBs you may have removed before replacement: [1] boot ROM [2] image memory (SDRAM) [3] expansion bus PCB [4] main controller PCB (sub) [5] Ethernet board
[1]
[1]
F-4-77
When moving the DC controller box, be sure to take care so as not to damage the connector [2] in the joint to the DC controller PCB.
[2]
[2]
F-4-81
[3]
F-4-78
9) Remove the main controller PCB [2]. - 8 screws [1]
[1]
[4] [5]
F-4-82
4.7.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) 4.7.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub)
[1]
F-4-79
0011-0601
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 2) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)] 3) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 4) Remove the Controller Box Cover. 4-1) Remove the controller box cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
4-41
Chapter 4
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-83
[1]
F-4-85

0011-6630
[1]
F-4-84
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1.Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub R-A) 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main controller PCB (sub R-A) [2].
4.7.3.2 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub)

0011-6629
F-4-86
2.Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub PE-A) 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main controller PCB (sub PE-A) [2].
F-4-87
3.Removing the Relay PCB (Gu-short) 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the relay PCB (Gu-short) [2].
4-42
Chapter 4
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-4-88
4.Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub SJ-A) 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the main controller PCB (sub SJ-A) [2].
[2]
F-4-91
[1]
F-4-89 F-4-92
5.Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A) 1) Remove the main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar-A) - 2 connectors [1]. - 2 screws [2]
5) Remove the SRAM Board. 5-1) Remove the SRAM board [2]. - 2 locks [1]
[2]
0003-5504
[1]
4.7.3.4 Removing the Main Controller PCB (sub)

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the main controller PCB (sub) [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-4-93
4.7.4.2 Removing the Expansion Bus PCB

0003-5545
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the expansion bus PCB [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[2] [1]
F-4-90
4.7.4 Expansion Bus PCB 4.7.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Expansion Bus PCB
0011-0963
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 3) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)] 4) Remove the Controller Box Cover. 4-1) Remove the controller box cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
F-4-94
4-43
Chapter 4
4.7.4.3 After Replacing the Expansion PCB

0003-5557
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN Attach the SRAM PCB [1] removed from the existing PCB to the newly attached expansion bus PCB [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-4-98
4.7.6 UFR Board

[2]
F-4-95
4.7.6.1 Preparation for Removing the UFR Board

0011-0966
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 3) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)] 4) Remove the Controller Box Cover. 4-1) Remove the controller box cover[2]. - 2 screws [1]
4.7.5 SRAM PCB 4.7.5.1 Preparation for Removing the SRAM PCB
0011-0964
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Removing the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Controller Box Cover. 2-1) Remove the controller box cover[2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[1]
[1] [1] [1]
[1]
[2] [2]
F-4-96 F-4-99
[1] [1]
F-4-100 F-4-97
4.7.6.2 Removing the UFR Board

0003-5555
4.7.5.2 Removing the SRAM Board

0003-5538
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the UFR board [2]. - 2 screws [1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the SRAM board [2]. - 2 locks [1],
4-44
Chapter 4
[2]
F-4-101
[1]
F-4-104
[2]
[1]
4.7.7 Ethernet Board 4.7.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Ethernet Board
0011-0967
4.7.8 HDD 4.7.8.1 Preparation for Removing the HDD

0011-0970
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 3) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)] 4) Remove the Controller Box Cover. 4-1) Remove the controller box cover[2]. - 2 screws [1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Controller Box Cover. 2-1) Remove the controller box cover[2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-105
[2]
F-4-102
[1]
F-4-106
[1]
F-4-103
4.7.8.2 Making a Backup of Data (reference only)

0011-6631

0003-5550
4.7.7.2 Removing the Ethernet Board

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the Ethernet board [2]. - 2 screws [1]
When exchanging the HDD, you may need user data backup. The following is an outline of how a backup of data may be made: Making a Backup Using the Import/Export Function of the Remote User Interface (RUI) Backing Up the Address Book 1) Type in the following URL to access the RUI. http://[IP address of machine]/ 2) Click [user mode]. From the menu that appears in response, select 'import/export'. If a system administrator ID and ID number have been used,
4-45
Chapter 4 a dialog box will appear. Type in the system administrator ID for 'user name' and the appropriate ID number for 'password'; then, click [OK]. 3) Click [address book]. 4) Select the appropriate address book and the file format you want; then, click [export]. 5) Select an appropriate location for file storage as instructed on the screen. (Be sure to use a name that can be readily recognized for an import session.) Memo When you export transfer settings, all address book contents will be included. (As such, there is no need for backing up an address book unless specific books are needed.) Exporting the Transfer Settings 1) Access the following URL: http://[IP address of machine] 2) Click [user mode]. When a menu has appeared, select 'import/export'. If a system administrator ID and ID number have been used, a dialog box will appear. Type in the system administrator ID for 'user name' and the ID number for 'password'; then, click [OK]. 3) Click [transfer settings]. 4) Click [export]; then, click [start export]. 5) Select an appropriate location for file storage as instructed on the screen. Exporting User Mode Settings 1) Access the following URL: http://[IP address of machine] 2) Click [user mode]. When a menu has appeared, select 'import/export'. If a system administrator ID and ID number have been used, a dialog box will paper. Type in the system administrator ID for 'user name' and ID number for 'password'; then, click [OK]. 3) Click [user mode]. 4) Click [exposure]; then, click [start export]. 5) Select an appropriate location for file storage as instructed on the screen. Making a Backup Using the Machine Information Distribution Function If multiple iR machines of the same type are connected to a network and, in addition, they have the same machine information distribution function, the machine in question may send the same information to all the rest so that all will have the same settings. For details, see the descriptions on the machine information distribution function in the Reference Guide. 1) Make the appropriate settings on the source machine. Register the recipients of machine information by making the following selections: user mode>system control setup>machine information distribution setup>recipient. 2) Register the targets manually or using the auto search mechanism. (In the case of the latter, select the appropriate targets from the result of the search, and click [OK].) 3) Check the setup of the targets (recipients of machine information); then, check the setup of the source, thereby making sure they are ready for distribution. 4) Make settings for manual distribution. Be sure that the targets are not being used by the network or local UI when doing so. 5) Make the following selections: user mode>system control setup>machine information distribution setup>manual distribution setup. Of the following, enable (ON) the settings you want: 'user mode setting', 'group ID', 'address book'; then, click [next]. If you select 'address book', the transfer settings and routine job button settings will also be distributed in addition to address book settings. 6) When you have selected the targets and then click [start manual distribution], the machine information will be distributed to the selected recipients. When done, check the result of distribution. Caution You will not be able to receive information using the machine information distribution function if a system administrator ID has been registered. Be sure to delete the system administrator ID temporarily; further, be sure also to register it once again after receiving machine information. Backing Up a MEAP Application If a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license retained by the application will be lost. There is no need to consider this point if no MEAP application exists. If the MEAP application in question provides a backup function, be sure to use the function to back up the data that is specific to the application. As for the license, all applications must be disabled using the SMS (Service Management Service), the licenses must be invalidated, and the invalided license files must be downloaded. Note 1. Backing Up a MEAP Application Using the SST The data that has been backed up using MEAPack of the SST before start2) On the list of applications, select the radio button of the application you want to disable, and click [disable]. 3) Click the name of the application in question (whose license has been installed) to access the application/license information page. 4) Click [manage license], and then click [invalidate]. When a screen has appeared asking you if you want to invalidate the license, click [OK]. 5) When a screen has appeared asking you if you want to download/delete the invalidated license file, click [download]. Select an appropriate location for file storage according to the instructions on the screen. At this time, be sure to use a name that can readily indicate the application with which the invalidated license file is associated. When the invalidated license file is ready for downloading to a PC, click [delete]. When a screen has appeared asking you if you want to delete the license, click [OK]. 6) Go back to the list of applications, and select the radio button of the application you want to uninstall, and click [uninstall]. If there are multiple applications you want to uninstall, repeat steps from 1) through 6). User Authentication Information Registered Using SDL (Single Device Login) If SDL has been selected for a MEAP login application, you must make a backup of the user authentication information as follows: 1) Access the following URL: http://[IP address of machine]:8000/sdl/ 2) Log in using the user name and password registered as an administrator using SDL. The default administrator user is as follows: user name: Administrator password: password 3) Click [user management]. 4) Select [all], and then click [export]. 5) Keep the file format and the character code as they are (default). Click [start]. 6) Select an appropriate location for file storage as instructed on the screen. Caution Data Not Permitting a Backup A backup cannot be made of data stored in a Box, files that are yet to be transmitted, and image merge data. (These types of data will be lost.) Be sure to consult with the user as to how they must be handled. (As necessary, make a backup of them.) For details of the types of data of which a backup cannot be made, see the points to note provided for installation. Disabling and Invalidating a MEAP Application and Downloading and Uninstalling the Invalidated License 1) Type in the following URL to access the SMS: http://[IP address of machine]:8000/sms/ If the user has changed the SMS password, ask him to log in himself (or, ask him to change the password after implementation of security mechanisms). The default password is 'MeapSmsLogin'. Caution When the user starts to use a security mechanism, the SMS password will be reset. Ask the user to change the password. ing to use a security kit must not be returned to the iR machine after the implementation of the kit. Likewise, the data that has been backed up after the implementation of a security kit will not be valid on an iR machine for which a security kit has been put into use. In other words, the security kit implementation conditions must be the same before and after a backup is made (i.e., the MEAP backup function cannot be used to make a backup when installing the Kit). 2. Reinstalling a MEAP Application Although a backup of a MEAP application may be made, it cannot be reinstalled once the Kit has been installed. The following is an outline of how to disable a MEAP application, invalidate a license, and download the invalided license file. For details, see the MEAP SMS Administrator Guide.
4.7.8.3 Handling the HDD

0011-6632
4-46
Chapter 4
When removing the HDD, be sure to protect against static destruction. Keep the HDD free of impact.
4.7.8.4 Preparation for Removing the HDD

0011-6633
[2] [1]
F-4-109
3) Disconnect the harness [1] and the flat cable [2]. 4) Remove the 4 screws [3], and detach the HDD [4] from the HDD unit.
[1]
[1]
F-4-110
4.7.8.6 After Replacing the HDD

0000-8121
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Not Used 1) Format the HDD. Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down the 2 and 8 keys). Using the SST's HD formatting function, perform formatting of all partitions. (For details, see the instructions on how to upgrade the machine.) 2) Download the system software. Using the SST, download the system, language, and RUI files. It may take about 5 min for the machine to start up after a download session. 2. If a Card Reader and NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Are Used A card ID used by the NSA exists on the HDD. If you have replaced the HDD, you must also download the card data used by the NSA once again; otherwise, you will not be able to make use of statistical management functions of the NSA. You will first have to format the HDD and download the system software as for 1 above; thereafter, you need to perform additional steps: 1) Format the HDD. 2) Download the system software. 3) Make the following selections: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD 4) Enter a card number. 5) Turn off and then on the machine's main power. Enter the number of the first card of those to be used for group control, and press the OK key. (For instance, if the group will be using numbers between 1 through 1000, enter '1'.) 6) Make a check. Make the following selections in Additional Function: system control settings>group ID control>count control; then, check to make sure the following IDs are made ready: ID00000001 through ID00001000. 7) Set the appropriate addresses. Make the following selections in Additional Function: system control settings>network settings>TCP/IP settings>IP address. Then, set the following addresses: IP address, gateway address, subnet mask. 8) Enter a number. Make the following selections in Additional Function, and enter a number: system administrator information settings>system control group ID/system control ID No. 9) Turn off and then on the machine's main power.
[1]
F-4-107
4.7.8.5 Removing the HDD

0011-6634
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [2], and remove the 6 screws [1]; then, detach the HDD unit [3] from the device. MEMO Take care not to drop the washer and the fastener.
F-4-108
2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the cover [2].
4-47
Chapter 4
Unless you set up the system control ID and the system control ID No., you will not be able to register a card to the machine while using NSA. 10) Download the card ID. Keep the machine in a standby state, and download the card ID through the NSA. 11) Check the count control. Make the following selections in Additional Function to bring up the Count Control screen: system control settings>group ID control; then, check to see that only the ID data you have downloaded are indicated. 12) Check to see that the operation is normal. Using a user card that has been registered to the NSA, make copies; then, check that the number of copies you have made are associated with the card you have used in the machine.
[1]
4.7.8.7 After Replacing the HDD

0011-6635
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Formatting the HDD Start up the device in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power switch while holding down the 2 and 8 keys). Using the SST's HD formatting function, execute full partition formatting. (For details, see the chapter on upgrading.) 2) Downloading the System Software Using the SST, download the System, Language, and RUI files. It may take about 5 min for the device to start up after downloading.
[1]
F-4-113
[2]
4.7.9 Controller Fan 4.7.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Controller Fan
0011-0975
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 2) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)]
4.7.8.8 Removing the HDD

0003-5853
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the HDD. 1-1) Remove the HDD box [3]. - 2 connectors [1] - 6 screws [2]
[2]
4.7.9.2 Preparation for Removing the Controller Fan

0011-6636
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Left Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 3) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)]
[3]
4.7.9.3 Removing the Controller Fan

0011-6638

[1]
1) Remove the controller fan [3]. - 1 connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[2]
F-4-111
1-2) Remove the HD cover [2]. - 6 screws [1]

[2] [1]
F-4-114
4.7.9.4 Removing the Controller Fan

0003-6143
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Open the cable guide [2]. - connector [1] 2) Remove the controller fan [4]. - 2 screws [3]
[1]
F-4-112
[1]
1-3) Remove the HDD [2]. - 4 screws [1]
4-48
Chapter 4
[2] [1] [4]
[3] [3]
F-4-115
4-49
Chapter 5 Original Exposure System
Contents
Contents
5.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.3 Construction of the Control System............................................................................................................................................. 5-3 5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................5-4

5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On.................................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key ....................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 Various Control Mechanisms.........................................................................................................................................5-6

5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System ........................................................................................................................................ 5-6
5.3.1.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................................................................5-6 5.3.1.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor........................................................................................................................................................................5-6
5.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction................................................................................................................................................................ 5-7

5.3.2.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction ..............................................................................................................................5-7 5.3.2.2 Changing the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction ................................................................................................................................5-7
5.3.3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp ................................................................................................................................................... 5-7

5.3.3.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................................................................5-7 5.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp................................................................................................................................................................................................5-8 5.3.3.3 Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp.........................................................................................................................................................5-8
5.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals .................................................................................................................................................... 5-8

5.3.4.1 Identifying the Size of Originals .....................................................................................................................................................................5-8 5.3.4.2 Points of Measurement Used for Original Size Identification ........................................................................................................................5-8 5.3.4.3 Overview of Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................5-10
5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control .................................................................................................................................................................... 5-11

5.3.5.1 Stream Reading Dust Detection Control.......................................................................................................................................................5-11 5.3.5.2 White Plate Dust Detection Control..............................................................................................................................................................5-13
5.3.6 Image Processing ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-13

5.3.6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................5-13 5.3.6.2 CCD Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................................5-14 5.3.6.3 CCD Gain Correction, Offset Correction......................................................................................................................................................5-15 5.3.6.4 CCD Output A/D Conversion .......................................................................................................................................................................5-15 5.3.6.5 Outline of Shading Correction ......................................................................................................................................................................5-15 5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................................................................5-15 5.3.6.7 Shading Correction........................................................................................................................................................................................5-15

5.4.1 Copyboard Glass ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-15
5.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass....................................................................................................................................................................5-15
5.4.2 Exposure Lamp .......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-16

5.4.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Scanning Lamp .............................................................................................................................................5-16 5.4.2.2 Removing the Scanning Lamp ......................................................................................................................................................................5-17
5.4.3 Reader Controller PCB .............................................................................................................................................................. 5-18

5.4.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Reader Controller PCB.................................................................................................................................5-18 5.4.3.2 Removing the Reader Controller PCB..........................................................................................................................................................5-19 5.4.3.3 After Replacing the Reader Controller .........................................................................................................................................................5-19
5.4.4 Interface PCB............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-21

5.4.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Interface PCB ...............................................................................................................................................5-21 5.4.4.2 Removing the Interface PCB ........................................................................................................................................................................5-21 5.4.4.3 Points to Note When Attaching the Interface PCB.......................................................................................................................................5-22
5.4.5 Inverter PCB .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-22

5.4.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Inverter PCB.................................................................................................................................................5-22 5.4.5.2 Removing the Inverter PCB ..........................................................................................................................................................................5-23 5.4.5.3 After Replacing the Inverter PCB .................................................................................................................................................................5-23
5.4.6 CCD Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-23
Contents
5.4.6.1 Preparation for Removing the CCD Unit ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-23 5.4.6.2 Removing the CCD Unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 5-25 5.4.6.3 After Replacing the CCD Unit...................................................................................................................................................................... 5-25
5.4.7 Scanner Motor............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-26

5.4.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Scanner Motor .............................................................................................................................................. 5-26 5.4.7.2 Removing the Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-26 5.4.7.3 Attaching the Scanner Motor ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-27
5.4.8 ADF Open/Close Sensor............................................................................................................................................................ 5-28

5.4.8.1 Preparation for Removing the ADF Open /Close Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 5-28 5.4.8.2 Removing the ADF Open/Closed Sensor ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.4.9 Scanner HP Sensor..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-28

5.4.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor.............................................................................................................. 5-28 5.4.9.2 Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor....................................................................................................................................... 5-28
5.4.10 Original Sensor ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-29

5.4.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Original Size Sensor................................................................................................................................... 5-29 5.4.10.2 Removing the Original Size Sensor............................................................................................................................................................ 5-31
5.4.11 Cooling Fan.............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-31

5.4.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Cooling Fan ................................................................................................................................................ 5-31 5.4.11.2 Removing the Cooling Fan ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.4.12 Scanner Drive Cable ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-31

5.4.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Scanner Drive Cable .................................................................................................................................. 5-31 5.4.12.2 Removing the Scanner Drive Cable............................................................................................................................................................ 5-33 5.4.12.3 Attaching the Scanner Drive Cable ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-38 5.4.12.4 Adjusting the Position of the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base .............................................................................................................................. 5-39
Chapter 5
5.1 Construction
5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions
0002-5096
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the machine's original exposure system:
T-5-1 Item Scanning lamp scanning xenon lamp (white) book mode: by moving optical unit ADF mode: by moving original Reading resolution Scanner position detection scanner HP Lens Magnification 600 (main scanning) x 600 (sub scanning) dpi scanner HP sensor (PS501) single-focus, fixed copyboard mode: 100% ADF mode: 100% main scanning direction: image processing by controller block Description
sub scanning direction: image processing by controller block Scanner drive control No. 1/No. 2 mirror base: by pulse motor (M501)
Original scanning lamp
[1]activation control by inverter circuit
Activation control Original size detection
[2]error detection control [1]book mode sub scanning direction: by reflection type sensor
main scanning direction: by CCD [2]w/ ADF in use main scanning direction: by slide guide in ADF
sub scanning direction: by photo sensor in ADF
5.1.2 Major Components

0002-5118
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The original exposure system consists of the following major components:
T-5-2 Item Scanning lamp Scanner motor Reader Cooling fan Scanner HP sensor ADF open/closed sensor 1 Notation LA1 M501 FM13 PS501 PS502 xenon lamp: 77.500 lx 2-phase pulse motor: pulse control cools the reader assembly. detects the home position of the scanner. detects the state (open/closed) of the ADF using the ADF open/closed sensor (5 deg). Description
ADF open/closed sensor 2
PS503
detects the size with the ADF at 25 deg or less.
Original size sensor (ABconfiguration)
---
detects the size in sub scanning direction (AB-configuration)
5-1
Chapter 5
Item Original size sensor (inchconfiguration) Notation --Description detects the size in sub scanning direction (inch-configuration).
Mirror
---
No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, mirror
Scanner motor Signal size sensor (A/B-configuration) Interface PCB Reader cooling fan Original size sensor (inch-configuration sensor) Reader controller PCB CCD unit
ADF open/closed sensor 1 ADF open/closed sensor 2 Scanner HP sensor Anti-condensation sensor
F-5-1
Inverter PCB
Stream reading position (start position)
Image HP leading edge Size detection HP Original Copyboard glass
No. 2 mirror No. 1 mirror base Original scanning lamp
No. 1 mirror No. 2 mirror base No. 3 mirror
Lens
CCD
F-5-2
Scanner motor
Light-blocking plate Scanner HP sensor
(forward)
(reverse)
No. 2 mirror base No. 1 mirror base
F-5-3
5-2
Chapter 5
5.1.3 Construction of the Control System

0002-5128
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the construction of the control system of the original exposure system:
Scanner motor drive control To ADF Interface PCB Reader cocling FAN To printer (main controller)
03 J3 J3 06 08 J3 03 J2 J2 01 06 J2 02 J2 05 J2
Scanner motor Reader controller PCB
07 13 J3 J3 9 J3 30 10 J
12 J3
J2 09 04 J2
CCD unit
J6 01 J6 02
Scanner HP sensor
Inverter PCB Original scanning lamp activation control

F-5-4
5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB

0002-5129
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the functional construction of the reader controller PCB:
Image processing (shading correction)
Scanner motor Printer unit Stores firmware (flash ROM) Not used
DF
J201 DC24V DC13V DC5V DC3.3V IC4 J206
J203 IC2
J202 IC1 (CPU) J207 J208
IC3
J209 J210
J205
J204
Backs up service mode settings (EEPROM) Inverter PCB Original Original size sensor size sensor (AB-configuration) (inch-configuration)
Not used
(dotted line): back CCD unit

F-5-5
T-5-3 Jack No J201 used for the power from the machine (printer unit). Description
5-3
Chapter 5
Jack No J202 J203 J204 J205 J206 J207 J208 J209 J210 used for the power from the machine (printer unit). used for communications with the printer unit (connection with the scanner motor). used for communications with the ADF (image signal input). used for connection with the CCD unit. used for communication with the CCD unit. used for connection with the inverter PCB. used for connection with the original size sensor (AB-configuration). used for connection with the original size sensor (inch-configuration). not used not used. Description
T-5-4 IC IC1 IC2 IC3 IC4 CPU (stores boot program) ASCI (built-in RAM) flash RAM (stores firmware) EEPROM (backs up service mode settings) Description
5.2 Basic Sequence

5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On
0002-5131
STBY Reader motor Original scanning lamp HP sensor Scanner unit position
ON ON
Forward Reverse
SREADY Reverse Forward
STBY
shift shading fixed shading white plate dust detection control shading correction
HP (shading position)
HP (shading position)
Gain correction Offset correction
F-5-6
Start position
1. HP positioning Shading position Original size detection Image leading edge position *1
2. CCD-LIVE control gain correction *2 3. move to shift shading start position 4. shift shading 5. fixed shading - white plate dust detection shading correction
*1
*1: shifts only if the copyboard (ADF) is open. *2: controls by turning on/off the power of the CCD and the circuitry around it for power saving and for protection against overheating.
F-5-7
5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key

0002-5136
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode; 1 original)
5-4
Chapter 5
Start key ON STBY Reader motor Original scanning lamp HP sensor

ON ON ON
SREADY
SCFW
Reverse Forward Reverse
SCRW
Forward Reverse
STBY
Forward Reverse
Scanner unit position HP (shading position)

Copyboard cover start position
Image end Shift to copyboard scan start position
HP (shading position) CCD-KILL control*1
shift shading CCD-LIVE fixed shading control*1 white plate dust detection control shading correction *1: controls by turning on/off the power of the CCD and the circuitry around it for power saving and for protection against overheating.
F-5-8
Original size detection position Stop position Image leading edge *1 1. HP positioning *2 *2 2. move to shift shading start position 3.move to shift shading 4.fixed shading - white plate dust detection shading correction 5.Start position move to shift 6.Original scann 7.HPposition move to shift *1: shifts only if the copyboard cover (ADF) is open. *2: executed only if 1 min or more (power off) has passed from the previous session. *1
Start position
Shading position
F-5-9
2. Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (ADF mode; 1 original)
Start key ON
STBY Reader motor Original scanning lamp HP sensor
ON ON
Not executed if 1 min or less (power off) from previous session. SCRW
Reverse Forward Reverse Forward
SREADY
Reverse
SCFW
Forward Reverse Forward
STBY
Forward
Scanner unit position

HP (shading ) Stream reading position
ADF Dust
Image end
HP (shading )
CCD-KILL control*1
Stream reading shift position shading
shift position shift shading fixed shading white plate dust detection control shading correction
shift shading fixed shading white plate dust detection control shading correction CCD-KILL control*1
*1: controls by turning on/off the power of the CCD and the circuitry around it for power saving and for protection against overheating.
F-5-10
5-5
Chapter 5
Stream reading position 1. HP positioning
Original size detection Shading Stop position position Image leading edge position
*1 *2 *2
2. move to shift shading start position 3.shift shading 4.fixed shading - white plate dust detection shading correction 5.stream reading position to shift 6.original stream reading scan 7.shifts to point of dust detection 8.shifts to point of stand by position 9.moves to shift shading start position 10.shift shading 11.fixed shading - white plate dust detection shading correction *1: shifts only if the copyboard cover (ADF) is open *2: executed only if 1 min (power ON) or more has passed from the previous session.
*1
F-5-11
5.3 Various Control Mechanisms

5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System 5.3.1.1 Overview
0002-5137
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the arrangement of the components associated with the drive of the scanner:
Reader drive PCB
[1] Interface PCB [2] [4] [3]

Light-blocking plate
Scanner motor
forward
Scanning lamp
reverse
Scanner HP sensor ADF open/closed sensor 1 ADF open/closed sensor 2

F-5-12
No. 2 mirror base
No. 1 mirror base
[1] Scanner Motor M501 Drive Signal controls the activation/deactivation of the motor and the direction and speed of the motor. [2] Scanner HP Sensor PS501 Detection Signal used in reference to the detection of the No. 1 mirror base at its home position. [3] ADF Open/Closed Sensor 1 PS502 Detection Signal used in reference to the detection of the state (open/closed) of the ADF. [4] ADF Open/Closed Sensor 2 PS503 Detection Signal used in reference to the detection of the state (open/closed) of the ADF.
5.3.1.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor

0002-5138
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the construction of the mechanisms used to control the scanner motor.
5-6
Chapter 5 The motor driver on the interface PCB controls the rotation (activation/deactivation) of the scanner motor and its direction and speed of rotation according to the signals from the CPU.
Reader controller PCB J202 J203 [1] CPU J308 J307
Interface PCB +24V/15V A Motor driver A* B B* J306 3 1 4 5 2 6 Scanner motor M501
1 Scanner motor control signal

F-5-13
- Moving the Scanner in Reverse After an Image Scan After an image scan, the No. 1 mirror base is moved in reverse to shading position at 234 mm/sec regardless of the selected color mode. - Moving the Scanner Forward for an Image Scan When making an image scan, the No. 1 mirror base unit is moved by controlling the motor as follows:
Start position Image leading edge Acceleration Image trailing edge Normal speed Stop
Deceleration
Shift speed [1] [2] [3] [4]
Shift length 1. Acceleration Zone: accelerates to suit the selected mode 2. Approach Zone: moves for speed stabilization. 3. Image Read Zone: reads the image at a specific speed. (if black-and-white/SEND mode, twice as fast as in full-color mode) 4. Deceleration Zone: past the image trailing edge, immediately decelerates and stops.
F-5-14
The machine uses the following scanning speeds to suit different modes;
T-5-5 Function Copier Mode black-and-white full-color SEND black-and-white full-color Scanning speed 234 mm/sec 234 mm/sec 468 mm/sec 234 mm/sec
5.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction 5.3.2.1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction

0002-5139
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci For main scanning direction in both copyboard and ADF modes, the image is read at 100%, and the magnification is varied by the main controller block.
5.3.2.2 Changing the Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction

0002-5140
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci For sub scanning direction in both copyboard and ADF modes, the image is read at 100%, and the magnification is changed by the main controller block. In SEND mode, the reading size is switched between 100% and 50% depending on the selected resolution.
5.3.3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp 5.3.3.1 Overview

0002-5141
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The scanning lamp is controlled for the following, with associated control mechanisms operating as follows: 1. Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp The scanning lamp is turned on or off by the drive signal (XE-ON) generated by the CPU of the reader controller PCB. When the signal is generated, the inverter
5-7
Chapter 5 PCB generates high-frequency high voltage using the activation control circuit from the drive voltage (+24V) supplied by the reader controller PCB, thus turning on the scanning lamp. 2. Detection Error Activation The machine detects a fault in the intensity of the lamp as an activation error caused by a fault in the intensity of the lamp at time of initial activation (shading correction). MEMO: E225 - the reader controller PCB is faulty - the inverter PCB is faulty - the scanning lamp (xenon tube) is faulty - CCD is faulty - flexible cable has poor contact
J601 J206
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GND GND GND GND XE-ON 24V 24V XSYNC 24V 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Inverter PCB Xenon lamp Activation control circuit LA1
Reader controller PCB
CPU
F-5-15
5.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp

0004-1095
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine's scanning lamp is a xenon lamp, which uses xenon gas sealed inside. On the outside of the glass tube, 2 electrodes are arranged in parallel with the tube; the inside of the tube, on the other hand, is coated with fluorescent material. When a high-frequency high voltage is applied to the electrodes, the gas inside the tube starts to discharge, causing the fluorescent material to emit light.
electode electode
fluorescent medium
opening glass tube
electode
electode
F-5-16
5.3.3.3 Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp

0004-1096
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The scanning lamp is turned on and off by the drive signal (LAMP_ON) generated by the CPU of the reader control PCB. When the signal is generated, the inverter PCB generates high-frequency high voltage in the activation control circuit using the drive voltage (+24 V) supplied by the reader controller PCB to turn on the xenon lamp.
5.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals 5.3.4.1 Identifying the Size of Originals
0002-5146
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine identifies the size of an original based on combinations of measurements taken of the light reflected by specific points (using a reflection type sensor and CCD). In consideration of possible displacement of the original when the ADF is closed, the machine uses a 2-point CCD check. - Main Scanning Direction: by CCD (AB-configuration; 8-point measurement; inch-configuration, 6-point measurement) - Sub Scanning Direction: reflection type photo sensor (AB-configuration: 1-point measurement; inch-configuration: 1-point measurement) Specifically, the following takes place: 1) External Light Search (main scanning direction only) While keeping the scanning lamp off, the machine measures the level of the CCD at specific points in main scanning direction. 2) Sensor Output Level Detection The machine turns on the scanning lamp, and measures the sensor output at specific points. It then checks combinations of these measurement to find the size of the original.
5.3.4.2 Points of Measurement Used for Original Size Identification

0002-5150
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci For main scanning direction, the machine moves the No. 1 mirror base to the following points in relation to the location of the original to measure the levels of the CCD. For sub scanning direction, the machine checks the states of the sensors arranged as follows:
5-8
Chapter 5
AB-Configuration
Inch-configuration
Original sensor 1
Point of original detection 1
STMTR
Original sensor 3
Point of original detection 1 B6 Print of original A5 detection 2 Point of original detection 3 B5 Point of original detection 4
B5R A4R B4 A4 A3
STMT
LTRR LTR
LGL 279.4431.8mm (11"17")
CCD original detection position
CCD original detection position
F-5-17
To raise the accuracy of original size identification (as when the original is displaced while the ADF is closed), the machine makes use of the following 2 types of mechanisms: 1. Presence/Absence of an Original at 2 Points (for each point of measurement) For each point of measurement in main scanning direction, the machine checks the presence/absence of an original with reference to the CCD output at 2 points near the point of measurement.
Original size border line
Near 13 mm
1A:additional point of detection
Near 4 mm
1B:conventional point if detection
Original size border line

F-5-18 T-5-6 Result of measurement A no yes no yes B no no yes yes original absent original present original present original present Result of detection
Note: Changes in the Signal (from ADF open to close) change: no other: yes The machine uses OR combinations for identification. 2.Priority on the Front Sensors When checking the measurements for main scanning direction, if the absence of an original is indicated at the rear while the presence of an original is indicated at the front, the machine will give priority to the indication at the front (i.e., presence of an original).
5-9
Chapter 5
Document size sensor 1
Point of detection 1 Point of detection 2 Point of detection 3 Point of detection 4 CCD original detection position
F-5-19 T-5-7 Point of detection yes/no Size identified
B5
1 2 3 4 Result
yes no yes no
yes yes yes no B5
Note: Change in the Signal (ADF open to closed) change: no other: yes
5.3.4.3 Overview of Operation

0002-5153
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Standby No.1 mirror base: shading position xenon lamp: off original sensor: off
Xenon lamp Original sensor ADF Reader unit
Point of detection 1 Point of detection 2 Point of detection 3 Copyboard glass Point of detection 4
Original detection position

F-5-20
2) ADF Opened No.1 mirror base: moves to original detection position xenon tube: off original sensor: off
(external light)
F-5-21
3) ADF Closed 3-1) When the ADF is brought to 25 deg, the area covered by an original will be blocked from external light; therefore, the machine will assume the absence of an original at points that detect external light (external search). The ADF open/closed sensor 2 identifies the condition as being "closed," and the machine starts original size identification. At this position, B5, B4, A4, and A3 are excluded from the list of possible sizes.
5-10
Chapter 5 3-2) The machine executes an external light search: for main scanning direction, it turns on the xenon lamp to check its light (reflected) at 4 points using the CCD; for the sub scanning direction, the machine checks the state of the original sensor.
(external light)
F-5-22
25
F-5-23
4) ADF Cover Fully Closed (5 deg or less). The machine checks for a change in the output levels of the sensors for 2 sec after the ADF open/closed sensor has identified the ADF as being "closed"; the machine assumes the absence of an original at points without a change. The machine then identifies the size of the original based on the combination of changes at 5 points.
5
F-5-24
5) Standby (in wait for a press on the Start key) No. 1 mirror base: at point of original detection xenon lamp: off original sensor: off
F-5-25
AB-Configuration Point of CCD Original detection 1 2 3 size A B A B A B A3 B4 A4R A4 B5 B5R A5 B6 absent
Original 4 A B sensor 1
Inch-configuration Point of CCD Original detection Original 1 2 3 size A B A B A B sensor 3 11"x17" LGL LTRR LTR STMTR STMT absent :unchanged :changed
F-5-26
5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control 5.3.5.1 Stream Reading Dust Detection Control
0002-5159
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine checks the stream reading glass and the ADF platen roller for the presence/absent of dust. It then changes the point of reading or executes image correction depending on the result of detection, thereby avoiding reproduction of dust particles in its output images. The machine executes the detection mechanism only when the ADF is used: 1. Timing of Detection (1) at the end of a job (2) between sheets (for every sheet read)
5-11
Chapter 5
Start key ON
1st SCAN Dust detection* Dust detection

F-5-27
2nd SCAN Dust detection
*Executed only if dust has been detected at all points, i.e., A, B, C, D, and E in the previous job. If so, the machine uses the point with least dust as the reading position and executes dust correction before starting reading operation. 2. Particulars of Control (1) at the end of a job (makes a change to the point of stream reading dust reading position) The machine checks the light reflected by the platen roller at the reading position to see if there is dust, moving to the next point if it finds dust (from A to B, C, D, and then to E; 5 points max.). It uses the first point that is free of dust as the reading point for the next job.
0.5mm 0.5mm 0.5mm 0.5mm
B At time of a job
A *1
E pattern 1
*1 pattern 2 pattern 3 pattern 4 pattern 5 At the start of a job *1 *2

F-5-28
If it finds dust at all 5 points (A, B, C, D, E), then it will indicate an alarm when an original is placed in the ADF, prompting the user for cleaning. To reset, press [close]. When it starts a job, it will run the session once again and use a point with no dust or little dust as the reading position. *1: reading position at the end of the previous job. *2: point with no dust or little dust.
T-5-8 A B C D E reading reference position (1.0 mm to the left from the center of the platen roller) 1.0 mm to the left from the reference position 0.5 mm to the left from the reference position 0.5 mm to the right from the reference position 1.0 mm to the right from the reference position (center of the platen roller)
(2) between sheets (dust correction) The machine does not move the xenon lamp for dust detection. If dust is detected between sheets, the machine executes dust correction by making correction on the pixels on both sides of the area where dust is found. MEMO:
5-12
Chapter 5 COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L1 (level 1) (adjustment of dust detection level between sheets) COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L2 (level 1) (adjustment of dust detection at job end)
5.3.5.2 White Plate Dust Detection Control

0003-4293
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine uses a fan to cool the inside of the reader unit to prevent overheating otherwise caused by the xenon lamp in stream reading mode. The fact, however, can cause stray dust inside the reader unit to collect on the white plate, showing up as lines in output images. 1. Timing of Control (1) Before a Job (a) white plate dust detection (b) white plate dust correction (2) After a Job (a) white plate dust detection (b) white plate dust correction
Start key ON
1st SCAN Dust detection

F-5-29
2nd SCAN Dust detection
2. Particulars of Control (1) White Plate Dust Detection The machine compares the shading coefficient obtained from shift shading and the shading coefficient obtained from fixed shading to identify the presence/ absence of dust and, if any, coordinates and width of the area. (2) White Plate Dust Correction If the machine detects dust as a result of white plate dust detection, it corrects the shading coefficient of the area using the shading coefficient of both sides so as to decrease the effects of the presence of dust. It executes shading correction using the coefficient it obtains after correction. If the result of white plate dust detection indicates the presence of dust, the shading coefficient of the area in question will be corrected by the coefficients of its adjacent areas during shading correction with the aim of reducing the effects of the presence of dust. Thereafter, shading correction will be executed using the corrected coefficient.
White plate
Detection Algorithm Computation of shading coefficient (shift shading to reference area) Computation of shading coefficient (from fixed shading to shading correction position)
Area of dust
Comparison
Detection of coordinates of start of dust and width
Correction Algorithm
Fixing shading position Shading correction position Reference area (Shading coefficient computation area)
F-5-30
Correction of dust area coefficient using data of both sides
5.3.6 Image Processing 5.3.6.1 Overview

0002-5161
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the major functions of the machine' s image processing system: - CCD (image sensor)
5-13
Chapter 5 number of lines: 3 (RGB, 1 line each) number of pixels: 7350 size of pixel: 9.3 x 9.3 ym - Shading Correction shading adjustment: in service mode shading correction: performed for every copy
Analog image processing block CCD
Analog image processing A/D conversion
Digital image processing block Reader controller PCB Shading processing Controller block
CCD/AP PCB
F-5-31
The following shows the functions of the PCBs associated with the image processing system: CCD/AP PCB: CCD drive, analog image processing, A/D conversion reader controller PCB: shading correction The machine performs image processing for every RGB line using the reader controller PCB, and the major functions involved are as follows: (1) Analog Image processing (a) CCD drive (b) CCD output gain correction, offset correction (c) CCD output A/D conversion
CCD (1 line each for R, G, and B) A12V Odd-numbered Even-numbered pixel pixel Analog image signal A5V CCD control signal J204 Reader controller PCB J101 J204
CCD drive control
Analog image processing
Even-numbed pixel A/D Odd-numbered conversion pixel
Gain correction data Digital image signal 10 J102

F-5-32
- gain correction - offset correction
CCD/AP PCB
J205
(2) Digital Image Processing

Reader controller PCB J204 EEP-ROM CPU Target value SRAM J102 J205 Digital image signal 8 J203 Shading correction
J101
Gain correction data CCD/AP PCB
Digital image signal 10
F-5-33
5.3.6.2 CCD Drive

0002-5168
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine's CCD is a linear image sensor consisting of 3 lines (R, G, B, 1 line each), each line composed of 7350 photo cells. The signal that has been put through photo-conversion in the light-receiving segment is divided into 2 analog signals of 2 channels for output: even-numbered pixels (EVEN) and odd-numbered pixels (ODD).
5-14
Chapter 5
Output buffer Shift register

Gate
Odd-numbered pixel data
Light-receiving segment (photodiode) Shift register
6 5
4 3
Gate
2 1 Even-numbered pixel data Output buffer
F-5-34
5.3.6.3 CCD Gain Correction, Offset Correction

0002-5170
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The analog video signal from the CCD is processed so that the rate of amplification is even (gain correction); the output in the absence of incident light is also processed for a specific level (offset correction).
5.3.6.4 CCD Output A/D Conversion

0002-5171
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The odd-numbered and even-numbered pixel analog video signals after the foregoing correction are then converted into 10-bit digital signals by the A/D converter according to their pixel voltage levels.
5.3.6.5 Outline of Shading Correction

0002-5172
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The output of the CCD may not always be uniform because of the following reasons even when the density of the original in question is uniform: - variation in the sensitivity among individual pixels of the CCD. - difference in the level of transmission between the center and the edge of the lens. - difference in the intensity of light between the middle and the edges of the scanning lamp. - deterioration of the scanning lamp The machine executes shading correction to even out the output of the CCD. The machine executes either of the following 2 shading mechanisms: shading correction it carries out for every copy and shading adjustment for which the target value is set in service mode.
5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment

0002-5186
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine performs shading adjustment in response to a command made in service mode. The machine measures the density of blank white paper and that of the white plate to obtain density data; it then computes the data to produce the target value for use at time of shading correction.
5.3.6.7 Shading Correction

0002-5187
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine executes shading correction each time it scans an original. The machine directs the light from the scanning lamp against the standard white plate, and converts the reflected light into a digital signal by the analog image processing block on the CCD/AP PCB. The result (i.e., a digital signal representing the intensity of the reflected light) is sent to the shading correction circuit of the reader controller PCB as a shading coefficient. The shading correction circuit in turn compares the coefficient against the target value it holds, and offers the difference as the shading correction value. The machine uses the shading correction value to correct the variation that may exist among the individual pixels of the CCD, thereby keeping the image density to a specific level at all times.
CCD output Characteristics after correction Characteristics before correction
Target value Measurement
White Standard white plate

F-5-35
Original density

5.4.1 Copyboard Glass 5.4.1.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass
0003-3121
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the ADF.
5-15
Chapter 5 2) Remove the copyboard glass[3]. - 2 screws[1] - right glass retainer[2]
[1] [3]
[2]
F-5-36
When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the white plate attached to its back. (soiling can cause lines in the image) If soiled, clean it using lintfree paper moistened with alcohol.
5.4.2 Exposure Lamp 5.4.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Scanning Lamp
0011-0978
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove Copyboard Glass. (page 5-15)Reference [Removing the Copyboard Glass] 2) Remove the Right Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (upper)] 3) Remove the Reader Right Cover. (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Reader Right Cover] 4) Remove the Left Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (upper)] 5) Remove the Reader Left Cover. (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Reader Left Cover] 6) Remove the Reader Front Cover. (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Reader Front Cover] 7) Remove the Reader Rear Cover. (page 10-19)Reference [Removing the Reader Rear Cover] 8) Remove the CCD Unit Cover. 8-1) Remove the CCD unit cover [2]. - 9 screws [1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-5-37
[1]
F-5-38
5-16
Chapter 5
5.4.2.2 Removing the Scanning Lamp

0003-3135
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the cable [2] from the cable guide [3]. - connector [1]
[1]
[3]
F-5-39
[2]
2) Move the No. 1 mirror base [1] to the right to match it against the cut-off [2] of the frame. Reference: When moving the No. 1 mirror base, be sure to hold it by the cut-up tab [A] of the mirror stay.
[2] [1]
[2] [A]
F-5-40
3) Remove the scanning lamp [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-41
5-17
Chapter 5
5.4.3 Reader Controller PCB 5.4.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Reader Controller PCB
0011-0981
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Copyboard Glass. (page 5-15)Reference [Removing the Copyboard Glass] 2) Remove the CCD Unit Cover. 2-1) Remove the CCD unit cover [2]. - 9 screws [1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-5-42
[1]
F-5-43
3) Remove the Original Size Sensor Unit. 3-1) Remove the original size detection unit [2]. - 3 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-44
3-2) Remove the original size sensor unit [2]. - connector [1]
5-18
Chapter 5
[2]
[1]
F-5-45
5.4.3.2 Removing the Reader Controller PCB

0003-3122
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the reader controller PCB [4]. - 5 flat cables [1] - connector [2] - 4 screws [3]
[1] [3] [4]
[3]
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
F-5-46
Reference: Disconnecting the Flat Cable Slide the locking lever [1] in the direction of the arrow; then, disconnect the flat cable [2].
[1]
F-5-47
[2]
5.4.3.3 After Replacing the Reader Controller

0003-5467
Be sure to print out the settings using P-PRINT before replacing the reader controller. 1. Initializing the RAM of the Reader Controller Without Replacing the PCB Using the SST, upload the backup data of the reader controller; after you have initialized the RAM, download the backup data, thereby eliminating the need for the following adjustment work. a. Reader Unit-Related Adjustment 1) Using the SST, download the latest system software (R-CON).
5-19
Chapter 5 2) Make the following selections in service mode, and press the OK key to initialize the RAM: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLER>R-CON. Then, turn off and then on the main power. 3) Enter the following settings in service mode: (1) standard while plate white level data COPIER>ADJUST>CCD-W-PLATE-X,Y,Z
* 820686679349 *
W-PLT-X W-PLT-Y
F-5-48
W-PLT-Z
(2) service mode label record (behind reader front cover) (a) image read start position adjustment (x direction; for fixed position reading) COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X (b) image read start position adjustment (Y direction: for fixed reading) COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y (c) shading position adjustment (for fixed reading) COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S (d) feeder mode main scanning position adjustment COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y-DF (e) ADF stream reading CCD read position adjustment COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>STRD-POS (f) CCD unit RG/GB sub scanning direction color displacement correction COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG/GB (g) factory default CD unit RG/GB sub scanning color displacement correction COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>FCCDU-RG/GB (h) auto gradation correction target value COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL>OFFSET-P-Y,M,C,K b. ADF-Related Adjustment
The machine retains ADF-related service data in the RAM of its reader controller, calling for adjustment of the ADF if you have initialized its RAM. 1) In service mode, enter the settings indicated on the P-PRINT printout you have previously obtained: (1) original stop position adjustment FEEDER>ADJUST>DOCST (2) original feed speed (magnification) adjustment FEEDER>ADJUST>LA-SPEED 2) Make the following adjustments using the following service mode items: (1) ADF sensor sensitivity adjustment FEEDER>FUNCTION>SENS-IN (2) tray width adjustment FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A4 FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A5R FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTR FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTRR (3) white level adjustment COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1 COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL2 When done, put the P-PRINT printout [1] in the service book case, disposing of the previous printout.
5-20
Chapter 5
[1]
F-5-49
5.4.4 Interface PCB 5.4.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Interface PCB
0011-0984
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the reader rear cover. (page 10-19)Reference [Removing the Reader Rear Cover]
5.4.4.2 Removing the Interface PCB

0003-3124
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the interface PCB cover [3]. - 4 RS tightening screws [1] - 2 binding screws [2]
[1] [3]
[1]
F-5-50
[2]
[1]
2) Remove the interface PCB unit [4]. - 7 connectors [1] - 2 flat cables [2] - 5 screws [3]
[3] [3] [2] [2] [1] [3]
[1]
F-5-51
[3]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Reference: How to Remove the Flat Cable Move the locking lever [1] in the direction of the arrow, and remove the flat cable [2].
5-21
Chapter 5
[1]
F-5-52
[2]
3) Remove the interface PCB [2]. - 9 screws [1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-5-53
5.4.4.3 Points to Note When Attaching the Interface PCB

0004-7789
If the tie-wrap [1] of the scanner motor harness is closer to the motor than the wire guide [2], the harness will come into contact with the rotor and suffer damage. Be sure that the tie-wrap is closer to the interface PCB than the wire guide.
[2]
[1]
F-5-54
5.4.5 Inverter PCB 5.4.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Inverter PCB
0011-0986
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Copyboard Glass.(page 5-15)Reference [Removing the Copyboard Glass] 2) Remove the CCD Unit Cover. 2-1) Remove the CCD unit cover [2]. - 9 screws [1]
5-22
Chapter 5
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-5-55
[1]
F-5-56
5.4.5.2 Removing the Inverter PCB

0003-3125
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 2 PCB supports [4], and remove the inverter PCB [5]. - connector [1] - flat cable [2] - screw [3]
[4]
[2] [4]
[1]
F-5-57
[3]
[5]
5.4.5.3 After Replacing the Inverter PCB

0003-5473
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci There is no special adjustment after replacing the inverter PCB.
5.4.6 CCD Unit 5.4.6.1 Preparation for Removing the CCD Unit
0011-0995
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove Copyboard Glass. (page 5-15)Reference [Removing the Copyboard Glass] 2) Remove the CCD Unit Cover. 2-1) Remove the CCD unit cover [2]. - 9 screws [1]
5-23
Chapter 5
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-5-58
[1]
F-5-59
3) Remove the Original Size Sensor Unit. 3-1) Move the original size detection unit [2]. - 3 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-60
[2]
[1]
F-5-61
5-24
Chapter 5
5.4.6.2 Removing the CCD Unit

0003-3137
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the original size detection unit [2]. - 3 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-62
2) Remove the CCD unit [4]. - 2 flat cables [1] from the reader controller PCB - 2 screws [2] - 2 leaf springs [3]
[2] [1] [3] [1]
[2]
[3]
F-5-63
[4]
5.4.6.3 After Replacing the CCD Unit

0003-3143
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci If you have replaced the CCD unit, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the CCD unit: COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG (to enter the correction value for CCD-dependent RG color displacement in sub scanning direction) COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-GB (to enter the correction value for CCD-dependent GB color displacement in sub scanning direction)
+2,-1,30524101
CCDU-GB CCDU-RG
F-5-64
Moreover, be sure to update the settings indicated on the service label attached behind the reader unit front cover with the settings indicated on the label attached to the CCD unit.
5-25
Chapter 5
5.4.7 Scanner Motor 5.4.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Scanner Motor
0011-1001
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the reader rear cover. (page 10-19)Reference [Removing the Reader Rear Cover]
5.4.7.2 Removing the Scanner Motor

0003-3130
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the cover [2]. - 4 screws [1]
[1] [2]
[1]
F-5-65
2) Remove the 2 harness retainers [2] from the back of the cover [1] to remove the cover.
[1]
F-5-66
[2]
3) Move the scanner motor [3] in the direction of the arrow to remove. - 3 screws [1] - 2 springs [2]
[3] [2] [1]
[1]
F-5-67
[2]
4) Remove the scanner motor [2]. - connector [1]
5-26
Chapter 5
[1]
[2]
F-5-68
5.4.7.3 Attaching the Scanner Motor

0003-3131
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When attaching the scanner motor, be sure that the timing belt [3] is securely attached to the scanner pulley [1] and the motor shaft [2].
[3] [1]
F-5-69
[2]
[3]
F-5-70
If the tie-wrap [1] of the scanner motor harness is closer to the motor side than the wire guide [2], the harness can come into contact with the rotor of the scanner motor and suffer damage. Be sure that the tie-wrap is closer to the interface PCB than the wire guide when mounting the scanner motor.
[2]
[1]
F-5-71
5-27
Chapter 5
5.4.8 ADF Open/Close Sensor 5.4.8.1 Preparation for Removing the ADF Open /Close Sensor
0011-1006
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Reader Rear Cover. (page 10-19)Reference [Removing the Reader Rear Cover]
5.4.8.2 Removing the ADF Open/Closed Sensor

0004-5164
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the connector [1].

[2]
[1]
F-5-72
2) Remove the reinforcing plate [2]. - 4 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-73
3) Remove the ADF open/closed sensor (1, 2). - hook [1]

[1]
[1]
F-5-74
5.4.9 Scanner HP Sensor 5.4.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor
0011-1008
5.4.9.2 Removing the Mirror Base Home Position Sensor

0003-3128
5-28
Chapter 5 1) Remove the plate [2]. - 4 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-75
2) Remove the sensor mounting plate [2]. - screw [1]
[1]
[2]
F-5-76
3) Remove the home position sensor [1]. - connector [1]

[2]
[1]
F-5-77
5.4.10 Original Sensor 5.4.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Original Size Sensor
0011-1011
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove Copyboard Glass. (page 5-15)Reference [Removing the Copyboard Glass] 2) Remove the CCD Unit Cover. 2-1) Remove the CCD unit cover [2]. - 9 screws [1]
5-29
Chapter 5
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-5-78
[1]
F-5-79
3) Remove the Original Size Sensor Unit. 3-1) Move the original size detection unit [2]. - 3 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-80
[2]
[1]
F-5-81
5-30
Chapter 5
5.4.10.2 Removing the Original Size Sensor

0003-5464
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) While removing the claw at the edge, remove the original size sensor [1].
[1]
F-5-82
5.4.11 Cooling Fan 5.4.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Cooling Fan
0011-1018
5.4.11.2 Removing the Cooling Fan

0003-3129
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the cooling fan [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[3]
[1]
F-5-83
[2]
5.4.12 Scanner Drive Cable 5.4.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Scanner Drive Cable
0011-1169
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Be sure to keep the following on hand when replacing the scanner drive cable: - mirror positioning tool 1) Remove the Copyboard Glass. (page 5-15)Reference [Removing the Copyboard Glass] 2) Remove the Right Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (upper)] 3) Remove the Reader Right Cover.(page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Reader Right Cover] 4) Remove the Left Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (upper)] 5) Remove the Reader Left Cover. (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Reader Left Cover] 6) Remove the Reader Front Cover. (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Reader Front Cover] 7) Remove the ADF. 7-1) Remove the communications cable [1] of the ADF from the host machine.
[1]
F-5-84
7-2) Bend up the edge of the rubber cover [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, remove the angle guide plate [3].
5-31
Chapter 5
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-5-85
7-3) Move toward the front, and lift it to remove. - 3 knurled screws [1]
[1]
F-5-86
8) Remove the Control Panel. 8-1) Remove the connector [1].
[1]
F-5-87
8-2) Remove the control panel [2] together with the cover. - 5 screws [1]
5-32
Chapter 5
[2]
F-5-88
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-5-89
[1]
[2]
F-5-90
5.4.12.2 Removing the Scanner Drive Cable

0004-1362
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the reading glass retainer [2].
When removing the reading glass retainer, take care so that the leaf spring will not come off. 2) Remove the reading glass [3]. 3) Remove the 2 screws [4], and remove the left glass retainer [5].
5-33
Chapter 5
[3] [2]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[4]
F-5-91
When attaching it, be sure to hold down both ends of the leaf spring [A] with your fingers. (Take care not to bend the leaf spring.) Be sure to attach it while forcing the left glass retainer [B] against the reading glass [C]. Check to make sure that the side of the reading glass and the leaf spring [D] of the left glass retainer are in firm contact. Otherwise, dust from the reading glass can start to collect, causing lines in images.
[A]
F-5-92
5-34
Chapter 5
[C] [B]
[D]
F-5-93
4) Remove the ADF right screw cover [2]. -screw [1]

[1] [2]
F-5-94
5) Remove the ADF left screw cover [2]. -the screw[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-95
6) Remove the interface PCB cover [3]. - 6 screws [1]
5-35
Chapter 5
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-5-96
[2]
[1]
7) Remove the interface PCB [3] together with its base. - 9 connectors [1] - 5 screws [2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-5-97
[1]
[2]
8) Remove the reader communications cable.
[1]
F-5-98
9) Open the 3 wire saddles [2]. - connector [1] 10) Remove the motor cover [4] together with the harness. - 4 screws [3]
[3] [4] [2] [1]
[3]
F-5-99
11) Remove the motor frame [3]. - wire saddle [1] (Remove the harness) - 6 screws [2]
5-36
Chapter 5
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-5-100
12) Remove the ADF open/closed sensor cover [2]. - 4 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-5-101
13) Remove the harness from the wire saddle [3]. - 2 connectors [1] - snap-open band [2]
[2]
F-5-102
[3]
[1]
14) Remove the ADF open/closed sensor base [3]. - harness [1] (From the wire saddle) - 6 screws [2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
F-5-103
[1]
[2]
15) Remove the reader upper frame [2]. - 24 screws [1]
5-37
Chapter 5
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1] [1] [2]
[1]
F-5-104
16) Remove the 2 cable fixing screws [2] of the No. 1 mirror base [1]. 17) Remove the spring [3] used to hold the cable in place. 18) Remove the 2 hooks of the cable from the right side of the reader frame. 19) Remove the cable from the pulleys.
[2]
[4]
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
F-5-105
5.4.12.3 Attaching the Scanner Drive Cable

0004-1432
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Attach the ball of the cable in the hole of the drive pulley [1], and wind the cable (4 times inside, 5 times outside); then, attach it using tape or the like. At this time, be sure that the cable fixing [2] is on the inside. 2) Engage the cable on the pulleys; then, engage one end of the cable on the hook [3] of the left side and the other end on the hook of the right side. 3) Temporarily fix the cable fixing plate [2] in place to the No. 1 mirror base [5]. 4) Attach the reader upper frame.
5-38
Chapter 5
[1]
[2] [1]
[4]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3] [3]
F-5-106
[4]
[5]
[4]
F-5-107
5.4.12.4 Adjusting the Position of the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base

0004-1439
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Set the pins at the rear of the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3009-040) in such a way so that the tool may be used for the machine.
5-39
Chapter 5
[C] [B] [A]
[A] [B]
F-5-108
2) Set the pins at the front of the mirror positioning tool in such a way so that the tool may be used for the machine.
[C] [B] [A]
[A] [B]
F-5-109
3) Insert the pins of the mirror positioning tool (front [2]; rear [3]) of the mirror positioning tool into the holes [1] of the No. 1 mirror base, No. 2 mirror base, and rail.
[2]
[1]
F-5-110
5-40
Chapter 5
[3]
[1]
F-5-111
4) Fully secure the ends of the cable (you have temporarily fixed to the hooks of the reader frame previously). 5) Remove the mirror positioning tool (front, rear). 6) Put back the parts by reversing the steps used to remove them.
5-41
Chapter 6 Laser Exposure
Contents
Contents
6.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.3 Construction of the Control System............................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................6-3

6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3 Various Control..............................................................................................................................................................6-3

6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing..................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3.1.1 Turning On and Off the Laser Unit.................................................................................................................................................................6-3 6.3.1.2 Controlling the Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction........................................................................................................................6-4 6.3.1.3 Controlling the Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction ..........................................................................................................................6-5
6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ...................................................................................................................................... 6-6

6.3.2.1 APC Control....................................................................................................................................................................................................6-6 6.3.2.2 PWM Control ..................................................................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor .......................................................................................................................................... 6-6

6.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor..............................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter....................................................................................................................................................... 6-7

6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter ..........................................................................................................................................................................6-7
6.4 Parts Replacement Procedure.........................................................................................................................................6-8

6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.4.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Laser Scanner Unit .........................................................................................................................................6-8 6.4.1.2 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ..................................................................................................................................................................6-8 6.4.1.3 Points to Note When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit ................................................................................................................................6-9 6.4.1.4 Cleaning the Laser Scanner Unit.....................................................................................................................................................................6-9
Chapter 6
6.1 Construction
0002-9823
T-6-1 Laser Light Wave length Output Number of beams 645 to 665 mm (visible light) 35mW 1
T-6-2 Laser Scanner Motor Type of motor Revolution Type of bearing DC brushless 32000 rpm (approx.) oil
T-6-3 Polygon Mirror Number of facets 12 (29-mm dia.)
T-6-4 Control Mechanism Synchronization main scanning direction sub scanning direction Light intensity APC PWM Others laser activation/deactivation*1 (exposes "light" areas)
laser scanner motor laser shutter
*1: The machine directs its laser beam to shine on "light" areas (non-image areas), leaving "dark" areas (image areas) as they are.
Light area
Dark area
Light area
Laser ON Enlarged view

F-6-1
Laser ON

0002-9832
6-1
Chapter 6
T-6-5 Item [11 Laser unit Description emits laser light.
[2] [3] [4] [5]
Polygon mirror BD mirror BD PCB Laser mirror 1
scans laser light in main scanning direction. reflects laser light, directing it to the BD PCB. generates the BD signal. reflects laser light, directing it to the photosensitive drum.
[6] [7]
Laser mirror 2 Laser mirror 3
reflects laser light, directing it to the photosensitive drum. reflects laser light, directing it to the photosensitive drum.
[8]
Routing mirror
reflects laser light, directing it to the photosensitive drum.
[4] [5] [6]
[8]
[3] [7]
[2]
[1]
Drum
F-6-2

0002-9842
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine uses ASIC1 (IC29) on its DC controller PCB to control the laser exposure system. ASIC1 (IC29) uses the video signals coming from the main controller PCB to form a latent static image on the photosensitive drum through the following 6 control mechanisms:
6-2
Chapter 6
DC-CON ASIC(IC29) [1] Video MN-CON MN-CON [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
F-6-3
Laser-scanner
Drum
[1] turns on/off the laser unit [2] controls the laser light in main scanning direction [3] performs APC control [4] performs PWM control [5] controls the laser scanner motor [6] controls the laser shutter MN-CON: main controller PCB DC-CON: DC controller PCB
6.2 Basic Sequence

6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation
0002-9844
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the basic sequence of operation of the laser exposure system: 1) the Start key is pressed or the print request signal arrives from the main controller PCB. 2) the DC controller PCB executes a control mechanism so that the laser scanner 3) rotates at the target speed; at the same time, it forces the laser unit to go on for a check on faults. 4) the machine becomes ready for forming an image. 5) the DC controller PCB generates sub scanning sync signals (see MEMO: PVREQ-Y, PVREQ-M, PVREQ-C,PVREQ-K) for individual colors, and sends them to the main controller PCB. 6) the main controller PCB generates video signals using the sub scanning sync signals, and sends them to the DC controller PCB. 7) in response, the DC controller PCB turns on the laser unit to suit the video signals. - Full Color, A4, Plain Paper, 1 Page
[1]
STBY Scanner motor ITB HP PVREQ (M,Y,C,K) Video Laser M M Y Y C C K K Harf INTR
[2]
PRINT Full LSTR STBY Harf
F-6-4
[1] press on the Start key (print request signal) [2] ready for image formation MEMO: The sub scanning direction sync signal (PVREQ) is used to match the leading edge of the toner image on the drum and the leading edge of the print paper. The timing at which the PVREQ signal is generated differs depending on the selected color mode: - Full Color Mode In the case of full color mode, an image must be formed in 4 colors (Y, M, C, Bk). All images are first formed on the intermediate transfer belt (ITB), and they must be controlled so that their leading edges will match without color displacement. When the machine becomes ready for image formation in full color mode, the ITB home position sensor generates the ITBHP signal to serve as a reference so that the machine may generate the PVREQ signal for each color. - Mono Color Mode In the case of mono color mode, there is no need for color matching. When the machine becomes ready for image formation, therefore, it generates the PVREQ signal at specific timing regardless of the ITB home position signal (ITBHP).
6.3 Various Control

6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing 6.3.1.1 Turning On and Off the Laser Unit
0002-9846
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The laser unit is turned on or off by the laser driver PCB in response to the laser control signal (CONT0/CNT1) coming from the DC controller PCB.
6-3
Chapter 6
T-6-6
Laser control signal State of operation CNT0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 APC forced OFF ON OFF CNT1 standby printing OFF video signal input enabled State of laser
CNT0
CNT1
J1901
J1102
DC-CON
F-6-5
In standby mode, the intensity setting selected in APC is canceled.
6.3.1.2 Controlling the Synchronization in Main Scanning Direction

0002-9852
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine controls the synchronization in main scanning direction to mach the write start position in main scanning direction, and the control is executed by the BD sync control circuit found in ASIC1, which serves to generate the sync signal for main scanning direction used by the DC controller PCB based on the BD signal coming from the BD PCB. The following shows how the circuit operates: The VIDEO signal from the main controller PCB is sent to FIFO of ASIC1; at the same time, the BD sync control circuit generates the printer sync signal (WCK) based on the BD signal, and sends the result to PWMIC and FIFO. Thereafter, FIFO reads the image signals in sync with the printer synch signal, and sends them to PWM1C, which converts the image signals into a laser drive signal (LD) for output to the laser unit.
6-4
Chapter 6
[3]
[4]
J1902
J1104 J301 J1204 BD MN-CON [2] ASIC1(IC29) DC-CON VDO
LD PWN IC (IC21)
WCK
[1]
F-6-6
[1] BD sync control circuit [2] FIFO [3] BD PCB [4] Laser unit MN-CON: main controller PCB DC-CON: DC controller PCB
6.3.1.3 Controlling the Synchronization in Sub Scanning Direction

0002-9854
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine controls the synchronization in sub scanning direction to match the write start position of each image to be formed on the ITB in full color mode. This control mechanism is executed by the sub scanning sync control circuit of ASIC1, which uses the ITB home position signal (ITBHP) generated by the ITB home position sensor to generate the synch signal (PVREQ) for sub scanning direction. The following shows how the circuit operates: The ITB home position signal (ITBHP) generated by the ITB home position sensor is detected by the sub scanning synch control circuit; at the same time, the circuit generates the PVREQ signal for each color and sends the result to the main controller PCB. In response, the main controller PCB sends video signals to the DC controller PCB, which will form an image starting at a specific point on the ITB.
DC-CON ITB J1121 J301 J1204 PVREQ [2] ITBHP [1] VDO ASIC1(IC29) MN-CON
F-6-7
[1] Sub scanning sync control circuit [2] ITB home position sensor MN-CON: main controller PCB DC-CON: DC controller PCB Error Code: E100 (BD detention error) -0001 indicates that the BD signal is not detected a specific period of time after the scanner has started up. -0002 the BD signal is not detected while the scanner motor is rotating at a constant speed.
6-5
Chapter 6
6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light 6.3.2.1 APC Control

0002-9878
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine uses APC control to make sure that the intensity of laser light remains at a specific level by controlling the output of the laser diode of the laser driver. For the control, the machine causes the DC controller to send the laser control signal (CNT0=1, CNT1=0) to the laser drive IC on the laser driver PCB. As a result, the laser drive IC is set to APC mode, thus forcing the laser diode (LD) to emit light. While the control is under, way, the laser driver IC uses the photo diode (PD) to monitor the laser diode (LD), adjusting the output of the laser diode until a specific level of intensity is reached.
5V PD [1] CNT1 LD Laser driver J1901 J1102 CNT0 DC-CON
F-6-8
[1] Laser driver IC1 DC-CON: DC controller
6.3.2.2 PWM Control

0002-9880
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine uses PWM control to determine how long the laser unit must remain on to suit the image data coming from to the main controller PCB. The length of time (see MEMO) is selected by the DC controller PCB (16-step activation patterns for each pixel). MEMO: The relationship between the length of laser activation and the density of the image is as follows. The machine exposes the light areas (non-image areas) and leaves the dark areas (image areas) as they are; further, the darker the image, the shorter the laser activation and, conversely, the lighter the image, the longer the laser activation.
100%
Darker
Image density
Lighter
Length of activation (t) Shorter

F-6-9
Longer
6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 6.3.3.1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor
0002-9881
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine controls the laser scanner motor so that the motor rotates at a specific speed using its motor speed control mechanism and reference signal generation mechanism found inside the DC controller PCB. The motor speed control mechanism detects the speed detection signal (FG, BD), and compares it against the reference signal generated by the reference signal generation mechanism, thereby controlling the acceleration signal (ACC) and the deceleration signal (DECK) to make sure that the motor rotates at a specific speed. The machine checks different references for speed detection to suit the state of the printer unit, ultimately reducing the length of time used to control the scanner motor speed. The FG signal is a detection signal used to roughly adjust the scanner motor speed, and it is used at power-on or during last rotation. The BD signal, on the other hand, is a detection signal used to finely adjust the motor speed, and it is used at time of printing.
6-6
Chapter 6
DEC
ACC
BD
J1104
[2]
[1]
ASIC1(IC29) DC-CON
F-6-10
[1] Motor speed control mechanisms [2] Reference signal generation mechanism DC-CON: DC controller PCB Error Code: E110 (scanner motor error) -0001 the FG signal is not detected a specific period of time after the scanner motor starts up. -0002 the FG signal is not detected while the scanner motor is rotating at a constant speed.
6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter
0002-9882
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine is equipped with a mechanism to protect against exposure of its inside by laser light when the black toner assembly is opened. When the black toner hopper assembly is opened, the protrusion attached to the hopper assembly releases the laser shutter, causing the laser shutter to close so that the laser path is closed. If the DC controller PCB identifies the front cover, right cover, or black toner supply cover as being open, controller PCB forces the laser scanner motor and the laser unit to turn off.
FG
6-7
Chapter 6
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-6-13
[1]
4-3) Remove the harness from the cable guide [3]. - 5 connectors [1] 4-4) Remove the HV2 PCB [5]. - 2 screws [4]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-6-11
[1] Laser light [2] Laser shutter
[5]
[4]
[3]
[4]
F-6-14

6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit 6.4.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Laser Scanner Unit
0011-1185
6.4.1.2 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

0003-8369
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the wire guide [2]. - connector [1] 2) Remove the 2 locking plates [4]. - 2 screws [3]
[1] [2] [4]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Left Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 3) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)] 4) Remove the HV2 PCB. 4-1) Remove the harness [2] from the cable guide [3]. - connector [1]
[2]
[3]
F-6-15
[1]
3) Remove the grounding wire [2]. - screw [1] 4) Open the wire guide [3], and remove the harness [4]. 5) Remove the laser driver cover [6]. - 5 screws [5]
[3]
F-6-12
4-2) Remove the delivery cooling fan [2] together with its base. - 3 screws [1]
6-8
Chapter 6 unit into the machine so that the laser shutter will not interfere with the actuator. After replacing the laser scanner unit, be sure to perform the following: 1) Select the following in service mode, and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
[5]
[6]
[5]
[3]
6.4.1.4 Cleaning the Laser Scanner Unit

0005-3675
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the right cover (upper) [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[2]
[2]
F-6-16
[1]
[5]
[4]
6) While lifting the area [A], slide out the laser scanner unit [1] slightly. 7) Remove the laser scanner unit [1]. - 2 connectors [2]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-6-20
2) Open the front cover. 3) By pulling the grip [1] toward the front, fully open the manual feed cover [2].
[A]
F-6-17
6.4.1.3 Points to Note When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit

0003-8371
[1]
F-6-21
[2]
The laser scanner unit is attached with a laser shutter [1].

[1]
If the machine is attached with a side paper deck, be sure to remove the 2 screws [1] and removed the latch plate (front) [2] to prevent damage to the surface of th front cover when the cover is released.
[1]
F-6-18
Moreover, the actuator [1] of the laser shutter is attached to the hopper assembly.
[1]
[2]
F-6-22
4) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 5) Remove the process unit cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
F-6-19
Be sure to keep the hopper assembly open when inserting the laser scanner
6-9
Chapter 6
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-6-27
12) Shift down the lever [1], and remove the black toner bottle [2].
F-6-23
6) Attach the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the lever in position. 7) Press the release button [1] of the right deck, and slide out the right deck [2].
[1]
[2]
F-6-28
[1] [2]
F-6-24
8) Remove the front cover strap [2]. -screw [1] from the lower right
[1]
F-6-29
[1]
[2]
14) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2].
[2]
F-6-25
9) Fully open the front cover [2]. - 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front cover hinge
[1]
[1]
F-6-30
15) Slide out the grip [1] found on the edge of the dust-blocking glass to remove the glass for the machine.
[1] [2]
F-6-26
10) Close the right deck. 11) Open the black toner supply cover [1].
6-10
Chapter 6
[1]
[2]
F-6-35
20) While forcing the drum stop tool [3] against the drum fixing member [2] of the drum shaft [1], remove the fixing screw [4].
[1]
F-6-31
16) Remove the 5 connectors [1] from the upper right.

[1]
Be sure to match the protrusion [5] of the drum fixing member and the protrusion [6] of the drum stop tool.
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-6-32
[5]
[2]
17) Remove the 5 connectors [1] from the upper left.

[1]
[6]
[3]
[4]
F-6-36
21) Using a pair of precision pliers, remove the drum fixing member [1].
[1]
[1]
F-6-33
18) When you have freed the high-voltage connector cable [1] from the 2 wire saddles [2], be sure to keep it on the cable hook [3] to avoid trapping it during the work.
[2] [1] [3]
F-6-37
22) Remove the 3 binding screws (M4x8).
F-6-34
19) Remove the process unit cover [1] from the shipping box, and remove the drum stop tool [2] from the back of the cover.
[1]
F-6-38
23) Shift down the fixing/feeding releasing lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.
6-11
Chapter 6 27) Fully open the upper right cover [2]. - screw [1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-6-39
24) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1].

[1]
F-6-43
28) Remove the filter retainer [2] and the filter [3]. - screw [1] 29) Remove the connector cover [5]. - screw [4]
[2] [3] [1]
F-6-40
25) While pressing on the 2 hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
[5]
F-6-44
[4]
[2] [1]
30) Remove the grounding wire [2]. - screw [1] 31) Remove the side plate [4]. - 5 screws [3]
[3] [4]
[1]
[1]
F-6-41
[3]
F-6-45
[2]
26) While lifting both ends [1] of the process unit slightly, fully slide out the process unit [2] to the front.
[1]
32) While holding the mirror cleaning tool [1] as shown, insert it into the slit [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-6-42
F-6-46
6-12
Chapter 6 33) Turn the mirror cleaning tool [1] 90 deg clockwise as shown. (step 1) 34) Move the mirror cleaning tool [1] to the front and the rear as shown to clean the laser mirror [2]. (step 2)
Procedure1
[2] [1] [2] [1]
Procedure2 [1]
[2]
F-6-47
6-13
Chapter 7 Image Formation
Contents
Contents
7.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System ........................................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2 7.1.3 Charging System .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Image Formation Process...............................................................................................................................................7-4

7.2.1 Image Formation Process............................................................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.3 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................7-5

7.3.1 At Time of Power-On .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-5 7.3.2 During Copying/Printing (normal speed) .................................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.3.3 During Copying/Printing (2/3 speed, 1/3 speed) ......................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.4 Image Stabilization Control ...........................................................................................................................................7-7

7.4.1 Overview of Image Stabilization Control .................................................................................................................................... 7-7 7.4.2 Timing of Image Stabilization Control ........................................................................................................................................ 7-8 7.4.3 Potential Control .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-9 7.4.4 ATVC Control ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-12 7.4.5 ATR Control .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-14 7.4.6 ACR Control (Auto Carrier Refresh Control) ........................................................................................................................... 7-16 7.4.7 D-max Control ........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-16 7.4.8 D-half Control ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-18 7.4.9 PASCAL control ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.5 Charging Meachanism .................................................................................................................................................7-22

7.5.1 Controlling the Primary Charging Bias ..................................................................................................................................... 7-22 7.5.2 Controlling the Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism ......................................................................................... 7-23 7.5.3 Controlling the Pre-Transfer Charging Bias .............................................................................................................................. 7-24 7.5.4 Controlling the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism .................................................................................. 7-25 7.5.5 Pre-Exposure LED ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-26
7.6 Developing Rotary .......................................................................................................................................................7-26

7.6.1 Overview of the Developing Rotary .......................................................................................................................................... 7-26 7.6.2 Controlling the Developing Rotary............................................................................................................................................ 7-27
7.7 Developing Unit...........................................................................................................................................................7-30

7.7.1 Construction of the Color Developing Assembly ...................................................................................................................... 7-30 7.7.2 Controlling the Color Developing Assembly Drive Mechanism............................................................................................... 7-30 7.7.3 Controlling the Color Developing Bias ..................................................................................................................................... 7-31 7.7.4 Color Toner Supply.................................................................................................................................................................... 7-32 7.7.5 Detecting the Level of Color Toner ........................................................................................................................................... 7-33 7.7.6 Construction of the Black Developing Assembly...................................................................................................................... 7-35 7.7.7 Controlling the Black Developing Assembly Drive Mechanism .............................................................................................. 7-35 7.7.8 Black Toner Supply ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-36 7.7.9 Controlling the Black Developing Bias ..................................................................................................................................... 7-37
7.8 Transfer Device............................................................................................................................................................7-38

7.8.1 Overview of the Transfer Assembly .......................................................................................................................................... 7-38 7.8.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias..................................................................................................................................................... 7-39 7.8.3 Overview of the Primary Transfer Assembly ............................................................................................................................ 7-40 7.8.4 Controlling the ITB Cleaner Shifting Mechanism..................................................................................................................... 7-40 7.8.5 Checking the ITB Cleaner Position ........................................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.8.6 Overview of the Secondary Transfer Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 7-42 7.8.7 Controlling the Movement of the Secondary Transfer Roller ................................................................................................... 7-43 7.8.8 Checking the Location of the Secondary Transfer Roller ......................................................................................................... 7-44 7.8.9 Detecting the ITB Home Position.............................................................................................................................................. 7-45 7.8.10 Separation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-47
Contents
7.9 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning.................................................................................................................................... 7-47

7.9.1 Overview of the Drum Cleaning Unit........................................................................................................................................ 7-47 7.9.2 Controlling the Drum Cleaning Unit Drive Mechanism............................................................................................................ 7-48
7.10 Waste Toner Collection Mechanism ......................................................................................................................... 7-48

7.10.1 Collection of Waste Toner ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-48 7.10.2 Detecting the State of the Waste Toner Bottle (full) ............................................................................................................... 7-49
7.11 Parts Replacement Procedure.................................................................................................................................... 7-51

7.11.1 Process Unit ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-51
7.11.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Process Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 7-51 7.11.1.2 Removing the Process Unit......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-54 7.11.1.3 Points to Note When Attaching the Process Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 7-56
7.11.2 Pre-exposure LED Array ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-56

7.11.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Pre-exposure LED Array............................................................................................................................ 7-56 7.11.2.2 Removing the Pre-Exposure LED Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-60
7.11.3 Primary Charging Assembly.................................................................................................................................................... 7-60

7.11.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Parimary Charging Assembly .................................................................................................................... 7-60 7.11.3.2 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 7-61
7.11.4 Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Motor ......................................................................................................................... 7-62

7.11.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor.................................................................................................... 7-62 7.11.4.2 Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor............................................................................................................................. 7-63
7.11.5 Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.............................................................................................................................................. 7-63

7.11.5.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly........................................................................................................................................ 7-63
7.11.6 Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Motor ................................................................................................................... 7-64

7.11.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor ............................................................................................ 7-64 7.11.6.2 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor ..................................................................................................................... 7-64
7.11.7 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit ........................................................................................................................................ 7-64

7.11.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit........................................................................................................... 7-64 7.11.7.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit.................................................................................................................................... 7-68 7.11.7.3 Points to Note When Attaching the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit .................................................................................................. 7-69
7.11.8 Photosensitive Drum................................................................................................................................................................ 7-69

7.11.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum .................................................................................................................................. 7-69 7.11.8.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-75 7.11.8.3 Replacing the Photosensitive Drum............................................................................................................................................................ 7-76
7.11.9 Drum Motor ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-76

7.11.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum Motor ............................................................................................................................................... 7-76 7.11.9.2 Removing the Drum Motor......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-77
7.11.10 Drum Heater........................................................................................................................................................................... 7-78

7.11.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum Motor ............................................................................................................................................. 7-78 7.11.10.2 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater .................................................................................................................................... 7-79 7.11.10.3 Removing the Drum Heater ...................................................................................................................................................................... 7-80
7.11.11 Drum Heater PCB .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-80

7.11.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum Heater PCB .................................................................................................................................... 7-80 7.11.11.2 Removing the Drum Heater PCB ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-88 7.11.11.3 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater PCB ........................................................................................................................... 7-89
7.11.12 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade .................................................................................................................................... 7-90

7.11.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade ...................................................................................................... 7-90 7.11.12.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade ............................................................................................................................... 7-94 7.11.12.3 Points to Note When Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade ............................................................................................. 7-94
7.11.13 Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Edge Scraper .......................................................................................................................... 7-95

7.11.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Edge Scraper ............................................................................................ 7-95 7.11.13.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Edge Scraper ..................................................................................................................... 7-99
7.11.14 Hopper Assembly................................................................................................................................................................... 7-99

7.11.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Assembly..................................................................................................................................... 7-99 7.11.14.2 Releasing the Hopper Assembly............................................................................................................................................................. 7-100 7.11.14.3 Removing the Hopper Assembly ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-101
7.11.15 Hopper Supply Motor .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-101

7.11.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Black Toner Supply Motor..................................................................................................................... 7-101 7.11.15.2 Removing the Black Toner Supply Motor.............................................................................................................................................. 7-103
7.11.16 Hopper Strring Motor .......................................................................................................................................................... 7-103
Contents
7.11.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper String Motor ..............................................................................................................................7-103 7.11.16.2 Removing the Hopper Stirring Motor .....................................................................................................................................................7-105
7.11.17 Color Developing Assembly................................................................................................................................................ 7-105

7.11.17.1 Preparation for Removing the Color Developing Unit ...........................................................................................................................7-105 7.11.17.2 Removing the Color Developing Unit ....................................................................................................................................................7-109 7.11.17.3 When Replacing the Color Developing Unit ..........................................................................................................................................7-111 7.11.17.4 Replacing the Starter of the Color Developing Unit...............................................................................................................................7-112
7.11.18 Black Developing Assembly................................................................................................................................................ 7-113

7.11.18.1 Preparation for Removing the Black Developing Assembly ..................................................................................................................7-113 7.11.18.2 Removing the Black Developing Unit ....................................................................................................................................................7-117 7.11.18.3 Points to Note About Replacing the Black Developing Unit..................................................................................................................7-118
7.11.19 Black Developing Cylinder.................................................................................................................................................. 7-119

7.11.19.1 Preparation for Removing the Black Developing Cylinder ....................................................................................................................7-119 7.11.19.2 Removing the Black Developing Cylinder .............................................................................................................................................7-123 7.11.19.3 Points to Note When Handling the Black Developing Cylinder.............................................................................................................7-124 7.11.19.4 Points to Note When Mounting the Polarity Positioning Plate...............................................................................................................7-124
7.11.20 Black Developing Clutch ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-125

7.11.20.1 Preparation for Removing the Black Developing Clutch .......................................................................................................................7-125 7.11.20.2 Removing the Black Developing Clutch.................................................................................................................................................7-125
7.11.21 Color Toner Supply Clutch .................................................................................................................................................. 7-126

7.11.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Color Toner Supply Clutch ....................................................................................................................7-126 7.11.21.2 Removing the Color Toner Supply Clutch..............................................................................................................................................7-127
7.11.22 Color Developing Clutch ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-128

7.11.22.1 Preparation for Removing the Color Developing Clutch........................................................................................................................7-128 7.11.22.2 Removing the Color Developing Clutch.................................................................................................................................................7-129
7.11.23 Cleaning Assembly Scoop-Up Sheet ................................................................................................................................... 7-129

7.11.23.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Scoop-Up Sheet ....................................................................................7-129 7.11.23.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Scoop-Up Sheet .............................................................................................................7-134 7.11.23.3 Attaching the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Scoop-Up Sheet ................................................................................................................7-135
7.11.24 Secondary Transfer Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-135

7.11.24.1 Removing the Secondary Transfer Unit..................................................................................................................................................7-135
7.11.25 ITB Cleaning Unit................................................................................................................................................................ 7-136

7.11.25.1 Preparation for Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit ..................................................................................................................................7-136 7.11.25.2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit ...........................................................................................................................................................7-139
7.11.26 ITB Cleaner End Scraper ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-139

7.11.26.1 Preparation for Removing the ITB Cleaner End Scraper........................................................................................................................7-139 7.11.26.2 Removing the ITB Cleaner End Scraper.................................................................................................................................................7-143 7.11.26.3 Attaching the ITB Cleaner End Scraper..................................................................................................................................................7-143
7.11.27 Intermediate Transfer Unit................................................................................................................................................... 7-143

7.11.27.1 Preparation for Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit .....................................................................................................................7-143 7.11.27.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ..............................................................................................................................................7-145 7.11.27.3 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit .........................................................................................................................7-145 7.11.27.4 Points to Note When Replacing the Intermediate Transfer Unit ...........................................................................................................7-146
7.11.28 Intermediate Transfer Belt ................................................................................................................................................... 7-146

7.11.28.1 Preparation for Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt......................................................................................................................7-146 7.11.28.2 Removing the ITB...................................................................................................................................................................................7-150 7.11.28.3 Points to Note When Attaching the ITB .................................................................................................................................................7-150
7.11.29 ITB Home Position Sensor PCB.......................................................................................................................................... 7-151

7.11.29.1 Removing the ITB Home Position Sensor (right, left) ...........................................................................................................................7-151
7.11.30 Secondary Transfer Roller Shift Motor ............................................................................................................................... 7-151

7.11.30.1 Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller Shift Motor ...........................................................................................................................7-151
7.11.31 Primary Transfer Roller ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-151

7.11.31.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Transfer Roller..........................................................................................................................7-151 7.11.31.2 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller...................................................................................................................................................7-156 7.11.31.3 Points to Note When Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller.................................................................................................................7-157
7.11.32 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller...................................................................................................................................... 7-158

7.11.32.1 Preparation for Removing the Secondary Transfer Internal Roller ........................................................................................................7-158 7.11.32.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Inside Roller ....................................................................................................................................7-162
7.11.33 Secondary Transfer Roller ................................................................................................................................................... 7-163

7.11.33.1 Preparation for Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller......................................................................................................................7-163
Contents
7.11.33.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller .............................................................................................................................................. 7-164
7.11.34 ITB Cleaning Blade ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-164

7.11.34.1 Preparation for Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade................................................................................................................................ 7-164 7.11.34.2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade......................................................................................................................................................... 7-167 7.11.34.3 When Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade............................................................................................................................................... 7-167
7.11.35 ITB Scoop-up Sheet............................................................................................................................................................. 7-169

7.11.35.1 Preparation for Removing the Scoop-Up Sheet...................................................................................................................................... 7-169 7.11.35.2 Removing the ITB Scoop-Up Sheet ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-172
7.11.36 Intermediate Transfer Belt Static Eliminator....................................................................................................................... 7-172

7.11.36.1 Preparation for Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt Static Eliminator ......................................................................................... 7-172 7.11.36.2 Removing the ITB Static Eliminator ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-177
7.11.37 Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator.................................................................................................................................. 7-177

7.11.37.1 Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Holder ................................................................................................................. 7-177
7.11.38 Potential Sensor Unit ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-177

7.11.38.1 Preparation for Removing the Potential Sensor...................................................................................................................................... 7-177 7.11.38.2 Removing the Potential Sensor............................................................................................................................................................... 7-182
7.11.39 ATR Sensor Unit.................................................................................................................................................................. 7-182

7.11.39.1 Preparation for Removing the ATR Sensor Unit.................................................................................................................................... 7-182 7.11.39.2 Removing the ATR Sensor Unit ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-187
7.11.40 Patch Image Sensor.............................................................................................................................................................. 7-187

7.11.40.1 Preparation for Removing the Patch Image Sensor ................................................................................................................................ 7-187 7.11.40.2 Removing the Patch Image Reading Sensor........................................................................................................................................... 7-191
7.11.41 Idle Roller ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-191

7.11.41.1 Preparation for Removing the Idle Roller............................................................................................................................................... 7-191 7.11.41.2 Removing the Idle Roller........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-195 7.11.41.3 Detaching the Idle Roller ........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-196
7.11.42 Patch Image Reading Sensor Shutter Solenoid.................................................................................................................... 7-196

7.11.42.1 Preparation for Removing the Patch Image Reading Sensor Shutter Solenoid ...................................................................................... 7-196 7.11.42.2 Removing the Patch Image Reading Sensor Shutter Solenoid ............................................................................................................... 7-200
7.11.43 Charging Wire...................................................................................................................................................................... 7-200

7.11.43.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-200 7.11.43.2 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Primary Charging Assembly .......................................................................................................... 7-200 7.11.43.3 Stringing the Charging Wires ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-200 7.11.43.4 Stringing the Grid. .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-201 7.11.43.5 Adjusting the Primary Charging Wire .................................................................................................................................................... 7-201
Chapter 7
7.1 Construction
7.1.1 Specifications of the Image Formation System
0002-9938
T-7-1 Drum Unit Photosensitive drum Type of drum Diameter of drum Cleaning mechanism Speed of process A-Si 84 mm by blade (in contact) 276 mm/sec
T-7-2 Primary Charging Assembly
Method of charging Method of cleaning
by corona wire auto cleaning
T-7-3 Pre-Exposure system Method of exposure by LED array
T-7-4 Mono Color Developing Assembly
Diameter of developing cylinder Method of development Toner Toner level detection inside developing assembly
24.5 mm dry, 1-component magnetic, negative
yes
Mono Color Developing Assembly

T-7-5 Color Developing Assembly Diameter of developing cylinder Method of development Toner Toner level detection inside developing assembly 20 mm dry, 2-component non-magnetic, negative no
T-7-6 Toner Cartridge
Toner level detection (mono color)
by piezoelectric oscillator sensor
7-1
Chapter 7
Toner Cartridge
Toner level detection (color) Toner amount*
by optical sensor Y: 210g (approx.) M: 210g (approx.) C: 210g (approx.) Bk: 2000g (Bk)
*If color, indicates the amount of developer (toner + carrier).

T-7-7 Intermediate Transfer Assembly
Component Source of drive
intermediate transfer belt (ITB) by drum/ITB motor
Cleaning mechanism
by blade (in contact)
T-7-8 Feed speed 276 mm/sec Mode mono color color 184 mm/sec 92 mm/sec color color Paper type plain paper, transparency plain paper heavy paper 1 (105 to 163 g) heavy paper 2 (163 g or more), transparency
T-7-9 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly
Method of charging Method of cleaning
by corona wire auto cleaning
T-7-10 Image Stabilization Control Item Dmax control ATR control ATVC control Potential control Dhalf control PASCAL control Description determines best developing bias determines toner supply amount determines best transfer bias level determines best primary grid bias level determines best gradation control (printer) determines best gradation table (printer + reader)

0003-1029
7-2
Chapter 7
The following shows the major components associated with the machine' s image formation system:
[15] [14] [18] [13] [16] [17] [1] [2] [3] [4]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9] [8]
F-7-1
[7]
[6]
[19]
[5]
[1] Photosensitive drum [2] Primary charging assembly [3] Pre-exposure LED [4] Drum cleaner assembly [5] ITB unit [6] Pre-transfer charging assembly [7] Secondary transfer outsider roller [8] ITB cleaner assembly [9] Color toner cartridge (Y) [10] Color developing assembly (Y) [11] Color toner cartridge (C) [12] Color developing assembly (C) [13] Color developing assembly (M) [14] Color toner cartridge (M) [15] Black developing assembly [16] Toner collection roller [17] Potential sensor [18] Black toner hopper [19] ITB inside cleaner end scraper
7.1.3 Charging System

0003-1030
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci - Primary Charging Bias method of charging: by corona target of charging: primary charging wire DC bias level: 6.5kV (1400yA) - Grid Bias method of charging: by corona target of charging: grid wire DC bias level: 800V - Color Developing Bias method of charging: by roller target of charging: color developing cylinder AC bias level: 1.8kV (Vp-p) DC bias level: 300V - Black Developing Bias method of charging: by roller target of charging: black developing cylinder AC bias level: 1.7kV (p-p) DC bias level: 290V - Stray Toner Collection Roller Bias method of charging: by roller target of charging: toner collection roller DC bias level: -1.0kV - Pre-Transfer Charging Bias
7-3
Chapter 7 method of charging: by corona target of charging: pre-transfer charging wire AC bias level: 8.3kV (Vp-p) DC bias level: -1.8kV (-300yA) - Primary Transfer Bias method of charging: by corona target of charging: primary transfer roller DC bias level: 1.0kV - Primary Transfer Static Eliminator Bias method of charging: charging target of charging: primary transfer static eliminator DC bias level: -4.0kV - Secondary Transfer Bias method of charging: roller charging target of charging: secondary transfer roller DC bias level: 3.0kV (at time of cleaning, -3.0kV)
[4] [5] [6]
[3]
[2] [7]
[1] [8]
[9]
F-7-2
DC bias level: 3.0 kV (cleaning is -3.0kV) [1] Pre-transfer charging wire [2] Color developing cylinder [3] Stray toner collection roller [4] Black developing cylinder [5] Primary charging wire [6] Grid wire [7] Primary transfer static eliminator [8] Primary transfer roller [9] Secondary transfer outside roller
7.2 Image Formation Process

7.2.1 Image Formation Process
0003-1031
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Latent Static Image Formation Block This block consists of 3 steps, at the end of which a latent static image is formed on the photosensitive drum. - Step 1 (pre-exposure) [1] In preparation for primary charging, the pre-exposure LED shines light on the surface of the photosensitive drum to remove the residual charges from the surface, thus preventing uneven density. - Step 2 (primary charging) [2] In preparation for laser exposure, the machine charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to an even, positive potential. The machine uses charging method in which charges are indirectly applied to the photosensitive drum by means of a charging wire. - Step 3 (laser exposure) [3] When the surface of the photosensitive drum is scanned by a laser beam, the charges in the "light" areas become neutralized, turning the areas into a latent static image. (The machine uses a system of laser exposure in which it exposes non-imaging areas with laser light.) 2. Development Block - Step 4 (development) [4] The machine deposits toner over the latent static image on the photosensitive drum, thus turning the latent image into a visible image. The machine' s black toner is a magnetic 1-component developer while its color toner is non-magnetic 2-component developer; development of both makes is based on toner projection.
7-4
Chapter 7
3. Transfer Block In this block, the toner image on the surface of the photosensitive drum is moved to print paper by way of the ITB. - Step 5 (pre-transfer charging) [5] In full color mode, toner is deposited for all 4 colors on the ITB, with a difference in toner potential if left unattended. A specific level of bias therefore is applied when black is developed for individual colors, thereby making sure that the toner layers on the ITB are of an identical potential, thus increasing the efficiency of primary transfer. - Step 6 (primary transfer) [6] A positive charge is applied from the back of the ITB to transfer the toner from the surface of the photosensitive drum to the ITB. This process is repeated for all color (M, Y, C, Bk) in sequence. - Step 7 (secondary transfer) [7] The toner on the ITB is moved to paper. - Step 8 (separation) [8] Paper is separated from the ITB. 4. Fixing Block - Step 9 (fixing) [9] The toner is permanently fused into the fibers of the paper by means of heat and pressure. 5. ITB Cleaning Block - Step 10 (ITB cleaning) [10] The residual toner is removed from the ITB by way of cleaning the ITB. 6. Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Block - Step 11 (drum cleaning) [11] The residual toner is removed from the photosensitive drum by way of cleaning the photosensitive drum.
1. Static Image Formation Block
[2] [3] [1]
2. Developing Block
[4]
Photosensitive drum
[11]
6. Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Block
[5] [6] ITB
5. ITB Cleaning Block

[10]
Delivery
[9]
[7] [8]
Registration
Pickup
4. Fixing Block
3. Transfer Block
F-7-3
7.3 Basic Sequence

7.3.1 At Time of Power-On
0004-7867
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The main power switch is turned on while the surface temperature of the fixing roller is lower than 100 deg C (i.e., the main power switch is turned on after the machine has been left alone for a long time, such as in the morning). 1. Characteristics - Immediately before starting the sequence, the machine detects the home position of the developing rotary and removes static charges from the drum surface. - It takes about 530 sec before the machine enters the standby state after its main power switch has been turned on. - While warm-up rotation is taking place, the machine performs the following image stabilization control mechanisms: potential control, primary transfer ATVC control, secondary transfer ATVC control,D-max control, D-half control*1. *1: When the power is tuned on with the color print counter reading 500 or higher.
7-5
Chapter 7
Main switch ON
WMUPR
Drum/ITB motor (M2) Pre-exposure LED (LED1) Primary charging bias Grid bias Developing rotary motor (M5) Stray toner collection roller bias Black developing bias (DC) Black developing bias (AC) Black developing clutch (CL3) Color developing bias (DC) Color developing bias (AC) Color developing clutch (CL1) Pre-transfer charging bias Primary transfer bias Secondary transfer outside roller shift motor (M20) Secondary transfer bias ITB cleaner shift motor (M21) Patch image sensor (PS2)
CNTR
PSTBY
Potential control
Rotation, suspension during automatic adjustment
Primary transfer ATVC
D-Max control
F-7-4
2. if the main power switch is turned on with the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100 deg C or higher - It takes about 2 min or less before the machine enters the standby state after its main power switch has been turned on(i.e., the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 200 deg C). - In principle, image stabilization control is not executed.
7.3.2 During Copying/Printing (normal speed)

0005-5911
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Full-color, Plain paper, A4, 1 Copy/Print 1. Characteristics - While an image is being formed on the intermediate transfer belt, the machine keeps the ITB cleaning blade and the secondary outside roller away from the belt.
Start key ON PSTBY ITB HP signal
Drum/ITB motor (M2) Primary charging bias Grid bias Developing rotary motor (M5) Black developing bias Color developing bias Pre-transfer charging bias Primary transfer bias Secondary transfer bias
Secondary transfer outside roller shift motor (M20)
PINTR
PRINT
LSTR
PSTBY
Bk M Y C
Primary transfer ATVC Secondary transfer ATVC

Secondary transfer outside roller cleaning
ITB cleaner shift motor (M21)
ITB cleaning
ITB cleaning
F-7-5
While making mono copies/prints, the machine keeps the ITB cleaning blade and the secondary toner outside roller in contact with the intermediate transfer belt at all times.
7.3.3 During Copying/Printing (2/3 speed, 1/3 speed)

0005-5913
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Full-color, Heavy paper or OHP, A4, 1 Copy/Print
7-6
Chapter 7
1. Characteristics The machine uses 2/3 speed when it makes full-color prints or uses heavy paper (105 to 163 g). This sequence is basically the same as normal speed sequence, the difference being that the machine reduces the process speed after primary transfer to 2/3, thus increasing fixing on heavy paper. The machine uses 1/3 speed when it makes full-color prints and uses heavy paper (163 g or more) or transparency. This sequence is also identical to normal speed sequence, the difference being that the machine reduces the process speed to 1/3 speed after primary transfer.
The machine uses 2/3 speed and 1/3 speed for full-color mode, not for mono color mode.
7.4 Image Stabilization Control

7.4.1 Overview of Image Stabilization Control
0003-2128
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine is designed to execute the following control mechanisms to be sure of stable image production in the presence of changes in the site environment and deterioration of components associated with image formation over the product life.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4] DC-CON
Ganma-LUT [Printer]
Ganma-LUT [Printer+Reader]
[5]
[6] MN-CON
PRINTER
READER
F-7-6 T-7-11 Item 1 Dmax control 2 ATR control Description determines the best Color developing bias. determines toner supply amounts.
7-7
Chapter 7
Item 3 ATVC control 4 Potential control Description determines the best transfer bias level. determines the best transfer bias level.
5 Dhalf control 6 PASCAL control
determines the best gradation table (printer). determines the best gradation table (printer + reader)
7.4.2 Timing of Image Stabilization Control

0003-2620
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine uses different control mechanisms depending on the site environment; specifically, it executes the following as part of different sequences of operation: 1. At Power-On / Toner container replacement The control lasts about 120 sec*1. *1: The machine performs this control mechanism when the temperature of the fixing upper roller is less than 100 deg C. *2: The machine performs this control mechanism in response to a history of making 500 or more color prints (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C).
Main power switch ON Toner container replacement WMUPR STBY
Potential control
Primary transfer ATVC control Secondary transfer ATVC control
D-max control
D-half control *2
F-7-7
*1: The machine performs the image stabilization control mechanism at power-on or toner container replacement only when the surface temperature of the fixing roller is less than 100 deg C. *2: The machine performs D-half control when the power is turned on with its color print counter reading 500 or higher (and the temperature of the fixing upper roller being 100 deg C or lower). 2. In Response to a Press on the Start Key (mono color) The control lasts about 6 sec.
Start key ON PRINT
Mono color print (for every 240 prints)
STBY
INTR
LSTR
F-7-8
3. In response to a Press on the start Key (full color) The control lasts a maximum of about 80 sec.
Start key ON PRINT

Full color print (for every 120 prints)
STBY
INTR
LSTR
Primary transfer ATVC control Secondary transfer ATVC control Potential control Primary transfer ATVC control ATR control
*1
F-7-9
*1: The machine also performs this control mechanism in response to every incidence of an image ratio of 480% (as converted). 4. During Last Rotation The control lasts about 100 sec.
7-8
Chapter 7
PRINT
Last print
LSTR
*1 Potential control Primary transfer ATVC control ATR control
STBY
F-7-10
*1: The machine performs this control mechanism in response to every incidence of an image ratio of 200% or every 20 full-color prints. 5. Jam recovery The control lasts a maximum of about 100 sec.
Jam recovery
WMUPR
STBY
Potential control
D-max control
D-harf control
*2
F-7-11
*1: The machine performs this control mechanism when the temperature of the fixing upper roller is less than 100 deg C. *2: The machine performs this control mechanism in response to a history of making 500 or more color prints (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C). 6. Return from sleep state The control lasts a maximum of about 100 sec.
Return from sleep state
WMUPR
STBY
Potential control
D-max control
D-harf control *2
F-7-12
*1: The machine performs this control mechanism when the temperature of the fixing upper roller is less than 100 deg C. *2: The machine performs this control mechanism in response to a history of making 500 or more color prints (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C).
7.4.3 Potential Control

0003-7609
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine is designed to perform potential control to be sure of stable printing in the presence of drops in the sensitivity of the photosensitive drum or changes in the environment. 1. Conditions of Execution - when the power is turned on/when the toner cartridge is replaced (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C) - after jam recovery/after return from a sleep state (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C) - every 120 full-color prints made continuously (stops printing for performance) - every 20 full-color prints or during last rotation in response to every incidence of an image ratio of 200% (as converted) - during performance of PASCAL control - in response to changes in the environment 2. Items of Control - Drum dark-area potential (VD) control - Drum light-area potential (VL) control
7-9
Chapter 7
DC-CON
HVT2
[1]
[2]
HVT1
[3]
[7]
[6] [5]
[8]
[4]
[9]
F-7-13
[1] Potential control PCB [2] Laser driver PCB [3] Environment sensor [4] Pre-exposure LED [5] Grid wire [6] Primary charging wire [7] Potential sensor [8] Black developing cylinder [9] Color developing cylinder 3. Particulars of Control a. Drum Dark Area Potential Control (VD) The machine decides on a grid bias (Vg) with the aim of obtaining the best dark area potential (VD) at various points of development (black developing cylinder position, color cylinder position) for the photosensitive drum.
T-7-12 Order Item Description
Application of Vg
applies Vg (Vg1 through Vg3) to the drum.
creation of the target Vd-Vg curve
measures the VD in response to the foregoing Vg (Vg1 through Vg3) using the potential sensor to create a VD-Vg curve.
determination of a target Vg
computes the target VD from the output of the environment sensor; then, decides on a target Vg from the target VD.
Reference: * Vg1=650V,Vg2=700V,Vg3=750V * Target VD(Bk)= approx. 490V * Target VD(Color)= approx. 450V
7-10
Chapter 7
Target VD
VD(V)
VD-Vg Curve 0
F-7-14
Vg1
Vg2 Vg Vg3
Grid bias Vg (V)

b. Drum Light Area Potential (VL) Control The machine decides on a laser output level to obtain the best light area potential (VL) for various points of development (developing cylinder position, color cylinder position) for the photosensitive drum.
activation of laser
shines laser light at a specific laser power level (LP1 thorough LP4) on the drum.
creation of a VL-LP curve (sensor position)
measures the VL against the aforementioned laser power level (LP1 through LP4) using the potential sensor, and creates a VL-LP curve for the sensor position.
creation of a VL-LP curve (points of black development/color development)
creates a VL-LP curve for points of black and color development based on the result of computation on the VL curve for the sensor position.
monitoring of the environment sensor
computes the target VL potential for individual colors based on the output of the environment sensor (target VL (Bk), target VL (color).
determination of laser output
determines the laser output that enables the target VL potential for individual colors based on the target VL-LP curve.
Reference: The target VL values are for the normal environment (temperature of 23 deg C; humidity of 50%). - Target VL (BK)= approx. 230V - Target VL (Color)= approx. 150V
7-11
Chapter 7
Control of No.1 to 3
VL-LP Curve (sensor position) VL-LP Curve (Bk cylinder position) VL-LP Curve (color cylinder position)
F-7-15
Target VL(Color)
F-7-16
7.4.4 ATVC Control

0003-7610
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine executes ATVC control to determine the best transfer voltage when transferring toner from the photosensitive drum to the ITB and from the ITB to paper. This control may be of 2 types: primary transfer ATVC and secondary transfer ATVC.
7-12
VL(V) Target VL(Bk)

0
20h 60h A0h
E0h
Laser power
Control of No.4 to 5
VL-LP Curve (sensor position) VL-LP Curve (Bk cylinder position) VL-LP Curve (color cylinder position)
Target VL(Bk)
VL(V)
0
90h
E0h
Laser power
Chapter 7
UN-12
J470 ENV_TEMP J1120A
DC-CON
J1133B J1119B
TR2_OUT
TR1_OUT
J1605 J1701
HVT2
J1606
HVT3
[1]
[2]
F-7-17
[1] Primary transfer roller [2] Secondary transfer outside roller DC-CON: DC controller UN-12: environment sensor 1. Primary Transfer ATVC In primary transfer ATVC, the machine determines the primary transfer voltage so the target transfer current may be obtained at time of transfer. a. Conditions of Execution - when the power is turned on/when the toner cartridge is replaced (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C) - after jam recovery/after return from a sleep state (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C) - during initial rotation in response to a press on the Start key - every 120 full-color prints made continuously (stops printing for performance) - every 240 mono-color prints image continuously (stops printing for performance) - during last rotation in response to every incidence of an image ratio of 200% or 20 full-color prints made continuously - during performance of PASCAL - in response to changes in the environment b. Particulars of Control
7-13
Chapter 7
1 application of the primary transfer bias applies a specific level of bias to the primary transfer roller; then, detects the level of current by HVT2 to feed the data back to the DC controller.
monitoring the environment sensor
uses the DC controller to compute the correction value from the output of the environment sensor and the printing information (paper type, color mode).
determination of the primary transfer bias
uses the DC controller to determine the best transfer bias while taking into account the correction value.
2. Secondary Transfer ATVC In secondary transfer ATVC, the machine determines the secondary transfer voltage so that the target transfer current may be obtained at time of transfer. a. Conditions of Execution - when the power is turned on/when the toner cartridge is replaced (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C) - after jam recovery/after return from a sleep state (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C) - during initial rotation in response to a press on the Start key - every 120 full-color prints made continuously (stops printing for performance) - every 240 mono-color prints image continuously (stops printing for performance) - during performance of PASCAL - in response to changes in the environment b. Particulars of Control
application of secondary transfer bias
applies a specific level of bias to the secondary transfer roller; then, uses HVT3 to detect the level of current and feeds the data back to the DC controller.
monitoring of the environment sensor
uses the DC controller to compute the correction value from the output of the environment sensor and the printing information (paper type, 1st-side/2nd-side).
determination of the secondary transfer bias
uses the DC controller to determine the best secondary transfer bias while taking the correction value into account.
7.4.5 ATR Control

0003-6782
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine executes ATR control to compute the amount of toner to supply to the color developing assembly based on the amount of toner it has used. 1. Particulars of Control
a. Computing the Amount of Toner to Supply The machine computes the amount of toner to be supplied to individual color developing assemblies. The machine uses 3 types of data to make these computations. - video count (performed for every color print) The machine uses the video count data to predict the amount of toner likely to be consumed, and computes the amount of toner consumed. - result of detection by the patch image read sensor (in response to an image ratio of 480%, as converted or 60 color prints made continuously*1) The machine uses the patch image read sensor to measure the toner image created on the ITB, and adjust the amount of toner to be supplied so that the density will be identical to the target density. - result of detection by the ATR sensor (performed for every 10 color prints) The machine uses the ATR sensor to measure the developer on the cylinder of each color developing assembly, and increases/decrease the toner supply target if the measurement is outside of the target density range. *1: When this condition occurs, the machine stops the ongoing job and forms a patch on the intermediate transfer belt for detection by the patch image read sensor.
7-14
Chapter 7
MN-CON
[1]
DC-CON
[3] PS4 M Toner

C Developing assembly M Developing assembly
[2] PS2
C Toner
Y Developing assembly
Y Toner
Developing rotary assembly
F-7-18
[1] Video count [2] Result of detection by patch image read sensor [3] Result of detection by ATR sensor PS4: ATR sensor PS2: patch image read sensor DC-CON: DC controller MN-CON: main controller Error Code: E020-xx10: the SGNL value for INIT control is lower than 62. E020-xx11: the REF value for INIT control at time of initial setup is lower than 62. E020-xx12: the SGNL value for INIT control at time of initial setup is 960 or higher. E020-xx13: the REF value for INIT control at time of initial setup is 960 or higher. E020-xx81: the P-SENS-P value at time of reading the background (ITB surface) for patch detection is lower than 255. E020-xx90: the result of computation by patch reading for patch detection is lower than 16. E020-xx91: the result of computation by patch reading for patch detection is 1008 or higher. E020-xx92: the result of computation by patch reading for patch detection is lower than 42 for 3 times continuously. E020-xx93: the result of computation by patch reading for patch detection is 522 or higher for 3 times continuously. E020-xxA0: the SGNL value for ATR control is lower than 62. E020-xxA1: the REF value for ATR control is lower than 62. E020-xxA2: the SGNL value for ATR control is 960 or higher. E020-xxA3: the REF value for ATR control is 960 or higher. E020-xxA8: T/D ratio detected as a result of ATR control exceeds its upper limit (5%) 5 consecutive times.
7-15
Chapter 7 E020-xxA9: T/D ratio detected as a result of ATR control falls below its lower limit (-4%) three consecutive times. E020-xxC0: the variation among the SGNL values for ATR is 100 or higher. E020-xxC1: the variation among the REF values for ATR is 100 or higher. E020-xxC2: the variation among the SGNL values for patch detection is 400 or higher. E020-xxD0: the average of the SGNL values for INIT control at time of initial setup is 200 or lower. E020-xxD1: the average of the REF value for INIT control at time of initial setup is 200 or lower. E020-xxD2: the average of the patch detection (SGNL) values for INIT control at time of initial setup is 200 or lower. E020-xxD4: the average of the SGNL value for INIT control at time of initial setup is 800 or higher. E020-xxD5: the average of the REF values for INTI control at time of initial setup is 562 or higher. E020-xxDA: the variation among the REF values for INTI control at time of initial setup is 100 or higher. E020-xxDB: the variation among the REF values for INTI control at time of setup is 10 or higher. E020-xxDC: the variation among the patch detection (SGNL) values for INTI control at time of initial setup is 800 or higher. The suffix xx of any of the foregoing error codes indicates the color developing assembly in question: xx=00: no distinction by color 01=Y 02=M 03=C
7.4.6 ACR Control (Auto Carrier Refresh Control)

0004-9234
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine's ACR control is designed to prolong the life of the color developing assemblies by feeding the developing assemblies with a fresh supply of toner (mix of resin dye and magnetic iron) while discharging deteriorating carrier from the assemblies. A new supply of toner is sent to a color developing assembly from its buffer assembly when the feedscrew inside the buffer assembly rotates (the DC controller turns on the development motor (M3) and the color toner supply clutch (CL2) when a shortage of toner is expected.) Once inside the developing assembly, the toner is moved forward by the feedscrew inside it; the deteriorating carrier in the assembly, on the other hand, is discharged outside the assembly, falling on its own weight for collection in the waste toner case.
DC-CON J1109A
CL2
[1] [2]
M3
M toner C
C toner
[3]
Y toner
Y
F-7-19
[1] Toner feedscrew [2] Buffer assembly [3] Color developing assembly M3: development motor CL2: toner supply clutch DC-CON: DC controller
7.4.7 D-max Control

0003-7060
7-16
Chapter 7
The machine executes D-max (image density correction) control so as to limit fluctuations in the image density caused by changes in the environment or deterioration of the photosensitive drum or of toner. The machine uses the DC controller of the printer unit for the control. When specific conditions exist, the DC controller creates a patch pattern of individual colors (Y, M, C) on the ITB; then, it uses the patch image sensor (PS2) to measure the density of the patches to determine a developing bias that will bring about a desirable density for each color. The machine executes D-max control for the following conditions: - when the power is turned on/when the toner cartridge is replaced (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C) - after jam recovery/after return from a sleep state (with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C) - during last rotation every 200 full-color prints*1 - during performance of PASCAL - in response to changes in the environment 1: Perform this condition until it becomes 4000-page printing in total. And after 4000 pages is not performed.
DC-CON
PS2
F-7-20
PS2: patch image sensor DC-CON: DC controller 1. Flow of Operations The following shows the flow of operations executed under this control:
7-17
Chapter 7
Starts up
ITB Creates a patch pattern
PS2 EX: D-max Correction Table for M Reads the patches
M3 M2
Target density
M4 M5
DC controller Creates a D-max correction table (M, Y, C)
M1
DC controller 0 Vdc Determines the developing bias (VDC)
F-7-21
7.4.8 D-half Control

0003-7416
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine executes D-half control (image gradation correction control) to bring about an ideal set of gradation characteristics. When specific conditions exist, the main controller sends patch pattern data for individual colors (Y, M, C, Bk) to the DC controller, which in response forms patch patterns of individual colors (Y, M, C, Bk) on the ITB. Thereafter, the DC controller measures the density of the patch pattern using the patch image read sensor (PS2), and sends the result to the main controller, where gradation correction is executed so that ideal halftone images may be obtained. The machine executes D-half control for the following: - when the power is turned on/when the toner cartridge is replaced*1 - after jam recovery/after return from a sleep state*1 - in response to changes in the environment - during performance of PASCAL *1: if there is a history of 500 or more full-color prints with the temperature of the fixing upper roller being less than 100 deg C.
7-18
Chapter 7
MN-CON
Patch pattern data output
Density data input
DC-CON
PS2
F-7-22
M Y C [1] Bk PS2
F-7-23
PS2: patch image read sensor DC-CON: DC controller MN-CON: main controller 1. Flow of Operation The following shows the flow of operation that takes place during the control:
7-19
Chapter 7
Starts up
Main controller Generates patch pattern data
ITB Creates patch patterns
PS2 EX: D-max Correction Table for M Reads the patches Actual gradation characteristics M9 M10 M8 100 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 0 density data (MN-CON)
F-7-24
DC controller Generates density data
7.4.9 PASCAL control

0003-9817
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine is designed to execute PASCAL control (image characteristics correction control) to enable the reproduction of ideal image characteristics, and the execution involves the reader unit mechanisms. The machine uses the main controller of the printer unit for the control. The printer uses the data stored in the main controller to generate 3 types of test patterns *1; when the printouts of the test patterns are placed in the reader unit one after another, the machine reads them in sequence to enable the main controller to execute gradation correction that will lead to ideal image characteristics. The machine executes PASCAL control for the following conditions: - in response to a command by the user
7-20
density data (DC-CON)
image characteristics
Main controller Creates a D-half correction table (M, Y, C)
100
Chapter 7
Reader
Test pattern data input
MN-CON
Test pattern data output

F-7-25
Printer
NM-CON: main controller 1. Flow of Operation The following shows the flow of operation that takes place during the control:
Start-up
Printer unit
The main controller generates test patterns (3 types).
The user/service person places the printouts of the test patterns in the reader unit one after another.
Reader unit EX: Image Correction Table for M Actual gradation characteristics 100 M63 M64 Reader unit
Data output (reader unit)
The machine reads the test patterns.
M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 0 Data output (MN-CON) 100 Ideal image characteristics
The machine generates data.
Printer unit The machine uses the main controller to prepare an image correction table (MYCBk).
F-7-26
*1: Differences Among 3 Test Patterns - Test Print 1
7-21
Chapter 7 It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of error diffusion processing, which is not subject to moire and, therefore, used in text/photo/map, print photo, and text mode. - Test Print 2 It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of screening with a low number of lines, which is suitable for the expression of gradation and, therefore, is used for print film photo mode and when priority is placed on PDL. - Test Print 3 It shows 64 gradations expressed by means of screening with a high number of lines, which is suitable for the achievement of a high resolution and is, therefore, used when priority is placed on PDL resolution.
Test Print
F-7-27
7.5 Charging Meachanism

7.5.1 Controlling the Primary Charging Bias
0003-1034
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The primary charging bias is used to charge the surface of the photosensitive drum to a positive potential by way of preparing it for image formation. The primary charging bias may be either of 2 types of biases: primary charging DC bias, grid DC bias. The bias is generated by the high-voltage PCB 1 in response to a command from the DC controller, and is applied to the primary charging wire or the grid wire. The level of the grid bias is determined based on the result of potential control.
7-22
Chapter 7
DC-CON
J1111B
GRID_CONT PRIM_CONT PRIM_ON
J1501
HVT1
J1511
GRID
FT1520
PRIMARY
[1]
[2]
F-7-28
[1] Grid charging wire [2] Grid wire HVT1: high-voltage PCB 1 DC-CON: DC controller
7.5.2 Controlling the Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism

0003-1035
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine is equipped with a mechanism to clean the charging wire with the aim of preventing soiling of the wire inside the primary charging assembly. The primary charging wire cleaner motor (M26) is rotated in normal and reverse directions to turn the cleaner screw, causing the wire cleaner to move to the front or the rear for cleaning of the charging wire. The DC controller serves to drive the primary charging wire cleaner motor by generating 2 types of primary charging wire cleaner motor drive signals (PRIM_CLN_MTR0, PRIM_CLN_MTR1). The relationship between the drive signals from the DC controller and the cleaning operation is as follows: - when PRIM_CLN_MTR0 is '0', the wire cleaner moves to the rear. - when PRIM_CLN_MTR0 is '1', the wire cleaner moves to the front.
7-23
Chapter 7
J1106-A1
PRIM_CLN_MTR0 PRIM_CLN_MTR1
DC-CON
-A2
[1] [3]
[5]
[2]
[4]
F-7-29
[1] Primary charging assembly [2] Charging wire [3] Cleaner screw [4] Wire cleaner [5] Primary charging wire cleaner motor DC-CON: DC controller The cleaning operation starts in response to the following: - the temperature of the fixing roller is 10 deg C or less at time of power-on. - wire cleaning is performed in user mode. - as many as 2000 images have been processed (i.e., 2000 pages of mono color; 500 pages of full color)*1. *1: the intervals at which cleaning takes place may be adjusted using the following service mode item: - in a normal environment, COPIER>OPTION>BODY>W-CLN-P. - in a high temperature/high humidity environment, COPIER>OPTION>BODY>W-CLN-PH.
7.5.3 Controlling the Pre-Transfer Charging Bias

0003-1038
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The pre-transfer charging bias is used to even out the potential of the toner layers formed on the ITB, and it is applied to the toner on the photosensitive drum when black toner is developed. The pre-transfer charging bias may be either of 2 types of biases: pre-transfer charging DC bias, pre-transfer charging AC bias. The bias is generated by the highvoltage PCB 1 in response to a command from the DC controller, and is applied to the pre-transfer charging wire.
7-24
Chapter 7
DC-CON
J1111B
Pre-transfer high-voltage unit

FT1521
POST_CONT
J1501
HVT1
J1514F
POST_DC_ON POST
POST_AC_ON
[1]
F-7-30
[1] Pre-transfer charging wire HVT1: high-voltage PCB 1 DC-CON: DC controller
7.5.4 Controlling the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism

0003-1040
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine is equipped with a mechanism to clean the charging wire found inside the pre-transfer charging assembly, thus preventing soiling of the wire. The pre-transfer charging wire cleaner motor (M27) rotates in normal and reverse directions to turn the cleaner screw; as a result, the wire cleaner moves to the front or the rear to clean the charging wire. The DC controller controls the pre-transfer charging wire cleaner motor drive signal (POST_CLN_+MTR0, POST_CLN_MTR1) to drive the pre-transfer charging wire cleaner motor. The relationship between the drive signal generated by the DC controller and the cleaning operation is as follows: - when POST_CLN_MTR0 is '0', the wire cleaner moves to the rear. - when POST_CLN_MTR0 is '1', the wire cleaner moves to the front.
J1108-A11
POST_CLN_MTR0 POST_CLN_MTR1
DC-CON
J1108-A12
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5] [3]
F-7-31
7-25
Chapter 7 [1] Pre-transfer charging assembly [2] Charging wire [3] Cleaner screw [4] Wire cleaner [5] Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner motor [6] rear [7] front DC-CON: DC controller The cleaning operation takes place in response to the following: - the temperature of the fixing roller is 100 deg C or less at power-on. - wire cleaning is performed in user mode. - as many as 2000 images have been made (copy count; if mono color, 2000 pages, if full color, 500 pages).*1 *1: the intervals at which cleaning takes place may be adjusted using the following service mode items: - in a normal environment, COPIER>OPTION>BODY>W-CLN-P. - in a high temperature/high humidity environment, COPIER>OPTION>BODY>W-CLN-PH.
7.5.5 Pre-Exposure LED

0003-1043
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine uses a pre-exposure LED array to remove charges remaining on the photosensitive drum, thus preventing uneven density in prints.The pre-exposure LED array is arranged opposite the photosensitive drum, and the LEDs are turned on during printing to remove residual changes from the drum surface and forming stable images. The DC controller controls the pre-exposure LED array drive signal (EXP_LED) to turn on and off the LED array. The DC controller generates the following drive signal: EXP_LED: if '0', the pre-exposure LED array goes on. if '1', the pre-exposure LED array goes off.
[1]
J1106-A7 EXP_LED
DC-CON Drum
F-7-32
[1] Pre-exposure LED array
7.6 Developing Rotary

7.6.1 Overview of the Developing Rotary
0003-1164
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The developing rotary serves to position a color developing assembly to a specific point. Stored inside the rotary are 3 types of color developing assemblies (M, Y, C) and color toner cartridges (M, Y, C). When printing occurs, the developing rotary motor (M5) rotates to turn the rotary counterclockwise so that one of the 3 color developing assemblies will come face to face with the photosensitive drum in sequence. The rotary is locked in or out of place by the work of the developing rotary locking solenoid (SL10). The rotary is equipped with 2 sensors (PS19, PS8), serving to detect the position of the rotary assembly and to turn on and off SL10. The machine uses the DC controller to control these electrical loads: M5, SL10, PS19, PS8.
7-26
Chapter 7
DC-CON
M5 PS19 PS8 Developing rotary assembly C developing assembly C toner M toner Y developing assembly M developing assembly SL10
Y toner
F-7-33
DC-CON: DC controller M5: developing rotary motor PS8: developing rotary solenoid sensor PS19: developing rotary home position sensor SL10: developing rotary fixing solenoid
7.6.2 Controlling the Developing Rotary

0003-1167
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine moves the color developing assemblies (M, Y, C) and the color toner cartridges (M, Y, C) stored inside the developing rotary to a specific point at specific times. The DC controller uses the developing rotary home position sensor (PS19) to monitor the position of the rotary, turning on and off the developing rotary motor (M5) to move the rotary. To rotate the rotary, the DC controller turns on the DC controller developing rotary locking solenoid so that the rotary is freed. On the other hand, to stop the rotary, the DC controller turns off the solenoid so that the rotary is attached. The DC controller monitors the state of PS19 to check on the position of the rotary. On the back of the rotary is the home position detecting flag, used to cause the DC controller to assume that the rotary is in home position when the flag moves past PS19. The DC controller rotates the rotary with reference to the rotary home position, making sure that the rotary stops only at specific points. There are as many as 6 points at which the rotary stops: - point of Y toner cartridge access (home position *1): 1 point - point of M, C toner cartridge access: 2 points - point of color toner development: 3 points
7-27
Chapter 7
DC-CON
M5 PS19 PS8
C developing assembly
SL10
C toner M toner
Y developing assembly M developing assembly
Y toner FLAG
F-7-34
DC-CON: DC controller M5: developing rotary motor PS8: developing rotary solenoid sensor PS19: developing rotary home position sensor 1: home position is also used for black development. If a color developing cylinder was allowed to remain in contact with the sensitive drum at time of black development, the cylinder would disturb the black toner image. To prevent such disturbance, the machine moves the developing rotary to its home position so that a color developing cylinder will never be opposite the photosensitive drum. The following shows the position of Y toner cartridge access and point of M development.
7-28
Chapter 7
PS8
C toner cartridge
C developing assembly
Y developing assembly
M toner cartridge
Y toner cartridge
Flag
M developing assembly
<Point of Y Toner Cartridge Access>
PS8
C toner cartridge
M toner cartridge
C toner cartridge
M developing assembly
Y developing assembly
Y toner cartridge
Flag <Point of M Development>

F-7-35
The following shows the sequence of operation of the developing rotary when printing takes place: - Timing of Operation (developing rotary; full color)
Start key ON STBY
Developing rotary motor (M5)
INTR [1] [2]
PRINT [3]
LSTR [4]
Rotary HP sensor (PS8)

Developing rotary Solenoid (SL10) Develpping rotary SL sensor (PS19)
Bk
F-7-36
[1] moves from the rotary home position to the point of M development. [2] moves from the point of M development to the point of Y development. [3] moves from the point of Y development to the point of C development. [4] moves from the point of C development to the rotary home position. - Timing of Operation (developing rotary; mono color)
7-29
Chapter 7
Start key ON STBY

Developing rotary motor (M5)
INTR
PRINT
LSTR
Rotary HP sensor (PS8)

Developing rotary Solenoid (SL10) Develpping rotary SL sensor (PS19)
F-7-37
Error Code: E021-0001 (developing rotary rotation error) indicates that any of the following 2 conditions exits: - the home position flag cannot be detected. - an error occurred in the intervals at which the home position flag is detected while the developing rotary is rotating.
7.7 Developing Unit

7.7.1 Construction of the Color Developing Assembly
0003-1050
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine uses 3 types of color developing assemblies (M, Y, C), all stored inside the developing rotary. These color developing assemblies are of the same construction, the only difference being the color of toner (dye) supplied by individual toner cartridges. The following shows the construction and the functions of the color developing assemblies:
T-7-16 Item 1 Developing cylinder Description holds toner (toner/carrier).
2 Blade
forms an even layer of toner on the developing cylinder.
3 Developer stirring screw
stirs the toner and supplies it to the developing cylinder.
[1]
[2] [3]
F-7-38
7.7.2 Controlling the Color Developing Assembly Drive Mechanism

0003-1110
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The color developing assembly mainly consists of the developing cylinder, toner stirring screw A, and toner stirring screw B. These loads are driven when the color developing clutch (CL1) goes on, and are designed so that they go on only when development takes place.
7-30
Chapter 7
DC-CON J1109A J1109B
M3
CL1
[3]
F-7-39
[2]
[1]
[1] Developing cylinder [2] Toner stirring screw A [3] Toner stirring screw B M3: development motor CL1: color developing clutch DC-CON: DC controller
7.7.3 Controlling the Color Developing Bias

0003-1113
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The color developing bias is generated to enable depositing of color toner over the latent static image on the surface of the photosensitive drum. The color developing bias may be either of 2 types of biases: color developing DC bias, color developing AC bias. These biases are generated by the high-voltage PCB 2 in response to a command from the DC controller, and are applied to the color developing cylinder at specific timing. The level of the bias is determined based on the result of potential control.
7-31
Chapter 7
DC-CON
J1133A
DEV_CLR_DC_CONT
J1601
HVT2
J1611
DEV_CL_DC_ON
AC+DC
DEV_CL_AC_ON
[1]
F-7-40
[1] Color developing cylinder DC-CON: DC controller HVT2: high-voltage PCB 2
7.7.4 Color Toner Supply

0003-6236
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The color toner is sent to the color toner developing assembly from the color toner cartridge by way of the buffer assembly. The supply path consists of 2 segments: the path in the buffer assembly and the path to the color developing assembly. In the former, toner inside the color toner cartridge is moved to the buffer assembly of the developing rotary. The work is done by rotating the developing rotary so that toner inside the color toner cartridge falls on its own into the buffer assembly. The latter, on the other hand, is done when the toner feedscrew found inside the buffer assembly rotates; the feedscrew is controlled by the DC controller, which turns on the development motor (M3) and the color toner supply clutch (CL2) according to the amounts of toner needed as indicated by the result of ATR control. The toner feedscrew inside the buffer assembly is driven to rotate for a specific period of time to supply the color developing assembly with the exact amount of toner from the toner buffer assembly.
7-32
Chapter 7
DC-CON J1109A
CL2
[1] [2]
M3
M toner C
C toner
[3]
Y toner
Y
F-7-41
[1] Color toner feedscrew [2] Buffer assembly [3] Color developing assembly M3: development motor CL2: color toner supply clutch
7.7.5 Detecting the Level of Color Toner

0003-1118
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine is equipped with 2 types of detection mechanism to monitor the level of color toner: - based on the reading of the video counter - based on the state of the scanner sensor 1. Detection by the Reading of the Video Counter The machine computes the amount of toner consumption for individual colors based on the video data coming from the main controller, and uses the result to find out the level of toner remaining inside the color developing assembly. The machine runs a check for every color print, and keeps the result of detection in the memory of the DC controller. The range of toner level is between 1% and 100% (in 1% increments). MEMO: When the color toner starts to run out, the machine indicates the user message "Toner Running Short," with the level of toner falling to 10%. (at time of shipment) The timing of indicating the message may be changed in service mode (between toner levels of 5% and 10%): COPIER>OPTION>BODY>T-LW-LVL. 2. Detention by the Optical Sensor The machine uses a penetration type sensor (color toner level sensor; PS25) to check the presence/absence of color toner; specifically, the DC controller monitors the state of PS25, which consists of a light-emitting segment (LED) and a light-receiving segment (PD). When printing starts, the DC controller generates the LED drive signal (CL_TNR_SNS_ON) to turn on the LED. The light from the light-emitting segment moves through the light guide attached to the cartridge to reach the inside of the toner cartridge. The light then moves through the toner cartridge and then along the light guide to reach the light-receiving segment, causing the color toner level detection signal (CL_TNR_REMAIN) to be sent to the DC controller. The DC controller, in turn, detects the presence/absence of toner using the toner level detection signal occurring as the result of turning on the light-emitting segment of the sensor. The following shows the timing of detection:
7-33
Chapter 7
[4]
[1]
CL_TNR_SNS_ON CL_TNR_REMAIN
[3] DC-CON [2]
[4]
[4]
[5] PS25 <Much Toner Left>

F-7-42
PS25 <Little Toner Left>
[1] Toner cartridge [2] Light-emitting segment [3] Light-receiving segment [4] Light guide [5] Toner PS25: color toner level sensor DC-CON: DC controller
<Little Toner Left> Detection starts 1 cycle

Light emitting segent Light receiving segent
1 cycle
PS25
Counter1(*1) Counter2(*2)
1 1
1 1
<Much Toner Left> Detection starts 1 cycle

Light emitting segent Light receiving segent
1 cycle
PS25
Counter1(*1) Counter2(*2)
F-7-43
0 0
1 0
*1: if the light-receiving segment of PS25 receives light, '1'. *2: if the state of counter 1 is '1' as many as 4 times during a single cycle (5 lighting operations), '1'.
7-34
Chapter 7 MEMO: If color toner is absent, the user message "Add Toner" is indicated and the printing is stopped.
7.7.6 Construction of the Black Developing Assembly

0003-1147
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The black developing assembly is stored outside the developing rotary, and is held opposite the photosensitive drum at all times. The toner supplied to the black developing assembly is fed from the hopper assembly. The following shows the construction and the functions of the black developing assembly:
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[7] [8]
F-7-44 T-7-17 Item [1] Toner feedscrew Description moves toner supplied by the hopper assembly to the inside of the developing unit.
[2] Toner stirring plate 1
supplies toner to the developing cylinder.
[3] Toner stirring plate 2
supplies toner to the developing cylinder.
[4] Blade
forms an even layer of toner on the developing cylinder.
[5] Developing cylinder
retains toner
[6] Toner colleting roller
attracts stray toner.
[7] Scraper
scrapes off stray toner from the toner collecting roller.
[8] Stray toner case.
collects stray toner in the toner case.
7.7.7 Controlling the Black Developing Assembly Drive Mechanism

0003-1152
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The black developing assembly consists of 5 components in terms of drive loads, which are driven when the development motor (M3) and the black developing clutch (CL3) go on.
7-35
Chapter 7
DC-CON J1109A
M3
CL3
[1]
F-7-45
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1] Toner feedscrew [2] Toner stirring plate 1 [3] Toner stirring plate 2 [4] Developing cylinder [5] Toner colleting roller M3: development motor CL3: black developing clutch DC-CON: DC controller
7.7.8 Black Toner Supply

0003-1154
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Black toner is supplied to the black toner developing assembly from the black toner cartridge by way of the hopper assembly, which plays the major role in the supply path. As many as 2 motors are associated with the hopper assembly: black toner supply motor (M25) and hopper stirring motor (M23), serving to adjust the amount of toner sent to the black developing assembly. The DC controller monitors the output of the black toner level sensor (TS1) and the toner level sensor (TS2) found inside the hopper, determining the amount of toner to supply to the hopper assembly or to the black toner developing assembly. When the toner starts to run out, the DC controller drives M25 or M23 to make up for the shortage; if the level of toner is high, it keeps M23 and M25 still.
[1]
M25
[2]
M23
[3]
TS2
[4] [5]
J1108B
DC-CON
BK_TNR_REMAIN
[6] TS1
F-7-46
[1] Black toner bottle [2] Hopper assembly [3] Toner stirring plate
7-36
J1106A
SUB_HOP_REMAIN
Chapter 7 [4] Toner feedscrew [5] Toner feed pipe [6] Black developing assembly M23: hopper stirring motor M25: black toner supply motor TS1: black toner level sensor TS22: hopper inside toner level sensor DC-CON: DC controller The machine uses the following sequence of operation to make up for any shortage of toner.
- If Toner Inside the Hopper Assembly

Toner absence detected
TS2 M25 TS1 M24 1.9S 2.0S 1.0S
1cycle (Max:20cycle)
F-7-47
- If Toner Runs Out in the Black Developing Assembly

Toner absence detected
TS2 M25 TS1 M24 0.3S 4.5S 1cycle (Max:8cycles) 0.5S
F-7-48
Error Code: E020-00FF (hopper stirring motor error) indicates that ITS1=0 continues when the hopper stirring motor has been driven for 8 cycles (ON for 4.5 sec, OFF for 0.5 sec x 8 times) after the presence of toner inside the hopper (TS2=1) and the absence of toner (TS1=0) inside the black toner assembly have been detected. MEMO: The following user messages are used in relation to black toner supply: - Toner Running Short condition: TS2=0 exists 1 min after the black toner supply motor (M25) is started (no toner inside the hopper assembly). state of printer: ready to print - Add Toner condition: TS1 and TS2=0 exists 20 sec after the hopper stirring motor (M23) is driven. (no toner inside the black developing assembly). state of printer: at rest
7.7.9 Controlling the Black Developing Bias

0003-1156
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The black developing bias is used to enable depositing of black toner over the latent static image on the surface of the photosensitive drum, and there are 2 types of black developing biases: black developing DC bias and black developing AC bias. These biases are generated by the high-voltage PCB 2 in response to a command from the DC controller for application to the black developing cylinder.
7-37
Chapter 7
DC-CON
J1133A
DEV_BK_DC_CONT
J1601
HVT2
J1611
DEV_BK_DC_ON
AC+DC
[1]
DEV_BK_AC_ON
F-7-49
[1] Black developing cylinder DC-CON: DC controller HVT2: high-voltage PCB 2
7.8 Transfer Device

7.8.1 Overview of the Transfer Assembly
0003-1171
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The transfer assembly is divided into the primary transfer assembly and the secondary transfer assembly. The primary transfer assembly serves to transfer the toner image of the photosensitive drum to the ITB, while the secondary transfer assembly moves the image transferred to it onto paper. The major components of the transfer assembly include the following: ITB cleaning screw, ITB cleaning blade, ITB drive roller, ITB, primary transfer static eliminator, primary transfer roller, tension roller, ITB inside cleaner end scraper, secondary transfer outside roller.
[5]
[4]
[6] [3]
Primary transfer
[7] [8] [2] [1] [9]

F-7-50
Secondary transfer
7-38
Chapter 7 [1] ITB cleaning screw [2] ITB cleaning blade [3] ITB drive roller [4] ITB [5] Primary transfer static eliminator [6] Primary transfer roller [7] Tension roller [8] ITB inside cleaner end scraper [9] Secondary transfer outside roller
7.8.2 Controlling the Transfer Bias

0003-1173
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The transfer bias may be the primary transfer bias used in the primary transfer assembly or the secondary transfer bias used in the secondary transfer assembly. There are 3 types of primary transfer biases (primary transfer DC bias, primary transfer DC reverse bias, primary transfer static eliminator bias), while there are 2 types of secondary transfer biases (secondary DC bias, secondary transfer DC reverse bias). These biases are generated by the high-voltage PCBs 2 and 3 according to the instructions of the DC controller, and are applied to their respective loads (primary transfer roller, primary transfer static eliminator, secondary transfer outside roller).
DC-CON
J1133B J1119B
TR1_RV_SEL TR1_ON
TR1_CRT_SEL
TR1CONT
J1605
HVT2
J1606
TR1CRTCONT
TR1CONTN
+DC -DC
TRNS1_DC
TR1ELM_ON
TR1ELMCONT
TR2_ON
TR2_RV_SEL
TR2_CRT_SEL
TR2CONTP
TR2CRTCONT
TR2CONTN
TRNS2_DC
TR1_OUT
TR2_OUT
J1701
HVT3
[1]
[2]
DC,-DC
[3]
F-7-51
[1] Primary transfer roller [2] Primary transfer static eliminator [3] Secondary transfer outside roller HVT2: high-voltage PCB 2 HVT3: high-voltage PCB 3 DC-CON: DC controller What follows below is an additional explanation of the individual biases used in the transfer assemblies: - Primary Transfer Bias (application bias: DC) The primary transfer bias is used to transfer the toner image on the photosensitive drum to the ITB, and is applied to the primary transfer roller. - Primary Transfer Reverse Bias (application bias: -DC) This bias is used to clean (remove) the patch pattern formed on the ITB for image stabilization control (Dmax, Dhalf, ATR). In the course of image stabilization control, this bias is applied so that the patch pattern (toner) is retuned from the ITB to the photosensitive drum for collection by the photosensitive drum cleaner. - Primary Transfer Static Eliminator Bias (application bias: -DC) The primary transfer static eliminator is arranged to the side of the primary transfer roller, serving to prevent the toner image from flying astray as the result of discharge between the ITB and the primary transfer downstream roller. - Secondary Transfer Bias (application bias: DC, -DC) The secondary transfer bias is used to transfer the toner image from the ITB to paper. There are 2 types of secondary transfer biases, and they are applied to the secondary transfer outside roller. At time of printing, a DC bias is applied to the secondary transfer outside roller. The DC reverse bias is used to remove the residual toner from the secondary
7-39
Chapter 7 transfer roller; its application will cause the residual toner on the secondary transfer roller to be attracted to the ITB for collection to the waste toner bottle by the work of the ITB cleaner.
7.8.3 Overview of the Primary Transfer Assembly

0003-1177
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The primary transfer assembly is driven by 2 motors, mainly serving to rotate major rollers and relocate the rollers. The drum/ITB motor (M2) is used to rotate the ITB drive roller and the ITB cleaning screw; the ITB cleaner shift motor (M21), on the other hand, is used to move the ITB cleaner to and from the ITB belt. The rollers are moved when the DC controller operates the 2 motors; the DC controller, also checks the home position of the ITB cleaner for use when it moves the ITB cleaner to and from the ITB.
DC-CON J1108A
ITB_CLN_HP_SNS
J1109B
M21
M2
[3]
[1]
PS23
F-7-52
[2]
[1] ITB drive roller [2] ITB cleaning screw [3] ITB cleaner PS23: ITB cleaning home position sensor M2: drum/ITB motor M21: ITB cleaner shift motor DC-CON: DC controller
7.8.4 Controlling the ITB Cleaner Shifting Mechanism

0003-1180
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine moves the ITB cleaner to and from the ITB for removal of toner remaining on the ITB. To bring the cleaner into contact with the belt, the DC controller drives the ITB cleaner shift motor (M21) at the following timing of operation: - immediately after the start of secondary transfer, the DC controller generates the ITB cleaner shift motor drive signal so that M21 rotates clockwise for about 0.8 sec. - the shift cam rotates clockwise, raising the shift arm (thereby locking the ITB cleaner in place against the ITB). - when cleaning of the ITB is done, the DC controller generates the ITB center shift motor drive signal so that M21 rotates clockwise for about 0.8 sec. - the shift cam rotates clockwise so that the shift arm lowers (thereby causing the ITB cleaner to move away from the ITB).
7-40
Chapter 7
DC-CON J1108A
M21
[1] Engagement [3] [3]
[3]
[2]
Disengagement
[2]
F-7-53
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1] ITB cleaner [2] Shift cam [3] Shift arm M21: ITB cleaner shift motor DC-CON: DC controller
7.8.5 Checking the ITB Cleaner Position

0003-1182
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine runs a home position search to locate the ITB cleaner. The DC controller checks the location with reference to the output of the ITB cleaner home position sensor (PS23). When the power is turned on or the front cover is opened/closed, the DC controller checks to find out if the home position flag attached to the drive shaft of the ITB cleaner shift motor (M21) blocks M23.
7-41
Chapter 7
DC-CON J1108A
ITB_CLN_HP_SNS
M21
PS23
[1] Engagement(PS23 output="1") [1]
[2]
Disengagement(PS23 output="0") [1]
[2]
F-7-54
PS23
[2]
PS23
[1] ITB cleaner [2] ITB cleaner home position flag PS23: ITB cleaner home position sensor M21: ITB cleaner shift motor DC-CON: DC controller Error Code: E078-0001 (ITB cleaner shift motor error) indicates that the ITB cleaner remains locked in position (PS23=1) 5 sec after the ITB cleaner shift motor (M21) is started.
7.8.6 Overview of the Secondary Transfer Assembly

0003-1183
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The secondary transfer outside roller shift motor (M20) drives the secondary transfer outside roller to move it into contact with or away from the ITB inside the secondary transfer assembly. The DC controller controls the operation of M26 for the movement; it also runs a check on the secondary transfer outside roller for its location (i.e., to see if it is in contact with the belt).
7-42
Chapter 7
DC-CON
M26
PS22
[1]
F-7-55
[2]
[3]
[1] Secondary transfer outside roller [2] Shift arm [3] Shift cam PS22: secondary transfer outside roller home position sensor M20: secondary transfer outside roller shift motor DC-CON: DC controller
7.8.7 Controlling the Movement of the Secondary Transfer Roller

0003-1184
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine moves the secondary transfer outside roller into contact with or away from the ITB for transfer of toner images from the ITB to paper. The DC controller drives the secondary transfer outside roller shift motor (M20) to move the roller at the following timing of operation: - after primary transfer, the DC controller generates the secondary transfer roller shift motor drive signal so that M20 rotates clockwise for about 0.8 sec. - the shift cam rotates clockwise to press down the shift arm (thereby locking the secondary transfer outside roller in place against the ITB). - after secondary transfer, the DC controller generates the secondary transfer outside roller shift motor drive signal so that M20 rotates clockwise for about 0.8 sec. - the shift cam rotates clockwise so that the contact arm is pressed up and the secondary transfer outside roller is moved away from the ITB.
7-43
Chapter 7
M20
J1308
Motor drive signal
Feeding driver PCB
DC-CON
[3]
[1]
[2]
Locked in position ITB
Not locked in position ITB
[2]
F-7-56
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1] Secondary transfer outside roller [2] Shift arm [3] Shift cam M20: secondary transfer outside roller shift motor DC-CON: DC controller
7.8.8 Checking the Location of the Secondary Transfer Roller

0003-1244
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine runs a home position search to check the location of the secondary transfer outside roller, i.e., the DC controller checks on the output of the secondary transfer outside roller home position sensor (PS22). When the power is turned on or the front cover is opened/closed, the DC controller checks the location of the secondary transfer outside roller with reference to whether the home position flag attached to the drive shaft of M20 is blocking PS22.
7-44
Chapter 7
DC-CON
Feeding driver PCB

J1308
[1]
PS22
SEC_TRANS_HP_SNS
PS22=1 <Point of Engagement of the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller> PS22 [1]
M20
PS22=0 <Point of Disengagement of the Secondary Transfer Outside Roller>
PS22
[1]
F-7-57
[1] Secondary transfer outside roller home position flag PS22: secondary transfer outside roller home position sensor M20: secondary transfer outside roller shift motor DC-CON: DC controller Error Code: E077-0001 (secondary transfer outside roller shift motor error) indicates that the secondary transfer roller remains locked in place (PS22=1) 5 sec after the secondary transfer outside roller motor (M20) is started.
7.8.9 Detecting the ITB Home Position

0003-1248
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine is programmed to check the ITB home position to make sure that the image write start position is correct. It uses the ITB home position sensor (PS1, PS30) to check the home position detection surfaces (2 reflecting surfaces) found at the edge of the ITB using the following sequence of operation: 1) when a print command arrives, the DC controller rotates the ITB; upon detection of a reflecting surface, PS1 and PS30 send their respective home position detection signal to the DC controller (1_TOP_SNS_A, 1_TOP_SNS_B). 2) in response, the DC controller assumes that the detection signal that first arrives represents the home position (1_TOP1A; see MEMO); then, it increases its count each time the next reflecting surface is detected (I_TOP2A, I_TOP3A, I_TOP4A, and so on). 3) in the case of full color printing, the DC controller generates the sub scanning sync signal (PVREQ) as many as 4 times based on these signals, and sends them to the main controller. Thereafter, the DC controller receives video data of individual colors 4 times to form images of individual colors at specific points of the ITB.
7-45
Chapter 7
[2]
PS30
[2] [1] PS30
[2] DC-CON
PS1
I_TOP_SNS_1
I_TOP_SNS_2
F-7-58
[1] ITB [2] Reflecting surface PS1: ITB home position sensor A PS30: ITB home position sensor B DC-CON: DC controller MEMO: The side A home position detection signal (I_TOP1A) is the signal used when forming an image for a single page at a time. The side B home position detection signal (I_TOP1B) is the signal used when forming images for 2 sides at a time. The DC controller uses the output of the sensor (PS1 or PS30) that detects the reflecting surface of the ITB first as indicating the home position for side A. It then assumes the point reached a specific period of time after side A home position to be side B home position. The machine uses the following sequence of operation to form images in different printing modes: 1. Full Color, 1 Print The machine generates the PVREQ (request) signal for individual colors with reference to the ITB home position detection signal (I_TOP1A) of side A, used for the formation of an image.
Start key ON INTR Home position side detection signal A (PS1 or PS30 side output) B PVREQ Laser (image formation) I_TOP1A I_TOP2A PRINT I_TOP3A I_TOP4A
Bk
F-7-59
2. Full Color, 2 Prints, Continuous (2-page placement; see Note) The machine generates the PVREQ (request) signal for individual colors based on the ITB home position detection signal (I_TOP1B) of side B and the home position detection signal (I_TOP1A) of side A, used for the formation of an image. For the 1st side, the image is formed in sequence with reference to I_TOP1A; for the 2nd side, on the other hand, the images are made in sequence based on I_TOP1B.
7-46
Chapter 7
Start key ON INTR Home position detection signal

( PS1 or PS30 output )
PRINT I_TOP1A I_TOP2A I_TOP3A I_TOP4A I_TOP4B
side A side B
I_TOP1B
I_TOP2B
I_TOP3B
PVREQ Laser (image formation)
Bk
Bk
F-7-60
The term "2-paper placement" refers to printing in which images for 2 pages are formed on the ITB at the same time. It may be used for up to LTR size (sub scanning direction), limited by the interval between 2 home position detection signals. 3. Mono Color, Continuous In mono color printing, a single color is used so that the point of image formation on the ITB may vary; the DC controller, therefore, does not run an ITB home position search as it would in the case of color printing. The machine determines the home position based on the reading of the timer of the DC controller, and generates the PVREQ (requires) signal, used for the formation of an image.
Start key ON INTR DC controller timer Home position detection signal PVREQ Laser (image formation)
F-7-61
PRINT
I_TOP1A Bk
7.8.10 Separation
0003-1259
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine uses the curvature separation method, in which the rigidity of paper is used for its separation form the ITB. To assist the separation, the machine uses the static eliminator to reduce the charge on the back of paper, thus weakening the static bonding between the paper and the ITB.
[1]
[2]
F-7-62
[3]
[1] ITB [2] Separation static eliminator [3] Secondary transfer outside roller
7.9 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning

7.9.1 Overview of the Drum Cleaning Unit
0003-6411
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The drum cleaning unit is found next to the photosensitive drum inside the process unit, and it is equipped with the function of collecting residual toner from the photosensitive drum. The unit consists of 4 components, serving to clean the photosensitive drum in preparation for the next print cycle. The residual toner collected by the unit is moved forward by the waste toner feedscrew for collection in the waste toner case fitted to the back of the machine. The following shows the arrangement of the major components:
7-47
Chapter 7
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
F-7-63
[1] Cleaning blade [2] Magnet roller [3] Waste toner layer guide blade [4] Waste toner feedscrew
7.9.2 Controlling the Drum Cleaning Unit Drive Mechanism

0003-6412
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The drum cleaning unit possesses 2 drive loads; they are controlled by the DC controller, and turned on when the ITB/drum motor (M2) turns on.
DC-CON J1109B
M2
F-7-64
[1] Magnet roller [2] Waste toner feedscrew M2: ITB/drum motor DC-CON: DC controller
7.10 Waste Toner Collection Mechanism

7.10.1 Collection of Waste Toner
0003-6401
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine uses its waste toner bottle to collect waste toner from 3 imaging units (i.e., drum cleaning unit, color toner developing assembly, ITB cleaning unit). The mechanism of collection involves the DC controller, which drives the development motor (M3) to turn the screw inside the waste toner pipe. The waste toner pipe is connected to the toner discharge outlet so that the rotation of M3 automatically moves the waste toner through the waste toner pipe to the waste toner bottle.
7-48
Chapter 7
J1109A
M3
DC-CON [2] [3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7] < Rear view>

F-7-65
[1] Drum cleaning unit discharge opening [2] Waste toner tube [3] Waste toner feedscrew [4] Color developing unit discharge opening [5] ITB cleaning unit discharge opening [6] Waste toner bottle [7] Waste toner [8] Waste toner feedscrew gear M3: developing motor SW1: waste toner lock detecting switch DC-CON: DC controller
7.10.2 Detecting the State of the Waste Toner Bottle (full)

0003-6402
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine checks the state of the waste toner bottle to see if it is full and thus to prevent overflowing of waste toner. The waste toner bottle collects waste toner from 3 image formation units (drum cleaning unit, color toner developing assembly, and ITB cleaning unit). The amount of waste toner is computed with reference to the soft counter reading kept by the DC controller, and the soft counter reading is based on computations of the following data: - paper size - color mode (full or mono) - image ratio The DC controller monitors the soft counter at all times, and executes the following operation when the reading exceeds the following:
T-7-18 Counter reading 210000 or higher Detection waste toner full caution Printer operation continues to operate (indicating a user message)*1.
250000 or higher
waste toner full
stops (indicting a service error)*2
*1: the message will read "Waste Toner Bottle Full" on the control panel.
7-49
Chapter 7 *2: for details, see MEMO.

J1117B
WASTE_TNR_ERR0
DC-CON
M3 [2] SW1
J1109A
[8]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7] < Rear view >

F-7-66
[1] Drum cleaning unit discharge opening [2] Waste toner tube [3] Waste toner feedscrew [4] Color developing unit discharge opening [5] ITB cleaning unit discharge opening [6] Waste toner bottle [7] Waste toner [8] Waste toner feedscrew gear M3: developing motor SW1: waste toner lock detecting switch DC-CON: DC controller Error Code: E013-0001 (waste toner full error) indicates that the soft counter reading is 250000 or higher. E013-0002 (waste toner feedscrew error) indicates that the output of the waste toner lock detecting switch (SW1) is "1" for 1 sec or more. (If the waste toner feedscrew fails to rotate when the developing motor (M3) is driven, the waste toner feedscrew is pressed in the direction of the arrow, thus turning on SW1.)
(1) The reading of the waste toner may be checked or reset using the following service mode item: COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>WASTE-TNR (2) The timing of messages (waste toner full pre-warning, waste toner full warning) may be changed using the following serve mode item: (a) to change the timing of indicating the waste toner full pre-warning, COPIER>ADJUST>MISC>WT-FL-LM (at time of shipment, set to 210000). (b) to change the timing of indicating the waste toner full error, COPIER>ADJUST>MISC>WT-ER-LV (at time of shipment, set to 40000).
7-50
Chapter 7

7.11.1 Process Unit 7.11.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Process Unit
0011-1275
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Right Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (upper)] 2) Release the Front Cover. 2-1) Open the front cover. 2-2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front.
[1] [2]
F-7-70
2-7) Remove the front cover strap [2]. - screw [1] from lower right
[2] [1]
F-7-67
[1]
[2]
If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate (front)[2].
[1]
F-7-71
2-8) Fully open the front cover [2]. - 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front cover hinge
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-68 F-7-72
[2]
2-3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 2-4) Remove the process unit cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
2-9) Close the right deck. 3) Release the Hopper Assembly. 3-1) Open the black toner supply cover [1].
[1]
[2]
F-7-73
3-2) Shift down the lever [1], and remove the black toner bottle [2].
F-7-69
2-5) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly, and set the lever in place. 2-6) Press the release button [1] of the right deck, and slide out the right deck [2].
7-51
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-7-74
[2]
F-7-78
Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover. Be sure to remove any such toner.
5) Remove the Transfer Cleaner Drive Assembly. 5-1) Open the color toner supply mouth cover [1].
[1]
F-7-75 F-7-79
3-3) Remove the 3 screws [1].
5-2) Remove the color toner supply cover [3]. - connector [1] - screw [2]
[1] [2]
[1]
F-7-76
3-4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2].
[3]
[2]
F-7-80
5-3) Slightly slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 5-4) Remove the connector [1] to remove it from the wire guide[2].
[1]
[1]
F-7-77
4) Remove the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly. 4-1) Remove the pre-transfer charging assembly [3] from the machine. - screw [1] - connector [2]
F-7-81
[2]
5-5) Shift down the locking plate [2]. - screw [1]
7-52
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-82
5-6) Remove the transfer cleaner driver assembly [3]. - connector [1] - 5 screws [2]
[2] [1]
F-7-85
7) Clean the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit. 7-1) Place the ITB unit [1] on paper for protection.
[1]
[2]
F-7-83
[3]
[2]
F-7-86
6) Remove the Intermediate Transfer Unit. 6-1) Remove the 2 connectors [1].
[1]
7-2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt [2] about 50 mm.
[2]
F-7-84
6-2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 6-3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to the front; when it stops, move it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to remove.
F-7-87
[1]
Do not touch the surface of the ITB. Also, be sure to slide the intermediate transfer assembly straight out so as to prevent damage to the surface of the ITB.
7-3) If there is any toner [3] on the surface of the intermediate transfer belt, dry wipe it with lint-free paper.
7-53
Chapter 7
[3]
[1]
[1]
F-7-91 F-7-88
3) After removing the cable from the 2 wire saddles [2], fix the high-voltage connector cable [1] in place using the cable hook [3] to avoid trapping it during the work.
[2] [1] [3]
When you remove the transfer cleaner drive assembly, the ITB cleaning blade [1] is likely to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt by the work of a spring, causing toner [2] to deposit on the belt surface in the form of lines. The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer assembly, thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade [3].
[3]
F-7-92
4) Remove the process unit cover [1] from the shipping box, and remove the drum stop tool [2] from its back.
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-89
[2]
F-7-93
0003-2410
7.11.1.2 Removing the Process Unit

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 2 connectors [1] found at the upper right.
[1]
5) Hold the drum fixing member [1] in place using the drum stop tool [2]. Then, using a screwdriver, remove the drum fixing screw [3].
- As shown in the figure, be sure to remove the screw on the protrusion [4] of the drum stop only after matching it against the notch [5] in the drum flange.
F-7-90
2) Remove the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper left.
7-54
Chapter 7
[1]
[1] [3] [2]

F-7-97
9) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] toward the front.

[1]
[5]
[4]
F-7-94
- When drawing out the process unit, check the position of the protrusion [1] of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking [2] on the drum flange. In the example in the figure, the marking [2] on the drum flange is at "." on the left and at ".." on the right in relation to the protrusion [2] of the drum fixing member. Moreover, when you close the process unit, it is important that the spatial relationship between the protrusion of the drum fixing member and the marking on the drum flange is as it was before you drew out the unit. 6) Using a pair of precision pliers, remove the drum fixing member [1].
F-7-98
10) While pressing on the 2 drawer hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2] fully.
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-95
7) Remove the 2 binding screws [1].
[1]
F-7-99
11) Lift both ends [1] of the process unit slightly, and fully pull out the process unit [2] toward the front.
[1]
[1]
F-7-96
8) Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.
[2]
F-7-100
7-55
Chapter 7 12) Lift the 2 locations [1] indicated in the diagram, and remove the process unit [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-101
[2]
F-7-103
7.11.1.3 Points to Note When Attaching the Process Unit

0002-6282
[1]
When using the drum fixing screw, be sure always to use the drum stop tool. Otherwise, the photosensitive drum can rotate clockwise, causing the edge of the blade to bend over and, ultimately, leading to cleaning faults. Be sure also to hold the drum stop tool in place while removing the drum fixing screw. The drum stop tool is attached to the back of the process unit cover.
[2]
7.11.2 Pre-exposure LED Array 7.11.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Pre-exposure LED Array
0011-1313
F-7-104
[1] [2]
F-7-105
[2] [1]
F-7-102
2-7) Remove the front cover strap [2]. -screw [1] from lower right
[1]
[2]
F-7-106
7-56
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-111
3-5) While forcing the drum stop tool [3] against the drum fixing member [2] of the drum shift [1], remove the fixing screw [4].
[1] [2]
F-7-107
- Be sure to match the protrusion [5] of the drum fixing member and the protrusion [6] of the drum stop tool.
2-9) Close the right deck. 3) Slide Out the Process Unit. 3-1) Remove the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper right.
[1]
[2] [4]
[1] [1]
F-7-108
[1]
[3]
[6]
3-2) Remove the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper left.

[1]
[5]
F-7-112
- When drawing out the process unit, check the position of the protrusion [1] of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking [2] on the drum flange. In the example in the figure, the marking [2] on the drum flange is at "." on the left and at ".." on the right in relation to the protrusion [2] of the drum fixing member. Moreover, when you close the process unit, it is important that the spatial relationship between the protrusion of the drum fixing member and the marking on the drum flange is as it was before you drew out the unit.
[1]
F-7-109
3-3) After removing the high-voltage connector cable [1] from the 2 wire saddles [2], fix the cable in place using the cable hook [3].
[2] [1] [3]
[2]
F-7-110
3-4) Remove the process unit cover [1] from the shipping box, and remove the drum stop tool [2] from the back of the cover.
[1]
F-7-113
7-57
Chapter 7 3-6) Using a pair of fine pliers, remove the drum fixing member [1].
[1]
[2] [1]
F-7-114
3-7) Remove the 3 binding screws (M4x8) [1].
[1]
F-7-118
3-11) Slightly lift both ends [1] of the process unit, and fully slide out the process unit [2].
[1]
[1]
F-7-115
3-8) Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
[2]
F-7-119
When you have slid out the process unit, check any of the following parts is soiled with toner before fitting it back in; if soiled, dry wipe the part: - entire surface of the deck top panel [1] - front bend of the deck top panel [2] - lower rear sheet (4 locations) of the fixing/feeding assembly [3].
F-7-116
[1]
3-9) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] toward the front.
[1]
[2]
F-7-117 F-7-120
3-10) While pushing on the 2 hooks [1] found on both sides of the fixing/ feeding assembly, fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
7-58
Chapter 7
[1]
[3]
F-7-121 F-7-125
4) Release the Hopper Assembly. 4-1) Open the black toner supply cover [1].
[2]
[1]
F-7-122
[1]
F-7-126
[1]
5) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. 5-1) Remove the connector [1]. 5-2) Loosen the screw [2], and move the primary charging assembly stopper [3] in the direction of the arrow; then, tighten the screw [2]. 5-3) Remove the primary charging assembly [4] from the machine.
[4] [1]
[2]
F-7-123
Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover. Be sure to wipe off any such toner.
F-7-127
[2]
[3]
6) Remove the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning. 6-1) Open the 2 cable clamps [1], and lead the harness [2] through the opening [3] in the process unit.
[1]
F-7-124
[3]
F-7-128
[2]
6-2) Open the 8 cable clamps [1], and move the harness [2] out of the way.
7-59
Chapter 7 the Right Cover (upper)] 2) Release the Front Cover. 2-1) Open the front cover. 2-2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front.
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-7-129
6-3) Remove the connector [1].

[1]
F-7-133
[1]
[1]
F-7-130
6-4) Remove the photosensitive drum cleaning unit [2]. - 4 screws [1]
[2]
[2]
F-7-134
[1]
[1]
F-7-131
7.11.2.2 Removing the Pre-Exposure LED Unit

0002-6242
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the pre-exposure LED unit. - 3 screws [1]
[1]
F-7-135
[2]
[2]
F-7-132
7.11.3 Primary Charging Assembly 7.11.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Parimary Charging Assembly
0011-1330
[1] [2]
F-7-136
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Right Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing
7-60
Chapter 7 2-7) Remove the front cover strap [2]. - screw [1] from lower right
[1]
[2]
F-7-141
F-7-137
[1]
[1]
F-7-142
[1] [2]
F-7-138
[2]
[1]
F-7-143
[1]
7.11.3.2 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly

0002-6213
F-7-139
[1]
[4] [1]
[2]
F-7-140
[2]
F-7-144
[3]
7-61
Chapter 7
7.11.4 Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Motor 7.11.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
0011-1462
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Right Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference[Removing the Right Cover (upper)] 2) Release the Front Cover. 2-1) Open the front cover. 2-2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front.
F-7-148
[1] [2]
[2] [1]
F-7-145
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-149
[1]
[2]
F-7-146
[1] [2]
F-7-150
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-151
F-7-147
7-62
Chapter 7
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
F-7-152
[2]
F-7-156
[3]
7.11.4.2 Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor

0002-6222
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the motor cover [3]. - 3 claws [1] - connector [2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-7-153
[1]
F-7-157
2) Turn over the motor cover, and remove the connector [1]; then, remove the primary charging wire cleaning motor [2].
[1]
F-7-154
[2]
[2]
F-7-158
7.11.5 Pre-transfer Charging Assembly 7.11.5.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly
0002-6224
[1]
F-7-155
1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Remove the process unit cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
7-63
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-7-159
[2]
F-7-162
4) Remove the pre-transfer charging assembly [3] from the machine. - screw [1] - connector [2]
[1] [3]
7.11.6.2 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor

0002-6226
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the motor cover [2]. - 3 claws [1]
[2]
[2]
F-7-160
7.11.6 Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Motor 7.11.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
0011-1465
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly. 1-1) Open the front cover. 1-2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 1-3) Remove the process unit cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[1]
F-7-163
2) Turn over the motor cover, and remove the pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor from the motor cover.
[1]
F-7-164
[2]
7.11.7 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit 7.11.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit
F-7-161
0011-1467
1-4) Remove the pre-transfer charging assembly [3] from the machine. - screw [1] - connector [2]
7-64
Chapter 7
[2] [1]
F-7-165 F-7-169
[1]
[2]
2-8) Fully open the front cover [2]. - 2 screws [1] (binding) of the front cover hinge If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate (front)[2].
[1]
[1]
[1] [2]
F-7-170
[2]
F-7-166
[1]
[1]
F-7-171
[2]
[1]
F-7-167
[2]
F-7-172
[1] [2]
F-7-168
7-65
Chapter 7
[1]
F-7-173
[1]
F-7-177
[2] [1] [3]
[1]
F-7-174
[2]
F-7-178
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-175
F-7-179
4) Slide Out the Process Unit. 4-1) Remove the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper right.
[1]
[1] [1]
F-7-176
7-66
Chapter 7
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
[1]
F-7-183
[6]
[1]
[5]
F-7-180
- When drawing out the process unit, check out the position of the protrusion [1] of the drum fixing member in relation to the marking [2] on the drum flange. In the example in the figure, the marking [2] on the drum flange is at "." on the left and at ".." on the right in relation to the protrusion [2] of the drum fixing member. Moreover, when you close the process unit, it is important that the spatial relationship between the protrusion of the drum fixing member and the marking on the drum flange is as it was before you drew out the unit.
F-7-184
[1]
[2]
F-7-185
[1] [2] [1]

F-7-181
4-6) Using a pair of fine pliers, remove the drum fixing member [1].
[1]
[1]
F-7-182
F-7-186
7-67
Chapter 7 4-11) Slightly lift both ends [1] of the process unit, and fully slide out the process unit [2].
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
F-7-190
[3]
[2]
F-7-187
7.11.7.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit

0003-2495
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the 2 cable clamps [1], and lead the harness [2] through the opening [3] in the process unit.
[1]
[1]
[3]
F-7-191
[2]
2) Open the 8 cable clamps [1], and move the harness [2] out of the way.
[2]
F-7-188
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-189 F-7-192
3) Remove the connector [1].

[1]
F-7-193
4) Remove the photosensitive drum cleaning unit [2]. - 4 screws [1]
7-68
Chapter 7 2-3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 2-4) Remove the process unit cover [2]. -2 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-194
[2]
7.11.7.3 Points to Note When Attaching the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit
0003-8364
F-7-197
When attaching the photosensitive drum cleaning unit, take care not to rotate it in reverse direction to prevent soiling by the scoop-up sheet. (The drum is designed to rotate counterclockwise.)
7.11.8 Photosensitive Drum 7.11.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum
0011-1471
[1] [2]
F-7-198
[1]
[2] [1]
F-7-195 F-7-199
[2]
2-8) Fully open the front cover [2]. -2 screws [1] (binding) of the front cover hinge
[1]
[1]
[1] [2]
F-7-200
[2]
F-7-196
7-69
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
F-7-201
[1]
[1]
F-7-205
[1] [3]
[2]
F-7-202
F-7-206
[2]
F-7-203

[1]
F-7-207
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-204
[3]
F-7-208
7-70
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-209
[1]
[2]
F-7-213
[1]
F-7-210
[2] [1]
F-7-214
[2]
[2]
F-7-211
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-215
F-7-212
7-71
Chapter 7
[3]
[1]
[1]
F-7-219 F-7-216
[2] [1] [3]
[3]
F-7-220
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-217
[2]
F-7-221
[1]
[1] [1]
F-7-218
7-72
Chapter 7
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
[1]
F-7-225
[6]
[1]
[5]
F-7-222
F-7-226
[1]
[2]
F-7-227
[1] [2] [1]

F-7-223
[1]
[1]
F-7-224
F-7-228
7-73
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
F-7-232
[3]
[2]
F-7-229
10) Remove the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit. 10-1) Open the 2 cable clamps [1], and lead the harness [2] through the opening [3] in the process unit.
[1]
[1]
[3]
F-7-233
[2]
[2]
[2]
F-7-230
[1]
F-7-234

[1]
[3]
F-7-231
F-7-235
7-74
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-236
F-7-240

[1]
11) Remove the Black Development Unit. Points to Note About the Work - The machine's developing unit is not equipped with a developing cylinder protection cover. Take full care, therefore, not to damage the developing cylinder when you have removed the developing unit. The waste toner collecting inside the machine can move into the fixing/ feeding assembly through the outlet; be sure to place paper under the process unit for the work. - The machine's black developing unit is attached with a potential sensor. Do not touch the sensor window [1] indicated in the figure. Moreover, take care not to drop the black developing assembly or otherwise subject it to impact so as to avoid damage to the potential sensor.
F-7-241
11-5) Push in the high-voltage cable [1] through the opening [2] indicated in the figure.
[2]
[1]
F-7-237
11-1) Open the harness guide used to fix the high-voltage cable [1] in place.
[2] [1] [2]
[1]
F-7-242
11-6) While holding the high-voltage cable [1] in place as shown, remove the black developing assembly [2] in upward direction.
F-7-238
When removing the black developing assembly, be sure to work with the high-voltage cable kept at the top of the assembly so that its connector will not damage the surface of the photosensitive drum.
11-2) Remove black developing assembly locking plate [1]. - screw [2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-7-239
11-3) Remove the black developing assembly joint plate [1]. - 2 screws [2]
F-7-243
7.11.8.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum

0003-2841
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the charging assembly rail [2]. - 2 screws [1]
7-75
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
F-7-244
2) Remove the charging assembly rail fixing plate [2]. - screw [1] 3) Remove the bearing stopper [4]. - screw [3]
[1] [2]
[1]
F-7-247
[2]
7.11.8.3 Replacing the Photosensitive Drum

0005-9072
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci If you have replaced the photosensitive drum, be sure to go through the following: 1) Remove the drum heater and the drum heater PCB; then, mount them to the new photosensitive drum. 2) Attach the photosensitive drum so that the lot number label [1] attached to its inner side is toward the front of the machine.
[1]
[4]
F-7-245
[3]
4) Pull the photosensitive drum [1] toward the front once, and then detach it.
[1]
F-7-246 F-7-248
At the font, hold the photosensitive drum shaft [1], and lift the drum; then, place it on the level area of the heat process unit front plate. Thereafter, hold the drum flange [2] from behind the front side plate.
MEMO: There is a light difference in the inside diameter of the photosensitive drum between its front and its rear. (The front and rear drum flanges are designed in relation to the photosensitive drum.) If you attach the photosensitive drum in the wrong orientation, the gap between the developing cylinder and the photosensitive drum will be uneven, possibly causing uneven density. 3) Replace the starter (3 types) of the color developing unit.
7.11.9 Drum Motor 7.11.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum Motor
0011-1485
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 3) Remove the Right Cover (upper rear). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (upper rear)]
7-76
Chapter 7
[1]
[3] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1]
[2]
[1] [2] [1]
[2]
[3]
[1] [1] [2] [1]
[1] [2]
[2] [1] [3] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1]
F-7-249
4) Slide the DC Controller Box. 4-1) Remove the DC controller cover [2]. - 9 screws [1]
[1] [2]
F-7-253
5-3) Lift the DC controller box [1] to remove.

[1]
[1]
F-7-254
[1]
F-7-250
4-2) Move the DC controller box [2] to the left. - 6 screws [1]
[1] [2]
During assembly work, be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: 1) Connect the connector of the harness [1] first, and then the other harness [2]. 2) Attach the harnesses [1] [2] using the wire saddle [3] so that the harness [1] is on the left side of the harness [2].
[3]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[1]
F-7-251
[3]
5) Remove the DC Controller Box. 5-1) Open the 3 cable guides [1], and remove the harness [2].
[2]
[1]
[3] [2]
F-7-255
[1]
Reference: If the harness [1] is away from the side plate [4] of the DC controller box, wrong detection (E070-0102) of the ITB home position tends to occur because of noise.
F-7-252
7.11.9.2 Removing the Drum Motor

0004-1056
5-2) Open that 13 cable guides [2]; then, remove the harness [3]. - 33 connectors [1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the fly wheel [2]. - 2 screws [1]
7-77
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-259
F-7-256
2) Remove the drum motor [3]. - 2 connectors [1] - 3 screws [2]

[1] [3]
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-7-260
[2]
F-7-257
[2]
7.11.10 Drum Heater 7.11.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum Motor
0011-1490
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 3) Remove the Right Cover (upper rear). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (upper rear)]
[1]
[1]
F-7-261
[2] [3] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [1] [1] [2] [1] [1] [2] [1] [2] [3]
F-7-258
[1] [2]
[2] [1] [3] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1]
4) Slide the DC Controller Box. 4-1) Remove the DC controller cover [2]. - 9 screws [1]
F-7-262
7-78
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
F-7-263
[1] [2]
[3]
F-7-265
[3]
3) Check the drum phase label [1] attached behind the process unit cover.
[4] [3]
[1]
[3] [2]
F-7-264
1. COPIE 2. COPIER > TEST > R > FUNC PG > TYPE 3. = 16 TION > 4. COPIE INSTALL > AINR5. COPIER > FUNCTION OFF = 1 6. PASC R > FUNCTION > MISC-P AL > MISC > DR-P-P > P-PRI ADJ = OK NT = OK
1 2 3 4
2 3 4 1
F-7-266
[1]
7.11.10.2 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater

0006-2080
See the following sample. The cell with a check mark [1] indicates the present drum phase location. In this case, the marking [3] is located in relation to the protrusion [2] of the drum fixing member with its left at ".." and right at "..." .
1. COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE = 16 2. COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF = 1 3. 4. COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DR-P-ADJ = OK 5. COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT = OK 6. PASCAL
Drum memory can occur if the phase of the drum is changed, as when replacing the drum heater. Take full care not to change the phase of the drum during the work by making sure of the following: 1) When removing the drum flange, check the location of the marking [2] on the drum flange in relation to the lot No. label [1] found on the inner side of the drum. (In the case of the figure, the left of the marking is at ".." and the right is at "..." with the lot No. label facing upward.) 2) When attaching the drum flange, be sure to attach with a screw where it was found in step 1.
1 2 3 4
2 3 4 1
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-7-267
4) Be sure to attach the drum fixing member [1] to the drum flange [2] in cor-
7-79
Chapter 7 rect relation to the phase location indicated on the drum phase label.
[1]
[2] [1] [2]

F-7-271
7.11.11 Drum Heater PCB 7.11.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum Heater PCB
F-7-268
0011-1507
7.11.10.3 Removing the Drum Heater

0002-6234
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the flange found at the front [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-7-272
[2]
F-7-269

[1]
[1]
F-7-270
3) Lift the drum heater upright from the photosensitive drum; then, remove the drum heater.
[2]
F-7-273
7-80
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-278
F-7-274
[1]
[2]
F-7-279
[1] [2]
F-7-275
[1]
[2]
F-7-280
F-7-276
[1]
[1]
F-7-281
[1] [2]
F-7-277
7-81
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-282
[2]
F-7-286
[1] [3]
[1]
[2]
F-7-287
[2]
F-7-283
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-284
[2]
F-7-288
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-285 F-7-289
7-82
Chapter 7
[3]
[1]
F-7-293
F-7-290
[1]
[3]
[2] [1]
F-7-291
[2]
F-7-294
[1]
[1] [1]
F-7-295 F-7-292
[1]
7-83
Chapter 7
[1]
[2] [4]
[1]
F-7-296
[1]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[1] [3]
[5]
F-7-299
F-7-297
[1]
[2]
F-7-298
[2]
[1]
F-7-300
[1]
F-7-301
7-84
[1]
[1]
F-7-302
[1]
[2]
F-7-306
When you have slide out the process unit, check any of the following parts is soiled with toner before fitting it back in; if soiled, dry wipe the part: - entire surface of the deck top panel [1] - front bend of the deck top panel [2] - lower rear sheet (4 locations) of the fixing/feeding assembly [3].
[1]
F-7-303
[1]
[2]
F-7-307
F-7-304
[2] [1]
F-7-308
[3]
[1]
F-7-305
7-85
Chapter 7
[4]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-7-309
[3]
F-7-313
[1]
[3]
F-7-310
[2]
[1]
F-7-314
[2]
[2] [1] [2]
[1]
F-7-311

[1]
F-7-315
[1]
F-7-312
[2]
F-7-316
7-86
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-7-317

[1]
[1]
F-7-321
12-2) Remove the charging assembly rail fixing plate [2]. - screw [1] 12-3) Remove the bearing stopper [4]. - screw [3]
[1] [2]
F-7-318
[2]
[4]
F-7-322
[3]
12-4) Pull the photosensitive drum [1] toward the front once, and then remove it.
[1]
[1]
F-7-319
F-7-323
[1]
At the font, hold the photosensitive drum shaft [1], and lift the drum; then, place it on the level area of the heat process unit front plate. Thereafter, hold the drum flange [2] from behind the front side plate.
[2]
F-7-320
12) Remove the Photosensitive Drum. 12-1) Remove charging assembly rail [2]. - 2 screws [1]
7-87
Chapter 7 14-2) Remove the connector [1].

[1]
F-7-327
14-3) Lift the drum heater upright from the photosensitive drum; then, remove the drum heater.
[1]
[1]
F-7-324
[2]
Points to Note When Attaching the Photosensitive Drum Attach the photosensitive drum so that the lot number label [1] attached to its inner side is toward the front of the machine.
[1]
F-7-328
7.11.11.2 Removing the Drum Heater PCB

0002-6236
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the drum heater PCB together with the flange. - 2 screws [1]
[1] [2]
F-7-325
MEMO: There is a light difference in the inside diameter of the photosensitive drum between its front and its rear. (The front and rear drum flanges are designed in relation to the photosensitive drum.) If you mount the photosensitive drum in the wrong orientation, the gap between the developing cylinder and the photosensitive drum will be uneven, possibly causing uneven density. 14) Remove the Drum Heater. 14-1) Remove the flange found at the front [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
F-7-329
2) Remove the 2 connectors [1].
[2]
F-7-326
[1]
F-7-330
3) Remove the drum heater PCB [2].
7-88
Chapter 7 - 4 edge saddles [1]

[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-331
7.11.11.3 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater PCB

0006-2081
1 2 3 4
2 3 4 1
Drum memory can occur if the phase of the drum is changed, as when replacing the drum heater PCB. Take full care not to change the phase of the drum during the work by making sure of the following: 1) When removing the drum flange, check the location of the marking [2] on the drum flange in relation to the lot No. label [1] found on the inner side of the drum. (In the case of the figure, the left of the marking is at ".." and the right is at "..." with the lot No. label facing upward.) 2) When attaching the drum flange, be sure to attach with a screw where it was found in step 1.
[1]
F-7-333
1 2 3 4
2 3 4 1
[1]
4 3
[1]
[2]
[1] [2]
F-7-334
[3]
4) Be sure to attach the drum fixing member [1] to the drum flange [2] in correct relation to the phase location indicated on the drum phase label.
F-7-332
[2] [1] [2]
F-7-335
7-89
Chapter 7
7.11.12 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade 7.11.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade
0011-1511
F-7-339
[1] [2]
[2] [1]
F-7-336
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-340
[1]
[2]
F-7-337
[1] [2]
F-7-341
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-342
F-7-338
7-90
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-343
[1] [1]
F-7-347

[1]
[1]
F-7-344 F-7-348
[2] [1] [3]
[1]
F-7-345
[2]
F-7-349
[1]
[2]
F-7-350
[1]
F-7-346
4) Slide Out the Process Unit. 4-1) Remove the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper right. - Be sure to match the protrusion [5] of the drum fixing member and the protrusion [6] of the drum stop tool.
7-91
Chapter 7
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
[1]
F-7-354
[6]
[1]
[5]
F-7-351
F-7-355
[1]
[2]
F-7-356
[1] [2] [1]

F-7-352
[1]
[1]
F-7-353
F-7-357
7-92
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
F-7-361
[3]
[2]
F-7-358
[1]
When you have slide out the process unit, check any of the following parts is soiled with toner before fitting it back in; if soiled, dry wipe the part: - entire surface of the deck top panel [1] - front bend of the deck top panel [2] - lower rear sheet (4 locations) of the fixing/feeding assembly [3].
[1]
[3]
F-7-362
[2]
[2]
[2]
F-7-359
[1]
F-7-363

[1]
[3]
F-7-360
F-7-364
7-93
Chapter 7 front and is upright.

[2]
[2]
C1
30
32
12
63
C1
63 12 32 30
[1]
F-7-365
0002-6256
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the locking spring [2]. - E-ring [1]
[1]
[1]
F-7-369
- Be sure to force the cleaning blade [1] firmly against the retaining plate [2], and check that there is no gap in the area [3] indicated in the figure.
[3] [1] [2]
[2]
F-7-366
2) Remove the photosensitive drum cleaning blade. - 5 screws [1]
F-7-370
- Be sure to tighten the screws [1] on the cleaning blade in the order indicated in the figure.
[1]
5 4 1 2 3
[2]
F-7-367
F-7-371
7.11.12.3 Points to Note When Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade
0002-6258
- Apply blade lubricant (TKN-0480) along the edge (shaded; coming into contact with the photosensitive drum) of the cleaning blade.
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Be sure of the following when attaching the photosensitive drum cleaning blade: - Do not turn over the cleaning blade. Replace it when one side has been used. - Clean the area [1] of the retainer plate coming into contact with the cleaning blade and the blade plate [2] using alcohol; then, dry wipe it to remove any toner.
The fine particle of toner under the blade edge can put the blade out of alignment, allowing toner on the photosensitive drum to remain on the drum in the form of residual toner.
F-7-372
[1]
When you have replaced the photosensitive drum cleaning blade, be sure to execute the following service mode item. Be sure that you execute service mode immediately after the control panel screen has appeared after turning on the main switch. : COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITR-ROT.
[2]
F-7-368
- Be sure to attach the cleaning blade [1] so that the lot No. [2] faces the
7-94
C1
63 12 32 30
7.11.12.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade
[1]
Chapter 7
7.11.13 Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Edge Scraper 7.11.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Edge Scraper
0011-1584
F-7-376
[1] [2]
[2] [1]
F-7-373
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-377
[1]
[2]
F-7-374
[1] [2]
F-7-378
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-379
F-7-375
7-95
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-380
[1] [1]
F-7-384

[1]
[1]
F-7-381 F-7-385
[2] [1] [3]
[1]
F-7-382
[2]
F-7-386
[1]
[2]
F-7-387
[1]
F-7-383
4) Slide Out the Process Unit. 4-1) Remove the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper right. - Be sure to match the protrusion [5] of the drum fixing member and the protrusion [6] of the drum stop tool.
7-96
Chapter 7
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
[1]
F-7-391
[6]
[1]
[5]
F-7-388
F-7-392
[1]
[2]
F-7-393
[1] [2] [1]

F-7-389
[1]
[1]
F-7-390
F-7-394
7-97
[1]
[4]
[1]
[2]
F-7-398
[3]
[2]
F-7-395
[1]
When you have slide out the process unit, check any of the following parts is soiled with toner before fitting it back in; if soiled, dry wipe the part: - entire surface of the deck top panel [1] - front bend of the deck top panel [2] - lower rear sheet (4 locations) of the fixing/feeding assembly [3]
[1]
[3]
F-7-399
[2]
[2]
[2]
F-7-396
[1]
F-7-400

[1]
[3]
F-7-397
F-7-401
7-98
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-402
7.11.13.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Edge Scraper

0004-1089
[2]
F-7-405
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the double-sided adhesive tape (2 strips) of the end scraper [2].
[1] [1]
2-3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 2-4) Remove the process unit cover [2]. -2 screws [1]
[1]
F-7-403
[2]
Points to Note When Attaching the End Scraper Be sure to clean the surface from which the double-sided tape has been removed with alcohol so that it is free of adhesive.
F-7-406
7.11.14 Hopper Assembly 7.11.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Assembly
0011-1594
[2]
F-7-407
[1]
[2] [1]
F-7-404
[1]
F-7-408
[2]
7-99
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
F-7-413
[1] [2]
F-7-409
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-414
7.11.14.2 Releasing the Hopper Assembly

0003-0967
F-7-410
[1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1].
[1]
[2]
F-7-411 F-7-415
2) Shift down the lever [1], and detach the black toner bottle [2]. Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover. Be sure to wipe off any such toner.
[1]
[2]
F-7-416
F-7-412
7-100
Chapter 7
[1]
F-7-417 F-7-421
4) Open the hopper assembly, and lift it to remove.
7.11.15 Hopper Supply Motor 7.11.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Black Toner Supply Motor
0011-1599
[1]
1) Remove the Right Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (upper)] 2) Release the Front Cover. 2-1) Open the front cover. 2-2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front.
F-7-418
4) Close the black toner supply cover [1]; then, fully open the hopper assembly [2].
[2]
[2] [1]
F-7-422
[1]
F-7-419
[1]
0002-6266
7.11.14.3 Removing the Hopper Assembly

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Pick and remove the wire saddle [2]. - connector [1]
[2] [1]
F-7-423 F-7-420
[2]
2) Close the hopper assembly. 3) Remove the E-ring [1].
7-101
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-428
F-7-424
[1]
[2]
F-7-429
[1] [2]
F-7-425
[1]
[2]
F-7-430
F-7-426
[1]
[1]
F-7-431
[1] [2]
F-7-427
7-102
Chapter 7 2) Remove the black toner supply motor [3]. - 3 screws [1] - 2 connectors [2]
[2] [3] [1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-432
4) Remove the Hopper Assembly. 4-1) Pick and remove the wire saddle [2]. - connector [1]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-7-436
[2]
[1]
7.11.16 Hopper Strring Motor 7.11.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper String Motor
0011-1603
F-7-433
4-2) Close the hopper assembly. 4-3) Remove the E-ring [1].
[1]
F-7-434
4-4) Open the hopper assembly, and lift it to remove.
7.11.15.2 Removing the Black Toner Supply Motor

0002-6268
[2] [1]
F-7-437
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1]; then, remove the 2 screws [2], and remove the hopper inside cover [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-7-435
[2]
F-7-438
7-103
Chapter 7 2-3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 2-4) Remove the process unit cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-443
[1]
F-7-439
[2]
F-7-444
[1] [2]
F-7-440
[1]
[2]
F-7-445

F-7-441
[1]
[1]
F-7-446
[1] [2]
F-7-442
7-104
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
F-7-447
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-7-450
[1]
7.11.17 Color Developing Assembly 7.11.17.1 Preparation for Removing the Color Developing Unit
0011-1617
F-7-448
[1]
F-7-449
7.11.16.2 Removing the Hopper Stirring Motor

0002-6269
[2] [1]
F-7-451
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the hopper stirring motor [3]. - 3 screws [1] - connector [2]
[1]
[2]
F-7-452
7-105
[1]
[1]
F-7-457
[2]
[1]
F-7-453
[2]
F-7-458
[1] [2]
F-7-454
F-7-459
[1]
[2]

F-7-455
[1]
[1]
F-7-460
[1] [2]
F-7-456
7-106
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-7-465
[1]
F-7-461
[1]
[1] [1]
F-7-462
[2] [4] [3]
[1]

[1]
[6]
[5]
F-7-466
[1]
F-7-463
[2] [1] [3]
[2]
F-7-464
[1]
F-7-467
7-107
Chapter 7 4-6) Using a pair of fine pliers, remove the drum fixing member [1].
[1]
[2] [1]
F-7-468
[1]
F-7-472
[1]
[1]
F-7-469
[1]
[2]
F-7-473
F-7-470
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-471 F-7-474
7-108
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-7-475
F-7-479

[1]
F-7-480
[2]
[1]
F-7-476
[2] [1] [2]
[1]
F-7-481
F-7-477
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-478
[2]
F-7-482
7.11.17.2 Removing the Color Developing Unit

0002-5816
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the color toner supply cover [1].
7-109
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-483
2) Loosen the screw [2] used to fix the torque limiter [1] of the developing rotary in place; then, move the limiter downward.
F-7-486
5) Rotate the developing rotary until the developing cylinder [1] of the color developing unit you are removing faces upward.
[2]
F-7-484
[1]
F-7-487
[1]
3) Attach the torque limiter [2] using a screw [1].
6) Open the developing assembly fixing arm [2]. - 2 screws [1]
If you fail to attach the torque limiter, the rotary will lose balance when any of the color developing units is removed, possibly damaging the photosensitive drum or the color developing assembly.
[1] [2]
[1] [1] [2] [2]
F-7-488
7) Hold the color developing assembly as shown in the figure; then, lift its rear to remove at an angle [2].
F-7-485
Once you have detached the color developing unit, be sure its supply mouth does NOT face down.
4) Push the lever [1] of the developing rotary solenoid once; then, rotate it counterclockwise by hand so that you have access to the color developing unit you are replacing.
[1]
If you rotate the developing rotary clockwise with a color developing assembly inside it, the anti-stray sheet attached to the sleeve of the color developing assembly can interfere with the photosensitive drum and become detached. Be sure always to rotate the developing rotary counterclockwise.
[2]
F-7-489
If you have to rotate the developing rotary farther, be sure to tape the toner supply mouth [1] to prevent spilling the toner.
7-110
Chapter 7
[1]
F-7-490
F-7-494
7.11.17.3 When Replacing the Color Developing Unit

0003-1347
7) Supply the remaining half of the starter around the stirring screw inside the color developing unit. 8) Turn the developing gear 5 to 6 times once again so that the starter inside the unit is even. 9) Move the starter found on the inner side of the container wall off the wall.
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN 1) Open the packing box, and take out the new color developing unit. 2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 4 hooks [2]; then, remove the developing assembly lid [3].
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-7-491
F-7-495
3) Even out the starter by shaking the container about 10 times. 4) Open the lid [2] of the starter bottle [1]; then, remove the middle lid [3], and close the lid.
10) Fit the container lid you removed in step 2) back on in the direction indicated in the figure.
F-7-496
Thereafter, engage the 4 hooks [1]; then, fix the container lid [3] in place using the 2 screws [2] you removed in step 3).
[2]
F-7-492
[1]
[3]
[2]
5) Supply half the starter so that it is even in the lengthwise direction around the stirring screw inside the color developing unit.
[3]
[1]
F-7-497
F-7-493
Force down the lid against the container so that the gap [1] indicated in the figure is small enough to prevent insertion of a transparency.
6) Turn the developing gear 5 to 6 times by hand in the direction indicated in the figure so that the starter will be even inside the unit.
7-111
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-7-498 F-7-500
When tightening the screw, take full care so that no shavings caused by turning the screw into the lid of the developing assembly and the container will move into the container. 11) Cut off the appropriate tab [1]] to suit the color of the starter you have supplied. The tab A in the figure is an extra tab.
3) On A3 paper or in a vinyl bag, dispose of the contents of the unit by turning it over.
[A] [1]
F-7-499 F-7-501
12) Fit the color developing unit by going through the steps used to detach it but in reverse. 13) Turn on the main power switch. 14) Make the following selections in service mode, and set '1', and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINR-OFF. 15) Select one of the following service mode items to suit the color of the starter you have supplied; then, press the OK key. - if for the Y developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-Y - if for the M developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-M - if for the C developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-C - if for the CMY developing assemblies, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-3 A countdown is shown on the screen while this mode item is under way. At the end, the screen will show "OK!". This mode uses ATVC control, possibly taking a while depending on the site environment. The count on the screen, for this reason, may loop between 690 and 620. 16) Execute the following service mode item: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT. Store away the generated printout in the service book case. (If there is a previous printout, dispose of it.) 17) End service mode, and start user mode; on the Auto Gradation Correction screen, follow the instructions to execute auto gradation correction (full).
4) Turn back over the developing unit, and turn the developing gear in the direction in which the cylinder normally turns so that the agent will drop into the developing assembly.
F-7-502
7.11.17.4 Replacing the Starter of the Color Developing Unit

0005-8346
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the color developing unit. 2) Remove the developing unit lid [3]. - screw [1] - 4 hooks [2]
5) Dispose of the agent into a vinyl bag or on paper by turning over the developing unit. 6) Repeat steps 4) and 5) about 3 times (e.g., until no agent drops into the developing assembly). 7) Shake the container of the starter about 10 times. 8) Detach the funnel [2] of the starter bottle [1]; then, remove the middle lid [3], and put the funnel back on [2].
[2]
F-7-503
[1]
[3]
9) Pour the starter along the length of the stirring screw inside the color developing unit so that it is about half full.
7-112
Chapter 7
[1]
F-7-504
10) Turn the developing gear in its normal direction 5 to 6 by hand to even out the starter inside it. 11) Pour the rest of the starter around the string screw inside the color developing unit. 12) Turn the developing gear 5 to 6 times once again to even out the starter inside the unit. 13) Move the starter that may remain on the inner side of the unit wall [1] into the developing assembly.
F-7-508
When tightening the screw, take care so that the shavings from the developing unit or its lid will not enter the unit. 15) Attach the color developing unit using the steps you used to remove it but in reverse. 16) Turn on the main power switch. 17) Select the following in service mode; then, enter '1', and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINR-OFF. 18)Select the appropriate mode item from the following to suit the color of the starter you have used; then, press the OK key if Y developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-Y. if M developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-M. if C developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-C.
[1]
A countdown is shown on the screen while this mode item is under way. At the end, the screen will show "OK!". This mode uses ATVC control, possibly taking a while depending on the site environment. The count on the screen, for this reason, may loop between 690 and 620.
F-7-505
14) Attach the developing assembly lid you removed in step 2), making sure that the lid is oriented as shown.
19) Perform the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT. Then, store the generated printout in the service book case. If there is any previous printout, dispose of it. 20) End service mode, and select 'auto gradation correction' in sure mode; perform auto gradation correction (full correction) by going through the instructions on the screen.
7.11.18 Black Developing Assembly 7.11.18.1 Preparation for Removing the Black Developing Assembly
0011-1636
F-7-506
Engage the 4 hooks [1], and attach the developing assembly lid [3] using the 2 screws [2] you removed in step 2).
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-7-507
[2] [1]
F-7-509
Be sure to force the lid against the developing container so that no transparency will insert the gap [1] shown in the figure. If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate
7-113
Chapter 7 (front)[2].
[1]
[1]
[1] [2]
[2]
F-7-510 F-7-514
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-515
[1]
F-7-511
[2]
F-7-516
[1] [2]
F-7-512
[1]
[2]
F-7-517

F-7-513
7-114
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-7-518
F-7-522
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-7-523
[1]
F-7-519
[1]
[1] [1]
F-7-520
[2] [4] [3]
[1]

[1]
[6]
[5]
F-7-524
[1]
F-7-521
7-115
Chapter 7 4-9) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] toward the front.
[1]
[2]
F-7-529
[1] [2] [1]

F-7-525
[1]
[1]
F-7-526
F-7-530
[1]
[1]
F-7-527
[1]
[2]
F-7-531
F-7-528
7-116
Chapter 7 2) Remove black developing assembly locking plate [1]. - screw [2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-536
[2]
F-7-532
3) Remove the black developing assembly joint plate [1]. - 2 screws [2]
[1]
[2]
F-7-537

[3]
F-7-533
[1]
7.11.18.2 Removing the Black Developing Unit

0002-6286
Points to Note About the Work - The machine's developing unit is not equipped with a developing cylinder protection cover. Take full care, therefore, not to damage the developing cylinder when you have removed the developing unit. The waste toner collecting inside the machine can move into the fixing/ feeding assembly through the outlet; be sure to place paper under the process unit for the work. - The machine's black developing unit is attached with a potential sensor. Do not touch the sensor window [1] indicated in the figure. Moreover, take care not to drop the black developing assembly or otherwise subject it to impact so as to avoid damage to the potential sensor.
F-7-538
5) Push in the high-voltage cable [1] through the opening [2] indicated in the figure.
[2]
[1]
F-7-534
1) Open the harness guide used to fix the high-voltage cable [1] in place.
[2] [1] [2]
F-7-539
[1]
6) While holding the high-voltage cable [1] in place as shown, remove the black developing assembly [2] in upward direction.
F-7-535
7-117
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
F-7-540
[1]
7.11.18.3 Points to Note About Replacing the Black Developing Unit

0003-0418
Do not touch the sensor window [1] shown in the figure during the work. Also, take care not to drop or otherwise subject the black developing unit to impact to avoid damage to the potential sensor
F-7-543
[1]
- If you put the high-voltage cable of the black developing assembly inside the machine when setting the assembly, you can trap the cable; to avoid trapping, be user to keep the high-voltage cable [1] on top of the black developing assembly as shown in the figure.
[1]
F-7-541
[1]
If you are replacing the black developing unit, you will have to remove the potential sensor from the old unit and attach it to the new one as follows: 1) Remove the potential sensor holder [2]. - 2 screws [1]
F-7-544
[2]
F-7-542
[1]
When setting the black developing unit in the machine, be sure of the following: - The developing rotary must be rotated counterclockwise so that the developing cylinder of the color developing assembly is kept facing the direction indicated in the figure.
2) Hold the black developing assembly [1] by its ends as shown in the figure; then, while keeping it level, push it in at an angle to set. When doing so, be sure to match the boss [2] found at the rear of the developing assembly against the left guide [3] found at the rear of the machine. Be sure also to match the rib [4] found at the front of the developing assembly against the right guide [5] found at the front of the machine.
7-118
Chapter 7
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
F-7-547
[1]
[5] [4]
F-7-545
7.11.19 Black Developing Cylinder 7.11.19.1 Preparation for Removing the Black Developing Cylinder
0011-1640
[2]
F-7-548
[1] [2]
[2] [1]
F-7-546 F-7-549
[1]
[2]
F-7-550
7-119
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
F-7-555
[1] [2]
F-7-551
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-556
F-7-552
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-553 F-7-557
4-2) Remove the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper left. Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover. Be sure to wipe off any such toner.
[1]
[1]
F-7-558 F-7-554
7-120
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-7-559
[1]
[1]
F-7-562
[2]
F-7-560
[1]
F-7-563

[2] [4] [3]
[1]
[6]
[5]
F-7-561
[1]
F-7-564
[1]
F-7-565
7-121
Chapter 7 4-9) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [1] toward the front.
[1]
[1]
F-7-566
[2]
F-7-569
[2] [1]
[3]
F-7-570
5) Remove the Black Developing Unit. Points to Note About the Work - The machine's developing unit is not equipped with a developing cylinder protection cover. Take full care, therefore, not to damage the developing cylinder when you have removed the developing unit. The waste toner collecting inside the machine can move into the fixing/ feeding assembly through the outlet; be sure to place paper under the process unit for the work. - The machine's black developing unit is attached with a potential sensor. Do not touch the sensor window [1] indicated in the figure. Moreover, take care not to drop the black developing assembly or otherwise subject it to impact so as to avoid damage to the potential sensor.
[1]
F-7-567
[1]
[1]
F-7-571
[2]
F-7-568
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-7-572
7-122
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-573
5-3) Remove the black developing assembly joint plate [1]. -2 screws [2]
[2]
F-7-577
[1]
7.11.19.2 Removing the Black Developing Cylinder

0003-6707
[2]
When attaching the developing cylinder, take care not to touch the surface of the cylinder. Also, take full care not to damage the surface. The machine's black developing unit is attached with a potential sensor. Do not touch the sensor window [1] shown in the figure. Also, take care not to drop or otherwise subject the black developing assembly to impact to avoid damage to the potential sensor.
F-7-574

[1]
[1]
F-7-578
1) Remove the black developing assembly. 2) Remove the cylinder cover [2]. - 3 screws [1]
F-7-575
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-7-579
3) Remove the developing cartridge lid [2]. - 5 screws [1]

[2]
[1]
F-7-576
F-7-580
[1]
4) Remove the magnetic positioning plate [2]. - screw [1]
7-123
Chapter 7
7.11.19.3 Points to Note When Handling the Black Developing Cylinder

0005-0954
The black developing cylinder need not be cleaned on a periodical basis. If you must clean the surface of the cylinder, be sure to dry wipe it with lintfree paper, NEVER using water or solvent.
[1]
F-7-581
[2]
5) Remove the lower guide plate [2]. - screw [1] 6) Pull out the gear box [4]. - 3 screws [2]
[3] [4]
7.11.19.4 Points to Note When Mounting the Polarity Positioning Plate

0006-0539
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN Go through the following steps in strict sequence when mounting the polarity positioning plate: 1) Let go of your hand so that the developing cylinder moves and stops on its own. 2) Shift the polarity positioning plate [1] counterclockwise as much as the length of the play of the D-cut notch [2]; then, read the index [4] of the marking found on the blade support base.
[3] [2]
[1]
F-7-582
7) Remove the blade [2]. - 2 screws [1]
The blade is adjusted at the factory to an extremely high level of accuracy. Be sure not to loosen the screw [3] indicated in the figure in the field.
[1] [2] [1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-583 F-7-586
8) Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], collar [3], and bearing [4] from the rear of the machine.
3) Turn the polarity positioning plate [1] counterclockwise by a single index (5 deg); then, tighten the screw [2] to fix it in place.
[4]
F-7-584
[3]
[2]
[1]
9) Remove the stop ring [1], collar [2], and bearing [3] from the front of the machine.
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-585
[2]
[3]
F-7-587
7-124
Chapter 7
7.11.20 Black Developing Clutch

[2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [3]
7.11.20.1 Preparation for Removing the Black Developing Clutch

0011-1642
[3] [1] [2] [1] [1] [1] [2] [1] [1] [2] [2] [1] [3] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Right Cover (upper rear). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (upper rear)] 3) Move the DC Controller Box. 3-1) Remove the DC controller cover [2]. - 9 screws [1]
[1] [2]
[2] [1]
F-7-591

[1]
[1]
[1]
F-7-588
F-7-592
[1]
[2]
[1]
Points to Note When Attaching the DC Controller Box During assembly work, be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: 1) Connect the connector of the harness [1] first, and then the other harness [2]. 2) Attach the harnesses [1] [2] using the wire saddle [3] so that the harness [1] is on the left side of the harness [2].
[3]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-7-589
[2]
[4] [3]
[1]
[1]
[3] [2]
F-7-593
F-7-590
7.11.20.2 Removing the Black Developing Clutch

0004-1069
7-125
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-597
F-7-594
2) Loosen the screw [2]; then, turn the tensioner [3] counterclockwise. - screw [1] 3) Remove the timing belt [4].
7.11.21 Color Toner Supply Clutch 7.11.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Color Toner Supply Clutch
0011-1646
[4]
[1] [2]
[3]
F-7-595
[2]
[1]
[1]
4) Remove the 3 harnesses [2] from the 6 cable guides [3]. - 3 connectors [1] 5) Remove the side plate [5]. - 3 screws [4]
[5] [4] [1] [3] [2]
[1]
F-7-598
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-596
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[4]
[1]
6) Remove the black developing cylinder [1].
[1]
F-7-599
7-126
Chapter 7
[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4] [3]
F-7-600
[2] [3] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [1] [1] [2] [1] [1] [2] [2] [1] [3] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [1] [2] [1] [2] [3]
[1]
[3] [2]
F-7-603
7.11.21.2 Removing the Color Toner Supply Clutch

0004-1070
[1]
F-7-601

[1]
F-7-602 F-7-604
[2]
Points to Note When Attaching the DC Controller Box During assembly work, be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: 1) Connect the connector of the harness [1] first, and then the other harness [2]. 2) Attach the harnesses [1] [2] using the wire saddle [3] so that the harness [1] is on the left side of the harness [2].
2) Remove the spring [1], and loosen the screw [2]; then, turn the tensioner [3] clockwise. 3) Remove the timing belt [4].
[4]
[3]
F-7-605
[2]
[1]
4) Free the 3 harnesses [2] from the 6 cable guides [3]. - connector [1] 5) Remove the side plate [5]. - 3 screws [4]
7-127
Chapter 7
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-7-609
[1]
F-7-606
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[4]
[2]
6) Remove the color toner supply clutch [1].

[1]
[1]
F-7-610
F-7-607
[2] [3] [1] [1] [2] [1] [2] [3]
7.11.22 Color Developing Clutch 7.11.22.1 Preparation for Removing the Color Developing Clutch
0011-1648
[2] [1] [2] [1] [1] [1] [2] [1] [1] [2] [2] [1] [3] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1]
[1] [2]
F-7-611

[1]
[1]
[1]
F-7-608 F-7-612
3-2) Move the DC controller box [2] to the left. - 6 screws [1] Points to Note When Attaching the DC Controller Box During assembly work, be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: 1) Connect the connector of the harness [1] first, and then the other harness [2]. 2) Attach the harnesses [1] [2] using the wire saddle [3] so that the harness [1] is on the left side of the harness [2].
7-128
Chapter 7
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[4] [3]
[1]
[3]
F-7-616
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[4]
F-7-613
6) Remove the color developing clutch [2]. - 2 E-rings [1]
7.11.22.2 Removing the Color Developing Clutch

0004-1071
[1]
[2]
F-7-617
[1]
7.11.23 Cleaning Assembly Scoop-Up Sheet 7.11.23.1 Preparation for Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Scoop-Up Sheet
0011-1650
[2]
F-7-614
2) Loosen the screw [2]; then, turn the tensioner [3] clockwise. - spring [1] 3) Remove the timing belt [4].
[4]
[2] [1]
F-7-618
[3]
F-7-615
[2]
[1]
4) Free the 3 harnesses [2] from the 6 cable guides [3]. - 3 connectors [1] 5) Remove the side plate [5]. -3 screws [4]
7-129
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[1] [2]
[2]
F-7-619 F-7-623
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-624
[1]
F-7-620
[2]
F-7-625
[1] [2]
F-7-621
[1]
[2]
F-7-626

F-7-622
7-130
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-627
F-7-631
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-628
[1] [3]
[2]
F-7-632
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-7-629
F-7-633
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-630
[2]
F-7-634
[3]
[2]
7-131
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
F-7-635
F-7-638
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-7-636
F-7-639
[1]
[3]
F-7-637
[2] [1]
F-7-640
7-132
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[1]
F-7-641
[3]

[1]
[6]
[5]
F-7-645
[1]
F-7-642
[2] [1] [3]
[2]
F-7-643
[1]
[1]
F-7-646
[2]
F-7-644
[1]
F-7-647
7-133
[1]
[1]
F-7-648
[1]
[2]
F-7-652
[1]
F-7-649
[1]
[2]
F-7-653
F-7-650
[2] [1]
F-7-654
[3]
7.11.23.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Scoop-Up Sheet

0002-5818
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the photosensitive drum cleaning scoop-up sheet [2] toward the rear to remove. - screw [1]
[1]
F-7-651
7-134
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
[2] [1]
F-7-655
7.11.23.3 Attaching the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner Scoop-Up Sheet

0003-2876
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Engage the hole found at the rear of the photosensitive drum scoop-up sheet [1] on the hook [2]: then, pull it toward the front and attach with a screw [3]. During the work, be sure that the tip of the scoop-up sheet is not bent between the cartridge and the photosensitive drum.
[1]
F-7-657
4) Remove the the connector cover [2]. - screw [1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
F-7-658
[2]
[2]
F-7-656
Making Checks After Attaching the Photosensitive Drum Scoop-Up Sheet - Check that the scoop-up sheet is not bent or broken from below. - Be sure that the photosensitive drum is rotated counterclockwise, NOT clockwise; failure to observe this will lead to bending or deformation of the scoop-up sheet.
[1]
F-7-659
6) Remove the 2 stepped screws [1].

[1]
7.11.24 Secondary Transfer Unit 7.11.24.1 Removing the Secondary Transfer Unit
0003-1968
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) While pressing the 2 hooks [1] frond on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2] fully.
F-7-660
7) While moving the secondary transfer unit [1], remove the 2 connectors [2]; then, remove the secondary transfer unit.
7-135
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-7-661
F-7-664
7.11.25 ITB Cleaning Unit 7.11.25.1 Preparation for Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit
0011-1679
[1] [2]
F-7-665
[2] [1]
F-7-662
If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate (front).
[1]
F-7-666
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-7-663
[1] [2]
F-7-667
7-136
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
F-7-668
[1]
[1]
F-7-672
[1] [3]
[2]
F-7-669
F-7-673
[2]
F-7-670

[1]
F-7-674
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-671
[3]
F-7-675
7-137
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-676
[1]
[2]
F-7-680
[1]
F-7-677
[2] [1]
F-7-681
[2]
[2]
F-7-678
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-682
F-7-679
7-138
Chapter 7
[3]
[2] [1]
F-7-683
[3]
F-7-685
[1]
7.11.26 ITB Cleaner End Scraper 7.11.26.1 Preparation for Removing the ITB Cleaner End Scraper
0011-1680
[2] [1]
F-7-684
7.11.25.2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit

0002-6349
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Move the ITB cleaning unit [2] in the direction of the arrow to remove. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
F-7-686
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-7-687
7-139
[1]
[1]
F-7-692
[2]
[1]
F-7-688
[2]
F-7-693
[1] [2]
F-7-689
F-7-694
[1]
[2]

F-7-690
[1]
[1]
F-7-695
[1] [2]
F-7-691
7-140
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-696
[2]
F-7-700
[1] [3]
[1]
[2]
F-7-701
[2]
F-7-697
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-698
[2]
F-7-702
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-699 F-7-703
7-141
Chapter 7
[3]
[1]
F-7-707
F-7-704
[1]
[3]
[2] [1]
F-7-705
[2]
F-7-708
8) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit. 8-1) Move the ITB cleaning unit [2] in the direction of the arrow to remove. - 2 screws [1]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-706
[1]
F-7-709
7-142
Chapter 7
7.11.26.2 Removing the ITB Cleaner End Scraper

0005-9394
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 2 end scrapers [1] by peeling off the 2 strips of double-sided tape.
[1]
[1]
F-7-710
Points to Note When Attaching the End Scraper Clean the area from where you have removed the end scraper with alcohol so that adhesive from the double-sided tape will not remain.
[2]
7.11.26.3 Attaching the ITB Cleaner End Scraper

0005-9395
F-7-713
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Remove the 2 strips of double-sided tape from the end scraper [1]; then, attach the 2 end scrapers [1] by aligning their edges against the ends of the ITB cleaner plate.
[1] [1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-714
F-7-711
Points to Note When Attaching the End Scraper Before starting the work, be sure to clean the area with alcohol so that no adhesive will remain.
7.11.27 Intermediate Transfer Unit 7.11.27.1 Preparation for Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit
0011-1685
F-7-715
[1] [2]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-7-712 F-7-716
[2]
7-143
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
F-7-721
[1] [2]
F-7-717
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-722
F-7-718
[1]
[1] [3]
[2]
F-7-719
[2]
F-7-723
[1]
F-7-720 F-7-724
7-144
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-725
[1]
F-7-729
2) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Slide out the intermediate transfer assembly [1] to the front; when it stops, move it slightly to the upper right and then slide it farther out to remove.
[2]
F-7-726
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-730
7.11.27.3 Cleaning the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit

0005-9403
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Place the ITB unit [1] on paper for protection.
F-7-727
[1]
[2] [1]
F-7-731
2) Turn the drive gear [1] by hand in the direction of the arrow to move the intermediate transfer belt [2] about 50 mm.
[2]
F-7-728
[3]
[2]
7.11.27.2 Removing the Intermediate Transfer Unit

0002-6336
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 2 connectors [1].
7-145
Chapter 7
[2]
- When replacing the intermediate transfer unit, be sure to hold it by both its ends (10 mm from either edge), avoiding its imaging area. If its image area is soiled, be sure to clean the area using lint-free paper coated with a small amount of black toner. - Be sure to keep a clean sheet of print paper under the intermediate transfer unit during the work.
7.11.28 Intermediate Transfer Belt 7.11.28.1 Preparation for Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt
0011-1686
[1]
F-7-732
3) If there is any toner [3] on the surface of the intermediate transfer belt, dry wipe it with lint-free paper.
[3]
[2] [1]
F-7-735
[1]
F-7-733
[3]
[2]
F-7-736
[2] [1]
F-7-734
7.11.27.4 Points to Note When Replacing the Intermediate Transfer Unit

0002-6338
7-146
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-741
F-7-737
[1]
[2]
F-7-742
[1] [2]
F-7-738
[1]
[2]
F-7-743
F-7-739
[1]
[1]
F-7-744
[1] [2]
F-7-740
7-147
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-745
[2]
F-7-749
[1] [3]
[1]
[2]
F-7-750
[2]
F-7-746
5) Remove the Transfer Cleaning Drive Assembly. 5-1) Open the color toner supply mouth cover [1].
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-747
[2]
F-7-751
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-748 F-7-752
7-148
Chapter 7
[2] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-756
[1]
F-7-753
8-3) Free the cable [3] from the 3 cable clamps [2]. - connector [1] 8-4) Remove the patch image reading unit [5]. - 2 screws [4]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2] [1]
[5]
F-7-757
[2]
9) Remove the Idler Roller. 9-1) Remove the pre-transfer guide [2]. - screw [1]
[1]
F-7-754
8) Remove the Patch Image Reading Unit. 8-1) Move the arm [1] shown in the figure to lock it in place; thus releasing the roller (both front and rear).
[1]
F-7-755
8-2) Stand the intermediate transfer unit by fitting its 2 pints [2] in the 2 holes of the fixing/feeding assembly.
Check that the ITB cleaner unit has been already removed.
7-149
Chapter 7
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-759
When removing the roller, take care not to damage the surface of the ITB by the roller.
7.11.28.2 Removing the ITB

0002-6341
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Holding the ITB [1] by the edge, lift it straight up to remove.
F-7-758
9-2) Holding the shaft of the idler roller [1], pull the roller[2] upright to remove.
[1]
F-7-760
7.11.28.3 Points to Note When Attaching the ITB

0002-6342
When attaching the intermediate transfer belt, take full care so that the belt will not be upside down. See that the red marking [1] is found on the edge of the intermediate transfer belt. Otherwise, you must remove the belt, turn it over, and then attach it. To prevent reversed attachment of the intermediate transfer belt, there is a number marking (10-digit) [2] on its surface (edge) in addition to the foregoing marking.
7-150
Chapter 7
7.11.30 Secondary Transfer Roller Shift Motor 7.11.30.1 Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller Shift Motor
0002-6348
ITB
1) Fully slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 2) Remove the secondary transfer cam assembly [3]. - 4 screws [1] - connector [2]
13 003 36305
>PI<
Example :
[2]
003 >PI<
3630
513
[1]
[2]
F-7-761
When you have replaced the ITB, be sure to perform the following service mode item. Be sure that you perform service mode immediately after the control panel screen has appeared after turning on the main switch. : COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>1TRROT
[1]
[3]
[1]
7.11.29 ITB Home Position Sensor PCB 7.11.29.1 Removing the ITB Home Position Sensor (right, left)
0002-6353
F-7-763
3) Remove the secondary roller shift motor [3] from the secondary transfer cam assembly [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the ITB. 2) Remove the ITB home position sensor (right) [3] and the other ITB home position sensor (left) [4]. - screws [1] (2 pc. each) - connectors [2] (1 pc. each)
[4] [2] [2] [3]
[3]
F-7-764
[2]
[1]
F-7-762
[1]
7.11.31 Primary Transfer Roller 7.11.31.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Transfer Roller
0011-1694
If you are replacing the ITB home position sensor (right, left), take care to avoid touching the sensor widow; otherwise, wrong detention can occur.
7-151
Chapter 7
[2] [1]
F-7-765 F-7-769
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1] [2]
F-7-770
[2]
F-7-766
[1]
[1]
F-7-771
[2]
[1]
F-7-767
[2]
F-7-772
[1] [2]
F-7-768
7-152
Chapter 7
F-7-773 F-7-777
[1]
[1] [2]
[1]
F-7-774
[2]
[3]
F-7-778
[1]
[1]
F-7-775
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-779
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-7-776
F-7-780
7-153
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-781
[3]
[2]
F-7-784
[1]
[2]
F-7-782
F-7-785
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-7-783
F-7-786
7) Clean the Surface of the Intermediate Transfer Unit. 7-1) Place the ITB unit [1] on paper for protection. When you remove the transfer cleaner drive assembly, the ITB cleaning blade [1] is likely to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt by the work of a spring, causing toner [2] to deposit on the belt surface in the form of lines. The toner can then be forced against the photosensitive drum by the primary transfer assembly, thus affecting the photosensitive drum cleaning blade [3].
7-154
Chapter 7
[3]
[2] [2]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-790 F-7-787
[1]
8) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit. 8-1) Move the ITB cleaning unit [2] in the direction of the arrow to detach. - 2 screws [1]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2] [1]
[2] [5]
F-7-791
[1]
F-7-788
[1]
F-7-789
7-155
Chapter 7
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-793
When removing the roller, take care not to damage the surface of the ITB by the roller. 11) Remove the ITB. 11-1) Holding the ITB [1] by the edge, lift it straight up to remove.
[1]
F-7-792
F-7-794
7.11.31.2 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller

0002-6343
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Shift the locking lever [1] in the direction of the arrows; then, lift the roller arm [2].
7-156
Chapter 7
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-7-795
2) Pick the shaft [1] of the primary transfer roller [2], and remove the roller.
[2]
[1]
F-7-798
2) Clean the rollers [1] and the inside scraper [2] using alcohol.
[1]
F-7-796
7.11.31.3 Points to Note When Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller

0005-9148
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci As the machine is used more and more, the shavings from the primary transfer roller can start to collect on the rollers behind the belt. When you have replaced the primary transfer roller, be sure to clean the 6 rollers [1] and the scraper [2] indicated below.
The idler roller (indicated by an arrow) is designed for attaching after fitting the intermediate transfer belt. Although the figure shows the roller, it is only for reference purposes, and the roller is not in its indicated position at this point in time.
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-797
1. Cleaning Procedure 1) Place the ITB cleaner drive unit [1] with its cover facing down; then, stand the ITB unit [2].
[1]
F-7-799
[2]
[1]
7-157
Chapter 7
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-7-802
F-7-800
[1]
When you have replaced the primary transfer roller, be sure to perform the following service mode item. Be sure that you perform service mode immediately after the control panel screen has appeared after turning on the main switch. : COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITRROT.
[2]
7.11.32 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller 7.11.32.1 Preparation for Removing the Secondary Transfer Internal Roller
0011-1697
F-7-803
[1] [2]
F-7-804
[2] [1]
F-7-801
[1]
[2]
F-7-805
7-158
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
F-7-810
[1] [2]
F-7-806
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-811
F-7-807
[1]
[1] [3]
[2]
F-7-808
[2]
F-7-812
[1]
F-7-809 F-7-813
7-159
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-814
[1]
F-7-818
[2]
F-7-815
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-819
[1]
F-7-816
[2] [1]
F-7-820
[2]
F-7-817
[3]
[2]
7-160
Chapter 7
[2]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-821
[3]
F-7-824
[1]
F-7-822 F-7-825
[1]
[3]
[2] [2]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-826 F-7-823
[1]
7-161
Chapter 7
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2] [5]
F-7-827
[2]
[1]
F-7-829
[1]
F-7-830
7.11.32.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Inside Roller

0002-5733
F-7-828
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 2 screws [1] found at the rear of the intermediate transfer unit; then, move the electrode [2] in counterclockwise direction.
7-162
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
F-7-831 F-7-834
[1]
[2]
2) Remove the E-ring [1], washer [2], and bearing [3] from the front of the intermediate transfer unit. 3) Remove the E-ring [4] and the bearing [5] from the rear of the intermediate transfer unit. 4) Remove the secondary transfer inside roller [6].
[2]
[4] [5]
F-7-832
[6]
[3] [1]
[1]
F-7-835
7.11.33 Secondary Transfer Roller 7.11.33.1 Preparation for Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller
0011-1700
1-6) Remove the 2 stepped screws [1].

[1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Secondary Transfer Unit. 1-1) Open the front cover. 1-2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 1-3) While pressing the 2 hooks [1] frond on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2] fully.
[2] [1]
F-7-836
1-7) While moving the secondary transfer unit [1], remove the 2 connectors [2]; then, remove the secondary transfer unit.
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-833
F-7-837
1-4) Remove the the connector cover [2]. - screw [1]
2) Remove the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Holder. 2-1) Remove the secondary transfer guide [2]. - 2 screws [1] 2-2) Remove the secondary transfer static eliminator holder [3].
7-163
Chapter 7
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-7-838
[2] [1]
F-7-841
0002-6346
7.11.33.2 Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the left roller arm [2] and the right roller arm [3]. - 2 E-rings [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1] [2]
F-7-839
2) Pull out the 2 secondary roller bushing [1] in the direction of the arrow; then, remove the secondary transfer roller [2].
[1]
[2]
F-7-842
[1]
[2]
F-7-840
[2]
If you are replacing the secondary transfer roller, be sure to hold the roller shaft. Also, take care not to touch the surface of the roller and not to damage the roller.
F-7-843
7.11.34 ITB Cleaning Blade 7.11.34.1 Preparation for Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade
0011-1702
[2]
F-7-844
[1]
7-164
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
F-7-845
F-7-849
[1]
[1]
F-7-850
[1] [2]
F-7-846
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-851
F-7-847
[1]
[1] [3]
[2]
F-7-848
[2]
F-7-852
7-165
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-853
[2]
F-7-857
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-854
[1]
F-7-858
[2]
F-7-855
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-859
F-7-856
7-166
Chapter 7
[1]
[3]
[2] [1]
F-7-860
F-7-863
[2]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-861
[3]
[1]
F-7-864
7.11.34.2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade

0002-6351
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the ITB cleaner blade [2]. - 4 screws [1]
[1]
F-7-862
F-7-865
[2]
7.11.34.3 When Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade

0005-9885
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Whenever you need to replace the ITB cleaning blade, be sure to go though the following steps to apply blade lubricant (TKN-0480) to the edge of he
7-167
Chapter 7 blade. 1) Turn the primary transfer roller locking lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to engage the intermediate transfer belt.
[2]
[1]
F-7-866
2) Apply an appropriate amount of blade lubricant [1] as if to sprinkle it over an area of the surface as shown.
[1]
F-7-869
NG (inadequate)
5) Attach the ITB cleaning unit [2] to the intermediate transfer unit [1]; then, fix it in place using 2 screws [3].
OK (appropriate)
NG (excessive)
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-7-867
3) Spread the blade lubricant [1] using lint-free paper [2] as shown to cover an area of the belt about 10 cm wide.
10cm
[1] [2]
[3]
F-7-870
6) Turn the drive gear [3] until the area [2] of blade lubricant is no longer visible on the intermediate transfer belt [1].
F-7-868
Take care so that the blade lubricant will not make its way behind the intermediate transfer belt. Otherwise, the presence of blade lubricant behind the intermediate transfer belt can cause the ITB home position sensor to make wrong detection. 4) Turn the drive gear [1] in he direction of the arrow so that the area of blade lubricant [2] is found as shown.
7-168
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-873
[1]
[3]
F-7-871
If you have replaced the ITB cleaner blade, be sure to perform the following: 1) Perform the following service mode item (black band sequence): COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>BK-BNDEX.
[2]
7.11.35 ITB Scoop-up Sheet 7.11.35.1 Preparation for Removing the Scoop-Up Sheet
0011-1716
F-7-874
[1] [2]
F-7-875
[2] [1]
F-7-872
[1]
[2]
F-7-876
7-169
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
F-7-881
[1] [2]
F-7-877
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-882
F-7-878
[1]
[1] [3]
[2]
F-7-879
[2]
F-7-883
[1]
F-7-880 F-7-884
7-170
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-885
[1]
F-7-889
[2]
F-7-886
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-890
[1]
F-7-887
[2] [1]
F-7-891
[2]
F-7-888
[3]
[2]
7-171
Chapter 7
[2]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-892
[3]
F-7-895
[1]
7.11.35.2 Removing the ITB Scoop-Up Sheet

0003-6737
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the ITB scoop-up sheet [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[2]
F-7-893
[1]
F-7-896
[3]
7.11.36 Intermediate Transfer Belt Static Eliminator 7.11.36.1 Preparation for Removing the Intermediate Transfer Belt Static Eliminator
0011-1718
[2] [1]
[2]
F-7-894
[1]
F-7-897
7-172
Chapter 7
[1]
[1]
[1] [2]
[2]
F-7-898 F-7-902
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-903
[1]
F-7-899
[2]
F-7-904
[1] [2]
F-7-900
[1]
[2]
F-7-905

F-7-901
7-173
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-906
F-7-910
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-907
[1] [3]
[2]
F-7-911
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-7-908
F-7-912
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-909
[2]
F-7-913
[3]
[2]
7-174
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
F-7-914
F-7-917
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-7-915
F-7-918
[1]
[3]
F-7-916
[2] [1]
F-7-919
7-175
Chapter 7
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2] [1]
[2] [5]
F-7-923
[2]
[1]
F-7-920
[1]
[1]
F-7-921
[2] [2]
F-7-924
[1]
F-7-922
[1]
7-176
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[1]
F-7-927
[3]
7.11.37 Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator 7.11.37.1 Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Holder
0003-6734
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Remove the secondary transfer guide [2]. - 2 screws [1] 4) Remove the secondary transfer static eliminator holder [3].
[3]
F-7-925
[2]
[1]
F-7-928
[1]
7.11.38 Potential Sensor Unit 7.11.38.1 Preparation for Removing the Potential Sensor
0011-1698
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The potential sensor unit includes the following 4 parts: - potential control PCB - potential sensor - potential sensor relay harness (between relay connector and potential control PCB) - potential sensor harness (between potential sensor and relay connector)
Be sure that the potential sensor and the potential control PCB are always replaced at the same time.
F-7-926
7.11.36.2 Removing the ITB Static Eliminator

0002-6352
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Shift down the lock lever [1] in the direction of the arrow; then, lift up the roller arm [2]. 2) Remove the ITB static eliminator [4]. - 2 claws [3]
1) Remove the Potential Control PCB. 1-1) Open the upper right cover. 1-2) Open the upper right cover [1] wider. - screw [1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-929
7-177
Chapter 7 1-3) Remove the filter retainer [2] and the filter [3]. - screw [1] 1-4) Remove the connector cover [4]. - screws [4]
[2] [3] [1]
[2] [1]
F-7-933
[5]
F-7-930
[4]
[1]
1-5) Remove the grounding wire [2]. - screw [1] 1-6) Remove the side plate [4]. - 5 screws [3]
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
F-7-934
[3]
F-7-931
[2]
[1]
1-7) Remove the 2 connectors [1]. 1-8) Remove the potential control PCB [3]. - 2 screws [2]
[2]
[3]
[2]
F-7-935
[1]
F-7-932
[1] [2]
F-7-936
7-178
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
F-7-937
F-7-941
[1]
[1]
F-7-942
[1] [2]
F-7-938
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-943
F-7-939
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-940 F-7-944
5-2) Remove the 5 connectors [1] found at the upper left. Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover. Be sure to wipe off any such toner.
7-179
Chapter 7
[1]
[2] [4]
[1]
F-7-945
[1]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[1] [3]
[5]
F-7-948
F-7-946
[1]
[2]
F-7-947
[2]
[1]
F-7-949
[1]
F-7-950
7-180
[1]
[1]
F-7-951
[1]
[2]
F-7-955
[1]
F-7-952
[1]
[2]
F-7-956
F-7-953
[2] [1]
F-7-957
[3]
[1]
F-7-954
7-181
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
F-7-958
[1]
[2] [1] [2]
F-7-963
F-7-959
[1]
[2]
[1] [2]
F-7-964
7.11.38.2 Removing the Potential Sensor

0004-5173
F-7-960
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the potential sensor together with developing cover[2]. - 3 screws [1]
[1] [1]
[2]
F-7-961
[2]
F-7-965

[1]
7.11.39 ATR Sensor Unit 7.11.39.1 Preparation for Removing the ATR Sensor Unit
0011-1695
F-7-962
7-182
Chapter 7
[2] [1]
F-7-966 F-7-970
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1] [2]
F-7-971
[2]
F-7-967
[1]
[1]
F-7-972
[2]
[1]
F-7-968
[2]
F-7-973
[1] [2]
F-7-969
7-183
Chapter 7
[1]
F-7-974
[1]
F-7-978
[2] [1] [3]
[1]
F-7-975
[2]
F-7-979
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-976
F-7-980
[1]
[1] [1]
F-7-977
7-184
Chapter 7
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
[1]
F-7-984
[6]
[1]
[5]
F-7-981
F-7-985
[1]
[2]
F-7-986
[1] [2] [1]

F-7-982
[1]
[1]
F-7-983
F-7-987
7-185
[1]
[1]
F-7-991
[2] [1] [2]
[2]
F-7-988
[1]
F-7-992
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-7-989
F-7-993
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-7-990 F-7-994

[1]
F-7-995
7-186
Chapter 7
[2]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-996
F-7-999
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-1000
[2]
F-7-997
0002-6228
7.11.39.2 Removing the ATR Sensor Unit

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the connector [1]. 2) Open the clamp [2], and remove the harness for the wire guide [3]. 3) Remove the 2 screws [4]. 4) Remove the ATR sensor unit [6]. - 2 lock claws [5]
[1] [2] [3]
[2] [1]
F-7-1001
[4]
F-7-998
[5]
[6]
[4]
7.11.40 Patch Image Sensor 7.11.40.1 Preparation for Removing the Patch Image Sensor
0011-1651
F-7-1002
[1] [2]
7-187
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
F-7-1003
F-7-1007
[1]
[1]
F-7-1008
[1] [2]
F-7-1004
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-1009
F-7-1005
[1]
[1] [3]
[2]
F-7-1006
[2]
F-7-1010
7-188
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-1011
[2]
F-7-1015
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-1012
[1]
F-7-1016
[2]
F-7-1013
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-1017
F-7-1014
7-189
Chapter 7
[1]
[3]
[2] [1]
F-7-1018
F-7-1021
[2]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-1019
[3]
[1]
F-7-1022
F-7-1020
[1]
F-7-1023
7-190
Chapter 7
7.11.41 Idle Roller 7.11.41.1 Preparation for Removing the Idle Roller
0011-1638
[2] [2]
[1]
F-7-1024
[1]
[1]
F-7-1028
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2] [5]
F-7-1025
7.11.40.2 Removing the Patch Image Reading Sensor

0003-8387
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the pattern reader holder [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-1029
[1]
[2]
F-7-1026
2) Remove the patch image reading sensor [3]. - 2 screws [1] - connector [2]
[1] [3]
[2]
F-7-1030
[2]
F-7-1027
7-191
Chapter 7
[1]
[1] [2]
F-7-1031 F-7-1035
[2]
2-7) Remove the front cover strap [2]. - screw [1] from lower right Once you have released the hopper assembly, toner can spill over the toner bottle supply mouth of the hopper assembly cover. Be sure to wipe off any such toner.
[1]
[2]
F-7-1032
F-7-1036
[1]
[1]
[1] [2]
F-7-1033 F-7-1037
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-1034 F-7-1038
7-192
Chapter 7
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-7-1039
F-7-1043
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-1040
[2]
F-7-1044
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-1041
[1]
F-7-1045
[2]
F-7-1042
7-193
Chapter 7
[3]
[1]
F-7-1046
[1]
F-7-1049
[3]
F-7-1047
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-7-1050
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-1048
[1]
F-7-1051
9) Remove the Patch Image Reading Unit. 9-1) Move the arm [1] shown in the figure to lock it in place; thus releasing
7-194
Chapter 7 the roller (both front and rear).
[2]
[1]
F-7-1052
[1]
[2] [2]
[1]
F-7-1053
[1]
[4]
[3]
[1]
F-7-1055
2) Holding the shaft of the idle roller [1], lift the roller[2] upright to remove.
[2] [5]
F-7-1054
7.11.41.2 Removing the Idle Roller

0003-2619
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the pre-transfer guide [2]. - screw [1]
7-195
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
F-7-1058
[1]
F-7-1056
When removing the roller, take care not to damage the surface of the ITB by the roller.
[2]
F-7-1059
7.11.41.3 Detaching the Idle Roller

0002-6344
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 2 bushings [1], bearing [2], and E-ring[3] from the idle roller.
[1]
[2]
[1] [1]
F-7-1057
[2]
[3]
F-7-1060
7.11.42 Patch Image Reading Sensor Shutter Solenoid 7.11.42.1 Preparation for Removing the Patch Image Reading Sensor Shutter Solenoid
0011-1616
[2]
F-7-1061
[1]
7-196
Chapter 7
[1]
[2]
F-7-1062
F-7-1066
[1]
[1]
F-7-1067
[1] [2]
F-7-1063
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-1068
F-7-1064
[1]
[1] [3]
[2]
F-7-1065
[2]
F-7-1069
7-197
Chapter 7
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-7-1070
[2]
F-7-1074
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1]
[3]
F-7-1071
[1]
F-7-1075
[2]
F-7-1072
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-1076
F-7-1073
7-198
Chapter 7
[1]
[3]
[2] [1]
F-7-1077
F-7-1080
[2]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-7-1078
[3]
[1]
F-7-1081
F-7-1079
[1]
F-7-1082
7-199
Chapter 7
7.11.43.2 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Primary Charging Assembly

0002-5836
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Pick the wire cleaner hook [1], and remove the wire cleaner [2] .
[2]
[2] [2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-7-1083
[1]
[4]
[3]
[1]
F-7-1087
[1]
7.11.43.3 Stringing the Charging Wires

0002-5844
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci All charging wires (except the grid wire) may be strung in the same way, and the following shows how to string the charging wire of the primary charging assembly. 1) Remove the shield plates (left, right) of the charging assembly. Be sure to detach the left and right shield plates separately so as to prevent warping of the primary charging assembly. At this time, be sure NOT to loosen both right and left mounting screws [1] at the same time on the left and right shield plates.
[2] [5]
F-7-1084
7.11.42.2 Removing the Patch Image Reading Sensor Shutter Solenoid

0004-5880
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 4 screws [1].
F-7-1088
[1]
[1]
2) Remove the wire cleaner.
In the case of the pre-transfer charging assembly, remove the 2 lids. 3) Free a length of about 5 cm from a 0.06-mm-dia charging wire reel, and form a loop at its end about 2 mm in diameter.
F-7-1085
2) Remove the patch image reading sensor shutter solenoid [2]. - connector [1]
[2] [1]
Reference: To form a lop, wind the charging wire around a hex key once, turn the key 3 to 4 times, and twist the wire. 4) Cut off the excess end of the charging wire with nippers. 5) Hook the loop on the stud.
Stud Charging wire Reel
F-7-1086
(front)
F-7-1089
Charging wire
(rear)
7.11.43 Charging Wire 7.11.43.1 Outline

0002-5835
6) Hook the charging wire [2] on the charging wire positioner [1] at the rear; then, hook the charging wire on the hook [3] for tension.
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Around the photosensitive drum are 2 charging writes used for primary and pre-transfer charging. These wires are brown wires 0.06 mm in diameter. Be sure not to use gold-plated writes in their place; otherwise, image faults may occur. Be sure also to use a high-polish pad (blue) designed for a brown wire as the cleaning pad for the primary and pre-transfer charging assemblies.
7-200
Chapter 7 then, attach it temporarily.
[3] [1]
[1]
[2]
F-7-1090
[2]
7) Cut the excess charging wire with nippers. 8) Pick the end [1] of the tension spring with tweezers, and hook it on the charging power supply terminal [2]. In the case of the pre-transfer charging assembly, hook the spring on the pin at the front.
[1]
F-7-1094
4) Free a length of about 5 cm form a 0.1-mm-dia charging wire reel, and form a loop of about 2 mm in diameter at its end. Reference: To form a loop, wind the charging wire around a hex key once, turn the key 3 to 4 times, and twist the charging wire. 5) Cut the excess of the charging wire with nippers. 6) When you have strung the charging wire on all studs, pass its end [2] between the motor unit and the washer found behind the charging assembly. Then, wind the charging wire around the attaching screw [3] once (clockwise), and attach it using the screw. 7) After routing the wire for stud, lead it through wire end [2], put it between the washer and the motor unit, and wind it once around the attaching screw(clockwise) [3] , and secure it in place with a attaching screw.
[2]
F-7-1091
Make sure of the following: - the charging wire must not be bent or twisted. - the charging wire must be in the V-groove of the charging wire positioner.
[1]
(correct)
(wrong)
[3]
Grid side
[2]
(correct)
F-7-1092
(wrong)
F-7-1095
9) Attach the cushion at the front of the charging wire. (This does not apply to the primary charging assembly.) 10) Attach the left and right shield plates (or, 2 lids). 11) Attach the wire cleaner. At this time, be sure to pay attention to the orientation of the wire cleaner. 12) Wipe the charging wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
8) Cut the excess of the charging wire with nippers. 9) Tighten the attaching screw you loosened in step 3). (Be sure to tighten it until the tension of the gird wire is even and while making sure that the charging assembly is free of deformation. 10) Tighten the attaching screws you loosened in steps 1) and 2). 11) Wipe the grid wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
7.11.43.4 Stringing the Grid.

0002-5849
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Loosen the 2 attaching screws [1] used to hold the left and right shield plates in place. 2) Loosen the 3 attaching screws [2] used to hold the motor unit at the front.
[2] [1]
Check to be sure that the grid wire is free of bends and twists. Also, the lengths of the wire must be at equal intervals. (The grid wire must be in the groove of the block.)
7.11.43.5 Adjusting the Primary Charging Wire

0002-5850
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci If you have to replace the primary charging wire, check that the height of the changing wire is as indicated:
[A]
[B]
[1]
F-7-1093
F-7-1096
3) Loosen the screw [1], and move the block [2] in the direction of the arrow;
left (on the developing unit side) [A]: 7.5 +/-0.5 mm right (on the photosensitive drum cleaning unit side) [B]: 8.0 +/-0.5 mm
7-201
Chapter 7 If the height is not as indicated, make the necessary adjustments. Reference: The height of the primary charging wire may be adjusted by turning the screw found behind the charging assembly. A full turn will change the height by about 0.7 mm.
7-202
Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System
Contents
Contents
8.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1.2 Major Divisions of the Machine .................................................................................................................................................. 8-1 8.1.3 Arrangement of Rollers................................................................................................................................................................ 8-2 8.1.4 Diagram of the Paper Path ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-3 8.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors............................................................................................................................................................... 8-4 8.1.6 Arrangement of Solenoids ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-5 8.1.7 Arrangement of Drive Mechanisms............................................................................................................................................. 8-6
8.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................8-7

8.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation (in response to a press on the Start key) ....................................................................................... 8-7 8.2.2 Interval Acceleration.................................................................................................................................................................... 8-9 8.2.3 Stopping the Paper Before Registration..................................................................................................................................... 8-12
8.3 Detecting Jams .............................................................................................................................................................8-12

8.3.1 Delay Jams ................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-12
8.3.1.1 Cassette/Deck Pickup Assembly (right deck, left deck, cassette 3/4)...........................................................................................................8-12 8.3.1.2 Delay Jam (source of paper other than cassette/deck) ..................................................................................................................................8-13
8.3.2 Stationary Jams .......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-13

8.3.2.1 Common Stationary Jam ...............................................................................................................................................................................8-13 8.3.2.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On..........................................................................................................................................................................8-14
8.3.3 Other Jams ................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-15

8.3.3.1 Wrong Paper Size..........................................................................................................................................................................................8-15 8.3.3.2 Wrong Material .............................................................................................................................................................................................8-15
8.4 Cassette ........................................................................................................................................................................8-15

8.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.4.2 Identifying Paper Sizes .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-15 8.4.3 Setting the Universal Cassette ................................................................................................................................................... 8-17 8.4.4 Checking the Level of Remaining Paper ................................................................................................................................... 8-17
8.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ..................................................................................................................................................8-19

8.5.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-19 8.5.2 Basic Sequence .......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-20 8.5.3 Movement of the Lifter .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-20
8.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit ............................................................................................................................................8-21

8.6.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-21 8.6.2 Basic Sequence .......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-22 8.6.3 Identifying the Size of Paper...................................................................................................................................................... 8-22 8.6.4 Identifying the Last Sheet .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-23
8.7 Deck .............................................................................................................................................................................8-24

8.7.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-24 8.7.2 Basic Sequence .......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-25 8.7.3 Identifying the Size of Paper...................................................................................................................................................... 8-25 8.7.4 Checking the Level of Remaining Paper ................................................................................................................................... 8-26
8.8 Registration Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................8-27

8.8.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.9 Duplex Feeding Unit ....................................................................................................................................................8-27

8.9.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-27 8.9.2 Detecting the Horizontal Registration Position ......................................................................................................................... 8-30 8.9.3 A5, 5 Sheets in Circulation ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-32 8.9.4 A3, 3 Sheets in Circulation ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-33
8.10 Delivery......................................................................................................................................................................8-34
8.10.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-34
Contents
8.10.2 Face-Up Delivery..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-35 8.10.3 Face-Down Delivery................................................................................................................................................................ 8-35
8.11 Parts Replacement Procedure.................................................................................................................................... 8-38

8.11.1 Cassette Pickup Unit ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-38
8.11.1.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-38
8.11.2 Cassette Pickup Motor ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-38

8.11.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Pick-up Motor .............................................................................................................................. 8-38 8.11.2.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-38
8.11.3 Cassette Lifter Motor ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-38

8.11.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Lifter Motor ................................................................................................................................. 8-38 8.11.3.2 Removing the Cassette Lifter Motor .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-39
8.11.4 Left Deck Lifter Motor ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-39

8.11.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Lift Deck Lifter Motor ............................................................................................................................... 8-39 8.11.4.2 Removing the Left Deck Lifter Motor........................................................................................................................................................ 8-39
8.11.5 Right Deck Lifter Motor .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-39

8.11.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Right Deck Lifter Motor ............................................................................................................................ 8-39 8.11.5.2 Removing the Right Deck Lifter Motor ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-40
8.11.6 Left Deck Pickup Motor .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-40

8.11.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Left Deck Pickup Motor ............................................................................................................................ 8-40 8.11.6.2 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Motor...................................................................................................................................................... 8-40
8.11.7 Right Deck Pickup Motor ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-40

8.11.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Right Deck Pickup Motor .......................................................................................................................... 8-40 8.11.7.2 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Motor ................................................................................................................................................... 8-41
8.11.8 Vertical Path Motor.................................................................................................................................................................. 8-41

8.11.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Vertical Path Motor.................................................................................................................................... 8-41 8.11.8.2 Removing the Vertical Path Motor ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-41
8.11.9 Right Deck Pull-Off Motor...................................................................................................................................................... 8-41

8.11.9.1 Preparation for Removeing the Right Deck Pull-Off Motor ..................................................................................................................... 8-41 8.11.9.2 Removing Right Deck Pull-Off Motor ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-42
8.11.10 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B)........................................................................................................................................ 8-42

8.11.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) .......................................................................................................... 8-42 8.11.10.2 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) ................................................................................................................................... 8-42
8.11.11 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor ............................................................................................................................................... 8-43

8.11.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Sensor.................................................................................................................. 8-43 8.11.11.2 Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Sensor........................................................................................................................................... 8-44
8.11.12 Right Deck Pickup Assembly ................................................................................................................................................ 8-44

8.11.12.1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 8-44
8.11.13 Left Deck Pickup Assembly .................................................................................................................................................. 8-45

8.11.13.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit....................................................................................................................................................... 8-45
8.11.14 Right Deck Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller ........................................................................................................................... 8-46

8.11.14.1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers ............................................................................................................ 8-46
8.11.15 Left Deck Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller ............................................................................................................................. 8-46

8.11.15.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup, Feed, and Separation Roller ................................................................................................................ 8-46
8.11.16 Cassette Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller ................................................................................................................................ 8-47

8.11.16.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers ................................................................................................................. 8-47
8.11.17 Manual Feed Unit .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-47

8.11.17.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit.............................................................................................................................................................. 8-47
8.11.18 Manual Feed Roller................................................................................................................................................................ 8-48

8.11.18.1 Removing the Manual Feed Roller ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-48
8.11.19 Manual Feed Separation Roller ............................................................................................................................................. 8-48

8.11.19.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller................................................................................................................ 8-48 8.11.19.2 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller......................................................................................................................................... 8-49
8.11.20 Manual Feed Pre-Regustration Motor ................................................................................................................................... 8-49

8.11.20.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Feed Pre-Regustration Motor...................................................................................................... 8-49 8.11.20.2 Manual Feed Pre-Registration Motor ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-51
8.11.21 Horizontal Registration Assembly......................................................................................................................................... 8-51

8.11.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Horizontal Registration Unit .................................................................................................................... 8-51 8.11.21.2 Removing the Horizontal Registration Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 8-52
8.11.22 Registration Motor ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-53
Contents
8.11.22.1 Preparation for Removing the Registration Motor....................................................................................................................................8-53 8.11.22.2 Removing the Registration Motor.............................................................................................................................................................8-54
8.11.23 Horizontal Registration Motor ............................................................................................................................................... 8-54

8.11.23.1 Preparation for Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor .................................................................................................................8-54 8.11.23.2 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor...........................................................................................................................................8-56
8.11.24 Duplex Reversal Motor.......................................................................................................................................................... 8-56

8.11.24.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Reversal Motor .......................................................................................................................8-56 8.11.24.2 Removing the Duplexing Reversal Motor ................................................................................................................................................8-56
8.11.25 Duplex Left Motor ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-56

8.11.25.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Left Motor...............................................................................................................................8-56 8.11.25.2 Removing the Duplex Left Motor.............................................................................................................................................................8-57
8.11.26 Duplex Middle Motor ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-57

8.11.26.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Middle Motor..........................................................................................................................8-57 8.11.26.2 Removing the Duplexing Middle Motor...................................................................................................................................................8-58
8.11.27 Duplex Right Motor ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-58

8.11.27.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Right Motor ............................................................................................................................8-58 8.11.27.2 Removing the Duplexing Right Motor .....................................................................................................................................................8-59
8.11.28 Outside Delivery Motor ......................................................................................................................................................... 8-59

8.11.28.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Delivery Motor............................................................................................................................8-59 8.11.28.2 Removing the Outside Delivery Motor.....................................................................................................................................................8-61
Chapter 8
8.1 Construction
0002-4685
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the major specifications, control mechanisms, and functions of the pickup/feeding system:
T-8-1 Item Method of paper accommodation Method of pickup Description front loading front deck (right, left) cassette (3, 4) manual feed tray reference of paper movement accommodation of paper center front deck (right, left) cassette (3, 4) manual feed tray Size of paper front deck (left, right) cassette (3, 4) 1500 sheets (80 g/m2) 550 sheets (80 g/m2) 100 sheets (80 g/m2) A4, B5, LTR A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 305X457mm, 320X450mm(SRA3), 330X483mm, 11X17, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, EXEC, 12X18, 12-5/8X17-11/16, 13X19 separation retard separation retard separation retard Remarks
manual feed tray Weight of paper front deck (left, right) cassette (3, 4) manual feed tray duplexing Switching paper sizes front deck (left, right) cassette (3,4) manual feed tray Method of duplexing through path
main scanning: 100 to 330 mm sub scanning: 148.5 to 482 mm 64 to 209g/m2 64 to 209g/m2 64 to 250g/m2 mono color: 64 to 209 g/m2 color: 64 to 163 g/m2 by service person by user by user
8.1.2 Major Divisions of the Machine

0002-4689
8-1
Chapter 8
[10] [9]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[3] [7] [4] [6]
[5]
F-8-1
[1] Registration roller assembly [2] Manual feed pickup assembly [3] Secondary transfer assembly [4] Right deck pickup assembly [5] Cassette pickup assembly [6] Left deck pickup assembly [7] Duplexing feeding assembly [8] Delivery assembly [9] Fixing assembly [10] Feeding assembly
8.1.3 Arrangement of Rollers

0002-4701
8-2
Chapter 8
[34] [33] [32] [31]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[30] [29] [28] [27] [26] [25] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [24] [23] [22] [21] [20] [19]
F-8-2
[18]
[17]
[1] Registration roller [2] Manual feed pull-off roller [3] Manual feed roller [4] Manual feed separation roller [5] Pre-registration roller [6] Duplexing outlet roller [7] Vertical path 1 roller [8] Right deck feed roller [9] Right deck separation roller [10] Vertical path 2 roller [11] Vertical path 3 roller [12] Cassette 3 feed roller [13] Cassette 3 separation roller [14] Vertical path 4 roller [15] Cassette 4 feed roller [16] Cassette 4 separation roller [17] Cassette 4 pickup roller [18] Cassette 3 pickup roller [19] Right deck pickup roller [20] Duplexing right roller [21] Secondary transfer roller [22] Duplexing confluence roller [23] Left deck separation roller [24] Left deck feed roller [25] Left deck pickup roller [26] Duplexing left roller [27] Reversing 2 roller [28] Duplexing inlet roller [29] Reversing 1 roller [30] Pressure roller [31] Inside paper roller [32] Outside delivery roller [33] Fixing roller [34] Outside heat roller
8.1.4 Diagram of the Paper Path

0003-2745
8-3
Chapter 8
[8] [7]
[1]
[9]
[2] [6] [5]
[4]
[3]
F-8-3
[1] Manual feed pickup [2] Side paper deck pickup [3] Cassette 4 pickup [4] Cassette 3 pickup [5] Right deck pickup [6] Left deck pickup [7] Face-down delivery [8] Face-up delivery [9] Duplexing re-pickup
8.1.5 Arrangement of Sensors

0003-2748
8-4
Chapter 8
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
[16] [17] [18] [23]

[1] External delivery sensor [2] Reversal sensor [3] Inside delivery sensor [4] Fixing inlet sensor [5] Post-transfer sensor [6] Duplexing confluence sensor [7] Transparency sensor (front; PS3) [8] Registration sensor [9] Transparency sensor (rear; PS29) [10] Manual feed paper sensor [11] Vertical path confluence sensor [12] Vertical path 0 sensor [13] Vertical path 1 sensor [14] Right deck pickup sensor [15] Vertical path 2 sensor [16] Vertical path 3 sensor [17] Cassette 3 pickup sensor [18] Vertical path 4 sensor [19] Cassette 4 pickup sensor [20] Left deck stationary sensor [21] Left deck pickup sensor [22] Duplexing left sensor [23] Reversal vertical path sensor
[22]
[21]
[20]
F-8-4
[19]
8.1.6 Arrangement of Solenoids

0003-2750
8-5
Chapter 8
[8]
[7]
SL5 SL3 SL1 [1] SL7 SL4 SL6 [2]
[6]
SL8 [5] SL9 [3]
[4]
F-8-5
[1] Manual feed pickup solenoid [2] Deck (right) pickup solenoid [3] Cassette 3 pickup solenoid [4] Cassette 4 pickup solenoid [5] Left deck confluence solenoid [6] Deck (left) pickup solenoid [7] Reversal shifting solenoid [8] Delivery solenoid
8.1.7 Arrangement of Drive Mechanisms

0003-2752
8-6
Chapter 8
M4 M8 M9 M6
M10
M14
M17
M15
M11
M18
M12 M13 M19

F-8-6
M4 Fixing motor M6 Manual feed pre-registration motor M8 Registration motor M9 Outside delivery motor M10 Duplexing reversal motor M11 Duplexing left motor M12 Duplexing middle motor M13 Duplexing right motor M14 Right deck pull-off motor M15 Vertical path motor M17 Right deck pickup motor M18 Left deck pickup motor M19 Cassette pickup motor
8.2 Basic Sequence

8.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation (in response to a press on the Start key)
0005-4709
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Right Deck a. A4, plain, 2 sheets continuous, secondary transfer speed at normal, face-up delivery
8-7
Chapter 8
Print start STBY Right deck pickup motor (M17) Right deck pickup sensor (PS33) Deck (right) pickup solenoid (SL6) Vertical path 0 sensor (PS31) Right deck pull-off motor (M14) Manual feed preregistration motor (M6) Transparency sensor (front/rear; PS3/29) Registration motor (M8) Fixing motor (M4) Delivery solenoid (SL7) Outside delivery motor (M9) : acceleration control used. : rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). PRINT LSTR
F-8-7
b. A4, plain, 2 sheets continuous, secondary transfer speed at 2/3, face-up delivery
Print start STBY Right deck pickup motor (M17) Right deck pickup sensor (PS33) Deck (right) pickup solenoid (SL6) Vertical path 0 sensor (PS31) Right deck pull-off motor (M14) Manual feed preregistration motor (M6) Transparency sensor (front/rear; PS3/29) Registration motor (M8) Fixing motor (M4) Delivery solenoid (SL7) Outside delivery motor (M9) : acceleration control used. : 2/3 rotates at 2/3 speed (184 mm/sec). : rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *1 : pre-registration stop.
*1 *1
PRINT
LSTR
*1
*1
F-8-8
2. Cassette 3 a. A4, plain, 2 sheets continuous, secondary transfer speed at normal, face-up delivery
8-8
Chapter 8
Print start STBY Cassette 3 pickup motor (M19) Cassette 3 pickup sensor (PS48) Cassette 3 pickup solenoid (SL8) Vertical path 2 sensor (PS61) Vertical path motor (M15) Right deck pickup motor (M17) Right deck pull-off motor (M14) Manual feed preregistration motor (M6) Transparency sensor (front/rear; PS3/29) Registration motor (M8) Fixing motor (M4) Delivery solenoid (SL7) Outside delivery motor (M9) : acceleration control used. : rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *1 : pre-registration stop.
*1 *1
PRINT
LSTR
*1
*1
F-8-9
3. Manual Feeder a. A4, plain, 2 sheets continuous, face-up delivery

Print start STBY Manual pickup solenoid (SL1) Manual feed preregistration motor (M6) Transparency sensor (front/rear; PS3/29) Registration motor (M8) Fixing motor (M4) Delivery solenoid (SL7) Outside delivery motor (M9) : rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). PRINT LSTR
F-8-10
8.2.2 Interval Acceleration

0003-2759
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine provides 3 types of secondary transfer speed (normal, 2/3 speed, 1/3 speed) to suit the type of paper (material, weight) and the selected color mode. These speeds are in keeping with the image formation speed (276 mm/sec; if normal speed, 276 mm/sec; if 2/3 speed, 184 mm/sec; if 1/3 speed, 92 mm/sec).
plain paper weight Full color single-sided double-sided Mono color single-sided double-sided normal normal 64 105
heavy paper 1
heavy paper 2 heavy paper 3 163 209 250(g/m2)
OHP
2/3 speed 2/3 speed
1/3 speed
1/3 speed
normal normal
normal
F-8-11
Instead of relying on electromagnetic clutches, the machine's feeding system makes use of a number of drive motors for finer control of interval acceleration, thus increasing the level of productivity. The rate of acceleration in response to transfer speed at respective intervals is as follows: 1. between pickup and secondary transfer roller
8-9
Chapter 8
T-8-2 Transfer speed Interval Normal (276 mm/sec) A to D 1.8 times as fast (speed partly variable) *2 2/3 speed (184 mm/sec) A to D 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec) A to D
Right deck
2.2 times as fast
2.7 times as fast
Feed speed
left deck cassette 3/4 side deck (optional)
1.8 times as fast
2.2 times as fast
2.7 times as fast
Manual feed
Equivalent to transfer speed
D(*1)
A A
F-8-12
*1. Point 20 mm in front of secondary transfer. *2. If the source of paper is the right deck and normal speed is used, the machine executes variable speed control (speed used between normal speed and x1.8 speed) in relation to the timing at which the paper reaches the vertical path 0 sensor (PS31) within interval B and C; this is to prevent interference between the trailing edge of the preceding paper and the leading edge of the following paper otherwise occurring if the speed was fixed to x1.8 (because of the short distance from the point of pickup to the point of registration).
T-8-3 Transfer speed Interval Feed speed right deck A to B 1.8 times speed Normal speed (276 mm/sec) B to C variable speed C to D 1.8 times speed
B PS31
F-8-13
8-10
Chapter 8 A: Point of pickup B: Point of pre-registration C: Point 36 mm in front of the registration sensor D: Point 20 mm in front of secondary transfer 2. Secondary Transfer Roller to Outside Delivery
T-8-4 Transfer speed Interval Feed speed face-up delivery Normal speed (276 mm/sec) E to F to H equivalent to transfer speed *3 2/3 speed (184 mm/sec) E to F to H equivalent to transfer speed 1/3 Speed (92 mm/sec) E to F to H equivalent to transfer speed
T-8-5
Transfer speed Interval Feed speed Face-down delivery
Normal speed (276 mm/sec) E to F equivalent to transfer speed F to G to H 2.3 as fast *4
2/3 speed (184 mm/sc) E to F equivalent to transfer speed F to G to H 3.4 times as fast *4
1/3 speed (92 mm/sec) E to F equivalent to transfer speed F to G to H 3.4 times as fast *4
H F E
F-8-14
*3. If the paper is A4, B5, or LTR, the speed of movement will be 2.3 times as high between F and H. However, the normal speed may be selected in service mode for better stacking (COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DLV-SPSW). *4. Acceleration occurs when the trailing edge of paper leaves the inside delivery sensor. 3. Secondary Transfer Roller to Duplexing Re-Pickup
T-8-6 Transfer speed Interval E to F equivalent to transfer speed Normal speed (276 mm/sec) F to G to H H to D E to F equivalent to transfer speed 2/speed (184 mm/sec) F to G to H H to D
Feed speed
duplexing
2.3 time as fast *5
1.8 times as fast
3.4 times as fast *5
2.2 times as fast
F E D H G
F-8-15
*5. Acceleration occurs when the trailing edge of paper leaves the fixing roller. In duplexing mode, 1/3 speed cannot occur at tune of transfer.
8-11
Chapter 8
8.2.3 Stopping the Paper Before Registration

0003-2796
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine stops the paper before registration to prevent interference between preceding paper and following paper (otherwise occurring as the result of changes in feed speed over certain intervals). The paper is stopped at the following points (according to sources of paper). If the manual feed pickup unit is used as the source of paper or if the source of paper is the right deck and, at the same time, while the normal transfer speed is used (i.e., variable speed control is executed), paper will not be stopped before registration:
T-8-7 Source of paper Right deck Left deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Side deck Point of stopping paper [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] about 10 mm ahead of the vertical path 0 sensor (PS31) about 25 mm ahead of the duplexing confluence sensor (PS18) about 24 mm ahead of the vertical path 2 sensor (PS61) about 57 mm ahead of the vertical path 3 sensor (PS62) about 29 mm ahead of the deck feed sensor (PS106)
[2]
[1]
[5]
PS18 PS31
PS106 PS60
[3] PS61 [4] PS62
F-8-16
8.3 Detecting Jams

8.3.1 Delay Jams 8.3.1.1 Cassette/Deck Pickup Assembly (right deck, left deck, cassette 3/4)
0003-2804
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The leading edge of paper does not reach the sensor in question within a specific period of time after the pickup motor goes on.
Start key ON or print started
INTR [1] Feed motor Jam check Sensor N Normal
PRINT [1]
Error [1]:specific length of time (feed)
F-8-17
8-12
Chapter 8
T-8-8 Source of paper Motor Right deck Left deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 right deck pickup motor (M17) left deck pickup motor (M18) cassette pickup motor (M19) cassette pickup motor (M19) Sensor used right deck pickup sensor (PS33) left deck pickup sensor (PS40) cassette 3 pickup sensor (PS48) cassette 4 pickup sensor (PS54)
8.3.1.2 Delay Jam (source of paper other than cassette/deck)

0003-2805
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine monitors the length of time between when paper leaves the sensor N-1 and when it reaches the sensor N (i.e., the sensor used for detection), and it will identify a delay jam if the sensor N does not go on within a specific period of time after the sensor N-1 has gone on.
Start key ON or PRINT setting reached INTR [1] Sensor N-1 Jam check Sensor N Normal Error [1]:specific period of time (feed)
F-8-18 T-8-9 Sensor Vertical path confluence sensor (PS32) Vertical path 0 sensor (PS31) Vertical path 1 sensor (PS60) Vertical path 2 sensor (PS61) Vertical path 3 sensor (PS62) Vertical path 4 sensor (PS63) Transparency sensor (front; PS3) Transparency sensor (rear; PS29) Registration sensor (PS9) Post-transfer sensor (PS10) Inside delivery sensor (PS12) Reversal sensor (PS14) Outside delivery sensor (PS13) Reversal vertical path sensor (PS15) Duplexing left sensor (PS17) Duplexing confluence sensor (PS18) if not transparency if not transparency if transparency Remarks
PRINT [1]
8.3.2 Stationary Jams 8.3.2.1 Common Stationary Jam

0003-2807
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The sensor N does not go off within a specific period of time after it has gone on.
8-13
Chapter 8
Start key ON or print started
INTR L+A Jam check Sensor N Normal
PRINT L+A Error
(L: paper length feed distance; A: specific feed length)

F-8-19 T-8-10 Sensor Vertical confluence sensor (PS32) Vertical path 0 sensor (PS31) Vertical path 1 sensor (PS60) Vertical path 2 sensor (PS61) Vertical path 3 sensor (PS62) Vertical path 4 sensor (PS63) Transparency sensor (front; PS3) Transparency sensor (rear; PS29) Registration sensor (PS9) Reversal sensor (PS14) Outside delivery sensor (PS13) Reversal vertical path sensor (PS15) Duplexing left sensor (PS17) Duplexing confluence sensor (PS18) if not transparency if not transparency if transparency if face-down delivery Remarks
8.3.2.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On

0003-2808
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Paper exists over the following sensor before the machine starts initial multiple rotation at power-on:
T-8-11 Sensor Vertical path confluence sensor (PS32) Vertical path 0 sensor (PS31) Vertical path 1 sensor (PS60) Vertical path 2 sensor (PS61) Vertical pith 3 sensor (PS62) Vertical path 4 sensor (PS63) Transparency sensor (front; PS3) Transparency sensor (rear; PS29) Registration sensor (PS9) Reversal sensor (PS14) Outside delivery sensor (PS13) Reversal vertical path sensor (PS15) Duplexing left sensor (PS17) Duplexing confluence sensor (PS18) Fixing inlet sensor (PS11) Left deck stationary sensor (PS47) Remarks
8-14
Chapter 8
8.3.3 Other Jams 8.3.3.1 Wrong Paper Size

0003-2809
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine identifies a jam if it detects paper shorter than the specified size:
T-8-12 Sensor Transparency sensor (front; PS3) Transparency sensor (rear; PS29) Registration sensor (PS9) Remarks if not transparency if not transparency if transparency
8.3.3.2 Wrong Material

0003-2810
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine identifies a jam if it detects paper of a material not indicated by the transparency sensor.
T-8-13 Sensor Ttansparency sensor (front: PS3) Ttansparency sensor (rear: PS29)
8.4 Cassette
8.4.1 Overview
0003-2814
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Paper is attach inside the cassette by means of the side guide plate and the rear guide plate. The index special guide must be attached before using an index sheet. The cassette is set to a specific paper size using the cassette size dial.
[2] [1] [3]
[4]
F-8-20
[1] Rear guide plate [2] Side guide plate [3] Cassette size dial [4] Index special guide
8.4.2 Identifying Paper Sizes

0003-2826
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The size of paper inside the cassette is identified by the cassette size dial, and the result is communicated to the cassette size detection PCB. The array of 4 actuators on the cassette size detection PCB found on the machine indicates a specific state in keeping with the states (on/off) of the 4 actuators, enabling the identification of as many as 15 paper sizes. If the cassette is absent, all 4 actuators are off, causing the machine to identify the absence of a cassette. The cassette is set to AB-configuration or Inch-configuration by means of the switch mounted to the side of the dial. When the cassette is attached to the machine, the switch turns off or on to indicate that the cassette is of the AB or inch configuration.
8-15
Chapter 8
[2] [1]
INCH
SW3 SW2 SW1 SW0 SW4

F-8-21
[1] AB/inch-configuration switch [2] Cassette size dial

T-8-14 (AB-Configuration) Size (no cassette) A5R A4 A4R A3 B5 B5R B4 305x457mm 320x450mm(SRA3) 330x483mm U1 U2 SW0 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF SW1 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON SW2 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON SW3 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF SW4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
T-8-15 (Inch-Configuration) Size (no cassette) STMTR LTR LTRR LGL 11 x 17 EXEC 12 x 18 12-5/8 x 17-11/16 13 x 19 U3 U4 SW0 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF SW1 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON SW2 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON SW3 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF SW4 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
If a combination not found in the foregoing table is found, the machine will assume the absence of a cassette, and will not move up the cassette lifter.
8-16
Chapter 8 If the machine fails to identify a paper size (no indication of a paper size on the control panel), it will indicate the Add Paper message if the cassette in question is selected.
8.4.3 Setting the Universal Cassette

0003-2832
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following is a list of default sizes identified in relation to U1 through U4:
T-8-16 U1 U2 U3 U4 G-LTR FLSC G-LGL A-LTR
In addition to the foregoing default sizes, the following may be assigned in service mode:
T-8-17 (Universal U1 thorough U4) Size FLSC OFI E-OFI B-OFI A-OFI M-OFI FOLI A-FLS G-LTR G-LGL A-LTR (LTR) A-LTRR (LTRR)
8.4.4 Checking the Level of Remaining Paper

0003-2833
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine uses the following sensors to check the level of remaining paper:
T-8-18 Sensor Paper level sensor A Paper level sensor B Paper sensor Cassette 3 PS52 PS53 PS50 Cassette 4 PS58 PS59 SP56
8-17
Chapter 8
[7] [5] [6] [8]
[4] [3]
[2] [1]
F-8-22
[1] Tray [2] Paper level sensor flag [3] Cassette paper level sensor A [4] Cassette paper level sensor B [5] Lifter motor [6] Lifter gear [7] Cassette paper sensor [8] Flag
8-18
Chapter 8
View Front the Front of the Machine Full of paper Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A Paper
OFF OFF Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A Paper
OFF ON Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A Paper
ON Empty of paper
ON Flag Paper tray Cassette paper sensor
F-8-23 T-8-19
Paper level sensor A
Paper level sensor B
Paper sensor
Level of paper
Indication on control panel
OFF
OFF
OFF
from 100% to about 50% of capacity
ON
OFF
OFF
from about 50% to about 10% of capacity
ON
ON
OFF
about 10% or less of capacity
--
--
ON
no paper
8.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit

8.5.1 Overview
0003-2838
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter so that the paper remains in contact with the pickup roller. When the cassette pickup motor turns on, the pickup roller starts to rotate to pick up paper.
8-19
Chapter 8 When the cassette solenoid turns on, on the other hand, the pickup roller starts to leave the surface of paper. The feed roller and the separation roller make sure that only one sheet of paper is moved ahead to the feed path to reach the vertical path roller. The pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller of the cassette 3/4 are driven by the cassette pickup motor (M19), and its drive is switched from the cassette 3 pickup assembly to the cassette 4 pickup assembly by reversing the rotation of the cassette pickup motor.
[2] [1] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[9]
[8] [7]
F-8-24
[1] Cassette 3/4 pickup solenoid (SL8/SL9) [2] Cassette 3/4 limit sensor (PS49/PS55) [3] Cassette 3/4 lifter sensor (PS51/PS57) [4] Cassette 3/4 pickup sensor (PS48/PS54) [5] Vertical path 3/4 sensor (PS62/PS63) [6] Cassette 3/4 feed roller [7] Cassette 3/4 separation roller [8] Cassette 3/4 pickup roller [9] Cassette 3/4 paper sensor
8.5.2 Basic Sequence

0005-4710
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. A4, plain, 2 sheets continuous, secondary transfer speed at normal, face-up delivery
Print start STBY Cassette 3 pickup motor (M19) Cassette 3 pickup sensor (PS48) Cassette 3 pickup solenoid (SL8) Vertical path 2 sensor (PS61) Vertical path motor (M15) Right deck pickup motor (M17) Right deck pull-off motor (M14) Manual feed preregistration motor (M6) Transparency sensor (front/rear; PS3/29) Registration motor (M8) Fixing motor (M4) Delivery solenoid (SL7) Outside delivery motor (M9) : acceleration control used. : rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *1 : pre-registration stop.
*1 *1
PRINT
LSTR
*1
*1
F-8-25
8.5.3 Movement of the Lifter

0003-2840
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When the cassette is attached inside the machine, the pickup roller starts to move down and, at the same time, the sensor flag leaves the lifter sensor, thus turning on the cassette lifter motor to move up the lifter. When the lifter sensor detects the surface of paper, on the other hand, the lifter stops to move up. The limit sensor is used to prevent damage in the event that the lifter motor fails to stop.
8-20
Chapter 8
[2] [1] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[9]
[8] [7]
F-8-26
[1] Cassette 3/4 pickup solenoid (SL8/SL9) [2] Cassette 3/4 limit sensor (PS49/PS55) [3] Cassette 3/4 lifter sensor (PS51/PS57) [4] Cassette 3/4 pickup sensor (PS48/PS54) [5] Vertical path 3/4 sensor(PS62/PS63) [6] Cassette 3/4 feed roller [7] Cassette 3/4 separation roller [8] Cassette 3/4 pickup roller [9] Cassette 3/4 paper sensor (PS50/PS56)
8.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit

8.6.1 Overview
0003-2845
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When the manual feed pickup solenoid (SL1) goes on, the manual feed holding plate is moved up; as a result, the paper on the tray is forced against the manual feed pickup roller, causing a single sheet of paper to be picked up by the manual feed pick up tray and the separation roller. The manual feed roller, manual feed separation roller, and manual feed pull-off roller are driven by the pre-registration motor. The paper on the tray of the manual feed pickup unit is monitored using the manual feed paper sensor (PS6). The last sheet of the tray, on the other hand, is identified using the last paper sensor (PS7).
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4] [5] [8] [7] [6]

F-8-27
8-21
Chapter 8
[3]
[9]
[10]
OFF SL1
ON SL1
F-8-28
[1] Manual feed pull-off upper roller [2] Manual feed separation roller [3] Manual feed pickup roller [4] Last paper sensor (PS7) [5] Last paper detecting roll [6] Paper sensor flag [7] Manual feed paper sensor (PS6) [8] Manual feed pull-off lower roller [9] Manual feed holding plate [10] Paper

0005-4711
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. A4, plain, 2 sheets continuous, face-up delivery
Print start STBY Manual pickup solenoid (SL1) Manual feed preregistration motor (M6) Transparency sensor (front/rear; PS3/29) Registration motor (M8) Fixing motor (M4) Delivery solenoid (SL7) Outside delivery motor (M9) : rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). PRINT LSTR
F-8-29
8.6.3 Identifying the Size of Paper

0003-2850
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine identifies the width of paper with reference to the output of the variable resistor (SVR1) operating in keeping with the movement of the side guides. The width of the side guide on the manual feed tray is adjusted by the user by manually moving the guides.
8-22
Chapter 8
[2] [3] [1]
[4]
F-8-30
[1] Slide guide (rear) [2] Variable resistor [3] Manual feed tray [4] Slid guide (front)
8.6.4 Identifying the Last Sheet

0003-2853
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine uses a secondary transfer method, which requires it to identify the last sheet so that no image will be formed on the ITB in the absence of paper. When the last paper pickup roll rotates, the slit cut into the roll causes the output of the last paper sensor (PS7) to take on a pulse wave form. The last paper pickup roller rotates only when the last sheet is picked up, and remains stationary at other times; if 4 or more output pulses are detected from the last paper sensor, therefore, the machine automatically assumes that the paper in question is the last sheet.
8-23
Chapter 8
Last paper
Manual feed last paper sensor
Last paper detecting roll Last sheet If 4 or more output pulses are detected, the paper is identified as being the last sheet.
Manual feed last paper sensor Last paper detecting roll

F-8-31
8.7 Deck
8.7.1 Overview
0003-2859
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The paper inside the left/right front deck is held up by the work of the lifter so that the paper remains in contact with the pickup roller at all times. When the deck pickup motor turns on, the pickup roller starts to rotate to pick up paper. The pickup roller leaves the paper when the deck pickup solenoid (SL6, SL7) turns on. The feed roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that no more than a single sheet of paper is moved ahead to the paper path. The pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller are driven by the deck pickup motor (M17, M18).
[10]
[11] [12] [13]
[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5] [18] [6] [7] [17]
[14] [15] [16]
[9]
[8]
F-8-32
8-24
Chapter 8
T-8-20 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Left deck pickup solenoid Left deck limit sensor Left deck lifter sensor Left deck stationary sensor Left deck pickup sensor Left deck feed roller Left deck separation roller Left deck pickup roller Left deck paper sensor PS42 SL6 PS41 PS43 PS47 PS40 [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] Right deck pickup solenoid Right deck limit sensor Right deck lifter sensor Vertical path 1 sensor Right deck pickup sensor Right deck feed roller Right deck separation roller Right deck pickup roller Right deck paper sensor PS35 SL7 PS34 PS36 PS60 PS33

0005-4712
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Right Deck, A4, plain, 2 sheets continuous, secondary transfer speed at normal, face-up delivery
Print start STBY Right deck pickup motor (M17) Right deck pickup sensor (PS33) Deck (right) pickup solenoid (SL6) Vertical path 0 sensor (PS31) Right deck pull-off motor (M14) Manual feed preregistration motor (M6) Transparency sensor (front/rear; PS3/29) Registration motor (M8) Fixing motor (M4) Delivery solenoid (SL7) Outside delivery motor (M9) : acceleration control used. : rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). PRINT LSTR
F-8-33
2. Right Deck, A4, plain, 2 sheets continuous, secondary transfer speed at 2/3, face-up delivery
Print start STBY Right deck pickup motor (M17) Right deck pickup sensor (PS33) Deck (right) pickup solenoid (SL6) Vertical path 0 sensor (PS31) Right deck pull-off motor (M14) Manual feed preregistration motor (M6) Transparency sensor (front/rear; PS3/29) Registration motor (M8) Fixing motor (M4) Delivery solenoid (SL7) Outside delivery motor (M9) : acceleration control used. : 2/3 rotates at 2/3 speed (184 mm/sec). : rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *1 : pre-registration stop.
*1 *1
PRINT
LSTR
*1
*1
F-8-34
8.7.3 Identifying the Size of Paper

0003-2867
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The left/right front deck is not equipped with a mechanism used to identify the size of paper, and its configuration is switched in service mode. The left and right front decks may be switched to A4, B5, or LTR as follows: 1) Change the position of the paper size guide plates of the deck.
8-25
Chapter 8 2) Register the new paper size in service mode. 1. Service Mode - COPIER>OPTION>CST>P-SZ-C1 Right deck paper size selection setting: 0: A4 (default); 1: B5, 2: LTR - COPIER>OPTION>CST-SZ-C2 Left deck paper size selection setting: 0: A4 (default); 1: B5, 2: LTR
8.7.4 Checking the Level of Remaining Paper

0003-2869
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The level of paper remaining in the left/right front deck is checked using the following sensors:
T-8-21 Sensor Paper level sensor A Paper level sensor B Paper sensor Right deck PS37 PS38 PS35 Left deck PS44 PS45 SP42
Paper level (100% to 50%)
Paper level (50% to 25%)
Paper level (25% or less of capacity)
F-8-35 T-8-22
Paper sensor
Level of paper
ON
ON
OFF
from 100% to about 50% of capacity
OFF
ON
OFF
from about 50% to about 25% of capacity
OFF
OFF
OFF
about 25% or less of capacity
8-26
Chapter 8
Paper sensor
Level of paper
--
--
ON
no paper
8.8 Registration Unit

8.8.1 Overview
0003-2870
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The registration roller is driven by the registration motor (M8), and is turned on and off to make sure that the paper will match the image on the intermediate transfer belt. The registration assembly is equipped with 3 sensors: registration sensor (PS9), transparency sensor (front; PS3), and transparency sensor (rear; PS29). When a transparency is used, the registration sensor (PS9) detects it. When the medium is not a transparency, the transparency sensor (front; PS3) and the transparency sensor (rear; PS29) detect it. The transparency sensor (front) and the transparency sensor (rear) serve to find out whether the arriving medium is a transparency or not; if a plain paper is detected when the machine is in transparency mode or if a transparency is detected when the machine is in plain paper mode, the machine will identify the condition as indicating the presence of a jam and stop its operation.
[1]
[2]
[3] [4] [6]
[5]
F-8-36
[1] Registration upper roller [2] Registration lower roller [3] Transparency sensor (rear; PS29) [4] Transparency sensor (front; PS3) [5] Registration sensor [6] Registration motor
8.9 Duplex Feeding Unit

8.9.1 Overview
0003-2871
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci To move the 1st side of a double-sided print, the delivery reversal solenoid (SL5) remains off and the reversing flapper is shifted up. When the paper moves past the reversal vertical path sensor (PS15) and reaches a specific point, the duplexing reversal motor (M10) stops/rotates in reverse to move the paper to the duplexing left feeding assembly. The paper is caused to arch in the duplexing left roller assembly for removal of any skew, all of which takes place at the same time as horizontal registration detection. Thereafter, the duplexing left motor (M11) turns on to move the paper to the re-pickup standby position, which starts at specific timing of operation to move the paper to the duplexing right feeding assembly and then to the registration roller assembly. The paper is never stopped in the duplexing right feeding assembly.
8-27
Chapter 8
SL5 [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
M10
M11
M12
M13
F-8-37
[1] Reversal vertical path sensor (PS15) [2] Horizontal registration sensor (PS24) [3] Duplexing left sensor (PS17) [4] Duplexing confluence sensor (PS18) 1) With the delivery reversing solenoid (SL5) remaining off, the reversing flapper is in up position so that the paper moves to the reversal vertical path assembly.
OFF SL5 PS15
F-8-38
2) When the trailing edge of paper reaches a point about 20 mm from the reversing 2 roller, the duplexing reversal motor (M10) stops/rotates in reverse to move the paper to the duplexing left feeding assembly.
8-28
Chapter 8
Stops/rotates in reverse PS15
20mm
M10 Reversal 2 roller
F-8-39
3) The paper moves to the duplexing left feeding assembly, and the horizontal registration sensor (PS24) checks the horizontal registration. The paper is also butted against the duplexing left roller so that it arches.
PS24
PS17 Duplex left roller
M10
M11 Horizontal registration detection/arching
F-8-40
4) When the paper moves past the duplexing left roller, it stops when its leading edge reaches a point 35 mm from the duplexing left roller, remaining in wait for the next operation.
8-29
Chapter 8
35mm M11 Re-pickup standby position
F-8-41
5) A specific period of time thereafter, the duplexing left motor rotates to move the paper to the duplexing right feeding assembly and then to the registration roller assembly. Paper will never stop in the duplexing right feeding assembly.
M12
M13
PS18
F-8-42
8.9.2 Detecting the Horizontal Registration Position

0003-2872
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine executes a duplexing registration sensor home position search when the main power switch is turned on, front cover is opened/closed, manual feed unit is opened/closed, lower right cover is opened/closed, power save function is reset, or printing ends, causing the sensor to move to the point of 13x19 paper detection. Inside the duplexing left feeding assembly, the paper reaches the duplexing left sensor (PS17); thereafter, the horizontal registration motor (M28) turns on, and the horizontal registration sensor (PS24) starts a search for the edge of the paper. The search start position is set to a point of the paper edge (in the cassette of A4, 165 mm from the middle of the unit) with reference to the distance of the slide guides on the manual feed tray and the cassette/deck size at the start of copying operation.
8-30
Chapter 8
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
F-8-43
[1] Paper [2] Horizontal registration sensor (PS24) [3] Sensor plate [4] Horizontal registration motor (M28) 1. Horizontal Registration Search 1) After a home position search*1, the horizontal registration sensor (PS24) moves to the 13x19 paper detection position *2. *1. Where the horizontal registration sensor detects the sensor plate (i.e., 61.5 mm toward the rear from the middle of the feeding assembly). *2. 165 mm toward the rear from the middle of the feeding assembly.
Sensor plate Center of the paper path (0mm) Home position (61.5mm)
F-8-44
13X19 paper detection position (165mm)
2) The horizontal registration sensor checks the presence/absence of paper. 2-1) If the presence of paper is identified in step 1., the horizontal registration sensor is moved away from the paper until it detects the absence of paper; after it has been moved 2 mm from the paper, it is then moved closer to the paper once again, identifying the point at which paper is detected as the edge of paper.
8-31
Chapter 8
Paper
F-8-45
2mm
2-2) If the absence of paper is identified, the horizontal registration sensor is moved away by 2 mm from the paper and then back closer to the paper, identifying the point at which paper is detected as the edge of the paper.
Paper
A+2mm
F-8-46
3) The machine computes the number of motor pulses generated when the horizontal registration sensor is moved in step 2-1 or 2-2 to find out the displacement of paper, thus determining the image write start position (for each single pulse, the sensor moves over a length of 0.157 mm).
8.9.3 A5, 5 Sheets in Circulation

0003-2875
1 1
(1)
(2)
1 Rotates in reverse
1 Re-pickup standby position
(3)
F-8-47
(4)
8-32
Chapter 8
3 2
3 1 2 4 4
(5)
(6)
1 4 3 2
1 4 2 3 5 5
(7)
F-8-48
3 2 1 3 4 5 4
(8)
2 1
(9)
4 3 2 1 5
5 4 3 2 1
(10)
(11)
F-8-49
(12)
8.9.4 A3, 3 Sheets in Circulation

0003-2877
8-33
Chapter 8
1 Rotates in reverse
(1)
(2)
1 Re-pickup standby position
2 3
(3)
F-8-50
1 1 3 3 2
(4)
(5)
(6)
2 1
3 2 1
(7)
F-8-51
(8)
8.10 Delivery
8.10.1 Overview
0003-2878
8-34
Chapter 8 The machine discharges paper either face-up or face-down:

T-8-23 Mode of delivery Face-up Mode of operation - When making single print of a single original - When making multiple prints of a single original (however, face-down if a finisher is installed) - If heavy paper 3 is selected - If the source of paper is from the manual feed tray and the paper is not plain paper (default size)
Face-down
When the selected mode of operation is other than the above; however, face-down delivery may be selected for the above modes using the following service mode item: COPIER>OPERATION>BODY>FDW-DLV (valid only if no finisher is installed).
8.10.2 Face-Up Delivery

0004-4321
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When the delivery solenoid (SL5) goes on, the flapper shifts down to move the paper to the delivery assembly.
ON SL5
F-8-52
8.10.3 Face-Down Delivery

0004-4320
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine operates as follows when in face-down delivery mode: 1) The delivery solenoid (SL5) is off, and the paper is moved in the direction of the duplexing feeding assembly.
8-35
Chapter 8
ON SL5
PS14
M10 Rotation in normal direction
F-8-53
2) A specific period of time after the reversal sensor (PS14) goes on, the duplexing reversal motor (M10) rotates in normal direction; it then stops when the trailing edge of paper reaches the reversal stop position (15 mm farther down the reversal confluence point).
OFF SL5
PS14
15mm
Reversal stop position
M10 Stop
F-8-54
3) In 100 msec, the duplexing reversal motor (M10) rotates in reverse to move the paper with the trailing edge first in the direction of delivery.
M10 Rotation in reverse
F-8-55
8-36
Chapter 8 4) When the leading edge of preceding paper moves past the curl removing roller by 20 mm, the reversal shifting solenoid (SL3) goes on to move away the reversal 1 roller in preparation for the arrival of the following paper. The duplexing reversal motor (M10) stops after the trailing edge of the paper has moved past the reversal 2 roller.
M9 Curl-removing roller
20mm
ON SL3
M10 Stop
Reversal 2 roller
F-8-56
5) The length of overlap between the trailing edge of the preceding paper and the leading edge of the following paper is 42 mm at maximum. *1. The length of overlap between the trailing edge of the preceding paper and the leading edge of the following paper is 42 mm at maximum.
M9 OFF SL5
PS14
*1 ON SL3
F-8-57
6) A specific period of time after the reversal sensor (PS14) goes on in response to the arrival of the following paper, the duplexing reversal motor (M10) starts to move in normal direction. When the leading edge of the following paper moves past the reversal 1 roller by about 20 mm, the reversal shifting solenoid (SL3) turns off so that the following paper is moved to the reversal stop position. Then, the machine repeats step 3) and thereafter.
8-37
Chapter 8 1) Remove the Right Cover (lower rear). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (lower rear)] 2) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 3) Remove the Waste Toner Bottle Base. 3-1) Remove the waste toner bottle [1].
PS14
OFF SL3 20mm
M10 Rotation in normal direction

[1]
F-8-61 F-8-58
3-2) Lift the waste toner bottle base [2] to remove it in the direction of the arrow. - 7 screws [1]
[1] [1]

8.11.1 Cassette Pickup Unit 8.11.1.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit
0002-9785
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Slide out the cassette 3/4. 2) Remove the lower rear right cover. 3) Open the lower right cover. 4) Remove connector cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-8-62
8.11.2.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor

0003-6634
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the cassette pickup motor [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[2] [3]
F-8-59
5) Remove the pickup unit (cassette 3/4) [2]. - connector [1]

[2] [1]
F-8-60
[1]
F-8-63
8.11.2 Cassette Pickup Motor 8.11.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Pick-up Motor
0011-1167
8.11.3 Cassette Lifter Motor 8.11.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Lifter Motor
0011-1171
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C
8-38
Chapter 8 / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 2) Remove the DC Power Supply Unit. 2-1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and remove the harness [2].
[2]
1) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 2) Remove the DC Power Supply Unit. 2-1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and remove the harness [2].
[2]
[1] [1]
F-8-67 F-8-64
2-2) Open the 3 wire saddles [2] to remove the harness [3]. - 16 connectors [1] 2-3) Remove the DC power supply unit [5]. - 4 screws [4]
[4] [1] [4]
[4] [1] [4]
[3] [3] [2] [2] [1] [2] [1] [1] [1] [1] [2] [1]
[1] [1]
[4] [4] [5] [1]
[5]
[1]
F-8-68
F-8-65
8.11.3.2 Removing the Cassette Lifter Motor

0003-5800
8.11.4.2 Removing the Left Deck Lifter Motor

0003-6677
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Slide out the cassette 3 or 4. 2) Remove the cassette lifter motor [3]. - connector [1] - 3 screws [3]
[2] [3]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the left deck lift motor [3]. - connector [1] - 3 screws [2]
[3] [2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-8-66
[1]
F-8-69
8.11.5 Right Deck Lifter Motor 8.11.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Right Deck Lifter Motor
0011-1179 0011-1175
8.11.4 Left Deck Lifter Motor 8.11.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Lift Deck Lifter Motor
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Right Cover (lower rear). (page 10-16)Reference [Remov-
8-39
Chapter 8 ing the Right Cover (lower rear)] 2) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 3) Remove the Waste Toner Bottle Base. 3-1) Remove the waste toner bottle [1]. 1) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 2) Remove the DC Power Supply Unit. 2-1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and remove the harness [2].
[2]
[1]
F-8-73
[1]
F-8-70
[1] [1]
[4] [1] [4]
[3] [2] [1] [2] [1] [1]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
F-8-71
F-8-74
8.11.6.2 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Motor 8.11.5.2 Removing the Right Deck Lifter Motor
0003-6659 0003-6668
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the right deck lifter motor [3]. - connector [1] - 3 screws [2]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the left deck pickup motor [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-8-72
[1]
F-8-75
8.11.7 Right Deck Pickup Motor 8.11.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Right Deck Pickup Motor
0011-1187
8.11.6 Left Deck Pickup Motor 8.11.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Left Deck Pickup Motor
0011-1186
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Right Cover (lower rear). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (lower rear)]
8-40
Chapter 8 2) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 3) Remove the Waste Toner Bottle Base. 3-1) Remove the waste toner bottle [1]. 2) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 3) Remove the Waste Toner Bottle Base. 3-1) Remove the waste toner bottle [1].
[1]
F-8-76 F-8-79
[1]
[1] [1]
[1] [1]
[2]
F-8-77 F-8-80
[2]
8.11.7.2 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Motor

0003-6650
8.11.8.2 Removing the Vertical Path Motor

0004-1072
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the right deck pickup motor [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[2] [1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the vertical path motor [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[3]
[3]
F-8-78
[2]
F-8-81
[1]
8.11.8 Vertical Path Motor 8.11.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Vertical Path Motor
0011-1253
8.11.9 Right Deck Pull-Off Motor 8.11.9.1 Preparation for Removeing the Right Deck PullOff Motor
0011-1258
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Right Cover (lower rear). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (lower rear)]
8-41
Chapter 8 1) Remove the Right Cover (lower rear). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (lower rear)] 2) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 3) Remove the Waste Toner Bottle Base. 3-1) Remove the waste toner bottle [1]. 1) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 2) Remove the DC Power Supply Unit. 2-1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and remove the harness [2].
[2]
[1]
F-8-85
[1]
F-8-82
[4] [1] [4]
[1] [1]
[3] [2] [1] [2]
[1] [1]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
F-8-83
F-8-86
8.11.9.2 Removing Right Deck Pull-Off Motor

0004-1080
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the right deck pull-off motor [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[2]
3) Remove the Cassette Lifter Motor. 3-1) Slide out the cassette 3 or 4. 3-2) Remove the cassette lifter motor [3]. - connector [1] - 3 screws [3]
[2] [3]
[2]
F-8-87
[1]
[3]
F-8-84
[1]
8.11.10.2 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/ B)

0003-5804
8.11.10 Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B) 8.11.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor (A/B)
0011-1261
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Slide out the cassette 3/4. 2) Open the 2 wire saddles [2]. - connector [1] 3) Remove the sensor base [4]. - screw [3]
8-42
Chapter 8
[4]
[1]
[1]
F-8-91
[3]
F-8-88
[2]
3-2) Open the 3 wire saddles [2]. - 4 connectors [1]

[1] [2]
4) Remove the connector [2]. - harness from the wire saddle [1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-89 F-8-92
5) Release the hook [1], and remove the cassette power level sensor [2].
3-3) Open the wire saddle [2]. - 8 connectors [1]

[1] [1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-90
[1]
8.11.11 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 8.11.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Sensor
0011-1267
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 2) Remove the Left Cover (lower). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (lower)] 3) Remove the Power Cord Base. 3-1) Remove the 4 screws [1] from the left side.
F-8-93
[1]
[1]
3-4) Remove the AC driver box [2]. - 3 screws [1]
8-43
Chapter 8
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-8-97
[1]
8.11.12 Right Deck Pickup Assembly 8.11.12.1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit
0002-9781 0003-6673
F-8-94
8.11.11.2 Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Sensor

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the sensor base [3]. - connector [1] - screw [2]
[2]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Slide out the right deck. 2) Remove the upper rear right cover. 3) Open the lower right cover. 4) Open the manual feed unit. 5) Open the manual feed unit wide. - screw [1]
[1]
[3]
F-8-95
[1]
F-8-98
6) Remove the connector cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]

[2]
[1]
F-8-96
[1]
F-8-99
3) Release the hook [1], and remove the left deck paper level sensor.
7) Remove the pickup unit (right deck) [1]. - connector [1]
8-44
Chapter 8
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-8-100 F-8-104
8.11.13 Left Deck Pickup Assembly 8.11.13.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit
0002-9541
6) In the same way, remove the right deck compartment. 7) Remove the connector [2] found at the rear of the left deck pickup assembly [1].
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Open the front door. 2) Slide out the left deck, and remove the 2 screws [1] from the left side of the compartment.
[1]
F-8-105
[2]
8) Slide out the fixing/freeing assembly. 9) Remove detach the pickup fixing plate [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
F-8-101
[2]
3) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the right side of the deck compartment.
[1]
F-8-106
[1]
F-8-102
When detaching the fixing plate, be sure to support the pickup assembly with you hand. (The pickup assembly may fall.) 10) While supporting the bottom of the left deck pickup assembly, slide out the pickup assembly [1] to remove.
[1]
4) Lift the left deck compartment [1] to remove.
[2]
F-8-103
5) Put back the 2 rails [1] into the machine.

F-8-107
8-45
Chapter 8
8.11.14 Right Deck Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller

[4]
8.11.14.1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers
0003-8601
[3] [1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Slide out the right deck. 2) From both sides of the deck compartment [1], remove the 2 screws each [2]; then, remove the deck compartment.
[2]
[1]
[6] [5]
F-8-111
When attaching the pickup roller [1], be sure the protrusion [2] indicated in the diagram faces the rear.
[1]
[2]
F-8-108
[1]
[2]
F-8-112
8.11.15 Left Deck Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller

[2]
F-8-109
8.11.15.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup, Feed, and Separation Roller
0003-8616
3) Push the 2 rails [1] into the machine.
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Slide out the right deck. 2) Slide out the left deck. 3) Remove the left deck compartment. - 2 screws each [2] (from both sides of the left deck compartment [1])
[1]
F-8-110
4) Pull out the pickup roller [2]. - hook [1] 5) Pull out the feed roller [4]. - resin ring [3] 6) Pull out the separation roller [6]. - resin ring [5]
[1]
F-8-113
[1]
F-8-114
4) Push the 2 rails [1] into the machine.
8-46
Chapter 8
[4] [3] [1]
[1]
F-8-115
[2] [6] [5]

F-8-118
5) Pull out the pickup roller [2]. - hook [1] 6) Pull out the feed roller [4]. - resin ring [3] 7) Pull out the separation roller [6]. - resin ring [5]
[4] [3] [1]
When attaching the pickup roller [1], be sure that the protrusion [2] indicated in the diagram faces the rear.
[1]
[2]
F-8-119
[2] [6] [5]

F-8-116
8.11.17 Manual Feed Unit 8.11.17.1 Removing the Manual Feed Unit
0002-9702
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When attaching the pickup roller [1], be sure that the protrusion [2] indicated in the diagram faces the rear.
[1]
1) Open the manual feed unit. 2) Remove the cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
F-8-117
[2]
8.11.16 Cassette Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller 8.11.16.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers
0003-8618
F-8-120
3) Remove the harness retainer [3]. - screw [1] used to hold the grounding wire in place - connector [2]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Slide out the cassette 3/4. 2) Pull out the pickup roller [2]. - hook [1] 3) Pull out the feed roller [4]. - resin ring [3] 4) Pull out the separation roller [67]. - resin ring [5]
8-47
Chapter 8
[1]
[3]
[1] [2]
F-8-124
4) Pull out the feed roller [2] to the front. - resin ring [1]
F-8-121
4) Lift the manual feed unit [1] to remove.
[2]
F-8-125
[1]
[1]
8.11.19 Manual Feed Separation Roller 8.11.19.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller
0011-1293
F-8-122
8.11.18 Manual Feed Roller 8.11.18.1 Removing the Manual Feed Roller
0002-9766
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Manual Feed Roller. 1-1) Open the manual feed unit. 1-2) Release the claw [1], and remove the gear [2] and the bushing [3].
[3] [2]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the manual feed unit. 2) Release the claw [1], and remove the gear [2] and the bushing [3].
[3] [2]
[1]
[1]
F-8-126
1-3) Remove the feeder upper cover [1].

F-8-123
[1]
3) Remove the feeder upper cover [1].
F-8-127
1-4) Pull out the feed roller [2] to the front. - resin ring [1]
8-48
Chapter 8
8.11.20 Manual Feed Pre-Regustration Motor 8.11.20.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Feed PreRegustration Motor
0011-1299
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Right Cover (upper rear). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (upper rear)] 3) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 4) Remove the Right Cover (lower rear). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (lower rear)] 5) Move the DC Controller Box. 5-1) Remove the DC controller cover [2]. - 9 screws [1]
[1] [2]
[2]
F-8-128
[1]
8.11.19.2 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Roller

0002-9780
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Lift the paper guide to free the hook [1]; then, move it to free the claw [2], thereby removing the paper guide (front) [3] and the other paper guide (rear) [4].
[1] [2]
[1]
[2] [4]
[1]
[1]
[1] [3]
F-8-129
F-8-132
[1]
[1] [2]
2) As in step 1), remove the paper guide (middle) [1]. Reference: When attaching the paper guide (middle), try pushing down on the separation roller shaft [2] to facilitate the work.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-8-133
[1]
F-8-130
[2]
3) Pick its tab [1], and pull out the separation roller [2] toward the rear.
[1] [2]
[1]
F-8-134 F-8-131
8-49
Chapter 8
[2] [3] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1]
[1] [2] [1]
[2]
[3]
[1] [1] [2] [1]
[1] [2]
[2] [1] [3] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1]
[2]
F-8-138
[1]
F-8-135

[1]
F-8-136
[1]
[3]
F-8-139
[2]
7-2) Remove the harness from the 6 cable guides [2]. - 6 connectors [1]
[2]
[3]
[4] [3]
[1]
F-8-140
[2]
[1]
[1]
7-3) Remove the screw. - harness [1] (from the 2 cable guides [2])
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-8-137
Reference: If the harness [1] is away from the side plate [4] of the DC controller box, wrong detection (E070-0102) of the ITB home position tends to occur because of noise. 7) Remove the HV1 PCB. 7-1) Remove the HV1 transformer lid [2]. - 2 hooks [1]
[2]
F-8-141
[3]
8-50
Chapter 8 7-4) Lift the HV1 PCB [2] to remove. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[1]
F-8-145
[2]
[2]
F-8-142
1-5) Remove the fixing front cover [3]. - screw [1] - 2 screws [2]
[2]
0003-6525
8.11.20.2 Manual Feed Pre-Registration Motor

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Move the manual feed pre-registration motor [3] to the right to remove. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
F-8-146
[2]
1-6) After shifting the timing belt [3] to the front, detach it together with the fixing motor base [4]. - 3 screws [1] - 3 connectors [2]
[1]
[2]
F-8-143
[1]
[4]
[1]
8.11.21 Horizontal Registration Assembly 8.11.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Horizontal Registration Unit
0011-1309
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Fixing Assembly. 1-1) Open the front cover. 1-2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 1-3) Push the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
[2]
F-8-147
[1]
[3]
1-7) Remove the screw [2] found at the rear of the fixing assembly [1].
[1] [2]
[2]
[1] [1]
F-8-148
1-8) Holding the 2 grips [1], remove the fixing assembly [2].
F-8-144
1-4) Open the reversal delivery cover [1] and the middle cover [2].
8-51
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-149
[3]
F-8-152
[4]
[3]
5) Remove the screw [1] from the front side.
When lifting the fixing assembly, be sure to take care not to touch the web length detecting arm [1] so that the arm will be free of damage.
[1]
F-8-153
[1]
F-8-150
6) Remove the screw [1] from the rear. 7) Remove the side plate [2].
[2]
8.11.21.2 Removing the Horizontal Registration Unit

0003-7968
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the handle [2]. - screw [1] 2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover [4]. - 2 screws [3]
[1]
[4]
[1]
F-8-154
[2] [3]
F-8-151
3) Remove the connector [1], and open the 3 wire saddles [2]. 4) Remove the duplexing left motor [4] together with its base. - 2 screws [3]
F-8-155
[1]
9) Remove the 2 connectors [1], and open the wire guide [2]. 10) Move the horizontal registration unit [4] in the direction of the arrow to remove. - screw [3]
8-52
Chapter 8
[2]
[4]
[2]
[1]
F-8-159
[1]
F-8-156
[1]
[3]

[1]
8.11.22 Registration Motor 8.11.22.1 Preparation for Removing the Registration Motor
0011-1312
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Fixing/Feeding Driver PCB. 1-1) Open the front cover. 1-2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 1-3) Remove the handle [2]. - screw [1] 1-4) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover [4]. - 2 screws [3]
[1] [4]
[1]
F-8-160
1-8) Move the fixing/feed driver base [1] in the direction of A to remove it from the hook [2]. Thereafter, lift the base [1] in the direction of B.
[1]
[2]
F-8-157
[3]
1-5) Remove the fixing/feeding upper cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
B A
[2]
[1]
F-8-158
[2]
F-8-161
1-9) Remove the fixing/feed driver base [3]. - connector [1] (using a pair of precision pliers.) - 2 connectors [2]
8-53
Chapter 8
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-8-162 F-8-165
[2]
8.11.22.2 Removing the Registration Motor

0003-7032
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the registration motor [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[1] [3]
[2] [1]
[3]
F-8-166
[2]
1-6) After shifting the timing belt [3] to the front, detach it together with the fixing motor base [4]. - 3 screws [1] - 3 connectors [2]
[2]
F-8-163
[1]
[1]
[4]
8.11.23 Horizontal Registration Motor 8.11.23.1 Preparation for Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor
0011-1314
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Fixing Assembly. 1-1) Open the front cover. 1-2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 1-3) Push the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
[2]
F-8-167
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1] [1]
F-8-168
F-8-164
8-54
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-8-169
[3]
F-8-172
[4]
[3]
2-5) Remove the screw [1] from the front side.
[1]
F-8-173
[1]
F-8-170
2-6) Remove the screw [1] from the rear. 2-7) Remove the side plate [2].
[2]
2) Remove the Horizontal Registration Unit. 2-1) Remove the handle [2]. - screw [1] 2-2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover [4]. - 2 screws [3]
[1]
[4]
[1]
F-8-174
[2] [3]
F-8-171
2-3) Remove the connector [1], and open the 3 wire saddles [2]. 2-4) Remove the duplexing left motor [4] together with its base. - 2 screws [3]
[1]
F-8-175
2-9) Remove the 2 connectors [1], and open the wire guide [2]. 2-10) Move the horizontal registration unit [4] in the direction of the arrow to detach. - screw [3]
8-55
Chapter 8
[2]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-8-179
[2]
[1]
F-8-176
[1]
[3]
8.11.24.2 Removing the Duplexing Reversal Motor

0004-1086
8.11.23.2 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor

0003-7981
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the duplexing reversal motor [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) open the 2 wire guides [2] to remove the horizontal registration motor [3]. - 2 screws [1]
[1] [3] [2]
[3]
[1]
F-8-177
8.11.24 Duplex Reversal Motor 8.11.24.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Reversal Motor
0011-1318
[2]
F-8-180
[1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Fixing Front Cover. 1-1) Open the font cover. 1-2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 1-3) Open the reversal delivery cover [1] and the middle cover [2].
8.11.25 Duplex Left Motor 8.11.25.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Left Motor
0011-1322
[1]
F-8-178
[2]
1-4) Remove the fixing front cover [3]. - knob [1] - 2 screws [2]
F-8-181
[1]
[2]
8-56
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
F-8-182
[2]
[2]
F-8-185
0004-1088
8.11.25.2 Removing the Duplex Left Motor

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the handle [2]. - screw [1] 2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover [4]. - 2 screws [3]
8.11.26 Duplex Middle Motor 8.11.26.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Middle Motor
0011-1325
[1] [4]
[1]
[4]
[2] [3]
F-8-183
3) Remove the connector [1], and open the 3 wire saddles [2]. 4) Remove the duplexing left motor [4] together with its base. - 2 screws [3]
[2] [1] [2]
[2]
F-8-186
[3]
[2]
[3]
F-8-184
[4]
[3]
5) Remove the duplexing left motor [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
F-8-187
8-57
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
F-8-188

[1]
F-8-191
8.11.26.2 Removing the Duplexing Middle Motor

0004-1081
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the duplexing middle motor [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[3] [1]
[2]
F-8-192
[1]
F-8-189
8.11.27 Duplex Right Motor 8.11.27.1 Preparation for Removing the Duplexing Right Motor
0011-1327
[1]
[1] [4]
B A
[2]
F-8-190
[2]
F-8-193
[3]
8-58
Chapter 8
[2]
[1]
B A
[1]
F-8-194
[2]
[2]
F-8-197
[1] [1]
F-8-195
[2]
[3]

[1]
F-8-198
8.11.27.2 Removing the Duplexing Right Motor

0004-1084
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the duplexing right motor [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[3] [1]
[1]
F-8-196
[2]
F-8-199
8.11.28 Outside Delivery Motor 8.11.28.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Delivery Motor
0011-1328
8-59
Chapter 8 1) Remove the Left Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 3) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)] 4) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 5) Remove the Controller Box Cover. 5-1) Remove the controller box cover [2]. - 2 screws [1] 6-2) Remove the harness from the 3 harness retainers [1].
[1]
[1]
F-8-204
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-8-200
F-8-205
6-3) Remove the 9 screws [1] used to attach the main controller box.
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-8-201
6) Remove the Controller Box. 6-1) Remove the 9 connectors [1].
[1]
[1]
F-8-206
[1]
F-8-202
F-8-207
[1]
F-8-203
8-60
Chapter 8
[1]
F-8-208
6-4) Move the main controller box [1] toward the delivery side to remove.
[1]
F-8-209
[2]
F-8-210
8.11.28.2 Removing the Outside Delivery Motor

0003-6688
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the outside delivery motor [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[1]
[3] [2]
F-8-211
8-61
Chapter 9 Fixing System
Contents
Contents
9.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ................................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1.3 Construction of the Control System............................................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................9-4

9.2.1 Sequence of Operation at Power-On............................................................................................................................................ 9-4 9.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation (printing)....................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3 Various Control Mechanisms.........................................................................................................................................9-6

9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller.................................................................................................................................. 9-6
9.3.1.1 Controlling the Speed According to Paper Type ............................................................................................................................................9-6 9.3.1.2 Controlling the Speed for Large Volume Printing (down-sequence) .............................................................................................................9-6 9.3.1.3 Interval Rotation..............................................................................................................................................................................................9-7
9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature ................................................................................................................................. 9-8

9.3.2.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................................................................9-8 9.3.2.2 At Power-On ...................................................................................................................................................................................................9-8 9.3.2.3 In Standby .......................................................................................................................................................................................................9-9 9.3.2.4 When Producing Mono Color (Black) Single-Sided Prints ............................................................................................................................9-9 9.3.2.5 When Producing Mono Color (Black) Double-Sided Prints.........................................................................................................................9-10 9.3.2.6 When Producing Full Color Prints ................................................................................................................................................................9-10 9.3.2.7 With Power Save Mode Enabled ..................................................................................................................................................................9-11 9.3.2.8 Controlling the Overheating at the End of the Roller ...................................................................................................................................9-11
9.3.3 External Heat Roller Drive Control ........................................................................................................................................... 9-11

9.3.3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................9-11
9.4 Fixing Cleaning Web Mechanisms ..............................................................................................................................9-12

9.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-12 9.4.2 Web Retaining Mechanism........................................................................................................................................................ 9-13
9.5 Protective Functions.....................................................................................................................................................9-14

9.5.1 Detecting Overheating Using Thermistors ................................................................................................................................ 9-14 9.5.2 Cutting Off the Power Using Thermal Switches ....................................................................................................................... 9-14 9.5.3 Errors.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-15

9.6.1 Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-15
9.6.1.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly....................................................................................................................................................................9-15 9.6.1.2 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Assembly ..................................................................................................................................9-16
9.6.2 Fixing Roller .............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-16

9.6.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Roller.................................................................................................................................................9-16 9.6.2.2 Removing the Fixing Roller..........................................................................................................................................................................9-18 9.6.2.3 Points to Note When Removing the Fixing Roller .......................................................................................................................................9-19
9.6.3 Pressure Roller ........................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19

9.6.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Pressure Roller..............................................................................................................................................9-19 9.6.3.2 Removing the Pressure Roller.......................................................................................................................................................................9-20 9.6.3.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Pressure Roller .....................................................................................................................................9-21
9.6.4 External Heat Roller .................................................................................................................................................................. 9-21

9.6.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Heating Roller Heater .....................................................................................................................9-21 9.6.4.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller ..........................................................................................................................................................9-23
9.6.5 Fixing Thermistor (Upper)......................................................................................................................................................... 9-23

9.6.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Upper Thermistor ..............................................................................................................................9-23 9.6.5.2 Removing the Fixing Upper Thermistor .......................................................................................................................................................9-24 9.6.5.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Upper Thermistor .....................................................................................................................9-25
9.6.6 Fixing Thermistor (Lower) ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-25

9.6.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Lower Thermistor .............................................................................................................................9-25 9.6.6.2 Removing the Fixing Lower Thermistor.......................................................................................................................................................9-26
Contents
9.6.6.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Lower Thermistor..................................................................................................................... 9-26
9.6.7 External Heat Thermistor........................................................................................................................................................... 9-27

9.6.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Heating Roller Thermistor .............................................................................................................. 9-27 9.6.7.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Thermistor ....................................................................................................................................... 9-27 9.6.7.3 Points to Note When Mounting the External Heat Thermistor .................................................................................................................... 9-28
9.6.8 Fixing Thermal Switch .............................................................................................................................................................. 9-28

9.6.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch................................................................................................................................. 9-28 9.6.8.2 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch.......................................................................................................................................................... 9-29 9.6.8.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Thermal Switch ........................................................................................................................ 9-30
9.6.9 Fixing Locking Thermal Switch ................................................................................................................................................ 9-30

9.6.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Pressure Thermal Switch .................................................................................................................. 9-30 9.6.9.2 Removing the Fixing Pressure Thermal Switch ........................................................................................................................................... 9-31 9.6.9.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Pressure Thermal Switch.......................................................................................................... 9-31
9.6.10 Thermal Switch........................................................................................................................................................................ 9-31

9.6.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Thermal Switch .......................................................................................................................................... 9-31 9.6.10.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch ............................................................................................................................. 9-32 9.6.10.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch............................................................................................ 9-32
9.6.11 Upper Fixing Heater ................................................................................................................................................................ 9-33

9.6.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Upper Heater................................................................................................................................... 9-33 9.6.11.2 Removing the Fixing Upper Heater............................................................................................................................................................ 9-34
9.6.12 Lower Fixing Roller................................................................................................................................................................. 9-34

9.6.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Lower Heater .................................................................................................................................. 9-34 9.6.12.2 Removing the Fixing Lower Heater ........................................................................................................................................................... 9-35
9.6.13 Fixing Locking Heater ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-36

9.6.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Heating Roller Heater ................................................................................................................... 9-36 9.6.13.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Heater ............................................................................................................................................ 9-37
9.6.14 Fixing Web............................................................................................................................................................................... 9-38

9.6.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Web................................................................................................................................................. 9-38 9.6.14.2 Removing the Fixing Web .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-39 9.6.14.3 Attaching the Fixing Web........................................................................................................................................................................... 9-40 9.6.14.4 When Replacing the Fixing Web................................................................................................................................................................ 9-40
9.6.15 Fixing Motor ............................................................................................................................................................................ 9-40

9.6.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Motor .............................................................................................................................................. 9-40 9.6.15.2 Removing the Fixing Motor ....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-40
9.6.16 External Heater Shift Motor..................................................................................................................................................... 9-40

9.6.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Heating Shift Motor ...................................................................................................................... 9-40 9.6.16.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Shift Motor .................................................................................................................................... 9-41
9.6.17 Upper Separation Claw ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-41

9.6.17.1 Removing the Delivery Upper Separation Claw ........................................................................................................................................ 9-41
9.6.18 Lower Separation Claw............................................................................................................................................................ 9-42

9.6.18.1 Removing the Delivery Lower Separation Claw ........................................................................................................................................ 9-42
Chapter 9
9.1 Construction
0003-2879
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the major functions of the fixing system:
T-9-1 Item Method of fixing Fixing heater Description by heating roller on fixing roller side on pressure roller side on outside heating roller side Control temperature fixing roller pressure roller outside heating roller Fixing temperature detection fixing roller 2 pc. (main heater, sub heater) 1 pc. 1 pc. 200 deg C (in standby) 170 deg C (in standby) 225 deg C (in standby) main thermistor THM1 (contact type; middle) sub thermistor THM4 (contact type; rear edge)
pressure roller
main thermistor THM2 (contact type; middle) sub thermistor THM5 (contact type; rear edge)
outside heating roller
main thermistor THM3 (contact type) sub thermistor THM6 (contact type; front edge)
Protective mechanism
The following mechanisms are used, and the power to the fixing heater is cut upon detection of a fault:
- monitoring of temperature by main/sub thermistor - operation of thermal switch fixing roller: pressure roller: outside heating roller: - detection of thermistor open circuit Separation claw Cleaning mechanism upper/lower separation claw (contact type) fixing roller pressure roller outside heating roller cleaning web none none TP1 220 +/- 8 deg C TP2 220 +/- 8 deg C TP3 250 +/- 10 deg C

0003-2881
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the major components of the fixing system:
T-9-2 Component Diameter of fixing roller Diameter of pressure roller Diameter of outside heating roller Fixing main heater H1 Notation Description 60 mm 60 mm 36 mm halogen heater; 430 W (100 V), 450 W (120/230 V)
Fixing sub heater Pressure heater Outside heater
H2 H3 H4
halogen heater; 400 W (100/120/230 W) halogen heater; 400 W (100/120/230 W) halogen heater; 400 W (100 V), 500 W (120/230 V)
Main thermistor
fixing pressure outside heating
THM1 THM2 THM3 THM4 THM5 THM6
contact type (thermal control, overheating detection) contact type (temperature control, overheating detection) contact type (temperature control, overheating detection) Contact type (overheating detection) Contact type (overheating detection) Contact type (overheating detection)
Sub thermistor
fixing pressure outside heating
9-1
Chapter 9
Component Thermal switch fixing pressure outside heating Cleaning web Notation TP1 TP2 TP3 Description contact type (220 +/- 8 deg C ) contact type (220 +/- 8 deg C ) contact type (250 +/- 10 deg C ) driven by fixing web solenoid (SL2) - If large size paper (B4 or larger), goes on twice per sheet - If small size (smaller than B4), goes on once per sheet
Separation claw (upper) separation claw (lower) Fixing inlet sensor Inside delivery sensor Web solenoid Fixing motor Outside heating roller shift motor PS11 PS12 SL2 M4 M22
contact type contact type residual jam detection detects delay/residual jam takes up cleaning web DC brushless motor stepping motor
[17]
[10] [13] [16]
[3] [7] [1]
[4]
[5] [14]
[18]
[8] [11]
[21]
[15] [20] [19] [2] [6]

F-9-1
[9] [12]
9-2
Chapter 9
[3]
[16]
[10]
[13] [17]
[22] [11]
[12] [7] [4] [20] [5] [14] [6] [15]

F-9-2 T-9-3 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] Fixing roller Pressure roller Outside heater roller Fixing main heater Fixing sub heater Pressure heater Outside heating roller heater Fixing main thermistor Pressure main thermistor Outside heating main thermistor Fixing sub thermistor [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] Pressure sub thermistor Outside heating sub thermistor Fixing thermal switch Pressure thermal switch Outside heating thermal switch Cleaning web Separation claw (upper) Separation claw (lower) Fixing inlet sensor Inside delivery sensor Web solenoid
[1] [8] [9]
[2]

0003-2884
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the major components of the fixing system:
9-3
Chapter 9
DC controller PCB
EX_FIX_P_MTR J1118-A7 to A10 J1118-B6 to B13 J1118-B3 to B4
J1124-B7 EX_FIX_THM J1124-B4 MAIN_THM J1124-A3
PRS_THM J1124-B3 PRS_THM_EDGE J1124-B1
MAIN_THM_EDGE J1124-A5
J1804-1
J1812-1
J1812-2
J1803-1
FIX_MTR
FIX_WEB_SL
EX_FIX_THM_EDGE
TP3 THM4
THM3
THM5
SL2
H4 H1 H2
THM6
THM1
THM2 TP1
M4
H3 TP2
M22
F-9-3
9.2 Basic Sequence

9.2.1 Sequence of Operation at Power-On
0003-2886
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine starts WMUPR1 (fixing idle rotation) when the surface temperature of the outside heating roller reaches 190 deg C. It then starts WMUP2 (start-up sequence) when the fixing roller exceeds 200 deg C, the pressure roller exceeds 140 deg C, and the outside heating roller exceeds 225 deg C, at the end of which it enters the standby state.
- fixing roller: 200 deg C - pressure roller: 140 deg C or higher - outside roller: 225 deg C if above is true, starts start-up sequence
- when outside heating roller is 190 deg C, starts initial multiple rotation
at end of start-up sequence, enters standby
*6 WMUP Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub heater (H2) Pressure heater (H3) Outside heating roller heater (H4) Fixing motor (M4) Outside heating roller shaft motor (M22) Number of heaters permitted for simultaneous activation 3 (in contact) WMUPR1 (fixing idle rotation) WMUP2 (start-up sequence) STBY
Alternate activation *1 Heater full activation Alternate activation *1 Heater full activation Controlled to 225 deg C *3 (off contact) *5 3 2 3 : heater full activation. : heater temperature control. : heater alternate activation control. : activation limit control : motor turned on. *4 Controlled to 200 deg C Limit on pressure heater activation *2 Controlled to 170 deg C
F-9-4
*1: As many as 3 heaters may simultaneously be turned on during the warm-up period (other than start-up sequence WMUP2). To start up individual rollers in the shortest time possible under the limit, the fixing main heater (H1) and the pressure heater (H34) are turned on alternately.
9-4
J1803-2 J1804-3
J1105-A2 J1105-A3 J1105-A4 J1105-A5 J1105-A7 J1105-A8 J1105-A9 J1105-A10
MAIN_HEAT_ON MAIN_TR_ERR SUB_HEAT_ON SUB_TR_ERR PRESS_HEAT_ON PRESS_TR_ERR EX_HEAT_ON EX_TR_ERR
J1810-18 J1810-17 J1810-16 J1810-15 J1810-13 J1810-12 J1810-11 J1810-10
AC driver PCB
Chapter 9
Fixing main heater (H1) OFF ON Pressure heater (H3) 1sec

F-9-5
ON
OFF 1sec
*2: As many as 2 heaters may simultaneously be turned on during WMUP2 (start-up sequence). In other words, during this period, the pressure heater (H3) may go on only when the fixing sub heater (HJ2) or the outside heating roller heater (H4) is off. *3: Rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *4: Rotates idly for 1 sec at 1/3 speed every 30 min after the fixing roller stops. *5: When the fixing roller reaches 200 deg C, the outside heating roller moves away from the fixing roller. *6: During WMUP2 (start-up sequence), the machine performs drum surface potential control, primary transfer ATVC control, and D-MAX control.
9.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation (printing)

0003-2887
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Mono Color (Black), Single-Sided
- Fixing roller: 200 deg C - pressure roller: 140 deg C or higher - Outside heating roller: 225 edge C When above is true, starts standby.
Stat key ON
STBY
Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub heater (H2) Pressure heater (H3) External heating heater (H3) Fixing motor (M4) External fixing roller shift motor (M22)
Controlled to 200 deg. C Controlled to 170 deg. C Controlled to 225 deg. C
PRINT
LSTR
STBY
Controlled to 200 deg. C
*4
*1
(Engagement)
*2
*3
(Disengagement)
: heater full activation. : heater temperature control. : heater alternate activation control.
: motor on.
F-9-6
*1: Rotates at normal speed (276 mm/sec). *2: Rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *3: Rotates idly for 1 sec at 1/3 speed every 30 min after the fixing roller stops. *4: In the case of the 120/230-V model, the 400-W pressure heater is turned on at 200-W equivalent during printing (by turning on and off the pressure heater very cycle of the power supply, using a control signal generated by the DC controller). 2. Mono Color (Black), Double-Sided
Stat key ON
STBY
PRINT
LSTR
STBY
*4
*1
(Engagement)
*2
*3
(Disengagement)
: motor on.
F-9-7
*1: Rotates at normal speed (276 mm/sec). *2: Rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *3: Rotates idly for 1 sec at 1/3 speed every 30 min after the fixing roller stops. *4: In the case of the 120/230-V model, the 400-W pressure heater is turned on at 200-W equivalent during printing (by turning on and off the pressure heater for every single cycle of the power supply using a control signal generated by the DC controller). 3. Full Color
9-5
Chapter 9
Stat key ON
STBY
PRINT
LSTR
STBY
*4
*1
(Engagement)
*2
*3
(Disengagement)
: motor on.
F-9-8
*1: In the case of plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2), rotates at normal speed (276 mm/sec); if heavy paper 1 (106 to 163 g/m2), rotates at 2/3 speed (184 mm/sec); if heavy paper 2 (64 to 209 g/m2), heavy paper 3 (164 to 250 g/m2) or transparency, rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *2: Rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *3: Rotates idly for 1 sec at 1/3 speed every 30 min after the fixing roller stops. *4: In the case of the 120/230-model, the 400-W pressure heater is turned on at 200-W during printing (by turning on and off the pressure heater for every single cycle of the power supply using a control signal generated by the DC controller.
9.3 Various Control Mechanisms

9.3.1 Controlling the Speed of the Fixing Roller 9.3.1.1 Controlling the Speed According to Paper Type
0003-2889
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine controls the fixing roller to any of 3 speeds according to paper type.
T-9-4 Paper type Mono color print plain paper heavy paper, transparency, postcard Color print plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) heavy paper (106 to 163 g/m2), postcard heavy paper 2 (164 to 209 g/m2), heavy paper 3 (210 to 250 g/m2), transparency Fixing speed normal speed (276 mm/sec) normal speed (276 mm/sec) normal speed (276 mm/sec) 2/3 speed (184 mm/sec) 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec)
9.3.1.2 Controlling the Speed for Large Volume Printing (down-sequence)

0003-2890
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci If the main thermistor (THM1) of the machine's fixing roller identifies the surface temperature of the fixing roller as being any of the following, the machine starts down-sequence, in which distance between sheets is increased to decrease the speed of printing, thereby preventing poor fixing otherwise caused by drops in the roller temperature when continuous printing is under way. The speed of printing is relatively low in color mode and, therefore, the temperature of the fixing roller rarely drops, thus not calling for down-sequence. The following is a table of control mechanisms used for down-sequence prepared according to site environments and paper types; the notations within the table indicate the following: LV: down-sequence level deg C: temperature of the fixing roller triggering down-sequence PPM: printing speed Toner fixing starts to fail when the temperature of the fixing roller drops to level 4 or below. The machine, therefore, stops (suspends) printing when it detects a level 4 condition; it then starts (resumes) printing using the speed it used at the start when the temperature of the fixing roller returns to the recovery level. If the room temperature is less than 20 deg C and heavy paper or a transparency is used, the machine reduces its print speed (except when heavy paper 1 is used for the 120V or 230V model).
MEMO: If you changed the setting in service mode(*), the particulars of the down sequence table may not be as shown below: for instance, if '1' (priority on fixing) is selected, the down sequence start temperature tends to be slightly higher; on the other hand, if '2' is selected (priority on productivity), the temperature tends to be slightly lower. * The following applies: Plan paper: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FIX-TEMP Heavy paper 1: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>T1-TEMP Heavy paper 2: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>T2-TEMP Heavy paper 3, transparency: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>OHP-TEMP
9-6
Chapter 9 1. 100V Model, A4 Paper, Room Temperature of 20 deg C or Higher

T-9-5
Plain paper LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 174 173 172 170 185 deg C PPM 68 60 50 35 Stop 68 LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery
Heavy paper 1 deg C 184 180 176 173 200 PPM 68 40 30 20 Stop 68 LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery
Heavy paper 2 deg C 184 180 176 173 200 PPM 68 40 30 20 Stop 68
Heavy paper 3/transparency LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 184 180 176 173 200 deg C PPM 40 40 30 20 Stop 40
2. 100-V Model, A4 Paper, Room Temperature of Lower Than 20 deg C

T-9-6 Plain paper LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 174 173 172 170 185 deg C PPM 68 60 50 35 Stop 68 LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 188 184 182 200 30 20 15 Stop 30 Heavy paper 1 deg C PPM LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 188 184 182 200 30 20 15 Stop 30 Heavy paper 2 deg C PPM Heavy paper 3/transparency LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 188 184 182 200 30 20 15 Stop 30 deg C PPM
3. 120/230-V Model, A4 Paper, Room Temperature of 20 deg C or Higher

T-9-7 Plain paper LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 171 170 169 167 185 deg C PPM 68 60 50 35 Stop 68 LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 184 180 176 173 200 Heavy paper 1 deg C PPM 68 50 40 30 Stop 68 LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 184 180 176 173 200 Heavy paper 2 deg C PPM 68 50 40 30 Stop 68 Heavy paper 3/transparency LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 184 176 174 173 200 deg C PPM 40 40 30 25 Stop 40
4. 120/230-V Model, A4 Paper, Room Temperature of Lower Than 20 deg C

T-9-8 Plain paper LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 171 170 169 167 185 deg C PPM 68 60 50 35 Stop 68 LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 188 182 178 176 200 Heavy paper 1 deg C PPM 68 40 30 20 Stop 68 LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 188 184 182 200 40 30 20 Stop 40 Heavy paper 2 deg C PPM Heavy paper 3/transparency LV Initial 1 2 3 4 Recovery 188 184 182 200 40 30 20 Stop 40 deg C PPM
9.3.1.3 Interval Rotation

0003-2891
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci To prevent deformation that could otherwise occur on the fixing roller (nip) if the machine is left alone for a long time in a temperature control state, the fixing roller is rotated (interval rotation) at 92 mm/sec (1/3 speed) every 30 min while the machine is in standby. The interval rotation is also performed in power save mode and low power mode, and the intervals of rotation may be changed in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FX-CROT).
9-7
Chapter 9
9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature 9.3.2.1 Overview

0003-2893
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Each of the heat rollers of the fixing assembly is controlled based on the output of the main thermistor mounted in contact with the center of the roller. The sub thermistor mounted in contact with the edge of the roller is used to detect overheating at the edge of the roller, which can occur when small-size paper (e.g., A4R) is move past continuously. The mechanisms used to control these individual heat rollers are as follows:
DC controller PCB
EX_FIX_P_MTR J1118-A7 to A10 J1118-B6 to B13 J1118-B3 to B4
J1124-B7 EX_FIX_THM J1124-B4 MAIN_THM J1124-A3
PRS_THM J1124-B3 PRS_THM_EDGE J1124-B1
MAIN_THM_EDGE J1124-A5
J1804-1
J1812-1
J1812-2
J1803-1
FIX_MTR
FIX_WEB_SL
EX_FIX_THM_EDGE
TP3 THM4
THM3
THM5
SL2
H4 H1 H2
THM6
THM1
THM2 TP1
M4
H3 TP2
M22
F-9-9
9.3.2.2 At Power-On
0003-2894
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The fixing roller is heated by the fixing main heater (H1) and the fixing sub heater (H2), while the pressure roller is heated by the pressure heater (H3). The outside heating roller, on the other hand, is heated by the outside heating roller heater (H4). During the warm-up period (other than start-up sequence), as many as 3 heaters may simultaneously be turned on. To start up each of the rollers in the shortest time possible, the fixing sub heater and the outside heating roller heater are turned on for full activation, while alternately turning on the fixing main heater and the pressure heater. When the outside heating roller reaches 190 deg C, the outside pressure roller shift motor (M22) goes on to move the outside heating roller into contact with the fixing roller, thereby starting fixing idle rotation. The outside heating roller remaining in contact with the fixing roller helps increase the temperature of the fixing roller. When the fixing roller reaches 200 deg C, the outside heating roller shift motor (M22) goes on so that the outside heating roller moves away from the fixing roller. When the fixing roller reaches 200 deg C, the pressure roller reaches 140 deg C, and the outside heating roller reaches 225 deg C, the machine starts start-up sequence, causing the fixing main heater to go off. The outside heating roller heater is put under temperature control when the outside heating roller reaches 225 deg C; on the other hand, the fixing sub heater is put under temperature control when the fixing roller reaches 200 deg C. As no more than 2 heaters may be turned on simultaneously while start-up sequence is under way, the pressure heater may be turned on only while either the outside heating roller heater or the fixing sub heater remains off. When the temperature of the pressure roller reaches 170 deg C, the pressure heater is put under temperature control. The warm-up period ends when the start-up sequence ends, causing the machine to enter the standby state.
9-8
J1803-2 J1804-3
J1105-A2 J1105-A3 J1105-A4 J1105-A5 J1105-A7 J1105-A8 J1105-A9 J1105-A10
MAIN_HEAT_ON MAIN_TR_ERR SUB_HEAT_ON SUB_TR_ERR PRESS_HEAT_ON PRESS_TR_ERR EX_HEAT_ON EX_TR_ERR
J1810-18 J1810-17 J1810-16 J1810-15 J1810-13 J1810-12 J1810-11 J1810-10
AC driver PCB
Chapter 9
- when outside heating roller is 190 deg C, starts initial multiple rotation
- fixing roller: 200 deg C - pressure roller: 140 deg C or higher - outside roller: 225 deg C if above is true, starts start-up sequence
at end of start-up sequence, enters standby
*6 WMUP Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub heater (H2) Pressure heater (H3) Outside heating roller heater (H4) Fixing motor (M4) Outside heating roller shaft motor (M22) Number of heaters permitted for simultaneous activation 3 (in contact) WMUPR1 (fixing idle rotation) WMUP2 (start-up sequence) STBY
Alternate activation *1 Heater full activation Alternate activation *1 Heater full activation Controlled to 225 deg C *3 (off contact) *5 3 2 3 : heater full activation. : heater temperature control. : heater alternate activation control. : activation limit control : motor turned on. *4 Controlled to 200 deg C Limit on pressure heater activation *2 Controlled to 170 deg C
F-9-10
*1: As many as 3 heaters may be turned on at a time during warm-up (other than during start-up sequence WMUP2). To start up the rollers in the shortest time possible under this limit, the fixing heater (H1) and the pressure heater (H3) are turned on alternately.
Fixing main heater (H1) OFF ON Pressure heater (H3) 1sec
F-9-11
ON
OFF 1sec
*2: As many as 2 heaters may be turned on at a time while start-up sequence (WMUP2) is under way; in other words, the pressure heater (H3) may be turned on only when either the fixing sub heater (H2) or the outside heating roller heater (H) is off. *3: Rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *4: Rotates idly for 1 sec at 1/3 speed every 30 min after the fixing roller stops. *5: The outside heating roller moves away from the fixing roller when the fixing roller reaches 200 edge C. *6: While start-up sequence (WMUP2) is under way, the machine performs drum surface potential control, primary transfer ATVC control, and D-MAX control.
9.3.2.3 In Standby
0003-2895
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When the machine is in standby, the fixing roller is controlled to 200 deg C, pressure roller to 170 deg C, and outside heating roller to 225 deg C.
STBY
Fixing main heater (H1) Fixing sub heater (H2) Pressure heater (H3) External heating heater (H4) Fixing motor (M4) External heating rollershift motor (M22) Controlled to 200 deg. C Controlled to 170 deg. C Controlled to 225 deg. C *1
: heater temperature control. : motor on.
F-9-12
*1: Rotates idly for 1 sec at 1/3 speed every 3 min after the fixing roller stops.
9.3.2.4 When Producing Mono Color (Black) Single-Sided Prints

0003-2896
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci A roller tends to be deprived of heat as a result of contact with paper while the machine is making mono color single-sided prints (especially in continuous printing). The machine, therefore, uses the fixing main heater (H1), which has high output, and executes temperature control at 200 deg C. The outside heating roller is controlled to 225 deg C by the work of the outside heating roller heater.
9-9
Chapter 9
Stat key ON
STBY
PRINT
LSTR
STBY
*4
*1
(Engagement)
*2
*3
(Disengagement)
: motor on.
F-9-13
*1: Rotates at normal speed (276 mm/sec). *2: Rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *3: Rotates idly for 1 sec at 1/3 speed every 30 min after the fixing roller stops. *4: In the case of the 120/230-V model, the 400-W pressure heater is turned on at 200-W equivalent during printing (by turning on and off the pressure heater for every single cycle of the power supply using the control signal generated by the DC controller).
9.3.2.5 When Producing Mono Color (Black) Double-Sided Prints

0003-2897
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The fixing roller is controlled to 200 deg C by the fixing sub heater (H2), and the outside heating roller heater is controlled to 225 deg C by the outside heating roller heater.
Stat key ON
STBY
PRINT
LSTR
STBY
*4
*1
(Engagement)
*2
*3
(Disengagement)
: motor on.
F-9-14
*1: Rotates at normal speed (276 mm /sec). *2: Rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *3: Rotates idly for 1 sec at 1/3 speed every 30 min after the fixing roller stops. *4: In the case of the 120/230-V model, the 400-W heater is turned on at 200-W equivalent during printing (by turning the pressure heater on and off for every single cycle of the power supply using the control signal generated by the DC controller).
9.3.2.6 When Producing Full Color Prints

0003-2898
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The fixing roller is controlled to 200 deg C by the fixing sub heater (H2), and the outside heating roller is controlled to 225 deg C by the outside heating roller heater.
9-10
Chapter 9
Stat key ON
STBY
PRINT
LSTR
STBY
*4
*1
(Engagement)
*2
*3
(Disengagement)
: motor on.
F-9-15
*1: In the case of plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2), rotates at normal speed (276 mm/sec); if heavy paper 1 (106 to 163 g/m2), at 2/3 speed (184 mm/sec); if heavy paper 2, heavy paper 3 (164 to 250 g/m2), or transparency, at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *2: Rotates at 1/3 speed (92 mm/sec). *3: Rotates idly for 1 sec at 1/3 speed every 30 min after the fixing roller stops. *4: In the case of the 120/230-V model, the 400-W pressure heater is turned on at 200-W equivalent during printing (by turning on and off the pressure heater for every single cycle of the power supply using a control signal generated by the DC controller).
9.3.2.7 With Power Save Mode Enabled

0004-3516
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the temperature to which the individual rollers of the fixing assembly are controlled when the machine enters low power mode or power save mode, with the lengths of time between when the power save mode is disabled and when the machine enters the standby (STBY) state. In sleep mode, all fixing heaters are off.
T-9-9 Power save mode STBY Low power mode -10% Fixing roller Pressure roller 200 deg C 170 deg C 110 deg C 110 deg C 180 deg C 170 deg C -25% 150 deg C 150 deg C -50% 85 deg C 85 deg C
Outside heating roller
225 deg C
110 deg C
200 deg C
150 deg C
85 deg C
Recovery time
--
about 240 sec
about 70 sec
about 150 sec
about 450 sec
9.3.2.8 Controlling the Overheating at the End of the Roller

0005-4713
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci If the end of the heat roller overheats as when small-size paper (e.g., A4R) is moved past continuously and, as a result, if the sub thermistor detects any of the following temperatures, the heater will be forced off to avoid damage to the heat roller. The overheating control mechanism is executed when printing in mono color mode or at time of recovery, and is not executed in color mode, in which sheets are moved at longer intervals.
T-9-10 Heater (that is forced off) Fixing main/sub heater (H1/H2) Pressure heater (H3) Outside heating roller heater (H4) Sub thermistor THM4 THM5 THM6 Control temperature 215 deg C 185 deg C 240 deg C
9.3.3 External Heat Roller Drive Control 9.3.3.1 Overview

0003-2899
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The outside heating roller helps the temperature control mechanism for the fixing roller by remaining in contact with the fixing roller during warm-up, printing, and last rotation. The outside heating roller is moved in contact with or away from the fixing roller by the drive of the outside heating roller shift motor (M22). When the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 190 deg C during warm-up to start initial multiple rotation or when printing starts, the outside heating roller shift motor (M22) goes on (normal direction of rotation) to move the outside heating roller in contact with the fixing roller. When the temperature of the fixing roller reaches 200 deg C during warm-up or when last rotation ends, the outside heating roller shift motor goes on (in reverse direction of rotation) to move the outside heating roller away from the fixing roller. When the paper jam also occurs, the outside heating roller shift motor goes on to move the outside heating roller away from the fixing roller.
9-11
Chapter 9 The timing at which the outside heating roller is moved is monitored using the outside heating roller HP sensor (PS21) for the following: - When the main power switch is turned on - When the front cover, upper right cover, or lower right cover is opened/closed - When the power save mechanism (power save mode, low power mode, sleep mode) is disabled
Normal rotation M22
Reverse rotation M22
PS21
PS21
[1]
[2]
Touched
F-9-16
Released (Home position)
[1] Outside heating roller [2] Fixing roller
9.4 Fixing Cleaning Web Mechanisms

9.4.1 Overview
0003-2900
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The cleaning web used to clean the fixing upper roller is fed by means of a one-way clutch (fixing web solenoid SL2). The web is fed coinciding with the detection of the leading edge of paper by the registration sensor (PS9) while printing is under way. The remaining length of the web is checked by the following 2 ways:
9-12
Chapter 9
Cleaning web
SL2
F-9-17
When the web detecting lever moves off the web at the cut-off, the lever that has been blocking the web length sensor (PS20) moves away from the sensor, thus causing the machine to indicate a pre-warning(*1) to alert the user that the web is running out. If the fixing web solenoid goes on 3,000 times(*2) without replacement of the web, the machine will then indicate 'E005' on its control panel. *1: The alert indication may be disabled in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>USER>WEB-DISP. *2: The count may be checked in service mode: COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB.
PS20
F-9-18
Whenever you have replaced the fixing web, be sure to reset the following service mode item to '0': COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FX-WEB
9.4.2 Web Retaining Mechanism

0004-3925
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The web retaining pad is used to hold the web in place (i.e., to keep it from becoming slack) when the fixing roller is rotated in reverse, as when a paper jam is being removed. The web retaining pad is attached to the shaft to which the cam used to move the outside heating roller to and from the fixing roller is attached; while the outside heating roller is in contact with the fixing roller, the pad is away from the web, coming into contact to hold the web in place when the outside roller moves away from the fixing roller.
9-13
Chapter 9
The machine indicates the message "Printer is warming up..." on its LCD while it executes last rotation after printing. While the message is on the LCD, the fixing roller is under temperature control, and the outside heating roller is in contact with the fixing roller, i.e., the web retaining pad is away from the web. If you open the front cover and turn the fixing assembly release knob, the web will become slack and possibly displaced. Do not open the front door while the message is on the LCD. If you must, do not turn the fixing assembly releasing knob. The web retainer is also away from the web when you force the front cover to open while printing or fixing idle rotation is under way during warm-up: be sure to keep this in mind during service work.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
F-9-19
[1] Web retaining pad [2] Cam [3] Cleaning Web [4] Outside heating roller [5] Fixing roller
9.5 Protective Functions

9.5.1 Detecting Overheating Using Thermistors
0003-2901
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The main thermistor and the sub thermistor of individual rollers may detect any of the following temperatures; in response, the DC controller issues signals to cut off the heater drive circuit, thereby depriving the heaters of power.
T-9-11 Main (middle) Fixing roller Pressure roller External heating roller 235 deg C 200 deg C 245 deg C Sub (end) 245 deg C 210 deg C 247 deg C
9.5.2 Cutting Off the Power Using Thermal Switches

0003-2902
9-14
Chapter 9 If the reading of the inside temperatures of the thermal switch of individual rollers indicates a temperature higher hand the following, the thermal switch goes off to stop the power to the fixing heater: Fixing roller: 220 +/-8 deg C Pressure roller: 220 +/-8 deg C Outside roller: 250 +/-10 deg C
[2]
[1] [1]
0003-2903
9.5.3 Errors
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Related Error E000 (inadequate rise in temperature of the fixing assembly at poweron) The main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3) has an open circuit or poor contact. The thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3) has an open circuit. The heater (H1, H2, H3, H4) has an open circuit. The AC driver PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. A check is made during initial multiple rotation. E001 (overheating of the fixing assembly) The main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3) has an open circuit or poor contact. The sub thermistor (THM4, THM5, THM6) has an open circuit or poor contact. The thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3) has an open circuit. The heater (H1, H2, H3, H4) has an open circuit. The AC driver PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. A check is made at all times. E002 (inadequate rise in temperature of the fixing assembly) The main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3) has an open circuit or poor contact. The thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3) has an open circuit. The heater (H1, H2, H3, H4) has an open circuit. the AC rive PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. A check is made during initial multiple rotation. E003 (abnormal drop in temperature of the fixing assembly after standby) The main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3) has an open circuit or poor contact. The thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3) has an open circuit. The heater (H1, H2, H3, H4) has an open circuit. The AC driver PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. Detail code: 004X A check is made during standby. Detail code: 005X A check is made during printing. E004 (fixing assembly protection circuit error) The main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3) has an open circuit or poor contact. The sub thermistor (THM4, THM5, THM6) has an open circuit or poor contact. The AC driver PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. A check is made during initial multiple rotation. E005 (web take-up error) The fixing web has been taken up. The web length sensor (PS20) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The fixing web solenoid is not connected. E006 (fixing assembly connection error) The fixing/feed unit is not fitted correctly (the fixing assembly is not detected even when the front cover is identified as being closed). The DC controller PCB is faulty. A check is made at all times. E008 (fixing roller end of life) As many as 20,000 prints(*) have been counted after a message has been issued to prompt replacement of the fixing roller. The DC controller is faulty. * May be changed in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FXERRLVL. E009 (outside heating roller shift error) The outside heating roller shift motor (M22) is faulty. The outside heating roller HP sensor (PS21) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. A check is made at all times.
[3]
F-9-22
F-9-20
4) Open the reversal delivery cover [1] and the middle cover [2].
[1]
F-9-21
[2]
5) Remove the fixing front cover [3]. - screw [1] - 2 screws [2]
[2] [1]
[2]
6) After moving the timing belt [3] to the front, remove it together with the fixing motor base [4]. - 3 screws [1] - 3 connectors [2]
[1] [1] [4]

9.6.1 Fixing Unit 9.6.1.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly
0002-9347
[2]
F-9-23
[1]
[3]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Press the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
7) Remove the screw [2] found at the rear of the fixing assembly [1].
9-15
Chapter 9
9.6.2 Fixing Roller

[1] [2]
9.6.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Roller

0011-1464
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Fixing Assembly. 1-1) Open the front cover. 1-2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 1-3) Press the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
F-9-24
8) Holding the 2 grips [1], remove the fixing assembly [2].
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1] [1]
F-9-28
[1]
F-9-25
[1]
F-9-29
[2]
[1]
F-9-26
[2]
[1]
9.6.1.2 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Assembly

0002-9355
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN When fitting the fixing assembly into the fixing/feeding assembly, take full care not to damage the 2 sensors [1].
[3]
F-9-30
[2]
[1]
1-6) After moving the timing belt [3] to the front, remove it together with the fixing motor base [4]. - 3 screws [1] - 3 connectors [2]
F-9-27
9-16
Chapter 9
[1]
[1]
[4]
[1]
F-9-35
[2]
2-2) Remove the faston [1] of the heater.

[1]
[2]
F-9-31
[1]
[3]
[1] [2]
F-9-36 F-9-32
2-3) Remove the heater cover [2] while moving the heater harness [3] out of the way. - screw [1]
[2]
[1]
[2] [1] [3]
[1]
F-9-33
F-9-37
2-4) Remove the heater retainer [2]. - screw [1]

[1] [2]
[1]
F-9-34 F-9-38
2) Remove the Fixing Upper Heater. 2-1) Move the thermistor cover [2] to remove. - screw [1]
2-5) Remove the heater [5]. - 4 screws [1] (remove heater harness [2]) - 2 screws [3] (remove the heater cover [4])
9-17
Chapter 9
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-42
[2]
4) Remove the fixing roller [2] together with the gear and the bearing. - 2 wires [1]
[1]
F-9-39
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
9.6.2.2 Removing the Fixing Roller

0003-3904
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the pin while pushing down on the fixing assembly. - screws [1]
F-9-43
[2]
[1]
F-9-40
[2]
F-9-44
[1]
2) Open the fixing assembly. - screw [1] - pin [2]
5) Remove the ring [1], gear [2], bush [3], and bearing [4] from the front in the order indicated.
[4]
[3] [2] [1]
F-9-45
When attaching the gear you have removed previously, be sure that the protrusion [1] of the gear is toward the front of the machine.
[1]
F-9-41
[2]
3) Remove the upper inlet guide [2]. - 2 screws [1]
9-18
Chapter 9
[2]
[1] [1]
[1]
F-9-46
F-9-49
1-4) Open the reversal delivery cover [1] and the middle cover [2]. 6) Remove the ring [2], spacer [3], bearing [4], and bush [5] from the rear.
[1] [5] [4] [3] [2]
F-9-47
9.6.2.3 Points to Note When Removing the Fixing Roller

0005-9439
[1]
F-9-50
[2]
1-5) Remove the fixing front cover [3]. - screw [1] - 2 screws [2] When attaching the inlet upper guide [1], be sure to place print paper [2] under the edge of the guide.
[2] [1]
To remvoe the paper after the work, go thorough the following sequence: close the fixing assembly, while pushing the fixing assembly downward, insert 2 pins, tighten the screws, and then pull on the paper to remove.
[2]
[3]
F-9-51
[2]
[1] [1] [4]
[1]
F-9-48
9.6.3 Pressure Roller 9.6.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Pressure Roller
0011-1468
[2]
F-9-52
[1]
[3]
9-19
Chapter 9
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-9-53
[1]
F-9-57
[2]
[1]
2-3) Remove the heater terminal cover [2]. - screw [1] 2-4) Remove the heater retainer [4]. - screw [3]
[4] [3]
[1]
[1]
F-9-54 F-9-58
[2]
2-5) Remove the heater harness [2]. - screw [1] 2-6) Remove the heater [5]. - screw [3] - heater retainer [4]
[4] [3]
[1]
F-9-55
[5]
F-9-59
[2]
2) Remove the Fixing Lower Heater. 2-1) Remove the heater terminal cover [2]. - screw [1]
9.6.3.2 Removing the Pressure Roller

0003-3914
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the pin [2] while pressing down on the fixing assembly. - screw [1]
[2] [1]
[2]
F-9-56
2-2) Remove the heater harness [2]. - screw [1]
[1]
F-9-60
2) Open the fixing assembly. - screw [1] - pin [2]
9-20
Chapter 9 1-1) Open the front cover. 1-2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 1-3) Press the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
[2]
[2] [1]
[1] [1]
F-9-61
3) Lift the pressure roller [1] together with the bearing and the bush to remove.
F-9-65
[1]
F-9-62
4) Remove the bearing [2] and the bush [3] from both ends of the pressure roller [1].
[1]
F-9-66
[2]
[1] [3] [2]
F-9-63
[2]
[1]
9.6.3.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Pressure Roller

0005-8186
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN Be sure to mount the pressure roller [1] so that the lot number [2] found on its edge is found toward the front of the machine.
[1]
[3]
F-9-67
[2]
[1] [1] [4]
[2]
Front
F-9-64
9.6.4 External Heat Roller 9.6.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Heating Roller Heater
0011-1469
[2]
F-9-68
[1]
[3]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Fixing Assembly.
9-21
Chapter 9 - connector [1]

[1] [2]
[2]
[1]
F-9-69
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-9-73
2-3) Remove the 2 heater harnesses [2] from the wire guide [3]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-9-70
F-9-74
[2]
2-4) Pull out the outside heating roller [3]. - screw [1] - pin [2]
[2] [3]
[1]
F-9-71
2) Remove the Outside Heating Roller Heater. 2-1) Engage the ends of the 2 springs [1] on the hooks [2] of the side plate.
[2] [1] [2] [1]
[1]
F-9-75
2-5) Remove the screw [1]. 2-6) Remove the wire guide [3]. - screw [2] 2-7) Remove the heater retainer [5]. - screw [4]
[1]
F-9-72
2-2) Remove the harness [2] from the 2 wire saddles [3].
9-22
Chapter 9
[5] [2]
[4]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[A]
[3]
F-9-76
2-8) Remove the screw [1]. 2-9) Remove the wire guide [3]. - screw [2] 2-10) Remove the heater retainer [5]. - screw [4]
[1] [4]
F-9-79
9.6.4.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller

0003-2560
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the ring [1], bush [2], and bearing [4] from both ends of the outside heating roller [1]; then, remove the outside heating roller.
[4] [1]
[2]
F-9-77
[3]
[5]
[2]
F-9-80
2-11) Remove the heater [2] out of the outside heating roller [1].
[1]
[3]
9.6.5 Fixing Thermistor (Upper) 9.6.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Upper Thermistor
0011-1472
[2]
[2]
F-9-78
[1]
When attaching the outside heating roller heater, be sure that the length A of the heater cable [2] sticking out the heater holder [1] is no more than 4 mm.
[1]
F-9-81
9-23
Chapter 9
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-9-82
[2] [1]
F-9-86
[2] [1]
[3]
F-9-83
[2]
[1]
F-9-87
[1] [1] [4]
9.6.5.2 Removing the Fixing Upper Thermistor

0002-9923
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the thermistor cover [2]. - screw [1]
[2]
F-9-84
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-9-88
[2]
[1] [2]
2) Move the harness out of the way, and remove thermistor [3] together with the holder. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[3]
[1]
F-9-85
[2]
F-9-89
3) Remove the thermistor [2]. - 2 screws [1]
9-24
Chapter 9
[3]
[2]
F-9-90
9.6.5.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Upper Thermistor

0005-5541
[1]
F-9-94
[2]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN After mounting the thermistor, make sure of the following: The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to the fixing roller. (Check to be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light.) Otherwise, re-mount it.
[2] [1]
[1]
F-9-91
[3]
F-9-95
[2]
OK
NG
NG
[1] [1] [4]
F-9-92
9.6.6 Fixing Thermistor (Lower) 9.6.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Lower Thermistor
0011-1474
[2]
F-9-96
[1]
[3]
[1] [2]
[2]
[1] [1]
F-9-97
F-9-93
9-25
Chapter 9
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-9-102
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-9-98
4) Remove the harness [1] from the wire saddle [2]. 5) Remove the 2 holders [4]. - 2 screws [3]
[1] [2]
[4]
F-9-103
[3]
[4]
6) Remove the harness [2] from the 2 wire saddles [3]. - 2 screws [1]
[2] [1]
[1]
F-9-99
[1] [3]
9.6.6.2 Removing the Fixing Lower Thermistor

0003-0174
F-9-104
[3]
1) Remove the harness [2] from the 4 wire saddles [3]. - connector [1]
[2]
9.6.6.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Lower Thermistor

0005-5546
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN After mounting the thermistor, make sure of the following: The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to the fixing roller. (Check to be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light.) Otherwise, re-mount it.
[1]
F-9-100
[3]
[1]
2) Remove the inlet guide [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
F-9-101
[2]
[1]
F-9-105
OK
NG
NG
F-9-106
9-26
Chapter 9
9.6.7 External Heat Thermistor

[1] [1] [4]
9.6.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Heating Roller Thermistor

0011-1475
[2]
F-9-110
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1] [1]
[1] [2]
F-9-107
F-9-111
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-9-108
[2] [1]
F-9-112
[2] [1]
[3]
F-9-109
[2]
[1]
F-9-113
9.6.7.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Thermistor

0002-9920
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the fixing upper cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
9-27
Chapter 9
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
F-9-118
9.6.7.3 Points to Note When Mounting the External Heat Thermistor

0005-5547
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN After mounting the thermistor, make sure of the following:
F-9-114
2) Remove the harness [2] from the wire saddle[3]. - connector [1]
[3]
The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to the fixing roller. (Check to be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light.) Otherwise, re-mount it.
[1]
F-9-119
[1]
F-9-115
[2]
OK
NG
NG
3) Remove the thermistor attaching plate [4]. - harness [1] (From the wire saddle [2]) - screw [3]
[4]
F-9-120
9.6.8 Fixing Thermal Switch 9.6.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch
0011-1478
[3]
F-9-116
4) Remove the thermistor attaching plate [4]. - harness [1] (From the wire saddle [2]) - screw [3]
[4]
1) Remove the Fixing Assembly. 1-1) Open the front cover. 1-2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 1-3) Press the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
[2]
[1] [1]
[1]
F-9-117
[2]
[2]
[3]
5) Remove thermistor [2] from the thermistor mounting plate [3]. - 2 screws [1]
F-9-121
9-28
Chapter 9
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-9-122
[2] [1]
F-9-126
[2] [1]
[3]
F-9-123
[2]
[1]
F-9-127
[1] [1] [4]
9.6.8.2 Removing the Fixing Thermal Switch

0003-0170
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the thermistor cover [2]. - screw [1]
[2]
F-9-124
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-9-128
[2]
[1] [2]
2) Remove the harness [2] from the wire guide [3]. - connector [1] 3) Remove the 2 fastons [4]. 4) Remove the thermal switch [6]. - screw [5]
[1] [3] [2]

F-9-125
[4]
F-9-129
[6]
[5]
9-29
Chapter 9
9.6.8.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Thermal Switch

0004-5055
- screw [1] - 2 screws [2]

[2] [1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN After mounting the thermal switch, make sure of the following: The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to the fixing roller. (Check to be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light.) Otherwise, re-mount it.
[3]
F-9-134
[2]
[1]
F-9-130
[1]
[1]
[4]
OK
NG
NG
NG
NG
F-9-131
9.6.9 Fixing Locking Thermal Switch 9.6.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Pressure Thermal Switch
0011-1479
[2]
F-9-135
[1]
[3]
[1] [2]
[2]
[1]
F-9-136
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-132
[1]
F-9-137
[1]
F-9-133
[2]
1-5) Remove the fixing front cover [3].
9-30
Chapter 9
[1]
F-9-138 F-9-142
[1]
OK
NG
NG
NG
NG
9.6.9.2 Removing the Fixing Pressure Thermal Switch

0003-0172
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the harness [2] from the 4 wire saddles [3]. - connector [1]
[2]
F-9-143
9.6.10 Thermal Switch 9.6.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Thermal Switch
0011-1480
[1]
F-9-139
[3]
2) Remove the inlet unit [2]. - 2 screws [1]

[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-9-140
[2]
[1]
F-9-144
3) Remove the 2 heater harnesses [2] out of the way. - 2 screws [1] 4) Remove the thermal switch. - screw [3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-9-141 F-9-145
[1]
[2]
9.6.9.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Pressure Thermal Switch
0004-5057
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN After mounting the thermal switch (before mounting the inlet guide), check to make sure o the following: The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to the pressure roller. (Be sure to check it by shining the thermal switch by a pen light.) if not, remount it.
9-31
Chapter 9
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-9-146
[2]
[1]
F-9-150
[1] [1] [4]
9.6.10.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch

0003-0140
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the fixing upper cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[2]
F-9-147
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1] [2]
F-9-151
2) Remove the 2 heater harnesses [2]. - 2 screws [1] 3) Remove the thermal switch. - screw [3]
[1]
F-9-148
[2]
[1]
[4]
[2]
F-9-152
[3]
9.6.10.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch
0004-5059
[1]
F-9-149
After mounting the thermal switch, check to be sure of the following: The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to the outside heating roller. (Be sure to shine the thermal witch switch a pen light.) If not, remount it.
9-32
Chapter 9
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-9-153 F-9-157
[2]
OK
NG
NG
NG
NG
[1] [1] [4]
F-9-154
9.6.11 Upper Fixing Heater 9.6.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Upper Heater
0011-1481
F-9-158
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1] [1]
F-9-159
F-9-155
[2]
[1]
[1] [1]
F-9-156
[2]
F-9-160
9-33
Chapter 9
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-161
9.6.11.2 Removing the Fixing Upper Heater

0011-5510
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Move the thermistor cover [2] to remove. - screw [1]
F-9-165
5) Remove the heater [5]. - 4 screws [1] (remove heater harness [2]) - 2 screws [3] (remove the heater cover [4])
[1] [3] [1] [2]
[1]
F-9-162
[2]
2) Remove the faston [1] of the heater.

[1]
[1]
F-9-166
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
9.6.12 Lower Fixing Roller 9.6.12.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Lower Heater
0011-1486
F-9-163
3) Remove the heater cover [2] while moving the heater harness [3] out of the way. - screw [1]
1) Remove the Fixing Assembly. 1-1) Open the front cover. 1-2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 1-3) Press the leaf springs [1] found at the left and right to slide farther out the fixing/feeding assembly [2].
[2] [2] [1] [3] [1] [1]
F-9-164
4) Remove the heater retainer [2]. - screw [1]
F-9-167
9-34
Chapter 9
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-9-168
[2] [1]
F-9-172
[2] [1]
[3]
F-9-169
[2]
[1]
F-9-173
[1] [1] [4]
9.6.12.2 Removing the Fixing Lower Heater

0011-5511
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the heater terminal cover [2]. - screw [1]
[2]
F-9-170
[1]
[3]
[2] [1]
[1] [2]
F-9-174
2) Remove the heater harness [2]. - screw [1]
F-9-171
[2]
[1]
F-9-175
3) Remove the heater terminal cover [2]. - screw [1] 4) Remove the heater retainer [4].
9-35
Chapter 9 - screw [3]

[4] [3]
[1] [2]
F-9-176
[1]
F-9-179
[2]
5) Remove the heater harness [2]. - screw [1] 6) Remove the heater [5]. - screw [3] - heater retainer [4]
[4] [3]
[2] [1]
[5]
F-9-177
[2]
[3]
F-9-180
[2]
9.6.13 Fixing Locking Heater 9.6.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Heating Roller Heater
0011-1489
[1] [1] [4]
[2]
[2]
F-9-181
[1] [1]
[1]
[3]
[1] [2]
F-9-178
F-9-182
9-36
Chapter 9
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-9-183
F-9-186
3) Remove the 2 heater harnesses [2] from the wire guide [3]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
F-9-184
F-9-187
9.6.13.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Heater

0011-5600
4) Pull out the outside heating roller [3]. - screw [1] - pin [2]
[2] [3]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Engage the ends of the 2 springs [1] on the hooks [2] of the side plate.
[2] [1] [2] [1]
[1]
F-9-188
5) Remove the screw [1]. 6) Remove the wire guide [3]. - screw [2] 7) Remove the heater retainer [5]. - screw [4]
[1]
F-9-185
9-37
Chapter 9
[5] [2]
[4]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[A]
[3]
F-9-189
8) Remove the screw [1]. 9) Remove the wire guide [3]. - screw [2] 10) Remove the heater retainer [5]. - screw [4]
[1] [4]
F-9-192
9.6.14 Fixing Web 9.6.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Web
0011-1492
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-9-190
[3]
[5]
[1]
11) Remove the heater [2] out of the outside heating roller [1].
[1]
F-9-193
[2]
F-9-191
When attaching the outside heating roller heater, be sure that the length A of the heater cable [2] sticking out the heater holder [1] is no more than 4 mm.
F-9-194
[1]
[2]
9-38
Chapter 9
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-9-195
[2]
[1]
F-9-199
[1] [1] [4]
2) Remove the Fixing Web Unit. 2-1) Remove the fixing upper cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-9-196
[1]
[3]
F-9-200
[1] [2]
2-2) Remove the fixing web unit [2]. - 2 screws [1]
F-9-197
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-201
9.6.14.2 Removing the Fixing Web

0002-9569
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the fixing web [3]. - 2 screws [1] - 2 fixings [2]
[1]
F-9-198
9-39
Chapter 9
[2]
[3]
F-9-202
[1]
F-9-204
[1]
[2]
9.6.14.3 Attaching the Fixing Web

0002-9570
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Attach the fixing web as shown:
[2] [1]
[3]
F-9-205
[2]
9.6.15.2 Removing the Fixing Motor

0003-7054
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the fixing motor [3]. - 2 connectors [1] - 3 screws [2]
F-9-203
9.6.14.4 When Replacing the Fixing Web

0002-9572
[2]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN 1. After attaching the web, take up its slack so that there will be no slack when the web unit is fitted in the fixing assembly. 2. After replacing the web, reset the readings of the following service mode items: COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FX-WEB
9.6.15 Fixing Motor 9.6.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Motor
0011-1497
F-9-206
[1]
[3]
9.6.16 External Heater Shift Motor 9.6.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Outside Heating Shift Motor
0011-1498
9-40
Chapter 9
[4] [3]
[1] [2]
[1]
F-9-207
[2]
[2] [1]
F-9-210
9.6.17 Upper Separation Claw 9.6.17.1 Removing the Delivery Upper Separation Claw
0003-2571
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Open the reversal delivery cover.
[3]
F-9-208
[2]
9.6.16.2 Removing the Outside Heating Roller Shift Motor

0003-7985
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) After moving the timing belt [3] to the front, remove it together with the fixing motor base [4]. - 3 screws [1] - 3 connectors [2]
F-9-211
[1]
[1]
[1]
[4]
4) Open the middle cover.
[1]
[2]
F-9-209
[1]
[3]
F-9-212
2) Remove the harness from the cable guide [1]; then, remove the connector [2]. 3) Remove the outside heating roller shift motor [4]. - screw [3]
5) Remove the leaf spring [2]. - screw [1]

[2]
[1]
F-9-213
6) Turn the separation claw [1] in the direction of the arrow; then, remove
9-41
Chapter 9 the hook of the spring [2] to remove it in upward direction.

[1]
[3]
[2]
F-9-214
[1]
[2]
9.6.18 Lower Separation Claw 9.6.18.1 Removing the Delivery Lower Separation Claw
0003-2572
F-9-218
7) Remove the leaf spring [2]. - screw [1]

[2]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Open the reversal delivery cover.
[1]
F-9-219
8) Remove the lower separation claw [2]. - hook of the spring [1]
[2]
[1]
F-9-215
4) Open the middle cover.

F-9-220
[1]
[1]
F-9-216
5) Remove the spring [1] from the rear of the delivery assembly.
[1]
F-9-217
6) Remove the screw [1] from the front of the delivery assembly; then, remove the pin [2], and move the lower separation claw assembly [3] toward the front to remove.
9-42
Chapter 10 Externals and Controls
Contents
Contents
10.1 Control Panel..............................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1 10.1.2 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1 10.1.3 LCD Processing ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2 10.1.4 LCD Contrast Adjustment ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-2 10.1.5 Control Panel CPU................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Counters .....................................................................................................................................................................10-2

10.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-2 10.2.2 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-3 10.2.3 Increasing the Count ................................................................................................................................................................ 10-5
10.3 Fans ............................................................................................................................................................................10-5

10.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-5 10.3.2 Sequence of Operations ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4 Power Supply .............................................................................................................................................................10-7

10.4.1 Power Supply ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-7
10.4.1.1 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer Unit...........................................................................................................................................10-7 10.4.1.2 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer Unit...........................................................................................................................................10-8 10.4.1.3 Power to the Environment Heater .............................................................................................................................................................10-10
10.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................................................... 10-11

10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Power Supply PCB .......................................................................................................................................10-11 10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the DC/DC Converter PCB 1 .........................................................................................................................................10-12 10.4.2.3 Rated Output of the DC/DC Converter PCB 1 .........................................................................................................................................10-12 10.4.2.4 Rated Output of the DC/DC Converter PCB 2 .........................................................................................................................................10-12
10.4.3 Protection Function ................................................................................................................................................................ 10-12

10.4.3.1 Protection of the Power Supply PCB ........................................................................................................................................................10-12 10.4.3.2 Protection by a Fuse ..................................................................................................................................................................................10-12
10.4.4 Backup Battery....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-13

10.4.4.1 Backup Battery..........................................................................................................................................................................................10-13
10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-14

10.4.5.1 SNMP setup ..............................................................................................................................................................................................10-14
10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure...................................................................................................................................10-16

10.5.1 External Covers...................................................................................................................................................................... 10-16
10.5.1.1 Upper Right Cover ....................................................................................................................................................................................10-16 10.5.1.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper)...................................................................................................................................................10-16 10.5.1.2 Right Cover (Upper Rear) .........................................................................................................................................................................10-16 10.5.1.2.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear)............................................................................................................................................10-16 10.5.1.3 Right Cover (Lower Rear) ........................................................................................................................................................................10-16 10.5.1.3.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear)............................................................................................................................................10-16 10.5.1.4 Right Cover (Lower Front) .......................................................................................................................................................................10-16 10.5.1.4.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower front) ..........................................................................................................................................10-16 10.5.1.5 Right Cover (Lower Middle) ....................................................................................................................................................................10-16 10.5.1.5.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower middle).......................................................................................................................................10-16 10.5.1.6 Upper Left Cover ......................................................................................................................................................................................10-16 10.5.1.6.1 Removing the Left Cover (upper) .....................................................................................................................................................10-16 10.5.1.7 Left Lower Cover ......................................................................................................................................................................................10-17 10.5.1.7.1 Removing the Left Cover (lower) .....................................................................................................................................................10-17 10.5.1.8 Left Middle Cover.....................................................................................................................................................................................10-17 10.5.1.8.1 Removing the Left Cover (middle) ...................................................................................................................................................10-17 10.5.1.9 Rear Upper Cover .....................................................................................................................................................................................10-17 10.5.1.9.1 Removing the Rear Cover (upper) ....................................................................................................................................................10-17 10.5.1.9.2 Removing the Rear Cover (upper) ....................................................................................................................................................10-17 10.5.1.10 Rear Lower Cover ...................................................................................................................................................................................10-18 10.5.1.10.1 Removing the Rear Cover (lower) ..................................................................................................................................................10-18
Contents
10.5.1.11 Reader Right Cover ................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-18 10.5.1.11.1 Removing the Reader Right Cover ................................................................................................................................................. 10-18 10.5.1.12 Reader Left Cover................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-18 10.5.1.12.1 Removing the Reader Left Cover ................................................................................................................................................... 10-18 10.5.1.13 Reader Front Cover................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-18 10.5.1.13.1 Before Removing the Reader Front Cover ..................................................................................................................................... 10-18 10.5.1.13.2 Removing the Reader Front Cover ................................................................................................................................................. 10-18 10.5.1.14 Reader Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-19 10.5.1.14.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover .................................................................................................................................................. 10-19 10.5.1.15 Delivery Cover........................................................................................................................................................................................ 10-20 10.5.1.15.1 Removing the Delivery Cover ........................................................................................................................................................ 10-20
10.5.2 Hopper Drive Unit ................................................................................................................................................................. 10-20

10.5.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Assembly........................................................................................................................... 10-20 10.5.2.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Assembly.................................................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.5.3 Power Cord Base.................................................................................................................................................................... 10-22

10.5.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Power Cord Base...................................................................................................................................... 10-22 10.5.3.2 Removing the Power Cord Base ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.5.4 Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-23

10.5.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Control Panel ........................................................................................................................................... 10-23 10.5.4.2 Removing the Control Panel..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-24
10.5.5 DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................ 10-24

10.5.5.1 Preparation for Removing the DC Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................. 10-24 10.5.5.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-24 10.5.5.3 Points to Note When Mounting the DC Controller PCB.......................................................................................................................... 10-24
10.5.6 Printer Power Supply PCB..................................................................................................................................................... 10-25

10.5.6.1 Preparation for Removing the DC Power Supply Unit............................................................................................................................. 10-25 10.5.6.2 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit...................................................................................................................................................... 10-25
10.5.7 Leakage Breaker .................................................................................................................................................................... 10-25

10.5.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Leakage Breaker....................................................................................................................................... 10-25 10.5.7.2 Removing the Leakage Breaker................................................................................................................................................................ 10-26
10.5.8 Fixing Relay........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-26

10.5.8.1 Preparation for Removing the DC/DC converter PCB2 ........................................................................................................................... 10-26 10.5.8.2 Removing the DC/DC converter PCB2 .................................................................................................................................................... 10-26
10.5.9 Relay PCB.............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-26

10.5.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Relay PCB ................................................................................................................................................ 10-26 10.5.9.2 Removing the Relay PCB ......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-26
10.5.10 DC Relay.............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-27

10.5.10.1 Preparation for Removing the DC Relay ................................................................................................................................................ 10-27 10.5.10.2 Removing the DC Relay ......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-27
10.5.11 HV1 PCB ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-27

10.5.11.1 Preparation for Removing the HV1 PCB ............................................................................................................................................... 10-27 10.5.11.2 Removing the HV1 PCB......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-27
10.5.12 HV2 PCB ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-28

10.5.13 HV3 PCB ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-28

10.5.14 Fixing/Feed Driver PCB ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-29

10.5.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing/Feed Driver PCB ........................................................................................................................ 10-29 10.5.14.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeding Driver PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 10-30
10.5.15 Pickup Driver PCB .............................................................................................................................................................. 10-30

10.5.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Pickup Driver PCB................................................................................................................................. 10-30 10.5.15.2 Removing the Pickup Driver PCB.......................................................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.5.16 Switch PCB.......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-31

10.5.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Switch PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 10-31 10.5.16.2 Removing the Switch PCB ..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.5.17 Primary Exhaust Fan............................................................................................................................................................ 10-31

10.5.17.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Exhaust Fan .............................................................................................................................. 10-31 10.5.17.2 Removing the Primary Exhaust Fan ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-32
Contents
10.5.18 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan .................................................................................................................................................. 10-33

10.5.18.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan .....................................................................................................................10-33 10.5.18.2 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ..............................................................................................................................................10-34
10.5.19 Power Supply Cooing Fan ................................................................................................................................................... 10-35

10.5.19.1 Preparation for Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan.....................................................................................................................10-35 10.5.19.2 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan..............................................................................................................................................10-35
10.5.20 Delivery Cooling Fan 1........................................................................................................................................................ 10-35

10.5.20.1 Preparation for Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 1 ..........................................................................................................................10-35 10.5.20.2 Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 1 ...................................................................................................................................................10-35
10.5.21 Delivery Cooling Fan 2........................................................................................................................................................ 10-36

10.5.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 2 ..........................................................................................................................10-36 10.5.21.2 Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 2 ...................................................................................................................................................10-36
10.5.22 Ozone Filter ......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-36

10.5.22.1 Removing the Ozone Filter .....................................................................................................................................................................10-36 10.5.22.2 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Ozone Filter ................................................................................................................................10-37
10.5.23 Toner Filter .......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-37

10.5.23.1 Removing the Toner Filter ......................................................................................................................................................................10-37
10.5.24 Sub Toner Filter ................................................................................................................................................................... 10-37

10.5.24.1 Preparation for Removing the Sub Toner Filter......................................................................................................................................10-37 10.5.24.2 Removing the Sub Toner Filter...............................................................................................................................................................10-38
Chapter 10
10.1 Control Panel

10.1.1 Overview
0011-8896
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The machine' s control panel consists of PCBs, LCD, and touch panel as shown below, and its functions include the following: - LCD display - contrast adjustment - touch switch input processing - hard key input processing
Main controller PCB J1212A, J1212B
J511A, J511B Touch panel J1114 J1112 J1113 J1110, J1111 Control panel CPU PCB
Color LCD J1 Control panel inverter PCB Control panel

F-10-1
J6801, J6802 Keypad PCB
10.1.2 Overview
0003-2955
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine' s control panel consists of PCBs, LCD, and touch panel as shown below, and its functions include the following: - LCD display - contrast adjustment - touch switch input processing - hard key input processing
Main controller PCB J1015
J511A, J511B Touch panel J1114 J1112 J1113 J1110, J1111 Control panel CPU PCB
Color LCD J1 Control panel inverter PCB Control panel

F-10-2
J6801, J6802 Keypad PCB
10-1
Chapter 10
10.1.3 LCD Processing

0003-2956
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The CPU on the main controller PCB sends data (display information) to the control panel CPU PCB according to the instructions at such times as programmed. The data goes through the control panel CPU PCB for display on the color LCD.
10.1.4 LCD Contrast Adjustment

0003-2957
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine' s keypad PCB is equipped with a contrast adjustment volume (VR6801) to enable the user to adjust the contrast of the LCD.
10.1.5 Control Panel CPU

0003-2958
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci - Monitoring Key Inputs communicates the inputs made on the keypad or function keys to the CPU on the main controller PCB. - Monitoring Touch Panel Inputs communicates the inputs made on the touch panel to the CPU on the main controller PCB. - Controlling the Buzzer Sound - Controlling the Control Panel LED
MEMO: The color LCD is driven by the main controller, and the control panel CPU PCB serves to relay the drive signals.
10.2 Counters
10.2.1 Overview
0018-2848
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine is equipped with counters used to keep count of prints according to output functions; the counters are indicated on the control panel in response to a press on the Check key on the panel. The following shows the counters and the settings made at time of shipment from the factory:
T-10-1 Model 100V *1 *** Counter 1 total 1 Counter 2 total (black-and-white 1) Counter 3 copy (full color + mono color 1) Counter 4 total A (full color + mono color 1) Counter 5 not indicated** Counter 6 not indicated**
101
108
232
149
000
000
T-10-2 Model Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6
100V *1 ****
total 2
copy (full color + mono color 2)
total A (full color + mono color 2)
copy (black-and-white 1)
total A (black-andwhite 2)
not indicated **
102
231
148
222
133
000
T-10-3 Model 120V UL *2 Counter 1 total 1 Counter 2 total (black-and-white 1) Counter 3 copy (full color + mono color; large) Counter 4 copy (full color + mono color; small) Counter 5 print (full color + mono color: large) Counter 6 print (full color + mono color; small)
101
108
229
230
321
322
230V *3
total 1
total (black-and-white 1)
copy + print (full color; large)
copy + print (full color; small)
total (mono color 1)
total 1 (double-sided)
101
108
401
402
118
114
10-2
Chapter 10
T-10-5 Model 240V EUR *4 Counter 1 total 1 Counter 2 total (full color + mono color; large) Counter 3 total (full color + mono color; small) Counter 4 total (black-andwhite; large) Counter 5 total (black-andwhite; small) Counter 6 scan (total 1)
101
122
123
112
113
501
240V AUS *5
total 1
copy (full color + mono color; large)
copy (full color + mono color; small)
print (full color + mono color; large)
print (full color + mono color; small)
101
108
229
230
321
322
1. Notations large: large-size paper (sheet in excess of 364 mm in length in paper feed direction; count increased by 1). small: small-size paper (sheet 364 mm or shorter in length in paper feed direction). total: all (copy + print); count increased by 1. double-sided: in auto duplexing mode, count increased by 1. - the 3-digit notation in the Counter column shows the setting of the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>USER>COUNTER 1 through 6 - counters 2 through 6 may be changed using the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>USER. *1 :F15-3017/3019 *2 :F15-3036/3038 *3 :F15-3047/3049/3077 *4 :F15-3096/3097/3098/3099 *5 :F15-3066/3068 ** : by default, not indicated; may be changed in serve mode. *** : if '0' is set for the following: COPIER>OPTION>USER>CNT-SW. ****: if '1' is set for the following: COPIER>OPTION>USER>CNT-SW.
10.2.2 Overview
0003-2959
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C The machine is equipped with counters used to keep count of prints according to output functions; the counters are indicated on the control panel in response to a press on the Check key on the panel. The following shows the counters and the settings made at time of shipment from the factory:
T-10-7 Model 100V *1 *** Counter 1 total 1 Counter 2 total (black-and-white 1) Counter 3 copy (full color + mono color 1) Counter 4 print (full color + mono color 1) Counter 5 not indicated** Counter 6 not indicated**
101
108
232
324
000
000
100V *1 ****
total 2
copy (full color + mono color 2)
total A (full color + mono color 2)
copy (black-and-white 1)
total A (black-andwhite 2)
not indicated **
102
231
148
222
133
000
120V TW *2
total 1
not indicated**
101
108
401
402
118
000
10-3
Chapter 10
T-10-10 Model 120V UL *3 Counter 1 total 1 Counter 2 total (black-and-white 1) Counter 3 copy (full color + mono color; large) Counter 4 copy (full color + mono color; small) Counter 5 print (full color + mono color: large) Counter 6 print (full color + mono color; small)
101
108
229
230
321
322
230V *4
total 1
total 1 (double-sided)
101
108
401
402
118
114
T-10-12 Model 240V UK *5 Counter 1 total 1 Counter 2 total (full color + mono color; large) Counter 3 total (full color + mono color; small) Counter 4 total (black-andwhite; large) Counter 5 total (black-andwhite; small) Counter 6 scan (total 1)
101
122
123
112
113
501
240V CA *6
total 1
copy (full color + mono color; large)
copy (full color + mono color; small)
print (full color + mono color; large)
print (full color + mono color; small)
101
108
229
230
321
322
T-10-14 Model 230V FRN *7 Counter 1 total 1 Counter 2 total (full color + mono color; large) Counter 3 total (full color + mono color; small) Counter 4 total (black-andwhite; large) Counter 5 total (black-andwhite; small) Counter 6 scan (total 1)
101
122
123
112
113
501
T-10-15 Model 230V GER *8 Counter 1 total 1 Counter 2 total (full color + mono color; large) Counter 3 total (full color + mono color; small) Counter 4 total (black-andwhite; large) Counter 5 total (black-andwhite; small) Counter 6 scan (total 1)
101
122
123
112
113
501
T-10-16 Model 230V AMS *9 Counter 1 total 1 Counter 2 total (full color + mono color; large) Counter 3 total (full color + mono color; small) Counter 4 total (black-andwhite; large) Counter 5 total (black-andwhite; small) Counter 6 scan (total 1))
10-4
Chapter 10
Model Counter 1 101 Counter 2 122 Counter 3 123 T-10-17 Model 230V ITA *10 Counter 1 total 1 Counter 2 total (full color + mono color; large) Counter 3 total (full color + mono color; small) Counter 4 total (black-andwhite; large) Counter 5 total (black-andwhite; small) Counter 6 scan (total 1) Counter 4 112 Counter 5 113 Counter 6 501
101
122
123
112
113
501
1. Notations large: large-size paper (sheet in excess of 364 mm in length in paper feed direction; count increased by 1). small: small-size paper (sheet 364 mm or shorter in length in paper feed direction). total: all (copy + print); count increased by 1. double-sided: in auto duplexing mode, count increased by 1. - the 3-digit notation in the Counter column shows the setting of the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>USER>COUNTER 1 through 6 - counters 2 through 6 may be changed using the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>USER. *1 :F14-4011/4012/4016/4017/4018/4019/7211/7212 *2 :F14-4001 *3 :F14-4031/4036/4038/7231 *4 :F14-4041/4042/4047/4049/4077/4061/4070/7241/7242/7261/7270 *5 :F14-4051/4054 *6 :F14-4061/4062/4066/4068/7261/7262 *7 :F14-4071/4072 *8 :F14-4081/4082 *9 :F14-4091/4092/4096/4097/4098/4099/7291/7292 *10 :F14-4021/4022 ** : by default, not indicated; may be changed in serve mode. *** : if '0' is set for the following: COPIER>OPTION>USER>CNT-SW. ****: if '1' is set for the following: COPIER>OPTION>USER>CNT-SW.
10.2.3 Increasing the Count

0003-2960
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine increases the count based on the type of print (single-sided or double-sided) and the presence/absence of a finisher. 1. Single-Sided Print, 2nd Side of a Double-Sided Print When making a single-sided print or the 2nd side of a double-sided print, the machine increases the count when the trailing edge of paper is discharged outside the machine (as indicated by the output of the following sensor).
T-10-18 Finisher present absent Sensor outside delivery sensor (PS13) delivery sensor of the finisher
2. 1st Side of a Double-Sided Print The machine assumes the end of printing on the 1st side of a double-sided print to be when the duplexing left sensor (PS17) turns on, thus increasing the count.
10.3 Fans
10.3.1 Overview
0003-2962
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the names and functions of the fans used in the machine:
T-10-19 Notation FM1 FM2 FM3 FM4 FM11 FM12 FM5 FM6 Name primary charging suction fan primary charging exhaust fan feed fan 1 feed fan 2 feed fan 3 feed fan 4 fixing heat exhaust fan delivery cooling fan 1 Filter yes yes no no no no no no 2-speed control yes yes no no no no yes no Description draws air from outside the machine to the primary charging assembly. error E824-0000
discharges exhaust from around the primary E824-0001 charging assembly. keeps paper on the feed belt. keeps paper on the feed belt. keeps paper on the feed belt. keeps paper on the feed belt. discharges heat generated by the fixing assembly. cools the delivery assembly. E805-0003
10-5
Chapter 10
Notation FM7 FM8 FM9 FM10 FM13 FM14 Name process unit cooling fan controller cooling fan power supply cooling fan delivery cooling fan 2 reader cooling fan DF feed motor cooling fan Filter no no no no no no 2-speed control yes no no yes no no Description cools the process unit. cools the controller. cools the power supply. cools paper at time of delivery. cools reader unit cools DF feed motor error E804-0002 E804-0004 E804-0007
FM2 FM4 FM11 FM12 FM6 FM7 FM3
FM1
FM13
FM14 FM10
FM5 FM8
FM9
F-10-3
10.3.2 Sequence of Operations

0005-4704
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine uses the following sequence of operation to turn on or off the fans:
10-6
Chapter 10
Main power switch ON Warm-up Initial multiple Printing

rotation
Control panel Main power power switch OFF switch OFF Last rotation *1 Standby
15 min 15 min
Jam
15 min 15 min
Power save mode
Sleep mode
Primary charging suction fan (FM1) Primary charging delivery fan (FM2) Feed fan 1 (FM3) Feeed fan 2 (FM4) Feeed fan 3 (FM11) Feeed fan 4 (FM12) Fixing heat discharge fan (FM5) Delivery cooling fan 1 (FM6) Process unit cooling fan (FM7) Controller cooling fan (FM8) Power supply cooling fan (FM9) Delivery cooling fan2 (FM10) Reader cooling fan (FM13) DF feed motor cooling fan (FM14)
*1
*2
*2
*3 *3 *4 *4
15 min
*4
*4
15 min
*5 *6 *7
*5
: full-speed rotation. : half-speed rotation
F-10-4
*1: if in a high temperature/humidity environment, half-speed rotation. *2: if in a high temperature/humidity environment, full-speed rotation. *3: rotates only if all following conditions exist: paper shorter than LTR (216 mm or less), heavy paper mode, full color duplexing mode. *4: if the fixing temperature is 100 deg C or higher when the main power switch is tuned on, full-speed rotation; if lower than 100 deg C, stops. However, even when the fixing roller is lower than 100 deg C, half-speed rotation will be used if the temperature of th outside heating roller is 100 deg C or higher. *5: if a finisher is installed, full-speed rotation at all times; if a delivery tray or a shift tray is installed, rotates only in mono color transparency mode. (for the US mode, full-speed rotation; for non-US models, half-speed rotation) *6: rotates when the scanning lamp goes on. *7: rotates when the DF feed motor is on.
10.4 Power Supply

10.4.1 Power Supply 10.4.1.1 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer Unit
0003-2965
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The machine's DC power supply is controlled by the printer power supply PCB. The power to accessories is also controlled by the printer power supply PCB. The following shows the functions of PCBs associated with power supply:
T-10-20 Name Printer power supply PCB (DC power supply PCB + DC power supply relay PCB) Description generates DC power (24 V, 13 V); supplies DC power to the controller power supply PCB, DC controller PCB, pickup driver PCB, fixing diver PCB, highvoltage power supply PCB, reader unit, finisher, side deck, fax board.
AC driver PCB
supplies AC power to the printer power supply PCB and the fixing heater drive. turns on and off the power to the drum heater, reader heater 1, cassette heater, and deck heater*1.
Environment switch PCB
DC/DC converter PCB 1
supplies DC power to the main controller PCB and the DC controller PCB.
Main power switch Door switch Leakage breaker
turns on and off the AC power to the printer power supply PCB. turns on and off the 3 VA. cuts off power in the event of an error.
*1: in the case of the 100/230-V model, optional; in the case of the 120-V model, not available.
10-7
Chapter 10 *2: in the case of the 100-V model, standard; in the case of the 120-V model, not available.
Interlock 13 VA; AC-Relay-ON
Drawer connector
430W
Fixing main heater(H1)
AC driver
Power plug
Leakage breaker
Thermal switch 230 Thermal switch
400W
Fixing sub heater(H2)
Noise filter
AC relay
Fixing heater drive
400W
Locking heater(H3)
400W
External extra-heat heater(H4)
200 Thermal switch 250
100V,15A 120V,20A 230V,15A

Environment switch
Fuse FU101 100V/120V: 2.5A 230V: 1.25A
13VA
Relay (Normal Close) Half-wave/ full wave On/Off
Reader/lattice Reader heater *1 Slip ring

100W 2
Main switch
Drum heater driver
Drum heater(H5)
60W
Cassette heater(H7) *2 Cassette heater switch Outlet Inlet

15W
Side deck heater *1

20W
Printer power supply PCB Fuse15A 13VB All-night system

DC/DC convertor PCB 1
3.3VB 5VA 12VA 3.3VA 5VA
FAX Main controller Main controller Main controller DC controller DC controller DC controller Fixing/feed driver Fax Finisher Reader AC relay, DC relay
Non-all night system
13VA
Switch circuit
Front cover Manual feed unit Fixing/feed unit open/close switch open/close switch open/close switch
Deck lattice 24VA-1 24VA-1

Over-current detection 5A Switch circuit Over-current detection 7A
3.5K side deck DC controller (fan, scanner motor) FAX, ASSIST, CoinROBO Reader Finisher Pickup driver, Developing motor DC controller (rotation developing drive) DC controller (rotation developing drive) DC controller, HV1, HV2, HV3, Drum ITB motor Fixing/feed driver Fixing motor
24VA-1 Reader lattice 24VA-2 Finisher lattice 24VA-2 24VA-1 24VA-3 24VA-3
Over-current detection 5A
Over-current detection 5A Over-current detection 5A
30VA-3 30VA-3 24VA-3 24VA-3 24VA-3 Drawer connector
DC relay
Over-current detection 5A Over-current detection 7A Over-current detection 7A
*1: 100V/230V: Option, 120V: None *2: 100V: Standard, 230V: Option, 120V: None
F-10-5 T-10-21 Main power switch
Operating mode
Sleep
Low power
Door open
Fixing error
Print*
Main power switch all-night non-all night 13VB 13VA 24VA-1 24VA-2 24VA-3 30VA-3 DC relay AC relay
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
* same is true for standby, warm-up, and recovery.
10.4.1.2 Route of Power Supply Inside the Printer Unit

0011-4634
10-8
Chapter 10 The machine's DC power supply is controlled by the printer power supply PCB. The power to accessories is also controlled by the printer power supply PCB. The following shows the functions of PCBs associated with power supply:
T-10-22 Name Printer power supply PCB (DC power supply PCB + DC power supply relay PCB) Description generates DC power (24 V, 13 V); supplies DC power to the controller power supply PCB, DC controller PCB, pickup driver PCB, fixing diver PCB, high-voltage power supply PCB, reader unit, finisher, side deck, fax board.
AC driver PCB
supplies AC power to the printer power supply PCB and the fixing heater drive.
turns on and off the power to the drum heater, reader heater 1, cassette heater, and deck heater*1.
supplies DC power to the main controller PCB and the DC controller PCB.
Main power switch Door switch Leakage breaker
turns on and off the AC power to the printer power supply PCB. turns on and off the 3 VA. cuts off power in the event of an error.
*1: in the case of the 100/230-V model, optional; in the case of the 120-V model, not available. *2: in the case of the 100-V model, standard; in the case of the 120-V model, not available.
10-9
Chapter 10
Drawer connector
430W
Fixing main heater(H1)
AC driver
Power plug
Leakage breaker
Thermal switch 230 deg C Thermal switch
400W
Fixing sub heater(H2)
Noise filter
AC relay
Fixing heater drive
400W
Locking heater(H3)
400W
External extra-heat heater(H4)
200 deg C Thermal switch 250 deg C
100V,15A 120V,20A 230V,15A

Environment switch
Fuse FU101 100V/120V: 2.5A 230V: 1.25A
13VA
Relay (Normal Close) Half-wave/ full wave On/Off
Reader/lattice Reader heater *1 Slip ring

100W x 2
Main switch
Drum heater driver
Drum heater(H5)
60W
Cassette heater(H7) *2 Cassette heater switch 13VB Outlet Inlet

15W
Side deck heater *1

20W
Printer power supply PCB 100V/120V:15A Fuse101 230V:6.3A
FAX 3VB Main controller 5VA

12VA 3VA 5VA
Main controller Main controller DC controller DC controller DC controller Fixing/feed driver Fax Finisher Reader AC relay, DC relay
Non-all night system
13VA
Switch circuit
Front cover Manual feed unit Fixing/feed unit open/close switch open/close switch open/close switch
Deck lattice 24VA-1 24VA-1

Over-current detection 5A Switch circuit Over-current detection 7A
3.5K side deck DC controller (fan, scanner motor) FAX, ASSIST, CoinROBO Reader Finisher Pickup driver, Developing motor DC controller (rotation developing drive) DC controller (rotation developing drive) DC controller, HV1, HV2, HV3, Drum ITB motor Fixing/feed driver Fixing motor
24VA-1 Reader lattice 24VA-2 Finisher lattice 24VA-2 24VA-1 24VA-3 24VA-3
Over-current detection 5A
Over-current detection 5A Over-current detection 5A
30VA-3 30VA-3 24VA-3 24VA-3 24VA-3 Drawer connector
DC relay
Over-current detection 5A Over-current detection 7A Over-current detection 7A
*1: 100V/230V: Option, 120V: None *2: 100V: Standard, 230V: Option, 120V: None
F-10-6 T-10-23 Main power switch
Operating mode
Sleep
Low power
Door open
Fixing error
Print*
Main power switch all-night non-all night 13VB 13VA 24VA-1 24VA-2 24VA-3 30VA-3 DC relay AC relay
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF
* same is true for standby, warm-up, and recovery.
10.4.1.3 Power to the Environment Heater

0003-9458
10-10
Chapter 10
13VA: non-all night 13V Environment switch PCB Environment switch Cassette heater switch
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
AC Driver PCB
13VA RL1 N.O.
Cassette heater (H7) Side deck heater
N.C. CST_HEAT_ON
DRUM_HEAT_ON
Drum heater (H5)

13VA RL2 N.O.
N.C.
Reader heater Fuse (FU701)
F-10-7
The following shows how the environment heater is supplied with power according to the machine's different modes: (full-wave: full-wave control; half-wave: half-wave control) 1. Environment Switch OFF
T-10-24 Operating mode Main power OFF Sleep Lower power Standby Printing
Main power OFF Cassette heater switch Drum Heater Cassette Heater Reader unit Heater OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF full-wave OFF OFF ON
ON OFF full-wave OFF OFF ON full-wave ON OFF OFF half-wave OFF OFF ON half-wave OFF OFF
full-wave ON OFF
2. Environment Switch ON
T-10-25 Operating mode Main power OFF Sleep Low power Standby Printing
Main power OFF Cassette heater switch Drum Heater Casset teHeater Reader unit Heater OFF
OFF ON half-wave ON ON OFF half-wave OFF ON ON half-wave ON ON OFF full-wave OFF OFF ON
ON OFF full-wave OFF OFF ON full-wave ON OFF OFF half-wave OFF OFF ON half-wave OFF OFF
half-wave OFF ON
full-wave ON OFF
10.4.2 Rated Output of DC Power Supply PCB 10.4.2.1 Rated Output of the Printer Power Supply PCB
0003-2966
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the printer power supply PCB (DC power supply PCB + DC power supply relay PCB):
10-11
Chapter 10
T-10-26 Output All-night /non-all night Rated output Tolerance 13VA non-all night 13.2V +/- 3% 13VB all-night 13.2V +/- 3% 24VA-1 non-all night 24V +8%, -6% 24VA-2 non-all night 24V +8%, -6% 24VA-3 non-all night 24V +8%, -6%
10.4.2.2 Rated Output of the DC/DC Converter PCB 1

0003-2967
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the DC/DC converter PCB 1:
T-10-27 Output All-night /non-all night Rated output Tolerances 3VA non-all night 3.4V +/- 4% 3VB all-night 3.4V +/- 4% 5VA non-all night 5.1V +/- 3% 12VA non-all night 12V +5%, -6%

0011-4526
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the DC/DC converter PCB 1:
T-10-28 Output All-night /non-all night Rated output Tolerances 3VA non-all night 3.4V +/- 4% 3VB all-night 3.4V +/- 4% 5VA non-all night 5.1V +/- 3% 12VA non-all night 12V +5%, -6%

0003-9715
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following shows the rating and the power supply tolerances of the DC/DC converter PCB:
T-10-29 Output All-night/non-all night Rated output Tolerance 30VA-3 non-all night 30V +/- 5%
10.4.3 Protection Function 10.4.3.1 Protection of the Power Supply PCB

0003-2968
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine' s printer power supply PCB is equipped with a protective mechanism against the presence of excess current or voltage; i.e., if a short-circuit, for instance, occurs on any of the loads to cause over-current or over-voltage, the machine will automatically shut off the output voltage to protect the power supply circuit. When the protective mechanism has gone on, turn off the main power switch of the printer unit, remove the cause of the activation, leave the machine alone for about 3 min or more, and then turn it back on to reset the protective circuit.
10.4.3.2 Protection by a Fuse

0005-4708
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Some PCBs of the machine are equipped with a fuse to protect against over-current occurring in a load. The fuse will melt in the presence of over-current, thereby cutting off the output of the power line.
10-12
Chapter 10
T-10-30 PCB DC controller PCB Fuse notation FU1 Rating 2A/60V Reference voltage 13VDC Load Primary charging suction fan (FM1), Fixing heat discharge fan (FM5), Process unit cooling fan (FM7); half-speed drive
FU2
2A/60V
24VDC
Primary charging suction fan (FM1), Fixing heat discharge fan (FM5), Process unit cooling fan (FM7); full-speed drive
FU3 FU4 AC driver PCB (100 V) FU701 FU701 AC driver PCB (200 V) FU101 DC power supply PCB (100 V) FU101 DC power supply PCB (200 V) FU500 DC/DC converter PCB 1 DC power supply relay PCB FU801 FU802 Fixing/feed driver PCB FU201 FU202 FU301 FU401 FU405 FU701 FU702 Pickup driver PCB FU1 FU2
7A/60V 7A/60V 2.5A/125V 1.25A/250V 15A/250V 6.3A/250V 5A/24V 2A/60V 2A/60V 60V/1.5A 60V/1.5A 60V/1.5A 60V/1.5A 60V/3.15A 50V/800mA 50V/800mA 60V/1.5A 50V/1.0A
30VDC 30VDC 100VAC
Developing rotary motor (phase A) Developing rotary motor (phase B) Cassette heater, Deck heater
200VAC Cassette heater, Deck heater 100VAC DC power supply PCB 200VAC DC power supply PCB 13VDC 3.3V DC/DC convert pickup (on DC/DC convert PCB 1) 12VDC 12VDC(-) 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 13VDC 13VDC 24VDC 13VDC ATR sensor (through DC controller PCB) ATR sensor (through DC controller PCB) Feed fan 3, 4 (FM11, FM12) Feed fan 1, 2 (FM3, FM4) Reversal shifting solenoid (SL3), Delivery solenoid (SL5) Delivery cooling fan 1 (FM6) Secondary transfer outside roller shift motor (M20) 5V DC/DC converter circuit (on Fixing/feed driver PCB) 3.3 DC/DC converter circuit (on Fixing/feed driver PCB) not used 5V DC/DC converter circuit (on Pickup drive PCB)
10.4.4 Backup Battery 10.4.4.1 Backup Battery

0003-2969
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The SRAM PCB and the DC controller PCB of the machine's main controller PCB are equipped with a lithium battery (1 pc. each) serving as a backup source of power in the event of a power shortage or when the power plug is removed.
T-10-31
SRAM PCB DC controller PCB
manganese dioxide lithium battery (3 V, 100 mAh) lithium battery (3 V, 6000 mAh)
Life
10 yr or more (true of both; with power plug removed)
Replacement
not possible in the field on its own.
LISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Do not use a battery which is not of a type specifically indicated (same name, or equivalent). Dispose of any used battery according to the instructions of its manufacturer.
10-13
Chapter 10
10.4.5 Energy-Saving Function 10.4.5.1 SNMP setup

0012-7214
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When the machine is used as a Windows printer, enabling 'Use SNMP' causes the operating system to collect machine status information at specific intervals, preventing the machine from starting a sleep state. To avoid the situation, disable the setting (Windows' printer properties). -Disabling 'Use SNMP' 1) Select 'Configure Port' on the Ports screen (printer properties).
F-10-8
2) Remove the check mark from 'SNMP Status Enabled'.
10-14
Chapter 10
F-10-9
10-15
Chapter 10

10.5.1 External Covers 10.5.1.1 Upper Right Cover
10.5.1.1.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper)
0011-0902
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the right cover (upper) [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-10-12
10.5.1.4 Right Cover (Lower Front)

10.5.1.4.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower front)
0011-0905
[1]
F-10-10
1) Remove the right cover (lower front). - screw [1]
10.5.1.2 Right Cover (Upper Rear)

10.5.1.2.1 Removing the Right Cover (upper rear)
0011-0903
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the reader communications cable [1]. 2) Remove the right cover (upper rear) [3]. - 2 screws [2]
[2]
[1] [2]
F-10-13
[3]
10.5.1.5 Right Cover (Lower Middle)

10.5.1.5.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower middle)
0011-0906
[1]
1) Remove the right cover (lower middle) [2]. - 2 screws [1]
F-10-11
10.5.1.3 Right Cover (Lower Rear)

10.5.1.3.1 Removing the Right Cover (lower rear)
0011-0904
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the right cover (lower rear) [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1] [2] [1]
F-10-14
10.5.1.6 Upper Left Cover

10.5.1.6.1 Removing the Left Cover (upper)
0011-0907
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Remove the left cover (upper) [2]. - 3 screws [1]
10-16
Chapter 10
10.5.1.9 Rear Upper Cover

[1] [2]
10.5.1.9.1 Removing the Rear Cover (upper)

0011-0919
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the cable [2] from the 2 cable clamps [1]. 2) Remove the 2 screws [3].
[3]
F-10-15
10.5.1.7 Left Lower Cover

10.5.1.7.1 Removing the Left Cover (lower)
0011-0917
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 2 grip covers [1]. 2) Remove the left cover (lower) [3]. - 6 screws [2]
[2] [1] [2] [1] [2]
[2] [1]
F-10-18
3) Remove the rear cover (upper) [2]. - 5 screws [1]

[1]
[2]
[2] [3] [2]
F-10-16
10.5.1.8 Left Middle Cover

10.5.1.8.1 Removing the Left Cover (middle)
0011-0918
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the connector [1]. 2) Remove the left cover (middle) [3]. - 5 screws [2]
[2]
[1]
F-10-19
10.5.1.9.2 Removing the Rear Cover (upper)

0011-6490
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open four cable clamps [1] to release a reader communication cable [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-10-17
[1]
F-10-20
2) Unscrew 7 screws [1] and detach the rear cover (upper) [2].
10-17
Chapter 10
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-10-23
[1]
10.5.1.12 Reader Left Cover

F-10-21
10.5.1.10 Rear Lower Cover

10.5.1.10.1 Removing the Rear Cover (lower)
0011-0921
10.5.1.12.1 Removing the Reader Left Cover

0011-0923
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the reader left cover [2]. - 2 screw [1]
[2]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the rear cover (lower) [2]. - 7 screws[1]
[1] [2] [1]
[1]
F-10-24
10.5.1.13 Reader Front Cover

10.5.1.13.1 Before Removing the Reader Front Cover
[1]
0011-0927
F-10-22
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Copyboard Glass. (page 5-15)Reference [Removing the Copyboard Glass] 2) Remove the Right Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (upper)] 3) Remove the Reader Right Cover. (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Reader Right Cover] 4) Remove the Left Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (upper)] 5) Remove the Reader Left Cover. (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Reader Left Cover] 10.5.1.13.2 Removing the Reader Front Cover
0011-0926
10.5.1.11 Reader Right Cover

10.5.1.11.1 Removing the Reader Right Cover
0011-0922
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the reader right cover [1]. - 2 screws [1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the screw [2] each from the left/right of the reader front cover [1].
10-18
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-25
[2]
F-10-28
2) Remove the 2 connectors [1]. 3) Remove the 2 screws [2].

[1]
[1]
F-10-26
2) Remove the reader front cover [1] in upward direction.

[1]
[2]
F-10-29
4) Turn over the edge of the rubber cover [1], and remove the 2 screws [2] each; then, remove the 2 angle guide plates [3].
[1] [2]
F-10-27
10.5.1.14 Reader Rear Cover

10.5.1.14.1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover
0011-0925
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the connector [1].
F-10-30
[3]
10-19
Chapter 10 2) Release the Front Cover. 2-1) Open the front cover. 2-2) While pulling on the grip [1], fully open the manual feed cover [2] to the front.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-10-31
[1]
F-10-34
5) Fully open the ADF. 6) Remove the 3 screws [1], and move the reader rear cover [2] toward the rear to remove.
If a side paper deck exists, remove the 2 screws [1] and the latch plate (front). Take care not to damage the ADF open/closed sensor arm [3]
[3] [2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-10-32 F-10-35
[2]
10.5.1.15 Delivery Cover

10.5.1.15.1 Removing the Delivery Cover
0011-0929
[1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the delivery cover [2]. - 3 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-36
[2]
F-10-33
10.5.2 Hopper Drive Unit 10.5.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Hopper Drive Assembly
0011-1512
[1] [2]
F-10-37
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Right Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (upper)]
10-20
Chapter 10
[1]
[2]
F-10-38
F-10-42
[1]
[1]
F-10-43
[1] [2]
F-10-39
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-44
F-10-40
[1]
[2] [1]
[2]
F-10-45 F-10-41
10-21
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
F-10-46
[1]
F-10-49
0003-6713
10.5.2.2 Removing the Hopper Drive Assembly

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the black toner supply cover [1], and remove the 2 screws [1]; then, remove the hopper inside cover [3].
[2]
4) Remove the hopper drive assembly [2]. - 6 screws [1]

[1] [1]
[3]
[2]
F-10-50
10.5.3 Power Cord Base

[1]
F-10-47
10.5.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Power Cord Base

0011-1589
2) Remove pipe cover [2]. - screw [1]

[2]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 2) Remove the Left Cover (lower). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (lower)]
10.5.3.2 Removing the Power Cord Base

0004-5214
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 4 screws [1] from the left side.
[1]
F-10-48
3) Remove the toner feed pipe [2]. - 3 screws [1]
[1]
F-10-51
2) Open the 3 wire saddles [2]. - 4 connectors [1]
10-22
Chapter 10
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-55
[1]
[1]
F-10-52
3) Open the wire saddle [2]. - 8 connectors [1]

[1] [1]
[2]
F-10-56
[2]
[1]
F-10-53
[1]
4) Remove the AC driver box [2]. - 3 screws [1]
[1]
F-10-57
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-54
10.5.4 Control Panel 10.5.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Control Panel
0011-1591
F-10-58
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Right Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (upper)] 2) Release the Hopper Assembly. 2-1) Open the black toner supply cover [1].
10-23
Chapter 10 / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci

[2]
1) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 2) Move the DC Controller Box. 2-1) Remove the DC controller cover [2]. - 9 screws [1]
[1] [2]
[1]
F-10-59
3) Remove the Reader Left Cover. (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Reader Left Cover]
[1]
10.5.4.2 Removing the Control Panel

0003-4090
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the control panel inside cover [3]. - 2 screws [1] - connector [1]
[3]
[1]
F-10-63
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
F-10-60
[1]
[1]

[1]
F-10-64
10.5.5.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB

0003-6223
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 33 connectors [1], and remove the 10 screws [2]; then, as necessary, open the cable guide.
[2] [1] [2] [1] [2]
[1]
F-10-61
3) Move the control panel [1] in the direction of the arrow to remove.
[1]
[1] [1]
[1] [2] [1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-65
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
2) Remove the DC controller PCB.
10.5.5.3 Points to Note When Mounting the DC Controller PCB

0005-7177
F-10-62
10.5.5 DC Controller PCB 10.5.5.1 Preparation for Removing the DC Controller PCB
0011-1592
During assembly work, be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: - Connect the connector of the harness [1] first, and then the other harness [2]. - Fix the harnesses [1] [2] in place using the wire saddle [3] so that the harness [1] is on the left side of the harness [2].
10-24
Chapter 10
[3]
[4]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[3] [2] [1]
[4] [3]
[2] [1] [1]
[1]
[1]
[3] [2]
F-10-66 F-10-68
[4]
[5]
[1]
10.5.7 Leakage Breaker 10.5.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Leakage Breaker
0011-1598
Supplementary Information: If the harness [1] is away from the side plate [4] of the DC controller box, wrong detection (E070-0102) of the ITB home position tends to occur because of noise.
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 2) Remove the Left Cover (lower). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (lower)] 3) Remove the Power Cord Base. 3-1) Remove the 4 screws [1] from the left side.
10.5.6 Printer Power Supply PCB 10.5.6.1 Preparation for Removing the DC Power Supply Unit
0011-1596
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)]
10.5.6.2 Removing the DC Power Supply Unit

0011-5602
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and remove the harness [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-69

[1] [2]
F-10-67
2) Open the 3 wire saddles [2] to remove the harness [3]. - 16 connectors [1] 3) Remove the DC power supply unit [5]. - 4 screws [4]
[1]
F-10-70
3-3) Open the wire saddle [2]. - 8 connectors [1]
10-25
Chapter 10
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-10-74
10.5.8 Fixing Relay

[1]
F-10-71
[1]
3-4) Remove the AC driver box [2]. - 3 screws [1]
10.5.8.1 Preparation for Removing the DC/DC converter PCB2

0011-1653
[1]
10.5.8.2 Removing the DC/DC converter PCB2

0004-5254
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 2 connectors [1].
[2]
[1]
F-10-72
10.5.7.2 Removing the Leakage Breaker

0003-5822
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 4 fastons [1].
[1]
[1]
F-10-75
[1]
2) Remove the DC/DC converter PCB2 [2]. - 4 screws [1]

[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-73
2) Remove the leakage breaker [2]. - 2 screws [1]

F-10-76
[1]
10.5.9 Relay PCB 10.5.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Relay PCB
0011-1605
10.5.9.2 Removing the Relay PCB

0003-6696
10-26
Chapter 10 / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the relay PCB [3]. - 20 connectors [1] - 6 screws [2]
[2] [1] [2] [1] [2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[1] [2]
[2]
[2]
F-10-77
[4]
[3]
[1]
F-10-79
10.5.10 DC Relay 10.5.10.1 Preparation for Removing the DC Relay

0011-1609
4) Remove the cable [3] from the cable guide [2]. - 2 connectors [1] 5) Release the hook [3], and remove the lid [4].
[2] [1] [3]
10.5.10.2 Removing the DC Relay

0004-1296
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the 8 fastons [1]. 2) Pull the leaf spring [2] to the front, and remove the relay [3].
[1] [3]
[5]
F-10-80
[4]
[1]
6) Remove the cable from the cable guide [2]. - 5 connectors [1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-10-78
10.5.11 HV1 PCB 10.5.11.1 Preparation for Removing the HV1 PCB
0011-1611
[1]
F-10-81
[2]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 3) Remove the Right Cover (upper rear). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (upper rear)] 4) Remove the Right Cover (lower rear). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Right Cover (lower rear)]
7) Lift the HV1 PCB [2] to remove. - 2 screws [1]
10.5.11.2 Removing the HV1 PCB

0003-8715
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the 3 wire saddles [1], and remove the 2 cables [2]. 2) Remove the screw [3]. 3) Release the hook [4].
10-27
Chapter 10
[1]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[4]
[2]
F-10-82
F-10-85
0011-1623 0011-1620
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Left Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Delivery cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 3) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Secondary Transfer Unit. 1-1) Open the front cover. 1-2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 1-3) While pressing the 2 hooks [1] frond on both sides of the fixing/feeding assembly, slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2] fully.

0003-6982
[2] [1]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the harness [2] from the cable guide [3]. - connector [1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
F-10-86
F-10-83
2) Remove the delivery cooling fan [2] together with its base. - 3 screws [1]
1-4) Remove the the connector cover [2]. -screw [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-87
[2]
[1]
F-10-84
3) Remove the harness from the cable guide [3]. - 5 connectors [1] 4) Remove the HV2 PCB [5]. - 2 screws [4]
10-28
Chapter 10
[1]
F-10-88
[1]
F-10-92
[2]
1-6) Remove the 2 stepped screws [1].

[1]
3) Remove the HV3 PCB [3]. - 3 connectors [1] - 3 screws [2]

[1]
F-10-89
1-7) While moving the secondary transfer unit [1], remove the 2 connectors [2]; then, remove the secondary transfer unit.
[1]
F-10-93
[2]
[3]
10.5.14 Fixing/Feed Driver PCB 10.5.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing/Feed Driver PCB
[2]
0011-1626
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Removing the Fixing/Feeding Driver PCB. 1-1) Open the front cover. 1-2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 1-3) Remove the handle [2]. - screw [1] 1-4) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover [4]. - 2 screws [3]
0004-0911
F-10-90

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the registration guide unit [3]. - connector [1] - 4 screws [2]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[2]
F-10-94
[3]
[1]
F-10-91
[3]
2) Remove the cover [2]. - screw [1]
10-29
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
B A
[1]
F-10-95
[2]
[2]
F-10-98
1-9) Remove the connector [1] using a pair of precision pliers. Thereafter, remove the 2 connectors [2], and remove the fixing/feed driver base [3].
[1] [1]
F-10-96
[2]
[3]

[1]
F-10-99
10.5.14.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeding Driver PCB

0003-7025
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the fixing/feeding driver PCB [2]. - 4 screws [1]
[1] [2] [1]
[1]
F-10-97
[1]
F-10-100
10.5.15 Pickup Driver PCB 10.5.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Pickup Driver PCB
0011-1629
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 2) Remove the DC Power Supply Unit. 2-1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and free the harness [2].
10-30
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-101
2-2) Open the 3 wire saddles [2] to free the harness [3]. - 16 connectors [1] 2-3) Remove the DC power supply unit [5]. - 4 screws [4]
[4] [1] [4]
F-10-104
2) Remove the switch PCB [2]. - screw [1]
[3] [2] [1] [2] [1] [1]

[2]
[1]
[1]
F-10-105
10.5.17 Primary Exhaust Fan

[4] [5] [1]
F-10-102
10.5.15.2 Removing the Pickup Driver PCB

0003-5797
10.5.17.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Exhaust Fan

0011-1631
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Free the PCB support [3]; then, remove the pickup drive PCB [4]. - 7 connectors [1] - 5 screws [2]
[2] [1] [1] [3] [1]
[1] [2]
[2] [2] [1]
[1] [2]
F-10-103
[1]
[4] [2]
10.5.16 Switch PCB 10.5.16.1 Preparation for Removing the Switch PCB
0011-1630
[1]
F-10-106
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 2) Remove the Left Cover (lower). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (lower)]
10.5.16.2 Removing the Switch PCB

0003-6693
10-31
Chapter 10
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[1]
F-10-107
[1]
[2]
[3] [2]
F-10-111
[1]
10.5.17.2 Removing the Primary Exhaust Fan

0003-6583
F-10-108
[2] [3] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [1] [1] [2] [1] [1] [2] [2] [1] [3] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [1] [2] [1] [2] [3]
1) Open the 2 cable guides [2]. - connector [1]

[1] [2]
F-10-112
F-10-109
2) Remove the primary exhaust fan [2] together with the duct. - 3 screws [1]
[1]
[1]
F-10-110
[2] [1]
F-10-113
3) Open the cable guide [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, remove the primary exhaust fan [3].
10-32
Chapter 10
[3]
[1]
[1]
F-10-117
[2] [1]
F-10-114
10.5.18 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 10.5.18.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan
0011-1639
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (upper). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 3) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 4) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)] 5) Remove the Controller Box Cover. 5-1) Remove the controller box cover [2]. -2 screws [1]
[1]
F-10-118
6-2) Remove the harness from the 3 harness retainers [1].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-10-119
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-115
F-10-120
6-3) Remove the 9 screws [1] used to attach the main controller box.
[1]
F-10-116
6) Remove the Controller Box. 6-1) Remove the 9 connectors [1].
10-33
Chapter 10
[1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-125 F-10-121
10.5.18.2 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan

0003-6619
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the fixing heat discharge ozonefilter [1].
[1]
[1]
F-10-122
[1]
F-10-126
2) Remove the duct [3]. - connector [1] - 5 screws [2]

[1] [2] [3]
F-10-123
6-4) Move the main controller box [1] toward the delivery side to remove.
[2]
F-10-127
[1]
3) Remove the fixing heat discharge fan [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
[2]
F-10-124
[1]
[3]
F-10-128
10-34
Chapter 10
10.5.19 Power Supply Cooing Fan

[3]
10.5.19.1 Preparation for Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan

0011-1643
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Rear Cover (lower). (page 10-18)Reference [Removing the Rear Cover (lower)] 2) Remove the DC Power Supply Unit. 2-1) Open the 2 wire saddles [1], and remove the harness [2].
[2]
[1]
F-10-132
[1]
[2]
10.5.20 Delivery Cooling Fan 1 10.5.20.1 Preparation for Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 1
0011-1644
F-10-129
[4] [1] [4]
1) Remove the Left Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 3) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)]
10.5.20.2 Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 1

0004-1048
[3] [2] [1] [2] [1] [1]
[2]
1) Remove the harness [2] from the cable guide [3]. - connector [1]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[1]
F-10-130
10.5.19.2 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan

0003-5611
[3]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the power supply unit upper cover [2]. - 2 screws [1]
[1] [2] [1]
F-10-133
2) Remove the delivery cooling fan [2]. - 3 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
F-10-131
[1]
F-10-134
2) Remove the power supply cooling fan [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
3) Remove the harness [2] from the cable guide [3]. - connector [1] 4) Remove the delivery cooling fan 1.
10-35
Chapter 10 - 2 screws [4]

[3] [1]
[4] [3] [2] [3] [1]
F-10-135
10.5.21 Delivery Cooling Fan 2 10.5.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 2
0011-1647
[2]
F-10-138
10.5.22 Ozone Filter 10.5.22.1 Removing the Ozone Filter

0003-3764
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the face cover [1] from the right cover (upper rear).
[1]
[1]
F-10-136
[2]
[2] [1]
F-10-139
2) Pull out the filter holder [1].

[1]
[3]
F-10-137
[2]
10.5.21.2 Removing the Delivery Cooling Fan 2

0004-1050
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the delivery cooling fan 2 [3]. - connector [1] - 2 screws [2]
F-10-140
3) Remove the ozone filter [2] from the filter holder [1].
10-36
Chapter 10
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-141
10.5.22.2 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Ozone Filter

0005-0740
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the rear cover (lower) [2]. - 7 screws [1]
[1] [2] [1]
F-10-144
2) Pull out the filter holder [1].

[1]
F-10-145
3) Remove the toner filter [2] from the filter holder [1].
[1]
F-10-142
2) Remove the fixing heat discharge ozone filter [1].
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-143
F-10-146
10.5.24 Sub Toner Filter 10.5.24.1 Preparation for Removing the Sub Toner Filter
0011-1649 0003-4092
10.5.23 Toner Filter 10.5.23.1 Removing the Toner Filter

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Remove the face cover [1] from the upper rear upper cover.
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the Left Cover (upper). (page 10-16)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (upper)] 2) Remove the Delivery Cover. (page 10-20)Reference [Removing the Delivery Cover] 3) Remove the Left Cover (middle). (page 10-17)Reference [Removing the Left Cover (middle)] 4) Remove the HV2 PCB. 4-1) Remove the harness [2] from the cable guide [3]. - connector [1]
10-37
Chapter 10
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-10-147
4-2) Remove the delivery cooling fan [2] together with its base. - 3 screws [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-10-148
4-3) Remove the harness from the cable guide [3]. - 5 connectors [1] 4-4) Remove the HV2 PCB [5]. - 2 screws [4]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[4]
F-10-149
10.5.24.2 Removing the Sub Toner Filter

0005-7961
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Remove the sub toner filter [1].
[1]
F-10-150
10-38
Chapter 11 MEAP
Contents
Contents
11.1 MEAP.........................................................................................................................................................................11-1
11.1.1 Checking the Operating Environment. .................................................................................................................................... 11-1 11.1.2 Setting Up the Network ........................................................................................................................................................... 11-4 11.1.3 Setting the method to login to SMS ......................................................................................................................................... 11-5 11.1.4 Login to SMS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 11-8 11.1.5 Checking Application List ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-10 11.1.6 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application .......................................................................................................................... 11-11 11.1.7 Checking the Platform Information ....................................................................................................................................... 11-12 11.1.8 MEAP Specifications............................................................................................................................................................. 11-13 11.1.9 Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS ................................................................................. 11-15 11.1.10 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application................................................................................................... 11-15 11.1.11 Reference (Application System Information) ...................................................................................................................... 11-16 11.1.12 Installing an Application...................................................................................................................................................... 11-17 11.1.13 MEAP Enterprise Service Manager..................................................................................................................................... 11-20 11.1.14 Adding a License File .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-20 11.1.15 Disabling a License File (suspending a license) .................................................................................................................. 11-22 11.1.16 Downloading/Removing an Invalidated License File.......................................................................................................... 11-24 11.1.17 Reusable license................................................................................................................................................................... 11-26 11.1.18 License for forwarding......................................................................................................................................................... 11-27 11.1.19 Uninstalling an Application ................................................................................................................................................. 11-29 11.1.20 Changing Login Services ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-30 11.1.21 Initializing the Password...................................................................................................................................................... 11-34 11.1.22 Creating a Backup for MEAP Application Area, Formatting the Hard Disk, Restoring the MEAP Application Area with the Backup, Using the SST (Service Support Tool)........................................................................................................................... 11-35 11.1.23 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive............................................................................................................................................ 11-37 11.1.24 MEAP Safe Mode ................................................................................................................................................................ 11-37 11.1.25 Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2)............................................................................................................. 11-38 11.1.26 Reference material ............................................................................................................................................................... 11-41 11.1.27 Option for exclusive individual measure ............................................................................................................................. 11-42
Chapter 11
11.1 MEAP
11.1.1 Checking the Operating Environment.
0018-0809
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci This section lists the requirements on the operating environment for the maintenance.
Memo: Java Script must be enabled in every environment. Important: For the following operations in the combined environment of Windows XP and Internet Explorer6, Java2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1.3.1 or later is required. - User registration / edit in SDL - User registration / edit in SSO local device - Use of SSO remote login in SSO
Remote Login of Default Authentication or Simple Device Login (SDL), Remote UI, and Portal Services Remote Login of Default Authentication or Simple Device Login (SDL), Remote UI, and Portal Services guarantee operation under the following system environment.
T-11-1 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 SE Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a Microsoft Windows ME Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP3 Supported browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 Gold Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 - 5.1.6 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.2.2
Microsoft Windows XP Professional / Home Mac OS 8.6 - 9.x Mac OS X 10 - 10.2.4
Remote UI (RUI) RUI guarantees operation under the following system environment.
T-11-2 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 SE Microsoft Windows ME Microsoft Windows NT Workstartion 4.0 Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows XP MacOS 8.6 or later Supported browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2 or later Netscape Communicator 4.6 or later
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later
SMS SMS guarantees operation under the following system environment.

T-11-3 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 SE Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows XP Supported browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1
11-1
Chapter 11 SDL and SSO with Local Devoce Authentication (user registration/edit functions) For user registration / edit in SDL and SSO(with Local Authentication), following system requirements must be satisfied. System environment for administrator
T-11-4 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 SE Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP3 Microsoft Windows XP Supported browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1
System environment for end user

T-11-5 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 SE Microsoft Windows NT Workstation4.0 Microsoft Windows ME Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Supported browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0.1 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0.1 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
SSO domain authentication environment Windows server for Security Agent to be installed Security Agent (hereinafter SA) guarantees operation in the following system environment.
T-11-6 Memory Hardware Hard disk CPU 256MB or more Empty capacity of 15MB or more Processor more than Intel Celeron 800 MHz corresponding Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP4 Microsoft Windows 2000 Server SP4 Software OS Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP2 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP1 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Microsoft Windows 2000 Server SP4 Corresponding Active Directory Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP1 * Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 *
* Construction of SSO domain environment by using Active Directory of Microsoft Windows Server 2003 needs SA of version 2.0.1 or newer, SSO Login application of version 3.0.0 or newer.
Combination list of the versions of SSO Login application of MEAP device and SA
T-11-7 Product Nameof MEAP Device US EU AO Version Version of SA of SSO V1.1.0 V1.2.0 Login Applicati on V1.1.0 A A
V1.3.0
V1.3.1
V2.0.0
V2.0.1
V3.0.1
iR5020/ iR5020i/ iR6020/ iR6020i
iR5020N/ iR5020i/ iR6020N/ iR5020i/ iR6020i iR6020i
11-2
Chapter 11
Product Nameof MEAP Device US EU AO Version Version of SA of SSO V1.1.0 V1.2.0 Login Applicati on V1.1.0 A A
V1.3.0
V1.3.1
V2.0.0
V2.0.1
V3.0.1
iR2220i/ iR2220N/ iR3320i/ iR3320N iR C3220/ iR C2620
iR2220i/ iR2220N/ iR3320i/ iR2220i/ iR3320i iR3320N iR C3220/ iR C2620 iR C3220/ iR C2620
V1.1.1
iR 2270/ iR 2870/ iR 3035/ iR 2270 / iR 2870/ iR 3035/ iR 3045 iR 3045 iR85+/ iR8070/ iR105+/ iR9070 iR 5570/ iR 6570 iR C3170U/ iR C3170i iR85+/ iR8070/ iR105+/ iR9070 iR 5570 / 6570 iR 3170C/ iR 3170Ci/ iR C2570/ iR C2570i iR 5870C/ iR 5870Ci/ iR 6870C/ iR 6870Ci iR7086/ iR7095/ iR7095 P/ iR7105 iR C4080/ iR C4080N/ iR C4580/ iR C4580N/ iR C5180/ iR C5180N
iR 2270 /2870/3035/3045 iR85+/ iR8070/ iR105+/ iR9070 iR 5570 / 6570 iR C3170/ iR C3170i/ iR C2570/ iR C2570i iR C5870/ iR C5870i/ iR C6870/ iR C6870i iR7086/ iR7095/ iR7095P/ iR7105 iR C4080/ iR C4080N/ iR C4580/ iR C4580N/ iR C5180/ iR C5180N
V1.1.2 V2.2.7 V1.1.3 V2.2.7 V2.0.0, V2.2.9 V2.2.6
A A A A A A
A A A A A A
A A A A A A
A A A A A A
A B A B B B
A B A B B B
A B A B B B
iR C5870U/ iR C6870U iR7086/ iR7095/ iR7095 Printer/ iR7105 iR C5180i/ iR C4580i/ iR C4080i
V2.4.0 V2.5.0 V3.9.0 V3.0.0
A A A A
A A A A
A A A A
A A A A
B B B B
B B C C
B B C C
imagePRESS C1 iR C2880/ iR C3380 iR3025/ iR3030/ iR3035/ iR3045 iR 5055/ iR 5065/ iR 5075 iR C5185 imagePRESS C7000VP iR 5050 iR C5058/ C5068/ C6880i
imagePRESS C1 iR C2880 / C3380 iR3025/ iR3030/ iR3035/ iR3045 iR 5055/ iR 5065/ iR 5075 iR C5185 imagePRESS C7000VP iR 3180C/ iR3180Ci iR C5880/ C5880i/ C6880/ C6880i
imagePRESS C1 iR C2880 / C3380 iR3025/ iR3030/ iR3035/ iR3045 iR 5055/ iR 5065/ iR 5075 iR C5185 imagePRESS C7000VP iR C3180i / iR C2580i iR C5880/ C6880/ C6880i
V3.1.0 V3.2.0 V3.4.1 V3.5.0 V3.6.0 V3.8.0 V3.9.0 V3.9.0 V3.9.0
A A A A A A A A A
A A A A A A A A A
A A A A A A A A A
A A A A A A A A A
B B B B B B B B B
C C C C C C C C C
C C C C C C C C C
A = SSO basic function support B = SSO basic function + Multi domain function + LLS cache function support C = SSO basic function + Multi domain function + LLS cache function support + Server 2003 Active Directory support Memo: -It must improve in the version of SSO Login application and version of SA when you want to use the function B or C. -The right of access to the domain controller and the right of access to the Windows 2003 DNS are necessary, when the domain authentication is used with SSO. Important: -The device using SSO authentication and the Windows server on which Security Agent is installed must exists in the same domain. -In the case that Security Agent has been installed in Windows XP Professional SP2, Windows Server 2003 SP1/Server 2003 R2 and Windows Firewall is set enabled, Security Agent (SA.exe) needs to be added as an exceptional program of Windows Firewall. If not being designated a directory of installation, SA.exe is stored in the following directory. C:\Program Files\Canon\SSOPackage\SecurityAgent -In the case that Active Directory has been constructed in Windows Server 2003 SP1/Server 2003 R2 and Windows Firewall is set enabled, TCP port '5678' used by Security Agent needs to be added in Windows Firewall.
Browser The following combinations of operations are guaranteed for the access from Web browser to MEAP device.
T-11-8 OS Microsoft Windows 98SE Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a Microsoft Windows ME Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP3 Supported Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2, Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2, Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2, Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP3, Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2, Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1, Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1,
Microsoft Windows XP Professional
11-3
Chapter 11
11.1.2 Setting Up the Network

0018-0817
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci To allow a MEAP device to accept accesses through the network, for example you operate a device with SMS, the On option must be selected on Use HTTP screen. The option is selected by default. The setting can be changed on the control panel of the MEAP device. 1) Make the following selections: Ad Func button > System Settings button> Down-arrow button. Memo: If the System manager ID and system password have already been assigned, ID Entry dialog appears after System Settings button is pressed. Enter the system manager ID and the password, and click ID key to go into System Management Mode.
F-11-1
2) Make the following selections: MEAP Settings button > Use HTTP button> On button > OK button .
F-11-2
Memo: When using SSL, set [Use SSL] ON. (This setting is also applied to the SSL setting of RUI. Same is true in the case of setting SSL ON on the side of RUI.) Setting [Use SSL] ON displays the message dialogue 'Changes effective after the main power switch is turned OFF and ON' . Press [OK].
F-11-3
11-4
Chapter 11
3) Press Done button as many times as necessary until the Basic screen appears. 4) Turn off the device's main power; wait for 10 sec, and then turn the power back on.
- The setting [Use HTTP] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have turned off and then on the device's main power switch. - You cannot make a connection through a proxy server. If a proxy server is in use, enter the IP address of the MEAP device in the Exceptions field for the browser. Open Internet Options dialog of Internet Explorer and select Connections tab, LAN Settings button, Use a proxy server option, and Advanced button of Proxy server group. Proxy Settings dialog will opens. The Exceptions field is in the dialog. As network settings vary among environments, consult the network administrator. - If Cookie and JavaScript are not enabled in the Web browser, you will not be able to use SMS. - To type text using the Web browser, use the characters compatible with the MEAP device's touch panel display. The MEAP device may not properly recognize some characters. - When [se SSL] is made available, it is necessary to set the key and the certificate necessary for the SSL communication. Set the key and the certificate by SSL with [Certificate Settings] that exists in [System Settings] > [Network Settings] > [TCP/IP Settings] on the iR device.
11.1.3 Setting the method to login to SMS

0018-0818
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci SMS Installer Service, which is used to login SMS includes Password Authentication and Remote Login Service Authentication (henceforce: RLS Authentication). Password Authentication is an authentication method only by password. RLS Authentication is an authentication method using SDL / SSO by ID and password. Either or both of the authentication methods can be enabled by changing the setting. Memo: If Default Authentication is selected as the device authentication method, 'RLS Authentication' is not selectable as SMS Login method. Also, if 'RLS Authentication' is selected, the device authentication method (Default Authentication, SDL, SSO) cannot be changed. Setting of login method to SMS (Start/Stop) must be made after logging-in by the other login method. In other words, setting for Start/Stop of Password Authentication is made after logging-in with RLS Authentication, and setting for Start/Stop of RLS Authentication is made after logging-in with Password Authentication. The table below shows the setting methods for each combination of login method and Start/Stop.
T-11-9 Start RLS Authentication Start Password Authentication Stop Password Authentication Login available with either method Login available only with RLS Authentication Stop RLS Authentication Login available only with Password Authentication Setting unavailable
When only RLS Authentication is enabled, there may be a case you cannot login to device for the following reasons. - Authentication server down - Disconnection with authentication server due to network failure In these cases, boot the device as MEAP SAFE mode from device service mode. By booting the device as MEAP SAFE mode, login to SMS becomes available as Default Authentication is enabled. After login to SMS, set RLS Authentication as Started, return the device to normal mode, and then login by RLS Authentication.
Setting for login by Password Authentication 1) In order to make a setting for login by Password Authentication, you need to login by RLS Authentication. Therefore, login by RLS Authentication. Login screen (In case authentication method is SSO)
11-5
Chapter 11
F-11-4
2) Select 'System Management' tab > 'Utility' tab > 'Application Management Function' tab.
F-11-5
3) In order to enable login by Password Authentication, tick SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) radio button and then click [Start]. On the other hand, in order to disable login by Password Authentication, clear the tick of SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) radio button and click [Stop].
F-11-6
4) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly. In case the setting is changed from 'Stop' to 'Start', login screen that was not seen before is displayed. In case the setting is changed from 'Start' to 'Stop', access to login screen leads to the screen below and login becomes unavailable. Login error screen
11-6
Chapter 11
F-11-7
Setting for login by RLS Authentication 1) In order to make a setting for Login by RLS Authentication, you need to Login by Password Authentication. Login screen by Password Authentication
F-11-8
2) Select 'System Management' tab > 'Utility' tab > 'Application Management Function' tab.
F-11-9
3) In order to enable Login by RLS Authentication, tick SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication) radio button and then click [Start]. On the other hand, in order to disable login by RLS Authentication, clear the tick of SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication) radio button and click [Stop].
11-7
Chapter 11
F-11-10
4) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly. In case the setting is changed from 'Stop' to 'Start', login screen that was not seen before is displayed. In case the setting is changed from 'Start' to 'Stop', access to login screen leads to the screen below and Login becomes unavailable. Login error screen
F-11-11
11.1.4 Login to SMS

0018-0819
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Login by Password Authentication 1) Access SMS from the browser of the PC connected to the network on which the MEAP device operates. URL: http://<MEAP Device IP address>:8000/sms/ Ex.) http://172.16.188.240:8000/sms/ Memo: - The default password is "MeapSmsLogin." (The password is case-sensitive.) - When you want to change the display original language, change in the box in the right of the screen. This setting is not affect by the setting of the language of the device.
11-8
Chapter 11
F-11-12
2) The following screen appears if the password has been changed by the user's system administrator. If so, check with the system administrator for the new password. Keep in mind that there is no special password offered for service work.
F-11-13
Login by RLS Authentication 1) Access SMS by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network as the MEAP device. URL: http://<IP address of MEAP device>:8000/sms/rls/ Ex.) http://172.16.188.240:8000/sms/rls
Memo: - In case the device authentication method is SSO and login to domain, enter User Name, Password, and Login Destination registered in Active Directory, and click 'Log in'. - In case the device authentication method is SDL or SSO and login to 'this device', enter User Name and Password registered in the device and click 'Log in'.
In the case the device authentication method is SSO
11-9
Chapter 11
F-11-14
In the case the device authentication method is SDL
F-11-15
11.1.5 Checking Application List

0018-0820
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The page of Application List is designed to show resources arranged according to applications. The page gives you a good idea of how much of the device's memory is being used by the applications (both in absolute and relative terms) as well as how much memory still remains. Check this page before adding an application. The information is collected from the manifest (headers) - in other words, the size of a resource represents the size as it is declared by the application in question, not necessarily the size of resources actually used by the application. The items of information include the following: - hard disk - memory - thread - socket - file descriptor You will not be able to install an application if the size of the remaining memory falls short of the size declared by the application. Moreover, the specifications have been designed so that an application will not be able to start up if there is a shortage of memory for any of the foregoing items (i.e., memory, thread, socket, file descriptor). To find out if there is enough memory, go through the following steps: 1) Log in to SMS. 2) Click Application List tab. 3) Check the displayed information: a. Information on Applications - Name (of the application) - Installation (date) - Application ID - Status - License - Resources Used b. Resource Information - Amount Used - Remaining - Percent Used
11-10
Chapter 11
F-11-16
11.1.6 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application

0018-0821
iR 5800C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Log in to the SMS. 2) Click 'Application List'. 3) Click the radio button of the MEAP application in question, and click 'Start' or 'Stop'.
F-11-17
4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either "Started" or "Stopped."
11-11
Chapter 11
F-11-18
11.1.7 Checking the Platform Information

0018-0822
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci You can check the versions of MEAP Contents, MEAP Specifications, and Java Virtual Machine of the device.
Some applications may not be installed to some MEAP devices of specific specifications. (See 'MEAP Specifications'). 1) Log in to SMS. 2) Click System Management tab.
F-11-19
3) Click System Info tab.
11-12
Chapter 11
F-11-20
11.1.8 MEAP Specifications

0018-0823
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)? MEAP Specifications is one of the information required to judge whether MEAP applications can be operated or not. With MEAP Specifications, you can prevent an application that uses a specific function of device from being installed onto the device that does not have the function.
About Name MEAP Specification is shown as 'MEAP Specifications' in the screen to check the version on the side of device that supports MEAP (counter confirmation button) and MEAP platform (SMS). On the other hand, in the manifest file of MEAP application, it is shown as 'MeapSpecVersion' (described in the same way in the SDK document) (Note) 'MEAP Specifications' hereafter in this document.
Mechanism MEAP platform judges whether MEAP applications can be operated on it using on the 2 information below: - Device Specification ID - MEAP Specifications Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP (including print, scan, and copy), and one that differs by model such as maximum copy number, thus each model has a different ID. (It is easy to determine the IDs for this reason.) MEAP application declares 1 or more Device Specification ID required for its execution. Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the models declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in (using) SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service Manager, matching of Device Specification ID is executed on the side of MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the ID declared by the application rejects installation of such an application. Meanwhile, MEAP Specifications shows other information than defined by Device Specification ID above, including network and security. Thus each model does not always have the same version. MEAP application declares 1 or more MEAP Specifications required for its execution. Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the environments declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service Manager, matching of MEAP Specifications is executed on the side of MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the version declared by the application rejects installation of such an application.
MEAP Spec Version for each model

T-11-10 Product Name iR 6020 iR 5020 iR 3320 iR 2220 iR C3220 iR C2620 iR 4570 iR 2870 iR 2270 iR 3570 iR85+ iR 8070 USA Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y EUR Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y OCE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y SPL Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y KOR Y Y Y 5 5, 6, 7 (System v10.xx later) 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 5 5 5 5 5, 6, 7 (System v30.xx later) 5, 6, 7 (System v30.xx later) 5, 6, 7 (System v30.xx later) 5, 6, 7 (System v30.xx later) Initial MEAPSpecVer Change information
11-13
Chapter 11
Product Name iR 105+ iR 9070 iR 6570 iR 5570 iR C3170 iR C2570 iR C3180 iR C2580 iR 7105 iR 7095 iR 7086 iR 7095P iR 7095Printer iR C6870 iR C5870 iR C5180 CLC5151 iR C4580 CLC4040 iR C4080 iR C5185 imagePRESS C1 iR C3380 iR C2880 iR 3025 iR 3045 iR 3035 iR 3030 iR 5050 iR 5055 iR 5065 iR 5075 imagePRESS C7000VP iR C5058 iR C5068 iR C5880 iR C5880i iR C6880 iR C6880i USA Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y EUR Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y OCE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y SPL Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y KOR Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11 Initial MEAPSpecVer 5 5 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15,17,18 5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15,17,18 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 (System v50.xx later) Change information 5, 6, 7 (System v10.xx later) 5, 6, 7 (System v10.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9 (System v20.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9 (System v20.xx later)
* Due to the change in I/F specifications, these models support '5' only.
T-11-11
MEAP Spec Version

MEAP Spec Version 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 13 Description MEAP basic function MEAP Spec Version 1 function and SSL/TSL + Proxy [Reserved] MEAP Spec Version 1 function and CPCA V2 + ERS (Error Recovery Service) + New SSL/TSL [Reserved] MEAP Spec Version 5 function and Compact PDF + OCR PDF(Text Searchable) + USB-Host(Buffering of Interrupt Transfer) [Reserved] MEAP Spec Version 5 function and USB-Host(Exception + ClearFeature + SetFeature + HotPlug) + WINS address acquisition using MIBAgent + TimerService + SSL client authentication MEAP Spec Version 5 function and AMS MEAP Spec Version 5 function and J2ME1.1 Support + Encrypted PDF + Trace and smooth PDF + CTK2.0
11-14
Chapter 11
MEAP Spec Version 14 15 17 18 Description Device signature PDF IMI + ERS (API addition for IMI) Acquiring images of JBIG format Parsing XML documents (XML parser)
11.1.9 Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS

0018-0824
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Log in to SMS. 2) Click System Management tab. 3) On System Management screen, click System Info tab. 4) Click Details button.
F-11-21
5) When the following status information of MEAP applications (including the system application) appears in a different window, copy and paste all information to create an attachment (text information) for preparing a problem report. You can also use this function whenever you want to check the status of any particular application.
F-11-22
11.1.10 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application

0018-0825
11-15
Chapter 11
1) Make the following selections: Additional Functions button > System Settings button> the down-arrow button. Memo: If the System manager ID and system password have already been assigned, ID Entry dialog appears after System Settings button is pressed. Enter the system manager ID and the password, and click ID key.
F-11-23
2) Make the following selections: MEAP Settings button > Print System Information button >Yes button.
F-11-24
3) Press Done button as many times as necessary until the Basic screen appears. 4) Turn off the MEAP device's main power; wait for 10 sec, and then turn the power back on. Important: The previous version of printing function for MEAP application status information (system information) was depended on PDL. However, current version of function is not dependent on PDL. So even device for which PDL is not available can print it. (Since iRC3220)
11.1.11 Reference (Application System Information)

0018-0826
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci You can check all applications installed to the device at a glance with the MEAP application status information and, thus, it is important for you to provide it when you are reporting a problem. The following items of information will be indicated or printed for individual applications: Memo: The system information shown on the screen and the system information printed in the MEAP device's user mode are exactly the same.
T-11-12
11-16
Chapter 11 Application System Information

Application Name: C-Cabinet Gateway for MEAP Application ID/System Application Name: 03a46668-63e4-4636-9cbb-492b6cef05d5 Application Version: 1.0.0 Status: Resolved Installed on: Tue Oct 21 14:00:11 GMT+09:00 2003 Vendor : Canon Inc. License Status : Installed Maximum Memory Usage : 1024 Registered Service :
Application Name It is the name (bundle-name) declared in a statement within the application program. It may not necessarily be identical to the name of the program. Application ID/System Application Name In the case of a system application, it will be the file name. If a general application, it is the application ID (application-ID) declared in a statement within the application program. Within the device, the applications are set apart by means of their application IDs. Application Version It is the version of the application (bundle-version) declared in a statement within the application program. Status It indicates the status of the application in question; specifically, Installed: the application has been installed. Active: the application is being in use. Resolved: the application is at rest. Installed On It indicates the date on which the application was installed. Vendor It is the name of the vendor that developed the application, and is the name (bundle-vendor) declared in a statement within the application program. License Status It indicates the status of the license; specifically, None: no license is needed. Not Installed: no license has been installed. Installed: the appropriate license has been installed. Invalid: the license has been invalidated. Overlimt: the license has been used beyond its permitted limit. License Expires After It indicates the date after which the license expires. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed. License Upper Limit It indicates the limit imposed on individual counter readings. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed. Counter Value It is the current counter reading of a specific counter. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed. Maximum Memory Usage It indicates the maximum amount of memory that the application uses. It is the amount (maximum memory usage) declared in a statement within the application program, and is expressed in kilobytes. Registered Service It is a list of services that have been registered by the application with the MEAP framework. Some services may not have printable data.
11.1.12 Installing an Application

0018-0827
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Important: - To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs to register the license access number of the application and the serial number of the device. http://www.canon.com/meap/ -Maximum 20 applications can be installed (In iR5160/iR6060/iR2250/iR2850/iR3350, one is the portal service already installed at the time of shipment from the factory) -The following are the resource amounts assured for each device in the operation of one MEAP application. These values are for reference purpose only, therefore the unused resource of SMS needs to be checked at the time of installation of MEAP application. The displayed values of SMS resource may be larger than the followings since the actual values vary according to the log-in service (authentication function) selected by users and the configuration (future models).
T-11-13 Product Name iR5020/iR6020/iR2220/iR3320 iRC2620/iRC3220 iR2270/iR2870/iR3570/iR4570/iR85/iR8070/iR6570/iR5570 iRC3170/iRC2570 iRC3180/iRC2580 HDD 300MB 400MB 400MB 400MB 1024MB Memory 20MB 20MB 20MB 20MB 30MB Thread 128 128 128 128 128 Socket 48 48 48 48 128 File Description 42 42 42 42 128
11-17
Chapter 11
Product Name iR7086/iR7095/iR7095P/iR7095Printer/ Initial MEAP Spec Ver iR7105 Change Information iRC4080/iRC4580/iRC5180 imagePRESS C1 iRC2880/iRC3380 iR3025/iR3030/iR3035/iR3045 iR5050 iR5055/iR5065/iR5075 iRC5185 imagePRESS C7000VP iR C5058/ iR C5068/ iR C5880/ iR C5880i/ iR C6880/ iR C6880i Initial MEAP Spec Ver Change Information HDD 400MB 1024MB 1024MB 1024MB 1024MB 1024MB 400MB 1024MB 1024MB 1024MB 1024MB 1024MB Memory 20MB 30MB 20MB 30MB 20MB 20MB 20/30MB* 30MB 20MB 30MB 20MB 30MB Thread 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 Socket 48 128 48 128 48 48 48 128 48 128 48 128 File Description 42 128 42 128 42 42 42 128 42 42 42 128
*20MB for 512MB model, 30MB for 768MB model. - As for memory, check the available resource when starting up the application. For other resources other than memory, check them when installing. - Some applications call for a specific set of conditions for installation. For details, see the User's Guide that comes with the individual applications.
1) Long on to SMS. 2) Click Install tab.
F-11-25
3) Check that Install Application/License page appears. 4) Click Browse button, and select the application file and the license file of the application; then, click OK button. Memo: Application File: identified by the extension "jar". License File: identified by the extension "lic".
11-18
Chapter 11
F-11-26
5) See the message "Installing...Please wait a moment."
F-11-27
Important: - You cannot install only the license. - You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license. Be sure to select its license file. - If you are adding a license to an existing application, see 1.3.10 Adding a License File. - If you are updating an existing application, stop the application; then, install the new application or its license file. You will not be able to update an application while it is running.
6) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click OK button.
F-11-28
11-19
Chapter 11
7) Some applications show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement. Read the terms, and click OK. 8) Check the message "Installing...Please wait a moment." appears, beginning the installation. 9) Check Application List page appears when the installation is completed. Important: To use the application that you have just installed, you must make sure that the application status is Started.
11.1.13 MEAP Enterprise Service Manager

0018-0828
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Outline MEAP Enterprise Service Manager is the PC application utility to perform batch installation, unistallation and management of MEAP application and license files required for installation of applications, on several MEAP-available devices on network. The main targets are system administrators in big companies and CANON service engineers (end users of devices do not use). It is used when customized applications delivered to a certain company needs to be managed collectively. Previous SMS can manage only one device at a time. This utility reduces the management cost of devices and TCO.
Major functions Discovery of devices available for MEAP Discovery of devices available for MEAP on network Storage of the serial number list of discovered device Installation of application and license file Management of application (starting / stopping) Uninstallation of application Others
System configuration MEAP Enterprise Service Manager (MEAP ESM) functions in combination with DIS (DSL Installer Service) installed on the MEAP platform side of the device. This system can be used only for MEAP-available device with appropriate DIS installed. (*) When using this system on the firmware for version upgrading on October 2003 or older, version upgrading of the system software on the field device is necessary. The versions available for ESM are as follows: iR5160 / iR6020: System v54.02 or newer, MEAP Contents v53.07 or newer iR2220 / iR3320: System v33.01 or newer, MEAP Contents v33.02 or newer Other products: Available from the initial version
When installing MEAP Enterprise Service Manager (MEAP ESM) of master CD on PC, Microsoft '.NET Framework' v1.0 or v1.1 is necessary. The user should download it from the Web site of Microsoft.
11.1.14 Adding a License File

0018-0829
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Log on to SMS. 2) On Application List, click the name of the application to which you want to add a license file.
11-20
Chapter 11
F-11-29
3) Check appears. 4) On Application/License Information page, click License Management button.
F-11-30
5) Click Browse button, and select the license file you want to install.
11-21
Chapter 11
F-11-31
6) Click Install button.
F-11-32
7) Check the content of the confirmation page, and click OK button.
11.1.15 Disabling a License File (suspending a license)

0018-0830
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Important: - To invalidate (or suspend) a license, you must first stop the application in question. - Once suspended, the status of the license will be 'Not Installed', and its application will no longer be available for use. - You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the same iR, the device with the same device serial number. - When replacing the device due to lease up or trouble, use the license for forwarding (See 'License for forwarding'). 1) Stop the application you want to uninstall on Application List page.
11-22
Chapter 11
F-11-33
2) Click the name of the application that you want to disable.
F-11-34
3) License File Management page appears. On Application/License Information page, click License Management button.
11-23
Chapter 11
F-11-35
4) Click Disable button.
F-11-36
5) Click OK.
11.1.16 Downloading/Removing an Invalidated License File

0018-0831
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci You must remove the invalidated license file before uninstalling an application. If re-installation is a possibility, you may download the license file to a PC for storage. To download or delete a license file, first disable it. Important: - Once you have removed an invalidated license file, you will no longer be able to download it form the MEAP device.
1) Login to SMS. 2) Application List page appears. 3) On Application List page, click the name of the application you want.
11-24
Chapter 11
F-11-37
4) Check Application/License Information page appears. 5) On Application/License Information page, click License Management button.
F-11-38
6) License File Management page appears. To download, click Download button.
11-25
Chapter 11
F-11-39
7) When you have selected Download button, specify where you want to store the file by following the instructions on the screen. 8) To delete, click Delete button.
F-11-40
9) Check the confirmation page appears. 10) Click OK button. Important: - Without the license file, an application cannot be reinstalled even to the MEAP device that the application had been installed last time. Download and save the license file before deleting the application.
11.1.17 Reusable license

0018-0832
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Reinstallation was not able to perform for all license files. When reinstalling, Disable License file should be downloaded (see 'Disabling a License File' and 'Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File' in this manual) or a license for reinstallation should be obtained from LMS, before reinstallation. This specification aims to prevent misuse of applications. To increase convenience of users, only application with unlimited validity date and application counter (e.g. Portal Service, SDL, SSO) has been made to be able
11-26
Chapter 11 to install as many times as needed by the same license file. This kind of license is called 'Reusable license'.
Memo: For devices for System version of 33.01, 54.02 (iR 2220 series / iR5020 series) or older, version upgrading is required. It is already installed in the model with iR C3220 or newer.
11.1.18 License for forwarding

0018-0833
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When the device is replaced due to lease up or trouble, it is possible to continue using the current license information of MEAP application by forwarding it to a new device. The license is forwarded by CE because the hidden page of SMS is used. 1) Log in to SMS, stop the application to be forwarded (see 'Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application' in this manual).
F-11-41
2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (http:// IP address of device: 8000/sms/ForwardLicense).
F-11-42
3) Specify the application to be forwarded.
F-11-43
11-27
Chapter 11
4) Click 'Disable' at Create Transfer License File.
F-11-44
5) The screen to check invalidation of the license is displayed. Click 'OK',
F-11-45
6) Icon of license file for forwarding is displayed in the box of license file downloading. Click 'Download'.
F-11-46
7) The dialogue 'File Download' is displayed. Click 'Save'.
11-28
Chapter 11
F-11-47
8) Specify the download destination, click 'Save'.
F-11-48
9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click 'Delete' to display the confirmation screen and click 'OK' to delete the file (in consideration of breakage of license for forwarding, deleting disabled license can be executed after all steps have been completed).
F-11-49
10) Log out of SMS. 11) Ask the sales company to issue a license for forwarding.
Memo: When requesting issuance of license for forwarding, inform the sales company of the name of product name and serial No. of the device as sender, and of the name of product name and serial No. of the forwarding destination.
12) Install application using the license for forwarding issued by the sales company.
11.1.19 Uninstalling an Application

0018-0834
11-29
Chapter 11
1) Log on to SMS, and click 'Application List' tab. 2) Check 'Application List' page appears. 3) On the application list, select the radio button of the application you want to uninstall, and click 'Uninstall' button. Memo: Dimmed Uninstall button shows that the selected application cannot be removed.
F-11-50
4) Check the screen to make sure that what is shown is the application you want to uninstall; then, click OK button. In response, the system runs an uninstall sessions. Important: - The status of the license must be 'Not Installed' or 'Unnecessary' for its application to be uninstalled. As necessary, go to License File Management page, and disable the license file before starting to remove it. - A license file may be invalidated only when its application is not active. - If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application, a message will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will no loner be available. Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated applications.
11.1.20 Changing Login Services

0018-0835
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Login Service Overview The login service is used to authenticate users who logs in to a MEAP device. You can change login services or uninstall them using System Management site. At time of shipment, the login service offers the following 3 modes of authentication: - Default authentication - SDL (Simple Device Login) - SSO (Single Sign-On)
Important: - To set SDL, the registered information in SDL and the registered user data (Department ID and Password) in Department ID Management of the machine have to match. - To set up SDL or SSO, Department ID Management must be set to Off in advance. To use SDL and Department ID Management simultaneously, set Department ID Management to On after switching the login service to SDL. - If SSO is set as the login service, NetSpot Accountant is necessary for using Department ID Management. - If SSO is set, you cannot use an optional card reader. - To set to SSO, first adjust the current time for the PC where Active Directory is running, the iR, and the PC where users log on. If there is more than a 30minute difference among them, an error occurs at logon. - If SSO or SDL is set as login service, it takes time until the iR is ready to start up. - When the SEND function is used in the environment of SDL and SSO, it is necessary to set each user's mail address to transmit E-mail. When the mail address is not set, E-mail cannot be transmitted. However, when i-Fax is transmitted, the mail address set to the device is used.
Outline of Default Authentication
11-30
Chapter 11 In this mode of authentication, you will be using Department ID Management or you will not be using any authentication mechanism. If you enable the Department ID Management in the MEAP device's Additional Functions mode, the user can use the device only when he/she enters an ID number (a 7-character ID and password) that has been registered from the device's touch panel display or through Remote UI. Outline of SDL (Simple Device Login) In this mode of authentication, you will be operating on a MEAP device on its own. You will store user information to the MEAP device's memory by accessing the device through a Web browser. SDL offers the following functions: a. it brings up the Login screen on the MEAP device's touch panel display for user authentication. b. it brings up the Login page when you access the MEAP device from Web browser to manage the numbers of printed and scanned sheets for each department ID working with the department ID management function. it operates in conjunction with the group ID control mechanisms to keep track of the number of print pages or scan pages according to group IDs. c. it enables register/editing of user authentication information through a Web browser.
F-11-51
Outline of SSO (Single Sign-On) This is the log-in service that can be operated on the domain of Active Directory environment network or at iR device. The following are the user authentication systems. - Domain Authentication - Local Device Authentication - Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication
- The three user authentication systems can be changed at Web browser (See 'Setting the User Authentication System' on MEAP Administrator Guide). - The default setting is 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication'. To increase security, set 'Domain Authentication' as user authentication system or change the user name and password of the administrator of Local Device Authentication from the default ones, just after starting to use SSO. Domain Anthentication This is the authentication of the domains on network simultaneously with log-in to iR device, in combination with the domain controller on Active Directory environment network. It authenticates up to four domain users (multi domain) with trusts as well as the domain with iR device installed. Users select the domain name of log-in destination when they log in. Optional NetSpot Accountant or imageWARE Accounting Manager enables analysis / management of the usage of iR device.
Local Device Anthentication This is the user authentication used for only iR device itself. The users to be authenticated is registered / managed by the database of iR device. The method of registration / management is the same as the one for SDL. The log-in destination is [this device].
Domain Authentication + Local Device Anthentication This is the user authentication system with the functions of both 'Domain Authentication' and 'Local Device Authentication'. Domain Authentication is useful to authenticate the users registered / managed by Active Directory, and Local Device Authentication is for authentication of the temporary users being not able to be added to Active Directory. In the case that any trouble of domain controller or Security Agent occurs, using Local Device Authentication enables emergency action until recovery. In the following example, Domain A user with iR installed and Domain B having trusts with Domain A, and also the users registered in iR device itself can be authenticated. Users select the login destination (domain name or [This Device]) when they log in.
11-31
Chapter 11
Domain A
NetSpot Security Agent Accountant Domain Controller (Active Directory)
Domain B
Domain Controller (Active Directory)
Domain A User
iR
F-11-52
Domain B User
- Optional NetSpot Accountant or imageWARE Accounting Manager is necessary to use Domain Authentication and department ID management simultaneously. When Domain Authentication is set without combination with NetSpot Accountant or imageWARE Accounting Manager, log-in is impossible. Therefore, department ID management should not be 'ON'. If department ID management is set to 'ON' while using Domain Authentication and log-in becomes impossible, change the log-in service to Default Authentication and turn department ID management to [OFF]. - For combination with NSA / iWAM, it is necessary to set the user with administrative privilege of the domain on the SA service account. - When the print count and scan count for each department ID needs to be managed in conjunction with Local Device Authentication and department ID management, turn department ID management to [ON]. To use simultaneously Local Device Authentication and department ID management, the information registered with Local Device Authentication should be matched with the user information of department ID management (department ID and password). - The user information registered by SDL and the one by Local Device Authentication are managed separately in the iR device. The user information registered in one system is not reflected to the other. - The card reader for optional control card cannot be used for Local Device Authentication. When using the card reader for control card, set SDL. - Security Agent is necessary only for Domain Authentication. - Security Agent should be installed on the computer in the domain with iR device installed. - Installation of Security Agent is included in MEAP Administrator CD-ROM.
Operating Environment The operation is guaranteed for SDL or SSO if the system environment is in keeping with the following requirements: SDL (registering/editing user information) a. Operating System and Supported Browsers
T-11-14 Operating System Windows 98 SE Windows 2000 Professional SP3 Windows XP Supported browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1
Important: - If you use Internet Explorer 6 on Windows XP, you will need Java 2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1.3.1.
SSO To use SSO, you must have a Widows server to which Active Directory has been installed as well as Security Agent. 1) PC for hosting Security Agent a. Supported OS
T-11-15 Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows XP Professional Microsoft Windows Server 2003
11-32
Chapter 11
When using SA on WindowXP SP2, it is necessary to exclude Security Agent from the targets of firewall at the setting of the firewall. b. Others Access right to Windows 2000 domain Name System (DNS)Access right to domain controller
For combination with NetSpot Accountant / iW Accounting Manager, and department ID management is turned on to use it, it is necessary to set the user with administrative privilege of the domain on the SA service account. 2) Client PC (if access from Web browser to MEAP device is desired) a. Operating System and Supported Browsers
T-11-16 Operating System Windows 98 SE Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a Windows ME Windows 2000 Professional SP3 Supported Browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP3 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1
Windows XP Professional
b. Others Access right to Windows 2000 Domain Name System (DNS) Access right to Domain Controller Client Steps to Change Login Services 1) Make the following selections: System Management > Enhanced Sys. App.
F-11-53
2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Select the radio button of the login service mode you want to use; then, click Select button.
11-33
Chapter 11
F-11-54
3) When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart, turn off the device's main power, and turn it back on after 10 seconds.
F-11-55
11.1.21 Initializing the Password

0018-0836
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Get the switch license for initializing the password. Request the support of the regional headquarters of the Canon for switch license for initializing the password presenting the device serial number. 2) Click Login button leaving Password field blank or entering incorrect password. The Return to install Password Settings area appears. Click Browse button and select the switch license file prepared in advance.
11-34
Chapter 11
F-11-56
3) When you click Initialize button, the confirmation message appears. Click OK button. Then Login page opens. Enter the default password 'MeapSmsLogin' to log in. The password is case-sensitive. If you click Cancel button, the Login page opens without initializing the password.
11.1.22 Creating a Backup for MEAP Application Area, Formatting the Hard Disk, Restoring the MEAP Application Area with the Backup, Using the SST (Service Support Tool)
0018-0837
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci You can back up the area of the HDD where MEAP applications reside to a PC, as when you want to format the HDD. MEAP devices use a license-based mechanism to control applications so that formatting the HDD will necessarily delete the jar files and application data, requiring you to not only reinstall them but also make necessary settings. (Doing so consists in obtaining special license files for reinstallation and downloading user data/settings, increasing your work load.) If you use the SST's backup function, you will be able to temporarily put aside the area of MEAP applications, thus being free of the foregoing extra work. This function, however, is limited to a specific MEAP device (serial number), and cannot be used for illegal copying of applications.
You must not perform any other work (including checking operation) until the HDD has been backed up. This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP counter readings and the HDD contents, and any fault in operation arising as the result of failure to observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of operation. Memo: The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the same license.
The following list shows the details of area that SST backs up; Jar files of MEAP applications Settings set with MEAP applications. Note that SST does not back up images in Mailboxes that MEAP applications use. User information data registered with SDL Requirements for Backup Using the SST The following conditions must be met for use of the function: 1) Device Firmware Version
T-11-17 Boot ROM iR2220 Series iR2250 Series iR5020 Series iR5160 Series 24.42 later 24.42 later System 33.01 later 54.02 later SST Since Ver 1.81 Since Ver 1.81
Devices ither than those listed the above. Already supported since the 1st version. Already supported since the 1st version. The version supporting the corresponding devices.
2) SST Version Version 1.81 or later. An earlier version will not permit the use of the function. If needed, upgrade the SST. 3) Space for backup To back up the HDD of the iR, the PC must have approx 300 MB of free space at maximum.
11-35
Chapter 11
Making a Backup and Formatting Hard Disk Drive with Service Support Tool 1) If SDL or SSO is used for the login service, switch to default authentication before backing up the user information. Although SST will back up SDL user information, it is recommended to export the user information just in case. For SDL user information backup, go to User Management page of Simple Device Login site and export the data. (The SDL login page opens with the URL "http://<device IP address>:8000/sdl/").
If a hard disk of a system that uses SDL or SSO is formatted without changing the login service to the default authentication, the error message "The login service must be set again with SMS" appears and the system cannot start up when you attempt to restart the system after formatting. If this problem occurs, change the login service to SDL or SSO with SMS. If you cannot access to SMS since you do not have the IP address of the device, start the system with FIXIP mode hold down the numeric keys 1 and 7 and turn the power switch on. The IP address "172.16.1.100" will be automatically assigned for the device. Then log in to SMS specifying the address. 2) While holding down the 2 and 8 buttons, start up the device in download mode. As in the case of Sramimg.bin, the function is available only when the device is in Download Mode. 3) Connect the PC to the device and start the Service Support Tool. 4) In Download/Upload session of SST, select the appropriate device model, System in the tree view, and take necessary steps to connect to the device. 5) Click Upload the Backup Data button. 6) Click the option "Meapback.bin" from Name list of Backup Data Available for Selection, and click Start Storing button. Selecting Meapback.bin
F-11-57
7) When the data has been generated, enter an appropriate name in File name field and click Save button; then, click OK button to end the backup session. 8) In Selecting Model/Unit screen, select HDFormat and start formatting. All the partitions in the hard disk drive will be formatted. Restoring the Backup Data 1) After formatting the hard disk drive with SST, install the System, MEAP Contents, Language, and Remote UI files. 2) To restore the backup "Meapback.bin," click Download the Backup Data button. 3) Select the backup data file and click Start Writing button to download the backup data. Note that SST cannot restore backup data created with a different version. Selecting Backup Data
F-11-58
11-36
Chapter 11 4) When the screen with OK button appears, the restoration of backup data finishes. Click OK button. 5) Reboot the main power and access the device with SMS and check that the MEAP applications are restored. 6) Restore non-MEAP backup data and settings that are saved before formatting the hard disk drive. The SDL user information is included in the backup data. You do not have to restore it.
11.1.23 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive

0018-0838
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci If you must replace the hard disk drive because of a fault, all MEAP application files stored on it will also be lost, requiring you to re-install the applications and their license files in addition to performing the normal work associated with the replacement of the hard disk. Like other counter information, MEAP counter information will remain after replacement. Reinstallation of MEAP applications calls for special license files designed to continue with the current counter readings, thus enabling the use of the applications until the date of their expiration. These special licenses are service tools, and are not offered to general users. If you cannot make a backup of the license files as hard disk suffers a fault, contact the support staff of the regional headquarters of Canon telling the device serial number and the names of MEAP applications installed to the device to obtain the necessary special license files. In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial number of the device in question. The following shows the steps to follow after you have obtained a special license from the support staff of the regional headquarters of Canon. 1) Copy the set of special license files on the PC you are using for service work. Register the following with the Service Support Tool (SST): system file, language file, remote UI file, hard disk drive format file, MEAP contents file. (Be sure to pay attention to the version compatibility of individual files.) 2) Have the new hard disk drive at hand and replace it on site. While holding down the 2 and 8 keys at the same time, turn on the main power so that the machine will start up in download mode. The IP address 172.16.1.100 will automatically be used, which enables you to download files in high speed through a network.) 3) Using the SST, format the new HDD, and install the System, MEAP Contents, Language, and Remote UI files. 4) When the device has started normally, obtain the jar files of the MEAP applications from the user, and install them using the license files of the applications in the same way as you would when installing them for the first time. 5) As necessary, make login service selections and import user information. Memo: If you format the hard disk without uninstalling MEAP applications, always reinstall the applications previously installed. Unless reinstalling them, lots for the MEAP counters the applications use will not be released. The message "The number of applications that can be installed has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications." may appear and the device does not accept to install new application. To install new applications, once reinstall the applications installed before formatting and uninstall unnecessary applications.
11.1.24 MEAP Safe Mode

0018-0839
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that normally start up as default files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up. When you have made changes and turned off and then on the device, the control panel will indicate 'MPSF' in its lower right corner. The MEAP applications that may have been active before you shut down the equipment will not start up on their own. Make use of safe mode when restoring the system software as when MEAP applications or services cause a fault as the result of a conflict or wrong sequence of registration/use. You can access to SMS in this condition so that you can take necessary measures, for example, you can stop application that may cause the trouble. If default authentication has been selected, the mode of authentication remains valid; otherwise, the message "The login service must be set again with SMS" appears. Change the login service as necessary. Starting in Safe Mode 1) Start the device in service mode: click Ad Func key, press 2 and 8 buttons at the same time, and then click Ad Func key once again so that the service mode screen appears. 2) Press COPIER button. 3) Press OPTION button. 4) Press USER. 5) Press the right-arrow button. 6) Press MEAPSAFE.
11-37
Chapter 11
F-11-59
7) Press the 1 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '1'; then, click OK button.
F-11-60
8) Check that the notation 'MPSF' has appeared in the lower right corner of the screen; then, turn off and then on the main power.
F-11-61
If you want to end safe mode, repeat the steps but change '1' to '0' in step -7 and turn off and then on the main power.
11.1.25 Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2)

0018-0841
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci For the ports in which the MEAP application uses, the default is 8000 for the port on HTTP server, and 8443 for the port on HTTPS server. In the case that these ports have already used by the customer who is to introduce this application, the MEAP application cannot use the HTTP (or HTTPS) server(s). By changing the following ports to use, however, the MEAP application can be used as well as the existing system. HTTP server Setting value is 0 through 65535 [the value at factory shipment/after clearing RAM: 8000] HTTPS server Setting value is 0 through 65535 [the value at factory shipment/after clearing RAM: 8443] Memo: -As for port on HTTPS server, it only applies to the device that supports SSL function.
11-38
Chapter 11 -Make sure not to use 1 through 1023 other than 80 (HTTP) as a port for MEAP. Because the ports in this range are used by general servers, there is a possibility that the ports in this range will be duplicated in the future.
<Setting Procedure of Port on HTTP server> 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed). 2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on control panel, the screen is displayed. 3) Press [COPIER] button. 4) Press [Option] button. 5) Press [BODY] button. 6) Press [<-] button. 7) Press [MEAP-PN] button.
F-11-62
8) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.
F-11-63
9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.
F-11-64
<Setting Procedure of port on HTTPS server>
11-39
Chapter 11 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed). 2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on control panel, the screen is displayed. 3) Press [COPIER] button. 4) Press [Option] button. 5) Press [BODY] button. 6) Press [<-] button. 7) Press [MEAP-SSL] button.
F-11-65
8) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.
F-11-66
9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.
F-11-67
11-40
Chapter 11
11.1.26 Reference material

0018-0842
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Glossary

T-11-18 Terms & Acronyms Applet Application Application ID ASP AVS Code Sign CPCA CPCA Java CL Default Authentication Department ID Management Device Specification ID DIS DSL Esplet File descriptor iR Native Application ISV J2ME Java Definitions and Explanations Applet Type Application. A Type of MEAP application that is designed to display user interface on device control panel. A software unit that provides a solution to users. A unique identifier assigned to each application. Used for indicating memory usage of the application in the MEAP system. Application Service Provider. A business to provide the application service on Internet. Applet Viewer Service. One of the MEAP system services that shows the user interface of the current applet type service on the console. To attach Digital Signature to software code. MEAP has the mechanism to reject MEAP application without Code Sign for security reason. Common Peripheral Controlling Architecture. CPCA defines an object model of peripheral deices. A client can control a device by creating or modifying objects in the device. CPCA Java Class Library. A Java class library, which is used to control a device. The login service used when the department ID control is used but other authentication controls are not used. When the Department ID control is turned on, the login dialog prompts the users to enter the department ID and password. The dialog appears the initial screen of both the control panel on the MEAP device and Remote UI ID assigned for each device model. It shows the usage of functions that are equipped by MFP, as well as CPCA API specification and version numbers that is necessary for acquiring the values such as maximum number of copies, etc. Dynamic Service Loading Installer Service. Receives data from the DSL on the MEAP platform. Enables an application to install to two or more devices. Dynamic Service Loading. While the SMS installs a license file and application to one device, the DSL can install them to two or more devices. It consists of MEAP ESM and the DIS. Esplet Type Application. A type of MEAP application that does not have a user interface on the device console or on the web browser. The term of "Esplet" is a coinage by Canon inspired from Applet, Servlet, and "Espresso". With a file descriptor, an OS identifies the files that a program accesses. The file descriptor includes information such as file name and size as well as the identifier. An OS determines files to operate with the identifier. The functionalities that existing imageRUNNER has such as Copy, Universal Send and Mailbox. Independent Software Vender. Software manufacturer who develops and/or sells applications and tools but does not entire computer systems. Refers application developer in this document. Java 2 Platform Micro Edition. One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. It is applied for MEAP. Other devices such as cellular phones and PDA. A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems, in the U. S. A. Low dependent on models and OSes and runs on various platforms. Taking advantage of this feature, many applications that runs on web servers uses Java. The MEAP platform uses J2ME - a type of Java. A script language developed by Netscape Communications, in the U.S. A., runs on web browsers such as Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer. Allows web designers to create interactive pages with HTML files such as animated buttons and display of timetables. JAVA Virtual Machine. The Java byte code interpreter. The Virtual Machine acts as an interpreter for processing the byte code using the native instruction set. A number issued for accessing license file. The Licensing server requires entries of application ID, expiration date/times information, and the number of access numbers, to issue license access numbers. A software manufacture of a MEAP application provides the users with the license files. Specifies the terms of agreement that a user concludes with the manufacturer. Required for installing a MEAP application. Manages user information of MEAP device. Authenticates users with user names and passwords. Three login services are available for MEAP device - Default Authentication, which provides department ID control, SDL (Simple Device Login) and SSO (Single Sign-On). Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform. Provides an environment for executing application programs on a peripheral device. Uses the Java platform (J2ME - Java 2 platform Micro Edition) to run Java application for MEAP. MEAP Application Management System. The license issuing server that issues "License File" necessary for MEAP applications to be installed onto MEAP device. Also used for issuing the "License Access Number". Runs on MEAP platform. Consists of application files (*.jar) and the license file (*.lic). Required to install an MEAP application to a MEAP device. MEAP Enterprise Service Manager. One of software programs composing the DSL, to be installed on a PC in a Windows environment. Works as the interface with the DSL. MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than CPCA, such as network and security. The version number is not assigned for each device model. imageRUNNER (iR) device that has MEAP Platform incorporated. Multi Function Peripheral. Peripheral device that supports more than one function, such as digital copier, printer, scanner, and fax. Open Service Gateway Initiative. See "http://www.osgi.org/". The service displayed on a Web browser by inputting the address "http://<device IP address>:8000/" or "http://<device IP address>/" A portal to access a MEAP device from a Web browser. Provides functions to store data fetched from remote servers. When a user request to display a web page that has been displayed and stored in the proxy, the proxy server read the stored data but does not access the remote server where the original page is present, for efficient access services. When a proxy server receives a URL from a PC, it searches the file in the cache and sends it to the PC if the requested file is found. If the requested file is not stored in the cache, it accesses the remote server of the URL to acquire the file and, at the same time, stores the acquired file in the cache so that the proxy server can quickly send the file at the next request.
Java Script
Java VM License Access Number License File Login Service
MEAP MEAP AMS MEAP Application MEAP Contents MEAP ESM MEAP Specifications MEAP device MFP OSGi Portal Service
Proxy Server
11-41
Chapter 11
Detail of License File
LicenseFile-Version: 1 LicenseFile-Id: f6489a8c-8c7e-4d74-bd12-b031ea6a62a5 Application-Id: e92b0b91-7c42-45b1-96b3-295d5d1b5877 Serial-No: XYZ00123 Validated-Period: 100 MaximumBWScan1: 1000, stop MaximumBWScan2: 900, stop MaximumBWScan3: 800, stop MaximumBWScan4: 700, stop MaximumPrintedImpressions: 1000, stop MaximumPrintedImpressions-BW: 800, stop MaximumPrintedImpressions-BW-Large: 200, stop MaximumPrintedImpressions-BW-Small: 600, stop MaximumScannedImpressions: 2000, stop MaximumScannedImpressions-BW: 1200, stop
License File ID Application ID Serial No Validated Period
Counter information
IxQvZ/A8O0aDsUBdMeu5XrxqIsqLzq7JAjHAD/ZMnNxVMsR7RGcuI2c6RRdU7mlW ht2VF8LA3SH6n4kxvZYmEQZ8pBhu67wliysAJ0gHS0l6WsMqX6WI5ZAQeD8TZnnf 344VXYG4
F-11-68
11.1.27 Option for exclusive individual measure

0018-0843
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci -Display Setting of Copy Tab Make a setting as to whether to display/hide the copy screen (copy tab) on the control panel. This is the specification for users who want to customize hiding it on control panel. Default value 1: display Setting range, item 0: hide 1: display
Setting Procedure 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed). 2) Press [COPIER] button. 3) Press [Option] button. 4) Press [BODY] button. 5) Press [<-]or[->] (arrow) button. 6) Press [UI-COPY] button. 7) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button. 8) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.
-Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2) In the case that operation is restricted by MEAP application, hide the warning screen of error/JAM (such as JAM screen, door opening, no-toner). In the case that these errors occur, there will be a display indicating 'call the service personnel' etc.
Memo: Part of the warning screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen. - As for the screens for jam and no-toner, the warning screen (animation) can be displayed by pressing the followings: [Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure] - As for the screen for door opening, the warning screen cannot be displayed because there is no display for [[Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
Default value 1: No activation of warning display
11-42
Chapter 11
Setting range, item 0: display warning screen 1: hide warning screen
Setting Procedure 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed). 2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on control panel, the screen is displayed. 3) Press [COPIER] button. 4) Press [Option] button. 5) Press [BODY] button. 6) Press [<-]or[->] button. 7) Press [ANIM-SW] button. 8) Press either 0 (display warning screen) or 1 (hide warning screen) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button. 9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.
-Setting of Screen Transition from MEAP Screen to the Standard Screen In the case that the operation is restricted by MEAP application, make a setting to hide Native applications such as Copy/Send/Box. With this setting, disable screen transition with => key. Default value 0: OFF (transit to Native screen) Setting range, item 0: OFF (transit to Native screen) 1: ON (No-transition to Native screen)
Setting Procedure 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then, by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed). 2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on control panel, the screen is displayed. 3) Press [COPIER] button. 4) Press [Option] button. 5) Press [BODY] button. 6) Press [<-] (arrow) button. 7) Press [ANIM-DSP] button. 8) Press either 0 (transit to Native screen) or 1 (no-transition to Native screen) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button. 9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.
11-43
Chapter 12 RDS
Contents
Contents
12.1 RDS ............................................................................................................................................................................12-1
12.1.1 Application operation mode..................................................................................................................................................... 12-1 12.1.2 Service Center URL and Port Specification ............................................................................................................................ 12-1 12.1.3 Communication test ................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1 12.1.4 Communication log.................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1 12.1.5 Detailed Communication log .................................................................................................................................................. 12-1 12.1.6 SOAP communication function ............................................................................................................................................... 12-1 12.1.7 Resend at SOAP transmission error......................................................................................................................................... 12-2 12.1.8 e-RDS setting screen................................................................................................................................................................ 12-2 12.1.9 Sleep operation......................................................................................................................................................................... 12-5 12.1.10 Network Setting(Maintenance) .............................................................................................................................................. 12-5 12.1.11 e-RDS Setting ........................................................................................................................................................................ 12-5 12.1.12 Trouble shoot ......................................................................................................................................................................... 12-6 12.1.13 Error message......................................................................................................................................................................... 12-6
Chapter 12
12.1 RDS
12.1.1 Application operation mode
0011-6896
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Serviceman selects the operation mode of OFF/ON by the setting in e-RDS setting screen of the service mode. (Menu Screen: E-RDS) - OFF (default): e-RDS doesn't operate. - ON: e-RDS operates every function.
12.1.2 Service Center URL and Port Specification

0011-6898
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The URL and the port number of the equipment information destination can be specified as follows. - Default (specified beforehand) - Specified by the service mode. (Menu Screen: RGW-ADR, RGW-PORT)
12.1.3 Communication test

0011-6900
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Serviceman can distinguish the communication status with the UGW by executing the communication test in the service mode (Menu Screen: COM-TEST), and referring to the communication log Error information is displayed in the latest communication log at communication error.
12.1.4 Communication log

0011-6902
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The list of the log of the communication error (proxy server error etc.)(For 30) can be displayed in display panel in the service mode. (Menu Screen: COM-LOG)
12.1.5 Detailed Communication log

0011-6904
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Detailed information of the error in the communication log can be displayed in display panel. (Log List Screen: Each error)
12.1.6 SOAP communication function

0011-6905
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following processing is achieved by the SOAP communication (SSL client communication). e-RDS does the host authentication by using the CA*1 certificate of the VeriSign Co.. When the host certificate or the CA certificate is expired, e-RDS doesn't connect to UGW. *1: CA: Certificate Authority: Organization that issues electronic certificate used by electronic commerce etc
(1) Communication test: - Do the communication test (2) Regularly collect the following data, and transmit it. - Copy Counter - Service mode counter - Parts counter - Mode Counter - ROM version - Scheduling information - Application log (3) When jam or alarm/service call error is detected from the device, e-RDS transmits to UGW. - Transmission of alert code(Counter information is transmitted at the same time. ) When the state of the device changes, e-RDS sends the alert code list. The main alert codes used are Toner LOW/OUT, Jam, and Door open. When recovering from an error, e-RDS transmits data that shows the recovering from an error again. - Transmission of Jam log (Counter information is transmitted at the same time.) - Transmission of Alarm log (Counter information is transmitted at the same time.) - Transmission of Service Call (Error code) log (Counter information is transmitted at the same time.) (4) Change of the device scheduling information - Scheduling information can be changed by the instruction from UGW.
12-1
Chapter 12 List of Transmissions:

Content of transmission Communication test Copy counter collection/transmission Service mode counter collection/transmission Mode counter collection/transmission Parts counter collection/transmission ROM version transmission Application log Transmission of alert code Jam Alarm Error Confirmation whether there is processing that eRDS executes Transmission timing When Service mode of device is executed Every 6 hours Every 6 hours Every 6 hours Every 6 hours Every 6 hours When the log file size exceeds 10kbytes When the state of the device is changed. When Jam occurs When Alarm occurs When Error occurs Every 6 hours
12.1.7 Resend at SOAP transmission error

0011-6906
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When SOAP send error is generated by the trouble on UGW side etc. at the transmission of an alert code, the latest three batches of data that failed in the transmission are stored in HDD, and e-RDS resends it at prescribed intervals.
12.1.8 e-RDS setting screen

0011-6907
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The e-RDS setting screen is in the service mode screen. When the tab above is selected on any e-RDS setting screen, it changes to the mid item screen. Moreover, it returns to previous screen when reset key is pressed.
12-2
Chapter 12 Menu Screen
F-12-1
Setting screen of e-RDS. The form and the initial value of each setting item are as follows.
Item(meaning) E-RDS (Embedded-RDS)
Explanation Turning OFF/ON e-RDS. 0:OFF / 1:ON Counter information and error information are transmitted to the host at ON. Initial value: 0: OFF URL of the host (When the input area is selected (touched), shift to the keyboard screen) Initial value: URL of an actual host. Length: 129 characters (NULL is contained) Port Number of the host Initial value: 443 Range of available number: 1-65535 Execution of Communication test Communication test starts when you select (touch) this and press the [OK] key. e-RDS tries the connection with the host, and displays the result by "OK!" or "NG!". (NG: No Good, the communication test is failed)
RGW-ADR (RDS-Gateway ADDRESS)
RGW-PORT (RDS-Gateway PORT) COM-TEST (Communication Test)
COM-LOG (Communication Log)
The result of communication test When this is selected (touched), and the blank rectangle on right side is selected, it switches to "Log list screen".
12-3
Chapter 12 Log list screen
F-12-2
History list of communication test error (error generation date, error code and error information) is displayed. When the each line is selected (touched), it shifts to "Log detailed screen". It shifts to "Menu screen" by the [Function] > [INSTALL]. The list screen changes by a right arrow or a left arrow. Maximum log number: 30 Notes: Only the first part of error information is displayed.
12-4
Chapter 12 Log detailed screen
F-12-3
Detailed information of individual communication test error is displayed. Refer to the displayed message to "Error message list". It shifts to "Log list screen" by the [OK] button pressing. Maximum length of error information: 128 characters (not include NULL)
12.1.9 Sleep operation

0011-6908
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When there is a method that should be transmitted while e-RDS is operating (ON), e-RDS wakes from the state of sleep and begins transmitting.
12.1.10 Network Setting(Maintenance)

0011-6909
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci You should do the network setting of Device appropriately before the e-RDS setting. A. Display the Additional Functions screen. - Press [Additional Functions (*)] key. - Input ID code. B. Display the TCP/IP Settings screen. - Select (touch) [System Settings] > [Network Settings] > [TCP/IP Settings] on the Touch Panel Display. C. Setting of items related to IP address - Select (touch) [IP Address Settings] => IP Address Settings screen is displayed. - Set each items such as IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Addresses, and DHCP, etc. - Return to the TCP/IP Settings screen by pushing the [OK] button after the setting ends. D. DNS Settings - Select (touch) [DNS Settings] => DNS Settings screen is displayed. - Set necessary items. - Return to the TCP/IP Settings screen by pushing the [OK] button after the setting ends. E. Proxy Settings - Select (touch) [Proxy Settings] (Press Down arrow button until [Proxy Settings] is displayed on the TCP/IP Settings screen.) => Proxy Settings screen is displayed. - Set necessary items. - Return to the TCP/IP Settings screen by pushing the [OK] button after the setting ends. F. Display the normal screen. - Press [Additional Functions (*)] key pressing or press [Done] button to a necessary frequency.
12.1.11 e-RDS Setting

0011-6910
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci A. Display the Menu screen of e-RDS from the service mode. A-1. Shift to the service mode
12-5
Chapter 12 - Press [Additional Functions (*)] key. - Press 2 and 8 of the numeric keys at the same time. - Press [Additional Functions (*)] key. => SERVICE MODE LEVEL1 A-2. Initialize e-RDS - Select (touch) [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] on the Touch Panel Display. A-3. Display Menu screen of e-RDS - Select (touch) [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] => Menu screen
F-12-4
B. Set 1 in [E-RDS]. C. Input the URL of UGW in [RGW-ADR]. (Select the input area to shift to the keyboard screen, and Input URL.) D. Input the port number of UGW in [RGW-PORT]. E. Select [COM-TEST] and push [OK] button to start the communication test with UGW. F. While the result is "NG!", repeat to correct the setting and try [COM-TEST] until the result becomes "OK!". You need checking the setting of the network of the device and the connection of the network if necessary. Notes: In the environment with the proxy server, you should set the proxy server. Refer to the proxy setting in the network guide of the device for details.
12.1.12 Trouble shoot

0011-6911
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1-1 Q. There is no setting item. A. Confirm the network setting. Confirm the model 1-2 Q. The communication test fails. A. Confirm the firmware version. Confirm the network setting. Confirm the communication test result.
12.1.13 Error message

0011-6912
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Error information displayed in "Log list screen" or "Log detailed screen" is as follows. Notes: Only the first part of error information is displayed in "Log list screen". Maximum length of error information in "Log detailed screen": 128 characters (not include NULL) When the communication test is not completed end e-RDS is 1 (ON), following string is displayed: "SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed."
12-6
Chapter 12
Moreover, when it fails in the event waiting in the device and either of a Jam notification, an Alarm notification, and a Service call notification or an Alert notification is specified, following string is displayed.
"Event Registration is Failed."
In other cases error information is displayed in the form of the following. "[*] [Error string]: [Method name] [Server side detailed error]" The enclosed character string by [] is replaced as follows. [*]: *(asterisk) is added to the head of the string only at the communication test. [Error string]: As for number 1 and 2 of the following Error string lists, only the Error string is displayed. Besides, it is displayed as "[*] [Error string]: [Method name] [Server side detailed error]". ([Server side detailed error] might not go out.)
Error string 1 SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed Cause Counter Measure
The e-RDS is started (the device is rebooted) when e-RDS is ON Complete the communication test. and communication test isn't done.
Event Registration is Failed.
The device failed event processing.
Turn OFF/ON of the device main switch. Or, replace the system software of the device (upgrade).
3 4 5 6 7
URL Scheme error (not https) The header of registered URL of UGW is not https. Server connection error Communication failure of TCP/IP occurred. Or IP address of the device isn't set.
Change the header on URL of UGW to https Check the network connection. Correct URL. Check and correct the proxy server address etc. Check and correct username and password to log in proxy.
URL server specified is illegal Illegal URL (other than UGW) is specified. Proxy connection error Proxy authentication error The e-RDS cannot connect it with the proxy server. The e-RDS fails the authentication to proxy.
Server certificate error
- The certificate is not installed in The device. - The certificate that The user is using is not registered in The device or The server.
Register the root certificate in the device or register the VeriSign certificate in the server.
Server certificate expired
- Expired certificate is registered in the device or the server. - Register the root certificate in expiration date in the - The date of the device is outside the time limit of the certificate. device or register the VeriSign certificate in the server. - Set an accurate date to the device.
10 11
Unknown error
Other communication error occurs.
After waiting for a while, try again.
Server response error (NULL) UGW returns the error but communication to UGW is succeeded. After waiting for a while, try again. If (NULL) is displayed after the message, the error occurs in the HTTPS communication. Server response error (Hexadecimal) UGW returns the error but communication to UGW is succeeded. After waiting for a while, try again. (Hexadecimal) displayed after the message is error code that UGW returns. [server side detailed error] is added at the end of error information only at this error.
12
13
Device internal error
Device internal error such as the memory cannot be taken occurs. Turn OFF/ON of the device main switch. Or, replace the system software of the device (upgrade).
14
Server schedule is invalid
Illegal schedule transmission information is set in UGW. (Ex: Every 30 minutes were set to UGW but the right interval in eRDS is 1 hour.) There was no reply from UGW in predetermined time. (The congestion of the network etc.) It is the timeout at HTTPS level.
Correct the schedule transmission information setting in UGW. (Ex: every 1 hour)
15
Server response time out
After waiting for a while, try again.
12-7
Chapter 12
Error string 16 17 Service not found E-RDS switch is set OFF Cause The URL of UGW is illegal, and UGW is inaccessible. Counter Measure Check and correct the URL of UGW.
You execute the communication test while the E-RDS switch is Turn ON E-RDS switch, and execute the communication OFF. test. The e-RDS receives empty schedule data from UGW. Check setting file. (Call the help desk of UGW.)
18 19
Server schedule is not exist
Network is not ready, try later You execute the communication when the connection to the Confirm that the network connection has been established. network has not been established. Moreover, execute again after enough waiting. (The network connection might not be established from the startup of the device for 60 seconds.)
20
URL error
Illegal URL (Syntax error etc.)
Correct URL.
T-12-1
[Method name]:
Method name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 postServiceModeCount postModeCount postPartsCount postFirmwareInfo getOperationList postOperationOutcome postConfiguration postGlobalClickCount postJamLog postServiceCallLog postAlert postDebugLog getConfiguration communicationTest Meaning Account counter acquisition phase Mode counter acquisition phase Parts counter acquisition phase ROM version acquisition phase Check/acquisition phase whether the information file for me is in UGW. Phase in which E-RDS configuration is transmitted to UGW Counter acquisition phase Jam notification acquisition phase Error notification acquisition phase Alert notification acquisition phase Log acquisition phase Information acquisition phase (Schedule transmission etc.) Communication test phase
[Server side detailed error]: Detailed error information returned from UGW is displayed for "Server response error". However, only the first 128 characters are displayed by the entire error information. Nothing is displayed here at other errors.
12-8
Chapter 13 Maintenance and Inspection
Contents
Contents
13.1 Periodically Replaced Parts .......................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 13-1 13.1.2 Reader Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 13-1 13.1.3 Printer Unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Durables and Consumables ........................................................................................................................................13-2

13.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 13-2 13.2.2 Reader Unit .............................................................................................................................................................................. 13-2 13.2.3 Printer Unit............................................................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure........................................................................................................................13-3

13.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ..................................................................................................................................... 13-3 13.3.2 Scheduled Servicing (reader unit)............................................................................................................................................ 13-4 13.3.3 Scheduled Servicing (printer unit) ........................................................................................................................................... 13-4 13.3.4 Shifting the Photosensitive Drum Phase.................................................................................................................................. 13-9
13.4 Cleaning ...................................................................................................................................................................13-15

13.4.1 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Rear Guide ....................................................................................................................... 13-15 13.4.2 Cleaning the Registration Roller, Registration Guide, and Transparency Sensor ................................................................. 13-15
Chapter 13
13.1 Periodically Replaced Parts

13.1.1 Overview
0002-9397
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Some parts of the machine must be replaced on a periodical basis for the machine to maintain a specific level of performance. They must be replaced regardless of the presence/absence of external changes or damage, as the performance of the machine will be considerably affected once they fail. If possible, plan any replacement to coincide with a scheduled visit.
The intervals indicated may vary depending on the site environment and user habit. 1. Checking the Timing of Replacement The timing of replacement may be checked using the following service mode items: (1) Copier COPIER>COUNTER>PRDC-1 (2) Accessory COPIER>COUNTER>PRDC-2
13.1.2 Reader Unit

0000-9633
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine's reader unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis.
13.1.3 Printer Unit

0011-4548
T-13-1 as of September 2005 Ref. 1 Ozone filter Parts name Parts No. FC5-2486-000 Q'ty 1 Interval 250,000 images* Remarks
Toner filter
FL2-0554-000
250,000 images*
Primary charging wire
FB4-3687-000
AR
500,000 images*
***
4 5
Charging wire cleaner 1 Charging wire cleaner 2
FL2-2427-000 FL2-2428-000
1 1
500,000 images* 500,000 images*
** **
Post-charging wire
FB4-3687-000
AR
500,000 images*
***
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Post-charging assembly wire cleaner 1 Post-charging assembly wire cleaner 2 Primary grid wire Fixing thermistor Pressure thermistor Outside heating roller thermistor Primary charging assembly Post-charging assembly Fixing thermal switch Pressure thermal switch
FL2-2427-000 FL2-2428-000 FY1-0883-000 FK2-0013-000 FK2-0013-000 FK2-0013-000 FM2-0429-000 FM2-0427-000 FM2-0497-000 FM2-0498-000
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
500,000 images* 500,000 images* 500,000 images* 500,000 prints* 500,000 prints* 500,000 prints* 1,000,000 images* 1,000,000 images* 1,000,000 prints 1,000,000 prints **** **** ****
17
Outside heating thermal switch
FM2-0499-000
1,000,000 prints
* In the case of a black mono color print: counted as 1,in the case of a full color print: counted as 4 images. ** Under high humidity and high temperature condition, 100,000 images(iRC6800/iRC6870N/iRC6870/iRC6870N)A85,000 images(iRC5800/iRC5870N/ iRC5870/iRC5870N) *** Offered as a service part on a reel basis.
13-1
Chapter 13 **** May be either a main thermistor or a sub thermistor, and these 2 items are offered as a service part in the form of a set.
13.2 Durables and Consumables

13.2.1 Overview
0005-8049
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Some parts of the machine may have to be replaced once or more over the period of machine warranty because of wear or damage. Replace them as needed by referring to the table of estimated lives (expressed in terms of the number of prints they make). 1. Making Checks When Replacing Durables Use the following service mode items to find out when to replace parts: - Machine COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 - Accessory COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
13.2.2 Reader Unit

0000-9645
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine's reader unit does not have parts that are classified as durables.
13.2.3 Printer Unit

0011-4549
T-13-2 as of March 2004 Ref. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Parts name Feed roller (manual feed D roller) Separation roller (manual feed C roller) ITB cleaner scoop-up sheet Secondary transfer static eliminator holder Fixing roller Pressure roller Outside heating roller ITB cleaner blade Secondary transfer outside roller Parts No. FB1-8581-000 FB5-0873-000 FL2-0411-000 FL2-0598-000 FC5-6298-000 FC5-6299-000 FC5-2285-000 FC5-1662-000 FC5-2157-000 Q'ty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 195,000 images 195,000 images (165,000 images) [10] Primary transfer roller FC5-1660-000 1 Interval 120,000 prints 120,000 prints 150,000 prints 150,000 prints 150,000 prints 150,000 prints 150,000 prints 195,000 images (*) (*) (*) (**) Apply lubricant at time of replacement. (**) (**)/The values in parentheses represent the iRC5800/5800N/ 5870/5870N. Remarks
[11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20]
Cleaner blade Pickup rolleriDeck A rollerj Feed roller iDeck B rollerj Separation roller iDeck C rollerj Pickup rolleriCassette A rollerj Feed roller iCassette B rollerj Separation rolleriCassette C rollerj Primary transfer static eliminator ITB Secondary transfer inside roller
FC5-1788-000 FC5-2524-000 FC5-2526-000 FC5-2528-000 FC5-2524-000 FC5-2526-000 FC5-2528-000 FM2-0420-000 FC5-1658-000 FC5-1661-000
1 1 each
195,000 images 250,000 prints 250,000 prints 250,000 prints 250,000 prints 250,000 prints 250,000 prints 300,000 images 300,000 images 300,000 prints
(**) one edge in use, Apply lubricant at time of replacement. Machine left/right deck Machine left/right deck Machine left/right deck Body upper/lower cassette Body upper/lower cassette Body upper/lower cassette (**) (**)
1 each 1 each 1 each 1 each 1 each 1 1 1
13-2
Chapter 13
as of March 2004 Ref. [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] Parts name Cleaner scoop-up sheet Edge scraper Color developing assembly web Fixing heat insulating bush Separation claw Lower separation claw unit Pressure insulating bush Outside heat insulating bush ITB edge scraper Ozone filter (fixing) Toner filter Bk developing assembly Developing cylinder Bk developing assembly Developing roll Parts No. FL2-0422-000 FC5-5136-000 FM2-0446-000 FC5-2286-000 FB5-3613-000 FM2-1672-000 FM2-0501-000 RB1-0325-000 FC5-2582-000 FC6-2843-000 FC5-6370-000 FL2-0554-000 FM2-0434-000 FC5-1863-000 Q'ty 1 2 3 1 2 4 6 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 Interval 390,000 images 500,000 images 500,000 prints 500,000 prints 500,000 prints 500,000 prints 500,000 prints 500,000 prints 500,000 prints 600,000 images 1,000,000 images 1,000,000 images 1,000,000 prints 1,000,000 prints (**) (**) (**) (**) (**) Remarks
*: in the case of a color ratio of 10%; if 100%, 60,000 prints; if 0%, 180,000 prints. **: in the case of a black mono color print, counted as 1 image; in the case of a full color print, counted as 4 images. MEMO: The estimated life is in terms of the median value found in the evaluation data. The parts number, further, is subject to change to reflect design changes.
13.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure

13.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure
0003-4125
- As a rule, perform scheduled servicing every 150,000 prints. - Check with the Service Book before setting out for a scheduled service visit, and take parts for which replacement is expected. - If the power plug is left connected for a long time in a place subject to dust, humidity, or oil smoke, a fire hazard is a possibility (i.e., the dust collecting around the plug can absorb moisture, resulting in insulating failure). Be sure to remove the power plug on a periodical basis, and wipe off the dust and dirt collecting around it. 1. Work Procedure 1) Report to the person in charge, and check the general condition. 2) Record the counter reading, and check the faulty prints. 3) Check following, and clean/adjust the items that are indicated:
T-13-3 Items Text copy against image density standard for soiling of back of paper for clarity of characters for margin for fixing for margin standards (single-sided print) misplaced registration, soiled back of paper leading edge: 4.0+1.5/-1.0mm left edge: 2.5+/- 1.5mm (double-sided print) leading edge: 4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
13-3
Chapter 13
Items left edge: 2.5+/- 2.0mm Feeding system registration upper/lower roller for paper lint along front edge of registration assembly
4) Check the waste toner case. If half full or more, dispose of the waste toner in a vinyl bag or the like for collection; or, replace the waste toner case.
- If you need to dispose of the waste toner, be sure to do so in strict accordance with the regulations imposed by the local authorities. - Do not dispose of waste toner in a fire. Doing so may cause an explosion. 5) Clean the copyboard glass and the reading glass. 6) Make test copies. 7) Make sample copies. 8) Check the operation of the leakage breaker. With the power switch at ON, push the test switch of the leakage breaker to check that it operates normally (i.e., the breaker switch shifts to the OFF side to cut off the power). If the leakage beaker fails to operate normally, replace it, and run a check once again. 2. Resetting the Breaker When you have made the check, turn off the main power switch, and turn on the breaker switch, and then turn the main power switch back on. 9) Put the sample copies in order, and clean up the area around the machine. 10) Record the final counter reading; at this time, be sure to fill out the blanks for 'FX-UP-RL' and 'DV-UNT-K' (service counters). 11) Fill out the Service Book, and report to the person in change. Be sure to update the history of checks on the leakage breaker in the Service Book.
13.3.2 Scheduled Servicing (reader unit)

0011-4553
Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated herein.

T-13-4 Unit Location Work clean Intervals 195,000 images Remarks clean the white plate on the back.
Original exposure system Face/back of the copyboard glass (large) Original exposure system Face/back of the copyboard glass (small) Original exposure system Scanner rail
clean clean/ lubricate clean
195,000 images as needed
Original exposure system Scanner mirror (No. 1 through No. 3 mirrors) Original exposure system Reflecting plate
195,000 images
clean
195,000 images
The foreign values are estimates only, and are subject to change based on future data.
13.3.3 Scheduled Servicing (printer unit)

0011-4556
Do not use solvents or oils other than those permitted.
13-4
Chapter 13
T-13-5 Unit Location Item replace Interval 250,000 images
[1]
Remarks
Externals and controls Ozone filter
Externals and controls Toner filter
replace
250,000 images
[1]Toner filter [2]Ozone filter
Externals and controls Dust-collecting filter (primary)
clean
250,000 prints
inside of the right upper cover wn Charging assembly Charging assembly Dust-colleting glass Primary charging assembly clean replace 250,000 prints 1,000,000 images upon installation 500,000 images upon installation, 250,000 images 500,000 images 500,000 images 1,000,000 images upon installation 500,000 images 500,000 images upon installation, 250,000 images
Primary charging wire clean replace
Charging assembly
Primary grid wire
clean replace
Charging assembly Charging assembly Charging assembly
Charging wire cleaner replace 1/2 Post-charging assembly Post-charging wire replace clean replace
Charging assembly Charging assembly
Post-Charging wire cleaner 1/2 Charging assembly shielding plate
replace clean
13-5
Chapter 13
Unit Photosensitive drum Location Drum heater sliding area Item clean/lubricate Interval 1,000,000 images Remarks
[1]
[1]
Clean the terminal [1] of the slip ring using alcohol; then, apply a small amount of lubricant (FY9-6008).
Photosensitive drum
Shifting the photosensitive drum phase Developing cylinder Developing stray toner-blocking sheet
adjustment
250,000 imags
Black developing assembly Black developing assembly
check clean
upon installation 250,000 prints
[3]
Black developing assembly Black developing assembly Black developing assembly Developing cylinder drive gear Developing roll Bias roller toner collection case clean clean clean 250,000 prints 250,000 prints 250,000 images
[4]
[1]
[3] [2]
[1]Developing stray toner-blocking sheet [2]Developing cylinder drive gear [3]Developing roll [4]Bias roller toner collection case
Color developing assembly Color developing assembly
Developing cylinder
check
upon installation
Developing stray toner-blocking sheet
clean
250,000 prints
Color developing assembly Color developing assembly Color developing assembly Color developing assembly
ATR sensor Color toner c sensor window Sleeve ends bushing Bottle cover
clean clean clean clean
250,000 images 250,000 images 250,000 images 250,000 images
13-6
Chapter 13
Unit Color developing assembly Location Color toner cartridge placement@ sensor window clean Item Interval 250,000 images Remarks
[1]
[1]Color toner cartridge placement sensor window ITB Patch @sensor window clean 250,000 images
ITB
ITB inside scraper/ clean roller(when replacing primary transfer roller) Pre-transfer corona assembly rail, thereunder clean
195,000 images
ITB area
150,000 prints
ITB area
Scoop-up sheet base, thereunder
clean
150,000 prints
[1]
ITB area Cleaner container, hereunder clean 150,000 prints
[2]
[1]Scoop-up sheet base, thereunder [2]Cleaner container, hereunder
Secondary transfer assembly
Secondary transfer rear guide
clean
150,000 prints
[2]
[1]
Feeding assembly
Pre-Fixing Feeding belt
clean
150,000 prints [1] Secondary transfer rear guide [2] Pre-Fixing Feeding belt
13-7
Chapter 13
Unit Feeding assembly Location OHP sensor clean Item Interval 250,000 prints Remarks
[1] [1]
[1]clean upper/lower OHP sensor using blow brush
Feeding assembly Feeding assembly Hopper assembly Fixing assembly Fixing assembly
Registration roller Registration roller guide Toner receptacle/ supply mouth Fixing web Fixing thermistor
clean clean clean check clean replace
250,000 prints 250,000 prints 250,000 prints upon installation 150,000 prints 500,000 prints
Fixing assembly
Pressure thermistor
clean
150,000 prints
replace
500,000 prints
Fixing assembly
Outside heating roller thermistor
clean
150,000 prints
replace
500,000 prints
Fixing assembly
Fixing thermal switch clean
300,000 prints
replace
1,000,000 prints
Fixing assembly
Pressure thermal switch
clean
150,000 prints
replace
1,000,000 prints
13-8
Chapter 13
Unit Fixing assembly Location Outside heating thermal switch clean Item Interval 150,000 prints Remarks
replace
1,000,000 prints
Fixing assembly Delivery assembly
Inlet guide Upper/lower separation claw
clean clean inspect
150,000 prints 150,000 prints 250,000 images*
use lint-free with specified solvent. use lint-free paper with specified solvent.
Waste toner collection Waste toner box assembly
*: The black developing cylinder need not be cleaned on a periodical basis. If you must clean the surface of the cylinder, be sure to dry wipe it with lint-free paper, NEVER using water or solvent. **: The intervals are based on a color ratio of 10% and image ratio of 5%, and thus are subject to variation depending on the actual ratios.
The foregoing values are estimates only, and are subject to change based on future data.
13.3.4 Shifting the Photosensitive Drum Phase

0006-0350
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The photosensitive drum can develop drum memory unless the image write start position is moved at specific intervals. Be sure to move the drum phase every so many copies/prints have been made as shown below. 1. Overview of the Work
1. Preparatory work
2. Mechanical work
3. Updating the density initial data - rewriting the density initial data (service mode) - executing auto gradation correction
- making test copies (service mode) - disabling initial rotation (service mode)
shifting the photosensitive drum phase
F-13-1
2. When to Perform the Work - every some copies or prints made continuously - when removing and attaching the drum (i.e., when the initial drum phase is lost) Here,3. "Mechanical Work" in the detailed instructions is not needed. To avoid the possible discrepancy in phase, however, be sure to perform 1. "Preparatory Work" and 3. "Updating the Density Initial Data." 3. Detailed Instructions 1) Preparatory Work 1-1) Turn off the main power switch, and wait until the machine has entered a ready state. 1-2) To stabilize the machine operation, generate 5 test pattern printouts (A3, double-sided) by executing the following in service mode: COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE=16.
Be sure not to forget to select a cassette loaded with A3 paper and double-sided printing in service mode. - to select a particular cassette in service mode, perform COPIER>TEST>PG>PG-PICK=3 or =4. - to select double-sided printing in service mode, perform COPIER>TEST>PG>2-SIDE=1. 1-3) Set "1" to the following service mode to disable initial multiple rotation: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINR-OFF. 1-4) Turn off the main power switch. 2) Mechanical Work 2-1) Open the front cover. 2-2) Shift down the fixing/feeding release lever [1], and slide out the fixing/feeding assembly [2] to the front.
13-9
Chapter 13
[1]
[2]
F-13-2
2-3) Open the color toner supply cover [1]. Remove the 2 screws [2], and remove the process cover [3].
[2]
[3] [1]
F-13-3
2-4) Remove the screw [1], and shift down the primary transfer roller locking lever [2] (so that the primary transfer roller is freed).
[1] [2]
F-13-4
2-5) Check the position of the marking [2] on the drum flange in relation to the protrusion [1] of the drum fixing member. (checking the drum phase) In the figure, the marking [2] on the drum flange is at "." on the left and ".." on the right in relation to the protrusion [1] of the drum fixing member.
[1] [2]
[2]
F-13-5
At this time, check the drum phase label [1] attached behind the process unit cover. If there is no check mark on the label indicating the present phase position, be sure to put a check mark.
13-10
Chapter 13
1 2 3 4
2 3 4 1
[1]
F-13-6
1 2 3
2 3 4 1
[2]
F-13-7
2-6) Hold down the drum fixing member [1] using the drum stop tool [2]: then, using a screwdriver, remove the drum fixing screw [3]. As shown, be sure to remove the screw only after matching the protrusion [4] of the drum stop tool against the cut-off [5] of the drum flange.
[1] [3] [2]
[5]
[4]
F-13-8
2-7) Attach the drum stop tool [1] in the drum flange [2]; then, turn the drum counterclockwise by 90 deg.
[1]
90
[2]
F-13-9
13-11
Chapter 13
(1) When attaching the tool to the flange, be sure to turn the drum only after matching the protrusion [2] of the tool against the cut-off [1] of the drum flange.
[1]
[2]
F-13-10
(2) The drum phase position is identified by means of a marking of 1 to 4 dots on the flange. At time of shipment from the factory, dent A in the drum shaft is between "." and "..". The following figures show the position of the drum flange before an after a shift is introduced:
Position of the Flange Before the Phase Is Shifted (at time of shipment)
[A]
Position of the Flange After the Phase Is Shifted (after the shift work for the first time)
F-13-11
(3) Do not shift the drum phase as part of normal work involving drawing out of the process unit. 2-8) After attaching the drum fixing member [2] to the drum flange [1], hold it down from above using the drum stop tool [3]. Thereafter, tighten the drum fixing screw [4] with a screwdriver. Be sure to fix the protrusion [5] of the drum stop tool in place with a screw after matching it against the cut-off [6] of the drum flange.
13-12
Chapter 13
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
[6]
[5]
F-13-12
2-9) After checking the drum phase position, put a check mark on the drum phase label [1] attached behind the process cover.
1 2 3 4
2 3 4 1
[1]
F-13-13
The following figure shows a label with a check mark indicating that the work has been performed.
1 2 3
2 3 4 1
[1]
F-13-14
2-10) Attach the cover by performing step 2-1 through 2-4 in reverse. 3) Updating the Density Initial Data. 3-1) Turn on the main power switch, and wait until the machine has entered a ready state. 3-2) Perform the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DR-P-ADJ
When the machine ends the service mode item normally, the setting (AINR-OFF) will automatically return to "0". 3-3) Perform the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT. Then, record the values of the following on the service label attached behind the front cover: COPIER>ADJT>DENS>P-SGNL-Y/M/C.
Store the output of P-PRINT in the service book case. If there is previous output in the case, replace it with the new output. 3-4) Perform auto gradation correction in user mode (adjust/cleaning>auto gradation correction>full correction).
13-13
Chapter 13
Be sure to perform the foregoing steps to position the drum in phase whenever you are not sure whether the drum is in correct phase. 1. Related Service Mode Item a. counter mode for phase shift work: COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>DRM-PHAS Particulars Use it to indicate the counter reading for determining the intervals of the work. (The denominator indicates the counter reading of the work intervals, while the numerator indicates the counter reading on an actual machine). - Settings: 00000000 to 99999999 - At Time of Shipment denominator of counter reading: 200,000 images (Japan); 100,000 images (outside Japan) (numerator of counter reading): 0 b. message switchover mode associated with the foregoing counter: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DRM-DISP Particulars Use it to enable/disable the indication of the foregoing count reading: Settings:0 to 2 0: disable indication 1: indicate in service mode only (factory default) 2: indicate both on User screen and in service mode c. confirmation mode for phase shift work: COPIER>DISPLAY>ALARM-2 A record of the work will be indicated in terms of the number of times the work has been performed.
13-14
Chapter 13
13.4 Cleaning
13.4.1 Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Rear Guide
0004-6732
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Remove the ribs one by one by moving lint-free paper moistened with alcohol in the direction of the arrow in the figure.
- Do not dry wipe, as the ribs are likely to become charged. - The ribs of the secondary transfer rear guide are located near the static eliminating brush [3]; do not move the lint-free paper in the wrong direction to avoid trapping and bending the static eliminator.
F-13-15
13.4.2 Cleaning the Registration Roller, Registration Guide, and Transparency Sensor
0005-6999
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 2) Press the leaf springs on both sides, and slide the fixing/feeding assembly farther out. 3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and turn overt the transparency upper sensor unit [2].
[1]
[2]
F-13-16
4) Remove the paper lint building up over the transparency sensor [1] using a blower brush.
13-15
Chapter 13
[1]
F-13-17
5) Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the grounding spring [2]. 6) Remove the screw [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
F-13-18
7) Remove the 3 screws [1], and remove the registration roller upper stay [3] together with the grounding spring [4] while removing the spring [2] off its hook.
[3]
[2]
[4]
F-13-19
[1]
8) Open the registration upper guide [1], and clean the back [1] of the upper guide and the lower guide [2] using lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. 9) Remove the paper lint building up on the transparency sensor [3] using a blower brush.
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-13-20
10) Turn the upper registration roller [1] and the lower registration roller [2] to clean them with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
13-16
Chapter 13
[2]
F-13-21
[1]
13-17
Chapter 14 Standards and Adjustments
Contents
Contents
14.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure ...........................................................................................................................14-1
14.1.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 1...................................................................................................................................... 14-1 14.1.2 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 2...................................................................................................................................... 14-1 14.1.3 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 3...................................................................................................................................... 14-2 14.1.4 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 4...................................................................................................................................... 14-3 14.1.5 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 5...................................................................................................................................... 14-4 14.1.6 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 6...................................................................................................................................... 14-5 14.1.7 Potential Control Conversion Table......................................................................................................................................... 14-6
14.2 Image Adjustments ..................................................................................................................................................14-11

14.2.1 Image Position ....................................................................................................................................................................... 14-11 14.2.2 Checking the Image Position ................................................................................................................................................. 14-11 14.2.3 Cassette .................................................................................................................................................................................. 14-11 14.2.4 Manual Feed Tray .................................................................................................................................................................. 14-12 14.2.5 Front Deck ............................................................................................................................................................................. 14-12
14.3 Scanning System ......................................................................................................................................................14-13

14.3.1 After Replacing the CCD Unit............................................................................................................................................... 14-13 14.3.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass ................................................................................................................................... 14-13 14.3.3 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or Initializing the RAM................................................................................... 14-14
14.4 Laser Exposure System ............................................................................................................................................14-14

14.4.1 After Replacing the Laser Scanner ........................................................................................................................................ 14-14
14.5 Image Formation System .........................................................................................................................................14-14

14.5.1 After Replacing the Black Developing Unit .......................................................................................................................... 14-14 14.5.2 Points to Note When Attaching the Polarity Positioning Plate.............................................................................................. 14-14 14.5.3 Replacing the Color Developing Unit.................................................................................................................................... 14-15 14.5.4 Replacing the Starter of the Color Developing Unit.............................................................................................................. 14-16 14.5.5 After Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly ................................................................................................................. 14-18 14.5.6 After Replacing the Primary Charging Wire ......................................................................................................................... 14-18 14.5.7 After Replacing the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire .................................................................................................................. 14-18 14.5.8 After Replacing the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire .................................................................................................................. 14-18 14.5.9 After Replacing the Waste Toner Box................................................................................................................................... 14-18 14.5.10 After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade............................................................................................................................. 14-18 14.5.11 After Repacking the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade................................................................................................. 14-19 14.5.12 Replace the Photosensitive Drum ........................................................................................................................................ 14-20 14.5.13 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater ............................................................................................................... 14-20 14.5.14 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater PCB ...................................................................................................... 14-21 14.5.15 After Repacking the ITB ..................................................................................................................................................... 14-22 14.5.16 After Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller....................................................................................................................... 14-22
14.6 Fixing System ..........................................................................................................................................................14-23

14.6.1 Points to Note When Attaching the Fixing Assembly ........................................................................................................... 14-23 14.6.2 After Replacing the Fixing Roller.......................................................................................................................................... 14-23 14.6.3 After Replacing the Fixing Web ............................................................................................................................................ 14-23 14.6.4 Position of the Fixing inlet Guide .......................................................................................................................................... 14-23 14.6.5 Points to Note When Attaching the Pressure Roller .............................................................................................................. 14-24 14.6.6 Adjusting the Nip Pressure of the Pressure Roller ................................................................................................................ 14-24 14.6.7 Adjusting the Position of the Feeding Web Solenoid (SL2).................................................................................................. 14-24 14.6.8 Points to Note About the Position of the Fixing Thermal Switch ......................................................................................... 14-24 14.6.9 Points to Note When Mounting the Shift Thermal Switch .................................................................................................... 14-24 14.6.10 Points to Note When Mounting the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch..................................................................... 14-25 14.6.11 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Upper Thermistor ............................................................................................ 14-25 14.6.12 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Lower Thermistor............................................................................................ 14-25
Contents
14.6.13 Points to Note When Mounting the External Heat Thermistor............................................................................................ 14-25
14.7 Electrical Components ............................................................................................................................................ 14-25

14.7.1 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB......................................................................................................................... 14-25 14.7.2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................... 14-26 14.7.3 Points to Note When Mounting the DC Controller PCB/ DC Controller Box ...................................................................... 14-26 14.7.4 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main)................................................................................................................. 14-27 14.7.5 After Repacking the SRAM Board ........................................................................................................................................ 14-27 14.7.6 After Replacing the HDD ...................................................................................................................................................... 14-27 14.7.7 When Replacing the HV2 PCB.............................................................................................................................................. 14-27 14.7.8 When Replacing the ATR Sensor/Patch Image Read Sensor................................................................................................ 14-28
14.8 Pickup/Feeding System ........................................................................................................................................... 14-28

14.8.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration After Replacing the Pickup Cassette ........................................................................ 14-28 14.8.2 Adjusting the Manual Feed Pickup Horizontal Registration ................................................................................................. 14-28 14.8.3 Adjusting the Front Deck Pickup Horizontal Registration .................................................................................................... 14-28 14.8.4 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value.............................................................................................................................. 14-30
Chapter 14
14.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure

14.1.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 1
0005-4335
START
Turn off the potential control mechanism: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P0-CNT '0'
Is the image better? See*1 YES
NO
To image adjustment basic procedure 2 NG
Execute the following: COPIER>FUNCTION> DPC>OFFSET. OK
Check the potential sensor harness.
Turn off the main power switch.
1. Short circuit CP82 found on the DC controller PCB and GND (frame). 2. Disconnect the connector J426 for the DC controller PCB found on the potential control PCB.
Turn on the main power switch.
Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT-K.
Is the setting between 0 and 30? YES
NO
Replace the DC controller PCB.
Replace the potential sensor unit.

F-14-1
*1: Make a Bk mono copy. If the said fault is absent, make a full color copy. (Be sure not to make more than 5 full color copies.) 1. At the End of the Work When done, go through he following so that the machine is ready to generate images of optimum quality. 1) Enable the potential control mechanism in service mode (set '1' to the following, and execute the item: COPIER>option>PO-CNT). 2) Perform image stabilization control in service mode (i.e., execute COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>INTR-EX). 3) If the sure to perform full correction in user mode (under auto gradation correction) to ensure optimum density.
When done, be sure to set '1' to the service mode item (potential control function); otherwise, image faults can occur.

0005-4336
14-1
Chapter 14
<Check the Primary / Grid output>

Image adjustment basic procedure 2 Turn off the potential control mechanism: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P0-CNT '0' Measure the voltage PR-CNT at J1111B-9 found on the DC controller PCB during copying operation. Make the following selections in service mode (primary current level of the primary charging assembly): COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>PRIMARY. Using the "Potential Control Conversion Table," convert the reading (in uA) indicated during printing operation into a control voltage. Refer to the result as conversion value A.
Is the difference between the actual measurement of GRID-CNT and the foregoing value B within +/-10%?
NO
YES Replace the DC controller PCB.
Try replacing HVT1. Is the fault corrected?
YES
NO END
Is the difference between the actual measurement of PR-CNT and the foregoing value A within +/-10%?
NO
YES Replace the DC controller PCB. Measure the voltage GRID-CNT at J111B-8 found on the DC controller PCB during copying operation.
Try replacing the photosensitive drum. Is the fault corrected?
YES
NO END
Make the following selections in service mode (grid voltage level of the primary charging assembly): COPIER>DISPLAY> HV-STS>GRID. Using the "Potential Control Conversion Table," convert the reading (unit V) indicated during printing operation into a control voltage. Refer to the result as conversion value B.
F-14-2
To image adjustment basic procedure 3

0005-4337
14-2
Chapter 14
<Check the Laser output>

Image adjustment basic procedure 3
Turn on the potential control mechanism: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P0-CNT '1'
Make the following selections in service mode, and set '1' : COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC. Thereafter, turn off and then on the main power switch.
Unconditional execution of potential control mechanism
Check the following service mode settings: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>LPWR-Y COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>LPWR-M COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>LPWR-C COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>LPWR-K
Is the reading between 00 and FF?
YES
NO Check the voltage level of CP11 found on the DC controller PCB during black printing operation.
Is the voltage level (laser output) of CP11 within the limit (2.0 V)? YES Replace the laser scanner unit.
F-14-3
NO

0005-4338
14-3
Chapter 14
<Check the Developing output>

Turn on the potential control mechanism: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P0-CNT '1'
Is the fault in a color or in the black?
Color
Bk Measure the voltage DEV_DC_CONT at J1132A-11 found on the DC controller PCB during black printing operation. Measure the voltage DEV_CL_DC_CONT at J1132A-9 found on the DC controller during full color printing operation.
Make the following selections in service mode (DC level of black developing bias): COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>BIAS. Using the "Potential control Conversion Table," convert the reading (in V) indicated during black printing operation into a control voltage. Refer to the result as conversion value D.
Make the following selections in service mode (DC level of color developing bias) : COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>BIAS. Using the "Potential control Conversion Table," convert the reading (in V) indicated during full color printing operation into a control voltage. Refer to the result as conversion value C.
Is the difference between the actual measurement of DEV-DC-CNT and the foregoing value D within +/-10%?
NO
NO
Is the difference between the actual measurement of DEV-DC-CNT and the foregoing value C within +/-10%?
YES
YES

F-14-4

0005-4339
14-4
Chapter 14
<Check the Primary transfer output>

Is the toner image on the photosensitive drum before transfer normal?
NO
Replace the photosensitive drum.
YES Turn off the potential control mechanism: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P0-CNT '0'
Measure the voltage TR1CONT at J1132B-8 found on the DC controller PCB during black printing operation.
Make the following selections in service mode (current level of primary transfer): COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS>1TR-K1. Using the "Potential Control Conversion Table," convert the reading (in uA) indicated during black printing operation into a control voltage. Refer to the result as conversion value E.
Is the difference between the actual measurement of TR-CNT and the foregoing value E within +/-20%?
NO
YES
NO To image adjustment basic procedure 6
YES END
F-14-5

0005-4340
14-5
Chapter 14
<Check the Secondary output>

Turn off the potential control mechanism: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>P0-CNT '0'
Measure the voltage 2TRCONTP at J1119B-13 found on the DC control PCB during black printing operation.
Make the following selections in service mode (current level of secondary transfer): COPIER >DISPLAY>HV-STS>2TR. Using the "Potential control Conversion Table," convert the reading (in uA) indicated during black printing operation into a control voltage.
Is the difference between the actual measurement of TR-CNT and '2TR' as it is indicated in service mode between +/-20%?
NO
YES
NO
YES
END
F-14-6
1. Try changing the setting of the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FUZZY. 2. Try replacing the paper.
14.1.7 Potential Control Conversion Table

0005-4608
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Potential Control Conversion Table
T-14-1 Color development (V) 2.6 6.8 11.1 15.3 19.5 23.8 28 32.2 36.4 40.7 44.9 49.1 53.4 57.6 61.8 66.1 1.7 4.1 6.5 8.8 11.2 13.5 15.9 18.2 20.6 22.9 25.3 27.6 30 32.3 34.7 37 Black development (V) 2 5.8 9.5 13.3 17 20.8 24.5 28.3 32.1 35.8 39.6 43.3 47.1 50.8 54.6 58.3 Primary transfer (uA) 0 0 3 3.6 4.1 4.7 5.2 5.8 6.3 6.9 7.4 8 8.6 9.1 9.7 10.2 Secondary transfer (uA) 99.4 98.9 98.5 98 97.5 97.1 96.6 96.1 95.7 95.2 94.7 94.3 93.8 93.3 92.9 92.4
Control voltage (V) 1.031 1.078 1.125 1.172 1.219 1.266 1.313 1.359 1.406 1.453 1.5 1.547 1.594 1.641 1.688 1.734
Primary (uA) 1395.5 1388.9 1382.3 1375.7 1369.1 1362.6 1356 1349.4 1342.8 1336.3 1329.7 1323.1 1316.5 1310 1303.4 1296.8
Grid (V)
14-6
Chapter 14
Control voltage (V) 1.781 1.828 1.875 1.922 1.969 2.016 2.063 2.109 2.156 2.203 2.25 2.297 2.344 2.391 2.438 2.484 2.531 2.578 2.625 2.672 2.719 2.766 2.813 2.859 2.906 2.953 3 3.047 3.094 3.141 3.188 3.234 3.281 3.328 3.375 3.422 3.469 3.516 3.563 3.609 3.656 3.703 3.75 3.797 3.844 3.891 3.938 3.984 4.031 4.078 4.125 4.172 4.219 4.266 4.313 4.359 4.406 4.453 4.5 4.547 4.594 4.641 4.688 4.734
Primary (uA) 1290.2 1283.7 1277.1 1270.5 1263.9 1257.3 1250.8 1244.2 1237.6 1231 1224.5 1217.9 1211.3 1204.7 1198.2 1191.6 1185 1178.4 1171.9 1165.3 1158.7 1152.1 1145.5 1139 1132.4 1125.8 1119.2 1112.7 1106.1 1099.5 1092.9 1086.4 1079.8 1073.2 1066.6 1060.1 1053.5 1046.9 1040.3 1033.7 1027.2 1020.6 1014 1007.4 1000.9 994.3 987.7 981.1 974.6 968 961.4 954.8 948.3 941.7 935.1 928.5 921.9 915.4 908.8 902.2 895.6 889.1 882.5 875.9
Grid (V) 70.3 74.5 78.8 83 87.2 91.5 95.7 99.9 104.1 108.4 112.6 116.8 121.1 125.3 129.5 133.8 138 142.2 146.5 150.7 154.9 159.2 163.4 167.6 171.9 176.1 180.3 184.5 188.8 193 197.2 201.5 205.7 209.9 214.2 218.4 222.6 226.9 231.1 235.3 239.6 243.8 248 252.2 256.5 260.7 264.9 269.2 273.4 277.6 281.9 286.1 290.3 294.6 298.8 303 307.3 311.5 315.7 320 324.2 328.4 332.6 336.9
Color development (V) 39.4 41.7 44.1 46.4 48.8 51.1 53.5 55.8 58.2 60.6 62.9 65.3 67.6 70 72.3 74.7 77 79.4 81.7 84.1 86.4 88.8 91.1 93.5 95.8 98.2 100.5 102.9 105.2 107.6 109.9 112.3 114.6 117 119.4 121.7 124.1 126.4 128.8 131.1 133.5 135.8 138.2 140.5 142.9 145.2 147.6 149.9 152.3 154.6 157 159.3 161.7 164 166.4 168.7 171.1 173.5 175.8 178.2 180.5 182.9 185.2 187.6
Black development (V) 62.1 65.9 69.6 73.4 77.1 80.9 84.6 88.4 92.2 95.9 99.7 103.4 107.2 110.9 114.7 118.5 122.2 126 129.7 133.5 137.2 141 144.7 148.5 152.3 156 159.8 163.5 167.3 171 174.8 178.6 182.3 186.1 189.8 193.6 197.3 201.1 204.9 208.6 212.4 216.1 219.9 223.6 227.4 231.1 234.9 238.7 242.4 246.2 249.9 253.7 257.4 261.2 265 268.7 272.5 276.2 280 283.7 287.5 291.3 295 298.8
Primary transfer (uA) 10.8 11.3 11.9 12.4 13 13.5 14.1 14.7 15.2 15.8 16.3 16.9 17.4 18 18.5 19.1 19.6 20.2 20.8 21.3 21.9 22.4 23 23.5 24.1 24.6 25.2 25.7 26.3 26.9 27.4 28 28.5 29.1 29.6 30.2 30.7 31.3 31.8 32.4 33 33.5 34.1 34.6 35.2 35.7 36.3 36.8 37.4 37.9 38.5 39.1 39.6 40.2 40.7 41.3 41.8 42.4 42.9 43.5 44 44.6 45.2 45.7
Secondary transfer (uA) 91.9 91.5 91 90.5 90 89.6 89.1 88.6 88.2 87.7 87.2 86.8 86.3 85.8 85.4 84.9 84.4 84 83.5 83 82.6 82.1 81.6 81.2 80.7 80.2 79.8 79.3 78.8 78.4 77.9 77.4 77 76.5 76 75.6 75.1 74.6 74.2 73.7 73.2 72.8 72.3 71.8 71.4 70.9 70.4 69.9 69.5 69 68.5 68.1 67.6 67.1 66.7 66.2 65.7 65.3 64.8 64.3 63.9 63.4 62.9 62.5
14-7
Chapter 14
Primary (uA) 869.3 862.8 856.2 849.6 843 836.5 829.9 823.3 816.7 810.1 803.6 797 790.4 783.8 777.3 770.7 764.1 757.5 751 744.4 737.8 731.2 724.7 718.1 711.5 704.9 698.3 691.8 685.2 678.6 672 665.5 658.9 652.3 645.7 639.2 632.6 626 619.4 612.9 606.3 599.7 593.1 586.5 580 573.4 566.8 560.2 553.7 547.1 540.5 533.9 527.4 520.8 514.2 507.6 501.1 494.5 487.9 481.3 474.7 468.2 461.6 455
Grid (V) 341.1 345.3 349.6 353.8 358 362.3 366.5 370.7 375 379.2 383.4 387.7 391.9 396.1 400.3 404.6 408.8 413 417.3 421.5 425.7 430 434.2 438.4 442.7 446.9 451.1 455.4 459.6 463.8 468.1 472.3 476.5 480.7 485 489.2 493.4 497.7 501.9 506.1 510.4 514.6 518.8 523.1 527.3 531.5 535.8 540 544.2 548.4 552.7 556.9 561.1 565.4 569.6 573.8 578.1 582.3 586.5 590.8 595 599.2 603.5 607.7
Color development (V) 189.9 192.3 194.6 197 199.3 201.7 204 206.4 208.7 211.1 213.4 215.8 218.1 220.5 222.8 225.2 227.6 229.9 232.3 234.6 237 239.3 241.7 244 246.4 248.7 251.1 253.4 255.8 258.1 260.5 262.8 265.2 267.5 269.9 272.2 274.6 276.9 279.3 281.7 284 286.4 288.7 291.1 293.4 295.8 298.1 300.5 302.8 305.2 307.5 309.9 312.2 314.6 316.9 319.3 321.6 324 326.3 328.7 331 333.4 335.7 338.1
Black development (V) 302.5 306.3 310 313.8 317.6 321.3 325.1 328.8 332.6 336.3 340.1 343.8 347.6 351.4 355.1 358.9 362.6 366.4 370.1 373.9 377.7 381.4 385.2 388.9 392.7 396.4 400.2 404 407.7 411.5 415.2 419 422.7 426.5 430.2 434 437.8 441.5 445.3 449 452.8 456.5 460.3 464.1 467.8 471.6 475.3 479.1 482.8 486.6 490.4 494.1 497.9 501.6 505.4 509.1 512.9 516.6 520.4 524.2 527.9 531.7 535.4 539.2
Primary transfer (uA) 46.3 46.8 47.4 47.9 48.5 49 49.6 50.1 50.7 51.3 51.8 52.4 52.9 53.5 54 54.6 55.1 55.7 56.2 56.8 57.4 57.9 58.5 59 59.6 60.1 60.7 61.2 61.8 62.3 62.9 63.5 64 64.6 65.1 65.7 66.2 66.8 67.3 67.9 68.4 69 69.6 70.1 70.7 71.2 71.8 72.3 72.9 73.4 74 74.5 75.1 75.7 76.2 76.8 77.3 77.9 78.4 79 79.5 80.1 80.6 81.2
Secondary transfer (uA) 62 61.5 61.1 60.6 60.1 59.7 59.2 58.7 58.3 57.8 57.3 56.9 56.4 55.9 55.5 55 54.5 54.1 53.6 53.1 52.7 52.2 51.7 51.3 50.8 50.3 49.8 49.4 48.9 48.4 48 47.5 47 46.6 46.1 45.6 45.2 44.7 44.2 43.8 43.3 42.8 42.4 41.9 41.4 41 40.5 40 39.6 39.1 38.6 38.2 37.7 37.2 36.8 36.3 35.8 35.4 34.9 34.4 34 33.5 33 32.6
14-8
Chapter 14
Primary (uA) 448.4 441.9 435.3 428.7 422.1 415.6 409 402.4 395.8 389.3 382.7 376.1 369.5 362.9 356.4 349.8 343.2 336.6 330.1 323.5 316.9 310.3 303.8 297.2 290.6 284 277.5 270.9 264.3 257.7 251.1 244.6 238 231.4 224.8 218.3 211.7 205.1 198.5 192 185.4 178.8 172.2 165.7 159.1 152.5 145.9 139.3 132.8 126.2 119.6 113 106.5 99.9 93.3 86.7 80.2 73.6 67 60.4 53.9 47.3 40.7 34.1
Grid (V) 611.9 616.2 620.4 624.6 628.8 633.1 637.3 641.5 645.8 650 654.2 658.5 662.7 666.9 671.2 675.4 679.6 683.9 688.1 692.3 696.5 700.8 705 709.2 713.5 717.7 721.9
Color development (V) 340.5 342.8 345.2 347.5 349.9 352.2 354.6 356.9 359.3 361.6 364 366.3 368.7 371 373.4 375.7 378.1 380.4 382.8 385.1 387.5 389.8 392.2 394.6 396.9 399.3 401.6
Black development (V) 542.9 546.7 550.5 554.2 558 561.7 565.5 569.2 573 576.8 580.5 584.3 588 591.8 595.5 599.3 603 606.8 610.6 614.3 618.1 621.8 625.6 629.3 633.1 636.9 640.6 644.4 648.1 651.9 655.6 659.4 663.2 666.9 670.7 674.4 678.2 681.9 685.7 689.5 693.2 697 700.7 704.5 708.2 712 715.7 719.5 723.3 727 730.8 734.5 738.3 742 745.8 749.6 753.3 757.1 760.8 764.6 768.3 772.1 775.9 779.6
Primary transfer (uA) 81.8 82.3 82.9 83.4 84 84.5 85.1 85.6 86.2 86.7 87.3 87.9 88.4 89 89.5 90.1 90.6 91.2 91.7 92.3 92.8 93.4 94 94.5 95.1 95.6 96.2 96.7 97.3 97.8 98.4 98.9 99.5 100.1 100.6 101.2 101.7 102.3 102.8 103.4 103.9 104.5 105 105.6 106.2 106.7 107.3 107.8 108.4 108.9 109.5 110 110.6 111.1 111.7 112.3 112.8 113.4 113.9 114.5 115 115.6 116.1 116.7
Secondary transfer (uA) 32.1 31.6 31.2 30.7 30.2 29.7 29.3 28.8 28.3 27.9 27.4 26.9 26.5 26 25.5 25.1 24.6 24.1 23.7 23.2 22.7 22.3 21.8 21.3 20.9 20.4 19.9 19.5 19 18.5 18.1 17.6 17.1 16.7 16.2 15.7 15.3 14.8 14.3 13.9 13.4 12.9 12.5 12 11.5 11.1 10.6 10.1 9.6 9.2 8.7 8.2 7.8 7.3 6.8 6.4 5.9 5.4 5 4.5 4 3.6 3.1 2.6
726.2 404.0 730.4 406.3 734.6 408.7 738.9 411.0 743.1 413.4 747.3 415.7 751.6 418.1 755.8 420.4 760 422.8 764.3 425.1 768.5 427.5 772.7 429.8 776.9 432.2 781.2 434.5 785.4 436.9 789.6 439.2 793.9 441.6 798.1 443.9 802.3 446.3 806.6 448.7 810.8 451.0 815 453.4 819.3 455.7 823.5 458.1 827.7 460.4 832 462.8 836.2 465.1 840.4 467.5 844.6 469.8 848.9 472.2 853.1 474.5 857.3 476.9 861.6 479.2 865.8 481.6 870 483.9 874.3 486.3 878.5 488.6
14-9
Chapter 14
Control voltage (V) 10.781 10.828 10.875 10.922 10.969 11.016 11.063 11.109 11.156 11.203 11.25 11.297 11.344 11.391 11.438 11.484 11.531 11.578 11.625 11.672 11.719 11.766 11.813 11.859 11.906 11.953 12
Primary (uA) 27.5 21 14.4 7.8 1.2 0
Grid (V)
Color development (V) 882.7 491.0 887 493.3 891.2 495.7 895.4 498.0 899.7 500.4 903.9 Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty
Black development (V) 783.4 787.1 790.9 794.6 798.4 802.1 Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty
Primary transfer (uA) 117.2 117.8 118.4 118.9 119.5 120 120.6 Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty Outside of warranty
Secondary transfer (uA) 2.2 1.7 1.2 0.8 0.3 -0.2 -0.6 -1.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty 0 Outside of warranty
14-10
Chapter 14 Execute the following service mode to adjust the registration: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST
decrease the setting of REGIST. (an increase by 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm)
0003-8718
14.2 Image Adjustments

14.2.1 Image Position
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The margin and the non-image width of a printout made at 100% magnification must be as follows: - Leading Edge Margin
4.0+1.5/-1.0mm [double-sided copy, 2nd side:4.0+1.5/-1.0mm]
Copy, 1st side:4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
Paper leading edge Increase the setting of REGIST. (an decrease by 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm)
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
F-14-11
2) Left/Right Image Margin Adjustment Adjust the horizontal registration mechanically. 3) Leading Edge Image Margin Adjustment (2nd side) Execute the following service mode items to adjust the registration: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > RG-REFE
decrease the setting of REGIST. (an increase by 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm)
double-sided copy, 2nd side:4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Paper leading edge Increase the setting of REGIST. (an decrease by 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm)
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 1618 20
F-14-7
- Left/Right Margin
2.5+1.5mm/-1.5mm (double-sided copy, 2nd side :2.5+2.0mm/-2.0mm)
F-14-12
0 2 4 5 6 8 10
4) Leading Edge Non-Image Width Adjustment Execute the following service mode item: COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X
Decrease the setting of ADJ-X. (a decrease by 10 will decrease the non-image width by 1 mm)
4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
Image edge
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 1618 20
F-14-8
Increase the setting of ADJ-X. (an increase by 10 will increase the non-image width by 1 mm)
- Leading Edge Non-Image Width

F-14-13
4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
5) Left/Right Non-Image Width Adjustment Execute the following service mode item: COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y
Image edge
Decrease the setting of ADJ-X. (a decrease by 10 will decrease the non-image width by 1 mm) Increase the setting of ADJ-Y. (a decrease by 10 will increase the non-image width by 1 mm) 2.5 1.5mm/-1.5mm
0 2 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
F-14-9
- Left/Right Non-Image Width

2.5+1.5mm/-1.5mm
0 2
0 2 4 5 6 8
4 5 6 8 10
F-14-14
10
14.2.3 Cassette
F-14-10
0003-8720
14.2.2 Checking the Image Position

0003-8719
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Make prints using the cassettes 3 and 4 as the source of paper, and check that the left/right margin is as indicated. If not as indicated, adjust the following: 1) Press the cassette release button, and slide out the cassette 3 or 4 to the front. 2) Open the upper right cover and the lower right cover. 3) Insert a screwdriver through the opening in the front right stay; then, loosen the screw [1], and adjust the position of the adjusting plate [2].
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Make 10 prints using the following as the source of paper; then, check to see if the margin and the non-image width are as indicated: - cassettes - manual feed tray - left/right front deck If outside the standards, adjust the following: 1) Leading Edge Image Margin Adjustment (1st side)
14-11
Chapter 14
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-14-15
F-14-17
Move the adjusting plate toward the rear to decrease the left margin. Move the adjusting plate toward the front to increase the left margin. 4) Tighten the screw. 5) Close the upper right cover and the lower right cover. 6) Attach the cassette 3 or 4 back in the machine.
3) Loosen the 2 screws [1], and insert a screwdriver [2] through the opening of the left front stay; then, turn the adjusting screw to adjust the left/right margin.
[1]
14.2.4 Manual Feed Tray

0003-8721
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Make copies using the manual feed tray as the source of paper, and check that the left/right margin is as indicated. If not, adjust the following: 1) Loosen the screw [1], and move the position of the slide guide [2] to adjust the horizontal registration.
[2]
F-14-18
4) Check that the left/right margin of the printouts on paper from the left deck is as indicated. 5) As necessary, adjust the following:
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-14-19 F-14-16
2) Check that the left/right margin of the prints is as indicated. 3) Tighten the screw.
Reference: Turn the screwdriver counterclockwise to decrease the left margin [1]. Turn the screwdriver clockwise to increase the left margin [2]. A full turn of the screwdriver will change the left margin by 1.0 mm.
0003-8722
14.2.5 Front Deck

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Make prints using the right deck and left deck as the source of paper, and check that the left/right margin is as indicated: If not, adjust the following: 1. Adjusting the Left/Right Margin for the Left Deck 1) Press the release button, and slide out the left deck. 2) Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove the left face cover [1].
6) Tighten the 2 screws you loosened in step 3). 7) Attach the left face cover you removed in step 2) back to the machine. 8) Close the left deck. If the gap between the front cover/cassette 3 front cover and the left front cover is appreciable, perform the following: 9) Slide out the left deck, and loosen the 4 screws [1]; then, move the front left cover [2].
14-12
Chapter 14
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1] [1] [2]

F-14-20 F-14-23
[1]
[2]
10) Close the left deck; when the gap is gone, slide out the left deck once again, and attach the 4 screws you loosened in step 9). If there still is a gap, go back to step 9). 11) Close the left deck. 2. Right Deck Left/Right Margin Adjustment 1) Press the release button, and slide out the right deck. 2) Open the upper right color and the lower right cover 3) Loosen the 2 screws [1]; then, insert a screwdriver [2] through the opening in the front right stay, and turn the adjusting screw to adjust the left/right margin.
10) Close the right deck; when the gap is gone, slide out the right deck once again, and tighten the 4 screws you loosened in step 9). If there still is a gap, go back to step 9).
14.3 Scanning System

14.3.1 After Replacing the CCD Unit
0003-9936
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci If you have replaced the CCD unit, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the CCD unit: COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG (to enter the correction value for CCD-dependent RG color displacement in sub scanning direction) COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-GB (to enter the correction value for CCD-dependent GB color displacement in sub scanning direction)
+2,-1,30524101
[1]
CCDU-GB CCDU-RG
[2]
F-14-21
4) Check that the left/right margin of printouts made on paper from the right deck is as indicated. 5) As necessary, perform the following:
[1]
[2]
F-14-24
Moreover, be sure to update the settings indicated on the service label attached behind the reader unit front cover with the settings indicated on the label attached to the CCD unit.
14.3.2 After Replacing the Copyboard Glass

0003-8724
F-14-22
Reference: Turn the screwdriver counterclockwise to decrease the left margin [1]. Turn the screwdriver clockwise to increase the left margin [1]. A full turn of the screwdriver changes the left margin by 1.0 mm. 6) Tighten the 2 screws you loosened in step 3). 7) Close the upper right cover and the lower right cover 8) Close the right deck. If the gap between the front cover/cassette 3 front cover and the front right cover is appreciable, perform the following: 9) Slide out the right deck, and loosen the 4 screws, and move the front right cover [2].
If you have replaced the copyboard glass, be sure to enter the bar code value indicated in the upper right of the copyboard glass using the following service mode items: COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Y COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-Z (to enter the standard white plate white level data X, Y, Z)
14-13
Chapter 14 (c) shading position adjustment (for fixed reading) COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S (d) feeder mode main scanning position adjustment COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y-DF (e) ADF stream reading CCD read position adjustment COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>STRD-POS (f) CCD unit-dependent RB/GB sub scanning direction color displacement correction value COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG/GB (g) CCD unit-dependent RG/GB sub scanning direction color displacement value at shipment COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>FCCDU-RG/GB (h) auto gradation adjustment target value COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL>OFST-P-Y,M,C,K 2. ADF-Related Adjustments
* 820686679349 *
W-PLT-X W-PLT-Y
F-14-25
The machine uses the RAM on its reader controller to store ADF-related service data; as such, you must make the appropriate adjustments for the ADF whenever you have replaced the reader controller or initialized the RAM. 1) Enter the settings indicated on the P-PRINT printout you have previously generated for the following items: (1) original stop position adjustment FEEDER>ADJSUT>DOCST (2) original feed speed (magnification) adjustment FEEDER>ADUST>LA-SPEED 2) Make adjustments using the following items: (1) ADF sensor sensitivity adjustment FEEDER>FUNCTION>SENS-INT (2) tray width adjustment (a) AB system: FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A4 and FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A5R (b) inch system: FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTR and FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTRR (3) white level adjustment COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1 COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL2 When done, store the P-PRINT printout [1] you have previously generated in the service book, disposing of the older printout, if any.
W-PLT-Z
14.3.3 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB or Initializing the RAM
0003-8726
-Be sure to generate the latest P-PRINT printout before replacing the reader controller PCB. -If you are initializing the RAM of the reader controller without replacing the PCB, using the SST to upload the backup data of the reader controller. Then, after initializing the RAM, download the data to eliminate the need for the following adjustments: 1. Reader Unit-Related Adjustments 1) Using the SST, download the latest version of the system software (RCON). 2) Select the following in service mode, and press the OK key to initialize the RAM: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>R-CON. Thereafter, turn off and then on the main power. 3) Enter the settings for the following items in service mode: (1) standard white plate white level data COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X,Y,Z
[1]
F-14-27
14.4 Laser Exposure System

14.4.1 After Replacing the Laser Scanner
0004-2103
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Select the following in service mode, and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
14.5 Image Formation System

14.5.1 After Replacing the Black Developing Unit
0004-2117
* 820686679349 *
W-PLT-X W-PLT-Y
F-14-26
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Be sure to perform the following whenever you have replaced the black developing assembly: 1) Make the following selections in service mode (black toner supply): FUNCTION>INSTALL>TONER-S.
W-PLT-Z
(2) service label settings (label attached behind reader unit front cover) (a) image read start position adjustment (x direction; for fixed reading) COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X (b) image read start position adjustment (Y direction; fixed reading) COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y
14.5.2 Points to Note When Attaching the Polarity Positioning Plate

0006-0541
14-14
Chapter 14
Go through the following steps in strict sequence when mounting the polarity positioning plate: 1) Let go of your hand so that the developing cylinder moves and stops on its own. 2) Shift the polarity positioning plate [1] counterclockwise as much as the length of the play of the D-cut notch [2]; then, read the index [4] of the marking found on the blade support base.
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-14-30
3) Even out the starter by shaking the container about 10 times. 4) Open the lid [2] of the starter bottle [1]; then, remove the middle lid [3], and close the lid.
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-14-28 F-14-31
[1]
[3]
3) Turn the polarity positioning plate [1] counterclockwise by a single index (5 deg); then, tighten the screw [2] to fix it in place.
5) Supply half the starter so that it is even in the lengthwise direction around the stirring screw inside the color developing unit.
F-14-32
6) Turn the developing gear 5 to 6 times by hand in the direction indicated in the figure so that the starter will be even inside the unit.
[2] [1]
F-14-29
14.5.3 Replacing the Color Developing Unit

0004-0872
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Open the packing box, and take out the new color developing unit. 2) Remove the screw [1], and free the 4 hooks [2]; then, remove the developing assembly lid [3].
F-14-33
7) Supply the remaining half of the starter around the stirring screw inside the color developing unit. 8) Turn the developing gear 5 to 6 times once again so that the starter inside the unit is even. 9) Move the starter found on the inner side of the container wall off the wall.
14-15
Chapter 14
[1]
[A] [1]
F-14-38
F-14-34
10) Fit the container lid you removed in step 2) back on in the direction indicated in the figure.
12) Fit the color developing unit by going through the steps used to detach it but in reverse. 13) Turn on the main power switch. 14) Make the following selections in service mode, and set '1', and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINR-OFF. 15) Select one of the following service mode items to suit the color of the starter you have supplied; then, press the OK key. - if for the Y developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-Y - if for the M developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-M - if for the C developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-C - if for the CMY developing assemblies, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-3 A countdown is shown on the screen while this mode item is under way. At the end, the screen will show "OK!". This mode uses ATVC control, possibly taking a while depending on the site environment. The count on the screen, for this reason, may loop between 690 and 620. 16) Execute the following service mode item: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT. Store away the generated printout in the service book case. (If there is a previous printout, dispose of it.) 17) End service mode, and start user mode; on the Auto Gradation Correction screen, follow the instructions to execute auto gradation correction (full).
F-14-35
Thereafter, engage the 4 hooks [1]; then, fix the container lid [3] in place using the 2 screws [2] you removed in step 3).
[2]
14.5.4 Replacing the Starter of the Color Developing Unit

0004-0874
[3]
1) Remove the color developing unit. 2) Remove the developing unit lid [3]. - screw [1] - 4 hooks [2]
[1]
[3] [1]
F-14-36
Force down the lid against the container so that the gap [1] indicated in the figure is small enough to prevent insertion of a transparency.
[1]
[2]
F-14-39
3) On A3 paper or in a vinyl bag, dispose of the contents of the unit by turning it over.
F-14-37
When tightening the screw, take full care so that no shavings caused by turning the screw into the lid of the developing assembly and the container will move into the container. 11) Cut off the appropriate tab [1]] to suit the color of the starter you have supplied. The tab A in the figure is an extra tab.
F-14-40
4) Turn back over the developing unit, and turn the developing gear in the direction in which the cylinder normally turns so that the agent will drop
14-16
Chapter 14 into the developing assembly.
[1]
F-14-41
5) Dispose of the agent into a vinyl bag or on paper by turning over the developing unit. 6) Repeat steps 4) and 5) about 3 times (e.g., until no agent drops into the developing assembly). 7) Shake the container of the starter about 10 times. 8) Detach the funnel [2] of the starter bottle [1]; then, remove the middle lid [3], and put the funnel back on [2].
F-14-44
14) Attach the developing assembly lid you removed in step 2), making sure that the lid is oriented as shown.
F-14-45
Engage the 4 hooks [1], and attach the developing assembly lid [3] using the 2 screws [2] you removed in step 2).
[2]
[2]
F-14-42
[1]
[3]
9) Pour the starter along the length of the stirring screw inside the color developing unit so that it is about half full.
[3]
[1]
F-14-46
F-14-43
Be sure to force the lid against the developing container so that no transparency will insert the gap [1] shown in the figure.
[1]
10) Turn the developing gear in its normal direction 5 to 6 by hand to even out the starter inside it. 11) Pour the rest of the starter around the string screw inside the color developing unit. 12) Turn the developing gear 5 to 6 times once again to even out the starter inside the unit. 13) Move the starter that may remain on the inner side of the unit wall [1] into the developing assembly.
F-14-47
When tightening the screw, take care so that the shavings from the developing unit or its lid will not enter the unit.
14-17
Chapter 14 15) Attach the color developing unit using the steps you used to remove it but in reverse. 16) Turn on the main power switch. 17) Select the following in service mode; then, enter '1', and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINR-OFF. 18)Select the appropriate mode item from the following to suit the color of the starter you have used; then, press the OK key if Y developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-Y. if M developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-M. if C developing assembly, COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-C.
[1]
A countdown is shown on the screen while this mode item is under way. At the end, the screen will show "OK!". This mode uses ATVC control, possibly taking a while depending on the site environment. The count on the screen, for this reason, may loop between 690 and 620. 19) Perform the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT. Then, store the generated printout in the service book case. If there is any previous printout, dispose of it. 20) End service mode, and select 'auto gradation correction' in sure mode; perform auto gradation correction (full correction) by going through the instructions on the screen.
F-14-48
2) Apply an appropriate amount of blade lubricant [1] as if to sprinkle it over an area of the surface as shown.
NG (inadequate)
14.5.5 After Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly

0004-2166
OK (appropriate)
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci If you have replaced the primary charging assembly, be sure to adjust the following: 1) Check the settings indicated on the primary charging assembly height adjustment label attached behind the front cover. 2) Adjust so that the charging wire height of the new charging assembly is as indicated. 3) Perform primary charging assembly cleaning in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-CLN. 4) Select the following in service mode (potential control): COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC. 5) Turn off and then on the main power.
NG (excessive)
[1]
14.5.6 After Replacing the Primary Charging Wire

0004-9315
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Clean the charging wire, grid wire, and shielding plates. 2) Perform the following in service mode (primary charging wire cleaning): COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-CLN.
F-14-49
[2]
3) Spread the blade lubricant [1] using lint-free paper [2] as shown to cover an area of the belt about 10 cm wide.
14.5.7 After Replacing the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire

0004-2672
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Perform the following in service mode (pre-transfer charging wire cleaning): COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-CLN.
10cm
[1] [2]
14.5.8 After Replacing the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire

0004-9316
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Clean the charging wire and the shielding plates. 2) Perform the following in service mode (pre-transfer charging wire cleaning): COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-CLN.
14.5.9 After Replacing the Waste Toner Box

0004-3914
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Attach the new waste toner box in the machine. 2) Perform the following service mode, thereby resetting the waste toner counter reading to '0' (waste toner counter reset): COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>WASTE-TURN.
F-14-50
Take care so that the blade lubricant will not make its way behind the intermediate transfer belt. Otherwise, the presence of blade lubricant behind the intermediate transfer belt can cause the ITB home position sensor to make wrong detection. 4) Turn the drive gear [1] in the direction of the arrow so that the area of blade lubricant [2] is found as shown.
14.5.10 After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade

0004-4219
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Whenever you need to replace the ITB cleaning blade, be sure to go though the following steps to apply blade lubricant (TKN-0480) to the edge of he blade. 1) Turn the primary transfer roller locking lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to engage the intermediate transfer belt.
14-18
Chapter 14
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
F-14-51
5) Attach the ITB cleaning unit [2] to the intermediate transfer unit [1]; then, attach it using 2 screws [3].
F-14-53
[3]
If you have replaced the ITB cleaner blade, be sure to perform the following: 1) Perform the following service mode item (black band sequence): COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>BK-BNDEX.
[3] [2] [1]
14.5.11 After Repacking the Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade

0004-4224
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Be sure of the following when attaching the photosensitive drum cleaning blade: (1) Do not turn over the cleaning blade. Replace it when one side has been used. (2) Clean the area [1] of the retainer plate coming into contact with the cleaning blade and the blade plate [2] using alcohol; then, dry wipe it to remove any toner.
The fine particle of toner under the blade edge can put the blade out of alignment, allowing toner on the photosensitive drum to remain on the drum in the form of residual toner.
[1]
[3]
F-14-52
6) Turn the drive gear [3] until the area [2] of blade lubricant is no longer visible on the intermediate transfer belt [1].
[2]
F-14-54
(3) Be sure to attach the cleaning blade [1] so that the lot No. [2] faces the front and is upright.
14-19
Chapter 14 If you have replaced the photosensitive drum, be sure to go through the following: 1) Remove the drum heater and the drum heater PCB; then, mount them to the new photosensitive drum. 2) Attach the photosensitive drum so that the lot number label [1] attached to its inner side is toward the front of the machine.
32 12 63
[2]
C1
30
[1]
C1
63 12 32 30
[1]
F-14-55
(4) Be sure to force the cleaning blade [1] firmly against the retaining plate [2], and check that there is no gap in the area [3] indicated in the figure.
[3] [1] [2]
F-14-56
(5) Be sure to tighten the screws [1] on the cleaning blade in the order indicated in the figure.
F-14-57
(6) Apply blade lubricant (TKN-0480) along the edge (shaded; coming into contact with the photosensitive drum) of the cleaning blade.
[1]
F-14-58
When you have replaced the photosensitive drum cleaning blade, be sure to perform the following service mode item. Be sure that you perform service mode immediately after the control panel screen has appeared after turning on the main switch. : COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITR-ROT.
F-14-60
14.5.12 Replace the Photosensitive Drum

0004-8937
14-20
C1
63 12 32 30
F-14-59
MEMO: There is a light difference in the inside diameter of the photosensitive drum between its front and its rear. (The front and rear drum flanges are designed in relation to the photosensitive drum.) If you attach the photosensitive drum in the wrong orientation, the gap between the developing cylinder and the photosensitive drum will be uneven, possibly causing uneven density. 3) Replace the starter (3 types) of the color developing unit.
14.5.13 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater

0006-1891
Drum memory can occur if the phase of the drum is changed, as when replacing the drum heater. Take full care not to change the phase of the drum during the work by making sure of the following: 1) When removing the drum flange, check the location of the marking [2] on the drum flange in relation to the lot No. label [1] found on the inner side of the drum. (In the case of the figure, the left of the marking is at ".." and the right is at "..." with the lot No. label facing upward.) 2) When attaching the drum flange, be sure to attach with a screw where it was found in step 1.
[1]
[1] [2]
Chapter 14
Drum memory can occur if the phase of the drum is changed, as when replacing the drum heater PCB. Take full care not to change the phase of the drum during the work by making sure of the following: 1) When removing the drum flange, check the location of the marking [2] on the drum flange in relation to the lot No. label [1] found on the inner side of the drum. (In the case of the figure, the left of the marking is at ".." and the right is at "..." with the lot No. label facing upward.) 2) When attaching the drum flange, be sure to attach with a screw where it was found in step 1.
[1]
1 2 4
1 2 3 4
2 3 4 1
[1]
F-14-61
[1] [2]
1 2 3 4
2 3 4 1
[1]
[2]
F-14-64
1 2
[3]
F-14-62
1 2 3 4
2 3 4 1
[1]
F-14-65
[2] [1] [2]

F-14-63
14.5.14 Points to Note When Replacing the Drum Heater PCB

0006-2063
14-21
Chapter 14
1 2 3 4
2 3 4 1
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
F-14-68
[3]
F-14-66
1. Cleaning Procedure 1) Place the ITB cleaner drive unit [1] with its cover facing down; then, stand the ITB unit [2].
[2]
[2] [1] [2]
[1]
F-14-67 F-14-69
0004-4225
14.5.15 After Repacking the ITB

iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When you have replaced the ITB belt, be sure to perform the following service mode item. Be sure that you perform service mode immediately after the control panel screen has appeared after turning on the main switch. : COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITR-ROT.
2) Clean the rollers [1] and the inside scraper [2] using alcohol.
14.5.16 After Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller

0004-4230
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci As the machine is used more and more, the shavings from the primary transfer roller can start to collect on the rollers behind the belt. When you have replaced the primary transfer roller, be sure to clean the 6 rollers [1] and the scraper [2] indicated below.
The idle roller (indicated by an arrow) is designed for mounting after fitting the intermediate transfer belt. Although the figure shows the roller, it is only for reference purposes, and the roller is not in its indicated position at this point in time.
14-22
Chapter 14 Be sure that you perform service mode immediately after the control panel screen has appeared after turning on the main switch. : COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITR-ROT.
14.6 Fixing System

14.6.1 Points to Note When Attaching the Fixing Assembly
0004-1594
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When fitting the fixing assembly into the fixing/feeding assembly, take full care not to damage the 2 sensors [1].
[1] [1]
F-14-72
14.6.2 After Replacing the Fixing Roller

0004-5054
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci If you have replaced the fixing roller, be sure to execute the following service mode item to reset the counter reading: COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FX-UP-RL
14.6.3 After Replacing the Fixing Web

0004-1786
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. After attaching the web, take up its slack so that there will be no slack when the web unit is fitted in the fixing assembly. 2. After replacing the web, reset the readings of the following service mode items: COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FX-WEB
[3]
[1]
F-14-70
[2]
[1]
14.6.4 Position of the Fixing inlet Guide

0004-2213
Do not loosen the screw on the inlet guide base [1], as you would have to adjust the position of the guide if you detached it. If you loosened it for some reason, be sure to perform the following: 1) Adjust the position of the inlet guide base [1] so that the height [A] at the center of the fixing inlet guide [2] is 60.7 +/-0.2 mm and the difference in height between the ribs [B] on both sides of the inlet guide is 0.5 or less.
B A B
F-14-71 F-14-73
[1]
[2]
[1]
When you have replaced the primary transfer roller, be sure to perform the following service mode item.
14-23
Chapter 14
[2]
[1]
F-14-74
14.6.5 Points to Note When Attaching the Pressure Roller

0005-8345
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Be sure to mount the pressure roller [1] so that the lot number [2] found on its edge is found toward the front of the machine.
[1]
[3]
F-14-77
[4]
14.6.8 Points to Note About the Position of the Fixing Thermal Switch
0004-5056
[2]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci After mounting the thermal switch, make sure of the following: The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to the fixing roller. (Check to be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light.) Otherwise, re-mount it.
Front
F-14-75
14.6.6 Adjusting the Nip Pressure of the Pressure Roller

0005-9076
The nip is adjusted to a high degree of accuracy before the machine is shipped out of the factory, and it cannot be adjusted in the field. Do not turn the 2 hex bolts [1] found on the delivery side of the fixing assembly. If you turned it by mistake, be sure to turn it back to its initial position.
F-14-78
[1]
[1]
OK NG NG NG NG
F-14-79
14.6.9 Points to Note When Mounting the Shift Thermal Switch

0004-5058
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci After mounting the thermal switch (before mounting the inlet guide), check to make sure o the following:
F-14-76
14.6.7 Adjusting the Position of the Feeding Web Solenoid (SL2)

0004-2616
The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to the pressure roller. (Be sure to check it by shining the thermal switch by a pen light.) if not, remount it.
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Pull on the solenoid [1], and tighten the screw [4] while making sure that the lever [2] is in firm contact with the plate at a specific point [3].
[1]
F-14-80
14-24
Chapter 14
OK
NG
NG
NG
NG
The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to the fixing roller. (Check to be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light.) Otherwise, re-mount it.
F-14-81
[1]
14.6.10 Points to Note When Mounting the Outside Heating Roller Thermal Switch
0004-5060
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci After mounting the thermal switch, check to be sure of the following: The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to the outside heating roller. (Be sure to shine the thermal witch switch a pen light.) If not, remount it.
[1]
F-14-86
OK
NG
NG
F-14-87
14.6.13 Points to Note When Mounting the External Heat Thermistor

0005-5551
F-14-82
NG NG NG NG
OK
After mounting the thermistor, make sure of the following: The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to the fixing roller. (Check to be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light.) Otherwise, re-mount it.
F-14-83
14.6.11 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Upper Thermistor

0005-5549
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci After mounting the thermistor, make sure of the following: The surface of the thermal switch [1] must be parallel to the fixing roller. (Check to be sure by shining the thermal switch with a pen light.) Otherwise, re-mount it.
[1]
F-14-88
OK
NG
NG
[1]
F-14-84 F-14-89
OK
NG
NG
14.7 Electrical Components

14.7.1 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB
0003-9937
F-14-85
14.6.12 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Lower Thermistor

0005-5550
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci After mounting the thermistor, make sure of the following:
-Be sure to generate the latest P-PRINT printout before replacing the reader controller PCB. -If you are initializing the RAM of the reader controller without replacing the PCB, using the SST to upload the backup data of the reader controller. Then, after initializing the RAM, download the data to eliminate the need for the following adjustments:
14-25
Chapter 14 1. Reader Unit-Related Adjustments 1) Using the SST, download the latest version of the system software (RCON). 2) Select the following in service mode, and press the OK key to initialize the RAM: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>R-CON. Thereafter, turn off and then on the main power. 3) Enter the settings for the following items in service mode: (1) standard white plate white level data COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>W-PLT-X,Y,Z
[1]
F-14-91
14.7.2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB

0004-1683
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Using the SST, upload SramDCON.bin by selecting [Upload Backup Data]. MEMO: For specific instructions on the uploading procedure, see the descriptions in the appropriate chapter of the Manual. 2) Replace the DC controller PCB. Then, using the SST, download the latest system software. 3) Make the following selections in service mode to initialize the RAM on the DC controller PCB: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>DC-CON. 4) Using the SST, download the previously uploaded file by selecting [Download Backup Data].
* 820686679349 *
W-PLT-X W-PLT-Y
F-14-90
W-PLT-Z
MEMO: For specific instructions on the downloading procedure, see the descriptions in the appropriate chapter of the Manual. 5) Using the SST, download the previously uploaded file by selecting [Download Backup Data]. 6) Perform the following in service mode (forced initial multiple rotation): COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>INTR-EX. 7) Perform full auto gradation correction in user mode (image characteristics correction control). 8) Dispose of the waste toner that has collected in the waste toner bottle.
(2) service label settings (label attached behind reader unit front cover) (a) image read start position adjustment (x direction; for fixed reading) COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X (b) image read start position adjustment (Y direction; fixed reading) COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y (c) shading position adjustment (for fixed reading) COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S (d) feeder mode main scanning position adjustment COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y-DF (e) ADF stream reading CCD read position adjustment COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>STRD-POS (f) CCD unit-dependent RB/GB sub scanning direction color displacement correction value COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>CCDU-RG/GB (g) CCD unit-dependent RG/GB sub scanning direction color displacement value at shipment COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>FCCDU-RG/GB (h) auto gradation adjustment target value COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL>OFST-P-Y,M,C,K 2. ADF-Related Adjustments
You cannot change the waste toner counter reading (COUNTER>MISC>WASTE-TNR) in service +mode. If you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM, you must make sure that the waste toner bottle is empty.
14.7.3 Points to Note When Mounting the DC Controller PCB/ DC Controller Box
0005-7222
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci During assembly work, be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: - Connect the connector of the harness [1] first, and then the other harness [2]. - Fix the harnesses [1] [2] in place using the wire saddle [3] so that the harness [1] is on the left side of the harness [2].
The machine uses the RAM on its reader controller to store ADF-related service data; as such, you must make the appropriate adjustments for the ADF whenever you have replaced the reader controller or initialized the RAM. 1) Enter the settings indicated on the P-PRINT printout you have previously generated for the following items: (1) original stop position adjustment FEEDER>ADJSUT>DOCST (2) original feed speed (magnification) adjustment FEEDER>ADUST>LA-SPEED 2) Make adjustments using the following items: (1) ADF sensor sensitivity adjustment FEEDER>FUNCTION>SENS-INT (2) tray width adjustment (a) AB system: FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A4 and FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-A5R (b) inch system: FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTR and FEEDER>FUNCTION>TRY-LTRR (3) white level adjustment COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1 COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL2 When done, store the P-PRINT printout [1] you have previously generated in the service book, disposing of the older printout, if any.
14-26
Chapter 14
14.7.5 After Repacking the SRAM Board

[3]
0004-1721
[3]
[4] [3]
(1) Be sure to inform the sure that replacing the SRAM board will lead to the loss of all image data held in Boxes, and obtain his/her consent before starting the work. (2) If you are replacing the SRAM board, be sure to use a new one. The use of a used SRAM board (used in a different printer) will likely cause malfunction. 1) Replace the SRAM board, and turn on the main power (so that the machine will run an auto initialization session). 2) When the control panel indicates the message "Turn Off and Then On the Power Switch on the Left" on its control panel, turn off and then on the power. 3) Select the following selections in service mode, and press the OK key to initialize the RAM: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>MN-CON.
[2]
[1]
[3]
14.7.6 After Replacing the HDD

0004-1730
F-14-92
Supplementary Information: If the harness [1] is away from the side plate [4] of the DC controller box, wrong detection (E070-0102) of the ITB home position tends to occur because of noise.
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. If NetSpot Accountant (NSA) Is Not Used 1) Format the HDD. Start in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down the 2 and 8 keys). Using the SST's hard disk formatting function, format all partitions. (For instructions, see the chapter on upgrading.) 2) Download the system software. Using the SST, download the system, language, and RUI files. (It may take about 5 min for the machine to start up after a download session.) 2. If NetSpot Account (NSA) Is Used in Combination with a Card Reader The HDD retains the card ID used by NSA. If you have replaced the HDD, you will have to download the card data from NSA once again for NSA to operate. As shown under A. "If NetSpot Accountant Is Not Used," format the HDD and download the system software, and then perform extra steps: 1) Format the HDD. Start up in safe mode (i.e., by turning on the main power while holding down the 2 and 8 keys). Using the SST's hard disk formatting function, format all partitions. (For instructions, see the chapter on upgrading.) 2) Download the system software. Using the SST, download the system, language, and RUI files. (It may take about 5 min for the machine to start up after a download session.) 3) Start service mode. Select the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD. 4) Enter the appropriate card No. Enter the lowest of the numbers of the cards used for group control, and press the OK key (e.g., enter '1' if cards run from No. 1 to No. 1000). 5) Turn off and then on the main power. 6) Check the count control function. In sure mode, make the following selections, and check IDs between ID00000001 and ID00001000 have been created. 7) Set the address. Set 'IP address', 'gateway address', and 'sub net mask' in sure mode: system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address. 8) Enter the appropriate number in sure mode: system administrator info setup>system control group ID>system control ID No. 9) Turn off and then on the main power.
14.7.4 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB (main)

0004-1717
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci After attaching the main controller PCB (main), be sure to attach the PCBs you may have removed before replacing the main controller PCB: [1] boot ROM [2] image memory (SDRAM) [3] expansion bus PCB [4] main controller PCB (sub) [5] UFR board (optional) [6] Ethernet board
[1] [2]
F-14-93
[4]
[3]
If you fail to set 'system control group ID' and 'system control ID No.', you will not be able to set 'register card to device' as part of the NetSpot Account setup work. 10) Download the card ID. While the machine is in a standby state, download the card ID from NSA. 11) Check the count control function. In sure mode, make the following selections, and check that only the ID data is indicated on the screen: system control setup>group ID control>count control. 12) Check that the machine operates normally. Make copies using a sure card that has been registered using NSA; then, check that the use of the card is properly indicated.
14.7.7 When Replacing the HV2 PCB

0004-2092
[5]
F-14-94
[6]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Enter the settings indicated on the PCB label [1] attached to the new HV2 for the following 6 service mode items:
14-27
Chapter 14 COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>1TR-GAIN COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>1TR-OFST COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>1TR-CGAI COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>1TR-COFS COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>1TR-GAI2 COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>1TR-OFS2
[2]
1TR-GAIN 1TR-OFST 1TR-CGAI 1TR-COFS 1TR-GAI2 1TR-OFS2
XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX
[1]
F-14-97
Move the adjusting plate toward the rear to decrease the left margin. Move the adjusting plate toward the front to increase the left margin. 4) Tighten the screw. 5) Close the upper right cover and the lower right cover. 6) Attach the cassette 3 or 4 back in the machine.
14.8.2 Adjusting the Manual Feed Pickup Horizontal Registration

0003-9955
F-14-95
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Make copies using the manual feed tray as the source of paper, and check that the left/right margin is as indicated. If not, adjust the following: 1) Loosen the screw [1], and move the position of the slide guide [2] to adjust the horizontal registration.
2) Generate a P-PRINT printout in service mode. 3) Store the generated P-PRINT printout [1] in the service book case, replacing any existing printout.
[1]
F-14-96
14.7.8 When Replacing the ATR Sensor/Patch Image Read Sensor

0004-4764
[2]
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci If you have replaced the ATR sensor/patch image read sensor, be sure to perform the following: 1) Replace the contents of the color developing unit with starter (3 types).
[1]
14.8 Pickup/Feeding System

F-14-98
14.8.1 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration After Replacing the Pickup Cassette
0003-9954
2) Check that the left/right margin of the prints is as indicated. 3) Tighten the screw.
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Make prints using the cassettes 3 and 4 as the source of paper, and check that the left/right margin is as indicated. If not as indicated, adjust the following: 1) Press the cassette release button, and slide out the cassette 3 or 4 to the front. 2) Open the upper right cover and the lower right cover. 3) Insert a screwdriver through the opening in the front right stay; then, loosen the screw [1], and adjust the position of the adjusting plate [2].
14.8.3 Adjusting the Front Deck Pickup Horizontal Registration

0003-9957
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Make prints using the right deck and left deck as the source of paper, and check that the left/right margin is as indicated: If not, adjust the following: 1. Adjusting the Left/Right Margin for the Left Deck 1) Press the release button, and slide out the left deck. 2) Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove the left face cover [1].
14-28
Chapter 14
[1]
[1]
F-14-99
[1] [1] [2]

F-14-102
3) Loosen the 2 screws [1], and insert a screwdriver [2] through the opening of the left front stay; then, turn the adjusting screw to adjust the left/right margin.
[1]
10) Close the left deck; when the gap is gone, slide out the left deck once again, and attach the 4 screws you loosened in step 9). If there still is a gap, go back to step 9). 11) Close the left deck. 2. Right Deck Left/Right Margin Adjustment 1) Press the release button, and slide out the right deck. 2) Open the upper right color and the lower right cover 3) Loosen the 2 screws [1]; then, insert a screwdriver [2] through the opening in the front right stay, and turn the adjusting screw to adjust the left/right margin.
[2]
F-14-100
4) Check that the left/right margin of the printouts on paper from the left deck is as indicated. 5) As necessary, adjust the following:
[1]
[1] [2]
[2]
F-14-103
4) Check that the left/right margin of printouts made on paper from the right deck is as indicated. 5) As necessary, perform the following:
F-14-101
Reference: Turn the screwdriver counterclockwise to decrease the left margin [1]. Turn the screwdriver clockwise to increase the left margin [2]. A full turn of the screwdriver will change the left margin by 1.0 mm. 6) Tighten the 2 screws you loosened in step 3). 7) Attach the left face cover you removed in step 2) back to the machine. 8) Close the left deck. If the gap between the front cover/cassette 3 front cover and the left front cover is appreciable, perform the following: 9) Slide out the left deck, and loosen the 4 screws [1]; then, move the front left cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F-14-104
Reference: Turn the screwdriver counterclockwise to decrease the left margin [1]. Turn the screwdriver clockwise to increase the left margin [1]. A full turn of the screwdriver changes the left margin by 1.0 mm. 6) Tighten the 2 screws you loosened in step 3). 7) Close the upper right cover and the lower right cover 8) Close the right deck. If the gap between the front cover/cassette 3 front cover and the front right cover is appreciable, perform the following: 9) Slide out the right deck, and loosen the 4 screws, and move the front right cover [2].
14-29
Chapter 14
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-14-105
[2]
10) Close the right deck; when the gap is gone, slide out the right deck once again, and tighten the 4 screws you loosened in step 9). If there still is a gap, go back to step 9).
14.8.4 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value

0003-9967
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Turn on the main power switch. 2) Register the A4R paper width basic value as follows: 2-1) Set the manual feed side guide [1] to A4R.
[1]
F-14-106
2-2) Start service mode, and select the following to register manual feed A4R width: CPOIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A4R 2-3) Press the OK key to store the new A4R width. 2-4) Record the A4R basic setting indicated on the control panel on the service label. 3) Register the A4 paper width basic value as follows: 3-1) Set the manual feed side guide to A4. 3-2) Select the following to register manual feed A4 width: CPOIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A4 3-3) Press the OK key to register the A4 width. 3-4) Record the A4 basic value indicated on the control panel on the service label. 4) Register the A6R paper with basic value as follows: 4-1) Set the manual feed side guide to A6R. 4-2) Select the following to register the A6R width: CPOIER>FUNCTION>CST>MF-A6R 4-3) Press the OK key to register the new A6R width. 4-4) Record the A6R basic value indicated on the control panel on the service label. 5) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode. 6) Turn off the control panel power switch. 7) Turn off the main power switch.
14-30
Chapter 15 Correcting Faulty Images
Contents
Contents
15.1 Making lnitial Checks ................................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1.1 Checking the Site Environment ............................................................................................................................................... 15-1 15.1.2 Checking the Paper .................................................................................................................................................................. 15-1 15.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper ............................................................................................................................................ 15-1 15.1.4 Checking the Durables ............................................................................................................................................................. 15-1 15.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts ............................................................................................................................... 15-1 15.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks.............................................................................................................................. 15-1 15.1.7 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-2
15.2 Test Print ....................................................................................................................................................................15-2

15.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-2 15.2.2 Test Print TYPE ....................................................................................................................................................................... 15-2 15.2.3 Selecting Test Print TYPE ....................................................................................................................................................... 15-2 15.2.4 16-Gradation (TYPE=4) .......................................................................................................................................................... 15-3 15.2.5 Full Page Halftone (TYPE=5) ................................................................................................................................................. 15-3 15.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15-4 15.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripes (TYPE=10).................................................................................................................................. 15-4 15.2.8 64-Gradation (TYPE=12) ........................................................................................................................................................ 15-5 15.2.9 Full Color 16-Gradation (TYPE=14)....................................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.3 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................................................................15-6

15.3.1 Symptoms ................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-6
15.3.1.1 Symptoms....................................................................................................................................................................................................15-6 15.3.1.2 Maintenance Recommendations for Components Around the Photosensitive Drum/Intermediate Transfer Unit in the Event of an Image Fault......................................................................................................................................................................................................................15-7
15.3.2 Image Faults........................................................................................................................................................................... 15-10

15.3.2.1 Solid Image ...............................................................................................................................................................................................15-10 15.3.2.1.1 Solid black / Poor contact of connectors around process unit...........................................................................................................15-10 15.3.2.2 Light Image / Weak Density .....................................................................................................................................................................15-13 15.3.2.2.1 Overall light image on black area, uneven image .............................................................................................................................15-13 15.3.2.2.2 Solid color image is too light and texture is rough ...........................................................................................................................15-14 15.3.2.2.3 Swathes of voids / Light image on entire image: Occasionally occurs when making large-volume copies (more than 240 sheets)...1514 15.3.2.2.4 Light image when printing via UFR .................................................................................................................................................15-14 15.3.2.2.5 Light image: After replacement of intermediate transfer unit...........................................................................................................15-15 15.3.2.2.6 Low density / Poor contact of connectors around process unit.........................................................................................................15-15 15.3.2.3 Foggy Image..............................................................................................................................................................................................15-18 15.3.2.3.1 Black fogging on copies upon installation ........................................................................................................................................15-18 15.3.2.3.2 Fogging (Y/M/C): After replacement of color Developing Ass'ys or developer, because of locking claw is not snapped in place 15-18 15.3.2.3.3 Wide fogging occurs only on colored image ....................................................................................................................................15-19 15.3.2.3.4 Is Newspaper mode available? / Background is fogged when making a copy of newspaper...........................................................15-19 15.3.2.3.5 Poor reproducibility of photo when copying text-photo mixed original: Text / Photo / Map mode ................................................15-19 15.3.2.3.6 Solid black image/soiled back upon installation ...............................................................................................................................15-19 15.3.2.3.7 Extreme fogging due to poor connection of LED array for pre-conditioning unit/Occasional E061-0003 Error Code...................15-20 15.3.2.4 Uneven Density .........................................................................................................................................................................................15-21 15.3.2.4.1 Uneven density at 40mm intervals in main scanning direction ........................................................................................................15-21 15.3.2.4.2 Coarse/smeared image: Occurs because transfer clutch cam shaft comes off, the message "Correctly place the test print on the platen glass" is displayed during auto gradation correction.....................................................................................................................................15-21 15.3.2.4.3 Uneven Density Along the Leading Edge in a Solid Color Image ...................................................................................................15-21 15.3.2.4.4 Uneven Density in the Form of a Feedscrew in Color Images .........................................................................................................15-22 15.3.2.4.5 Uneven Density in Halftone Images .................................................................................................................................................15-23 15.3.2.4.6 Magenta Colored Dots ......................................................................................................................................................................15-24 15.3.2.4.7 Uneven Density On Rough-Textured Paper......................................................................................................................................15-25 15.3.2.4.8 Coarse Image in a Solid C Original .................................................................................................................................................15-26 15.3.2.4.9 Transfer Faults on Mono-Color Prints ..............................................................................................................................................15-28
Contents
15.3.2.5 Out of Focus.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-29 15.3.2.5.1 Unfocused image / Smeared image / Abnormal sound from ITB: Because ITB sags...................................................................... 15-29 15.3.2.5.2 Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction ............................................................................................................................... 15-29 15.3.2.5.3 Smeared of Colored Characters/Lines .............................................................................................................................................. 15-31 15.3.2.6 Partially Blank/Streaked ........................................................................................................................................................................... 15-31 15.3.2.6.1 White streaks on image: When making copy (stream reading) of almost solid original.................................................................. 15-31 15.3.2.6.2 Lines appear on printed image in main scanning direction as if electrical noise occurred because of Ethernet PCB (SURF) failure, MS Word ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-32 15.3.2.6.3 Color missing occurs in random portions of output image because internal scraper of ITB is bent ................................................ 15-32 15.3.2.6.4 Vertical Lies in Halftone Images ...................................................................................................................................................... 15-32 15.3.2.6.5 Image Fault Occurring at Specific Intervals ..................................................................................................................................... 15-33 15.3.2.6.6 Missing Color ................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-34 15.3.2.6.7 White Spots at 51mm Intervals......................................................................................................................................................... 15-36 15.3.2.6.8 Vertical Lines Caused by an ITB Cleaning Fault ............................................................................................................................. 15-38 15.3.2.7 Smudged/Streaked .................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-38 15.3.2.7.1 Edge of paper is soiled when making continuous copy from ADF / Black spots ............................................................................ 15-38 15.3.2.7.2 Black line on trailing edge of paper when staple mode is specified: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2............................................ 15-39 15.3.2.7.3 Soiled image because of toner dropping from drum cleaning unit: Due to cleaning brush coming off........................................... 15-39 15.3.2.7.4 Soiled image due to toner dropped from drum cleaning unit: Because brush portion of cleaning brush comes off and the 24T gear and 54T/18T gear are broken............................................................................................................................................................................... 15-40 15.3.2.7.5 Line appears in main scanning direction at trailing edge: At two-sided original to two-sided copy operation ............................... 15-41 15.3.2.7.6 Vertical Lines.................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-41 15.3.2.7.7 Soiling of the Left/Right Margin on Double-Sided Prints (1st side) ................................................................................................ 15-42 15.3.2.7.8 Stray Toner ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-43 15.3.2.7.9 Oil Lines in Vertical Direction ......................................................................................................................................................... 15-43 15.3.2.7.10 Soiling as Dots at Drum Intervals................................................................................................................................................... 15-43 15.3.2.7.11 Horizontal Line Caused by Impact from the Developing Rotary ................................................................................................... 15-45 15.3.2.7.12 Soiling in the Form of a Ring ......................................................................................................................................................... 15-46 15.3.2.8 Ghost / Memory ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-48 15.3.2.8.1 Ghost Caused by a Bend on the ITB Cleaning Blade....................................................................................................................... 15-48 15.3.2.9 Faulty Color Reproduction ....................................................................................................................................................................... 15-48 15.3.2.9.1 When printing cells filled in with blue by selecting from MS Excel standard color palette, they are printed with tinges of purple... 1548 15.3.2.9.2 Faulty Color Reproduction Caused by an Error in Primary Transfer ATVC ................................................................................... 15-48
15.3.3 Faulty Feeding ....................................................................................................................................................................... 15-51

15.3.3.1 Skew Feed................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-51 15.3.3.1.1 2mm-3mm misalignment in a batch when stapling: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2..................................................................... 15-51 15.3.3.1.2 Misalignment greater than 2mm in a batch when stapling: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2.......................................................... 15-53 15.3.3.1.3 Stapling failure: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2 ............................................................................................................................ 15-53 15.3.3.1.4 Misalignment in staple/sort/group mode: Poor contact of grounding spring of swing guide: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2 ..... 15-54 15.3.3.1.5 Troubleshooting for misalignment in staple/sort mode: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2............................................................... 15-54 15.3.3.2 Fold/Rip .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-55 15.3.3.2.1 Fold at leading edge of paper when making single (1 to 1) copy: Because installation failure of inlet lower guide Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-55 15.3.3.2.2 Stapling failure in 2nd and later copies when attempting to make multiple copies in staple mode: Because paper is not properly held in buffer unit, Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2 .......................................................................................................................................... 15-56 15.3.3.2.3 Fold at leading edge of paper when making single (1 to 1) copy: Because guide rollers in Return Roller Ass'y comes off Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2........................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-56 15.3.3.2.4 Fold at leading edge of paper when making single (1 to 1) copy: Troubleshooting, Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2 ................. 15-57 15.3.3.3 Ripple/Curl................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-58 15.3.3.3.1 Output paper is rippled (accordion) when being delivered............................................................................................................... 15-58 15.3.3.4 Wrap.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-58 15.3.3.4.1 Wrapping Around the Pressure Roller / Oil Traces / Separation Claw Traces / Wrinkle Traces..................................................... 15-58
15.3.4 Malfunction............................................................................................................................................................................ 15-59

15.3.4.1 No Power .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-59 15.3.4.1.1 Power is suddenly shut down at power-on after installation of FAX board..................................................................................... 15-59 15.3.4.1.2 Host machine does not start up and repeat reboot, LCD does not come on, No power ................................................................... 15-60 15.3.4.1.3 After installation of FAX board, power is shut down immediately at power-on ............................................................................. 15-60 15.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related............................................................................................................................................................................... 15-61 15.3.4.2.1 Black toner cartridge cap does not close completely, causing black toner leakage ......................................................................... 15-61 15.3.4.2.2 LDC does not come on at power-on: Because Main Controller PCB is faulty ................................................................................ 15-61 15.3.4.2.3 Control panel switch does not work ................................................................................................................................................. 15-61
Contents
15.3.4.3 Counter Malfunction .................................................................................................................................................................................15-62 15.3.4.3.1 Counters for Dept. ID Management does not increase after installation of Card Reader-D1: Card itself is recognized .................15-62 15.3.4.4 Malfunction/Faulty Detection ...................................................................................................................................................................15-62 15.3.4.4.1 Paper lifting plate in left front paper deck does not ascend upon installation ..................................................................................15-62 15.3.4.4.2 Black toner fails to be replenished although "Toner-S" is executed upon installation / Light image ..............................................15-63 15.3.4.4.3 Initialization of color developing assemblies (INISET-3) is not completed; "OK" does not display ..............................................15-63 15.3.4.4.4 Remaining toner indication bar for black displays one quarter upon installation.............................................................................15-63 15.3.4.4.5 Feature of Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning does not operate: Saddle Finisher-R2 User Mode................................................15-64 15.3.4.4.6 Message "The specified size does not conform to the position of the slide guides." is displayed when setting A4R/B5R in Manual Feed Tray ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................15-64 15.3.4.4.7 Paper deck is not drawn out when cassette button is pressed if it is full loaded with paper: Occurs on both right and left paper decks.. 15-64 15.3.4.4.8 Upon power-on, Machine repeats rebooting and fails to start up at point where progressive bar fills a little..................................15-64 15.3.4.4.9 Machine displays "Processing" and locks up when printing: Because of Ethernet PCB (SURF) failure, PowerPoint ....................15-64 15.3.4.4.10 When stamp setting is ON and FAX message is sent, LCD hangs up with optical lamp staying ON............................................15-64 15.3.4.4.11 Unable to format hard disk (HD)/Format error: Because hard disk drive (HDD) is changed ........................................................15-65 15.3.4.4.12 Fixing Web Displacement / 0A15/020D Jam Code ........................................................................................................................15-65 15.3.4.5 Noise .........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-66 15.3.4.5.1 Abnormal buzzing sound from ITB unit ...........................................................................................................................................15-66 15.3.4.5.2 Abnormal whizzing sound from Fixing Ass'y ..................................................................................................................................15-67 15.3.4.5.3 Frictional sound from Additional Finisher Tray-A1: When Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2 is initialized at power-ON and copy start, abnormal noise ..............................................................................................................................................................................................15-67 15.3.4.5.4 Additional Finisher Tray-A1: Abnormal sound during up-and-down movement of tray / Tray comes off .....................................15-67 15.3.4.5.5 Abnormal noise or color void sometimes occurs during rotation of Developing Rotary in color copy mode .................................15-67 15.3.4.5.6 Abnormal noise (vibration noise) from Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) Ass'y: Because of shavings of rubber roller .................15-68 15.3.4.5.7 Abnormal sound occurs from fixing cleaner web drive assembly/fixing cleaner web is not rolled up: Due to deformation of one-way arm.................................................................................................................................................................................................................15-68 15.3.4.5.8 Abnormal Noise from the Rotating Rotary .......................................................................................................................................15-68 15.3.4.6 User Warning Message .............................................................................................................................................................................15-69 15.3.4.6.1 Message [Check the network connection.] / Message [Check the TCP/IP.].....................................................................................15-69 15.3.4.6.2 "Finisher cannot be used." is displayed.............................................................................................................................................15-69 15.3.4.6.3 Window prompting to clean scanning glass frequently appears .......................................................................................................15-69 15.3.4.6.4 DADF-M1: Message "Original scanning area (thin glass strip) is dirty." / How to adjust white level ............................................15-70 15.3.4.6.5 Detail codes in which Temporary Functional Limit mode for Finisher is effective .........................................................................15-70 15.3.4.6.6 Message "Insert toner cartridge. (Yellow)" keeps displaying: Upon installation .............................................................................15-70 15.3.4.6.7 "Limited Functions Mode" key on service call message window with spanner ...............................................................................15-71 15.3.4.6.8 Message "The data of the Protect Key Device is invalid." is displayed upon installation, Unable to install security kit ................15-71 15.3.4.6.9 Message "The data of the Protect Key Device is invalid." is displayed upon installation, Unable to install SEND kit ..................15-71 15.3.4.6.10 Message "Close the finisher's front cover" does not disappear because Main Controller PCB inside Finisher is faulty: Finisher-R1/ Saddle Finisher-R2........................................................................................................................................................................................15-71 15.3.4.6.11 Message "Close the finisher's front cover" does not disappear: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2 .................................................15-71 15.3.4.6.12 DADF-M1: Message "Original scanning area (thin glass strip) is dirty." does not disappear .......................................................15-71 15.3.4.6.13 Frequent DF Reading Glass Cleaning Message..............................................................................................................................15-72 15.3.4.6.14 Frequent DF reading Glass Cleaning Message (user requesting disabling of the message)...........................................................15-72 15.3.4.7 Other Defect ..............................................................................................................................................................................................15-72 15.3.4.7.1 Processing unit cannot be inserted deep inside machine...................................................................................................................15-72 15.3.4.7.2 Duplexing guide is not opened/closed smoothly ..............................................................................................................................15-72 15.3.4.7.3 Unable to change marking width for both side of crease for saddle stitching when selecting booklet mode for print job ..............15-73 15.3.4.7.4 Rev. paper delivery door assembly cannot be opened smoothly at time of jam handling: Due to deformation of pulley ...............15-73 15.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment........................................................................................................................................................................15-73 15.3.4.8.1 Message "Load Paper." is displayed: Swaged part comes off of lifting wire ...................................................................................15-73 15.3.4.8.2 Drum keeps rotating with message "Adjusting gradation." / E012-0001 Error Code ......................................................................15-73 15.3.4.8.3 Additional Finisher Tray-A1 comes off / Option Slide Panel does not descend ..............................................................................15-73 15.3.4.8.4 ITB belt is ripped or displaced after replacement: Points to note when mounting ITB unit ............................................................15-73 15.3.4.8.5 Fixing roller is deformed: Because fixing drawer connector (AC driver cable) has poor connection .............................................15-74
15.3.5 Printing/scanning ................................................................................................................................................................... 15-74

15.3.5.1 No Output..................................................................................................................................................................................................15-74 15.3.5.1.1 Paper cannot be delivered to Additional Finisher Tray-A1 (upper tray): Although upper tray is assigned for printer ....................15-74 15.3.5.1.2 Machine accepts print job but does not run it ...................................................................................................................................15-74 15.3.5.2 Installation Failure ....................................................................................................................................................................................15-74 15.3.5.2.1 Unable to install printer driver completely: Because UBS cable is connected before installing......................................................15-74 15.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result ...............................................................................................................................................................15-74
Contents
15.3.5.3.1 Pages are output in reverse order: MS Word .................................................................................................................................... 15-74 15.3.5.3.2 Scanned documents are always saved in PDF format although selecting "TIFF/PDF" as File Format: Push Scan ........................ 15-74 15.3.5.3.3 Image sent to PC in TIFF/PDF format is reduced when printing from PC ...................................................................................... 15-75
15.3.6 Network.................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-75

15.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-75 15.3.6.1.1 Utility software (e.g. Network ScanGear) cannot be used, no problem with other functions .......................................................... 15-75 15.3.6.2 Connection Problem ................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-75 15.3.6.2.1 147 Error Code: When machine is started up in safe mode at time of downloading with SST ....................................................... 15-75
15.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related ..................................................................................................................................................... 15-75

15.3.7.1 Transmission Problem .............................................................................................................................................................................. 15-75 15.3.7.1.1 FAX number is not entered partially (in the actual failure case, 2nd digit)...................................................................................... 15-75 15.3.7.1.2 FAX-transmitted image is too light: When sending carbon copy-like blue original document ....................................................... 15-75 15.3.7.1.3 Want to disable broadcast feature: FAX transmission...................................................................................................................... 15-76 15.3.7.1.4 Unable to send scanned image to file server: Because logon password entered from PC differs from address information of file server registered in machine #801 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 15-76 15.3.7.1.5 How to register high scanning density as standard sending mode: FAX transmission .................................................................... 15-76 15.3.7.1.6 FAX-transmitted image becomes too light on receiving side: User mode adjustment is not effective, FAX transmission............. 15-76 15.3.7.2 Reception Problem.................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-76 15.3.7.2.1 FAX reception fails after host machine goes into sleep mode.......................................................................................................... 15-76 15.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect.......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-76 15.3.7.3.1 FAX-transmitted image is reduced in sub scanning direction on receiving side when sending to particular destination................ 15-76 15.3.7.3.2 FAX-received document that consists of 2 pages or more is printed in duplex ............................................................................... 15-76 15.3.7.3.3 FAX-transmitted image spreads across tow pages on receiving side when sending one page of image to particular destination .. 15-76 15.3.7.4 Setting/Registration Defect....................................................................................................................................................................... 15-77 15.3.7.4.1 How to lengthen time before iRC6800 starts call-receipt operation (Auto RX) .............................................................................. 15-77 15.3.7.4.2 Shared folder on PC cannot be registered in address book: Windows XP ....................................................................................... 15-77
15.3.8 Jam (Main Unit)..................................................................................................................................................................... 15-77

15.3.8.1 1700 Jam Code: Explanation of 1700 Jam Code ...................................................................................................................................... 15-77 15.3.8.2 0103/0104 Jam Code Neuissiedler large-size/RA3 pickup fault .............................................................................................................. 15-77 15.3.8.3 0101 Jam Code: Only occurs with right paper deck, upon installation .................................................................................................... 15-78 15.3.8.4 0109/0110 Jam Code: Vertical Path Roller does not rotate...................................................................................................................... 15-78 15.3.8.5 0109 Jam Code: Occurs only during duplex copy/print ........................................................................................................................... 15-78 15.3.8.6 010A Jam Code: Occurs only with machines that are equipped with Side Paper Deck-D1 .................................................................... 15-78 15.3.8.7 010A Jam Code: Rotational failure of Manual feed pre-registration motor (M6) due to DC Controller PCB failure............................. 15-80 15.3.8.8 010C Jam Code: Occurs during feeding B5/STMT paper (small size), Due to rotational failure of paper feeder fan ............................ 15-80 15.3.8.9 020E Jam Code: Cogged timing belt in Finisher-R1 is detached ............................................................................................................. 15-81 15.3.8.10 0216 Jam Code: Malfunction of Registration Sensor Flag..................................................................................................................... 15-81 15.3.8.11 0A0A/020A Jam Code: Sometimes jam occurrence indication remains displaying .............................................................................. 15-81 15.3.8.12 0A0C Jam Code: Stationary jam at power-on at Inside Delivery Sensor PS12 ..................................................................................... 15-81 15.3.8.13 0A0C Jam Code: Stationary jam at Inside Delivery Sensor PS12, ........................................................................................................ 15-82 15.3.8.14 0A15 Jam Code: Stationary jam at power-on at Fixing Inlet Sensor PS11 ............................................................................................ 15-82 15.3.8.15 0A16 Jam Code: Stationary jam at power-on at Left Deck Stationary Sensor PS47 ............................................................................. 15-82
15.3.9 Jam (Document Feeder)......................................................................................................................................................... 15-82

15.3.9.1 Original feeding failure: How to set service mode items after clearing RAM, DADF-M1 ..................................................................... 15-82
15.3.10 Jam (FIN) ............................................................................................................................................................................. 15-82

15.3.10.1 1101 Jam Code: Because Finisher Controller PCB is faulty, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2............................................................. 15-82 15.3.10.2 1104/1101 Jam Code: Troubleshooting, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2............................................................................................. 15-82 15.3.10.3 1104 Jam Code: Because compression spring for 1st delivery roller comes off, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2............................... 15-83 15.3.10.4 1104/1101 Jam Code: Because compression spring for inlet roller is not properly installed, Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2 ......... 15-84 15.3.10.5 1104 Jam Code: Because grounding plate of swing guide unit is not properly positioned, Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2............. 15-84 15.3.10.6 1200 Jam Code: Timing Jam due to soil of Inlet Path Sensor PI33 ....................................................................................................... 15-85
15.3.11 Error Code............................................................................................................................................................................ 15-85

15.3.11.1 E001-0001/E001-0003 Error Code: When turning Energy Save Mode off ........................................................................................... 15-85 15.3.11.2 E001-0001/E001-0002/E001-0003 Error Code: Because fixing drawer (AC Driver cable) has poor contact....................................... 15-85 15.3.11.3 E001-0002 Error Code: Abnormal (rumbling) sound occurs when fixing roller is rotating .................................................................. 15-85 15.3.11.4 E003-0041/E003-0042/E003-0043 Error Code: Because fixing drawer (AC Driver cable) has poor contact....................................... 15-86 15.3.11.5 E004-0002 Error Code: Fixing Sub Heater is broken............................................................................................................................. 15-86 15.3.11.6 E005-0000 Error Code: How to clear error code.................................................................................................................................... 15-86 15.3.11.7 E006-0001 Error Code: Because fixing drawer (AC Driver cable) has poor contact ............................................................................ 15-86 15.3.11.8 E006-0001 Error Code: Due to deformation of fixing roller.................................................................................................................. 15-87 15.3.11.9 E008-0001 Error Code: Necessary steps upon indication ...................................................................................................................... 15-87
Contents
15.3.11.10 E009-00FF Error Code: Because of broken 24T gear in fixing drive unit ...........................................................................................15-87 15.3.11.11 E514-8001/E514-8002 Error Code / Misalignment in staple/sort/group mode: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2...............................15-87 15.3.11.12 E013-0001 Error Code: How to clear waste toner full detection..........................................................................................................15-87 15.3.11.13 E013-0001 Error Code: How to change the waste toner detection timing ...........................................................................................15-88 15.3.11.14 E014-0001 Error Code/abnormal noise: Detachment of fixing roller occurs because C-ring (stop ring) is detached .........................15-88 15.3.11.15 E020-0XD2 Error Code: Claws of color developing assembly cover are not securely snapped into place .........................................15-88 15.3.11.16 E020-03A0 Error Code: When making continuous or intermittent copy of color image .....................................................................15-88 15.3.11.17 E020-0xA9/0xA0 Error Code: Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................................15-89 15.3.11.18 E020-0xA8/0xA2 Error Code: Troubleshooting...................................................................................................................................15-91 15.3.11.19 E020-0281 Error Code: When auto gradation adjustment is performed upon installation...................................................................15-92 15.3.11.20 E020-03A0/E020-03A1/E020-03A2/E020-03A3 Error Code: Because output voltage from DC Power Relay PCB is not enough ..15-92 15.3.11.21 E020-03A0 Error Code: Displayed after replacement of DC Controller PCB .....................................................................................15-93 15.3.11.22 E020-00FF Error Code: Because of DC Controller PCB failure ..........................................................................................................15-93 15.3.11.23 E020-03A0 Error Code: Because J119 connector on DC power relay PCB is disconnected...............................................................15-93 15.3.11.24 E020-00FF Error Code: Because hopper stirring motor (M23) causes rotation failure .......................................................................15-93 15.3.11.25 E021-0001 Error Code: Rotational failure of Developing Rotary Motor due to faulty DC Controller PCB .......................................15-93 15.3.11.26 E043-0001 Error Code: Abnormal noise from Paper Pick-up Ass'y of Side Paper Deck ....................................................................15-93 15.3.11.27 E061-0007 Error Code: Because potential sensor connector is disconnected upon installation ..........................................................15-94 15.3.11.28 E061-0001/E061-0003 Error Code: Because potential sensor PCB is faulty .......................................................................................15-94 15.3.11.29 E070-0001 Error Code: ITB Home Position detection error ................................................................................................................15-94 15.3.11.30 E070-0001 Error Code: ITB home position cannot be detected after replacement of ITB ..................................................................15-94 15.3.11.31 E070-0003 Error Code: Because of poor contact of leaf spring of static-charge eliminator in ITB Transfer Ass'y, after replacement of primary transfer roller ........................................................................................................................................................................................15-94 15.3.11.32 E070-0101 Error Code: Reflecting surface for ITB HP detection is soiled..........................................................................................15-95 15.3.11.33 E070 Error Code: Difference between sub codes 0001 and 0002 and their function ...........................................................................15-95 15.3.11.34 E073-0001 Error Code: Because of deformation of release arm of Fixing Feeder Ass'y.....................................................................15-95 15.3.11.35 E077-0001 Error Code: Secondary transfer outside roller shift motor (M20) does not run .................................................................15-95 15.3.11.36 E077-0001 Error Code: Secondary Transfer Outside Roller repeats up-and-down movement upon power-on ..................................15-95 15.3.11.37 E079/E009 Error Code: Because of broken 24T gear...........................................................................................................................15-96 15.3.11.38 E079-0002 Error Code: Due to pinched drawer cable2 of fixing feeder assembly ..............................................................................15-96 15.3.11.39 E079-0002 Error Code: Points to note when performing service work on drawer cable of fixing feeder assembly ...........................15-97 15.3.11.40 E020/E021/E061/E070/E078/E820 Error Code / Poor contact of connectors around process unit .....................................................15-97 15.3.11.41 E020-03A0/E020-01A2 Error Code ..................................................................................................................................................15-100 15.3.11.42 E061-0001 Error Code ........................................................................................................................................................................15-100 15.3.11.43 E070-0102 Error Code ........................................................................................................................................................................15-101 15.3.11.44 E070-0101/E070-0102/E070-0201/E070-0202/E070-0302 Error Code.............................................................................................15-101 15.3.11.45 E542-8001 Error Code ........................................................................................................................................................................15-102 15.3.11.46 E100 Error Code: Because of deformation of laser shutter lever .......................................................................................................15-103 15.3.11.47 E100-0002 Error Code: Fine lines appear on front side of image in sub scanning direction because laser scanner assembly is faulty ..15103 15.3.11.48 0111 Jam Code: Occurs when copying in duplex mode .....................................................................................................................15-103 15.3.11.49 0111 Jam Code: Because tension spring of reverse driven roller comes off ......................................................................................15-103 15.3.11.50 E197 Error Code: Release arm of Fixing Feeder Ass'y was deformed...............................................................................................15-104 15.3.11.51 E248-0000 Error Code: Upon installation ..........................................................................................................................................15-104 15.3.11.52 E505 Error Code: Alignment/staple position adjustment backup data error, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2 .................................15-104 15.3.11.53 E540-8003 Error Code: Occurs when Upper Tray ascends because of Back End Assist Plate coming off .......................................15-104 15.3.11.54 E540-8002/E540-8001 Error Code: Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2 ..............................................................................................15-104 15.3.11.55 E602-0001 Error Code: Unable to enter Download mode because Main Controller PCB is faulty...................................................15-104 15.3.11.56 E602-0113 Error Code: Because hard disk (HDD) is faulty...............................................................................................................15-105 15.3.11.57 E719-0011 Error Code: After clearing error code, "Enter the Dept. ID and Password using the numeric keys." appears, Card Reader-C1 15-105 15.3.11.58 E733-0001/E732-0001 Error Code: Occurs when progress bar is completed after power-on ...........................................................15-105 15.3.11.59 E747-00FF Error Code........................................................................................................................................................................15-105 15.3.11.60 E800-0001 Error Code: Installation of Fixing Feeder Ass'y is not properly detected ........................................................................15-105 15.3.11.61 E800-0001 Error Code: Because of deformation of release arm of Fixing Feeder Ass'y...................................................................15-105 15.3.11.62 E800-0001/E227-0001 Error Code: Because DC power supply is faulty...........................................................................................15-106 15.3.11.63 E820-0002 Error Code: Because of rotational failure of process unit cooling fan (FM7) .................................................................15-106 15.3.11.64 E824-000 Error Code: Because of rotational failure of primary charging suction fan (FM1) ...........................................................15-106 15.3.11.65 1200/1104 Jam Code due to unintended rotation of shutter open/close clutch (CL31): Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2 ................15-106
15.3.12 FAX # Code ....................................................................................................................................................................... 15-107

15.3.12.1 #801 Error Code: Upon installation, machine can send data to shared folder on PC with Windows2000 but can't do so to shared folder on PC with WindowsXP .......................................................................................................................................................................................15-107
Contents
15.3.13 Specifications-Related FAQ .............................................................................................................................................. 15-107

15.3.13.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications ........................................................................................................................................................ 15-107 15.3.13.1.1 Effects on human eyes by scanning lamp (Xenon lamp).............................................................................................................. 15-107 15.3.13.1.2 Recovery time from "Energy Save Mode" ................................................................................................................................... 15-107 15.3.13.1.3 Function limitation when security key is not inserted .................................................................................................................. 15-107 15.3.13.1.4 How to set copy standard mode at "Black" .................................................................................................................................. 15-107 15.3.13.1.5 Unable to select [Stack Bypass Settings] button .......................................................................................................................... 15-107 15.3.13.1.6 How to deactivate "Sleep Mode" and "Low Power Mode" .......................................................................................................... 15-108 15.3.13.1.7 How to print documents that have failed to be forwarded (forwarding errors) ............................................................................ 15-108 15.3.13.1.8 DADF-M1: Can originals with different widths and lengths be fed at once? Different size originals function .......................... 15-108 15.3.13.1.9 Network settings (IP Address, Subnet mask) when using Service Support Tool (SST) .............................................................. 15-108 15.3.13.1.10 How to set "Different Size Originals" as Standard Send Settings for FAX transmission .......................................................... 15-108 15.3.13.1.11 Functions "Flaming" and "Blanking" are inoperative under [Special Features> Area Designation> Pen Entry] when using ADF 15108 15.3.13.1.12 What is [Auto Online] feature?................................................................................................................................................... 15-108 15.3.13.1.13 What is [Auto Offline] feature? .................................................................................................................................................. 15-108 15.3.13.1.14 How to clear System Administrator Password ........................................................................................................................... 15-109 15.3.13.1.15 Number of copies that can be taken after "Remaining toner is low." message appears ............................................................. 15-109 15.3.13.1.16 "Free Size" setting cannot be done when attempting to use stack bypass as paper source ........................................................ 15-109 15.3.13.1.17 Upgrading DCON/RCON/G3FAX............................................................................................................................................. 15-109 15.3.13.1.18 How to disable display of message "Cleaning web is low."....................................................................................................... 15-109 15.3.13.1.19 Lubricant used upon replacement of cleaning blade for photosensitive drum ........................................................................... 15-109 15.3.13.1.20 How to disable display of message "Prepare a new fixing unit." ............................................................................................... 15-109 15.3.13.1.21 Horizontal registration failure: How to adjust horizontal registration for main cassettes and front decks ................................ 15-110 15.3.13.1.22 How to switch display of software counter items....................................................................................................................... 15-110 15.3.13.1.23 How to disable function to automatically change paper source between cassettes: Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS.............. 15-110 15.3.13.1.24 Message "Enter the Dept. ID and Password using the numeric keys." is displayed: On machine without Card Reader........... 15-110 15.3.13.1.25 Copy ratio cannot be changed when selecting "Long Strip Original" in special features .......................................................... 15-110 15.3.13.1.26 How to clear message "Remaining toner is low." / Message "Remaining toner is low." does not disappear even after replacement of yellow toner cartridge ................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-110 15.3.13.1.27 How to replace toner cartridge by specifying color: When message "Remaining toner is low." is displayed........................... 15-111 15.3.13.1.28 Want to disable indication of message "Remaining toner is low."............................................................................................. 15-111 15.3.13.1.29 Cautions upon indication of message "Remaining toner is low. (Yellow)" ............................................................................... 15-111 15.3.13.1.30 How to output history print of JAM: JAM/ERR/ALARM-1, -2/SEND-ERR ........................................................................... 15-111 15.3.13.1.31 Affect on cardiac pacemaker by copier ...................................................................................................................................... 15-111 15.3.13.1.32 Descriptions on how host machine controls color toner replenishment and cautions: E020 Error Code................................... 15-111 15.3.13.1.33 Is it possible to make black-and-white copy after either of color toner has been depleted? ...................................................... 15-112 15.3.13.1.34 Is it possible to make black-and-white copy after either of color toner is depleted during continuous color copy?.................. 15-112 15.3.13.1.35 Proper installation direction of photosensitive drum upon replacement: Should lot No. label be front or rear? ....................... 15-112 15.3.13.1.36 Is it possible to make black-and-white copy after either of color toner is depleted during continuous color printing?............. 15-112 15.3.13.1.37 Card Reader-C1: Card cannot be recognized (Card No. 2500) .................................................................................................. 15-112 15.3.13.1.38 Remaining toner indication is not reset to 100% even after replacement of Bk toner cartridge before indication of "No toner." .. 15112 15.3.13.1.39 Black is not displayed under "Specified Toner Replacement" which can enable users to replace toner cartridge when there still remains toner............................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-112 15.3.13.1.40 Want to erase all documents stored in Conf. Fax Inbox at once................................................................................................. 15-113 15.3.13.1.41 Flap of envelope is sealed after being delivered......................................................................................................................... 15-113 15.3.13.1.42 How to activate AppleTalk settings............................................................................................................................................ 15-113 15.3.13.1.43 How to display message "Check the drum phase" on both User and Service Mode Screens .................................................... 15-113 15.3.13.1.44 Massage "Check the drum phase" is displayed when entering service mode............................................................................. 15-113 15.3.13.1.45 How to verify number of executions of drum phase shifting ..................................................................................................... 15-113 15.3.13.1.46 Equation to calculate estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts ................................................ 15-113 15.3.13.1.47 How to check RAM (memory) capacity..................................................................................................................................... 15-113 15.3.13.1.48 Reading of ENV-TR (Environmental zone) differs from that of other iRC machines............................................................... 15-114 15.3.13.1.49 Methods to make stamping original mode effective................................................................................................................... 15-114 15.3.13.1.50 Page count between message "Prepare a new fixing unit." and E008-0001 Error Code............................................................ 15-114 15.3.13.1.51 Output image size is different between when using "Zoom by Percentage" function and "Preset Zoom" function although same copy ratio is set .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-114 15.3.13.1.52 Six items under Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST (Level 2) > HV-TR ................................................................................. 15-114 15.3.13.1.53 How to change page count before message "Prepare a new fixing unit." is displayed .............................................................. 15-114 15.3.13.1.54 Convenient setting for always printing on particular irregular-size paper: How to register Stack Bypass Standard Settings and Custom Paper Size ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-115
Contents
15.3.13.1.55 How to temporarily print standard-size heavy paper in heavy paper mode................................................................................15-115 15.3.13.1.56 Image loss occurs when copying irregular size original (280 x 420 mm: double truck of magazine) by reducing ratio ...........15-115 15.3.13.1.57 How to make heavy paper available when printing: Registration of Heavy paper to Printer driver ..........................................15-115 15.3.13.1.58 Message "Load paper" is displayed on LCD when printing: Because paper type selected in printer driver does not agree with machine's setting .........................................................................................................................................................................................15-115 15.3.13.1.59 Description on message "Adjusting gradation. Please wait a moment." ....................................................................................15-116 15.3.13.1.60 How to reject print jobs sent from computers with unknown Department ID............................................................................15-116 15.3.13.1.61 How to make facedown delivery available when making copies by scanning from copyboard glass of machine without finisher 15116 15.3.13.1.62 Condensation upon installation/faulty image/malfunction .........................................................................................................15-116 15.3.13.1.63 Auto paper selection mode is unavailable when portrait original (A5/STMT) is placed in landscape orientation (A5R/STMTR).15116 15.3.13.2 FAQ on Send Specifications .................................................................................................................................................................15-116 15.3.13.2.1 Documents stored in Mail Box (Inbox) are lost............................................................................................................................15-116 15.3.13.2.2 How to send E-mail.......................................................................................................................................................................15-116 15.3.13.2.3 How to clear logs (job history, job record) ...................................................................................................................................15-117 15.3.13.2.4 How to make Send tab not display on LCD..................................................................................................................................15-117 15.3.13.2.5 How to send documents or images to designated folder in computer: Windows (SMB) .............................................................15-117 15.3.13.2.6 How to check whether SEND kit has been installed.....................................................................................................................15-117 15.3.13.2.7 How to cancel send jobs waiting to be processed or being sent (E-mail / IFAX / Sending to File Server / Storing in User Inbox)..15117 15.3.13.2.8 How to change Scanning Mode and File Format displayed on Send screen as standard .............................................................15-117 15.3.13.2.9 Want to send originals with blank boarder (margin) around edge of scanned image: Push scan.................................................15-118 15.3.13.2.10 Message "To send a file in [PDF (compct)] format, select a setting other than black and white and select 300 x 300 dpi." is displayed: FAX transmission........................................................................................................................................................................................15-118 15.3.13.3 FAQ on LIPS Specifications.................................................................................................................................................................15-118 15.3.13.3.1 Is it possible to superimpose form over document created using application when printing?: Overlay Printing.........................15-118 15.3.13.4 FAQ on UFR Specifications .................................................................................................................................................................15-118 15.3.13.4.1 USB Interface Board: Where to install it ......................................................................................................................................15-118 15.3.13.4.2 Cannot select Staple as finishing mode on PC: Device status is not obtained..............................................................................15-118 15.3.13.4.3 How to fix print color in black and white (monochrome).............................................................................................................15-118 15.3.13.4.4 How to restrict computers that can send data (print job, I-FAX)..................................................................................................15-119 15.3.13.4.5 How to print 2nd side upside down in duplex printing .................................................................................................................15-119 15.3.13.4.6 Cannot select staple as finishing mode on PC: Because Custom Size Paper is selected ..............................................................15-119 15.3.13.4.7 Correct imformation on paper type is not displayed on tooltips (message) displayed on illustration of printer driver................15-119 15.3.13.4.8 How to check type information (size, type, level of paper) of machine in printer driver properties............................................15-119 15.3.13.4.9 Do counters increase when printing job of Excel sheet including both monochrome and color pages? ......................................15-119 15.3.13.5 FAQ on G3FAX Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................15-119 15.3.13.5.1 When receiving B5-sized document by FAX, A4 paper is used for output..................................................................................15-119 15.3.13.5.2 Difference between # error and ## error: FAX error code............................................................................................................15-119 15.3.13.5.3 There is no error code indication in Details although its log displays "NG" ................................................................................15-120 15.3.13.5.4 How to display ## service error code............................................................................................................................................15-120 15.3.13.5.5 "TX Report" and "FAX Error TX Report" (total 2 sheets) are output upon FAX transmission error ..........................................15-120 15.3.13.5.6 How to erase Fax forwarding settings...........................................................................................................................................15-120 15.3.13.5.7 How to invalidate Fax forwarding setting temporarily .................................................................................................................15-120 15.3.13.5.8 Multiple Communication Result Report .......................................................................................................................................15-120 15.3.13.5.9 Is it possible to move data from Address Book to One-Touch key?.............................................................................................15-120 15.3.13.5.10 How to erase all destinations stored in Address Book and One-Touch buttons at once.............................................................15-121 15.3.13.5.11 Is FAX/TEL auto switching function available?.........................................................................................................................15-121 15.3.13.5.12 How to print FAX Activity Report when necessary ...................................................................................................................15-121 15.3.13.5.13 How to make sender information smaller on receiving side: FAX Transmission ......................................................................15-121 15.3.13.5.14 How to set memory reception ending sound: FAX reception.....................................................................................................15-121 15.3.13.5.15 Wants to hide destination name printed at sender information area on receiving side when sending FAX message: FAX transmission 15-121 15.3.13.6 FAQ on I-FAX Specifications ..............................................................................................................................................................15-121 15.3.13.6.1 Difference between POP reception and SMTP reception: I-FAX reception ................................................................................15-121 15.3.13.6.2 Is it required to issue POP when using I-FAX function?..............................................................................................................15-121 15.3.13.7 FAQ on Remote UI Specifications .......................................................................................................................................................15-122 15.3.13.7.1 Remote UI: Explanations about applicable functions of Remote UI ............................................................................................15-122 15.3.13.7.2 Remote UI: How to specify Department ID Management settings through Remote UI ..............................................................15-122 15.3.13.7.3 Remote UI: How to back up (export) address book......................................................................................................................15-122 15.3.13.7.4 Remote UI: How to restrict computers that can set or browse machine setting items using Remote UI .....................................15-122
Contents
15.3.13.7.5 How to review documents stored in Inbox from computer .......................................................................................................... 15-122 15.3.13.7.6 Remote UI: Functions [Job Status] [Mail Box] [Address] [Add. Func.] do not work except for [Device], while prompting for User Name and Password.................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-122 15.3.13.7.7 Remote UI: How to back up forwarding settings ......................................................................................................................... 15-123 15.3.13.7.8 Remote UI: How to back up settings of additional functions (user mode)................................................................................... 15-123 15.3.13.7.9 Remote UI cannot be accessed with Mac ..................................................................................................................................... 15-123 15.3.13.7.10 Pop-up window cannot be closed after displaying message board on touch panel / How to display "Done" key: Remote UI . 15-123 15.3.13.7.11 Wants to import FAX destinations registered to Address Book of machine into FAX driver ................................................... 15-123
15.4 Outline of Electrical Components ......................................................................................................................... 15-123

15.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid.................................................................................................................................................................... 15-123
15.4.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids ........................................................................................................................................................................... 15-123
15.4.2 Motor.................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-125

15.4.2.1 Motors ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-125
15.4.3 Fan........................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-128

15.4.3.1 Fans ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-128
15.4.4 Sensor................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-130

15.4.4.1 Sensors .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-130
15.4.5 Switch .................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-136

15.4.5.1 Switches .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-136
15.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ................................................................................................................................................. 15-137

15.4.6.1 Heaters, Lamps, and Others .................................................................................................................................................................... 15-137
15.4.7 PCBs .................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-140

15.4.7.1 PCB ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-140 15.4.7.2 PCB ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-143
15.4.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB............................................................. 15-145
15.4.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emiting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB................................................................................. 15-145 15.4.8.2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker ............................................................................................................................................ 15-145 15.4.8.3 Main Controller PCB (main) .................................................................................................................................................................. 15-146 15.4.8.4 DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-146 15.4.8.5 HV1 PCB ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-147 15.4.8.6 HV2 PCB ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-147 15.4.8.7 HV3 PCB ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-148
Chapter 15
15.1 Making lnitial Checks

15.1.1 Checking the Site Environment
0001-6073
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci - The voltage of the source of power must be as indicated (+/-10%), and the power plug must remain connected day and night. - The temperature and humidity of the site must be as indicated, and the site must be away from a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier; moreover, the machine must not be near a fire or subjected to dust. - The site must be free of ammonium gas. - The machine must not be subjected to the direct rays of the sun. As necessary, curtains must be furnished. - The site must be well ventilated, and its floor must keep the machine level. - The machine must remain connected to the wall outlet at all times.
15.1.2 Checking the Paper

0001-6076
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci - Check if the paper is of a type recommended by Canon. - Check if the paper is dry. If moist, try paper fresh out of package.
15.1.3 Checking the Placement of Paper

0001-6077
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci - Check that the amount of paper placed in the cassette and the manual feed tray is as indicated. - If transparencies are used, check to see if they are placed in the correct orientation.
15.1.4 Checking the Durables

0001-6079
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Check the Durables Table, and replace those parts that have reached the end of the indicated lifetimes.
15.1.5 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts

0001-6080
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Check the Scheduled Servicing Chart and the Periodically Replaced Parts Table, and replace those parts that have reached the end of the indicated lifetimes.
15.1.6 Checking the Units and Functional Blocks

0001-6082
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Reader Unit - Check the optical system (contact sensor, white plate, copyboard glass) for a scar, dirt, and foreign matter. - Check the contact sensor unit to see if it moves smoothly. Check its rail for dirt. - Check the contact sensor for flickering. - Check the scanner for condensation. 2. Process - Check the drum unit/developing unit to see if it is attached properly. - Check the photosensitive drum for a scar and dirt. - Check the patch image read sensor window for dirt. 3. Transfer - Check the secondary transfer outside roller for wear, scar, dirt, and deformation. - Check the blade of the cleaning unit for a tear, warping, deformation, and stray toner. 4. Fixing - Check the fixing roller/pressure roller for wear, scar, dirt, and deformation. - Check the fixing heater (main/sub) to see if it goes on when the power is turned on. - Check the fixing thermistor for an open circuit. - Check the thermal switch for electrical continuity. 5. Paper Movement - Check if there is foreign matter such as paper lint. - Check the pickup/feed/separation roller for a buildup of paper powder, wear, scar, dirt, and deformation. - Check the registration roller (middle, outside)/paper path roller for wear, scar, dirt, and deformation. - Check the feed guide for wear, scar, dirt, and deformation. - Check the paper for a bent leading edge, curling, waving, and moisture. - As necessary, try transparencies of a type recommended by Canon to see if the problem, if any, is corrected. 6. Machine - Check if an excess load is imposed on the drive system. - Check the gears for wear and chipping. 7. Cassette - Check if the cassettes are fitted properly. Check also to see that an appropriate paper size is selected. As necessary, try a normal cassette if the problem, if any, stops. - Check the movement of the cassette holding plate is smooth. Check also to see that the holding plate is free of deformation. - Check if the side guide plate/trailing edge plate inside the cassette are set correctly. - Check if the cassette heater switch is at the ON side (if a cassette heater is fitted). 8. Service Mode - Check that the various CCD adjustment values are as indicated on the service label.
15-1
Chapter 15 (COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>all items) - Check if registration adjustment is correct. (COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST) - Check if the machine inside temperature/humidity is the correct reading. (COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG>TEMP/ABS-HUM) - Check the image read position adjustment is correct. (COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X/ADJ-Y) - Check if the value for ADJUST/OPTION is as indicated on the service label. - Check if error initialization has been executed. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) 9. General - Check the power plug is connected properly. - Check there is the rated AC voltage at the power outlet. - Check the sensors, clutches, motors, and solenoids operate normally. Check the connectors for poor contact. (Be sure to check with the General Timing Chart for reference to power/signal routes.) - Check the leakage breaker/circuit breaker operates normally. - Check the wiring for trapping and loose screws. - Check the external cover are all fitted properly. - Check the main power switch/control panel power switch are at the ON side. - Check the power cable/signal cable to accessories are correctly routed. - Check the cover switch operates normally. - Check the fuses on the PCBs to see if they have blown. - Check the user knows how to use the machine correctly.
15.1.7 Others
0001-6094
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci If a machine is brought in from a cold to a warm place, its inside can develop condensation, which will lead to various problems. (1) condensation on the BD sensor can cause faults associated with E100. (2) condensation on the dust-blocking glass can cause the images in sub scanning direction to be too light. (3) condensation on the contact sensor of the reader unit or the copyboard glass can lead to light images. (4) condensation on the pickup/feed guide can cause faulty paper movement. If (4) above is noted, be sure to dry wipe the units involved in the feed system. The same is true of toner cartridges, developing units, and drum units, i.e., when they are unpacked after being brought in from a cold place. To prevent condensation, advise the user to leave the package alone (for about 1 to 2 hr) before opening it.
15.2 Test Print

15.2.1 Overview
0001-6108
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine offers the following 6 types of test prints (TYPE), each designed for identification of a specific type of image fault. The data for these test prints is prepared by the main controller: if the output of a test print is free of the fault in question, suspect a fault on the PDL input or the reader unit.
15.2.2 Test Print TYPE

0001-6109
T-15-1 Type No. 0 1-3 4 5 6 7-9 10 11 12 13 14 15-100 Description normal copy/print -(for R&D) 16 gradations full half-tone grid -(for R&D) MCYBk horizontal stripe (sub scanning direction) -(for R&D) 64 gradations -(for R&D) full color 16 gradations -(for R&D)
15.2.3 Selecting Test Print TYPE

0001-6111
15-2
Chapter 15
1) Set the copy count, paper size, and pickup mode (single-sided or double-sided). 2) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>PG. 3) Make the following selections: COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE. 4) Enter the appropriate TYPE No. using the keypad, and press the OK key. 5) Select the appropriate color using COLOR-Y/M/C/K (output at 1). 6) Set the density using DENS-Y/M/C/K (valid only if TYPE=5). 7) Press the start key.
15.2.4 16-Gradation (TYPE=4)

0001-6113
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Use this test print to check gradation, fogging, white line, and uneven density at the front/rear. - Gradation If the 16-gradation[1] is not properly produced, suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser exposure system. - Fogging If fogging is found only in the white area[2], suspect a fault in the drum unit or the laser exposure system. - White Line If a white line is found in the image, suspect a fault in the developing system. - Uneven Density at the Front/Rear If uneven density is found at the front/rear, suspect a fault in the drum unit, laser exposure system, or transfer system.
[1]
[2]
F-15-1
15.2.5 Full Page Halftone (TYPE=5)

0001-6115
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Use this test print to check a transfer fault, black line, white line, and uneven density at specific intervals. MEMO: - You can print out test prints for individual colors by making the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>PG and then COLOR-Y/M/C/K. - You can also change the density of the test prints by making the following selections in service mode: TEST>PG>DENS>Y/M/C/K. (1) Transfer Fault If a transfer fault (white spot) occurs, suspect a fault in the ITB unit or the secondary transfer outside roller. (2) Black Line If a black line occurs, suspect a scratch in the photosensitive drum or dirt on the primary charging roller. (3) White Line If a white line occurs, suspect a fault in the ITB unit, secondary transfer outside roller, or laser exposure system. (4) Uneven Density If the density is uneven at specific intervals, suspect the following: (a) photosensitive drum (if at 194.7 mm) (b) developing cylinder (if at 37.6 mm) (5) Uneven Density If uneven density occurs, suspect dirt on the dust-blocking glass of the laser unit or deterioration of the ITB.
15-3
Chapter 15
COLOR-M=1, COLOR-Y/C/K=0
F-15-2
15.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6)

0001-6117
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Use this text print to check color displacement, right angles, and straight lines. - Color Displacement If color displacement is found, suspect a scar in the ITB and a fault in the drum unit. - Right Angle, Straight Lines If the right angles or straight lines are not correct, suspect a fault in the laser exposure system, a fault in the shape of the registration (middle/outside) roller, and a fault in the secondary transfer outside roller.
F-15-3
15.2.7 MCYBk Horizontal Stripes (TYPE=10)

0001-6118
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Use this test print to check the density of dark areas of individual colors, balance among colors, and white lines associated with development. (1) Solid Density of Individual Colors and Balance Among Colors (a) the density must not be appreciably low (too light). (b) if the density of a specific color is too low (too light), suspect a fault in the developing system. (c) if the density of all colors is low (too light), suspect a fault in the laser exposure system and the transfer block. (2) While Line If a white line is found in a specific color, suspect a fault in the development system of that particular color. (3) Uneven Density at the Front/Rear If uneven density is found in a specific color, suspect a fault in the development system of that particular color. If it is found in all colors, suspect a fault in the drum unit, ITB unit, and laser exposure system.
15-4
Chapter 15
2.5 1.5mm
2.5 1.5mm
F-15-4
15.2.8 64-Gradation (TYPE=12)

0001-6119
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Use this test print to check the gradation of Y, M, C, and Bk at once.
F-15-5
15.2.9 Full Color 16-Gradation (TYPE=14)

0001-6120
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Use this test print to check the gray balance, gradation of individual colors (YMCBk), and fogging. - Gray Balance Check the grayscale area to see if the densities of all colors are even. - Gradation Check the gradation of individual colors (YMCBk) and for any difference in color. - Fogging If fogging is found in the white area, suspect a fault in the developing system, a fault in the drum unit, and poor adjustment of the laser exposure system.
15-5
Chapter 15
4 colors (YMCK) 3 colors (YMC)
Light area
White
White
F-15-6
15.3 Troubleshooting
15.3.1 Symptoms 15.3.1.1 Symptoms
0005-4102
15-6
Chapter 15
T-15-2 Item Image fault Symptoms Solid black / Poor contact of connectors around process unit Overall light image on black area, uneven image Low density / Poor contact of connectors around process unit Uneven Density Along the Leading Edge in a Solid Color Image Uneven Density in the Form of a Feedscrew in Color Images Uneven Density in Halftone Images Colored Dots Uneven Density On Rough-Textured Paper Coarse Image in a Solid C Original Transfer Faults on Mono-Color Prints Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction Smeared of Colored Characters/Lines Vertical Lies in Halftone Images Image Fault Occurring at Specific Intervals Missing Color White Spots at 51mm Intervals Vertical Lines Caused by an ITB Cleaning Fault Vertical Lines Soiling of the Left/Right Margin on Double-Sided Prints (1st side) Oil Lines in Vertical Direction Stray Toner Soiling as Dots at Drum Intervals Horizontal Line Caused by Impact from the Developing Rotary Soiling in the Form of a Ring Ghost Caused by a Bend on the ITB Cleaning Blade Faulty Color Reproduction Caused by an Error in Primary Transfer ATVC Paper feed fault Malfunction Wrapping Around the Pressure Roller / Oil Traces / Separation Claw Traces / Wrinkle Traces Fixing Web Displacement / 0A15/020D Jam Code Abnormal Noise from the Rotating Rotary Frequent DF Reading Glass Cleaning Message Frequent DF reading Glass Cleaning Message (user requesting disabling of the message) Jam (Main Unit) Error code 0103/0104 Jam Code Neuissiedler large-size/RA3 pickup fault E020/E021/E061/E070/E078/E820 Error Code / Poor contact of connectors around process unit E020-03A0/E020-01A2 Error Code E061-0001 Error Code E070-0102 Error Code E070-0101/E070-0102/E070-0201/E070-0202/E070-0302 Error Code E542-8001 Error Code
15.3.1.2 Maintenance Recommendations for Components Around the Photosensitive Drum/Intermediate Transfer Unit in the Event of an Image Fault
0006-0542
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci If any of the following image faults has occurred as the result of wear on any of the durable components around the photosensitive drum or the intermediate transfer unit, refer to the tables that follow for guidance; the tables have been prepared in view of frequency of servicing, length of servicing work, and parts cost: For a detailed description of individual faults, field remedies, and image samples, see their respective symptoms.
15-7
Chapter 15
1. Transfer Fault on 2nd Side (2nd color; as first in the morning) a. Cause: Wear on Secondary Transfer Roller
T-15-3 Field with high labor cost Field with low labor cost
Parts name (work)
Servicing intervals
[1]
Photosensitive drum (dry wiping)
images with spots
[2]
Photosensitive drum cleaning blade Photosensitive drum scoop-up sheet
195,000 images
replace
replace
[3]
390,000 images
[4]
Photosensitive drum cleaner scoop-up sheet
150,000 prints
clean
clean
[5]
Photosensitive drum cleaner assembly (lower)
150,000 prints
clean
clean
[6]
Pre-transfer charging assembly rail
150,000 prints
clean
clean
[7]
Primary transfer roller
195,000 images
replace
replace
[8]
Primary transfer static eliminator
300,000 images
ITB(replacement;) [9] ITB(cleaning of outer surface)
300,000 images
unit replacement
clean
clean
[10]
Secondary transfer inside roller
300,000 prints
replace
[11]
Patch detection sensor (cleaning)
250,000 images
clean
clean
[12]
ITB inside roller, scraper (cleaning)
Primary transfer roller replacement
clean
clean
[13]
ITB cleaning blade
195,000 images
replace
replace
[14]
ITB cleaner scoop-up sheet
150,000 prints
replace
replace
[15]
Secondary transfer outside roller
195,000 images
replace *
replace *
* : required 2. Line/White Spot, Color Displacement at 51mm Intervals a. Cause: Wear on Primary Transfer Roller, Soiling Inside ITB Unit
T-15-4 Parts name (work) [1] Photosensitive drum (dry wiping) Servicing intervals images with spots Field with high labor cost Field with low labor cost -
15-8
Chapter 15
Field with high labor cost replace clean clean clean replace * clean replace clean clean * replace replace replace Field with low labor cost replace clean clean clean replace * clean clean clean * replace replace replace
Parts name (work) [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Photosensitive drum cleaning blade Photosensitive drum scoop-up sheet Photosensitive drum cleaner scoop-up sheet (lower) Photosensitive drum cleaner assembly (lower) Pre-transfer charging assembly rail Primary transfer roller Primary transfer static eliminator ITB(replacement;) [9] ITB(cleaning of outer surface) [10] [11] Secondary transfer inside roller Patch detection sensor (cleaning)
Servicing intervals 195,000 images 390,000 images 150,000 prints 150,000 prints 150,000 prints 195,000 images 300,000 images 300,000 images unit replacement 300,000 prints 250,000 images
[12] [13] [14] [15]
ITB inside roller, scraper (cleaning) ITB cleaning blade ITB cleaner scoop-up sheet Secondary transfer outside roller
Primary transfer roller replacement 195,000 images 150,000 prints 195,000 images
* : required 3. Soiling in Dots at Drum Intervals, Slippage Under Cleaner (ghost) a. Cause: Wear on Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Blade/ITB Cleaning Blade
T-15-5 Field with high labor cost clean * replace * Field with low labor cost clean * replace * -
Parts name (work)
Servicing intervals
[1]
Photosensitive drum (dry wiping)
images with spots
[2]
Photosensitive drum cleaning blade
195,000 images
[3]
Photosensitive drum scoop-up sheet
390,000 images
[4]
Photosensitive drum cleaner scoop-up sheet (lower)
150,000 prints
clean
clean
[5]
Photosensitive drum cleaner assembly (lower)
150,000 prints
clean
clean
[6]
Pre-transfer charging assembly rail
195,000 images
clean
clean
[7]
Primary transfer roller
150,000 prints
replace
replace
[8]
Primary transfer static eliminator
300,000 images
ITB(replacement;) [9] ITB(cleaning of outer surface)
300,000 images
unit replacement
clean
clean
[10]
Secondary transfer inside roller
300,000 prints
replace
[11]
Patch detection sensor (cleaning)
250,000 images
clean
clean
15-9
Chapter 15
Parts name (work)
Servicing intervals
Field with high labor cost
Field with low labor cost
[12]
ITB inside roller, scraper (cleaning)
Primary transfer roller replacement
clean
clean
[13]
ITB cleaning blade
195,000 images
replace * replace
replace * replace
[14]
ITB cleaner scoop-up sheet
150,000 prints
[15]
Secondary transfer outside roller
195,000 images
replace
replace
* : required
[4] [2] [6] [1] [5] [3]
[11]
[8] [7] [9]
[13] [14]
[10] [15]
[12]:
F-15-7
15.3.2 Image Faults 15.3.2.1 Solid Image

15.3.2.1.1 Solid black / Poor contact of connectors around process unit
0005-9759
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci For details of error codes, see the following: E020-0080/E020-0180/E020-0280/E020-0380/E020-0090/E020-0190/E020-0290/E020-0091/E020-0191/E020-0291/E020-0092/E020-0192/E020-0292/E0200392/E020-00A0/E020-01A0/E020-02A0/E020-03A0/E020-00A1/E020-01A1/E020-02A1/E020-03A1/E020-00A2/E020-01A2/E020-02A2/E020-03A2/E02000A3/E020-01A3/E020-02A3/E020-03A3/E021-0001/E021-0002/E061-0005/E061-0007/E070-0000/E070-0001/E070-0002/E070-0003/E078-0001/E820-0020 1. Cause When drawing out the Pkit as part of servicing work, you need to disconnect and then connect the connectors. When repeated, their internal pins can start to suffer from poor connection, resulting in wrong operation/detection. 2. Description A break in the harness can occur when the harness is disconnected/connected about 30 times. The following is a list of harnesses that are subject to a break with descriptions of symptoms expected when a break occurs.
T-15-6 Name (part No.) Pin No. Connection load (notation) Expected error condition (symptom in response to error)
15-10
Chapter 15
[1]ITB cleaner harness (FM2-0946) 1/2/3/4 connector: J214L E078-0001 The motor stops.
5/6/7
ITB cleaning HP sensor (PS23)
E078-0001 The sensor fails to operate
8/9/10
process unit cooling fan (FM7)
E820-0002 The fan stops. The machine fails to detect rotation.
11/12
post-charging assembly cleaning motor (M27)
image fault (vertical line) The motor stops.
[2]PKIT harness (FM2-0947) connector: J201LA/J201B 1/2 primary charging wire cleaning motor (M26) image fault (vertical line) The motor stops.
3/4/5
color toner cartridge sensor (PS26)
message calling for the bottle. The absence of a bottle is wrongly detected in the presence of a bottle.
The presence of a bottle is wrongly detected in the absence of a bottle.
6/7
pre-exposure LED (LED1)
image fault (solid black) E061-0005 The LED fails to go on.
8/9/10/11
color toner level sensor (PS25)
message calling for replacement of toner The absence of toner is wrongly detected in the presence of toner.
image fault (low density) E020-**92 The presence of toner is wrongly detected in the absence of toner.
12/13/14
black toner level sensor (TS1)
2-min supply error E020-00FF black developing assembly excess toner supply The absence of toner is wrongly detected in the presence of toner.
black developing assembly without toner -> image fault (low density) The presence of toner is wrongly detected in the absence of toner.
15/16
NC
1/2
developing rotary locking solenoid (SL10)
E021-0002 The solenoid fails to operate
3/4/5
developing rotary solenoid sensor (PS8)
E021-0002 The sensor fails to operate.
15-11
Chapter 15
6/7/8 developing rotary HP sensor (PS19) E021-0001 The sensor fails to operate.
9-14
ATR sensor (PS4)
E020-**A0 E020-**A1 E020-**A2 E020-**A3 An error sensor value is detected
15/16
ATR sensor shutter solenoid (SL12)
E020-**A0 E020-**A1 E020-**A2 E020-**A3 A sensor error value is detected.
[3]ITB harness (FM2-0949) connector: J261L/J267L 1/2 patch image read sensor shutter solenoid (SL11) E020-**81 E020-**90 E020-**91 A sensor error value is detected
3-8
patch image read sensor (PS2)
E020-**81 E020-**90 E020-**91 A sensor error value is detected
1/2/3
ITB HP sensor B (PS30)
E070-00** The sensor fails to operate. E070-00** The sensor fails to operate.
4/5/6
ITB sensor A (PS1)
[4]Hopper harness (FM2-0950) connector: J301L 1/2 hopper stirring motor (M23) black developing assembly without toner -> image fault (low density) The motor stops.
3/4/5
hopper inside toner level sensor (TS2)
2-min supply error (reset by opening/closing the door) hopper excess toner supply The absence of toner is wrongly detected in the presence of toner.
hopper without toner -> black developing assembly inside without toner The job stops. The presence of toner is wrongly detected in the absence of toner.
6/7
black toner supply motor (M25)
hopper without toner -> black developing assembly inside without toner The job stops. The hopper is without toner.
8/9/10
hopper open/closed sensor (PS28)
message calling for replacement of the bottle, not permitting recovery. remains closed.
The black cartridge motor stops. remains closed
[5]Poteantial sensor harness (FL2-0986) connector: J407L 1-6 potential sensor E061-0007 An error potential level is detected.
15-12
Chapter 15
[5] [1] [3] [4]
F-15-8
[2]
F-15-9
3. Field Remedy Replace the connector with the harness intact.
15.3.2.2 Light Image / Weak Density

15.3.2.2.1 Overall light image on black area, uneven image
0006-2424
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Inspected by Canon Inc. a. Cause As a result of inspection, it was found that this symptom occurred for the following reasons: The black developing ass'y was not supplied with toner because the 3P connector of the toner level sensor inside the black developing ass'y was not securely fitted. Finally, the toner level became low and light image or uneven image occurred. b. Field Remedy 1) Make sure that bit8 in service mode [COPIER> DC-CON> I/O> P009] shows "1", which means that the toner level sensor detects toner remaining. 2) Slide out the AP kit from the main unit and unplug/reinsert the 3P connector once again. 3) Check the service mode value in Step 1 once again. If bit8 shows "0", this symptom might have occurred because of poor contact of the 3P connector. In such a case, the toner level is low, so replenish the black developing ass'y with toner in service mode [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> TONER-S> OK].
15-13
Chapter 15
F-15-10
15.3.2.2.2 Solid color image is too light and texture is rough

0006-8840
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci A. Inspected by Canon Inc. 1. Description It was pointed out from the field that the solid color density is too light and the texture is rough depending on what paper type is used (recycle paper particularly). Therefore, the actual print sample was inspected and it was found to be within specifications. However, the setting change below can increase the density. Follow the steps below to satisfy your customer demands.
If the density becomes too dark, toner scattering might occur at the edge of solid area. Particularly, this symptom will be too visible on the second side of duplex copy, and on dry paper which has been left in low humidity environment for a long time. When you adjust the density, pay careful attention to the image so as not to induce toner scattering. 2. Field Remedy a. For copy 1) In user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Auto Gradation Adjustment], perform [Full Adjustment]. If the symptom still recurs, go on to the step 2. 2) In service mode [COPIER> Adjust> COLOR> ADJ-Y / ADJ-M / ADJ-C], increase the set value by one step by step. For your reference, the maximum increase is three. b. For print In user mode [Printer Settings> Settings> Print Quality> Density], increase the set value of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan by one step by step. For your reference, the maximum increase is three. 15.3.2.2.3 Swathes of voids / Light image on entire image: Occasionally occurs when making large-volume copies (more than 240 sheets)
0007-3911
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy Upgrade ROM of the DC Controller PCB to Ver.7.02 and later so that the ATVC that is executed at every 240 sheets when making large-volume copies has been optimized. Description In the field, light image occasionally occurred on the entire image of the both sides of paper after making large-volume Bk duplex copies, and swathes of voids occurred after the 2nd time ATVC control during making large-volume Bk copies. These symptoms do not occur with a job less than 240 sheets. 15.3.2.2.4 Light image when printing via UFR
0007-4574
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy In the UFR printer driver [Properties> Quality> Print Details> Toner Save], select "Off". Description The toner save mode in the printer driver is set to "Off" for PCL by default (factory initial setting), but to "Print Default" for UFR. Consequently, if this mode is set to "On" in user mode on the host machine, the output via UFR could be regarded as light by a user who does not know this setting.
15-14
Chapter 15 15.3.2.2.5 Light image: After replacement of intermediate transfer unit

0011-9291
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description In the field, light image occurred after replacement of the intermediate transfer unit. When replacing the intermediate transfer unit or the intermediate transfer belt, perform the following field remedy. Field Remedy 1. Service mode > COPIER > Function > MISC-P > 1ATVC-EX > OK. 2. In the same screen as in Step 1, MISC-P > 1TR-ROT > OK. 3. User mode > Adjustment/Cleaning > Auto Gradation Adjustment > Full Adjut. 15.3.2.2.6 Low density / Poor contact of connectors around process unit
0005-9762
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci For details of error codes, see the following: E020-0080/E020-0180/E020-0280/E020-0380/E020-0090/E020-0190/E020-0290/E020-0091/E020-0191/E020-0291/E020-0092/E020-0192/E020-0292/E0200392/E020-00A0/E020-01A0/E020-02A0/E020-03A0/E020-00A1/E020-01A1/E020-02A1/E020-03A1/E020-00A2/E020-01A2/E020-02A2/E020-03A2/E02000A3/E020-01A3/E020-02A3/E020-03A3/E021-0001/E021-0002/E061-0005/E061-0007/E070-0000/E070-0001/E070-0002/E070-0003/E078-0001/E820-0020 1. Cause When sliding out the Pkit as part of servicing work, you need to disconnect and then connect the connectors. When repeated, their internal pins can start to suffer from poor connection, resulting in wrong operation/detection. 2. Description A break in the harness can occur when the harness is disconnected/connected about 30 times. The following is a list of harnesses that are subject to a break with descriptions of symptoms expected when a break occurs.
[1]ITB cleaner harness (FM2-0946) 1/2/3/4
connector: J214L E078-0001 The motor stops.
5/6/7
8/9/10
process unit cooling fan (FM7)
E820-0002 The fan stops. The machine fails to detect rotation.
11/12
post-charging assembly cleaning motor (M27)
image fault (vertical line) The motor stops.
[2]PKIT harness (FM2-0947) connector: J201LA/J201B 1/2 primary charging wire cleaning motor (M26) image fault (vertical line) The motor stops.
3/4/5
6/7
15-15
Chapter 15
8/9/10/11 color toner level sensor (PS25) message calling for replacement of toner The absence of toner is wrongly detected in the presence of toner.
12/13/14
15/16
NC
1/2
3/4/5
6/7/8
developing rotary HP sensor (PS19)
9-14
ATR sensor (PS4)
E020-**A0 E020-**A1 E020-**A2 E020-**A3 An error sensor value is detected
15/16
3-8
1/2/3
4/5/6
ITB sensor A (PS1)
[4]Hopper harness (FM2-0950) connector: J301L
15-16
Chapter 15
1/2 hopper stirring motor (M23) black developing assembly without toner -> image fault (low density) The motor stops.
3/4/5
hopper inside toner level sensor (TS2)
2-min supply error (reset by opening/closing the door) hopper excess toner supply The absence of toner is wrongly detected in the presence of toner.
6/7
8/9/10
message calling for replacement of the bottle, not permitting recovery. remains closed.
The black cartridge motor stops. remains closed
[5] [1] [3] [4]
F-15-11
15-17
Chapter 15
[2]
F-15-12
3. Field Remedy Replace the connector with the harness intact.
15.3.2.3 Foggy Image

15.3.2.3.1 Black fogging on copies upon installation
0006-6890
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy First of all, check whether a red round sticker is attached on the upper cover of the black developing ass'y (rear side). If not, wipe the developing cylinder with a dry cloth in the following procedure. Note that a green round sticker is attached on some of the developing ass'y; however, it is not related to this issue, so please disregard it. 1. Remove the black developing ass'y from the host machine. 2. Remove the potential sensor unit and the cylinder cover from the black developing ass'y. 3. Apply lint-free paper folded in four onto the cylinder along with the blade, and wipe the cylinder with a forefinger from the rear to the front up to two-thirds the full length of the cylinder (in order to prevent toner adhesion to the gears and the rollers on the cylinder end). 4. Turn the cylinder and repeat the step 3 for the overall surface. Note: Change the side of the lint-free paper to a new one after three to four times of use. 5. Wipe the cylinder from the front to the rear in the same manner as in the step 3. 6. While turning the cylinder, visually inspect it to make sure of no unevenness of toner coating on the cylinder surface. 7. Reinstall the cylinder cover and the potential sensor unit that were removed in the step 2. 8. Install the developing ass'y into the host machine and then output an image for verification. Note: - Do not touch the cylinder with your bare hands. - Do not deform the anti-scattering sheet. - Be sure to use dry lint-free paper (Never use alcohol.) 15.3.2.3.2 Fogging (Y/M/C): After replacement of color Developing Ass'ys or developer, because of locking claw is not snapped in place
0006-8841
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, fogging appeared on the image or the inside of the machine was soiled by leakage of developer for the following reason: After replacement of any of color developing ass'ys or developer, the locking claws of the lid of the developing ass'y were not securely snapped in place. Then, the developing ass'y was installed into the host machine. Consequently, the distance between the developing cylinder and the drum became too short. When this symptom occurs, make sure that the lid of the developing ass'y is securely snapped in place. If any problem is found, perform the following steps. Field Remedy 1. Remove the developing ass'ys and clean the inside of the machine. 2. Replace the developer. 3. Snap the lid of the developing ass'y in place, and then install the ass'ys. Make sure that fogging does not occur.
15-18
Chapter 15
F-15-13
15.3.2.3.3 Wide fogging occurs only on colored image

0007-4575
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy As a result of inspection, it was found that wide Magenta fogging appeared on the image because the leaf spring for Magenta which applies developing bias in the developing rotary had poor contact. When such a symptom occurs with colors (except for black), inspect the leaf spring of the affected color viewing from the toner cartridge slot to see whether it becomes loose or deformed. In order to turn the developing rotary for inspection, execute the following service mode [COPIER> Function> MISC-P> DEV-DR-Y/M/C]. 15.3.2.3.4 Is Newspaper mode available? / Background is fogged when making a copy of newspaper
0008-3252
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy Newspaper mode is not available. Before making a copy of newspaper, adjust the background color as follows: a. Adjustment of background color Press [Special Features> Image Quality Adjustment> Remove Background> Fine Adjustment] to adjust the background color. Adjusting it in a minus direction lightens the color. For your information, it will be easier to copy newspaper from now on if you save the adjustment result above in mode memory and furthermore save it as a standard key so that it will appear on the copy screen. b. How to save it in mode memory 1. While the adjustment of background color is being effective, press Special Features> Mode Memory, select either of M1 through M9, and press Store to save the current state. 2. Press Register Name to register the name of the selected mode. Our recommendation is 'Newspaper'. 3. In user mode [Copy Settings> Standard Key 1 (or 2) Settings], select [Mode Memory] from Group and the applicable mode memory (e.g., Newspaper). As a result, 'Newspaper' button will appear in the bottom of the copy screen. 15.3.2.3.5 Poor reproducibility of photo when copying text-photo mixed original: Text / Photo / Map mode
0009-9249
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy In the field, the symptom was improved by increasing the setting of the text-photo recognition level in service mode. When the symptom occurs, select [COPIER > ADJUST >MISC > SEG-ADJ] and adjust the text-photo recognition level. In order for the original to be recognized as a photo original: Increase the setting In order for the original to be recognized as a text original: Decrease the setting Available range of setting: -4 to +4. 15.3.2.3.6 Solid black image/soiled back upon installation
0009-9262
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: When copying, the whole surface of the drum is covered with toner (of all four colors), causing solid black image and soiled back resulted from soiled secondary transfer outside roller. (E100 or E061 was not displayed.) This is because the DC Controller PCB is faulty. When the symptoms occur, replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one. FM2-0857 DC Controller PCB Assembly (120V) FM2-0858 DC Controller PCB Assembly (230V)
15-19
Chapter 15
F-15-14
F-15-15
F-15-16
15.3.2.3.7 Extreme fogging due to poor connection of LED array for pre-conditioning unit/Occasional E061-0003 Error Code
0009-9283
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] escription Extreme fogging occurred on images (including non-image area) because the connector [1] (J206) of the LED array inside the AP kit had poor connection. As a result of inspection it was also found that E061-0003 sometimes occurred and E061-0008 was recorded in the error history. Field Remedy When a symptom occurs, re-insert the connector on both the LED array and AP kit sides.
15-20
Chapter 15
F-15-17
- E061-0003 can be displayed when a level of potential higher than the grid bias is sampled while the grid bias is being adjusted. FK2-0005 LED Array FM2-0428 Pre-conditioning Unit
15.3.2.4 Uneven Density

15.3.2.4.1 Uneven density at 40mm intervals in main scanning direction
0009-2951
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the symptom occurred because of electrical leakage from the pre-transfer corona assembly. When it occurs, try the field remedy below. Field Remedy 1. Remove the pre-transfer corona assembly from the machine and copy an image. 2. If the symptom disappears, clean up the pre-transfer corona assembly and check the symptom again. 3. If the symptom still recurs, replace the pre-transfer corona assembly with a new one. FM2-0427 Pre-Transfer Corona Ass'y 15.3.2.4.2 Coarse/smeared image: Occurs because transfer clutch cam shaft comes off, the message "Correctly place the test print on the platen glass" is displayed during auto gradation correction
0009-9290
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description At inspection, coarse/smeared image occurred because the bushing that fixes the transfer clutch cam shaft came off as shown in the photo [1]. This is for your information, but there was a case where the message "Correctly place the test print on the platen glass" was displayed when the scanning of the third test print was started during the auto graduation correction. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, check the transfer clutch cam shaft of the I.T.B positioning assembly. If it comes off, return it to its original position. FS1-1569 Bushing FC5-1728 Transfer Clutch Cam Shaft 15.3.2.4.3 Uneven Density Along the Leading Edge in a Solid Color Image
0006-0349
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause In a H/H environment, toner tends to become moist and have less bonding with carrier, at times sticking directly to the developing cylinder. As a result, the ratio of toner to carrier will increase, causing the leading edge of the image to become darker because of the extra toner from the developing cylinder (as when a solid color image is produced). 2. Field Remedy Perform the following steps to decrease the toner-to-carrier ratio by 1%: 1) In service mode, decrease the patch target value of the color in question: - in the case of Y, lower the setting by '50' in COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>P-SGNL-Y. - in the case of M, lower the setting by '50' in COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>P-SGNL-M. - in the case of C, lower the setting by '50' in COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>P-SGNL-C.
To change the setting, enter the value obtained by subtracting '50' from the present value (i.e., not '-50'). For instance, if the present value is '450', enter '400'. 2) When the machine has entered a ready state, make 2 prints of a full-page solid image of the color in question. COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 5 COPIER>TEST>PG>DENS-Y/M/C/K: for the color in question, '255'; for other colors, '0' COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE>PG-PICK: select the source of paper loaded with paper (3: cassette 3; 4: cassette 4) COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE>2-SIDE: 1 COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE>PG-QTY:2 3) Perform [P-PRINT]. (in service mode, COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT) 4) Store the output in the service book case for storage. If the case stores previous output, replace it with the new output. 3. Note This symptom tends to be most conspicuous under the following conditions:
15-21
Chapter 15 - high humidity environment - 1st print after the machine has been left alone for a long time - C mono solid image - 37 mm or so from the leading edge of the image 4. Image Sample
F-15-18
15.3.2.4.4 Uneven Density in the Form of a Feedscrew in Color Images

0005-5640
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause The developing assembly lid is not fitted correctly when a color toner is replaced. 2. Field Remedy Take out the color developing assembly in question from the machine, and fit its lid so that there is no gap.
Be sure to force the lid against the developing assembly so that there is no gap in the area [1] indicated in the diagram, i.e., not permitting insertion of a transparency.
[1]
F-15-19
When tightening the screw, be sure to take care so that the shavings of the lid of the developing assembly or its lid will not enter the assembly (i.e., shavings occurring as a result of tightening the screw).
15-22
Chapter 15 3. Image Sample
F-15-20
15.3.2.4.5 Uneven Density in Halftone Images

0005-7963
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Description In a high temperature/humidity environment, the symptom can start to occur relatively early (around 100,000 images) after replacement of the primary charging wire/cleaning pad. The uneven density tends to be conspicuous in color half-tone images. The uneven density tends to be found at the same area in all colors. 2. Cause The symptom is caused by dirt on the primary charging wire or the dust-blocking glass. In particular, the cleaning pad tends to start deteriorating early (about 100,000 images) in a high temperature/humidity environment. 3. Field Remedy 1) Clean the dust-blocking glass. 2) If the primary charging wire is approaching the end of its life, replace it. Be sure also to replace the cleaning pad at the same time. 3) If the area of friction of the cleaning pad is worn or deformed, replace th pad. 4) Perform the following in service mode to clean the charging wire: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-CLN. MEMO: The estimated life of the primary charging wire is 500,000 images: the cleaning pad is 500,000 images (however, in a high temperature/humidity environment, 100,000 images). 4. Image Sample
15-23
Chapter 15
F-15-21
15.3.2.4.6 Magenta Colored Dots

0005-8491
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause When the 2nd and subsequent colors are developed in an M mono halftone area of full color printing, carrier can stick to the drum. The presence of such carrier causes electrical discharge during primary transfer in the 2nd and subsequent colors, causing the polarity of the M toner on the intermediate transfer belt to reverse. As a result, some of the M toner on the intermediate belt is returned to the drum, causing the image to show dots. 2. Field Remedy Perform the following service mode item to adjust the primary transfer current. Decrease gradually the values of all the settings of service mode level 2 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > TR-TG Y, M, C while checking the effects. After changing the settings of 1TR-TG Y, M, C, be sure to execute service mode level 1 COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P >1ATVC-EX. After changing the setting, check to see that there is no abnormality in the green solid image.
If the setting in the abovementioned service mode (primary transfer current adjustment) is decreased too much, a fault in binary color solid image may occur due to transfer fault. 3. Description This symptom can occur as a combination of various factors; in other words, although the variation among individual bias outputs and the variation among carrier production lots may be well within allowance, the combined variation can lead to colored dots in images. Improvements have been made and the symptom is now at a level not causing any practical problem; it, however, can prove to be relatively noticeable when certain types of originals are used (although only to a negligible level). 4. Image Sample
15-24
Chapter 15
F-15-22
15.3.2.4.7 Uneven Density On Rough-Textured Paper

0005-8571
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause When a Bk solid image is copied on rough-textured paper (not of a recommended type), the ups and downs on the surface of the paper can cause a shortage of transfer current, causing white spots and uneven density in images. 2. Field Remedy Perform the following service mode to decrease the pre-transfer charging bias: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>PRE-TR; set it to '250'. 3. Description This symptom is most conspicuous when a Bk solid image is copied on rough-textured paper (not of a recommended type). Advise the user to avoid rough-textured paper. 4. Image Sample
15-25
Chapter 15
F-15-23
15.3.2.4.8 Coarse Image in a Solid C Original

0006-1405
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause When a solid C original is used, the machine will faithfully reproduce any uneven surface of the original communicated by its reader unit. Moreover, the machine's controller possesses characteristics that tend to amplify a minute difference in an area of high density, causing any change in an area of a solid C original to be amplified and its print to show a coarse image.
15-26
Chapter 15
F-15-24
2. Field Remedy If this symptom is noted, go through the following flow of work to correct it:
15-27
Chapter 15
Start
Execute auto gradation correction (full) in user mode. *1
Is the yellow area of the output image coarse?
No
Yes
Perform step 1.
END
Execute auto gradation correction (full) in user mode. (*1)
Is the cyan area of the output image coarse?
No
Yes
Perform step 2.
END
Is the copy image too light?
No
Yes
Perform step 3.
F-15-25
END
*1: Normally, as many as 3 copies are made in full mode of auto gradation correction. Here, however, stop full correction when the 1st copy has been made to save on work time. a. Step 1 Adjust the gamma correction table of the controller as follows: 1) Set "3" to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>GLUTLV-C. 2) Set "3" to the following in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>GLUTMX-C. b. Step 2 1) Set "-3" or "-4" to the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-C. c. Step 3 1) Set "-1" or "-2" to the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-C. 3. Description This symptom does not occur while the printer unit is used on its own. This symptom tends to be most conspicuous when a C mono color image is copied. Although the CA-1 Text Chart, in particular, is subject to this symptom, the degree of the symptom is not serious enough to cause practical problems to the user. 15.3.2.4.9 Transfer Faults on Mono-Color Prints
0006-3717
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause The machine executes primary transfer ATVC control at specific intervals when making mono-color prints. When there is a change in the environment, however,
15-28
Chapter 15 the machine can at times fail to perform the control, resulting in transfer faults. 2. Field Remedy Perform the following work: Execute the service mode item used to change the intervals of executing primary transfer control: i.e., set "1" to the following: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>INTROT-1. 3. Description In the case of color prints, the machine performs ATVC control for every job; as such, the output is of the symptom. 4. Image Sample
F-15-26
15.3.2.5 Out of Focus

15.3.2.5.1 Unfocused image / Smeared image / Abnormal sound from ITB: Because ITB sags
0007-3987
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy Pull out the Intermediate Transfer Unit and set the tension arms (front and rear) in position so that the ITB can be held under a tension by the ITB tension roller. After making sure of it, reinstall the Intermediate Transfer Unit into the host machine. Description In our inspection, unfocused image occurred concurrently with the abnormal sound because the ITB tension roller was not set into position and ITB sagged. When the tension arms (front and rear) are released at the time of servicing the Intermediate Transfer Unit, the arms are locked at that position. So, be sure to put them back in position after servicing. 15.3.2.5.2 Color Displacement in Sub Scanning Direction
0005-5828
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause (1) the shock occurring when the ITB cleaning blade goes on or off causes the transfer to the ITB to be displaced. (2) the shock occurring when the secondary transfer outside roller goes on or off causes the transfer to the ITB to be displaced. 2. Filed Remedy (cause 1) The following 2 remedies are offered for the field: - adjustment of the wire start position in sub scanning direction - change to the primary transfer color-to-color current level a. Adjusting the Wire Start Position in Sub Scanning Direction 1) Print out a Rainbow Chart (by performing 31 in service mode: COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE). 2) Check the printed chart to find out which color is displaced. (The machine is designed as a C-base machine; use yellow to serve as the point of reference).
15-29
Chapter 15 3) Adjust the write start position of the displaced color in service mode. - if Y is displaced on the 1st side, execute the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>IMAGE-REG>REG-V-Y - if M is displaced on the 1st side, execute the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>IMAGE-REG>REG-V-M - if K is displaced on the 1st side, execute the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>IMAGE-REG>REG-V-K - if Y is displaced on the 2nd side, execute the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>IMAGE-REG>REG2-V-Y - if M is displaced on the 2nd side, execute the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>IMAGE-REG>REG2-V-M - if K is displaced on the 2nd side, execute the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>IMAGE-REG>REG2-V-K
NG
OK
M C Bk Full Ref.
M C Bk Full Ref.
F-15-27
An increase of '1' made to the setting will move the write start position of the selected color by a single pixel (about 0.04 mm). If you have initialized the DC controller PCB or if you have replaced the DC controller PCB, be sure to enter the values indicated on the service label - range of adjustment: -10 to +10 (unit: pixel; at time of shipment: 0) b. Changing the Primary Transfer Color-to-Color Current Level Set '-2' to the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>1TR-STS1. - range of adjustment: -5 to 0 (unit: 2 yA; at time of shipment: 0) 3. Filed Remedy (cause 2) 1) Replace the primary transfer roller. 2) Dry wipe the rollers [1] and the scraper [2] shown in the following figure with lint-free paper.
[1]
[2]
F-15-28
MEMO:
15-30
Chapter 15 When the primary transfer roller becomes worn, shavings from its surface will likely move on the intermediate transfer belt to reach all rollers inside the intermediate transfer unit. The presence of shavings between the belt and the rollers will hinder the movement of the belt, possibly causing displacement of color in sub scanning direction. The shavings, in passing, have a high degree of viscosity, and tends to resist removal from the rollers. 15.3.2.5.3 Smeared of Colored Characters/Lines
0005-8556
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1. Cause When 2-color (blue, green, red) is used to form an image of characters or lines, an excess of toner deposit can cause the layer of toner to grow too thick during the first transfer of the second color, thus leading to smears of toner (character edges) on the intermediate transfer belt because of separation discharges. 2. Field Remedy Perform the following service mode item to decrease the amount of toner that is deposited for individual colors: set '-3' to the following: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-Y set '-3' to the following: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-M set '-3' to the following: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-C set '-3' to the following: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-K
If the images are too light after the change, set the item to '-1' to '-2'. When you have performed these items, be sure to perform auto gradation correction (full; image characteristics corrective control) in user mode so as to maintain the optimum level of density. 3. Description This symptom can also be caused by combined factors; in other words, the resistance of the intermediate transfer belt and the amount of deposited toner may well be within allowance individually, they can trigger the symptom when combined. Improvements have been made so that the level of the symptom is equal to that found in past machines; if the user points it out, however, provide the foregoing remedy. The fault, however, is of a negligible level. 4. Image Sample
F-15-29
15.3.2.6 Partially Blank/Streaked

15.3.2.6.1 White streaks on image: When making copy (stream reading) of almost solid original
0008-3240
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In an actual failure case, when making a copy (stream reading) of an almost solid original, which is output using other manufacturer's printer, some white streaks appeared on the output. Note that this symptom does not occur when using the copyboard glass. Those streaks disappeared after cleaning the stream reading glass, but recurred after several sheet copy. As a result of inspection, it was found the symptom was induced by the following three conditions: 1. The dust detection feature is disabled in service mode.
15-31
Chapter 15 2. The original is poor in fixing and toner peels off by rubbing the surface. 3. As the original has folds, toner-like power sticks to the folds together with paper dust. Field Remedy 1. Clean the stream reading glass. 2. In service mode [COPIER> Option> BODY> DFDST-L1/DFDST-L2], check the set values. The default is "200". 3. Make sure that the original to be copied is in good fixing condition. If toner peels off, create the original using this machine and make a copy of it without being folded. 15.3.2.6.2 Lines appear on printed image in main scanning direction as if electrical noise occurred because of Ethernet PCB (SURF) failure, MS Word
0009-3246
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: Because of the Ethernet PCB (SURF) failure, the symptom occurs when outputting a file created on MS Word. For your information, copy images and test print images are normal. When the symptom occurs, remove and then put back the Ethernet PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a new one. FG3-2874 Ethernet PCB 15.3.2.6.3 Color missing occurs in random portions of output image because internal scraper of ITB is bent
0011-6427
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Because the internal scraper of the transfer belt assembly was bent, color was missing from random portions of an output image in the same shape (as if such color missing was caused by electrical discharge). When the symptom has occurred, compare it with the attached sample image; if they are same, perform the following field remedy.
F-15-30
Field Remedy 1. To check the symptom, perform the following procedure; Service mode > COPIER > Test > PG > set [TYPE] to [5] (full page halftone) > OK, and then set [DENS-M] or [DENS-C] to a value between 48 and 128 > OK, and then enter "0" for other colors > OK, and then press the Start key to print a test page. 2. If the output page shows the same symptom as the attached sample image, there is a possibility that the internal scraper of the ITB unit is bent. Visually check the scraper; if it is bent, replace the ITB belt and the scraper at the same time. FL2-0398 Internal Scraper FC5-1658 Transfer Belt 15.3.2.6.4 Vertical Lies in Halftone Images
0005-4285
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Description This fault tends to occur in halftone images. 2. Cause The scoop-up sheet of the photosensitive drum cleaner bends over at time of replacement, scraping the surface of the photosensitive drum in the form of lines.
15-32
Chapter 15
3. Field Remedy Clean the photosensitive drum, or replace it. Replace the scoop-up sheet of the photosensitive drum. Fit the scoop-up sheet of the photosensitive drum properly. 1) Engage the hole at the rear of the scoop-up sheet [1] of the photosensitive drum on the hook [2]; then, pull it toward the front, and attach it using the screw [3]. While doing so, be sure that the tip of the scoop-up sheet is not bent in the gap between the cartridge and the photosensitive drum.
[3] [1]
[2]
F-15-31
Check to Make After attaching the Photosensitive Drum Scoop-Up Sheet (1) After attaching the photosensitive drum, check to make sure that the scoop-up sheet is not warping or bent from below. (2) If wrapped or bent, the scoop-up sheet of the photosensitive drum is likely to lead to deformation. The photosensitive drum must always be rotated in counterclockwise direction only, NEVER in clockwise direction.
F-15-32
15.3.2.6.5 Image Fault Occurring at Specific Intervals

0005-4703
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Description This image fault occurs in main scanning direction. 2. Field Remedy By referring to the following table of intervals, clean or replace the part identified:
15-33
Chapter 15
T-15-8 Roller intervals (approx.) 60 mm 37 mm 51 mm 63 mm 75 mm 168 mm 264 mm 188 mm 188 mm 113 mm Part black developing cylinder color developing cylinder primary transfer roller secondary transfer inside roller secondary transfer outside roller ITB photosensitive drum fixing roller pressure roller outside heating roller
15.3.2.6.6 Missing Color

0005-5813
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause When a double-sided print is made in a low humidity environment, the secondary transfer voltage tends to increase while processing the 2nd side, at times causing missing color because of an increase in the degree of discharge.
F-15-33
2. Field Remedy If this symptom is noted, go through the following flow of work to correct it:
15-34
Chapter 15
START
Perform step 1.
Using the CA-1 Test Sheet, execute auto duplexing copying.
Is the fault*1 found on the 2nd side of the print?
No
Yes
Execute auto gradation correction (full) in user mode.
Perform step 2. END
Is the image on the print too light?
No
Yes
Execute auto gradation correction (full) in user mode.
Perform step 3.
F-15-34
END
*1: It shows on prints as seen on the following image fault sample:
15-35
Chapter 15
F-15-35
a. Step 1 Decrease the secondary transfer voltage for paper type, environment, and color mode using the following 6 service mode items: (1) Environment (TR-ENV1) Set the environment in the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-ENV1. (1: low humidity; 2: normal humidity; 3: high humidity). (2) Paper Type (TR-PPR1) Set the paper type in the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-PPR1. (1: plain paper; 2: recycled paper; 3: colored paper; 4: punch paper; 5: heavy paper 1; 6: heavy paper 2; 7: heavy paper 3; 8: transparency; 9: tracing paper; 10: postcard; 11: 2-pane postcard; 12: 4-pane postcard; 13: label sheet) (3) Color Mode (TR-CLR1) Use the color mode in the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-CLR1. (1: Bk; 2: 4C) (4) Single-Side/Double-Sided (TR-DUP1) Select either double-sided or single-sided in the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-DUP1. (1: single-sided; 2: auto double-sided; 3: manual double-sided) (5) Secondary Transfer ATVC Target Current Offset (2TR-TGT1) Set '0' and perform the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>2TR-TGT1. (range of setting: -10 to +10; in 5 yA) (6) Secondary Transfer ATVC Paper Voltage Offset (2TR-SHR1) Set '-3' and perform the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>2TR-SHR1. (range of settings: -10 to +10; in 100 V)
Be sure to check the foregoing 6 service mode items before executing the following items; for instance, to decrease the transfer voltage by 300 V for low humidity, plain paper, 4C, auto duplexing: COPIER> ADJUST> HT-TR> TR-ENV1 :1 COPIER> ADJUST> HT-TR> TR-PPR1 :1 COPIER> ADJUST> HT-TR> TR-CLR1 :2 COPIER> ADJUST> HT-TR> TR-DUP1 :2 COPIER> ADJUST> HT-TR> 2TR-TGT1 :0 COPIER> ADJUST> HT-TR> 2TR-SHR1 :-3 b. Step 2 Adjust the color balance using the following 4 service mode items, thus decreasing the density of individual colors: (1) Y Color Balance Adjustment Set '-3' and perform the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-Y. (range of settings: -8 to +8) (2) M Color Balance Adjustment Set '-3' and perform the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-M. (range of settings: -8 to +8) (3) C Color Balance Adjustment Set '-3' and perform the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-C. (range of settings: -8 to +8) (4) K Color Balance Adjustment Set '-3' and perform the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-K. (range of settings: -8 to +8) c. Step 3 If the copy image is too light, set the service mode items (color balance adjustment) performed in step 2 to '-1' or '-2'. 15.3.2.6.7 White Spots at 51mm Intervals
0005-6903
15-36
Chapter 15 1. Cause White spots can occur when wear starts on the primary transfer roller (i.e., an area of the roller is likely to become soft). 2. Field Remedy 1) Replace the primary transfer roller. 2) Clean the rollers inside the ITB unit and the scraper inside the intermediate transfer belt. a. Cleaning the Rollers Inside the ITB Unit and the Scraper Inside the Intermediate Transfer Belt 1) Dry wipe the rollers [1] and the scraper [2] shown in the following figure with lint-free paper.
[1]
[2]
F-15-36
3. Description The white spot in question tends to occur at intervals of about 51 mm. 4. Image Sample
F-15-37
15-37
Chapter 15 15.3.2.6.8 Vertical Lines Caused by an ITB Cleaning Fault

0006-4283
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause When the ITB cleaning blade becomes worn, a part of it can become appreciably rigid and bend. Once this phenomenon occurs, the cleaning blade tends to fail to remove all residual toner from the belt, permitting some (additive) to remain and stick to the ITB, leading to white spots in images. 2. Field Remedy Perform the following work: Perform "clean roller" in user mode. This mode item is designed to start black band sequence (Note) to increase the cleaning performance of the blade. user mode>adjust/clean/clean roller If performing the mode item fails to bring about good results, perform it once again.
In black band sequence, the machine will deposit black toner on the ITB in the form of a black belt and collect the toner using the cleaning blade. 3. Explanation This symptom is noticeable in color prints of halftone images, but is absent in mono-color prints. A service mode item is also offered as a remedy against this system. This mode item has been designed considering users making color prints of halftone images immediately turning on the main power. The machine may be set so that it executes black band sequence a specific number of times when the main power is turned on. To do so, use COPIER>OPTION>BODY>ITB-CLN. The settings are as follows: 0: do not execute (factory default) 1: execute once 2: execute twice 3: execute 3 times
MEMO: It takes 60 sec for the machine to run this mode item. In other words, if the mode is set to "3", the machine's wait time will be longer by 180 sec. In this regard, it may be good idea to set it to "1", thereby reducing the wait time. 4. Image Sample
F-15-38
15.3.2.7 Smudged/Streaked
15.3.2.7.1 Edge of paper is soiled when making continuous copy from ADF / Black spots
0007-3914
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy
15-38
Chapter 15 Upgrade ROM of the Reader Controller PCB to Ver.8.01 and later so that the timing of outputting the image data has been modified. Description As a result of inspection, black spots appeared at the edge of paper (front and rear) because the timing of outputting the image data from the CCD unit was changed because of its temperature rising during making continuous copy of multiple-sheets of original from the ADF. The upgraded Reader Controller PCB has been implemented into the following machines: JHS00251 / JHT01196 / JJM00777 / JKH00137 / JKL00011 / JXH00038 / JKP00251 / JKM00031 15.3.2.7.2 Black line on trailing edge of paper when staple mode is specified: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2
0008-1590
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause When scanning the original by using the ADF, the trailing edge of paper might appear as a black line. This line is invisible when the staple mode is not specified because it falls within the leading edge margin (4mm wide) on the output paper. However, when the staple mode is specified, the original image is rotated by 180 degrees and the line appears in the image area without falling within the trailing edge margin (2mm wide). As a result of inspection, this symptom was corrected by increasing the ADF scanning magnification. Field Remedy When this symptom is pointed out by your customer, make an adjustment to increase the ADF scanning magnification under an agreement with your customer. 1. Create a test chart with LTR paper as shown below.
F-15-39
2. Place the test chart on the copyboard glass and make a copy under 100% magnification. [Copy A] 3. Place the test chart on the ADF and make a copy under 100% magnification. [Copy B] 4. Compare Copy A and Copy B, and calculate the difference ("d") of the image length in the paper delivery direction: [Copy B] - [Copy A] = "d" 5. If "d" is minus, it is possible that the root cause might be related to the ADF scanning magnification. So, increase it in the following service mode so as to fall "d" in the range of 0mm to 0.5mm. In service mode [FEEDER> Adjust> LA-SPEED], decrease the set value. For LTR paper, when the set value is decreased by 1, "d" will increase by 0.22mm. 6. Make sure that the symptom is corrected by the setting change. 15.3.2.7.3 Soiled image because of toner dropping from drum cleaning unit: Due to cleaning brush coming off
0009-9261
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In inspection, an output image was soiled with waste toner dropped from the drum cleaning unit. This was because the brush portion that is attached to the cleaning brush with a strip of two-sided tape came off and wound around the waste toner feedscrew. When the symptom occurs, follow the field remedy below to replace the cleaning brush with a new one. In the field, on the other hand, the brush portion wound around the waste toner feedscrew, and chipped the teeth of 24T gear and 54T/18T gear. Therefore, when replacing the cleaning brush, check those gears for chipping. Field Remedy 1. Remove the drum cleaning unit referring to the service manual [Parts Replacement Procedure > Image Processing system > Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Unit > Removing the photosensitive drum unit]. 2. Remove the 3 screws [1] and then remove the magnet cover [2].
F-15-40
3. Remove the cleaning brush [3].
15-39
Chapter 15
F-15-41
4. When attaching the cleaning brush again, follow the steps above in reverse. Note: To prevent the symptom in advance, check the brush portion at the same time when replacing or removing the cleaner blade and the photosensitive drum [4]. If the portion is coming off, replace it with a new one. If it is difficult to make such a check due to severity of toner accumulation, insert an OHP sheet between the cleaning brush mount [5] and the brush portion [6] for check.
F-15-42
FL2-2473 Cleaning Brush FS6-0124 24T Gear FU5-0156 54T/18T Gear 15.3.2.7.4 Soiled image due to toner dropped from drum cleaning unit: Because brush portion of cleaning brush comes off and the 24T gear and 54T/18T gear are broken
0009-9588
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In inspection, the tooth of the 24T gear and the 54T/18T gear were chipped because the waste toner feedscrew was rotating in a state where the brush portion of the cleaning brush came off and wound around it.
F-15-43
Field Remedy When performing replacement of the cleaning brush, check both of the gears for breakage. If they are broken, replace them with a new one. FS6-0124 24T Gear
15-40
Chapter 15 15.3.2.7.5 Line appears in main scanning direction at trailing edge: At two-sided original to two-sided copy operation
0011-9293
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, a line appeared at the trailing edge of the second page in the main scanning direction when performing two-sided original to two-sided copy operation; however, this symptom was solved by executing the service mode item [LA-SPEED]. When the symptom has occurred, carry out this service mode item. Field Remedy Service mode > FEEDER > Adjust > adjust the value for [LA-SPEED]. (Adjustable range: -30 to 30, Default setting: 0) - [LA-SPEED] is used to adjust the original feeding speed for stream reading from the feeder. Increasing the value for this mode will increase the feeding speed. (The image will shrink.) 15.3.2.7.6 Vertical Lines
0005-5802
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause The presence of dirt on the deflecting mirror inside the laser scanner unit can cause lines in vertical direction. 2. Field Remedy Clean the deflecting mirror as follows: 1) Open the hopper assembly. 2) Hold the mirror cleaning tool [1] as shown, and insert it in the slit [2]. (mirror cleaning tool: FL2-2474)
[1]
F-15-44
3) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 4) Slide out the process unit. 5) Slide out the grip [1] found on the edge of the dust-blocking plate to remove the glass plate from the machine.
[2]
[1]
F-15-45
6) Turn the mirror cleaning tool [1] by 90 deg as shown. (step 1) 7) Move the mirror cleaning tool [1] to the front and to the rear as shown to clean the laser mirror. (step 2)
15-41
Chapter 15
Procedure1
[2] [1] [2] [1]
Procedure2 [1]
[2]
F-15-46
3. Description The vertical lines tend to grow thicker as the machine is used longer. 15.3.2.7.7 Soiling of the Left/Right Margin on Double-Sided Prints (1st side)
0005-4707
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause The presence of dirt on the sheet found at the lower rear of the fixing/feed assembly can soil the left/right margin of double-side prints (1st side). 2. Field Remedy Clean the sheet found at the lower rear of the fixing/feeding assembly. See the following figure [3]. Check if any of the following is soiled with toner; if soiled, dry wipe it: - entire surface of the deck top plate [1] - bend area of the deck top plate fan [2] - sheet at fixing/feeding assembly (4 locations) [3]
[1]
[2]
F-15-47
[3]
F-15-48
3. Description This symptom does not occur if the paper is about 300 mm or less in width.
15-42
Chapter 15 15.3.2.7.8 Stray Toner

0005-5806
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause When solid color double-sided prints are made in a low humidity environment, the inadequate secondary transfer current for the 2nd side can cause stray toner. 2. Field Remedy Limit the amount of color toners by performing the following service mode items: Set -3- to the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-Y. Set -3- to the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-M. Set -3- to the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-C. Set -3- to the following in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR>ADJ-K.
If the image is too faint, increase the setting by using the foregoing service mode items. After performing this remedy, be sure to perform full correction in user mode (under auto gradation correction) to ensure optimum density. 3. Remarks This symptom can occur when printing on the 2nd side of dry paper while making a double-side print of solid color images in a low humidity environment. Advise the user to avoid the use of paper that has been left alone for a long time whenever possible, recommending the use of paper fresh out of package.
F-15-49
15.3.2.7.9 Oil Lines in Vertical Direction

0005-6054
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause When paper of the same size is used continuously, the area of the fixing roller coming into contact with the edge of paper tends to wear out, developing a dent. The dent in turn tends to collect oil from the belt, resulting in oil lines when paper of a larger size is used. This symptom is most conspicuous on th 1st large size sheet, growing lighter and disappearing after several sheets. The symptom, on the other hand, tends to occur more readily when the fixing roller starts to deteriorate after long use (100,000 sheets or more). EX: if A4 is used normally, and A3 extra-length paper is used as an exception: 2. Field Remedy Replace the fixing roller/pressure roller. 15.3.2.7.10 Soiling as Dots at Drum Intervals
0005-9972
15-43
Chapter 15 1. Cause When the transfer cleaning drive assembly is removed, the force of the pressure spring causes the ITB cleaning blade to butt against the intermediate transfer belt. The contact in turn will cause the coating of the blade to stick to the belt. The coating will then be pressed against the photosensitive drum under the force of the primary transfer roller. When the photosensitive drum cleaning blade starts to wear, it can fail to collect the coating, and the coating will likely appear on the prints in the form of dots. 2. Field Remedy If this symptom is noted, go through the following flow of work to correct it:
Start
Perform step 1.
Is the symptom noted?
No
Yes Perform step 2.
Set forced photosensitive drum cleaning (*1).
Set forced photosensitive drum cleaning (*1).

F-15-50
*1: To set forced photosensitive drum cleaning (at power-on), perform the following: 1) Set "1" the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTIONAL>BODY>D-CLN-TM. 2) Set "1" to the following service mode item: COPIER>OTPN>BODY>PAIR-FAN. The machine performs the following in the course of this cleaning mode item: - Stops drum idle rotation and magnet roller, and executes black band sequence. - Eecutes full-speed rotation of the primary charging suction fan in an H/H environment. a. Step 1 Clean the photosensitive drum as follows: 1) Slide out the process unit. 2) Remove the primary charging assembly. 3) Remove the 2 screws, and detach the charging assembly rail.
[2]
[1]
F-15-51
4) As shown in the figure, turn the photosensitive drum [1] counterclockwise while dry-wiping its surface with lint-free paper [2].
15-44
Chapter 15
[1]
[2]
F-15-52
b. Step 2 Replace the ITB cleaning blade and the photosensitive drum cleaning blade. 3. Description The coating on the photosensitive drum will appear white in response to light (e.g., form a pen light). Removing the coating from such an area will eliminate dots in the output. 4. Image Sample
F-15-53
15.3.2.7.11 Horizontal Line Caused by Impact from the Developing Rotary

0006-0303
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause When a full color print is performed, the vibration from the movement of the developing rotary affects the laser exposure mechanism, at times resulting in a horizontal line in the output. 2. Field Remedy Perform the following to adjust the target contrast potential of individual colors: 1) Generate test prints (COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE=1). 2) Decrease the target contrast of the color in which the line is conspicuous. - change the setting to '-30' in service mode (COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VCONT-Y). - change the setting to '-30' in service mode (COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VCONT-M). - change the setting to '-30' in service mode (COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VCONT-C). 3) Once again, generate test prints (COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE=1); then, check the output against the output generated in step 1). If there is no improvement, go
15-45
Chapter 15 to step 4). 4) Decrease the target contrast potential of the color in question further in service mode: - change the setting to '-50' in service mode (COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VCONT-Y). - change the setting to '-50' in service mode (COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VCONT-M). - change the setting to '-50' in service mode (COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VCONT-C). 5) Once again, generate test prints (COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE=1), and compare the output against the output generated in step 3), thereby check that improvement has been made.
Make copies using the CA-1 Test Chart and an appropriate original of the user. If the image contrast has adversely been affected, increase the setting using the foregoing service mode item (range of settings: -31 and -49). After you have performed the foregoing remedy, be sure to perform auto gradation correction (full; image characteristic correction control) in user mode. 3. Description This symptom tends to be conspicuous in M or C when making full color prints (halftone). In the case of M, the symptom tends to occur about 25 to 30 mm from the leading edge of the image; in the case of C, on the other hand, it tends to occur around 50 to 60 mm from the image leading edge. 4. Image Sample
F-15-54
15.3.2.7.12 Soiling in the Form of a Ring

0006-2599
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause If, for some reason, fine particles (e.g., of oil) make their way inside a color developing assembly, electrical discharge is likely to occur between the metal particles on the surface of the developing cylinder and the photosensitive drum, causing soiling in the form of a ring. 2. Field Remedy Shift SW1 SW2 (DIP switch) on the HV2 PCB to ON. (At time of shipment, these switches are kept to OFF.)
15-46
Chapter 15
[1]
1 2
F-15-55
3. Description If SW1 is OFF and SW2 is OFF, the AC component of the developing bias is 1,800 Vp-p (default). If SW1 is ON and SW2 is ON, the AC component of the developing bias is 1,600 Vp-p. A decrease in the AC component of the developing bias will limit the increase in potential occurring instantaneously between the metal particulars on the developing cylinder and the surface of the photosensitive drum, thus making electrical discharge less likely.
4. Image Sample
F-15-56
ON
15-47
Chapter 15
15.3.2.8 Ghost / Memory

15.3.2.8.1 Ghost Caused by a Bend on the ITB Cleaning Blade
0005-6902
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause The ITB cleaning blade can bend when used in a high humidity environment, causing a ghost image. 2. Field Remedy Replace the ITB cleaning blade. 3. Description This symptom tends to be conspicuous when an image with a high color ratio is copied. 4. Image Sample
F-15-57
15.3.2.9 Faulty Color Reproduction

15.3.2.9.1 When printing cells filled in with blue by selecting from MS Excel standard color palette, they are printed with tinges of purple
0008-6216
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Inspected by Canon Inc. a. Description This symptom is the limitation of this product. However, either of the following setting changes "a" or "b" can slightly adjust the color balance. b. Field Remedy Adjustment via printer driver properties: 1) On the window of printer driver properties, click [Quality] tab> place a check mark on [Manual Color Settings]> press [Color Settings]. 2) On [Matching] tab, select [Saturation] from [Matching Mode] pull-down menu. Then press OK to start printing. Adjustment via user mode: In user mode [Printer Settings> Settings> Print Quality> Density], change the set value of Magenta (M) to "-3" and Cyan to "+3". 15.3.2.9.2 Faulty Color Reproduction Caused by an Error in Primary Transfer ATVC
0006-1872
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause
15-48
Chapter 15 If the process unit is left alone for a long time in a high humidity environment, the primary transfer ATVC control mechanism that goes on when the main power is turned on can cause electrical discharge between the primary transfer roller and the primary transfer static eliminator. The discharge can cause the resistance of the primary transfer roller to fluctuate. Malfunction of the primary transfer ATVC control mechanism can lead to an error associated with E020 or can adversely affect color reproduction. 2. Field Remedy Use the following service mode item to perform primary transfer ATVC controller mechanism after idle rotation of the primary transfer roller. Perform this service mode item immediately after the control panel screen comes on (i.e., when the main power is turned on). COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITR-ROT 3. Description The symptom is either an error associated with E020 or faulty color reproduction. Details are as follows:
a. E020 Error - E020-xx90 - E020-xx91 - E020-xxD2 - E020-xxDC
xx represents the color developing assembly suffering the error in question. - 00= no specific color - 01= Y - 02= M - 03= C b. Color Reproduction Fault For instance, the faulty reproduction shows up as any of the following 3 types of image faults: 4. Image Sample a. image of a specific color is too light
F-15-58
b. image of a specific color is too dark
15-49
Chapter 15
F-15-59
c. image is too light overall
F-15-60
15-50
Chapter 15
15.3.3 Faulty Feeding 15.3.3.1 Skew Feed

15.3.3.1.1 2mm-3mm misalignment in a batch when stapling: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2
0006-6828
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description The Operation Tray Ass'y of Finisher has three end guide plates that align the paper end before stapling. As a result of inspection, it was found that the end guide plate at the center (Part name: Center Tray Support Plate) is located closer to the paper output direction than the other plates at the front and the rear (Part name: Front/Rear Operation Tray Bin), causing 2mm-3mm misalignment in a batch. Cause Since the end guide plate at the center is located closer to the paper output direction than the front/rear plates, when paper comes into the Operation Tray Ass'y, the paper end touches the center plate and stacked on the skew. The normal stacking condition is: when paper comes into the Ass'y, the paper end touches the front/rear plates and stacked as it is. It touches the center plate lightly or does not touch. - As shown in the figure A below, if ( R )=( C )=( F ) is (0)=(0 or -0.5mm)=(0), no adjustment is required. - As shown in the figures B and C below, if ( R )=( C )=( F ) is (0)=(0+)=(0), the center plate needs to be adjusted by referring to the procedure below. ( R ): Rear plate, ( C ): Center plate, ( F ): Front plate
F-15-61
Checking to determine whether or not the adjustment is required: 1. Lift up the paper delivery guide [1] and turn the timing belt [2] at the center in a clockwise direction viewing from the front in order to move the back end assist plate on the timing belt as far as it will go.
F-15-62
2. Insert a sheet of thick paper (A4 or A3) [3] from the paper output as shown below and push it against the rear plate and the center plate in this order.
F-15-63
3. Open the front door of Finisher and move the staple unit as far as it will go. Check the paper position from the direction of [4]. If the clearance between the paper and the center plate [5] is 0mm to 0.5mm, no additional adjustment is required. If the paper touches the rear and the center plates, and there is a clearance between the paper and the front plate, adjust the position of the center plate by following the steps below.
15-51
Chapter 15
F-15-64
Field Remedy 1. By referring to Finisher Service Manual [Parts Replacement Procedure > Document Feeding System > Removing the Processing Tray], remove the Operation Tray Ass'y [7] from the main body. Remove the front/rear operation tray adjustment guides [8] by pulling upward and unsnap the hooks (2 locations) of the operation tray guides [9] to remove them.
F-15-65
2. Unfasten the screw [10] (1pc.), remove the sensor mount plate, and disconnect the connectors [11] [12].
F-15-66
3. Unfasten the screws [13] (3pcs.) which fix the cable guide and the disconnect the connectors [14]. Then, remove the cable guide together with the cables.
F-15-67
4. Unfasten the screws [15] (2pcs.) which fix the mount plate for the stepping motor M39, and the screw [16] (1pc.) of the operation tray cover.
15-52
Chapter 15
F-15-68
5. Remove the operation tray from the ass'y. Note: When assembling the Operation Tray Ass'y once again, pay careful attention to the position of each sensor flag.
F-15-69
6. Place a sheet of paper on the Operation Tray Ass'y, loosen the screw [18], and adjust the center plate so that it should be located at 0mm to 0.5mm behind the front/rear plates.
F-15-70
7. Assemble the Operation Tray Ass'y following the removal procedure Step 1 from Step 5 in reverse. At that time, make sure that all the connectors are to be inserted or of no pinched cable. 8. Make a copy in the staple mode in order to make sure that no misalignment in a batch. 15.3.3.1.2 Misalignment greater than 2mm in a batch when stapling: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2
0007-3157
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause Because the Front/Rear Return Rollers exhibit variations in coefficient of friction when they are new, stapling misalignment in a batch occurred in early stage of usage. If your machine exhibits this symptom upon installation of the finisher or in early stage of usage, check the finisher serial number. If it agrees with the range of the serial numbers below, perform the procedure in Field Remedy. Finisher Serial Numbers: JJF02348 and before, JJG01049 and before Field Remedy 1. Remove the tray connector cover (only for R2) and the rear panel. 2. Set SW104 bits 1, 3, 5, 6, and 8 ON on the Finisher Controller PCB. 3. Hold up the swing guide with a hand and insert about 5 sheets of paper into the operation tray. 4. Turn the power ON and push SW103 on the Finisher Controller PCB to start the roller running-in operation. The swing guide starts ascending and the return rollers start turning counterclockwise for aging. 5. Leave the machine as it is for more than 20 minutes, and then push SW103 once again to stop the operation. (There will be no problem if the operation is performed longer.) 6. Turn the power OFF and set all bits of SW104 OFF. 7. Make sure that the misalignment has been improved. 8. Install the rear panel and the tray connector cover. Note: Upon installation of finisher, the above procedure can be done concurrently with "TONER-S". 15.3.3.1.3 Stapling failure: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2
0008-3749
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the staple mode, when paper was drawn into the processing tray, it hit against the upper part of the return roller and was skewed. As a result, it did not reach
15-53
Chapter 15 the rear end assist guide and was not stapled. Cause As a result, it was found that this symptom occurred because a wrong engagement of the disks inside the electromagnetic clutch (stack ejection lower roller clutch CL32). Field Remedy When this symptom occurs, replace the electromagnetic clutch with a new one. FH6-5101 Electromagnetic Clutch 15.3.3.1.4 Misalignment in staple/sort/group mode: Poor contact of grounding spring of swing guide: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2
0008-3829
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: Since the grounding spring [1] does not come in contact with the swing guide plate [2] due to its positioning failure, paper becomes charged while passing over the swing guide ass'y and several sheets of paper attract each other during the aligning operation, resulting in a misalignment of the output paper.
F-15-71
Field Remedy Make sure that the grounding spring securely comes in contact with the swing guide plate. If not, loosen and fasten the screw to properly position the spring as shown in the figure [3]. FC5-5551 Grounding Spring 15.3.3.1.5 Troubleshooting for misalignment in staple/sort mode: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2
0009-3122
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description The following descriptions summarize our inspection results into misalignment problems caused by several factors when staple or sort mode is selected with Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2. When this symptom occurs, refer to the cases below and follow the steps described in Field Remedy. The cases below are listed in the order in which checking or steps seems easier, not in the order of frequency.
F-15-72
Cause [1] Because the Front/Rear Return Rollers exhibit variations in coefficient of friction when they are new, stapling misalignment in a batch may occur in early stage of usage. If your machine exhibits this symptom upon installation of the finisher or in early stage of usage, check the finisher serial number. If it agrees with the range of the serial numbers below, perform the procedure in Field Remedy. Finisher Serial Numbers: JJF02348 and before, JJG01049 and before Field Remedy 1. Remove the tray connector cover (only for R2) and the rear panel. 2. Set SW104 bits 1, 3, 5, 6, and 8 ON on the Finisher Controller PCB. 3. Hold up the swing guide with a hand and insert about 5 sheets of paper into the operation tray.
15-54
Chapter 15 4. Turn the power ON and push SW103 on the Finisher Controller PCB to start the roller running-in operation. The swing guide starts ascending and the return rollers start turning counterclockwise for aging. 5. Leave the machine as it is for more than 20 minutes, and then push SW103 once again to stop the operation. (There will be no problem if the operation is performed longer.) 6. Turn the power OFF and set all bits of SW104 OFF. 7. Make sure that the misalignment has been improved. 8. Install the rear panel and the tray connector cover. Note: Upon installation of finisher, the above procedure can be done concurrently with "TONER-S". Cause [2] Since the buffer stopper sheet is not properly attached to the buffer stopper arm, paper may be caught at the stopper sheet depending on the paper condition and not be held by the arm securely. In the field, when a sheet cannot be held by the arm, it is pushed out by the next sheet to the delivery tray, or if it is held by the arm askew, it is delivered to the processing tray as it is and not stapled properly. In actual failure cases, this symptom occurs in the 2nd and later copies irregularly. Field Remedy Inspect the buffer stopper sheets attached to the center two rear end guides of the buffer stopper arm. If they are not properly attached, replace the stopper sheet or the stopper arm with a new one. FL2-0807 Buffer Stopper Arm FC5-4704 Buffer Stopper Sheet Cause [3] Since the Finisher Controller PCB is faulty, the buffer rear end holding solenoid (SL34) does not attract the plunger completely and the buffer guide is not opened. Consequently, the rear end of the first sheet is not held by the buffer guide, resulting in a paper jam. Also, if the solenoid does not attract the plunger at all, the same jam may occur or misalignment of paper in a batch may otherwise occur. Field Remedy 1. In order to determine whether or not the root cause is related to the host machine, detach the finisher from the host machine and make sure that no paper jam occurs in the host machine. 2. Connect the finisher to the host machine. 3. In service mode [COPIER> I/O> SORTER> P006], make sure that bit4 is changed from "0" to "1" when the sensor lever is actuated. 4. Remove the finisher front door. 5. Actuate the door switches (2 locations) and turn the power of the host machine ON. 6. While making a copy in staple mode, inspect the solenoid to attract its plunger. If the solenoid cannot attract the plunger only by one-third, the Finisher Controller PCB is likely to be faulty, so replace it with a new one. FG3-2883 Finisher Controller PCB FL2-0821 Solenoid Cause [4] Due to a wrong engagement of the disks inside the electromagnetic clutch (stack ejection lower roller clutch CL32), paper may hit against the upper part of the return roller and skewed, finally not reach the rear end assist guide and not stapled. Field Remedy When this symptom occurs, replace the electromagnetic clutch with a new one. FH6-5101 Electromagnetic Clutch Cause [5] Since the end guide plate at the center (Part name: Center Tray Support Plate) in the operation tray ass'y is located closer to the paper output direction than the other plates at the front and the rear (Part name: Front/Rear Operation Tray Bin), causing 2mm-3mm misalignment in a batch. Field Remedy Adjust the position of the end guide plate at the center by retrieving and referring to the document titled "2mm-3mm misalignment in a batch when stapling: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2". Cause [6] Since the grounding spring does not come in contact with the swing guide plate due to its positioning failure, paper becomes charged while passing over the swing guide ass'y and several sheets of paper attract each other during the aligning operation, resulting in a misalignment of the output paper. Field Remedy Make sure that the grounding spring securely comes in contact with the swing guide plate. If not, loosen and fasten the screw to properly position the spring. FC5-5551 Grounding Spring Cause [7] Since the back end assist plate and the back end assist button of the operation tray assembly come off of the cogged timing belt, E514 is displayed or a misalignment attributed to a failure in the stack delivery operation occurs. Field Remedy As the cogged timing belt may be damaged, replace it with a new one, and then fit the back end assist plate and the back end assist button to the new belt. FC5-3553 Cogged Timing Belt FC5-3554 Back End Assist Plate FC5-4715 Back End Assist Button
15.3.3.2 Fold/Rip
15.3.3.2.1 Fold at leading edge of paper when making single (1 to 1) copy: Because installation failure of inlet lower guide Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2
0008-3254
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, because the inlet lower guide [1] is installed over the entrance guide crossmember [2], paper hit against the guide when making 1-to-1 copy and was folded at the leading edge. No occurrence in continuous copy. [3]: Normal installation state (the inlet lower guide is placed under the entrance guide crossmember.) [4]: The inlet lower guide is installed over the entrance guide crossmember. Note: In the case of 1-to-1 copy, paper is delivered in face-up and is curled downward, accordingly it is more likely to be caught at the guide rather than in the case of continuous copy. Field Remedy Place a sheet of paper exhibiting this symptom on the inlet lower guide. If the guide comes over the crossmember at points where the folds occur, reinstall the guide once again. FC5-3729 Inlet Lower Guide
15-55
Chapter 15
F-15-73
15.3.3.2.2 Stapling failure in 2nd and later copies when attempting to make multiple copies in staple mode: Because paper is not properly held in buffer unit, Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2
0008-3257
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the 2nd and later copies when multiple copies are to be stapled, two or three sheets of paper are temporarily stored in the buffer unit (held by the buffer stopper arm) and delivered to the processing tray in a batch and then stapled. Since the buffer stopper sheet [2] is not properly attached to the buffer stopper arm [1], it is possible that paper might be caught at the stopper sheet depending on the paper condition and not be held by the arm securely. In the field, paper which was not held by the arm was pushed out by the next sheet to the delivery tray, or paper which was held by the arm askew was not stapled properly although it was delivered to the processing tray. In actual failure cases, this symptom occurs in the 2nd and later copies irregularly. For your information, the buffer feature mechanism is: in order to prevent copy speed from being reduced, several sheets in the 2nd copy are stored in the buffer unit without waiting for the 1st copy to be stapled and ejected. Field Remedy Inspect the buffer stopper sheets attached to the center two rear end guides of the buffer stopper arm. If they are not properly attached, replace the stopper sheet or the stopper arm with a new one. FL2-0807 Buffer Stopper Arm FC5-4704 Buffer Stopper Sheet
F-15-74
15.3.3.2.3 Fold at leading edge of paper when making single (1 to 1) copy: Because guide rollers in Return Roller Ass'y comes off Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2
0008-3637
15-56
Chapter 15 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, because some of the guide rollers in the return roller ass'y came off[1], paper was caught at the rollers when being delivered and thus the leading edge of the paper was folded. Especially in the case of 1-to-1 copy, paper is delivered in face-up and is curled downward, accordingly it is more likely to be caught at the roller. When this symptom occurs, inspect the guide roller and reinstall them if they comes off. FC5-3454 Guide Roller
F-15-75
15.3.3.2.4 Fold at leading edge of paper when making single (1 to 1) copy: Troubleshooting, Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2
0009-3212
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Description In inspection, the leading edge of paper was folded when making a 1-to-1 copy on machines with Finisher-R1 or Saddle Finisher-R2 installed. When this symptom occurs, refer to the cases below and follow the steps described in Field Remedy. (This information is as of August 30, 2004)
F-15-76
Cause [a] Since the inlet lower guide [a-1] is installed over the entrance guide crossmember [a-2], paper may hit against the guide when making 1-to-1 copy and be folded at the leading edge. No occurrence in continuous copy. In the case of 1-to-1 copy, paper is delivered in face-up and is curled downward, accordingly it is more likely to be caught at the guide rather than in the case of continuous copy (face-down). [a-3]: shows normal installation state (the inlet lower guide is placed under the entrance guide crossmember.). [a-4]: shows that the inlet lower guide is installed over the entrance guide crossmember. Field Remedy Place a sheet of paper exhibiting this symptom on the inlet lower guide. If the guide comes over the crossmember at points where the folds occur, reinstall the guide once again. FC5-3729 Inlet Lower Guide Cause [b] Since some of the guide rollers in the return roller ass'y come off as shown in [b-2], paper may be caught at the rollers when being delivered and thus the leading edge of the paper be folded. Especially in the case of 1-to-1 copy, paper is delivered in face-up and is curled downward, accordingly it is more likely
15-57
Chapter 15 to be caught at the roller. [b-1]: shows normal installation state. [b-2]: shows that the guide roller comes off. Field Remedy When this symptom occurs, inspect the guide roller and reinstall them if they come off. FC5-3454 Guide Roller
15.3.3.3 Ripple/Curl
15.3.3.3.1 Output paper is rippled (accordion) when being delivered
0008-3638
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When A4/B5 paper was used, it was rippled [1] when being delivered because its leading edge was caught (not jammed) at the lower internal delivery guide [3] in the internal paper delivery ass'y [2]. As a result of inspection, it was found that the lower internal delivery guide was soiled with substances like coagulated adhesive. It is possible that labels other than the recommended types had been fed. Field Remedy 1. When this symptom occurs, clean the lower internal delivery guide with alcohol. 2. Check the paper types in use, and if labels other than the recommended types are used, instruct your customer to use the recommended labels. FC5-2345 Lower Internal Delivery Guide
F-15-77
15.3.3.4 Wrap
15.3.3.4.1 Wrapping Around the Pressure Roller / Oil Traces / Separation Claw Traces / Wrinkle Traces
0005-6299
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Description - wrapping around the pressure roller occurs when fixing on the 2nd side of a double-sided print is under way - difference in color caused by oil along the leading edge of the 1st side of a double-sided print (wavy, unevenness in gloss) [1] - traces of separation claws along the leading edge of the 1st side of a double-sided print (lines opposite the separation claws) [2] - traces of wrinkles of the pressure roller on the 1st side of a double-sided print [3] However, of the foregoing, the symptom may not occur or may not be noticeable because of the degree of the cause. The symptom tends to occur more readily for the following: - paper of 80 g or less is used on a non-Japanese machine - the fixing roller or the pressure roller has deteriorated (tending to occur more readily after 100,000 prints) - a solid image (mono- or 2-color) is made (with the symptom being absent in the case of a mono solid image) - double-sided prints are made 2. Cause As the pressure roller is used more and more, the rubber layer starts to soften, gradually increasing the nip width and, as a result, causing the symptom to occur more readily. 3. Field Remedy Change the setting of the following from '0' (default) to '1' or '2' in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FXLW-TMP. MEMO: - The effects are greater when '2' is set; however, a drop in latitude in fixing will be a trade-off when heavy paper is used. - Be sure to return the setting to its initial value after replacing the fixing roller or the pressure roller. If the user seldom uses heavy paper and is likely to complain each time the roller starts to wear out, the setting need not be changed back to its initial value. - if the fixing roller or the pressure roller has been used for more than 150,000 prints, replacement of the roller is recommended.
15-58
Chapter 15
MEMO: The pressure roller temperature control target is changed as follows to suit the setting selected in service mode: 1: 160 deg C 2: 150 deg C 4. Image Sample
F-15-78
15.3.4 Malfunction 15.3.4.1 No Power

15.3.4.1.1 Power is suddenly shut down at power-on after installation of FAX board
0006-8796
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, this symptom occurred because, after installation of the FAX board, the connector (4P, yellow cables) for the control card was wrongly inserted into J146 (4P) at the side of the FAX unit. Field Remedy Insert the appropriate connector (4P, orange and blue cables) for the FAX power supply into J146.
15-59
Chapter 15
F-15-79
15.3.4.1.2 Host machine does not start up and repeat reboot, LCD does not come on, No power
0008-3141
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following symptoms occurred because the Main Controller PCB was faulty: 1. After power-ON, when the progress bar reaches the interval 1 (Self-diagnostic program), the host machine repeats reboot and does not start up. 2. After power-ON, the main power indicator comes on; but the LCD does not. Initialization of the host machine and the finisher is done. Field Remedy 1. In order to determine whether or not the root cause is related to the host machine, detach any optional products (finisher, etc. if being installed), and turn the power ON. 2. If the host machine does not start up, replace the Main Controller PCB with a new one. FG3-2857 Main Controller PCB 15.3.4.1.3 After installation of FAX board, power is shut down immediately at power-on
0009-3240
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, this symptom occurred because the connector (4pins, yellow cables) for the control card was wrongly inserted into J146 (4pins) at the side of the FAX unit as shown in [1]. Field Remedy Insert the FAX unit power supply connector (4pins, orange and blue cables) into J146 as shown in [2].
15-60
Chapter 15
F-15-80
15.3.4.2 Control Panel-Related

15.3.4.2.1 Black toner cartridge cap does not close completely, causing black toner leakage
0007-4585
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found this symptom occurred because of the following reason. When the black toner cartridge in the Hopper Ass'y was removed from the host machine in order to pull out the process unit during service work, the lock lever was pushed down by pulling leftward forcibly and the locking mechanism did not work properly, causing the toner cartridge cap not to close completely and finally toner leakage. There is a possibility that toner leakage occurs if users do the similar operation. Thus, for a preventive purpose, ask your customer not to apply any unnecessary side-to-side force when operating the lock lever. 15.3.4.2.2 LDC does not come on at power-on: Because Main Controller PCB is faulty
0010-3864
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: Upon power-on, the LCD does not come on and even the control cooling fan (M8) does not rotate on account of the defective Main Controller PCB. Field Remedy 1. Check the input voltage applied to the following points of J1201 and J1202 on the Main Controller PCB. If no voltage is applied, the DC power relay PCB is thought to be faulty. - J1201: Pin1 to Pin3 = 3V, Pin2 to Pin4 = 3V, Pin5 to Pin7 = 3V, Pin6 to Pin8 = 3V, Pin9 to Pin10 = 12V - J1202: Pin1 to Pin2 = 5V, Pin3 to Pin4 = 13V 2. If the voltage is applied, check the connection of all connectors that are from J1212 on the Main Controller PCB to J2118 on the control panel CPU PCB assembly. 3. If the symptom still occurs, replace the Main Controller PCB with a new one. FG3-2857 Main Controller PCB Assembly FM2-0843 DC Power Relay PCB Assembly 15.3.4.2.3 Control panel switch does not work
0010-3867
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found that the control panel switch did not work because a pin of the connector J2116, which connects the control panel to the Main Controller PCB, was bent (on the panel mount side), causing bad connection of the connector. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, check all the connects (including J2117) between J1212 of the Main Controller PCB and J2118 of the control pale CPU PCB assembly. If a bent pin or bad connection is found, modify it.
15-61
Chapter 15
F-15-81
15.3.4.3 Counter Malfunction

15.3.4.3.1 Counters for Dept. ID Management does not increase after installation of Card Reader-D1: Card itself is recognized
0007-5279
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Case in the field a. Field Remedy Change the set value in service mode [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> CARD (default: 0)] to the lowest number of the cards that are to be used. For example, when the cards from 100 through 300 are used, the number "100"should be entered. After making sure that the set value has been changed (it could take some time), turn the power off and then on. b. Description If the set value remains the default "0", the counters for the Dept. ID management will not increase because the host machine cannot understand which cards should be managed although the card itself is recognized and copy can be made. For your information, if you mistakenly enter "200" in the above case, the cards numbered "100" through "199" will not be recognized and copy cannot be made. The card counter can be checked in user mode [System Management Settings> Department ID Management> Count Management].
15.3.4.4 Malfunction/Faulty Detection

15.3.4.4.1 Paper lifting plate in left front paper deck does not ascend upon installation
0006-6428
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Case in the field a. Cause In the field, this symptom occurred because the left deck cable was trapped by the left deck locking plate when the plate was attached upon installation. b. Field Remedy When attaching the plate, try lightly pushing down the cable with your left hand. For more details, refer to the service manual [Unpacking and Installation > Mounting the Pickup Assembly].
F-15-82
15-62
Chapter 15 15.3.4.4.2 Black toner fails to be replenished although "Toner-S" is executed upon installation / Light image
0006-6586
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Case in the field a. Field Remedy In the field, black toner replenishment was not properly completed although "Toner-S", which is a toner replenishment mode in service mode, was executed. Check which applies to your case among the following, and perform the appropriate action. 1) When "Toner-S" is executed, the indication of countdown reaches "0" but keeps displaying "10" and "0" by turns. In such a case, upgrade the ROM on the DC Controller PCB to Ver.5.04 and later. Afterward, execute "Toner-S" once again. 2) It will take approximately 7 minutes to complete "Toner-S" in normal circumstances. If "Toner-S" is executed while "WAITING" is being displayed at the right corner of the Service Mode screen, the indication will immediately display "OK". Be sure to execute "Toner-S" after "WAITING" is changed to "READY". 3) When "Toner-S" is executed, the indication displays "OK" after approximately 3 minutes and a half. This means toner replenishment has not been completed properly. If a light image problem occurs after the replenishment, it is possible that the connector of the toner sensor fails to be inserted or is not securely fitted because of its bent pins. By referring to the procedure below, check the connection status of the connector for the toner sensor. 3-1) For the preventive measure against electrostatic discharge, touch the machine metal plate with your hand and test probes. 3-2) Disconnect the connector [1] from the female connector J209 [2] of the AP kit. 3-3) Using a tester (multimeter), make a measurement of resistance between the 1st pin (minus) and the 3rd pin (plus) of the female connector J209 [2]. The rightmost pin is the 1st pin. Touch the pins with the appropriate test probes. If not, the measurement results will not become stable. Set up the multimeter at the maximum (40M ohms).
F-15-83
- If the measurement result reads several M ohms to 20M ohms, the connector is securely fitted. It is possible that the toner sensor is faulty although there is no failure report from the field. - If the measurement result reads infinite (Overlimit), it is possible that the connector fails to be inserted or some of the connector pins are bent. In such a case, pull out the AP kit from the host machine and visually inspect the pins at the back side of the connector J209 [2] and insert the connectors are securely fitted.
F-15-84
3-4) Perform "Toner-S" once again.Field Remedy 15.3.4.4.3 Initialization of color developing assemblies (INISET-3) is not completed; "OK" does not display
0007-5150
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, initialization of the color developing assemblies (INISET-3) was executed upon installation, however, "OK" did not display even after the count has reached "0". Under the normal circumstance, it will be completed in approximately 14 minutes. Cause The cables of the connector of the potential control sensor were broken, causing INISET-3 to fail. Field Remedy 1. Inspect the connector of the potential control sensor for poor contact or cable break. 2. After making sure of no problem in the step 1, execute the service mode [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> INISET-3] once again. Note: It is possible that the cables were broken because the AP-kit was pulled out without disconnecting the connector. If you need to pull out the AP-kit for servicing, be sure to disconnect not only the potential control sensor connector but others. 15.3.4.4.4 Remaining toner indication bar for black displays one quarter upon installation
0008-3232
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description This symptom can occur when the main power switch is turned ON before inserting the Bk toner bottle upon installation. Be sure to turn the switch ON after the bottle is inserted according to the installation procedure. If the switch is turned ON before inserting the toner bottle, perform the following steps "a" or "b" to
15-63
Chapter 15 restore the indication to 100%. Field Remedy a. In case that the main power switch was not turned OFF when the indication bar displayed one quarter. a-1. Open the hopper cover and insert the Bk toner bottle. Then, turn the main power switch OFF/ON. b. In case that the main power switch was turned OFF/ON when the indication bar displayed one quarter. b-1. Open the hopper cover after the toner supply motor stops running and insert the Bk toner bottle. Then, turn the main power switch OFF/ON. Note: Be sure not to perform either of the above-mentioned steps "a" or "b" after the following steps "c" or "d". Otherwise, the indication bar will keep displaying one quarter until the toner bottle is replaced with a new one next time. c. Turn the main power switch OFF, open the hopper cover, insert the Bk toner bottle, and then turn the power switch ON again. d. Turn the main power switch OFF/ON, open the hopper cover when the toner supply motor is running, and then insert the Bk toner bottle. Cause If the main power switch is turned ON before the Bk toner bottle is inserted, the toner toner supply motor will start running but stop in a specific period of time because there is no toner supplied. The host machine detects no toner and the indication displays one quarter. However, this is a just indication and there is no problem such as warning message regarding remaining toner displays earlier than normal or the amount of toner consumption is increased. 15.3.4.4.5 Feature of Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning does not operate: Saddle Finisher-R2 User Mode
0008-3740
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy Upgrade the ROM on the DC Controller PCB to Ver.8.02 and later. Note: When upgrading, upgrade System to Ver.6.03 and later simultaneously. Description In the field, "Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning" under user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning], which should be executed after replacing the staple cartridge with a new one or clearing a staple jam, did not operate. As a result of inspection, the ROM on the DC Controller has been modified. How to operate: In user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning], press the Start key. 15.3.4.4.6 Message "The specified size does not conform to the position of the slide guides." is displayed when setting A4R/B5R in Manual Feed Tray
0009-2955
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the following occurred: When paper is set in the manual feed tray and then the Next button is pressed (to go to the Paper Type selection screen), the message "The specified size does not conform to the position of the slide guides. Adjust the slide guides and specify the size again" is displayed. This is because of a poor adjustment of the size guide of the manual feed tray. When the message is displayed, follow the field remedy below. Field Remedy 1. Place A4R size paper in the manual feed tray and set the size guide to the A4R width. Then, in service mode [COPIER > FUNCTION > CST > select MFA4R > OK]. 2. Do the same thing as the step 1 for A6R size paper. 3. Do the same thing as the step 1 for A4 size paper. 15.3.4.4.7 Paper deck is not drawn out when cassette button is pressed if it is full loaded with paper: Occurs on both right and left paper decks
0009-2956
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found that the front paper deck, full loaded with paper, was not drawn out even when the cassette button was pressed because the spring pressure of the compression spring located deep inside the front paper decks was low. As a solution, the compression spring has been changed to a one with higher pressure. When this symptom occurs, replace the spring with a new one. FU5-2176 Compression Spring 15.3.4.4.8 Upon power-on, Machine repeats rebooting and fails to start up at point where progressive bar fills a little
0009-2958
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the symptom occurred because the Boot ROM and the expansion RAM were not securely fitted. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, remove and then insert the Boot ROM and the expansion RAM. 15.3.4.4.9 Machine displays "Processing" and locks up when printing: Because of Ethernet PCB (SURF) failure, PowerPoint
0009-3119
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: Because of the Ethernet PCB (SURF) failure, the machine displays "Processing" and locks up when printing a file created on PowerPoint. For your information, copy images and test print images are normal. When the symptom occurs, remove and then put back the Ethernet PCB. If the symptom still recurs, replace the PCB with a new one. FG3-2874 Ethernet PCB 15.3.4.4.10 When stamp setting is ON and FAX message is sent, LCD hangs up with optical lamp staying ON
0010-3863
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: When the stamp setting is ON and a FAX message is sent, DF cover open jam occurs immediately before a stamp is placed on the original fed from the DF, causing the LCD to hang up with the optical lamp staying ON. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, upgrade the software of the reader controller PCB to version 10.01. This version has the modified program to prevent the jam
15-64
Chapter 15 from occurring when a stamp setting is ON and a FAX message is sent. 15.3.4.4.11 Unable to format hard disk (HD)/Format error: Because hard disk drive (HDD) is changed
0010-3866
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description From the machines with the following serial numbers, the new type hard disk drive (HDD) is being adopted. And the service part HDD was also replaced with the new type one. Additionally, the HD format file version 00.09 was released with this HDD change. When you format the new type HDD, download the HD format file version 00.09 or later to SST. Starting serial number iRC6800 (120V): JJM03898, iRC6800 (230V): JKL00019, iRC6800 (AU 230V): JXH00445, iRC6800 (EUR 230V): KH00998, iRC6800N (KOR 220V): JKQ00001, iRC6800N (230V): JKM00153, iRC6800N (EUR 230V): JKP02059, iRC5800 (120V): KEM00740, iRC5800 (230V): KEP00005, iRC5800 (AU 230V): KEQ00012, iRC5800 (EUR 230V): KEN00028, iRC5800N (230V): KET00011, iRC5800N (EUR 230V): KES00041 WM2-5222 HDD (HDS728040PLAT20) 15.3.4.4.12 Fixing Web Displacement / 0A15/020D Jam Code
0005-6084
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause If you open the front cover in any of the following conditions and turn the fixing jam removal knob, the web will likely become slack and displaced: - during last rotation after output ("Printer is warming up..." is indicated.) - during fixing idle rotation at time of warm-up - during printing When the slack starts to increase and the belt becomes trapped by the fixing roller, the following jam can occur: - 0A15 (fixing inlet sensor power-on jam) - 0200 (reversal sensor stationary jam) 2. Field Remedy Take up the fixing web so that it is not slack. Observe the following, and advise the user on points of importance:
Web retaining pad is used to keep the web in place so that the web will not become slack when the fixing roller is rotated in reverse for jam removal. The web retaining pad is attached to the same shaft as the cam used to move the outside heating roller to and from the fixing roller: while the outside heating roller is in contact with the fixing roller, the pad is away from the web; on the other hand, when the outside heating roller is away from the fixing roller, the pad is used to keep the web in place.
The machine indicates the message "Printer is warming up..." on its LCD while it executes last rotation after printing. While the message is on the LCD, the fixing roller is under temperature control, and the outside heating roller is in contact with the fixing roller, i.e., the web retaining pad is away from the web. If you open the front cover and turn the fixing assembly release knob, the web will become slack and possibly displaced. Do not open the front door while the message is on the LCD. If you must, do not turn the fixing assembly releasing knob. The web retainer is also away from the web when you force the front cover to open while printing or fixing idle rotation is under way during warm-up: be sure to keep this in mind during service work.
15-65
Chapter 15
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
F-15-85
[1] Web retaining pad [2] Cam [3] Cleaning web [4] Outside heating roller [5] Fixing roller
15.3.4.5 Noise
15.3.4.5.1 Abnormal buzzing sound from ITB unit
0006-8839
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Inspected by Canon Inc. a. Field Remedy Check whether your machine is earlier than the following serial numbers: JHS00176/JHT00861/JHK00006/JJM00182/JXH00008/JKM00003 JKP00003. If so, perform the steps below. Clean the internal scraper in the ITB unit and attach two pieces of commercial double-sided tape (20mm wide, 0.14-0.16mm thick) to the back side of the scraper holder as follows: 1) Remove the ITB unit from the host machine. 2) Remove the internal scraper from the ITB unit and clean it. 3) Attach the double-sided tape to two locations on the back side of the scraper holder: the center, and between the rear end and about 10mm behind from the screw hole. (The tape should be attached where the ribs of the ITB unit frame come in contact.) 4) Remove the protective paper from the tape and install the scraper holder to the ITB unit. 5) Attach the ITB unit back to the host machine. 6) Make a copy and check whether the abnormal buzzing sound has gone. b. Description It is possible that rubber residues of the secondary transfer roller are deposited to the edge of the internal scraper. In such a case, the sliding frictional resistance between the scraper and the ITB will become higher and the scraper holder will start vibrating, resulting in an abnormal buzzing sound. As a result of inspection, it was found that the double-sided tape can prevent the scraper holder from vibrating and finally an abnormal sound. Note that the machines whose serial numbers are greater or equal to the above have the double-sided tape to the scraper holder. - FL2-0398: Internal Scraper
15-66
Chapter 15
F-15-86
15.3.4.5.2 Abnormal whizzing sound from Fixing Ass'y

0007-3924
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy As a result of inspection, abnormal sound was heard only during the rotation of the external heating roller because the stopper ring came off of the roller edge and the bearing also came off. When the symptom occurs, inspect the stopper ring. FC5-2377 Stopper Ring 15.3.4.5.3 Frictional sound from Additional Finisher Tray-A1: When Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2 is initialized at power-ON and copy start, abnormal noise
0008-3133
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the tray of the Additional Finisher Tray-A1 was not snapped onto the front stay completely, the tray interfered with the upper height panel and caused a frictional sound while it was moving up and down for the finisher initialization. Field Remedy Inspect the tray of the Additional Finisher Tray-A1 from the upper for a gap between the upper height panel. If the tray comes in contact with the panel or the gap is too small, it is possible that the tray is not properly installed. In such a case, push the tray down until you hear it click. 15.3.4.5.4 Additional Finisher Tray-A1: Abnormal sound during up-and-down movement of tray / Tray comes off
0008-3230
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description Upon installation of the additional finisher tray, the Tray 1 was detached from the finisher and reinstalled once again after attaching the necessary accessories, and then the additional tray was installed; however, because the Tray 1 was not level, the additional tray came in contact with upper height panel (rear side) during up-and-down movement of the tray, causing abnormal sound or the tray coming off. Normally, the clearance between the tray and the upper height panel (rear side) should be approximately 3mm. Field Remedy 1. Detach the additional tray from the Tray 1. 2. Detach the Tray 1 from the finisher. 3. Install the Tray 1 from the top of the finisher horizontally so that the front and the rear gears of the Tray 1 do not misalign on the rails. Then, slide the guide shutter upward to cover the paper delivery gate flapper, and release the latch on the underside of the Tray 1 to move it down. Note: If the Tray 1 is moved down without sliding the guide shutter upward, the flapper will come off. 4. In order to make sure that the Tray 1 is level, move it down to the guide shutter and check whether the distance between the projection on the tray and the top end of the guide shutter is equal between the front and the rear sides. If not, detach and reinstall the Tray 1 once again. For the detailed installation procedures, refer to Additional Finisher Tray-A1 Service Manual (Installation Procedure). 15.3.4.5.5 Abnormal noise or color void sometimes occurs during rotation of Developing Rotary in color copy mode
0008-3644
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: Since the tension spring comes off of the developing drive swing arm [2] in the developing drive assembly, the gear in the swing arm poorly meshes with the gear of a color developing assembly, causing abnormal noise or color void. Field Remedy Slide out the fixing feeder assembly and the AP kit from the host machine and make sure that the tension spring is securely fitted. FU5-2123 Tension Spring
15-67
Chapter 15
F-15-87
[3]:Tension Spring, [4]: The location where the tension spring is attached. 15.3.4.5.6 Abnormal noise (vibration noise) from Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) Ass'y: Because of shavings of rubber roller
0009-3307
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, check the machine serial number, and if it is earlier than those listed below replace the internal scraper with a new one. FL2-0398 Internal Scraper Description When the shavings of the rubber portion of the secondary transfer roller adhere to the edge of the internal scraper inside the ITB ass'y, a frictional resistance is increased between the inner face of the ITB and the internal scraper to vibrate the scraper holder, causing the symptom. The symptom had been improved by fixing the scraper holder with two-sided tape, however, it is still possible to occur depending on the severity of the rubber shavings. Therefore, the internal scraper was modified. The following lists the starting serial numbers of the machine with the modified internal scraper: - iRC6800 (120V): JJM03837 - iRC6800 (230V): JKL00099 - iRC6800N (230V): JKM00119 - iRC6800 EUR (230V): JKH00781 - iRC6800N EUR (230V): JKP01687 - iRC6800 AU (230V): JXH00339 15.3.4.5.7 Abnormal sound occurs from fixing cleaner web drive assembly/fixing cleaner web is not rolled up: Due to deformation of oneway arm
0010-7463
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the one-way arm was deformed. This caused chattering sound (abnormal sound) and prevented the fixing cleaner web from being rolled up. Field Remedy When chattering sound occurs, check the one-way arm for deformation; if deformed, replace it with a new one. FC5-2369 One-way Arm 15.3.4.5.8 Abnormal Noise from the Rotating Rotary
0005-4270
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Cause During assembly work after servicing the machine, the controller box plate [1] is likely to have been screwed toward the rear of the plate of the DC controller box [2], thus imposing pressure on the rotary motor. 2. Field Remedy Correct the location at which the plates are screwed in place. The figure shows the correct location. top: controller box plate [1] bottom: plate of the DC controller box [2]
15-68
Chapter 15
[2]
[1]
[2]
F-15-88
15.3.4.6 User Warning Message

15.3.4.6.1 Message [Check the network connection.] / Message [Check the TCP/IP.]
0006-4895
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Case in the field a. Field Remedy If the host machine is not connected to network, follow the steps below: Change the service mode setting so as not to display the network error messages. In service mode (LEVEL 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> NWERR-SW], change the set value from "1" to "0", and then turn the control panel switch off and turn the main power switch OFF/ON. 0: not display 1: display (value at time of factory shipment/value after RAM clear) 15.3.4.6.2 "Finisher cannot be used." is displayed
0006-6294
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Manual-related a. Field Remedy Check the error log and perform appropriate corrective actions for the error. Then, clear the functional separation mode in service mode below so that the message will disappear. How to clear: In service mode [SORTER> Option> MD-SPRTN], change the set value from "1" to "0". b. Description If the "Limited Functions Mode " key appears on the LCD when an error occurs in the finisher, that means the host machine can shift to the "Limited Functions Mode" in which the finisher can output paper but neither staple or alignment. Press the key so that the message "Finisher cannot be used." is displayed on the LCD. 15.3.4.6.3 Window prompting to clean scanning glass frequently appears
0006-8843
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Inspected by Canon Inc. a. Description A window prompting to clean the scanning glass appeared frequently although the glass was not soiled. As a result of inspection, this symptom was solved by the adjustment of the ADF document tray position and the horizontal registration adjustment in service mode. When this symptom occurs, follow the steps in Field Remedy to fix the problem. b. Cause Because of a poor adjustment of the ADF horizontal registration, the edge of the platen roller is wrongly detected as dirt. c. Field Remedy 1) Adjust the original document position relative to the platen roller when the original document passes over the roller: 1-1) Place A3 paper on the ADF tray and press the start key. While it is passing over the platen roller, open the ADF forcibly to stop the operation. 1-2) Measure the distance between the roller end and the document end at both the front and the rear sides. Repeat this three times or more. (Reference value is: Front = Rear = 3.5mm) 1-3) In order to equate these distances, adjust the slide guides' position of the ADF tray by referring to DADF-M1 service manual [Parts Replacement Pro-
15-69
Chapter 15 cedure> Electrical System> Document Width Volume> Adjusting the Side Guide Plate]. 2) Adjust the ADF horizontal registration in service mode: 2-1) Place a test chart on the ADF tray and make a direct copy. Overlay the copy on the chart. In service mode [COPIER> Adjust> ADJ-XY> ADJ-Y-DF], change the set value in order to fall the horizontal registration (both front and rear) within the specification "</= 1mm". - The bigger the set value is, the wider the front is and the narrower the rear is. - Increasing the set value by one corresponds with 0.1mm increase. Reference: Refer to DADF-M1 service manual [Maintenance> Adjustment> Basic Adjustment> Horizontal Registration] for the horizontal registration adjustment.
Do NOT set the value of ADJ-Y-DF smaller than 50. 2-2) Make a direct copy of the test chart in the same manner as in the step 1. Make sure that the horizontal registration falls within the specifications. 2-3) After the adjustment, overwrite the value in ADJ-Y-DF on the service label with the set value obtained in the step 1. 15.3.4.6.4 DADF-M1: Message "Original scanning area (thin glass strip) is dirty." / How to adjust white level
0007-3893
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy In the field, the above message disappeared after making the ADF white level adjustment. Follow the steps below: 1. Clean the copyboard glass and the reading glass. 2. Place a sheet of paper which your customer is always using on the copyboard glass, and execute the following service mode [COPIER> Function> CCD> DFWLVL1]. 3. Move the paper from the copyboard glass to the document tray of the ADF, and execute the following service mode [COPIER> Function> CCD> DF-WLVL2]. Note: DF-WLVL1 and DF-WLVL2 must be executed simultaneously. 15.3.4.6.5 Detail codes in which Temporary Functional Limit mode for Finisher is effective
0007-3944
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The meaning of "Temporary Functional Limit" mode is: When the finisher becomes inoperative because of an error related to any finishing functions, this mode will isolate only the affected functions and make the finisher operate. For example, when E590-8002 (Punch motor error) occurs, this mode will isolate the punching function and make the finisher operate. The error codes related to the finisher are E500 through E593, and this mode is available with the codes whose detail code starts with "8". Note: The following are conditions where the mode is effective. 1. When "1" is selected in service mode [SORTER> Option> MD-SPRTN]. 2. When the user presses "Limited Functions Mode" key on the LCD after some error code is displayed. 15.3.4.6.6 Message "Insert toner cartridge. (Yellow)" keeps displaying: Upon installation
0008-3314
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description A message "Insert toner cartridge. (Yellow)" does not disappear although the Yellow toner cartridge was inserted upon installation. Therefore, the Magenta and the Cyan cartridges were unable to be set. As a result of inspection, there found a deformation of a pin in the connector J212 (3 pin connector) for the color toner cartridge sensor (PS26). Field Remedy Inspect the connector J212 fixed on the front side of the AP kit to make sure of a secure connection or a pin deformation. If any problem is found, correct it. FK2-0004 Photoreflector
F-15-89
15-70
Chapter 15 15.3.4.6.7 "Limited Functions Mode" key on service call message window with spanner
0008-3751
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy 1. Turn the power OFF/ON to check whether the service call message window will disappear. If not, go to step 2. Note: If there are print data on standby when the power is turned OFF, they will be cleared. 2. If you want to output paper by temporarily limiting other functions, press "Limited Functions Mode" key, select "Yes" and turn the power OFF/ON so that the machine will start up in the limited functions mode (in other words, features "Offset" and "Staple" cannot be used). If you select "No", the machine will not operate until the error is cleared. 3. Check the error log in service mode [COPIER> Display> ERR], and perform appropriate corrective actions for the error. 4. If the "Limited Function Mode" key was pressed in step 2, select in user mode [Common Settings> Limited Functions Mode> Off] and turn the power OFF/ ON so that the message "Finisher cannot be used." will disappear. Description The detail description of this symptom is: When a feature "Offset" or "Staple" was selected and the start key was pressed, the service call message window with a spanner appeared on the LCD because some malfunction has occurred in the finisher, and the machine was not able to make a copy any longer. If the "Limited Functions Mode" key appears on the same window, you can press it so that the finisher can only output paper by temporarily limiting other functions. After this mode is active, a message "Finisher cannot be used." appears at the left lower part of the LCD. 15.3.4.6.8 Message "The data of the Protect Key Device is invalid." is displayed upon installation, Unable to install security kit
0008-3790
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description Upon installation of the driver, a message "The data of the Protect Key Device is invalid." was displayed and the security expansion failed. In the field, this symptom was solved by replacement of the protect key device. When this symptom occurs, replace the protect key device with a new one. FH5-3364 Protect Key Device - Parallel FH5-3398 Protect Key Device - USB 15.3.4.6.9 Message "The data of the Protect Key Device is invalid." is displayed upon installation, Unable to install SEND kit
0008-3798
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description Upon installation of the driver, a message "The data of the Protect Key Device is invalid." was displayed and the SEND expansion failed. In the field, this symptom was solved by replacement of the protect key device. When this symptom occurs, replace the protect key device with a new one. FH5-3420 Protect Key Device - Parallel FH5-3422 Protect Key Device - USB 15.3.4.6.10 Message "Close the finisher's front cover" does not disappear because Main Controller PCB inside Finisher is faulty: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2
0009-9316
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In inspection, there was a case where the message "Close the finisher's front cover" did not disappear because the Main Controller PCB inside the finisher was faulty. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, follow the steps below. 1. Check if 24V is placed between the first and second pins of J701 on the Main Controller PCB using a tester. If it is placed, replace the PCB with a new one because the PCB may be faulty. If it is not placed, go to the step2. 2. Check if 24V is placed between the first and second pins of J117 on the DC Power Relay PCB using a tester. If it is not placed, replace the PCB with a new one because the PCB may be faulty. If it is placed, go to the step3. 3. Check the cable between the machine and the finisher for poor connection. FG3-2883 Main Controller PCB Assembly FM2-0843 DC Power Relay PCB Assembly 15.3.4.6.11 Message "Close the finisher's front cover" does not disappear: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2
0009-9323
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: The message "Close the finisher's front cover" does not disappear because J117 on the DC Power Relay PCB has poor connection, preventing 24V from being supplied from the machine to the finisher. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, check J117 of the DC Power Relay PCB for poor connection. FM2-0843 DC Power Relay PCB Assembly 15.3.4.6.12 DADF-M1: Message "Original scanning area (thin glass strip) is dirty." does not disappear
0010-7460
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the message "Original scanning area (thin glass strip) is dirty." was displayed, and it still appeared after the original scanning area was cleaned, and the white level adjustment was executed using the service mode item "DF-WLEL1" or "DF-WLEL2". When the symptom has occurred, follow the procedure below. Field Remedy In service mode [COPIER > OPTION > BODY], decrease the setting value of [DFDST-L2] (default: 200) in increments of 5 until the message disappears. Note that decreasing this setting value will make the machine less sensitive in detecting dust, and as a result, black lines on image (in the sub scanning direction) will be a possible.
15-71
Chapter 15 15.3.4.6.13 Frequent DF Reading Glass Cleaning Message

0004-9000
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following is a list of causes and field remedies associated with the symptom: 1. Cause (1) dust or dirt on the reading glass; the reader unit detects dirt to issue the cleaning message, and it does not detect stray dust (2) dirt on the read roller, or dirt on the white plastic film (3) scratch on the reading glass: or dirt resisting cleaning (4) scratches in radial direction of the red roller, or dirt remaining after cleaning (5) dirt on the CCD - Checking for Dirt on the CCD The presence of dirt on CCD cells will cause a line in the image in both stream reading and copyboard modes alike. If the particles are small, the reader unit will make up for their presence, removing lines from the output image. Set '0' to the following service mode item, and check the output image for a line; thereafter, be sure to change the setting back to its initial value: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L1 (level 1) 2. Field Remedy 1) Clean the reading glass using cleaning tissue or cleaning oil. 2) Dry wipe the read roller/white plastic film; or, use alcohol to clean them. MEMO: If the machine is installed in a dusty place, cleaning it on a periodical basis is desirable. 3) Replace the reading glass. 4) Replace the read roller. MEMO: If you have replaced the rear roller, be sure to perform the following: - white level adjustment - DF height adjustment 5) Replace the CCD unit. 15.3.4.6.14 Frequent DF reading Glass Cleaning Message (user requesting disabling of the message)
0004-9024
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci This message is not issued in response to the presence of dirt inside the machine (i.e., it is not used to alert the user to an error condition). Nevertheless, if the user requests disabling the message, go through the following: 1. Field Remedy 1) Change the level used to detect dust. Decrease the level of detection (level 1) in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L in increments of '5'. MEMO: A decrease in the level will decrease the level of correction executed for the presence of dust, possibly leaving a light black line in the output image. Setting it to '0' will disable dust detection all together.
2) Change the setting of the cleaning message in service mode: COPIER>OPTIONAL>BODY>DFDST-L1 (level 1). MEMO: The cleaning message may be disabled in service mode, but the machine will still check for dust; varying the read position according to the result of detection.
15.3.4.7 Other Defect

15.3.4.7.1 Processing unit cannot be inserted deep inside machine
0006-4913
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy While the processing unit is drawn out from the host machine, slightly turn the developing rotary drive gear which is located deep inside the machine and then insert the processing unit once again. Description It is possible that the drive gear at the processing unit side (the large gear in the developing rotary) interferes with the one at the machine side, causing the processing unit to fail to be inserted. 15.3.4.7.2 Duplexing guide is not opened/closed smoothly
0009-9328
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found in the duplexing feeder assembly: When the assembly is opened/closed, the release button of the assembly catches on the rib of the duplexing guide (FL2-2479) and thereby preventing the guide to be opened/closed smoothly. This is because the tension spring is twisted and fitted as it is to the tape mount (that is connected to the support tape) under the guide. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, check the tension spring and re-attach it if it is twisted. FU5-2153 Tension Spring
15-72
Chapter 15 FC5-5167 Tape Mount FC5-2119 Support Tape 15.3.4.7.3 Unable to change marking width for both side of crease for saddle stitching when selecting booklet mode for print job
0010-3862
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: Even if the marking width for both side of the crease for saddle stitching has been changed in service mode, the changed width is not reflected when selecting booklet mode as a special feature for a print job. However, upgrading system software to version 6.03 solves this symptom. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, upgrade system software to version 6.03 and set the following service mode items. a. Marking width In service mode [SORTER > OPTION > BLNK-SW], set any of the following values: 0: w/o marking width 1: w/ marking width (Default) b. Number of sheets that may be saddle-bounded In service mode (Level2) [COPIER > OPTION > ACC >STPL-LMT], set any of the following values: 0: 5sh (w/o marking width) 1: 10sh (w/o marking width) 2: 10sh (w/ marking width) 3: 15sh (w/ marking width) c. Combination patterns of service mode settings and results iRC36800_ID579 15.3.4.7.4 Rev. paper delivery door assembly cannot be opened smoothly at time of jam handling: Due to deformation of pulley
0010-7464
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the following occurred: When the fixing feeder assembly is pulled out and then the rev. paper delivery door assembly is opened to remove a piece of jammed paper, the wire over the pulley prevents the smooth movement of the delivery door assembly. This is because the pulley is deformed and prevents the wire from moving smoothly over it. Field Remedy When the symptom has occurred, check whether or not the pulley rotates smoothly; if not, replace it with a new one. FC5-5150 Pulley
15.3.4.8 Part Breakage/Detachment

15.3.4.8.1 Message "Load Paper." is displayed: Swaged part comes off of lifting wire
0007-3907
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy As a result of inspection, the message "Load Paper." was displayed because the swaged part came off of the tip of the lifting wire in the right paper deck and the paper lifting plate did not ascend. If the message is displayed although paper remains in the left or the right paper deck, inspect the lifting wire. FC5-2603 Lifting Wire 15.3.4.8.2 Drum keeps rotating with message "Adjusting gradation." / E012-0001 Error Code
0007-3982
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy It is possible that the drum HP sensor (PS65) is faulty or comes off. So, inspect it. Description In our inspection, the drum HP sensor came off and that caused a detection failure of the drum home position. Under this state, iRC6800 started the image stabilization control with a message "Adjusting gradation.". After 20 to 30 minutes passed, E012-0001 (Drum, ITB motor error) was displayed. Note: The drum fly wheel is fixed with a 20mm-long screw. At the time of servicing, if it is mistakenly fixed with a longer one used at the front side of the drum (25mm long), it is possible that it hits against and damages the drum HP sensor. Be sure to use the correct one.B 15.3.4.8.3 Additional Finisher Tray-A1 comes off / Option Slide Panel does not descend
0007-5214
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description On some units of the Additional Finisher Tray-A1 whose serial number is JLE01605 and earlier, the option slide panel is warped and the sliding performance becomes poor. When the tray descends, the slide panel stops halfway without descending by its own weight. At worst, when the tray ascends, it jumps over the panel which stops halfway, and it comes off when it descends next time. Field Remedy When this symptom occurs, inspect the option slide panel. If it is warped, replace it with a new one and install the stop plate in order to prevent the panel from being warped. Additionally, in order to improve sliding performance of the panel, apply grease to the sliding portion of the panel. For the detail procedure, refer to Additional Finisher Tray-A1 Service Manual [Installation> Installation Procedure]. FC5-6994 Stop Plate FC5-6991 Option Slide Panel 15.3.4.8.4 ITB belt is ripped or displaced after replacement: Points to note when mounting ITB unit
0009-9308
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description The possible causes of the ripping or displacement of the ITB belt include the following:
15-73
Chapter 15 a. Improper mounting of AP-Kit b. Improper mounting of Intermediate transfer unit c. Mishandling of ITB belt during replacement To prevent the symptom, the points to note when mounting and handling the parts mentioned a. through c. above have been written up for your service works. Field Remedy 15.3.4.8.5 Fixing roller is deformed: Because fixing drawer connector (AC driver cable) has poor connection
0009-9319
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found: When the fixing feeder assembly is set into the machine in state where the fixing drawer (J8) on the machine side loses smooth movement, the fixing drawer has poor connection with the drawer on the fixing feeder assembly side, causing improper fixing temperature control. In this case, if pressure is applied to the fixing roller, the roller is deformed. Field Remedy 1. Turn the main power switch OFF and remove the power cable. Then remove the rear panels to detach the controller box. 2. Remove the fixing drawer and then remove the stepped screw of the drawer. 3. Apply grease (MOLYKOTE PG641) to the portion of the stepped screw where the washer (XD1-1104-135) moves, and then fit the stepped screw to the fixing drawer to make sure that the washer moves smoothly on the surface of the stepped screw. Note: Be sure not to apply grease to the terminal of the fixing drawer. 4. Return the fixing drawer and the controller box to the original position. 5. Replace the fixing roller with a new one. 6. Connect the power cable and turn the main power switch ON. 7. When an error code E000/E001/E002/E003 is displayed, in service mode [COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERROR], select [OK], and then turn the control panel switch OFF, and turn the main power switch OFF/ON. 8. Make sure that the fixing temperature is controlled normally in service mode [COPIER > ANALOG > FIX-UC/FIX-UE/FIX-LC/FIX-LE/FIX-EXC/FIXEXL]. CK-0562 Grease (Molykote PG641) FC5-6298 Fixing Roller FM2-0921 AC Driver Cable (Fixing Drawer)
15.3.5 Printing/scanning 15.3.5.1 No Output

15.3.5.1.1 Paper cannot be delivered to Additional Finisher Tray-A1 (upper tray): Although upper tray is assigned for printer
0008-3242
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description Even if the upper tray is assigned for Printer in user mode [Common Settings> Tray Designation], a print job using the features "Offset" (selectable with Collate and Group) and "Staple" cannot be delivered to the upper tray. This is a specification constraint. Accordingly, if a checkmark is placed on "Offset" or "Staple " is selected in printer driver properties [Finishing], paper will automatically be output to other trays than the upper one. In other words, a print job without the above features will be output to the upper tray; however, it is common to assign the upper tray for FAX, and the middle/lower trays for Copy and Printer. 15.3.5.1.2 Machine accepts print job but does not run it
0010-3861
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the following occurred: When the LAN cable is temporarily disconnected from a PC, since the machine is receiving a print job from the PC, it fails to run the job, and moreover, fails to run print jobs that are sent after reconnection of the LAN cable, even if it can accept such jobs. Field Remedy On the System Monitor screen, cancel the print job, of which transmission was not completed. This will allow the machine to run print jobs that were sent after reconnection of the LAN cable. In case that the causal job is not canceled, the machine cancels it 5 minutes later in accordance with the specifications and starts running the print jobs that are stopped by the causal job.
15.3.5.2 Installation Failure

15.3.5.2.1 Unable to install printer driver completely: Because UBS cable is connected before installing
0009-2932
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In USB connection, it is impossible to completely install the printer driver in a PC when a USB cable is connected between the machine and the PC beforehand. Wait for connecting the cable until the installer instructs you to do so. Field Remedy In the field, the symptom was solved retrying the installation after uninstalling the uncompleted printer driver and then rebooting the PC. In the PC [Start > Programs], if the Canon Printer Uninstaller is present, use it to uninstall the uncompleted printer driver.
15.3.5.3 Faulty Printing/Scanning Result

15.3.5.3.1 Pages are output in reverse order: MS Word
0009-2943
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In MS Word [Print dialog box > Option], if Reverse Print Order is checked, pages are output in reverse order. Uncheck it to collect the page order. 15.3.5.3.2 Scanned documents are always saved in PDF format although selecting "TIFF/PDF" as File Format: Push Scan
0009-2947
15-74
Chapter 15
[ Case in the field ] Field Remedy If you want to save a scanned document in TIFF format, on the Send Screen, select [File Format > TIFF/PDF > Scan Settings > Black and White] before scanning. When any of the color modes is selected, scanned documents are always saved in PDF format. 15.3.5.3.3 Image sent to PC in TIFF/PDF format is reduced when printing from PC
0009-2948
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the following occurred: When printing a PDF file using Acrobat which has been sent from this machine, the output image is reduced because a check mark is placed on "Shrink oversized pages to paper size in ["Print" dialog box > Copies and Adjustments]. When the symptom occurs, uncheck it.
15.3.6 Network 15.3.6.1 Start-Up Failure

15.3.6.1.1 Utility software (e.g. Network ScanGear) cannot be used, no problem with other functions
0006-4896
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description It is possible that "SNMP Settings" and "Enable Dedicated Port" are set to Off. If so, change them to On. In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> SNMP Settings> On] In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> Enable Dedicated Port> On] SNMP Settings: If you want to set or browse each item of the machine with utility software that uses SNMP to obtain information, set it to On. Enable Dedicated Port: If you want to set or browse detailed information of the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility software, set it to On.
15.3.6.2 Connection Problem

15.3.6.2.1 147 Error Code: When machine is started up in safe mode at time of downloading with SST
0010-3859
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the error code was displayed and formatting of the hard disk (HDD) was impossible when the machine was started up in safe mode (by turning the main power switch ON while pressing the "2" and "8" keys simultaneously) after a PC with SST was connected. This was because the IP address of the PC was "172.16.1.100". Field Remedy Open the Command Prompt screen on the PC making the following selection [Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt], type "IPCONFIG" in [C:\ >], press the Enter key, and then, change the setting for "IP Address" and "Subnet Mask" to the following: - IP Address: 172.16.1.160 - Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Note: Never enter the following addresses in "IP Address". - 172.16.1.0 - 172.16.1.100 - 172.16.1.255
15.3.7 Transmission/Fax-Related 15.3.7.1 Transmission Problem

15.3.7.1.1 FAX number is not entered partially (in the actual failure case, 2nd digit)
0007-3953
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description If you enter a fax number using the numerical keys without pressing the "Fax" key immediately after switching to the "Send" screen (this is not a proper procedure), the machine has to start up the entry screen of the fax number and cannot accept any entry of the numerical keys in a fraction of a second because of software constraints. This is to prevent any operational error even if some key operations are done during transition of the screens. In this failure case, one digit of the fax number was not entered because the operator pressed the number during the affected period of time. Field Remedy According to the proper procedure, press the "Fax" key after switching to the "Send" screen, and then enter the fax number using the numerical keys. Or, enter the number slowly after making sure that the screen has been switched. For more details, refer to Sending and Facsimile Guide [Basic Sending Methods> Specifying Destinations> Using the New Address Tab> Specifying a Fax Number]. 15.3.7.1.2 FAX-transmitted image is too light: When sending carbon copy-like blue original document
0008-3255
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy In user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning> Exposure Recalibration> "Send (B&W)" or "Send"], adjust the density and then send the affected document once again. The setting of the density adjustment will be saved. Description When sending a document with blue texts such as a carbon copy by FAX, the image at receiving side tends to be lighter as compared with a one with black texts. Note: The following are the items which appear under "Exposure Recalibration" depending on which optional products are installed. - "Send (B&W)" and "Send (Color)" appear if Color Universal Send Kit-D1, Super G3 Fax Board-P1, and Resolution Switching Board are installed. - "Send" appears if Super G3 Fax Board-P1 and Resolution Switching Board are installed.
15-75
Chapter 15 15.3.7.1.3 Want to disable broadcast feature: FAX transmission

0009-3235
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description It is impossible to disable the broadcast function of this machine. On some black & white machines, a confirmation message is displayed before sending if multiple destinations are selected in order to prevent users from broadcasting unintentionally; however, this machine lists all the specified addresses on the LCD in sequence upon specification. This enables users to confirm all the addresses one by one while specifying. Please explain this to your customer. 15.3.7.1.4 Unable to send scanned image to file server: Because logon password entered from PC differs from address information of file server registered in machine #801
0009-3236
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the symptom occurred on a customer who regularly changes the log on password to the LAN with a PC for security. Because the customer forgot to reflect the new log on password in the address information of the file server after changing. When the symptom occurs, set the new password in User mode [Address Book Settings > select either "Register Address" or "One-touch Buttons" where the affected file server is registered > select the file server > press "Register/Edit" or "Edit" button]. 15.3.7.1.5 How to register high scanning density as standard sending mode: FAX transmission
0009-9699
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In order to send a FAX message without adjusting the scanning density every FAX transmission, follow the steps below. 1. Send screen > Scan Settings > Option > change the scanning density > Register/Erase > Scanning Mode > select any of the three "Black & White" modes > Store > Overwrite > Yes > change name by pressing "Register Name" > Done. 2. User mode > Communications Settings > Common Settings > TX Settings > Edit Standard Send Settings > Scanning Mode > select the scanning mode registered in step1 > OK. 15.3.7.1.6 FAX-transmitted image becomes too light on receiving side: User mode adjustment is not effective, FAX transmission
0010-4097
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy In the field, in addition to the adjustment in user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning > Exposure Recalibration > Send (B&W)], the symptom was improved by adjusting the density as follows: On Send screen, press [Scan Settings > Option > increase the density > OK]. Therefore, when the symptom occurs, perform the both adjustments before sending.
15.3.7.2 Reception Problem

15.3.7.2.1 FAX reception fails after host machine goes into sleep mode
0007-4579
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy Upgrade the system software to Ver.5.03 and later so that defects related to memory control and communication control has been corrected. As a temporary measure, select "High" in user mode [Common Settings> Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode].
15.3.7.3 Other Operational Defect

15.3.7.3.1 FAX-transmitted image is reduced in sub scanning direction on receiving side when sending to particular destination
0009-2936
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the filed, the symptom was solved by changing all of the following in service mode [FAX > SSSW]. 1. Activate inch/mm conversion (text mode): Change bit1 of [SW05] from "0" to "1." 2. Activate inch/mm conversion (text/photo mode): Change bit2 of [SW05] from "0" to "1." 3. Set scanning direction for inch/mm conversion to "both main and sub scanning direction": Change bit2 of [SW14] from "0" to "1." 15.3.7.3.2 FAX-received document that consists of 2 pages or more is printed in duplex
0009-2939
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description If FAX-received document consists of 2 pages or more, they are always printed in duplex when the following setting is "On"; In user mode [Communications Settings > RX Settings under Common Settings > Two-sided Print]. If you don't want to, change the setting to "Off". 15.3.7.3.3 FAX-transmitted image spreads across tow pages on receiving side when sending one page of image to particular destination
0009-2942
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy In the field, the symptom occurred because the length of the transmitted image was increased in the sub scanning direction. However, it was solved by executing the following in service mode [FAX > SSSW]. 1. Activate inch/mm conversion (text mode) function: Change bit1 of [SW05] from "0" to "1."
15-76
Chapter 15 2. Activate inch/mm conversion (text/photo mode) function: Change bit2 of [SW05] from "0" to "1." 3. Set scanning direction for inch/mm conversion to "both main and sub scanning direction": Change bit2 of [SW14] from "0" to "1."
15.3.7.4 Setting/Registration Defect

15.3.7.4.1 How to lengthen time before iRC6800 starts call-receipt operation (Auto RX)
0008-1591
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In service mode [FAX> Ncu> Auto RX> 007], change the set value (default: 2) so that the time before iRC6800 starts call-receipt operation will be lengthened by changing the number of CI (the number of ringing calls). 15.3.7.4.2 Shared folder on PC cannot be registered in address book: Windows XP
0008-3756
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description When attempting to register a shared folder on a PC (OS: Windows XP) in one of the address books as follows: in user mode [Address Book Settings> Register Address> Register New Address> File> select "Windows (SMB)" for Protocol> specify the PC> configure User and Password> designate the shared folder]; however, a message "Cannot find server." was displayed and the registration failed. When this symptom occurs, follow the steps below. Field Remedy 1. Right-click on the shared folder on the PC, select [Properties> Sharing], and place a check mark on both of the following messages "Share this folder on the network." and "Allow other users to change my files.". 2. Register the folder in the address book once again in user mode. For detail procedures of registration, refer to Sending and Facsimile Guide [Storing/Editing Address Book Settings> Storing New Addresses> File Server Addresses].
15.3.8 Jam (Main Unit) 15.3.8.1 1700 Jam Code: Explanation of 1700 Jam Code
0010-3858
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description 1700 Jam Code means a timeout jam and can be displayed when communication with the finisher is interrupted.
15.3.8.2 0103/0104 Jam Code Neuissiedler large-size/RA3 pickup fault

0006-3789
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Cause In a high temperature/humidity environment, Neuissiedler paper (13x19)/SRA3 paper tends to absorb moisture, thus causing pickup faults. Field Remedy Fit a pressure spring (service part; FC5-2525) to increase the pickup roller pressure. Work Procedure Fit the pressure spring [1] through the protrusion [2]; then, fit the spring in the groove [3] and hook it on the protrusion [4].
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
F-15-90
15-77
Chapter 15
15.3.8.3 0101 Jam Code: Only occurs with right paper deck, upon installation
0008-3147
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description This symptom occurred because the boss [1] of the support plate [2] for the separation roller was broken. As a result of inspection, it was found that the reason of the breakage is that the right door was opened without peeling off the shipping tag connected with the spacer for the separation roller and this applied an excessive force to the roller shaft. Jam Code 0101 is a delay jam at the right deck pickup sensor PS33. Field Remedy Open the right door and inspect the boss (rear) of the support plate for the separation roller in the right paper pick-up ass'y for breakage. If it is broken, replace the right paper pick-up ass'y with a new one. Note: Upon installation, be sure to peel off the three shipping tags before opening the right door. For your information, it is easier to remove the spacer if you push down the projection on it. FM2-0540 Right Paper Pick-up Ass'y
F-15-91
15.3.8.4 0109/0110 Jam Code: Vertical Path Roller does not rotate
0008-1598
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found these jam codes occurred because the right deck pull-off motor (M14) was faulty and the vertical path 1 roller did not rotate. They might occur during the delivery of the first sheet or during the next job just after a recovery from these jam codes. - 0109 Jam Code: Delay jam at the vertical path confluence sensor (PS32) - 0110 Jam Code: Delay jam at the vertical path 0 sensor (PS32) Field Remedy 1. In service mode [COPIER> Function> PART-CHK], select MTR, enter "14" with the numeric keys and press the OK key. Then, select MTR-ON and press the OK key. If the motor M14 is normal, it will run about 10 sec and the status will display "START", "ACTIVE", and "OK!" in this order. For your information, in order to visually inspect the motor rotation, open the right upper cover when executing MTR-ON. The status results in "NG" (does not run), go on to the Step 2. If it runs normally, go on to the Step 3 as the above paper detection sensors are faulty. 2. Manually rotate the vertical path 1 roller to check whether or not a mechanical excessive force is applied to it. If it is equal to the pre-registration roller's, replace the motor (M14) with a new one as the roller is normal. 3. In service mode [COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P006], observe the bits described below will be changed from "0" to "1" while opening the right upper cover and moving the sensor levers. If they are not changed, replace the sensors with a new one after making sure of no poor contact of the connectors. - bit0: PS32 (Vertical Path Confluence Sensor) - bit1: PS31 (Vertical Path 0 Sensor) FL2-0583 Stepping DC Motor FK2-0149 Photo-Interrupter
15.3.8.5 0109 Jam Code: Occurs only during duplex copy/print

0008-3146
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy The following was found as a result of inspection. Since the E ring in the duplexing outlet roller came off and the duplexing metal roller also came off. Accordingly, this jam code occurred frequently in duplex copy/print. When this symptom occurs during duplex copy/print, inspect the duplexing metal roller for installation condition. Description 0109 Jam Code: Delay jam at vertical path confluence sensor (PS32) FC5-2091
15.3.8.6 010A Jam Code: Occurs only with machines that are equipped with Side Paper Deck-D1
0008-3636
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found 010A jam occurred because of the following reason: Depending on how the Side Paper Deck-D1 is attached to the host
15-78
Chapter 15 machine, it could push the right door of the host machine inward, and thereby the adequate paper path is not maintained, resulting in 010A jam due to variations in the shape of the pre-registration guide 1. To prevent this, the pre-registration guide 1 has been modified so that the variations in shape is controlled. When this symptom occurs, replace the pre-registration guide 1 with a new one referring to the Field Remedy below. Note that all of the pre-registration guide 1 in the service part inventory have already been changed to the new one and the machines starting from the following serial numbers have the new guide: JHT02142 / JHS00422 / JJM03790 / JKL00019 / JKM00155 / JXH00240 / JKP01225 - 010A Jam Code: Delay jam at the registration sensor Field Remedy 1. Detach the Side Paper Deck-D1 from the host machine in reference to Service Manual of the Side Paper Deck-D1 [Parts Replacement Procedure > Detaching the Host Machine > Paper Deck]. 2. Remove the two screws [1] and then detach the right rear panel [2].
F-15-92
3. Open the upper right door [3] and remove the screw [4] that fixes the support tape.
F-15-93
4. Remove the one screw [5] and then detach the cable cover [6] on the right paper pick-up assembly.
F-15-94
5. Remove the one screw [7] and detach the connector blanking panel [8].
F-15-95
6. Remove the two screws [9] and detach the pre-registration guide 1 [10] and the pre-registration guide 2 [11] together.
15-79
Chapter 15
F-15-96
F-15-97
7. Detach the pre-registration guide 2 [11] from the registration guide 1 and then attach it to the new pre-registration guide 1.
F-15-98
8. Assemble all the detached parts again in reverse order that you follow when detaching them. 9. Attach the Side Paper Deck-D1 to the host machine. FC5-2111 Pre-registration Guide 1
15.3.8.7 010A Jam Code: Rotational failure of Manual feed pre-registration motor (M6) due to DC Controller PCB failure
0009-2438
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found that the error occurs because the manual feed pre-registration motor (M6) does not rotate on account of the DC Controller PCB failure. When the symptom occurs, follow the field remedy below. - 010A Jam Code: Delay jam at the OHP sensors (PS3/PS29). Field Remedy 1. In service mode, [COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR > enter the motor number "6" using the numeric key > OK > MTR-ON > OK] and then check if the selected motor rotates. If not, the signal output from the DC Controller PCB to the motor may be faulty. 2. Unplug and insert all the connectors of the DC Controller PCB for prevention of poor connection and then check if the symptom is solved. If not, replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one. FM2-0857 DC Controller PCB Assembly (120V) FM2-0858 DC Controller PCB Assembly (230V) FL2-0477 Stepping AC Motor (M6)
15.3.8.8 010C Jam Code: Occurs during feeding B5/STMT paper (small size), Due to rotational failure of paper feeder fan
0008-3399
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description A paper jam occurred when B5 paper was fed from the front deck. The jam code "010C" and the alarm code "330014" were recoded in the logs respectively. - 010C: Delay jam at the inside delivery sensor PS12 - 330014: Alarm for paper feeder fans 1/2 (FM3/FM4) Cause Since the Fixing Feed Driver PCB is faulty, the paper feeder fans (FM3/FM4) do not rotate and cannot keep the paper on the feed belt, causing a paper jam. Field Remedy 1. Make sure that the alarm code "330014" was recorded in service mode [COPIER> Display> ALARM-2]. If TIME-2 (recovery time) indicates "FFFF", that means the alarm state is not cleared. 2. Pull out the fixing feeder unit from the host machine and unfasten a screw from the cable retaining plate (FC5-5169) located at the front side of the pre-fixing feeder unit. Then, make sure of secure connections of the connectors between the fans and the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (J1305). Afterwards, put the fixing feeder unit back into the host machine.
15-80
Chapter 15 3. Turn the power OFF/ON, and make a copy (.any sized-paper is acceptable). Check ALARM-2 once again to make sure that TIME-2 of "330014" indicates the recovery time instead of "FFFF". If so, the root cause is related to poor connections of the connectors. If it still indicates "FFFF", go on to the Step 4. 4. The Fixing Feed Driver PCB is likely to be faulty, so replace it with a new one. If the symptom still recurs even after the replacement, make sure that the connector J1119 is securely fitted on the DC Controller PCB. If no connectivity problem is found, replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one. 5. After the replacement, turn the power OFF/ON and make a copy (any sized-paper is acceptable). Then, check ALARM-2 once again to make sure that TIME2 indicates the recovery time. FM2-0822 Fixing Feed Driver PCB FL2-2477 Fan FM2-0857 (120V), FM2-0858 (230V) DC Controller PCB
15.3.8.9 020E Jam Code: Cogged timing belt in Finisher-R1 is detached

0009-2440
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, 020E jam code occurred because the cogged timing belt (XF9-0748) in the finisher, which drives the lower roller (FC5-3620), was detached, and paper did not reach the buffer roller. In actual failure cases, A3 or B4-sized paper was delivered without a paper jam. and A4 or B5-sized paper was jammed. - 020E Jam Code: Stationary jam at the outside delivery sensor (PS13). Field Remedy Visually inspect the cogged timing belt to see whether it is properly positioned and the roller rotates. If the belt is detached, reinstall it.
15.3.8.10 0216 Jam Code: Malfunction of Registration Sensor Flag

0008-3643
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: Since the registration mount assembly has blurs on the location where the shaft of the registration sensor flag is fitted, the sensor flag does not move smoothly, consequently causing 0216 jam. - 0216 Jam Code: Stationary jam at the registration sensor. Field Remedy 1. Slide out the fixing feeder assembly from the host machine, and then detach the registration mount assembly [1] from the assembly. 2. Check whether the registration sensor flag moves smoothly. If not, visually inspect its shaft [3] for any abnormality. FM2-0472 Registration Mount Assembly FL2-0578 Registration Sensor Flag
F-15-99
15.3.8.11 0A0A/020A Jam Code: Sometimes jam occurrence indication remains displaying
0008-3139
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause The following was found as a result of inspection. Since there was a backlash in the sensor flag for the registration sensor (PS9), the paper detection lever of the sensor flag interfered with the guide plate and this prevented the sensor flag from moving smoothly. Accordingly, the above jam codes frequently occurred or the jam occurrence indication remained displaying. 0A0A: Residual jam at registration sensor 020A: Stationary jam at registration sensor Field Remedy When the symptom described above occurs, or these jam codes are recorded in the jam history, inspect the paper detection lever to check whether it interferes with the guide plate. If so, remove the Registration Mount Ass'y and the sensor flag, and insert a washer into the shaft (front side). Recommended washer size: 4.1mm (inner diameter) x 8mm (outer diameter) x 0.5 to 1mm (thick) (Washer part number: XD1-1104-135 through XD1-1104-139
15.3.8.12 0A0C Jam Code: Stationary jam at power-on at Inside Delivery Sensor PS12
0006-6564
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, 0A0C occurred at power-on because the sensor flag for the inside delivery sensor came off and blocked the sensor, which means that the host machine
15-81
Chapter 15 wrongly detects paper presence. Field Remedy Inspect the sensor flag for its installation state.
15.3.8.13 0A0C Jam Code: Stationary jam at Inside Delivery Sensor PS12,
0007-3902
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause When the fixing feeder unit was forcibly pressed inside the host machine while the reversal paper delivery door and the internal paper delivery unit were being opened, the internal paper delivery unit was deformed and thereby the position of the separation claw became misalignment, resulting in a paper jam. Field Remedy When the symptom frequently occurs, inspect the internal paper delivery unit. If any deformation is verified, replace it with a new one. Also, for the purpose of preventing any future incidents, explain your customer how to handle it. FM2-0495 Internal Paper Delivery Ass'y
15.3.8.14 0A15 Jam Code: Stationary jam at power-on at Fixing Inlet Sensor PS11
0006-6889
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, 0A15 occurred at power-on because the sensor flag for the fixing inlet sensor PS11 did not return to its initial position or the connector of the sensor was not securely fitted, causing the host machine to wrongly detect paper presence at power-on. Field Remedy 1. Check whether the sensor flag moves smoothly. If not, remove and install it once again. 2. Disconnect and insert the connector of the sensor once again.
15.3.8.15 0A16 Jam Code: Stationary jam at power-on at Left Deck Stationary Sensor PS47
0006-6900
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, a message "Pull out the paper deck and remove the jammed paper." was displayed after turning the power ON because the connector was not securely fitted between the host machine and the left deck paper pick-up unit. Field Remedy Pull out and remove the left front deck, and then unplug and reinsert the connector J517 that connects the host machine and the left deck paper pick-up unit.
15.3.9 Jam (Document Feeder) 15.3.9.1 Original feeding failure: How to set service mode items after clearing RAM, DADF-M1
0009-2436
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description As this machine stores the ADF-related service data in the RAM on the Reader Controller PCB, follow the field remedy below after the Reader Controller PCB has been replaced with a new one or the RAM has been cleared. Field Remedy 1. Find the setting values of the following service mode items from the P-PRINT that has been output and saved in place and enter the values in service mode. - Original stop position: [FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST]. - Original feed speed (magnification): [FEEDER > ADJUST > LA-SPEED]. 2. Adjust the ADF sensor sensitivity in service mode. - Tray width adjustment: [FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR, TRY-LTRR] - White level adjustment: [COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLV1, WLV2] 3. Upon performing step1 and 2 above, output the P-PRINT and save it in place. [Service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT].
15.3.10 Jam (FIN) 15.3.10.1 1101 Jam Code: Because Finisher Controller PCB is faulty, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2
0008-1195
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Jam Code 1101 is a feed stationary jam at the inlet path sensor PI33. As a result of inspection, this symptom occurred because of the following reason: Since the Finisher Controller PCB was faulty, the buffer rear end holding solenoid (SL34) did not attract the plunger completely and the buffer guide was not opened. Therefore, the rear end of the first sheet was not held by the buffer guide, resulting in a paper jam. Also, if the solenoid does not attract the plunger at all, the same jam might occur or misalignment of paper in a batch might otherwise occur. For the operation of the buffer guide, refer to Finisher Service Manual [Functions> Feed Drive System> Paper Delivery Path> Buffer/Processing Tray Path]. Field Remedy 1. In order to determine whether or not the root cause is related to the host machine, detach the finisher from the host machine and make sure that no paper jam occurs in the host machine. 2. Connect the finisher to the host machine. 3. In service mode [COPIER> I/O> SORTER> P006], make sure that bit4 is changed from "0" to "1" when the sensor lever is actuated. 4. Remove the finisher front door. 5. Actuate the door switches (2 locations) and turn the power of the host machine ON. 6. While making a copy in staple mode, inspect the solenoid to attract its plunger. If the solenoid cannot attract the plunger only by one-third, the Finisher Controller PCB is likely to be faulty, so replace it with a new one. FG3-2883 Finisher Controller PCB FL2-0821 Solenoid
15.3.10.2 1104/1101 Jam Code: Troubleshooting, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2

0008-0583
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description On Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2, jam code 1104 or 1101 (or both) occurs because of miscellaneous factors. The following describes the inspection results. When this symptom occurs, follow the steps below to determine the root cause (as of July 29, 2004).
15-82
Chapter 15 - 1104 jam: When paper does not pass through the feed path sensor (PI34) after paper is delivered for a prescribed time (distance) following the sensor has detected paper. - 1101 jam: When paper does not pass through the inlet sensor (PI33) after paper is delivered for a prescribed time (distance) following the sensor has detected paper.
F-15-100
[1] Compression spring (FC5-3674) in the entrance upper guide unit is not properly installed. Cause Since the compression spring in the entrance upper guide unit was not properly installed, the inlet roller [1] was free from pressure and paper was not delivered properly, resulting in a paper jam. Field Remedy Lift up the entrance upper guide and push the inlet roller from the back side by hand to check whether the roller is returned to its original position by spring pressure. If not, the compression spring is likely to come off, so reinstall it. [2] Finisher Controller PCB (FG3-2883) is faulty. Cause Since the Finisher Controller PCB was faulty, the buffer rear end holding solenoid (SL34) did not attract the plunger completely and the buffer guide was not opened completely. Therefore, the rear end of the first sheet was not held by the buffer guide, resulting in a paper jam. Also, if the solenoid does not attract the plunger at all, the same jam might occur or misalignment of paper in a batch might otherwise occur. Field Remedy Visually inspect the plunger of the solenoid. If the solenoid cannot attract the plunger only by half (or not at all), replace the Finisher Controller PCB with a new one. [3] Compression spring (FU5-2294) for the 1st delivery roller comes off. Cause Since the compression spring for the 1st delivery roller came off, the first sheet entered the processing tray; but the second sheet was unable to, resulting in a paper jam. Field Remedy Visually inspect the compression spring for its installation state. If it comes off or is not installed properly, reinstall it. [4] Grounding plate (FC5-5551) of swing guide unit is not properly positioned. Cause Since the grounding plate was positioned onto the metal plate of the swing guide, the plate blocked the movement of the swing guide, and paper was not delivered, resulting in a paper jam. Field Remedy Visually inspect the grounding plate and if it comes onto the metal plate correct it. [5] Back end down lever (Rear: FC5-3574) moves together with the shaft for the buffer roller. Cause Since grease which has been applied to the rear buffer roller holder adhered to the back end down lever (Rear), the lever moved together with the buffer roller shaft and blocked paper delivery movement, resulting in a paper jam. Field Remedy Turn the buffer roller shaft by hand and check whether the back end down lever (Rear) moves together with it. In such a case, remove the E rings holding the lever and slide the lever to the backward, Clean the grease away from the shaft with alcohol, and put the lever back to its original position. [6] E ring (FC5-4697) for the return roller (rear) comes off. Cause Since the return roller (rear) fell because the E ring came off, paper was not delivered, resulting in a paper jam. Field Remedy Lift up the swing guide unit from the finisher delivery tray side and check whether the E ring for the return roller comes off. If it comes off, reinstall it. After installation, make sure that it is securely installed by turning it.
15.3.10.3 1104 Jam Code: Because compression spring for 1st delivery roller comes off, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2
0008-1194
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Jam Code 1104 is a stationary jam recorded when paper does not pass through the feed path sensor (PI34) even after a prescribed time (distance) has elapsed following paper detection by the sensor. As a result of inspection, this symptom occurred because of the following reason: Since the compression spring for the 1st delivery roller came off, the first sheet entered the processing tray; but the second sheet was unable to, resulting in a paper jam. For the operation of the stack ejection roller, refer to Finisher Service Manual [Functions> Feed Drive System> Paper Delivery Path> Buffer/Processing Tray Path]. Field Remedy 1. In order to determine whether or not the root cause is related to the host machine, detach the finisher from the host machine and make sure that no paper jam occurs in the host machine. 2. Connect the finisher to the host machine.
15-83
Chapter 15 3. In service mode [COPIER> I/O> SORTER> P011], make sure that bit4 is changed from "0" to "1" when the sensor lever is actuated. 4. Inspect the compression spring for the 1st delivery roller. If it comes off, install it. FU5-2294 Compression Spring
15.3.10.4 1104/1101 Jam Code: Because compression spring for inlet roller is not properly installed, Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2
0008-1197
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the compression spring in the entrance upper guide unit was not properly installed, the inlet roller [1] was free from pressure and paper was not delivered properly, resulting in a paper jam. - 1104 jam: When paper does not pass through the feed path sensor (PI34) after paper is delivered for a prescribed time (distance) following the sensor has detected paper. - 1101 jam: When paper does not pass through the inlet sensor (PI33) after paper is delivered for a prescribed time (distance) following the sensor has detected paper. Field Remedy Lift up the entrance upper guide and push the inlet roller from the back side by hand to check whether the roller is returned to its original position by spring pressure. If not, the compression spring is likely to come off, so reinstall it. FC5-3674 Compression Spring
F-15-101
15.3.10.5 1104 Jam Code: Because grounding plate of swing guide unit is not properly positioned, Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2
0008-1198
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, since the grounding plate [1] was positioned onto the metal plate [3] of the swing guide [2] (the grounding plate should come into contact with the guide at its side), the plate blocked the movement of the swing guide, and paper was not delivered, resulting in a paper jam. When this symptom occurs, inspect the grounding plate, and if it comes onto the metal plate correct it. - 1104 jam: When paper does not pass through the feed path sensor (PI34) after paper is delivered for a prescribed time (distance) following the sensor has detected paper.
15-84
Chapter 15
F-15-102
15.3.10.6 1200 Jam Code: Timing Jam due to soil of Inlet Path Sensor PI33
0007-5144
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the jam occurrence was displayed on the LCD because the host machine wrongly detected paper presence at the Inlet Path Sensor (PI33) of Finisher before it received a signal of paper delivery. This was because the sensor was soiled. When this symptom occurs or the jam code was recorded in the jam history, clean the Inlet Path Sensor.
15.3.11 Error Code 15.3.11.1 E001-0001/E001-0003 Error Code: When turning Energy Save Mode off
0006-6999
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy Upgrade the ROM on the DC Controller PCB to Ver.6.01 and later. With this version, heat-control of the fixing heater will be turned OFF even when the energy save key is pressed immediately after the completion of a continuous print job. Description In the field, E001-0001 or E001-0003 was displayed after the following actions were performed: After the completion of a continuous print job, "Please wait a moment." was displayed because the heater temperature has become low. An operator pressed the energy save key within a few seconds through 1 minute and 20 seconds after the above message was displayed. After a while, other operator pressed the energy save key once again to resume the machine; however, the LCD on the control panel did not come on. Consequently, the operator turned the power OFF/ON. As a result, E001-0001 or E001-0003 was displayed. Note: These error codes will not be displayed under the following conditions: If an operator presses the energy save key after 1 minute and 20 seconds have passed following the completion of a continuous print job. In addition, if the host machine automatically goes into the low-power mode or the auto sleep mode after a specific period of time designated in user mode [Timer Settings> Low-power Mode, or Auto Sleep Time].
15.3.11.2 E001-0001/E001-0002/E001-0003 Error Code: Because fixing drawer (AC Driver cable) has poor contact
0009-8973
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: When the fixing feeder assembly is set into the machine in state where the fixing drawer (J8) on the machine side loses smooth movement, the fixing drawer on the machine side has poor contact with that on the fixing feeder assembly side, causing E001-0001/E0010002/E001-0003. - E001 can be displayed when the rise in the temperature of the fixing assembly is excessive. (-0001: fixing roller, -0002: outside heating roller, -0003: pressure roller) Cause Since the fixing drawer had poor contact, the temperature detection sensor falsely detected that the temperature of the fixing assembly was lower than actual temperature. This caused the DC Controller PCB to increase the temperature of the assembly. However, the temperature detection sensor suddenly detected that the rise in the temperature of the assembly was excessive when the fixing drawer had good contact, consequently causing the symptom. Field Remedy 1. Turn the control panel switch and main power switch OFF in sequence, and disconnect the power cable. Then remove the rear panels to detach the controller box. 2. Remove the fixing drawer and then remove the stepped screw of the drawer. 3. Apply grease (MOLYKOTE PG641) to the portion of the stepped screw where the washer (XD1-1104-135) moves, re-fit the stepped screw to the fixing drawer, and then make sure that the washer moves smoothly on the surface of the stepped screw. Note: Be sure not to apply grease to the terminal of the fixing drawer. 4. Return the fixing drawer and the controller box to the original position. 5. Connect the power cable and then turn the main power switch ON. CK-0562 Grease FM2-0921 AC Driver Cable (Fixing Drawer)
15.3.11.3 E001-0002 Error Code: Abnormal (rumbling) sound occurs when fixing roller is rotating
0009-9048
15-85
Chapter 15 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: When the fixing roller is rotating, an abnormal rumbling sound occurs and the outside heating roller vibrates to make the thermistor temporarily lose the appropriate contact with the outside heating roller, causing the machine to make a false detection of the fixing temperature. This is because the fixing roller is deformed after some period of use. - E001-0002 can be displayed when the rise in the temperature of the outside heating roller is excessive. Field Remedy When the abnormal sound from the fixing roller or a false detection of the fixing temperature occurs, follow the procedure below. 1. Replace the fixing roller with a new one. 2. Check if the thermistor is attached in a way that its detection surface becomes parallel to the outside heating roller. If not, modify its position. 3. In service mode [COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR], press [OK] and turn the control panel switch OFF. And then turn the main power switch OFF/ON. FC5-6298 Fixing Roller FK2-0013 Thermistor Unit
15.3.11.4 E003-0041/E003-0042/E003-0043 Error Code: Because fixing drawer (AC Driver cable) has poor contact
0009-9191
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: When the fixing feeder assembly is set to the machine, the fixing drawer on the fixing feeder assembly side has poor contact with that on the machine side, causing E003-0041/E003-0042/E003-0043. This is because the fixing drawer (J8) on the machine side loses smooth movement. - E003 can be displayed when the temperature of the fixing assembly drops abnormally after standby. (-0001: the temperature of the fixing roller drops below 150deg. C, -0002: the temperature of the outside heating roller drops below 190 deg. C, -0003: the temperature of the pressure roller drops below 120 deg. C) Cause Since the fixing drawer had poor contact, the DC controller PCB detected that the temperature of the fixing assembly detected with the thermistor stays at low level for more than 1 second. Field Remedy 1. Turn the control panel switch and main power switch OFF in sequence, and disconnect the power cable. Then remove the rear panels to detach the controller box. 2. Remove the fixing drawer and then remove the stepped screw of the drawer. 3. Apply grease (MOLYKOTE PG641) to the portion of the stepped screw where the washer (XD1-1104-135) moves, re-fit the stepped screw to the fixing drawer, and then make sure that the washer moves smoothly on the surface of the stepped screw. Note: Be sure not to apply grease to the terminal of the fixing drawer. 4. Return the fixing drawer and the controller box to their original position. 5. Connect the power cable and then turn the main power switch ON. 6. Make the following selections in service mode [COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR], and then press [OK]. Thereafter, turn the control panel switch OFF and turn the main power switch OFF/ON. 7. In service mode [COPIER > ANALOG > FIX-UC/FIX-UE/FIX-LC/FIX-LE/FIX-EXC/FIX-EXL], make sure that the temperature is controlled normally. CK-0562 Grease FM2-0921 AC Driver Cable (Fixing Drawer)
15.3.11.5 E004-0002 Error Code: Fixing Sub Heater is broken

0007-3975
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Because of breakage or poor installation of the fixing sub heater in the fixing unit, E004-0002 was displayed after paper was picked up following a press of the copy start key. Afterwards, checking the jam history in service mode revealed that 0A05/0A08/0A06 (the difference between them is paper source) were recorded. Field Remedy Inspect the fixing sub heater for breakage or poor installation. If any problem is found, replace or reinstall the fixing sub heater. FK2-0049: 120V FK2-0054: 230V
15.3.11.6 E005-0000 Error Code: How to clear error code

0006-5356
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy When E005-0000 is displayed, replace the fixing web with a new one and then clear the count in the following two service modes. 1. In service mode [COPIER> Counter> MISC> FIX-WEB], press the "C" key to clear the counter. 2. In service mode [COPIER> Counter> DRBL1> FIX-WEB], press the "C" key to clear the counter. 3. Turn the power OFF/ON. Description E005 is an error code related to the fixing web. When the total count of the fixing web solenoid turning ON has reached 450 thousand, or when the web level detecting lever drops through the cut-out, a message "Fixing web is low." will be displayed. Then, if the fixing web continues to be used without replacement and the count has reached 3,000, E005-0000 will be displayed.
15.3.11.7 E006-0001 Error Code: Because fixing drawer (AC Driver cable) has poor contact
0009-8974
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: When the fixing feeder assembly is set into the machine in state where the fixing drawer (J8) on the machine side loses smooth movement, the fixing drawer on the machine side has poor contact with that on the fixing feeder assembly side, causing E006-0001. - E006-0001 can be displayed when the fixing drawer has been identified as being disconnected. Field Remedy 1. Turn the control panel switch and main power switch OFF in sequence, and disconnect the power cable. Then remove the rear panels to detach the controller box. 2. Remove the fixing drawer and then remove the stepped screw of the drawer. 3. Apply grease (MOLYKOTE PG641) to the portion of the stepped screw where the washer (XD1-1104-135) moves, and then re-fit the stepped screw to the fixing drawer to make sure that the washer moves smoothly on the surface of the stepped screw. Note: Be sure not to apply grease to the terminal of the fixing drawer. 4. Return the fixing drawer and the controller box to the original position. 5. Connect the power cable and then turn the main power switch ON. CK-0562 Grease FM2-0921 AC Driver Cable (Fixing Drawer)
15-86
Chapter 15
15.3.11.8 E006-0001 Error Code: Due to deformation of fixing roller

0009-9044
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the error code was displayed although the front cover of the machine was closed (i.e., the fixing/feeder assembly was set properly). Since this was because the fixing roller was deformed, the roller was replaced with a new one. - E006-0001 can be displayed when the fixing drawer has been identified as being disconnected. Field Remedy 1. Slide out the fixing/feeder assembly from the machine and turn the knob on the fixing assembly to check if the assembly rotates smoothly. If it does not, check the following rollers for deformation: fixing roller, pressure roller, heating roller, and web cleaning roller. 2. Replace the deformed roller with a new one. FC5-6298 Fixing Roller FC5-6299 Pressure Roller FC5-2285 Heating Roller FC5-2287 Cleaning Roller
15.3.11.9 E008-0001 Error Code: Necessary steps upon indication

0009-2441
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description E008-0001 can be displayed when the page count for the fixing roller exceeds the prescribed value. Field Remedy 1. Replace the fixing roller with a new one. 2. In service mode [COPIER> Counter> DRBL-1> FX-UP-RL], press the current page count and clear it. 3. Turn the control panel switch OFF and turn the main power switch OFF/ON. FC5-6298 Fixing Roller
15.3.11.10 E009-00FF Error Code: Because of broken 24T gear in fixing drive unit
0008-3746
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause The possible causes of the detail code "00FF" are: the heating estrangement motor (M22), the external heating HP sensor (PS21), or the DC Controller PCB is faulty. In actual failure cases, when the external heating roller came in contact with or moved away from the fixing roller, the 24T gear hit against the stopper, causing a breakage of the 24T gear after long use. Field Remedy When this symptom occurs, inspect the 24T gear and replace it with a new one if it is broken. Simultaneously, visually inspect the 16/42T gear that drives the 24T gear. If it is broken, replace it with a new one, too. Note: When replacing the 24T gear, it is necessary to remove the heating roller sensor flag that is installed in the same shaft as the 24T gear. As the sensor flag is secured by snap-in claws, it is possible that the claws might be broken if being released too much. If it is broken, replace it with a new one. Description E009-00FF: To be displayed when it is detected that the external heating roller remains in contact with the fixing roller. FU5-0178: 24T Gear FU5-0214: 16/24T Gear FC5-2358: External Heating Roller Sensor Flag
15.3.11.11 E514-8001/E514-8002 Error Code / Misalignment in staple/sort/group mode: Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2

0008-3831
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: The back end assist plate [2] and the back end assist button [3] of the operation tray assembly [1] come off of the cogged timing belt [4], and thereby E514 is displayed or a misalignment attributed to a failure in the stack delivery operation occurs.
F-15-103
Field Remedy As the cogged timing belt may be damaged, replace it with a new one, and then fit the back end assist plate and the back end assist button to the new belt. FC5-3553 Cogged Timing Belt FC5-3554 Back End Assist Plate FC5-4715 Back End Assist Button
15.3.11.12 E013-0001 Error Code: How to clear waste toner full detection
0006-4907
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy After replacing the waste toner case or removing the waste toner from the case, clear the toner counter in service mode as follows: Select [COPIER> Counter> MISC> WST-TNR], press "C" (Clear key) to clear the counter, and turn the power OFF/ON. Description E013-0001 can be displayed when the waste toner case has become full.
15-87
Chapter 15
15.3.11.13 E013-0001 Error Code: How to change the waste toner detection timing
0006-4909
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The waste toner detection timing is determined by the total page counts specified in service mode below: 1. Page counts until the warning message is indicated 2. Page counts between the warning message and E013 indication Field Remedy Follow the steps below if you want to change these page counts: 1. Page counts until the warning message is indicated In service mode [COPIER> Adjust> MISC> WT-FL-LM], select any number from "0" through "4". 0: 80,000 / 1: 140,000 / 2: 210,000 (default) / 3: 320,000 / 4: 460,000 2. Page counts between the warning message and E013 indication In service mode [COPIER> Adjust> MISC> WT-ER-LV], select any number from "0" though "3". 0: 1 / 1: 20,000 / 2: 40,000 (default) / 3: 60,000
15.3.11.14 E014-0001 Error Code/abnormal noise: Detachment of fixing roller occurs because C-ring (stop ring) is detached
0010-3850
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: When the fixing roller is rotating, friction resistance occurs between the C-ring and spacer on the rear side of the fixing roller. This resistance detaches the fixing roller, and applies a load to the fixing motor, consequently causing the symptom. To prevent this, a rib has been added to the bore of the spacer. Field Remedy Check the shape of the spacer on the rear side of the fixing roller. If the spacer has no rib, replace it with a new one having a rib. Note: When the fixing roller is replaced with a new one or detached for a service work, check the shape of the spacer. If it does not have the rib, replace it with a new one. - E014-0001 can be displayed when a lock state is not identified for 1 sec or more after motor start-up. FC5-2590 Fixing Spacer
15.3.11.15 E020-0XD2 Error Code: Claws of color developing assembly cover are not securely snapped into place
0007-5154
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy As a result of inspection, When the symptom occurs, inspect the affected color developing assembly cover by referring to the first two digits in the sub code (01: Y, 02: M, 03: C) to make sure that the claws are securely snapped into place. Description E020-0XD2 can be displayed when the average of the patch Sig values is 200 or lower as a result of INIT control (service mode INISET-x) upon initial setup. The suspect causes are: The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The primary transfer engagement is faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty.
15.3.11.16 E020-03A0 Error Code: When making continuous or intermittent copy of color image
0007-5213
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy The symptom found in our inspection is as follows: When making continuous or intermittent copy of color image, a message "Adjusting gradation. Please wait a moment." appeared and then the error code was displayed. Although the host machine became ready after turning the power OFF/ON, the same symptom recurred. This is because the connector J1135 on the DC Controller PCB was disconnected and 12V was not supplied to the ATR sensor. For your information, there is no problem with the output images. And this symptom does not occur with black-and-white copy. When the symptom occurs, inspect the connector J1135 for pin deformation or poor contact. Description E020-03A0 can be displayed when the Sig value is lower than 62 as a result of ATR control. The suspect causes are: The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact.
15-88
Chapter 15
F-15-104
15.3.11.17 E020-0xA9/0xA0 Error Code: Troubleshooting

0008-0878
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description E020-0xA9 can be displayed when the T/D ratio detected as a result of ATR control falls below its lower limit (-4%) three consecutive times. E020-0xA0 can be displayed when the Sig value detected as a result of ATR control is lower than 62. The possible causes is that enough amount of toner has not been supplied because the ATR shutter does not open/close smoothly or the connectors of the shutter solenoid are not securely fitted (or pinched cables) or the toner cartridge is not properly installed. Follow the steps below to determine the root cause. Field Remedy 1. Have the P-PRINT on hand which had been output immediately after executing "INISET" when the developing ass'y was last replaced. 2. Without turning the power OFF, record all the readings under service mode [COPIER> Adjust> DENS]. 3. Compare the readings in step 1 and step 2, and if there are discrepancies, enter the readings of the P-PRINT to service mode [COPIER> Adjust> DENS]. 4. Without turning the power OFF, record all the readings under service mode [COPIER> Display> DENS> DENS-Y/M/C, REF-Y/M/C, SGNL-Y/M/C]. Note: If the power is mistakenly turned OFF/ON, all the readings will be cleared. In such a case, make a color copy of ten or more sheets in A4 size, and compare the readings once again. 5. Turn the power OFF/ON to clear E020. Then, make a copy of CA1-chart or output a test print (PG TYPE=10). 6. If one or two colors of DENS-Y/M/C are smaller than -4.0% in step 4 and the output image in step 5 is light, go to step 7. If all the three colors of DENS-Y/M/C are smaller than -4.0% in step 4 and the output image in step 5 is light, go to step 10. If the output image in step 5 does not match the readings of DENS-Y/M/C in step 4, go to step 9. 7. If all the readings are identical in step 3, go to step 8. If not, output a test print (PG TYPE=6) of 20 sheets in A4 size and check the readings of DENS-Y/M/ C. Continue this two to three times. If the readings increase, end this work and monitor the machine condition. If the readings do not change, go to step 8. Note: If E020 occurs during outputting the test prints, turn the power OFF/ON and continue to print. 8. Visually inspect the developing cylinder surface of the affected color (whose DENS is smaller than -4.0%). If the cylinder surface looks like normal [1], go to step 9. If it is obviously black [2], toner has not been supplied to the developing ass'y. In this case, check the following and if any abnormality is found correct it.
F-15-105
- Turn the shaft [3] of the toner feed screw by hand. Does the gear [4] rotate normally? - Compare the shaft rotation of the affected developing unit with the normal one's. Isn't it too much heavy? - Is the knob of the toner cartridge locked securely as shown in [5]? - Has the protective sheet been peeled off from the toner supply mouth in the developing rotary as shown in [6]? After correcting the defective situation, replace the affected developing unit or the developer with a new one. Then, execute "INISET" for the changed color.
15-89
Chapter 15
F-15-106
F-15-107
9. It is possible that the ATR shutter is not opened/closed properly. Pull the plunger of the shutter solenoid [7] to check whether the shutter is opened/closed smoothly. In addition, make sure that the connectors [8,9,10,11] of the ATR shutter cable are securely fitted and there is no pinched cable.
F-15-108
F-15-109
F-15-110
10. When E020-0xA0 is displayed, check if J1135 or J119 on the DC controller PCB has poor connection. If poor connection is not found, replace the DC controller PCB with a new one. When E020-0x9 is displayed, it is possible that the gear [12], which drives the toner feed screw and is installed at the rear side
15-90
Chapter 15 of the host machine, is broken. Check whether it rotates smoothly clockwise/counterclockwise. If it rotates smoothly, replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one.
F-15-111
15.3.11.18 E020-0xA8/0xA2 Error Code: Troubleshooting

0008-1005
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description E020-0xA8 can be displayed when the T/D ratio detected as a result of ATR control exceeds its upper limit (5%) three consecutive times. E020-0xA2 can be displayed when the Sig value detected as a result of ATR control is higher than 960. The possible cause is an oversupply of toner. Follow the steps below to determine the root cause. Field Remedy 1. Have the P-PRINT on hand which had been output immediately after executing "INISET" when the developing ass'y was last replaced. 2. Without turning the power OFF, record all the readings under service mode [COPIER> Adjust> DENS]. 3. Compare the readings in step 1 and step 2, and if there are discrepancies, enter the readings of the P-PRINT to service mode [COPIER> Adjust> DENS]. 4. Without turning the power OFF, record all the readings under service mode [COPIER> Display> DENS> DENS-Y/M/C, REF-Y/M/C, SGNL-Y/M/C]. Note: If the power is mistakenly turned OFF/ON, all the readings will be cleared. In such a case, make a color copy of ten or more sheets in A4 size, and compare the readings once again. 5. If one or two colors are +5.0% or higher in DENS-Y/M/C, go to step 6. If all the three colors are +5.0% or higher, go to step 9. 6. If all the readings are identical in step 3, go to step 7. If not, output a test print (PG TYPE=10) of 20 sheets in A4 size and check the readings of DENS-Y/ M/C. Continue this two to three times. If the readings decrease, end this work and monitor the machine condition. Note: If E020 occurs during outputting the test prints, turn the power OFF/ON and continue to print. 7. Visually inspect the developing cylinder surface of the affected color (whose DENS is +5.0 or higher). If the cylinder surface is exposed [1], go to step 8. If it is close to the toner color [2], it is possible that excessive amount of toner has been supplied. In this case, check the following:
F-15-112
- Turn the shaft [3] of the toner feed screw by hand. Does the gear [4] rotate normally? - Compare the shaft rotation of the affected developing unit with the normal one's. Isn't it too much light? - Visually inspect the toner supply valve [5] and the toner ejection valve [6] for any deformation or damage.
F-15-113
15-91
Chapter 15
F-15-114
If no mechanical difference is confirmed, toner which had been oversupplied should be consumed. Output a test print (PG TYPE=5, DENS of the affected color=255, other colors=0) of 20 sheets in A4 size. Then, check whether the reading under service mode [COPIER> Display> DENS] decreases. If it decreases, end this work and monitor the machine condition. 8. As no developer is left, DENS-Y/M/C is detected higher wrongly. Replace the affected developing unit or the developer with a new one. Then, execute "INISET" for the changed color. 9. When E020-0xA2 is displayed, check if J1135 or J119 on the DC Controller PCB has poor connection. If poor connection is not confirmed, replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one. When E020-0xA8 is displayed, it is possible that the gear [7], which drives the toner feed screw and is installed at the rear side of the host machine, is locked. Check whether it rotates smoothly clockwise/counterclockwise. If it rotates smoothly, replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one.
F-15-115
15.3.11.19 E020-0281 Error Code: When auto gradation adjustment is performed upon installation
0008-1593
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy When the auto gradation adjustment was performed upon installation, the LCD displayed a message "Adjusting gradation. Please wait a moment." and the error code was displayed because the rightmost pin of the connector J261, which is located at the front plate and connects the cables for the patch detection sensor unit, was deformed. When the symptom occurs, inspect the connector pins for deformation. If they are deformed, correct them.
F-15-116
Description E020-0281 can be displayed when the P-SENS-P value at time of reading the background (intermediate transfer belt surface) for patch detection is lower than 255. The suspected causes are: The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The ITB cleaner is faulty.
15.3.11.20 E020-03A0/E020-03A1/E020-03A2/E020-03A3 Error Code: Because output voltage from DC Power Relay PCB is not enough
0008-3256
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When "INISET-3" was executed upon installation, it looked as if it had been completed normally; however, when checking the ATR output value on P-PRINT, the readings of SGNL and REF were abnormal for all YMC; SGNL was 1035 (normally 400 through 600) and REF was 380 (normally 510 through 520). If you keep using the host machine as it is, E020 might occur with the detail codes 03A0/03A1/03A2/03A3 (03xx is displayed because Cyan is first checked for the ATR control.). Cause The output voltage from the DC Power Relay PCB to the ATR sensor is not enough (only -8V is output although -12V should be under normal circumstances). Field Remedy 1. In service mode [COPIER> Adjust> DENS> "SGNL" and "REF"], check the readings, and if an abnormal value is confirmed as described above, go to step 2. 2. Using a tester (multimeter), measure the 1st pin (GND) and the 2nd pin (-12V) of J119 on the DC Power Relay PCB, or the 4th pin (GND) and the 3rd pin (-
15-92
Chapter 15 12V) of J1135 on the DC Controller PCB. If the output is not -12V, replace the DC Power Relay PCB with a new one. FM2-0843 DC Power Relay PCB
15.3.11.21 E020-03A0 Error Code: Displayed after replacement of DC Controller PCB

0009-2453
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the error code was displayed because all the values for [Service mode COPIER > ADJUST > DENS] were not entered after replacement of the DC Controller PCB. After replacement of the PCB or the RAM clear, enter the 12 items of [DENS] in service mode referring to the P-PRINT that has been kept in place.
15.3.11.22 E020-00FF Error Code: Because of DC Controller PCB failure

0009-2455
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found that the error occurs because the black toner supply motor (M25) and the hopper stirring motor (M23) fail to rotate on account of the DC controller PCB failure. When the symptom occurs, follow the field remedy below. - E020-00FF shows there is no toner inside the black developing assembly and can be displayed; 1. When toner is not supplied to the developing assembly correctly. 2. When the hopper stirring motor does not rotate normally. Field Remedy 1. In service mode, [COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR > enter the motor number "23" or "25" using the numeric key > OK > MTR-ON > OK] and then check if the selected motor rotates. If not, the signal output from the DC Controller PCB to the motor may be faulty. 2. Unplug and insert all the connectors of the DC Controller PCB for prevention of poor connection and check if the symptom is solved, If not, replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one. FM2-0857 DC Controller PCB Assembly (120V) FM2-0858 DC Controller PCB Assembly (230V) FK2-0015 DC 24V Motor (M23, M25)
15.3.11.23 E020-03A0 Error Code: Because J119 connector on DC power relay PCB is disconnected
0009-8934
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy Check if the J119 connector of the DC Power Replay PCB and the J1135 connector of the DC Controller PCB are not disconnected. Description In the field, the error code occurred one week after the installation. At that time, it was recovered by turning the main power switch OFF/ON, however, it recurred about one month later. To be more precise, it occurred after making 10 sheets of color copy continuously, although it never occurred when making copies continuously in the monochrome mode. Executing "INIT-C" in service mode after replacement of the cyan developing assembly and developer solved the error code, however, the SIGNAL value was as low as "8" or "9" (usually around "510"). - E020-03A0 can be displayed when the Sig value detected as a result of ATR control is lower than 62. Cause - (minus) 12V that should be supplied for the ATR sensor from the DC Power Relay PCB via the DC Controller PCB was not supplied. FM2-0843 DC Power Relay PCB Assembly
15.3.11.24 E020-00FF Error Code: Because hopper stirring motor (M23) causes rotation failure
0010-3855
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: The hopper stirring motor causes rotation failure and fails to supply Bk toner for the developing assembly, consequently causing the symptom. However, replacement of the motor corrects the symptom. Field Remedy 1. In service mode [COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR > enter the motor number "23" using the numeric keys > OK > MTR-ON > OK] and then check if the hopper stirring motor rotates. If it rotates, go to the step2 below. If it does not rotate, go to the step3 below. 2. It is thought that a toner level sensor is faulty. According to toner supply sequence, the toner supply motor drives to supply toner for the developing assembly when the sub hopper level sensor (TS2) detects the presence of toner and the black toner level sensor (TS1) detects the absence of toner. Therefore, there is possibility that the toner level is not detected correctly due to a defective sensor. Check the sensors for a problem, and replace them with a new one if necessary. 3. Since it is thought that the hopper stirring motor or the DC controller PCB is faulty, re-insert all the connectors of the DC controller PCB and the hopper stirring motor to correct poor connection. If the symptom still occurs, replace the hopper stirring motor and then the DC Controller PCB with a new one. - E020-00FF means the absence of toner in the Bk developing assembly and can be displayed under the following conditions; a: when toner is not supplied correctly for the developing assembly b. when the hopper stirring motor does not rotate normally FK2-0015 Hopper Stirring Motor/Black Toner Supply Motor FM2-0857 DC Controller PCB Assembly (120V) FM2-0858 DC Controller PCB Assembly (230V) FK2-0158 Toner Sensor (TS1/TS2)
15.3.11.25 E021-0001 Error Code: Rotational failure of Developing Rotary Motor due to faulty DC Controller PCB
0007-5153
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy As a result of inspection, this error code was displayed because the developing rotary motor (M5) did not rotate due to a faulty DC Controller PCB. When the symptom described below occurs, replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one. Description Since a message "Replace toner cartridge. (Yellow)" appears after power-ON, the toner slot is opened; however, the developing rotary is stopped at a position where Magenta toner cartridge can be replaced, or any cartridges cannot be replaced. Then, opening and closing the toner slot several times, a different message "Ready to copy." appears. When making a full-colored copy, a paper jam occurs (Jam Code 0Axx) and finally the error code is displayed. The color area becomes blank on the paper. FM2-0821 DC Controller PCB
15.3.11.26 E043-0001 Error Code: Abnormal noise from Paper Pick-up Ass'y of Side Paper Deck
0009-2456
15-93
Chapter 15 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: Because of rotational failure of the deck main motor (M101), abnormal noise occurs from the side paper deck when feeding paper from the deck and then E043-0001 is displayed. When the symptom occurs, replace the deck main motor with a new one after making sure that mechanical load on the feeding system is not excessive. - E043-0001 can be displayed when the rotation of the motor is not detected for 1 second or more after the motor starts up. FK2-0118 DC Motor
15.3.11.27 E061-0007 Error Code: Because potential sensor connector is disconnected upon installation
0009-8870
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the error code occurred when "INSET" was performed for the color developing assembly upon installation, although "TONER-S" for the black developing assembly was performed normally. This was because the potential sensor cable connector (J407) was disconnected. When the symptom occurs, check the cable connector for disconnection or poor connection. - E061-0007 can be displayed when the potential that is read is outside the +/- 30V range during adjustment of EPC offset. FL2-0986 Potential Sensor Cable
15.3.11.28 E061-0001/E061-0003 Error Code: Because potential sensor PCB is faulty

0010-3849
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found that the error code was corrected by replacing the potential sensor PCB with a new one. - E061-0001 can be displayed when the potential is 10V or less during initial rotation at time of image forming. - E061-0003 can be displayed when a level of potential higher than the grid is sampled at time of adjusting the grid bias. Field Remedy Reinsert all the connectors on the potential sensor PCB and the connector of the potential sensor connect cable. If the symptom still occurs, replace the potential sensor PCB with a new one. FM2-0444 Potential Sensor PCB Assembly
15.3.11.29 E070-0001 Error Code: ITB Home Position detection error

0006-6891
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Cause In the field, this symptom occurred because the primary transfer roller locking lever failed to be fixed upon installation and this caused a rotational failure of the ITB belt, resulting in an error of the ITB home position detection. Field Remedy Lift the primary transfer roller locking lever up rightwad and fix it with a binging screw (M4x8). Description E070-0001 can be displayed when the ITB home position is not detected within a specific period of time (approximately 4 seconds).
15.3.11.30 E070-0001 Error Code: ITB home position cannot be detected after replacement of ITB
0006-8813
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: At the time of replacement of the ITB, the internal scraper peeled a white sticker for the ITB home position detection off the ITB, causing a home position detection error. As a preventive measure, the internal scraper has been modified in order not to come in contact with the white sticker. The following are the starting serial numbers: JHS00161/JHT00164/JKH00006/JJM00004/JXH00004/JKM00002/JKP00001 Field Remedy If you replace the ITB with a new one on a machine whose serial number is earlier than the above, replace the internal scraper simultaneously. FL2-0398: Internal Scraper
15.3.11.31 E070-0003 Error Code: Because of poor contact of leaf spring of static-charge eliminator in ITB Transfer Ass'y, after replacement of primary transfer roller
0008-3241
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the above error code was displayed because the leaf spring of the static-charge eliminator in the ITB Transfer Ass'y came in contact with the auxiliary roller in the opposite direction [1]. Since a high voltage is applied to the static-charge eliminator, a leakage might occur from it if it is not positioned properly, resulting in the error code. The proper position is shown in [2]. Field Remedy When this symptom occurs, inspect the leaf spring to check whether it contacts with the auxiliary roller in the proper position and correct it if it is improper. And, if it is deformed, replace it with a new one by referring to the procedure in the service manual [Image Formation> Parts Replacement Procedure> Intermediate Transfer Belt Static Eliminator]. Note: When putting back the roller arm which has been pulled up in order to replace the primary transfer roller, be sure not to position the leaf spring in the opposite direction against the auxiliary roller. FL2-0408 Static-Charge Eliminator
15-94
Chapter 15
F-15-117
15.3.11.32 E070-0101 Error Code: Reflecting surface for ITB HP detection is soiled
0008-3253
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, this error code was displayed because the reflecting surfaces backside of the ITB for ITB home position detection were soiled and was resolved by cleaning the surfaces. When this symptom occurs, clean the ITB belt, the reflecting surfaces and the sensor. E070-0101: The period of time between the HP sensor (PS30) detects the ITB home position and detects next time is longer than specified.
15.3.11.33 E070 Error Code: Difference between sub codes 0001 and 0002 and their function
0008-7147
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description E070 is an error code displayed when the ITB home position cannot be detected by the ITB HP sensors. The last two digits in the sub code "01" mean the rear home position sensor (PS30) and "02" mean the front one (PS1). - E070-0001: ITB home position error detected by the rear sensor (PS30). - E070-0002: ITB home position error detected by the front sensor (PS1). This error code will be displayed when the ITB home position cannot be detected within a specific period of time (approximately 4 seconds) after the drum/ITB motor (M2) has started rotating. The signal from these sensors is used as a reference signal for write start position of full-colored image. For more details, refer to Service Manual [Image Formation > Transfer Device > Detecting the ITB Home Position].
15.3.11.34 E073-0001 Error Code: Because of deformation of release arm of Fixing Feeder Ass'y
0008-3779
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Field Remedy As a result of inspection, it was found this symptom occurred because of the following reasons: the Fixing Feeder Ass'y was forcibly pulled out without shifting down the release lever completely at the time of jam clearance or the front cover was forcibly closed without resetting the release lever after the jam clearance. Consequently, the release arm was deformed [1] and the Fixing Feeder Ass'y was not set deep inside the host machine, resulting in the error code. (The release arm indicated in [2] is normal.)
F-15-118
- E073-0001 can be displayed when the transfer drawer connector or the transfer frame drawer connector is not connected although the front cover is closed. Field Remedy When this symptom occurs, visually inspect the release arm, and replace it with a new one if it is deformed. FL2-1160 Release Arm
15.3.11.35 E077-0001 Error Code: Secondary transfer outside roller shift motor (M20) does not run
0008-3145
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy As a result of inspection, it was found that this error code was displayed because the fuse on the Fixing Feed Driver PCB was blown and the secondary transfer outside roller shift motor M20 did not run. When the symptom occurs, replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB with a new one. Description E077-0001 can be displayed when the home position of the secondary transfer outside roller cannot be detected and the roller remains locked in place 5 seconds after the motor M20 is started. FM2-0822 Fixing Feed Driver PCB
15.3.11.36 E077-0001 Error Code: Secondary Transfer Outside Roller repeats up-and-down movement upon power-on
0008-3641
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
15-95
Chapter 15 Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: Since the cables of the rear OHP sensor (the light receptor side) are pinched, the secondary transfer outside roller repeats the up-and-down movement several times upon power-on, and then E007-0001 occurs. - E077-0001 can be displayed when the home position of the secondary transfer outside roller cannot be detected and the roller remains locked in place 5 seconds after the secondary transfer outside roller shift motor M20 is started. Field Remedy 1. Slide out the fixing feeder assembly from the host machine, and then detach the registration mount assembly [1] from the assembly. 2. Turn the detached registration mount assembly upside down [3] and make sure that the OHP sensor cables [2] are not pinched. If the cables are pinched like the photo [4], replace the registration mount assembly with a new one.
F-15-119
Note: When mounting the registration mount assembly on the fixing feeder assembly, make sure that the OHP sensor cables are routed along the cable guide of the registration mount assembly to prevent pinched cables. FM2-0472 Registration Mount Assembly
15.3.11.37 E079/E009 Error Code: Because of broken 24T gear

0006-6567
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause When the external heating roller comes in contact with or moves away from the fixing roller, the 24T gear hits against the stopper. It is found by our inspection that the 24T gear was broken after a long use. Field Remedy When this symptom occurs, replace the 24T gear with a new one. Simultaneously, visually inspect the 16/42T gear that drives the 24T gear. If it is broken, replace it with a new one, too. Note: When replacing the 24T gear, it is necessary to remove the heating roller sensor flag that is installed in the same shaft as the 24T gear. As the sensor flag is secured by snap-in claws, it is possible that the claws might be broken if being released too much. If it is broken, replace it with a new one. Description E079: To be displayed when the home position of the external heating roller cannot be detected, or an open circuit of the home position sensor is detected. E009: To be displayed when it is detected that the external heating roller remains in contact with the fixing roller. FU5-0178: 24T Gear FU5-0214: 16/24T Gear FC5-2358: External Heating Roller Sensor Flag
15.3.11.38 E079-0002 Error Code: Due to pinched drawer cable2 of fixing feeder assembly
0009-9063
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found in the fixing feeder assembly: J403L-A9 lead wire of the drawer cable2 is pinched like [1] in the photo, and causes IC104 on the DC Controller PCB to be damaged, resulting in the error code. Note: In this inspection case, the IC was damaged again because the DC Controller PCB was replaced with a new one and then the main power switch was turned ON before the pinched lead wire was repaired. When the symptom occurs, never fail to follow the procedure below. - E079-0002 can be displayed when the outside heating roller home position sensor fails to go off. Field Remedy 1. Check if the drawer cable of the fixing feeder assembly is not pinched. 2. If it is pinched, repair the damaged lead wire or replace the drawer cable2 with a new one. 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB with a new one. FM2-0821 DC Controller PCB Assembly FM2-0984 Drawer Cable2
15-96
Chapter 15
F-15-120
15.3.11.39 E079-0002 Error Code: Points to note when performing service work on drawer cable of fixing feeder assembly
0009-9095
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found in the fixing feeder assembly: J403L-A9 lead wire of the drawer cable2 is pinched like [1] in the photo, and IC104 on the DC Controller PCB is damaged, finally resulting in the error code. When performing a service work related to the drawer cable, pay attention to the following. Field Remedy When screwing the pressed plate of the drawer connector to the pre-fixing feeder assembly after replacing the drawer cable or removing it for a service work, pay attention not to pinch a lead wire of the cable between the plate and the assembly. FM2-0984 Drawer Cable2 FM2-0821 DC Controller PCB Assembly
F-15-121
15.3.11.40 E020/E021/E061/E070/E078/E820 Error Code / Poor contact of connectors around process unit
0005-9975
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci For details of error codes, see the following: E020-0080/E020-0180/E020-0280/E020-0380/E020-0090/E020-0190/E020-0290/E020-0091/E020-0191/E020-0291/E020-0092/E020-0192/E020-0292/E0200392/E020-00A0/E020-01A0/E020-02A0/E020-03A0/E020-00A1/E020-01A1/E020-02A1/E020-03A1/E020-00A2/E020-01A2/E020-02A2/E020-03A2/E02000A3/E020-01A3/E020-02A3/E020-03A3/E021-0001/E021-0002/E061-0005/E061-0007/E070-0000/E070-0001/E070-0002/E070-0003/E078-0001/E820-0020 Cause When drawing out the Pkit as part of servicing work, you need to disconnect and then connect the connectors. When repeated, their internal pins can start to suffer from poor connection, resulting in wrong operation/detection. Description A break in the harness can occur when the harness is disconnected/connected about 30 times. The following is a list of harnesses that are subject to a break with descriptions of symptoms expected when a break occurs.
[1]ITB cleaner harness (FM2-0946) 1/2/3/4
connector: J214L E078-0001 The motor stops.
5/6/7
15-97
Chapter 15
8/9/10 process unit cooling fan (FM7) E820-0002 The fan stops. The machine fails to detect rotation.
11/12
post-charging assembly cleaning motor image fault (vertical line) (M27) The motor stops.
[2]PKIT harness (FM2-0947) connector: J201LA/J201B 1/2 primary charging wire cleaning motor image fault (vertical line) (M26) The motor stops.
3/4/5
6/7
8/9/10/11
color toner level sensor (PS25)
message calling for replacement of toner The absence of toner is wrongly detected in the presence of toner.
12/13/14
15/16
NC
1/2
3/4/5
6/7/8
developing rotary HP sensor (PS19)
15-98
Chapter 15
9-14 ATR sensor (PS4) E020-**A0 E020-**A1 E020-**A2 E020-**A3 An error sensor value is detected
15/16
3-8
1/2/3
4/5/6
ITB sensor A (PS1)
[4]Hopper harness (FM2-0950) connector: J301L 1/2 hopper stirring motor (M23) black developing assembly without toner -> image fault (low density) The motor stops.
3/4/5
hopper inside toner level sensor (TS2) 2-min supply error (reset by opening/closing the door) hopper excess toner supply The absence of toner is wrongly detected in the presence of toner.
6/7
8/9/10
message calling for replacement of the bottle, not permitting recovery. remains closed. The black cartridge motor stops. remains closed
15-99
Chapter 15
[5] [1] [3] [4]
F-15-122
[2]
F-15-123
Field Remedy Replace the connector with the harness intact.
15.3.11.41 E020-03A0/E020-01A2 Error Code

0005-6300
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Description This symptom tends to occur when the connection has been disconnected and then connected a number of times (30 times or more). Cause The pins inside the connector tend to wear out when the connector [1] is disconnected and then connected a number of times (left of the process unit).
[1]
F-15-124
Field Remedy Replace the connector together with its harness.
15.3.11.42 E061-0001 Error Code

0005-4274
15-100
Chapter 15
Cause The grounding wire [2] of HV1 [1] has poor contact. Field Remedy Connect the grounding wire correctly.
F-15-125
15.3.11.43 E070-0102 Error Code

0005-7223
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Description This symptom can occur when paper is placed in the manual feed tray in a low humidity environment and, as a result, the machine is subjected to static noise. Cause If the harness [1] connected to the DC controller PCB is away from the side plate [2] of the DC controller box, wrong detection (E070-0102) of the ITB home position tends to occur easily because of noise. Field Remedy When mounting the DC controller PCB or the DC controller box, be sure to connect the harness to the DC controller PCB as follows: 1) Connect the connector of the harness [1] first, then the other harness [3]. 2) Fix the harnesses [1] [3] in place using the wire saddle [4] so that the harness [1] is on the left side of the other harness [3].
[4]
[4]
[2] [4]
[1]
[4] [3]
F-15-126
15.3.11.44 E070-0101/E070-0102/E070-0201/E070-0202/E070-0302 Error Code

0005-4278
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Cause If the grounding spring found inside the intermediate transfer assembly becomes deformed, the resulting static noise can cause the ITB home position sensor to malfunction. The grounding spring may have become deformed when a part inside the intermediate transfer assembly was replaced. Field Remedy Check the following contacts of the grounding spring. If any of these contacts is deformed and, thus, the electrical conductivity is poor, correct the spring: 1 contact with the end of the primary transfer upstream roller 2 contact with the edge of the plate 3 contact with a plate around the secondary transfer assembly 4 contact with a plate around the secondary transfer assembly 5 contact with the secondary upstream roller 6 contact with the secondary transfer inside roller 7 contact with the primary transfer downstream roller
15-101
Chapter 15
[1] [2]
[4] [3]
F-15-127
[5]
F-15-128
[6]
[7]
F-15-129
15.3.11.45 E542-8001 Error Code

0005-4273
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Cause If the saddle delivery tray door of the Saddle Finisher-R2 is not closed, the No. 2 tray will interfere with the door when it moves up/down, causing an error; particularly, the door fails to close at its rear. Field Remedy Close the saddle delivery tray door [1] (particularly, its rear) firmly. As necessary, advise the user on the importance of closing the door firmly.
15-102
Chapter 15
[1]
F-15-130
15.3.11.46 E100 Error Code: Because of deformation of laser shutter lever

0006-8846
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy As a result of inspection, it was found that E100 was displayed because the laser shutter was not opened by the deformed laser shutter lever. When E100 is displayed, visually inspect the laser shutter lever and replace it with a new one if a deformation is verified. Cause It is possible that the laser shutter lever was deformed because the hopper unit was installed into the machine while being lifted up forcibly and the tip of the lever hit against the AP kit, causing its deformation. FC5-1916: Laser Shutter Lever
15.3.11.47 E100-0002 Error Code: Fine lines appear on front side of image in sub scanning direction because laser scanner assembly is faulty
0009-8908
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, fine lines appeared in the front side of copy/print images in the sub scanning direction. During inspection, additionally, E100-0002 was also displayed and was corrected by replacing the laser scanner assembly with a new one. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, re-insert the connectors of the laser scanner assembly, DC Controller PCB, and Main Controller PCB. If the symptom still occurs, replace the laser scanner assembly with a new one. - E100-0002 can be displayed when the BD signal is not detected while the polygonal scanner is rotating stably. FM2-0394 Laser Scanner Assembly
15.3.11.48 0111 Jam Code: Occurs when copying in duplex mode

0009-9110
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: When paper is delivered to the position of the mylar attached to the rev. vert. path guide, it catches on the notches of the mylar, causing a jam. This is because the mylar is deformed. - 0111 Jam Code: Delay jam at duplexing left sensor (PS17) Field Remedy When the jam code occurs, check the mylar attached to the rev. vert. path guide, and replace the rev. vert. path guide with a new one if the mylar is deformed. FL2-0505 Rev. Vert. Path Guide
15.3.11.49 0111 Jam Code: Because tension spring of reverse driven roller comes off
0009-9113
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, the following was found: The tension spring (rear) of the reverse driven roller comes off and prevents pressure to be applied to the roller. This allows the leading edge of paper to come into contact with the mylar on the reversing assembly when making B5 size paper in duplex mode, consequently causing 0111 jam. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, check the tension springs that are fit on the reverse driven roller (FC5-2217) of the rev. paper delivery door assembly (FM2-0482). If the springs come off, return them to their original position. Or if the springs are deformed, replace them with a new one. - 0111 Jam Code: Delay jam at the duplexing left sensor (PS17). FU5-2139 Tension Spring
15-103
Chapter 15
F-15-131
15.3.11.50 E197 Error Code: Release arm of Fixing Feeder Ass'y was deformed
0007-5151
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy The release arm located deep inside the Fixing Feeder Ass'y was deformed, and this enabled the set lever for the Fixing Feeder Ass'y to be locked before the ass'y was not inserted completely. Consequently, there occurred poor contact at the drawer connector and finally E197 (communication error with the fixing feeder driver PCB) was displayed. When this error code is displayed, inspect the release arm, and replace it with a new one if it is deformed. FL2-1160 Release Arm
15.3.11.51 E248-0000 Error Code: Upon installation

0008-3755
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, E248-0000 was displayed simultaneously at power-on upon installation because the connector on the SRAM Board PCB was not securely fitted. When this symptom occurs, check the installation state of the SRAM Board PCB. E248-0000 can be displayed when a check error occurs on the data of the SRAM Board PCB at time of start-up. FG3-2860 SRAM Board PCB
15.3.11.52 E505 Error Code: Alignment/staple position adjustment backup data error, Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2
0009-2457
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, this error code was solved by replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, not by turning the main power switch OFF/ON. Additionally, it was solved by adjusting the alignment or the staple position in our inspection. When the error occurs, try adjusting the alignment or the staple position before the replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB. - E505 can be displayed when an error occurs with the checksum value on the Finisher Controller PCB upon power-on (Backup memory error).
15.3.11.53 E540-8003 Error Code: Occurs when Upper Tray ascends because of Back End Assist Plate coming off
0007-1849
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Field Remedy Since the Back End Assist Plate and the Back End Assist Button came off the Timing Belt in the Operation Tray Ass'y, there occurred a malfunction in paper stacking operation, and E540-8003 was displayed when the upper tray ascended. When this symptom occurs, it is possible that the timing belt has been damaged. Thus, replace the belt with a new one and attach the assist plate and the assist button once again. FC5-3553 Timing Belt FC5-3554 Back End Assist Plate FC5-4715 Back End Assist Button
15.3.11.54 E540-8002/E540-8001 Error Code: Finisher-R1 / Saddle Finisher-R2

0008-3780
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description Since a corrugated cardboard box was placed under the delivery tray of the finisher, the tray hit the box during ascent and descent and this put an electrical load to the Main Controller PCB of the finisher, leading to a breakage of the PCB. Field Remedy 1. Make sure that there is no obstruction under the tray that could hamper its movement. 2. After removing the obstruction, and turn the main power OFF/ON to check whether the error code will disappear. 3. If the error code still recurs, the Main Controller PCB of the finisher is likely to be faulty, so replace it with a new one. FG3-2883 Main Controller PCB
15.3.11.55 E602-0001 Error Code: Unable to enter Download mode because Main Controller PCB is faulty
0010-3857
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found that the machine displayed the error code "E602-0001" and failed to enter download mode because the main controller PCB was faulty.
15-104
Chapter 15 - E602-0001 can be displayed when the hard disk is not recognized or when BOOTDEVE is not found at time of start-up. Field Remedy 1. Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON to execute auto recovery sequence. If the symptom still occurs, go to the step2. 2. Turn the main power switch OFF, and turn it ON while holding down the numeric keys "2" and "8" on the control panel at the same time. Then, make sure that the machine enter "Download mode". 3. If the machine fails to enter the mode, go to the step4. If the machine succeeds in entering, the hard disk is thought to be faulty. 4. Check the input voltage applied to the following points of J1201 and J1202 on the Main Controller PCB. If the voltage is applied, replace the Main Controller PCB with a new one. If no voltage is applied, the DC power relay PCB is thought to be faulty. - J1201: Pin1 to Pin3 = 3V, Pin2 to Pin4 = 3V, Pin5 to Pin7 = 3V, Pin6 to Pin8 = 3V, Pin9 to Pin10 = 12V - J1202: Pin1 to Pin2 = 5V, Pin3 to Pin4 = 13V FG3-2857 Main Controller PCB Assembly FM2-0843 DC Power Relay PCB Assembly
15.3.11.56 E602-0113 Error Code: Because hard disk (HDD) is faulty

0010-5000
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, this error code was corrected by replacing the HDD with a new one. - E602-0113 can be displayed when a read error occurs in DOSDEV (image storage area) on the HD. Field Remedy 1. In service mode [COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM], set [CHK-TYPE] to "1" (image storage area) and then press [OK]. 2. In service mode [COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > HD-CHK], press [OK], turn the control panel switch OFF and then turn the main power switch OFF/ON. 3. If the symptom still occurs, replace the HDD with a new one, and then download system software. Note: Never turn off the main power switch and the control panel switch during downloading. If these switches are turned off, there is a possibility that this machine does not start up. WM2-5210 HDD
15.3.11.57 E719-0011 Error Code: After clearing error code, "Enter the Dept. ID and Password using the numeric keys." appears, Card Reader-C1
0007-5235
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description E719-0011 can be displayed when the card reader cannot be detected at power-on although it has been connected before power-off. In the field, this symptom occurred as follows: When the power was turned ON while the card reader was being disconnected for service work, the error code was displayed. Then, the error was cleared in service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> ERR] and the message "Enter the Dept. ID and Password using the numeric keys." appeared. Field Remedy In service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> PWD-CLR], press the OK key and then turn the power OFF/ON. If you connect the card reader after the service work, be sure to change the set value in service mode [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> CARD] to the lowest number of the cards to be used. Then, turn the power OFF/ON.
15.3.11.58 E733-0001/E732-0001 Error Code: Occurs when progress bar is completed after power-on
0009-9046
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description At the time of inspection, there were cases where E733-0001 or E732-0001 was displayed because the Main Controller PCB was faulty. - E733-0001 can be displayed when a DDI-P communication error occurs. - E732-0001 can be displayed when a DDI-S communication error occurs. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, follow the steps below. 1. Check the connection of the following: the connectors of the DC Controller PCB and Main Controller PCB, and the connectors of the cable connecting the reader assembly to the printer assembly. If the symptom still occurs, go to the step 2. 2. Re-insert the RAM on the Main Controller PCB. If the symptom still occurs, go to the step 3. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB with a new one. FG3-2857 Main Controller PCB Assembly
15.3.11.59 E747-00FF Error Code

0009-9091
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description It is conceivable that the error code may be caused because the SDRAM or the Main Controller PCB is faulty, however, the error code was solved in the field by re-connecting the interface cable between the Reader and Printer units. When the symptom occurs, turn the main power switch OFF, re-connect the interface cable, and then turn the main power switch ON again. - E747 can be displayed when an error occurs in the ASIC for image processing or in the ASIC for memory control/communication control.
15.3.11.60 E800-0001 Error Code: Installation of Fixing Feeder Ass'y is not properly detected
0007-3892
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] escription In the field, E800-0001 was displayed for the following reason. Because of a breakage of the actuator of SW15 to be used for detecting the Fixing Feeder Ass'y is set into position, the installation of the ass'y was not properly detected although the releasing lever was locked, resulting in E800. Field Remedy In service mode [COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P001], check bit15 to see whether "1" is indicated. If so, open the rear upper panel and lock the releasing lever, and then check whether the sensor flag located deep inside the lever shaft pushes the actuator of SW15. If not, it is possible that the position of SW15 is not proper, the actuator is deformed or damaged. In such cases, correct the installation position or replace SW15 with a new one.
15.3.11.61 E800-0001 Error Code: Because of deformation of release arm of Fixing Feeder Ass'y
0008-3639
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found this symptom occurred because of the following reasons: the Fixing Feeder Ass'y was forcibly pulled out without shifting
15-105
Chapter 15 down the release lever completely at the time of jam clearance or the front cover was forcibly closed without resetting the release lever after the jam clearance. Consequently, the release arm was deformed [1] and the interlock was not actuated although the Fixing Feeder Ass'y was put back, resulting in the error code. (The release arm indicated in [2] is normal.)
F-15-132
- E800-0001 can be displayed when the host machine detects the interlock of the Fixing Feeder Ass'y not being actuated. Field Remedy When this symptom occurs, visually inspect the release arm, and replace it with a new one if it is deformed. After replacement, be sure to check whether bit15 in service mode [COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> P001] alternates between "0" and "1" while releasing and resetting the release lever. FL2-1160 Release Arm
15.3.11.62 E800-0001/E227-0001 Error Code: Because DC power supply is faulty

0010-5003
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, E800-0001 was displayed and "E227/E800" was displayed in service mode [COPIER > DISPLAY > ERR]. However, this symptom was corrected by replacing the DC power supply with a new one. - E800-0001 can be displayed when the interlock 24V mechanism remains off for 500 msec in a state in which the door is being closed. - E227-0001 can be displayed when 24V port is OFF at power-on. Field Remedy If 24V DC is not supplied for the Pin 1, 2, and 5 of the connector J133-1 on the DC power relay PCB (FM2-0843), replace the DC power supply with a new one. FM2-0524 DC Power Supply Assembly (120V) FM2-1229 DC Power Supply Assembly (230V)
15.3.11.63 E820-0002 Error Code: Because of rotational failure of process unit cooling fan (FM7)
0009-9075
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, the error code occurred because the process unit cooling fan (FM7) caused a rotational failure. - E820-0002 can be displayed when there is an error in the process unit cooling fan. The conceivable causes of the rotational failure are as follows: - The cooling fan itself is faulty. - The DC Controller PCB fails to output 24V because the fuse (FU2) on it has an open-circuit. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, follow the steps below. 1. Remove all the connectors of the DC Controller PCB and then check FU2 for electrical continuity. 2. If FU2 has electrical continuity, replace FM7 with a new one. 3. If FU2 has no electrical continuity, overcurrent might be fed continuously through the DC Controller PCB, consequently causing FU2 to have an opencircuit. Therefore, replace the PCB with a new one. 4. If the step 3 does not solve the error code, replace FM7 with a new one. In the field, there was one case where the error code was solved by replacing the DC Controller PCB and FM7 simultaneously. FL2-1185 FAN FM2-0857 DC Controller PCB Assembly (120V) FM2-0858 DC Controller PCB Assembly (230V)
15.3.11.64 E824-000 Error Code: Because of rotational failure of primary charging suction fan (FM1)
0009-9079
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, the error code occurred because the primary charging suction fan (FM1) caused a rotational failure. - E824-0000 can be displayed when there is an error in the primary charging suction fan. The causes of the rotational failure are as follows: - The suction fan itself is faulty. - The DC Controller PCB fails to output 24V because the fuse (FU2) on it has an open-circuit. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, follow the steps below. 1. Remove all the connectors of the DC Controller PCB and then check FU2 for electrical continuity. 2. If FU2 has electrical continuity, replace FM1 with a new one. 3. If FU2 has no electrical continuity, overcurrent might be fed continuously through the DC Controller PCB, consequently causing FU2 to have an opencircuit. Therefore, replace the PCB with a new one. 4. If the step 3 does not solve the error code, replace FM1 with a new one. In the field, there was one case where the error code was solved by replacing the DC Controller PCB and FM1 simultaneously. FK2-0103 FAN FM2-0857 DC Controller PCB Assembly (120V) FM2-0858 DC Controller PCB Assembly (230V)
15.3.11.65 1200/1104 Jam Code due to unintended rotation of shutter open/close clutch (CL31): Finisher-R1/Saddle Finisher-R2
0009-9102
15-106
Chapter 15
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description As a result of inspection, it was found that such jam codes were displayed because the shutter open/close clutch failed to disengage and caused an unintended rotation, thereby lifting up the shutter when paper was delivered during a print/copy run. The jam code displayed depends on the timing at which the shutter is lifted up. -1200: When the clutch causes an unintended rotation immediately before paper is delivered. - 1104: When the clutch causes an unintended rotation while paper is being delivered. Field Remedy When the jam codes are recorded as jam histories in service mode, replace the clutch (CL31) with a new. FH6-5101 Electromagnetic Clutch
15.3.12 FAX # Code 15.3.12.1 #801 Error Code: Upon installation, machine can send data to shared folder on PC with Windows2000 but can't do so to shared folder on PC with WindowsXP
0010-3845
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the following occurred: Since a shared folder on a PC with WindowsXP can be browsed from the machine, the address of the folder is registered to the machine. However, the machine fails to send data to the folder and displays #801. This is because the detailed settings on sharing of the folder are not made in the PC side. When the symptom occurs, try the field remedy below. - #801 can be displayed when the machine fails user authentication (no user, invalid password, or no access right). Field Remedy 1. Right-click on the shared folder on the PC, select [Properties> Sharing], and place a check mark on both of the following messages "Share this folder on the network." and "Allow other users to change my files.". 2. Register the folder in the address book once again in user mode. For detail procedures of registration, refer to Sending and Facsimile Guide [Storing/Editing Address Book Settings> Storing New Addresses> File Server Addresses].
15.3.13 Specifications-Related FAQ 15.3.13.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications

15.3.13.1.1 Effects on human eyes by scanning lamp (Xenon lamp)
0006-2045
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The mechanism of light emission from the Xenon lamp is that: ultraviolet rays which are generated inside the glass tube are radiated toward a fluorescent material applied to the inner surface and then emitted outside as a visible light. At that time, ultraviolet rays are absorbed by the glass tube and the insulating tube, and are hardly emitted outside. The measurements of light level of the Xenon lamp and the fluorescent lamp show that there is hardly light emission in the range of ultra-violet. Accordingly, it is considered the Xenon lamp has a similar effect on human eyes as the fluorescent lamp does. However, if you look at intensive light, persistence of its vision will remain, so be sure not to directly look at the Xenon lamp when it comes on. 15.3.13.1.2 Recovery time from "Energy Save Mode"
0006-2350
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The following lists the recovery time for each rating of the energy saver mode that is selectable in user mode [Common Settings> Energy Saver Mode]. -10%: approx. 70 sec. -25%: approx. 150 sec. -50%: approx. 450 sec. None (no return time): 0 sec. Note: The above numbers might vary depending on the length of the energy saver mode and the environmental conditions. 15.3.13.1.3 Function limitation when security key is not inserted
0006-2397
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description At the time of shipment from the factory, printing/RX printing are possible even without inserting the security key. A change in user mode setting can disable all the functions. In user mode [System Settings> Limit Functions with the Security Key Off], select [Partial Functions] (default) or [All Functions]. - Partial Functions: Printing/RX printing are possible; however, copying, Mailbox, report outputting (manual), TX, Remote UI, Remote scan are impossible. - All Functions: All the functions are impossible. 15.3.13.1.4 How to set copy standard mode at "Black"
0006-2398
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy Set the copy standard mode at "Black". Follow the steps below: 1. On the screen of [Copy], select [Black] from the list of color. 2. In user mode [Copy Settings> Standard Settings], press [Store]. 15.3.13.1.5 Unable to select [Stack Bypass Settings] button
0006-2399
15-107
Chapter 15 [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy If [Stack Bypass Standard Settings] is set at [On], the button [Stack Bypass Settings] does not work. In user mode [Common Settings> Stack Bypass Standard Settings], select [Off]. 15.3.13.1.6 How to deactivate "Sleep Mode" and "Low Power Mode"
0006-2400
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description "Sleep Mode" can be deactivated in service mode; however, "Low Power Mode" cannot be in accordance with Energy Star Program. Accordingly, the host machine will automatically be shifted from standby state to sleep state after 4 hours at the longest. 15.3.13.1.7 How to print documents that have failed to be forwarded (forwarding errors)
0006-2401
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description In user mode [Communications Settings> Common Settings> TX Settings> Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors> Always Print> OK]. 15.3.13.1.8 DADF-M1: Can originals with different widths and lengths be fed at once? Different size originals function
0006-2403
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description DADF-M1 can feed different size originals not only with same widths but with different widths. The different size originals in the following combinations are applicable: A3 and B4, B4 and A4R, A4 ad B5, B5 and A5 Be sure to align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder if you are placing originals with different widths. 15.3.13.1.9 Network settings (IP Address, Subnet mask) when using Service Support Tool (SST)
0006-2404
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description It is unnecessary to enter any specific IP address and subnet mask into iRC6800 because the fixed IP address for servicing is assigned when you start up in normal mode (turning the power ON while pressing 1+7 simultaneously) or in safe more (turning the power ON while pressing 2+8 simultaneously). On the other hand, configure the computer for SST as designated below and connect it to iRC6800. IP address: 172.16.1.160 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 15.3.13.1.10 How to set "Different Size Originals" as Standard Send Settings for FAX transmission
0006-2408
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description 1. Select "Different Size Originals" mode: On "Send" screen, press [Scan Settings> Option> Special Features> Different Size Originals> Same Width or Different Width> OK> Done> OK]. 2. Register "Different Size Originals" mode as one of the scanning modes: On "Send" screen, press [Scan Settings> Option> Store/Erase], select any item, press [Store], then a message "Do you wish to overwrite the previous setting?" appears, press [Yes] and register the name as necessary, and finally press [Done]. 3. Set the registered scanning mode as "Standard Send Setting": In user mode [Communications Settings> Common Settings> TX Settings> Edit Standard Send Settings], press "Scanning Mode" to select the scanning mode that has been registered in Step 2, and press [OK> Done]. 15.3.13.1.11 Functions "Flaming" and "Blanking" are inoperative under [Special Features> Area Designation> Pen Entry] when using ADF
0006-2428
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description This is a specification constraint of this product. When a document is placed on the ADF, "Flaming" and "Blanking" are inoperative under [Special Features> Area Designation> Pen Entry]. However, the following feature is available: [Special Features> Area Designation> Numeric Key Entry> Flaming or Blanking]. 15.3.13.1.12 What is [Auto Online] feature?
0006-4899
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description In order to use the network scan function, iRC6800 needs to be switched to online. If [Auto Online] is set to "On", the machine automatically goes online when you press [Scan] on the Basic Features screen. How to set: In user mode [System Settings> Auto Online/Offline> Auto Online], set it to "On". 15.3.13.1.13 What is [Auto Offline] feature?
0006-4900
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description
15-108
Chapter 15 If [Auto Offline] is set to "On" in user mode, iRC6800 automatically goes offline after the network scan function is used. How to Set: In user mode [System Settings> Auto Online/Offline> Auto Offline], set it to "On". The machine will go offline after the period of time specified in user mode [Timer Settings> Auto Clear Time] has lapsed. Note that if [Auto Clear Time] is set to "0" (none), the machine will go offline approximately 2 minutes later. 15.3.13.1.14 How to clear System Administrator Password
0006-4912
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> PWD-CLR], press OK and turn the power OFF/ON. 15.3.13.1.15 Number of copies that can be taken after "Remaining toner is low." message appears
0006-4918
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description Black toner: approximately 4,000 sheets (6% image duty with A4 paper) Color toner: approximately 800 sheets (5% image duty with A4 paper) 15.3.13.1.16 "Free Size" setting cannot be done when attempting to use stack bypass as paper source
0006-4920
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description This is a specification constraint of this product. "Free Size" setting is not available with iRC6800. If you want to use nonstandard-sized paper from the stack bypass, press [Irreg. Size] button on the [Selecting the Paper Size] window and enter the paper size using the numeric keys. The applicable paper size is 100 x 148mm up to 330 x 483mm. Note: If you select [Irreg. Size], you cannot use several copying functions such as Multi-Page Enlargement, Rotate Collate, Rotate Group. 15.3.13.1.17 Upgrading DCON/RCON/G3FAX
0006-5353
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description When upgrading DCON, RCON, and G3FAX using the Service Support Tool, only the normal mode is available (simultaneous press of 1+7 and turning the power ON). The network settings on a computer for the SST should be: IP address: 172.16.1.160 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 15.3.13.1.18 How to disable display of message "Cleaning web is low."
0006-5358
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In service mode [COPIER> Option> USER> WEB-DISP], change the set value from "0" to "1". Description The message "Cleaning web is low." can be displayed when either of the following two conditions is met ahead of the other. 1. The total count of the web solenoid turning ON by software has reached 450 thousand. This count can be checked in service mode [COPIER> Counter> DRBL1> FIX-WEB]. 2. The web level detecting lever has dropped through the cut-out of the fixing web. 15.3.13.1.19 Lubricant used upon replacement of cleaning blade for photosensitive drum
0006-6296
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy At the time of replacement, apply lubricating oil TKN-0480 (Lubricant for Cleaning Assembly) designated as a service tool. Description Since the toner of iRC6800 is smaller in particle size and closer to spherical in shape as compared with the existing models', it is harder to be scraped off by the cleaning blade and the amount of toner adhesion to the blade edge is lesser. As the toner adhering to the blade edge also performs as a lubricant, the friction becomes higher between the blade and the drum surface. After replacement of the cleaning blade, be sure to apply the designated lubricating oil to a new one in order to prevent the blade from being turned up due to friction. Lubricant for Cleaning Assembly: TKN-0480 15.3.13.1.20 How to disable display of message "Prepare a new fixing unit."
0006-9808
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> FXMSG-SW], set it to "0" (0: disable display, 1: enable display [default]). Description The message "Prepare a new fixing unit." is displayed when the page count of the fixing roller has reached the one specified in service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> FXWRNLVL]. FXMSG-SW has to be set to "1" in normal circumstances. However, if you cannot replace the fixing unit until the next visit although you confirm the message, it can be set to "0" in order to prevent customers from feeling needless anxiety and prevent a further service call. After replacement of the fixing unit or the fixing roller, set the value back to "1" for safety's sake.
15-109
Chapter 15 15.3.13.1.21 Horizontal registration failure: How to adjust horizontal registration for main cassettes and front decks
0007-1833
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy a. Main Cassettes 1. Slide out the 3rd cassette or the 4th cassette, and open the upper right cover and the lower right cover. 2. Insert a screwdriver through the opening in the front right stay; then, loosen the screw that fixes the horizontal registration adjustment plate. 3. Slide the plate to the front side or the rear side to optimize the margin. - To the rear side: Decreases the left margin. - To the front side: Increases the left margin. b. Left Front Deck 1. Slide out the left deck. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, detach the left face cover. 2. Loosen the screws (2 pcs.) that fix the registration adjustment plate. 3. Insert a screwdriver through the opening in the left front stay; then turn the adjusting screw to optimize the margin. (1 rotation will change the margin by 1.0mm.) - In a counterclockwise direction: Decreases the left margin. - In a clockwise direction: Increases the left margin. c. Right Front Deck 1. Slide out the right deck and open the upper right cover and the lower right cover. 2. Loosen the screws (2 pcs.) that fix the registration adjustment plate. 3. Insert a screwdriver through the opening in the right front stay; then turn the adjusting screw to optimize the margin. (1 rotation will change the margin by 1.0mm.) - In a counterclockwise direction: Decreases the left margin. - In a clockwise direction: Increases the left margin. 15.3.13.1.22 How to switch display of software counter items
0007-3895
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description In service mode [COPIER> Option> USER> CNT-SW], change the set value from "0" to "1" so that you can change the display of the software counter items that can be checked in the LCD. Additionally, if you want to change the items to display after switching [CNT-SW], enter the appropriate number for the software counter items in service mode [COPIER> Option> USER> COUNTER 2 through COUNTER 6 (COUNTER 1 cannot be changed)]. For the details of the software counter items, refer to Service Manual [Service Mode> OPTION (Machine Settings Mode)> USER> Software Counter Specifications]. 15.3.13.1.23 How to disable function to automatically change paper source between cassettes: Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS
0007-3935
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In user mode [Common Settings> Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS], select the function modes (Copy, Printer, Mail Box, Receive/Fax, Other) and set any cassettes that you do not want to use as a paper source to "Off". For more details, refer to Reference Guide [Customizing Settings> Specifying Common Settings> Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching]. 15.3.13.1.24 Message "Enter the Dept. ID and Password using the numeric keys." is displayed: On machine without Card Reader
0007-5152
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In service mode [COPIER> Function> CLEAR> PSW-CLR], press OK and then turn the power OFF/ON. Description Even on a machine without a Card Reader, an operator mistakenly selected "On" in user mode [System Settings> Dept. ID Management] and pressed OK. When the operator returned to the initial screen, a message "Enter the Dept. ID and Password using the numeric keys." was displayed. 15.3.13.1.25 Copy ratio cannot be changed when selecting "Long Strip Original" in special features
0008-1592
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description In an actual case, in order to copy an original whose size is 257mm (main scanning length: B4) x 420mm (sub scanning length: A3) from the DF on B4 paper without image loss, the "Long Strip Original" key in the screen of Special Features was selected; however, the "Copy Ratio" key on the initial screen was not selectable. This is due to a specification constraint: the host machine cannot specify the long strip original and thus cannot properly determine the image scanning start position. Accordingly, when selecting "Long Strip Original", the copy ratio cannot be changed manually. Field Remedy As a result of inspection, the following measure was found in order to obtain a satisfactory output based on the above case. Try it if necessary. 1. On the initial copy screen, select Special Features > Area Designation > Numeric Key Entry > enter "420" for X2 and "257" for Y2 > select "Framing" > Next > select either of "Shift Center" or "Do not shift center" > OK. 2. Select Copy Ratio > Auto > Paper Select > B4. 3. Position the document guides at A3 and align the top edge of original with the back edge of the feeder. Note: If you position the guides at B4, the output image will not become a satisfactory one. 4. If the output image is satisfactory and if your customer needs to use this mode frequently, you can assign it in Mode Memory. (Exclusively when your customer always uses the same size long strip original.) 15.3.13.1.26 How to clear message "Remaining toner is low." / Message "Remaining toner is low." does not disappear even after replacement of yellow toner cartridge
0008-3226
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description Since the above message prompts for customers only to prepare a new toner cartridge, it is impossible to replace the cartridge and clear the message at this time. It will disappear when the next message "Replace toner cartridge." is displayed and a new toner cartridge is installed. However, as far as the yellow toner
15-110
Chapter 15 cartridge is concerned, it can be replaced because of mechanical constraints of this machine. If the yellow toner cartridge has been replaced with the message "Remaining toner is low." and your customer wants to clear it, follow the steps below. Field Remedy 1. In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> T-CRG-SW], set it to "1" and turn the power OFF/ON. 2. A button "Specified Toner Replacement" appears under user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning]. Press it > select the color which has been changed (yellow in this case) > open the front door > open/close the toner supply port cover > close the front door. 3. After confirming the message disappear, reset the service mode setting in step 1 to "0". 15.3.13.1.27 How to replace toner cartridge by specifying color: When message "Remaining toner is low." is displayed
0008-3250
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description If you want to replace the toner cartridge by specifying the color, follow the steps below. Field Remedy 1. In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> T-CRG-SW], set it to "1" and turn the power OFF/ON. 2. A button "Specified Toner Replacement" appears under user mode [Adjustment/Cleaning]. Press it and select the color you want to change before replacement. Note: Please do not change the service mode setting above unless a request from your customer is made (e.g. wants to replace the toner cartridge in advance in order to make a huge number of copy although the toner still remains.). In principle, avoid any replacement by specifying the color as much as possible because the remaining toner is wasted and a toner leakage might occur when the cartridge is removed. 15.3.13.1.28 Want to disable indication of message "Remaining toner is low."
0008-3305
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description When the remaining toner amount becomes approximately 10%, a message "Remaining toner is low." will be displayed. It is impossible to disable an indication of this message. However, the indication timing can be changed by following the steps below: Field Remedy 1. If you want to postpone the indication timing rather than the standard setting (i.e. to be displayed when lower than 10% is left.), in service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> T-LW-LVL], change the set value to between "10" and "5" (unit: 1%). 2. Turn the control panel switch off and then turn the main power switch OFF/ON. 3. Instruct your customer to prepare a new toner cartridge as early as possible when the above message is displayed. Note: If the indication timing is postponed, it is possible that toner could be depleted suddenly before the next message "Replace toner cartridge." is displayed. 15.3.13.1.29 Cautions upon indication of message "Remaining toner is low. (Yellow)"
0008-3310
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description There are two different toner-related messages depending on the amount of remaining toner. 1. When the remaining toner is low: "Remaining toner is low." 2. When the toner has run out: "Replace toner cartridge." The message 1) prompts users to prepare a new toner cartridge, so the users are not allowed to replace it with a new one. However, as far as the yellow cartridge is concerned, it comes to a position where it can be replaced due to a mechanical constraint of this machine. Be sure NOT to replace the yellow cartridge when the message 1) is displayed. Even if it is replaced, the message will not be cleared. When the message 2) is displayed, replace the cartridge by referring to the procedure indicated on the touch panel display. The host machine recognizes a new toner cartridge installation and the message will be cleared. 15.3.13.1.30 How to output history print of JAM: JAM/ERR/ALARM-1, -2/SEND-ERR
0008-3318
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description It is impossible to output the history print of "JAM" only. In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Function> MISC-P> HIST-PRT], press the OK key so that the history print including "ERR", "ALARM-1", "ALARM-2", "SEND-ERR". 15.3.13.1.31 Affect on cardiac pacemaker by copier
0008-3407
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The following warning is described in the Reference Guide [Important Safety Instructions> Other Warnings> For cardiac pacemaker users]. If you receive an inquiry about this from your customer, refer to it. "This product generates a low level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from the product and consult your doctor." 15.3.13.1.32 Descriptions on how host machine controls color toner replenishment and cautions: E020 Error Code
0008-3739
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description - Toner replenishment amount control: The host machine determines how much amount of color toner should be replenished to the developing ass'y based on the following three data. 1. Video counters transmitted from the Main Controller PCB. 2. Density of patch image measured by the patch image sensor. 3. Toner density (T/D ratio) on the developing cylinder measured by the ATR sensor. When INISET-3 is executed upon installation, the initial values of 2 and 3 above (hereafter called "A" and "B" respectively) will be stored in RAM. After awhile, the density of the patch images will be measured during copying, and the host machine determines the amount of toner replenishment to make the density closer to "A". Simultaneously, the host machine measures T/D ratio, adds the differentials from "B" to "A" and finally controls the toner replenishment amount. - Cautions
15-111
Chapter 15 1. If DC-CON clear (RAM clear) is executed when E020 is displayed, the initial values "A" and "B" will also be cleared and accordingly the host machine cannot control the toner replenishment amount properly, resulting in E020. Follow the procedures described in "After replacing the DC Controller PCB" when executing DC-CON clear. 2. Never execute the following service modes except upon replacement of the developing ass'y or the developer: [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> INISET-3 or INISET-Y/M/C]. Upon replacement, be sure to execute INISET and output P-PRINT. INISET must be executed for changed color(s). 3. INISET is a process to store the condition of the initial developing ass'y into RAM. If INISET is executed although the developer in the developing ass'y is not new, the condition at that time is stored as the initial state and the toner replenishment cannot be controlled, resulting in E020. 15.3.13.1.33 Is it possible to make black-and-white copy after either of color toner has been depleted?
0008-3743
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description If black toner remains, black-and-white copy is possible. For more details, refer to Reference Guide [Routine Maintenance> Replacing the Toner Cartridge]. 15.3.13.1.34 Is it possible to make black-and-white copy after either of color toner is depleted during continuous color copy?
0008-3744
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description When either of color toner is depleted during continuous color copy and that job is suspended, black-and-white copy is impossible. To be more specific, during ten-sheet continuous color copy, an instruction on how to replace Magenta toner is displayed on the LCD at the 5th page and the job is suspended, black-andcolor copy is impossible, but black-and-white print is possible. The suspended job will automatically be resumed after replacement of the color toner. For more details, refer to Reference Guide [Routine Maintenance> Replacing the Toner Cartridge]. Note: If you make black-and-white copy after either of color toner is has been depleted, do not remove the depleted toner cartridge. 15.3.13.1.35 Proper installation direction of photosensitive drum upon replacement: Should lot No. label be front or rear?
0008-3748
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description Upon replacement of the photosensitive drum, install it so that the lot No. label attached to its inner is toward the front of the machine. 15.3.13.1.36 Is it possible to make black-and-white copy after either of color toner is depleted during continuous color printing?
0008-3750
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description When either of color toner is depleted during continuous color printing and that job is suspended, black-and-white copy is possible. To be more specific, during ten-sheet continuous color printing, an instruction on how to replace Magenta toner is displayed on the LCD at the 5th page and the job is suspended, black-andcolor copy is possible, but black-and-white print is impossible. The suspended job will automatically be resumed after replacement of the color toner. For more details, refer to Reference Guide [Routine Maintenance> Replacing the Toner Cartridge]. Note: If you make black-and-white copy after either of color toner is has been depleted, do not remove the depleted toner cartridge. 15.3.13.1.37 Card Reader-C1: Card cannot be recognized (Card No. 2500)
0008-3771
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description According to the specification of the card reader, any number from "1" through "2001" can be entered as the smallest number of the card. Since 1000 cards starting with the entered number are acceptable, in order to make the card reader recognize the card "2500", enter any number from "1501" through "2001" as the smallest number. Field Remedy In service mode [COPIER> Function> INSTALL> CARD], enter any number from "1501" through "2001". 15.3.13.1.38 Remaining toner indication is not reset to 100% even after replacement of Bk toner cartridge before indication of "No toner."
0008-3802
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description If the black toner cartridge is replaced with a new one although the indication "No toner." has not been displayed yet, the remaining toner indication is not reset to 100%. In such a case, put the original toner cartridge back into the host machine. Be sure to replace it with a new one after "No toner." indication is displayed. For your information, the following describes the mechanism of black toner remaining detection. - "Remaining toner is low. (Black)": As the sensor inside the hopper detects no toner, it makes the black toner supply motor run. However, the sensor cannot detect toner presence. This message is to prompt users to prepare a new toner cartridge, thus the remaining toner indication will not be reset to 100% at the time of this message indication. - "No toner.": As the sensor inside the developing ass'y detects no toner, it makes the hopper stirring motor run. However, the sensor cannot detect toner presence. The remaining toner indication will be reset to 100% after replacement following this message indication. 15.3.13.1.39 Black is not displayed under "Specified Toner Replacement" which can enable users to replace toner cartridge when there still remains toner
0008-3847
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The black toner is not displayed under "Specified Toner Replacement" because this feature does not cover the black toner. Only the cyan, magenta, and yellow toner cartridges can be selected. Be sure to replace the black toner cartridge with a new one after "No toner" message is displayed.
15-112
Chapter 15 15.3.13.1.40 Want to erase all documents stored in Conf. Fax Inbox at once
0008-3848
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description Documents stored in the Conf. Fax Inbox can be erased on a one-by-one basis only. In order to erase the documents in Conf. Fax Inbox or Memory RX Inbox, select the desired document and press [Erase]. Note: All the documents stored in User Inbox can be erased at once by pressing [Select All]. 15.3.13.1.41 Flap of envelope is sealed after being delivered
0008-3851
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description Envelope is out of specification of this machine. Available paper types of this machine are described in the Reference Guide [Basic Operations> Available Paper Stock]. 15.3.13.1.42 How to activate AppleTalk settings
0008-9223
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> AppleTalk Settings], press "On" for AppleTalk. 15.3.13.1.43 How to display message "Check the drum phase" on both User and Service Mode Screens
0009-3310
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description With the default setting, the message "Check the drum phase" is displayed only on the service mode screen. However, following the procedure below enables you to display the message on both the user and the service mode screens. Field Remedy In service mode [COPIER > OPTION > DRM-DISP], change the setting from "1" (default) to "2". - Setting "0": disable message - Setting "1": display only on Service Mode screen (Default) - Setting "2": display on both User and Service Mode screens 15.3.13.1.44 Massage "Check the drum phase" is displayed when entering service mode
0009-3313
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The message "Check the drum phase" is displayed when the drum reaches at the estimated life of 100,000 images (Default value). This is to urge you to shift the drum phase for prevention of drum memory. Field Remedy 1. Shift the drum phase referring to Service manual [Maintenance and Inspection > Periodically Replaced Parts > Scheduled Service Basic Procedure > Shifting the Photosensitive Drum Phase]. 2. In service mode [COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DR-P-ADJ], press OK. The counter "DRM-PHAS" will be automatically reset, and the message will disappear. 15.3.13.1.45 How to verify number of executions of drum phase shifting
0009-3315
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The number of executions of the drum phase shifting can be verified in service mode [COPIER > DISPLAY > ALARM-2]. In this screen, the lines, of which CODE and DTL columns show 000009 and 0005 respectively, indicate the drum phase shifting that has been executed so far. 15.3.13.1.46 Equation to calculate estimated remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts
0009-3317
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The remaining days before next replacement of consumable parts are calculated from the following equation: (L x D / C) - D D: Days between installation of the host machine (or part replacement) and to date, C: Counter, L: Limit (life of the parts) Note that the remaining days are just reference because they are predicated on that the host machine will be continuously used at the same pace as before. 15.3.13.1.47 How to check RAM (memory) capacity
0009-3318
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy The RAM capacity can be checked as follows: In service mode [COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS > RAM], if the value is 768MB (512MB + 256 MB), the correct RAM is mounted.
15-113
Chapter 15 15.3.13.1.48 Reading of ENV-TR (Environmental zone) differs from that of other iRC machines
0009-3320
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description "ENV-TR" (Environmental zone) in Service Mode has the following three definitions and is subject to the moisture containt (g) in the machine installation environment. The moisture content can be checked in service mode [COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > ABS-HUM]. The three definitions differ depending on models. Therefore, even if this machine is installed in the same environment as others, the reading of ENV-TR may differ from each other. The following are the definitions of moisture content of this machine. 1: low humidity environment (up to 5.8g) 2: normal humidity environment (5.9g to 17.3g) 3: high humidity environment (17.4g and higher) 15.3.13.1.49 Methods to make stamping original mode effective
0009-3322
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description There are two different methods to make the stamping original mode effective; "a" is to stamp originals whenever you want and "b" is to stamp originals at all times. If the method "b" is selected, "a" becomes ineffective. Note: Originals can be stamped only when they are scanned with the document feeder. Field Remedy Make sure that the optional stamp unit is attached to the document feeder (DADF-M1). Then, in service mode [FEEDER> Option> STAMP-SW], change it to "1" from "0". Turn the control panel switch OFF and turn the main power switch OFF/ON. Select either of the methods "a" or "b". a. To stamp originals whenever you want: On the send screen, specify the destination> Send Settings> Stamp> press OK. b. To stamp originals at all times: In user mode [Communications Settings> TX Settings under Common Settings> Edit Standard Send Settings], press [Stamp] and OK. All send originals will be stamped. 15.3.13.1.50 Page count between message "Prepare a new fixing unit." and E008-0001 Error Code
0009-3326
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The page count between an indication of the message "Prepare a new fixing unit." and the E008 indication is 20,000. The page count is different depending on color mode and paper size: Black and white / Small size: 1 count Black and white / Large size: 2 counts Full color / Small size: 3 counts Full color / Large size: 6 counts 15.3.13.1.51 Output image size is different between when using "Zoom by Percentage" function and "Preset Zoom" function although same copy ratio is set
0009-3329
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description In the "Zoom by Percentage" function, originals can be reduced or enlarged in an integer magnification which is set on the LCD. In the "Preset Zoom" function, on the other hand, all the preset buttons on the LCD show an integer: however, rescale of the original is done at the decimal level. This is the reason why the size of the output image differs between those functions. This is true for other models. 15.3.13.1.52 Six items under Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST (Level 2) > HV-TR
0009-3330
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description Of the 14 items under Service mode (Level2) [COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR], the following six items are used to add or change the conditions in which the machine performs the secondary transfer ATVC control. If faulty images occur because the machine is used under peculiar installation (job) environment, you can use those items so that the machine can perform the secondary transfer ATVC control that is suitable for the environment and can improve the image quality. - 2TR-TGT (1 to 8): Set an offset value used in relation to the secondary transfer ATVC target current level. - 2TR-SHR (1 to 8): Set an offset value used in relation to the secondary transfer ATVC paper separation voltage. - TR-PPR (1 to 8): Set paper type - TR-ENV (1 to 8): Set environment - TR-CLR (1 to 8): Set color mode - TR-DUP (1 to 8): Set simplex/duplex mode As the items that have the same number work as a group, you can set up eight different patterns of conditions (1 to 8). The first two items are used to designate the offset value of the ATVC control and the last four are to designate the operating mode which makes the two items effective. This machine checks the present job conditions against those 8 patterns of conditions. If it finds out the compatible pattern, it performs the secondary transfer ATVC control in accordance with the pattern. Note: Please refer to Service manual [Service mode > COPIER > ADJUST (Level2) > HV-TR] for detailed definitions and settings for each item. 15.3.13.1.53 How to change page count before message "Prepare a new fixing unit." is displayed
0009-3332
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The following service mode setting can change the page count before a message "Prepare a new fixing unit." is displayed. Field Remedy
15-114
Chapter 15 1. In service mode (Level 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> FXWRNLVL], change the set value by selecting from the alternatives below: "0": 180,000 (default), "1": 150,000, "2": 120,000 2. Turn the control panel switch OFF and turn the main power switch OFF/ON. 15.3.13.1.54 Convenient setting for always printing on particular irregular-size paper: How to register Stack Bypass Standard Settings and Custom Paper Size
0009-3333
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description When you want to feed a particular irregular-size paper from the stack bypass every time you print on it, follow the procedure below, and you will omit to enter the size and type of the paper to both the machine and your PC. 1. In the machine: Register the paper in Stack Bypass Standard Settings. 2. In the PC: Register the paper in Custom Paper Size in the printer driver. 3. In the PC: Select the paper for Output Size in the printer driver. The detailed procedure is explained below by taking the envelope case for an example. Field Remedy 1. In the machine: Register the paper in Stack Bypass Standard Settings In user mode, [Common Settings > Stack Bypass Standard Settings > ON > Register > Irreg. Size > enter the size of the envelope used > OK > Next > select the paper type > OK > OK], and then load the envelope on the stack bypass. 2. In the PC: Register the paper in Custom Paper Size in the printer driver [Start > Settings > Printer > iRC6800 > Properties > General > Printing Preferences > Custom Paper Size > enter the name of the envelope (in this case, Envelope A) into Name of Custom Paper Size > enter the size of the envelope > Register > OK]. 3. In the PC: Select the paper for Output Size in the printer driver [Start > Settings >Printer > iRC6800 > Properties > General > Printing Preferences > Output Size > select Envelope A registered in step 2. > Apply > OK]. From the first launch of an application software after executing the procedure above, you can print on the paper without entering its size and type to the machine and your PC. Note: When you set the Stack Bypass Standard Settings to ON, it will be impossible for you to either feed any sizes of paper other than the registered nor activate Stack Bypass Setting. 15.3.13.1.55 How to temporarily print standard-size heavy paper in heavy paper mode
0009-3334
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy Follow the procedure below. Set the heavy paper you want to use in the stack bypass or a paper cassette. You can't set it in the side paper deck. a. When using the stack bypass 1. In machine: press [Paper Select > Stack Bypass > select the paper size > Next > select the paper type (Heavy) > OK] 2. In PC: [Print > iRC6800 > Properties > Paper Source tab > check the radio button "Paper Source " in "Select by" > select Stack Bypass from "Paper Source" > print]. The machine will start picking up the heavy paper from the stack bypass and print it in the heavy paper mode. b. When using a paper cassette 1. In machine: [User mode > Common Settings > Register Paper Type > select the paper source (the cassette where the paper is set) > select the paper type (Heavy) > OK]. 2. In PC: [Print > iRC6800 > Properties > Paper Source tab > check the radio button "Paper Source" in "Select by" > select the paper source (the cassette where the heavy paper is set.) from "Paper Source" > print]. The machine will start picking up the heavy paper from the cassette and print it in the heavy paper mode. 15.3.13.1.56 Image loss occurs when copying irregular size original (280 x 420 mm: double truck of magazine) by reducing ratio
0009-3335
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description When making a copy of an irregular size original (in the actual failure case, 280 x 420mm: double truck of a magazine) to A4 paper, an image loss sometimes occurs. Cause Since the length of the original in the main scanning direction is between B4 and A3, it could be detected as B4 or A4 depending on the position where it is placed on the copyboard glass. If it is detected as B4, it is reduced at a copy ration of 81%, resulting in an image loss. Field Remedy Follow either of the following steps. a. Place the original fitting on the top left corner of the copyboard glass > select A4R for Paper Size > set Copy Ratio at 70%. b. Place the original aligning with the bottom left limit of A3 size paper > select A4 or A4R for Paper Size > press Auto Zoom button or set Copy Ratio at 70%. 15.3.13.1.57 How to make heavy paper available when printing: Registration of Heavy paper to Printer driver
0009-9349
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy Follow the steps below: 1. In the machine, [User Mode > Common Settings > Register Paper Type > select the paper source (a cassette where you want to set heavy paper) > select heavy paper as the paper type > OK]. 2. In the PC, [Start > Settings > Printer > iRC6800 > Properties > Device Settings > Get Device Status > Apply > OK]. Since this step adds the heavy paper to [Paper Type] of the printer driver as one of selection items, the heavy paper is selectable in the PC. 15.3.13.1.58 Message "Load paper" is displayed on LCD when printing: Because paper type selected in printer driver does not agree with machine's setting
0009-9352
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description This message is displayed when the paper type selected in the printer driver is not registered in the machine. In the field, it was displayed because the setting of a cassette, which had been assigned for heavy paper, was changed to a different paper type and an operator selected heavy paper in the printer diver and sent a print job without noticing such a fact.
15-115
Chapter 15 When sending a job from a PC to the machine, perform "Get Device Status" to check the current settings of the machine. If any change has been made to the machine's setting, register the paper type if necessary. Please explain this to your customer. Note: When the symptom occurs, the procedure below allows you to print the job instead of sending it again. Please also explain this to your customer. [System Monitor > check the indicated paper type > "Recover Later" > Done > set the paper you want to use in a cassette > register it in user mode (Register Paper Type under Common Settings) > OK]. 15.3.13.1.59 Description on message "Adjusting gradation. Please wait a moment."
0010-4087
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description This message is displayed when the machine is executing the image stabilization control (such as the potential control, primary/secondary transfer ATVC control, and other ATR controls) in order to keep the most appropriate density and quality of copies. This control is performed at an interval of the predetermined number of copies. If it is performed during a continuous copying operation, the machine stops copying for 80 seconds at the maximum. Please explain this to your customer. In addition, please note that there is no function to disable this control. 15.3.13.1.60 How to reject print jobs sent from computers with unknown Department ID
0010-4089
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description To reject print jobs sent from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID, follow the procedure below: [User mode > System Settings > Dept. ID Management > set "Dept. ID Management" to ON > set "Accept Print Jobs with Unknown IDs" to OFF > OK]. 15.3.13.1.61 How to make facedown delivery available when making copies by scanning from copyboard glass of machine without finisher
0010-4090
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description In regard to the machine without the finisher, the procedure below will make the facedown delivery available when making two or more sets of copies by scanning originals from the copyboard glass. In service mode (level2) [COPIER OPTION > BODY], set [FDW-DLV] to "1", then turn the control panel switch and the main power switch OFF in sequence, and then turn the main power switch ON again. Please note that the facedown deliver is not available when making one set of copies because of a specification constraint. 15.3.13.1.62 Condensation upon installation/faulty image/malfunction
0010-4091
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, a faulty image or a malfunction occurred because of condensation caused on the machine. It is assumed that this condensation occurred because the machine was installed immediately after it was transferred from a cold place to a warm place. Field Remedy When the machine is transferred from a cold place to a warm place, leave it for more than 1 hour without unpacking to let it get to know the surrounding temperature. 15.3.13.1.63 Auto paper selection mode is unavailable when portrait original (A5/STMT) is placed in landscape orientation (A5R/STMTR)
0010-7967
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description When a copy job is run by loading a stack of paper on the cassette in landscape orientation and placing a portrait original (A5/STMT) on the copyboard glass in landscape orientation (A5R/STMTR), the machine displays the Paper Select screen on its LCD, instead of selecting an appropriate size of paper automatically. Auto paper selection mode is available only when a portrait original (A5/STMT) is set on the document feeder in landscape orientation. Field Remedy To make a copy of an STMT/A5-size original from the copyboard glass using auto paper selection mode, set the original in portrait orientation (A5/STMT). Note: Auto paper selection mode is also unavailable for the following types of originals; use the manual paper selection mode for them. - Irregular size originals - Originals with high degree of transparency such as OHP film - Originals with extremely dark background - Originals smaller than A6R-size or postcard
15.3.13.2 FAQ on Send Specifications

15.3.13.2.1 Documents stored in Mail Box (Inbox) are lost
0006-2421
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description Documents stored in the mail box (Inbox) will automatically be erased three days later by default. In order to prevent the documents from being erased, set "Time Until Doc. Auto Erase" to "0". In user mode [Mail Box Settings> User Inboxes Settings], select an Inbox to be changed and select any number at [Time Until Doc. Auto Erase]. 15.3.13.2.2 How to send E-mail
0006-2430
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy There are two different sending methods.
15-116
Chapter 15 a. How to send an e-mail to a destination that is not registered in the address book: 1. Set the document to be sent. 2. Press [Send] tab> [E-mail] under New Address> [E-mail Address], type an e-mail address and press OK. 3. Press [Send Settings] and enter each item (Send Doc. Name, Subject, Message, Reply-to, Sender's Name). 4. Press [E-mail Priority] to select the priority, and [File Format] to select the format of the document to send. Then, press the Start key. b. How to send an e-mail to a destination that is registered in the address book: 1. Set the document to be sent. 2. Press [Send] tab> [Address Book/Server], and select the desired destination. 3. Press [Send Settings] and enter each item (Send Doc. Name, Subject, Message, Reply-to, Sender's Name). 4. Press [E-mail Priority] to select the priority, and [File Format] to select the format of the document to send. Then, press the Start key. For your information, the following describes how to register addresses: In user mode [Address Book Settings> Register Address> Register New Address> E-mail], type the name in the [Name] field and the e-mail address in the [E-mail Address] field. Then, press OK. 15.3.13.2.3 How to clear logs (job history, job record)
0006-2435
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description In service mode [COPIER> Function> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE], select "1" and press [OK] key. Then, select [HD-CLEAR] and press [OK] key. Turn the power OFF/ON so that the logs will be cleared. Note that the data stored in Inboxes will also be cleared at that time. The log of FAX transmission/reception can be cleared in service mode [FAX> CLEAR]. 15.3.13.2.4 How to make Send tab not display on LCD
0006-3253
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description You can select in service mode whether or not the send functions are displayed on the LCD. In order not to display the [Send] tab, change the setting in service mode (LEVEL 2) [COPIER> Option> BODY> UI-SEND> 0]. 15.3.13.2.5 How to send documents or images to designated folder in computer: Windows (SMB)
0006-4901
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy a. Preparation on computer: Create a new folder as a shared folder on your computer where you want to send documents (or images). b. Settings on iRC6800: Register the folder created in the above step in one of the address books on Send screen. 1. In user mode [Address Book Settings> Register Address> Register New Address> File]. 2. Enter [Name] and select any address book from Address Book 1 through 10. 3. Select "Windows (SMB)" for [Protocol]. 4. Configure [Host Name], [File Path], [User] and [Password]. Host Name: Enter the name of the file server on the network as the destination of the send job. File Path: Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job. You can also specify [Host Name] and [File Path] by pressing [Browse] button. For more details, refer to Sending and Facsimile Guide [Basic Sending Methods> Specifying Destinations> Using the New Address Tab> Specifying a File Server> Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB)). How to send: On [Send] tab, press [Address Book/Server], select the folder from the address book, and press [Start] so that the documents or images will be sent to the designated folder. 15.3.13.2.6 How to check whether SEND kit has been installed
0007-3970
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description It can be checked in either way of the following. 1. Check whether the "Send" tab appears on the LCD. If so, the SEND kit has been installed. (Otherwise, only the "Fax" tab appears.) 2. Press "Counter Check Key" on the control panel, and "Device Configuration" key. If "Universal Send Kit" is displayed under "Option", the SEND kit has been installed. 15.3.13.2.7 How to cancel send jobs waiting to be processed or being sent (E-mail / IFAX / Sending to File Server / Storing in User Inbox)
0008-3258
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description In order to cancel a send job while it is waiting to be processed, or while it is being sent, follow the steps below. Field Remedy Press [System Monitor> Send> Status> select the send job to be canceled> Cancel]. The message "Is it OK to cancel?" is displayed on the LCD, so press [Yes]. Note: The canceled send job is displayed as "NG" (No Good) on the Log screen. And, a send job while it is being sent might be sent depending on in what timing [Cancel] is pressed. 15.3.13.2.8 How to change Scanning Mode and File Format displayed on Send screen as standard
0008-3800
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In user mode [Communication Settings > TX Settings under Common Settings > Edit Standard Send Settings], select the scanning mode and file format you want to change from the Scanning Mode drop-down list and the File Format drop-down list, respectively and then press [OK].
15-117
Chapter 15 15.3.13.2.9 Want to send originals with blank boarder (margin) around edge of scanned image: Push scan
0009-2929
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy 1. Set the original you want to send with a blank border on the feeder or the copyboard glass, and in the Send screen, press the drop-down list of [Scan Settings] > select a scan setting > [Option] > [Special Features] > [Frame Erase]. 2. Press [Original Frame Erase] > enter the width of blank border > [Next] > select the original size > [OK] to return the Send screen. When entering the width, you can set the same width for all four borders (Adjust All At Once), or set the top, left, right, and bottom widths independently (Adjust Each Dim). 3. Select the destination and press the Start key to send the image. Description Selecting the "Frame Erase" feature from the Scan Settings in the Send screen enables you to send originals with a blank boarder around the edge of scanned image. There are three kinds of Frame Erase functions: Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Biding Erase. In the Original Frame Erase and the Book Frame Erase, "Adjust All At Once" function and "Adjust Each Dim" function are available. 15.3.13.2.10 Message "To send a file in [PDF (compct)] format, select a setting other than black and white and select 300 x 300 dpi." is displayed: FAX transmission
0010-3869
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description As the file format [PDF (compct)] is enabled only when it is combined with any of the following scanning modes: [Color/grayscale 300 x 300dpi], [Full color 300 x 300 dpi], or [Grayscale 300 x 300 dpi], the message is displayed when other scanning mode is selected. When you want to set [PDF(compct)] as a standard sending setting, select one of those scanning modes. For your information, with the factory setting, if the file format is set to [PDF (compct)], [Color/ Grayscale 300 x 300dpi] is automatically set as the scanning mode.
15.3.13.3 FAQ on LIPS Specifications

15.3.13.3.1 Is it possible to superimpose form over document created using application when printing?: Overlay Printing
0010-4094
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description It is possible to superimpose a form that is created in the PC side over a document created using an application. Field Remedy a. Creating a form file a-1. Create a form file using an application installed in the PC, and save it as a new file. a-2. Open the saved form file and then select [File > Print > Properties > Page Options > Overlay > Create a Form File > Browse > select "All Files" for "Save as type" and select the form file created in the step a-1 > delete an extension from the filename displayed in "File name" field if any > select "Form File (*.p5c)" for "Save as type" and save the form file as a new form file > make an entry for "Title" and "Sub-title" in the Overlay tab if necessary]. a-3. Continue pressing [OK] until the Print dialog box is closed and then the saved form file appears on the screen. b. Superimposing the saved form file over a document created using an application b-1. Open a document over which you want to superimpose the created form. b-2. Select [File > Print > Properties > Page Options > Overlay > Use Overlay Printing]. b-3. Select [Browse > select "All Files" for "Save as type" > Open > select the form file created in the step a-2. > Open]. b-4. Check the contents of "File Info" in the Overlay tab and select OK twice to start overlay printing. Note: Overlay printing is unavailable when the paper size, orientation, resolution, and color mode are different between the form and the application document.
15.3.13.4 FAQ on UFR Specifications

15.3.13.4.1 USB Interface Board: Where to install it
0006-2396
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description Install it at J1104 on the Main Controller PCB. 15.3.13.4.2 Cannot select Staple as finishing mode on PC: Device status is not obtained
0008-3828
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the following symptom occurred: In the printer driver [Properties > Finishing tab > Finishing], the radio button [Staple] is grayed out and unavailable for the user. Field Remedy To make the [Staple] button selectable, change the setting of the printer driver; [Start > Settings > Printers > The icon of iRC6800 > Properties > Device Settings > choose the Finisher connected to your machine from the pull-down menu of Output Options or click on [Get Device Status] to automatically collect the information on the Finisher > Apply > OK]. 15.3.13.4.3 How to fix print color in black and white (monochrome)
0008-6740
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description Even though "black and white printing" is specified on the printer driver, the image can be printed in color depending on application software in use. In such a case, select in user mode [Printer Settings> Settings> Color Mode> Black and White].
15-118
Chapter 15 15.3.13.4.4 How to restrict computers that can send data (print job, I-FAX)
0008-6742
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy a. How to set permitted PCs: a-1. In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> TCP/IP Settings> IP Address Range Settings> Setting/Browsing Range> Permit IP Address(es)> Apply Settings> ON]. a-2. If a single address is to be set, press [Single Address] and enter the IP address and finally press [OK]. If multiple addresses are to be set, press [Multiple Addresses] and enter the IP addresses in [First Address] and [Last Address], and finally press [OK]. b. How to set rejected PCs: b-1. In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> TCP/IP Settings> IP Address Range Settings> Setting/Browsing Range> Reject IP Address(es)> Apply Settings> ON]. b-2. Do the same thing in step 2 above. 15.3.13.4.5 How to print 2nd side upside down in duplex printing
0008-6872
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In the printer driver properties, select Finishing tab and change Binding Location from "Long Edge (Left)" to "Short Edge (Top)". 15.3.13.4.6 Cannot select staple as finishing mode on PC: Because Custom Size Paper is selected
0009-2931
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description In the printer driver, when Custom Paper Size is selected for Output Size, the radio button [Staple] is grayed out and unavailable for the user. To select Staple as the finishing mode, select any standard size paper for Output Size. 15.3.13.4.7 Correct imformation on paper type is not displayed on tooltips (message) displayed on illustration of printer driver
0009-9343
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the symptom occurred because the paper type was newly added in a PC by using [Start > Settings > Printers > iRC6800 > Properties > Device Settings > Form to Tray Assignment > Paper Type]. In order to make tooltips display correct paper type information, perform "Get Device Status" instead of "Form to Tray Assignment." Note: Performing "Get Device Status" will clear all the paper types that has been added using "Form to Tray Assignment." 15.3.13.4.8 How to check type information (size, type, level of paper) of machine in printer driver properties
0009-9345
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description Follow the steps below. 1. Start > Settings > Printers > iRC6800 > Properties > Device Settings > Get Device Status > Apply > OK. 2. "Print" dialogue box of a file > Properties > Paper Source tab > select "Paper Type" in "Select By" 3. In the Paper Source tab, move the mouse pointer over the illustration of this machine. The tooltip (message) pops up and displays the size, the type, and the level of paper set in such a paper source. 15.3.13.4.9 Do counters increase when printing job of Excel sheet including both monochrome and color pages?
0010-4085
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description If the color mode is set to "Auto Detect" in the printer driver, the machine detects color mode of each page and increases each counter in accordance with the results of the detection.
15.3.13.5 FAQ on G3FAX Specifications

15.3.13.5.1 When receiving B5-sized document by FAX, A4 paper is used for output
0006-2043
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description This symptom is due to a specification of G3FAX. When the sending side scans B5-sized document in landscape orientation (182mm wide), the machine declares the document to be A4. Consequently, the machine on the receiving side will receive and print it with A4 paper. This is because G3 standard regards a document narrower than 210mm (equivalent to A4R) to be 210mm. In order to print it with B5 paper at the receiving side, it is necessary that the sending side scans B5 paper in portrait orientation (257mm wide). 15.3.13.5.2 Difference between # error and ## error: FAX error code
0008-1571
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description When an error occurs during transmission or reception, the following error codes will be displayed on the LCD depending on what has happened. - # error code: User error code which can be solved by users by themselves.
15-119
Chapter 15 - ## error code: Service error code which needs any corrective action by a service engineer. - STOP: Jobs which have been canceled during transmission or waiting for transmission. 15.3.13.5.3 There is no error code indication in Details although its log displays "NG"
0008-3775
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy This job is the one which resulted in a service error (## error code). In order to prevent users from being confused, the host machine is configured at a time of factory shipment so that ## error code is not be displayed although # code is. In order to display ## error codes. in service mode [FAX> Sssw> SW01], set bit0 (rightmost) to "1" from "0". 15.3.13.5.4 How to display ## service error code
0008-3776
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In service mode [FAX> Sssw> SW01], set bit0 (rightmost) to "1". ## service error code will be displayed in reports and on the LCD. Description If you want to check jobs which resulted in a service error on the LCD, follow the steps below: Press [System Monitor> Fax> Log], select a job with "NG" and press [Details]. If the selected job is a service error, ## code will be displayed in [Result]. Note: On the list of [Log], it is impossible to determine which job has resulted in a service error. You need to select a job with "NG" one by one. 15.3.13.5.5 "TX Report" and "FAX Error TX Report" (total 2 sheets) are output upon FAX transmission error
0008-3796
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description When a FAX transmission error occurs, the following two different reports are to be output by default. 1. FAX Error TX Report: to be output upon a FAX transmission error 2. TX Report: to be output upon a FAX or SEND transmission error If you want to output either of the reports, follow the steps below: Field Remedy a. If you want to output only "FAX Error TX Report" upon a FAX transmission error: In user mode [Report Settings> Settings> Send> TX Report], press OFF. Note: Even when a SEND transmission error occurs, no report will be output any longer. b. If you want to output only "TX Report" upon a FAX transmission error: In user mode [Report Settings> Settings> Fax> Fax TX Report], press OFF. Note: How long it takes to complete the transmission (USAGE T) and its error code will not be indicated on the TX Report. 15.3.13.5.6 How to erase Fax forwarding settings
0008-3803
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In user mode [System Settings> Forwarding Settings> select the forwarding setting that you want to erase> Erase], press Yes so that the selected setting will be erased. Note: If you want to make the setting invalid temporarily, in user mode [System Settings> Forwarding Settings], select the setting that you want to and press [Validate/Invalidate]. 15.3.13.5.7 How to invalidate Fax forwarding setting temporarily
0008-3837
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In user mode [System Settings> Forwarding Settings, select the forwarding setting that you want to invalidate and press [Validate/Invalidate]. In order to make it valid once again, press [Validate/Invalidate] again. 15.3.13.5.8 Multiple Communication Result Report
0009-2458
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The multiple communication result report is output after a sequential broadcast transmission. In this report, all the destinations are classified as follows according to the result of the FAX transmission: - TX/RX INCOMPLETE: The FAX number of the destination of an incomplete transmission is indicated. (For example, the FAX number that does not exist is entered.) - TRANSACTION OK: The FAX number of the destination of a completed transmission is indicated. - ERROR: The FAX number of the destination of an error transmission is indicated. For any column, if there is no applicable destination, "---" is printed. 15.3.13.5.9 Is it possible to move data from Address Book to One-Touch key?
0009-2459
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description It is impossible to move the address data registered in the Address Book to the One-Touch key. Newly register the address data you want to a One-Touch key. The address data registered in a One-Touch key is reflected to the Address Book.
15-120
Chapter 15 15.3.13.5.10 How to erase all destinations stored in Address Book and One-Touch buttons at once
0009-2460
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy In service mode, [COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ADRS-BK], press OK, then turn the control panel power switch OFF and turn the main power switch OFF/ON. 15.3.13.5.11 Is FAX/TEL auto switching function available?
0009-2462
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The FAX/TEL auto switching function is not available in this machine. If you need it, install a device that has this function between telephone line and the machine (LINE). 15.3.13.5.12 How to print FAX Activity Report when necessary
0009-2465
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy When you want to print the FAX Activity Report at a timing other than the specified times or every 40 transmissions, select [Send screen > System Monitor > Fax > Log] and press "Print List." 15.3.13.5.13 How to make sender information smaller on receiving side: FAX Transmission
0009-7511
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In order to make the sender information smaller, choose either of the following two methods. a. Select the fine mode (200 x 200dpi). In the normal mode (200 x 100dpi), the sender information becomes vertically long. b. In service mode [FAX > NCU > SPECIAL-B > SW28], change the value of bit6 to "1" so that the sender information size in the normal mode can be the same as in the fine mode. 15.3.13.5.14 How to set memory reception ending sound: FAX reception
0010-4088
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Case in the field ] Description In service mode, [FAX > NCU > SPECIALB > SW04 > set "1" for [bit1] > OK]. Next, turn the control panel switch and the main power switch OFF in sequence, and then, turn the main power switch ON again. 15.3.13.5.15 Wants to hide destination name printed at sender information area on receiving side when sending FAX message: FAX transmission
0010-4093
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The following procedure enables you to hide the destination name that is printed at the sender information area on the receiving side. This function is useful when you register destination names in the abbreviated form. However, please note that this function is not available for the iR3300 series machines. In user mode [Communication Settings > TX Settings under Common Settings > TX Terminal ID > Display Destination Name], select [OFF].
15.3.13.6 FAQ on I-FAX Specifications

15.3.13.6.1 Difference between POP reception and SMTP reception: I-FAX reception
0010-3868
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description A. POP reception This reception mode requires a mail server. Even when FAX data are sent to the machine while the main power switch of the machine is being turned OFF, the mail server keeps such data, and allows the machine to receive the data after the main power switch is turned ON. In order to make this mode available, enter user mode [System Settings > Network Settings > E-mail/I-FAX], and then set [POP] to ON (Default). B. SMTP reception This reception mode enables the machine to receive FAX data without a mail server. When the main power switch of the machine is turned OFF, however, the sender's FAX machine repeats data transmission preset times and then results in error. In order to make this mode available, enter user mode [System Settings > Network Settings > E-mail/I-Fax], and then set [SMTP Receipt] to ON. Reference: This machine uses SMTP to send FAX data to the mail server or directly to other I-FAX products. 15.3.13.6.2 Is it required to issue POP when using I-FAX function?
0010-4092
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description It is required to issue POP (server/Address) when using I-FAX function. Field Remedy Ask a network administrator for POP server and POP address and input such information entering User mode [System Settings > Network Settings > E-mail/
15-121
Chapter 15 I-Fax].
15.3.13.7 FAQ on Remote UI Specifications

15.3.13.7.1 Remote UI: Explanations about applicable functions of Remote UI
0006-2392
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description a. How to access Remote UI In user mode [System Settings> Remote UI> ON] and turn the power OFF/ON. Then, enter the host machine's IP address into your web browser, so the Remote UI's top page or main screen is displayed on your computer screen. b. Applicable functions of Remote UI 1. Device Status and Information Display 2. Job Management (Copy/Send/Fax jobs) 3. Managing Inboxes (User Inboxes/Memory RX Inboxes/Confidential Fax Inboxes) 4. Printing PDF or PS Files Directly (Direct Print) 5. Managing the Address Book 6. Customizing System Settings 7. Specifying LDAP Server Settings 8. Specifying Forwarding Settings 9. Managing Department IDs 10. Device Custom Settings 11. Import/Export Function of Address Book and Device Settings 15.3.13.7.2 Remote UI: How to specify Department ID Management settings through Remote UI
0006-2393
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description On the top page of the Remote UI, select [Add. Func.> Department ID Management] and configure the necessary settings. For more details, refer to Remote UI Guide [Customizing Settings> Managing Department IDs]. 15.3.13.7.3 Remote UI: How to back up (export) address book
0006-2394
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The Remote UI enables you to back up (export) the address book data to a computer or load (import) to the host machine. How to back up (export): [Remote UI> Add. Func.> Import/Export> Address Book> Export], select an address book to be saved and click 'Start Export'. How to load (import): [Remote UI> Add. Func.> Import/Export> Address Book> Import], select an address book to be loaded and click 'Start Import'. For more details, refer to Remote UI Guide [Customizing Settings> Import/Export Function> Saving the Address Book]. 15.3.13.7.4 Remote UI: How to restrict computers that can set or browse machine setting items using Remote UI
0006-2412
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description a. How to permit computer(s) to set or browse: 1. In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> TCP/IP Settings> IP Address Range Settings> Setting/Browsing Range> Permit IP Address(es)> Apply Settings> ON> Register]. 2. If a single address is to be set, press [Single Address] and enter the IP address and finally press [OK]. If multiple addresses are to be set, press [Multiple Addresses] and enter the IP addresses in [First Address] and [Last Address], and finally press [OK]. b. How to prohibit computer(s) from setting or browsing: 1. In user mode [System Settings> Network Settings> TCP/IP Settings> IP Address Range Settings> Setting/Browsing Range> Reject IP Address(es)> Apply Settings> ON> Register]. 2. If a single address is to be set, press [Single Address] and enter the IP address and finally press [OK]. If multiple addresses are to be set, press [Multiple Addresses] and enter the IP addresses in [First Address] and [Last Address], and finally press [OK]. 15.3.13.7.5 How to review documents stored in Inbox from computer
0006-2441
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description Documents (or images) stored in Inboxes can be reviewed through the Remote UI. 1. Start your web browser and enter the IP address of the host machine. The Remote UI top page will be displayed. (No additional software is required except for Web browser.) 2. Click [Mail Box] button and select any Inbox where the document (or the image) is stored. 15.3.13.7.6 Remote UI: Functions [Job Status] [Mail Box] [Address] [Add. Func.] do not work except for [Device], while prompting for User Name and Password
0006-3254
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description When the host machine is equipped with the Card Reader-D1, or [Dept. ID Management] is activated in user mode, the functions related to print volume and billing cannot be viewed through the Remote UI. For User Name and Password, use "System Manager ID" and "System Password" respectively that have been specified in user mode [System Settings> System Manager Settings], so that all the functions can be reviewed through the Remote UI.
15-122
Chapter 15 15.3.13.7.7 Remote UI: How to back up forwarding settings

0006-4897
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description The Remote UI enables you to back up (export) the forwarding settings to a computer or load (import) them back to the host machine. How to back up (export): [Remove UI> Add. Func.> Import/Export> Forwarding Settings> Export], click "Start Export". How to load (import): [Remove UI> Add. Func.> Import/Export> Forwarding Settings> Import], click "Start Import". For more details, refer to Remote UI Guide [Customizing Settings> Import/Export Function> Saving Forwarding Settings in Files (Export)]. 15.3.13.7.8 Remote UI: How to back up settings of additional functions (user mode)
0006-4898
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy The Remote UI enables you to back up (export) the additional functions settings (user mode) to a computer or load (import) them back to the host machine. How to back up (export): [Remote UI> Add. Func.> Import/Export> Additional Functions> Export], click "Start Export". How to load (import): [Remote UI> Add. Func.> Import/Export> Additional Functions> Import], click "Start Import". For more details, refer to Remote UI Guide [Customizing Settings> Import/Export Function> Saving Additional Functions Settings in Files (Export)]. 15.3.13.7.9 Remote UI cannot be accessed with Mac
0006-4925
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy Make sure of the following: 1. MacOS is Ver.8.6 or later, Web browser is IE5.0 or later. 2. On iRC6800, [On] is selected in user mode [System Settings> Remote UI]. 15.3.13.7.10 Pop-up window cannot be closed after displaying message board on touch panel / How to display "Done" key: Remote UI
0008-1595
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description There are two options for how to display the pop-up window on the machine's touch panel display. 1. If you select [All Times], the pop-up window cannot be closed on the touch panel display. While it is being displayed, a copy or fax operation is not acceptable. 2. If you select [On Auto Clear Time], "Done" key appears in the bottom of the pop-up window so you can close the window by pressing the key. Then, you can make a copy or fax operation. The window will be redisplayed after the Auto Clear mode initiates. Field Remedy In order to close the pop-up window on the machine's touch panel display so as to enable a copy or fax operation, select [On Auto Clear Time]. For more details, refer to the Remote UI Guide [Customizing Settings> Customizing System Settings> Customizing System Information]. Note: If there is no problem in clearing the message in the pop-up window, select in user mode [System Settings> Clear Message Board]. In this case, the message in the pop-up window and the status display will be cleared, so you have to enter the messages once again through the Remote UI. 15.3.13.7.11 Wants to import FAX destinations registered to Address Book of machine into FAX driver
0010-7969
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [ Manual-related ] Description Using the Remote UI enables you to import FAX destinations registered to the address book of this machine into the address book of the FAX driver. Field Remedy 1. Remote UI > Add. Func. > Import/Export > Address Book > Export > select the target address book from the pull down menu > select "Custom Format" as File Format > Start Export. 2. In the File Download screen opened automatically after the above-mentioned Step1, Save > specify the destination for saving in [Save in] > select ".abk Document" as [Save as type] > Save. 3. On the PC screen, Start > Settings > Printers > FAX printer driver > Properties > General > Printing Preferences > Import > select the .abk format file that is saved in the Step2 > Open]. This step will import the exported address book data into the address book of the FAX driver.
15.4 Outline of Electrical Components

15.4.1 Clutch/Solenoid 15.4.1.1 Clutches and Solenoids
0004-9524
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Reader Unit The reader unit does not use clutches or solenoids. 2. Printer Unit
15-123
Chapter 15
T-15-10 Name Notation Parts No. Color developing assembly clutch FK2-0033 Color toner supply clutch FK2-0033 Black developing assembly clutch FK2-0033 Manual feed pickup solenoid FK2-0115 Fixing web solenoid FK2-0037 Reversal shift solenoid FM2-0584 Left deck confluence solenoid FK2-0035 Delivery solenoid FM2-0488 Deck (right) pickup solenoid FK2-0116 Deck (left) pickup solenoid FK2-0116 Cassette 3 pickup solenoid FK2-0116 Cassette 4 pickup solenoid SL9 FK2-0116 SL10 SL11 SL12 Developing rotary locking solenoid FK2-0117 Patch image read sensor shutter solenoid FK2-0100 ATR sensor shutter solenoid FK2-0100 SL>12 J1106 SL>11 J1121 SL>10 J1106 SL>9 J1114 SL>8 J1114 SL>7 J1113 SL>6 J1113 SL>5 J1308/1303 J1119 SL>4 J1307/1303 J1119 SL>3 J1307/1303 J1119 SL>2 J1118 SL>1 J1107 CL>3 J1109 CL>2 J1109 CL>1 J1109 I/O PART-CHK Connector No Fixing/feeding driver PCB DC controller PCB
CL1 CL2 CL3
SL1 SL2 SL3 SL4 SL5 SL6 SL7 SL8
15-124
Chapter 15
SL1 SL10 SL4 SL3 SL2
CL3 CL2 CL1 SL6 SL12 SL7 SL5 SL8 SL9 SL11
F-15-133
15.4.2 Motor 15.4.2.1 Motors

0004-9333
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Reader Unit
T-15-11 Notation M501 FK2-0237 Name Parts No. Scanner motor I/O Description PART-CHK drives the No. 1/No. 2 mirror base E202 E code
T-15-12 Connector No. Notation I/F PCB M501 J306/307 J203 Reader controller PCB
15-125
Chapter 15
F-15-134
2. Printer Unit
T-15-13 Notation M1 Name Parts No. Polygon motor FM2-0394 (laser scanner assembly) Drum/ITB motor FK2-0019 M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M25 M26 Developing motor FK2-0021 Fixing motor FK2-0023 Developing rotary motor FK2-0025 Manual feed pre-registration motor FL2-0477 Registration motor FL2-0476 Outside delivery motor FM2-1244 Duplexing reversal motor FL2-0478 Duplexing left motor FK2-0032 Duplexing middle motor FL2-0479 Duplexing right motor FL2-0480 Right deck pull-off motor FL2-0583 Vertical path motor FL2-0583 Right deck pickup motor FL2-0582 Left deck pickup motor FL2-0581 Cassette pickup motor FL2-0581 Secondary transfer outside roller shift motor FK2-0031 ITB cleaner shift motor FK2-0155 Outside heating roller shift motor FK2-0153 Hopper stirring motor FK2-0015 Black toner supply motor FK2-0015 Primary charging wire cleaning motor FL2-0991 shifts the ITB cleaner MTR>21 shifts the outside heating roller MTR>22 stirs toner (black) inside the hopper assembly MTR>23 supplies toner from the black toner bottle MTR>25 drives the primary wire cleaner MTR>26 E025 E020 E009/E079 E078 drives the vertical path 1 roller MTR>14 drive the vertical path 3/4 roller MTR>15 Dives the right deck pickup assembly, vertical path roller 2 MTR>17 drives the left deck pickup assembly MTR>18 drives the cassette 3/4 pickup assembly MTR>19 shifts the secondary transfer outside roller MTR>20 E077 drives the duplexing left roller MTR>11 drives the duplexing confluence roller MTR>12 drives the duplexing right roller, duplexing outlet roller MTR>13 drives the registration roller MTR>8 drives the outside delivery roller, curl-removing roller MTR>9 drives the reversing 1/2 roller, duplexing inlet roller MTR>10 drives the developing rotary MTR>5 MTR>6 E021 drives the manual feed pickup assembly, pre-registration front roller drives the fixing assembly MTR>4 E014 I/O drives the laser scanner MTR>1 E110 drives the photosensitive drum, photosensitive drum cleaner, intermediate transfer unit MTR>2 supplies color toner; drives the black/color developing assembly MTR>3 E023 E012 Description PART-CHK E code
M2
15-126
Chapter 15
Name Parts No. Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor FL2-0991 Horizontal registration motor FM2-0163 Right deck lifter motor FK2-0017 Left deck lifter motor FK2-0017 Cassette 3 lifer motor FK2-0016 Cassette 4 lifter motor FK2-0016 drives the lower cast lifter drives the upper cassette lifter drives the left deck lifer drives the right deck lifter I/O Description PART-CHK MTR>27 drives the horizontal registration sensor MTR>28 E051 E code drives the pre-transfer wire cleaner
Notation M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32
T-15-14 Connector No. Notation Fixing/feeding assembly driver PCB M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 J1308/1302 J1404/1403 J1404/1403 J1404/1403 J1404/1403 J1308/1302 J1310/1302 J1312/1302 J1310/1302 J1311/1302 J1405/1402 J1406/1402 J1405/1402 J1407/1402 J1406/1402 J1311/1302 Pickup driver PCB DC controller PCB J1104 J1109 J1109 J1118 J1127 J1122 J1119 J1122 J1119 J1119 J1119 J1119 J1115 J1115 J1115 J1115 J1115 J1115 J1108 J1118 J1108 J1108 J1106 J1108 J1119 J1116 J1116 J1116 J1116
15-127
Chapter 15
M6 M14 M29 M18 M9
M17
M30 M31 M19 M32 M3 M2 M5 M20 M27 M21 M22 M15 M4 M23 M26
M1 M25
M28
M13 M8 M12 M11
M10
F-15-135
15.4.3 Fan 15.4.3.1 Fans

0005-0020
T-15-15 Notation FM13 Name Parts No. Reader cooling fan FH5-1061 I/O cools the reader assembly Function PART-CHK E code
T-15-16 Notation FM13 Connector No. Interface PCB J313/J308 Reader controller PCB J202
15-128
Chapter 15
FM13
F-15-136
2. Printer Unit
T-15-17 Notation FM1 Name Parts No. primary charging suction fan FK2-0103 FM2 Primary charging assembly exhaust fan FK2-0124 FM3 FM4 FM5 Feeding fan 1 FH5-1061 Feeding fan 2 FH5-1061 Fixing heat exhaust fan FK2-0103 FM6 FM7 Delivery cooling fan 1 FK2-0124 Process unit cooling fan FL2-1185 FM8 FM9 FM10 Control cooling fan FH5-1033 Power supply cooling fan FK2-0524 Delivery cooling fan 2 MN-CONT>P001 P003-10 1:half speed I/O Description PART-CHK FAN-ON>1 E alarm code E824-000 draws air from outside the machine to the primary charging assembly
discharges air from around the primary charging assembly FAN-ON>2 keeps paper on the feed belt FAN-ON>4 keeps paper on the feed belt FAN-ON>4 330014 discharges heat from the fixing assembly to the outside of the machine FAN-ON>5 cools the delivery assembly 1:ON cools the process unit FAN-ON>7 cools the inside of the controller box 1:ON cools the DC power supply PCB FAN-ON>9 E804-0007 cools paper being delivered outside the machine (only if equipped with a finisher) E820-0002 FAN-ON>6 330001 E805-0003 330014 E824-0001
FK2-0124 FM11 FM12 Feeding fan 3 FH5-1061 Feeding fan 4 FH5-1061
FAN-ON>10 keeps paper on the feed belt FAN-ON>3 keeps paper on the feed belt FAN-ON>3
330007
330015 330015
T-15-18 Connector No. Notation FM1 FM2 FM3 FM4 FM5 FM6 FM7 FM8 FM9 FM10 J124 J1110 J1308 J1305 J1305 Fixing/feeding driver PCB DC power supply relay PCB DC controller PCB J1117 J1109 J1119 J1119 J1110 J1119 J1108 J1113 Main controller PCB (main)
15-129
Chapter 15
Connector No. Notation FM11 FM12 Fixing/feeding driver PCB J1308 J1308 DC power supply relay PCB DC controller PCB J1119 J1119 Main controller PCB (main)
FM2
FM5
FM8
FM9
FM1
FM10 FM7 FM3 FM11
FM12 FM4
FM6
F-15-137
15.4.4 Sensor 15.4.4.1 Sensors

0005-0022
T-15-19 Name Notation Interface PCB Description Connector No. Parts No. I/O Reader controller PCB Jam/E code
PS501 PS502 PS503
Scanner HP sensor FK2-0149 ADF open/closed sensor 1 FK2-0149 ADF open/closed sensor 2 FK2-0149
detects scanner home position J310/J308 detects the state (open/closed) of the ADF J310/J307 detects the timing of original size detection J310/J308 J202 J203 J202
15-130
Chapter 15
PS501 PS502 PS503
F-15-138
2. Printer Unit
T-15-20 Name Notation Parts No. PS1 PS2 PS3 ITB HP sensor A FK2-0161 Patch image read sensor FH7-7601 Transparency sensor (front) FM2-0850 FM2-0851 PS4 PS5 PS6 PS7 PS8 ATR sensor FM2-0422 Upper right cover open/closed sensor FK2-0149 Manual feed paper sensor FK2-0149 Last sheet sensor FK2-0149 Developing rotary solenoid sensor FK2-0149 PS9 Registration sensor FK2-0149 PS10 Post-transfer sensor FK2-0149 PS11 PS12 Fixing inlet sensor FK2-0149 Inside delivery sensor FK2-0149 PS13 PS14 Outside delivery sensor FK2-0149 Reversal sensor FK2-0149 PS15 PS17 PS18 PS19 PS20 Reversal vertical path sensor FK2-0149 Duplexing left sensor FK2-0149 Duplexing confluence sensor FK2-0149 Developing rotary HP sensor FK2-0149 Web length sensor FK2-0149 P009-2 1:web absent P002-0 0:open P007-14 1:paper present P007-15 1:paper present P004-10 1:HP checks the density of the toner on the ITB J1121 detects registration paper (if not transparency); detects transparency (if transparency) J1305/J1302 J1119 xx0A, 0D90, 0D91, 0D92, 0D93 I/O Feed driver PCB detects the ITB home position J1121 E070 DC controller PCB Description Connector No. Jam/E code
checks the density of toner on the developing cylinder J1106 detects the state (open/closed) of the upper right cover J1117 Detects the presence/absence of paper from the manual feeder J1107 J1107 identifies the last sheet from the manual feeder detects the activation of the developing rotary solenoid J1106 J1305/J1302 detects paper after transfer J1305/J1302 detects paper at the fixing inlet P006-6 1:paper present detects inside delivery paper J1307/J1303 detects outside delivery paper P006-7 1:paper present detects reversed paper J1307/J1303 detects reversal vertical path paper J1307/J1303 detects duplexing left paper J1307/J1303 detects duplexing confluence paper J1307/J1303 detects developing rotary home position J1106 detects the remaining length of the fixing cleaning web J1118 E021 J1119 xx12 J1119 xx11 J1119 xx0F J1119 xx0D (face-down delivery only) J1110 xx0E J1119 xx0C (except stationary) J1124 xx15 (stationary only) J1119 xx0B (except stationary) J1119 xx0A, 0D91 E020
P004-12 1:ON(rotary lock) detects registration paper
15-131
Chapter 15
Name Notation Parts No. PS21 PS22 PS23 Outside heating roller HP sensor FK2-0149 FK2-0149 ITB cleaning HP sensor FK2-0149 PS24 PS25 PS26 PS28 PS29 FH7-7196 Color toner level sensor FK2-0003 FK2-0004 FK2-0149 Transparency sensor (rear) FM2-0850 FM2-0851 PS30 PS31 ITB HP sensor B FK2-0161 Vertical path 0 sensor FK2-0149 PS32 P004-11 1:HP detects paper in the vertical path 0 P006-1 1:paper present J1107 xx09 (only if from right deck) P009-9 1:toner present P009-12 1:set P009-13 0:open J1305/J1302 detects the ITB home position J1121 Color toner cartridge sensor Hopper assembly open/closed sensor P004-8 1:HP detects duplexing horizontal registration J1307/J1303 detects the remaining level of color toner J1106 detects the presence/absence of a color toner cartridge J1106 detects the state (open/closed) of the hopper assembly J1108 detects registration paper (if not transparency), detects a transparency (if transparency) J1119 xx0A, 0D90, 0D91, 0D92, 0D93 J1119 E051 Horizontal registration sensor P004-9 1:HP J1305/1302 detects the ITB cleaner home position J1108 Secondary transfer outside roller HP sensor I/O Feed driver PCB DC controller PCB detects the outside heating roller home position J1118 detects the secondary transfer outside roller home position J1119 E077 E079 Description Connector No. Jam/E code
Vertical path confluence sensor FK2-0149
detects paper at the pickup vertical path confluence J1117
P006-0 1:paper present detects paper from the right deck P007-9 1:paper present detects the right deck limit P005-9 1:limit state P005-8 1:paper present detects the right deck lifter P005-10 0:pickup state(paper present) P005-11 1:50% or more of capacity P005-12 1:50% to 25% of capacity
PS33
Right deck pickup sensor FK2-0149
J1113
xx01 (except stationary)
PS34 PS35 PS36 PS37 PS38 PS39 PS40
Right deck limit sensor FK2-0149 Right deck paper sensor FK2-0149 Right deck lifter sensor FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 Right deck sensor FK2-0149 Left deck pickup sensor FK2-0149 Right deck paper level sensor A Right deck paper level sensor B
J1113 detects the presence/absence of paper in the right deck J1113 J1113 J1111 J1111 J1110 detects pickup from the left deck
detects the remaining level of paper in the right deck detects the remaining level of paper in the right deck detects the presence/absence of the right deck
P007-8 1:paper present detects the left deck limit P004-1 1:limit state detects paper in the left deck P004-0 1:paper present detects the left deck lifer P004-2 0:pickup state(paper prresent) P004-3 1:50% or more of capacity P004-4 1:50% to 25% of capacity detects paper in the left deck
J1113
xx02 (except stationary)
PS41 PS42 PS43 PS44 PS45 PS46 PS47 PS48
Left deck limit sensor FK2-0149 Left deck paper sensor FK2-0149 Left deck lifter sensor FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 Left deck paper sensor FK2-0149 Left deck stationary paper sensor FK2-0149 Cassette 3 pickup sensor FK2-0149 Left deck paper level sensor A Left deck paper level sensor B
J1113 J1113 J1113 J1111 J1111 J1110 detects stationary paper in the left deck J1113 J1114 xx03 (except stationary) detects pickup from the cassette 3
detects the remaining level of paper in the left deck detects the remaining level of paper in the left deck
P007-12 1:paper present P007-11 1:paper present detects the cassette 3 limit P005-1 1:limit state detects paper in the cassette 3 P005-0 1:paper present
PS49 PS50
Cassette 3 limit sensor FK2-0149 Cassette 3 paper sensor FK2-0149
J1114 J1114
15-132
Chapter 15
Name Notation Parts No. PS51 PS52 PS53 PS54 Cassette 3 lifter sensor FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 Cassette 4 pickup sensor FK2-0149 PS55 PS56 PS57 PS58 PS59 PS60 Cassette 4 limit sensor FK2-0149 Cassette 4 paper sensor FK2-0149 Cassette 4 lifter sensor FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 Vertical path 1 sensor FK2-0149 PS61 PS62 PS63 PS64 PS65 Vertical path 2 sensor FK2-0149 Vertical path 3 sensor FK2-0149 Vertical path 4 sensor FK2-0149 FK2-0149 Drum HP sensor FK2-0149 Lower right cover open/closed sensor P002-1 0:open Cassette 4 paper level sensor A Cassette 4 paper level sensor B P006-9 1:limit state detects paper in the cassette 4 P006-8 1:paper present detects the cassette 4 lifter P006-10 0:pickup state(paper present) P006-11 0:50% or less of capacity P006-12 0:10% or less of capacity detects paper in the pickup vertical path 1 P006-2 1:paper present detects paper in the pickup vertical path 2 P006-3 1:paper present detects paper in the pickup vertical path 3 P006-4 1:paper present detects paper in the pickup vertical path 4 P006-5 1:paper present J1114 J1112 detects the home position of the photosensitive drum J1109 xx05 detects the state (pen/closed) of the lower right cover J1114 xx06 J1112 xx04 J1113 xx08 (except stationary) J1114 J1117 J1117 detects the remaining level of paper in the cassette 4 detects the remaining level of paper in the cassette 4 J1114 Cassette 3 paper level sensor A Cassette 3 paper level sensor B I/O Feed driver PCB detects the cassette 3 lifter P005-2 1:pickup state(paper present) P005-3 1:50% or less of capacity P005-4 1:10% or less of capacity detects pickup from the cassette 4 P007-11 1:paper present detects the cassette 4 limit J1114 J1114 xx04 (except stationary) J1114 J1117 J1117 detects the remaining level of paper in the cassette 3 detects the remaining level of paper in the cassette 3 DC controller PCB Description Connector No. Jam/E code
15-133
Chapter 15
PS28
PS29 PS29 PS14 PS12 PS18 PS15 PS10
PS32 PS3
PS3 PS22
PS9
PS2 PS19 PS8 PS4 PS25 PS41 PS47 PS43 PS40 PS42 PS1 PS30 TS2
TS1
PS23
F-15-139
15-134
Chapter 15
PS5 PS31 PS20 PS21 PS26 PS6
PS13 PS64
PS34 PS11 PS24 PS49 PS17
PS36 PS7
PS35 PS33 PS60
PS51 PS61
PS62 PS50 PS48 PS57 PS55 PS56 PS54 PS63
F-15-140
PS65
PS37 PS38 PS52 PS58
PS39 PS46 PS44 PS45
PS53 PS59
F-15-141
15-135
Chapter 15
15.4.5 Switch 15.4.5.1 Switches

0005-0068
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Reader Unit The reader unit does not have any switch. 2. Printer Unit
T-15-21 Name Notation Parts No. SW1 SW2 Main power switch FK2-0140 Environment switch FM2-0844 SW3 SW11 SW12 SW13 Cassette heater switch FM2-0844 Upper right cover open/closed switch FM2-0960 Front cover switch FM2-0398 Control key FG3-3004 P002-2 1:open control key INSTALL>KEY 0: do not recognize control key function 1: recognize control key function J1208 detects the front cover detects the upper right cover turns on/off the cassette heater, deck heater turns on/off the drum heater, reader heater, cassette heater, deck heater I/O COPIER>FUNCTION turns on/off the main power Connector E code Description
SW14 SW15
Waste toner lock detection switch WC4-0241 Fixing/feeding lock switch FC5-2496
detects the state (locked/unlocked) of the waste toner screw E013-0002 detects the state (locked/unlocked) of the feeder release lever
15-136
Chapter 15
SW14
SW15
SW2 SW3
SW13 SW1
SW11
SW12
F-15-142
15.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others 15.4.6.1 Heaters, Lamps, and Others
0004-3243
15-137
Chapter 15
H5
LED1
H3 H4
H2 H1 H6
LA1 H501 H502
H7
HDD1
ELB1
F-15-143
T-15-22 Name Notation Parts No. H1 Fixing main heater FK2-0043(100V) FK2-0048(120V) FK2-0053(230V) H2 Fixing sub heater FK2-0044(100V) FK2-0049(120V) FK2-0054(230V) sub heater (controls the fixing roller temperature) E000,E001,E004 PART-CHK main heater (controls the fixing roller temperature) E000,E001,E004 E code Description
15-138
Chapter 15
Name Notation Parts No. H3 Shift heater FK2-0045(100V) FK2-0050(120V) FK2-0055(230V) H4 Outside heating roller heater FK2-0047(100V) FK2-0052(120V) FK2-0057(230V) H5 Drum heater FL2-0419(100V) FL2-0535(120V) FL2-0536(230V) H7 Cassette heater FH7-4740(100V) FM2-0564(230V) H501 Lens heater FK2-0226(100V) FK2-0229(230V) H502 Mirror heater FK2-0227(100V) FK2-0229(230V) ELCB1 Leakage breaker FK2-0151(100V) FK2-0152(120V) FK2-0150(230V) HDD1 Hard disk WM2-5208 LED1 Pre-exposure LED FK2-0005 LA1 scanning lamp FK2-0224 illuminates originals MISC-R>SCANLAMP E225 holds programs, images E602,E606 removes residual charges from the photosensitive drum leakage breaker prevents condensation on the mirror prevents condensation on the lens prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the cassette prevents condensation on the drum fixing auxiliary heater (helps keep the fixing roller heated) E000,E001,E004 PART-CHK shift heater (keeps the shift roller heated) E000,E001,E004 E code Description
T-15-23 Notation H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H7 H501 Main controller PCB Inverter PCB Reader controller PCB AC driver PCB J1803/1810 J1803/1810 J1804/1810 J1804/1810 J1805/1810 J1806/1810 J1807 DC controller PCB J1105 J1105 J1105 J1105 J1105 J1105 -----
15-139
Chapter 15
Notation H502 ELCB1 HDD1 LED1 LA1
Main controller PCB
Inverter PCB
Reader controller PCB
AC driver PCB J1807 J1801
DC controller PCB --------J1106
J2126/1204 J602/601 J206
15.4.7 PCBs 15.4.7.1 PCB

0011-4635
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Reader Unit
T-15-24 Notation [1] [2] [3] [4] Interface PCB Reader controller PCB CCD/AP PCB Inverter PCB Name Parts No. FM2-1102 FM2-1101 FM2-0617 (CCD unit) FK2-0225 Description communicates with the printer unit, ADF controls the reader unit performs analog image processing drives the scanning lamp
F-15-144
2. Printer Unit
T-15-25 Notation [1] BD PCB Name Parts No. FM2-0394(laser scanner) Description generates the BD signal
[2]
Potential control PCB
FM2-0444(potential sensor unit)
converts the potential sensor output
[3]
Manual feed paper width PCB
FH7-7600
detects the width of paper from the manual feeder
[4]
Laser driver PCB
FM2-0394(laser scanner)
controls the drive of the laser unit
[5]
Potential sensor
measures the surface potential of the photosensitive drum
[6]
Drum heater PCB
FM2-0841(100/120V), 0842(230)
controls the drum heater
15-140
Chapter 15
Notation [7] HVT2 Name FM2-0528 Parts No. Description controls the developing (black, color), primary transfer, primary static eliminator bias
[8]
Keypad PCB
FM2-1250
controls the input information from the keypad
[9]
Control panel inverter PCB
FM2-1251
controls the back-light activation of the LCD
[10]
Control panel CPU PCB
FM2-1249
controls the panel
[11]
HVT3
FM2-0826
controls the secondary transfer bias
[12]
Fixing/feeding driver PCB
FM2-0822
controls the sensors, motors, fans, and solenoids of the fixing/feeding and duplexing assemblies
[13]
Environment sensor
FK2-0160
takes measurements of the environment
[14]
Cassette 3 paper size detection PCB
FM2-0849
detects the size of the cassette 3
[15]
FM2-0849
[16]
FM2-6049
converts DC power supply
[17]
Main controller PCB (subR-A)
FM2-6038
color space conversion, rotation for electronic sort, binary processing for fax, resolution conversion for fax
[18]
Main controller PCB (subPE-A)
FM2-6037
image processing for printer output (color space compression, background removal, LGO conversion, direction mapping, color balance, zoom fine adjustment, gradation conversion, screen processing, framing, add-on) bus connection
[19]
Relay PCB (Gu-short)
FK2-1867
[20]
Main controller PCB (sub SJ-A)
FM2-6036
scanner interface, scanner image processing (resolution conversion, image rotation, compression expansion) LAN connection, HDD controller, HDD power supply
[21]
FM2-6039
[22]
HDD
WM2-5208
holds system software, image data
[23]
FM2-5889(100), 0550(120), 0551(230) (power code terminal assembly) FM2-5889(100), 0550(120), 0551(230) (power code terminal assembly) FM2-0823
switches the heater
[24]
AC drive PCB
controls AC drive
[25]
Pickup drive PCB
controls the motor of the pickup assembly
[26]
FM2-0848
[27]
DC power relay PCB
FM2-0843
turns on/off the DC power supply, protects against overvoltage/over-current
15-141
Chapter 15
Notation Name DC power supply PCB [28] Parts No. FM2-0524(100/120), FM2-1229(230) generates DC power Description
[29] [30] [31]
SDRAM HVT1 Boot ROM DC controller PCB
WA7-3573 FM2-0527
temporarily holds image data controls primary charging, grid, pre-transfer charging bias starts up the system
[32] All night power supply PCB [33] Main controller PCB (main) [34] SRAM PCB [35]
FM2-6055(100), FM2-6056(120), FM2-6057(230) FK2-0101(100/120) FK2-0111(230V)
controls the printer unit/accessories
non-interruptive power supply
FM2-6035
image data processing for output to printer unit
FM2-6040
holds service mode settings/HDD control information
[1] [2] [3]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[8] [9] [10] [11]
[12]
[13] [14] [15]
[22]
[32] [17] [31] [30] [29] [35] [31] [27] [28] [33] [26] [23] [24] [25] [34] [18] [19] [20] [21] [16]
F-15-145
15-142
Chapter 15
15.4.7.2 PCB
0004-9428
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1. Reader Unit

T-15-26 Notation [1] [2] [3] [4] Interface PCB Reader controller PCB CCD/AP PCB Inverter PCB Name Parts No. FM2-1102 FM2-1101 FM2-0617 (CCD unit) FK2-0225 Description communicates with the printer unit, ADF controls the reader unit performs analog image processing drives the scanning lamp
F-15-146
2. Printer Unit
T-15-27 Notation [1] BD PCB Name Parts No. FM2-0394(laser scanner) Description generates the BD signal
[2]
Potential control PCB
converts the potential sensor output
[3]
Manual feed paper width PCB
FH7-7600
detects the width of paper from the manual feeder
[4]
Laser driver PCB
FM2-0394(laser scanner)
controls the drive of the laser unit
[5]
Potential sensor
measures the surface potential of the photosensitive drum
[6]
Drum heater PCB
FM2-0841(100/120), 0842(230)
controls the drum heater
[7]
HVT2
FM2-0528
controls the developing (black, color), primary transfer, primary static eliminator bias
[8]
Keypad PCB
FM2-1250
controls the input information from the keypad
[9]
Control panel inverter PCB
FM2-1251
controls the back-light activation of the LCD
15-143
Chapter 15
Notation [10] Name Control panel CPU PCB FM2-1249 Parts No. controls the panel Description
[11]
HVT3
FM2-0826
controls the secondary transfer bias
[12]
Fixing/feeding driver PCB
FM2-0822
controls the sensors, motors, fans, and solenoids of the fixing/feeding and duplexing assemblies
[13]
Environment sensor
FK2-0160
takes measurements of the environment
[14]
FM2-0849
[15]
FM2-0849
[16]
FM2-0832
[17]
SRAM PCB
FG3-2860
holds service mode settings/HDD control information
[18]
Expansion bus PCB
FM2-0536
controls the color LCD controller, card reader I/F
[19]
Main controller PCB (sub)
FM2-0535
connects the image signals from the reader units
[20]
Ethernet PCB
FG3-2865
connects to the network
[21]
FG3-2857
processes image data for output to the printer unit
[22]
HDD
WM2-5208
holds system software, image data
[23]
FM2-0523(100), 0550(120), 0551(230) (power code terminal assembly) FM2-0523(100), 0550(120), 0551(230) (power code terminal assembly) FM2-0823
switches the heater
[24]
AC drive PCB
controls AC drive
[25]
Pickup drive PCB
controls the motor of the pickup assembly
[26]
FM2-0848
[27]
DC power relay PCB DC power supply PCB
FM2-0843 FM2-0524(100/120), 1229(230)
turns on/off the DC power supply, protects against overvoltage/over-current generates DC power
[28]
[29] [30] [31]
SDRAM HVT1 Boot ROM
WA7-2922 FM2-0527
temporarily holds image data controls primary charging, grid, pre-transfer charging bias starts up the system
15-144
Chapter 15
Notation Name DC controller PCB [32] Parts No. FM2-0821(100), 0857(120), 0858(230) Description controls the printer unit/accessories
[1] [2] [3]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[8] [9] [10] [11]
[16] [12] [13] [14] [15]
[17]
[32]
[18] [31] [19] [30] [29] [28] [20] [22] [21]
[27] [26] [25]
[23] [24]
F-15-147
15.4.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB 15.4.8.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emiting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB
0001-1848
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Of the variable resistors (VR), light-emitting diodes (LED), and check pins used in the machine those needed in the field are discussed.
- Although normal, some LEDs may emit dim light when they remain off becouse of leakege current. - Keep the following symbols in mind; ---VR that may be used in the field. ---VR that must not be used in the field.
15.4.8.2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker

0004-1098
15-145
Chapter 15 Points to Note When Checking the Output of the PCBs Normally, an AC voltage is being applied to the terminals of the leakage beaker [1]. Take full care not to touch them when making a check.
F-15-148
15.4.8.3 Main Controller PCB (main)

0005-0094
LED2 LED5
LED2001
F-15-149 T-15-28 Notation LED2001 LED2 LED5 Description in operation +3.3 V (all night) being supplied +3.3 V (non-all night) being supplied
15.4.8.4 DC Controller PCB

0004-6239
15-146
Chapter 15
LED1
VR1
LED8 LED7 LED3 LED4
LED5 LED6
F-15-150
LED9
LED2
VR10
T-15-29
Notation VR1,VR10 LED1-9
Description for factory in operation
15.4.8.5 HV1 PCB

0005-0082
VR1
F-15-151 T-15-30 Notation VR1 Description for factory
15.4.8.6 HV2 PCB

0005-0085
15-147
Chapter 15
VR2
F-15-152 T-15-31 Notation VR2 Description for factory
15.4.8.7 HV3 PCB

0005-0087
VR1 VR2
F-15-153 T-15-32 Notation VR1 VR2 Description for factory for factory
15-148
Chapter 16 Self Diagnosis
Contents
Contents
16.1 Error Code Table........................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.1.1 Error Code................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-1 16.1.2 Error Code................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-3
16.2 Error Code Details .....................................................................................................................................................16-4

16.2.1 Error Code in Detail................................................................................................................................................................. 16-4 16.2.2 E602 in Detail ....................................................................................................................................................................... 16-18 16.2.3 Error Code in Detail............................................................................................................................................................... 16-22 16.2.4 Error Code in Detail............................................................................................................................................................... 16-39
16.3 Error Codes (SEND) ................................................................................................................................................16-56

16.3.1 Self-Diagnostic Display ......................................................................................................................................................... 16-56 16.3.2 List of Error Codes without Messages................................................................................................................................... 16-57
16.4 Jam Codes ................................................................................................................................................................16-61

16.4.1 Jam Code (printer unit) .......................................................................................................................................................... 16-61 16.4.2 Jam Code (finisher-related).................................................................................................................................................... 16-62 16.4.3 Jam Code (ADF-related)........................................................................................................................................................ 16-63
16.5 Alarm Codes ............................................................................................................................................................16-64

16.5.1 Alarm Code ............................................................................................................................................................................ 16-64
Chapter 16
16.1 Error Code Table

16.1.1 Error Code
0018-0991
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine is equipped with a self diagnostic mechanism which runs a check on the machine (particularly, on sensor output) at such times as programmed in advance, indicating the nature of any error it may have come across. The following is a compilation of error codes, with descriptions of how they are identified and possible causes. The 4-digit code is indicated to offer details, and may be checked in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR).
T-16-1 Code E000 E001 E002 E003 E004 E005 E006 E008 E009 E012 E013 E014 E020 E021 E023 E025 E032 E043 E051 E061 E070 E073 E077 E078 E079 E100 E110 E197 E202 E225 E227 E240 E246 E248 E315 E351 E400 E413 E490 E500 E503 E505 E514 E519 E530 E531 E532 E535 E537 E540 E542 E584 the temperature of the fixing assembly is abnormally high the temperature of the fixing assembly is not high enough the temperature of the fixing assembly drops abnormally after standby there is an error in the fixing assembly protection circuit there is an error in the take-up of the web there is an error in the connection of the fixing assembly there is an error in relation to the life of the fixing assembly there is an error in the shift of the external heating roller there is an error in the drum/ITB motor there is clogging by waste toner there is an error in the fixing motor there is an ATR error there is an error in the rotation of the developing assembly the developing sleeve motor does not rotate normally there is an overcurrent in the toner feed motor or the cartridge motor the NE controller counter does not operate there is an error in the 3.5K paper deck pickup motor, causing an error signal the horizontal registration home position is not detected within a specific period of time during potential control, a specific level of potential is not obtained or the limiter goes on there is an error in the detection of ITB home position with the front door closed, the transfer drawer connector or the transfer frame drawer connector is not connected the home position of the secondary transfer roller (engagement) is not detected the home position of the transfer belt cleaner unit (engagement) is not detected the home position of the outside heating roller (engagement) is not detected the BD is not detected there is an error in the scanner motor there is an error in the communication with the fixing/feed PCB there is a home position error the lamp has blown there is an error in the power supply (24 V) there is a DDI-P communication error (error in the communication between master and slave 0) counter memory write error there is an error in EEPROM codex error there is an error in the main controller PCB (sub) there is a DF communication error there is an error in the DF shift motor the DF is of the wrong model there is a finisher communication error (common among finishers) there is an error within the finisher (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the backup memory of the finisher (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the trailing edge assist motor (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the gear change motor (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in front alignment (finisher R1/R2) there is a stapling error (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the shift of the stapler (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the swing of the stapler (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in rear alignment (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the up/down movement of the upper tray (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the up/down movement of the lower tray (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the shutter unit (finisher R1/R2) Description at power-on, the temperature of the fixing assembly is not high enough
16-1
Chapter 16
Code E590 E591 E592 E593 E5F0 E5F1 E5F2 E5F3 E5F4 E5F5 E5F6 E5F8 E5F9 E602 E604 E605 E606 E610 E611 E674 E677 E710 E711 E712 E713 E717 E719 E730 E731 E732 E733 E740 E743 E744 E745 E746 E747 E748 E749 E800 E804 E805 E820 E824 there is an error in the punch motor (punch unit) there is an error in the punch dust sensor (punch unit) there is an error in the punch horizontal sensor (punch unit) there is an error in the punch shift motor (punch unit) there is an error in saddle paper positioning there is an error in saddle paper folding there is an error in the saddle guide there is an error in saddle alignment there is an error in saddle rear stapling there is an error in saddle front stapling there is a saddle butting error there is an error in the saddle connector there is an error in saddle stitching there is a hard disk error there is a shortage of image memory (SDARM) there is an error in the image memory battery there is an error on the hard disk HDD encryption key fault Rebooting repeat error due to SRAM failure, etc. there is a fax board error there is an external controller error there is an IPC initialization error there is an IPC communication error there is an error in the communication between ADF and reader there is a finisher communication error there is an error in the communication with the NE controller there is an error in the communication with the coin vendor/card reader there is a PDL error there is a UFR board error there is a reader communication error there is a printer communication error there is an Ethernet board error there is a DDI communication error there is a language file/boot ROM error there is TokenRing board error the accessories board is of the wrong type there is an error in the ASIC for image processing or memory control; or, there is an error in the ASIC for communication control CL2 board-dependent board error reboot command initiated by change in PDL configuration an interlock 24V off state has been identified for the fixing unit; with the door closed, the interlock 24V detection signal is off for 500 msec continuously there is a fan error (of any type) the fixing heat exhaust fan is identified as being closed; or, there is an error in the fan there is an error in the process unit cooling fan there is an error in the primary charging suction/exhaust fan Description
16-2
Chapter 16
16.1.2 Error Code

0005-0279
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C The machine is equipped with a self diagnostic mechanism which runs a check on the machine (particularly, on sensor output) at such times as programmed in advance, indicating the nature of any error it may have come across. The following is a compilation of error codes, with descriptions of how they are identified and possible causes. The 4-digit code is indicated to offer details, and may be checked in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR).
T-16-2 Code E000 E001 E002 E003 E004 E005 E006 E008 E009 E012 E013 E014 E020 E021 E023 E025 E032 E043 E051 E061 E070 E073 E077 E078 E079 E100 E110 E197 E202 E225 E227 E240 E246 E247 E248 E315 E350 E351 E354 E355 E400 E413 E490 E500 E503 E505 E514 E519 E530 E531 E532 E535 E537 the temperature of the fixing assembly is abnormally high the temperature of the fixing assembly is not high enough the temperature of the fixing assembly drops abnormally after standby there is an error in the fixing assembly protection circuit there is an error in the take-up of the web there is an error in the connection of the fixing assembly there is an error in relation to the life of the fixing assembly there is an error in the shift of the external heating roller there is an error in the drum/ITB motor there is clogging by waste toner there is an error in the fixing motor there is an ATR error there is an error in the rotation of the developing assembly the developing sleeve motor does not rotate normally there is an overcurrent in the toner feed motor or the cartridge motor the NE controller counter does not operate there is an error in the 3.5K paper deck pickup motor, causing an error signal the horizontal registration home position is not detected within a specific period of time during potential control, a specific level of potential is not obtained or the limiter goes on there is an error in the detection of ITB home position with the front door closed, the transfer drawer connector or the transfer frame drawer connector is not connected the home position of the secondary transfer roller (engagement) is not detected the home position of the transfer belt cleaner unit (engagement) is not detected the home position of the outside heating roller (engagement) is not detected the BD is not detected there is an error in the scanner motor there is an error in the communication with the fixing/feed PCB there is a home position error the lamp has blown there is an error in the power supply (24 V) there is a DDI-P communication error (error in the communication between master and slave 0) counter memory write error counter memory SRAM error there is an error in EEPROM codex error soft ID PCB/function fault there is an error in the main controller PCB (sub) serial No. mismatch serial No. mismatch there is a DF communication error there is an error in the DF shift motor the DF is of the wrong model there is a finisher communication error (common among finishers) there is an error within the finisher (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the backup memory of the finisher (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the trailing edge assist motor (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the gear change motor (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in front alignment (finisher R1/R2) there is a stapling error (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the shift of the stapler (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the swing of the stapler (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in rear alignment (finisher R1/R2) Description at power-on, the temperature of the fixing assembly is not high enough
16-3
Chapter 16
Code E540 E542 E584 E590 E591 E592 E593 E5F0 E5F1 E5F2 E5F3 E5F4 E5F5 E5F6 E5F8 E5F9 E602 E604 E605 E606 E610 E674 E677 E710 E711 E712 E713 E717 E719 E730 E731 E732 E733 E740 E743 E744 E745 E746 E747 E748 E749 E800 E804 E805 E820 E824 Description there is an error in the up/down movement of the upper tray (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the up/down movement of the lower tray (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the shutter unit (finisher R1/R2) there is an error in the punch motor (punch unit) there is an error in the punch dust sensor (punch unit) there is an error in the punch horizontal sensor (punch unit) there is an error in the punch shift motor (punch unit) there is an error in saddle paper positioning there is an error in saddle paper folding there is an error in the saddle guide there is an error in saddle alignment there is an error in saddle rear stapling there is an error in saddle front stapling there is a saddle butting error there is an error in the saddle connector there is an error in saddle stitching there is a hard disk error there is a shortage of image memory (SDARM) there is an error in the image memory battery there is an error on the hard disk HDD encryption key fault there is a fax board error there is an external controller error there is an IPC initialization error there is an IPC communication error there is an error in the communication between ADF and reader there is a finisher communication error there is an error in the communication with the NE controller there is an error in the communication with the coin vendor/card reader there is a PDL error there is a UFR board error there is a reader communication error there is a printer communication error there is an Ethernet board error there is a DDI communication error there is a language file/boot ROM error there is TokenRing board error the accessories board is of the wrong type there is an error in the ASIC for image processing or memory control; or, there is an error in the ASIC for communication control CL2 board-dependent board error reboot command initiated by change in PDL configuration an interlock 24V off state has been identified for the fixing unit; with the door closed, the interlock 24V detection signal is off for 500 msec continuously there is a fan error (of any type) the fixing heat exhaust fan is identified as being closed; or, there is an error in the fan there is an error in the process unit cooling fan there is an error in the primary charging suction/exhaust fan
16.2 Error Code Details

16.2.1 Error Code in Detail
0018-0981

T-16-3 code E000 Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks
At power-on, the rise in the temperature of the fixing assembly is not high enough. The main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4) has an open circuit or poor contact. The AC drive PCB or the DC controller PCB is faulty. 0010 After power-on, the temperature does not reach 50 deg C within 300 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0011 The temperature reaches 50 deg C, but does not reach 80 deg C within 300 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, sec. thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0012 The temperature reaches 80 deg C, but does not reach 110 deg C within 300 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
16-4
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks
0013 The temperature reaches 110 deg C, but does not reach 140 deg C within Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, 300 sec. thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0014 The temperature reaches 140 deg C, but does not reach 170 deg C within Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, 300 sec. thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0015 The temperature reaches 170 deg c, but does not reach 200 deg C within 300 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0020 After power-on, the temperature does not reach 50 deg C within 180 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0021 The temperature reaches 50 deg C, but does not reach 80 deg C within 180 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, sec. thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0022 The temperature reaches 80 deg C, but does not reach 110 deg C within 180 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0023 The temperature reaches 110 deg C, but doest not reach 140 deg C within Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, 180 sec. thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0024 The temperature reaches 140 deg C, but does not reach 170 deg C within Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, 180 sec. thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0025 The temperature reaches 170 deg C, but does not reach 200 deg C within Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, 180 sec. thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: If the outside heating roller is in contact, within 400 sec. COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0026 The temperature reaches 200 deg C, but does not reach 230 deg C within Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, 180 sec. thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: If the outside heating roller is in contact, within 400 sec. COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0030 After power-on, the temperature does not reach 50 deg C within 420 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0031 The temperature reaches 50 deg C, but does not reach 80 C deg in 420 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0032 The temperature reaches 80 deg C, but does not reach 110 deg C within 420 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0033 The temperature reaches 110 deg C, but does not reach 140 deg C within Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, 420 sec. thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0034 The temperature reaches 140 deg C, but does not reach 170 deg C within Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, 420 sec. thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. E001 The rise in the temperature of the fixing assembly is excessive. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the following: main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), sub thermistor (THM4, THM5, THM6), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4). The AC driver PCB or the DC controller PCB is faulty. 0001 The rise in the temperature of the fixing roller is excessive. Check the main thermistor, sub thermistor, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor, sub thermistor, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor, sub thermistor, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0002 The rise in the temperature of the outside heating roller is excessive.
0003 The rise in the temperature of the pressure roller is excessive.
00FF When the cause (Detailed code) cannot be found in the DC controller PCB After releasing the error with the procedure of input-port as DC controller PCB detects instantly an abnormal signal from COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR, the thermistor. 1. Turn off the switch of control panel. 2. Turn off the switch of main power. 3. Turn on the switch of main power. a. When the machine returns, Check the interconnection between the DC controller PCB and the thermistor. b. When the machine does not return, Follow the instruction the error (Detailed) code shows on the control panel. E002 The rise in the temperature of the fixing assembly is not enough. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4). The AC driver PCB or the DC controller PCB has a fault. 0010 The temperature of the fixing roller reaches 80 deg C, but drops below 50 Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open deg C. circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0020 The temperature of the outside heating roller reaches 80 deg C, but drops Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open below 50 deg C. circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0030 The temperature of the pressure roller reaches 80 deg C, but drops below Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open 50 deg C. circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
16-5
Chapter 16
code E003 Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks
After standby, the drop in the temperature of the fixing assembly is excessive. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4). The AC driver PCB or the DC controller PCB has a fault. 0041 During standby, the temperature of the fixing roller drops below 150 deg Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open C. circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0042 During standby, the temperature of the outside heating roller drops below Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open 190 dg C. circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0043 During standby, the temperature of the pressure roller drops below 120 deg C. Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0051 During copying, the temperature of the fixing roller drops below 150 deg Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open C. circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0052 During copying, the temperature of the outside heating roller drops below Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open 190 deg C. circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0053 During copying, the temperature of the pressure roller drops below 60 deg Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open C. circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. E004 There is an error in the fixing assembly protection circuit. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3) or sub thermistor (TH4, THM5, THM6). The AC driver PCB or the DC controller PCB has a fault. 0001 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater. There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater. 0002 There is an SSR error in the fixing sub heater. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0003 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater or the fixing sub Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit heater. and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0004 There is an SSR error in the fixing main heater. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0005 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater or the fixing main Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit heater. and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0006 There is an SSR error in the fixing sub heater or the fixing main heater. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0007 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater, fixing sub heater, Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit or fixing main heater. and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0008 There is an SSR error in the pressure heater. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0009 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater or the contact heater. 000A There is an SSR error in the fixing sub heater or the contact heater.
000B There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater, fixing sub heater, Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit or contact heater. and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 000C There is an error in the fixing main heater or the contact heater. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
000D There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater, fixing main heater, or contact heater. 000E There is an error in the fixing sub heater, fixing main heater, or contact heater.
000F There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater, fixing sub heater, Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit fixing main heater, or contact heater. and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0010 The fixing roller thermistor has an open circuit. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0020 The outside heating roller thermistor has an open circuit.
0030 The pressure roller thermistor has an open circuit.
E005
There is an error in the take-up mechanism of the web.
16-6
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 0000 The web of the fixing assembly has been fully taken up. After the web sensor has detected an off state, the count has exceeded 3000. The web length sensor (PS20) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. 0010 The drive solenoid of the fixing assembly is not connected. E006 The fixing assembly has a comparison error. 0001 The fixing drawer has been identified as being disconnected. E008 There is an error in relation to the life of the fixing assembly. 0001 The counter reading for the fixing roller has exceeded a specific count. When you have replaced the fixing roller, reset in service mode, and turn off and then on the main power: COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL1>FX-UP-RL. Check the connector of the drive solenoid of the fixing web; then, turn off and then on the main power. Remarks Reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. If you have replaced the web, reset the reading in the following, and turn off and then on the power: COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL1>FIX-WEB. Check the drive solenoid of the fixing web for disconnection; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
E009
There is an outside heating roller shift error. The outside heating roller shift motor (M22) is faulty. The outside heating roller HP sensor (PS21) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. 00FF The outside heating roller remains in contact with the fixing roller. Check the outside heating roller shift motor and the fixing motor; then, turn off and then on the main power. Check the area around the photosensitive drum and the intermediate transfer belt; then, turn off and then on the main power. Check the amount of waste toner; then, turn off and then on the main power.
E012
There is an error in the drum/ITB motor. 0001 After motor start-up, a lock state is not identified for 1 sec or more.
E013
There is clogging by waste toner. 0001 There is a waste toner full error. the soft counter reading is 250000 or higher.
0002 There is a waste toner feedscrew error. Check the developing motor; then, turn off and then on the main The output of the waste toner lock detecting switch (SW14) is '1' for more power. than 1 sec. E014 There is a fixing motor error. 0001 After motor start-up, a lock state is not identified for 1 sec or more. E020 Check the fixing motor (fixing assembly); then, turn off and then on the main power.
There is an ATR error. xx=01 for Y; xx=02 for M; xx=03 for C; xx=04 for without color distinction xx10 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Sig Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate value is lower than 62. transfer belt. The ATR sensor is damage or has an open circuit. The connector may have poor contact. The intermediate transfer belt may be soiled. xx11 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Ref Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. value is lower than 62. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector may have poor contact. The intermediate transfer belt may be soiled> xx12 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Sig Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate value is 960 or higher. transfer belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The opening/closing of the shutter is faulty. The intermediate transfer belt is soiled. xx13 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Ref Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate value is 960 or higher. transfer belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The intermediate transfer belt is soiled. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate xx81 When the background (intermediate transfer belt) is read during patch detection, the P_base_adj value is lower than 255. transfer belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The ITB cleaner is faulty. xx90 The result (Sig D) of computation based on the reading of the patch during Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate patch detection (analog)) is lower than 16. transfer belt. xx91 The result (Sig D) of computation based on the reading of the patch during Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate patch detection (analog) is 1008 or higher. transfer belt. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The primary transfer pressure is faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. xx92 The value delta D obtained from the result (Sig D) of computation based Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate on the reading of the patch during patch detection is -5.0% or more 3 times transfer belt. continuously. The patch sensor may be damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The primary transfer engagement is faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. The amount of supply is low. xx93 The value delta D obtained from the result (Sig D) of computation based Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate on the reading of the patch during patch detection is +5.0% or lower 3 transfer belt. times continuously. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The primary transfer pressure is faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. The amount of supply is low. xxA0 For ATR control, the Sig value is lower than 62. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor transfer belt. contact. xxA1 For ATR control, the Ref value is lower than 62. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor transfer belt. contact.
16-7
Chapter 16
xxA2 For ATR control, the Sig value is 960 or higher. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor transfer belt. contact. The opening/closing of the shutter is faulty. xxA3 For ATR control, the Ref value is 960 or higher. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor transfer belt. contact. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate xxA8 The T/D ratio identified for ATR control has exceeded the upper limit transfer belt. (12%) 3 times continuously. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The amount of supply is too high. xxA9 The T/D ratio identified for ATR control has exceeded the lower limit Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate (3%) 3 times continuously. transfer belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The amount of supply is too low. xxC0 The variation among the 8 samplings of the light Sig value is 100 or Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate higher. transfer belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The stirring of toner is faulty. xxC1 The variation among the 8 samplings of the light Ref value is 100 or Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate higher. transfer belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. xxC2 The variation among the 8 samplings of the patch Sig value is 400 or higher. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The primary transfer engagement is faulty. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt.
xxD0 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate average of the light Sig values is 200 or lower. transfer belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The amount of supply is low. xxD1 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate average of the light Ref values is 462 or lower. transfer belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. xxD2 Fore INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate average of the patch Sig values is 200 or lower. transfer belt. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. the connector has poor contact. The primary transfer engagement is faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. xxD4 For INTI control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate average of the light Sig values is 800 or higher. transfer belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The amount of supply is too high. xxD5 For INTI control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate average of the light Ref values is 562 or higher. transfer belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. xxDA For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate variation among the 72 night Sig value samplings is 100 or more. transfer belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The stirring of toner is faulty. xxDB For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate variation among the 72 light Ref samplings is 100 or more. transfer belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. xxDC For INIT control (service mode INISET-*), the average of the patch Sig Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate values is 800 or higher. transfer belt. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. the primary transfer engagement if faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. The amount of supply is too high. xxF1 The connector or the color toner supply clutch is not connected. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute ITB cleaning. xxFF There is no toner inside the Bk developing assembly. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate - the toner is not supplied to the developing assembly correctly. transfer belt. - the hopper stirring motor is not rotating normally. The hopper connector has poor contact. The black toner supply motor (M25) is faulty. The hopper stirring motor (M23) is faulty. The black toner level sensor is faulty. The DC controller is faulty. E021 There is an error in the rotation of the developing assembly. 0001 The developing rotary home position is not detected. Turn off and then on the main power. The motor rotates out of sync because of poor torque caused by any of the following: The developing rotary HP sensor is faulty; the wiring of the DC controller is faulty; there is an excess load on the developing assembly. 0002 The length of the flag detected during rotation is longer or shorter than the Turn off and then on the main power. designed flag. The motor rotates out of sync because of poor torque caused by any of the following: the developing rotary HP sensor is faulty; the wiring of the DC controller PCB is faulty; there is an excessive load on the developing assembly. E023 E025 The developing motor (M3) does not rotate normally. 0001 After motor start-up, a lock state is not detected for 1 sec or more. Turn off and then on the main power. There is an over-current in the hopper stirring motor (M23)or the black toner supply motor (M25).
16-8
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 0001 There is an overcurrent in the hopper stirring motor (M23). 0002 There is an over-current in the black toner supply motor (M25). Remarks Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
0410 The connector of the black toner supply motor (M25) is identified as being Turn off and then on the main power. disconnected. E032 The NE connector counter does not operate. 0001 There is an open circuit in the line for the count pulse signal. E043 Turn off the main power, and check the cable for an open circuit; then, turn on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
There is an error in the 3.5K paper deck pickup motor, causing an error signal. 0001 After motor start-up, a lock state is not detected for 1 sec or more. The mechanical load such as on the feeding system is excessive.
E051
The horizontal registration home position is not detected within a specific period of time. The horizontal registration position is faulty (0003). 0001 The horizontal registration home position is not detected within a specific Turn off and then on the main power. period of time. 0002 The ON edge of the SUS plate is not detected during a search for home position. Turn off and then on the main power.
0003 The logical motor position differs between before and after the detection Turn off and then on the main power. operation. E061 At time of potential control, a specific level of potential is absent. Or, the limiter goes on. 0001 When forming an image, the potential is 10 V or less during initial rotation. 0002 At time of potential control, the potential is 10 V or less during initial rotation. 0003 While the grid bias is being adjusted, a level of potential higher than the grid bias is sampled. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
0005 The difference in potential between dark and light areas is less than 100 V. Turn off and then on the main power. 0007 During adjustment of EPC offset, the potential that is read is outside the +/ Turn off and then on the main power. -30 V range. 0008 During dark area potential adjustment, the sampling value is too low. 0010 The sampling of the light area potential is faulty. E070 Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
There is an error in the detection of the ITB home position. xx=01: ITB home position sensor B, xx=02: ITB home position sensor A; only at ITB 1/1 speed; XX=00: no distinction 00xx The home position of the intermediate transfer belt is not detected within Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the a specific period of time . ITB HP sensor; then, turn on the main power. The ITB HP sensor is faulty. 01xx The period of time between when the home position of the intermediate Turn off the main power, and check the drive of the intermediate transfer belt is detected and the next home position is detected is longer transfer belt; then, turn on the main power. than specified . The presence of a tear may have caused the sensor to wrongly identify it as indicating the home position. 02xx The period of time between when the home position of the intermediate Turn off the main power, and check the surface of the intermediate transfer belt is detected and when the next home position is detected is transfer belt for a tear; then, turn on the main power. shorter than specified . The intermediate transfer belt slips on the drive roller, causing a delay in the timing at which the home position is detected. 03xx The detection of the home position of the intermediate transfer belt has Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the failed once. ITB HP sensor; then turn on the main power. ITB home position sensor B and ITB home position sensor A must occur alternately; however, the same state has been detected continuously.
E073 E077
With the front door closed, the transfer drawer connector or the transfer frame drawer connector is not connected. 0001 The result of detecting the feed unit indicates the absence of the unit. Turn off and then on the main power. The home position of the secondary transfer roller (engagement) is not detected. 0001 The HP sensor does not go on within 5 sec after the start of a HP search. Turn off and then on the main power.
E078
The home position of the transfer belt cleaner unit (engagement) is not detected. 0001 The HP sensor does not turn on within 5 sec after the start of a HP search. Turn off and then on the main power.
E079
The home position of the outside heating roller is not detected. The outside heating roller home position sensor does not go off. 0001 The HP sensor does not turn on within 5 sec after the start of an HP search. Turn off and then on the main power. 0002 If there is an open circuit in the home position sensor of the outside heating Turn off and then on the main power. roller home position sensor, the state of the sensor will be identified as being ON. An error will be identified if the sensor fails to go off when it is at a point where it must normally go on and the outside heating roller shift motor is driven.
E100
The BD is not detected. 0001 The BD signal is not detected when the polygon scanner has been driven Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the for a specific period of time. 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. 0002 The BD signal is not detected white the polygon scanner is rotating stably. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power.
E110
There is a scanner motor error. 0001 The FG signal is not detected within a specific period of time after the polygon scanner has been driven. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power.
16-9
Chapter 16
0002 The FG signal is not detected while the polygon scanner is rotating stably. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. 0003 The FG signal is not detected while the polygon scanner is rotating stably. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. E197 There is an error in the communication with the fixing feed PCB. In the course of initializing communication between the DC controller and Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB wiring and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. 0002 the fixing/feeding unit, as many as 10 communication errors occur continuously. Following the end of initialization of the communication between the DC Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB wiring 0003 controller and the fixing/feeding unit, as many as 10 communication errors and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. occur continuously. At the start of drum initial multiple rotation, there is no signal indicating Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB wiring the start of 24V in the fixing assembly in the communication between the and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. 0004 DC controller and the fixing/feeding unit. E202 There is an HP error. 0001 An error is found during the forward trip of the HP search. Check the harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, The scanner HP sensor is faulty. The scanner motor is faulty. The reader replace the faulty part. controller is faulty. 0002 An error is found during the return trip of the HP search. Check the harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, The scanner HP sensor is faulty. The scanner motor is faulty. The reader replace the faulty part. controller PCB is faulty. E225 The lamp has blown. 0001 The level of shading is lower than specified. E227 There is a power supply (24V) error. 0001 At power-on, the 24V port is off. 0002 At the start of a job, the 24V port is off. 0003 At the end of a job, the 24V port is off. 0004 While a load is being driven, the 24V port is off. E240 There is a DDI-P communication error. 0000 There is a DDI-P communication error (error in communication between Turn off the main power, and check the wiring of the DC controller master and slave 0). PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. E248 There is an error in the EEPROM. 0000 At time of start-up, a check error has occurred on the SRAM board. 0001 There is a power-on error. 0002 There is a write error. 0003 There is a wire/read error. E315 E351 codex error 000E An error has occurred in the course of software decoding. There is an error in the main controller PCB (sub). 0000 At start-up, there is an error in the communication between main controller Turn off the main power, and replace the main controller PCB (sub). PCB (sub) and the main controller PCB (main). If the result is not good, replace the main controller PCB (main), and turn on the main power. E400 There is a DF communication error. 0001 There is a check sum error. 0002 There is a reception status error. 0003 There is a reception interrupt error. E413 There is an error in the DF shift motor. 0001 The shift HP sensor is open. 0002 The shift HP sensor is closed. E490 E500 The DF is of the wrong model. 0001 The installed DF is not of the correct type. There is a finisher communication error. 0001 There is an error in data communication. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller, wiring of the An error has been detected in terms of the number of errors or the duration finisher PCB, and 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. of the error in the communication between copier and finisher. E503 There is an error in the communication within the finisher (finisher R1/R2). 0002 There is a data communication error. finisher-to-saddle unit communication error 0003 finisher-to-punch unit communication error E505 There is an error in the backup memory of the finisher (finer R1/R2). Check the connection between the saddle stitcher controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB. Check the connection between the Punch controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB. Replace the DF with one of an appropriate type. Check the harness; then, as necessary, replace the sensor and motor. Check the attaching of the parts around the cam. Check the harness; then, as necessary, replace the sensor and motor. Check the attaching of the parts around the cam. Disconnect and connect the harness connector; then, replace the reader controller PCB or the ADF DC controller. Disconnect and connect the harness connector; then, replace the reader controller PCB or the ADF DC controller. Disconnect and connect the harness connector; then, replace the reader controller PCB or the ADF DC controller. Turn off the main power, and check the SRAM board; then, as necessary, replace the SRAM board, and turn on the main power. Replace the reader controller PCB. Replace the reader controller PCB. Replace the reader controller PCB. Check the power supply harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the power supply. Check the power supply harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the power supply. Check the power supply harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the power supply. Check the power supply harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the power supply. Check the harness connector for connection. Check the scanning lamp (xenon), inverter, and reader controller PCB.
16-10
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 0001 There is an error in the data stored in the backup memory. 0002 There is a data error in the punch assembly EEPROM. Remarks Turn off the main power, and check the DC control, wiring of the finisher PCB, and 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. Turn off the main power, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the puncher controller PCB: then, check the 24V system fuse, and turn back on the main power. 1) Check the trailing edge assist home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the trailing edge assist motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the trailing edge assist mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the trailing edge assist motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the trailing edge assist home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the trailing edge assist motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the trailing edge assist mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the trailing edge assist motor. Is the problem corrected?
E514
There is an error in the trailing edge assist motor (finisher R1/R2). 8001 The home position sensor does not go off when the trailing edge assist motor has been rotated for a specific period of time.
8002 The home position sensor does not go on when the trailing edge assist motor has been rotated for a specific period of time.
E519
There is an error in the gear change motor (finisher R1/R2). 8001 The home position sensor does not go off within a specific period of time 1) Check the gear change home position sensor. Is the sensor after the gear change motor has started to rotate. normal? 2) Check the wiring between the fisher controller PCB and the gear change motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the gear change mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the gear change motor. Is the problem corrected? 0002 The home position sensor does not go on within a specific period of time 1) Check the gear change home position sensor. Is the sensor after the gear change motor has started to rotate. normal? 2) Check the wiring between the fisher controller PCB and the gear change motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the gear change mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the gear change motor. Is the problem corrected?
E530
There is an error in front alignment (finisher R1/R2). 8001 Th alignment motor has started to rotate.e home position sensor does not 1) Check the pre-aligning plate home position sensor. Is the sensor go off within a specific period of time after the front normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the prealigning plate motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the aligning plate. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the pre-aligning plate motor. Is the problem corrected? 8002 The home position sensor does not go on within a specific period of time 1) Check the pre-aligning plate home position sensor. Is the sensor after the front alignment motor has started to rotate. normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the prealigning plate motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the aligning plate. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the pre-aligning plate motor. Is the problem corrected?
E531
There is an error in stapling (finisher R1/R2). 0001 The home position sensor does not go off within a specific period of time 1) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the after the stapler motor has started to rotate. stapler. Is the wiring normal? 2) Try replacing the stapler. Is the problem corrected? 0002 The home position sensor does not go on within a specific period of time 1) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the after the stapler motor has started to rotate. stapler. Is the wiring normal? 2) Try replacing the stapler. Is the problem corrected?
E532
There is an error in the shift mechanism of the stapler. (finisher R1/R2) 8001 The home position sensor does not go off within a specific period of time 1) Check the stapler shift home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? after the stapler shift motor has started to rotate. 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stapler shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the stapler shift base. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the stapler shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 8002 The home position sensor does not go on within a specific period of time 1) Check the stapler shift home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? after the stapler shift motor has started to rotate. 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stapler shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the stapler shift base. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the stapler shift motor. Is the problem corrected?
E535
There is an error in the staple swing mechanism. (finisher R1/R2) 8001 The home position sensor does not go off even when the swing motor has 1) Check the swing home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? rotated for a specific period of time. 2) Check the writing between the finisher controller PCB and the swing motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the swing mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the swing motor. Is the problem corrected?
16-11
Chapter 16
8002 The home position sensor does not go on even when the swing motor has 1) Check the swing home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? rotated for a specific period of time. 2) Check the writing between the finisher controller PCB and the swing motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the swing mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the swing motor. Is the problem corrected? 0003 There is an error in relation to an hazardous area.. 1) Check the swing home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the writing between the finisher controller PCB and the swing motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the swing mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the swing motor. Is the problem corrected?
E537
rear alignment error (Finisher-R1/R2) 8001 The home position sensor does not go off even when the swing motor has 1) Check the post-aligning plate home position sensor. Is the sensor rotated for a specific period of time. normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the post-aligning plate motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the aligning plate. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the post-aligning plate motor. Is the problem corrected? 8002 The home position sensor does not go on even when the swing motor has 1) Check the post-aligning plate home position sensor. Is the sensor rotated for a specific period of time. normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the post-aligning plate motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the aligning plate. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the post-aligning plate motor. Is the problem corrected?
E540
upper tray ascent/descent error (Finisher-R1/R2) 8001 upper tray ascent/descent motor clock error 1) Check the No. 1 tray area sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between finisher controller PCB and the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the ascent/descent mechanism of the tray? 4) Try replacing the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 1 tray area sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between finisher controller PCB and the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the ascent/descent mechanism of the tray? 4) Try replacing the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 1 tray area sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between finisher controller PCB and the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the ascent/descent mechanism of the tray? 4) Try replacing the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 2 tray sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finer controller PCB and the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the tray ascent/descent mechanism? 4) Try replacing the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 2 tray sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finer controller PCB and the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the tray ascent/descent mechanism? 4) Try replacing the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 2 tray sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finer controller PCB and the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the tray ascent/descent mechanism? 4) Try replacing the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the shutter home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stack edging motor and between the finisher controller PCB and the shutter open/close clutch. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the shutter mechanism? 4) Try replacing the stack edging motor or the shutter open/close clutch. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the shutter home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stack edging motor and between the finisher controller PCB and the shutter open/close clutch. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the shutter mechanism? 4) Try replacing the stack edging motor or the shutter open/close clutch. Is the problem corrected?
8002 area error
8003 safety switch activation
E542
lower tray ascent/descent error (Finisher-R1/R2) 8001 lower tray ascent/descent motor clock error
8002 area error
E584
shutter unit error (Finisher-R1/R2) 8001 The shutter open sensor does not go off (i.e., the shutter is not closed).
0002 The shutter open/closed sensor does not go on (i.e., the shutter does not open).
E590
There is an error in the punch motor. (punch unit) 8001 The punching home position sensor is not detected when the punch motor Check the punch home position sensor, horizontal registration motor, has been driven for 200 msec. and punch driver PCB; then, turn off and then on the main power. 8002 The puncher does not detect the punching home position after the motor has stopped (initial operation). Check the punch home position sensor, horizontal registration motor, and punch driver PCB; then, turn off and then on the main power.
E591
There is an error in the punch dust sensor. (punch unit)
16-12
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 8001 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage with emission of light. Remarks Turn off and then on the main power.
8002 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. Turn off and then on the main power. E592 There is an error in the punch horizontal registration sensor. (punch unit) 8001 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage at time of light emission. (trailing edge sensor) Turn off and then on the main power.
8002 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. Turn off and then on the main power. (trailing edge sensor) 8003 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage with emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 1) Turn off and then on the main power.
8004 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. Turn off and then on the main power. (horizontal registration sensor 1) 8005 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage with emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 2) Turn off and then on the main power.
8006 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. Turn off and then on the main power. (horizontal registration sensor 2) 8007 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage it the presence of emission Turn off and then on the main power. of light. (horizontal registration sensor 3) 8008 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. Turn off and then on the main power. (horizontal registration sensor 3) 8009 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage with emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 4) Turn off and then on the main power.
800A There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. Turn off and then on the main power. (horizontal registration sensor 4) E593 There is an error in the punch shift motor. (punch unit) 8001 The light-receiving voltage HP sensor does not go off at time of light emission. Turn off and then on the main power.
8002 The light-receiving voltage HP sensor doest not go on without emission of Turn off and then on the main power. light. E5F0 There is an error in saddle paper positioning. 0001 The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn on when the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 1.33 sec. The paper positioning plate motor (M4S) or the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S) is faulty. 0002 The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn off when Check the paper positioning plate motor (M4S) /paper positioning the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 1 sec. plate home position sensor (PI7S). The paper positioning plate motor (M4S) or the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S) is faulty. E5F1 There is an error in saddle paper folding. 0001 The number of detection pulses of the paper folding motor clock sensor is Check the paper folding motor (M2S) /paper folding motor clock lower than specified. sensor (PI4S). The paper folding home position sensor or the paper folding motor clock sensor (P14S) is faulty. 0002 The state of the paper folding home position sensor does not change when Check the paper folding motor (M2S) /paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4S). the paper folding motor has been driven for 3 sec. The paper folding motor (M2S) or the paper folding motor clock sensor (P14S) is faulty. E5F2 There is an error in the saddle guide. 0001 The guide home position sensor does not turn on when the guide motor has Check the guide motor (M3S) /guide home position sensor (PI13S). been driven for 0.45 sec. The guide motor (M3S) or the guide home position sensor (PI3S) is faulty. 0002 The guide home position sensor doest not turn off when the guide motor Check the guide motor (M3S) /guide home position sensor (PI13S). has been driven for 1 sec. The guide motor (M3S) or the guide home position sensor (PI3S) is faulty. E5F3 There is an error in saddle alignment. 0001 The aligning plate home position sensors does not turn on when the alignment motor has been driven for 05. sec (during initialization, 1.67 sec). The alignment motor (M5S) or the aligning plate home position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. Check the alignment motor (M5S) /aligning plate home position sensor (PI5S). Check the paper positioning plate motor (M4S) /paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S).
0002 The alignment plate home position sensor does not turn off when the Check the alignment motor (M5S) /aligning plate home position alignment motor has been driven for 1 sec. sensor (PI5S). The alignment motor (M5S) for the alignment plate home position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. E5F4 There is an error in saddle rear sampling. 0001 The stitching home position sensor does not turn on when the stapler Check he stitching motor (rear; M6S) /stitching home position sensor motor (rear) is rotated in reverse for 0.5 sec or more. (rear; MS5S). The switch motor (rear, M65) or the stitching home position sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. 0002 The stitching home position sensor does not turn off when the switch Check he stitching motor (rear; M6S) /stitching home position sensor motor (rear) is reverse for 0.5 sec or more. (rear; MS5S). The switch motor (rear, M6S) or the stitching home position sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. E5F5 There is an error in saddle front stapling.
16-13
Chapter 16
0001 The stitching home position sensor does not turn on when the switch motor Check the stitching motor (front; M7S) /stitching home position (front) is rotated in reverse for 0.5 sec or more. sensor (front; MS7S). The stitch motor (front, M7S) or the stitching home position sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. 0002 The stitching home position sensor does not turn off when the switch motor (front) is rotated in normal direction for 0.5. The stitch motor (front, M7S) or the switching home position sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. E5F6 There is an error in saddle butting. 8001 The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn on when the The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI4) is faulty. paper pushing motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or more. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI4) is faulty. 8002 The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn off when paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 80 msec or more. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI4S) is faulty. 8003 The number of detection pulses of the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor drops below a specific number. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1S) is faulty. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI4S) is faulty. Check the stitching motor (front; M7S) /stitching home position sensor (front; MS7S).
The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1S) is faulty.
8004 The paper pushing plate sensor does not turn off when the paper pushing The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate plate motor has been driven for 80 msec or more. leading edge position sensor (PI15S) is faulty. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor (PI15S) is faulty. 8005 The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor does not turn on The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or more. leading edge position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. E5F8 There is an error in the saddle connector. 0001 The connector of the guide home position sensor is identified as being disconnected. The connector of the guide home position sensor (PI3S) is faulty. Check the connectors of the guide home position sensor (PI13S). Check the connectors of the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI4S).
0002 The connector of the paper pushing plate home position sensor is Check the connectors of the paper pushing plate leading edge identified as being disconnected. position sensor (PI5S). The connector of the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14S) is faulty. 0003 The connector of the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor is identified as being disconnected. The connector of the paper pushing plate leading edge sensor (PI15S) is faulty. E5F9 There is an error in the saddle switch. 0001 With any of the following sensor is identifying its respective cover a being Check the inlet cover switch (MS1S)/front cover switch (MS2S)/ closed, the inlet cover switch is identified as being open for 1 sec or more delivery cover switch (MS3S). after the start of the initial rotation of the machine or the start of printing: - inlet cover sensor (PI9S) - front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S) - delivery cover sensor (PI3S) Or, the front cover switch (MS2S) or the delivery cover switch (MS3S) is open. The inlet cover switch (MS1S), front cover switch (MS2S), or delivery cover switch (MS3S) is faulty. 0002 With any of the following sensor is identifying its respective cover as Check the front cover switch (MS2S)/delivery cover switch (MS3S). being closed, the front cove switch is identified as being open for 1 sec or more after the start of the initial rotation of the machine or the start of printing: - inlet cover sensor (PI9S) - front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S) - delivery cove sensor (PI3S) The front cove switch (MS2S) or the delivery cover switch (MS3S) is faulty. 0003 With any of the following sensors identifying its respective cover as being Check the delivery cover switch (MS3S). closed, the delivery cover switch is identified as being open for 1 sec or more after the start of the initial rotation of the machine or the start of printing: - inlet cover sensor (PI9S) - front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S) - delivery cover sensor (PI3S) - delivery cover switch (MS3S) E602 E604 There is a hard disk error. There is a shortage of image memory (SDRAM). 0000 The amount of memory required by the model in question is not recognized. E609 0008 0009 E610 E609 (Samsung HDD-related error code) The HDD does not increase to a specific temperature level within a specific time when the power is turned on. Replace the HDD. Set it to the size of memory suited to the model in question. Check the connectors of the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor (PI5S).
The HDD does not increase to a specific temperature level in relation to a Turn off and then on the power. sleep state. If the return operation fails, replace the HDD. HDD encryption key fault
0001 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error). Ask the user to check the configuration of the hardware. The encryption board is missing.
16-14
Chapter 16
0002 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error). Ask the user to check the configuration of the hardware. The requirements for the memory configuration are not fully met. 0101 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key (initialization error). An attempt to initialize the key storage area has failed. 0102 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key (initialization error). An attempt to initialize the encryption area has failed. 0201 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. An error exists in the encryption processing area. 0202 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. An error exists in the encryption processing area. 0301 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption key error) An attempt to create an encryption key has failed. 0302 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption key error) A fault has been detected in the encryption key. 0303 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption key error) A fault has been detected in the encryption key. 0401 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption processing error) An error has been detected in the course of decoding. 0402 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption processing error) An error has been detected in the course of decoding. E611 Rebooting repeat error due to SRAM failure, etc. 0000 Rebooting error when the SRAM data has been destroyed, the job information saved in the SRAM can no longer be read or when rebooting is otherwise repeated when the power is shut off and restored E674 There is an error in the fax board. 0001 The fax board is detected, but communication is not possible. Turn off the main power, and check the fax board and the main controller PCB; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, replaced the fax board or the main controller PCB. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware. Turn off and on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware (SRAM). The error resets the data on the HDD. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware (SRAM). The error resets the data on the HDD. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware (encryption board). Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware (encryption board).
0004 When trouble was detected while the modem IC used in onBaord Fax was being accessed 0008 When trouble was detected while the port IC used in onBaord Fax was being accessed 000C When trouble was detected while the modem IC and port IC used in onBaord Fax were being accessed 0010 When trouble has been detected when the timer device used in onBaord Fax was opened 0011 When trouble has been detected when the timer device used in onBaord Fax was started up E677 There is an external controller error. 0003 An error has been detected by a check on the configuration when the external controller is being started up. Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to start up, re-install the system software of the external controller. Turn off the main power, and check the controller is an appropriate type, and check the cable; then turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, re-install the system software of the external controller.
0010 A controller for a non-Canon machine is connected.
0080 There is an error in the communication with the printer after the external Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on the main controller has started up normally. power. If the machine fails to start up, re-install the system software of the external controller. E710 There is an error in IPC initialization. 0001 The machine fails to become ready within 3 sec after the IPC chip has started up. E711 There is an IPC communication error. 0002 An error has been detected 4 times or more within 1.5 sec after the Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on the main communication has been interrupted between the finisher and the printer, power. and the machine does not reset. If the machine fails to reset, check the connector between the finisher and the copier for poor contact; as necessary, replace the finisher controller/DC controller. E713 There is a finisher communication error. 0001 There is an error in the IC used for communication by the sorter. Turn off the main power switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB, and check the 24V system fuse: then, turn on the main power switch. If the machine does not reset, replace the DC controller PCB/finisher controller PCB. Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on the main power.
E717
There is an error in the communication with the NE controller. 0001 The NE controller that was connected before the power is turned off is not Check the cable, and reset in service mode: recognized after the power is turned on. COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0002 An IPC open circuit or an IPC communication error is not reset. Check the cable, and reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the cable, and reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
E719
error in communication with coin vendor/card reader 0001 The coin vendor that is connected before the power is turned off is not recognized when the paper is turned on.
16-15
Chapter 16
0002 - The IPC cable to the coin vendor is broken and the IPC communication Check the cable; thereafter, reset by making the following selections: cannot be recovered. COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERROR. - There is an open circuit in the pickup delivery signal line. - An improper connection is detected (short circuit between Tx and Rx of IPC). 0003 Error occurred in communicating with coin vendor unit while obtaining unit price at startup. 0011 The card reader that is connected before the power is turned off is not recognized when the paper is turned on. 0012 There is an IPC cable open circuit or an IPC communication error in relation to the card reader that cannot be reset. E730 There is a PDL error. 1001 At the start of a job, an initialization error has occurred. There is a fault in the PDL software. 100A A system error (e.g., failed initialization) has occurred during job processing. The PDL software has a fault. Perform PDL resetting, or turn off and then on the main power. Perform PDL resetting, or turn off and then on the main power. Check the cable, and reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the cable, and reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
100B At start-up, a mismatch occurs between the version number indicated in Perform PDL resetting, or turn off and then on the main power. the master font management file of /BOOTDEV and the bootable version. If the machine fails to reset, re-install the font file or fully format and There is no master font management file in /BOOTDEV. re-install the system software. There is an error in the PDL master font. 9004 There is an error in the PAI communication with the external controller. There is an OPEN/IF communication error. Turn off the main power, and check the open I/F board and the cable; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, replace the external controller, open I/F PCB, or the main controller PCB. Turn off the main power, and check the open I/F board and the cable; then turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, replace the eternal controller, open I/F PCB, or main controller PCB. Perform PDL resetting, or turn off the main power, and check the connector of the UFR board; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, re-install the firmware or replace the main control PCB.
9005 There is an error it the connection of the video cable connected to the external controller.
A006 PDL does not response, subootable is out of order or does not exist. There is a PDL communication error.
A007 At time of start-up, a mismatch occurs between the version of the machine Perform PDL resetting, or turn off and then on the main power. control software and the version of the PDL control software. If the machine fails to reset, fully format and re-install the system The PDL version is wrong. software. B013 The font data is found to be damaged at start-up. PDL E731 There is a UFR board error. 3000 There is a UFR board error. At start-up, the UFR board is not recognized. Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the UFR board; then, turn on the main power. If the machine does not reset, replace the UFR board or the main controller PCB. Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the UFR board; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to ret, replace the UFR board or the main control PCB. There is an error in the built-in font. If the error is not reset when the main power has been turned off and then on, perform full system formatting and installation sessions.
3001 At start-up, initialization of the UFR fails.
3002 Initialization of Rambus fails. 3015 While a job is being processed, there is no video data in the chip of the Turn off and then on the main power. main controller PCB (main) although the software is operating without a If the machine fails to start up, replace the main controller PCB. problem. E732 There is an error in reader communication. 0001 There is an error in reader communication. Turn off the main power, and check the connectors to the reader, and check the power supply of the reader; then, turn on the main power.
9999 Although a printer model, the machine is identified as a reader unit at start- Turn off and then on the main power. up. (A copier model is started up as a printer model when the RAM is initialized.) E733 There is a printer communication error. 0000 There is a printer communication error. At start-up, the printer is not detected. 0001 There is a DDI-P communication error. Turn off the main power, and check the connectors to the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB, and check the power supply of the printer; then, turn on the main power. Turn off the main power, and check the connectors to the DC control PCB and the main controller PCB, and check the power supply of the printer; then, turn on the main power. Turn off the main power, and replace the NIC; then, turn on the main power.
E740
There is an Ethernet board error. 0002 At time of start-up, the MAC address is found to be illegal. A non-Canon MAC address is detected. 0003 Invalid network ID detected at startup.
E743
There is a DDI communication error. 0000 There is an SCI error. The reception data is faulty. A reception time-out condition has occurred. An SEQ time-out error has occurred. An SEQ time-out error has occurred. Disconnect and connect the DDI-S cable connector; then, as necessary, replace the reader controller PCB or the main controller PCB.
E744
There is a language file/boot ROM error. 0001 The version of the language file on the HDD is different from the version Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version of bootable. using the Service Support Tool. 0002 The size of the language file on the HDD is too large. Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the Service Support Tool.
16-16
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 0003 There is no language to use in Config.txt on the HDD. Or, none of the languages on the HDD is appropriate for use. A switchover cannot be made to a language file on the HDD. 0004 A switchover cannot be made to a language file on the HDD. 1000 There is a boot ROM project error. The installed boot ROM is of the wrong type. 2000 When an illegal engine ID has been detected E745 There is a TokenRing error. 0001 When the TokeRing driver is initialized, the attempt in PCI has failed. When the TokeRing driver is initialized, the attempt in PCI has failed. Remarks Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the Service Support Tool. Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the Service Support Tool. Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the Service Support Tool. Turn off the main power, and replace the boot ROM with one of the correct type; then, turn on the main power.
0002 When the TokeRing driver is being initialized, the MAC address is found Turn off the main power switch; as necessary, replace the TokenRing to be faulty. board, and turn on the main power. 0003 While the TokeRing driver is being initialized, board information cannot Turn off the main power; as necessary, replace the TokenRing board, be obtained, or the settings are wrong. and turn on the main power. The board information cannot be obtained. 0004 When starting up the TokenRing driver, a connection error occurs. E746 The accessories board is of the wrong type. 0003 At time of start-up, the UFR board is found to be of the wrong type. (A query is made to find out if the type is correct with reference to the engine ID.) 0004 At time of start-up, the scanner board is found to be of the wrong type. (A query is made to find out if the type is correct with reference to the engine ID.) 0011 An error occurred in the connection to the main controller PCB (main).The voice board and voice recognition board recognized (connected) both of them. E747 ** Main controller PCB error Turn the main power OFF and back ON. Replace the main controller PCB (main). Disconnect and re-connect the main controller PCB (sub PE) or replace. Replace the main controller PCB (main). Disconnect and re-connect the main controller PCB (sub PE) or replace. Taking out and putting in, replacement of main controller PCB (sub EF), replacement of main controller PCB (main) Taking out and putting in, and replacement of main controller PCB (sub EF) Disconnect and re-connect the main controller PCB (sub R) or replace. Replace the main controller PCB (main). Disconnect and re-connect the main controller PCB (sub R) or replace. Disconnect and re-connect the OPEN interface PCB or replace. Replace the main controller PCB (main). Disconnect and re-connect the main controller PCB (sub R) or replace. Disconnect and re-connect the main controller PCB (sub SJ) or replace. Replace the main controller PCB (main). Disconnect and re-connect the main controller PCB (sub SJ) or replace. Replace it with a UFR board of the correct type. Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the cable, and check the power supply of MAU; then, turn on the main power.
Replace it with a scanner board of the correct type.
0000-1217 Error on the main controller PCB (main) 2000-3D00 Error in communication with main controller PCB (sub PE) 3F00-3F07 When the non-mounting of the main controller PCB (sub PE) has been detected 4000- Communication error with main controller PCB (sub EF) 5D00 5F00- When main controller PCB (sub EF) is detected not to be attached 5F07 6000-7D00 Error in communication with main controller PCB (sub R) 7F00 When the non-mounting of the main controller PCB (sub R) has been detected 8000-9C00 Error in communication with the OPEN interface PCB 9F00 When the non-mounting of the main controller PCB (sub R) has been detected C000-DC00 Error in communication with the main controller PCB (sub SJ) DF00 When the non-mounting of the main controller PCB (sub SJ) has been detected
FF00 When an illegal main controller PCB (sub SJ, PE or R) or OPEN interface Replace with the main controller PCB (sub SJ, PE or R) or OPEN PCB has been detected interface PCB designed for this unit. EXXX When there was an interrupt from a virtual ASIC E748 ** Main controller PCB error 4000 When not even one of the ASICs of the main controller PCBs (sub SJ, PE Disconnect and re-connect the main controller PCBs (sub SJ, PE or or R) or of the ASICs of the OPEN interface PCB can be detected R) or replace. Disconnect and re-connect the OPEN interface PCB or replace. Replace the main controller PCB (main). 4010 When a defective main controller PCBs (sub SJ, PE or R) or OPEN interface PCB has been detected Disconnect and re-connect the main controller PCBs (sub SJ, PE or R) or replace. Disconnect and re-connect the OPEN interface PCB or replace. Replace the main controller PCB (main). Turn the main power OFF and back ON. Replace the main controller PCB (main).
4020 When the connection of an illegal board to the PCI expansion slot has been Install the PCI expansion board (encryption board or audio board) detected designed for this unit. 4030 Error in accessing the HDD controller 4040 Error in accessing the main controller PCBs (sub SJ, PE or R) or OPEN interface PCB 4042 SDRAM size error 4043 MAC address read error Replace the main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar). Replace the main controller PCB (main). Disconnect and re-connect the main controller PCBs (sub SJ, PE or R) or replace. Disconnect and re-connect the OPEN interface PCB or replace. Replace the main controller PCB (main). Disconnect and re-connect the SDRAM, replace or add. Replace the main controller PCB (main). Replace the main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar). Replace the main controller PCB (main).
16-17
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 4045 Error in accessing the RTC 4050 Error in accessing the LAN controller Remarks Disconnect and re-connect the SRAM PCB or replace. Replace the main controller PCB (main). Replace the main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar). Replace the main controller PCB (main).
4150 When it is detected that the remaining charge of the SRAM/RTC backup Turn the main power OFF and back ON. Replace the SRAM PCB. battery has been used up 4160 Error in accessing the FAX interface controller 4170 Error in accessing the USB host controller 4180 Error in accessing the USB device controller Replace the main controller PCB (main). Replace the main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar). Replace the main controller PCB (main). Replace the main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar). Replace the main controller PCB (main).
4190 Error in accessing the IPC communication interface controller (card reader Replace the main controller PCB (sub LAN-bar). Replace the main or coin robot) controller PCB (main). 4210 Error in accessing the ASIC for I/O, interrupt processing 4220 SDRAM (slot position: top) read error 4221 SDRAM (slot position: bottom) read error 4230 Error in accessing the LCD controller 4260 Write error when BootROM version was upgraded Replace the main controller PCB (main). Disconnect and re-connect the SDRAM or replace. Disconnect and re-connect the SDRAM or replace. Replace the main controller PCB (main). Replace the BootROM.
4910 When a PCB assembly different from the main controller PCB assembly Replace the main controller PCB assembly. for this equipment has been found. E749 ** Restart in accordance with a change of the product configuration 0001 The BootROM is replaced with a different type (when the PDL option is Turn OFF and back ON the main power to recover installed) . E800 0001 The interlock 24V mechanism of the fixing unit is identified as being off. With the door closed, the interlock 24V mechanism remains off for 500 msec. Turn off the main switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB, check the fixing unit interlock, and check the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the interlock main switch. There is any of the various types of fan errors. 0004 There is an error in the controller cooling fan. 0007 There is an error in the power supply cooling fan. E805 Turn off the main switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch. Turn off the main switch, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch. Turn off the main power, and check the supply of power to the fan; then, as necessary, replace the fan, and turn on the main power. Turn off the main switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch. Turn off the main switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and 2V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch.
E804
The fixing heat exhaust fan is identified as having stopped or having an error. 0003 There is an error in the fixing heat exhaust fan.
E820
There is an error in the process unit cooling fan. 0002 There is an error in the process unit fan.
E824
There is an error in the primary charging suction/primary charging exhaust fan. 0000 There is an error in the primary charging suction mechanism. 0001 There is an error in the primary exhaust fan.

0018-2558
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Related Service Mode CHK-TYPE =COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE (Specifies the partitions to be formatted by HD-CLEAR) HD-CHECK =COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK (Performs Write Abort repairs for the entire HDD when CHK-TYPE = 0) HD-CLEAR =COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR (Formats the partitions specified by CHK-TYPE) E602-XXYY XX='00'
16-18
Chapter 16
T-16-4 XX YY Description Remedial action 1. Turn off the main switch, and check the HDD cable. Thereafter, turn on the main switch. 2. Check to see if the HDD rotates at power-up. Check to see if 5V/12V power is being supplied. 3. If the foregoing fails to correct the fault, replace the HDD and reinstall the system software. If the fault still persists, replace the main board.
01
The HDD is not recognized. The boot partition (BOOTDEV) is not found at time of start-up.
02
1. Start up in safe mode; then, execute full formatting using the SST, reinstall the system software (System, There is no system software for the main Lang, RUI), and turn off and then on the main switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD. Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. CPU. 1. Locate the sector that shows WriteAbort, and repair it. <in the case of black-and-white E code> 1-1 Go through the following, as service mode cannot be started: 1-2 Turn off the power; then, while holding down the 1 and 9 keys, turn on the power so that the WriteAbort sector repair routine will start automatically, causing the screen to go solid black. 1-3 Allow for some time (40 to 50 min). A progress indictor will appear. When the screen turns solid white, the repair is over. <in the case of spanner icon indication> 1-1 Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HD-CHECK (40 to 50 min); then, turn off the main switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main switch. 3. If the fault still persists, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software. 1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software. 1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
00 03
WriteAbort has been detected in BootDevice.
06
The system software of the sub CPU is missing.
07
ICCProfile is missing.
XX='01 to FF
XX YY YY=10, YY=00, YY=11, YY=13, 12,14,22 YY=05 01,02,04 21 25 ,23,24 During normal operation HDD formatting
YY=03 CHK Partition in TYP question E
At time of start-up Description
XX
HDD formattin HDD HDD g by formattin Items formattin normal g by safe deleted g by HD- mode + mode + Remedy Remedy Remedy Remedy Remedy Remedy (typical) CLEAR SST SST
16-19
Chapter 16
image data storage area (e.g., Box)
01 02
FSTDEV
*1 *1
*5 *5
*9 *9
*10 *10
*11 *11
*12 *12 FSTDEV possible selected (3 (3 partitions partitions simultane simultane ous) ous)
IMG_MNG image management data
03
image data storage area (for FSTCDEV Chasing)
*1
*5
*9
*10
*11
*12
all stored data (e.g., Box)
04 2 05
general-purpose data APL_GEN storage area general-purpose data storage area (temporary TMP_GEN file)
*1
*5
*9
*10
*11
*12
General
*1
*5
*9
*10
*11
*12
06 07
TMP_FAX fax (temporary file) TMP_PSS PSS (temporary file)
*1 *1
*5 *5
*9 *9
*10 *10
*11 *11
*12 *12
APL_GE possible N (4 selected partitions (4 General simultane partitions ous) simultane ous) FAX PSS
3 08
PDLDEV
PDL-related file storage area (font, registration form, ICCProfile, PDL function color correction information file)
possible *1 *5 *9 *10 *11 *12 UserFont IccProfil e
PDLDE V selected
09 10 11 5 6
BOOTDEV Firmware storage area (Booktable, MEAP, Key, certificate, PDF dictionary, RUI content, voice dictionary (ICC profile, PS test data)) APL_MEA P MEAP APL_SEN D Not identified address book, filter HDD full sector fault check and repair
Not possible
Not possible
*3 *1 *2
*8 *5 *5
*9 *9 *9
*10 *10 *10
*11 *11 *11
*12 *12 *12
System MEAP SEND possible Not possible possible Not possible
0 FF
*4
*7
*9
*10
*11
*12
YY *1 03
Description WriteAbort(start-up)
Remedial action 1. Indicate the partition in question for CHK-TYPE; then, execute HDD-CHECK (several min to several 10s of min); then, turn off and then on the power. 2. If the foregoing fails, indicate the partition for CHK-TYPE, and execute HDD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then on the main power switch.
*2
03
1. If possible, ask the user to make a backup of the data (address book) using the remote UI. 2. Indicate the partition in question for CHK-TYPE, and execute HDD_CHECK (several min to several 10s of min); then, turn off and then on the main power switch. 3. If the foregoing fails, start download mode, and execute full formatting and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main power switch.
*3
03
Recovery on the boot partition always calls for the use of SST in safe mode: 1. Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HDD-CHECK (several 10s of min); then, turn off and then on the power. 2. If the foregoing fails, start download mode, and execute full formatting and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main power switch.
*4
03
1. Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HDD-CHECK (several 10s of min); then, turn off and then on the power. 2. If the foregoing fails, use CHK-TYPE-1, 2, 3, 5 to execute HDD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then on the power.
16-20
Chapter 16
YY *5 05 Description file system error Remedial action 1. Indicate the partition for CHK-TYPE, and execute HDD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then on the main switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
*6
05
file system error
HDD-CLEAR cannot be executed in service mode so as to prevent inadvertent deletion of data for address book, filter, and the like. 1. If possible, ask the user to make a backup of the data for address book using the remote UI. 2. Start in service mode, and start download mode. Execute full formatting using the SST, and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main power switch.
*7
05
file system error
This error seldom occurs. 1. Using CHK-TYPE=1, 2, 3, 5, execute HDD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then on the power. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
*8
05
file system error
Repair of the boot partition always calls for the use of the SST in safe mode. 1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main power switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
*9
00,01, HDD contact fault, or v x Works 02,04 system error
1. Check the cable and power supply connectors. 2. If the foregoing fails, start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and then on the main power switch. 3. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
*10
11,21
HDD contact fault
This error seldom occurs in the course of normal read/write operations. 1. Check the cable and power connectors. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
*11
13,25
WriteAbort
The text file on the HDD (e.g., Box) may be damaged. 1. Indicate the partition for CHK-TYPE, and execute HDD-CHECK (several min to several 10s of min); then, turn off and then on the power. 2. If the forgoing fails, indicate the partition for CHK-TYPE, and execute HDD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then on the main switch. (In the case of BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2, or APL_SEND, execute formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software.) 3. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD, and replace the HDD and reinstall the system software.
*12
10,12, system error, or packet data error 14 22,23, 24
This error occurs in response to corruption of data or a bug in software. 1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software (System, Lang, RUI); then, turn off and then on the main power switch. 2. If the foregoing fails, suspect a fault on the HDD; replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.
E602-XXYY XX="20"
T-16-5 XX YY 00 01 20 02 Description Remedial action
Authentication error between the main unit 1. Remove and insert the encryption board, and turn the power OFF/ON. and encryption board 2. After clearing the encryption key (*), perform HDD formatting and system reinstallation work by SST. The encryption board cannot be recognized. Failure in the encryption board / HDD 1. After clearing the encryption key (*), perform HDD formatting and system reinstallation work by SST. 1. Remove and insert the encryption board, and turn the power OFF/ON. 2. After clearing the encryption key (*), perform HDD formatting and system reinstallation work by SST. 3. After replacing the encryption board, perform HDD formatting and system reinstallation work by SST. 4. After replacing the HDD, perform HDD formatting and system reinstallation work by SST. 5. Replace the main controller PCB.
*: Clearing of the encryption key can be performed from the service mode "COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>KEY-CLR (Level 2)". After this operation, the HDD becomes unformatted, and if the machine is activated in this condition, E602-0001 is displayed. Therefore, it is necessary to perform HDD formatting and system
16-21
Chapter 16 reinstallation work by SST.

0005-0271

T-16-6 Code E000 Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks
At power-on, the rise in the temperature of the fixing assembly is not high enough. The main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4) has an open circuit or poor contact. The AC drive PCB or the DC controller PCB is faulty. 0010 After power-on, the temperature does not reach 50 deg C within 300 sec. 0011 The temperature reaches 50 deg C, but does not reach 80 deg C within 300 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0012 The temperature reaches 80 deg C, but does not reach 110 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and deg C within 300 sec. heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0013 The temperature reaches 110 deg C, but does not reach 140 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and deg C within 300 sec. heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0014 The temperature reaches 140 deg C, but does not reach 170 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and deg C within 300 sec. heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0015 The temperature reaches 170 deg c, but does not reach 200 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and deg C within 300 sec. heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0020 After power-on, the temperature does not reach 50 deg C within 180 sec. 0021 The temperature reaches 50 deg C, but does not reach 80 deg C within 180 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0022 The temperature reaches 80 deg C, but does not reach 110 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and deg C within 180 sec. heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0023 The temperature reaches 110 deg C, but doest not reach 140 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and deg C within 180 sec. heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0024 The temperature reaches 140 deg C, but does not reach 170 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and deg C within 180 sec. heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0025 The temperature reaches 170 deg C, but does not reach 200 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and deg C within 180 sec. heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. If the outside heating roller is in contact, within 400 sec. 0026 The temperature reaches 200 deg C, but does not reach 230 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and deg C within 180 sec. heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. If the outside heating roller is in contact, within 400 sec. 0030 After power-on, the temperature does not reach 50 deg C within 420 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0031 The temperature reaches 50 deg C, but does not reach 80 C Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and deg in 420 sec. heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0032 The temperature reaches 80 deg C, but does not reach 110 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and deg C within 420 sec. heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0033 The temperature reaches 110 deg C, but does not reach 140 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and deg C within 420 sec. heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0034 The temperature reaches 140 deg C, but does not reach 170 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and deg C within 420 sec. heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. E001 The rise in the temperature of the fixing assembly is excessive. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the following: main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), sub thermistor (THM4, THM5, THM6), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4). The AC driver PCB or the DC controller PCB is faulty. 0001 The rise in the temperature of the fixing roller is excessive. Check the main thermistor, sub thermistor, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0002 The rise in the temperature of the outside heating roller is excessive. 0003 The rise in the temperature of the pressure roller is excessive. Check the main thermistor, sub thermistor, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor, sub thermistor, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
16-22
Chapter 16
Code Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks
00FF When the cause (Detailed code) cannot be found in the DC After releasing the error with the procedure of COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR, controller PCB input-port as DC controller PCB detects 1. Turn off the switch of control panel. instantly an abnormal signal from the thermistor. 2. Turn off the switch of main power. 3. Turn on the switch of main power. a. When the machine returns, Check the interconnection between the DC controller PCB and the thermistor. b. When the machine does not return, Follow the instruction the error (Detailed) code shows on the control panel.
E002
The rise in the temperature of the fixing assembly is not enough. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4). The AC driver PCB or the DC controller PCB has a fault. 0010 The temperature of the fixing roller reaches 80 deg C, but Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor drops below 50 deg C. contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0020 The temperature of the outside heating roller reaches 80 deg C, but drops below 50 deg C. Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0030 The temperature of the pressure roller reaches 80 deg C, but Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor drops below 50 deg C. contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. E003 After standby, the drop in the temperature of the fixing assembly is excessive. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4). The AC driver PCB or the DC controller PCB has a fault. 0041 During standby, the temperature of the fixing roller drops below 150 deg C. 0042 During standby, the temperature of the outside heating roller drops below 190 dg C. Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0043 During standby, the temperature of the pressure roller drops Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor below 120 deg C. contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0051 During copying, the temperature of the fixing roller drops Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor below 150 deg C. contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0052 During copying, the temperature of the outside heating roller drops below 190 deg C. 0053 During copying, the temperature of the pressure roller drops below 60 deg C. E004 Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
There is an error in the fixing assembly protection circuit. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3) or sub thermistor (TH4, THM5, THM6). The AC driver PCB or the DC controller PCB has a fault. 0001 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater. There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater. 0002 There is an SSR error in the fixing sub heater. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0003 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater or Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; the fixing sub heater. then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0004 There is an SSR error in the fixing main heater. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0005 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater or Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; the fixing main heater. then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0006 There is an SSR error in the fixing sub heater or the fixing Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; main heater. then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0007 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater, fixing sub heater, or fixing main heater. 0008 There is an SSR error in the pressure heater. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0009 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater or Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; the contact heater. then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 000A There is an SSR error in the fixing sub heater or the contact Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; heater. then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 000B There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater, fixing sub heater, or contact heater. 000C There is an error in the fixing main heater or the contact heater. 000D There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater, fixing main heater, or contact heater. 000E There is an error in the fixing sub heater, fixing main heater, or contact heater. 000F There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater, fixing sub heater, fixing main heater, or contact heater. 0010 The fixing roller thermistor has an open circuit. 0020 The outside heating roller thermistor has an open circuit. 0030 The pressure roller thermistor has an open circuit. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
16-23
Chapter 16
Code E005 Cause/Particulars of detection There is an error in the take-up mechanism of the web. Reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. If you have replaced the 0000 The web of the fixing assembly has been fully taken up. After the web sensor has detected an off state, the count has web, reset the reading in the following, and turn off and then on the power: COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FIX-WEB. exceeded 3000. The web length sensor (PS20) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. 0010 The drive solenoid of the fixing assembly is not connected. Check the drive solenoid of the fixing web for disconnection; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. E006 The fixing assembly has a comparison error. 0001 The fixing drawer has been identified as being disconnected. E008 Check the connector of the drive solenoid of the fixing web; then, turn off and then on the main power. Remarks
There is an error in relation to the life of the fixing assembly. 0001 The counter reading for the fixing roller has exceeded a specific count. When you have replaced the fixing roller, reset in service mode, and turn off and then on the main power: COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FX-UP-RL.
E009
There is an outside heating roller shift error. The outside heating roller shift motor (M22) is faulty. The outside heating roller HP sensor (PS21) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The outside heating roller remains in contact with the fixing Check the outside heating roller shift motor and the fixing motor; then, turn off and then roller. on the main power. There is an error in the drum/ITB motor. 0001 After motor start-up, a lock state is not identified for 1 sec Check the area around the photosensitive drum and the intermediate transfer belt; then, or more. turn off and then on the main power.
00FF E012
E013
There is clogging by waste toner. 0001 There is a waste toner full error. the soft counter reading is 250000 or higher. Check the amount of waste toner; then, turn off and then on the main power.
0002 There is a waste toner feedscrew error. Check the developing motor; then, turn off and then on the main power. The output of the waste toner lock detecting switch (SW14) is '1' for more than 1 sec. E014 There is a fixing motor error. 0001 After motor start-up, a lock state is not identified for 1 sec Check the fixing motor (fixing assembly); then, turn off and then on the main power. or more. E020 There is an ATR error. xx=01 for Y; xx=02 for M; xx=03 for C; xx=04 for without color distinction xx10 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. setup, the Sig value is lower than 62. The ATR sensor is damage or has an open circuit. The connector may have poor contact. The intermediate transfer belt may be soiled. xx11 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. setup, the Ref value is lower than 62. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector may have poor contact. The intermediate transfer belt may be soiled> xx12 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. setup, the Sig value is 960 or higher. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The opening/closing of the shutter is faulty. The intermediate transfer belt is soiled. xx13 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. setup, the Ref value is 960 or higher. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The intermediate transfer belt is soiled. xx81 When the background (intermediate transfer belt) is read Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. during patch detection, the P_base_adj value is lower than 255. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The ITB cleaner is faulty. xx90 The result (Sig D) of computation based on the reading of Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. the patch during patch detection (analog)) is lower than 16. xx91 The result (Sig D) of computation based on the reading of Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. the patch during patch detection (analog) is 1008 or higher. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The primary transfer pressure is faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty.
16-24
Chapter 16
Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. xx92 The value delta D obtained from the result (Sig D) of computation based on the reading of the patch during patch detection is -5.0% or more 3 times continuously. The patch sensor may be damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The primary transfer engagement is faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. The amount of supply is low. xx93 The value delta D obtained from the result (Sig D) of Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. computation based on the reading of the patch during patch detection is +5.0% or lower 3 times continuously. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The primary transfer pressure is faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. The amount of supply is low. xxA0 For ATR control, the Sig value is lower than 62. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. xxA1 For ATR control, the Ref value is lower than 62. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. xxA2 For ATR control, the Sig value is 960 or higher. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The opening/closing of the shutter is faulty. xxA3 For ATR control, the Ref value is 960 or higher. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt.
Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt.
xxA8 The T/D ratio identified for ATR control has exceeded the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. upper limit (12%) 3 times continuously. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The amount of supply is too high. xxA9 The T/D ratio identified for ATR control has exceeded the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. lower limit (3%) 3 times continuously. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The amount of supply is too low. xxC0 The variation among the 8 samplings of the light Sig value Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. is 100 or higher. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The stirring of toner is faulty. xxC1 The variation among the 8 samplings of the light Ref value Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. is 100 or higher. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. xxC2 The variation among the 8 samplings of the patch Sig value Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. is 400 or higher. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The primary transfer engagement is faulty. xxD0 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. setup, the average of the light Sig values is 200 or lower. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The amount of supply is low. xxD1 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. setup, the average of the light Ref values is 462 or lower. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. xxD2 Fore INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the average of the patch Sig values is 200 or lower. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. the connector has poor contact. The primary transfer engagement is faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt.
xxD4 For INTI control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. setup, the average of the light Sig values is 800 or higher. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The amount of supply is too high. xxD5 For INTI control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. setup, the average of the light Ref values is 562 or higher. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. xxDA For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. setup, the variation among the 72 night Sig value samplings is 100 or more. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The stirring of toner is faulty. xxDB For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. setup, the variation among the 72 light Ref samplings is 100 or more. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact.
16-25
Chapter 16
xxDC For INIT control (service mode INISET-*), the average of Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. the patch Sig values is 800 or higher. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. the primary transfer engagement if faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. The amount of supply is too high. xxF1 The connector or the color toner supply clutch is not connected. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute ITB cleaning.
Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. xxFF There is no toner inside the Bk developing assembly. - the toner is not supplied to the developing assembly correctly. - the hopper stirring motor is not rotating normally. The hopper connector has poor contact. The black toner supply motor (M25) is faulty. The hopper stirring motor (M23) is faulty. The black toner level sensor is faulty. The DC controller is faulty. E021 There is an error in the rotation of the developing assembly. 0001 The developing rotary home position is not detected. Turn off and then on the main power. The motor rotates out of sync because of poor torque caused by any of the following: The developing rotary HP sensor is faulty; the wiring of the DC controller is faulty; there is an excess load on the developing assembly. 0002 The length of the flag detected during rotation is longer or Turn off and then on the main power. shorter than the designed flag. The motor rotates out of sync because of poor torque caused by any of the following: the developing rotary HP sensor is faulty; the wiring of the DC controller PCB is faulty; there is an excessive load on the developing assembly. E023 The developing motor (M3) does not rotate normally. 0001 After motor start-up, a lock state is not detected for 1 sec or Turn off and then on the main power. more. E025 There is an over-current in the hopper stirring motor (M23)or the black toner supply motor (M25).
0001 There is an overcurrent in the hopper stirring motor (M23). Turn off and then on the main power.
0002 There is an over-current in the black toner supply motor (M25).
Turn off and then on the main power.
0410 The connector of the black toner supply motor (M25) is identified as being disconnected. E032 The NE connector counter does not operate. 0001 There is an open circuit in the line for the count pulse signal. E043
Turn off the main power, and check the cable for an open circuit; then, turn on the main power.
There is an error in the 3.5K paper deck pickup motor, causing an error signal. 0001 After motor start-up, a lock state is not detected for 1 sec or Turn off and then on the main power. more. The mechanical load such as on the feeding system is excessive.
E051
The horizontal registration home position is not detected within a specific period of time. The horizontal registration position is faulty (0003). 0001 The horizontal registration home position is not detected within a specific period of time. 0002 The ON edge of the SUS plate is not detected during a search for home position. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
0003 The logical motor position differs between before and after Turn off and then on the main power. the detection operation. E061 At time of potential control, a specific level of potential is absent. Or, the limiter goes on. 0001 When forming an image, the potential is 10 V or less during Turn off and then on the main power. initial rotation. 0002 At time of potential control, the potential is 10 V or less during initial rotation. 0003 While the grid bias is being adjusted, a level of potential higher than the grid bias is sampled. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
0005 The difference in potential between dark and light areas is Turn off and then on the main power. less than 100 V. 0007 During adjustment of EPC offset, the potential that is read Turn off and then on the main power. is outside the +/-30 V range.
16-26
Chapter 16
0008 During dark area potential adjustment, the sampling value Turn off and then on the main power. is too low. 0010 The sampling of the light area potential is faulty. E070 Turn off and then on the main power.
There is an error in the detection of the ITB home position. xx=01: ITB home position sensor B, xx=02: ITB home position sensor A; only at ITB 1/1 speed; XX=00: no distinction
00xx The home position of the intermediate transfer belt is not detected within a specific period of time . The ITB HP sensor is faulty.
Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the ITB HP sensor; then, turn on the main power.
01xx The period of time between when the home position of the Turn off the main power, and check the drive of the intermediate transfer belt; then, turn intermediate transfer belt is detected and the next home on the main power. position is detected is longer than specified . The presence of a tear may have caused the sensor to wrongly identify it as indicating the home position.
02xx The period of time between when the home position of the Turn off the main power, and check the surface of the intermediate transfer belt for a intermediate transfer belt is detected and when the next tear; then, turn on the main power. home position is detected is shorter than specified . The intermediate transfer belt slips on the drive roller, causing a delay in the timing at which the home position is detected. 03xx The detection of the home position of the intermediate Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the ITB HP sensor; then transfer belt has failed once. turn on the main power. ITB home position sensor B and ITB home position sensor A must occur alternately; however, the same state has been detected continuously. E073 With the front door closed, the transfer drawer connector or the transfer frame drawer connector is not connected. 0001 The result of detecting the feed unit indicates the absence of the unit. E077 Turn off and then on the main power.
The home position of the secondary transfer roller (engagement) is not detected. 0001 The HP sensor does not go on within 5 sec after the start of Turn off and then on the main power. a HP search.
E078
The home position of the transfer belt cleaner unit (engagement) is not detected. 0001 The HP sensor does not turn on within 5 sec after the start Turn off and then on the main power. of a HP search.
E079
The home position of the outside heating roller is not detected. The outside heating roller home position sensor does not go off.
0001 The HP sensor does not turn on within 5 sec after the start Turn off and then on the main power. of an HP search. 0002 If there is an open circuit in the home position sensor of the Turn off and then on the main power. outside heating roller home position sensor, the state of the sensor will be identified as being ON. An error will be identified if the sensor fails to go off when it is at a point where it must normally go on and the outside heating roller shift motor is driven. E100 The BD is not detected. 0001 The BD signal is not detected when the polygon scanner has been driven for a specific period of time. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power.
0002 The BD signal is not detected white the polygon scanner is Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; rotating stably. then, turn on the main power. E110 There is a scanner motor error. 0001 The FG signal is not detected within a specific period of time after the polygon scanner has been driven. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power.
0002 The FG signal is not detected while the polygon scanner is Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; rotating stably. then, turn on the main power. 0003 The FG signal is not detected while the polygon scanner is Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; rotating stably. then, turn on the main power. E197 There is an error in the communication with the fixing feed PCB. In the course of initializing communication between the DC controller and the fixing/feeding unit, as many as 10 0002 communication errors occur continuously. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB wiring and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power.
16-27
Chapter 16
Code Cause/Particulars of detection Following the end of initialization of the communication between the DC controller and the fixing/feeding unit, as many as 10 communication errors occur continuously. Remarks Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB wiring and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power.
0003
0004
Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB wiring and the 24V system At the start of drum initial multiple rotation, there is no signal indicating the start of 24V in the fixing assembly in fuse; then, turn on the main power. the communication between the DC controller and the fixing/feeding unit.
E202
There is an HP error. 0001 An error is found during the forward trip of the HP search. Check the harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the faulty part. The scanner HP sensor is faulty. The scanner motor is faulty. The reader controller is faulty. 0002 An error is found during the return trip of the HP search. The scanner HP sensor is faulty. The scanner motor is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty. Check the harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the faulty part.
E225
The lamp has blown. 0001 The level of shading is lower than specified. Check the harness connector for connection. Check the scanning lamp (xenon), inverter, and reader controller PCB.
E227
There is a power supply (24V) error. 0001 At power-on, the 24V port is off. 0002 At the start of a job, the 24V port is off. 0003 At the end of a job, the 24V port is off. 0004 While a load is being driven, the 24V port is off. Check the power supply harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the power supply. Check the power supply harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the power supply. Check the power supply harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the power supply. Check the power supply harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the power supply.
E240
There is a DDI-P communication error. 0000 There is a DDI-P communication error (error in communication between master and slave 0). Turn off the main power, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power.
E248
There is an error in the EEPROM. 0000 At time of start-up, a check error has occurred on the SRAM board. 0001 There is a power-on error. 0002 There is a write error. 0003 There is a wire/read error. Turn off the main power, and check the SRAM board; then, as necessary, replace the SRAM board, and turn on the main power. Replace the reader controller PCB. Replace the reader controller PCB. Replace the reader controller PCB.
E315
codex error 000E An error has occurred in the course of software decoding.
E351
There is an error in the main controller PCB (sub). 0000 At start-up, there is an error in the communication between Turn off the main power, and replace the main controller PCB (sub). If the result is not good, replace the main controller PCB (main), and turn on the main main controller PCB (sub) and the main controller PCB (main). power.
E400
There is a DF communication error. 0001 There is a check sum error. 0002 There is a reception status error. 0003 There is a reception interrupt error. Disconnect and connect the harness connector; then, replace the reader controller PCB or the ADF DC controller. Disconnect and connect the harness connector; then, replace the reader controller PCB or the ADF DC controller. Disconnect and connect the harness connector; then, replace the reader controller PCB or the ADF DC controller.
E413
There is an error in the DF shift motor. 0001 The shift HP sensor is open. 0002 The shift HP sensor is closed. Check the harness; then, as necessary, replace the sensor and motor. Check the attaching of the parts around the cam. Check the harness; then, as necessary, replace the sensor and motor. Check the attaching of the parts around the cam.
E490
The DF is of the wrong model. 0001 The installed DF is not of the correct type. Replace the DF with one of an appropriate type.
E500
There is a finisher communication error.
16-28
Chapter 16
Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller, wiring of the finisher PCB, and 0001 There is an error in data communication. An error has been detected in terms of the number of errors 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. or the duration of the error in the communication between copier and finisher. E503 There is an error in the communication within the finisher (finisher R1/R2). 0002 There is a data communication error. finisher-to-saddle unit communication error 0003 finisher-to-punch unit communication error E505 Check the connection between the saddle stitcher controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB. Check the connection between the Punch controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB.
There is an error in the backup memory of the finisher (finer R1/R2). 0001 There is an error in the data stored in the backup memory. Turn off the main power, and check the DC control, wiring of the finisher PCB, and 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. 0002 There is a data error in the punch assembly EEPROM. Turn off the main power, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the puncher controller PCB: then, check the 24V system fuse, and turn back on the main power.
E514
There is an error in the trailing edge assist motor (finisher R1/R2). 8001 The home position sensor does not go off when the trailing 1) Check the trailing edge assist home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? edge assist motor has been rotated for a specific period of 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the trailing edge assist time. motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the trailing edge assist mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the trailing edge assist motor. Is the problem corrected? 8002 The home position sensor does not go on when the trailing 1) Check the trailing edge assist home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? edge assist motor has been rotated for a specific period of 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the trailing edge assist time. motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the trailing edge assist mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the trailing edge assist motor. Is the problem corrected?
E519
There is an error in the gear change motor (finisher R1/R2). 8001 The home position sensor does not go off within a specific 1) Check the gear change home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? period of time after the gear change motor has started to 2) Check the wiring between the fisher controller PCB and the gear change motor. Is rotate. the wiring normal? 3) Check the gear change mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the gear change motor. Is the problem corrected? 0002 The home position sensor does not go on within a specific 1) Check the gear change home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? period of time after the gear change motor has started to 2) Check the wiring between the fisher controller PCB and the gear change motor. Is rotate. the wiring normal? 3) Check the gear change mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the gear change motor. Is the problem corrected?
E530
There is an error in front alignment (finisher R1/R2). 8001 Th alignment motor has started to rotate.e home position 1) Check the pre-aligning plate home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? sensor does not go off within a specific period of time after 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the pre-aligning plate the front motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the aligning plate. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the pre-aligning plate motor. Is the problem corrected? 8002 The home position sensor does not go on within a specific 1) Check the pre-aligning plate home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? period of time after the front alignment motor has started to 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the pre-aligning plate rotate. motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the aligning plate. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the pre-aligning plate motor. Is the problem corrected?
E531
There is an error in stapling (finisher R1/R2). 0001 The home position sensor does not go off within a specific 1) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stapler. Is the wiring period of time after the stapler motor has started to rotate. normal? 2) Try replacing the stapler. Is the problem corrected? 0002 The home position sensor does not go on within a specific 1) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stapler. Is the wiring period of time after the stapler motor has started to rotate. normal? 2) Try replacing the stapler. Is the problem corrected?
E532
There is an error in the shift mechanism of the stapler. (finisher R1/R2) 8001 The home position sensor does not go off within a specific 1) Check the stapler shift home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? period of time after the stapler shift motor has started to 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stapler shift motor. Is rotate. the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the stapler shift base. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the stapler shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 8002 The home position sensor does not go on within a specific 1) Check the stapler shift home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? period of time after the stapler shift motor has started to 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stapler shift motor. Is rotate. the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the stapler shift base. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the stapler shift motor. Is the problem corrected?
E535
There is an error in the staple swing mechanism. (finisher R1/R2) 8001 The home position sensor does not go off even when the swing motor has rotated for a specific period of time. 1) Check the swing home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the writing between the finisher controller PCB and the swing motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the swing mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the swing motor. Is the problem corrected?
16-29
Chapter 16
Code Cause/Particulars of detection 8002 The home position sensor does not go on even when the swing motor has rotated for a specific period of time. Remarks 1) Check the swing home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the writing between the finisher controller PCB and the swing motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the swing mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the swing motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the swing home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the writing between the finisher controller PCB and the swing motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the swing mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the swing motor. Is the problem corrected?
0003 There is an error in relation to an hazardous area..
E537
rear alignment error (Finisher-R1/R2) 8001 The home position sensor does not go off even when the swing motor has rotated for a specific period of time. 1) Check the post-aligning plate home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the post-aligning plate motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the aligning plate. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the post-aligning plate motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the post-aligning plate home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the post-aligning plate motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the aligning plate. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the post-aligning plate motor. Is the problem corrected?
8002 The home position sensor does not go on even when the swing motor has rotated for a specific period of time.
E540
upper tray ascent/descent error (Finisher-R1/R2) 8001 upper tray ascent/descent motor clock error 1) Check the No. 1 tray area sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between finisher controller PCB and the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the ascent/descent mechanism of the tray? 4) Try replacing the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 1 tray area sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between finisher controller PCB and the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the ascent/descent mechanism of the tray? 4) Try replacing the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 1 tray area sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between finisher controller PCB and the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the ascent/descent mechanism of the tray? 4) Try replacing the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected?
8002 area error
E542
lower tray ascent/descent error (Finisher-R1/R2) 8001 lower tray ascent/descent motor clock error 1) Check the No. 2 tray sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finer controller PCB and the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the tray ascent/descent mechanism? 4) Try replacing the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 2 tray sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finer controller PCB and the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the tray ascent/descent mechanism? 4) Try replacing the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 2 tray sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finer controller PCB and the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the tray ascent/descent mechanism? 4) Try replacing the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected?
8002 area error
E584
shutter unit error (Finisher-R1/R2) 8001 The shutter open sensor does not go off (i.e., the shutter is 1) Check the shutter home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? not closed). 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stack edging motor and between the finisher controller PCB and the shutter open/close clutch. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the shutter mechanism? 4) Try replacing the stack edging motor or the shutter open/close clutch. Is the problem corrected? 0002 The shutter open/closed sensor does not go on (i.e., the shutter does not open). 1) Check the shutter home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stack edging motor and between the finisher controller PCB and the shutter open/close clutch. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the shutter mechanism? 4) Try replacing the stack edging motor or the shutter open/close clutch. Is the problem corrected?
E590
There is an error in the punch motor. (punch unit) 8001 The punching home position sensor is not detected when the punch motor has been driven for 200 msec. 8002 The puncher does not detect the punching home position after the motor has stopped (initial operation). Check the punch home position sensor, horizontal registration motor, and punch driver PCB; then, turn off and then on the main power. Check the punch home position sensor, horizontal registration motor, and punch driver PCB; then, turn off and then on the main power.
E591
There is an error in the punch dust sensor. (punch unit) 8001 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage with emission of light. Turn off and then on the main power.
16-30
Chapter 16
Code Cause/Particulars of detection 8002 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. E592 Remarks Turn off and then on the main power.
There is an error in the punch horizontal registration sensor. (punch unit) 8001 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage at time of light emission. (trailing edge sensor) 8002 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. (trailing edge sensor) 8003 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage with emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 1) 8004 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 1) 8005 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage with emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 2) 8006 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 2) 8007 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage it the presence of emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 3) 8008 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 3) 8009 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage with emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 4) 800A There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 4) Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
E593
There is an error in the punch shift motor. (punch unit) 8001 The light-receiving voltage HP sensor does not go off at time of light emission. 8002 The light-receiving voltage HP sensor doest not go on without emission of light. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
E5F0
There is an error in saddle paper positioning. 0001 The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not Check the paper positioning plate motor (M4S) /paper positioning plate home position turn on when the paper positioning plate motor has been sensor (PI7S). driven for 1.33 sec. The paper positioning plate motor (M4S) or the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S) is faulty. 0002 The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not Check the paper positioning plate motor (M4S) /paper positioning plate home position turn off when the paper positioning plate motor has been sensor (PI7S). driven for 1 sec. The paper positioning plate motor (M4S) or the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S) is faulty.
E5F1
There is an error in saddle paper folding. 0001 The number of detection pulses of the paper folding motor Check the paper folding motor (M2S) /paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4S). clock sensor is lower than specified. The paper folding home position sensor or the paper folding motor clock sensor (P14S) is faulty. 0002 The state of the paper folding home position sensor does Check the paper folding motor (M2S) /paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4S). not change when the paper folding motor has been driven for 3 sec. The paper folding motor (M2S) or the paper folding motor clock sensor (P14S) is faulty.
E5F2
There is an error in the saddle guide. 0001 The guide home position sensor does not turn on when the Check the guide motor (M3S) /guide home position sensor (PI13S). guide motor has been driven for 0.45 sec. The guide motor (M3S) or the guide home position sensor (PI3S) is faulty. 0002 The guide home position sensor doest not turn off when the Check the guide motor (M3S) /guide home position sensor (PI13S). guide motor has been driven for 1 sec. The guide motor (M3S) or the guide home position sensor (PI3S) is faulty.
E5F3
There is an error in saddle alignment. 0001 The aligning plate home position sensors does not turn on Check the alignment motor (M5S) /aligning plate home position sensor (PI5S). when the alignment motor has been driven for 05. sec (during initialization, 1.67 sec). The alignment motor (M5S) or the aligning plate home position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. 0002 The alignment plate home position sensor does not turn off Check the alignment motor (M5S) /aligning plate home position sensor (PI5S). when the alignment motor has been driven for 1 sec. The alignment motor (M5S) for the alignment plate home position sensor (PI5S) is faulty.
E5F4
There is an error in saddle rear sampling.
16-31
Chapter 16
0001 The stitching home position sensor does not turn on when Check he stitching motor (rear; M6S) /stitching home position sensor (rear; MS5S). the stapler motor (rear) is rotated in reverse for 0.5 sec or more. The switch motor (rear, M65) or the stitching home position sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. 0002 The stitching home position sensor does not turn off when Check he stitching motor (rear; M6S) /stitching home position sensor (rear; MS5S). the switch motor (rear) is reverse for 0.5 sec or more. The switch motor (rear, M6S) or the stitching home position sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. E5F5 There is an error in saddle front stapling. 0001 The stitching home position sensor does not turn on when Check the stitching motor (front; M7S) /stitching home position sensor (front; MS7S). the switch motor (front) is rotated in reverse for 0.5 sec or more. The stitch motor (front, M7S) or the stitching home position sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. 0002 The stitching home position sensor does not turn off when Check the stitching motor (front; M7S) /stitching home position sensor (front; MS7S). the switch motor (front) is rotated in normal direction for 0.5. The stitch motor (front, M7S) or the switching home position sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. E5F6 There is an error in saddle butting. 8001 The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate home position sensor on when the paper pushing motor has been driven for 0.3 (PI4) is faulty. sec or more. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI4) is faulty. 8002 The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate home position sensor off when paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 80 (PI4S) is faulty. msec or more. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI4S) is faulty. 8003 The number of detection pulses of the paper pushing plate The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor motor clock sensor drops below a specific number. (PI1S) is faulty. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1S) is faulty. 8004 The paper pushing plate sensor does not turn off when the The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate leading edge position paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 80 msec or sensor (PI15S) is faulty. more. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor (PI15S) is faulty. 8005 The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor does The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate leading edge position not turn on when the paper pushing plate motor has been sensor (PI5S) is faulty. driven for 0.3 sec or more. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. E5F8 There is an error in the saddle connector. 0001 The connector of the guide home position sensor is Check the connectors of the guide home position sensor (PI13S). Check the connectors identified as being disconnected. of the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI4S). The connector of the guide home position sensor (PI3S) is faulty. 0002 The connector of the paper pushing plate home position sensor is identified as being disconnected. The connector of the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14S) is faulty. 0003 The connector of the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor is identified as being disconnected. The connector of the paper pushing plate leading edge sensor (PI15S) is faulty. E5F9 There is an error in the saddle switch. 0001 With any of the following sensor is identifying its Check the inlet cover switch (MS1S)/front cover switch (MS2S)/delivery cover switch respective cover a being closed, the inlet cover switch is (MS3S). identified as being open for 1 sec or more after the start of the initial rotation of the machine or the start of printing: - inlet cover sensor (PI9S) - front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S) - delivery cover sensor (PI3S) Or, the front cover switch (MS2S) or the delivery cover switch (MS3S) is open. The inlet cover switch (MS1S), front cover switch (MS2S), or delivery cover switch (MS3S) is faulty. 0002 With any of the following sensor is identifying its Check the front cover switch (MS2S)/delivery cover switch (MS3S). respective cover as being closed, the front cove switch is identified as being open for 1 sec or more after the start of the initial rotation of the machine or the start of printing: - inlet cover sensor (PI9S) - front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S) - delivery cove sensor (PI3S) The front cove switch (MS2S) or the delivery cover switch (MS3S) is faulty. Check the connectors of the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor (PI5S).
Check the connectors of the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor (PI5S).
16-32
Chapter 16
0003 With any of the following sensors identifying its respective Check the delivery cover switch (MS3S). cover as being closed, the delivery cover switch is identified as being open for 1 sec or more after the start of the initial rotation of the machine or the start of printing: - inlet cover sensor (PI9S) - front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S) - delivery cover sensor (PI3S) - delivery cover switch (MS3S) E602 E604 There is a hard disk error. There is a shortage of image memory (SDRAM). 0000 The amount of memory required by the model in question Set it to the size of memory suited to the model in question. is not recognized. E609 0008 0009 E610 E609 (Samsung HDD-related error code) The HDD does not increase to a specific temperature level Replace the HDD. within a specific time when the power is turned on. The HDD does not increase to a specific temperature level Turn off and then on the power. in relation to a sleep state. If the return operation fails, replace the HDD. HDD encryption key fault 0001 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error). The encryption board is missing. 0002 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error). The requirements for the memory configuration are not fully met. 0101 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key (initialization error). An attempt to initialize the key storage area has failed. 0102 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key (initialization error). An attempt to initialize the encryption area has failed. 0201 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. An error exists in the encryption processing area. 0202 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. An error exists in the encryption processing area. Ask the user to check the configuration of the hardware.
Ask the user to check the configuration of the hardware.
Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware.
Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware.
Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware.
0301 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption key Turn off and on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware. error) An attempt to create an encryption key has failed. 0302 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption key Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware error) (SRAM). The error resets the data on the HDD. A fault has been detected in the encryption key. 0303 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption key Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware error) (SRAM). The error resets the data on the HDD. A fault has been detected in the encryption key. 0401 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption processing error) An error has been detected in the course of decoding. 0402 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption processing error) An error has been detected in the course of decoding. E674 There is an error in the fax board. 0001 The fax board is detected, but communication is not possible. E677 There is an external controller error. 0003 An error has been detected by a check on the configuration Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on the main power. when the external controller is being started up. If the machine fails to start up, re-install the system software of the external controller. 0010 A controller for a non-Canon machine is connected. Turn off the main power, and check the controller is an appropriate type, and check the cable; then turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, re-install the system software of the external controller. Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to start up, re-install the system software of the external controller. Turn off the main power, and check the fax board and the main controller PCB; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, replaced the fax board or the main controller PCB. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware (encryption board). Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware (encryption board).
0080 There is an error in the communication with the printer after the external controller has started up normally. E710 There is an error in IPC initialization. 0001 The machine fails to become ready within 3 sec after the IPC chip has started up. E711 There is an IPC communication error.
Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on the main power.
0002 An error has been detected 4 times or more within 1.5 sec Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on the main power. after the communication has been interrupted between the If the machine fails to reset, check the connector between the finisher and the copier for finisher and the printer, and the machine does not reset. poor contact; as necessary, replace the finisher controller/DC controller. E713 There is a finisher communication error.
16-33
Chapter 16
0001 There is an error in the IC used for communication by the Turn off the main power switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the sorter. finisher controller PCB, and check the 24V system fuse: then, turn on the main power switch. If the machine does not reset, replace the DC controller PCB/finisher controller PCB. E717 There is an error in the communication with the NE controller. 0001 The NE controller that was connected before the power is Check the cable, and reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. turned off is not recognized after the power is turned on. 0002 An IPC open circuit or an IPC communication error is not Check the cable, and reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. reset. E719 error in communication with coin vendor/card reader 0001 The coin vendor that is connected before the power is turned off is not recognized when the paper is turned on. Check the cable, and reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0002 - The IPC cable to the coin vendor is broken and the IPC Check the cable; thereafter, reset by making the following selections: communication cannot be recovered. COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERROR. - There is an open circuit in the pickup delivery signal line. - An improper connection is detected (short circuit between Tx and Rx of IPC). 0011 The card reader that is connected before the power is turned Check the cable, and reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. off is not recognized when the paper is turned on. 0012 There is an IPC cable open circuit or an IPC communication error in relation to the card reader that cannot be reset. E730 There is a PDL error. 1001 At the start of a job, an initialization error has occurred. There is a fault in the PDL software. 100A A system error (e.g., failed initialization) has occurred during job processing. The PDL software has a fault. Perform PDL resetting, or turn off and then on the main power. Perform PDL resetting, or turn off and then on the main power. Check the cable, and reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
100B At start-up, a mismatch occurs between the version number Perform PDL resetting, or turn off and then on the main power. indicated in the master font management file of / If the machine fails to reset, re-install the font file or fully format and re-install the BOOTDEV and the bootable version. system software. There is no master font management file in /BOOTDEV. There is an error in the PDL master font. 9004 There is an error in the PAI communication with the external controller. There is an OPEN/IF communication error. 9005 There is an error it the connection of the video cable connected to the external controller. Turn off the main power, and check the open I/F board and the cable; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, replace the external controller, open I/F PCB, or the main controller PCB. Turn off the main power, and check the open I/F board and the cable; then turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, replace the eternal controller, open I/F PCB, or main controller PCB.
A006 PDL does not response, subootable is out of order or does Perform PDL resetting, or turn off the main power, and check the connector of the UFR not exist. board; then, turn on the main power. There is a PDL communication error. If the machine fails to reset, re-install the firmware or replace the main control PCB. A007 At time of start-up, a mismatch occurs between the version Perform PDL resetting, or turn off and then on the main power. of the machine control software and the version of the PDL If the machine fails to reset, fully format and re-install the system software. control software. The PDL version is wrong. B013 The font data is found to be damaged at start-up. PDL E731 There is a UFR board error. 3000 There is a UFR board error. At start-up, the UFR board is not recognized. 3001 At start-up, initialization of the UFR fails. Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the UFR board; then, turn on the main power. If the machine does not reset, replace the UFR board or the main controller PCB. Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the UFR board; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to ret, replace the UFR board or the main control PCB. There is an error in the built-in font. If the error is not reset when the main power has been turned off and then on, perform full system formatting and installation sessions.
3002 Initialization of Rambus fails. 3015 While a job is being processed, there is no video data in the Turn off and then on the main power. chip of the main controller PCB (main) although the If the machine fails to start up, replace the main controller PCB. software is operating without a problem. E732 There is an error in reader communication. 0001 There is an error in reader communication. 9999 Although a printer model, the machine is identified as a reader unit at start-up. (A copier model is started up as a printer model when the RAM is initialized.) E733 There is a printer communication error. 0000 There is a printer communication error. At start-up, the printer is not detected. 0001 There is a DDI-P communication error. Turn off the main power, and check the connectors to the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB, and check the power supply of the printer; then, turn on the main power. Turn off the main power, and check the connectors to the DC control PCB and the main controller PCB, and check the power supply of the printer; then, turn on the main power. Turn off the main power, and check the connectors to the reader, and check the power supply of the reader; then, turn on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
16-34
Chapter 16
Code E740 Cause/Particulars of detection There is an Ethernet board error. 0002 At time of start-up, the MAC address is found to be illegal. Turn off the main power, and replace the NIC; then, turn on the main power. A non-Canon MAC address is detected. E743 There is a DDI communication error. 0000 There is an SCI error. The reception data is faulty. A reception time-out condition has occurred. An SEQ timeout error has occurred. An SEQ time-out error has occurred. E744 There is a language file/boot ROM error. 0001 The version of the language file on the HDD is different from the version of bootable. 0002 The size of the language file on the HDD is too large. Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the Service Support Tool. Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the Service Support Tool. Disconnect and connect the DDI-S cable connector; then, as necessary, replace the reader controller PCB or the main controller PCB. Remarks
0003 There is no language to use in Config.txt on the HDD. Or, Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the Service none of the languages on the HDD is appropriate for use. Support Tool. A switchover cannot be made to a language file on the HDD. 0004 A switchover cannot be made to a language file on the HDD. 1000 There is a boot ROM project error. The installed boot ROM is of the wrong type. 3000 There is a mismatch in respect of the version of the boot ROM module. The installed boot ROM dose not permit normal start-up operation. E745 There is a TokenRing error. 0001 When the TokeRing driver is initialized, the attempt in PCI When the TokeRing driver is initialized, the attempt in PCI has failed. has failed. 0002 When the TokeRing driver is being initialized, the MAC address is found to be faulty. Turn off the main power switch; as necessary, replace the TokenRing board, and turn on the main power. Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the Service Support Tool. Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the Service Support Tool. Turn off the main power, and replace the boot ROM with one of the correct type; then, turn on the main power. Upgrade the boot ROM, or replace it.
0003 While the TokeRing driver is being initialized, board Turn off the main power; as necessary, replace the TokenRing board, and turn on the information cannot be obtained, or the settings are wrong. main power. The board information cannot be obtained. 0004 When starting up the TokenRing driver, a connection error Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the cable, and check the power occurs. supply of MAU; then, turn on the main power. E746 The accessories board is of the wrong type. 0003 At time of start-up, the UFR board is found to be of the wrong type. (A query is made to find out if the type is correct with reference to the engine ID.) Replace it with a UFR board of the correct type.
0004 At time of start-up, the scanner board is found to be of the Replace it with a scanner board of the correct type. wrong type. (A query is made to find out if the type is correct with reference to the engine ID.) E747 There is an error in the ASIC for image processing or in the ASIC for memory control/communication control. --- There is an error in IC1015 (ASIC for image processing) or Turn off the main power, and check the main controller PCB; then, turn on the main in IC1012 (for memory control/communication control) on controller PCB. the main controller PCB. (e.g., image data transfer error) E748 CL2 board-dependent board error 4000 A packet timeout condition has occurred in the G-chip loopback. 4020 An abnormal board has been detected. (TBD) 4021 The /SERROR signal of PCI has been detected. 4030 An error has occurred as a result of a check on access to BARSAC. 4031 BARSAC is identified as being locked. 4040 An error has occurred in the course of I2C write operation. 4041 An error has occurred during access to FRAM. 1. Disconnect and then connect the counter board. 2. Replace the counter board. 3. Replace the main controller PCB. The size is not 512 MB or more and 1.5 GB or less. 1. Disconnect and then connect DDR. 2. Replace DDR. 3. Replace the main board. 1. Replace the LAN board. 2. Replace the main controller PCB. 1. Disconnect and then connect 4 to 5 G-chip boards several times. 2. Replace the G-chip board. 3. Replace the main controller PCB. Remove the invalid board. Disconnect and then connect the PCI board. If the fault persists, replace it or the main controller PCB. Replace the main controller PCB. Replace the main controller PCB. Replace the LAN-BAR board.
4042 A DDR-SDRAM size error has occurred.
4043 A MAC address read error has occurred.
16-35
Chapter 16
Code Cause/Particulars of detection 4044 An ECOROM access error has occurred. Remarks 1. Disconnect and then connect ECOROM. 2. Replace ECOROM. 3. Replace the main controller PCB. 1. Disconnect and then connect SRAM/RTC board. 2. Replace the SRAM/RTC board. 3. Replace the main controller PCB. 1. Replace the LAN board. 2. Replace the main controller PCB. The RTCRAM board has a short-circuit, or the battery is exhausted. 1. If the error occurs no more than once in the course of disconnection and connection, leave it unattended. 2. If it occurs multiple times, replace the SRAM/RTC board. Replace the main controller PCB. 1. Replace the LAN/USB board. 2. Replace the main controller PCB. 1. Replace the LAN/USB board. 2. Replace the main controller PCB. Replace the main controller PCB.
4045 An RTC access error has occurred.
4050 An error has occurred during a check on access to the LANC board. 4150 The battery has been identified as being exhausted. (condition resets after error output)
4160 An access error has occurred. 4170 An access error has occurred. 4180 An access error has occurred. 4190 An access error has occurred.
4220 The nature of SPD of the RAM (slot 0) is illegal, or cannot 1. Disconnect and connect DDR-SDRAM of the slot in question. be read. 2. Replace DDR-SDRAM of the slot in question. 4221 The nature of SPD of the RAM (slot 1) is illegal, or cannot 1. Disconnect and then connect DDR-SDRAM of the slot in question. be read. 2. Replace DDR-SDRAM of the slot in question. 4230 An access error has occurred. 4260 A write error has occurred in the course of upgrading the boot ROM. 4310 A board that is older than the main4 board has been detected. 4901 A drop in 3.3 V (for emergency use) has been detected in the course of operation. 4910 A board not compatible with the machine has been detected. E749 Replace the main controller PCB. The boot ROM is damaged. Replace it with a service part. Use a board more recent than the main4 board, or provide retrofit work. Replace the power supply, and then replace the main controller PCB. Replace the main controller PCB.
Reboot instruction initiated by change in PDL configuration 0001 A change has occurred that calls for turning off and then on Turn off and then on the power. the power.
E800 0001
The interlock 24V mechanism of the fixing unit is identified as being off. With the door closed, the interlock 24V mechanism remains off for 500 msec. Turn off the main switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB, check the fixing unit interlock, and check the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the interlock main switch. There is any of the various types of fan errors. 0004 There is an error in the controller cooling fan. 0007 There is an error in the power supply cooling fan. Turn off the main switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch. Turn off the main switch, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch.
E804
E805
The fixing heat exhaust fan is identified as having stopped or having an error. 0003 There is an error in the fixing heat exhaust fan. Turn off the main power, and check the supply of power to the fan; then, as necessary, replace the fan, and turn on the main power.
E820
There is an error in the process unit cooling fan. 0002 There is an error in the process unit fan. Turn off the main switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch.
E824
There is an error in the primary charging suction/primary charging exhaust fan. 0000 There is an error in the primary charging suction mechanism. 0001 There is an error in the primary exhaust fan. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch. Turn off the main switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and 2V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch.
1. E602 in Detail If the machine indicates 'E602-xxyy', take the appropriate action according to the instructions indicated by the detail code.
If 'E602-xxyy' is indicated, be sure always to turn off and then on the main power (so that auto recovery sequence is performed).
00
HDD full
01
The machine cannot recognize the HDD. The machine cannot find BOOTDEV at time of start-up.
16-36
Chapter 16
Remedy: Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the 2 cables from the HDD (power, SIDE); then, turn on the main power. At that time, check if the HDD rotates and power is supplied.
NG
02
The machine cannot find the system software or the main controller (main PCB) in BOOTDEV.
Remedy:
E
03
NG
The machine detects a faulty sector while it is reading data from BOOTDEV.
Remedy:
H
06
NG
NG
The machine cannot find the system software for the main controller (sub) CPU in BOOTDEV. Remedy:
E
07
NG
The machine cannot find appropriate ICCProfile in BOOTDEV/PDLDEV. Remedy:
NG
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 FF
DOSDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 BOOTDEV DOSDEV5 IMPOSSIBLE TO SPECIFY
01, 02
There is a read error or a file system error at time of start-up.
Remedy:
NG
NG
- if xxyy = 0701, 0702, Remedy: Ask the user to collect address book data, transfer settings, and user mode data using the remote UI.
NG
NG
- if xxyy = 0801, 0802, Remedy:
NG
NG
- if xxyy = FF01, FF02,
16-37
Chapter 16
Remedy:
A
03
NG
NG
There is an HDD contact fault or an opening system error. Remedy: Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the 2 cables (power, IDE) from the HDD; then, turn on the main power. At that time, check if the HDD is rotating and power is supplied.
NG
NG
11, 21
There is an HDD contact faulty. Remedy: Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the 2 cables (power, IDE) from the HDD; then, turn on the main power. At that time, check to see if the HDD rotates and power is supplied.
NG
13, 25
There is a read error. Remedy:
NG
NG
- if xxyy = 0713, 0725, Remedy:
NG
NG
- if xxyy= 0813, 0825, Remedy:
NG
NG
10, 12, 14, There is a system error or a packet data error. 22, 23, 24 Remedy:
E
A:
NG
1) Set '0' to the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE. 2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK*. 3) When the execution is over, turn off and then on the main power. B: 1) While referring to "Formatting the HDD" enter the appropriate CHK-TYPE for the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM. 2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR. 3) When execution is over, turn off and then on the main power. C: 1) ** Start up the machine in normal mode (i.e., by turning on the main power while pressing the 1 and 7 keys); then, make the following selections, and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD. 2) Perform DOSDEV4 using the Service Support Tool. 3) When the execution is over, turn off and then on the main power. D: 1) Replace the main controller (main) board. 2) Move the image memory (SDRAM) and the boot ROM from the old board to the new board. E: 1) ** Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., by turning on the main power while pressing the 2 and 8 keys). 2) Perform HDD formatting (ALL) and download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI) using the Service Support Tool. 3) When the execution is over, turn off and then on the main power. F: 1) ** Replace the HDD, and start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., by turning on the main power while pressing the 2 and 8 keys). 2) Perform HDD formatting (ALL) and download the system software (SYSTEM, LANG, RUI) using the Service Support Tool.
16-38
Chapter 16 3) When the execution is over, turn off and then on the main power. G: 1) Set '1' to the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE. 2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CLEAR. 3) When the execution is over, turn off and then on the main power. H: 1) Turn off the main power, and turn on the power while pressing the 1 and 9 keys so that the machine will automatically start its recovery program* and turns its control panel solid black. 2) When the execution is over (i.e., when the screen is solid white), turn off and then on the main power.
If the machine does not start its recovery program in response to the foregoing operation, go to E. I: 1) By referring to "Formattingthe HDD," enter the appropriate CHK-TYPE in the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM. 2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key. 3) When the execution is over, turn off and then on the main power. J: 1) Enter '4 to the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE. 2) Make the following selections, and press the OK key: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK (1 to 5 min). 3) When the execution is over, turn off and then on the main power. * Takes about 30 to 50 min. ** As necessary, ask the user to collect the address book data, transfer settings, and user mode data before starting the work.
T-16-9 Formatting the HDD Partition DOSDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV CHK-TYPE 1 1 1 1 2 3 PDL spool PDL-related file (front, registration form, ICCProfile) Typical data that will be deleted all that relate to images (i.e., reservation, box, fax) mode memory, routine task button
DOSDEV4 BOOTDEV DOSDEV5 NOT TO SPECIFY
4 4 5 0
user data (address book, transfer settings); system software

0011-4648
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C

T-16-10 code E000 Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks
At power-on, the rise in the temperature of the fixing assembly is not high enough. The main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4) has an open circuit or poor contact. The AC drive PCB or the DC controller PCB is faulty. 0010 After power-on, the temperature does not reach 50 deg C within 300 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0011 The temperature reaches 50 deg C, but does not reach 80 deg C within 300 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal sec. switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0012 The temperature reaches 80 deg C, but does not reach 110 deg C within 300 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal sec. switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0013 The temperature reaches 110 deg C, but does not reach 140 deg C within 300 sec. 0014 The temperature reaches 140 deg C, but does not reach 170 deg C within 300 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0015 The temperature reaches 170 deg c, but does not reach 200 deg C within 300 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal sec. switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0020 After power-on, the temperature does not reach 50 deg C within 180 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
16-39
Chapter 16
0021 The temperature reaches 50 deg C, but does not reach 80 deg C within 180 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal sec. switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0022 The temperature reaches 80 deg C, but does not reach 110 deg C within 180 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal sec. switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0023 The temperature reaches 110 deg C, but doest not reach 140 deg C within 180 sec. 0024 The temperature reaches 140 deg C, but does not reach 170 deg C within 180 sec. 0025 The temperature reaches 170 deg C, but does not reach 200 deg C within 180 sec. If the outside heating roller is in contact, within 400 sec. 0026 The temperature reaches 200 deg C, but does not reach 230 deg C within 180 sec. If the outside heating roller is in contact, within 400 sec. 0030 After power-on, the temperature does not reach 50 deg C within 420 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0031 The temperature reaches 50 deg C, but does not reach 80 C deg in 420 sec. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0032 The temperature reaches 80 deg C, but does not reach 110 deg C within 420 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal sec. switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0033 The temperature reaches 110 deg C, but does not reach 140 deg C within 420 sec. 0034 The temperature reaches 140 deg C, but does not reach 170 deg C within 420 sec. E001 Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check for an open circuit and poor contact in the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
The rise in the temperature of the fixing assembly is excessive. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the following: main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), sub thermistor (THM4, THM5, THM6), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4). The AC driver PCB or the DC controller PCB is faulty. 0001 The rise in the temperature of the fixing roller is excessive. Check the main thermistor, sub thermistor, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor, sub thermistor, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor, sub thermistor, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0002 The rise in the temperature of the outside heating roller is excessive.
0003 The rise in the temperature of the pressure roller is excessive.
00FF When the cause (Detailed code) cannot be found in the DC controller PCB After releasing the error with the procedure of input-port as DC controller PCB detects instantly an abnormal signal from COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR, the thermistor. 1. Turn off the switch of control panel. 2. Turn off the switch of main power. 3. Turn on the switch of main power. a. When the machine returns, Check the interconnection between the DC controller PCB and the thermistor. b. When the machine does not return, Follow the instruction the error (Detailed) code shows on the control panel. E002 The rise in the temperature of the fixing assembly is not enough. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4). The AC driver PCB or the DC controller PCB has a fault. 0010 The temperature of the fixing roller reaches 80 deg C, but drops below 50 Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit deg C. and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0020 The temperature of the outside heating roller reaches 80 deg C, but drops below 50 deg C. Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0030 The temperature of the pressure roller reaches 80 deg C, but drops below 50 Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit deg C. and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. E003 After standby, the drop in the temperature of the fixing assembly is excessive. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3), thermal switch (TP1, TP2, TP3), or heater (H1, H2, H3, H4). The AC driver PCB or the DC controller PCB has a fault. 0041 During standby, the temperature of the fixing roller drops below 150 deg C. Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0042 During standby, the temperature of the outside heating roller drops below 190 dg C. Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0043 During standby, the temperature of the pressure roller drops below 120 deg Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit C. and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
16-40
Chapter 16
0051 During copying, the temperature of the fixing roller drops below 150 deg C. Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0052 During copying, the temperature of the outside heating roller drops below Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit 190 deg C. and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0053 During copying, the temperature of the pressure roller drops below 60 deg Check the main thermistor, thermal switch, and heater for an open circuit C. and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. E004 There is an error in the fixing assembly protection circuit. There is an open circuit or poor contact in the main thermistor (THM1, THM2, THM3) or sub thermistor (TH4, THM5, THM6). The AC driver PCB or the DC controller PCB has a fault. 0001 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater. There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater. 0002 There is an SSR error in the fixing sub heater. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0003 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater or the fixing sub heater. 0004 There is an SSR error in the fixing main heater.
0005 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater or the fixing main Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and heater. poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0006 There is an SSR error in the fixing sub heater or the fixing main heater. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0007 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater, fixing sub heater, Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and or fixing main heater. poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0008 There is an SSR error in the pressure heater. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0009 There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater or the contact heater. 000A There is an SSR error in the fixing sub heater or the contact heater.
000B There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater, fixing sub heater, Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and or contact heater. poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 000C There is an error in the fixing main heater or the contact heater. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
000D There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater, fixing main heater, Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and or contact heater. poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 000E There is an error in the fixing sub heater, fixing main heater, or contact heater. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
000F There is an SSR error in the outside heating roller heater, fixing sub heater, Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and fixing main heater, or contact heater. poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0010 The fixing roller thermistor has an open circuit. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for an open circuit and poor contact; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0020 The outside heating roller thermistor has an open circuit.
0030 The pressure roller thermistor has an open circuit.
E005
There is an error in the take-up mechanism of the web. 0000 The web of the fixing assembly has been fully taken up. Reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. If you have After the web sensor has detected an off state, the count has exceeded 3000. replaced the web, reset the reading in the following, and turn off and then The web length sensor (PS20) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. on the power: COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FIX-WEB. 0010 The drive solenoid of the fixing assembly is not connected. Check the drive solenoid of the fixing web for disconnection; then, reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the connector of the drive solenoid of the fixing web; then, turn off and then on the main power. When you have replaced the fixing roller, reset in service mode, and turn off and then on the main power: COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FX-UPRL.
E006
The fixing assembly has a comparison error. 0001 The fixing drawer has been identified as being disconnected.
E008
There is an error in relation to the life of the fixing assembly. 0001 The counter reading for the fixing roller has exceeded a specific count.
16-41
Chapter 16
code E009 00FF E012 Cause/Particulars of detection Remarks
There is an outside heating roller shift error. The outside heating roller shift motor (M22) is faulty. The outside heating roller HP sensor (PS21) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The outside heating roller remains in contact with the fixing roller. There is an error in the drum/ITB motor. 0001 After motor start-up, a lock state is not identified for 1 sec or more. Check the area around the photosensitive drum and the intermediate transfer belt; then, turn off and then on the main power. Check the amount of waste toner; then, turn off and then on the main power. Check the outside heating roller shift motor and the fixing motor; then, turn off and then on the main power.
E013
There is clogging by waste toner. 0001 There is a waste toner full error. the soft counter reading is 250000 or higher.
0002 There is a waste toner feedscrew error. Check the developing motor; then, turn off and then on the main power. The output of the waste toner lock detecting switch (SW14) is '1' for more than 1 sec. E014 There is a fixing motor error. 0001 After motor start-up, a lock state is not identified for 1 sec or more. E020 Check the fixing motor (fixing assembly); then, turn off and then on the main power.
There is an ATR error. xx=01 for Y; xx=02 for M; xx=03 for C; xx=04 for without color distinction xx10 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Sig Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer value is lower than 62. belt. The ATR sensor is damage or has an open circuit. The connector may have poor contact. The intermediate transfer belt may be soiled. xx11 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Ref Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer value is lower than 62. belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector may have poor contact. The intermediate transfer belt may be soiled> xx12 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Sig Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer value is 960 or higher. belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The opening/closing of the shutter is faulty. The intermediate transfer belt is soiled. xx13 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Ref Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer value is 960 or higher. belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The intermediate transfer belt is soiled. xx81 When the background (intermediate transfer belt) is read during patch Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer detection, the P_base_adj value is lower than 255. belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The ITB cleaner is faulty. xx90 The result (Sig D) of computation based on the reading of the patch during Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer patch detection (analog)) is lower than 16. belt. xx91 The result (Sig D) of computation based on the reading of the patch during Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer patch detection (analog) is 1008 or higher. belt. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The primary transfer pressure is faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. xx92 The value delta D obtained from the result (Sig D) of computation based on Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer belt. the reading of the patch during patch detection is -5.0% or more 3 times continuously. The patch sensor may be damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The primary transfer engagement is faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. The amount of supply is low. xx93 The value delta D obtained from the result (Sig D) of computation based on Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer the reading of the patch during patch detection is +5.0% or lower 3 times belt. continuously. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The primary transfer pressure is faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. The amount of supply is low. xxA0 For ATR control, the Sig value is lower than 62. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor belt. contact. xxA1 For ATR control, the Ref value is lower than 62. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor belt. contact. xxA2 For ATR control, the Sig value is 960 or higher. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor belt. contact. The opening/closing of the shutter is faulty. xxA3 For ATR control, the Ref value is 960 or higher. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor belt. contact. xxA8 The T/D ratio identified for ATR control has exceeded the upper limit Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer (12%) 3 times continuously. belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The amount of supply is too high. xxA9 The T/D ratio identified for ATR control has exceeded the lower limit (3%) Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer 3 times continuously. belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The amount of supply is too low.
16-42
Chapter 16
xxC0 The variation among the 8 samplings of the light Sig value is 100 or higher. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor belt. contact. The stirring of toner is faulty. xxC1 The variation among the 8 samplings of the light Ref value is 100 or higher. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor belt. contact. xxC2 The variation among the 8 samplings of the patch Sig value is 400 or higher. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor belt. contact. The primary transfer engagement is faulty. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer xxD0 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the belt. average of the light Sig values is 200 or lower. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The amount of supply is low. xxD1 For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer average of the light Ref values is 462 or lower. belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. xxD2 Fore INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer average of the patch Sig values is 200 or lower. belt. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. the connector has poor contact. The primary transfer engagement is faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. xxD4 For INTI control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer average of the light Sig values is 800 or higher. belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The amount of supply is too high. xxD5 For INTI control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer average of the light Ref values is 562 or higher. belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. xxDA For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer variation among the 72 night Sig value samplings is 100 or more. belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. The stirring of toner is faulty. xxDB For INIT control (service mode INISET-*) at time of initial setup, the Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer variation among the 72 light Ref samplings is 100 or more. belt. The ATR sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. xxDC For INIT control (service mode INISET-*), the average of the patch Sig Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer values is 800 or higher. belt. The patch sensor is damaged or has an open circuit. The connector has poor contact. the primary transfer engagement if faulty. The mounting of the developing assembly is faulty. The amount of supply is too high. xxF1 The connector or the color toner supply clutch is not connected. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute ITB cleaning. xxFF There is no toner inside the Bk developing assembly. Turn off and then on the main power; then, execute the intermediate transfer - the toner is not supplied to the developing assembly correctly. belt. - the hopper stirring motor is not rotating normally. The hopper connector has poor contact. The black toner supply motor (M25) is faulty. The hopper stirring motor (M23) is faulty. The black toner level sensor is faulty. The DC controller is faulty. E021 There is an error in the rotation of the developing assembly. 0001 The developing rotary home position is not detected. Turn off and then on the main power. The motor rotates out of sync because of poor torque caused by any of the following: The developing rotary HP sensor is faulty; the wiring of the DC controller is faulty; there is an excess load on the developing assembly. 0002 The length of the flag detected during rotation is longer or shorter than the Turn off and then on the main power. designed flag. The motor rotates out of sync because of poor torque caused by any of the following: the developing rotary HP sensor is faulty; the wiring of the DC controller PCB is faulty; there is an excessive load on the developing assembly. E023 The developing motor (M3) does not rotate normally. 0001 After motor start-up, a lock state is not detected for 1 sec or more. E025 Turn off and then on the main power.
There is an over-current in the hopper stirring motor (M23)or the black toner supply motor (M25).
0001 There is an overcurrent in the hopper stirring motor (M23).
0002 There is an over-current in the black toner supply motor (M25).
0410 The connector of the black toner supply motor (M25) is identified as being Turn off and then on the main power. disconnected. E032 The NE connector counter does not operate. 0001 There is an open circuit in the line for the count pulse signal. E043 Turn off the main power, and check the cable for an open circuit; then, turn on the main power.
There is an error in the 3.5K paper deck pickup motor, causing an error signal.
16-43
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 0001 After motor start-up, a lock state is not detected for 1 sec or more. The mechanical load such as on the feeding system is excessive. E051 Remarks Turn off and then on the main power.
The horizontal registration home position is not detected within a specific period of time. The horizontal registration position is faulty (0003). 0001 The horizontal registration home position is not detected within a specific Turn off and then on the main power. period of time. 0002 The ON edge of the SUS plate is not detected during a search for home position. 0003 The logical motor position differs between before and after the detection operation. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
E061
At time of potential control, a specific level of potential is absent. Or, the limiter goes on. 0001 When forming an image, the potential is 10 V or less during initial rotation. Turn off and then on the main power. 0002 At time of potential control, the potential is 10 V or less during initial rotation. Turn off and then on the main power.
0003 While the grid bias is being adjusted, a level of potential higher than the grid Turn off and then on the main power. bias is sampled. 0005 The difference in potential between dark and light areas is less than 100 V. Turn off and then on the main power. 0007 During adjustment of EPC offset, the potential that is read is outside the +/ Turn off and then on the main power. -30 V range. 0008 During dark area potential adjustment, the sampling value is too low. 0010 The sampling of the light area potential is faulty. E070 Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
There is an error in the detection of the ITB home position. xx=01: ITB home position sensor B, xx=02: ITB home position sensor A; only at ITB 1/1 speed; XX=00: no distinction 00xx The home position of the intermediate transfer belt is not detected within a Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the ITB HP specific period of time . sensor; then, turn on the main power. The ITB HP sensor is faulty. 01xx The period of time between when the home position of the intermediate Turn off the main power, and check the drive of the intermediate transfer transfer belt is detected and the next home position is detected is longer than belt; then, turn on the main power. specified . The presence of a tear may have caused the sensor to wrongly identify it as indicating the home position. 02xx The period of time between when the home position of the intermediate Turn off the main power, and check the surface of the intermediate transfer transfer belt is detected and when the next home position is detected is belt for a tear; then, turn on the main power. shorter than specified . The intermediate transfer belt slips on the drive roller, causing a delay in the timing at which the home position is detected. 03xx The detection of the home position of the intermediate transfer belt has failed once. ITB home position sensor B and ITB home position sensor A must occur alternately; however, the same state has been detected continuously. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the ITB HP sensor; then turn on the main power.
E073
With the front door closed, the transfer drawer connector or the transfer frame drawer connector is not connected. 0001 The result of detecting the feed unit indicates the absence of the unit. Turn off and then on the main power.
E077
The home position of the secondary transfer roller (engagement) is not detected. 0001 The HP sensor does not go on within 5 sec after the start of a HP search. Turn off and then on the main power.
E078
The home position of the transfer belt cleaner unit (engagement) is not detected. 0001 The HP sensor does not turn on within 5 sec after the start of a HP search. Turn off and then on the main power.
E079
The home position of the outside heating roller is not detected. The outside heating roller home position sensor does not go off. 0001 The HP sensor does not turn on within 5 sec after the start of an HP search. Turn off and then on the main power. 0002 If there is an open circuit in the home position sensor of the outside heating Turn off and then on the main power. roller home position sensor, the state of the sensor will be identified as being ON. An error will be identified if the sensor fails to go off when it is at a point where it must normally go on and the outside heating roller shift motor is driven.
E100
The BD is not detected. 0001 The BD signal is not detected when the polygon scanner has been driven for Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V a specific period of time. system fuse; then, turn on the main power. 0002 The BD signal is not detected white the polygon scanner is rotating stably. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power.
E110
There is a scanner motor error. 0001 The FG signal is not detected within a specific period of time after the polygon scanner has been driven. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power.
0002 The FG signal is not detected while the polygon scanner is rotating stably. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. 0003 The FG signal is not detected while the polygon scanner is rotating stably. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. E197 There is an error in the communication with the fixing feed PCB.
16-44
Chapter 16
In the course of initializing communication between the DC controller and Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB wiring and the the fixing/feeding unit, as many as 10 communication errors occur 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. 0002 continuously. Following the end of initialization of the communication between the DC Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB wiring and the controller and the fixing/feeding unit, as many as 10 communication errors 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. 0003 occur continuously. At the start of drum initial multiple rotation, there is no signal indicating the Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB wiring and the start of 24V in the fixing assembly in the communication between the DC 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. controller and the fixing/feeding unit.
0004
E202
There is an HP error. 0001 An error is found during the forward trip of the HP search. The scanner HP sensor is faulty. The scanner motor is faulty. The reader controller is faulty. 0002 An error is found during the return trip of the HP search. The scanner HP sensor is faulty. The scanner motor is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty. Check the harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the faulty part. Check the harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the faulty part.
E225
The lamp has blown. 0001 The level of shading is lower than specified. Check the harness connector for connection. Check the scanning lamp (xenon), inverter, and reader controller PCB. Check the power supply harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the power supply. Check the power supply harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the power supply. Check the power supply harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the power supply. Check the power supply harness connector for connection; then, as necessary, replace the power supply. Turn off the main power, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. Turn off the main power, and check the SRAM board; then, as necessary, replace the SRAM board, and turn on the main power. Replace the reader controller PCB. Replace the reader controller PCB. Replace the reader controller PCB.
E227
There is a power supply (24V) error. 0001 At power-on, the 24V port is off. 0002 At the start of a job, the 24V port is off. 0003 At the end of a job, the 24V port is off. 0004 While a load is being driven, the 24V port is off.
E240
There is a DDI-P communication error. 0000 There is a DDI-P communication error (error in communication between master and slave 0).
E248
There is an error in the EEPROM. 0000 At time of start-up, a check error has occurred on the SRAM board. 0001 There is a power-on error. 0002 There is a write error. 0003 There is a wire/read error.
E315
codex error 000E An error has occurred in the course of software decoding.
E351
There is an error in the main controller PCB (sub). 0000 At start-up, there is an error in the communication between main controller Turn off the main power, and replace the main controller PCB (sub). PCB (sub) and the main controller PCB (main). If the result is not good, replace the main controller PCB (main), and turn on the main power.
E400
There is a DF communication error. 0001 There is a check sum error. 0002 There is a reception status error. 0003 There is a reception interrupt error. Disconnect and connect the harness connector; then, replace the reader controller PCB or the ADF DC controller. Disconnect and connect the harness connector; then, replace the reader controller PCB or the ADF DC controller. Disconnect and connect the harness connector; then, replace the reader controller PCB or the ADF DC controller. Check the harness; then, as necessary, replace the sensor and motor. Check the attaching of the parts around the cam. Check the harness; then, as necessary, replace the sensor and motor. Check the attaching of the parts around the cam. Replace the DF with one of an appropriate type.
E413
There is an error in the DF shift motor. 0001 The shift HP sensor is open. 0002 The shift HP sensor is closed.
E490
The DF is of the wrong model. 0001 The installed DF is not of the correct type.
E500
There is a finisher communication error. 0001 There is an error in data communication. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller, wiring of the finisher An error has been detected in terms of the number of errors or the duration PCB, and 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. of the error in the communication between copier and finisher.
E503
There is an error in the communication within the finisher (finisher R1/R2). 0002 There is a data communication error. finisher-to-saddle unit communication error 0003 finisher-to-punch unit communication error Check the connection between the saddle stitcher controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB. Check the connection between the Punch controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB.
E505
There is an error in the backup memory of the finisher (finer R1/R2).
16-45
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 0001 There is an error in the data stored in the backup memory. 0002 There is a data error in the punch assembly EEPROM. Remarks Turn off the main power, and check the DC control, wiring of the finisher PCB, and 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main power. Turn off the main power, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the puncher controller PCB: then, check the 24V system fuse, and turn back on the main power. 1) Check the trailing edge assist home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the trailing edge assist motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the trailing edge assist mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the trailing edge assist motor. Is the problem corrected?
E514
There is an error in the trailing edge assist motor (finisher R1/R2). 8001 The home position sensor does not go off when the trailing edge assist motor has been rotated for a specific period of time.
8002 The home position sensor does not go on when the trailing edge assist motor 1) Check the trailing edge assist home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? has been rotated for a specific period of time. 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the trailing edge assist motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the trailing edge assist mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the trailing edge assist motor. Is the problem corrected? E519 There is an error in the gear change motor (finisher R1/R2). 8001 The home position sensor does not go off within a specific period of time after the gear change motor has started to rotate. 1) Check the gear change home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the fisher controller PCB and the gear change motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the gear change mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the gear change motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the gear change home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the fisher controller PCB and the gear change motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the gear change mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the gear change motor. Is the problem corrected?
0002 The home position sensor does not go on within a specific period of time after the gear change motor has started to rotate.
E530
There is an error in front alignment (finisher R1/R2). 8001 Th alignment motor has started to rotate.e home position sensor does not go 1) Check the pre-aligning plate home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? off within a specific period of time after the front 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the prealigning plate motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the aligning plate. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the pre-aligning plate motor. Is the problem corrected? 8002 The home position sensor does not go on within a specific period of time after the front alignment motor has started to rotate. 1) Check the pre-aligning plate home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the prealigning plate motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the aligning plate. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the pre-aligning plate motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stapler. Is the wiring normal? 2) Try replacing the stapler. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stapler. Is the wiring normal? 2) Try replacing the stapler. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the stapler shift home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stapler shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the stapler shift base. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the stapler shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the stapler shift home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stapler shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the stapler shift base. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the stapler shift motor. Is the problem corrected?
E531
There is an error in stapling (finisher R1/R2). 0001 The home position sensor does not go off within a specific period of time after the stapler motor has started to rotate. 0002 The home position sensor does not go on within a specific period of time after the stapler motor has started to rotate.
E532
There is an error in the shift mechanism of the stapler. (finisher R1/R2) 8001 The home position sensor does not go off within a specific period of time after the stapler shift motor has started to rotate.
8002 The home position sensor does not go on within a specific period of time after the stapler shift motor has started to rotate.
E535
There is an error in the staple swing mechanism. (finisher R1/R2) 8001 The home position sensor does not go off even when the swing motor has rotated for a specific period of time. 1) Check the swing home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the writing between the finisher controller PCB and the swing motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the swing mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the swing motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the swing home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the writing between the finisher controller PCB and the swing motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the swing mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the swing motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the swing home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the writing between the finisher controller PCB and the swing motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the swing mechanism. Is there a fault? 4) Try replacing the swing motor. Is the problem corrected?
0003 There is an error in relation to an hazardous area..
E537
rear alignment error (Finisher-R1/R2)
16-46
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 8001 The home position sensor does not go off even when the swing motor has rotated for a specific period of time. Remarks 1) Check the post-aligning plate home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the postaligning plate motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the aligning plate. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the post-aligning plate motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the post-aligning plate home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the postaligning plate motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Check the path of the aligning plate. Is there a mechanical obstacle? 4) Try replacing the post-aligning plate motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 1 tray area sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between finisher controller PCB and the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the ascent/descent mechanism of the tray? 4) Try replacing the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 1 tray area sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between finisher controller PCB and the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the ascent/descent mechanism of the tray? 4) Try replacing the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 1 tray area sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between finisher controller PCB and the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the ascent/descent mechanism of the tray? 4) Try replacing the No. 1 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 2 tray sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finer controller PCB and the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the tray ascent/descent mechanism? 4) Try replacing the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 2 tray sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finer controller PCB and the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the tray ascent/descent mechanism? 4) Try replacing the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the No. 2 tray sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finer controller PCB and the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the tray ascent/descent mechanism? 4) Try replacing the No. 2 tray shift motor. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the shutter home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stack edging motor and between the finisher controller PCB and the shutter open/ close clutch. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the shutter mechanism? 4) Try replacing the stack edging motor or the shutter open/close clutch. Is the problem corrected? 1) Check the shutter home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? 2) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the stack edging motor and between the finisher controller PCB and the shutter open/ close clutch. Is the wiring normal? 3) Is there a fault in the shutter mechanism? 4) Try replacing the stack edging motor or the shutter open/close clutch. Is the problem corrected?
E540
upper tray ascent/descent error (Finisher-R1/R2) 8001 upper tray ascent/descent motor clock error
8002 area error
E542
lower tray ascent/descent error (Finisher-R1/R2) 8001 lower tray ascent/descent motor clock error
8002 area error
E584
shutter unit error (Finisher-R1/R2) 8001 The shutter open sensor does not go off (i.e., the shutter is not closed).
0002 The shutter open/closed sensor does not go on (i.e., the shutter does not open).
E590
There is an error in the punch motor. (punch unit) 8001 The punching home position sensor is not detected when the punch motor Check the punch home position sensor, horizontal registration motor, and has been driven for 200 msec. punch driver PCB; then, turn off and then on the main power. 8002 The puncher does not detect the punching home position after the motor has Check the punch home position sensor, horizontal registration motor, and stopped (initial operation). punch driver PCB; then, turn off and then on the main power.
E591
There is an error in the punch dust sensor. (punch unit) 8001 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage with emission of light. Turn off and then on the main power.
8002 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light.
E592
There is an error in the punch horizontal registration sensor. (punch unit) 8001 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage at time of light emission. (trailing edge sensor) 8002 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. (trailing edge sensor) 8003 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage with emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 1) 8004 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 1) Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
16-47
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 8005 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage with emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 2) 8006 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 2) 8007 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage it the presence of emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 3) 8008 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 3) 8009 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage with emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 4) 800A There is an error in the light-receiving voltage without emission of light. (horizontal registration sensor 4) E593 There is an error in the punch shift motor. (punch unit) 8001 The light-receiving voltage HP sensor does not go off at time of light emission. Turn off and then on the main power. Remarks Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power. Turn off and then on the main power.
8002 The light-receiving voltage HP sensor doest not go on without emission of Turn off and then on the main power. light. E5F0 There is an error in saddle paper positioning. 0001 The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn on when the Check the paper positioning plate motor (M4S) /paper positioning plate paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 1.33 sec. home position sensor (PI7S). The paper positioning plate motor (M4S) or the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S) is faulty. 0002 The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn off when the Check the paper positioning plate motor (M4S) /paper positioning plate paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 1 sec. home position sensor (PI7S). The paper positioning plate motor (M4S) or the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S) is faulty. E5F1 There is an error in saddle paper folding. 0001 The number of detection pulses of the paper folding motor clock sensor is Check the paper folding motor (M2S) /paper folding motor clock sensor lower than specified. (PI4S). The paper folding home position sensor or the paper folding motor clock sensor (P14S) is faulty. 0002 The state of the paper folding home position sensor does not change when Check the paper folding motor (M2S) /paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4S). the paper folding motor has been driven for 3 sec. The paper folding motor (M2S) or the paper folding motor clock sensor (P14S) is faulty. E5F2 There is an error in the saddle guide. 0001 The guide home position sensor does not turn on when the guide motor has Check the guide motor (M3S) /guide home position sensor (PI13S). been driven for 0.45 sec. The guide motor (M3S) or the guide home position sensor (PI3S) is faulty. 0002 The guide home position sensor doest not turn off when the guide motor has Check the guide motor (M3S) /guide home position sensor (PI13S). been driven for 1 sec. The guide motor (M3S) or the guide home position sensor (PI3S) is faulty. E5F3 There is an error in saddle alignment. 0001 The aligning plate home position sensors does not turn on when the Check the alignment motor (M5S) /aligning plate home position sensor alignment motor has been driven for 05. sec (during initialization, 1.67 sec). (PI5S). The alignment motor (M5S) or the aligning plate home position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. 0002 The alignment plate home position sensor does not turn off when the alignment motor has been driven for 1 sec. The alignment motor (M5S) for the alignment plate home position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. E5F4 There is an error in saddle rear sampling. 0001 The stitching home position sensor does not turn on when the stapler motor Check he stitching motor (rear; M6S) /stitching home position sensor (rear; (rear) is rotated in reverse for 0.5 sec or more. MS5S). The switch motor (rear, M65) or the stitching home position sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. 0002 The stitching home position sensor does not turn off when the switch motor Check he stitching motor (rear; M6S) /stitching home position sensor (rear; (rear) is reverse for 0.5 sec or more. MS5S). The switch motor (rear, M6S) or the stitching home position sensor (rear, MS5S) is faulty. E5F5 There is an error in saddle front stapling. 0001 The stitching home position sensor does not turn on when the switch motor Check the stitching motor (front; M7S) /stitching home position sensor (front) is rotated in reverse for 0.5 sec or more. (front; MS7S). The stitch motor (front, M7S) or the stitching home position sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. 0002 The stitching home position sensor does not turn off when the switch motor Check the stitching motor (front; M7S) /stitching home position sensor (front) is rotated in normal direction for 0.5. (front; MS7S). The stitch motor (front, M7S) or the switching home position sensor (front, MS7S) is faulty. E5F6 There is an error in saddle butting. 8001 The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn on when the paper pushing motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or more. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI4) is faulty. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI4) is faulty. Check the alignment motor (M5S) /aligning plate home position sensor (PI5S).
8002 The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn off when paper The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate home pushing plate motor has been driven for 80 msec or more. position sensor (PI4S) is faulty. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI4S) is faulty.
16-48
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 8003 The number of detection pulses of the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor drops below a specific number. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1S) is faulty. 8004 The paper pushing plate sensor does not turn off when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 80 msec or more. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor (PI15S) is faulty. Remarks The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1S) is faulty.
The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor (PI15S) is faulty.
8005 The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor does not turn on when The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate leading the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or more. edge position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. The paper pushing plate motor (M8S) or the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. E5F8 There is an error in the saddle connector. 0001 The connector of the guide home position sensor is identified as being disconnected. The connector of the guide home position sensor (PI3S) is faulty. Check the connectors of the guide home position sensor (PI13S). Check the connectors of the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI4S).
0002 The connector of the paper pushing plate home position sensor is identified Check the connectors of the paper pushing plate leading edge position as being disconnected. sensor (PI5S). The connector of the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14S) is faulty. 0003 The connector of the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor is identified as being disconnected. The connector of the paper pushing plate leading edge sensor (PI15S) is faulty. E5F9 There is an error in the saddle switch. 0001 With any of the following sensor is identifying its respective cover a being Check the inlet cover switch (MS1S)/front cover switch (MS2S)/delivery closed, the inlet cover switch is identified as being open for 1 sec or more cover switch (MS3S). after the start of the initial rotation of the machine or the start of printing: - inlet cover sensor (PI9S) - front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S) - delivery cover sensor (PI3S) Or, the front cover switch (MS2S) or the delivery cover switch (MS3S) is open. The inlet cover switch (MS1S), front cover switch (MS2S), or delivery cover switch (MS3S) is faulty. 0002 With any of the following sensor is identifying its respective cover as being Check the front cover switch (MS2S)/delivery cover switch (MS3S). closed, the front cove switch is identified as being open for 1 sec or more after the start of the initial rotation of the machine or the start of printing: - inlet cover sensor (PI9S) - front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S) - delivery cove sensor (PI3S) The front cove switch (MS2S) or the delivery cover switch (MS3S) is faulty. 0003 With any of the following sensors identifying its respective cover as being Check the delivery cover switch (MS3S). closed, the delivery cover switch is identified as being open for 1 sec or more after the start of the initial rotation of the machine or the start of printing: - inlet cover sensor (PI9S) - front cover open/closed sensor (PI2S) - delivery cover sensor (PI3S) - delivery cover switch (MS3S) E602 E604 There is a hard disk error. There is a shortage of image memory (SDRAM). 0000 The amount of memory required by the model in question is not recognized. Set it to the size of memory suited to the model in question. E609 E609 (Samsung HDD-related error code) The HDD does not increase to a specific temperature level within a specific Replace the HDD. 0008 time when the power is turned on. 0009 E610 The HDD does not increase to a specific temperature level in relation to a sleep state. HDD encryption key fault 0001 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error). The encryption board is missing. 0002 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error). The requirements for the memory configuration are not fully met. 0101 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key (initialization error). An attempt to initialize the key storage area has failed. 0102 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key (initialization error). An attempt to initialize the encryption area has failed. 0201 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. An error exists in the encryption processing area. 0202 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. An error exists in the encryption processing area. 0301 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption key error) An attempt to create an encryption key has failed. 0302 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption key error) A fault has been detected in the encryption key. 0303 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption key error) A fault has been detected in the encryption key. Ask the user to check the configuration of the hardware. Ask the user to check the configuration of the hardware. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware. Turn off and on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware (SRAM). The error resets the data on the HDD. Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware (SRAM). The error resets the data on the HDD. Turn off and then on the power. If the return operation fails, replace the HDD. Check the connectors of the paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor (PI5S).
16-49
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 0401 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption processing error) An error has been detected in the course of decoding. 0402 A fault exists in the HDD encryption key. (encryption processing error) An error has been detected in the course of decoding. E674 There is an error in the fax board. 0001 The fax board is detected, but communication is not possible. Turn off the main power, and check the fax board and the main controller PCB; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, replaced the fax board or the main controller PCB. Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to start up, re-install the system software of the external controller. Turn off the main power, and check the controller is an appropriate type, and check the cable; then turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, re-install the system software of the external controller. Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to start up, re-install the system software of the external controller. Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on the main power. Remarks Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware (encryption board). Turn off and then on the power. If the remedy fails, suspect a fault in the hardware (encryption board).
E677
There is an external controller error. 0003 An error has been detected by a check on the configuration when the external controller is being started up. 0010 A controller for a non-Canon machine is connected.
0080 There is an error in the communication with the printer after the external controller has started up normally. E710 There is an error in IPC initialization. 0001 The machine fails to become ready within 3 sec after the IPC chip has started up. E711 There is an IPC communication error. 0002 An error has been detected 4 times or more within 1.5 sec after the communication has been interrupted between the finisher and the printer, and the machine does not reset. E713 There is a finisher communication error. 0001 There is an error in the IC used for communication by the sorter.
Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, check the connector between the finisher and the copier for poor contact; as necessary, replace the finisher controller/DC controller. Turn off the main power switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the finisher controller PCB, and check the 24V system fuse: then, turn on the main power switch. If the machine does not reset, replace the DC controller PCB/finisher controller PCB.
E717
There is an error in the communication with the NE controller. 0001 The NE controller that was connected before the power is turned off is not Check the cable, and reset in service mode: recognized after the power is turned on. COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. 0002 An IPC open circuit or an IPC communication error is not reset. Check the cable, and reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the cable, and reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. Check the cable; thereafter, reset by making the following selections: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERROR.
E719
error in communication with coin vendor/card reader 0001 The coin vendor that is connected before the power is turned off is not recognized when the paper is turned on. 0002 - The IPC cable to the coin vendor is broken and the IPC communication cannot be recovered. - There is an open circuit in the pickup delivery signal line. - An improper connection is detected (short circuit between Tx and Rx of IPC). 0011 The card reader that is connected before the power is turned off is not recognized when the paper is turned on.
Check the cable, and reset in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
0012 There is an IPC cable open circuit or an IPC communication error in relation Check the cable, and reset in service mode: to the card reader that cannot be reset. COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. E730 There is a PDL error. 1001 At the start of a job, an initialization error has occurred. There is a fault in the PDL software. 100A A system error (e.g., failed initialization) has occurred during job processing. The PDL software has a fault. Perform PDL resetting, or turn off and then on the main power. Perform PDL resetting, or turn off and then on the main power.
100B At start-up, a mismatch occurs between the version number indicated in the Perform PDL resetting, or turn off and then on the main power. master font management file of /BOOTDEV and the bootable version. If the machine fails to reset, re-install the font file or fully format and reThere is no master font management file in /BOOTDEV. install the system software. There is an error in the PDL master font. 9004 There is an error in the PAI communication with the external controller. There is an OPEN/IF communication error. Turn off the main power, and check the open I/F board and the cable; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, replace the external controller, open I/F PCB, or the main controller PCB. Turn off the main power, and check the open I/F board and the cable; then turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, replace the eternal controller, open I/F PCB, or main controller PCB. Perform PDL resetting, or turn off the main power, and check the connector of the UFR board; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, re-install the firmware or replace the main control PCB.
9005 There is an error it the connection of the video cable connected to the external controller.
A006 PDL does not response, subootable is out of order or does not exist. There is a PDL communication error.
A007 At time of start-up, a mismatch occurs between the version of the machine Perform PDL resetting, or turn off and then on the main power. control software and the version of the PDL control software. If the machine fails to reset, fully format and re-install the system software. The PDL version is wrong.
16-50
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection B013 The font data is found to be damaged at start-up. PDL E731 There is a UFR board error. 3000 There is a UFR board error. At start-up, the UFR board is not recognized. Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the UFR board; then, turn on the main power. If the machine does not reset, replace the UFR board or the main controller PCB. Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the UFR board; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to ret, replace the UFR board or the main control PCB. Remarks There is an error in the built-in font. If the error is not reset when the main power has been turned off and then on, perform full system formatting and installation sessions.
3001 At start-up, initialization of the UFR fails.
3002 Initialization of Rambus fails. 3015 While a job is being processed, there is no video data in the chip of the main Turn off and then on the main power. controller PCB (main) although the software is operating without a If the machine fails to start up, replace the main controller PCB. problem. E732 There is an error in reader communication. 0001 There is an error in reader communication. Turn off the main power, and check the connectors to the reader, and check the power supply of the reader; then, turn on the main power.
9999 Although a printer model, the machine is identified as a reader unit at start- Turn off and then on the main power. up. (A copier model is started up as a printer model when the RAM is initialized.) E733 There is a printer communication error. 0000 There is a printer communication error. At start-up, the printer is not detected. 0001 There is a DDI-P communication error. Turn off the main power, and check the connectors to the DC controller PCB and the main controller PCB, and check the power supply of the printer; then, turn on the main power. Turn off the main power, and check the connectors to the DC control PCB and the main controller PCB, and check the power supply of the printer; then, turn on the main power. Turn off the main power, and replace the NIC; then, turn on the main power.
E740
There is an Ethernet board error. 0002 At time of start-up, the MAC address is found to be illegal. A non-Canon MAC address is detected.
E743
There is a DDI communication error. 0000 There is an SCI error. The reception data is faulty. A reception time-out Disconnect and connect the DDI-S cable connector; then, as necessary, condition has occurred. An SEQ time-out error has occurred. An SEQ time- replace the reader controller PCB or the main controller PCB. out error has occurred.
E744
There is a language file/boot ROM error. 0001 The version of the language file on the HDD is different from the version of Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the bootable. Service Support Tool. 0002 The size of the language file on the HDD is too large. 0003 There is no language to use in Config.txt on the HDD. Or, none of the languages on the HDD is appropriate for use. A switchover cannot be made to a language file on the HDD. 0004 A switchover cannot be made to a language file on the HDD. 1000 There is a boot ROM project error. The installed boot ROM is of the wrong type. 3000 There is a mismatch in respect of the version of the boot ROM module. The installed boot ROM dose not permit normal start-up operation. Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the Service Support Tool. Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the Service Support Tool. Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the Service Support Tool. Download the appropriate language fields of the correct version using the Service Support Tool. Turn off the main power, and replace the boot ROM with one of the correct type; then, turn on the main power. Upgrade the boot ROM, or replace it.
E745
There is a TokenRing error. 0001 When the TokeRing driver is initialized, the attempt in PCI has failed. When the TokeRing driver is initialized, the attempt in PCI has failed.
0002 When the TokeRing driver is being initialized, the MAC address is found to Turn off the main power switch; as necessary, replace the TokenRing board, be faulty. and turn on the main power. 0003 While the TokeRing driver is being initialized, board information cannot be Turn off the main power; as necessary, replace the TokenRing board, and obtained, or the settings are wrong. turn on the main power. The board information cannot be obtained. 0004 When starting up the TokenRing driver, a connection error occurs. E746 The accessories board is of the wrong type. 0003 At time of start-up, the UFR board is found to be of the wrong type. (A query is made to find out if the type is correct with reference to the engine ID.) 0004 At time of start-up, the scanner board is found to be of the wrong type. (A query is made to find out if the type is correct with reference to the engine ID.) E747 ** Main controller PCB error Turn the main power off and turn it back on. Replace the main controller PCB (Main). 2000- An error occurs in the communication with the main controller PCB (Sub 3D00 PE). 3F00,3F02 When Unmounting of the main controller PCB (Sub PE) is detected. Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB (Sub PE), or replace it. Replace the main controller PCB (Main). Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB (Sub PE), or replace it. 0000-1217 An error occurs in the main controller PCB (Main). Replace it with a UFR board of the correct type. Turn off the main power, and check the connection of the cable, and check the power supply of MAU; then, turn on the main power.
Replace it with a scanner board of the correct type.
16-51
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 6000- An error occurs in the communication with the main controller PCB (Sub 7D00 R) 7F00 When unmounting of the main controller PCB (Sub R) is detected. 8000- A error occurs in the communication with the open interface PCB. 9C00 9F00 When unmounting of the main controller PCB (Sub R) is detected. C000- An error occurs in the communication with the main controller PCB (Sub DC00 SJ). DF00 When unmounting of the main controller PCB (Sub SJ) is detected. FF00 Incorrect main controller PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R) or incorrect open interface PCB is detected. EXXX When an interrupt occurs from unexpected ASIC. Remarks Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB (Sub R), or replace it. Replace the main controller PCB (Main). Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB (Sub R), or replace it. Disconnect and connect the open interface PCB, or replace it. Replace the main controller PCB (Main). Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB (Sub R), or replace it. Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB (Sub SJ), or replace it. Replace the main controller PCB (Main). Disconnect and connect the main controller PCB (Sub SJ), or replace it. Replace with an appropriate main controller PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R) or open interface PCB. Turn the main power off and turn it back on. Replace the main controller PCB (Main). E748 ** Main controller PCB error
4000 Any ASIC of the main controller PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R) or ASIC of the open Disconnect and then connect the main controller PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R), interface PCB is not detected. Replace the main controller PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R), Disconnect and then connect the relay PCB (GU-short), Replace the relay PCB (GU-short), Disconnect and then connect the open interface PCB, Replace the open interface PCB, Replace the main controller PCB (main) 4010 Failure of the main controller PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R) or failure of the open interface PCB is detected. Disconnect and then connect the main controller PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R), Replace the main controller PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R), Disconnect and then connect the relay PCB (GU-short), Replace the relay PCB (GU-short), Disconnect and then connect the open interface PCB, Replace the open interface PCB, Replace the main controller PCB (main) Mount the PCI expansion board (encrypted board or voice board) for the host machine.
4020 When connecting of an incorrect board to the PCB expansion slot is detected:
4021 When the /SERROR signal of the PCI is detected (such as the address parity Disconnect and connect the PCI expansion board, or replace it. error). Replace the main controller PCB (Main). 4030 An error occurs in accessing to the HDD controller. Replace the main controller PCB (Sub LAN-bar) Replace the main controller PCB (Main) 4040 Access error to the main controller PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R) or access error to the open interface PCB. Disconnect and then connect the main controller PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R), Replace the main controller PCB (Sub SJ/PE/R), Disconnect and then connect the relay PCB (GU-short), Replace the relay PCB (GU-short), Disconnect and then connect the open interface PCB, Replace the open interface PCB, Replace the main controller PCB (main) Disconnect and connect the counter memory PCB, or replace it. Replace the main controller PCB (Main). 4042 An error occurs in size of SDRAM. Disconnect and connect SDRAM, replace it, or add another. Replace the main controller PCB (Main) 4043 An error occurs in reading MAC address. Replace the main controller PCB (Sub LAN-bar). Replace the main controller PCB (Main). 4044 An error occurs in accessing to ECO-ID PCB. Connect and disconnect ECO-ID PCB, or replace it. Replace the main controller PCB (Main) 4045 An error occurs in accessing to RTC. Disconnect and connect SRAM, or replace it. Replace the main controller PCB (Main). 4050 An error occurs in accessing to LAN controller. Replace the main controller PCB (Sub LAN-bar). Replace the main controller PCB (Main). 4150 When an exhaustion of battery to backup SRAM/RTC is detected Turn off the main power and turn it back on. Replace the SRAM PCB. 4160 An error occurs in accessing to the FAX I/F controller. 4170 An error occurs in accessing to the USB host controller. Replace the main controller PCB (Main) Replace the main controller PCB (Sub LAN-bar). Replace the main controller PCB (Main). 4180 An error occurs in accessing to the USB device controller. Replace the main controller PCB (Sub LAN-bar). Replace the main controller PCB. 4190 An error occurs in accessing to the I/F controller (Card reader, Coin robot) Replace the main controller PCB (Sub LAN-bar). in IPC communication. Replace the main controller PCB (Main). 4210 An error occurs in accessing to the ASIC for I/O and interrupt. 4220 An error occurs in reading SDRAM(Slot position; Upper) 4221 An error occurs in reading SDRAM(Slot position; Lower). 4230 An error occurs in accessing to the LCD controller. 4260 An error occurs in writing when the BootROM version is upgraded. Replace the main controller PCB (Main). Disconnect and connect SDRAM, or replace it. Disconnect and connect SDRAM, or replace it. Replace the main controller PCB (Main). Replace the BootROM.
4041 An error occurs in accessing to the counter memory PCB.
16-52
Chapter 16
code Cause/Particulars of detection 4901 When turning off the 3.3V emergency night power is detected during operation. E749 ** Restart in accordance with a change of the product configuration Turn OFF and back ON the main power to recover Remarks Replace the controller power PCB. Replace the main controller PCB (Main).
0001 The BootROM is replaced with a different type (when the PDL option is installed) . E800 0001
The interlock 24V mechanism of the fixing unit is identified as being off. With the door closed, the interlock 24V mechanism remains off for 500 msec. Turn off the main switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB, check the fixing unit interlock, and check the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the interlock main switch. There is any of the various types of fan errors. 0004 There is an error in the controller cooling fan. 0007 There is an error in the power supply cooling fan. Turn off the main switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch. Turn off the main switch, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch. Turn off the main power, and check the supply of power to the fan; then, as necessary, replace the fan, and turn on the main power. Turn off the main switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch. Turn off the main power, and check the DC controller PCB and the 24V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch. Turn off the main switch, and check the wiring of the DC controller PCB and 2V system fuse; then, turn on the main switch.
E804
E805
The fixing heat exhaust fan is identified as having stopped or having an error. 0003 There is an error in the fixing heat exhaust fan.
E820
There is an error in the process unit cooling fan. 0002 There is an error in the process unit fan.
E824
There is an error in the primary charging suction/primary charging exhaust fan. 0000 There is an error in the primary charging suction mechanism. 0001 There is an error in the primary exhaust fan.
1. E602 {@E602-xxyyAR[hu@B
E602-xxyyAK1xdOFF/ONBiCV[PXs?j
T-16-11 xx p[eBV yy e
00
HDDS
01
HDDFBBOOTDEVNB uF dOFFHDDo2?P[uid/ IDEjmFAdONB AHDDAdmFB
NG
02
BOOTDEVCRg[iCjCPUpVXeB
uF
E
03
NG
BOOTDEVf[ôAosZNôB
uF
H
06
NG
NG
BOOTDEVCRg[iTujCPUpVXeB uF
E
07
NG
BOOTDEV/PDLDEVKICCProfileB
16-53
Chapter 16
xx p[eBV yy e
uF
E
08
NG
PSptHg uF
09 10 11
AAptHg
08
T-16-12 xx p[eBV yy e
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 FF
DOSDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 BOOTDEV DOSDEV5 s
01C02
NosG[At@CVXeG[
uF
NG
NG
Exxyy0701C0702 uF [U[gUI\A]A[U[hf[ô B
NG
NG
Exxyy0801C0802 uF
NG
NG
ExxyyFF01CFF02 uF
A
03
NG
NG
HDDGsAOSVXeG[ uF dOFFHDDo2?P[uid/ IDEjmFAdONB AHDD]AdmFB
NG
NG
11,21
HDDGs
16-54
Chapter 16
xx p[eBV yy e
uF dOFFHDDo2?P[uid/ IDEjmFAdONB AHDD]AdmFB
NG
13,25
osG[ uF
NG
NG
Exxyy0713A0725 uF
NG
NG
Exxyy0813,0825 uF
NG
NG
10,12A14,22 VXeG[ApPbgf[^G[ ,23,24 uF
NG
AF 1) COPIERFUNCTIONSYSTEMCHK-TYPE0B 2) COPIERFUNCTIONSYSTEMHD-CHECK*siIOKL[jB 3) IAdOFF/ONB BF 1) \uHDDFormatvQCOPIERFUNCTIONSYSTEMCHK-TYPEYCHK-TYPEB 2) COPIERFUNCTIONSYSTEMHD-CLEARsiIOKL[jB 3) IAdOFF/ONB CF 1)**@NormalModeNi1+7dONjACOPIERFUNCTIONSYSTEMDOWNLOADIOKL[B 2) SSTDOSDEV4tH[}bgsB 3) IAdOFF/ONB DF 1) CRg[iCj{[hB 2) O{[htiSDRAMjBOOTROMV{[hB EF 1)**@SafeModeNi2+8dONjB 2) SSTHDDtH[}bgiALL)VXe\tgEFAiSYSTEMALANGARUIj_E[hsB 3) IAdOFF/ONB FF 1)** HDDSafeModeNi2+8dONjB 2) SSTHDDtH[}bgiALL)VXe\tgEFAiSYSTEMALANGARUIj_E[hsB 3) IAdOFF/ONB GF 1) COPIERFUNCTIONSYSTEMCHK-TYPE1B 2) COPIERFUNCTIONSYSTEMHD-CLEARsiIOKL[jB 3) IAdOFF/ONB HF 1) dOFFA1+9dONiICvO*X^[gA^jB 2) Ii^jAdOFF/ONB
{CvOX^[gAEB IF 1) \uHDDFormatvQCOPIERFUNCTIONSYSTEMCHK-TYPEYCHK-TYPEB 2) COPIERFUNCTIONSYSTEMHD-CHECK*siIOKL[jB 3) IAdOFF/ONB JF 1) COPIERFUNCTIONSYSTEMCHK-TYPE4B 2) COPIERFUNCTIONSYSTEMHD-CHECK(1`5)siIOKL[jB 3) IAdOFF/ONB * 30`50B ** Kv[U[gUI\A]A[U[hf[ôB
16-55
Chapter 16
T-16-13 @HDD@Format p[eBV DOSDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV CHK-TYPE 1 1 1 1 2 3 PDLXv[ PDLAt@CitHgAo^tH[AICCProfilej \I Si\ABOXAFAXjA[hA^{^
DOSDEV4 BOOTDEV DOSDEV5
4 4 5 0
qf[î\A]jAVXe\tgEFA
16.3 Error Codes (SEND)

16.3.1 Self-Diagnostic Display
0005-6121
T-16-14 Cause Remedy
Scanning has stopped because the size of the data for the scanned original exceeds the limit. Scanning may be possible if [Data Cmprssn] is set to [High Ratio], Resolution is lowered, or [Sharpness] is reduced. Scanning was stopped because the data size of the scanned original exceeded the By selecting [High Ratio] for Data Compression Ratio, lowering the Resolution, and maximum data size that the machine could handle. lowering the Sharpness setting, scanning may become possible. Out of resources. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again. You cannot browse the network. There is a lack of TCP/IP resources because documents have just been continuously sent or are being continuously sent through FTP or Windows (SMB). Set the IP Address. Specify the IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), then turn the machine's main power OFF and back ON again.
Wait for a while, and try browsing again.
This machine is not set with an IP address.
No response from the server. Check the settings. The specified server settings are incorrect, or the server is not turned ON. Alternatively, the machine's TCP/IP resources may be low. NetWare is in use. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again. You cannot browse the network because NetWare is printing through a Pserver Wait until printing is complete, then try browsing again. or NDS PServer. There are too many subdirectories. You have exceeded the maximum number of subdirectory levels allowed. No response. The server was not running when you tried to send. Make sure that the server is ON, and check the destination. The network connection was lost when you tried to send. (Either you could not connect to the destination, or the connection was lost before the job could be Check the status of the network. completed.) You tried to send through NetWare, but the Tree name was not entered. Enter the Tree name. Specify a different destination because the directory level that you are trying to access cannot be specified. Wait for a while, and try browsing again. If there is still no response from the server, try selecting another server.
A TCP/IP error occurred when you tried to send an e-mail message or an I-fax. Check that the network cables and connectors are properly connected. Check the TCP/IP. The machine's TCP/IP connection is not operating. Check the IP Address Settings (IP Address, DHCP, RARP, BOOTP) in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
16-56
Chapter 16
Cause Cannot find the selected server. Check the settings. 1) Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). 2) Check whether the DNS server's DNS settings are correct. Remedy
The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot be determined.
If Login Information in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server, Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). the machine will not be able to determine the host name. Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings.
The machine cannot connect to the specified IP address/port.
1) Check the Gateway Address setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). 2) Check the Server Address and Port Number in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). 3) Check whether the LDAP server is operating normally. 4) If Login Information in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server, check whether UDP (User Datagram Protocol) packages are blocked by the filter.
Check the user name and password or check settings. Check the User and Password settings when Login Information in Register LDAP When setting Login Information for the LDAP server to 'Use' or 'Use (security Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use' or auth.)', the user name or password is incorrect. 'Use (security auth.)'. When setting Login Information for the LDAP server to 'Use (security auth.)', the domain name is incorrect. Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings. The search could not be completed within the time specified under <Search Timeout>. Increase the time setting for Search Timeout in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Check the Domain Name setting when Login Information in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)'.
The number of search results has exceeded limits. Change search conditions and try again. The number of addresses that meet the search criteria exceeds the specified maximum number of addresses to search. 1) Narrow down the search criteria, and then search again. 2) Increase the maximum number of addresses to search.
Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server. "/" is used in the search criterion. Remove "/" from the search criterion, and search again.
The combination of characters used in the search criterion does not constitute an acceptable search criterion. Make sure that the characters for the search criterion are combined properly, and There is an unequal number of "(" and ")". search again. "*" is not placed within "( )". If <Server LDAP version and character code> is set to 'ver.2 (JIS)', characters other than ASCII Code (0x20-0x7E) are being used. Omit characters that cannot be used, and search again.
Cannot start searching because the version setting for the server is incorrect. Check the settings. Although 'ver. 3' is set as the server LDAP version number in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the LDAP server is running on version 2. Set Server LDAP version and character code in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'ver. 2'.
16.3.2 List of Error Codes without Messages

0005-6118
T-16-15 Cause # 001 Paper or originals are jammed. # 003 1) Reduce the resolution, and try sending the document again. 2) When receiving a document, ask the remote party to either reduce the resolution at which the document is scanned, or divide the document into two or more parts before sending it. Remove any jammed paper or originals. Remedy
Communications that take longer than the preset time (64 minutes) caused the error.
# 005 The other party did not answer within 35 seconds. Check that the remote machine is able to communicate, and try again.
16-57
Chapter 16
Cause The receiving machine is not a G3 fax. # 009 There is no paper. The paper drawer is not correctly inserted into the machine. # 011 The document that you are sending is not placed correctly. # 012 The document could not be sent because the receiving fax machine was out Ask the receiving party to load paper into their fax machine. of paper. # 018 The receiving machine did not respond when your machine redialed. The documents could not be sent because the receiving machine was engaged. The settings on your machine do not match the settings on the receiving machine. # 022 Forwarding could not be performed because all of the addresses stored under the specified Group destination have been deleted, or User Inboxes are Re-enter the forwarding address and try sending again. specified as the Group destination. Transmission could not be performed because the specified destination was Re-enter the address in the address book and try sending again. deleted while the documents were waiting to be sent. # 037 Documents could not be received because there was insufficient memory available. # 081 A password is not set in the remote machine. # 099 Sending was interrupted. # 102 The subaddress and/or password do not match. Check the subaddress and/or password of the remote machine, and try again. Try sending again. Check the password of the remote machine, and try again. Erase unwanted documents and documents with errors from memory to increase the amount of available memory. Check that the receiving machine is able to communicate, and try again. Check that the receiving machine is able to communicate, and try again. Check that the receiving machine is able to communicate, and try again. Place the document properly in the feeder or on the platen glass, and repeat the whole procedure from the beginning. Load paper. Insert the paper drawer properly. Remedy Check the type of receiving machine with the receiving party.
# 107 The document could not be sent because there was insufficient memory available. # 701 The specified Department ID does not exist, or the password has changed. # 702 1) Wait a few moments, and try again after the other send jobs are complete. 2) Do not send the document to too many recipients at the same time. Send the document to a smaller number of recipients each time. Enter the correct Department ID or password using 0-9 (numeric keys) on the control panel, and try sending again. 1) Resend the document in a lower resolution. 2) Erase unwanted documents to make memory available. 3) If this problem occurs frequently, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
The document could not be sent because the memory is full.
# 703 1) Wait a few moments, and try again after the other send jobs are complete. 2) Erase documents stored in inboxes. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON again.
The memory for the image data is full.
# 704 An error occurred while reading address information from the Address Book. # 705 Check the address settings. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON again.
Change the Maximum Data Size for Sending setting in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in The send operation was interrupted because the size of the image data is Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). larger than the Maximum Data Size for Sending set in E-mail/I-Fax Settings Select a lower resolution, or if you are using I-fax, decrease the number of pages in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional containing images that you are sending each time, so that you do not exceed the Functions screen). Maximum Data Size for Sending limit.
# 706
16-58
Chapter 16
Cause Remedy
The Address Book is being imported or exported from the Remote UI, or it Wait until the Address Book import/export function from the Remote UI or the other is being used by another sending component. sending component is complete, and try sending again. # 711 The inbox memory is full. # 712 The maximum number of documents is already stored in the inbox. # 751 The server is not functioning. The network is down (the server is unable to Check the recipient's address. connect to the network or was disconnected). Check that the network is up. # 752 Check the SMTP Server name and E-mail Address in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings The SMTP server name for e-mail or I-fax is not correct, or the server is not in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). functioning. Check that the SMTP server is operating properly. The domain name or e-mail address may not be set. The network is down. Check the network status. # 753 A TCP/IP error occurred while sending an e-mail message. (Socket, Select Check the network cables and connectors. If the machine still does not operate error, etc.) normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON again. # 754 The server is not functioning or the network is down. The destination setting is not correct. # 755 You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not functioning correctly. The IP address is not set. When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the machine by the DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP server. # 756 NetWare in NetWare Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from Turn NetWare to 'On'. the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off'. # 801 A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the SMTP server to send an e-mail message or send/receive an I-fax. 1) Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally. 2) Check the network status. Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Check the server and network. Check the destination's address settings. Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox.
1) Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally. The SMTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination 2) Check the network status. is not correct. An error occurred on the server side during transmission to a 3) Check the destination setting. file server. 4) Check the status and setting of the file server. You are sending a file to a destination to which you have no write permission. Check the destination setting.
When the machine tried to send a file to the server, a file with the same name Change the setting on the file server to enable the file to be overwritten. already exists on the FTP server and that file cannot be overwritten. When the machine tried to send a file to the server, either the folder name is Check the destination setting. incorrectly specified or the password is incorrect. # 802 The name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect. The DNS server name in DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect. Connection to the DNS server failed. # 803 The connection was interrupted due to reasons on the recipient's side before Try sending again. all of the pages could be sent. # 804 Unable to match the specified directory name when sending data to a file server. You have no permission to access the folder. # 806 An incorrect user name or password was specified for the sending of a file to a file server. Change the user name or password. Check the destination. Change the setting on the server to enable access to the folder.
Check the name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax and DNS Server Settings in TCP/ IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Check that the DNS server is functioning normally.
16-59
Chapter 16
Cause An incorrect destination was specified for the sending of an e-mail message Check the e-mail or I-fax address. or I-fax. # 810 Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Check that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status. Remedy
A POP (Post Office Protocol) server connection error occurred while receiving an I-fax.
The POP server returned an error during the connection.
Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Check that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.
A timeout error occurred on the server while connecting to the POP server.
Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Check that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.
# 815 You cannot log on to the file server because the machine is printing a document sent to that server. Simultaneous connections are not possible. # 818 The received data is not in a printable file format. # 819 You have received data that cannot be processed (MIME information is incorrect). # 820 You have received data that cannot be processed (BASE 64 or uuencode is Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data. incorrect). # 821 You have received data that cannot be processed (TIFF analysis error). # 822 You have received data that cannot be processed (image data cannot be decoded). # 827 You have received data that cannot be processed (contains MIME information that is not supported). # 828 You have received HTML data. # 829 Data that contains more than 1,000 pages is received. # 830 This machine can print or store up to 999 pages of data in memory, but will delete any data that exceeds this limit. Ask the sender to resend the remaining pages. Ask the sender to use a file format other than HTML, and resend the data. Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data. Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data. Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data. Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data. Ask the sender to change the file format and resend the data. Wait for a few moments before trying to send the data again, or change the NetWare server to which you are sending your documents. Alternatively, stop the Pserver.
1)Check the I-fax address or destination setting. A DSN (Delivery Status Notification) error notification is received because 2) Set Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in Communication of an incorrect I-fax address or destination setting, or the data size of the sent Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) so that it is less than documents exceeds the mail server capacity. the mail server capability. 3) Check the status of the mail server, DNS server, and network.
# 831 An I-fax document could not be received using SMTP because of the RX/ Print Range setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). # 832 DSN (Delivery Status Notification) mail was not sent because TCP/IP Settings or E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) have not been set, or trouble has occurred in the mail server. # 833 MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail was not sent because TCP/IP Settings or E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) have not been set, or trouble has occurred in the mail server. # 834 1) Check the DNS Server Settings and IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings, and Email/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). 2) Check the status of the mail server and DNS server. 1) Check the DNS Server Settings and IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings, and Email/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). 2) Check the status of the mail server and DNS server. Reset the RX/Print Range setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
16-60
Chapter 16
Cause Remedy
An MDN error notification is received because of an incorrect I-fax address or destination setting, or trouble has occurred in the network or mail server. Check the I-fax address and destination settings. Alternatively, the memory of the receiving machine is full. # 835 The maximum number of text lines for receiving an I-fax has been exceeded. # 837 A connection request was received from a host whose connection is Check the settings in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in restricted by IP Address Settings, which can be set in TCP/IP Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Make sure that the connection Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). request is made from an authorized host. # 839 The user name or password for the SMTP authentication (SMTP AUTH) in Check the user name and password for SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH) in Authent./Encryption in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings Authent./Encryption in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect. Additional Functions screen). # 841 The encryption algorithm that matches the mail server does not exist for sending e-mail or I-fax. # 842 1) Set Allow SSL in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Authentication using the client certificate was requested by the mail server Functions screen) to 'Off'. for sending e-mail or I-fax. 2) Change the mail server settings so that the client certificate is not requested. # 843 There is large difference between the current time set in the KDC (Key Distribution Center) server and the one set in the machine. # 851 There is insufficient memory remaining in the system. The scanned document cannot be stored because there are more than 100 documents in the specified inbox. # 852 An error occurred because the main power switch was turned OFF while a job was being processed. # 899 The e-mail message or I-fax has been successfully sent, but reception may be incomplete because the transmission was relayed via multiple servers. # 995 Reserved communication jobs were cleared. Reserve the jobs again, if necessary. 1) Check whether reception was complete. 2) Check if you received an error notification. Check to see if the main power switch is turned ON. Try processing the job again, if necessary. Check the system's available memory, and delete unwanted documents in the inboxes. Delete unnecessary documents from the specified inbox. 1) Change the current date and time in Date & Time Settings in Timer Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). 2) Change the current time set in the KDC (Key Distribution Center) server. 1) Set Allow SSL in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. 2) Add the same encryption algorithm as the mail server in the mail server settings. Ask the sender to reduce the amount of text data in the body of the document, and resend the data.
16.4 Jam Codes

16.4.1 Jam Code (printer unit)
0005-6301
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. Type of Jam Code
T-16-16 Code 01xx 02xx 0Axx 0B00 0B01 0D91 0D92 0D93 delay jam stationary jam residual jam door open jam door open jam (detection by software) size error (sheet shorter than specified) material error (paper used instead of transparency material (transparency used instead of paper) Type of Jam Code
16-61
Chapter 16
2. Jam Code (printer unit)

T-16-17 Code xx01 xx02 xx03 xx04 xx05 xx06 xx07 xx08 xx09 xx10 xx0A xx0A xx0B xx0C xx0D xx0E xx0F xx11 xx12 xx13 xx14 xx15 xx16 0D91 0D92 Sensor right deck pickup sensor left deck pickup sensor cassette 3 pickup sensor cassette 4 pickup sensor vertical path 4 sensor vertical path 3 sensor vertical path 2 sensor vertical path 1 sensor vertical path confluence sensor vertical path 0 sensor transparency sensor (front, rear) registration sensor post-transfer sensor internal delivery paper sensor reversal sensor external delivery sensor reversal vertical path sensor duplex left sensor duplex confluence sensor side paper deck pickup sensor side paper deck feed sensor fixing inlet sensor left deck stationary sensor transparency sensor (front/rear) plain paper detected by transparency sensor when transparency is selected as medium transparency detected by transparency sensor when a medium other than transparency is selected Notation PS33 PS40 PS48 PS54 PS63 PS62 PS61 PS60 PS32 PS31 PS3, PS29 PS9 PS10 PS12 PS14 PS13 PS15 PS17 PS18 PS101 PS106 PS11 PS47 PS3, PS29 PS3, PS29 detects residual jam only detects residual jam only other than in transparency mode does not detect stationary jam other than in transparency mode in transparency mode does not detect stationary jam does not detect stationary jam At Time of Face-Down Delivery Remarks does not detect stationary jam does not detect stationary jam does not detect stationary jam does not detect stationary jam
0D93
PS3, PS29
16.4.2 Jam Code (finisher-related)

0005-6302
T-16-18 Code 1011 1101 1500 1300 1400 Sensor delivery sensor feed delay jam delivery sensor feed stationary jam stapler staple jam power-on jam door open jam Notation SR1(finisher-P1)
16-62
Chapter 16
T-16-19 Code 1001 1002 1004 1101 1102 Sensor inlet path sensor feed delay jam punch path sensor (punch registration sensor) feed delay jam delivery path sensor feed delay jam inlet path sensor feed stationary jam punch path sensor (punch registration sensor) feed stationary jam Notation P13 LED5/PTR5 P14 P13 LED5/PTR5
1104 1200 1500 1300 1400 1644 1645 1791 1792 1793 17A1 17A2 17A3 1786 1787 1788
delivery path sensor feed stationary jam timing jam stapler staple jam power-on jam door open jam punch jam punch power-on jam saddle feed sensor feed delay jam saddle delivery sensor feed delay jam saddle inlet sensor feed delay jam saddle feed sensor feed stationary jam saddle delivery sensor feed stationary jam saddle inlet sensor feed stationary jam saddle stapler staple jam saddle power-on jam saddle door open jam
P14 P13 STP P13,P14 DOOR LED5/PTR5 LED5/PTR5 P18S,PI19S,PI20S PI11S PI22S P18S,PI19S,PI20S PI11S,PI17S PI22S S STP PI11S,PI18S,PI19S,PI20S,PI22S DOOR
16.4.3 Jam Code (ADF-related)

0005-6303
T-16-20 Code 0001 Sensor post-separation sensor Sensor PI7 Description The post separation sensor does not detect paper even when paper has been fed 452 mm after the start of separation.
0002
post-separation sensor
PI7
- the separation sensor detects paper after paper has been fed 50 mm (if extra length, +200 mm) -45.5 mm following registration pickup. - the sensor goes on (paper with hole) before paper has been fed 12 mm after the detection of the trailing edge; the separation sensor detects paper after paper has been fed 50 mm from when the separation senor has gone on.
0003
registration sensor
PI1
the registration sensor does not detect paper even when paper has been fed 134.8 mm after the post-separation sensor has gone on. the read sensor goes off before the registration sensor goes off. - the read sensor does not detect paper when paper has been fed 364.2 mm (182.1 x 2) after the point of registration. - the read sensor does not detect paper even when paper has been fed 157.4 mm (78.7 x 2) from the point of No. 2 registration.
0004 0005
registration sensor read sensor
PI1 PI8
16-63
Chapter 16
Code 0006 Sensor read sensor Sensor PI8 Description - the read sensor detects paper when paper has been fed 500 mm (if extra length, +200 mm) from the start of feed following a temporary stop before reading. - in the course of LTRR/LGL identification in mix mode, the read sensor detects paper when paper has been fed 514 mm beginning at the advance edging standby position.
0007
delivery reversal sensor
PI9
- at time of switchback, the delivery sensor does not detect paper when paper has been fed 50 mm from the start of feed. - at time of switch-back, the delivery sensor does not detect paper after paper has been fed 50 mm from the start of feed.
0008
PI9
delivery reversal sensor the delivery sensor detects paper after paper has been fed 161.9 mm from the end of reading the trailing edge. a jam (1st sheet) is detected by the post-separation sensor. paper (1st sheet) fails to reach the registration sensor. a stationary jam (1st sheets) is detected by the registration sensor. paper (1st sheet) fails to reach the read sensor. a stationary jam (1st sheet) is detected by the read sensor. paper (1st sheet) fails to reach the delivery sensor. a stationary jam (1st sheet) is detected by the delivery sensor. timing of software operation is faulty. the shift motor has a fault. the ADF is opened while the machine is in operation. the ADF is opened while the machine is in operation (waiting for paper). the cover is opened while the machine is in operation (drive system in operation).
0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0071 0073 0090 0091 0092
post-separation sensor registration sensor registration sensor read sensor read sensor delivery reversal sensor delivery reversal sensor timing fault timing fault ADF open/closed sensor 1 ADF open/closed sensor 1 DF cover open/closed sensor
PI7 PI1 PI1 PI8 PI8 PI9 PI9 PS502 PS502 PI6
0093
DF cover open/closed sensor
PI6
the cover is opened while the machine is in operation (waiting for paper).
0094
registration sensor, separation sensor, feed sensor, delivery reversal sensor
PI1,PI7,PI8,PI9 paper is detected within the path during pickup of the 1st sheet.
0095
original placement sensor, DF cover open/closed sensor, ADF open/closed sensor 1
PI5,PI6,PS502
there is no paper in the tray, or the pickup start signal is received with the machine being in an open state.
16.5 Alarm Codes

16.5.1 Alarm Code
0005-6304
T-16-21 location code 0002 02 scanner system 0020 line correction alarm (i.e., dust is detected on the stream reading glass during detection at the end of a job) detail code indicates soling of the glass in stream reading mode
16-64
Chapter 16
location code 04 pickup/feed system 0001 0002 0003 0004 0008 0009 06 fixing system 09 drum 0002 0005 detail code cassette 1 lifter error cassette 2 lifter sensor cassette 3 lifter error cassette 4 lifter error optional deck lifter error horizontal registration home position detection error fixing upper roller end of life History of work on drum phase shifting waste toner cassette full Emergency night power-off for 3.3V was detected during operation. potential control VD alarm potential control VL alarm delivery cooling fan 1 alarm developing fan alarm reader cooing fan alarm fixing heat discharge fan alarm primary charging suction fan alarm primary charging exhaust fan alarm feed fan 1 alarm feed fan 2 alarm original separation alarm (1st original pickup fault) has occurred 3 times in succession. Insufficient light intensity of the post-separation sensor Insufficient light intensity of the read sensor Insufficient light intensity of the delivery reversal sensor The separation alarm is continuously given. shift tray alarm staple absent staple absent punch waste paper case full HDD access error register access error memory data transfer error rendering error (ECI module) rendering error (EM module) rendering error (IE module) rendering error (IDM module) rendering error (LAM module) rendering error (MI module) rendering error (PCM module) rendering error (PGM module) rendering error (VII module) rendering error (VOI module) compression image storage error rendering error (rendering time-out)
11 waste toner collection system 0001 31 power system 32 potential control system 0003 0001 0002 0001 0006 0010 33 fan 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 50 ADF 0010 0007 0008 0009 0010 60 shift tray 61 finisher 62 saddle stitcher 65 puncher 70 hdd 72 Surf 0001 0001 0001 0001 0007 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014
16-65
Chapter 16
location code 73 LIPS 0002 0004 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 83 PCI 0019 detail code work memory shortage work memory overflow for translator configuration acquisition/management error memory management error file management error reception data management error page control error macro management error color management error layout control error font management error character draw error graphic draw error image draw error LCD display error text mode command layer error vector mode command layer error utility execution control error data base management error menu control error boot error graphics memory shortage PCI /SERROR signal of the PCI was detected. (Address parity error, etc.)
16-66
Chapter 17 Service Mode
Contents
Contents
17.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.1.1 Construction of Service Mode ................................................................................................................................................. 17-1 17.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ........................................................................................................................................ 17-1 17.1.3 Exiting service modes .............................................................................................................................................................. 17-2 17.1.4 Back-Up ................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-2 17.1.5 Initial Screen ............................................................................................................................................................................ 17-3 17.1.6 Main/intermediate Item Screen................................................................................................................................................ 17-3 17.1.7 Sub- Item Screen...................................................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode)..............................................................................................................................17-4

17.2.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-4
17.2.1.1 COPIER List ...............................................................................................................................................................................................17-4 17.2.1.2 COPIER List .............................................................................................................................................................................................17-14 17.2.1.3 COPIER List .............................................................................................................................................................................................17-24
17.2.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-34

17.2.2.1 FEEDER List ............................................................................................................................................................................................17-34
17.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode)............................................................................................................................................17-35

17.3.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-35 17.3.2 DC-CON ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-36 17.3.3 DC-CON ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-39 17.3.4 R-CON ................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-42 17.3.5 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-43 17.3.6 SORTER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-43 17.3.7 MN-CONT ............................................................................................................................................................................. 17-48
17.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) ..................................................................................................................................17-49

17.4.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-49
17.4.1.1 COPIER List .............................................................................................................................................................................................17-49 17.4.1.2 COPIER List .............................................................................................................................................................................................17-63
17.4.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-77

17.4.2.1 FEEDER List ............................................................................................................................................................................................17-77
17.4.3 SORTER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-78

17.4.3.1 SORTER List ............................................................................................................................................................................................17-78
17.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode)..............................................................................................................17-78

17.5.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-78
17.5.1.1 COPIER LIst .............................................................................................................................................................................................17-78 17.5.1.2 COPIER List .............................................................................................................................................................................................17-89 17.5.1.3 COPIER List ...........................................................................................................................................................................................17-103
17.5.2 FEEDER .............................................................................................................................................................................. 17-116

17.5.2.1 FEEDER List ..........................................................................................................................................................................................17-116
17.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode) .......................................................................................................................17-118

17.6.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................................... 17-118
17.6.1.1 COPIER List ...........................................................................................................................................................................................17-118 17.6.1.2 COPIER List ...........................................................................................................................................................................................17-156 17.6.1.3 COPIER List ...........................................................................................................................................................................................17-184
17.6.2 FEEDER .............................................................................................................................................................................. 17-220

17.6.2.1 FEEDER List ..........................................................................................................................................................................................17-220
17.6.3 SORTER .............................................................................................................................................................................. 17-220

17.6.3.1 SORTER List ..........................................................................................................................................................................................17-220
17.6.4 BOARD................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-221

17.6.4.1 BOARD List............................................................................................................................................................................................17-221 17.6.4.2 BOARD List............................................................................................................................................................................................17-221
17.7 TEST (Test Print Mode) ........................................................................................................................................17-222
Contents
17.7.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................................... 17-222

17.7.1.1 COPIER List ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-222 17.7.1.2 COPIER List ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-223 17.7.1.3 COPIER List ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-225
17.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ................................................................................................................................. 17-227

17.8.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................................... 17-227
17.8.1.1 COPIER List ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-227 17.8.1.2 COPIER List ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-233
Chapter 17
17.1 Outline
17.1.1 Construction of Service Mode
0000-9782
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine's service mode has a 3-layer screen construction: Initial screen, Level 1/2 screen, and Level 3 screen. Its mode items are grouped into those used in regular maintenance work (Level 1 items) and those used in response to faults (Level 2 items).
User screen
)(2,8)(
Reset key
Initial screen (Level 1) Initial screen (Level 2)
(
(Select an item.)
)(2)
Main/intermediate item screen (Level 1)
(Select an item.)
(Select a main item from the top of screen.) (The corresponding intermediate items are then displayed and can be selected.)
Main/intermediate item screen (Level 2)
Sub-item screen (Level 1)
(Select a main item from the top of screen.) (The corresponding intermediate items are then displayed and can be selected.)
Previous/next page
Previous/next page
F-17-1
The machine's service mode is divided into the following 7 types:

COPIER FEEDER DISPLAY SORTER BOARD I/O ADJUST FUNCTION OPTION TEST COUNTER
F-17-2
status indication mode input/output indication mode adjustment mode operation/inspection mode settings mode test print mode counter mode
17.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes

0000-9783
If you want to execute a machine operation using a service mode item, be sure to disconnect all cables from an external controller or a network before starting service mode. Particularly, if you are using a FUNCTION (operation/inspection) mode item, the arrival of a print job from an external source can cause the machine to malfunction, leading to damage. 1) Press the asterisk key " " on the control panel.
17-1
Chapter 17 2) Press the 2 and 8 keys of the keypad at the same time. 3) Press the asterisk key " " on the control panel.
In response to the foregoing key operations, the machine will bring up the following Initial screen:
Copier's service mode

COPIER FEEDER SORTER
ADF's service mode only when installed. Sorter's or finisher's service mode only if installed; the absence of a mode for a sorter prevents the indication of the notation.
Optional board's service mode only if installed
BOARD
F-17-3
17.1.3 Exiting service modes

0000-9785
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci A press on the Reset key will bring back the Service Mode Initial screen. Another press on the Reset key will end service mode, and bring back the User screen (standard screen).
If you used service mode (ADJUST, FUNCTION, OPTION), be sure to turn off and then on the main power switch after ending service mode.
17.1.4 Back-Up
0005-6296
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci At time of shipment from the factory, all machines are adjusted individually, and adjustment values are recorded in their respective service labels. If you have replaced the reader controller PCB or the DC controller PCB, or if you have initialized the RAM, the adjustment values (for ADJUST and OPTION) will return to their default settings. If there has been any change in a service mode item, be sure to update its setting indicated on the service label. As necessary, make use of the space in the service label (as when recording an item not found on the label). - Service Label for the Reader Controller PCB (behind the front cover [1] of the reader unit)
[1]
F-17-4
- Service Label [1] for the Main Controller PCB/DC controller PCB (behind the front cover of the printer unit)
17-2
Chapter 17
[1]
F-17-5
17.1.5 Initial Screen

0000-9788
COPIER
Initial item Touch to select an item.
FEEDER
SORTER
FAX BOARD
F-17-6
17.1.6 Main/intermediate Item Screen

0000-9789
Display
I/O
Adjust
Function
Option
Test
Counter
Main items Touch an item to select it.

VERSION USER ACC-STS
Intermediate items Touch an item to select it.
ANALOG CST-STS JAM ERR
F-17-7
17.1.7 Sub- Item Screen

0000-9790
17-3
Chapter 17
Number of pages
Display
Selected intermediate item
I/O
Adjust Function Option
Test
Counter
<VERSION> DC-CON IP PANEL ANAPRO POWER

Sub-items
< 1/3 >
< READY > Copier status display

Ready to receive service/copy operation. Paper jam JAM: Executing service mode. SERVICE: Performing warmup or similar WAITING: operation. Cover open DOOR: COPYING: Copying Error ERROR: NO-TONER: No toner WTNR-FUL: Waste toner full NO-PAPER: No paper ALERM: Alarm READY:
PREV
NEXT
+/-
OK
Returns to previous page. Advances to next page.
F-17-8
Display
I/O
Test
Counter
<ADJ-XY> ADJ-X
xxxxx
< 1/3 >
< READY >
(yyyyy) {aaaaa to bbbbb}
Pressing an item displays it in reverse. ADJ-X
Value before change Entered value
Range of values that can be entered
PREV
NEXT
+/-
OK
Sets entered value.
Toggles values sign (). Stop Clear Start key: Stops running operations. key: Clears value. key: Starts copying without exiting service mode.
F-17-9
17.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode)

17.2.1 COPIER 17.2.1.1 COPIER List
0018-0476
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. VERSION

T-17-1 COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION Subheading Contents Level Use it to indicate the ROM version of various PCBs (copier, accessories). - The format of display is as follows: if R-CON XX.YY>, XX: version; YY: R&D control number. - If no PCB is installed, the display will be as follows: <-:->. DC-CON R-CON PANEL ECO FEEDER SORTER FAX NIB PS/PCL SDL-STCH Use it to indicate the ROM version of the DC controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the reader controller PCB. Use it to check the ROM version of the control panel controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the ECO PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the DADF controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the finisher controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the FAX board. Use it to indicate the Rom version of the network interface PCB Use it to check the Version of Printer board (PS/PCL function) Use it to check the ROM version of the saddle stitcher controller PCB. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
17-4
Chapter 17
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION Subheading OP-CONT MN-CONT DIAG-DVC RUI PUNCH LANG-EN LANG-FR LANG-DE LANG-IT LANG-JP GDI-UFR MEAP OCR-CN OCR-JP OCR-KR OCR-TW BOOT ROM TTS-JA TTS-EN TTS-IT TTS-FR TTS-DE WEB-BRWS HELP WEBDAV TIMESTMP ASR-JA ASR-EN LANG-CS LANG-DA LANG-EL LANG-ES LANG-ET LANG-FI LANG-HU LANG-KO LANG-NL LANG-NO LANG-PL LANG-PT LANG-RU LANG-SL LANG-SV LANG-TW LANG-ZH ECO-ID LANG-BU LANG-CR LANG-RM LANG-SK LANG-TK LANG-CA MEDIA-JA MEDIA-EN MEDIA-DE MEDIA-IT MEDIA-FR MEDIA-ZH MEDIA-SK MEDIA-TK MEDIA-CS MEDIA-EL MEDIA-ES MEDIA-ET MEDIA-FI Contents Use it to indicate the ROM version of the option controller PCB. Use it to check the ROM version of the main controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the self diagnosis device. Use it to indicate the version of the remote UI. Use it to indicate the version of the punch unit. Use it to check the version of an English language file. Use it to indicate the version of the French language file. Use it to indicate the version of the German language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Italian language file. Use it to indicate the Japanese language file. Use it to indicate the version of the UFR board (GDI-UFR function). Use it to indicate the Version of MEAP contents Use it to indicate the OCR version of Chinese (Simplified characters) Use it to indicate the OCR version of Japanese Use it to indicate the OCR version of Korean Use it to indicate the OCR version of Chinese (Traditional characters) Use it to indicate the BOOT ROM version Use it to indicate the Version of Japanese voice dictionary Use it to indicate the Version of English voice dictionary Use it to indicate the Version of Italian voice dictionary Use it to indicate the Version of French voice dictionary Use it to indicate the Version of German voice dictionary Use it to indicate the Web browser version Version of the simple navigation Version of the "WebDAV" file Version of the "Time Stamp" file Version of the Japanese voice recognition dictionary Version of the English voice recognition dictionary Use it to indicate the version of the Czech language file. Use it to indicate version of the Danish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Greek language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Spanish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Estonian language file. Use is to indicate the version of the Finnish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Hungarian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Korean language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Dutch language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Norwegian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Polish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Portuguese language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Russian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Slovenian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Swedish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Chinese (traditional) language file Use it to indicate the version of the Chinese (simplified) language file. Use it to indicate the version of the ECO-ID number. Use it to indicate the version of the Bulgarian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Croatian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Romanian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Slovakian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Turkish language file. Version of the Catalan language file Version of the Japanese paper brand information Version of the English paper brand information Version of the German paper brand information Version of the Italian paper brand information Version of the French paper brand information Version of the simplified Chinese paper brand information Version of the Slovakian paper brand information Version of the Turkish paper brand information Version of the Czechoslovakian paper brand information Version of the Greek paper brand information Version of the Spanish paper brand information Version of the Esthonian paper brand information Version of the Finnish paper brand information Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
17-5
Chapter 17
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION Subheading MEDIA-HU MEDIA-KO MEDIA-NL MEDIA-NO MEDIA-PL MEDIA-PT MEDIA-RU MEDIA-SL MEDIA-SV MEDIA-TW MEDIA-BU MEDIA-CR MEDIA-RM MEDIA-CA Version of the Hungarian paper brand information Version of the Korean paper brand information Version of the Dutch paper brand information Version of the Norwegian paper brand information Version of the Polish paper brand information Version of the Portuguese paper brand information Version of the Russian paper brand information Version of the Slovenian paper brand information Version of the Swedish paper brand information Version of the traditional Chinese paper brand information Version of the Bulgarian paper brand information Version of the Croatian paper brand information Version of the Romanian paper brand information Version of the Catalan paper brand information Contents Level 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2. ACC-STS
T-17-2 COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS Subheading FEEDER Use it to indicate the presence of a DADF. 0: not connected. 1: connected. Use it to indicate the presence of a finisher or a punch unit. X: Connection status of Finisher Y: Connection status of Punch unit X: 0: No connection 1: Finisher 2: Saddle finisher 3: Saddle finisher + Inserter 4: Saddle finisher + Paper folding unit 5: Saddle finisher + Inserter + Paperfolding unit 6: 3K Stacker 7: Inner finisher 8: External small finisher Y: 0: No connection 1: 2-hole 2: 2/3-hole 3: 4-hole (FRN) 4: 4-hole (SWDN) Use it to check the presence of a paper deck. 0: not connected. 1: connected. Use it to check the state of connection of a card reader: 0: card reader connected but card not inserted. 1: card reader not connected; or, card reader connected and card inserted (indicates '1' if ready for copying; indicates '0' if not ready for copying) Use it to indicate the presence of a copier data controller. 0: not connected. 1: connected. Use it to check the size of the memory mounted on the main controller PCB. RAM: xx[MB] Uses it to indicate the state of connection of a coin vendor. 0: not connected. 1: connected. Use it to check the state of connection of a network board. 0: not connected. 1: Ethernet board connected. 2: TokenRing board connected. 3: Ethernet board and TokeRing board connected. Use it to check the state of installation of network firmware. 0: not installed. 1: installed. Use it to check the presence of the SEND function. 0: SEND function absent. 1: SEND function present. Available PDL is displayed (1)b19 to 16: Reserve (To be used when PDL is newly added Available PDL is displayed (2) HDD type is displayed (less than 30 characters). Contents Level 1
SORTER
DECK
CARD
DATA-CON
RAM COINROBO
NIB
NETWARE
SEND
1 1 1 1
PDL-FNC1 PDL-FNC2 HDD
17-6
Chapter 17
COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS Subheading PCI1 Contents Board name connected to PCI1 is displayed (less than 30 characters).If no board is connected, '-' (hyphen) is displayed. - Voice board: Voice Board - Encryption board: 3DES Board - GIGA Ethernet board: 1Gbit-Board Use it to indicate the connection speed of a USB device. Indicates the connection speed of the 8 USB devices connected to the USB host chip. - OFF - LOW - FLL - HGH Level
USBH-SPD
3. ANALOG
T-17-3 COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG Subheading TEMP HUM ABS-HUM FIX-UC FIX-UE Use it to check the surface temperature at the edge of the fixing upper roller (as detected by the sub thermistor; in deg C) 1 FIX-LC Use it to indicate the temperature of the center of the fixing lower roller. unit: deg C 1 FIX-LE Use it to indicate the temperature of the edge of the fixing lower roller. unit: deg C 1 FIX-EXC Use it to indicate the temperature of the center of the outside heating roller. unit: deg C 1 FIX-EXE Use it to indicate the temperature of the edge of the outside heating roller unit: deg C 1 Use it to check the machine inside humidity (environment sensor; in %RH). Use it to check moisture content (environment sensor; in g). Use it to check the surface temperature of the middle of the fixing upper roller (as detected by the main thermistor; in deg C) 1 Contents Use it to check the machine inside temperature (environment sensor; in deg C). 1 1 1 Level
4. CST-STS
T-17-4 COPIER>DISPLAY>CST-STS Subheading WIDTH-MF Contents Use it to check the width of paper in the manual feed tray (in mm). Level 2
5. JAM
17-7
Chapter 17
F-17-10
Touch any Jam Indication screen to go to the detailed screen of that particular type of jam. [1] press to go to the previous page. [2] press to go to the next page. [3] indicates the order of occurrence of the jam in question. [4] indicates the type of jam. [5] Sensor in question [6] press to go to the previous Jam Indication screen. [7] press it to go to the next Jam Indication screen. (a) Jam Screen Indication Items - <No.> Indicates the order of occurrence of the jam in question.1 through 50 (the higher the number, the older the jam) - <DATE>Indicates the date of the jam in question. - <TIME1> Indicates the time of the jam in question. - <TIME2> Indicates the jam recovery time. - <L> Use it to indicate the location of jams.
T-17-5 Cord 0 1 2 copier (Printer unit) feeder finisher Location/classification
- <CODE> Use it to indicate jam codes (Refer to Jam code list described later). - <P> Use it to indicate the source of paper.
17-8
Chapter 17
T-17-6 Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 cassette 1 cassette 2 cassette 3 cassette 4 side paper deck manual feed tray (Multi-feeder) duplexing assembly cassette 1
- <CNTR> Indicates the reading of the soft counter for the source of paper. - <SIZE> Indicates the size of paper. (b) Jam code list (jam type)
T-17-7 Code 01xx 02xx 0Axx 0B00 0B01 0D91 0D92 0D93 Type of jam delay jam stationary jam residnal jam door open jam door open jam (detection by software) size mismatch (paper shorter than specified size) medium mismatch (paper instead of transparency) medium mismatch (transparency instead of paper)
(c) Jam code list (printer unit)

T-17-8 Code xx01 xx02 xx03 xx04 xx05 xx06 xx07 xx08 xx09 xx0A xx0A xx0B xx0C xx0D xx0E xx0F xx10 xx11 xx12 xx13 xx14 xx15 xx16 0D90 0D91 0D91 0D92 0D93 Sensor type right deck pickup sensor left deck pickup sensor cassette 3 pickup sensor cassette 4 pickup sensor vertical path 4 sensor vertical path 3 sensor vertical path 2 sensor vertical path 1 sensor vertical path confluence sensor transparency sensor (front, rear) registration sensor post-transfer sensor inside delivery sensor reversal sensor outside delivery sensor reversal vertical path sensor vertical path 0 sensor duplex left sensor duplex confluence sensor side paper deck pickup sensor side paper deck feed sensor fixing inlet sensor left deck stationary sensor transparency sensor (front, rear) transparency sensor (front, rear) registration sensor transparency sensor (front, rear) transparency sensor (front, rear) Sensor number Remarks PS33 PS40 PS48 PS54 PS63 PS62 PS61 PS60 PS32 PS3, PS29 PS9 PS10 PS12 PS14 PS13 PS15 PS31 PS17 PS18 PS101 PS106 PS11 PS47 PS3, PS29 PS3, PS29 PS9 PS3, PS29 PS3, PS29 detects a residual jam only detects a residual jam only when the mode is transparency mode when the mode is not transparency mode when the mode is transparency mode does not detect a stationary jam when the source of paper is the right deck when the source of paper is NOT the right deck when the mode is not transparency mode when the mode is transparency mode does not detect a stationary jam does not detect a stationary jam when in face-down delivery mode does not detect a stationary jam does not detect a stationary jam does not detect a stationary jam does not detect a stationary jam
(d) Jam code list (finisher-related)

T-17-9 Code 1001 1002 1004 Sensor type inlet path sensor feed delay jam punch path sensor (punch registration sensor) feed delay jam delivery path sensor feed delay jam Sensor notation PI33 LED5/PTR5 PI34
17-9
Chapter 17
Code 1101 1102 1104 1200 1500 1300 1400 1644 1645 1791 1792 1793 17A1 17A2 17A3 1786 1787 1788 Sensor type inlet path sensor feed stationary jam inlet path sensor feed stationary jam punch path sensor (Punch registration sensor) feed stationary jam delivery path sensor feed stationary jam timing jam stapler staple jam power-on jam door open jam punch jam punch power-on jam saddle feed sensor feed delay jam saddle delivery sensor feed delay jam saddle inlet sensor feed delay jam saddle feed sensor feed stationary jam saddle delivery sensor feed stationary jam saddle inlet sensor feed stationary jam saddle stapler staple jam saddle power-on jam saddle door open jam Sensor notation PI33 LED5/PTR5 PI34 PI33 STP PI33,PI34 DOOR LED5/PTR5 LED5/PTR5 PI18,PI19,PI20 PI11 PI22 PI18,PI19,PI20 PI11,PI17 PI22 S STP PI11,PI18,PI19,PI20,PI22 DOOR
(e) Jam code list (Feeder-specific)

T-17-10 Code 0001 0002 Sensor type post-separation sensor post-separation sensor Sensor notation Description PI7 PI7 the post-separation sensor does not detect paper when a feed of 452 mm has been made after the start of separation. - the separation sensor detects paper after a feed of "500 mm (if extra length, +200 mm) - 45.5 mm" has been made. - the sensor goes on within a feed of 12 mm after detection of the trailing edge (holed paper); the post-separation sensor detects paper when a feed of 50 m has been made after the separation sensor goes on. the registration sensor does not detect paper when a feed of 134.8 mm has been made after the post-separation sensor goes on. the read sensor goes off before the registration sensor goes off. - read sensor does not detect paper when a feed of 364.2 mm (182.1 x 2) has been made from the point of registration. - the read sensor does not detect paper when a feed of 157.4 mm (78.7 x 2) has been made from the point of No. 2 registration. - the read sensor detects paper when a feed of 500 mm (if extra-length, +200 mm) has been made from the start of feed after a temporary stop at point of reading. - the read sensor detects paper when a feed of 514 mm has been made after the start of feed from the standby point in mix mode (LTRR/LGL identified).
0003 0004 0005
registration sensor registration sensor feed sensor
PI1 PI1 PI8
0006
feed sensor
PI8
0007
PI9
- if not in high-speed duplex mode, the delivery sensor does not detect when a feed of 132.1 mm has been made after paper has reached the leading edge downstream roller with respect to the activation of the read sensor. - the delivery sensor does not detect paper when a feed of 50 mm has been made after the start of feed during a switch-back operation. the delivery sensor detects paper when a feed of 161.9 mm has been made from the end of reading the trailing edge. 1st; stationary jam at the post-separation sensor 1st; not reaching the registration sensor 1st; stationary at the registration sensor 1st; not reaching the read sensor 1st; stationary at the read sensor 1st; not reaching heat delivery sensor 1st; stationary sensor at the delivery sensor error software timing the shift motor is faulty the ADF is opened during operation the ADF is opened during operation (while paper is in wait) A cover is opened during operation (while a drive mechanism is in operation). A cover is opened during operation (in wait for paper). Paper is detected in the path while the 1st sheet is being picked up.
0008
PI9
0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0071 0073 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094
post-separation sensor registration sensor registration sensor feed sensor feed sensor delivery reversal sensor delivery reversal sensor wrong timing wrong timing ADF open/closed sensor 1 ADF open/closed sensor 1 DF cover open/closed sensor DF cover pen/closed sensor registration sensor, separation sensor, feed sensor, delivery reversal sensor
PI7 PI1 PI1 PI8 PI8 PI9 PI9 PS502 PS502 PI6 PI6 PI1,PI7,PI8,PI9
0095
original placement sensor, DF PI5,PI6,PS502 cover open/closed sensor, ADF open/closed sensor 1
A signal arrives indicating the start of pickup in the absence of an original in the tray or while the machine is in an OPEN state.
17-10
Chapter 17 Indicates the source of paper used. 6. ERR
F-17-11
- <No.> Indicates the order of occurrence of the error in question.1 to 50 (the higher the number, the older the error) - <DATE> Indicates the date of the error in question. - <TIME1> Indicates the date of the error in question. - <TIME2> Indicates the error return time. - <CODE> Indicates the cover of the error in question. - <DTL> Indicates the detail code of the error in question. (if not, '0000') - <L> Location of occurrence
T-17-11 Location Classification 0: main controller 1: Feeder 2: finisher 3: not used 4: reader unit 5: printer unit 6: PDL board (any of) 7: fax board
- <P> not used 7. HV-STS

T-17-12 COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS Subheading PRI-GRID PRE-TR BIAS Contents Use it to indicate the level of current of the primary grid bias. unit: A Use it to indicate the level of current of Pre-transfer corona assembly. unit: A Use it to indicate the developing bias DC level. unit: V Use it to indicate the primary transfer static eliminator bias level. 1EL Display range: -4000 to 0 reference: -4000 (unit: V) Use it to indicate the secondary transfer static eliminator bias level. 2EL Display range: -4000 to 0 reference: 0 (unit: yA) Display the output level of current at pre-transfer charger (Y) PRE-TR-Y/M/C Display range: -650 to 0 2 2 2 Level 1 1 1
8. CCD
T-17-13 COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD Subheading TARGET-B TARGET-G TARGET-R GAIN-OB GAIN-OG Use it to check the shading target value for B. Use it to check the shading target value for G. Use it to check the shading target value for R. Use it to indicate the gain level adjustment value (for color) of odd-numbered blue bits of the CCD. Use it to indicate the gain level adjustment value (for color) of odd-numbered green bits of the CCD. Contents Level 2 2 2 2 2
17-11
Chapter 17
COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD Subheading GAIN-OR GAIN-EB GAIN-EG GAIN-ER Contents Use it to indicate the gain level adjustment (for color) of odd-numbered red bits of the CCD. Use it to indicate the gain level adjustment value (for color) of even-numbered blue bits of the CCD. Use it to indicate the gain level adjustment (for color) of even-numbered green bits of the CCD. Use it to indicate the gain level adjustment value (for color) of even-numbered red bits of the CCD. Level 2 2 2 2
9. DPOT
T-17-14 COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT Subheading DPOT-K Contents Use it to indicate the surface potential of the photosensitive drum. unit: V 1 VDM Use it to indicate the dark-area potential (VD) for copying. unit: V 1 1TR-DC4K Output setting value of Primary transfer DC (Bk of 4C) (Unit: V) 400 to 3000[V] Level
VCONT-Y/M/C/K VBACK-Y/M/C/K 2TR-PPR
Use it to indicate the present value of the target contrast potential (Y/M/C/K) (Unit: V). Use it to indicate the current value of the fogging removal potential (Y/M/C/K) (Unit: V). Use it to indicate the output level of the paper voltage of the secondary transfer DC voltage generated mot recently.
2 2 2
2TR-BASE
Use it to indicate the output level of the reference voltage of the secondary transfer DC voltage generated most recently.
1TR-DC-Y/M/C/K VDT-SNS
Use it to indicate the output level of the primary transfer DC voltage (Y/M/C/K) generated most recently. Use it to indicate target value of the dark-area potential (VD) of the potential sensor position. (unit: V; optimum value: 504 V)
2 VDT-BK Use it to indicate the target value of the dark-are potential (VD) of the point of black development. (unit: V; optimum value: about 490 V) Use it to indicate the target value of the dark-area potential of the point of color development. (unit: V; optimum value: about 450 V) Use it to indicate the laser power level of Y/M/C/K used as the VL target potential. (optimum value: 00 to FF in hexadecimal notation)
VDT-YMC
LPWR-Y/M/C/K
10. DENS
T-17-15 COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS Subheading DENS-Y/M/C Contents Use it to indicate the result of computation made on the density of the patch image (YMCK) formed on the photosensitive drum (indicating the difference from the target value in %). The value is updated when the machine performs toner supply operation after the main power switch is turned on. Optimum value: -25 to +25 Level
REF-Y/M/C
Use it to indicate the standard value (YMC) for toner on the developing cylinder. The value is updated when the machine performs toner supply operation after the main power switch is turned on. Optimum value: 464 to 560
SGNL-Y/M/C
Use it to indicate the measurement of the toner on the developing cylinder (YMC). The value is updated when the machine performs toner supply operation after the main paper switch is turned on. Optimum value: 225 to 863
17-12
Chapter 17
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS Subheading P-SENS-P Indicates the result of background detection (P wave component) executed as part of analog patch detection. The currently valid value will be indicated only upon execution of analog patch detection after the power is turned on. DENS-S-Y/M/C Use it to indicate the measurement (YMC) of the density of the sample image formed during ATR control. 2 D-Y/M/C -TRGT Use it to indicate the target value (YMC) for toner. 2 DEV-DC-Y/M/C/K Use it to indicate the output level of the developing DC voltage (YMCB) generated most recently. 2 D-CRNT-P/S P-SENS-S Use it to indicate the measurement (P wave, S wave) of the dark current at time of ATR control. Use it to indicate the measurement of the intensity of light (S wave) of the background (drum) at time of ATR control. 2 DENS-Y/M/C-H DS-S-Y/M/C/-H Use it to indicate the history of ATR sensor measurements (YMC; latest 8). Use it to indicate the history of the results of patch image detection (YMC; latest 8). 2 P-LED-DA SPL-LG-Y/M/C Use it to indicate the D/A settings for the patch image sensor. Display supply history (Y-color, Latest 8 times) Display supply history (M-color, Latest 8 times) Display supply history (C-color, Latest 8 times) Use it to indicate the measurement of the background at time of analog patch operation (S wave component). Use it to indicate the measurement of the background at time of analog patch operation (P wave component). 2 2 1 Contents Level
2 2 2
PSENSP-S PSENSP-P
11. MISC
T-17-16 COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC Subheading ENV-TR Contents Display the environmental ranges Dsiplay the environmental ranges for transfer controlling according to the environment (temprature and humidity) inside the printer. Range of value 1: Low humidity (to 5.8 g) 2: Normal humidity (5.9 to 17.3 g) 3: High humidity (from 17.4 g) Factory default value: The value adjusted at the factory/The value after RAM cleared: 2 LPOWER Use it indicate the laser intensity in real time. 1 Level
12. ALARM-1
T-17-17 COPIER>DISPLAY>ALARM-1 Subheading IMG-DT-Y/M/C/K LST-DY-Y/M/C Contents Average value of image proportions created with Y/M/C/K. Use it to indicate the image duty for Y/M/C generated most recently. range of display: 0 to 100 (%) Level 1
13. ALARM-2
17-13
Chapter 17
F-17-12 T-17-18 Item No. DATE TIME1 TIME2 CODE DTL CNTR Description Indicates the order of occurrence of alarms (1 to 50; the highest number indicating the oldest) Indicates the date of occurrence of alarms Indicates the time of occurrence of alarms Indicates the time of occurrence of alarms Indicates the location f occurrence of alarms Indicates alarm codes. Indicates the reading of the total counter at time of alarm.
14. ENVRNT Use it to indicate the environment log. The machine shows a log of changes taking place as indicated by the readings of the environment sensor and the output of the fixing thermistor: machine inside temperature in deg C, humidity in %, fixing roller surface temperature (center) in deg C. Remarks: The intervals at which data is colleted may be changed in the following service mode item: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>ENVP-IN.
F-17-13 T-17-19 Item No. DATE TIME D+deg C E+% F+deg C Description order of data collection (highest number indicating oldest data) date of data collection time of data collection machine inside temperature machine inside Humidity fixing roller surface (center) temperature
17.2.1.2 COPIER List

0011-6083
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. VERSION
17-14
Chapter 17
T-17-20 COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION Subheading Contents Level
Use it to indicate the ROM version of various PCBs (copier, accessories). - The format of display is as follows: if R-CON XX.YY>, XX: version; YY: R&D control number. - If no PCB is installed, the display will be as follows: <-:->.
DC-CON R-CON PANEL ECO FEEDER SORTER FAX NIB PS/PCL SDL-STCH OP-CONT MN-CONT DIAG-DVC RUI PUNCH LANG-EN LANG-FR LANG-DE LANG-IT LANG-JP GDI-UFR MEAP OCR-CN OCR-JP OCR-KR OCR-TW BOOT ROM TTS-JA TTS-EN WEB-BRWS LANG-CS LANG-DA LANG-EL LANG-ES LANG-ET LANG-FI LANG-HU LANG-KO LANG-NL LANG-NO LANG-PL LANG-PT LANG-RU LANG-SL LANG-SV LANG-TW LANG-ZH ECO-ID LANG-BU LANG-CR LANG-RM LANG-SK LANG-TK
Use it to indicate the ROM version of the DC controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the reader controller PCB. Use it to check the ROM version of the control panel controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the ECO PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the DADF controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the finisher controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the FAX board. Use it to indicate the Rom version of the network interface PCB Use it to check the Version of Printer board (PS/PCL function) Use it to check the ROM version of the saddle stitcher controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the option controller PCB. Use it to check the ROM version of the main controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the self diagnosis device. Use it to indicate the version of the remote UI. Use it to indicate the version of the punch unit. Use it to check the version of an English language file. Use it to indicate the version of the French language file. Use it to indicate the version of the German language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Italian language file. Use it to indicate the Japanese language file. Use it to indicate the version of the UFR board (GDI-UFR function). Use it to indicate the Version of MEAP contents Use it to indicate the OCR version of Chinese (Simplified characters) Use it to indicate the OCR version of Japanese Use it to indicate the OCR version of Korean Use it to indicate the OCR version of Chinese (Traditional characters) Use it to indicate the BOOT ROM version Use it to indicate the Version of Japanese voice dictionary Use it to indicate the Version of English voice dictionary Use it to indicate the Web browser version Use it to indicate the version of the Czech language file. Use it to indicate version of the Danish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Greek language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Spanish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Estonian language file. Use is to indicate the version of the Finnish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Hungarian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Korean language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Dutch language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Norwegian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Polish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Portuguese language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Russian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Slovenian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Swedish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Chinese (traditional) language file Use it to indicate the version of the Chinese (simplified) language file. Use it to indicate the version of the ECO-ID number. Use it to indicate the version of the Bulgarian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Croatian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Romanian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Slovakian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Turkish language file.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2. ACC-STS
17-15
Chapter 17
T-17-21 COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS Subheading FEEDER Use it to indicate the presence of a DADF. 0: not connected. 1: connected. Use it to indicate the presence of a finisher or a punch unit. X: Connection status of Finisher Y: Connection status of Punch unit X: 0: No connection 1: Finisher 2: Saddle finisher 3: Saddle finisher + Inserter 4: Saddle finisher + Paper folding unit 5: Saddle finisher + Inserter + Paperfolding unit 6: 3K Stacker 7: Inner finisher 8: External small finisher Y: 0: No connection 1: 2-hole 2: 2/3-hole 3: 4-hole (FRN) 4: 4-hole (SWDN) Use it to check the presence of a paper deck. 0: not connected. 1: connected. Use it to check the state of connection of a card reader: 0: card reader connected but card not inserted. 1: card reader not connected; or, card reader connected and card inserted (indicates '1' if ready for copying; indicates '0' if not ready for copying) Use it to indicate the presence of a copier data controller. 0: not connected. 1: connected. Use it to check the size of the memory mounted on the main controller PCB. RAM: xx[MB] Uses it to indicate the state of connection of a coin vendor. 0: not connected. 1: connected. Use it to check the state of connection of a network board. 0: not connected. 1: Ethernet board connected. 2: TokenRing board connected. 3: Ethernet board and TokeRing board connected. Use it to check the state of installation of network firmware. 0: not installed. 1: installed. Use it to check the presence of the SEND function. 0: SEND function absent. 1: SEND function present. Available PDL is displayed (1)b19 to 16: Reserve (To be used when PDL is newly added Available PDL is displayed (2) HDD type is displayed (less than 30 characters). Board name connected to PCI1 is displayed (less than 30 characters).If no board is connected, '-' (hyphen) is displayed. - Voice board: Voice Board - Encryption board: 3DES Board - GIGA Ethernet board: 1Gbit-Board Use it to indicate the connection speed of a USB device. Indicates the connection speed of the 8 USB devices connected to the USB host chip. - OFF - LOW - FLL - HGH Contents Level 1
SORTER
DECK
CARD
DATA-CON
RAM COINROBO
NIB
NETWARE
SEND
PDL-FNC1 PDL-FNC2 HDD PCI1
1 1 1
USBH-SPD
3. ANALOG
T-17-22 COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG Subheading TEMP Contents Use it to check the machine inside temperature (environment sensor; in deg C). 1 Level
17-16
Chapter 17
COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG Subheading HUM ABS-HUM FIX-UC FIX-UE Use it to check the surface temperature at the edge of the fixing upper roller (as detected by the sub thermistor; in deg C) 1 FIX-LC Use it to indicate the temperature of the center of the fixing lower roller. unit: deg C 1 FIX-LE Use it to indicate the temperature of the edge of the fixing lower roller. unit: deg C 1 FIX-EXC Use it to indicate the temperature of the center of the outside heating roller. unit: deg C 1 FIX-EXE Use it to indicate the temperature of the edge of the outside heating roller unit: deg C 1 Contents Use it to check the machine inside humidity (environment sensor; in %RH). Use it to check moisture content (environment sensor; in g). Use it to check the surface temperature of the middle of the fixing upper roller (as detected by the main thermistor; in deg C) 1 Level 1 1
4. CST-STS
5. JAM
17-17
Chapter 17
F-17-14
17-18
Chapter 17


17-19
Chapter 17

0003 0004 0005
PI1 PI1 PI8
0006
feed sensor
PI8
0007
PI9
0008
PI9
0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0071 0073 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094
0095
17-20
F-17-15

8. CCD
17-21
Chapter 17
9. DPOT
2 2 2
2TR-BASE
VDT-YMC
LPWR-Y/M/C/K
10. DENS
REF-Y/M/C
SGNL-Y/M/C
17-22
Chapter 17
2 2 2
PSENSP-S PSENSP-P
11. MISC
12. ALARM-1
T-17-36 COPIER>DISPLAY>ALARM-1 Subheading IMG-DT-Y/M/C/K LST-DY-Y/M/C Contents Average value of image proportions created with Y/M/C/K. Use it to indicate the image duty for Y/M/C generated most recently. range of display: 0 to 100 (%) Level 1
13. ALARM-2
17-23
Chapter 17

0004-9334
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1. VERSION
17-24
Chapter 17
T-17-39 COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION Subheading Contents Level
Use it to indicate the ROM version of various PCBs (copier, accessories). - The format of display is as follows: if R-CON XX.YY>, XX: version; YY: R&D control number. - If no PCB is installed, the display will be as follows: <-:->.
DC-CON R-CON PANEL ECO FEEDER SORTER FAX NIB PS/PCL LIPS SDL-STCH OP-CONT BOOT-ROM
Use it to indicate the ROM version of the DC controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the reader controller PCB. Use it to check the ROM version of the control panel controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the ECO PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the DADF controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the finisher controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the FAX board. Use it to indicate the Rom version of the network interface PCB Use it to check the Version of Printer board (PS/PCL function) Use it to check the version of the UFR board (LIPS). Use it to check the ROM version of the saddle stitcher controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the option controller PCB. Use it to indicate the boot ROM version of the main controller PCB. - if copier model/GDI-UFR model, xx.yyC - if LIPS model, xx.yyL - if PS/PCL model, xx.yy.N Use it to check the ROM version of the main controller PCB. Use it to indicate the ROM version of the self diagnosis device. Use it to indicate the version of the remote UI. Use it to indicate the version of the punch unit. Use it to check the version of an English language file. Use it to indicate the version of the French language file. Use it to indicate the version of the German language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Italian language file. Use it to indicate the Japanese language file. Use it to indicate the version of the UFR board (GDI-UFR function). Use it to indicate the version of the Czech language file. Use it to indicate version of the Danish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Greek language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Spanish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Estonian language file. Use is to indicate the version of the Finnish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Hungarian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Korean language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Dutch language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Norwegian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Polish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Portuguese language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Russian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Slovenian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Swedish language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Chinese (traditional) language file Use it to indicate the version of the Chinese (simplified) language file. Use it to indicate the version of the ECO-ID number. Use it to indicate the version of the Bulgarian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Croatian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Romanian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Slovakian language file. Use it to indicate the version of the Turkish language file.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
MN-CONT DIAG-DVC RUI PUNCH LANG-EN LANG-FR LANG-DE LANG-IT LANG-JP GDI-UFR LANG-CS LANG-DA LANG-EL LANG-ES LANG-ET LANG-FI LANG-HU LANG-KO LANG-NL LANG-NO LANG-PL LANG-PT LANG-RU LANG-SL LANG-SV LANG-TW LANG-ZH ECO-ID LANG-BU LANG-CR LANG-RM LANG-SK LANG-TK
2. ACC-STS
T-17-40 COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS Subheading FEEDER Use it to indicate the presence of a DADF. 0: not connected. 1: connected. Contents Level 1
17-25
Chapter 17
COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS Subheading SORTER Contents Use it to indicate the presence of a finisher or a punch unit. X: Connection status of Finisher Y: Connection status of Punch unit X: 0: No connection 1: Finisher 2: Saddle finisher 3: Saddle finisher + Inserter 4: Saddle finisher + Paper folding unit 5: Saddle finisher + Inserter + Paperfolding unit 6: 3K Stacker 7: Inner finisher 8: External small finisher Y: 0: No connection 1: 2-hole 2: 2/3-hole 3: 4-hole (FRN) 4: 4-hole (SWDN) Use it to check the presence of a paper deck. 0: not connected. 1: connected. Use it to check the state of connection of a card reader: 0: card reader connected but card not inserted. 1: card reader not connected; or, card reader connected and card inserted (indicates '1' if ready for copying; indicates '0' if not ready for copying) Use it to indicate the presence of a copier data controller. 0: not connected. 1: connected. Use it to check the size of the memory mounted on the main controller PCB. RAM: xx[MB] Uses it to indicate the state of connection of a coin vendor. 0: not connected. 1: connected. Use it to check the state of connection of a network board. 0: not connected. 1: Ethernet board connected. 2: TokenRing board connected. 3: Ethernet board and TokeRing board connected. Use it to check the state of installation of network firmware. 0: not installed. 1: installed. Use it to check the presence of the SEND function. 0: SEND function absent. 1: SEND function present. Available PDL is displayed (1)b19 to 16: Reserve (To be used when PDL is newly added Available PDL is displayed (2) HDD type is displayed (less than 30 characters). Board name connected to PCI1 is displayed (less than 30 characters).If no board is connected, '-' (hyphen) is displayed. - Voice board: Voice Board - Encryption board: 3DES Board - GIGA Ethernet board: 1Gbit-Board Use it to indicate the connection speed of a USB device. Indicates the connection speed of the 8 USB devices connected to the USB host chip. - OFF - LOW - FLL - HGH Level
DECK
CARD
DATA-CON
RAM COINROBO
NIB
NETWARE
SEND
PDL-FNC1 PDL-FNC2 HDD PCI1
1 1 1
USBH-SPD
3. ANALOG
T-17-41 COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG Subheading TEMP HUM ABS-HUM FIX-UC Use it to check the machine inside humidity (environment sensor; in %RH). Use it to check moisture content (environment sensor; in g). Use it to check the surface temperature of the middle of the fixing upper roller (as detected by the main thermistor; in deg C) 1 Contents Use it to check the machine inside temperature (environment sensor; in deg C). 1 1 1 Level
17-26
Chapter 17
COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG Subheading FIX-UE Contents Use it to check the surface temperature at the edge of the fixing upper roller (as detected by the sub thermistor; in deg C) 1 FIX-LC Use it to indicate the temperature of the center of the fixing lower roller. unit: deg C 1 FIX-LE Use it to indicate the temperature of the edge of the fixing lower roller. unit: deg C 1 FIX-EXC Use it to indicate the temperature of the center of the outside heating roller. unit: deg C 1 FIX-EXE Use it to indicate the temperature of the edge of the outside heating roller unit: deg C 1 Level
4. CST-STS
5. JAM
17-27
Chapter 17
F-17-18
17-28
Chapter 17


17-29
Chapter 17

0003 0004 0005
PI1 PI1 PI8
0006
feed sensor
PI8
0007
PI9
0008
PI9
0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0071 0073 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094
0095
17-30
F-17-19

8. CCD
17-31
Chapter 17
9. DPOT
2 2 2
2TR-BASE
VDT-YMC
LPWR-Y/M/C/K
10. DENS
REF-Y/M/C
SGNL-Y/M/C
17-32
Chapter 17
2 2 2
PSENSP-S PSENSP-P
11. MISC
12. ALARM-1
T-17-55 COPIER>DISPLAY>ALARM-1 Subheading IMG-DT-Y/M/C/K LST-DY-Y/M/C Contents Average value of image proportions created with Y/M/C/K. Use it to indicate the image duty for Y/M/C generated most recently. range of display: 0 to 100 (%) Level 1 2
13. ALARM-2
17-33
Chapter 17
17.2.2 FEEDER 17.2.2.1 FEEDER List

0004-9345
T-17-58 FEEDER>DISPLAY Subheading FEEDSIZE Contents The size of the original detected by the feeder will be indicated Level 1
17-34
Chapter 17
FEEDER>DISPLAY Subheading TRY-WIDE Contents Indicates the length of the original width detection slide (paper width detention; 0.1 mm). Indicates the length of the slide used to detect the width of the original in the DF' s original pickup tray (distance between 2 points). Level
SPSN-LMN
Use it to indicate the manual adjustment value (light-emission voltage) of the post-separation sensor. Optimum range 179 or less 1
SPSN-RCV
Use it to indicate the manual adjustment value (light reception voltage) of the post-separation sensor. Optimum range paper present: 154 or less paper absent: 179 or more 1
RDSN-LMN
Use it to indicate manual adjustment value (light emission voltage of the reader sensor. 1 Optimum range 179 or less
RDSN-RCV
Use it to indicate the manual adjustment value (light reception voltage) of the read sensor. Optimum range paper present: 154 or less paper absent: 179 or more 1
DRSN-LMN
Intensity of Light Emitted by the Delivery Reversal Sensor The manually adjusted value (emission voltage) of the delivery reversal sensor will be indicated. 1 Optimum range 905 or less
DRSN-RCV
Intensity of Light received by the Delivery Reversal Sensor The intensity of light received by the delivery reversal sensor after manual adjustment will be indicated 1 Optimum range paper present: 154 or less paper absent: 179 or more
17.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode)

17.3.1 Overview
0001-0118
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The following appears in response to COPIER>I/O; descriptions of the items (limited to those needed in the field) area given on the pages that follow:
Display
I/O
Adjust
Function
Option
Test
Counter
DC-CON R-CON
FEEDER SORTER
MN-CONT
F-17-22
1. Guide to the Screen
17-35
Chapter 17
Display
I/O
Adjust
Function
Option
Test
Counter
<DC-CON> P001 xxxxxxxx P002 xxxxxxxx P003 xxxxxxxx P004 xxxxxxxx P005 xxxxxxxx P006 xxxxxxxx P007 xxxxxxxx P008 xxxxxxxx
< 1/3 >
< READY >
Bit0 Bit7 Address
F-17-23
17.3.2 DC-CON
0005-1030
T-17-59 Address P001 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-9 10-12 13 14 15 P002 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P003 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11-14 15 Item main thermistor (overheating) main thermistor (open circuit) shift thermistor (overheating) shift thermistor (open circuit) outside heating roller thermistor (overheating) outside heating roller thermistor (open circuit) thermistor-related hard latch signal reserved for check DDI general input DDI power not used interlock 24 V (detected) Upper right cover open/closed sensor (PS5) Lower right cover open/closed sensor (PS64) Front cover switch (SW12) Black toner supply motor connection (M25) fixing unit (detected) feeder unit (detected) right deck presence/absence (detected) left deck presence/absence (detected) Drum/ITB motor (M2) lock (detected) developing motor (M3) lock (detected) fixing motor (M4) lock (detected) primary charging suction fan (FM1) lock (detected) Primary charging assembly exhaust fan (FM2) lock (detected) Fixing heat exhaust fan (FM5) lock (detected) power supply motor lock (detected) Delivery cooling fan 2 (fm10) port 0 port 1 port 2 port 3 port 4 port 5 port 6 port 7 hard counter hard counter Delivery cooling fan 1 (fm6) not used black developing roller bias ON signal 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: 24 V detected 0: door open 0: door open 1: door open 0: connected (valid only if motor at rest) 0: unit installed 0: unit installed 1: ON 1: ON 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) Remarks 0: error 0: error 0: error 0: error 0: error 0: error 0: error not used 1: blown fuse not used 0: POWER ON
17-36
Chapter 17
Address P004 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5-7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14-15 P005 0 1 2 3 4 5-7 8 9 10 11 12 13-15 P006 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13-15 P007 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Item Left deck paper sensor (PS42) Left deck limit sensor (PS41) Left deck lifter sensor (PS43) Left deck paper level sensor A (PS44) Left deck paper level sensor B (PS5) factory mode switch ITB cleaning HP sensor (PS23) Outside heating roller HP sensor (PS21) ITB HP sensor A (PS1) ITB HP sensor B (PS30) Developing rotary solenoid sensor(PS8) Drum HP sensor (PS65) not used Cassette 3 paper sensor (PS50) Cassette 3 limit sensor (PS49) Cassette 3 lifter sensor (PS51) Cassette 3 paper level sensor A (PS52) Cassette 3 paper level sensor B (PS53) not used Right deck paper sensor (PS35) Right deck limit sensor (PS34) Right deck lifter sensor (PS36) Right deck paper level sensor A (PS37) Right deck paper level sensor B (PS38) not used Duplexing confluence sensor (PS18) vertical path 0 sensor Vertical path 1 sensor (PS60) Vertical path 2 sensor (PS61) Vertical path 3 sensor (PS62) Vertical path 4 sensor (PS63) Fixing inlet sensor (PS11) Outside delivery sensor (PS13) Cassette 4 paper sensor (PS56) Cassette 4 limit sensor (PS55) Cassette 4 lifter sensor (PS57) Cassette 4 paper level sensor A (PS58) Cassette 4 paper level sensor B (PS59) not used upper cassette size detection 0 upper cassette size detection 1 upper cassette size detection 2 upper cassette size detection 3 upper cassette size detection 4 not used fixing web solenoid connection detection color toner supply clutch connection detection Left deck pickup sensor (PS40) Right deck pickup sensor (PS33) Cassette 4 pickup sensor (PS54) Cassette 3 pickup sensor (PS48) Left deck limit sensor (PS41) not used Manual feed paper sensor (PS6) Last sheet sensor (PS7) 1: ON 1: ON 0: connected (valid only if solenoid at rest) 0: connected (valid only if solenoid at rest) 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: sensor ON 1: sensor ON 0: sensor ON 0: sensor ON 1: rotary lock (lock state: solenoid FF) check not used 1: paper prevent 1: limit state L: pickup state 0: full 0: full not used 1: paper present 1: limit state L: pickup state 1: paper present 1: paper present not used H: ON H: ON H: ON H: ON H: ON H: ON H: ON H: ON 1: paper present 1: limit state L: pickup state 0: full 0: full not used 0: active 0: active 0: active 0: active 0: active Remarks 1: paper present 1: limit state L: pickup state 1: paper present 1: paper present
17-37
Chapter 17
Address P008 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5-7 8 9 10 11 12 13-15 P009 0 1 2 3-5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14-15 P012 0 1 2 3 4 5 6-7 P013 P014 0-7 0 1 2 3 4-7 P015 0-1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P016 P017 0-2 3-7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P018 0 1 2 3 4 5-7 P019 P020 P021 P022 P023 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 Item shift tray connection detection HP sensor (rear) (ps102) HP sensor (front) (ps101) Tray paper sensor (PS103) Limit sensor (front) (PS105) for R&D lower cassette size detection 0 lower cassette size detection 1 lower cassette size detection 2 lower cassette size detection 3 lower cassette size detection 4 for R&D waste toner error detection not used Web length sensor (PS20) for R&D Process unit cooling fan(FM7) lock detection motor cooling fan detection black toner level sensor (TS1) Color toner level sensor (ps25) sub hopper level sensor (TS2) not used Transparency sensor (rear) (ps29) Hopper assembly open/closed sensor (ps28) not used DDI serial transmission data soft IPC serial transmission data DDI serial reception data soft IPC serial reception data DDI serial DDI serial not used for R&D data on transmission to PC data on reception for PC flow control on communication with PC flow control on communication with PC not used for R&D DDI ready DDI ready ITOP_A sensor ITOP interrupt registration ON interrupt rotary HP interrupt not used for R&D FIN_RESET FIN_DOWNLOAD FIN_MODE LWR* HWR* RD* for R&D CLK20 LED_ON CS3* CS2* CS1* CS0* not used not used not used not used not used not used LED CS for PIO [0],[1] CS for RAM CS for ASIC CS for ROM 1: set 0: open 1: locked (sync rotation) not used 1: toner present 1: toner present 1: toner present 1: web absent 0: active 0: active 0: active 0: active 0: active Remarks 1: connected 1: HP detection 1: HP detection 0: paper present 0: full
17-38
Chapter 17
Address P024 P025 P026 P027 P028 P029 bit 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 Item not used not used not used not used not used not used Remarks
17.3.3 DC-CON
0011-6715

T-17-60 Address P001 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-9 10-12 13 14 15 P002 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P003 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11-14 15 Item main thermistor (overheating) main thermistor (open circuit) shift thermistor (overheating) shift thermistor (open circuit) outside heating roller thermistor (overheating) outside heating roller thermistor (open circuit) thermistor-related hard latch signal reserved for check DDI general input DDI power not used interlock 24 V (detected) Upper right cover open/closed sensor (PS5) Lower right cover open/closed sensor (PS64) Front cover switch (SW12) Black toner supply motor connection (M25) fixing unit (detected) feeder unit (detected) right deck presence/absence (detected) left deck presence/absence (detected) Drum/ITB motor (M2) lock (detected) developing motor (M3) lock (detected) fixing motor (M4) lock (detected) primary charging suction fan (FM1) lock (detected) Primary charging assembly exhaust fan (FM2) lock (detected) Fixing heat exhaust fan (FM5) lock (detected) power supply motor lock (detected) Delivery cooling fan 2 (fm10) port 0 port 1 port 2 port 3 port 4 port 5 port 6 port 7 hard counter hard counter Delivery cooling fan 1 (fm6) not used black developing roller bias ON signal 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: 24 V detected 0: door open 0: door open 1: door open 0: connected (valid only if motor at rest) 0: unit installed 0: unit installed 1: ON 1: ON 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) 0: lock (sync rotation) Remarks 0: error 0: error 0: error 0: error 0: error 0: error 0: error not used 1: blown fuse not used 0: POWER ON
17-39
Chapter 17
Address P004 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5-7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14-15 P005 0 1 2 3 4 5-7 8 9 10 11 12 13-15 P006 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13-15 P007 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Item Left deck paper sensor (PS42) Left deck limit sensor (PS41) Left deck lifter sensor (PS43) Left deck paper level sensor A (PS44) Left deck paper level sensor B (PS5) factory mode switch ITB cleaning HP sensor (PS23) Outside heating roller HP sensor (PS21) ITB HP sensor A (PS1) ITB HP sensor B (PS30) Developing rotary solenoid sensor(PS8) Drum HP sensor (PS65) not used Cassette 3 paper sensor (PS50) Cassette 3 limit sensor (PS49) Cassette 3 lifter sensor (PS51) Cassette 3 paper level sensor A (PS52) Cassette 3 paper level sensor B (PS53) not used Right deck paper sensor (PS35) Right deck limit sensor (PS34) Right deck lifter sensor (PS36) Right deck paper level sensor A (PS37) Right deck paper level sensor B (PS38) not used Duplexing confluence sensor (PS18) vertical path 0 sensor Vertical path 1 sensor (PS60) Vertical path 2 sensor (PS61) Vertical path 3 sensor (PS62) Vertical path 4 sensor (PS63) Fixing inlet sensor (PS11) Outside delivery sensor (PS13) Cassette 4 paper sensor (PS56) Cassette 4 limit sensor (PS55) Cassette 4 lifter sensor (PS57) Cassette 4 paper level sensor A (PS58) Cassette 4 paper level sensor B (PS59) not used upper cassette size detection 0 upper cassette size detection 1 upper cassette size detection 2 upper cassette size detection 3 upper cassette size detection 4 not used fixing web solenoid connection detection color toner supply clutch connection detection Left deck pickup sensor (PS40) Right deck pickup sensor (PS33) Cassette 4 pickup sensor (PS54) Cassette 3 pickup sensor (PS48) Left deck limit sensor (PS41) not used Manual feed paper sensor (PS6) Last sheet sensor (PS7) 1: ON 1: ON 0: connected (valid only if solenoid at rest) 0: connected (valid only if solenoid at rest) 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: sensor ON 1: sensor ON 0: sensor ON 0: sensor ON 1: rotary lock (lock state: solenoid FF) check not used 1: paper prevent 1: limit state L: pickup state 0: full 0: full not used 1: paper present 1: limit state L: pickup state 1: paper present 1: paper present not used H: ON H: ON H: ON H: ON H: ON H: ON H: ON H: ON 1: paper present 1: limit state L: pickup state 0: full 0: full not used 0: active 0: active 0: active 0: active 0: active Remarks 1: paper present 1: limit state L: pickup state 1: paper present 1: paper present
17-40
Chapter 17
Address P008 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5-7 8 9 10 11 12 13-15 P009 0 1 2 3-5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14-15 P012 0 1 2 3 4 5 6-7 P013 P014 0-7 0 1 2 3 4-7 P015 0-1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P016 P017 0-2 3-7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P018 0 1 2 3 4 5-7 P019 P020 P021 P022 P023 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 Item shift tray connection detection HP sensor (rear) (ps102) HP sensor (front) (ps101) Tray paper sensor (PS103) Limit sensor (front) (PS105) for R&D lower cassette size detection 0 lower cassette size detection 1 lower cassette size detection 2 lower cassette size detection 3 lower cassette size detection 4 for R&D waste toner error detection not used Web length sensor (PS20) for R&D Process unit cooling fan(FM7) lock detection motor cooling fan detection black toner level sensor (TS1) Color toner level sensor (ps25) sub hopper level sensor (TS2) not used Transparency sensor (rear) (ps29) Hopper assembly open/closed sensor (ps28) not used DDI serial transmission data soft IPC serial transmission data DDI serial reception data soft IPC serial reception data DDI serial DDI serial not used for R&D data on transmission to PC data on reception for PC flow control on communication with PC flow control on communication with PC not used for R&D DDI ready DDI ready ITOP_A sensor ITOP interrupt registration ON interrupt rotary HP interrupt not used for R&D FIN_RESET FIN_DOWNLOAD FIN_MODE LWR* HWR* RD* for R&D CLK20 LED_ON CS3* CS2* CS1* CS0* not used not used not used not used not used not used LED CS for PIO [0],[1] CS for RAM CS for ASIC CS for ROM 1: set 0: open 1: locked (sync rotation) not used 1: toner present 1: toner present 1: toner present 1: web absent 0: active 0: active 0: active 0: active 0: active Remarks 1: connected 1: HP detection 1: HP detection 0: paper present 0: full
17-41
Chapter 17
Address P024 P025 P026 P027 P028 bit 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 Item not used not used not used not used not used Remarks
17.3.4 R-CON
0005-1034
T-17-61 Indication P001 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P002 0 1 2-3 4 5 6 7 P003 0 1 2 3 4 5 6-7 P004 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P005 0 1 2 3 4-7 P006 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P007 0 1 2 3-4 5 6 7 Item delivery reversal motor CLK DDIS IF (OPTO0-) DDIS IF (SPRDY) DDIS IF (OPTI0) ADF pickup motor CLK fan power ON signal ADF read motor CLK size senor ON shift motor CLK 24V power supply monitor not used scanner motor CLK 13V power supply monitor Use it to switch between notations to suit the local needs. DDIS IF (SCPRDY) DDIS serial communication (TxD) ADF serial communication (TxD) DDIS serial communication (RxD) ADF serial communication (RxD) LED control ADF serial communication (SCK) not used original size detection 0 original size detection 1 original size detection 2 original size detection 3 DF connection detection DDIS IF (SRTS) scanner motor Vref output not used PC connection IF (TxD) PC connecting IF (RxD) fan lock detection signal DDIS IF (SCTS) not used not used PCB check terminal DDIS IF (OPTI1) DDIS IF (OPTO1) ADF sensor interrupt input copyboard open/closed sensor interrupt input 0 HP sensor interrupt input not used address bus 16 address bus 17 address bus 18 not used ADF pickup motor lock interrupt input ADF pickup motor lock interrupt input ADF delivery reversal motor lock interrupt input 1: normal 0: active 0: active 0: active 1: copyboard cover closed 1: HP 0: original present 0: original present 0: original present 0: original present 0: reception ready 0: enabled 0: reception ready 0: normal 0: others (OEM) 1: Canon 0: operation ready 1: ON 0: normal 1: ON 1: ON 0: operation prohibited 0: operation permitted 0: active Remarks
17-42
Chapter 17
Indication P008 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P009 0 1 2 3 4 5-7 Item lamp ON signal CCD drive ON signal wait signal L light signal H light signal read signal ADF serial communication (LOAD) CPU clock output not used shading RAM chip select work RAM chip select ASIC registration chip select ROM chip select not used 0: selected 0: selected 0: selected 0: selected Remarks 1: on 1: on 0: wait 0: active 0: active 0: active 0: enabled -
17.3.5 FEEDER
0005-1035
T-17-62 Address P001 bit 0 1 2 3 4-7 P002 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P003 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P004 0 1-6 7 P005 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P006 P007 P008 P009 P010 P011 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 Indication read sensor registration sensor delivery reversal sensor ADF open/closed sensor not used delivery reversal motor current setting 1 delivery reversal motor current setting 2 release motor current setting 1 release motor current setting 2 stamp solenoid drive clutch drive original detection LED fan motor drive pickup motor current setting CUT read motor current setting CUT shift motor current setting read motor mode setting read motor current setting 1 read motor current setting 2 pickup motor current setting 1 pickup motor current setting 2 feeder cover open/closed sensor not used stamp not used release HP sensor delivery reversal sensor post-separation sensor LGL sensor A4R/LTRR identification sensor not used original placement sensor for R&D for R&D for R&D for R&D for R&D for R&D 0: paper present 1: released 0: paper present 0: paper present 1: paper present 1: AB 0: stamp present 0: feeder cover open 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON Remarks 0: paper present 1: paper present 0: paper present 0: ADF open
17.3.6 SORTER
0005-1036
17-43
Chapter 17
T-17-63 Address P001 Controller STACKER Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P002 STACKER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P003 P004 STACKER STACKER 0-7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P005 STACKER 0-1 2 3 4-7 P006 STACKER 0 1-2 3 4 5 6 7 P007 STACKER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Indication inlet feed motor A inlet feed motor B inlet feed motor A inlet feed motor B inlet feed motor switch 0 inlet feed motor switch 1 inlet feed/stack delivery motor standby signal common solenoid ON signal punch feed motor A punch feed motor A punch feed motor B punch feed motor B punch feed motor current switch 0 punch feed motor current switch 1 tray 2 motor clock tray 1 motor clock for R&D saddle connection detention signal not used swing HP sensor upper cover open/closed sensor front cover open/closed sensor front cover interlock sensor gear change HP sensor not used for R&D punch transmission request signal saddle 13V ON signal not used punch connection detection not used punch motor standby inlet sensor (IRQ0) paper trailing edge sensor (IRQ1) punch communication input (IRQ2) not used tray approach sensor tray 2 area sensor 1 tray 2 area sensor 2 tray 2 paper sensor 3 tray 2 paper sensor tray paper surface sensor inlet motor clock input stack edging clock input 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 0: ON Remarks
17-44
Chapter 17
Address P008 Controller STACKER Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P009 STACKER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P010 STACKER 0 1 2 3 4-7 P011 STACKER 0 1-2 3 4 5-7 P012 STACKER 0 1 2 3 4 5-7 P013 STACKER 0 1 2 3 4 5-7 P014 STACKER 0 2 3 4-7 P015 STACKER 0 1 2 3-7 Indication tray 3 paper sensor tray 3 connection detection upper paper surface sensor tray 1 interlock sensor tray 1 area sensor 1 tray 1 area sensor 2 tray 1 area sensor 3 tray 1 paper sensor tray 1 shift motor CW tray 1 shift motor enable tray 1 shift motor power supply switch 0 tray 1 shift motor power supply switch 1 tray 2 shift motor CW tray 2 shift motor enable tray 2 shift motor power supply switch 0 tray 2 shift motor power supply switch 1 not used swing shift motor power supply switch 0 swing shift motor phase A pulse output swing motor phase B pulse output not used inlet roller shift solenoid for R&D buffer roller shift solenoid feed path sensor not used gear change phase A gear change phase B gear change motor current switch 0 gear change motor current switch 1 not used for R&D for R&D front alignment HP sensor front alignment HP sensor handling tray paper sensor trailing edge assist HP sensor not used rear alignment motor phase A rear alignment motor phase B rear alignment motor current switch 0 not used front alignment phase A front alignment phase B front alignment motor current swing 0 not used 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: ON Remarks 1: ON 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 0: ON 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON
17-45
Chapter 17
T-17-64 Address P016 Controller STACKER Bit 0 1-4 5 6 7 P017 STACKER 0 1 2 3-4 5 6 7 P018 STACKER 0-3 4 5-7 P019 STACKER 0-1 2 3-4 5-7 P020 STACKER 0 1-7 P021 STACKER 0 1-3 4 5 6 7 P022 STACKER 0-3 4 5 6 7 P023 STACKER 0 1 2-7 P024 SADDLE 0 1-7 P025 P026 P027 P028 P029 P030 SADDLE SADDLE SADDLE SADDLE SADDLE SADDLE 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 Indication not used for R&D CIS power supply ON signal for R&D size sensor drive signal not used 24V power supply monitor signal scanner motor drive signal for R&D 13V power supply monitor signal not used for R&D for R&D LED control signal for R&D not used original size detention 2 not used for R&D for R&D not used not used for R&D ADF sensor interrupt input copyboard cover open/closed sensor interrupt input 0 HP sensor interrupt input copyboard open/closed sensor interrupt input 1 for R&D scanner motor driver power save ADF pickup motor clock interrupt input ADF pickup motor clock interrupt input not used lamp ON signal CIS drive ON signal for R&D for R&D not used not used not used not used not used not used not used 1: ON 1: ON 0: ON 0/1, alternating 0/1, alternating 0: ON 1: cover open 1: HP 1: cover open 0: original present 1: ON 0: normal 0: normal 1: forward 0: reverse 1: ON 1: ON Remarks
17-46
Chapter 17
T-17-65 Address P031 Controller SADDLE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P032 SADDLE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P033 SADDLE 0 1 2 3 4-5 6 7 P034 SADDLE 0 1 2 3 4 5-7 P035 SADDLE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P036 SADDLE 0-1 2 3 4 5-7 P037 SADDLE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P038 PUNCHER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P039 P040 PUNCHER PUNCHER 0-2 3-7 0-3 4 5 6 7 Bit saddle tray paper sensor paper positioning area paper sensor crescent roller HP sensor saddle delivery path sensor saddle path (upstream) sensor saddle path (middle) sensor saddle path (downstream) sensor saddle path sensor butting motor enable signal butting motor normal direction signal butting motor reverse direction signal folding roller HP sensor front door open sensor delivery over open detention (photo sensor) saddle alignment HP sensor delivery cover open 24 V down detection inlet flapper solenoid saddle path switch flapper 1 saddle path switch flapper 2 intermediate feed solenoid not used inlet path sensor not used rear staple motor normal direction rear staple motor reverse direction front staple motor normal direction not used folding roller HP connector open detection not used DIPSW_1 DIPSW_2 DIPSW_3 DIPSW_4 DIPSW_5 DIPSW_6 DIPSW_7 DIPSW_8 not used push switch 1 5V detection signal 24V detection signal not used POWER_ON LED1 LED2 LED3 LEDY TRAY_MTR_CUR TRAY_MTR_B TRAY_MTR_A DIPSW1 DIPSW2 DIPSW3 not used PCH-OUT trailing edge sensor punch encoder clock punch HP sensor for R&D not used for R&D horizontal registration HP sensor horizontal registration motor STB punch motor CCW punch motor CW 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON Indication 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON Remarks
17-47
Chapter 17
Address P041 Controller PUNCHER 0-3 4 5 6 7 P042 PUNCHER 0 1-2 3 4 5 6 7 P043 PUNCHER 0-4 5 6-7 Bit not used DIPSW4 horizontal registration motor CUR for R&D not used LED1 for R&D LED2 front cover sensor for R&D PUSHSW2 PUSHSW1 not used upper cover sensor not used 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON Indication Remarks
17.3.7 MN-CONT
0005-1164
T-17-66 Address P001 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P002 0-7 8 9 10 11-12 13-15 P003 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P004 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P005 0-7 Indication PWR1 PWR2 Watchdog Timer Clear Clock Enable cooling fan ON LED1008 Watchdog Enable DDI DOWNLOAD not used open I/F control open I/F setting open I/F setting for R&D not used IP TEST Sync_Mask SRAM Mask SUB Clock stop PCI(PDL,HDD) soft reset serial EEPROM CS serial EEPROM SCK serial EEPROM DIN coin robot serial select DDI live wake pickup count (for coin robot assist) delivery count (for coin robot assist) LCD backlight control jail SROM access parallel EEPROM write protect fax SSB forced reset SRAM board detection parallel EEPROM R/B# not used operation enable (key SCREW) operation enable (CC-W) operation enable (coin robot) serial EEPROM DO not used not used 0: permitted; 1: prohibited 0: permitted; 1: prohibited 0: permitted; 1: prohibited 1: ON 0: access permitted; 1: access prohibited 0: Write 1: Protect 0: Reset 1: Normal 0: yes; 1: no 0: Busy; 1: Ready 0: IPC 1: Gchip Serial 0: Normal 1: Livewake 0: off 1: on 0:normal 1: Test 0: Mask 1: normal 0: permit; 1: prohibit 0: stop 1: run 0: Reset 1: Normal 0: Ready; 1: not ready Model 0 Model 1 Remarks 1: normal use 1: normal use from 1 to 0 every 50 msec 1: normal use cooling fan control For operation check 1: Watchdog enable 0: At the time of normal operation
17-48
Chapter 17
P006 0-7 8 9 10 11-13 14 15 P007 1-15 16 17-23 P008 0-2 3 4 5-7 8 9 P009 0-2 3 4 5 6-8 9 10 11 for R&D open I/F control (PRDY signal) open I/F signal open I/F setting not used open I/F board detection open I/F board control (CARD) 0: ready; 1: not ready for R&D FAX OPTION for R&D not used PSCNST Printer Power Ready not used SPRTST signal not used for R&D PPRTST signal printer power-on not used for R&D SSCNST signal Scanner Power ON Controller Power Ready 0: Ready; 1: not ready Scanner drive signal printer start-up signal printer start-up signal Scanner drive signal 0: Ready; 1: not ready 0: connected; 1: not connected 0: present; 1: absent Model 0 Model 1
17.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode)

0011-6085
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. ADJ-XY

T-17-67 COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY Subheading ADJ-X Contents Use it to adjust the scanner image leading edge position (i.e., image read start position in sub scanning direction). Method of adjustment - if the non-image width is larger than indicated, decrease the setting. - if an area outside the original is copied, increase the setting. - an increase by '1' will move the image read start position toward the trailing edge by 0.1 mm (i.e., move the image read area toward the trailing edge). - if you have initialized the RAM of the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Level
Range of Adjustment 1 to 100 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 20 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. ADJ-Y Use it to adjust the read start cell position of the CCD (i.e., image read start position in main scanning direction). Method of Adjustment - if the non-image width is larger than indicated, decrease the setting. - if an area outside the original is copied, increase the setting. - an increase by '1' will move the image read start position toward the front by 0.1 mm (i.e., move the image read area toward the front). - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1
Range of Adjustment 47 to 131 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 90 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label.
17-49
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY Subheading ADJ-S Contents Use it when entering the adjustment value for the scanner shading measurement position. Method of Adjustment - a decrease by '1' will move the shading measurement position toward the leading edge by 0.1 mm. - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment 30 to 50 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 50 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. ADJ-Y-DF Use it to adjust the main scanning points for DF SRAM reading mode. Method of Adjustment - an increase by '1' will move the image read start position to the front by 0.1 mm. - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment 21 to 106 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 53 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. STRD-POS Use it to adjust the CCD read position for DF stream reading mode. Method of Adjustment - an increase by '1' will move the image read position to the left by 1 mm. - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment 1 to 200 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 110 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. Level
2. CCD
T-17-68 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD Subheading W-PLT-X/Y/Z Contents Use it when entering the white label data indicated on the standard white plate. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the copyboard glass, enter the value indicated on the copyboard glass. (See the figure below) Level
Range of Adjustment: 1 to 9999 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: W-PLT-X=8271: W-PLT-Y=8735: W-PLT-Z=9418 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. CCDU-RG Use it to correct color displacement in sub scanning direction between RG associated with the CCD unit. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -9 to 9 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label.
17-50
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD Subheading CCDU-GB Contents Use it to correct color displacement in sub scanning direction between GB associated with the CCD unit. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: -9 to 9 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 FCCDU-RG Use it to correct color displacement in sub scanning direction between R and G associated with the CCD unit at time of shipment. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -9 to 9 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. FCCDU-GB Use it to correct color displacement in sub scanning direction between GB associated with the CCD unit at time of shipment. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -9 to 9 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 50-RG Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; RG) for book mode at 50% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the rear controller or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 50-GB Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; GB) for book mode at 50% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 100-RG Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; RG) for book mode at 100% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. Level
17-51
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD Subheading 100-GB Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; GB) for book mode at 100% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 50DF-RG Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement RG) for ADF mode at 50% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 50DF-GB Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; GB) for ADF mode at 50% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 100DF-RG Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; RG) for ADF mode at 100% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 100DF-GB Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; GB) for ADF mode at 100% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. DFTAR-R Use it when entering the shading target value (red) for use when the DF is used (i.e., normal original read position). Method of Adjustment - COPIER>FUNCTION>CC>WLVL1/DF-WLVL2 if the image has a fault when the foregoing service mode item has been executed (e.g., as caused by soiling of the chart), enter the factory measurement using this mode item. - if you have initialize the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Contents Level
Range of Adjustment: 1 to 2047 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 1159 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label.
17-52
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD Subheading DFTAR-G Contents Use it when entering the shading target (green) for the DF (normal original reading position). Method of Adjustment - COPIER>FUNCTION>CD>DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2 if the image starts to develop a fault after executing the foregoing service mode item (e.g., as caused by soiling of the chart), enter the factory measurement using this mode. - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: 1 to 2047 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 1189 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. DFTAR-B Use it to enter the shading target value (blue) for the DF (normal original read position). Method of Adjustment - COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2 if the image starts to develop a fault after executing the foregoing service mode item, enter the factory measurement using this mode item. - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Level
820686679349
va l u e o f W- P L AT E - Z va l u e o f W- P L AT E - X va l u e o f W- P L AT E - Y
F-17-24
3. LASER
T-17-69 COPIER>ADJUST>LASER Subheading PVE-OFST Contents Use it to adjust the degree of offset (point of laser illumination) from the center of the laser beam. Settings range: -600 to 600 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 POWER Use it to adjust the laser output (max). - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Settings range: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 112 LPWR-YMC Use it to set the laser power for when potential control is off (Y/M/C). Method of Adjustment - set the laser power for Y/M/C with potential control off. 2 Settings range: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 112 LPWR-3 Use it to set the laser power for when potential control is off (feed speed at 1/3). Method of Adjustment - set the laser power (at feed speed 1/3) with potential control off. 2 Settings range: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 37 1 Level
17-53
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>LASER Subheading LPWR-2 Contents Use it to set the laser power for when potential control is off (at feed speed 1/3). Method of Adjustment - set the laser power (at feed speed 1/3) with potential control off. Settings range: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 74 Level
4. IMG-REG
T-17-70 COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG Subheading REG-V-Y/K Use it to make rough adjustment of the write start position in sub scanning direction for Y/K. Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will move the pattern toward the trailing edge. - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PC or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10 (unit: pixel) at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Reference This item is for use at the factory only, and must NOT be used in the field. REG2-V-Y/K Use it to make rough adjustment of the write start position in sub scanning direction for Y/K (2nd side in 2-sheet placement). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will move the pattern toward the trailing edge. - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Contents Level
Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10 (unit: pixel) at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Reference This item is for use at the factory only, and must NOT be used in the field. REG-V-M Use it to make rough adjustment of the write start position in main scanning direction for M Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will move the pattern toward the trailing edge. - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1
Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10 (unit: pixel at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Reference This item is for use at the factory only, and must NOT be used in the field. REG2-V-M Use it to make rough adjustment of the write start position in sub scanning direction for M (2nd side in 2-sheet placement). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will move the pattern toward the trailing edge. - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1
Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10 (unit: pixel at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Reference This item is for use at the factory only, and must NOT be used in the field.
5. DENS
17-54
Chapter 17
T-17-71 COPIER>ADJUST>DENS Subheading SGNL-Y/M/C Use it to enter the toner density initial value (Y/M/C). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Contents Level
Range of Adjustment: 200 to 800 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 512 REF-Y/M/C Use it to enter the toner density reference signal (Y/M/C). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: 462 to 562 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 512 PTOFST-Y/M/C Use it to enter the correction value of the Y/M/C laser output for ATR control. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label.
Settings range: 48 to 48 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 P-SGNL-Y/M/C Use it to adjust the density of toner on the intermediate transfer belt for INIT execution (Y/M/C). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Settings range: 200 to 800 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 500 HLMT-PTY/M/C Use it to set an upper limit to patch target density correction (Y/M/C). 2
range of adjustment: -20 to 20 (unit: 0.1%) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 If possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal. LLMT-PTY/M/C Use it to set a lower limit to patch target density correction (Y/M/C). range of adjustment: -20 to 20 (unit: 0.1%) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 If possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal. DMAX-Y/M/C Use it to set an offset value for the Y/M/C density control target value. Method of Adjustment Set an offset value for the Y density control target value while in 2D-MAX control. range of settings: -8 to 8 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 P-TG-Y/M/C Use it to set an offset value for the ATR control target value (Y/M/C). Method of Adjustment Set an offset value for the target value of the Y toner while in ATR control.
2 range of settings: -108 to 108 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
6. BLANK
T-17-72 COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK Subheading BLANK-T Contents Use it when entering the adjustment value for the non-image width (leading edge). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1000 at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: +94 Level
17-55
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK Subheading BLANK-L Contents Use it to enter the adjustment value for the non-image width (left edge). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1000 at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: +59 BLANK-R Use it to enter the adjustment value for the non-image width (right edge). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1000 at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: +59 BLANK-B Use it to enter the adjustment value for the non-image width (trailing edge). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1000 at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: +47 Level
7. V-CONT
T-17-73 COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT Subheading EPOTOEST Set it to adjust the potential offset value. Range of Adjustment-300 to 300 (unit: 0.1 V) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 VCONT-Y/M/C/K Use it to adjust the target contrast potential (Y/M/C/K). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will make the image darker. 2 1 Contents Level
Range of Adjustment: Y/M/C: -50 to +50(unit: 10 V) K: -5 to +5 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Attention If possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal. VBACK-Y/M/C/K Use it to adjust the fogging potential (Y/M/C/K). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will serve to reduce following. Range of Adjustment: Y/M/C: -30 to +30 (unit: 5V) K: -5 to +5 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Attention If possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal.
8. PASCAL
T-17-74 COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL Subhead OFST-P-Y/M/C/K Contents Use it to apply offset adjustment on the test print reading signal (Y) for PASCAL control at time of auto gradation correction (full). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will make the image darker after auto gradation correction (full). Level
Range of Adjustment: -128 to +128 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
9. COLOR
17-56
Chapter 17
T-17-75 COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR Subheading ADJ-Y/M/C/K Contents Use it to adjust the color balance (Y/M/C/K; for the user). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will make the image darker. - a lower setting will make the image lighter. Range of Adjustment: -8 to +8 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 OFST-Y/M/C/K Use it to adjust the color balance and the density of the light area (Y/M/C/K). Method of Adjustment - a lower setting will reduce fogging. 1 Range of Adjustment: -32 to +32 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 LD-OFS-Y/M/C/K Use it to adjust the color balance (Y/M/C/K) of low density areas. range of adjustment: -8 to +8 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) - if possible, do unit use it as long as machine operation is normal. 2 Level
MD-OFS-Y/M/C/K
Use it to adjust the color balance (Y/M/C/K) of medium density areas. range of adjustment: -8 to +8 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) - if possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal. 2
HD-OFS-Y/M/C/K
Use it to adjust the color balance (Y/M/C/K) of high density areas. range of adjustment: -8 to +8 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) - if possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal. 2
10. HV-PRI
T-17-76 COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI Subheading PRIMARY Use it to adjust the primary charging current. Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1400V (unit: yA) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 1099 GRID Use it to adjust the primary charging assembly grid bias. Settings range: 0 to 900 (unit: V) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 752 GRID-2 Use it to adjust the gain of the primary charging current measurement value. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have recycled the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB. 2 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 900 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 498 Reference - This item is for use at the factory, and must NOT be used in the field. GRID-3 Use it to adjust the offset for the primary charging current measurement value. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have recycled the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB. 2 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 900 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 498 Reference - This item is for use at the factory, and must NOT be used in the field. 1 1 Contents Level
17-57
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI Subheading HVRATE-3 Contents Use it to adjust the parameter settings for primary charging bias/laser power (at feed speed 1/3). Method of Adjustment - adjust the parameter setting for the primary charging bias/laser power for when 1/3 feed speed is used. 2 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 100 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 33 HVRATE-2 Use it to adjust the parameter setting for primary charging bias/laser power (at feed speed 2/3). Method of Adjustment - adjust the parameter setting for the primary charging bias/laser power for when 2/3 feed speed is in use. Level
Range of Adjustment: 0 to 100 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 33
11. HV-TR
T-17-77 COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR Subheading PRE-TR Contents Use it to adjust the current for the pre-transfer charging assembly. Range of Adjustment: -200 to 200 (unit: 5.0 yA) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 1TR-GAIN Use it to adjust the gain for the primary transfer current measurement. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM of the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB. 1 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1000 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value /upon RAM initialization: 492 Reference This item is for use at the factory only, and must NOT be used in the field. 1TR-OFST Use it to adjust the offset value of the primary transfer current measurement. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB. 1 Level
1 Range of Adjustment: -1000 to 0 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: -442 Reference This item is for use at the factory only, and must NOT be used in the field. 1TR-CGAI Use it to correct the constant current for the primary transfer high-voltage PCB. (slope) Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB. 1
Range of Adjustment: 0 to 200 at time of shipment: factory measurement /upon RAM initialization: 118 1TR-COFS Use it to correct the constant current for the primary transfer high-voltage PCB. (intercept) Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB. 1
Range of Adjustment: -200 to 0 (unit: 0.1 yA) at time of shipment: factory measurement /upon RAM initialization: -102
17-58
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR Subheading 1TR-GAI2 Contents Use it to correct the constant voltage output for the transfer high-voltage PCB. 2 (slope) Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label. 1 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1000 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 492 1TR-OFS2 Use it to correct the constant voltage output for the primary transfer high-voltage PCB 2. (intercept) Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached on the PCB. Level
Range of Adjustment: 1000 to 0 (unit: V) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: -442 2TR-TGT1 to 8 Use it to set the offset value in relation to the secondary transfer ATVC target current level. Method of Adjustment - the secondary transfer ATVC target current level will be offset in relation to the setting herein when the operation mode of the machine matches the setting made in the following: TR-ENV, TR-PAPER, TR-CLR, TR-DUP.
2 Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10 (unit: 2 yA) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Reference The following 6 items make up a single set of items: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PAPER, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP. 2TR-SHR1 to 8 Use it to set the offset value for the paper voltage for secondary ATVC. Method of Adjustment - when the setting under TR-ENV, TR-PAPER, TR-CLR, and TR-DUP match the machine operation mode, the offset value set using this item will be applied to the paper voltage for secondary transfer ATVC.
2 Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10(unit: 100 V) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Reference - the following 6 items make up a single set of items: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PAPER, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP. TR-PPR1 to 8 Use it to enter an offset value against the secondary transfer ATVC setting if necessary in response to a complaint from the user.
selection of paper type for cassette 1 Settings: 1, plain paper; 2, recycled paper; 3, colored paper; 4, punched paper; 5, heavy paper 1; 6, heavy paper 2; 7, heavy paper 3; 8, transparency; 9, tracing paper; 10, postcard; 11, 2-pane postcard; 12, 4-pane postcard; 13, label sheet at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 Reference: The following 6 items make up a single set: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PAPER, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP
TR-ENV1 to 8
Use it to select the environment for the secondary ATVC setting. Settings range 1: low humidity; 2: normal humidity; 3: high humidity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 Reference - the following 6 items make up a single set of items: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PAPER, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP. 2
TR-CLR1 to 8
Use it to set the color mode for the secondary ATVC setting. 1: Bk; 2: C at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 Reference - the following 6 items make up a single set of items: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PAPER, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP. 2
17-59
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR Subheading TR-DUP1 to 8 Contents Use it to select the signal/double-side pickup mode for the secondary ATVC setting. Settings range 1: single-sided; 2: auto double-sided; 3: manual double-sided at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 Reference - the following 6 items make up a single set of items: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PAPER, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP. 1TR-TGY/M/C Use it to adjust the primary transfer ATVC target current offset value (Y/M/C). 2 Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10(unit: 0.5 yA) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1TR-TGK1 Use it to adjust the primary transfer ATVC target current offset value (Bk, mono). Range of Adjustment-10 to 10 (unit: 0.5 yA) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 1TR-TGK4 Use it to adjust the primary transfer ATVC target current offset value (Bk, 4C). Range of Adjustment-10 to 10 (unit: 0.5 yA) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 1EL Use it to set the primary transfer static eliminator bias level. Settings range: -4000 to 0 (unit: V) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2EL Use it to set the primary transfer static eliminator bias. Range of Adjustment - check the bias level using DISPLAY>HV-STS>2EL; then, set the appropriate bias level. 2 Settings range: -4000 to 0 (unit: V) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1TR-STS1 Use it to set the offset value (normal speed) for the primary sheet-to-sheet target current.) Settings range: -10 to 10 (unit: 2 yA) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1TR-STS2 Use it to set the offset value (1/3 speed) for the primary sheet-to-sheet target current. Settings range: -10 to 10 (unit: 2 yA) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1TR-STS3 Use it to set the offset value (2/3 speed) for the primary transfer sheet-to-sheet target value. Settings range: -10 to 10 (unit: 2 yA) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PRE-TR-Y/M/C Use it to adjust the current (Y/M/C) for the pre-transfer charging assembly. Settings range: 200 to 200 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization; 0 POSTSW-Y/M/C/K turn on or off the switch (Y/M/C/K) for the Y pre-transfer charging assembly to enable or disable the color Y for the pretransfer charging assembly. Settings 0: disable; 1: enable at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: Y/M:0,C/K:1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Level
12. FEED-ADJ
T-17-78 COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ Subheading REGIST Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration roller clutch goes on. Method of Adjustment - an increase of '1' will move the image in the direction of the leading edge of the sheet by 0.1 mm. - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Contents Level
Range of Adjustment: -50 to 50- (unit: 0.1 m) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/RAM initialization: 0
17-60
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ Subheading ADJ-REFE Contents Use it to adjust the horizontal adjustment for duplexing (for factory use). Method of Adjustment - an increase of '1' will move the image on the 2nd side to move toward the rear by 0.1 mm. 1 Range of Adjustment: -100 to 100 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 BLK-SML2 Use it to adjust the left/right margin on the 2nd side for small size. - an increase of '1' will make the left-right margin on the 2nd side longer by 0.1 mm. 1 Range of Adjustment: -50 to +50 (unit: 0.1 mm) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: -15 RVS-FD1 Use it to adjust the print of reversal. Range of Adjustment: -10 to +10 (unit: 1 mm) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 RVS-DUP Use it to adjust the point of duplexing reversal. Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 LOOP-T2 Use it to adjust the arching at the registration roller for heavy paper. Particulars of Adjustment A lower setting (arching at the registration roller) will serve to limit noise; however, too low a setting can affect the margin or can cause skew movement of paper. 2 2 2 Level
Range of Adjustment: -10 to +10 (mm) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
13. CST-ADJ
T-17-79 COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ Subheading MF-A4R Contents Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray (A4R). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you are entering a value after replacing the paper width detecting VR or newly, be sure to execute the following service mode item: FUNCTION>CST. Range of Adjustment: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 141 MF-A6R Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray (A6R). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you are entering a value after replacing the paper width detecting VR or newly, be sure to execute the following service mode item: FUNCTION>CST. Range of Adjustment: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 193 MF-A4 Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray (A4). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you are entering a value after replacing the paper width detecting VR or newly, be sure to execute the following service mode item: FUNCTION>CST. 1 Level
Range of Adjustment: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 42
14. MISC
17-61
Chapter 17
T-17-80 COPIER>ADJUST>MISC Subheading SEG-ADJ Use it to adjust the separation between text and photo in text/photo/map modes. Method of Adjustment - if you want the identification to be more on the photo side, increase the setting. - if you want the identification to be more on the text side, decrease the setting. Contents Level
Range of Adjustment: -4 to 4 at time of shipment/upon initialization of RAM: 0 K-ADJ Use it to adjust the black recognition level for black character processing. Method of adjustment - If you want the machine to identify a character as a black character, increase the setting. Range of Adjustment: -3 to 3 at time of shipment/upon initialization of RAM: 0 ATM Use it to set the environment in respect of atmospheric pressure. Settings 0 to 2 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ACS-ADJ Use it to adjust the level of color identification for ACS mode. Method of Adjustment - if you want the identification to be on the black-and-white side, increase the setting. - if you want the identification to be on the color side, decrease the setting. 1
Range of Adjustment: -3 to 3 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 WT-ER-LV Use it to set a threshold for issuing an alert when the waste toner box is becoming full. Use it to set a threshold for detection of a waste toner box error.
Settings (prints) 0: 1 prints 1: 20,000 prints 2: 40,000 prints 3: 60,000 prints estimates at a color ratio of 10% and image duty of 5%. varies depending on the color ratio/image duty. at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 2 WT-FL-LM Use it to set a threshold for issuing an alert when the waste toner box is becoming full. Use it to set a threshold for detection of a waste toner box error.
Settings (prints) 0: 80,000 prints 1: 140,000 prints 2: 210,000 prints 3: 320,000 prints 4: 460,000 prints estimates at a color ratio of 10% and image duty of 5%. varies depending on the color ratio/image duty. at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 2 ACS-EN Use it to adjust the ACS identification area. Settings range -2 to +2 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 ACS-CNT Use it to set the ACS identification chrome count area. Settings range -2 to +2 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ACS-EN2 Use it to adjust the ACS identification area (for stream reading). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will increase the area of identification. Settings range -2 to +2 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1
17-62
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC Subheading ACS-CNT2 Contents Use it to adjust the count area for the chrome identification pixels for ACS identification (for stream reading mode). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will increase the area of identification. 2 Settings range -2 to +2 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Level
15. EXP-LED
T-17-81 COPIER>ADJUST>EXP-LED Subheading PR-EXP Contents Use it to set the pre-exposure LED current level for when potential control is off (feed speed at 1/1) Settings range: 31 to 58 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 44 2 Level
EXP-ROT
Use it to set the length of time for pre-exposure at time of last rotation.
Range of Settings 0: forced pre-exposure last rotation disabled 1: 30 sec 2: 1 min 3: 1 min 30 sec 4: 2 min at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1

0004-9570
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1. ADJ-XY

T-17-82 COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY Subheading ADJ-X Contents Use it to adjust the scanner image leading edge position (i.e., image read start position in sub scanning direction). Method of adjustment - if the non-image width is larger than indicated, decrease the setting. - if an area outside the original is copied, increase the setting. - an increase by '1' will move the image read start position toward the trailing edge by 0.1 mm (i.e., move the image read area toward the trailing edge). - if you have initialized the RAM of the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Level
Range of Adjustment 1 to 100 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 20 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. ADJ-Y Use it to adjust the read start cell position of the CCD (i.e., image read start position in main scanning direction). Method of Adjustment - if the non-image width is larger than indicated, decrease the setting. - if an area outside the original is copied, increase the setting. - an increase by '1' will move the image read start position toward the front by 0.1 mm (i.e., move the image read area toward the front). - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1
Range of Adjustment 47 to 131 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 90 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label.
17-63
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY Subheading ADJ-S Contents Use it when entering the adjustment value for the scanner shading measurement position. Method of Adjustment - a decrease by '1' will move the shading measurement position toward the leading edge by 0.1 mm. - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment 30 to 50 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 50 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. ADJ-Y-DF Use it to adjust the main scanning points for DF SRAM reading mode. Method of Adjustment - an increase by '1' will move the image read start position to the front by 0.1 mm. - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment 21 to 106 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 53 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. STRD-POS Use it to adjust the CCD read position for DF stream reading mode. Method of Adjustment - an increase by '1' will move the image read position to the left by 1 mm. - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment 1 to 200 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 110 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. Level
2. CCD
T-17-83 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD Subheading W-PLT-X/Y/Z Contents Use it when entering the white label data indicated on the standard white plate. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the copyboard glass, enter the value indicated on the copyboard glass. (See the figure below) Level
Range of Adjustment: 1 to 9999 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: W-PLT-X=8271: W-PLT-Y=8735: W-PLT-Z=9418 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. CCDU-RG Use it to correct color displacement in sub scanning direction between RG associated with the CCD unit. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -9 to 9 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label.
17-64
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD Subheading CCDU-GB Contents Use it to correct color displacement in sub scanning direction between GB associated with the CCD unit. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: -9 to 9 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 FCCDU-RG Use it to correct color displacement in sub scanning direction between R and G associated with the CCD unit at time of shipment. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -9 to 9 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. FCCDU-GB Use it to correct color displacement in sub scanning direction between GB associated with the CCD unit at time of shipment. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -9 to 9 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 50-RG Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; RG) for book mode at 50% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the rear controller or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 50-GB Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; GB) for book mode at 50% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 100-RG Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; RG) for book mode at 100% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. Level
17-65
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD Subheading 100-GB Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; GB) for book mode at 100% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 50DF-RG Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement RG) for ADF mode at 50% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 50DF-GB Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; GB) for ADF mode at 50% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 100DF-RG Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; RG) for ADF mode at 100% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. 100DF-GB Use it to indicate the degree of offset (color displacement; GB) for ADF mode at 100% reading. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: -256 to 256 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon initialization: 0 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. DFTAR-R Use it when entering the shading target value (red) for use when the DF is used (i.e., normal original read position). Method of Adjustment - COPIER>FUNCTION>CC>WLVL1/DF-WLVL2 if the image has a fault when the foregoing service mode item has been executed (e.g., as caused by soiling of the chart), enter the factory measurement using this mode item. - if you have initialize the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Contents Level
17-66
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD Subheading DFTAR-G Contents Use it when entering the shading target (green) for the DF (normal original reading position). Method of Adjustment - COPIER>FUNCTION>CD>DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2 if the image starts to develop a fault after executing the foregoing service mode item (e.g., as caused by soiling of the chart), enter the factory measurement using this mode. - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: 1 to 2047 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 1189 Attention If you have changed the setting, be sure to record the new setting on the service label. DFTAR-B Use it to enter the shading target value (blue) for the DF (normal original read position). Method of Adjustment - COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2 if the image starts to develop a fault after executing the foregoing service mode item, enter the factory measurement using this mode item. - if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Level
820686679349
va l u e o f W- P L AT E - Z va l u e o f W- P L AT E - X va l u e o f W- P L AT E - Y
F-17-25
3. LASER
T-17-84 COPIER>ADJUST>LASER Subheading PVE-OFST Contents Use it to adjust the degree of offset (point of laser illumination) from the center of the laser beam. Settings range: -600 to 600 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 POWER Use it to adjust the laser output (max). - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Settings range: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 112 LPWR-YMC Use it to set the laser power for when potential control is off (Y/M/C). Method of Adjustment - set the laser power for Y/M/C with potential control off. 2 Settings range: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 112 LPWR-3 Use it to set the laser power for when potential control is off (feed speed at 1/3). Method of Adjustment - set the laser power (at feed speed 1/3) with potential control off. 2 Settings range: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 37 1 Level
17-67
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>LASER Subheading LPWR-2 Contents Use it to set the laser power for when potential control is off (at feed speed 1/3). Method of Adjustment - set the laser power (at feed speed 1/3) with potential control off. Settings range: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 74 Level
4. IMG-REG
T-17-85 COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG Subheading REG-V-Y/K Use it to make rough adjustment of the write start position in sub scanning direction for Y/K. Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will move the pattern toward the trailing edge. - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PC or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10 (unit: pixel) at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Reference This item is for use at the factory only, and must NOT be used in the field. REG2-V-Y/K Use it to make rough adjustment of the write start position in sub scanning direction for Y/K (2nd side in 2-sheet placement). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will move the pattern toward the trailing edge. - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Contents Level
Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10 (unit: pixel) at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Reference This item is for use at the factory only, and must NOT be used in the field. REG-V-M Use it to make rough adjustment of the write start position in main scanning direction for M Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will move the pattern toward the trailing edge. - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1
Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10 (unit: pixel at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Reference This item is for use at the factory only, and must NOT be used in the field. REG2-V-M Use it to make rough adjustment of the write start position in sub scanning direction for M (2nd side in 2-sheet placement). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will move the pattern toward the trailing edge. - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1
Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10 (unit: pixel at time of shipment: factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: 0 Reference This item is for use at the factory only, and must NOT be used in the field.
5. DENS
17-68
Chapter 17
T-17-86 COPIER>ADJUST>DENS Subheading SGNL-Y/M/C Use it to enter the toner density initial value (Y/M/C). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Contents Level
Range of Adjustment: 200 to 800 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 512 REF-Y/M/C Use it to enter the toner density reference signal (Y/M/C). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: 462 to 562 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 512 PTOFST-Y/M/C Use it to enter the correction value of the Y/M/C laser output for ATR control. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label.
Settings range: 48 to 48 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 P-SGNL-Y/M/C Use it to adjust the density of toner on the intermediate transfer belt for INIT execution (Y/M/C). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Settings range: 200 to 800 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 500 HLMT-PTY/M/C Use it to set an upper limit to patch target density correction (Y/M/C). 2
range of adjustment: -20 to 20 (unit: 0.1%) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 If possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal. LLMT-PTY/M/C Use it to set a lower limit to patch target density correction (Y/M/C). range of adjustment: -20 to 20 (unit: 0.1%) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 If possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal. DMAX-Y/M/C Use it to set an offset value for the Y/M/C density control target value. Method of Adjustment Set an offset value for the Y density control target value while in 2D-MAX control. range of settings: -8 to 8 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 P-TG-Y/M/C Use it to set an offset value for the ATR control target value (Y/M/C). Method of Adjustment Set an offset value for the target value of the Y toner while in ATR control.
2 range of settings: -108 to 108 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
6. BLANK
T-17-87 COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK Subheading BLANK-T Contents Use it when entering the adjustment value for the non-image width (leading edge). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1000 at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: +94 Level
17-69
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK Subheading BLANK-L Contents Use it to enter the adjustment value for the non-image width (left edge). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. 1 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1000 at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: +59 BLANK-R Use it to enter the adjustment value for the non-image width (right edge). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1000 at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: +59 BLANK-B Use it to enter the adjustment value for the non-image width (trailing edge). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the main controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1000 at time of shipment factory measurement value upon RAM initialization: +47 BLANK-C1 to 4 Use it to set the leading edge margin for the right deck. Method of Adjustment The value herein will be used to affect the value of BLANK-T. 1 Range of Adjustment: -35 to 35 (unit: 0.1 mm) at time of shipment: factory measurement /upon RAM initialization: 0 BLANK-PD Use it to set the leading edge margin for the optional deck. Method of Adjustment The value herein will be used to affect the value of BLANK-T. 1 Range of Adjustment: -35 to 35 (unit: 0.1 mm) at time of shipment: factory measurement /upon RAM initialization: 0 Level
7. V-CONT
T-17-88 COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT Subheading EPOTOEST Set it to adjust the potential offset value. Range of Adjustment-300 to 300 (unit: 0.1 V) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 VCONT-Y/M/C/K Use it to adjust the target contrast potential (Y/M/C/K). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will make the image darker. 2 1 Contents Level
Range of Adjustment: Y/M/C: -50 to +50(unit: 10 V) K: -5 to +5 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Attention If possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal. VBACK-Y/M/C/K Use it to adjust the fogging potential (Y/M/C/K). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will serve to reduce following. Range of Adjustment: Y/M/C: -30 to +30 (unit: 5V) K: -5 to +5 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Attention If possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal.
8. PASCAL
17-70
Chapter 17
T-17-89 COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL Subhead OFST-P-Y/M/C/K Contents Use it to apply offset adjustment on the test print reading signal (Y) for PASCAL control at time of auto gradation correction (full). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will make the image darker after auto gradation correction (full). Level
Range of Adjustment: -128 to +128 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
9. COLOR
T-17-90 COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR Subheading ADJ-Y/M/C/K Contents Use it to adjust the color balance (Y/M/C/K; for the user). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will make the image darker. - a lower setting will make the image lighter. Range of Adjustment: -8 to +8 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 OFST-Y/M/C/K Use it to adjust the color balance and the density of the light area (Y/M/C/K). Method of Adjustment - a lower setting will reduce fogging. 1 Range of Adjustment: -32 to +32 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 LD-OFS-Y/M/C/K Use it to adjust the color balance (Y/M/C/K) of low density areas. range of adjustment: -8 to +8 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) - if possible, do unit use it as long as machine operation is normal. 2 Level
MD-OFS-Y/M/C/K
Use it to adjust the color balance (Y/M/C/K) of medium density areas. range of adjustment: -8 to +8 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) - if possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal. 2
HD-OFS-Y/M/C/K
Use it to adjust the color balance (Y/M/C/K) of high density areas. range of adjustment: -8 to +8 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) - if possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal. 2
10. HV-PRI
T-17-91 COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI Subheading PRIMARY Use it to adjust the primary charging current. Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1400V (unit: yA) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 1099 GRID Use it to adjust the primary charging assembly grid bias. Settings range: 0 to 900 (unit: V) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 752 1 1 Contents Level
17-71
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI Subheading GRID-2 Contents Use it to adjust the gain of the primary charging current measurement value. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have recycled the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB. 2 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 900 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 498 Reference - This item is for use at the factory, and must NOT be used in the field. GRID-3 Use it to adjust the offset for the primary charging current measurement value. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have recycled the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB. 2 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 900 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 498 Reference - This item is for use at the factory, and must NOT be used in the field. HVRATE-3 Use it to adjust the parameter settings for primary charging bias/laser power (at feed speed 1/3). Method of Adjustment - adjust the parameter setting for the primary charging bias/laser power for when 1/3 feed speed is used. 2 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 100 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 33 HVRATE-2 Use it to adjust the parameter setting for primary charging bias/laser power (at feed speed 2/3). Method of Adjustment - adjust the parameter setting for the primary charging bias/laser power for when 2/3 feed speed is in use. Level
Range of Adjustment: 0 to 100 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 33
11. HV-TR
T-17-92 COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR Subheading PRE-TR Contents Use it to adjust the current for the pre-transfer charging assembly. Range of Adjustment: -200 to 200 (unit: 5.0 yA) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 1TR-GAIN Use it to adjust the gain for the primary transfer current measurement. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM of the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB. 1 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1000 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value /upon RAM initialization: 492 Reference This item is for use at the factory only, and must NOT be used in the field. 1 Level
17-72
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR Subheading 1TR-OFST Contents Use it to adjust the offset value of the primary transfer current measurement. Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB. Level
1 Range of Adjustment: -1000 to 0 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: -442 Reference This item is for use at the factory only, and must NOT be used in the field. 1TR-CGAI Use it to correct the constant current for the primary transfer high-voltage PCB. (slope) Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB. 1
Range of Adjustment: 0 to 200 at time of shipment: factory measurement /upon RAM initialization: 118 1TR-COFS Use it to correct the constant current for the primary transfer high-voltage PCB. (intercept) Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached to the PCB. 1
Range of Adjustment: -200 to 0 (unit: 0.1 yA) at time of shipment: factory measurement /upon RAM initialization: -102 1TR-GAI2 Use it to correct the constant voltage output for the transfer high-voltage PCB. 2 (slope) Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label. 1 Range of Adjustment: 0 to 1000 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 492 1TR-OFS2 Use it to correct the constant voltage output for the primary transfer high-voltage PCB 2. (intercept) Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you have replaced the high-voltage PCB, enter the value indicated on the label attached on the PCB.
Range of Adjustment: 1000 to 0 (unit: V) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: -442 2TR-TGT1 to 8 Use it to set the offset value in relation to the secondary transfer ATVC target current level. Method of Adjustment - the secondary transfer ATVC target current level will be offset in relation to the setting herein when the operation mode of the machine matches the setting made in the following: TR-ENV, TR-PAPER, TR-CLR, TR-DUP.
2 Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10 (unit: 2 yA) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Reference The following 6 items make up a single set of items: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PAPER, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP. 2TR-SHR1 to 8 Use it to set the offset value for the paper voltage for secondary ATVC. Method of Adjustment - when the setting under TR-ENV, TR-PAPER, TR-CLR, and TR-DUP match the machine operation mode, the offset value set using this item will be applied to the paper voltage for secondary transfer ATVC.
2 Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10(unit: 100 V) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Reference - the following 6 items make up a single set of items: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PAPER, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP.
17-73
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR Subheading TR-PPR1 to 8 Contents Use it to enter an offset value against the secondary transfer ATVC setting if necessary in response to a complaint from the user. Level
selection of paper type for cassette 1 Settings: 1, plain paper; 2, recycled paper; 3, colored paper; 4, punched paper; 5, heavy paper 1; 6, heavy paper 2; 7, heavy paper 3; 8, transparency; 9, tracing paper; 10, postcard; 11, 2-pane postcard; 12, 4-pane postcard; 13, label sheet at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 Reference: The following 6 items make up a single set: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PAPER, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP
TR-ENV1 to 8
Use it to select the environment for the secondary ATVC setting. Settings range 1: low humidity; 2: normal humidity; 3: high humidity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 Reference - the following 6 items make up a single set of items: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PAPER, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP. 2
TR-CLR1 to 8
Use it to set the color mode for the secondary ATVC setting. 1: Bk; 2: C at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 Reference - the following 6 items make up a single set of items: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PAPER, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP. 2
TR-DUP1 to 8
Use it to select the signal/double-side pickup mode for the secondary ATVC setting. Settings range 1: single-sided; 2: auto double-sided; 3: manual double-sided at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 Reference - the following 6 items make up a single set of items: 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PAPER, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, TR-DUP.
1TR-TGY/M/C
Use it to adjust the primary transfer ATVC target current offset value (Y/M/C). 2 Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10(unit: 0.5 yA) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
1TR-TGK1
Use it to adjust the primary transfer ATVC target current offset value (Bk, mono). Range of Adjustment-10 to 10 (unit: 0.5 yA) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 2
1TR-TGK4
Use it to adjust the primary transfer ATVC target current offset value (Bk, 4C). Range of Adjustment-10 to 10 (unit: 0.5 yA) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 2
1EL
Use it to set the primary transfer static eliminator bias level. Settings range: -4000 to 0 (unit: V) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2
2EL
Use it to set the primary transfer static eliminator bias. Range of Adjustment - check the bias level using DISPLAY>HV-STS>2EL; then, set the appropriate bias level. 2 Settings range: -4000 to 0 (unit: V) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
1TR-STS1
Use it to set the offset value (normal speed) for the primary sheet-to-sheet target current.) Settings range: -10 to 10 (unit: 2 yA) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2
1TR-STS2
Use it to set the offset value (1/3 speed) for the primary sheet-to-sheet target current. Settings range: -10 to 10 (unit: 2 yA) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2
1TR-STS3
Use it to set the offset value (2/3 speed) for the primary transfer sheet-to-sheet target value. Settings range: -10 to 10 (unit: 2 yA) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2
17-74
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR Subheading PRE-TR-Y/M/C Contents Use it to adjust the current (Y/M/C) for the pre-transfer charging assembly. Settings range: 200 to 200 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization; 0 POSTSW-Y/M/C/K turn on or off the switch (Y/M/C/K) for the Y pre-transfer charging assembly to enable or disable the color Y for the pretransfer charging assembly. Settings 0: disable; 1: enable at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: Y/M:0,C/K:1 2 2 Level
12. FEED-ADJ
T-17-93 COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ Subheading REGIST Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration roller clutch goes on. Method of Adjustment - an increase of '1' will move the image in the direction of the leading edge of the sheet by 0.1 mm. - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. Contents Level
Range of Adjustment: -50 to 50- (unit: 0.1 m) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/RAM initialization: 0 ADJ-REFE Use it to adjust the horizontal adjustment for duplexing (for factory use). Method of Adjustment - an increase of '1' will move the image on the 2nd side to move toward the rear by 0.1 mm. 1 Range of Adjustment: -100 to 100 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 BLK-SML2 Use it to adjust the left/right margin on the 2nd side for small size. - an increase of '1' will make the left-right margin on the 2nd side longer by 0.1 mm. 1 Range of Adjustment: -50 to +50 (unit: 0.1 mm) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: -15 RVS-FD1 Use it to adjust the print of reversal. Range of Adjustment: -10 to +10 (unit: 1 mm) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 RVS-DUP Use it to adjust the point of duplexing reversal. Range of Adjustment: -10 to 10 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 LOOP-T2 Use it to adjust the arching at the registration roller for heavy paper. Particulars of Adjustment A lower setting (arching at the registration roller) will serve to limit noise; however, too low a setting can affect the margin or can cause skew movement of paper. 2 2 2
Range of Adjustment: -10 to +10 (mm) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
13. CST-ADJ
T-17-94 COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ Subheading MF-A4R Contents Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray (A4R). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you are entering a value after replacing the paper width detecting VR or newly, be sure to execute the following service mode item: FUNCTION>CST. Range of Adjustment: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 141 Level
17-75
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ Subheading MF-A6R Contents Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray (A6R). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you are entering a value after replacing the paper width detecting VR or newly, be sure to execute the following service mode item: FUNCTION>CST. Range of Adjustment: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 193 MF-A4 Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feed tray (A4). Method of Adjustment - if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated on the service label. - if you are entering a value after replacing the paper width detecting VR or newly, be sure to execute the following service mode item: FUNCTION>CST. 1 Level
Range of Adjustment: 0 to 255 at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 42
14. MISC
T-17-95 COPIER>ADJUST>MISC Subheading SEG-ADJ Use it to adjust the separation between text and photo in text/photo/map modes. Method of Adjustment - if you want the identification to be more on the photo side, increase the setting. - if you want the identification to be more on the text side, decrease the setting. Contents Level
Range of Adjustment: -4 to 4 at time of shipment/upon initialization of RAM: 0 K-ADJ Use it to adjust the black recognition level for black character processing. Method of adjustment - If you want the machine to identify a character as a black character, increase the setting. Range of Adjustment: -3 to 3 at time of shipment/upon initialization of RAM: 0 ATM Use it to set the environment in respect of atmospheric pressure. Settings 0 to 2 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ACS-ADJ Use it to adjust the level of color identification for ACS mode. Method of Adjustment - if you want the identification to be on the black-and-white side, increase the setting. - if you want the identification to be on the color side, decrease the setting. 1
Range of Adjustment: -3 to 3 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 WT-ER-LV Use it to set a threshold for issuing an alert when the waste toner box is becoming full. Use it to set a threshold for detection of a waste toner box error.
Settings (prints) 0: 1 prints 1: 20,000 prints 2: 40,000 prints 3: 60,000 prints estimates at a color ratio of 10% and image duty of 5%. varies depending on the color ratio/image duty. at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 2
17-76
Chapter 17
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC Subheading WT-FL-LM Contents Use it to set a threshold for issuing an alert when the waste toner box is becoming full. Use it to set a threshold for detection of a waste toner box error. Level
Settings (prints) 0: 80,000 prints 1: 140,000 prints 2: 210,000 prints 3: 320,000 prints 4: 460,000 prints estimates at a color ratio of 10% and image duty of 5%. varies depending on the color ratio/image duty. at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 2 ACS-EN Use it to adjust the ACS identification area. Settings range -2 to +2 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 ACS-CNT Use it to set the ACS identification chrome count area. Settings range -2 to +2 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ACS-EN2 Use it to adjust the ACS identification area (for stream reading). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will increase the area of identification. Settings range -2 to +2 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 ACS-CNT2 Use it to adjust the count area for the chrome identification pixels for ACS identification (for stream reading mode). Method of Adjustment - a higher setting will increase the area of identification.
2 Settings range -2 to +2 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
15. EXP-LED
T-17-96 COPIER>ADJUST>EXP-LED Subheading PR-EXP Contents Use it to set the pre-exposure LED current level for when potential control is off (feed speed at 1/1) Settings range: 31 to 58 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 44 2 Level
EXP-ROT
Use it to set the length of time for pre-exposure at time of last rotation.
Range of Settings 0: forced pre-exposure last rotation disabled 1: 30 sec 2: 1 min 3: 1 min 30 sec 4: 2 min at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1

0005-0542
17-77
Chapter 17
T-17-97 FEEDER>ADJSUT Subheading DOCST Contents Adjusting the Original Image Leading Edge Method of adjustment A higher setting will delay the image leading edge timing. 1 Range of adjustment -50 to 50 (unit: 0.1mm) [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0] LA-SPEED Adjusting the document feeding speed at the time of stream reading from the feeder The speed becomes faster (image is reduced) by increasing setting value. 1 Range of adjustment: -30 to 30 (unit: 0.1%) [at time of shipment: factory adjustment value/after RAM initialization: 0] Level
17.4.3 SORTER 17.4.3.1 SORTER List

0005-0554
T-17-98 SORTER>ADJUDT Subheading PNCH-HLE Contents Use it to adjust the distance from the paper edge to the punch hole. Range of adjustment: -4to 2 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1 Level
17.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode)

17.5.1 COPIER 17.5.1.1 COPIER LIst
0018-0492
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. INSTALL

T-17-99 COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL Subheading TONER-S Contents Use it to stir the toner inside the developing assembly at time of installation. Method of Operation 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. - the machine starts operation. - the machine begins a countdown. 2) See that 'OK' has appeared, indicating that the operation is over. Use it to stir the toner inside the toner cartridge (Y/M/C). Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start operation. Use it to cause the machine to read the initial value of the toner density signal (SGNL, REF) of Y/M/C. Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation. Use it to cause the machine to read the initial value of the toner density signals (SGNL, REF) of 3 colors (YMC). Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation. Use to supply toner from the toner cartridge (Y/M/C) to the toner buffer assembly for the first time. Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start operation. Use it to set up a card reader. 1 to 2001 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) Enter a number for the cards, and press the OK key. (As many as 1000 cards each given a number starting with the one you entered will be enabled for use.) At this time, the card control information (group ID and ID No.) is initialized. Use it to set the control key function. 0: do not recognize control key function (as selected at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 1: recognize control key function 1) Select the following, and enter '1': COPIER>INSTALL>KEY. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch (so that the control key function will be recognized). Level
STIR-Y/M/C INIT-Y/M/C INIT-3
1 1 1 1
SPLY-H-Y/M/C CARD
KEY
17-78
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL Subheading INISET-Y/M/C Contents Use it to set up the Y/M/C color developing assemblies for the first time. The series of operations needed to initialize the Y/M/C color developing assembly will be performed at a time: Method of Operation 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. - the machine will start operation. - the machine will start a countdown. 2) See that 'OK' appears, indicating that the operation is over. Use it to set up the 3 (YMC) developing assemblies. The series of operations needed to initialize the 3 color (YMC) developing assemblies will be performed at a time. 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. - the machine will start operation. - the machine will make a countdown. 2) See that 'OK' appears, indicting that the operation is over. Use it to supply toner from the toner cartridge (HY/MC) to the toner buffer assembly. Use it to supply toner from the toner cartridge (HY/MC) to the toner buffer assembly. 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start operation. - the machine will start operation. - the machine will start a countdown. 2) See that 'OK' appears, indicating that the operation is over. Use it to enable or disable initial multiple rotation used for installation You can disable initial multiple rotation if you are concerned about the image formation sequence (i.e., forming a patch or executing Dmax/Dhalf), which can soil or wear out internal components during installation work). If the color toner set-up run (FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSET-3) ends fully normally, the setting herein will automatically be cancelled (to prevent faults that otherwise could occur if the function is not manually switched back); if the run failed to end, however, the initial multiple rotation function will remain disabled. Settings range 0: enable initial multiple rotation 1: disable initial multiple rotation (item under DC controller) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 Use it to select whether to use E-RDS. Selects whether to use E-RDS (Embedded-RDS) to send device counter/fault/consumable information to a sales company's server by SOAP protocol. Setting value 0: Do not use E-RDS. 1: Use E-RDS. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] RGW-PORT Use it to specify a port number for the sales company's server used for E-RDS. Setting range 1 to 65535 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 443] COM-TEST Use it to check a connection to the sales company's server used for E-RDS. Attempts to make a connection to the sales company's server used for E-RDS. Result: OK: Can be connected NG: Cannot be connected COM-LOG Use it to display the detail results of a communication test with the sales company's server used for E-RDS. Switches the screen to display information of a connection error with the sales company's server. Displays a date, time, error code, and error information for the error. Maximum number of logs: 30 Error information: 128 characters maximum (NULL is not included.) RGW-ADR Use it to specify a URL for the sales company's server used for E-RDS. 1 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010] CNT-DATE Setting of the start date to send counter information to the server. Set the start date to send counter information to the server by the third party advanced function for Embedded-RDS (eRDS). [Remarks] This mode is displayed only when the third party advanced function for eRDS is available. Setting range: YYYY: year, MM: month, HH: hour, MM: minute Factory setting value: 000000000000 (12 digits: YYYYMMDDHHMM) Setting of the interval to send counter information to the server. Set the interval to send counter information to the server by the third party advanced function for Embedded-RDS (eRDS). [Remarks] This mode is displayed only when the third party advanced function for eRDS is available. Setting range: 1 to 168 (for a week) Factory setting value: 24 1 1 1 Level
INISET-3
STIR-3 SPLY-H-3
AINR-OFF
E-RDS
CNT-INTV
2. CCD
17-79
Chapter 17
T-17-100 COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD Subheading DF-WLVL1/2 Contents Use it to adjust the ADF white level. Method of Operation 1) Place the type of original most often used by the user on the copyboard glass, and perform the following service mode item: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1. (In response, the machine will read the white level for book mode, checking the transmission quality of the glass for book mode). 2) Place the type of original most often used by the user in the DF, and perform the following service mode item: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL2. (In response, the machine will read the white level for DF mode (stream reading mode), checking the transmission quality of the reading glass by reading both sides of the original.) face reading: computes DFTAR-R/G/B back reading: computes DFTAR2-R/G/B Be sure to execute this item in combination with item 2. Level
3. LASER
T-17-101 COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER Subheading POWER Contents Use it to turn on the laser for adjustment of the laser power. 1) Select the item to highlight. 2) Press the OK key. To stop, press the Stop key. Level
4. DPC
T-17-102 COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC Subheading DPC Contents Use it to execute potential control. Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to perform the operation. (The operation will stop automatically.). Use it to adjust the offset value of the potential measurement circuit. Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start operation. (The operation will stop automatically.) Level 1
OFST
5. CST
T-17-103 COPIER>FUNCTION>CST Subheading MF-A4R,MFA6R,MF-A4 Use it to register the paper width basic value for the manual feeder. A4R width: 210 mm, A6R width: 105 mm, A4 width: 297 mm To make fine adjustments after registering the basic value, use the following service mode item: COPIER>ADJUS'T>CSTADJ>MF-A4, RMF-A6R, MF-A4. Method of Operation 1) Place A4R paper in the manual feeder, and adjust the side guide to the A4R width. 2) Using this service mode, select 'MF-A4R' to highlight, and press the OK key so that the value will be registered after auto adjustment. 3) Likewise, perform steps 1) and 2) above to register basic values for A6R and A4. Contents Level
6. CLEANING
T-17-104 COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING Subheading TBLT-CLN Contents Use it to clean the intermediate transfer belt. By removing foreign matter (e.g., fingerprints, oils, paper lint) from the intermediate transfer belt, a number of image faults may be prevented. Method of Operation Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation. (The operation will stop automatically.) Cleaning continues for about 80 sec, and will stop automatically. Use it to cause cleaning of all charging wires at the same time 5 times continuously. Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. - The notation changes to 'ACTIVE', and the machine starts wire cleaning. 2) Press the OK key once again to stop rotation. Level
WIRE-CLN
17-80
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING Subheading WIRE-EX Contents Use it to clean the primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire (a single round trip). The primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire may be cleaned for a signal round trip. Normally, the wire is cleaned by 5 round trips (about 3 min); on the other hand, the single trip in this mode will take no more than about 40 sec.) Method of Operation WIRE-EX 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. - The notation changes to 'ACTIVE', and the machine starts wire cleaning. 2) Stop the OK key once again to stop the rotation. Use it to perform the black band sequence. - a sequence of operations will be performed to clean the intermediate transfer belt to prevent image faults (white spots) after filed servicing. The operation will take about 15 sec. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. - The notation will change to 'ACTIVE', and the wire will be cleaned. 2) To end the operation, press the OK key once again. Level
BK-BNDEX
7. FIXING
T-17-105 COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING Subheading NIP-CHK Checking the Fixing Nip Width Operation 1) Register 'plain paper' or 'recycled paper' as the type of paper to use in the manual feed tray (in user mode, common settings>paper type). 2) Place A4/LTR plain paper or recycled paper in the manual feed tray. 3) Select this mode, and press the OK key (so that the paper will be picked from the manual feed tray). 4) See that the paper stops temporarily between the fixing rollers and then is delivered in about 10 sec. 5) Check to see that the delivered paper shows a nip width that is within the standards. 6) If the nip width is not as indicated, adjust the following; 6-1) Loosen the screw on the side where the nip is smaller, and tighten the screw on the other side as much. 7) When done, generate a test print (COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE 6; grid). Contents Level
B
F-17-26
- Standards The difference between a and b must be 0.5 mm or less. - Be sure to measure a and b at a point 15 to 20 mm from the edge of the paper. - The arrow in the figure indicates the direction of paper movement.
NIP-CHK is a service mode item used to check the nip width of the fixing roller. The nip is adjusted to a high degree of accuracy before the machine is shipped out of the factory, and it cannot be adjusted in the field. Do not turn the 2 hex bolts [1] found on the delivery side of the fixing assembly. If you turned it by mistake, be sure to turn it back to its initial position.
17-81
Chapter 17
[1]
F-17-27
8. PANEL
T-17-106 COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL Subheading LCD-CHK Contents Check the LCD for missing dots. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key to start the operation. In response, the front of the touch panel goes on as follows: white, black, red, green, blue. 2) Press the Stop key to stop the operation. (If a printer model, press the Clear key.) Checking the LEDs on the control panel Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key to start the operation. See that the LEDs go on in turn. 2) Press 'LED-OFF' to stop the operation. Use it to check the LCD for missing dots. Method of Operation 1) Select the item to stop the check under 'LED-CHK'. Use it to check the key inputs. Method of Operation 1) Select 'KEY-CHK' so that the numbers/names of the input keys will be indicated. 2) Press any key to check; if normal, the touch panel will show its corresponding character. (See the table below.) 3) Select 'KEY-CHK' to end the operation. Use it to adjust the coordinates of the analog touch panel. Method of Operation - use it to match the points of press on the touch panel and the coordinates of the LCD. - perform this service mode if you have replaced the LCD. 1) Select 'TOUCH CHK' to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Press the symbol '+' appearing on the touch panel in sequence (9 points) to end the adjustment. Level
LED-CHK
LED-OFF
KEY-CHK
TOUCHCHK
- Numbers and Names of the Input Keys

T-17-107 Key 0 to 9, #, * Reset Stop User mode Start Power save Clear ID Help Counter Check Indication on the screen 0 to 9, #, * RESET STOP USER START STAND BY CLEAR ID ? BILL
9. PART-CHK
17-82
Chapter 17
T-17-108 COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK Subheading CL Contents Use it to select the clutch whose operation you want to check. (between 1 and 10; 4 through 10 are spares) Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code of the clutch you want using the keypad. 1: color developing clutch 2: color toner supply clutch 3: black developing clutch 8: deck feed clutch 9: deck pickup clutch 4 to 7,10: spare 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press 'CL-ON' to check the operation. Use it to start checking the clutch operation. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and presses the OK key so that the clutch goes on and off as follows: ON for 0.5 sec>OFF for 10 sec>ON for 0.5 sec>OFF for 10 sec>ON for 0.5 sec>OFF Use it to select the clutch whose operation you want to check. (between 1 and 10; 4 through 10 are spares) Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code of the clutch you want to check using the keypad. 1: primary charging suction fan (FM1) 2: primary charging exhaust fan (FM2) 3: feed fan 3 (FM11), feed fan 4 (FM12) 4: feed fan 1 (FM3); feed fan 2 (FM4) 5: fixing heat exhaust fan (FM5) 6: delivery cooling fan 1 (FM6) 7: process unit cooling fan (FM7) 8: spare 9: power supply cooling fan (FM9) 10: delivery cooling fan 2 (FM10) 4 through 10: spare 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press 'CL-ON' to check the operation. FAN-ON Use it to start the operation of the fan Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key to start the following: in the case of FAN= 1,2,5,7,10 for 10 sec, ON at full speed>for 10 sec, ON at half-speed>standby Copier Heat Exhaust Fan, Delivery Cooling Fan, Manual Feed Cooling Fan in the case of FAN= 3,4,6,9 for 10 sec, ON at full speed>standby Use it to select the clutch whose operation you want to check. between 1 and 32; the following are spares: 16, 24, 29, 30, 31, 32 Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code of the clutch using the keypad. 1: polygon motor (M1) 2: drum/ITB motor (M2) 3: developing motor (M3) 4: fixing motor (M4) 5: developing rotary motor (M5) 6: manual feed pre-registration motor (M6) 7: spare 8: registration motor (M8) 9: external delivery motor (M9) 10: duplex reversal motor (M10) 11: duplex left motor (M11) 12: duplex middle motor (M12) 13: duplex right motor (M13) 14: right deck pull-off motor (M14) 15: vertical path motor (M15) 16: spare 17: right deck pickup motor (M17) 18: left deck pickup motor (M18) 19: cassette pickup motor (M19) 20: secondary transfer outside roller shift motor (M20) 21: ITB cleaner shift motor (M21) 22: outside heating roller shift motor (M22) 23: hopper stirring motor (M23) 24: spare 25: black goner supply motor (M25) 26: primary charging wire cleaning motor (M26) 27: pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor (M27) 28: horizontal registration motor (M28) 35: deck main motor(M101) 36: shift motor 29 to 34: Reserve 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press 'CL-ON' to check the operation. Level
CL-ON
FAN
MTR
17-83
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK Subheading MTR-ON Contents Use it to start the operation of the motor. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) - in the case of MTR=1 through 4, 6, 8 through 15, 17 through 19, 23, 25 through 28, for 10 sec, ON>end - in the case of MTR=20 through 22, for 5 sec, ON>end - in the case of MTR=5, HP search start>end Use it to select the solenoid whose operation you want to check. between 1 and 15 Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code of the solenoid using the keypad. 1: manual feed pickup solenoid (SL1) 2: fixing web solenoid (SL2) 3: reversal shift solenoid (SL3) 4: left deck confluence solenoid (SL4) 5: delivery solenoid (SL5) 6: deck (right) pickup solenoid (SL6) 7: deck (left) pickup solenoid (SL7) 8: cassette 3 pickup solenoid (SL8) 9: cassette 4 pickup solenoid (SL9) 10: developing rotary fixing solenoid (SL10) 11: patch image read sensor shutter solenoid (SL1C) 12: ATR sensor shutter solenoid (SL2C) 14: deck pickup roller release solenoid(SL101) 15: deck open solenoid 13 : spare 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press 'SL-ON' to check the operation. SL-ON Use it to start the operation of the solenoid. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that the solenoid goes on and off as follows: for 0.5 sec, ON>for 0 sec, OFF>for 0.5 sec, ON>for 10 sec, OFF>for 0.5 sec, ON>OFF Level
SL
10. CLEAR
T-17-109 COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR Subheading ERR Use it to clear an error code (E000, E001, E002, E003). Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power. Use this item to reset the RAM on the DC controller PCB. The RAM will not actually be reset until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. Method of Operation print out the service mode settings using the following service mode item: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. 3) Turn off and then on the main power switch. 4) As necessary, enter the settings that have been printed out using 'P-PRINT'. Use it to reset the RAM on the reader controller PCB. Method of Operation The RAM will not be cleared until the main power switch has been turned off and then on again. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. 3) Turn off and then on the main power. 4) As necessary, enter the settings printed out using 'PRINT'. Use it to reset the jam history. The jam history will not be reset until the OK key is pressed. Method of Operation 1) Select the time, and press the OK key. Use it to reset the error history. The error history will not be cleared until the OK key is pressed. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. Use it to initialize the password of the system administrator. The password will not be initialized until the OK key is pressed. Method of Operation 1)Select the item, and press the OK key. Use it to reset the address book data. The address book data will not be reset until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch. Use it to reset the counter readings controlled by the main controller PCB (main) for service work. (For the counters whose readings will be reset, see the list under COUNTER mode.) The counter readings will not be reset until the OK key is pressed. Contents Level
DC-CON
R-CON
JAM-HIST
ERR-HIST
PWD-CLR
ADRS-BK
CNT-MCON
17-84
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR Subheading CNT-DCON Contents Use it to reset the readings of the following counters controlled by the DC controller PCB: - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> SORT - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> FIN-STPR - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> FIN-PDDL - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> SADDLE - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> SDL-STPL The counter readings will not be initialized until the OK key is pressed. 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. Use it to reset the service mode settings (OPTION) back to their default settings (as when initializing the RAM). The settings will not be reset until the OK key is pressed. The data that will be reset is data on the main controller, DC controller, and reader controller. Method of Operation 1) Print out the settings using the following service mode item: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-RING. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. Use it to reset the following settings in user mode. - backup data (user settings) used to back up the copier control panel - backup data (user settings) on common settings - backup data (user settings) of various type expect on fax The settings will not be reset until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power. Use it to initialize the RAM on the main controller board SRAM board. - The contents of the RAM will not be initialized until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. - Performing this item will initialize all data on the SRAM board. In other words, the file management information for the hard disk will also be initialized, making reading of images from the hard disk impossible. If you need to perform this mode, be sure that the user is well aware of this fact. Method of Operation 1) Print out the service mode settings using the following service mode settings: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. In response, the machine will automatically start up and prompt you to turn off and then on the main power switch. 3) Turn off and then on the main power switch. Use it to reset card ID-related data (group). The card ID-related data will not be cleared until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch. Use it to reset a waste toner box full alert/error. If you have replaced the waste toner box, execute this item to reset the alert/error and initialize the counter used for the waste toner box detection mechanism. Use it to clear language-related errors. Recovers from an error and makes the language setting back to the default setting when a language-related error occurs after the language is changed to a different language. Use it to clear SRAM data of E-RDS. Sets the SCM value stored in the SRAM for E-RDS back to the factory setting value. Level
OPTION
MMI
MN-CON
CARD
W-TN-CLR
LANG-ERR
ERDS-DAT
SRAM data is cleared after the OK key is pressed. Operation procedure 1) Select this item and press the OK key. 2) When the data is normally cleared, "OK" is displayed. Reference - Be sure to use this to perform a bootable version update in the environment where E-RDS is used. The usage of SRAM for E-RDS differs depending on the version. Data mismatch occurs if SRAM is not cleared. - E-RDS related data stored in SRAM are "ON/OFF of E-RDS, a port number of the server, SOAP URL of the server, and a communication schedule with the server (How often does the machine obtain the data?), etc. Clears the value set in the following items. - COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>E-RDS - COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>RGW-PORT - COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>RGW-ADR - COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>COM-LOG SND-STUP Use it to initialize the setting for the transmission reading. (Execute this item when you switch language settings.) 1
17-85
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR Subheading CA-KEY Contents Use it to delete all the CA certificates and key pairs at once. Deletes all the CA certificates and key pairs at once when a serviceman replaces or discards a device. A CA certificate is used for the MEAP application that uses E-RDS and SSL client. A key pair is used for IPP, RUI, and MEAP SSL function. Level
- If this operation is not performed when a device is replaced or discarded, the CA certificate and key pair additionally registered by a user are left in the HDD, which is a problem in terms of security. A serviceman should therefore perform this operation. - Be sure to make sure that "OK" is displayed after performing this operation. If "NG" is displayed, the data may not be correctly deleted, and it is necessary to surely delete the CA certificate and key pair by initializing the HDD, etc. - This operation should not be carelessly executed because it deletes the SSL server certificate and key pair additionally registered by a user. When the data is deleted by mistake, a user needs to reinstall the SSL server certificate. When no data is additionally installed by a user, this operation places the machine in the same status as factory setting and gives no affect to the user. Operation procedure 1) Select this item and press the OK key. 2) When the data is normally cleared, "OK" is displayed. 3) Turn the main power OFF/ON. Reference: Turning the power OFF/ON extracts the CA certificate and key pair, registered at factory setting, from an archived file (/ BOOTDEV/KCMNG) so that they can be used for the above functions (E-RDS/SSL functions). KEY-CLR Clear the encryption key in the HDD encryption board. Clear the key in order to replace the encryption key for the HDD encryption board (security kit). Select KEY-CLR and press the OK key to clear the encryption key. When this operation is performed and the main power is turned OFF/ON, the processing for installation of the encryption board is activated, and new encryption key is created. <CAUTION> When this operation is performed, all the data in the HDD cannot be used. Therefore, when the main power is turned OFF/ ON, it is necessary to perform procedures starting from HDD formatting.
11. MISC-R
T-17-110 COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R Subheading SCANLAMP Contents Use it to check the activation of the scanning lamp. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key so that the scanning lamp will go on and remain on for 3 sec. Level 1
12. MISC-P
T-17-111 COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P Subheading P-PRINT Contents Use it to print out the service mode settings. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to print out the service mode settings. Printing will start in about 15 sec. Use it to print out the control panel key input history. 1) Select the item. 2) Press the item to print out the history. Use it to print out the jam history and the error history. 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to print out the histories. Use it to move data received in memory to a data Box. 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to move the data. Use it to print out a list of user mode settings. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to print out the service mode settings. Printing will start in about 3 sec. Use it to print out the service label. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to print out the service mode settings. Printing will start in about 15 sec. Use it to check the activation of the pre-exposure lamp (LED). Operation 1)Press the item to highlight. 2)Press the OK key so that the individual operations are performed for several seconds and the execution stops automatically (full activation). 3)Press the OK key to generate a printout. Reference If a fault is noted on the photosensitive drum as the result of activating the pre-exposure lamp, rotate the drum. Level
KEY-HIST
HIST-PRT
TRS-DATA
USER-PRT
LBL-PRNT
PRE-EXP
17-86
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P Subheading DEV-DR-Y/M/C Use it to move the developing rotary to the point of toner cartridge (Y/M/C) replacement. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key so that the developing rotary will move to the point of toner cartridge (Y) replacement. 1 The machine is set in such a way that the user will not be able to remove a toner cartridge if it still contains toner. The cartridge may be removed by moving the developing rotary to the point of access only when the cartridge has run out of toner. The use of this service mode item enables the user to move the developing rotary to the point of access so that the Y toner cartridge may be removed regardless of the presence/absence of toner inside it. D-PRINT D-PRINT Use it to generate printouts in service mode (DISPLAY). This mode is applicable to items indicated under DISPLAY for output of printouts (excluding those generated by P-PRINT/ LBL-PRINT/HIST-PRINT and ALARM). Use it to force primary ATVC. If you have replaced the intermediate transfer belt, perform this item. Method of Operation 1) Select the item,. 2) Press the OK key to start the operation. (The operation will end in about 1 min.) Use it to print out a log on the changes that may have taken place in machine inside temperature/humidity and fixing temperature. 1 The log shows changes in machine inside temperature/humidity and fixing temperature (middle) as colleted from the output of the environment sensor and non-contact thermistor. 1TR-ROT Use it to execute idle rotation of the primary transfer roller. Use it to force idle rotation of the primary transfer roller while applying a primary transfer bias so as to prevent a fault in primary transfer ATVC otherwise caused by changes in the environment. DR-P-ADJ Use it to adjust the phase shift of the photoactive drum. Method of Operation Use it to execute the adjustment sequence for a phase shift of the photosensitive drum. Operation 1)Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. In response, the adjustment will start and the indication will change to 'ACTIVE'. At the end, the indication will change to 'OK!'. Print out the print job history with detailed information. (for 100 jobs) Print out the history of 100 jobs stored in the copier main unit with detailed information. [Operation] Press the item to highlight it, and press the OK key to perform printing. [Remarks] The print job history is printed out with detailed information which is not displayed/output in the job history screen displayed by "system condition > print > job history > printer" and in the print job history report. The history of the latest 100 jobs are printed out. When the number of recorded print jobs is less than 100, all the recorded jobs are printed out. The difference to PJH-P2 is the number of jobs printed out. PJH-P-2 Print out the print job history with detailed information. (for all jobs) Print out the history of all jobs stored in the copier main unit with detailed information. [Operation] Press the item to highlight it, and press the OK key to perform printing. 1 [Remarks] The print job history is printed out with detailed information which is not displayed/output in the job history screen displayed by "system condition > print > job history > printer" and in the print job history report. The history of all the recorded jobs (up to 5000 jobs in the BW3/CL2 or later machine) are printed out. The difference to PJH-P1 is the number of jobs printed out. MAIN-DRV Use it to drive the intermediate transfer medium and the photosensitive drum for a specific period of time. 1) Select the item to highlight. 2) Press the OK key, and turn off and then on the power to start the operation. The operation will end in a specific period of time. Use it to start idle rotation of the secondary transfer roller/intermediate transfer belt. Perform idle rotation of the secondary roller and the intermediate transfer belt to prevent the intermediate belt from turning into a particular shape. 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation. Force ATR control. Use it to force ATR control if the correction value for ATR control is lost, as after E020 (field servicing) or after replacing the DC controller PCB. Use it to force initial rotation, as the first thing in the morning. You can force the various image stabilization control mechanisms (usually performed first thing in the morning during initial rotation) consisting of the following: rotation control single rotation ATVC patch detection Dmax The operation takes about 1 min. 1 1 Contents Level
1ATVC-EX
ENV-PRT
PJH-P-1
ITB-ROT
ATR-EX
INTR-EX
13. SENS-ADJ
17-87
Chapter 17
T-17-112 COPIER>FUNCTION>SENS-ADJ Subheading STCK-LMT Adjusting the Position of the Shift Tray Full Sensor 1 The notation will be 'ON' when detecting the full condition; otherwise, 'OFF'. Contents Level
- Adjusting the Shift Tray Full Sensor Position 1) Loosen the screws [1], and temporarily fix both full sensors in place farthest from the paper.
F-17-28
2) Place a stack of sheet about 60 mm high over the point of detection of either full sensor on the shift tray.
F-17-29
3) Select the item, and press the OK key. 4) While referring to the indication, move the sensor closer to the paper, and attach it where 'ON' goes on.
F-17-30
MEMO: If 'ON' is not indicated when the full sensor is moved closest to the paper, keep adding a sheet of paper until 'ON' is indicated.
17-88
Chapter 17
[1]
F-17-31
5) Move the other full sensor to the position of detection. 6) Perform step 4) on the other full sensor. 7) When done, press the Stop key. 14. SYSTEM
T-17-113 COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM Subheading DOWNLOAD Contents Use it to switch to download mode. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key so that the machine will enter download mode and wait for a command (connection). (At his time, 'STAND-BY' or 'STANDBY' will appear next to the Level 3 item of DOWNLOAD.) 3) Perform download work using the service support tool (The indication will read 'CONNECTED' while a communication is under way with the PC.) 4) See that the notation has changed to 'HOLD' to indicate that the communication is over. (You may turn off the power when the indication is 'HOLD'.) Use it to select a partition number for execution of HD-CHECK. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Select a partition number using the keypad. 0: check on and recovery of entire HDD 1: image storage area 2: general-purpose file storage area 3: PDL-related file storage area 4: firmware storage area A general-purpose file refers to a file containing such management data as user settings data, log data, PDL spool data, image data. 3) Press the OK key. HD-CHECK Use it to check the partition selected by CHK-TYPE and to repair a fault. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key. 3) Check the result. (1: OK, 2: NG (hardware), 3: NG (software), recovery sector/alternate sector). Use it to select the partition selected by CHK-TYPE. - if 0 or 4 is selected, the selection will be invalid. - if 1 is selected, the image management data stored in the SRAM area and the general-purpose file area will also be initialized. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key. If '1: image storage area' or '3: PDL-related file storage area' is selected under 'CHK-TYPE' and <HD-CLEAR> is performed, the initialization will take place only when the power has been turned off and then on again. The initialization will take about 5 min, during which the progress bar will grow longer gradually. You must never turn off the power while the progress bar is indicated. DEBUG-1 DEBUG-2 Not used Not used 2 2 Level
CHK-TYPE
HD-CLEAR

0011-6089
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. INSTALL
17-89
Chapter 17
T-17-114 COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL Subheading TONER-S Contents Use it to stir the toner inside the developing assembly at time of installation. Method of Operation 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. - the machine starts operation. - the machine begins a countdown. 2) See that 'OK' has appeared, indicating that the operation is over. Level
STIR-Y/M/C
Use it to stir the toner inside the toner cartridge (Y/M/C). Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start operation.
INIT-Y/M/C INIT-3
Use it to cause the machine to read the initial value of the toner density signal (SGNL, REF) of Y/M/C. Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation. Use it to cause the machine to read the initial value of the toner density signals (SGNL, REF) of 3 colors (YMC). Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation. Use to supply toner from the toner cartridge (Y/M/C) to the toner buffer assembly for the first time. Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start operation.
1 1
SPLY-H-Y/M/C
CARD Use it to set up a card reader. 1 to 2001 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) Enter a number for the cards, and press the OK key. (As many as 1000 cards each given a number starting with the one you entered will be enabled for use.) At this time, the card control information (group ID and ID No.) is initialized.
KEY
Use it to set the control key function. 0: do not recognize control key function (as selected at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 1: recognize control key function 1) Select the following, and enter '1': COPIER>INSTALL>KEY. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch (so that the control key function will be recognized).
INISET-Y/M/C
Use it to set up the Y/M/C color developing assemblies for the first time. The series of operations needed to initialize the Y/M/C color developing assembly will be performed at a time: Method of Operation 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. - the machine will start operation. - the machine will start a countdown. 2) See that 'OK' appears, indicating that the operation is over.
INISET-3
Use it to set up the 3 (YMC) developing assemblies. The series of operations needed to initialize the 3 color (YMC) developing assemblies will be performed at a time. 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. - the machine will start operation. - the machine will make a countdown. 2) See that 'OK' appears, indicting that the operation is over.
STIR-3 SPLY-H-3
Use it to supply toner from the toner cartridge (HY/MC) to the toner buffer assembly. Use it to supply toner from the toner cartridge (HY/MC) to the toner buffer assembly. 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start operation. - the machine will start operation. - the machine will start a countdown. 2) See that 'OK' appears, indicating that the operation is over.
17-90
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL Subheading AINR-OFF Contents Use it to enable or disable initial multiple rotation used for installation You can disable initial multiple rotation if you are concerned about the image formation sequence (i.e., forming a patch or executing Dmax/Dhalf), which can soil or wear out internal components during installation work). If the color toner set-up run (FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSET-3) ends fully normally, the setting herein will automatically be cancelled (to prevent faults that otherwise could occur if the function is not manually switched back); if the run failed to end, however, the initial multiple rotation function will remain disabled. Settings range 0: enable initial multiple rotation 1: disable initial multiple rotation (item under DC controller) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 Level
E-RDS
Use it to select whether to use E-RDS. Selects whether to use E-RDS (Embedded-RDS) to send device counter/fault/consumable information to a sales company's server by SOAP protocol. Setting value 0: Do not use E-RDS. 1: Use E-RDS. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 1
RGW-PORT
Use it to specify a port number for the sales company's server used for E-RDS. Setting range 1 to 65535 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 443] 1
COM-TEST
Use it to check a connection to the sales company's server used for E-RDS. Attempts to make a connection to the sales company's server used for E-RDS. Result: OK: Can be connected NG: Cannot be connected 1
COM-LOG
Use it to display the detail results of a communication test with the sales company's server used for E-RDS. Switches the screen to display information of a connection error with the sales company's server. Displays a date, time, error code, and error information for the error. Maximum number of logs: 30 Error information: 128 characters maximum (NULL is not included.)
RGW-ADR
Use it to specify a URL for the sales company's server used for E-RDS. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010] 1
2. CCD
3. LASER
17-91
Chapter 17
T-17-116
COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER Subheading POWER Contents Use it to turn on the laser for adjustment of the laser power. 1) Select the item to highlight. 2) Press the OK key. To stop, press the Stop key. Level
4. DPC
T-17-117 COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC Subheading DPC Contents Use it to execute potential control. Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to perform the operation. (The operation will stop automatically.). Use it to adjust the offset value of the potential measurement circuit. Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start operation. (The operation will stop automatically.) 1 Level 1
OFST
5. CST
6. CLEANING
T-17-119 COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING Subheading TBLT-CLN Contents Use it to clean the intermediate transfer belt. By removing foreign matter (e.g., fingerprints, oils, paper lint) from the intermediate transfer belt, a number of image faults may be prevented. Method of Operation Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation. (The operation will stop automatically.) Cleaning continues for about 80 sec, and will stop automatically. Level
WIRE-CLN
Use it to cause cleaning of all charging wires at the same time 5 times continuously. Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. - The notation changes to 'ACTIVE', and the machine starts wire cleaning. 2) Press the OK key once again to stop rotation. Use it to clean the primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire (a single round trip). The primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire may be cleaned for a signal round trip. Normally, the wire is cleaned by 5 round trips (about 3 min); on the other hand, the single trip in this mode will take no more than about 40 sec.) Method of Operation WIRE-EX 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. - The notation changes to 'ACTIVE', and the machine starts wire cleaning. 2) Stop the OK key once again to stop the rotation.
WIRE-EX
17-92
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING Subheading BK-BNDEX Contents Use it to perform the black band sequence. - a sequence of operations will be performed to clean the intermediate transfer belt to prevent image faults (white spots) after filed servicing. The operation will take about 15 sec. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. - The notation will change to 'ACTIVE', and the wire will be cleaned. 2) To end the operation, press the OK key once again. Level
7. FIXING
B
F-17-32
17-93
Chapter 17
[1]
F-17-33
8. PANEL
T-17-121 COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL Subheading LCD-CHK Check the LCD for missing dots. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key to start the operation. In response, the front of the touch panel goes on as follows: white, black, red, green, blue. 2) Press the Stop key to stop the operation. (If a printer model, press the Clear key.) Contents Level
LED-CHK Checking the LEDs on the control panel Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key to start the operation. See that the LEDs go on in turn. 2) Press 'LED-OFF' to stop the operation. LED-OFF Use it to check the LCD for missing dots. Method of Operation 1) Select the item to stop the check under 'LED-CHK'. 1
KEY-CHK Use it to check the key inputs. Method of Operation 1) Select 'KEY-CHK' so that the numbers/names of the input keys will be indicated. 2) Press any key to check; if normal, the touch panel will show its corresponding character. (See the table below.) 3) Select 'KEY-CHK' to end the operation.
TOUCHCHK Use it to adjust the coordinates of the analog touch panel. Method of Operation - use it to match the points of press on the touch panel and the coordinates of the LCD. - perform this service mode if you have replaced the LCD. 1) Select 'TOUCH CHK' to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Press the symbol '+' appearing on the touch panel in sequence (9 points) to end the adjustment.

9. PART-CHK
17-94
Chapter 17
T-17-123 COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK Subheading CL Contents Use it to select the clutch whose operation you want to check. (between 1 and 10; 4 through 10 are spares) Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code of the clutch you want using the keypad. 1: color developing clutch 2: color toner supply clutch 3: black developing clutch 8: deck feed clutch 9: deck pickup clutch 4 to 7,10: spare 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press 'CL-ON' to check the operation. Level
CL-ON Use it to start checking the clutch operation. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and presses the OK key so that the clutch goes on and off as follows: ON for 0.5 sec>OFF for 10 sec>ON for 0.5 sec>OFF for 10 sec>ON for 0.5 sec>OFF FAN Use it to select the clutch whose operation you want to check. (between 1 and 10; 4 through 10 are spares) Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code of the clutch you want to check using the keypad. 1: primary charging suction fan (FM1) 2: primary charging exhaust fan (FM2) 3: feed fan 3 (FM11), feed fan 4 (FM12) 4: feed fan 1 (FM3); feed fan 2 (FM4) 5: fixing heat exhaust fan (FM5) 6: delivery cooling fan 1 (FM6) 7: process unit cooling fan (FM7) 8: spare 9: power supply cooling fan (FM9) 10: delivery cooling fan 2 (FM10) 4 through 10: spare 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press 'CL-ON' to check the operation. FAN-ON Use it to start the operation of the fan Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key to start the following: in the case of FAN= 1,2,5,7,10 for 10 sec, ON at full speed>for 10 sec, ON at half-speed>standby Copier Heat Exhaust Fan, Delivery Cooling Fan, Manual Feed Cooling Fan in the case of FAN= 3,4,6,9 for 10 sec, ON at full speed>standby
17-95
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK Subheading MTR Contents Use it to select the clutch whose operation you want to check. between 1 and 32; the following are spares: 16, 24, 29, 30, 31, 32 Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code of the clutch using the keypad. 1: polygon motor (M1) 2: drum/ITB motor (M2) 3: developing motor (M3) 4: fixing motor (M4) 5: developing rotary motor (M5) 6: manual feed pre-registration motor (M6) 7: spare 8: registration motor (M8) 9: external delivery motor (M9) 10: duplex reversal motor (M10) 11: duplex left motor (M11) 12: duplex middle motor (M12) 13: duplex right motor (M13) 14: right deck pull-off motor (M14) 15: vertical path motor (M15) 16: spare 17: right deck pickup motor (M17) 18: left deck pickup motor (M18) 19: cassette pickup motor (M19) 20: secondary transfer outside roller shift motor (M20) 21: ITB cleaner shift motor (M21) 22: outside heating roller shift motor (M22) 23: hopper stirring motor (M23) 24: spare 25: black goner supply motor (M25) 26: primary charging wire cleaning motor (M26) 27: pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor (M27) 28: horizontal registration motor (M28) 35: deck main motor(M101) 36: shift motor 29 to 34: Reserve 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press 'CL-ON' to check the operation. MTR-ON Use it to start the operation of the motor. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) - in the case of MTR=1 through 4, 6, 8 through 15, 17 through 19, 23, 25 through 28, for 10 sec, ON>end - in the case of MTR=20 through 22, for 5 sec, ON>end - in the case of MTR=5, HP search start>end SL Use it to select the solenoid whose operation you want to check. between 1 and 15 Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code of the solenoid using the keypad. 1: manual feed pickup solenoid (SL1) 2: fixing web solenoid (SL2) 3: reversal shift solenoid (SL3) 4: left deck confluence solenoid (SL4) 5: delivery solenoid (SL5) 6: deck (right) pickup solenoid (SL6) 7: deck (left) pickup solenoid (SL7) 8: cassette 3 pickup solenoid (SL8) 9: cassette 4 pickup solenoid (SL9) 10: developing rotary fixing solenoid (SL10) 11: patch image read sensor shutter solenoid (SL1C) 12: ATR sensor shutter solenoid (SL2C) 14: deck pickup roller release solenoid(SL101) 15: deck open solenoid 13 : spare 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press 'SL-ON' to check the operation. SL-ON Use it to start the operation of the solenoid. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that the solenoid goes on and off as follows: for 0.5 sec, ON>for 0 sec, OFF>for 0.5 sec, ON>for 10 sec, OFF>for 0.5 sec, ON>OFF 1 Level
10. CLEAR
17-96
Chapter 17
T-17-124 COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR Subheading ERR Use it to clear an error code (E000, E001, E002, E003). Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power. DC-CON Use this item to reset the RAM on the DC controller PCB. The RAM will not actually be reset until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. Method of Operation print out the service mode settings using the following service mode item: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. 3) Turn off and then on the main power switch. 4) As necessary, enter the settings that have been printed out using 'P-PRINT'. 1 Contents Level
R-CON Use it to reset the RAM on the reader controller PCB. Method of Operation The RAM will not be cleared until the main power switch has been turned off and then on again. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. 3) Turn off and then on the main power. 4) As necessary, enter the settings printed out using 'PRINT'.
JAM-HIST Use it to reset the jam history. The jam history will not be reset until the OK key is pressed. Method of Operation 1) Select the time, and press the OK key. ERR-HIST Use it to reset the error history. The error history will not be cleared until the OK key is pressed. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. PWD-CLR Use it to initialize the password of the system administrator. The password will not be initialized until the OK key is pressed. Method of Operation 1)Select the item, and press the OK key. ADRS-BK Use it to reset the address book data. The address book data will not be reset until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch. CNT-MCON Use it to reset the counter readings controlled by the main controller PCB (main) for service work. (For the counters whose readings will be reset, see the list under COUNTER mode.) The counter readings will not be reset until the OK key is pressed. 1 1 1
CNT-DCON Use it to reset the readings of the following counters controlled by the DC controller PCB: - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> SORT - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> FIN-STPR - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> FIN-PDDL - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> SADDLE - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> SDL-STPL The counter readings will not be initialized until the OK key is pressed. 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. OPTION
Use it to reset the service mode settings (OPTION) back to their default settings (as when initializing the RAM). The settings will not be reset until the OK key is pressed. The data that will be reset is data on the main controller, DC controller, and reader controller. Method of Operation 1) Print out the settings using the following service mode item: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-RING. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key.
17-97
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR Subheading MMI Use it to reset the following settings in user mode. - backup data (user settings) used to back up the copier control panel - backup data (user settings) on common settings - backup data (user settings) of various type expect on fax The settings will not be reset until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power. Contents Level
MN-CON
Use it to initialize the RAM on the main controller board SRAM board. - The contents of the RAM will not be initialized until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. - Performing this item will initialize all data on the SRAM board. In other words, the file management information for the hard disk will also be initialized, making reading of images from the hard disk impossible. If you need to perform this mode, be sure that the user is well aware of this fact. Method of Operation 1) Print out the service mode settings using the following service mode settings: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. In response, the machine will automatically start up and prompt you to turn off and then on the main power switch. 3) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
CARD
Use it to reset card ID-related data (group). The card ID-related data will not be cleared until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch. Use it to reset a waste toner box full alert/error. If you have replaced the waste toner box, execute this item to reset the alert/error and initialize the counter used for the waste toner box detection mechanism.
W-TN-CLR
LANG-ERR
Use it to clear language-related errors. Recovers from an error and makes the language setting back to the default setting when a language-related error occurs after the language is changed to a different language.
ERDS-DAT
Use it to clear SRAM data of E-RDS. Sets the SCM value stored in the SRAM for E-RDS back to the factory setting value.
SRAM data is cleared after the OK key is pressed. Operation procedure 1) Select this item and press the OK key. 2) When the data is normally cleared, "OK" is displayed. Reference - Be sure to use this to perform a bootable version update in the environment where E-RDS is used. The usage of SRAM for E-RDS differs depending on the version. Data mismatch occurs if SRAM is not cleared. - E-RDS related data stored in SRAM are "ON/OFF of E-RDS, a port number of the server, SOAP URL of the server, and a communication schedule with the server (How often does the machine obtain the data?), etc. Clears the value set in the following items. - COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>E-RDS - COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>RGW-PORT - COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>RGW-ADR - COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>COM-LOG SND-STUP Use it to initialize the setting for the transmission reading. (Execute this item when you switch language settings.) 2 1
17-98
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR Subheading CA-KEY Contents Use it to delete all the CA certificates and key pairs at once. Deletes all the CA certificates and key pairs at once when a serviceman replaces or discards a device. A CA certificate is used for the MEAP application that uses E-RDS and SSL client. A key pair is used for IPP, RUI, and MEAP SSL function. Level
- If this operation is not performed when a device is replaced or discarded, the CA certificate and key pair additionally registered by a user are left in the HDD, which is a problem in terms of security. A serviceman should therefore perform this operation. - Be sure to make sure that "OK" is displayed after performing this operation. If "NG" is displayed, the data may not be correctly deleted, and it is necessary to surely delete the CA certificate and key pair by initializing the HDD, etc. - This operation should not be carelessly executed because it deletes the SSL server certificate and key pair additionally registered by a user. When the data is deleted by mistake, a user needs to reinstall the SSL server certificate. When no data is additionally installed by a user, this operation places the machine in the same status as factory setting and gives no affect to the user. Operation procedure 1) Select this item and press the OK key. 2) When the data is normally cleared, "OK" is displayed. 3) Turn the main power OFF/ON. Reference: Turning the power OFF/ON extracts the CA certificate and key pair, registered at factory setting, from an archived file (/ BOOTDEV/KCMNG) so that they can be used for the above functions (E-RDS/SSL functions).
11. MISC-R
T-17-125 COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R Subheading SCANLAMP Contents Use it to check the activation of the scanning lamp. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key so that the scanning lamp will go on and remain on for 3 sec. Level
12. MISC-P
T-17-126 COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P Subheading P-PRINT Use it to print out the service mode settings. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to print out the service mode settings. Printing will start in about 15 sec. KEY-HIST Use it to print out the control panel key input history. 1) Select the item. 2) Press the item to print out the history. Use it to print out the jam history and the error history. 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to print out the histories. Use it to move data received in memory to a data Box. 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to move the data. Use it to print out a list of user mode settings. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to print out the service mode settings. Printing will start in about 3 sec. Use it to print out the service label. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to print out the service mode settings. Printing will start in about 15 sec. 1 Contents Level
HIST-PRT
TRS-DATA
USER-PRT
LBL-PRNT
17-99
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P Subheading PRE-EXP Contents Use it to check the activation of the pre-exposure lamp (LED). Operation 1)Press the item to highlight. 2)Press the OK key so that the individual operations are performed for several seconds and the execution stops automatically (full activation). 3)Press the OK key to generate a printout. Reference If a fault is noted on the photosensitive drum as the result of activating the pre-exposure lamp, rotate the drum. 1 Level
DEV-DR-Y/M/C
Use it to move the developing rotary to the point of toner cartridge (Y/M/C) replacement. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key so that the developing rotary will move to the point of toner cartridge (Y) replacement. 1 The machine is set in such a way that the user will not be able to remove a toner cartridge if it still contains toner. The cartridge may be removed by moving the developing rotary to the point of access only when the cartridge has run out of toner. The use of this service mode item enables the user to move the developing rotary to the point of access so that the Y toner cartridge may be removed regardless of the presence/absence of toner inside it.
D-PRINT
D-PRINT Use it to generate printouts in service mode (DISPLAY). This mode is applicable to items indicated under DISPLAY for output of printouts (excluding those generated by P-PRINT/ LBL-PRINT/HIST-PRINT and ALARM).
1ATVC-EX Use it to force primary ATVC. If you have replaced the intermediate transfer belt, perform this item. Method of Operation 1) Select the item,. 2) Press the OK key to start the operation. (The operation will end in about 1 min.) ENV-PRT Use it to print out a log on the changes that may have taken place in machine inside temperature/humidity and fixing temperature. 1 The log shows changes in machine inside temperature/humidity and fixing temperature (middle) as colleted from the output of the environment sensor and non-contact thermistor. 1TR-ROT Use it to execute idle rotation of the primary transfer roller. Use it to force idle rotation of the primary transfer roller while applying a primary transfer bias so as to prevent a fault in primary transfer ATVC otherwise caused by changes in the environment.
DR-P-ADJ
Use it to adjust the phase shift of the photoactive drum. Method of Operation Use it to execute the adjustment sequence for a phase shift of the photosensitive drum. Operation 1)Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. In response, the adjustment will start and the indication will change to 'ACTIVE'. At the end, the indication will change to 'OK!'.
MAIN-DRV
Use it to drive the intermediate transfer medium and the photosensitive drum for a specific period of time. 1) Select the item to highlight. 2) Press the OK key, and turn off and then on the power to start the operation. The operation will end in a specific period of time. Use it to start idle rotation of the secondary transfer roller/intermediate transfer belt. Perform idle rotation of the secondary roller and the intermediate transfer belt to prevent the intermediate belt from turning into a particular shape. 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation.
ITB-ROT
17-100
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P Subheading ATR-EX Contents Force ATR control. Use it to force ATR control if the correction value for ATR control is lost, as after E020 (field servicing) or after replacing the DC controller PCB. Use it to force initial rotation, as the first thing in the morning. You can force the various image stabilization control mechanisms (usually performed first thing in the morning during initial rotation) consisting of the following: rotation control single rotation ATVC patch detection Dmax The operation takes about 1 min. Level 2
INTR-EX
13. SENS-ADJ
T-17-127 COPIER>FUNCTION>SENS-ADJ Subheading STCK-LMT Adjusting the Position of the Shift Tray Full Sensor The notation will be 'ON' when detecting the full condition; otherwise, 'OFF'. 1 Contents Level
F-17-34
F-17-35
17-101
Chapter 17
F-17-36
Memo: If 'ON' is not indicated when the full sensor is moved closest to the paper, keep adding a sheet of paper until 'ON' is indicated.
[1]
F-17-37
T-17-128 COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM Subheading DOWNLOAD Use it to switch to download mode. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key so that the machine will enter download mode and wait for a command (connection). (At his time, 'STAND-BY' or 'STANDBY' will appear next to the Level 3 item of DOWNLOAD.) 3) Perform download work using the service support tool (The indication will read 'CONNECTED' while a communication is under way with the PC.) 4) See that the notation has changed to 'HOLD' to indicate that the communication is over. (You may turn off the power when the indication is 'HOLD'.) Contents Level
CHK-TYPE Use it to select a partition number for execution of HD-CHECK. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Select a partition number using the keypad. 0: check on and recovery of entire HDD 1: image storage area 2: general-purpose file storage area 3: PDL-related file storage area 4: firmware storage area A general-purpose file refers to a file containing such management data as user settings data, log data, PDL spool data, image data. 3) Press the OK key.
17-102
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM Subheading HD-CHECK Use it to check the partition selected by CHK-TYPE and to repair a fault. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key. 3) Check the result. (1: OK, 2: NG (hardware), 3: NG (software), recovery sector/alternate sector). HD-CLEAR Use it to select the partition selected by CHK-TYPE. - if 0 or 4 is selected, the selection will be invalid. - if 1 is selected, the image management data stored in the SRAM area and the general-purpose file area will also be initialized. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key. If '1: image storage area' or '3: PDL-related file storage area' is selected under 'CHK-TYPE' and <HD-CLEAR> is performed, the initialization will take place only when the power has been turned off and then on again. The initialization will take about 5 min, during which the progress bar will grow longer gradually. You must never turn off the power while the progress bar is indicated. Contents Level

0004-9726
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1. INSTALL

T-17-129 COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL Subheading TONER-S Contents Use it to stir the toner inside the developing assembly at time of installation. Method of Operation 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. - the machine starts operation. - the machine begins a countdown. 2) See that 'OK' has appeared, indicating that the operation is over. Level
STIR-Y/M/C
Use it to stir the toner inside the toner cartridge (Y/M/C). Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start operation.
INIT-Y/M/C INIT-3
Use it to cause the machine to read the initial value of the toner density signal (SGNL, REF) of Y/M/C. Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation. Use it to cause the machine to read the initial value of the toner density signals (SGNL, REF) of 3 colors (YMC). Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation. Use to supply toner from the toner cartridge (Y/M/C) to the toner buffer assembly for the first time. Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start operation.
1 1
SPLY-H-Y/M/C
CARD Use it to set up a card reader. 1 to 2001 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) Enter a number for the cards, and press the OK key. (As many as 1000 cards each given a number starting with the one you entered will be enabled for use.) At this time, the card control information (group ID and ID No.) is initialized.
KEY
Use it to set the control key function. 0: do not recognize control key function (as selected at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 1: recognize control key function 1) Select the following, and enter '1': COPIER>INSTALL>KEY. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch (so that the control key function will be recognized).
INISET-Y/M/C
Use it to set up the Y/M/C color developing assemblies for the first time. The series of operations needed to initialize the Y/M/C color developing assembly will be performed at a time: Method of Operation 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. - the machine will start operation. - the machine will start a countdown. 2) See that 'OK' appears, indicating that the operation is over.
17-103
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL Subheading INISET-3 Contents Use it to set up the 3 (YMC) developing assemblies. The series of operations needed to initialize the 3 color (YMC) developing assemblies will be performed at a time. 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. - the machine will start operation. - the machine will make a countdown. 2) See that 'OK' appears, indicting that the operation is over. Level
STIR-3 SPLY-H-3
Use it to supply toner from the toner cartridge (HY/MC) to the toner buffer assembly. Use it to supply toner from the toner cartridge (HY/MC) to the toner buffer assembly. 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start operation. - the machine will start operation. - the machine will start a countdown. 2) See that 'OK' appears, indicating that the operation is over.
AINR-OFF
Use it to enable or disable initial multiple rotation used for installation You can disable initial multiple rotation if you are concerned about the image formation sequence (i.e., forming a patch or executing Dmax/Dhalf), which can soil or wear out internal components during installation work). If the color toner set-up run (FUNCTION>INSTALL>INSET-3) ends fully normally, the setting herein will automatically be cancelled (to prevent faults that otherwise could occur if the function is not manually switched back); if the run failed to end, however, the initial multiple rotation function will remain disabled. Settings range 0: enable initial multiple rotation 1: disable initial multiple rotation (item under DC controller) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0
E-RDS
Use it to select whether to use E-RDS. Selects whether to use E-RDS (Embedded-RDS) to send device counter/fault/consumable information to a sales company's server by SOAP protocol. Setting value 0: Do not use E-RDS. 1: Use E-RDS. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 1
RGW-PORT
Use it to specify a port number for the sales company's server used for E-RDS. Setting range 1 to 65535 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 443] 1
COM-TEST
Use it to check a connection to the sales company's server used for E-RDS. Attempts to make a connection to the sales company's server used for E-RDS. Result: OK: Can be connected NG: Cannot be connected 1
COM-LOG
Use it to display the detail results of a communication test with the sales company's server used for E-RDS. Switches the screen to display information of a connection error with the sales company's server. Displays a date, time, error code, and error information for the error. Maximum number of logs: 30 Error information: 128 characters maximum (NULL is not included.)
RGW-ADR
Use it to specify a URL for the sales company's server used for E-RDS. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010] 1
2. CCD
17-104
Chapter 17
3. LASER
T-17-131
COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER Subheading POWER Contents Use it to turn on the laser for adjustment of the laser power. 1) Select the item to highlight. 2) Press the OK key. To stop, press the Stop key. Level
4. DPC
T-17-132 COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC Subheading DPC Contents Use it to execute potential control. Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to perform the operation. (The operation will stop automatically.). Use it to adjust the offset value of the potential measurement circuit. Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start operation. (The operation will stop automatically.) 1 Level 1
OFST
5. CST
6. CLEANING
17-105
Chapter 17
T-17-134 COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING Subheading TBLT-CLN Contents Use it to clean the intermediate transfer belt. By removing foreign matter (e.g., fingerprints, oils, paper lint) from the intermediate transfer belt, a number of image faults may be prevented. Method of Operation Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation. (The operation will stop automatically.) Cleaning continues for about 80 sec, and will stop automatically. Level
WIRE-CLN
Use it to cause cleaning of all charging wires at the same time 5 times continuously. Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. - The notation changes to 'ACTIVE', and the machine starts wire cleaning. 2) Press the OK key once again to stop rotation. Use it to clean the primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire (a single round trip). The primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire may be cleaned for a signal round trip. Normally, the wire is cleaned by 5 round trips (about 3 min); on the other hand, the single trip in this mode will take no more than about 40 sec.) Method of Operation WIRE-EX 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. - The notation changes to 'ACTIVE', and the machine starts wire cleaning. 2) Stop the OK key once again to stop the rotation.
WIRE-EX
BK-BNDEX
Use it to perform the black band sequence. - a sequence of operations will be performed to clean the intermediate transfer belt to prevent image faults (white spots) after filed servicing. The operation will take about 15 sec. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. - The notation will change to 'ACTIVE', and the wire will be cleaned. 2) To end the operation, press the OK key once again.
7. FIXING
17-106
Chapter 17
B
F-17-38
[1]
F-17-39
8. PANEL
T-17-136 COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL Subheading LCD-CHK Check the LCD for missing dots. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key to start the operation. In response, the front of the touch panel goes on as follows: white, black, red, green, blue. 2) Press the Stop key to stop the operation. (If a printer model, press the Clear key.) Contents Level
LED-CHK Checking the LEDs on the control panel Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key to start the operation. See that the LEDs go on in turn. 2) Press 'LED-OFF' to stop the operation. LED-OFF Use it to check the LCD for missing dots. Method of Operation 1) Select the item to stop the check under 'LED-CHK'. 1
17-107
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL Subheading KEY-CHK Use it to check the key inputs. Method of Operation 1) Select 'KEY-CHK' so that the numbers/names of the input keys will be indicated. 2) Press any key to check; if normal, the touch panel will show its corresponding character. (See the table below.) 3) Select 'KEY-CHK' to end the operation. Contents Level
TOUCHCHK Use it to adjust the coordinates of the analog touch panel. Method of Operation - use it to match the points of press on the touch panel and the coordinates of the LCD. - perform this service mode if you have replaced the LCD. 1) Select 'TOUCH CHK' to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Press the symbol '+' appearing on the touch panel in sequence (9 points) to end the adjustment.

9. PART-CHK
T-17-138 COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK Subheading CL Contents Use it to select the clutch whose operation you want to check. (between 1 and 10; 4 through 10 are spares) Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code of the clutch you want using the keypad. 1: color developing clutch 2: color toner supply clutch 3: black developing clutch 8: deck feed clutch 9: deck pickup clutch 4 to 7,10: spare 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press 'CL-ON' to check the operation. Level
CL-ON Use it to start checking the clutch operation. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and presses the OK key so that the clutch goes on and off as follows: ON for 0.5 sec>OFF for 10 sec>ON for 0.5 sec>OFF for 10 sec>ON for 0.5 sec>OFF
17-108
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK Subheading FAN Use it to select the clutch whose operation you want to check. (between 1 and 10; 4 through 10 are spares) Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code of the clutch you want to check using the keypad. 1: primary charging suction fan (FM1) 2: primary charging exhaust fan (FM2) 3: feed fan 3 (FM11), feed fan 4 (FM12) 4: feed fan 1 (FM3); feed fan 2 (FM4) 5: fixing heat exhaust fan (FM5) 6: delivery cooling fan 1 (FM6) 7: process unit cooling fan (FM7) 8: spare 9: power supply cooling fan (FM9) 10: delivery cooling fan 2 (FM10) 4 through 10: spare 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press 'CL-ON' to check the operation. FAN-ON Use it to start the operation of the fan Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key to start the following: in the case of FAN= 1,2,5,7,10 for 10 sec, ON at full speed>for 10 sec, ON at half-speed>standby Copier Heat Exhaust Fan, Delivery Cooling Fan, Manual Feed Cooling Fan in the case of FAN= 3,4,6,9 for 10 sec, ON at full speed>standby Contents Level
MTR
Use it to select the clutch whose operation you want to check. between 1 and 32; the following are spares: 16, 24, 29, 30, 31, 32 Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code of the clutch using the keypad. 1: polygon motor (M1) 2: drum/ITB motor (M2) 3: developing motor (M3) 4: fixing motor (M4) 5: developing rotary motor (M5) 6: manual feed pre-registration motor (M6) 7: spare 8: registration motor (M8) 9: external delivery motor (M9) 10: duplex reversal motor (M10) 11: duplex left motor (M11) 12: duplex middle motor (M12) 13: duplex right motor (M13) 14: right deck pull-off motor (M14) 15: vertical path motor (M15) 16: spare 17: right deck pickup motor (M17) 18: left deck pickup motor (M18) 19: cassette pickup motor (M19) 20: secondary transfer outside roller shift motor (M20) 21: ITB cleaner shift motor (M21) 22: outside heating roller shift motor (M22) 23: hopper stirring motor (M23) 24: spare 25: black goner supply motor (M25) 26: primary charging wire cleaning motor (M26) 27: pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor (M27) 28: horizontal registration motor (M28) 35: deck main motor(M101) 36: shift motor 29 to 34: Reserve 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press 'CL-ON' to check the operation.
MTR-ON Use it to start the operation of the motor. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) - in the case of MTR=1 through 4, 6, 8 through 15, 17 through 19, 23, 25 through 28, for 10 sec, ON>end - in the case of MTR=20 through 22, for 5 sec, ON>end - in the case of MTR=5, HP search start>end
17-109
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK Subheading SL Contents Use it to select the solenoid whose operation you want to check. between 1 and 15 Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the code of the solenoid using the keypad. 1: manual feed pickup solenoid (SL1) 2: fixing web solenoid (SL2) 3: reversal shift solenoid (SL3) 4: left deck confluence solenoid (SL4) 5: delivery solenoid (SL5) 6: deck (right) pickup solenoid (SL6) 7: deck (left) pickup solenoid (SL7) 8: cassette 3 pickup solenoid (SL8) 9: cassette 4 pickup solenoid (SL9) 10: developing rotary fixing solenoid (SL10) 11: patch image read sensor shutter solenoid (SL1C) 12: ATR sensor shutter solenoid (SL2C) 14: deck pickup roller release solenoid(SL101) 15: deck open solenoid 13 : spare 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press 'SL-ON' to check the operation. SL-ON Use it to start the operation of the solenoid. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that the solenoid goes on and off as follows: for 0.5 sec, ON>for 0 sec, OFF>for 0.5 sec, ON>for 10 sec, OFF>for 0.5 sec, ON>OFF 1 Level
10. CLEAR
T-17-139 COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR Subheading ERR Use it to clear an error code (E000, E001, E002, E003). Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power. DC-CON Use this item to reset the RAM on the DC controller PCB. The RAM will not actually be reset until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. Method of Operation print out the service mode settings using the following service mode item: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. 3) Turn off and then on the main power switch. 4) As necessary, enter the settings that have been printed out using 'P-PRINT'. 1 Contents Level
R-CON Use it to reset the RAM on the reader controller PCB. Method of Operation The RAM will not be cleared until the main power switch has been turned off and then on again. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. 3) Turn off and then on the main power. 4) As necessary, enter the settings printed out using 'PRINT'.
JAM-HIST Use it to reset the jam history. The jam history will not be reset until the OK key is pressed. Method of Operation 1) Select the time, and press the OK key. ERR-HIST Use it to reset the error history. The error history will not be cleared until the OK key is pressed. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. PWD-CLR Use it to initialize the password of the system administrator. The password will not be initialized until the OK key is pressed. Method of Operation 1)Select the item, and press the OK key. 1 1
17-110
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR Subheading ADRS-BK Use it to reset the address book data. The address book data will not be reset until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch. CNT-MCON Use it to reset the counter readings controlled by the main controller PCB (main) for service work. (For the counters whose readings will be reset, see the list under COUNTER mode.) The counter readings will not be reset until the OK key is pressed. 1 Contents Level
CNT-DCON Use it to reset the readings of the following counters controlled by the DC controller PCB: - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> SORT - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> FIN-STPR - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> FIN-PDDL - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> SADDLE - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL- 2> SDL-STPL The counter readings will not be initialized until the OK key is pressed. 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. OPTION
Use it to reset the service mode settings (OPTION) back to their default settings (as when initializing the RAM). The settings will not be reset until the OK key is pressed. The data that will be reset is data on the main controller, DC controller, and reader controller. Method of Operation 1) Print out the settings using the following service mode item: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-RING. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key.
MMI Use it to reset the following settings in user mode. - backup data (user settings) used to back up the copier control panel - backup data (user settings) on common settings - backup data (user settings) of various type expect on fax The settings will not be reset until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power.
MN-CON
Use it to initialize the RAM on the main controller board SRAM board. - The contents of the RAM will not be initialized until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. - Performing this item will initialize all data on the SRAM board. In other words, the file management information for the hard disk will also be initialized, making reading of images from the hard disk impossible. If you need to perform this mode, be sure that the user is well aware of this fact. Method of Operation 1) Print out the service mode settings using the following service mode settings: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. In response, the machine will automatically start up and prompt you to turn off and then on the main power switch. 3) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
CARD
Use it to reset card ID-related data (group). The card ID-related data will not be cleared until the main power switch has been turned off and then on. Method of Operation 1) Select the item, and press the OK. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch. Use it to reset a waste toner box full alert/error. If you have replaced the waste toner box, execute this item to reset the alert/error and initialize the counter used for the waste toner box detection mechanism.
W-TN-CLR
LANG-ERR
Use it to clear language-related errors. Recovers from an error and makes the language setting back to the default setting when a language-related error occurs after the language is changed to a different language.
17-111
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR Subheading SND-STUP Contents Use it to initialize the setting for the transmission reading. (Execute this item when you switch language settings.) 2 CA-KEY Use it to delete all the CA certificates and key pairs at once. Deletes all the CA certificates and key pairs at once when a serviceman replaces or discards a device. A CA certificate is used for the MEAP application that uses E-RDS and SSL client. A key pair is used for IPP, RUI, and MEAP SSL function. Level
- If this operation is not performed when a device is replaced or discarded, the CA certificate and key pair additionally registered by a user are left in the HDD, which is a problem in terms of security. A serviceman should therefore perform this operation. - Be sure to make sure that "OK" is displayed after performing this operation. If "NG" is displayed, the data may not be correctly deleted, and it is necessary to surely delete the CA certificate and key pair by initializing the HDD, etc. - This operation should not be carelessly executed because it deletes the SSL server certificate and key pair additionally registered by a user. When the data is deleted by mistake, a user needs to reinstall the SSL server certificate. When no data is additionally installed by a user, this operation places the machine in the same status as factory setting and gives no affect to the user. Operation procedure 1) Select this item and press the OK key. 2) When the data is normally cleared, "OK" is displayed. 3) Turn the main power OFF/ON. Reference: Turning the power OFF/ON extracts the CA certificate and key pair, registered at factory setting, from an archived file (/ BOOTDEV/KCMNG) so that they can be used for the above functions (E-RDS/SSL functions).
11. MISC-R
T-17-140 COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R Subheading SCANLAMP Contents Use it to check the activation of the scanning lamp. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key so that the scanning lamp will go on and remain on for 3 sec. Level
12. MISC-P
T-17-141 COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P Subheading P-PRINT Use it to print out the service mode settings. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to print out the service mode settings. Printing will start in about 15 sec. KEY-HIST Use it to print out the control panel key input history. 1) Select the item. 2) Press the item to print out the history. Use it to print out the jam history and the error history. 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to print out the histories. Use it to move data received in memory to a data Box. 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to move the data. Use it to print out a list of user mode settings. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to print out the service mode settings. Printing will start in about 3 sec. Use it to print out the service label. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to print out the service mode settings. Printing will start in about 15 sec. 1 Contents Level
HIST-PRT
TRS-DATA
USER-PRT
LBL-PRNT
17-112
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P Subheading PRE-EXP Contents Use it to check the activation of the pre-exposure lamp (LED). Operation 1)Press the item to highlight. 2)Press the OK key so that the individual operations are performed for several seconds and the execution stops automatically (full activation). 3)Press the OK key to generate a printout. Reference If a fault is noted on the photosensitive drum as the result of activating the pre-exposure lamp, rotate the drum. 1 Level
DEV-DR-Y/M/C
Use it to move the developing rotary to the point of toner cartridge (Y/M/C) replacement. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key so that the developing rotary will move to the point of toner cartridge (Y) replacement. 1 The machine is set in such a way that the user will not be able to remove a toner cartridge if it still contains toner. The cartridge may be removed by moving the developing rotary to the point of access only when the cartridge has run out of toner. The use of this service mode item enables the user to move the developing rotary to the point of access so that the Y toner cartridge may be removed regardless of the presence/absence of toner inside it.
D-PRINT
D-PRINT Use it to generate printouts in service mode (DISPLAY). This mode is applicable to items indicated under DISPLAY for output of printouts (excluding those generated by P-PRINT/ LBL-PRINT/HIST-PRINT and ALARM).
1ATVC-EX Use it to force primary ATVC. If you have replaced the intermediate transfer belt, perform this item. Method of Operation 1) Select the item,. 2) Press the OK key to start the operation. (The operation will end in about 1 min.) ENV-PRT Use it to print out a log on the changes that may have taken place in machine inside temperature/humidity and fixing temperature. 1 The log shows changes in machine inside temperature/humidity and fixing temperature (middle) as colleted from the output of the environment sensor and non-contact thermistor. 1TR-ROT Use it to execute idle rotation of the primary transfer roller. Use it to force idle rotation of the primary transfer roller while applying a primary transfer bias so as to prevent a fault in primary transfer ATVC otherwise caused by changes in the environment.
DR-P-ADJ
Use it to adjust the phase shift of the photoactive drum. Method of Operation Use it to execute the adjustment sequence for a phase shift of the photosensitive drum. Operation 1)Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. In response, the adjustment will start and the indication will change to 'ACTIVE'. At the end, the indication will change to 'OK!'.
MAIN-DRV
Use it to drive the intermediate transfer medium and the photosensitive drum for a specific period of time. 1) Select the item to highlight. 2) Press the OK key, and turn off and then on the power to start the operation. The operation will end in a specific period of time. Use it to start idle rotation of the secondary transfer roller/intermediate transfer belt. Perform idle rotation of the secondary roller and the intermediate transfer belt to prevent the intermediate belt from turning into a particular shape. 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key to start the operation.
ITB-ROT
17-113
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P Subheading ATR-EX Contents Force ATR control. Use it to force ATR control if the correction value for ATR control is lost, as after E020 (field servicing) or after replacing the DC controller PCB. Use it to force initial rotation, as the first thing in the morning. You can force the various image stabilization control mechanisms (usually performed first thing in the morning during initial rotation) consisting of the following: rotation control single rotation ATVC patch detection Dmax The operation takes about 1 min. Level 2
INTR-EX
13. SENS-ADJ
T-17-142 COPIER>FUNCTION>SENS-ADJ Subheading STCK-LMT Adjusting the Position of the Shift Tray Full Sensor The notation will be 'ON' when detecting the full condition; otherwise, 'OFF'. 1 Contents Level
F-17-40
F-17-41
17-114
Chapter 17
F-17-42
Memo: If 'ON' is not indicated when the full sensor is moved closest to the paper, keep adding a sheet of paper until 'ON' is indicated.
[1]
F-17-43
T-17-143 COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM Subheading DOWNLOAD Use it to switch to download mode. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key so that the machine will enter download mode and wait for a command (connection). (At his time, 'STAND-BY' or 'STANDBY' will appear next to the Level 3 item of DOWNLOAD.) 3) Perform download work using the service support tool (The indication will read 'CONNECTED' while a communication is under way with the PC.) 4) See that the notation has changed to 'HOLD' to indicate that the communication is over. (You may turn off the power when the indication is 'HOLD'.) Contents Level
CHK-TYPE Use it to select a partition number for execution of HD-CHECK. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Select a partition number using the keypad. 0: check on and recovery of entire HDD 1: image storage area 2: general-purpose file storage area 3: PDL-related file storage area 4: firmware storage area A general-purpose file refers to a file containing such management data as user settings data, log data, PDL spool data, image data. 3) Press the OK key.
17-115
Chapter 17
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM Subheading HD-CHECK Use it to check the partition selected by CHK-TYPE and to repair a fault. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key. 3) Check the result. (1: OK, 2: NG (hardware), 3: NG (software), recovery sector/alternate sector). HD-CLEAR Use it to select the partition selected by CHK-TYPE. - if 0 or 4 is selected, the selection will be invalid. - if 1 is selected, the image management data stored in the SRAM area and the general-purpose file area will also be initialized. Method of Operation 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key. If '1: image storage area' or '3: PDL-related file storage area' is selected under 'CHK-TYPE' and <HD-CLEAR> is performed, the initialization will take place only when the power has been turned off and then on again. The initialization will take about 5 min, during which the progress bar will grow longer gradually. You must never turn off the power while the progress bar is indicated. Contents Level

0005-1259
T-17-144 FEEDER>FUNCTION Subheading SENS-INT Contents Use it to adjust the sensitivity of the individual sensors of the feeder. Select the item, and press the OK key to start feeder sensor initialization, turning the screen indication to 'ACT'. The operation will end automatically, turning the indication to 'OK'. Level
MTR-CHK
Use it to check the motor and the like of the ADF on its own. Operation 1) Press [MOTOR-CHK] to highlight. 2) Enter the number of the component using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press [MOTOR-ON[ to start checking the operation. Settings 0: pickup motor 1: feed motor 2: delivery reversal motor 3: lock motor at time of shipment: factory default upon RAM initialization: 0 1
TRY-A4 TRY-A5R TRY-LTR TRY-LTRR
Use it to execute automatic adjustment (A4 Width) for DF original paper width detection. Use it to execute automatic adjustment (A5R width) for DF original paper width detection. Use it to execute automatic adjustment (LTR width) for DF original paper width detection. Use it to execute automatic adjustment (LTR-R width) for DF original paper width detention.
1 1 1 1
17-116
Chapter 17
FEEDER>FUNCTION Subheading FEED-CHK Use it to check paper movement in the ADF on its own. Operation 1) Press [FEED-CHK] to highlight. 2) Enter the number of the component using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press [FEED-ON] to start checking the operation. Feed Mode 0: single-sided operation 1: double-side operation 2: single-sided operation w/ stamp 3: double-sided operation w/ stamp at time of shipment: factory default upon RAM initialization: 0 CL-CHK Use it to check the DF fan on its own. 0:DF fan Method of Operation 1)Press [FAN-CHK] (to highlight). 2)Enter the code of the part you want to check using the keypad. 3)Press the OK key. 4)Press [FAN-ON] to start checking the operation. CL-ON Use it to start the operation of the selected clutch. Press [CL-ON] and then press the OK key to start the operation of the clutch. Another press on the key will stop the operation. (The operation will stop in 200 msec; however, unless you press the OK key once again, the indication will not change to 'STOP.) 1 Contents Level
FAN-CHK
Use it to check the DF cooling fan. Perform using FAN-ON. 1) Press [FAN-CHK] to highlight. 2) Enter the number of the component using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press [FAN-ON] to start checking the operation. Component Number 0: cooling fan
FAN-ON
Use it to start the operation of the selected fan. Method of Operation Press [FAN-ON], and press the OK key to start the operation of the fan. Another press on the OK key will stop the operation. (The operation will automatically stop in 5 sec; hover, unless you press the OK key once again, the indication will not turn 'STOP'.)
SL-CHK
Use it to check the ADF solenoid on its own. Operation 1) Press [SL-CHK] to highlight 2) Enter the number of the component using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press [SL-ON] to start checking the operation. 1 Number of Component 0: lock solenoid 1: stamp solenoid at time of shipment: factory default upon RAM initialization: 0
SL-ON
Use it to start the operation of the selected solenoid. Operation The operation varies from model to model. 1) Press [SL] to highlight; then, press the OK key to start motor operation. 2) Press the OK key once again to stop the ongoing operation. (The operation will stop automatically in 5 sec; however, the indication will not change to [STOP] unless the OK key is pressed once again.)
17-117
Chapter 17
FEEDER>FUNCTION Subheading MTR-ON Use it to start motor operation. Operation The operation varies from model to model. 1) Press [MTR-ON] to highlight; then, press the OK key to start motor operation. 2) Press the OK key once again to stop the motor. (The operation will stop automatically in 5 sec; however, the indication will not change to [STOP] unless the OK key is pressed once again.) Contents Level
ROLL-CLN
Use it to clean the ADF roller. In this mode item, the roller is rotated by the work of its motor; it is cleaned by lint-free paper (moistened with alcohol) forced against it while it rotates. Operation 1) Press [ROLL-CLN] to highlight. 2) While the roller is rotating, clean it by forcing lint-free paper (moistened with alcohol) against it. 3) Press [ROLL-CLN] to highlight, and press the OK key to stop the rotation of the roller.
FEED-ON
Use it to check the movement of paper in the ADF on its own. Operation 1) Press [FEED-ON], and then press the OK key so that the ADF starts to move paper according to the operation mode selected using [FEED-CHK].
17.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode)

0018-0564
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. BODY

T-17-145 COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading PO-CNT MODEL-SZ for factory adjustment Use it to set the default magnification indication and ADF size detection. Settings 0: AB (6R5E) 1: INCH (5R4E) 2: A (3R3E) 3: AB/INCH (6R5E) at time of shipment/upon RAM replacement: 0 FIX-TEMP Use it to change the plain paper down sequence. settings range 0: default 1: priority on fixing 2: priority on productivity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PASCAL Use it to enable/disable the use of contrast potential obtained from auto gradation correction (full) and the use of gradation correction data. settings range 0: do not use 1: use 2: reserved (same as 1) 3: reserved (same as 0) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 CONFIG Use it to select multiple pieces of firmware stored on the hard disk to change the country, language, model, and paper size configuration. Method of Adjustment 1) Select the item to change, and press the +/- key. 2) See that each press on the +/- key changes the particulars. 3) When all particulars are indicated for all items, press the OK key. 4) Turn off and then on the main power switch. XXYYZZAA xx: country (e.g., JP for Japan) YY: language (e.g., ja for Japanese) ZZ: model (e.g., 00 for Canon) AA: paper size configuration (e.g., 00 for AB) 1 1 Contents Level 1
17-118
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading TEMP-TBL Contents Use it to adjust the control temperature of the fixing assembly. When this mode is activated, there will be an increase of 5 deg C in the following: standby temperature (both types); copying temperature; post-standby rotation temperature; extra-length sheet-to-sheet control temperature there will not be an increase of 5 deg C in the following: post-job rotation temperature; power save mode temperature; error detection temperature Adjustments are made to the normally used temperature control table. A change will be made to the fixing temperature control table in the event of low-temperature offset or paper blister caused by the characteristics of paper being used. In the case of low-temperature offset, select +5 deg C; in the case of a paper blister, on the other hand, select -5 deg C. The setting will not be valid unit the main power switch has been turned off and then on again. Settings 0: OFF 1: +5 deg C 2: -5 deg C at time of shipment/upon RAM replacement: 0 W/SCNR Use it to specify the presence/absence of a reader unit (as for the copier model). Settings 0: printer model 1: model with reader unit at time of shipment: 1 upon RAM initialization: 0 RUI-DSP Use it to set the copier function optional settings for the RUI screen. Settings 0: do not display copy screen for RUI 1: display copy screen for RUI at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ADJ-LVL Use it to select an operation mode for patch detection. Of the automatic adjusting sequences used, decreasing/increasing the frequency of potential control/primary transfer ATVC will lead to decrease/increase productivity. Method of Adjustment A higher setting will increase the adjustment intervals and, thus, increase the productivity; it, however, will also increase color fluctuation. Settings 0 to 4 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 INTROT-1 intervals of executing ATVC during initial multiple rotation (number of prints) Increase the setting if soiling in the form of dots occurs in keeping with drum rotation (i.e., by increasing the intervals of ATVC control). Decrease the setting if transfer faults occurs (i.e., by decreasing the intervals of ATVC control). Settings 0 to 240 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 90 INTROT-2 Use it to set intervals (in terms of the number of sheets) for process auto adjustment (full, at time of initial/last rotation) performed at specific intervals. 1 range of settings: 50 to 1000 (in terms of A4) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 200 DEVL-PTH Setting threshold level (number of sheets) that the toner discharge sequence starts to operate. Settings 0: Does not operate 1: Approx. 100 sheets 2: Approx. 200 sheets [Factory default/After RAM is cleared] 3: Approx. 500 sheets Reference Threshold level of density can be set from the following service mode. COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DEVL-VTH Use this mode when symptom such as coarse image occurs while copying/printing low-density Duty image continuously. AUTO-DH Use it to enable/disable auto gradation correction for standby. The auto gradation correction mechanism is started in response to changes in the environment or when the machine is left alone in standby for a specific period of time. The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on. Settings 0: prohibit 1: permit (default) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 DFDST-L1 A higher setting will increase the level of dust detection (i.e., the machine will be more sensitive in detecting dust, which if left behind will cause thin lines in the images). settings range 0 to 255 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 200 1 1 1 1 1 1 Level
17-119
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading DFDST-L2 Contents A higher setting will increase the level of dust detection (i.e., the machine will be more sensitive in detecting dust, which if left behind will cause thin lines in the images). settings range 0 to 255 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 200 ENVP-INT Use it to set the intervals at which logs are collected of machine internal temperature and fixing temperature, i.e., in relation to COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ENV-PRINT and COPIER>DISPLAY>ENVRNT. settings range 0 to 480 (min) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 60 T1-TEMP Use it to switch over the heavy paper 1 down sequence tables. settings 0: default 1: priority on fixing 2: priority on productivity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 T2-TEMP Use it to switch over the heavy paper 2 down sequence tables. settings 0: default 1: priority on fixing 2: priority on productivity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 BLNK-THP Use it to switch over leading edge margins for heavy paper 1/2 (color only; remedy against horizontal lines along leading edge). settings 0: default margin 1: 7 mm (leading edge margin median value) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CD-IDL-T Use it to adjust the duration of idle rotation for IDL-T (color developing assembly YMC; otherwise executed first in the morning in a high humidity environment). - a setting toward '-' will reduce the downtime associated with initial multiple rotation, but will not compensate fully for changes in density. - a setting toward '+' will fully compensate for changes in density, but will increase downtime associated with initial multiple rotation. settings range -3 to +6 (unit: 5 sec) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization; 0 OHP-SPED Use it to switch over the cpm for value BK OHT (remedy against adhesion upon delivery). settings 0: 40 cpm if w/ finisher; 20 cpm if w/o finisher 1: 20 cpm 2: 10 cpm at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 FX-CROT Use it to change the intervals at which the fixing roller is rotated idly (remedy against deformation of the roller). The fixing roller is rotated idly for 1 sec once every 30 min (default) to prevent it from suffering deformation while the machine remains in standby. settings range 0: 30 min 1: 20 min 2: 10 min 3: 5 min at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 LPW-TIME Use it to set time for automatic switching to the low-power mode in the 24-hour power distribution mode. Sets time to perform automatic switching and recovery of low-power mode in the 24-hour power distribution mode and execute an adjustment in the printer engine. Setting range 00:00 to 23:59 (24 hours, Unit: minute) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 03:00] Reference: - For the machines operating in the 24-hour power distribution mode (the operation is not switched to the power saving mode such as power save, low electricity, or sleep.) at a convenience store, etc., the machine does not perform the adjustment that is made only when recovering from the power saving mode in the printer engine. Use <LPW-TIME> to cover such a case. - You can judge whether the machine operates in the 24-hour power distribution mode or not by checking that "COPIER/OPTION/ ACC/COIN" is set to "1" (self-copy). When other numbers than "1" is set, this function does not work. - When the machine automatically switches the operation to the low electricity mode, the control panel screen is turned off for a moment, which is a feature included in the specifications. BASE-SW Use it to switch the operation to the base model from the full MEAP model. Sets the device operation back to the base model after it was switched to the full model. Setting value 0: OFF (base model) 1: ON (full model) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Level
17-120
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading DRM-DISP Contents Use it to enable/disable the message for drum phase shifting. If the photopositive drum is used with its home position unchanged in relation to the drum shaft, uneven density at drum intervals or lines can occur in output images. To limit the symptom, the phase of the photosensitive drum is shifted by 90 deg every specific number of prints. The machine does not shift the phase on its own, and requires the work of the service person. When needed, the machine issues a message to prompt the work on the User screen and the Service Mode screen. Use this mode item to enable/disable the message. Settings 0: disable message 1: indicate only in service mode (default) 2: indicate on both User and Service Mode screens The message will go off automatically when the following is executed: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DR-P-ADJ. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 - To change the number of prints after which the message is indicated for COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DRM-DISP, change the denominator in COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>DRM-PHAS. SC-L-CNT Use it to select the threshold value for the paper size (large/small) at the scanning counter. Selects whether to count B4-size paper as a large size or small size. Setting value 0: Count B4-size paper as a small size 1: Count B4-size paper as a large size [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference When "1" is set to count B4-size paper as a large size, LTR-size paper is counted as a small size. REPORT-Z Use it to switch the attribution flag to be added when printing a report. Setting value 0: PDL character mode 1: PDL photo mode 2: SCAN character mode 3: SCAN photo mode [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] IFXEML-Z Use it to switch the attribution flag to be added when printing an image received by ColoriFAX,E_mail. settings 0: SCAN photo mode 1: PDL photo mode 2: SCAN text mode 3: PDL text mode [at time of shipment/RAM initialization: 0] BMLNKS-Z Use it to switch the attribution flag to be added when printing an image received by BMLinkS. Setting value 0: SCAN photo mode 1: PDL photo mode 2: SCAN character mode 3: PDL character mode [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference 0: SCAN photo mode The black character consists of 4 black colors. Errors are diffused. The color tint is brighter than 2. 1: PDL photo mode The black character consists of 4 black colors. Screening is executed to the image. 2: SCAN character mode The black character consists of a single black color. The color tint in the photo is different from the color printed in 0. (It may be difficult for amateurs to recognize the difference.) Errors are diffused. 3: PDL character mode The black character consists of a single black color. Screening is executed to the image. LDAP-ADD Use it to select the condition for LDAP search to be added. Decides whether to add "ObjectClass" and "SrchNameRow" in the pull-down list of the current searching condition (name, organization, organization unit, fax, email). 1 Level
Only destinations for fax and email can be searched. Setting value 0: Do not add the searching condition. 1: Add the searching condition. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] SJOB-CL Switch for enabling scan job cancellation by logout To enable scan jobs to be canceled upon completion of the scanning operation if logout is initiated. When the user asks for the item to be provided 0: Canceling is disabled. [default] 1: Canceling is enabled.
17-121
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading IFX-CHIG Contents Setting of character count for ignoring IFAX received mail text When the text of a mail during IFAX reception is shorter than the number of characters set, it is ignored, and the text is neither printed nor sent. If the mail text has been lost as a result of setting the value to a number other than "0", and there is no attached TIFF file, a blank page (except the header and footer) will be printed and sent. * Kanji are treated as 2-byte characters, and the carriage return and other control codes are also included in the character count. Settings 0 to 999 (unit: number of characters) 0: The mail text is not ignored. [Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 0] DNSTRANS Switching the priority of DNS transfer Determine the priority of protocol (IPv4/IPv6) used for DNS inquiry based on the DNStrans value. Setting range 0: ipv4, 1: ipv6 Method of Adjustment When DNS query is first executed for IPv6 in the environment where both IPv6 and IPv4 are used and the DNS server only supports IPv4, timeout occurs and it takes time. In such a case, execute this mode to set priority to IPv4. RMT-CNSL Meap Remote Console switch When the service personnel take the Function Composer log in the field, turn on this switch and execute logging with Remote Console. 0: OFF [default] 1: ON TCPDLACK Enabled/disabled switch for Delayed Ack function Turning the switch to 0 disables the delayed Ack function of TCP. Setting range 0 to 1 [Value at factory shipping/default: 1] In the case that Delayed Ack causes deteriorated performance of network data transferring in the 10M environment and so on, disable Delayed Ack. W-CLN-P Use it to set the intervals at which the primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire is automatically cleaned in a normal environment in terms of the number of copies. The new setting will not be valid until the main power switch has been turned off and then back on. 2 Range of settings 100p to 2000 at time of shipment/RAM initialization: 2000 PRI-FAN Use it to select a primary fan drive mode. Use it to prevent soiling in the form of dots occurring in keeping with drum rotation. The temperature of the cleaning blade may be decreased so that the machine will better be able to remove the ingredients of the black toner sticking to the drum. 2 Settings 0: in high temperature/humidity environment, half-speed 1: in high temperature/humidity environment, full-speed at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization 0 SCANSLCT Enable/disable the function used to compute the area of scanning based on the selected paper size. settings 0: OFF (area determined based on original detection) 1: ON (area determined based on paper size) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 OHP-TEMP Use it to switch over transparency down-sequence tables. settings 0: default 1: priority on fixing 2: priority on productivity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DH-SW Use it to perform Dhalf. Settings 0: do not perform Dhalf control 1: perform Dhalf control at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 DM-MODE Use it to enable/disable image density correction control as part of auto gradation correction (PASCAL) Settings 0: do not perform 1: perform at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 SENS-CNF Use it to set the original sensor. Settings 0: AB configuration 1: inch configuration at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2 2 2 2 2 1 Level
17-122
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading DM-SW Contents Use it to enable/disable image gradation correction and image density correction after making a specific number of prints. Settings 0: do not perform (default) 1: perform every 200 prints up to initial 2000 2: perform every 200 prints up to initial 4000 3: perform at all times (every 200 prints) 4: reserved To change the intervals (200 prints at default), use COPIER>OPTIONAL>BODY>INTROT2. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 3 RAW-DATA Use it to specify whether or not to print out received data as it is. If the received image has a fault, use this mode to find out whether the fault is in the data or in the image processing. 2 Level
Settings 0: normal operation 1: print as is at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 BK-BND Use it to increase the black belt in 4C mode. Use it to prevent photosensitive drum cleaning faults in an N/L environment. Settings 0: increase by 100% 1: increase by 150% 2: increase by 20% at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 RMT-LANG Use it to switch the language of the remote UI used through the Web. Method of Adjustment Use the +/- key to select the appropriate language code. Use it to limit the number of output lines for when a large volume of data is received over i-fax. settings range 0: no limit 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 500 TR-CLN Use it to perform the cleaning sequence designed to avoid soiling on the back of paper caused by the secondary transfer roller. 77-mm back soiling preventive mode Settings: 0: perform only in H/H environment 1: disable in all environments 2: enable in all environments at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 SMTPTXPN Use it to change the number of the SMTP transmission port. settings range 0 to 65535 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 25 SMTPRXPN Use it to change the number of the SMTP reception port. settings range 0 through 65535 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 25 POP3PN Use it to change the number of the POP reception port. settings range 0 through 65535 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 110 ORG-LGL Use it to set a special paper size not recognized by the DF size detection mechanism. settings 0: LEGAL 1: FOOLSCAP 2: A-FOOLSCAP 3: FORIO 4: G-LEGAL 5: OFFICIO 6: E-OFFICIO 7: A-OFFICIO 8: B-OFFICIO 9: A-LEAGAL 10: M-OFFICIO at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ORG-LTR Use it to set a special paper size not recognized by the DF size detection mechanism. settings 0: LTR 1: G-LTR 2: A-LTR 3: EXECTIVE at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
IFAX-LIM
17-123
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading ORG-LTRR Contents Use it to set a special paper size not recognized by the DF size detection mechanism. 0: LTR (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) settings 0: LTR-R (default) 1: G-LTR-R 2: A-LTR-R 3: EXECTIVE-R at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ORG-LDR Use it to set a size that cannot be recognized by DH. Use it when A-LTR is recognized as LDR by mistake. Setting value 0: LDR 1: A-LTR 2 or larger: LDR [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] ORG-B5 Use it to set a special paper size not recognized by the DF size detection mechanism. 0: B5 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) settings 0: B5 1: K-LEAGAL at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 UI-COPY Use it to select whether to display the copy screen in the control panel. Setting value 0: Do not display the copy screen. 1: Display the copy screen. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 1] UI-BOX Use it to enable/disable display of the control panel Box scan. settings 0: do not display 1: display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 UI-SEND Use it to enable/disable display of the control panel Transmission screen. settings 0: do not display 1: display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 UI-FAX Use it to enable/disable display of the control panel Fax screen. settings 0: do not display 1: display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 UI-EXT Use it to enable/disable display of the control pane Extension screen. settings 0: do not display 1: display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 SCR-SLCT Use it to select halftone processing for film/photo mode. Method of Adjustment If moire is found in the output image or the dots make the image appear too coarse while the default (1: use screen with fewer lines) is selected, change the setting as follows: - if moire is noted, change to '0' (use error diffusion); this setting is suited to the reproduction of text. - if the image appears too coarse because of the dots, change to '2' (use screen with more lines). settings 0: use error diffusion 1: use low-number screen (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 2: use high-number screen at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 TMC-SLCT Use it to switch over coefficients used for error diffusion processing. If the output image has started to show uneven density or rough texture as more and more prints are made, change the setting for better dot stabilization so that the fault may be less noticeable. settings 0: standby 1: decrease sensitivity to grain/low stability 2: increase sensitivity to grain/high stability at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Level
17-124
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading D-CLN-TM Contents Use it to change the length of drum idle rotation. Use it to prevent soiling in the form of dots occurring in keeping with drum rotation. The machine executes idle rotation when it is turned on to remove residual matter from the drum. Settings 0: do not execute idle rotation 1: execute idle rotation for 30 sec 2: execute idle rotation for 60 sec at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Settings 3 through 6 are reserved (currently invalid). DEVL-VTH Use it to set a threshold for image density over which the machine will execute discharge sequence (designed as a remedy against rough image texture on copies of low-density images made in continuous printing). If possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal. settings range 1 to 5 (unit: %) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) FTPTXPN Use it to select the port number (FTP) as the target of SEND transmission. settings range 0 to 65535 (16-bit; at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 21) INTPPR-1 Use it to set an interval for execution of automatic image adjustment 1 (simple). Sets an interval for automatic paper interval adjustment (analog patch sequence, etc.), which is performed for a certain number of sheets to correct the image density change in a job for printing large number of pages. The unit is for a size equivalent to A4. Setting range 0 (Do not execute the function.), 50 to 1000 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 100] 2 2 Level
No larger number of sheets than the number specified by "setting of an interval for execution of automatic image adjustment 2 (full)". When the automatic image adjustment 2 is executed, the machine recognizes that the automatic image adjustment 1 has been already executed. Therefore, the next automatic image adjustment 1 is executed after the machine prints the number of sheets specified by this item.
PRN-FLG
Selecting an Image Area Flag (for PDL images) In the event that the controller fails to compress a PDL image at a specific rate of compression, image processing will be performed according to the image area flag selected in this mode item. settings 0: use high-number screen, gray compensation LUT 1: use error diffusion, gray compensation LUT 2: use high-number screen, normal LUT at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2
SCN-FLG
Use it to select an image area flag (for copy image). If compression at a specific rate fails on the controller over a scan image, image processing will be executed according to the image flag selected in this mode. settings 0: text 1: screened photo image 2: printed photo image at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2
T-LW-LVL
Use it to change the setting at which an alert message is issued for the level of toner. The threshold (%) of the level of toner over which the message is issued to indicate that toner is running short may be changed. A delay, however, can also result in the absence of toner immediately after the alert message. 2 settings range 5 to 100 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 10
NWERR-SW
Use it to enable/disable the indication of a network-related error message. This switch is used to disable error messages related to networking when the model is not connected to a network even though it is equipped with a network board as standard. An NADA machine is equipped with networking functions, and is by default set for use on a network; however, take advantage of the switch where the machine is not connected to a network (as in the case of installation in a Lawson shop). 2 settings 0: do not indicate 1: indicate (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1
17-125
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading FX-SPD Use it to adjust the speed of the fixing roller. If the arching of paper between the secondary transfer roller and the fixing roller is too great, the trailing edge of the paper tends to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt, causing traces by friction. A change to the speed of fixing will also change the speed of the delivery vertical path roller (fine-adjustment) accordingly. A higher setting will increase the speed. settings range -3 to 3 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 STS-PORT Enabling/Disabling the TOT Synchronous Command Communication Port Use it to enable or disable the inquiry/response (synchronous) command communication port for TUIF over TCP/IP. 2 Settings 0: OFF 1: ON at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CMD-PORT Enabling/Disabling the TOT Asynchronous Status Communication Port Use it to enable or disable the asynchronous status communication port for TUIF over TCP/IP. Settings 0: OFF 1: ON at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 MODELSZ2 Global Support for Copyboard Original Size Detection (mix of AB/Inch) When the setting is '1' , the machine will support global mode (AB/Inch) regardless of the setting of the swing flag MODEL-SZ (AB, Inch). Settings 0: normal 1: AB/inch mix detection at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 SZDT-SW Use it to enable/disable the switch-over from CCD size detection to photo size detection for copyboard original size detection. Settings 0: disable photo size detection 1: enable photo size detection at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 UISW-DSP Indication of the User Screen Switch Use it to enable or disable the indication of the switch used to switch between the Standard Specifications screen and Simple Specifications screen (Lawson type). - type equipped with functions equivalent to those of standard machines - type equipped with limited functions, e.g., those machines installed in Lawson shops. Use it to enable or disable the indication of the switch used by the user (shop administrator) to switch between screens to meet individual needs. (The switch is offered to authorized users only.) 2 2 2 Contents Level
Settings 0: do not display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 1: display at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ITB-CLN Use it to execute the ITB black band sequence at time of initial multiple rotation automatic adjustment. Settings: 0: disable 1: force execution once 2 and 3: reserved (input invalid) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-CMD5 Use it when imposing limits to the use of CRAM-MD5 certification for SMTP (NoSasl challenge response authentication mechanism; MD5 message digest algorithm). Use it to set CRAM-MD5 certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-GSAPI Use it when imposing limits to the use of GSSAPI certification for SMTP (NoSasl generic security service application program interface). Use it to set GSSAPI certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-NTLM Use it when imposing limits to the use of NTML certification for SMTP (NoSasl-windows NTLAN Manager). Use it to set NTLM certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-PLNWS Use it when imposing limits to the use of PLAIN/LOGIN certification (plain language certification for SMTP) where NS-PLNWS communication packets are encrypted for SMTP (NoSasl plain with transport layer security). Use it to set PLAIN.LOGIN certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2 2 2 2
17-126
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading NS-PLN Contents Use it when imposing limits to PLAIN/LOGIN certification (plain language certification) where communication packets sure encrypted for SMTP. Use it to set PLAIN.LOGIN certification for SMTP certification. (environment in which computation packet encryption is not used) 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-LGN Use it when imposing limits to LOGIN certification for SMTP (NoSasl LoGiN). Use it to set LOGIN certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 T-CRG-SW Use it to permit or not to permit replacement of the toner cartridge by the user when there still is toner in the cartridge. 2 2 Level
Settings 0: do not permit replacement by user (When the toner runs out (in the case of black toner, is running low), a button will appear to permit replacement of the toner cartridge: i.e., system status/stop>recovery procedure indication). 1: permit replacement by user (A button will appear to permit replacement; i.e., user mode>adjust/cleaning.) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 MEAP-PN Use it to set a port number for the HTTP server to be used by the MEAP application. Setting range 0 to 65535 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 8000]
2 When using the port for MEAP, be sure not to use the numbers 1 through 1023 except 80, because these numbers are used by an ordinary server.
TNR-DWN
Use it to set the amount of toner to be deposited. You can decrease the amount of toner, as when stray toner tends to occur in full color mode or when paper tends to wrap around the fixing roller. Settings 0: standard amount (default) 1: decrease for both single-sided and double-sided modes 2: standard for single-sided mode but decrease in double-sided mode for both 1st and 2nd sides (reserved) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 An update has been made to do away with setting 2 as a result of recent findings (i.e., the expected operation does not take place in some PDL or copy jobs; although the setting exists in service mode, it behaves like 0).
TMIC-BK
Use it to set the correction along the trailing edge for BkLUT and BkLUT for PDL (Tmic). Settings 0: PDL BK_LUT end correction ON; copy Bk_LUT end correction OFF 1: PDL BK_LUT end correction OFF; copy Bk_LUT end correction OFF 2: PDL BK_LUT end correction ON; copy Bk_LUT end correction ON (default) 3: PDL BK_LUT end correction OFF; copy Bk_LUT end correction ON at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2
SVMD-ENT
Switching the method of entering the Service Mode. Setting Values 0: [User Mode key] -> Press [2] and [8] simultaneously -> [User Mode key] [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear] 1: [User Mode key] -> Press [4] and [9] simultaneously -> [User Mode key] Reference Information Support for Siemens
DH-MODE
Patch Data (high density side) Used in D-half Except in Full Correction Change the default setting so that the readout collected from D-half at time of full correction will be substituted for the patch on the high density side at time of D-half (other than in full correction). 2 Settings 0: use patch image read data of full correction (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 1: do not use patch image read data of full correction at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
W-CLN-PH
Use it to set the intervals at which the primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire is automatically cleaned. If an image fault (e.g., vertical lines) occurs in a high temperature/humidity environment, the intervals at which the primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire is automatically cleaned may be changed. Note: In a normal environment, be sure to use W-CLN-P to set the intervals used to automatically clean the primary charging wire. Range of settings 100 to 1000 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1000
17-127
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading SSH-SW Contents Use it to select whether to activate the SSH server. Selects whether to activate the SSH server when activating the main unit. Setting value 0: Do not activate the SSH server when activating the main unit. 1: Activate the SSH server when activating the main unit. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2 Reference SSH stands for "Secure Shell", in which the communication between the digital accessory (DA) and the iR device is encrypted so that it cannot be read from outside. Level
Even when the setting value is changed to 1 (ON) while the main unit is being activated, the SSH server is not activated. The setting value becomes valid after the power is turned OFF/ON. RMT-LGIN Use it to select whether to allow remote login to the SSH server. Selects whether to allow remote login to the debug console in the SSH server from the remote host (SSH client: digital accessory). Setting value 0: Do not allow remote login to the SSH server. 1: Allow remote login to the SSH server. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0]
This is valid only when "1 (ON)" is set to <SSH-SW>. RE-PKEY Use it to select whether to recreate the pair key for the SSH server. Selects whether to recreate the pair key for the SSH server when activating the main unit. Setting value: 0: Do not recreate the pair key for the SSH server when activating the main unit. 1: Recreate the pair key for the SSH server when activating the main unit. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference - When "1 (Recreate the pair key.)" is set, the SSH server host recreates the pair key (secret key/public key) when activating the task (turning the power OFF/ON), outputs it to the key file, and saves it in the HDD. The encryption algorithm (DSA) and key length (512 bit) are fixed. - It sometimes takes approximately 3 to 4 minutes to activate the copier main unit due to this operation. 2
This is valid only when "1 (ON)" is set to <SSH-SW>. U-NAME Use it to set a user name required to connect to the SSH server. Sets a login user name required to connect to the SSH server. Only one user can login the server. Setting range 8 characters maximum (English one byte characters) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: gN3Fp2A] 2
- Do not change this setting because this is for future expansion. - This is valid only when "1 (ON)" is set to <SSH-SW>.
U-PASWD
Use it to set a password of the user required to connect to the SSH server. Sets a password of the login user required to connect to the SSH server. Setting range 8 characters maximum (English one byte characters) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: Vs8DuwJ]
- Do not change this setting because this is for future expansion. - This is valid only when "1 (ON)" is set to <SSH-SW>. - The password is left hidden on the screen. B-SPL-SW Use it to set the environment table for black toner supply. settings range 0: variable 1: fixed at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 B-CNT-SW Use it to set the environment table for black development contrast. settings range 0: variable 1: fixed at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2 2
17-128
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading 1ROT-CR Contents Use it to change the retention current for primary transfer retention current idle rotation. If the user disconnects the power plug at night and thus the drum heater goes off, the temperature of the primary transfer roller is not likely to match that of the drum when the power is turned on the next morning; and the resulting temporary change in the resistance of the primary transfer roller at times prevents proper performance of ATVC. If the level of current set by default is not high enough, use this item to increase it. Level
Settings 0: refer to environment sensor 1: 60uA 2: 70uA 3: 80uA 4: 90uA 5: 100uA 6: 110uA 7: 120uA at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1ROT-TIM Use it to change the duration of primary transfer power retention current idle rotation. Settings 0: refer to environment sensor 1: 40sec 2: 60sec 3: 120sec 4: 180sec 5: 300sec 6: 420sec 7: 600sec at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2ROT-TIM Use it to change the secondary transfer power retention idle rotation. Settings 0: refer to environment sensor 1: 40sec 2: 60sec 3: 120sec 4: 180sec 5: 300sec 6: 420sec 7: 600sec at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DEV-K-TM Use it to set the duration of toner discharge executed as part of the ITB black band cleaning sequence. Use it to set the duration of toner discharge executed as part of the ITB black band cleaning sequence. Settings 1: 10 2: 20 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 CDEV-IDL Use it to enable/disable power-on idle rotation of the color developing assembly (YMC). Use it to adjust the intervals of patch ATR for the No. 1 limit. A higher limit will increase the execution intervals, but will affect the density. On the other hand, although a lower limit will decrease the intervals, the density will be more stable. - the number of prints (CNT) reset upon execution of patch detection - cumulative video count CNT) Timing - perform patch detection during last rotation of the ongoing job when the No. 1 limit (20 prints) is exceeded. - force patch detection by interrupting the job as soon as the No. 2 limit is exceeded. - force patch execution as soon as the cumulative VC exceeds 300% (in terms of A4). 1 print = 3 images (YMC only); for image count, 1 for small and 2 for large)
Settings 0: OFF 1: ON at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1
17-129
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading PCHINT-1 Contents Use it to change the intervals of 1-patch detection (No. 1 limit) in terms of the number of prints. Use it to change the intervals of patch ATR for the No. 1 limit. A higher limit will increase the downtime intervals, but will affect the density. On the other hand, although a lower limit may decrease the downtime intervals, the density will be more stable. The following triggers are used to initiate patch detection: - when the 1st limit (20 prints) is exceeded, execute patch detection during the last rotation of the ongoing job. - when the 2nd limit is exceed, stop the ongoing job and force patch detection. (1 print = 3 images (YMC only); for image count, 1 for small and 2 for large) The above No. 1 limit may be changes. A higher limit will increase downtime intervals, but will affect density. On the other hand, although a lower limit will decrease downtime intervals, the density will be more stable. By default, the No. 1 limit is 20 prints (60 images), variable between -10 and + 10 (offset). Level
Use it to change the intervals of 1-patch detection (No. 1 limit) in terms of the number of prints. settings range: -10 to +10 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PCHINT-2 Use it to adjust the intervals of patch detection (No. 2 limit). Use it to change the patch ATR intervals for the No. 2 limit. For the triggers used to initiate patch detection, see the list for PCHINT-1. 2 Settings range: -10 to +10 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PCHINT-V Use it to adjust the intervals of patch detection (video counter cumulative count). Use it to adjust the intervals of patch ATR in relation to the video counter cumulative count. Settings range: -10 to +10 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 POT-OFTM Use it to adjust the length of time for the detection of a disconnected connector or to adjust the potential sensor offset. By default, the machine executes idle rotation of the fixing roller for 1 seconce every 30 min to prevent deformation of the roller while in standby. Settings range: 5 to 50 (unit: sec) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 5 FXWRNLVL Use it to set the fixing upper roller alert level. Use it to change the alert level in relation to the fixing counter reading. If you have replaced the fixing roller or the fixing unit with a modified type (with a longer life), use this mode to set the level to suit the new type: i.e., change the setting of the following service mode item to '1' or '2': COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FXRWNLVL. Then, decrease the following setting slightly: COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FX-UP-RL. Make copies to see that the appropriate alert is issued when the counter reaches a specific setting. 2
Settings range 0: 180,000 1: 150,000 2: 120,000 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 FXERRLVL Use it to change the fixing roller error level setting. Use it to change the error level of the fixing counter count. If you have replaced the fixing roller or the fixing unit with a modified type (with a longer life), change the setting to suit the new type. The threshold of the fixing error level will be in relation to the setting made using the following service mode (offset by the level you set here): COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FXWRNLVL. 2
Settings 0: +20,000 1: +40,000 2: +60,000 3: no error (alert retained) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PCHINTV2 Use it to change the intervals of post rotation patch detection (video counter count). Use it to change the intervals of patch ATR in relation to the cumulative video count. When a specific video count is exceeded, ATR patch detection is executed during last rotation at the end of the ongoing job, and the limit of the cumulative video count may be changed. A higher limit will increase the downtime intervals, but will affect the density. On the other hand, although a lower limit will decease the downtime intervals, the density will be more stable.
Settings range: -10 to +10 (level: 10% duty/A4) default: 200% duty (A4, 5% duty x 40 prints) at time of shipment/RAM initialization: 0 DLV-SPSW Use it to change the delivery speed. Settings 0: delivery speed with priority on FCOT (about.635 mm/sec) 1: delivery speed with priority on paper edge damage avoidance (about.276 mm/sec) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2
17-130
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading DA-CNCT Use it to select whether to use DA. Selects whether to use DA (software). Setting value 0: Do not use DA. 1: Use DA. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2 - "1 (DA disabled)" should be set to use DA. When DA (hardware) is installed in the main unit but "1" is not set, it cannot be used. - When "1" is set to COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DA-CNCT, "ON" is set to the following items. COPIER>OPTION>BODY>STS-PORT >CMD-PORT >SSH-SW >DA-PORT FXMSG-SW Use it to enable/disable the message that prompts replacement of the fixing assembly. Use it to enable/disable the message on the control panel indication the need for the replacement of the fixing assembly. Normally, the setting is enabled; however, you can disable the message if there is no need for replacement (so that the user will not feel unnecessarily concerned and place a service call). If replacement is necessary, be sure to replace it and enable the setting. Settings 0: do not indicate 1: indicate a time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 G-LUT-SW Use it to change the gamma LUT auto correction function. Use it to adjust the control on image formation in relation to the state (on/off) of the gamma LUT auto correction function. Settings range 0: off (do not apply gamma LUT auto correction) 1: copy T-mic (apply gamma LUT auto correction) 2: copy PDL T-mic (apply gamma LUT auto correction) 3: all (apply gamma a LUT auto correction) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization; 1 G-LUT-SZ Use it to set the gamma LUT auto correction function (smoothing intervals). Use it to set the intervals of smoothing executed as part of the gamma LUT auto correction function. Settings 0: 30 1: 35 2: 40 3: 45 4: 50 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 TR-BKBND Use it to set the black band used to prevent bending/slipping of the transfer cleaning blade. The machine is designed to deposit a black band to prevent bending/shipping of the transfer charging cleaning blade before cleaning the photosensitive drum immediately after patch detection or before application of the secondary transfer reverse bias. 2 Contents Level
Settings 0: off (default) 1: on only if H/H 2: on at all times at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1TR-ATVC Use it to enable/disable the primary transfer ATVC retry function for initial multiple rotation. Use it to enable/disable the primary transfer ATVC retry function for initial multiple rotation to suit the site of installation. Settings 0: off at all times (spare) 1: on only if H/H (default) 2: on normally at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 CHNG-STS Use it to set a port number for the status connection at TUIF over TCP/IP. Setting range 1 to 65535 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 20010] CHNG-CMD Use it to set a port number for the command connection at TUIF over TCP/IP. Setting range 1 to 65535 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 20000] FXLW-TMP Use it to change the control temperature for the pressure roller. Settings 0: 170 deg C(default) 1: 160 deg C 2: 150 deg C at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 GLUTLV-Y/M/K for study by design dpt
17-131
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading GLUTLV-C Contents Use it to adjust the slope as part of the gamma LUT auto correction mechanism of the controller when improvement is needed to correct coarseness of images read of a cyan solid original. Level
Settings 0: 2.4 1: 2.0 2: 1.6 3: 1.2 4: 0 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 GLUTMX-Y/M/ C/K Use it to adjust the maximum correction slope as part of the gamma LUT auto correction mechanism of the controller when improvement is needed to correct coarseness of images read of a cyan solid original. Settings 0: 2.4 1: 2.2 2: 2.0 3: 1.8 4: 1.6 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2 GLUTOF-Y/M/C/ for study by design dpt K
MEAP-DSP
Use it to select whether to switch the MEAP screen to the standard screen. Setting value 0: Switch the MEAP screen to the standard screen. 1: Do not switch the MEAP screen to the standard screen. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2
ANIM-SW
Use it to select whether to display full screen for a jam/alarm when operating the MEAP application. Setting value 0: Display full screen. 1: Do not display full screen. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] The following screens are displayed as exceptions even when "1" is set. - Serviceman error screen - Address list import screen - BBS screen - Screen for errors in manual feed paper size - Screen for the setting of manual feed paper - Screen for the setting of inserter paper 2
HDD-TMP
Use it to set a level of temperature to serve as a reference for detecting a low temperature error. Settings 0 to 30 deg C at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2 2
HDD-TIM
Use it to set the time interval allowed before a low temperature error is identified Settings 0 to 200 min at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 10 2
HDD-SW
Use it to enable/disable E code indication of a low temperature error Settings 0: indicate 1: do not indicate at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2
MEAP-SSL
Use it to set an HTTPS port for MEAP. Sets a port for the HTTPS server to use SSL in the MEAP HTTP. Setting range 1 to 65535 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 8443] 2
BG-CTR
Controlling correction of coarse image on solid area Controlling image formation to be corrected as well as ON/OFF of the function to correct coarse image on solid area Settings 0: OFF (Coarse image on solid area is not corrected.) [Factory default/After RAM is cleared] 1: Copy T-mic (Coarse image on solid are is corrected.) 2: Copy PDL T-mic (Coarse image on solid are is corrected.) 3: ON (Coarse image on solid are is corrected on the whole.)
BG-SET
Settings of coarse image correction on solid area Settings 0: Rougher than standard 1: A little rougher than standard 2: Standard [Factory default/After RAM is cleared] 3: A little finer than standard 4: Finer than standard
17-132
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading MIX-FLG Contents Use it to select an image field flag (for image synthesis). Selects the image processing method which is performed when a combined image cannot be compressed at a certain compression ratio on the main controller side. Setting value 0: Image processing equivalent to the PDL character mode 1: Image processing equivalent to the PDL photo mode 2: Image processing equivalent to the SCAN character mode 3: Image processing equivalent to the SCAN photo mode [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] LPD-PORT Use it to set an LPD port number Setting range 1 to 65535 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 515] Reference An LPD port is a network port for TCP/IP connection when printing is performed via network. BL-GM Use it to select gamma table for bookbinding and image synthesis. Selects gamma table to be used when a copy job for bookbinding/image synthesis and other job (PDL, etc.) are mixed. Setting value 0: 1: [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] ORG-A4R Use it to set a special paper size that is not otherwise recognized by the DF Setting value 0:A4-R 1:FOLIO-R [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] PDF-RDCT Use it to enable/disable reduction for transfer of received data (in PDF). Use it to indicate whether or not to reduce data received in fax/i-fax mode for transmission as e-mail/file PDF data. 0: disables reduction of received data for transfer as PDF 1: enables reduction of received data for transfer as PDF REDU-CNT Control the switching of the density adjustment method. Control whether or not to perform density adjustment considering toner volume restriction. Setting range 0 to 1 Standard value 1 REBOOTSW Set whether or not to perform reboot when the E240 error occurs. In the current specifications, reboot is performed when the E240 error occurs. (Reasons: Continuous rotation deteriorates the durability performance of the engine. It cannot be also denied that it may cause an error to the engine.) However, when reboot is performed automatically, jobs in the PDL disappear, which has been causing complaints in the field. Therefore, this mode is used to set whether or not to automatically perform reboot when the E240 error occurs. Setting range 0: Perform reboot automatically when the E240 error occurs. 1: Do not perform reboot automatically when the E240 error occurs. Standard value 0 VP-ART Change the line art processing. Change the outline processing for line art in the scalable PDF. Setting range 0 to 99 Standard value 1 VP-TXT Change the vector processing for characters. Change the vector processing for characters in the scalable PDF. Setting range 0 to 99 Standard value 1 UI-PRINT Set whether or not to display the print job screen in the control panel. This is a switch to set whether or not to display the print job screen in the control panel. This is a specification for a user who does not desire to display the screen in the control panel. Setting range 0: Do not display the print job screen. 1: Display the print job screen. Standard value 1 WUEV-SW Set whether or not to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation. Set whether or not to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation to the DS application on network when the copier main unit entered the sleep mode or recovered from the sleep mode. Setting range 0: Provide a notice. 1: Do not provide a notice. Standard value 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Level
17-133
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading WUEV-INT Setting range 60 to 65535 Standard value 600 WUEV-POT Set a port number for the destination to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation. Setting range 1 to 65535 Standard value 11427 WUEV-RTR Set a range to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation. Set the number of routers that can be used for a notice of the sleep mode operation. Setting range 0 to 254 Standard value 3 SJB-UNW Switch the number of reserved jobs for secure print jobs. Switch the number of reserved jobs for secure print jobs to 50 or 90. Setting range 0: 50 1: 90 Standard value 0 UI-RSCAN Set whether or not to display the remote scan screen in the control panel. This mode is used to set whether or not to display the remote scan screen in the control panel. This is a specification for a user who does not desire to display the screen in the control panel. Setting range 0: Do not display the screen. 1: Display the screen. Standard value 1 UI-EPRNT Set whether or not to display the expansion printing screen in the control panel. This mode is used to set whether or not to display the expansion printing screen (EFI print screen) in the control panel. This is a specification for a user who does not desire to display the screen in the control panel. Setting range 0: Do not display the screen. 1: Display the screen. Standard value 1 UI-WEB Set whether or not to display the Web browser screen in the control panel. This mode is used to set whether or not to display the Web browser screen in the control panel. This is a specification for a user who does not desire to display the screen in the control panel. Setting range 0: Do not display the screen. 1: Display the screen. Standard value 1 WEBV-SW Set whether or not to use the WEBDAV function. When 1 (ON) is set to this mode, the WEBDAV function is unavailable. (WEBDAV related information disappears from the following items. - User mode -> Setting of destination list specifications -> Registration of destinations -> File -> "WEBDAV" in the protocol - User mode -> "Use the chunk split transmission for WEBDAV transmission" in the setting of specifications for transmission [Reference] The WEBDAV function is installed in the main unit as standards, but there are cases when this function is not used in order to reduce the memory usage. Setting range: 0: Use the WEBDAV function. 1: Do not use the WEBDAV function. Factory setting value: 0 When changing into 1, it takes 1 to 2 minutes before the display of WEBDAV is off. After that, return to user mode, check to see that the display of WEBDAV in the above user mode is off and then turn off the power. If turning off the power before the display of WEBDAV is off, the display of WEBDAV is not off by turning on the power again. 2 2 Contents Set the interval to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation. 2 Level
CARD-RNG
Set the number of cards available. Set the number of cards available when using a card reader. Setting range 1 to 1000 Standard value 1000 [Reference] In the current condition, the starting number of the card is specified by COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>CARD, and the fixed number of cards is specified starting from that number. (ex. fixed at 1000 cards)
17-134
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading COMP-PRT Contents Composite print operation control (image processing memory allocation control) When performing printing for "printing of a page number / printing of the number of copies / printing of a date / bookbinding / printing of a tint block (hereinafter called 'combined printing') with the copying number of 2 or more, printing is prioritized in memory allocation for image processing for a certain memory model (option) or document size. This causes a lack of memory for image processing of scanning, SEND transmission (excluding FAX), and PDL input operation, and such operation cannot be performed until printing is completed. This mode is used to perform equal memory allocation to all jobs so that operation such as scanning, SEND transmission (excluding FAX), and PDL input can be performed before printing is completed (so that such operation is performed little by little). Setting range 0: Prioritize printing. 1: Perform equal memory allocation. Standard value 0 DHCP-12 DHCP-Option 12 request ON/OFF selector switch This uses DHCP option 55 to enable host name (option 12) inquiries when the DHCP-12 switch is set to ON. It is used to prevent option 12 and option 81 from being included in DHCP packets in conditions where the packets passing over the network are being monitored. (Supported through separate business negotiations, etc.) { DHCP = Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol } Settings 0: OFF 1: ON [Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 1] DHCP-81 DHCP-option 81 request ON/OFF selector switch When the DHCP-81 switch is set to ON and the user mode dynamic DNS setting is ON, this enables dynamic changes in the IP address using DHCP option 81. It is used to prevent option 12 and option 81 from being included in DHCP packets in conditions where the packets passing over the network are being monitored. (Supported through separate business negotiations, etc.) Settings 0: OFF 1: ON [Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 1] PT3-INEX Enable switch for paper brand Type 3 import/export To enable the paper brand Type 3 information to be handled by the following functions: - Import/export using remote UI - Distribution of equipment information - Import/export from iWEMC 0: Not enabled 1: Enabled (Default: 0) MIBCOUNT Charging counter MIB switch Change the scope range of the charging counter MIB. Setting range 0: Display all charging counter MIB information. 1: Display all charging counter MIB information that is displayed in LUI. 2: Do not display charging counter MIB information. Method of Adjustment When the charging counter MIB is not disclosed, request a serviceman to change the counter value. [Value after execution of RAM clear: 0] MEAP-PRI Changing the task priority of MEAP The task priority of MEAP increased when this mode is on. 0: OFF 1: ON Default: 1 Use this mode when increasing the MEAP performance. PDLEVCT1 PDL continuous job event decimation To increase the speed of the PDL continuous jobs, install a decimation function for the events to be sent to PDL-PIPIT on the CPCA. The UI display has some mismatch regarding event processing, therefore it shall be allowed for the service technician to turn off the Event Decimation function with Service Switch. This item displays the CPCA event to be decimated and the Status. Setting range 0: No event decimation 1: Decimates job status change/job list change. Status of interaction/executing/complete are excluded. 2: Decimates job status change/job list change. Status of interaction is excluded. [Value of factory shipping/default: 0] Use when there occurs a complaint of the UI display. 2 Level
2. USER
T-17-146 COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading COPY-LIM Use it to change the upper limit on the copy count. Settings range 1 to 9999 (prints) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 9999 1 Contents Level
17-135
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading SLEEP Use it to enable/disable the sleep function. Settings 0: OFF 1: ON at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 Use 'timer setup' of user mode to set the sleep function. COUNTER 1 Use it to set soft counter 1 appearing on the User Mode screen. 101: total 1 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 (fixed and cannot be changed) COUNTER 2 Use it to have the counter type of soft counter 2 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 108 COUNTER 3 Use it to change the counter type of soft counter 3 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 232 COUNTER 4 Use it to change the counter type of soft counter 4 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars my be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 324 COUNTER 5 Use it to change the counter type of soft counter 5 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 COUNTER 6 Use it to change the counter type of soft counter 6 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1 Contents Level
Software Counter Specifications 000s: remote copy 100s: total 200s: copy 300s: print 400s: copy + print 500s: scan 600s: box 700s: reception print 800s: report print Guide to the Table yes: counter valid on the machine 4C: full color mono: mono color (YMC/RGB; ageing effect mono) Bk: black mono L: large-size (larger than B4) S: small-size (B4 and smaller) counter particular 1, 2: indicates the count of large-size sheets; B4 may be counted as large-size if so set in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>USER>BR_L_CONT). copy: local copy + remote copy copy A: local copy + remote copy + box print print: PDL print + report print + box print print A: PDL port + report print scan: black-and-white scan + color scan
17-136
Chapter 17
T-17-147 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 000 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 no indication remote copy (full color 1) remote copy (full color o2) remote copy (mono color 1) remote copy (mono color 2) remote copy (black-and-white 1) remote copy (black-and-white 2) remote copy (full color; large) remote copy (full color; small) remote copy (mono color; large) remote copy (mono color; small) remote copy (black-and-white; large) remote copy (black-and-white; small) remote copy (full color + mono color; large) remote copy (full color + mono color; small) remote copy (full color + mono color 2) remote copy (full color + mono color 1) remote copy (full color; large; double-sided) remote copy (full color; small; double sided) remote copy (mono color; large; double-sided remote copy (mono color; small; double-sided) remote copy (black-and-white; large; double-sided) remote copy (black-and-white; small; doubles-sided) Counter particulars
T-17-148 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 101 102 103 104 105 106 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 total 1 total 2 total (large) total (small) total (full color 1) total (full color 2) total (black-and-white 1) total (black-and-white 2) total (mono color; lag) total (mono color; small) total (black-and-white; large) total (black-and-white; small) total 1 (double-sided) total 2 (double-sided) large-size (double-sided) Small-size (double-sided) total (mono color 1) total (mono color 2) total (full color; large) total (full color; small) total (full color + mono color; large) total (full color + mono color; small) total (full color + mono color 2) total (full color + mono color 1) Counter particulars
T-17-149 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Sport 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 copy (total 1) copy (total 2) copy (large) copy (small) copy A (total 1) copy A (total 2) copy A large) copy A (small) local copy (total 1) Counter particulars
17-137
Chapter 17
Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Sport 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 local copy (total 2) local copy (large) local copy (small) remote copy (total 1) remote copy (total 2) remote copy (large) remove copy (small) copy (full color 1) copy (full color 2) copy (mono color 1) copy (mono color 2) copy (black-and-white 1) copy (black-and-white 2) copy (full color; large) copy (full color; small) copy (mono color; large) copy (mono color; small) copy (black-and-white; large) copy (black-and-white; small) copy (full color + mono color; large) copy (full color + mono color; small) copy (full color + mono color; 2) copy (full color mono color; 1) copy (full color; large; double-sided) copy (full color; small; double-sided) copy (mono color; large; double-sided) copy (mono color; small; double-sided) copy (black-and-white; large; double-sided) copy (black-and-white; small; double-sided) copy A (full color 1) copy A (full color 2) copy A (mono color 1) copy A (mono color 2) copy A (black-and-white 1) copy A (back-and-white 2) copy A (full color; large) copy A (full color; small) copy A (mono color; large) co A (mono color; small) copy A (black-and-white; large) copy A (black-and-white; small) copy A (full color + mono color; lag) copy A (full color + mono color; small) copy A (full color + mono color; color 2) copy A (full color + mono color 1) copy A (full color; large; double-sided) copy A (full color; small; double-sided) copy A (mono color; laser; double-sided) copy A (mono color; small; double-sided) copy A (black-and-while; large; double-sided) copy A (black-and-white; small; double-sided) local copy (full color 1) local copy (full color 2) local copy (mono color 1) local copy (mono color 2) local copy (black-and-white 1) local copy (black-and-white 2) local copy (full color; large) local copy (full color; small) local copy (mono color; large) local copy (mono color; small) local copy (black-and-white; large) local copy (black-and-white; small) local copy (full color + mono color; small) local copy (full color + mono color; small) Counter particulars
17-138
Chapter 17
Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Sport 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 local copy (full color +mono color 2) local copy (full color + mono color 1) local copy (full color; large; double-sided) local copy (full color; small; double-sided) local copy (mono color; large; double-sided) local copy (mono color; small; double-sided) local copy (black-and-white; large; double-sided) local copy (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-150 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 339 340 341 342 345 346 351 352 355 356 print (total 1) print (total 2) print (large) print (small) print A (total 1) print A (total 2) print A (laser) pint A (small) print full color 1) print (full color 2) print (mono color 1) print (mono color 2) print (black-and-white 1) print (black-and-white 2)) print (full color; large) print (full color small) print (mono color; large) print (mono color; large) print (black-and-white; large) print (black-and-white; small) print (full color + mono color; large) print (full color + mono color; small) print (full color + mono color/2) front (full color + mono color/1) print (full color; large; double-sided) front (full color; small; double-sided) front (mono color; large; double-sided) print (mono color; small; double-sided) print (black-and-while; large; double-sided) print (black-and-white; small; sided-sided) PDL print (total 1) PDL print (total 2) PDL print (large) PDL print (small) PDL print (full color 1) PDL print (full color ) PDL print (black-and-white 1) PDL print (black-and-white 2) PDL print (full color; large) PDL print (full color; small) PDL print (black-and-white; large) PDL print (black-and-while; small) PDL print (full color; large; double-sided) PDL print (full color; small; double-sided) PDL print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) PDL print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) Counter particulars Counter particulars
T-17-151 Sport yes yes yes yes No. 401 402 403 404 copy + print (full color; large) copy + print full color; small) copy + print (black-and-white; large) copy + print (black-and-white; small) Counter particulars
17-139
Chapter 17
Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 copy + print (black-and-white 2) copy + print (black-and-white 1) copy print (full color + mono color; large) copy + print (full color + mono color; small) copy + print (full color + mono color/2) copy + print (full color + mono color/1) copy + print (large) copy + print (small) copy + print (2) copy + print (1) copy + print (mono color; large) copy + print (mono color; small) copy + print (full color; large; double-sided) copy + print (full color; small; double-sided) copy + print (mono color; large; double-side) copy + print (mono color; small; double-sided) copy + print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) copy + print (black-and-white; small double-sided) T-17-152 Sport yes yes yes No. 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 scan (total 1) scan (total 2) scan A(large) scan (large) black-and-white scan (total 1) black-and-white scan (total 2) black-and-white scan (large) black-and-white scan (small) color scan (total 1) color scan (total 2) color scan (large) color scan (small) Counter particulars Counter particulars
T-17-153 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 box print (total 1) box print (total 2) box print (large) box print (small) box print (full color 1) box print (full color 2) box print (mono color 1) box print (mono color 2) box print (black-and-white 1) box print (black and-white 2) box print (full color; large) box print (full color; small) box print (mono color; large) box print (mono color; small) box print (lack-and-white; large) box print (black-and-white; small) box print (full color + color; large) box print (full color + mono color; small) box print (full color + mono color 2) box print (full color + mono color 1) box print (full color; large; double-sided) box print (full color; small; double-sided) box print (mono color; large; double-sided) box print (mono color; small; double-sided) box print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) box print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) Counter particulars
17-140
Chapter 17
T-17-154 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 reception print (total 1) reception print (total 2) reception print (large) reception print (small) reception print (full color 1) reception print (full color 2) reception print (grayscale 1) reception print (grayscale 2) reception print (black-and-white 1) reception print (black-and-white 2) reception print (full color; large) reception print (full color; small) reception print (grayscale; large) reception print (grayscale; small) reception print (black-and-white; large) reception print (black-and-white; small) reception print (full color + grayscale; large) reception print (full color + grayscale; small) reception print (full color + grayscale 2) reception print (full color + grayscale 1) reception print (full color; large; double-sided) reception print (full color; small; double-sided) reception print (grayscale; large: double-sided) reception print (grayscale; small; double-side) reception print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) reception print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) Counter particulars
T-17-155 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 report print (total 1) report print (total 2) report print (large) report print (small) report point (full color 1) report print (full color 2) report print (grayscale 1) report print (grayscale 2) report print (lack-and-white 1) report print (black-and-white 2) report print (full color large) report print (full color; small) report print (grayscale; large) report print (grayscale; small) report print (black-and-white; large) report print (black-and-white; small) report print (full color + grayscale; large) report print (full color + grayscale; small) report print (full color + grayscale 2) report print (full color + grayscale 1) report print (full color; large; double-sided) report print (full color; small; double-sided) report print (grayscale; large; double-sided) report print (grayscale: small; double-sided) report print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) report print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) Counter particulars
T-17-156 Sport No. 901 902 903 904 copy scan total 1 (color) copy scan total 1 (black-and-white) copy scan total 2 (color) copy scan total 2 (black-and-white) Counter particulars
17-141
Chapter 17
Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 copy scan total 3 (color) copy scan total 3 (black-and-white) copy scan total 4 (color) copy scan total 4 (black-and-while) local copy scan (black-and-white) local copy scan (black-and-while) remote copy scan (color) remote copy scan (black-and-white) transmission scan total 1 (color) transmission scan total 1 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 2 (color) transmission scan total 2 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 3 (color) transmission scan total 3 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 4 (color) transmission scan total 4 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 5 (color) transmission scan total 6 (black-and-white transmission scan total 6 (color) transmission scan total 6 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 7 (color) transmission scan total 7 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 8 (color) transmission scan total 8 (black-and-white) universal transmission scan total (color) universal transmission scan total (black-and-while) box scan (color) box scan (black-and-while) remote scan (color) remote scan (black-and-white) transmission scan/fax (color) transmission scan/fax (black-and-white) transmission scan/i-fax (color) transmission scan/i fax (black-and-white) transmission scan/e-mail (color) transmission scan/e-mail (black-and-white) transmission scan/FTP (color) transmission scan/FTP (black-and-white) transmission scan/SMB (color) transmission scan/SMB (black-and-white) transmission scan/IPX (color) transmission scan/IPX (black-and-while) transmission scan/detach base (color) transmission scan/detach base (black-and-white) transmission scan/local print (color) transmission scan/local print (black-and-white) transmission scan/box (color) transmission scan/box (black-and-white) T-17-157 COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading CONTROL Contents Use it to impose a limit on the use of a control card for a PDL job. Settings 0: do not limit 1: limit at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 B4-L-CNT For soft counters 1 through 6, use it to specify whether B4 should be counted as large-size or small-size. Settings 0: small-size 1: large-size at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1 1 Level Counter particulars
17-142
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading COPY-JOB Contents Disabling Copy Job Reservation When the Card Reader/Coin Vendor Is in Use Use it when it is necessary to prevent multiple jobs as when the CCX or coin robot is in use. Settings 0: permit copy job reservation 1: prohibit copy job reservation at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 TAB-ROT Use it to enable/disable 180-deg rotation of a landscape image for a tab sheet. Settings 0: do not rotate 1: rotate at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PR-PSESW Use it to select whether to display the print pause function switch. Selects whether to display the print pause function switch in the user screen. Setting value 0: Print pause function not available (The print pause function switch is not displayed in the user screen.) 1: Print pause function available (The print pause function switch is displayed in the user screen.) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] IDPRN-SW Use it to switch over job types for the group control counter. Settings 0: count in PRINT category: box print, report print, SEND local print PDL print 1: count in PRINT category: report print, end local print, PDL print at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CPRT-DSP Use it to enable/disable indication of the count button on the Sales Counter Check screen. Settings 0: do not indicate 1: indicate at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 CNT-SW Use it to switch over counter indication items. Counters in Question At the time of the setting value 0 101 total 1 108 total (black-and-white 1) 232 copy (full color + mono color; 1) 324 print (full color + mono color; 1) At the time of the setting value 1 102 total 2 231 copy (full color + mono color; 2) 148 total A (full color + mono color; 2) 222 copy (black-and-white 2) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 REMPNL Use it to select whether to use the remote panel function. Selects whether to use the remote panel function, which enables a user to operate a copier using a PC in the same manner as the LCD panel Setting value 0: Do not use remote panel function. 1: Use remote panel function. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] BCONT-AST Use it to switch over counter indication items. Counters in Question Settings 0: count box print job as PDL job 1: count box print job as copy job at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DFLT-CPY Use it to set the default color mode of COPY. Settings 0: ACS 1: full color 2: black-and-white JPN (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) UL (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) EUR (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) other (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) DFLT-BOX Use it to set the default color mode for BOX. Settings 0: ACS 1: full color 2: black-and-white JPN (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) UL (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) EUR (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) others (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) DOC-REM Use it to set the message promoting for the removal of originals. Settings 0: do not indicate 1: indicate at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Level
17-143
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading COUNTER7 Contents Use it to select the counter type to be displayed for Counter 7 in the user mode. Sets the number for the 7th counter displayed for the counter check in the user mode. Setting range 1 to 26, 39, 41 to 45 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0 (not displayed)] COUNTER8 Use it to select the counter type to be displayed for Counter 8 in the user mode. Sets the number for the 8th counter displayed for the counter check in the user mode Setting range 1 to 26, 39, 41 to 45 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0 (not displayed)] LDAP-SW Use it to select the searching condition for LDAP search. Sets the matching condition to retrieve email addresses or fax numbers from the LDAP server. Setting value 0: Includes the following condition 1: Does not include the following condition 2: Is equal to the following condition 3: Is not equal to the following condition 4: Starts with the following condition 5: Ends with the following condition [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 4] Reference When the LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server is registered, email addresses or fax numbers can be retrieved from the LADP server. The email addresses or fax numbers obtained can be registered in the address/number list, etc FROM-OF Use it to select whether to delete "from-address" used for email sending. Setting value 0: Do not delete "from-address". 1: Delete "from-address". [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] SPEAKER Use it to select whether to display the "Speaker / Headphone Switching" button in the voice setting (user mode). Setting value 0: Do not display the button. 1: Display the button. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] FILE-OF Use it to select whether to prohibit transmission to file addresses. Selects whether to prohibit transmission to file addresses by prohibiting input of file addresses using the address book. Setting value 0: Do not prohibit transmission to file addresses. 1: Prohibit transmission to file addresses. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 1 Reference - To change this item from 0 to 1 when a file address is registered, it is desirable to manually delete the file address. (Otherwise, the file address can be used.) - When "1" is set, it is not allowed to import (register) a file address from RUI or equipment information distribution. Therefore, in order to delete all the addresses at once, set "1" and execute "overwriting import (deletes the current data and then registers the imported data)" for the file exported by RUI or equipment information distribution. MAIL-OF Use it to select whether to prohibit transmission to email addresses. Selects whether to prohibit email transmission by prohibiting input of email addresses using the address book. Setting value 0: Do not prohibit transmission to email addresses. 1: Prohibit transmission to email addresses. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 1 Reference - To change this item from 0 to 1 when an email address is registered, it is desirable to manually delete the email address. (Otherwise, the email address can be used.) - When "1" is set, it is not allowed to import (register) an email address from RUI or equipment information distribution. Therefore, in order to delete all the addresses at once, set "1" and execute "overwriting import (deletes the current data and then registers the imported data)" by RUI or equipment information distribution. IFAX-OF Use it to select whether to prohibit transmission to I Fax addresses. Selects whether to prohibit transmission to I Fax addresses by prohibiting input of I Fax addresses using the address book. Setting value 0: Do not prohibit transmission to I Fax addresses. 1: Prohibit transmission to I Fax addresses. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 1 Reference - To change this item from 0 to 1 when an I Fax address is registered, it is desirable to manually delete the I Fax address. (Otherwise, the I Fax address can be used.) - When "1" is set, it is not allowed to import (register) an I Fax address from RUI or equipment information distribution. Therefore, in order to delete all the addresses at once, set "1" and execute "overwriting import (deletes the current data and then registers the imported data)" by RUI or equipment information distribution. 1 1 1 1 Level
17-144
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading LDAP-DEF Switch the default setting of the LDAP searching condition. Change the default setting of a searching attribute condition specified for LDAP searching. Setting range 0 to 6 0: "Name" 1: "E-mail" 2: "FAX" 3: "Organization" 4: "Unit of organization" 5: User setting 1 6: User setting 2 Standard value 0 Refer to COPIER > OPTION> USER > LDAP-SW for the details of LDAP. HDCR-DSW Selection of whether to display 'all HDD data clear ON/OFF' item in user mode To select whether to display the 'all HDD data clear ON/OFF' item in the user mode. This mode takes effect only when the all HDD data clear function (licensed) is activated. When the user asks for the item to be provided. 0: The item is not displayed.[default] 1: The item is displayed. SIZE-DET Use it to enable/disable the original size detection function. Settings 0: off (the scanner will not go on when the copyboard cover is opened/closed thus not blinding the user) 1: on (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) DATE-DSP Use it to change the date notation. Settings 0: YYMM/DD 1: DD/MM'YY 2: MM/DD/YY MB-CCV Use it to limit access to the mail box function (control card). Settings 0: do not limit 1: limit at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 TRY-STP Use it to enable/disable output when the tray becomes full. Settings 0: normal mode (interrupted when the finisher tray becomes full) 1: interrupt in relation to stack height at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 MF-LG-ST Use it to enable/disable the indication of the Extra length mode. Settings 0: normal 1: indicate key on extension mode screen at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CNT-DISP Use it to enable/disable the indication of the serial number in response to a press on the Counter Check key. Settings 0: indicate serial number 1: do not indicate serial number at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NW-SCAN Use it to enable/disable the network scan function. Settings 0: no not permit 1: permit (invalid in the absence of a UFR or open I/F board) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 HDCR-DSP Use it to enable/disable the indication of HDD initialization mode (user mode). Settings 0: do not indicate and do not initialize 1: initialize once using 0s 2: initialize once using random data 3: initialize 3 times using random data at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 JOB-INVL Use it to set the intervals of interrupt jobs. Settings 0: standard (permit the next job) 1: permit output of next job after delivery of last page of interrupt job 2: permit output of next job after delivery of last page of all jobs at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 LGSW-DSP Use it to enable/disable indication of 'log display on/off' on the User Mode screen. Settings 0: do not indicate 'log display on/off'. 1: indicate 'log display on/off' at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Contents Level
17-145
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading PCL-COPY Contents Use it to set the PCL command COPIES (Meru/Pinatubo/Hood compatibility mode). Setting mode 0: control page by page according to COPIES command setting on pages 1: Meru/Pinatubo/Hood compatible mode 2 to 65535: space at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PRJOB-CP Use it to set the CCV count pulse for reception/report output. Settings 0: do not generate count pulse 1: generate count pulse at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DPT-ID-7 Registering a department ID and inputting a 7-digit code for authentication. Setting Values 0: As before [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear] 1: Inputting a 7-digit code Reference Information Support for Siemens RUI-RJT Disconnecting the HTTP port when three authentication failures from RUI are recognized. Setting Values 0: Invalid [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear] 1: Valid Reference Information Support for Siemens SND-RATE Use it to set the rate of compression when SEND-RATE is set to 'high' Settings 0: 1/16 1: 1/20 2: 1/24 A higher rate of compression will lower the image quality. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CTM-S06 Use it to remove the password from an export file (file transmission address). range of settings 0:do not remove password from export file 1:remove password from export file. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 FREG-SW Use it to select whether to display the free register section for the "SEND" MEAP counter. Setting value 0: Do not display the free register section. 1: Display the free register section. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] IFAX-SZL Use it to select whether to restrict the transmission size for IFAX transmission. (only when the transmission is not performed via a server) Setting value 0: Enable the restriction. (when transmission is performed via a server / when transmission is not performed via a server) 1: Disable the restriction. (only when transmission if not performed via a server) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 1] IFAX-PGD Use it to select whether to allow the transmission in the separation mode per page. (only when the data size exceeds the threshold.) Select whether to allow the transmission in the separation mode per page when the transmission data exceeds the threshold in the IFAX simple mode. Setting value 0: Do not allow the separation transmission per page. 1: Allow the separation transmission per page. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2 2 2 2 Level
In the page separation transmission mode, the order of pages on the receiver side is not guaranteed. There is also a possibility that another reception job might be inserted between the pages, which must be explained to a user before setting this item. MEAPSAFE Use it to select the MEAP safe mode. Setting value 0: Ordinary mode 1: Safe mode [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference In the safe mode, you can obtain a log for fault investigation by stopping the MEAP application
17-146
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading FXEX-CNT Contents Use it to set the temperature control hysterisis width for the outside heating roller. The outside heating roller of the machine has a low heating capacity and tends to go on and off frequently; this mode is offered to prevent flickering. Settings range 0: hysterisis width = -/+1 deg C (225 deg C -/+1 deg C) efault) 1: hysterisis width = -/+2 deg C (224 deg C -/+2 deg C) 2: hysterisis width = -/+3.5 deg C (222.5 deg C -/+3.5 deg C) 3: hysterisis width = -/+4.5 deg C (221.5 deg C -/+4.5 deg C) [at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0] PTJAM-RC Use it to select whether to make the machine recover from the PDL jam. Selects whether to make the machine recover from the PDL jam and perform printing. Setting value 0: Do not make the machine recover from the jam. 1: Make the machine recover from the jam. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 1] Reference Use it when you don't want to print the receipt or pay statement, etc. for a jam recovery after it was printed halfway. SLP-SLCT Use it to select whether to use the BW2 (CL1) Network application. Selects whether to make the machine enter the 1w(2w)Sleep mode so that the BW2 (CL1) Network application can be also used for BW3 (CL2). Setting value 0: Do not use the BW2 (CL1) network application. (The machine enters the 1w(2w)Sleep mode.) 1: Use the BW2 (CL1) network application. (The machine does not enter the 1w(2w)Sleep mode.) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2 Reference In order to make the BW3 (CL2) machine in the 1w(2w)Sleep recover via the network, it is necessary to receive a specific packet. Since the BW2 (CL1) machine does not require receipt of a specific packet, the BW3 (CL2) machine cannot recover from the 1w(2w)Sleep mode by the network application (such as NSA) used by the BW2 (CL1) machine. Therefore, it is necessary to make the machine not to enter the 1w(2w)Sleep mode when using the BW2 (CL1) application. 2 Level
PS-MODE
Use it to set a PS conversion mode. Sets a PS conversion mode. Setting value 0: No conversion 1: Conversion by PS Type3 Halftone command (opposite dither order) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference When BW2 was upgraded to BW3, major changes were made in the image processing method for PDL (PS), and the image printed by BW3 might be substantially different from the one printed by BW2. Therefore, the same image processing method as BW2 is provided by BW3.
2C-CT-SW
Use it to select the color counter (2-color mode only). Selects whether to use the full-color counter or mono-color counter for 2-color mode setting. Setting value 0: Use mono-color counter. 1: Use full-color counter. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 1] Reference 2-color printing: 1 color of R, G, B, C, M, Y + Bk Mono-color: 1 color only
CNCT-RLZ
Connection Serialization Switch Use it to enable/disable the connection serialization function. 0:off (disables connection serialization function) 1:on (enables connection serialization function) Remarks: Connection Serialization Function It has been designed to support the job grouping function of Version 1.0 of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition. The iR Series of machines (MFPs) are capable of assigning connections, and it is important that there be a mechanism preventing multiple connections on the part of the device for the job grouping function to operate correctly. Specifically, once the job data of a connection is received, that of another will not be accepted (received) until the end of the ongoing reception (so as to prevent reordering of jobs). The term "connection" refers to a connection established with multiple hosts (e.g., PCs) on a network. Job Grouping Function It has been designed as a function of Version 1.0 of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition, and serves to prevent a job coming from another PC in a group job (in which multiple jobs are transmitted within a single sessi
DOM-ADD
Use it to select whether to add the destination domain name for email transmission. Selects whether to add the domain name (ex. @canon.co.jp), which was set by the user mode, to the account input for email transmission. Setting value 0: Do not add the domain name. 1: Add the domain name. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] <When you send email to xxx@canon.co.jp> Set "canon.co.jp" as the domain name by the user mode, and set "1" to <DOM-ADD>. When you input xxx, the registered domain name is added for email transmission.
17-147
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading JA-DPI Specifies job archive record resolution. For jobs other than PC-FAX, FAX Rx, IFAX Rx, etc., the resolution is converted to the programmed resolution and an archive image is recorded. *The settings cannot be changed in service mode, but only referenced. Settings can only be made from a job archiveenabled MEAP programme. Setting values 0 : No not convert resolution. 1: 100 x 100 dpi 2: 200 x 200 dpi 3: 300 x 300 dpi [Factory settings and after RAM clear: 3] JA-COMPR Specifies job archive record compression rate. For jobs other than PC-FAX, FAX Rx, IFAX Rx, etc., the compression rate is converted to the programmed compression rate and an archive image is recorded. Setting values 0: Do not convert compression rate (use same compression table as original image). 1: 1/4 compression 2: 1/8 compression 3: 1/16 compression 4: 1/32 compression 5: 1/64 compression [Factory settings and after RAM clear: 3] FREE-DSP Charging/non-charging indication switch When a vendor does not have a hardware switch that changes charging/non-charging indication, a software switch is needed. If such is a case, this mode can be used whether to display the software switch. 0: not display (default) 1: display CLR-TIM Select the timing to perform a complete removal processing in the security kit. When a complete removal processing is performed, job processing performance sometimes decreases for certain data. This is because the page data which has been already processed is being removed during job processing and it slows down the accessing process to CPU and HDD. If the execution of this process is delayed so that the process is performed after the job is completed, the job processing capability can be improved. Setting range 0: Remove data during job processing. 1: Remove data after a job is completed. Standard value 0 JA-FORMT Image format during job archive recording This selects the image format during job archive recording. More specifically, it selects whether the images handled as PacketJPEG are to be recorded as PacketJPEG or converted into RasterJPEG and recorded. MEMO: This item can be set only from a MEAP application which supports job archives. Its setting cannot be changed from the service mode. It can only be referenced. It is used when checking the unit settings. Settings 0: PacketJPEG for a unit that supports PacketJPEG 1: RasterJPEG [Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 0] SNMP-COA SNMP access restriction switch for internal community name (administrative privilege) Restrict the SNMP access regarding the internally obtained community name (administrative privilege). Setting range 0: OFF 1: ON (Read only) 2: ON (Read/Write available) [default] Usually the SNMP community name can be set using the following item; [Additional Functions]>[System Settings]>[Network Settings]>[SNMP Settings]. There is an internal community name (administrative privilege) in addition to the community name that is set in the above item, and it is used at the time of access using the Canon utility software such as NetSpot. In the case that the SNMP access using an internal community name needs to be restricted in view of security, set this item to 0 or 1. 2 Contents Level
SNMP-COU
SNMP access restriction switch for internal community name (user privilege) Restrict the SNMP access regarding the internally obtained community name (user privilege). Setting range 0: OFF 1: ON (Read only) 2: ON (Read/Write available) [default] Usually the SNMP community name can be set using the following item; [Additional Functions]>[System Settings]>[Network Settings]>[SNMP Settings]. There is an internal community name (user privilege) in addition to the community name that is set in the above item, and it is used at the time of access using the Canon utility software such as NetSpot. In the case that the SNMP access using an internal community name needs to be restricted in view of security, set this item to 0 or 1.
3. CST
17-148
Chapter 17
T-17-158 COPIER>OPTION>CST Subheading P-SZ-C1 Use it to select and register paper size for the cassette 1. Settings 0: A4 1: B5 2: LTR at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 P-SZ-C2 Use it to select and register paper size for the cassette 2. Settings 0: A4 1: B5 2: LTR at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 U1-NAME to U4NAME Use it to enable/disable the indication of the paper name identified with a paper size group (U1 through U4). Contents Level
Settings 0: indication on touch panel as U1, U2, U3, U4. 1: indicate name of paper set in service mode (CST-U1, U2, U3, U4) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CST-U1/U2/U3/U4 Use it to select the names of paper sizes to be used in paper size groups. By registering a special size for U1, U2, U3, or U4, you can cause the machine to treat the paper in question as special size paper.
24: Foolscap (CST-U2; default) 25: Australian Foolscap 26: Officio 27: Ecuadorian Officio 28: Bolivian Officio 29: Argentine Letter (U4; default) 30: Argentine Letter-R 31: Government Letter (U1: default) 32: Government Letter-R 34: Government Legal (U3: default) 35: Folio 36: Argentine Officio 37: Mexico Officio 38: Executive
4. ACC
T-17-159 COPIER>OPTION>ACC Subheading COIN Use it set up the coin vendor mechanism. Use it to permit/not permit access to coin vendor mode. Settings 0: coin vendor not used (control card permitted; no charging) 1: coin vendor (charging used) 2: remote counter (charging used) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DK-P Use it to set the size of paper used in the paper deck (optional). Settings 0: A4 1: not supported 2: LTR at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CARD-SW Use it to set the UI screen when switching the coin vendor mechanism. Settings 0: coin 1: card 2: coin and card at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 MIN-PRC Coin manager minimum value setting This determines the minimum value handled by the coin manager which is connected. For instance, the service technician inputs "10" if the minimum value supported by the Japanese yen coin manager is 10 yen. This item takes effect only when 4 is set for ACC>COIN. Additional note When a number from 1 to 4 (Euros, pounds, Swiss francs, dollars) is set for COPIER>OPTION>ACC>UNIT-PRC, a fractional monetary unit can be input. For instance, an input of "50" signifies 50 cents ($0.50). Setting range: 0 to 9999 [Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 10] 1 1 1 Contents Level
17-149
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>ACC Subheading MAX-PRC Coin manager maximum value setting This determines the maximum value handled by the coin manager which is connected. An error screen is displayed if a value lower than the smallest unit is input when inputting the charge amount using initial settings/registration. For instance, the service technician inputs "8900" if the maximum value supported by the Japanese yen coin manager is 8900 yen. This item takes effect only when 4 is set for ACC>COIN. Additional note When a number from 1 to 4 (Euros, pounds, Swiss francs, dollars) is set for COPIER>OPTION>ACC>UNIT-PRC, a fractional monetary unit can be input. For instance, an input of "50" signifies 50 cents ($0.50). Setting range: 0 to 9999 [Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 0] MIC-TUN Manual tuning of microphone used for voice recognition This allows the audio intake level sensitivity to be adjusted manually for the input device connected by the user. This item is operated and the adjustment made if the sensitivity of the microphone is not increased enough with automatic tuning. Reference: See below for automatic tuning. Initial settings/registration > system control > voice control settings > microphone tuning Setting range: 0 to 255 [Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 128] STPL-LMT Use it to put a limit to the number of sheets for saddle binding. Settings 0: 5 sheets (w/o white band) 1: 10 sheets (w/o white band) 2: 10 sheets (w/ white band) 3: 15 sheets (w/ white band) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 3 SC-TYPE Use it to change the type of machine (self copy/coin vendor machine). This mode is effective only when the machine soft ID is "Lawson." Use it to switch between a Lawson model and a self copy model. Settings 0: Lawson model 1: general self copy model at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CC-SPSW Use it to set the control card (CC IV/CCV) I/F support level. Settings 0: do not support 1: support (priority on speed) 2: support (priority on upper limit) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 - if set to '1' , priority on the maintenance of the engine performance; as such, the upper limit may not be properly imposed. - if set to '2' , on the other hand, the upper limit may properly be imposed, but the engine performance may decrease depending on the source of paper. 2 Contents Level
5. INT-FACE
T-17-160 COPIER>OPTION>INT-FACE Subheading IMG-CONT Use it to set up EFI controller connection. Settings 0: normal operation 1: not used 2: not used 3: EFI controller 4: not used 5: not used Contents Level
If '1' is selected, the following user mode items will be reset to their default settings: - system control setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>IP address - system management setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>sub net mask - system management setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>gateway address - system management setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>Ethernet driver setup/commutation method - system management setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>Ethernet driver setup>Ethernet type - system management setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>start-up time Moreover, the settings of the following user mode items will be OFF: - system management setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>DHCP use - system management setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>RARP use - system management setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IP address setup>BOOTP use - system management setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>Ethernet driver setup>auto detection - system management setup>network setup>spool function use If the setting is '3' or 4', the following items will be OFF in addition to the foregoing: - system management setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>RW setup - system management setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>LPD setup - system management setup>network setup>TCP/IP setup>IPP print - system management setup>network setup>SMB setup The foregoing items will not be reset when set to '0: normal mode'; be sure to re-set them as necessary.
17-150
Chapter 17
T-17-161 COPIER>OPTION>INT-FACE Subheading AP-OPT Contents Use it to permit or not permit printing from PrintMe (application installed to the PS print server unit). Settings 0: enable if for specific account 1: enable for all accounts 2: reject printing (print only from specific group ID) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 AP-ACCNT Use it to set group ID for print jobs (CPCA) from PrintMe (application installed on PS print server unit). Settings 0 to 9999999 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) AP-CODE Use it to set a pass code for print jobs (CPCA) for PrintMe (application installed on PS print sever unit). Code settings 0 to 9999999 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) NWCT-TM Use it to set time for timeout to maintain network connection. (KeepAlive) Sets how long the network can be connected between the application in the PC and the iR main unit. (KeepAlive) Setting range 1 to 5 (Unit: minutes) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 5] Reference After the time specified here elapses, the network is disconnected. When the network cannot be connected due to some reason, this can reduce downtime of the main unit. 2 2 2 Level
6. LCNS-TR
T-17-162 COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR Subheading ST-SEND Setting value 0: SEND function not available (not installed) 1: SEND function available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-SEND Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the SEND function when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the SEND function in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-ENPDF Use it to display the installation status of the SEND encryption PDF transmission function when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: SEND encryption PDF transmission function not available (not installed) 1: SEND encryption PDF transmission function available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-ENPDF Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the SEND encryption PDF transmission function when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the SEND encryption PDF transmission function in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-SPDF Use it to select whether to display the installation status of the SEND searchable PDF transmission function when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: SEND searchable PDF transmission function not available (not installed) 1: SEND searchable PDF transmission function available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-SPDF Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the SEND searchable PDF transmission function when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the SEND searchable PDF transmission function in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-EXPDF Use it to display the installation status of the PDF expansion kit (encryption PDF + searchable PDF) when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: PDF expansion kit not available (not installed) 1: PDF expansion kit available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-EXPDF Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the PDF expansion kit (encryption PDF + searchable PDF) when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the PDF expansion kit (encryption PDF + searchable PDF) in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits 2 2 2 2 Contents Use it to select whether to display the installation status of the SEND function when the transfer function is set invalid. 2 Level
17-151
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR Subheading ST-LIPS Setting value 0: LIPS not available (not installed) 1: LIPS available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-LIPS Use it to obtain the LIPS transfer license key when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use LIPS in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-PDFDR Use it to display the installation status of the PDF Direct when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: PDF Direct not available (not installed) 1: PDF Direct available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-PDFDR Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the PDF Direct when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the PDF Direct in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-SCR Use it to display the installation status of the encryption secure print when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Encryption secure print not available (not installed) 1: Encryption secure print available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-SCR Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the encryption secure print when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the encryption secure print in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-HDCLR Use it to display the installation status of the HDD encryption / HDD complete deletion when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: HDD encryption / HDD complete deletion not available (not installed) 1: HDD encryption / HDD complete deletion available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-HDCLR Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the HDD encryption / HDD complete deletion when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the HDD encryption / HDD complete deletion in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-BRDIM Use it to display the installation status of BarDIMM when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: BarDIMM not available (not installed) 1: BarDIMM available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-BRDIM Use it to obtain the transfer license key for BarDIMM when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use BarDIMM in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-VNC Use it to display the VNC installation status when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: VNC not available (not installed) 1: VNC available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-VNC Use it to obtain the transfer license key for VNC when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use VNC in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-WEB Use it to display the installation status of the WEB browser when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: WEB browser not available (not installed) 1: WEB browser available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-WEB Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the WEB browser when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the WEB browser in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-HRPDF Use it to display the installation status of the high-compression PDF when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: High-compression PDF not available (not installed) 1: High-compression PDF available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-HRPDF Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the high-compression PDF when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the high-compression PDF in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Contents Use it to display the LIPS installation status when the transfer function is set invalid. 2 Level
17-152
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR Subheading ST-PS-K Setting value 0: PS Kanji Kit not available (not installed) 1: PS Kanji Kit available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-PS-K Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the PS Kanji Kit when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the PS Kanji Kit in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-TRSND Display the installation status of the trial SEND function in transfer invalidation. Setting range 0: Do not provide the trial SEND function. (not installed) 1: Provide the trial SEND function. (installed) Standard value 0 TR-TRSND Obtain a transfer license key of the trial SEND function in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use the trial SEND function by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-WTMRK Display the installation status of the main unit tint block function in transfer invalidation. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 TR-WTMRK Obtain a transfer license key of the main unit tint block function in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use the main unit tint block function by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-TSPDF Display the installation status of the PDF transmission function with a time stamp in transfer invalidation. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 Remarks This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available. TR-TSPDF Obtain a transfer license key of the PDF transmission function with a time stamp in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use the PDF transmission function with a time stamp by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits Remarks This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available. ST-USPDF Display the installation status of the PDF transmission function with a user signature in transfer invalidation. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 Remarks This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available. TR-USPDF Obtain a transfer license key of the PDF transmission function with a user signature in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use the PDF transmission function with a user signature by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits Remarks This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available. ST-DVPDF Display the installation status of the PDF transmission function with a device signature in transfer invalidation. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 Remarks This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available. TR-DVPDF Obtain a transfer license key of the PDF transmission function with a device signature in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use the PDF transmission function with a device signature by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits Remarks This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Contents Use it to display the installation status of the PS Kanji Kit when the transfer function is set invalid. 2 Level
17-153
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR Subheading ST-SCPDF Contents Display the installation status of the scalable PDF transmission function in transfer invalidation. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 Remarks This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available. TR-SCPDF Obtain a transfer license key of the scalable PDF transmission function in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use the scalable PDF transmission function by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits Remarks This mode is valid only when the SEND function is available. ST-AMS Display the installation status of ACQ in transfer invalidation. Display the installation status of AMS (Access Management System). Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 TR-AMS Obtain a transfer license key of ACQ in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use AMS (Access Management System) by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-ERDS Display the installation status of the third party expansion function for ERDS in transfer invalidation. Display the installation status of the third party expansion function (the function which sends a charging counter to a third party's charging server) for ERDS. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 TR-ERDS Obtain a transfer license key of the third party expansion function for ERDS in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use the third party expansion function (the function which sends a charging counter to a third party's charging server) by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-PS Display the installation status of PS in transfer invalidation. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 TR-PS Obtain a transfer license key of PS in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use PS by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-PCL Display the installation status of PCL in transfer invalidation. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 TR-PCL Obtain a transfer license key of PCL in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use PCL by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-PSLI5 Display the installation status of PS, LIPS4, and LIPS LX in transfer invalidation. Display the installation status of the combined options of PS, LIPS4, and LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas). Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 TR-PSLI5 Obtain a transfer license key of PS, LIPS4, and LIPS LX in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use the combined options of PS, LIPS4, and LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-LIPS5 Display the installation status of LIPS LX and LIPS4 in transfer invalidation. Display the installation status of the combined options of LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) and LIPS4. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Level
17-154
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR Subheading TR-LIPS5 Contents Obtain a transfer license key of LIPS LX and LIPS4 in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use the combined options of LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) and LIPS4 by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-LIPS4 Display the installation status of LIPS4 in transfer invalidation. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 TR-LIPS4 Obtain a transfer license key of LIPS4 in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use LIPS4 by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-PSPCL Display the installation status of PS and PCL in transfer invalidation. Display the combined options of PS and PCL. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 TR-PSPCL Obtain a transfer license key of PS and PCL in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use the combined options of PS and PCL by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-PCLUF Display the installation status of PCL and UFR in transfer invalidation. Display the combined options of PCL and UFR. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 TR-PCLUF Obtain a transfer license key of PCL and UFR in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use the combined options of PCL and UFR by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-PSLIP Display the installation status of PS and LIPS in transfer invalidation. Display the combined options of PS and LIPS. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 TR-PSLIP Obtain a transfer license key of PS and LIPS in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use the combined options of PS and LIPS by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-PSPCU Display the installation status of PS, PCL, and UFR in transfer invalidation. Display the combined options of PS, PCL, and UFR. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 TR-PSPCU Obtain a transfer license key of PS, PCL, and UFR in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use the combined options of PS, PCL, and UFR by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-LXUFR Display the installation status of LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) in transfer invalidation. Setting range 0: Unavailable (not installed) 1: Available (installed) Standard value 0 TR-LXUFR Obtain a transfer license key of LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) in transfer invalidation. Obtain a transfer license key to use LIPS LX (UFR II for overseas) by other MFP machine. Standard value Transfer license key: 24 digits ST-HDCR2 Display of installation status of all hard disk data erasure subsequent to disabling transmission This displays the installation status of all hard disk data erasure. Settings 0: OFF (not installed) 1: ON (installed) [Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 0] TR-HDCR2 Acquisition of all hard disk data erasure transmission license key subsequent to disabling transmission This acquires the transmission license key in order for all hard disk data erasure to be used by another MFP. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Level
17-155
Chapter 17

0004-9741
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1. BODY

T-17-163 COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading PO-CNT MODEL-SZ for factory adjustment Use it to set the default magnification indication and ADF size detection. Settings 0: AB (6R5E) 1: INCH (5R4E) 2: A (3R3E) 3: AB/INCH (6R5E) at time of shipment/upon RAM replacement: 0 FIX-TEMP Use it to change the plain paper down sequence. settings range 0: default 1: priority on fixing 2: priority on productivity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PASCAL Use it to enable/disable the use of contrast potential obtained from auto gradation correction (full) and the use of gradation correction data. settings range 0: do not use 1: use 2: reserved (same as 1) 3: reserved (same as 0) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 CONFIG Use it to select multiple pieces of firmware stored on the hard disk to change the country, language, model, and paper size configuration. Method of Adjustment 1) Select the item to change, and press the +/- key. 2) See that each press on the +/- key changes the particulars. 3) When all particulars are indicated for all items, press the OK key. 4) Turn off and then on the main power switch. 1 1 Contents Level 1
XXYYZZAA xx: country (e.g., JP for Japan) YY: language (e.g., ja for Japanese) ZZ: model (e.g., 00 for Canon) AA: paper size configuration (e.g., 00 for AB) TEMP-TBL Use it to adjust the control temperature of the fixing assembly. When this mode is activated, there will be an increase of 5 deg C in the following: standby temperature (both types); copying temperature; post-standby rotation temperature; extra-length sheet-to-sheet control temperature there will not be an increase of 5 deg C in the following: post-job rotation temperature; power save mode temperature; error detection temperature Adjustments are made to the normally used temperature control table. A change will be made to the fixing temperature control table in the event of low-temperature offset or paper blister caused by the characteristics of paper being used. In the case of low-temperature offset, select +5 deg C; in the case of a paper blister, on the other hand, select -5 deg C. The setting will not be valid unit the main power switch has been turned off and then on again.
Settings 0: OFF 1: +5 deg C 2: -5 deg C at time of shipment/upon RAM replacement: 0 W/SCNR Use it to specify the presence/absence of a reader unit (as for the copier model). Settings 0: printer model 1: model with reader unit at time of shipment: 1 upon RAM initialization: 0 RUI-DSP Use it to set the copier function optional settings for the RUI screen. Settings 0: do not display copy screen for RUI 1: display copy screen for RUI at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1 1
17-156
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading NW-SPEED Contents Use it to select a data transfer speed for connection to a service network. Level
Settings 0: Auto 1: 100Base-TX 2: 10Base-T at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
ADJ-LVL
Use it to select an operation mode for patch detection. Of the automatic adjusting sequences used, decreasing/increasing the frequency of potential control/primary transfer ATVC will lead to decrease/increase productivity. Method of Adjustment A higher setting will increase the adjustment intervals and, thus, increase the productivity; it, however, will also increase color fluctuation. Settings 0 to 4 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
INTROT-1
intervals of executing ATVC during initial multiple rotation (number of prints) Increase the setting if soiling in the form of dots occurs in keeping with drum rotation (i.e., by increasing the intervals of ATVC control). Decrease the setting if transfer faults occurs (i.e., by decreasing the intervals of ATVC control). 1 Settings 0 to 240 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 90
INTROT-2
Use it to set intervals (in terms of the number of sheets) for process auto adjustment (full, at time of initial/last rotation) performed at specific intervals. 1 range of settings: 50 to 1000 (in terms of A4) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 200
DEVL-PTH
Setting threshold level (number of sheets) that the toner discharge sequence starts to operate. Settings 0: Does not operate 1: Approx. 100 sheets 2: Approx. 200 sheets [Factory default/After RAM is cleared] 3: Approx. 500 sheets Reference Threshold level of density can be set from the following service mode. COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DEVL-VTH Use this mode when symptom such as coarse image occurs while copying/printing low-density Duty image continuously.
AUTO-DH
Use it to enable/disable auto gradation correction for standby. The auto gradation correction mechanism is started in response to changes in the environment or when the machine is left alone in standby for a specific period of time. The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on. 1 Settings 0: prohibit 1: permit (default) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1
DFDST-L1
A higher setting will increase the level of dust detection (i.e., the machine will be more sensitive in detecting dust, which if left behind will cause thin lines in the images). settings range 0 to 255 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 200 1
DFDST-L2
ENVP-INT
Use it to set the intervals at which logs are collected of machine internal temperature and fixing temperature, i.e., in relation to COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ENV-PRINT and COPIER>DISPLAY>ENVRNT. 1 settings range 0 to 480 (min) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 60
17-157
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading T1-TEMP Contents Use it to switch over the heavy paper 1 down sequence tables. settings 0: default 1: priority on fixing 2: priority on productivity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 T2-TEMP Use it to switch over the heavy paper 2 down sequence tables. settings 0: default 1: priority on fixing 2: priority on productivity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 BLNK-THP Use it to switch over leading edge margins for heavy paper 1/2 (color only; remedy against horizontal lines along leading edge). settings 0: default margin 1: 7 mm (leading edge margin median value) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CD-IDL-T Use it to adjust the duration of idle rotation for IDL-T (color developing assembly YMC; otherwise executed first in the morning in a high humidity environment). - a setting toward '-' will reduce the downtime associated with initial multiple rotation, but will not compensate fully for changes in density. - a setting toward '+' will fully compensate for changes in density, but will increase downtime associated with initial multiple rotation. 1 Level
settings range -3 to +6 (unit: 5 sec) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization; 0 OHP-SPED Use it to switch over the cpm for value BK OHT (remedy against adhesion upon delivery). settings 0: 40 cpm if w/ finisher; 20 cpm if w/o finisher 1: 20 cpm 2: 10 cpm at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 FX-CROT Use it to change the intervals at which the fixing roller is rotated idly (remedy against deformation of the roller). The fixing roller is rotated idly for 1 sec once every 30 min (default) to prevent it from suffering deformation while the machine remains in standby.
settings range 0: 30 min 1: 20 min 2: 10 min 3: 5 min at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 LPW-TIME Use it to set time for automatic switching to the low-power mode in the 24-hour power distribution mode. Sets time to perform automatic switching and recovery of low-power mode in the 24-hour power distribution mode and execute an adjustment in the printer engine. Setting range 00:00 to 23:59 (24 hours, Unit: minute) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 03:00] Reference: - For the machines operating in the 24-hour power distribution mode (the operation is not switched to the power saving mode such as power save, low electricity, or sleep.) at a convenience store, etc., the machine does not perform the adjustment that is made only when recovering from the power saving mode in the printer engine. Use <LPW-TIME> to cover such a case. - You can judge whether the machine operates in the 24-hour power distribution mode or not by checking that "COPIER/ OPTION/ACC/COIN" is set to "1" (self-copy). When other numbers than "1" is set, this function does not work. - When the machine automatically switches the operation to the low electricity mode, the control panel screen is turned off for a moment, which is a feature included in the specifications. BASE-SW Use it to switch the operation to the base model from the full MEAP model. Sets the device operation back to the base model after it was switched to the full model. Setting value 0: OFF (base model) 1: ON (full model)
17-158
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading DRM-DISP Contents Use it to enable/disable the message for drum phase shifting. If the photopositive drum is used with its home position unchanged in relation to the drum shaft, uneven density at drum intervals or lines can occur in output images. To limit the symptom, the phase of the photosensitive drum is shifted by 90 deg every specific number of prints. The machine does not shift the phase on its own, and requires the work of the service person. When needed, the machine issues a message to prompt the work on the User screen and the Service Mode screen. Use this mode item to enable/disable the message. Settings 0: disable message 1: indicate only in service mode (default) 2: indicate on both User and Service Mode screens The message will go off automatically when the following is executed: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DR-P-ADJ. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 - To change the number of prints after which the message is indicated for COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DRM-DISP, change the denominator in COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>DRM-PHAS. SC-L-CNT Use it to select the threshold value for the paper size (large/small) at the scanning counter. Selects whether to count B4-size paper as a large size or small size. 1 Level
Setting value 0: Count B4-size paper as a small size 1: Count B4-size paper as a large size [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference When "1" is set to count B4-size paper as a large size, LTR-size paper is counted as a small size. REPORT-Z Use it to switch the attribution flag to be added when printing a report. Setting value 0: PDL character mode 1: PDL photo mode 2: SCAN character mode 3: SCAN photo mode [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] IFXEML-Z Use it to switch the attribution flag to be added when printing an image received by ColoriFAX,E_mail. settings 0: SCAN photo mode 1: PDL photo mode 2: SCAN text mode 3: PDL text mode [at time of shipment/RAM initialization: 0] BMLNKS-Z Use it to switch the attribution flag to be added when printing an image received by BMLinkS. Setting value 0: SCAN photo mode 1: PDL photo mode 2: SCAN character mode 3: PDL character mode [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference 0: SCAN photo mode The black character consists of 4 black colors. Errors are diffused. The color tint is brighter than 2. 1: PDL photo mode The black character consists of 4 black colors. Screening is executed to the image. 2: SCAN character mode The black character consists of a single black color. The color tint in the photo is different from the color printed in 0. (It may be difficult for amateurs to recognize the difference.) Errors are diffused. 3: PDL character mode The black character consists of a single black color. Screening is executed to the image. LDAP-ADD Use it to select the condition for LDAP search to be added. Decides whether to add "ObjectClass" and "SrchNameRow" in the pull-down list of the current searching condition (name, organization, organization unit, fax, email).
1 Only destinations for fax and email can be searched. Setting value 0: Do not add the searching condition. 1: Add the searching condition. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0]
17-159
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading W-CLN-P Contents Use it to set the intervals at which the primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire is automatically cleaned in a normal environment in terms of the number of copies. The new setting will not be valid until the main power switch has been turned off and then back on. 2 Range of settings 100p to 2000 at time of shipment/RAM initialization: 2000 PRI-FAN Use it to select a primary fan drive mode. Use it to prevent soiling in the form of dots occurring in keeping with drum rotation. The temperature of the cleaning blade may be decreased so that the machine will better be able to remove the ingredients of the black toner sticking to the drum. 2 Settings 0: in high temperature/humidity environment, half-speed 1: in high temperature/humidity environment, full-speed at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization 0 SCANSLCT Enable/disable the function used to compute the area of scanning based on the selected paper size. settings 0: OFF (area determined based on original detection) 1: ON (area determined based on paper size) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 OHP-TEMP Use it to switch over transparency down-sequence tables. settings 0: default 1: priority on fixing 2: priority on productivity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DH-SW Use it to perform Dhalf. Settings 0: do not perform Dhalf control 1: perform Dhalf control at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 DM-MODE Use it to enable/disable image density correction control as part of auto gradation correction (PASCAL) Settings 0: do not perform 1: perform at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 SENS-CNF Use it to set the original sensor. Settings 0: AB configuration 1: inch configuration at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DM-SW Use it to enable/disable image gradation correction and image density correction after making a specific number of prints. Settings 0: do not perform (default) 1: perform every 200 prints up to initial 2000 2: perform every 200 prints up to initial 4000 3: perform at all times (every 200 prints) 4: reserved To change the intervals (200 prints at default), use COPIER>OPTIONAL>BODY>INTROT2. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 3 RAW-DATA Use it to specify whether or not to print out received data as it is. If the received image has a fault, use this mode to find out whether the fault is in the data or in the image processing. 2 2 2 2 Level
2 Settings 0: normal operation 1: print as is at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-160
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading BK-BND Contents Use it to increase the black belt in 4C mode. Use it to prevent photosensitive drum cleaning faults in an N/L environment. Level
Settings 0: increase by 100% 1: increase by 150% 2: increase by 20% at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
RMT-LANG
Use it to switch the language of the remote UI used through the Web. Method of Adjustment Use the +/- key to select the appropriate language code. Use it to limit the number of output lines for when a large volume of data is received over i-fax.
IFAX-LIM
settings range 0: no limit 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 500 TR-CLN Use it to perform the cleaning sequence designed to avoid soiling on the back of paper caused by the secondary transfer roller. 77-mm back soiling preventive mode
Settings: 0: perform only in H/H environment 1: disable in all environments 2: enable in all environments at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 SMTPTXPN Use it to change the number of the SMTP transmission port. settings range 0 to 65535 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 25 SMTPRXPN Use it to change the number of the SMTP reception port. settings range 0 through 65535 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 25 POP3PN Use it to change the number of the POP reception port. settings range 0 through 65535 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 110 ORG-LGL Use it to set a special paper size not recognized by the DF size detection mechanism. settings 0: LEGAL 1: FOOLSCAP 2: A-FOOLSCAP 3: FORIO 4: G-LEGAL 5: OFFICIO 6: E-OFFICIO 7: A-OFFICIO 8: B-OFFICIO 9: A-LEAGAL 10: M-OFFICIO at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ORG-LTR Use it to set a special paper size not recognized by the DF size detection mechanism. settings 0: LTR 1: G-LTR 2: A-LTR 3: EXECTIVE at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-161
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading ORG-LTRR Contents Use it to set a special paper size not recognized by the DF size detection mechanism. 0: LTR (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) Level
settings 0: LTR-R (default) 1: G-LTR-R 2: A-LTR-R 3: EXECTIVE-R at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ORG-LDR
Use it to set a size that cannot be recognized by DH. Use it when A-LTR is recognized as LDR by mistake.
Setting value 0: LDR 1: A-LTR 2 or larger: LDR [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] ORG-B5 Use it to set a special paper size not recognized by the DF size detection mechanism. 0: B5 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) settings 0: B5 1: K-LEAGAL at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 UI-BOX Use it to enable/disable display of the control panel Box scan. settings 0: do not display 1: display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 UI-SEND Use it to enable/disable display of the control panel Transmission screen. settings 0: do not display 1: display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 UI-FAX Use it to enable/disable display of the control panel Fax screen. settings 0: do not display 1: display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 UI-EXT Use it to enable/disable display of the control pane Extension screen. settings 0: do not display 1: display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 SCR-SLCT Use it to select halftone processing for film/photo mode. Method of Adjustment If moire is found in the output image or the dots make the image appear too coarse while the default (1: use screen with fewer lines) is selected, change the setting as follows: - if moire is noted, change to '0' (use error diffusion); this setting is suited to the reproduction of text. - if the image appears too coarse because of the dots, change to '2' (use screen with more lines).
settings 0: use error diffusion 1: use low-number screen (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 2: use high-number screen at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1
17-162
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading TMC-SLCT Contents Use it to switch over coefficients used for error diffusion processing. If the output image has started to show uneven density or rough texture as more and more prints are made, change the setting for better dot stabilization so that the fault may be less noticeable. Level
2 settings 0: standby 1: decrease sensitivity to grain/low stability 2: increase sensitivity to grain/high stability at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 D-CLN-TM Use it to change the length of drum idle rotation. Use it to prevent soiling in the form of dots occurring in keeping with drum rotation. The machine executes idle rotation when it is turned on to remove residual matter from the drum.
Settings 0: do not execute idle rotation 1: execute idle rotation for 30 sec 2: execute idle rotation for 60 sec at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Settings 3 through 6 are reserved (currently invalid). DEVL-VTH Use it to set a threshold for image density over which the machine will execute discharge sequence (designed as a remedy against rough image texture on copies of low-density images made in continuous printing). If possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal.
2 settings range 1 to 5 (unit: %) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) FTPTXPN Use it to select the port number (FTP) as the target of SEND transmission. settings range 0 to 65535 (16-bit; at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 21) PRN-FLG Selecting an Image Area Flag (for PDL images) In the event that the controller fails to compress a PDL image at a specific rate of compression, image processing will be performed according to the image area flag selected in this mode item. 2
2 settings 0: use high-number screen, gray compensation LUT 1: use error diffusion, gray compensation LUT 2: use high-number screen, normal LUT at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
SCN-FLG
T-LW-LVL
17-163
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading NWERR-SW Contents Use it to enable/disable the indication of a network-related error message. This switch is used to disable error messages related to networking when the model is not connected to a network even though it is equipped with a network board as standard. An NADA machine is equipped with networking functions, and is by default set for use on a network; however, take advantage of the switch where the machine is not connected to a network (as in the case of installation in a Lawson shop). Level
settings 0: do not indicate 1: indicate (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 FX-SPD Use it to adjust the speed of the fixing roller. If the arching of paper between the secondary transfer roller and the fixing roller is too great, the trailing edge of the paper tends to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt, causing traces by friction. A change to the speed of fixing will also change the speed of the delivery vertical path roller (fine-adjustment) accordingly. A higher setting will increase the speed. settings range -3 to 3 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 STS-PORT Enabling/Disabling the TOT Synchronous Command Communication Port Use it to enable or disable the inquiry/response (synchronous) command communication port for TUIF over TCP/IP. 2 Settings 0: OFF 1: ON at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CMD-PORT Enabling/Disabling the TOT Asynchronous Status Communication Port Use it to enable or disable the asynchronous status communication port for TUIF over TCP/IP. 2 Settings 0: OFF 1: ON at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 MODELSZ2 Global Support for Copyboard Original Size Detection (mix of AB/Inch) When the setting is '1' , the machine will support global mode (AB/Inch) regardless of the setting of the swing flag MODELSZ (AB, Inch). 2 Settings 0: normal 1: AB/inch mix detection at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 SZDT-SW Use it to enable/disable the switch-over from CCD size detection to photo size detection for copyboard original size detection.
Settings 0: disable photo size detection 1: enable photo size detection at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 UISW-DSP Indication of the User Screen Switch Use it to enable or disable the indication of the switch used to switch between the Standard Specifications screen and Simple Specifications screen (Lawson type). - type equipped with functions equivalent to those of standard machines - type equipped with limited functions, e.g., those machines installed in Lawson shops. Use it to enable or disable the indication of the switch used by the user (shop administrator) to switch between screens to meet individual needs. (The switch is offered to authorized users only.)
Settings 0: do not display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 1: display at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-164
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading ITB-CLN Contents Use it to execute the ITB black band sequence at time of initial multiple rotation automatic adjustment. Level
Settings: 0: disable 1: force execution once 2 and 3: reserved (input invalid) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-CMD5 Use it when imposing limits to the use of CRAM-MD5 certification for SMTP (NoSasl challenge response authentication mechanism; MD5 message digest algorithm).
Use it to set CRAM-MD5 certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-GSAPI Use it when imposing limits to the use of GSSAPI certification for SMTP (NoSasl generic security service application program interface). Use it to set GSSAPI certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-NTLM Use it when imposing limits to the use of NTML certification for SMTP (NoSasl-windows NTLAN Manager). Use it to set NTLM certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-PLNWS Use it when imposing limits to the use of PLAIN/LOGIN certification (plain language certification for SMTP) where NSPLNWS communication packets are encrypted for SMTP (NoSasl plain with transport layer security).
Use it to set PLAIN.LOGIN certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-PLN Use it when imposing limits to PLAIN/LOGIN certification (plain language certification) where communication packets sure encrypted for SMTP.
Use it to set PLAIN.LOGIN certification for SMTP certification. (environment in which computation packet encryption is not used) 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-LGN Use it when imposing limits to LOGIN certification for SMTP (NoSasl LoGiN).
Use it to set LOGIN certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 T-CRG-SW Use it to permit or not to permit replacement of the toner cartridge by the user when there still is toner in the cartridge.
Settings 0: do not permit replacement by user (When the toner runs out (in the case of black toner, is running low), a button will appear to permit replacement of the toner cartridge: i.e., system status/stop>recovery procedure indication). 1: permit replacement by user (A button will appear to permit replacement; i.e., user mode>adjust/cleaning.) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-165
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading TNR-DWN Contents Use it to set the amount of toner to be deposited. You can decrease the amount of toner, as when stray toner tends to occur in full color mode or when paper tends to wrap around the fixing roller. Level
Settings 0: standard amount (default) 1: decrease for both single-sided and double-sided modes 2: standard for single-sided mode but decrease in double-sided mode for both 1st and 2nd sides (reserved) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 An update has been made to do away with setting 2 as a result of recent findings (i.e., the expected operation does not take place in some PDL or copy jobs; although the setting exists in service mode, it behaves like 0). TMIC-BK Use it to set the correction along the trailing edge for BkLUT and BkLUT for PDL (Tmic).
Settings 0: PDL BK_LUT end correction ON; copy Bk_LUT end correction OFF 1: PDL BK_LUT end correction OFF; copy Bk_LUT end correction OFF 2: PDL BK_LUT end correction ON; copy Bk_LUT end correction ON (default) 3: PDL BK_LUT end correction OFF; copy Bk_LUT end correction ON at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2
SVMD-ENT
DH-MODE
Patch Data (high density side) Used in D-half Except in Full Correction Change the default setting so that the readout collected from D-half at time of full correction will be substituted for the patch on the high density side at time of D-half (other than in full correction).
2 Settings 0: use patch image read data of full correction (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 1: do not use patch image read data of full correction at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 W-CLN-PH Use it to set the intervals at which the primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire is automatically cleaned. If an image fault (e.g., vertical lines) occurs in a high temperature/humidity environment, the intervals at which the primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire is automatically cleaned may be changed. Note: In a normal environment, be sure to use W-CLN-P to set the intervals used to automatically clean the primary charging wire. Range of settings 100 to 1000 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1000 B-SPL-SW Use it to set the environment table for black toner supply. settings range 0: variable 1: fixed at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 B-CNT-SW Use it to set the environment table for black development contrast. settings range 0: variable 1: fixed at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2 2
17-166
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading 1ROT-CR Contents Use it to change the retention current for primary transfer retention current idle rotation. If the user disconnects the power plug at night and thus the drum heater goes off, the temperature of the primary transfer roller is not likely to match that of the drum when the power is turned on the next morning; and the resulting temporary change in the resistance of the primary transfer roller at times prevents proper performance of ATVC. If the level of current set by default is not high enough, use this item to increase it. Level
2 Settings 0: refer to environment sensor 1: 60uA 2: 70uA 3: 80uA 4: 90uA 5: 100uA 6: 110uA 7: 120uA at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1ROT-TIM Use it to change the duration of primary transfer power retention current idle rotation. Settings 0: refer to environment sensor 1: 40sec 2: 60sec 3: 120sec 4: 180sec 5: 300sec 6: 420sec 7: 600sec at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2ROT-TIM Use it to change the secondary transfer power retention idle rotation. Settings 0: refer to environment sensor 1: 40sec 2: 60sec 3: 120sec 4: 180sec 5: 300sec 6: 420sec 7: 600sec at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DEV-K-TM Use it to set the duration of toner discharge executed as part of the ITB black band cleaning sequence. Use it to set the duration of toner discharge executed as part of the ITB black band cleaning sequence. Settings 1: 10 2: 20 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 CDEV-IDL Use it to enable/disable power-on idle rotation of the color developing assembly (YMC). Use it to adjust the intervals of patch ATR for the No. 1 limit. A higher limit will increase the execution intervals, but will affect the density. On the other hand, although a lower limit will decrease the intervals, the density will be more stable. - the number of prints (CNT) reset upon execution of patch detection - cumulative video count CNT) Timing - perform patch detection during last rotation of the ongoing job when the No. 1 limit (20 prints) is exceeded. - force patch detection by interrupting the job as soon as the No. 2 limit is exceeded. - force patch execution as soon as the cumulative VC exceeds 300% (in terms of A4). 1 print = 3 images (YMC only); for image count, 1 for small and 2 for large) 2
17-167
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading PCHINT-1 Contents Use it to change the intervals of 1-patch detection (No. 1 limit) in terms of the number of prints. Use it to change the intervals of patch ATR for the No. 1 limit. A higher limit will increase the downtime intervals, but will affect the density. On the other hand, although a lower limit may decrease the downtime intervals, the density will be more stable. The following triggers are used to initiate patch detection: - when the 1st limit (20 prints) is exceeded, execute patch detection during the last rotation of the ongoing job. - when the 2nd limit is exceed, stop the ongoing job and force patch detection. (1 print = 3 images (YMC only); for image count, 1 for small and 2 for large) The above No. 1 limit may be changes. A higher limit will increase downtime intervals, but will affect density. On the other hand, although a lower limit will decrease downtime intervals, the density will be more stable. By default, the No. 1 limit is 20 prints (60 images), variable between -10 and + 10 (offset). 2 Level
Use it to change the intervals of 1-patch detection (No. 1 limit) in terms of the number of prints. settings range: -10 to +10 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PCHINT-2 Use it to adjust the intervals of patch detection (No. 2 limit). Use it to change the patch ATR intervals for the No. 2 limit. For the triggers used to initiate patch detection, see the list for PCHINT-1. 2 Settings range: -10 to +10 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PCHINT-V Use it to adjust the intervals of patch detection (video counter cumulative count). Use it to adjust the intervals of patch ATR in relation to the video counter cumulative count. 2 Settings range: -10 to +10 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 POT-OFTM Use it to adjust the length of time for the detection of a disconnected connector or to adjust the potential sensor offset. By default, the machine executes idle rotation of the fixing roller for 1 seconce every 30 min to prevent deformation of the roller while in standby. 2
Settings range: 5 to 50 (unit: sec) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 5 FXWRNLVL Use it to set the fixing upper roller alert level. Use it to change the alert level in relation to the fixing counter reading. If you have replaced the fixing roller or the fixing unit with a modified type (with a longer life), use this mode to set the level to suit the new type: i.e., change the setting of the following service mode item to '1' or '2': COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FXRWNLVL. Then, decrease the following setting slightly: COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FX-UP-RL. Make copies to see that the appropriate alert is issued when the counter reaches a specific setting. 2
Settings range 0: 180,000 1: 150,000 2: 120,000 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 FXERRLVL Use it to change the fixing roller error level setting. Use it to change the error level of the fixing counter count. If you have replaced the fixing roller or the fixing unit with a modified type (with a longer life), change the setting to suit the new type. The threshold of the fixing error level will be in relation to the setting made using the following service mode (offset by the level you set here): COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FXWRNLVL. 2 Settings 0: +20,000 1: +40,000 2: +60,000 3: no error (alert retained) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-168
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading PCHINTV2 Contents Use it to change the intervals of post rotation patch detection (video counter count). Use it to change the intervals of patch ATR in relation to the cumulative video count. When a specific video count is exceeded, ATR patch detection is executed during last rotation at the end of the ongoing job, and the limit of the cumulative video count may be changed. A higher limit will increase the downtime intervals, but will affect the density. On the other hand, although a lower limit will decease the downtime intervals, the density will be more stable. 2 Level
Settings range: -10 to +10 (level: 10% duty/A4) default: 200% duty (A4, 5% duty x 40 prints) at time of shipment/RAM initialization: 0 DLV-SPSW Use it to change the delivery speed. Settings 0: delivery speed with priority on FCOT (about.635 mm/sec) 1: delivery speed with priority on paper edge damage avoidance (about.276 mm/sec) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DA-CNCT Use it to select whether to use DA. Selects whether to use DA (software). Setting value 0: Do not use DA. 1: Use DA. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2 - "1 (DA disabled)" should be set to use DA. When DA (hardware) is installed in the main unit but "1" is not set, it cannot be used. - When "1" is set to COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DA-CNCT, "ON" is set to the following items. COPIER>OPTION>BODY>STS-PORT >CMD-PORT >SSH-SW >DA-PORT FXMSG-SW Use it to enable/disable the message that prompts replacement of the fixing assembly. Use it to enable/disable the message on the control panel indication the need for the replacement of the fixing assembly. Normally, the setting is enabled; however, you can disable the message if there is no need for replacement (so that the user will not feel unnecessarily concerned and place a service call). If replacement is necessary, be sure to replace it and enable the setting. Settings 0: do not indicate 1: indicate a time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 G-LUT-SW Use it to change the gamma LUT auto correction function. Use it to adjust the control on image formation in relation to the state (on/off) of the gamma LUT auto correction function. 2
Settings range 0: off (do not apply gamma LUT auto correction) 1: copy T-mic (apply gamma LUT auto correction) 2: copy PDL T-mic (apply gamma LUT auto correction) 3: all (apply gamma a LUT auto correction) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization; 1 G-LUT-MX Use it to change the gamma LUT auto correction function (maximum correction slope). Use it to set the maximum correction slope used to determine the final correction point for gamma LUT auto correction function.
Settings 0: 2.4 1: 2.2 2: 2.0 3: 1.8 4: 1.6 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2
17-169
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading G-LUT-SZ Contents Use it to set the gamma LUT auto correction function (smoothing intervals). Use it to set the intervals of smoothing executed as part of the gamma LUT auto correction function. Level
Settings 0: 30 1: 35 2: 40 3: 45 4: 50 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 TR-BKBND Use it to set the black band used to prevent bending/slipping of the transfer cleaning blade. The machine is designed to deposit a black band to prevent bending/shipping of the transfer charging cleaning blade before cleaning the photosensitive drum immediately after patch detection or before application of the secondary transfer reverse bias.
2 Settings 0: off (default) 1: on only if H/H 2: on at all times at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1TR-ATVC Use it to enable/disable the primary transfer ATVC retry function for initial multiple rotation. Use it to enable/disable the primary transfer ATVC retry function for initial multiple rotation to suit the site of installation.
Settings 0: off at all times (spare) 1: on only if H/H (default) 2: on normally at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 FXLW-TMP Use it to change the control temperature for the pressure roller. Settings 0: 170 deg C(default) 1: 160 deg C 2: 150 deg C at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 GLUTLV-Y/M/K for study by design dpt
GLUTLV-C
Use it to adjust the slope as part of the gamma LUT auto correction mechanism of the controller when improvement is needed to correct coarseness of images read of a cyan solid original.
Settings 0: 2.4 1: 2.0 2: 1.6 3: 1.2 4: 0 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 GLUTMX-Y/M/C/K Use it to adjust the maximum correction slope as part of the gamma LUT auto correction mechanism of the controller when improvement is needed to correct coarseness of images read of a cyan solid original.
Settings 0: 2.4 1: 2.2 2: 2.0 3: 1.8 4: 1.6 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2 GLUTOF-Y/M/C/K for study by design dpt
HDD-TMP
Use it to set a level of temperature to serve as a reference for detecting a low temperature error. Settings 0 to 30 deg C at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2 2
17-170
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading HDD-TIM Contents Use it to set the time interval allowed before a low temperature error is identified Settings 0 to 200 min at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 10 Level
HDD-SW
BG-CTR
Controlling correction of coarse image on solid area Controlling image formation to be corrected as well as ON/OFF of the function to correct coarse image on solid area
Settings 0: OFF (Coarse image on solid area is not corrected.) [Factory default/After RAM is cleared] 1: Copy T-mic (Coarse image on solid are is corrected.) 2: Copy PDL T-mic (Coarse image on solid are is corrected.) 3: ON (Coarse image on solid are is corrected on the whole.)
BG-SET
CKT-LANG
Switching Step1/Step2 of CL1 series (destined for China, Korea, Taiwan)
Settings 0: Step1 1: Step2 Reference Step 1: English descriptions partially remain. Step 2: Descriptions are entirely destined for China/Korea/Taiwan. Since the existing CL1 series are all Step1, use this mode to switch the setting to Step 2.
2. USER
T-17-164 COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading COPY-LIM Use it to change the upper limit on the copy count. Settings range 1 to 9999 (prints) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 9999 SLEEP Use it to enable/disable the sleep function. Settings 0: OFF 1: ON at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 Use 'timer setup' of user mode to set the sleep function. COUNTER 1 Use it to set soft counter 1 appearing on the User Mode screen. 101: total 1 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 (fixed and cannot be changed) COUNTER 2 Use it to have the counter type of soft counter 2 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 108 1 1 Contents Level
17-171
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading COUNTER 3 Contents Use it to change the counter type of soft counter 3 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 232 COUNTER 4 Use it to change the counter type of soft counter 4 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars my be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 324 COUNTER 5 Use it to change the counter type of soft counter 5 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 COUNTER 6 Use it to change the counter type of soft counter 6 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Level
Software Counter Specifications 000s: remote copy 100s: total 200s: copy 300s: print 400s: copy + print 500s: scan 600s: box 700s: reception print 800s: report print Guide to the Table yes: counter valid on the machine 4C: full color mono: mono color (YMC/RGB; ageing effect mono) Bk: black mono L: large-size (larger than B4) S: small-size (B4 and smaller) counter particular 1, 2: indicates the count of large-size sheets; B4 may be counted as large-size if so set in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>USER>BR_L_CONT). copy: local copy + remote copy copy A: local copy + remote copy + box print print: PDL print + report print + box print print A: PDL port + report print scan: black-and-white scan + color scan
T-17-165 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 000 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 no indication remote copy (full color 1) remote copy (full color o2) remote copy (mono color 1) remote copy (mono color 2) remote copy (black-and-white 1) remote copy (black-and-white 2) remote copy (full color; large) remote copy (full color; small) remote copy (mono color; large) remote copy (mono color; small) remote copy (black-and-white; large) remote copy (black-and-white; small) remote copy (full color + mono color; large) remote copy (full color + mono color; small) remote copy (full color + mono color 2) Counter particulars
17-172
Chapter 17
Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 remote copy (full color + mono color 1) remote copy (full color; large; double-sided) remote copy (full color; small; double sided) remote copy (mono color; large; double-sided remote copy (mono color; small; double-sided) remote copy (black-and-white; large; double-sided) remote copy (black-and-white; small; doubles-sided) T-17-166 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 101 102 103 104 105 106 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 total 1 total 2 total (large) total (small) total (full color 1) total (full color 2) total (black-and-white 1) total (black-and-white 2) total (mono color; lag) total (mono color; small) total (black-and-white; large) total (black-and-white; small) total 1 (double-sided) total 2 (double-sided) large-size (double-sided) Small-size (double-sided) total (mono color 1) total (mono color 2) total (full color; large) total (full color; small) total (full color + mono color; large) total (full color + mono color; small) total (full color + mono color 2) total (full color + mono color 1) Counter particulars Counter particulars
T-17-167 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Sport 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 copy (total 1) copy (total 2) copy (large) copy (small) copy A (total 1) copy A (total 2) copy A large) copy A (small) local copy (total 1) local copy (total 2) local copy (large) local copy (small) remote copy (total 1) remote copy (total 2) remote copy (large) remove copy (small) copy (full color 1) copy (full color 2) copy (mono color 1) copy (mono color 2) copy (black-and-white 1) copy (black-and-white 2) copy (full color; large) copy (full color; small) copy (mono color; large) copy (mono color; small) copy (black-and-white; large) Counter particulars
17-173
Chapter 17
Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Sport 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 copy (black-and-white; small) copy (full color + mono color; large) copy (full color + mono color; small) copy (full color + mono color; 2) copy (full color mono color; 1) copy (full color; large; double-sided) copy (full color; small; double-sided) copy (mono color; large; double-sided) copy (mono color; small; double-sided) copy (black-and-white; large; double-sided) copy (black-and-white; small; double-sided) copy A (full color 1) copy A (full color 2) copy A (mono color 1) copy A (mono color 2) copy A (black-and-white 1) copy A (back-and-white 2) copy A (full color; large) copy A (full color; small) copy A (mono color; large) co A (mono color; small) copy A (black-and-white; large) copy A (black-and-white; small) copy A (full color + mono color; lag) copy A (full color + mono color; small) copy A (full color + mono color; color 2) copy A (full color + mono color 1) copy A (full color; large; double-sided) copy A (full color; small; double-sided) copy A (mono color; laser; double-sided) copy A (mono color; small; double-sided) copy A (black-and-while; large; double-sided) copy A (black-and-white; small; double-sided) local copy (full color 1) local copy (full color 2) local copy (mono color 1) local copy (mono color 2) local copy (black-and-white 1) local copy (black-and-white 2) local copy (full color; large) local copy (full color; small) local copy (mono color; large) local copy (mono color; small) local copy (black-and-white; large) local copy (black-and-white; small) local copy (full color + mono color; small) local copy (full color + mono color; small) local copy (full color +mono color 2) local copy (full color + mono color 1) local copy (full color; large; double-sided) local copy (full color; small; double-sided) local copy (mono color; large; double-sided) local copy (mono color; small; double-sided) local copy (black-and-white; large; double-sided) local copy (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-168 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 print (total 1) print (total 2) print (large) print (small) print A (total 1) print A (total 2) print A (laser) Counter particulars Counter particulars
17-174
Chapter 17
Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 339 340 341 342 345 346 351 352 355 356 pint A (small) print full color 1) print (full color 2) print (mono color 1) print (mono color 2) print (black-and-white 1) print (black-and-white 2)) print (full color; large) print (full color small) print (mono color; large) print (mono color; large) print (black-and-white; large) print (black-and-white; small) print (full color + mono color; large) print (full color + mono color; small) print (full color + mono color/2) front (full color + mono color/1) print (full color; large; double-sided) front (full color; small; double-sided) front (mono color; large; double-sided) print (mono color; small; double-sided) print (black-and-while; large; double-sided) print (black-and-white; small; sided-sided) PDL print (total 1) PDL print (total 2) PDL print (large) PDL print (small) PDL print (full color 1) PDL print (full color ) PDL print (black-and-white 1) PDL print (black-and-white 2) PDL print (full color; large) PDL print (full color; small) PDL print (black-and-white; large) PDL print (black-and-while; small) PDL print (full color; large; double-sided) PDL print (full color; small; double-sided) PDL print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) PDL print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-169 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 copy + print (full color; large) copy + print full color; small) copy + print (black-and-white; large) copy + print (black-and-white; small) copy + print (black-and-white 2) copy + print (black-and-white 1) copy print (full color + mono color; large) copy + print (full color + mono color; small) copy + print (full color + mono color/2) copy + print (full color + mono color/1) copy + print (large) copy + print (small) copy + print (2) copy + print (1) copy + print (mono color; large) copy + print (mono color; small) copy + print (full color; large; double-sided) copy + print (full color; small; double-sided) copy + print (mono color; large; double-side) copy + print (mono color; small; double-sided) copy + print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) copy + print (black-and-white; small double-sided) Counter particulars Counter particulars
17-175
Chapter 17
T-17-170 Sport yes yes yes No. 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 scan (total 1) scan (total 2) scan A(large) scan (large) black-and-white scan (total 1) black-and-white scan (total 2) black-and-white scan (large) black-and-white scan (small) color scan (total 1) color scan (total 2) color scan (large) color scan (small) Counter particulars
T-17-171 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 box print (total 1) box print (total 2) box print (large) box print (small) box print (full color 1) box print (full color 2) box print (mono color 1) box print (mono color 2) box print (black-and-white 1) box print (black and-white 2) box print (full color; large) box print (full color; small) box print (mono color; large) box print (mono color; small) box print (lack-and-white; large) box print (black-and-white; small) box print (full color + color; large) box print (full color + mono color; small) box print (full color + mono color 2) box print (full color + mono color 1) box print (full color; large; double-sided) box print (full color; small; double-sided) box print (mono color; large; double-sided) box print (mono color; small; double-sided) box print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) box print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) Counter particulars
T-17-172 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 reception print (total 1) reception print (total 2) reception print (large) reception print (small) reception print (full color 1) reception print (full color 2) reception print (grayscale 1) reception print (grayscale 2) reception print (black-and-white 1) reception print (black-and-white 2) reception print (full color; large) reception print (full color; small) reception print (grayscale; large) reception print (grayscale; small) reception print (black-and-white; large) reception print (black-and-white; small) reception print (full color + grayscale; large) reception print (full color + grayscale; small) Counter particulars
17-176
Chapter 17
Sport yes yes No. 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 reception print (full color + grayscale 2) reception print (full color + grayscale 1) reception print (full color; large; double-sided) reception print (full color; small; double-sided) reception print (grayscale; large: double-sided) reception print (grayscale; small; double-side) reception print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) reception print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-173 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 report print (total 1) report print (total 2) report print (large) report print (small) report point (full color 1) report print (full color 2) report print (grayscale 1) report print (grayscale 2) report print (lack-and-white 1) report print (black-and-white 2) report print (full color large) report print (full color; small) report print (grayscale; large) report print (grayscale; small) report print (black-and-white; large) report print (black-and-white; small) report print (full color + grayscale; large) report print (full color + grayscale; small) report print (full color + grayscale 2) report print (full color + grayscale 1) report print (full color; large; double-sided) report print (full color; small; double-sided) report print (grayscale; large; double-sided) report print (grayscale: small; double-sided) report print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) report print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) Counter particulars Counter particulars
T-17-174 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 929 930 copy scan total 1 (color) copy scan total 1 (black-and-white) copy scan total 2 (color) copy scan total 2 (black-and-white) copy scan total 3 (color) copy scan total 3 (black-and-white) copy scan total 4 (color) copy scan total 4 (black-and-while) local copy scan (black-and-white) local copy scan (black-and-while) remote copy scan (color) remote copy scan (black-and-white) transmission scan total 1 (color) transmission scan total 1 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 2 (color) transmission scan total 2 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 3 (color) transmission scan total 3 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 4 (color) transmission scan total 4 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 5 (color) transmission scan total 6 (black-and-white transmission scan total 6 (color) transmission scan total 6 (black-and-white) Counter particulars
17-177
Chapter 17
Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 transmission scan total 7 (color) transmission scan total 7 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 8 (color) transmission scan total 8 (black-and-white) universal transmission scan total (color) universal transmission scan total (black-and-while) box scan (color) box scan (black-and-while) remote scan (color) remote scan (black-and-white) transmission scan/fax (color) transmission scan/fax (black-and-white) transmission scan/i-fax (color) transmission scan/i fax (black-and-white) transmission scan/e-mail (color) transmission scan/e-mail (black-and-white) transmission scan/FTP (color) transmission scan/FTP (black-and-white) transmission scan/SMB (color) transmission scan/SMB (black-and-white) transmission scan/IPX (color) transmission scan/IPX (black-and-while) transmission scan/detach base (color) transmission scan/detach base (black-and-white) transmission scan/local print (color) transmission scan/local print (black-and-white) transmission scan/box (color) transmission scan/box (black-and-white) T-17-175 COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading CONTROL Contents Use it to impose a limit on the use of a control card for a PDL job. Settings 0: do not limit 1: limit at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 B4-L-CNT For soft counters 1 through 6, use it to specify whether B4 should be counted as large-size or small-size. 1 Level Counter particulars
Settings 0: small-size 1: large-size at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 COPY-JOB Disabling Copy Job Reservation When the Card Reader/Coin Vendor Is in Use Use it when it is necessary to prevent multiple jobs as when the CCX or coin robot is in use.
Settings 0: permit copy job reservation 1: prohibit copy job reservation at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 TAB-ROT Use it to enable/disable 180-deg rotation of a landscape image for a tab sheet. Settings 0: do not rotate 1: rotate at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 IDPRN-SW Use it to switch over job types for the group control counter. Settings 0: count in PRINT category: box print, report print, SEND local print PDL print 1: count in PRINT category: report print, end local print, PDL print at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CPRT-DSP Use it to enable/disable indication of the count button on the Sales Counter Check screen. Settings 0: do not indicate 1: indicate at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1
17-178
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading CNT-SW Use it to switch over counter indication items. Counters in Question At the time of the setting value 0 101 total 1 108 total (black-and-white 1) 232 copy (full color + mono color; 1) 324 print (full color + mono color; 1) At the time of the setting value 1 102 total 2 231 copy (full color + mono color; 2) 148 total A (full color + mono color; 2) 222 copy (black-and-white 2) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 BCONT-AST Use it to switch over counter indication items. Counters in Question Settings 0: count box print job as PDL job 1: count box print job as copy job at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DFLT-CPY Use it to set the default color mode of COPY. Settings 0: ACS 1: full color 2: black-and-white JPN (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) UL (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) EUR (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) other (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) DFLT-BOX Use it to set the default color mode for BOX. Settings 0: ACS 1: full color 2: black-and-white JPN (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) UL (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) EUR (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) others (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) DOC-REM Use it to set the message promoting for the removal of originals. Settings 0: do not indicate 1: indicate at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 LDAP-SW Use it to select the searching condition for LDAP search. Sets the matching condition to retrieve email addresses or fax numbers from the LDAP server. 1 1 Contents Level
Setting value 0: Includes the following condition 1: Does not include the following condition 2: Is equal to the following condition 3: Is not equal to the following condition 4: Starts with the following condition 5: Ends with the following condition [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 4] Reference When the LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server is registered, email addresses or fax numbers can be retrieved from the LADP server. The email addresses or fax numbers obtained can be registered in the address/number list, etc
FROM-OF
Use it to select whether to delete "from-address" used for email sending. Setting value 0: Do not delete "from-address". 1: Delete "from-address". [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 1
FILE-OF
Use it to select whether to prohibit transmission to file addresses. Selects whether to prohibit transmission to file addresses by prohibiting input of file addresses using the address book. Setting value 0: Do not prohibit transmission to file addresses. 1: Prohibit transmission to file addresses. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 1 Reference - To change this item from 0 to 1 when a file address is registered, it is desirable to manually delete the file address. (Otherwise, the file address can be used.) - When "1" is set, it is not allowed to import (register) a file address from RUI or equipment information distribution. Therefore, in order to delete all the addresses at once, set "1" and execute "overwriting import (deletes the current data and then registers the imported data)" for the file exported by RUI or equipment information distribution.
17-179
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading MAIL-OF Contents Use it to select whether to prohibit transmission to email addresses. Selects whether to prohibit email transmission by prohibiting input of email addresses using the address book. Setting value 0: Do not prohibit transmission to email addresses. 1: Prohibit transmission to email addresses. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 1 Reference - To change this item from 0 to 1 when an email address is registered, it is desirable to manually delete the email address. (Otherwise, the email address can be used.) - When "1" is set, it is not allowed to import (register) an email address from RUI or equipment information distribution. Therefore, in order to delete all the addresses at once, set "1" and execute "overwriting import (deletes the current data and then registers the imported data)" by RUI or equipment information distribution. IFAX-OF Use it to select whether to prohibit transmission to I Fax addresses. Selects whether to prohibit transmission to I Fax addresses by prohibiting input of I Fax addresses using the address book. Setting value 0: Do not prohibit transmission to I Fax addresses. 1: Prohibit transmission to I Fax addresses. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 1 Reference - To change this item from 0 to 1 when an I Fax address is registered, it is desirable to manually delete the I Fax address. (Otherwise, the I Fax address can be used.) - When "1" is set, it is not allowed to import (register) an I Fax address from RUI or equipment information distribution. Therefore, in order to delete all the addresses at once, set "1" and execute "overwriting import (deletes the current data and then registers the imported data)" by RUI or equipment information distribution. SIZE-DET Use it to enable/disable the original size detection function. Level
Settings 0: off (the scanner will not go on when the copyboard cover is opened/closed thus not blinding the user) 1: on (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) DATE-DSP Use it to change the date notation. Settings 0: YYMM/DD 1: DD/MM'YY 2: MM/DD/YY MB-CCV Use it to limit access to the mail box function (control card). Settings 0: do not limit 1: limit at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 TRY-STP Use it to enable/disable output when the tray becomes full. Settings 0: normal mode (interrupted when the finisher tray becomes full) 1: interrupt in relation to stack height at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 MF-LG-ST Use it to enable/disable the indication of the Extra length mode. Settings 0: normal 1: indicate key on extension mode screen at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CNT-DISP Use it to enable/disable the indication of the serial number in response to a press on the Counter Check key. Settings 0: indicate serial number 1: do not indicate serial number at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NW-SCAN Use it to enable/disable the network scan function. Settings 0: no not permit 1: permit (invalid in the absence of a UFR or open I/F board) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 HDCR-DSP Use it to enable/disable the indication of HDD initialization mode (user mode). Settings 0: do not indicate and do not initialize 1: initialize once using 0s 2: initialize once using random data 3: initialize 3 times using random data at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-180
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading JOB-INVL Use it to set the intervals of interrupt jobs. Settings 0: standard (permit the next job) 1: permit output of next job after delivery of last page of interrupt job 2: permit output of next job after delivery of last page of all jobs at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 LGSW-DSP Use it to enable/disable indication of 'log display on/off' on the User Mode screen. Settings 0: do not indicate 'log display on/off'. 1: indicate 'log display on/off' at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PCL-COPY Use it to set the PCL command COPIES (Meru/Pinatubo/Hood compatibility mode). 2 Contents Level
Setting mode 0: control page by page according to COPIES command setting on pages 1: Meru/Pinatubo/Hood compatible mode 2 to 65535: space at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PRJOB-CP Use it to set the CCV count pulse for reception/report output. Settings 0: do not generate count pulse 1: generate count pulse at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DPT-ID-7 Registering a department ID and inputting a 7-digit code for authentication. Setting Values 0: As before [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear] 1: Inputting a 7-digit code Reference Information Support for Siemens RUI-RJT Disconnecting the HTTP port when three authentication failures from RUI are recognized. Setting Values 0: Invalid [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear] 1: Valid Reference Information Support for Siemens SND-RATE Use it to set the rate of compression when SEND-RATE is set to 'high' Settings 0: 1/16 1: 1/20 2: 1/24 A higher rate of compression will lower the image quality. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CTM-S06 Use it to remove the password from an export file (file transmission address). range of settings 0:do not remove password from export file 1:remove password from export file. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
CTM-S07
Use it to remove the source indication of the transmission password on the Edit screen (RUI address indication). Use it to remove the source indication of the transmission password on the Edit screen (RUI address indication). range of settings 0:do not remove source indication of transmission password on Edit screen 1:remove source indication of transmission password on Edit screen at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-181
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading FXEX-CNT Contents Use it to set the temperature control hysterisis width for the outside heating roller. The outside heating roller of the machine has a low heating capacity and tends to go on and off frequently; this mode is offered to prevent flickering. Level
Settings range 0: hysterisis width = -/+1 deg C (225 deg C -/+1 deg C) efault) 1: hysterisis width = -/+2 deg C (224 deg C -/+2 deg C) 2: hysterisis width = -/+3.5 deg C (222.5 deg C -/+3.5 deg C) 3: hysterisis width = -/+4.5 deg C (221.5 deg C -/+4.5 deg C) [at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0] PAS-RGST Character entry settings on the password registration screen Settings 0: Entered characters are displayed in plain text form [Factory default/After RAM is cleared] 1: Entered characters are in encrypted form (****) CN-CT Connection Serialization Switch Use it to enable/disable the connection serialization function. 0:off (disables connection serialization function) 1:on (enables connection serialization function) Remarks: Connection Serialization Function It has been designed to support the job grouping function of Version 1.0 of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition. The iR Series of machines (MFPs) are capable of assigning connections, and it is important that there be a mechanism preventing multiple connections on the part of the device for the job grouping function to operate correctly. Specifically, once the job data of a connection is received, that of another will not be accepted (received) until the end of the ongoing reception (so as to prevent reordering of jobs). The term connection refers to a connection established with multiple hosts (e.g., PCs) on a network. Job Grouping Function It has been designed as a function of Version 1.0 of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition, and serves to prevent a job coming from another PC in a group job (in which multiple jobs are transmitted within a single session). DOM-ADD Use it to select whether to add the destination domain name for email transmission. Selects whether to add the domain name (ex. @canon.co.jp), which was set by the user mode, to the account input for email transmission. Setting value 0: Do not add the domain name. 1: Add the domain name. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] <When you send email to xxx@canon.co.jp> Set "canon.co.jp" as the domain name by the user mode, and set "1" to <DOM-ADD>. When you input xxx, the registered domain name is added for email transmission.
3. CST
T-17-176 COPIER>OPTION>CST Subheading P-SZ-C1 Use it to select and register paper size for the cassette 1. Settings 0: A4 1: B5 2: LTR at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 P-SZ-C2 Use it to select and register paper size for the cassette 2. Settings 0: A4 1: B5 2: LTR at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 U1-NAME to U4NAME Use it to enable/disable the indication of the paper name identified with a paper size group (U1 through U4). Contents Level
Settings 0: indication on touch panel as U1, U2, U3, U4. 1: indicate name of paper set in service mode (CST-U1, U2, U3, U4) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-182
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>CST Subheading CST-U1/U2/U3/U4 Contents Use it to select the names of paper sizes to be used in paper size groups. By registering a special size for U1, U2, U3, or U4, you can cause the machine to treat the paper in question as special size paper. Level
4. ACC
T-17-177 COPIER>OPTION>ACC Subheading COIN Use it set up the coin vendor mechanism. Use it to permit/not permit access to coin vendor mode. Settings 0: coin vendor not used (control card permitted; no charging) 1: coin vendor (charging used) 2: remote counter (charging used) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DK-P Use it to set the size of paper used in the paper deck (optional). Settings 0: A4 1: not supported 2: LTR at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CARD-SW Use it to set the UI screen when switching the coin vendor mechanism. Settings 0: coin 1: card 2: coin and card at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 STPL-LMT Use it to put a limit to the number of sheets for saddle binding. Settings 0: 5 sheets (w/o white band) 1: 10 sheets (w/o white band) 2: 10 sheets (w/ white band) 3: 15 sheets (w/ white band) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 3 SC-TYPE Use it to change the type of machine (self copy/coin vendor machine). This mode is effective only when the machine soft ID is "Lawson." Use it to switch between a Lawson model and a self copy model. 1 1 Contents Level
2 Settings 0: Lawson model 1: general self copy model at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CC-SPSW Use it to set the control card (CC IV/CCV) I/F support level.
Settings 0: do not support 1: support (priority on speed) 2: support (priority on upper limit) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 - if set to '1' , priority on the maintenance of the engine performance; as such, the upper limit may not be properly imposed. - if set to '2' , on the other hand, the upper limit may properly be imposed, but the engine performance may decrease depending on the source of paper.
5. INT-FACE
17-183
Chapter 17
T-17-179 COPIER>OPTION>INT-FACE Subheading AP-OPT Contents Use it to permit or not permit printing from PrintMe (application installed to the PS print server unit). Level
Settings 0: enable if for specific account 1: enable for all accounts 2: reject printing (print only from specific group ID) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 AP-ACCNT Use it to set group ID for print jobs (CPCA) from PrintMe (application installed on PS print server unit).
2 Settings 0 to 9999999 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) AP-CODE Use it to set a pass code for print jobs (CPCA) for PrintMe (application installed on PS print sever unit). Code settings 0 to 9999999 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 2

0011-6925
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. BODY

T-17-180 COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading PO-CNT MODEL-SZ for factory adjustment Use it to set the default magnification indication and ADF size detection. Settings 0: AB (6R5E) 1: INCH (5R4E) 2: A (3R3E) 3: AB/INCH (6R5E) at time of shipment/upon RAM replacement: 0 Contents Level 1
17-184
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading FIX-TEMP Use it to change the plain paper down sequence. settings range 0: default 1: priority on fixing 2: priority on productivity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PASCAL Use it to enable/disable the use of contrast potential obtained from auto gradation correction (full) and the use of gradation correction data. settings range 0: do not use 1: use 2: reserved (same as 1) 3: reserved (same as 0) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 CONFIG Use it to select multiple pieces of firmware stored on the hard disk to change the country, language, model, and paper size configuration. Method of Adjustment 1) Select the item to change, and press the +/- key. 2) See that each press on the +/- key changes the particulars. 3) When all particulars are indicated for all items, press the OK key. 4) Turn off and then on the main power switch. 1 1 Contents Level
XXYYZZAA xx: country (e.g., JP for Japan) YY: language (e.g., ja for Japanese) ZZ: model (e.g., 00 for Canon) AA: paper size configuration (e.g., 00 for AB) TEMP-TBL Use it to adjust the control temperature of the fixing assembly. When this mode is activated, there will be an increase of 5 deg C in the following: standby temperature (both types); copying temperature; post-standby rotation temperature; extra-length sheet-to-sheet control temperature there will not be an increase of 5 deg C in the following: post-job rotation temperature; power save mode temperature; error detection temperature Adjustments are made to the normally used temperature control table. A change will be made to the fixing temperature control table in the event of low-temperature offset or paper blister caused by the characteristics of paper being used. In the case of low-temperature offset, select +5 deg C; in the case of a paper blister, on the other hand, select -5 deg C. The setting will not be valid unit the main power switch has been turned off and then on again.
Settings 0: OFF 1: +5 deg C 2: -5 deg C at time of shipment/upon RAM replacement: 0 W/SCNR Use it to specify the presence/absence of a reader unit (as for the copier model). Settings 0: printer model 1: model with reader unit at time of shipment: 1 upon RAM initialization: 0 RUI-DSP Use it to set the copier function optional settings for the RUI screen. Settings 0: do not display copy screen for RUI 1: display copy screen for RUI at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ADJ-LVL Use it to select an operation mode for patch detection. Of the automatic adjusting sequences used, decreasing/increasing the frequency of potential control/primary transfer ATVC will lead to decrease/increase productivity. Method of Adjustment A higher setting will increase the adjustment intervals and, thus, increase the productivity; it, however, will also increase color fluctuation. Settings 0 to 4 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1 1
17-185
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading INTROT-1 Contents intervals of executing ATVC during initial multiple rotation (number of prints) Increase the setting if soiling in the form of dots occurs in keeping with drum rotation (i.e., by increasing the intervals of ATVC control). Decrease the setting if transfer faults occurs (i.e., by decreasing the intervals of ATVC control). 1 Settings 0 to 240 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 90 INTROT-2 Use it to set intervals (in terms of the number of sheets) for process auto adjustment (full, at time of initial/last rotation) performed at specific intervals. 1 range of settings: 50 to 1000 (in terms of A4) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 200 DEVL-PTH Setting threshold level (number of sheets) that the toner discharge sequence starts to operate. Settings 0: Does not operate 1: Approx. 100 sheets 2: Approx. 200 sheets [Factory default/After RAM is cleared] 3: Approx. 500 sheets Reference Threshold level of density can be set from the following service mode. COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DEVL-VTH Use this mode when symptom such as coarse image occurs while copying/printing low-density Duty image continuously. Level
AUTO-DH
Use it to enable/disable auto gradation correction for standby. The auto gradation correction mechanism is started in response to changes in the environment or when the machine is left alone in standby for a specific period of time. The new setting will not be valid until the power switch has been turned off and then on. 1 Settings 0: prohibit 1: permit (default) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1
DFDST-L1
DFDST-L2
ENVP-INT
Use it to set the intervals at which logs are collected of machine internal temperature and fixing temperature, i.e., in relation to COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ENV-PRINT and COPIER>DISPLAY>ENVRNT. 1 settings range 0 to 480 (min) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 60
T1-TEMP
Use it to switch over the heavy paper 1 down sequence tables. settings 0: default 1: priority on fixing 2: priority on productivity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
T2-TEMP
Use it to switch over the heavy paper 2 down sequence tables. settings 0: default 1: priority on fixing 2: priority on productivity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
BLNK-THP
Use it to switch over leading edge margins for heavy paper 1/2 (color only; remedy against horizontal lines along leading edge). settings 0: default margin 1: 7 mm (leading edge margin median value) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-186
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading CD-IDL-T Contents Use it to adjust the duration of idle rotation for IDL-T (color developing assembly YMC; otherwise executed first in the morning in a high humidity environment). - a setting toward '-' will reduce the downtime associated with initial multiple rotation, but will not compensate fully for changes in density. - a setting toward '+' will fully compensate for changes in density, but will increase downtime associated with initial multiple rotation. 1 Level
settings range -3 to +6 (unit: 5 sec) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization; 0 OHP-SPED Use it to switch over the cpm for value BK OHT (remedy against adhesion upon delivery). settings 0: 40 cpm if w/ finisher; 20 cpm if w/o finisher 1: 20 cpm 2: 10 cpm at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 FX-CROT Use it to change the intervals at which the fixing roller is rotated idly (remedy against deformation of the roller). The fixing roller is rotated idly for 1 sec once every 30 min (default) to prevent it from suffering deformation while the machine remains in standby.
settings range 0: 30 min 1: 20 min 2: 10 min 3: 5 min at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 LPW-TIME Use it to set time for automatic switching to the low-power mode in the 24-hour power distribution mode. Sets time to perform automatic switching and recovery of low-power mode in the 24-hour power distribution mode and execute an adjustment in the printer engine. Setting range 00:00 to 23:59 (24 hours, Unit: minute) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 03:00] Reference: - For the machines operating in the 24-hour power distribution mode (the operation is not switched to the power saving mode such as power save, low electricity, or sleep.) at a convenience store, etc., the machine does not perform the adjustment that is made only when recovering from the power saving mode in the printer engine. Use <LPW-TIME> to cover such a case. - You can judge whether the machine operates in the 24-hour power distribution mode or not by checking that "COPIER/ OPTION/ACC/COIN" is set to "1" (self-copy). When other numbers than "1" is set, this function does not work. - When the machine automatically switches the operation to the low electricity mode, the control panel screen is turned off for a moment, which is a feature included in the specifications. BASE-SW Use it to switch the operation to the base model from the full MEAP model. Sets the device operation back to the base model after it was switched to the full model. Setting value 0: OFF (base model) 1: ON (full model) DRM-DISP Use it to enable/disable the message for drum phase shifting. If the photopositive drum is used with its home position unchanged in relation to the drum shaft, uneven density at drum intervals or lines can occur in output images. To limit the symptom, the phase of the photosensitive drum is shifted by 90 deg every specific number of prints. The machine does not shift the phase on its own, and requires the work of the service person. When needed, the machine issues a message to prompt the work on the User screen and the Service Mode screen. Use this mode item to enable/disable the message. Settings 0: disable message 1: indicate only in service mode (default) 2: indicate on both User and Service Mode screens The message will go off automatically when the following is executed: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DR-P-ADJ. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 - To change the number of prints after which the message is indicated for COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DRM-DISP, change the denominator in COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>DRM-PHAS.
17-187
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading SC-L-CNT Use it to select the threshold value for the paper size (large/small) at the scanning counter. Selects whether to count B4-size paper as a large size or small size. Contents Level
Setting value 0: Count B4-size paper as a small size 1: Count B4-size paper as a large size [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference When "1" is set to count B4-size paper as a large size, LTR-size paper is counted as a small size. REPORT-Z Use it to switch the attribution flag to be added when printing a report. Setting value 0: PDL character mode 1: PDL photo mode 2: SCAN character mode 3: SCAN photo mode [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] IFXEML-Z Use it to switch the attribution flag to be added when printing an image received by ColoriFAX,E_mail. settings 0: SCAN photo mode 1: PDL photo mode 2: SCAN text mode 3: PDL text mode [at time of shipment/RAM initialization: 0] BMLNKS-Z Use it to switch the attribution flag to be added when printing an image received by BMLinkS. Setting value 0: SCAN photo mode 1: PDL photo mode 2: SCAN character mode 3: PDL character mode [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference 0: SCAN photo mode The black character consists of 4 black colors. Errors are diffused. The color tint is brighter than 2. 1: PDL photo mode The black character consists of 4 black colors. Screening is executed to the image. 2: SCAN character mode The black character consists of a single black color. The color tint in the photo is different from the color printed in 0. (It may be difficult for amateurs to recognize the difference.) Errors are diffused. 3: PDL character mode The black character consists of a single black color. Screening is executed to the image. LDAP-ADD Use it to select the condition for LDAP search to be added. Decides whether to add "ObjectClass" and "SrchNameRow" in the pull-down list of the current searching condition (name, organization, organization unit, fax, email).
1 Only destinations for fax and email can be searched. Setting value 0: Do not add the searching condition. 1: Add the searching condition. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] W-CLN-P Use it to set the intervals at which the primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire is automatically cleaned in a normal environment in terms of the number of copies. The new setting will not be valid until the main power switch has been turned off and then back on. 2 Range of settings 100p to 2000 at time of shipment/RAM initialization: 2000
17-188
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading PRI-FAN Contents Use it to select a primary fan drive mode. Use it to prevent soiling in the form of dots occurring in keeping with drum rotation. The temperature of the cleaning blade may be decreased so that the machine will better be able to remove the ingredients of the black toner sticking to the drum. 2 Settings 0: in high temperature/humidity environment, half-speed 1: in high temperature/humidity environment, full-speed at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization 0 SCANSLCT Enable/disable the function used to compute the area of scanning based on the selected paper size. settings 0: OFF (area determined based on original detection) 1: ON (area determined based on paper size) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 OHP-TEMP Use it to switch over transparency down-sequence tables. settings 0: default 1: priority on fixing 2: priority on productivity at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DH-SW Use it to perform Dhalf. Settings 0: do not perform Dhalf control 1: perform Dhalf control at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 DM-MODE Use it to enable/disable image density correction control as part of auto gradation correction (PASCAL) Settings 0: do not perform 1: perform at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 SENS-CNF Use it to set the original sensor. Settings 0: AB configuration 1: inch configuration at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DM-SW Use it to enable/disable image gradation correction and image density correction after making a specific number of prints. Settings 0: do not perform (default) 1: perform every 200 prints up to initial 2000 2: perform every 200 prints up to initial 4000 3: perform at all times (every 200 prints) 4: reserved To change the intervals (200 prints at default), use COPIER>OPTIONAL>BODY>INTROT2. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 3 RAW-DATA Use it to specify whether or not to print out received data as it is. If the received image has a fault, use this mode to find out whether the fault is in the data or in the image processing. 2 2 2 2 Level
2 Settings 0: normal operation 1: print as is at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 BK-BND Use it to increase the black belt in 4C mode. Use it to prevent photosensitive drum cleaning faults in an N/L environment.
Settings 0: increase by 100% 1: increase by 150% 2: increase by 20% at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
RMT-LANG
Use it to switch the language of the remote UI used through the Web. Method of Adjustment Use the +/- key to select the appropriate language code.
17-189
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading IFAX-LIM Contents Use it to limit the number of output lines for when a large volume of data is received over i-fax. Level
settings range 0: no limit 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 500 TR-CLN Use it to perform the cleaning sequence designed to avoid soiling on the back of paper caused by the secondary transfer roller. 77-mm back soiling preventive mode
Settings: 0: perform only in H/H environment 1: disable in all environments 2: enable in all environments at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 SMTPTXPN Use it to change the number of the SMTP transmission port. settings range 0 to 65535 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 25 SMTPRXPN Use it to change the number of the SMTP reception port. settings range 0 through 65535 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 25 POP3PN Use it to change the number of the POP reception port. settings range 0 through 65535 (in increments of 1) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 110 ORG-LGL Use it to set a special paper size not recognized by the DF size detection mechanism. settings 0: LEGAL 1: FOOLSCAP 2: A-FOOLSCAP 3: FORIO 4: G-LEGAL 5: OFFICIO 6: E-OFFICIO 7: A-OFFICIO 8: B-OFFICIO 9: A-LEAGAL 10: M-OFFICIO at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ORG-LTR Use it to set a special paper size not recognized by the DF size detection mechanism. settings 0: LTR 1: G-LTR 2: A-LTR 3: EXECTIVE at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ORG-LTRR Use it to set a special paper size not recognized by the DF size detection mechanism. 0: LTR (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization)
settings 0: LTR-R (default) 1: G-LTR-R 2: A-LTR-R 3: EXECTIVE-R at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 ORG-LDR
Use it to set a size that cannot be recognized by DH. Use it when A-LTR is recognized as LDR by mistake.
Setting value 0: LDR 1: A-LTR 2 or larger: LDR [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0]
17-190
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading ORG-B5 Contents Use it to set a special paper size not recognized by the DF size detection mechanism. 0: B5 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) settings 0: B5 1: K-LEAGAL at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 UI-COPY Use it to select whether to display the copy screen in the control panel. Setting value 0: Do not display the copy screen. 1: Display the copy screen. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 1] UI-BOX Use it to enable/disable display of the control panel Box scan. settings 0: do not display 1: display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 UI-SEND Use it to enable/disable display of the control panel Transmission screen. settings 0: do not display 1: display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 UI-FAX Use it to enable/disable display of the control panel Fax screen. settings 0: do not display 1: display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 UI-EXT Use it to enable/disable display of the control pane Extension screen. settings 0: do not display 1: display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 SCR-SLCT Use it to select halftone processing for film/photo mode. Method of Adjustment If moire is found in the output image or the dots make the image appear too coarse while the default (1: use screen with fewer lines) is selected, change the setting as follows: - if moire is noted, change to '0' (use error diffusion); this setting is suited to the reproduction of text. - if the image appears too coarse because of the dots, change to '2' (use screen with more lines). 2 2 2 2 2 Level
settings 0: use error diffusion 1: use low-number screen (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 2: use high-number screen at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 TMC-SLCT Use it to switch over coefficients used for error diffusion processing. If the output image has started to show uneven density or rough texture as more and more prints are made, change the setting for better dot stabilization so that the fault may be less noticeable.
2 settings 0: standby 1: decrease sensitivity to grain/low stability 2: increase sensitivity to grain/high stability at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-191
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading D-CLN-TM Contents Use it to change the length of drum idle rotation. Use it to prevent soiling in the form of dots occurring in keeping with drum rotation. The machine executes idle rotation when it is turned on to remove residual matter from the drum. Level
Settings 0: do not execute idle rotation 1: execute idle rotation for 30 sec 2: execute idle rotation for 60 sec at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Settings 3 through 6 are reserved (currently invalid). DEVL-VTH Use it to set a threshold for image density over which the machine will execute discharge sequence (designed as a remedy against rough image texture on copies of low-density images made in continuous printing). If possible, do not use it as long as machine operation is normal.
2 settings range 1 to 5 (unit: %) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) FTPTXPN Use it to select the port number (FTP) as the target of SEND transmission. settings range 0 to 65535 (16-bit; at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 21) INTPPR-1 Use it to set an interval for execution of automatic image adjustment 1 (simple). Sets an interval for automatic paper interval adjustment (analog patch sequence, etc.), which is performed for a certain number of sheets to correct the image density change in a job for printing large number of pages. The unit is for a size equivalent to A4. 2
Setting range 0 (Do not execute the function.), 50 to 1000 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 100] 2 No larger number of sheets than the number specified by "setting of an interval for execution of automatic image adjustment 2 (full)". When the automatic image adjustment 2 is executed, the machine recognizes that the automatic image adjustment 1 has been already executed. Therefore, the next automatic image adjustment 1 is executed after the machine prints the number of sheets specified by this item.
PRN-FLG
Selecting an Image Area Flag (for PDL images) In the event that the controller fails to compress a PDL image at a specific rate of compression, image processing will be performed according to the image area flag selected in this mode item.
2 settings 0: use high-number screen, gray compensation LUT 1: use error diffusion, gray compensation LUT 2: use high-number screen, normal LUT at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
SCN-FLG
T-LW-LVL
17-192
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading NWERR-SW Contents Use it to enable/disable the indication of a network-related error message. This switch is used to disable error messages related to networking when the model is not connected to a network even though it is equipped with a network board as standard. An NADA machine is equipped with networking functions, and is by default set for use on a network; however, take advantage of the switch where the machine is not connected to a network (as in the case of installation in a Lawson shop). Level
settings 0: do not indicate 1: indicate (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 FX-SPD Use it to adjust the speed of the fixing roller. If the arching of paper between the secondary transfer roller and the fixing roller is too great, the trailing edge of the paper tends to come into contact with the intermediate transfer belt, causing traces by friction. A change to the speed of fixing will also change the speed of the delivery vertical path roller (fine-adjustment) accordingly. A higher setting will increase the speed. settings range -3 to 3 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 STS-PORT Enabling/Disabling the TOT Synchronous Command Communication Port Use it to enable or disable the inquiry/response (synchronous) command communication port for TUIF over TCP/IP. 2 Settings 0: OFF 1: ON at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CMD-PORT Enabling/Disabling the TOT Asynchronous Status Communication Port Use it to enable or disable the asynchronous status communication port for TUIF over TCP/IP. 2 Settings 0: OFF 1: ON at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 MODELSZ2 Global Support for Copyboard Original Size Detection (mix of AB/Inch) When the setting is '1' , the machine will support global mode (AB/Inch) regardless of the setting of the swing flag MODELSZ (AB, Inch). 2 Settings 0: normal 1: AB/inch mix detection at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 SZDT-SW Use it to enable/disable the switch-over from CCD size detection to photo size detection for copyboard original size detection.
Settings 0: disable photo size detection 1: enable photo size detection at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 UISW-DSP Indication of the User Screen Switch Use it to enable or disable the indication of the switch used to switch between the Standard Specifications screen and Simple Specifications screen (Lawson type). - type equipped with functions equivalent to those of standard machines - type equipped with limited functions, e.g., those machines installed in Lawson shops. Use it to enable or disable the indication of the switch used by the user (shop administrator) to switch between screens to meet individual needs. (The switch is offered to authorized users only.)
Settings 0: do not display (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 1: display at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-193
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading ITB-CLN Contents Use it to execute the ITB black band sequence at time of initial multiple rotation automatic adjustment. Level
Settings: 0: disable 1: force execution once 2 and 3: reserved (input invalid) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-CMD5 Use it when imposing limits to the use of CRAM-MD5 certification for SMTP (NoSasl challenge response authentication mechanism; MD5 message digest algorithm).
Use it to set CRAM-MD5 certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-GSAPI Use it when imposing limits to the use of GSSAPI certification for SMTP (NoSasl generic security service application program interface). Use it to set GSSAPI certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-NTLM Use it when imposing limits to the use of NTML certification for SMTP (NoSasl-windows NTLAN Manager). Use it to set NTLM certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-PLNWS Use it when imposing limits to the use of PLAIN/LOGIN certification (plain language certification for SMTP) where NSPLNWS communication packets are encrypted for SMTP (NoSasl plain with transport layer security).
Use it to set PLAIN.LOGIN certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-PLN Use it when imposing limits to PLAIN/LOGIN certification (plain language certification) where communication packets sure encrypted for SMTP.
Use it to set PLAIN.LOGIN certification for SMTP certification. (environment in which computation packet encryption is not used) 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 NS-LGN Use it when imposing limits to LOGIN certification for SMTP (NoSasl LoGiN).
Use it to set LOGIN certification for SMTP certification. 0: refer to SMTP server 1: do not use at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 T-CRG-SW Use it to permit or not to permit replacement of the toner cartridge by the user when there still is toner in the cartridge.
Settings 0: do not permit replacement by user (When the toner runs out (in the case of black toner, is running low), a button will appear to permit replacement of the toner cartridge: i.e., system status/stop>recovery procedure indication). 1: permit replacement by user (A button will appear to permit replacement; i.e., user mode>adjust/cleaning.) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-194
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading MEAP-PN Contents Use it to set a port number for the HTTP server to be used by the MEAP application. Setting range 0 to 65535 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 8000] 2 Level
When using the port for MEAP, be sure not to use the numbers 1 through 1023 except 80, because these numbers are used by an ordinary server.
TNR-DWN
Use it to set the amount of toner to be deposited. You can decrease the amount of toner, as when stray toner tends to occur in full color mode or when paper tends to wrap around the fixing roller.
Settings 0: standard amount (default) 1: decrease for both single-sided and double-sided modes 2: standard for single-sided mode but decrease in double-sided mode for both 1st and 2nd sides (reserved) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 An update has been made to do away with setting 2 as a result of recent findings (i.e., the expected operation does not take place in some PDL or copy jobs; although the setting exists in service mode, it behaves like 0). TMIC-BK Use it to set the correction along the trailing edge for BkLUT and BkLUT for PDL (Tmic).
Settings 0: PDL BK_LUT end correction ON; copy Bk_LUT end correction OFF 1: PDL BK_LUT end correction OFF; copy Bk_LUT end correction OFF 2: PDL BK_LUT end correction ON; copy Bk_LUT end correction ON (default) 3: PDL BK_LUT end correction OFF; copy Bk_LUT end correction ON at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2
SVMD-ENT
DH-MODE
Patch Data (high density side) Used in D-half Except in Full Correction Change the default setting so that the readout collected from D-half at time of full correction will be substituted for the patch on the high density side at time of D-half (other than in full correction).
2 Settings 0: use patch image read data of full correction (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 1: do not use patch image read data of full correction at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 W-CLN-PH Use it to set the intervals at which the primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire is automatically cleaned. If an image fault (e.g., vertical lines) occurs in a high temperature/humidity environment, the intervals at which the primary charging wire/pre-transfer charging wire is automatically cleaned may be changed. Note: In a normal environment, be sure to use W-CLN-P to set the intervals used to automatically clean the primary charging wire. Range of settings 100 to 1000 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1000
17-195
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading SSH-SW Contents Use it to select whether to activate the SSH server. Selects whether to activate the SSH server when activating the main unit. Setting value 0: Do not activate the SSH server when activating the main unit. 1: Activate the SSH server when activating the main unit. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference SSH stands for "Secure Shell", in which the communication between the digital accessory (DA) and the iR device is encrypted so that it cannot be read from outside. 2 Level
Even when the setting value is changed to 1 (ON) while the main unit is being activated, the SSH server is not activated. The setting value becomes valid after the power is turned OFF/ON.
RMT-LGIN
Use it to select whether to allow remote login to the SSH server. Selects whether to allow remote login to the debug console in the SSH server from the remote host (SSH client: digital accessory). Setting value 0: Do not allow remote login to the SSH server. 1: Allow remote login to the SSH server. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0]
This is valid only when "1 (ON)" is set to <SSH-SW>.
RE-PKEY
Use it to select whether to recreate the pair key for the SSH server. Selects whether to recreate the pair key for the SSH server when activating the main unit. Setting value: 0: Do not recreate the pair key for the SSH server when activating the main unit. 1: Recreate the pair key for the SSH server when activating the main unit. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference - When "1 (Recreate the pair key.)" is set, the SSH server host recreates the pair key (secret key/public key) when activating the task (turning the power OFF/ON), outputs it to the key file, and saves it in the HDD. The encryption algorithm (DSA) and key length (512 bit) are fixed. - It sometimes takes approximately 3 to 4 minutes to activate the copier main unit due to this operation. 2
This is valid only when "1 (ON)" is set to <SSH-SW>. U-NAME Use it to set a user name required to connect to the SSH server. Sets a login user name required to connect to the SSH server. Only one user can login the server. Setting range 8 characters maximum (English one byte characters) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: gN3Fp2A]
- Do not change this setting because this is for future expansion. - This is valid only when "1 (ON)" is set to <SSH-SW>.
U-PASWD
Use it to set a password of the user required to connect to the SSH server. Sets a password of the login user required to connect to the SSH server. Setting range 8 characters maximum (English one byte characters) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: Vs8DuwJ] 2 - Do not change this setting because this is for future expansion. - This is valid only when "1 (ON)" is set to <SSH-SW>. - The password is left hidden on the screen.
B-SPL-SW
Use it to set the environment table for black toner supply. settings range 0: variable 1: fixed at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2
17-196
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading B-CNT-SW Contents Use it to set the environment table for black development contrast. settings range 0: variable 1: fixed at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1ROT-CR Use it to change the retention current for primary transfer retention current idle rotation. If the user disconnects the power plug at night and thus the drum heater goes off, the temperature of the primary transfer roller is not likely to match that of the drum when the power is turned on the next morning; and the resulting temporary change in the resistance of the primary transfer roller at times prevents proper performance of ATVC. If the level of current set by default is not high enough, use this item to increase it. 2 Level
2 Settings 0: refer to environment sensor 1: 60uA 2: 70uA 3: 80uA 4: 90uA 5: 100uA 6: 110uA 7: 120uA at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1ROT-TIM Use it to change the duration of primary transfer power retention current idle rotation. Settings 0: refer to environment sensor 1: 40sec 2: 60sec 3: 120sec 4: 180sec 5: 300sec 6: 420sec 7: 600sec at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 2ROT-TIM Use it to change the secondary transfer power retention idle rotation. Settings 0: refer to environment sensor 1: 40sec 2: 60sec 3: 120sec 4: 180sec 5: 300sec 6: 420sec 7: 600sec at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DEV-K-TM Use it to set the duration of toner discharge executed as part of the ITB black band cleaning sequence. Use it to set the duration of toner discharge executed as part of the ITB black band cleaning sequence. Settings 1: 10 2: 20 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 CDEV-IDL Use it to enable/disable power-on idle rotation of the color developing assembly (YMC). Use it to adjust the intervals of patch ATR for the No. 1 limit. A higher limit will increase the execution intervals, but will affect the density. On the other hand, although a lower limit will decrease the intervals, the density will be more stable. - the number of prints (CNT) reset upon execution of patch detection - cumulative video count CNT) Timing - perform patch detection during last rotation of the ongoing job when the No. 1 limit (20 prints) is exceeded. - force patch detection by interrupting the job as soon as the No. 2 limit is exceeded. - force patch execution as soon as the cumulative VC exceeds 300% (in terms of A4). 1 print = 3 images (YMC only); for image count, 1 for small and 2 for large) 2
17-197
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading PCHINT-1 Contents Use it to change the intervals of 1-patch detection (No. 1 limit) in terms of the number of prints. Use it to change the intervals of patch ATR for the No. 1 limit. A higher limit will increase the downtime intervals, but will affect the density. On the other hand, although a lower limit may decrease the downtime intervals, the density will be more stable. The following triggers are used to initiate patch detection: - when the 1st limit (20 prints) is exceeded, execute patch detection during the last rotation of the ongoing job. - when the 2nd limit is exceed, stop the ongoing job and force patch detection. (1 print = 3 images (YMC only); for image count, 1 for small and 2 for large) The above No. 1 limit may be changes. A higher limit will increase downtime intervals, but will affect density. On the other hand, although a lower limit will decrease downtime intervals, the density will be more stable. By default, the No. 1 limit is 20 prints (60 images), variable between -10 and + 10 (offset). 2 Level
Use it to change the intervals of 1-patch detection (No. 1 limit) in terms of the number of prints. settings range: -10 to +10 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PCHINT-2 Use it to adjust the intervals of patch detection (No. 2 limit). Use it to change the patch ATR intervals for the No. 2 limit. For the triggers used to initiate patch detection, see the list for PCHINT-1. 2 Settings range: -10 to +10 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PCHINT-V Use it to adjust the intervals of patch detection (video counter cumulative count). Use it to adjust the intervals of patch ATR in relation to the video counter cumulative count. 2 Settings range: -10 to +10 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 POT-OFTM Use it to adjust the length of time for the detection of a disconnected connector or to adjust the potential sensor offset. By default, the machine executes idle rotation of the fixing roller for 1 seconce every 30 min to prevent deformation of the roller while in standby. 2
Settings range: 5 to 50 (unit: sec) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 5 FXWRNLVL Use it to set the fixing upper roller alert level. Use it to change the alert level in relation to the fixing counter reading. If you have replaced the fixing roller or the fixing unit with a modified type (with a longer life), use this mode to set the level to suit the new type: i.e., change the setting of the following service mode item to '1' or '2': COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FXRWNLVL. Then, decrease the following setting slightly: COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FX-UP-RL. Make copies to see that the appropriate alert is issued when the counter reaches a specific setting. 2
Settings range 0: 180,000 1: 150,000 2: 120,000 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 FXERRLVL Use it to change the fixing roller error level setting. Use it to change the error level of the fixing counter count. If you have replaced the fixing roller or the fixing unit with a modified type (with a longer life), change the setting to suit the new type. The threshold of the fixing error level will be in relation to the setting made using the following service mode (offset by the level you set here): COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FXWRNLVL. 2 Settings 0: +20,000 1: +40,000 2: +60,000 3: no error (alert retained) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-198
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading PCHINTV2 Contents Use it to change the intervals of post rotation patch detection (video counter count). Use it to change the intervals of patch ATR in relation to the cumulative video count. When a specific video count is exceeded, ATR patch detection is executed during last rotation at the end of the ongoing job, and the limit of the cumulative video count may be changed. A higher limit will increase the downtime intervals, but will affect the density. On the other hand, although a lower limit will decease the downtime intervals, the density will be more stable. 2 Level
Settings range: -10 to +10 (level: 10% duty/A4) default: 200% duty (A4, 5% duty x 40 prints) at time of shipment/RAM initialization: 0 DLV-SPSW Use it to change the delivery speed. Settings 0: delivery speed with priority on FCOT (about.635 mm/sec) 1: delivery speed with priority on paper edge damage avoidance (about.276 mm/sec) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DA-CNCT Use it to select whether to use DA. Selects whether to use DA (software). Setting value 0: Do not use DA. 1: Use DA. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2 - "1 (DA disabled)" should be set to use DA. When DA (hardware) is installed in the main unit but "1" is not set, it cannot be used. - When "1" is set to COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DA-CNCT, "ON" is set to the following items. COPIER>OPTION>BODY>STS-PORT >CMD-PORT >SSH-SW >DA-PORT FXMSG-SW Use it to enable/disable the message that prompts replacement of the fixing assembly. Use it to enable/disable the message on the control panel indication the need for the replacement of the fixing assembly. Normally, the setting is enabled; however, you can disable the message if there is no need for replacement (so that the user will not feel unnecessarily concerned and place a service call). If replacement is necessary, be sure to replace it and enable the setting. Settings 0: do not indicate 1: indicate a time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 G-LUT-SW Use it to change the gamma LUT auto correction function. Use it to adjust the control on image formation in relation to the state (on/off) of the gamma LUT auto correction function. 2
Settings range 0: off (do not apply gamma LUT auto correction) 1: copy T-mic (apply gamma LUT auto correction) 2: copy PDL T-mic (apply gamma LUT auto correction) 3: all (apply gamma a LUT auto correction) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization; 1 G-LUT-SZ Use it to set the gamma LUT auto correction function (smoothing intervals). Use it to set the intervals of smoothing executed as part of the gamma LUT auto correction function.
Settings 0: 30 1: 35 2: 40 3: 45 4: 50 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 TR-BKBND Use it to set the black band used to prevent bending/slipping of the transfer cleaning blade. The machine is designed to deposit a black band to prevent bending/shipping of the transfer charging cleaning blade before cleaning the photosensitive drum immediately after patch detection or before application of the secondary transfer reverse bias.
2 Settings 0: off (default) 1: on only if H/H 2: on at all times at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-199
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading 1TR-ATVC Contents Use it to enable/disable the primary transfer ATVC retry function for initial multiple rotation. Use it to enable/disable the primary transfer ATVC retry function for initial multiple rotation to suit the site of installation. Level
Settings 0: off at all times (spare) 1: on only if H/H (default) 2: on normally at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 CHNG-STS Use it to set a port number for the status connection at TUIF over TCP/IP. Setting range 1 to 65535 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 20010] CHNG-CMD Use it to set a port number for the command connection at TUIF over TCP/IP. Setting range 1 to 65535 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 20000] FXLW-TMP Use it to change the control temperature for the pressure roller. Settings 0: 170 deg C(default) 1: 160 deg C 2: 150 deg C at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 GLUTLV-Y/M/K for study by design dpt
GLUTLV-C
Use it to adjust the slope as part of the gamma LUT auto correction mechanism of the controller when improvement is needed to correct coarseness of images read of a cyan solid original.
Settings 0: 2.4 1: 2.0 2: 1.6 3: 1.2 4: 0 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 GLUTMX-Y/M/C/K Use it to adjust the maximum correction slope as part of the gamma LUT auto correction mechanism of the controller when improvement is needed to correct coarseness of images read of a cyan solid original.
Settings 0: 2.4 1: 2.2 2: 2.0 3: 1.8 4: 1.6 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2 GLUTOF-Y/M/C/K for study by design dpt
MEAP-DSP
Use it to select whether to switch the MEAP screen to the standard screen. Setting value 0: Switch the MEAP screen to the standard screen. 1: Do not switch the MEAP screen to the standard screen. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2
ANIM-SW
Use it to select whether to display full screen for a jam/alarm when operating the MEAP application. Setting value 0: Display full screen. 1: Do not display full screen. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2 The following screens are displayed as exceptions even when "1" is set. - Serviceman error screen - Address list import screen - BBS screen - Screen for errors in manual feed paper size - Screen for the setting of manual feed paper - Screen for the setting of inserter paper
17-200
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading HDD-TMP Contents Use it to set a level of temperature to serve as a reference for detecting a low temperature error. Settings 0 to 30 deg C at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2 HDD-TIM Use it to set the time interval allowed before a low temperature error is identified Settings 0 to 200 min at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 10 2 Level
HDD-SW
MEAP-SSL
Use it to set an HTTPS port for MEAP. Sets a port for the HTTPS server to use SSL in the MEAP HTTP. 2 Setting range 1 to 65535 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 8443]
BG-CTR
Controlling correction of coarse image on solid area Controlling image formation to be corrected as well as ON/OFF of the function to correct coarse image on solid area
Settings 0: OFF (Coarse image on solid area is not corrected.) [Factory default/After RAM is cleared] 1: Copy T-mic (Coarse image on solid are is corrected.) 2: Copy PDL T-mic (Coarse image on solid are is corrected.) 3: ON (Coarse image on solid are is corrected on the whole.)
BG-SET
MIX-FLG
Use it to select an image field flag (for image synthesis). Selects the image processing method which is performed when a combined image cannot be compressed at a certain compression ratio on the main controller side. Setting value 0: Image processing equivalent to the PDL character mode 1: Image processing equivalent to the PDL photo mode 2: Image processing equivalent to the SCAN character mode 3: Image processing equivalent to the SCAN photo mode [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2
LPD-PORT
Use it to set an LPD port number Setting range 1 to 65535 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 515] Reference An LPD port is a network port for TCP/IP connection when printing is performed via network. 2
BL-GM
Use it to select gamma table for bookbinding and image synthesis. Selects gamma table to be used when a copy job for bookbinding/image synthesis and other job (PDL, etc.) are mixed. Setting value 0: 1: [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2
ORG-A4R
Use it to set a special paper size that is not otherwise recognized by the DF Setting value 0:A4-R 1:FOLIO-R [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0]
17-201
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>BODY Subheading PDF-RDCT Contents Use it to enable/disable reduction for transfer of received data (in PDF). Level
Use it to indicate whether or not to reduce data received in fax/i-fax mode for transmission as e-mail/file PDF data. 0: disables reduction of received data for transfer as PDF 1: enables reduction of received data for transfer as PDF
2. USER
T-17-181 COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading COPY-LIM Use it to change the upper limit on the copy count. Settings range 1 to 9999 (prints) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 9999 SLEEP Use it to enable/disable the sleep function. Settings 0: OFF 1: ON at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 Use 'timer setup' of user mode to set the sleep function. COUNTER 1 Use it to set soft counter 1 appearing on the User Mode screen. 101: total 1 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 (fixed and cannot be changed) COUNTER 2 Use it to have the counter type of soft counter 2 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 108 COUNTER 3 Use it to change the counter type of soft counter 3 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 232 COUNTER 4 Use it to change the counter type of soft counter 4 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars my be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 324 COUNTER 5 Use it to change the counter type of soft counter 5 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 COUNTER 6 Use it to change the counter type of soft counter 6 displayed on the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. The counter particulars may be changed to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 1 Settings range 0 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1 1 Contents Level
Software Counter Specifications 000s: remote copy 100s: total 200s: copy 300s: print 400s: copy + print
17-202
Chapter 17 500s: scan 600s: box 700s: reception print 800s: report print Guide to the Table yes: counter valid on the machine 4C: full color mono: mono color (YMC/RGB; ageing effect mono) Bk: black mono L: large-size (larger than B4) S: small-size (B4 and smaller) counter particular 1, 2: indicates the count of large-size sheets; B4 may be counted as large-size if so set in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>USER>BR_L_CONT). copy: local copy + remote copy copy A: local copy + remote copy + box print print: PDL print + report print + box print print A: PDL port + report print scan: black-and-white scan + color scan
T-17-182 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 000 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 no indication remote copy (full color 1) remote copy (full color o2) remote copy (mono color 1) remote copy (mono color 2) remote copy (black-and-white 1) remote copy (black-and-white 2) remote copy (full color; large) remote copy (full color; small) remote copy (mono color; large) remote copy (mono color; small) remote copy (black-and-white; large) remote copy (black-and-white; small) remote copy (full color + mono color; large) remote copy (full color + mono color; small) remote copy (full color + mono color 2) remote copy (full color + mono color 1) remote copy (full color; large; double-sided) remote copy (full color; small; double sided) remote copy (mono color; large; double-sided remote copy (mono color; small; double-sided) remote copy (black-and-white; large; double-sided) remote copy (black-and-white; small; doubles-sided) Counter particulars
T-17-183 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 101 102 103 104 105 106 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 total 1 total 2 total (large) total (small) total (full color 1) total (full color 2) total (black-and-white 1) total (black-and-white 2) total (mono color; lag) total (mono color; small) total (black-and-white; large) total (black-and-white; small) total 1 (double-sided) total 2 (double-sided) large-size (double-sided) Small-size (double-sided) total (mono color 1) total (mono color 2) total (full color; large) total (full color; small) total (full color + mono color; large) total (full color + mono color; small) total (full color + mono color 2) Counter particulars
17-203
Chapter 17
Sport yes No. 125 total (full color + mono color 1) T-17-184 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Sport 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 273 copy (total 1) copy (total 2) copy (large) copy (small) copy A (total 1) copy A (total 2) copy A large) copy A (small) local copy (total 1) local copy (total 2) local copy (large) local copy (small) remote copy (total 1) remote copy (total 2) remote copy (large) remove copy (small) copy (full color 1) copy (full color 2) copy (mono color 1) copy (mono color 2) copy (black-and-white 1) copy (black-and-white 2) copy (full color; large) copy (full color; small) copy (mono color; large) copy (mono color; small) copy (black-and-white; large) copy (black-and-white; small) copy (full color + mono color; large) copy (full color + mono color; small) copy (full color + mono color; 2) copy (full color mono color; 1) copy (full color; large; double-sided) copy (full color; small; double-sided) copy (mono color; large; double-sided) copy (mono color; small; double-sided) copy (black-and-white; large; double-sided) copy (black-and-white; small; double-sided) copy A (full color 1) copy A (full color 2) copy A (mono color 1) copy A (mono color 2) copy A (black-and-white 1) copy A (back-and-white 2) copy A (full color; large) copy A (full color; small) copy A (mono color; large) co A (mono color; small) copy A (black-and-white; large) copy A (black-and-white; small) copy A (full color + mono color; lag) copy A (full color + mono color; small) copy A (full color + mono color; color 2) copy A (full color + mono color 1) copy A (full color; large; double-sided) copy A (full color; small; double-sided) copy A (mono color; laser; double-sided) copy A (mono color; small; double-sided) copy A (black-and-while; large; double-sided) copy A (black-and-white; small; double-sided) local copy (full color 1) Counter particulars Counter particulars
17-204
Chapter 17
Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Sport 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 local copy (full color 2) local copy (mono color 1) local copy (mono color 2) local copy (black-and-white 1) local copy (black-and-white 2) local copy (full color; large) local copy (full color; small) local copy (mono color; large) local copy (mono color; small) local copy (black-and-white; large) local copy (black-and-white; small) local copy (full color + mono color; small) local copy (full color + mono color; small) local copy (full color +mono color 2) local copy (full color + mono color 1) local copy (full color; large; double-sided) local copy (full color; small; double-sided) local copy (mono color; large; double-sided) local copy (mono color; small; double-sided) local copy (black-and-white; large; double-sided) local copy (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-185 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 339 340 341 342 345 print (total 1) print (total 2) print (large) print (small) print A (total 1) print A (total 2) print A (laser) pint A (small) print full color 1) print (full color 2) print (mono color 1) print (mono color 2) print (black-and-white 1) print (black-and-white 2)) print (full color; large) print (full color small) print (mono color; large) print (mono color; large) print (black-and-white; large) print (black-and-white; small) print (full color + mono color; large) print (full color + mono color; small) print (full color + mono color/2) front (full color + mono color/1) print (full color; large; double-sided) front (full color; small; double-sided) front (mono color; large; double-sided) print (mono color; small; double-sided) print (black-and-while; large; double-sided) print (black-and-white; small; sided-sided) PDL print (total 1) PDL print (total 2) PDL print (large) PDL print (small) PDL print (full color 1) PDL print (full color ) PDL print (black-and-white 1) PDL print (black-and-white 2) PDL print (full color; large) PDL print (full color; small) PDL print (black-and-white; large) Counter particulars Counter particulars
17-205
Chapter 17
Sport yes yes yes yes yes No. 346 351 352 355 356 PDL print (black-and-while; small) PDL print (full color; large; double-sided) PDL print (full color; small; double-sided) PDL print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) PDL print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-186 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 copy + print (full color; large) copy + print full color; small) copy + print (black-and-white; large) copy + print (black-and-white; small) copy + print (black-and-white 2) copy + print (black-and-white 1) copy print (full color + mono color; large) copy + print (full color + mono color; small) copy + print (full color + mono color/2) copy + print (full color + mono color/1) copy + print (large) copy + print (small) copy + print (2) copy + print (1) copy + print (mono color; large) copy + print (mono color; small) copy + print (full color; large; double-sided) copy + print (full color; small; double-sided) copy + print (mono color; large; double-side) copy + print (mono color; small; double-sided) copy + print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) copy + print (black-and-white; small double-sided) Counter particulars Counter particulars
T-17-187 Sport yes yes yes No. 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 scan (total 1) scan (total 2) scan A(large) scan (large) black-and-white scan (total 1) black-and-white scan (total 2) black-and-white scan (large) black-and-white scan (small) color scan (total 1) color scan (total 2) color scan (large) color scan (small) Counter particulars
T-17-188 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 box print (total 1) box print (total 2) box print (large) box print (small) box print (full color 1) box print (full color 2) box print (mono color 1) box print (mono color 2) box print (black-and-white 1) box print (black and-white 2) box print (full color; large) box print (full color; small) box print (mono color; large) box print (mono color; small) box print (lack-and-white; large) Counter particulars
17-206
Chapter 17
Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 box print (black-and-white; small) box print (full color + color; large) box print (full color + mono color; small) box print (full color + mono color 2) box print (full color + mono color 1) box print (full color; large; double-sided) box print (full color; small; double-sided) box print (mono color; large; double-sided) box print (mono color; small; double-sided) box print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) box print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-189 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 reception print (total 1) reception print (total 2) reception print (large) reception print (small) reception print (full color 1) reception print (full color 2) reception print (grayscale 1) reception print (grayscale 2) reception print (black-and-white 1) reception print (black-and-white 2) reception print (full color; large) reception print (full color; small) reception print (grayscale; large) reception print (grayscale; small) reception print (black-and-white; large) reception print (black-and-white; small) reception print (full color + grayscale; large) reception print (full color + grayscale; small) reception print (full color + grayscale 2) reception print (full color + grayscale 1) reception print (full color; large; double-sided) reception print (full color; small; double-sided) reception print (grayscale; large: double-sided) reception print (grayscale; small; double-side) reception print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) reception print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) Counter particulars Counter particulars
T-17-190 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 report print (total 1) report print (total 2) report print (large) report print (small) report point (full color 1) report print (full color 2) report print (grayscale 1) report print (grayscale 2) report print (lack-and-white 1) report print (black-and-white 2) report print (full color large) report print (full color; small) report print (grayscale; large) report print (grayscale; small) report print (black-and-white; large) report print (black-and-white; small) report print (full color + grayscale; large) report print (full color + grayscale; small) report print (full color + grayscale 2) report print (full color + grayscale 1) report print (full color; large; double-sided) Counter particulars
17-207
Chapter 17
Sport yes yes No. 822 823 824 825 826 Counter particulars report print (full color; small; double-sided) report print (grayscale; large; double-sided) report print (grayscale: small; double-sided) report print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) report print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-191 Sport yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes No. 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 copy scan total 1 (color) copy scan total 1 (black-and-white) copy scan total 2 (color) copy scan total 2 (black-and-white) copy scan total 3 (color) copy scan total 3 (black-and-white) copy scan total 4 (color) copy scan total 4 (black-and-while) local copy scan (black-and-white) local copy scan (black-and-while) remote copy scan (color) remote copy scan (black-and-white) transmission scan total 1 (color) transmission scan total 1 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 2 (color) transmission scan total 2 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 3 (color) transmission scan total 3 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 4 (color) transmission scan total 4 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 5 (color) transmission scan total 6 (black-and-white transmission scan total 6 (color) transmission scan total 6 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 7 (color) transmission scan total 7 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 8 (color) transmission scan total 8 (black-and-white) universal transmission scan total (color) universal transmission scan total (black-and-while) box scan (color) box scan (black-and-while) remote scan (color) remote scan (black-and-white) transmission scan/fax (color) transmission scan/fax (black-and-white) transmission scan/i-fax (color) transmission scan/i fax (black-and-white) transmission scan/e-mail (color) transmission scan/e-mail (black-and-white) transmission scan/FTP (color) transmission scan/FTP (black-and-white) transmission scan/SMB (color) transmission scan/SMB (black-and-white) transmission scan/IPX (color) transmission scan/IPX (black-and-while) transmission scan/detach base (color) transmission scan/detach base (black-and-white) transmission scan/local print (color) transmission scan/local print (black-and-white) transmission scan/box (color) transmission scan/box (black-and-white) Counter particulars
17-208
Chapter 17
T-17-192 COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading CONTROL Contents Use it to impose a limit on the use of a control card for a PDL job. Settings 0: do not limit 1: limit at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 B4-L-CNT For soft counters 1 through 6, use it to specify whether B4 should be counted as large-size or small-size. 1 Level
Settings 0: small-size 1: large-size at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 COPY-JOB Disabling Copy Job Reservation When the Card Reader/Coin Vendor Is in Use Use it when it is necessary to prevent multiple jobs as when the CCX or coin robot is in use.
Settings 0: permit copy job reservation 1: prohibit copy job reservation at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 TAB-ROT Use it to enable/disable 180-deg rotation of a landscape image for a tab sheet. Settings 0: do not rotate 1: rotate at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PR-PSESW Use it to select whether to display the print pause function switch. Selects whether to display the print pause function switch in the user screen. Setting value 0: Print pause function not available (The print pause function switch is not displayed in the user screen.) 1: Print pause function available (The print pause function switch is displayed in the user screen.) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] IDPRN-SW Use it to switch over job types for the group control counter. Settings 0: count in PRINT category: box print, report print, SEND local print PDL print 1: count in PRINT category: report print, end local print, PDL print at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CPRT-DSP Use it to enable/disable indication of the count button on the Sales Counter Check screen. Settings 0: do not indicate 1: indicate at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 CNT-SW Use it to switch over counter indication items. Counters in Question At the time of the setting value 0 101 total 1 108 total (black-and-white 1) 232 copy (full color + mono color; 1) 324 print (full color + mono color; 1) At the time of the setting value 1 102 total 2 231 copy (full color + mono color; 2) 148 total A (full color + mono color; 2) 222 copy (black-and-white 2) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 REMPNL Use it to select whether to use the remote panel function. Selects whether to use the remote panel function, which enables a user to operate a copier using a PC in the same manner as the LCD panel Setting value 0: Do not use remote panel function. 1: Use remote panel function. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] BCONT-AST Use it to switch over counter indication items. Counters in Question Settings 0: count box print job as PDL job 1: count box print job as copy job at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-209
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading DFLT-CPY Use it to set the default color mode of COPY. Settings 0: ACS 1: full color 2: black-and-white JPN (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) UL (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) EUR (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) other (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) DFLT-BOX Use it to set the default color mode for BOX. Settings 0: ACS 1: full color 2: black-and-white JPN (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) UL (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) EUR (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) others (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 2) DOC-REM Use it to set the message promoting for the removal of originals. Settings 0: do not indicate 1: indicate at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 COUNTER7 Use it to select the counter type to be displayed for Counter 7 in the user mode. Sets the number for the 7th counter displayed for the counter check in the user mode. Setting range 1 to 26, 39, 41 to 45 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0 (not displayed)] COUNTER8 Use it to select the counter type to be displayed for Counter 8 in the user mode. Sets the number for the 8th counter displayed for the counter check in the user mode Setting range 1 to 26, 39, 41 to 45 [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0 (not displayed)] LDAP-SW Use it to select the searching condition for LDAP search. Sets the matching condition to retrieve email addresses or fax numbers from the LDAP server. 1 1 1 Contents Level
Setting value 0: Includes the following condition 1: Does not include the following condition 2: Is equal to the following condition 3: Is not equal to the following condition 4: Starts with the following condition 5: Ends with the following condition [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 4] Reference When the LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server is registered, email addresses or fax numbers can be retrieved from the LADP server. The email addresses or fax numbers obtained can be registered in the address/number list, etc
FROM-OF
Use it to select whether to delete "from-address" used for email sending. Setting value 0: Do not delete "from-address". 1: Delete "from-address". [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 1
SPEAKER
Use it to select whether to display the "Speaker / Headphone Switching" button in the voice setting (user mode). Setting value 0: Do not display the button. 1: Display the button. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0]
17-210
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading FILE-OF Contents Use it to select whether to prohibit transmission to file addresses. Selects whether to prohibit transmission to file addresses by prohibiting input of file addresses using the address book. Setting value 0: Do not prohibit transmission to file addresses. 1: Prohibit transmission to file addresses. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 1 Reference - To change this item from 0 to 1 when a file address is registered, it is desirable to manually delete the file address. (Otherwise, the file address can be used.) - When "1" is set, it is not allowed to import (register) a file address from RUI or equipment information distribution. Therefore, in order to delete all the addresses at once, set "1" and execute "overwriting import (deletes the current data and then registers the imported data)" for the file exported by RUI or equipment information distribution. MAIL-OF Use it to select whether to prohibit transmission to email addresses. Selects whether to prohibit email transmission by prohibiting input of email addresses using the address book. Setting value 0: Do not prohibit transmission to email addresses. 1: Prohibit transmission to email addresses. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 1 Reference - To change this item from 0 to 1 when an email address is registered, it is desirable to manually delete the email address. (Otherwise, the email address can be used.) - When "1" is set, it is not allowed to import (register) an email address from RUI or equipment information distribution. Therefore, in order to delete all the addresses at once, set "1" and execute "overwriting import (deletes the current data and then registers the imported data)" by RUI or equipment information distribution. IFAX-OF Use it to select whether to prohibit transmission to I Fax addresses. Selects whether to prohibit transmission to I Fax addresses by prohibiting input of I Fax addresses using the address book. Setting value 0: Do not prohibit transmission to I Fax addresses. 1: Prohibit transmission to I Fax addresses. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 1 Reference - To change this item from 0 to 1 when an I Fax address is registered, it is desirable to manually delete the I Fax address. (Otherwise, the I Fax address can be used.) - When "1" is set, it is not allowed to import (register) an I Fax address from RUI or equipment information distribution. Therefore, in order to delete all the addresses at once, set "1" and execute "overwriting import (deletes the current data and then registers the imported data)" by RUI or equipment information distribution. SIZE-DET Use it to enable/disable the original size detection function. Level
Settings 0: off (the scanner will not go on when the copyboard cover is opened/closed thus not blinding the user) 1: on (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) DATE-DSP Use it to change the date notation. Settings 0: YYMM/DD 1: DD/MM'YY 2: MM/DD/YY MB-CCV Use it to limit access to the mail box function (control card). Settings 0: do not limit 1: limit at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 TRY-STP Use it to enable/disable output when the tray becomes full. Settings 0: normal mode (interrupted when the finisher tray becomes full) 1: interrupt in relation to stack height at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 MF-LG-ST Use it to enable/disable the indication of the Extra length mode. Settings 0: normal 1: indicate key on extension mode screen at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CNT-DISP Use it to enable/disable the indication of the serial number in response to a press on the Counter Check key. Settings 0: indicate serial number 1: do not indicate serial number at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-211
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading NW-SCAN Use it to enable/disable the network scan function. Settings 0: no not permit 1: permit (invalid in the absence of a UFR or open I/F board) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 HDCR-DSP Use it to enable/disable the indication of HDD initialization mode (user mode). Settings 0: do not indicate and do not initialize 1: initialize once using 0s 2: initialize once using random data 3: initialize 3 times using random data at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 JOB-INVL Use it to set the intervals of interrupt jobs. Settings 0: standard (permit the next job) 1: permit output of next job after delivery of last page of interrupt job 2: permit output of next job after delivery of last page of all jobs at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 LGSW-DSP Use it to enable/disable indication of 'log display on/off' on the User Mode screen. Settings 0: do not indicate 'log display on/off'. 1: indicate 'log display on/off' at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PCL-COPY Use it to set the PCL command COPIES (Meru/Pinatubo/Hood compatibility mode). 2 2 Contents Level
Setting mode 0: control page by page according to COPIES command setting on pages 1: Meru/Pinatubo/Hood compatible mode 2 to 65535: space at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PRJOB-CP Use it to set the CCV count pulse for reception/report output. Settings 0: do not generate count pulse 1: generate count pulse at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DPT-ID-7 Registering a department ID and inputting a 7-digit code for authentication. Setting Values 0: As before [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear] 1: Inputting a 7-digit code Reference Information Support for Siemens RUI-RJT Disconnecting the HTTP port when three authentication failures from RUI are recognized. Setting Values 0: Invalid [Initial setting upon shipment/value after RAM clear] 1: Valid Reference Information Support for Siemens SND-RATE Use it to set the rate of compression when SEND-RATE is set to 'high' Settings 0: 1/16 1: 1/20 2: 1/24 A higher rate of compression will lower the image quality. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CTM-S06 Use it to remove the password from an export file (file transmission address). range of settings 0:do not remove password from export file 1:remove password from export file. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-212
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading FREG-SW Contents Use it to select whether to display the free register section for the "SEND" MEAP counter. Setting value 0: Do not display the free register section. 1: Display the free register section. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] IFAX-SZL Use it to select whether to restrict the transmission size for IFAX transmission. (only when the transmission is not performed via a server) 2 Level
Setting value 0: Enable the restriction. (when transmission is performed via a server / when transmission is not performed via a server) 1: Disable the restriction. (only when transmission if not performed via a server) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 1]
IFAX-PGD
Use it to select whether to allow the transmission in the separation mode per page. (only when the data size exceeds the threshold.) Select whether to allow the transmission in the separation mode per page when the transmission data exceeds the threshold in the IFAX simple mode. Setting value 0: Do not allow the separation transmission per page. 1: Allow the separation transmission per page. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2
In the page separation transmission mode, the order of pages on the receiver side is not guaranteed. There is also a possibility that another reception job might be inserted between the pages, which must be explained to a user before setting this item. MEAPSAFE Use it to select the MEAP safe mode. Setting value 0: Ordinary mode 1: Safe mode [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference In the safe mode, you can obtain a log for fault investigation by stopping the MEAP application FXEX-CNT Use it to set the temperature control hysterisis width for the outside heating roller. The outside heating roller of the machine has a low heating capacity and tends to go on and off frequently; this mode is offered to prevent flickering.
Settings range 0: hysterisis width = -/+1 deg C (225 deg C -/+1 deg C) efault) 1: hysterisis width = -/+2 deg C (224 deg C -/+2 deg C) 2: hysterisis width = -/+3.5 deg C (222.5 deg C -/+3.5 deg C) 3: hysterisis width = -/+4.5 deg C (221.5 deg C -/+4.5 deg C) [at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0] PTJAM-RC Use it to select whether to make the machine recover from the PDL jam. Selects whether to make the machine recover from the PDL jam and perform printing. Setting value 0: Do not make the machine recover from the jam. 1: Make the machine recover from the jam. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 1] Reference Use it when you don't want to print the receipt or pay statement, etc. for a jam recovery after it was printed halfway. SLP-SLCT Use it to select whether to use the BW2 (CL1) Network application. Selects whether to make the machine enter the 1w(2w)Sleep mode so that the BW2 (CL1) Network application can be also used for BW3 (CL2). Setting value 0: Do not use the BW2 (CL1) network application. (The machine enters the 1w(2w)Sleep mode.) 1: Use the BW2 (CL1) network application. (The machine does not enter the 1w(2w)Sleep mode.) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference In order to make the BW3 (CL2) machine in the 1w(2w)Sleep recover via the network, it is necessary to receive a specific packet. Since the BW2 (CL1) machine does not require receipt of a specific packet, the BW3 (CL2) machine cannot recover from the 1w(2w)Sleep mode by the network application (such as NSA) used by the BW2 (CL1) machine. Therefore, it is necessary to make the machine not to enter the 1w(2w)Sleep mode when using the BW2 (CL1) application.
17-213
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>USER Subheading PS-MODE Use it to set a PS conversion mode. Sets a PS conversion mode. Setting value 0: No conversion 1: Conversion by PS Type3 Halftone command (opposite dither order) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] Reference When BW2 was upgraded to BW3, major changes were made in the image processing method for PDL (PS), and the image printed by BW3 might be substantially different from the one printed by BW2. Therefore, the same image processing method as BW2 is provided by BW3. 2C-CT-SW Use it to select the color counter (2-color mode only). Selects whether to use the full-color counter or mono-color counter for 2-color mode setting. Setting value 0: Use mono-color counter. 1: Use full-color counter. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 1] Reference 2-color printing: 1 color of R, G, B, C, M, Y + Bk Mono-color: 1 color only Contents Level
CNCT-RLZ
Connection Serialization Switch Use it to enable/disable the connection serialization function. 0:off (disables connection serialization function) 1:on (enables connection serialization function) Remarks: Connection Serialization Function It has been designed to support the job grouping function of Version 1.0 of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition. The iR Series of machines (MFPs) are capable of assigning connections, and it is important that there be a mechanism preventing multiple connections on the part of the device for the job grouping function to operate correctly. Specifically, once the job data of a connection is received, that of another will not be accepted (received) until the end of the ongoing reception (so as to prevent reordering of jobs). The term "connection" refers to a connection established with multiple hosts (e.g., PCs) on a network. Job Grouping Function It has been designed as a function of Version 1.0 of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition, and serves to prevent a job coming from another PC in a group job (in which multiple jobs are transmitted within a single session).
DOM-ADD
Use it to select whether to add the destination domain name for email transmission. Selects whether to add the domain name (ex. @canon.co.jp), which was set by the user mode, to the account input for email transmission. Setting value 0: Do not add the domain name. 1: Add the domain name. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] <When you send email to xxx@canon.co.jp> Set "canon.co.jp" as the domain name by the user mode, and set "1" to <DOM-ADD>. When you input xxx, the registered domain name is added for email transmission.
3. CST
T-17-193 COPIER>OPTION>CST Subheading P-SZ-C1 Use it to select and register paper size for the cassette 1. Settings 0: A4 1: B5 2: LTR at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 P-SZ-C2 Use it to select and register paper size for the cassette 2. Settings 0: A4 1: B5 2: LTR at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Contents Level
17-214
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>CST Subheading U1-NAME to U4NAME Contents Use it to enable/disable the indication of the paper name identified with a paper size group (U1 through U4). Level
Settings 0: indication on touch panel as U1, U2, U3, U4. 1: indicate name of paper set in service mode (CST-U1, U2, U3, U4) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CST-U1/U2/U3/U4 Use it to select the names of paper sizes to be used in paper size groups. By registering a special size for U1, U2, U3, or U4, you can cause the machine to treat the paper in question as special size paper.
4. ACC
T-17-194 COPIER>OPTION>ACC Subheading COIN Use it set up the coin vendor mechanism. Use it to permit/not permit access to coin vendor mode. Settings 0: coin vendor not used (control card permitted; no charging) 1: coin vendor (charging used) 2: remote counter (charging used) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DK-P Use it to set the size of paper used in the paper deck (optional). Settings 0: A4 1: not supported 2: LTR at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 CARD-SW Use it to set the UI screen when switching the coin vendor mechanism. Settings 0: coin 1: card 2: coin and card at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 STPL-LMT Use it to put a limit to the number of sheets for saddle binding. Settings 0: 5 sheets (w/o white band) 1: 10 sheets (w/o white band) 2: 10 sheets (w/ white band) 3: 15 sheets (w/ white band) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 3 SC-TYPE Use it to change the type of machine (self copy/coin vendor machine). This mode is effective only when the machine soft ID is "Lawson." Use it to switch between a Lawson model and a self copy model. 1 1 Contents Level
2 Settings 0: Lawson model 1: general self copy model at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0
17-215
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>ACC Subheading CC-SPSW Contents Use it to set the control card (CC IV/CCV) I/F support level. Level
Settings 0: do not support 1: support (priority on speed) 2: support (priority on upper limit) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 - if set to '1' , priority on the maintenance of the engine performance; as such, the upper limit may not be properly imposed. - if set to '2' , on the other hand, the upper limit may properly be imposed, but the engine performance may decrease depending on the source of paper.
5. INT-FACE
T-17-196 COPIER>OPTION>INT-FACE Subheading AP-OPT Contents Use it to permit or not permit printing from PrintMe (application installed to the PS print server unit). Level
Settings 0: enable if for specific account 1: enable for all accounts 2: reject printing (print only from specific group ID) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 AP-ACCNT Use it to set group ID for print jobs (CPCA) from PrintMe (application installed on PS print server unit).
2 Settings 0 to 9999999 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0) AP-CODE Use it to set a pass code for print jobs (CPCA) for PrintMe (application installed on PS print sever unit). Code settings 0 to 9999999 (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 2
17-216
Chapter 17
COPIER>OPTION>INT-FACE Subheading NWCT-TM Contents Use it to set time for timeout to maintain network connection. (KeepAlive) Sets how long the network can be connected between the application in the PC and the iR main unit. (KeepAlive) Setting range 1 to 5 (Unit: minutes) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 5] Reference After the time specified here elapses, the network is disconnected. When the network cannot be connected due to some reason, this can reduce downtime of the main unit. Level
6. LCNS-TR
T-17-197 COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR Subheading ST-SEND Contents Use it to select whether to display the installation status of the SEND function when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: SEND function not available (not installed) 1: SEND function available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-SEND Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the SEND function when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the SEND function in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits OF-SEND Use it to select whether to use the SEND function when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Do not use SEND function. 1: Use SEND function. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] ST-ENPDF Use it to display the installation status of the SEND encryption PDF transmission function when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: SEND encryption PDF transmission function not available (not installed) 1: SEND encryption PDF transmission function available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-ENPDF Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the SEND encryption PDF transmission function when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the SEND encryption PDF transmission function in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits OF-ENPDF Use it to select whether to use the SEND encryption PDF transmission function when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Do not use SEND encryption PDF transmission function. 1: Use SEND encryption PDF transmission function. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] ST-SPDF Use it to select whether to display the installation status of the SEND searchable PDF transmission function when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: SEND searchable PDF transmission function not available (not installed) 1: SEND searchable PDF transmission function available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-SPDF Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the SEND searchable PDF transmission function when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the SEND searchable PDF transmission function in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits OF-SPDF Use it to select whether to use the SEND searchable PDF transmission function when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Do not use SEND searchable PDF transmission function. 1: Use SEND searchable PDF transmission function. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2 2 2 2 2 2 Level
17-217
Chapter 17
ST-EXPDF Use it to display the installation status of the PDF expansion kit (encryption PDF + searchable PDF) when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: PDF expansion kit not available (not installed) 1: PDF expansion kit available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-EXPDF Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the PDF expansion kit (encryption PDF + searchable PDF) when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the PDF expansion kit (encryption PDF + searchable PDF) in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits OF-EXPDF Use it to select whether to use the PDF expansion kit (encryption PDF + searchable PDF) when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Do not use PDF expansion kit. 1: Use PDF expansion kit. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] ST-LIPS Use it to display the LIPS installation status when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: LIPS not available (not installed) 1: LIPS available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-LIPS Use it to obtain the LIPS transfer license key when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use LIPS in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits OF-LIPS Use it to select whether to use LIPS when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Do not use LIPS. 1: Use LIPS. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] ST-PDFDR Use it to display the installation status of the PDF Direct when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: PDF Direct not available (not installed) 1: PDF Direct available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-PDFDR Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the PDF Direct when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the PDF Direct in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits OF-PDFDR Use it to select whether to use the PDF Direct when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Do not use PDF Direct. 1: Use PDF Direct. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] ST-SCR Use it to display the installation status of the encryption secure print when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Encryption secure print not available (not installed) 1: Encryption secure print available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-SCR Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the encryption secure print when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the encryption secure print in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits OF-SCR Use it to select whether to use the encryption secure print when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Do not use encryption secure print. 1: Use encryption secure print. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
17-218
Chapter 17
ST-HDCLR Use it to display the installation status of the HDD encryption / HDD complete deletion when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: HDD encryption / HDD complete deletion not available (not installed) 1: HDD encryption / HDD complete deletion available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-HDCLR Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the HDD encryption / HDD complete deletion when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the HDD encryption / HDD complete deletion in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits OF-HDCLR Use it to select whether to use the HDD encryption / HDD complete deletion when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Do not use HDD encryption / HDD complete deletion. 1: Use HDD encryption / HDD complete deletion. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] ST-BRDIM Use it to display the installation status of BarDIMM when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: BarDIMM not available (not installed) 1: BarDIMM available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-BRDIM Use it to obtain the transfer license key for BarDIMM when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use BarDIMM in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits OF-BRDIM Use it to select whether to use BarDIMM when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Do not use BarDIMM. 1: Use BarDIMM. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] ST-VNC Use it to display the VNC installation status when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: VNC not available (not installed) 1: VNC available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-VNC Use it to obtain the transfer license key for VNC when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use VNC in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits OF-VNC Use it to select whether to use VNC when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Do not use VNC. 1: Use VNC. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] ST-WEB Use it to display the installation status of the WEB browser when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: WEB browser not available (not installed) 1: WEB browser available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-WEB Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the WEB browser when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the WEB browser in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits OF-WEB Use it to select whether to use the WEB browser when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Do not use WEB browser. 1: Use WEB browser. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
17-219
Chapter 17
ST-HRPDF Use it to display the installation status of the high-compression PDF when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: High-compression PDF not available (not installed) 1: High-compression PDF available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-HRPDF Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the high-compression PDF when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the high-compression PDF in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits OF-HRPDF Use it to select whether to use the high-compression PDF when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Do not use high-compression PDF. 1: Use high-compression PDF. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] ST-PS-K Use it to display the installation status of the PS Kanji Kit when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: PS Kanji Kit not available (not installed) 1: PS Kanji Kit available (installed) [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] TR-PS-K Use it to obtain the transfer license key for the PS Kanji Kit when the transfer function is set invalid. Obtains the transfer license key to use the PS Kanji Kit in other MFP machine. Setting value Transfer license key: 24 digits OF-PS-K Use it to select whether to use the PS Kanji Kit when the transfer function is set invalid. Setting value 0: Do not use PS Kanji Kit. 1: Use PS Kanji Kit. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2 2 2 2

0005-1261
T-17-198 FEEDER>OPTION Subheading SL-DBL Use it to enable/disable ADF high-speed duplex mode. Settings 0: on (execute high-speed duplex mode; normal, default) 1: off (do not execute high-speed duplex mode; use low-speed duplex mode) at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0 STAMP-SW Use it to specify the presence/absence of the stamp. This mode item indicates the presence/absence of the stamp, and is designed for use by the service person. 1 Contents Level
Settings 0:stamp absent 1:stamp present at time of shipment: factory adjustment value upon RAM initialization: 0
17.6.3 SORTER 17.6.3.1 SORTER List

0005-0565
17-220
Chapter 17
T-17-199 SORTER>OPTION Subheading BLNK-SW Contents Use it to set the margin width (W) for both sides of the crease associated with a saddle stitcher. Settings 0: normal width (5 mm) 1: large width (10 mm) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 1 Level
F-17-44 T-17-200 SORTER>OPTION Subheading MD-SPRTN Use it to set conditions on the finisher function. Setting 0: normal 1: go to bare mode at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1 Contents Level
17.6.4 BOARD 17.6.4.1 BOARD List

0005-0569

T-17-201 BOARD>OPTION MENU-1`4 e Indication of Levels 1 Through 4 for the Printer Setup Menu x
0: do no indicate setting 1: indicate [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization]
SURF-OFF
Use it to enable/disable the UFR board function. setting 0: enable operation as copier model without E code indication in absence of UFR board 1: check presence of UFR board; if absent, indicate E code [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization: 0] 2
17.6.4.2 BOARD List

0011-6098

T-17-202 BOARD>OPTION Subheading MENU-1 to 4 Contents Indication of Levels 1 Through 4 for the Printer Setup Menu 0: do no indicate setting 1: indicate [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization] 2 Level
17-221
Chapter 17
17.7 TEST (Test Print Mode)

0018-0758
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. PG

T-17-203 COPIER>TEST>PG Subheading TYPE Contents Use it to generate test prints. Enter the appropriate type number (test print), and press the Start key. (Be sure to return the setting to '0' after garneting the test print.) Settings 0: image from CCD (normal print) 1 to 3: for R&D 4: 16-gradation 5: full page halftone 6: grid 7 to 9: for R&D 10: MCYBk horizontal stripe 11: for R&D 12: YMCBk 64 gradation 13: for R&D 14: full color 16-gradation 15 to 200: for R&D at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 TXPH Use it to set image mode when generating test prints. Settings 0: T-Mic (w/o end correction) 1: SC1 (w/o end correction) 2: SC2 (w/o end correction) 3: T-Mic (w/ end correction only if Bk) 4: SC2 (w/ end correction if Bk) 5: T-Mic (w/ gamma LUT auto correction) 6: SCI (w/ gamma LUT auto correction) 7: SC2 (w/gamma LUT auto correction) 8: T-Mic (w/ end correction if Bk; w/ gamma LUT auto correction) 9: SC2 (w/ end correction if Bk; w/ gamma LUT auto correction) The setting herein is valid only for test prints. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 THRU Use it to switch over image correction tables when generating test prints. Settings 0: on (use) 1: off (do not use) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DENS-Y/M/C/K Use it to adjust the density of individual colors of a test print (TYPE=5). settings range 0 to 255: a higher setting will make the image darker. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 128 COLOR-Y/M/C/K Use it to set the output of individual colors for individual TYPEs. For example, to generate M in mono, set '1' to 'COLOR-M' and '0' to others. Settings 0: do not generate 1: generate at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 F/M-SW Set it to switch over full color and mono color during PG output. Settings 0: full color output 1: mono color output at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PG-PICK Use it to select the source of paper for test printing. Settings 1: cassette 1 2: cassette 2 3: cassette 3 4: cassette 4 5: side deck 6: manual feeder 7 to 8: not used at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 2-SIDE Use it to set the output mode for test printing. Settings 0: single-sided (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 1: double-sided at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 1 1 1 1 1 Level
17-222
Chapter 17
COPIER>TEST>PG Subheading PG-QTY Use it to set the output mode for test printing. Use it to set the copy count of test printing. 1 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 1 Contents Level
2. NETWORK
T-17-204 COPIER>TEST>NETWORK Subheading PING IPV6-ADR Contents Use it to check the connection between the machine and the network (for TCP/IP only). Destination address of PING (IPv6) Set the destination address of PING issued in "COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING-IP6". IPv6 address Hexadecimal characters (0-9, a-f) and separators (:)(.), 39 characters at maximum It should be a consistent character string as an address of IPv6. Usage PING is issued to check continuity in the network in the IPv6 environment. Set the destination address of IPv6 in this mode. PING-IP6 Issue of PING to the specified IPv6 address Issue PING to the address specified from MFP to check continuity in the network in the IPv6 environment. BML-DISP Use it to select the screen displayed for Bmlinks. Selects whether to display only the device configuration screen without displaying the job condition/history in the system status screen. Setting value 0: Display the ordinary system status screen. 1: Display only the device configuration screen. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2 1 Level 1
1) Turn off the main power switch. 2) Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn on the main power switch. 3) Inform the user's system administrator that the installation of the machine is over, asking him/her to make the appropriate network settings. 4) Inform the user's system administrator that you will be checking the network connector, and find out the remote host address (i.e., the IP address of the PC terminal on the user network) for use in the PING command. 5) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the IP address you obtained in step 4), and press the OK key and then the Start key. - if the connection to the network is normal, 'OK' will appear (to indicate that you may end the work). - if 'NG' has appeared, check the physical connection of the network cable; if normal, go to step 6). If a fault is found in the connection of the network cable, connect it properly, and go back to step 5). 6) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the loopback address* (127.0.0.1), and press the OK key and then the Start key. - if 'NG' is indicated, suspect a fault in the TCP/IP settings; go back to step 3), and check the settings. - if 'OK' is indicated, you may assume that the TCP/IP settings are free of a fault. However, the connection of the network interface board (NIC) or the NIC itself may have a fault; go to step 7) to make a check. *When used, the signal will return before reaching the NIC, thus enabling you to check the TCP/IP settings of the source machine. 7) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the local host address (IP address of the machine), and press the OK key. - if 'NG' is indicated, suspect a fault in the connection of the NIC or the NIC itself; check the connection of the NIC or replace it as necessary. - if 'OK' is indicated, the network settings of the machine and the NIC are free of a fault. On the other hand, the user's network environment is likely to have a fault; communicate the fact to the user's system administrator for action.
<
Display
<
I/O
Test
Counter
> NETWORK
> READY
PING
0.
Result (OK/NG)
IP address input
+/-
OK
F-17-45

0004-9844
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1. PG
17-223
Chapter 17
T-17-205 COPIER>TEST>PG Subheading TYPE Contents Use it to generate test prints. Enter the appropriate type number (test print), and press the Start key. (Be sure to return the setting to '0' after garneting the test print.) Settings 0: image from CCD (normal print) 1 to 3: for R&D 4: 16-gradation 5: full page halftone 6: grid 7 to 9: for R&D 10: MCYBk horizontal stripe 11: for R&D 12: YMCBk 64 gradation 13: for R&D 14: full color 16-gradation 15 to 200: for R&D at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 TXPH Use it to set image mode when generating test prints. Settings 0: T-Mic (w/o end correction) 1: SC1 (w/o end correction) 2: SC2 (w/o end correction) 3: T-Mic (w/ end correction only if Bk) 4: SC2 (w/ end correction if Bk) 5: T-Mic (w/ gamma LUT auto correction) 6: SCI (w/ gamma LUT auto correction) 7: SC2 (w/gamma LUT auto correction) 8: T-Mic (w/ end correction if Bk; w/ gamma LUT auto correction) 9: SC2 (w/ end correction if Bk; w/ gamma LUT auto correction) The setting herein is valid only for test prints. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 THRU Use it to switch over image correction tables when generating test prints. Settings 0: on (use) 1: off (do not use) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DENS-Y/M/C/K Use it to adjust the density of individual colors of a test print (TYPE=5). settings range 0 to 255: a higher setting will make the image darker. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 128 COLOR-Y/M/C/K Use it to set the output of individual colors for individual TYPEs. For example, to generate M in mono, set '1' to 'COLOR-M' and '0' to others. Settings 0: do not generate 1: generate at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 F/M-SW Set it to switch over full color and mono color during PG output. Settings 0: full color output 1: mono color output at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PG-PICK Use it to select the source of paper for test printing. Settings 1: cassette 1 2: cassette 2 3: cassette 3 4: cassette 4 5: side deck 6: manual feeder 7 to 8: not used at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 2-SIDE Use it to set the output mode for test printing. Settings 0: single-sided (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 1: double-sided at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PG-QTY Use it to set the output mode for test printing. Use it to set the copy count of test printing. 1 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Level
2. NETWORK
17-224
Chapter 17
T-17-206 COPIER>TEST>NETWORK Subheading PING Contents Use it to check the connection between the machine and the network (for TCP/IP only). Level 1
1) Turn off the main power switch. 2) Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn on the main power switch. 3) Inform the user's system administrator that the installation of the machine is over, asking him/her to make the appropriate network settings. 4) Inform the user's system administrator that you will be checking the network connector, and find out the remote host address (i.e., the IP address of the PC terminal on the user network) for use in the PING command. 5) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the IP address you obtained in step 4), and press the OK key and then the Start key. - if the connection to the network is normal, 'OK' will appear (to indicate that you may end the work). - if 'NG' has appeared, check the physical connection of the network cable; if normal, go to step 6). If a fault is found in the connection of the network cable, connect it properly, and go back to step 5). 6) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the loopback address* (127.0.0.1), and press the OK key and then the Start key. - if 'NG' is indicated, suspect a fault in the TCP/IP settings; go back to step 3), and check the settings. - if 'OK' is indicated, you may assume that the TCP/IP settings are free of a fault. However, the connection of the network interface board (NIC) or the NIC itself may have a fault; go to step 7) to make a check. *When used, the signal will return before reaching the NIC, thus enabling you to check the TCP/IP settings of the source machine. 7) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the local host address (IP address of the machine), and press the OK key. - if 'NG' is indicated, suspect a fault in the connection of the NIC or the NIC itself; check the connection of the NIC or replace it as necessary. - if 'OK' is indicated, the network settings of the machine and the NIC are free of a fault. On the other hand, the user's network environment is likely to have a fault; communicate the fact to the user's system administrator for action.
<
Display
<
I/O
Test
Counter
> NETWORK
> READY
PING
0.
Result (OK/NG)
IP address input
+/-
OK
F-17-46

0011-6931
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1. PG

T-17-207 COPIER>TEST>PG Subheading TYPE Contents Use it to generate test prints. Enter the appropriate type number (test print), and press the Start key. (Be sure to return the setting to '0' after garneting the test print.) Settings 0: image from CCD (normal print) 1 to 3: for R&D 4: 16-gradation 5: full page halftone 6: grid 7 to 9: for R&D 10: MCYBk horizontal stripe 11: for R&D 12: YMCBk 64 gradation 13: for R&D 14: full color 16-gradation 15 to 200: for R&D at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 Level
17-225
Chapter 17
COPIER>TEST>PG Subheading TXPH Use it to set image mode when generating test prints. Settings 0: T-Mic (w/o end correction) 1: SC1 (w/o end correction) 2: SC2 (w/o end correction) 3: T-Mic (w/ end correction only if Bk) 4: SC2 (w/ end correction if Bk) 5: T-Mic (w/ gamma LUT auto correction) 6: SCI (w/ gamma LUT auto correction) 7: SC2 (w/gamma LUT auto correction) 8: T-Mic (w/ end correction if Bk; w/ gamma LUT auto correction) 9: SC2 (w/ end correction if Bk; w/ gamma LUT auto correction) The setting herein is valid only for test prints. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 THRU Use it to switch over image correction tables when generating test prints. Settings 0: on (use) 1: off (do not use) at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 DENS-Y/M/C/K Use it to adjust the density of individual colors of a test print (TYPE=5). settings range 0 to 255: a higher setting will make the image darker. at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 128 COLOR-Y/M/C/K Use it to set the output of individual colors for individual TYPEs. For example, to generate M in mono, set '1' to 'COLOR-M' and '0' to others. Settings 0: do not generate 1: generate at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 F/M-SW Set it to switch over full color and mono color during PG output. Settings 0: full color output 1: mono color output at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PG-PICK Use it to select the source of paper for test printing. Settings 1: cassette 1 2: cassette 2 3: cassette 3 4: cassette 4 5: side deck 6: manual feeder 7 to 8: not used at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 2-SIDE Use it to set the output mode for test printing. Settings 0: single-sided (at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization) 1: double-sided at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 0 PG-QTY Use it to set the output mode for test printing. Use it to set the copy count of test printing. 1 to 999 at time of shipment/upon RAM initialization: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Contents Level
2. NETWORK
T-17-208 COPIER>TEST>NETWORK Subheading PING BML-DISP Contents Use it to check the connection between the machine and the network (for TCP/IP only). Use it to select the screen displayed for Bmlinks. Selects whether to display only the device configuration screen without displaying the job condition/ history in the system status screen. Setting value 0: Display the ordinary system status screen. 1: Display only the device configuration screen. [Factory setting / After RAM clear: 0] 2 Level 1
1) Turn off the main power switch. 2) Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn on the main power switch. 3) Inform the user's system administrator that the installation of the machine is over, asking him/her to make the appropriate network settings. 4) Inform the user's system administrator that you will be checking the network connector, and find out the remote host address (i.e., the IP address of the PC terminal on the user network) for use in the PING command. 5) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the IP address you obtained in step 4), and press the OK key and then the Start key.
17-226
Chapter 17 - if the connection to the network is normal, 'OK' will appear (to indicate that you may end the work). - if 'NG' has appeared, check the physical connection of the network cable; if normal, go to step 6). If a fault is found in the connection of the network cable, connect it properly, and go back to step 5). 6) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the loopback address* (127.0.0.1), and press the OK key and then the Start key. - if 'NG' is indicated, suspect a fault in the TCP/IP settings; go back to step 3), and check the settings. - if 'OK' is indicated, you may assume that the TCP/IP settings are free of a fault. However, the connection of the network interface board (NIC) or the NIC itself may have a fault; go to step 7) to make a check. *When used, the signal will return before reaching the NIC, thus enabling you to check the TCP/IP settings of the source machine. 7) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. Then, enter the local host address (IP address of the machine), and press the OK key. - if 'NG' is indicated, suspect a fault in the connection of the NIC or the NIC itself; check the connection of the NIC or replace it as necessary. - if 'OK' is indicated, the network settings of the machine and the NIC are free of a fault. On the other hand, the user's network environment is likely to have a fault; communicate the fact to the user's system administrator for action.
<
Display
<
I/O
Test
Counter
> NETWORK
> READY
PING
0.
Result (OK/NG)
IP address input
+/-
OK
F-17-47
17.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode)

0011-6099
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1.TOTAL

T-17-209 COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL Subheading SERVICE1 Contents service total counter 1 The count increases when a sheet is discharged outside the machine. (regardless of paper size, large or small) The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. service total counter 2 The counter increases when a sheet is discharged outside the machine. (if large size, by 2; if small size, by 1) The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. total copy counter The count increases when copying ends and the sheet is discharged outside the machine. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. PDL-PRT PDL print counter The count increases when the sheet is discharged outside the machine/stacked for duplexing during PDL printing in keeping with the charge counter. The count does not increase in the case of a blank sheet. The count is increased by 1 for both large and small sizes. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. FAX-PRT Level
SERVICE2
COPY 1
fax reception print counter The count increases when the sheet is discharged outside the machine/stacked for duplexing during fax reception in keeping with the charge counter. The count does not increase in the case of a blank sheet. The count increases by 1 for both large and small sizes. The reading may be reset. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. remote print counter The count increases when a sheet is discharged outside the machine/stacked for duplexing during remote printing in keeping with the charge counter. The count does not increase in the case of a blank sheet. The count increases by 1 for both large and small sizes. The reading may be reset. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'.
RMT-PRT
17-227
Chapter 17
COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL Subheading BOX-PRT Contents Box print counter The count increases when a sheet is discharged outside the machine/stacked for duplexing during Box printing in keeping with the charge counter. The count does not increase in the case of a blank sheet. The count increases by 1 for both large and small sizes. The reading may be reset. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. report print counter The count increases when the sheet is discharged outside the machine/stacked for duplexing in terms of the number of duplexing copies/prints in keeping with the charge counter. The count does not increase in the case of a blank sheet. The count increases by 1 for both large and small sizes. The reading may be reset. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. Double-Sided Copy/Print Counter It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the machine or stacked for duplexing in keeping with the charge counter, indicating the number of double-sided copies/prints. Double-Sided Copy/Print Counter It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the machine or stacked for duplexing in keeping with the charge counter, indicating the number of double-sided copies/prints. The count does not increase in the case of a blank sheet. The count increases by 1 for both large and small sizes. The reading may be reset. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. Scan Counter The count is increased at tine end of reading in terms of the number of scans. The count increases by 1 for both large and small sizes. The reading may be reset. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. Level
RPT-PRT
2-SIDE
SCAN
2.PICK-UP
T-17-210 COPIER>COUNTER>PICK-UP Subheading C1/2/3/4 Contents cassette 1/2/3/4 pickup total counter Use it to indicate the number of sheets picked up from the cassette 1/2/3/4. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. manual feeder total counter Use it to indicate the number of sheets picked up from the manual feeder unit. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. deck pickup total counter Use it to indicate the number of sheets picked up from the deck. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. duplexing pickup total counter Use it to indicate the number of 2-sided sheets. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. Level 1
MF
1 1 1
DK 2-SIDE
3.FEEDER
T-17-211 COPIER>COUNTER>FEEDER Subheading FEED Contents Use it to indicate the reading of the total counter in terms of the number of sheets picked up by the ADF. Level 1
4.JAM
T-17-212 COPIER>COUNTER>JAM Subheading TOTAL FEEDER SORTER 2-SIDE MF C1/2/3/4 DK copier total jam counter feeder total jam counter finisher total jam counter duplexing unit jam counter manual feed pickup jam counter cassette 1/2/3/4 jam counter side paper deck jam counter Contents Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5.MISC
T-17-213 COPIER>COUNTER>MISC Subheading FIX-WEB Contents fixing cleaning web counter (count retained by DC controller PCB) The count in this mode begins a count, after a web-less preliminary announcement display is displayed. If you have replaced the fixing web, reset the counter reading. Level
17-228
Chapter 17
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC Subheading WST-TNR Contents waste toner counter (count retained by DC controller PCB) If you have disposed of waste toner, reset the counter reading. Level
PRI-CLN
primary charging wire auto cleaning counter (count retained by DC controller PCB) If you have replaced the primary charging wire, reset the counter reading. 1
DV-UNT-K
for the developing unit, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by DC controller PCB) - if you have replaced the developing unit (Bk), reset the counter reading. - if you have replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the reading indicated before the replacement. Do not reset or change the reading of the counter unless the foregoing is true; otherwise, the image density will likely be wrong, causing fogging or damage to the drum by carrier. If you inadvertently reset or changed the reading, replace the developing unit (Bk), and reset the reading once again. The machine's ATR control uses the patch image density measured at specific timing and target value to correct toner supply amounts. The target density on the other hand is also corrected for individual colors and is corrected for Bk based on the cumulative number of images that have been formed (monitored by the counter in question).
DV-CAR-Y/M/C
toner life Y/M/C (count retained by DC controller PCB) YMC Toner Life Reset the setting to '0' when you have replaced the developing assembly; any value may be entered. - if you have replaced the DC control PCB, enter the reading indicated before the replacement. Estimated life 500,000 prints
DRM-PHAS
Use it when shifting the photosensitive drum phase. When the photosensitive drum is used without changing the home position in relation to the drum axis, uneven density at drum intervals or lines can occur in output images. To limit the symptom, shift the phase of the photosensitive drum by 90 deg every specific number of prints. The machine does not shift the phase on its own, and requires the work of the service person. The machine indicates a message to prompt the work on the User and Service Mode screens. Use this mode item to obtain an idea of how much the photosensitive drum has been used so that the work cycle may be predicted. - When the service mode item used in shifting the drum phase is executed (i.e., COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DR-P-ADJ), the counter reading will automatically be reset. - to change the timing at which the message is indicated (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DR-P-ADJ), change the denominator of the setting. By default, the denominator is 200,000 images (Japan) or 100,000 images (outside Japan).
The counter readings used in service mode are grouped into the following 5 types: Type 1 black-and-white S size: count by 1 L size: count by 2 full color S size: count by 4 L size: count by 8 Type 2 black-and-white S size: count by 1 L size: count by 2 full color
17-229
Chapter 17 S size: count by 3 L size: count by 6 Type 3 black-and-white S size: count by 1 L size: count by 2 full color S size: count by 1 L size: count by 2 Type 4 black-and-white full color count by 1 Type 5 black-and-white no count full color count by 1 6.PRDC-1 All the values of the items under COPIER>COUNTER>PRDC-1 are retained by the main controller PCB.
T-17-214 COPIER>COUNTER>PRDC-1 Subheading PRM-GRID PRM-WIRE PO-WIRE PRM-CLN PO-CLN PRM-CLN2 PO-CLN2 Contents for the grid plate, indicates the number of times high voltage has gone on. count type: type 1 for the primary charging wire, indicates the number of times high voltage has gone on. count type: type 1 for the pre-transfer charging wire, indicates the number of times high voltage has gone on. count type: type 1 for the primary charging wire cleaner, indicates the number of times it has been replaced. count type: type 1 for the pre-transfer charging wire cleaner, indicates the number of times it has been replaced. count type: type 1 for the primary charging wire cleaner 2, indicates the number of times it has been replaced. count type: type 1 for the pre-transfer charging wire cleaner2, indicates the number of times it has been replaced. Estimated life: 500,000 image count type: type 1 for the post charging assembly, indicates the number of times it has gone on. count type: type 1 for the primary charging wire, indicates the number of times it has gone on. count type: type 1 for the fixing assembly main thermistor (TH1), indicates the number of times it has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved. count type: type 3 for the fixing assembly thermal switch (TP1), indicates the number of times it has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved. count type: type 3 for the contact thermistor, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. counter type: type 3 for the external heating roller thermistor, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. count type: type 3 for the contact thermal switch, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. counter type: type 3 for the external heating roller thermal switch, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. count type: type 3 for the ozone filter (FM2) fan, indicates the number of times it has gone on. count type: type 1 for the toner filter (FM2), indicates the number of times it has gone on. count type: type 1 Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PO-UNIT PRM-UNIT FIX-TH1
FX-TSW
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
FX-LW-TH FX-EX-TH FX-LW-TS FX-EX-TS OZ-FIL2 TN-FIL2
<DRBL-1> The following is a list of service mode items whose data is retained by the DC controller PCB or the main controller PCB. Main controller PCB TRD-CLN, TR-BLT, TR-ROLL, 2TR-TOLL, TR-STC-H, 1TR-STC, ITB-SUPS, 2TR-INRL, CLN-BLD, CL-SUPS, CL-SCRP, C3-PU-RL, C3-SP-RL, C3-FDRL, C4-PU-RL, C4-SP-RL, C4-FD-RL, LD-PU-RL, LD-SP-RL, LD-FD-RL, RD-PU-RL, RD-SP-RL, RD-FD-RL, M-PU-RL, M-SP-RL, FX-IN-BS, FX-WEB, FX-EX-RL, FX-RW-BS, FX-EX-BS, DLV-UCLW, DLV-LCLW, OZ-FIL5, TN-FIL2, TN-FIL5, FX-SPACE, ITB-SCRP DC controller PCB DV-UNT-C, DV-UNT-Y, DV-UNT-M, FX-UP-RL, FX-LW-RL, If you are replacing the main controller PCB or the DC controller PCB,be sure to exeucte the following service mode item and keep the output stored away: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC>P-PRINT.
17-230
Chapter 17
T-17-215 COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 Subheading LSR-DRV LSR-MTR SCN-MTR TRD-CLN not used not used not used indicates the number of times the transfer drum cleaner has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the intermediate transfer belt unit, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 for the secondary transfer outside roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 for the secondary transfer outsider roller, indicates the number of times high voltage has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 indicates the number of times the secondary transfer static eliminator has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 indicates the number of times the primary transfer static eliminator has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 for the ITB cleaner scoop-up sheet, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the secondary transfer inside roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 indicates the number of times the photosensitive drum has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) not used not used for the cleaner scoop-up sheet, indicates the number of times it has been used in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 for the cleaner scoop-up sheet, indicates the number of times it has been used in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 indicates the number of times the C developing assembly has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 5 indicates the number of times the developing cylinder has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 3 indicates the number of tines the developing assembly roll has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 3 indicates the number of times the Y developing assembly has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 5 indicates the number of times the M developing assembly has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 5 for the edge scraper, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 for the cassette 3 pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the cassette 3 separation roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the cassette 3 feed roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the cassette 4 pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 Contents Level 1 1 1 1
TR-BLT
TR-ROLL
2TR-ROLL
TR-STC-H
1TR-STC
ITB-SUPS
2TR-INRL
1 1 1 1 1
PT-DRM DRM-MTR MAIN-MTR CLN-BLD
CL-SUPS
DV-UNT-C
DVG-CYL
DVG-ROLL
DV-UNT-Y
DV-UNT-M
CL-SCRP
C3-PU-RL
C3-SP-RL
C3-FD-RL
C4-PU-RL
17-231
Chapter 17
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 Subheading C4-SP-RL Contents for the cassette 4 separation roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 of the cassette 4 feed roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the left front deck pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 4 for the left front deck separation roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 4 for the left front deck feed roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 4 for the right front deck pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 4 for the right front deck separation roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 4 for the right front deck feed roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 4 for the manual feed pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the manual feed tray separation roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type; type 3 for the fixing upper roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 2 for the fix lower roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the fixing heat insulating bush, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the fixing web, indicates the number of times it has been taken up. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 Clear in COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB and COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FX-WEB, when webs are exchanged for the external heating roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 2 for the pressure roller heat insulating bush, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the eternal heating roller bush, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the delivery upper separation claw, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controlled PCB) count type: type 3 for the delivery lower separation claw, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the fixing heat discharge fan, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 Level 1
C4-FD-RL
LD-PU-RL
LD-SP-RL
LD-FD-RL
RD-PU-RL
RD-SP-RL
RD-FD-RL
M-PU-RL
M-SP-RL
FX-UP-RL
FX-LW-RL
FX-IN-BS
FX-WEB
FX-EX-RL
FX-LW-BS
FX-EX-BS
DLV-UCLW
DLV-LCLW
OZ-FIL5
TN-FIL2
for the toner filter (FM2), indicates the number of times it has gone on. Estimated life: 250,000 image count type: type 1
TN-FIL5 FX-SPACE ITB-SCRP
not used not used ITB scraper; number of sheets fed Estimated life: 600000 image count type:type 1
1 1
<DRBL-2>
17-232
Chapter 17
T-17-216 COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2 Subheading DF-PU-RL Contents for the ADF pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets it has picked up. (count retained by controller PCB) for both single-sided and double-sided modes, for each single original (not the sides), the count is increased by 1; large and small sizes are not distinguished for the ADF separation pad, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for both single-sided and double-sided modes, for each single original (not the sides), the count is increased by 1: large and small sizes are not distinguished for the DF separation plate, indicates the number of sheets that have been separated. (count retained by controller PCB) for single-sided mode, the count is increased by 1 for each single original; for double-sided mode, the count is increased by 3 (as feeding takes place 3 times for face, back, and idle); large and small sizes are not distinguished not used 1 DF-SP-RL LNT-TAP1 LNT-TAP2 LNT-TAP3 LNT-TAP4 LNT-TAP5 PD-PU-RL PD-SP-RL PD-FD-RL SORT FIN-STPR SADDLE SDL-STPL PUNCH FN-BFFRL for the ADF separation roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. for both single-sided and double-sided modes, the count is increased by every single original (not the sides). for the dust collecting tape A, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the dust collecting tape B, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the dust-collecting tape C, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the dust-collecting tape D, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the dust-collecting tape E, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the paper deck pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the paper deck separation roller, indicates the number of sets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the paper deck feed roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the sort path, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by DC controller PCB) for the stacker assembly, indicates the number of times the stapler has gone on. (count retained by the DC controller PCB) for the saddle path, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by DC controller PCB) for the saddle assembly, indicates the number of times the stapler has gone on. (count retained by DC controller PCB) for the puncher, indicates the number of times it has gone on. (count retained by DC controller PCB) for the buffer roller, indicates the number of times it has gone on. (count retained by DC controller PCB) for every single sheet that passes the buffer roller, the roller goes on once 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Level 1
DF-SP-PD
DF-FD-RL
LNT-TAPE

0004-9845
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN <TOTAL>

T-17-217 COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL Subheading SERVICE1 Contents service total counter 1 The count increases when a sheet is discharged outside the machine. (regardless of paper size, large or small) The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. service total counter 2 The counter increases when a sheet is discharged outside the machine. (if large size, by 2; if small size, by 1) The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. total copy counter The count increases when copying ends and the sheet is discharged outside the machine. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. Level
SERVICE2
COPY
17-233
Chapter 17
COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL Subheading PDL-PRT Contents PDL print counter The count increases when the sheet is discharged outside the machine/stacked for duplexing during PDL printing in keeping with the charge counter. The count does not increase in the case of a blank sheet. The count is increased by 1 for both large and small sizes. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. fax reception print counter The count increases when the sheet is discharged outside the machine/stacked for duplexing during fax reception in keeping with the charge counter. The count does not increase in the case of a blank sheet. The count increases by 1 for both large and small sizes. The reading may be reset. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. remote print counter The count increases when a sheet is discharged outside the machine/stacked for duplexing during remote printing in keeping with the charge counter. The count does not increase in the case of a blank sheet. The count increases by 1 for both large and small sizes. The reading may be reset. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. Box print counter The count increases when a sheet is discharged outside the machine/stacked for duplexing during Box printing in keeping with the charge counter. The count does not increase in the case of a blank sheet. The count increases by 1 for both large and small sizes. The reading may be reset. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. report print counter The count increases when the sheet is discharged outside the machine/stacked for duplexing in terms of the number of duplexing copies/prints in keeping with the charge counter. The count does not increase in the case of a blank sheet. The count increases by 1 for both large and small sizes. The reading may be reset. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. Double-Sided Copy/Print Counter It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the machine or stacked for duplexing in keeping with the charge counter, indicating the number of doublesided copies/prints. Double-Sided Copy/Print Counter It increases its count when paper is delivered outside the machine or stacked for duplexing in keeping with the charge counter, indicating the number of doublesided copies/prints. The count does not increase in the case of a blank sheet. The count increases by 1 for both large and small sizes. The reading may be reset. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. Scan Counter The count is increased at tine end of reading in terms of the number of scans. The count increases by 1 for both large and small sizes. The reading may be reset. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. Level
FAX-PRT
RMT-PRT
BOX-PRT
RPT-PRT
2-SIDE
SCAN
<PICK-UP>
T-17-218 COPIER>COUNTER>PICK-UP Subheading C1/2/3/4 Contents cassette 1/2/3/4 pickup total counter Use it to indicate the number of sheets picked up from the cassette 1/2/3/4. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. manual feeder total counter Use it to indicate the number of sheets picked up from the manual feeder unit. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. deck pickup total counter Use it to indicate the number of sheets picked up from the deck. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. duplexing pickup total counter Use it to indicate the number of 2-sided sheets. The count returns to '00000000' after '99999999'. Level 1
MF
DK
2-SIDE
<FEEDER>
T-17-219 COPIER>COUNTER>FEEDER Subheading FEED Contents Use it to indicate the reading of the total counter in terms of the number of sheets picked up by the ADF. Level 1
17-234
Chapter 17 <JAM>
T-17-220 COPIER>COUNTER>JAM Subheading TOTAL FEEDER SORTER 2-SIDE MF C1/2/3/4 DK copier total jam counter feeder total jam counter finisher total jam counter duplexing unit jam counter manual feed pickup jam counter cassette 1/2/3/4 jam counter side paper deck jam counter Contents Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
<MISC>
T-17-221 COPIER>COUNTER>MISC Subheading FIX-WEB Contents fixing cleaning web counter (count retained by DC controller PCB) The count in this mode begins a count, after a web-less preliminary announcement display is displayed. If you have replaced the fixing web, reset the counter reading. Level
WST-TNR
waste toner counter (count retained by DC controller PCB) If you have disposed of waste toner, reset the counter reading.
PRI-CLN
primary charging wire auto cleaning counter (count retained by DC controller PCB) If you have replaced the primary charging wire, reset the counter reading.
DV-UNT-K
for the developing unit, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by DC controller PCB) - if you have replaced the developing unit (Bk), reset the counter reading. - if you have replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the reading indicated before the replacement. Do not reset or change the reading of the counter unless the foregoing is true; otherwise, the image density will likely be wrong, causing fogging or damage to the drum by carrier. If you inadvertently reset or changed the reading, replace the developing unit (Bk), and reset the reading once again. The machine's ATR control uses the patch image density measured at specific timing and target value to correct toner supply amounts. The target density on the other hand is also corrected for individual colors and is corrected for Bk based on the cumulative number of images that have been formed (monitored by the counter in question).
DV-CAR-Y/M/C toner life Y/M/C (count retained by DC controller PCB) YMC Toner Life Reset the setting to '0' when you have replaced the developing assembly; any value may be entered. - if you have replaced the DC control PCB, enter the reading indicated before the replacement. Estimated life 500,000 prints
17-235
Chapter 17
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC Subheading DRM-PHAS Contents Use it when shifting the photosensitive drum phase. When the photosensitive drum is used without changing the home position in relation to the drum axis, uneven density at drum intervals or lines can occur in output images. To limit the symptom, shift the phase of the photosensitive drum by 90 deg every specific number of prints. The machine does not shift the phase on its own, and requires the work of the service person. The machine indicates a message to prompt the work on the User and Service Mode screens. Use this mode item to obtain an idea of how much the photosensitive drum has been used so that the work cycle may be predicted. - When the service mode item used in shifting the drum phase is executed (i.e., COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DR-P-ADJ), the counter reading will automatically be reset. - to change the timing at which the message is indicated (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>DR-P-ADJ), change the denominator of the setting. By default, the denominator is 200,000 images (Japan) or 100,000 images (outside Japan). Level
The counter readings used in service mode are grouped into the following 5 types: Type 1 black-and-white S size: count by 1 L size: count by 2 full color S size: count by 4 L size: count by 8 Type 2 black-and-white S size: count by 1 L size: count by 2 full color S size: count by 3 L size: count by 6 Type 3 black-and-white S size: count by 1 L size: count by 2 full color S size: count by 1 L size: count by 2 Type 4 black-and-white full color count by 1 Type 5 black-and-white no count full color count by 1 <PRDC-1> All the values of the items under COPIER>COUNTER>PRDC-1 are retained by the main controller PCB.
T-17-222 COPIER>COUNTER>PRDC-1 Subheading PRM-GRID PRM-WIRE Contents for the grid plate, indicates the number of times high voltage has gone on. count type: type 1 for the primary charging wire, indicates the number of times high voltage has gone on. count type: type 1 for the pre-transfer charging wire, indicates the number of times high voltage has gone on. count type: type 1 for the primary charging wire cleaner, indicates the number of times it has been replaced. count type: type 1 for the pre-transfer charging wire cleaner, indicates the number of times it has been replaced. count type: type 1 for the primary charging wire cleaner 2, indicates the number of times it has been replaced. count type: type 1 Level 1 1
PO-WIRE
PRM-CLN
PO-CLN
PRM-CLN2
17-236
Chapter 17
COPIER>COUNTER>PRDC-1 Subheading PO-CLN2 Contents for the pre-transfer charging wire cleaner2, indicates the number of times it has been replaced. Estimated life: 500,000@image count type: type 1 for the post charging assembly, indicates the number of times it has gone on. count type: type 1 for the primary charging wire, indicates the number of times it has gone on. count type: type 1 for the fixing assembly main thermistor (TH1), indicates the number of times it has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved. count type: type 3 for the fixing assembly thermal switch (TP1), indicates the number of times it has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved. count type: type 3 for the contact thermistor, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. counter type: type 3 for the external heating roller thermistor, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. count type: type 3 for the contact thermal switch, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. counter type: type 3 for the external heating roller thermal switch, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. count type: type 3 for the ozone filter (FM2) fan, indicates the number of times it has gone on. count type: type 1 for the toner filter (FM2), indicates the number of times it has gone on. count type: type 1 Level 1
PO-UNIT PRM-UNIT FIX-TH1
1 1 1
FX-TSW
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
FX-LW-TH FX-EX-TH
FX-LW-TS FX-EX-TS
OZ-FIL2 TN-FIL2
<DRBL-1> The following is a list of service mode items whose data is retained by the DC controller PCB or the main controller PCB. Main controller PCB TRD-CLNATR-BLTATR-ROLLA2TR-TOLLATR-STC-HA1TR-STCAITB-SUPSA2TR-INRLACLN-BLDACL-SUPSACL-SCRPAC3PU-RLAC3-SP-RLAC3-FD-RLAC4-PU-RLAC4-SP-RLAC4-FD-RLALD-PU-RLALD-SP-RLALD-FD-RLARD-PU-RLARD-SP-RLARDFD-RLAM-PU-RLAM-SP-RLAFX-IN-BSAFX-WEBAFX-EX-RLAFX-RW-BSAFX-EX-BSADLV-UCLWADLV-LCLWAOZ-FIL5ATNFIL2ATN-FIL5AFX-SPACEAITB-SCRP DC controller PCB DV-UNT-CADV-UNT-YADV-UNT-MAFX-UP-RLAFX-LW-RLA If you are replacing the main controller PCB or the DC controller PCB,be sure to exeucte the following service mode item and keep the output stored away: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC>P-PRINT.
T-17-223 COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 Subheading LSR-DRV LSR-MTR SCN-MTR TRD-CLN not used not used not used indicates the number of times the transfer drum cleaner has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the intermediate transfer belt unit, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 for the secondary transfer outside roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 for the secondary transfer outsider roller, indicates the number of times high voltage has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 indicates the number of times the secondary transfer static eliminator has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 indicates the number of times the primary transfer static eliminator has gone on in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 Contents Level 1 1 1
TR-BLT
TR-ROLL
2TR-ROLL
TR-STC-H
1TR-STC
17-237
Chapter 17
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 Subheading ITB-SUPS Contents for the ITB cleaner scoop-up sheet, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the secondary transfer inside roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 indicates the number of times the photosensitive drum has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) not used not used for the cleaner scoop-up sheet, indicates the number of times it has been used in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 for the cleaner scoop-up sheet, indicates the number of times it has been used in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 indicates the number of times the C developing assembly has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 5 indicates the number of times the developing cylinder has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 3 indicates the number of tines the developing assembly roll has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 3 indicates the number of times the Y developing assembly has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 5 indicates the number of times the M developing assembly has rotated in terms of the number of sheets involved. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 5 for the edge scraper, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 for the cassette 3 pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the cassette 3 separation roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the cassette 3 feed roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the cassette 4 pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the cassette 4 separation roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 of the cassette 4 feed roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the left front deck pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 4 for the left front deck separation roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 4 for the left front deck feed roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 4 for the right front deck pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 4 Level 1
2TR-INRL
PT-DRM
1 1 1
DRM-MTR MAIN-MTR CLN-BLD
CL-SUPS
DV-UNT-C
DVG-CYL
DVG-ROLL
DV-UNT-Y
DV-UNT-M
CL-SCRP
C3-PU-RL
C3-SP-RL
C3-FD-RL
C4-PU-RL
C4-SP-RL
C4-FD-RL
LD-PU-RL
LD-SP-RL
LD-FD-RL
RD-PU-RL
17-238
Chapter 17
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 Subheading RD-SP-RL Contents for the right front deck separation roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 4 for the right front deck feed roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 4 for the manual feed pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the manual feed tray separation roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type; type 3 for the fixing upper roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 2 for the fix lower roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by DC controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the fixing heat insulating bush, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the fixing web, indicates the number of times it has been taken up. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 Clear in COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB and COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FX-WEB, when webs are exchanged for the external heating roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 2 for the pressure roller heat insulating bush, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the eternal heating roller bush, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the delivery upper separation claw, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controlled PCB) count type: type 3 for the delivery lower separation claw, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 3 for the fixing heat discharge fan, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) count type: type 1 Level 1
RD-FD-RL
M-PU-RL
M-SP-RL
FX-UP-RL
FX-LW-RL
FX-IN-BS
FX-WEB
FX-EX-RL
FX-LW-BS
FX-EX-BS
DLV-UCLW
DLV-LCLW
OZ-FIL5
TN-FIL2
for the toner filter (FM2), indicates the number of times it has gone on. Estimated life: 250,000@image count type: type 1
TN-FIL5 FX-SPACE ITB-SCRP
not used not used ITB scraper; number of sheets fed Estimated life: 600000@image count type:type 1
1 1
<DRBL-2>
T-17-224 COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2 Subheading DF-PU-RL Contents for the ADF pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets it has picked up. (count retained by controller PCB) for both single-sided and double-sided modes, for each single original (not the sides), the count is increased by 1; large and small sizes are not distinguished for the ADF separation pad, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for both single-sided and double-sided modes, for each single original (not the sides), the count is increased by 1: large and small sizes are not distinguished Level 1
DF-SP-PD
17-239
Chapter 17
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2 Subheading DF-FD-RL Contents for the DF separation plate, indicates the number of sheets that have been separated. (count retained by controller PCB) for single-sided mode, the count is increased by 1 for each single original; for double-sided mode, the count is increased by 3 (as feeding takes place 3 times for face, back, and idle); large and small sizes are not distinguished not used 1 DF-SP-RL for the ADF separation roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. for both single-sided and double-sided modes, the count is increased by every single original (not the sides). for the dust collecting tape A, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the dust collecting tape B, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the dust-collecting tape C, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the dust-collecting tape D, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the dust-collecting tape E, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the paper deck pickup roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the paper deck separation roller, indicates the number of sets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the paper deck feed roller, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by controller PCB) for the sort path, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by DC controller PCB) for the stacker assembly, indicates the number of times the stapler has gone on. (count retained by the DC controller PCB) for the saddle path, indicates the number of sheets that have passed. (count retained by DC controller PCB) for the saddle assembly, indicates the number of times the stapler has gone on. (count retained by DC controller PCB) for the puncher, indicates the number of times it has gone on. (count retained by DC controller PCB) for the buffer roller, indicates the number of times it has gone on. (count retained by DC controller PCB) for every single sheet that passes the buffer roller, the roller goes on once Level
LNT-TAPE
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LNT-TAP1 LNT-TAP2 LNT-TAP3 LNT-TAP4 LNT-TAP5 PD-PU-RL PD-SP-RL PD-FD-RL SORT FIN-STPR SADDLE SDL-STPL PUNCH FN-BFFRL
17-240
Chapter 18 Upgrading
Contents
Contents
18.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.1.1 Outline of the Version Upgrade ............................................................................................................................................... 18-1 18.1.2 Overview of Upgrading Work ................................................................................................................................................. 18-1 18.1.3 Outline of the Functions and Operations ................................................................................................................................. 18-2 18.1.4 Outline of the Service Support Tool ........................................................................................................................................ 18-5 18.1.5 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use .......................................................................................................... 18-8
18.2 Making Preparations ................................................................................................................................................18-11

18.2.1 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST)............................................................................................................ 18-11 18.2.2 Copying the System Software (SST -> USB)........................................................................................................................ 18-14 18.2.3 Registering the System software............................................................................................................................................ 18-17 18.2.4 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST)............................................................................................................ 18-20 18.2.5 Making Connections .............................................................................................................................................................. 18-22 18.2.6 Copying the System Software (SST -> USB)........................................................................................................................ 18-26 18.2.7 Making Connections (SST in use) ......................................................................................................................................... 18-30 18.2.8 Making Connections (SST in use) ......................................................................................................................................... 18-32 18.2.9 Making Connections (USB device in use)............................................................................................................................. 18-33 18.2.10 Making Connections (USB device in use)........................................................................................................................... 18-33
18.3 Formatting the HDD ................................................................................................................................................18-34

18.3.1 Formatting All Partitions ....................................................................................................................................................... 18-34 18.3.2 Formatting All Partitions ....................................................................................................................................................... 18-35 18.3.3 Formatting Selected Partitions ............................................................................................................................................... 18-36 18.3.4 Formatting Selected Partitions ............................................................................................................................................... 18-37 18.3.5 Formatting the Procedure....................................................................................................................................................... 18-39 18.3.6 Formatting the Partitions........................................................................................................................................................ 18-44
18.4 Downloading System Software................................................................................................................................18-45

18.4.1 Batch Downloading ............................................................................................................................................................... 18-45
18.4.1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................................18-45 18.4.1.2 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................................18-46 18.4.1.3 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................18-47 18.4.1.4 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................18-51
18.4.2 Downloading the System Software........................................................................................................................................ 18-59

18.4.2.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................18-59 18.4.2.2 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................18-60 18.4.2.3 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................18-60 18.4.2.4 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................18-66 18.4.2.5 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................18-69
18.4.3 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module ...................................................................................................................... 18-73

18.4.3.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................18-73 18.4.3.2 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................18-75 18.4.3.3 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................18-76 18.4.3.4 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................18-81
18.4.4 Downloading the SDICT ....................................................................................................................................................... 18-83

18.4.4.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................18-83 18.4.4.2 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................18-83
18.4.5 Downloading the MEAPCONT ............................................................................................................................................. 18-83

18.4.6 Downloading the KEY........................................................................................................................................................... 18-83

18.4.7 Downloading the TTS............................................................................................................................................................ 18-83

18.4.7.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................18-83
Contents
18.4.7.2 Downloading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................... 18-83
18.4.8 Downloading the BROWSER................................................................................................................................................ 18-84

18.4.8.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-84 18.4.8.2 Downloading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................... 18-84
18.4.9 Downloading the BOOT Software......................................................................................................................................... 18-85

18.4.9.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-85 18.4.9.2 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-85 18.4.9.3 Downloading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................... 18-86 18.4.9.4 Downloading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................... 18-91
18.4.10 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software......................................................................................................................... 18-92

18.4.10.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-92 18.4.10.2 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-92 18.4.10.3 Downloading Procedure ......................................................................................................................................................................... 18-94 18.4.10.4 Downloading Procedure ......................................................................................................................................................................... 18-99 18.4.10.5 Downloading Procedure ......................................................................................................................................................................... 18-99
18.4.11 Downloading the FAX Software ......................................................................................................................................... 18-99

18.4.11.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-99 18.4.11.2 Downloading Procedure ....................................................................................................................................................................... 18-100
18.5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data........................................................................................................... 18-105

18.5.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-105 18.5.2 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................. 18-106 18.5.3 Uploading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................... 18-106 18.5.4 Uploading Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................... 18-111 18.5.5 Downloading Procedure....................................................................................................................................................... 18-115 18.5.6 Downloading Procedure....................................................................................................................................................... 18-119
18.6 Version Upgrade using USB ................................................................................................................................. 18-120

18.6.1 Overview of Menus and Functions ...................................................................................................................................... 18-120 18.6.2 Downloading/Writing the System Software (auto).............................................................................................................. 18-122 18.6.3 Downloading the System Software (Confirmation execution when version is downed the same version) ........................ 18-122 18.6.4 Downloading the System Software (all overwriting) .......................................................................................................... 18-123 18.6.5 Formatting the HDD ............................................................................................................................................................ 18-125 18.6.6 Other Functions.................................................................................................................................................................... 18-125
Chapter 18
18.1 Outline
18.1.1 Outline of the Version Upgrade
0005-6159
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The version upgrade of this machine and the accessories can be done by downloading from a personal computer (PC) in which the service support tool (SST) is installed or by replacing DIMM-ROM. The table below shows a list of firmware and the associated way of upgrading.
T-18-1 Firmware Way of Version Upgrade SST Main Body System (system software) Language (language module) RUI (remote UI) Boot (boot program) DCON (DC controller) RCON (reader controller) Accessory G3FAX (super G3FAX board-P1) Fin_QR (Finisher-R1/ Saddle Finisher-R2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ROM-DIMM replacement No No No Yes No No Yes No The special service tool (Downloader PCB: FY9-2034) is necessary. It also controls ADF reading. Notes
18.1.2 Overview of Upgrading Work

0011-6161
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The machine and its system software options may be upgraded as follows: - downloading from a PC to which the Service Support Tool (SST) has been installed - downloading from a USB device - replacing the DIMM-ROM(Only Boot and G3FAX) To upgrade the various system software, go through the following:
T-18-2 Item System software SST Machine System (main controller) Language (language module) RUI (remote user interface) Boot (boot program) MEAPCONT (MEAP library) SDICT (OCR dictionary) KEY (encryption communication key) TTS (voice dictionary) BROWSER (Web browser) DCON (DC controller) RCON (reader controller) Option G3FAX (Multi Port Fax BoardG1) Fin_T (Finisher-R1, Saddle Finisher-R2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Method USB Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes DIMM-ROM Replacement No No No Yes No No No No No No No Yes The reader controller is also used to control the ADF. The main controller is also used to control the G3 fax board (1-line). Remarks
Yes
No
No
The work requires a special service tool (downloader PCB; FY92034).
18-1
Chapter 18
18.1.3 Outline of the Functions and Operations

0011-6162
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When connected to a PC (to which the SST and system software have been installed) and USB device (to which system software has been copied), the machine provides the following functions:
iRC - - - PC for service work USB device
Initializing the HDD HDD setting information
System software
Downloading system software
HDD
Flash ROM Uploading backup data *1 Backup data Downloading backup data *1 Back up RAM
F-18-1
*1: Not when USB is in use.
18-2
Chapter 18 To use these functions, the machine must be in download mode, which may be either of the following: - Normal Mode (download mode B) Turn on the main power while holding down the keys 1+7; then, make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD. - Safe Mode (download mode A) Turn on the main power while holding down the keys 2+8.
on keypad, 2+8
Main power switch ON
on keypad, 1+7
Safe mode program
Boot ROM
Boot program
HDD
SYSTEM program In service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD Normal mode program
Safe mode (Download mode A)

F-18-2
Normal mode (Download mode B)
18-3
Chapter 18
Use safe mode for the following: - after replacing the HDD - when the system fails to start up normally The following shows combinations of download modes and functions:
T-18-3 Download mode Function Formatting the HDD Normal mode (download mode B) Safe mode (download mode A) All BOOTDEV
Downloading the system software System *1 Language RUI Boot G3FAX G4FAX Dcon Rcon SDICT MEAPCONT KEY TTS BROWSER Uploading/downloading of backup data *2 SramRCON SramDCON
System Language RUI Boot Dcon Rcon SDICT MEAPCONT KEY TTS BROWSER Meapback -
*1: Not all software to download may be selected for downloading while USB is in use. *2: Not when USB device is in use.
18-4
Chapter 18 Installing the System Software When downloaded, the system software is stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD. At the end of downloading, the main power switch must be turned off and then back on, thus restarting the machine and writing the system software to both system area and flash ROM from the temporary storage area. When the main power switch is turned off and then back on once again, the machine will start up using the new system software.
1) The system software is downloaded.
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ - - Do wnload Mode - - Download iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG
Status of reception (sample)

- - - Do wnload Mode - - Download [ iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - xx%
HDD
System Software
Temporary storage area
System Software
2) The main power switch is turned off and then on.
3) Writing takes place.

<<<<< do wnload shell >>>>> download Upgrading [ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upg ading complete Upgrading [ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upg ading complete Upgrading [ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upg ading complete Upgrading [ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upg ading complete Upgrading [ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upg ading complete Upgrading [ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upg ading complete +++ Switch OFF the po er then ON. +++ power
HDD
System Software
Temporary storage area System area
Boot ROM 4) The main motor switch is turned off and then on.
FLASH ROM
5) The machine starts up using the new version.

F-18-3
18.1.4 Outline of the Service Support Tool

0001-1613
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The service supporrt tool (SST, hereafter) provides the following functions:
18-5
Chapter 18
iR XXXX PC for service work
SST Initializing the HDD HDD setting information
System software
HDD
Flash ROM Uploading backup data Backup data Downloading backup data Back up RAM
F-18-4
To use the SST, you must first set the machine to download mode. The machine's download mode consists of 2 types. 1. Normal Mode(Download mode B) (With pressing 1+7, turn on the main power switch and select service mode: COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DOWNLOAD.) 2. Safe Mode(Download mode A) (With pressing 2+8, turn on the main power switch.)
18-6
Chapter 18
on keypad, 2+8
Main power switch ON
on keypad, 1+7
Safe mode program
Boot ROM
Boot program
HDD
SYSTEM program In service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD normal mode program
Download mode A
F-18-5
Download mode B
Use safe mode for the following: - after replacing the HDD. - if the system fails to operate normally.
The following shows combinations of functions that may be used in association with the SST and the download mode:
T-18-4
Function
Download mode
Normal mode (download mode B) Formatting the HDD ALL BOOTDEV
Safe mode (download mode A)
DOSDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 DOSDEV5
-System -Language -RUI -Boot -G3FAX -Dcon -Rcon
-System -Language -RUI -Boot -
18-7
Chapter 18
Function
Download mode
Normal mode (download mode B) Downloading/ Uploading back up data -DconSRAM -RconSRAM -
Safe mode (download mode A)
18.1.5 Network Interface of the Machine with the SST in Use

0001-1615
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The machine communicates with the SST using the Ethernet protocol(TCP/IP). The machine offers 2 sets of network settings: 1. user enviroment network settings (Additional Function> system contorol settings> network settings) 2. service network settings (IP address: 172.16.1.160 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0) The netework settings are dependent on how the machine is started up. The user enviroment settings are retained while the service settings are selected.
You need not change the user enviroment network settings before or after the SST.
18-8
Chapter 18
iR XXXX
User network enviroment
Ethernet I/F
User enviromsnt network settings
Service network settings
Power OFF Power ON in response to 1+7 or 2+8 on keypad
iR XXXX
Service PC
User enviroment network settings (settings are retained)
Ethernet I/F
SST in use
Service network settings IP address: 172.16.1.160 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Power OFF Normal power ON
iR XXXX
User network enviroment
Ethernet I/F
User envorment network settings (settings retained)
Service network settings

F-18-6
If you start up the machine by pressing 1+7, the machine indicates 'FIXIP' in the upper right of the LCD to distinguish its state from normal.
18-9
Chapter 18
Copy
Send Auto-Color Select eady to copy

Department*S
Mail Box
Options
100 %
1:1 Copy atio Paper Select
1
A
Finisher
Two-sided
Text/Photo/Map Special Features System Monitor

F-18-7
Interrupt I-Fax Memory X is on
Attension when installed option board -Normal Power ON The Ethernet interface is disabled if a TokenRing board is installed. -Power ON in response to 1+7 or 2+8 The Ethernet interface is enabled if a TokenRing board is installed, and the TokenRing board is disabled. You need not remove the TokenRing board when connecting the SST.
18-10
Chapter 18
User network enviroment (TokenRIng)
iR XXXX
TokenRIng I/F enabled Ethernet I/F disabled
Power OFF Power ON in response to 1+7 or 2+8 on keypad
iR XXXX Service PC
TokenRIng I/F disabled Ethernet I/F enabled
SST in use
F-18-8
18.2 Making Preparations

18.2.1 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST)
0018-2572
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Here, you will be copying the system software found on the System CD to the SST. [Preparatory Work] Requirements - PC to which the SST (version 3.34 or later) has been installed - System CD of the iR C6880/C5880 Series [Installing the System Software] 1) Turn on the PC. 2) Set the System CD in the PC. 3) Start up the SST. 4) Click [Register Firmware].
18-11
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)
Target Selection Select the target. MFP
CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .
Model List Select a model to connect
CONNECT
MFP USB
R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a
USB
System Management
c:
START
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-9
18-12
Chapter 18 5) Select the drive in which the System CD has been set, and click [SEARCH].
Registerd Firms Registered fir mware
Regist Firm S e l e c t a d r i ve a n d fo l d e r.
CONNECT
e:
R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e
e:
D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a System Management
iRC5870C-XXxx-BOOT iRC5870-USen iRC5870-XXen0107-RUI iRC5870-XXen0111-TTS iRC5870-XXen-LANG iRC5870-XXxx0100-BROWS
REGISTER
CANCEL
SEARCH
EXIT
F-18-10
6) A list of system software found on the System CD appears. Remove the check marks from the folders and software files you do not need, and click [REGISTER].
Found Firm T h e f i r m wa r e l i s t e d b e l ow i s fo u n d . U n c h e cke d f i r m wa r e i s r e g i s t e r e d .
CONNECT R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a System Management
iRC6870 SYSTEM USenv0112 LANGUAGE XXenv0112 RUI XXenv0107 MEAPCONT XXxxv0105 BOOT XXxxv0103 BROWSER XXxxv0100 G3FAX XXenv6102
REGISTER
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-11
18-13
Chapter 18 7) When a message has appeared to indicate that the system software has been installed, click [OK].
Found Firm F i r m wa r e r e g i s t ra t i o n c o m p l e t e d . > > > B a t c h R e g i s t ra t i o n R e s u l t s
CONNECT
TTS XXenv0111 iRCXXXX HDFormat XXxxv0002 KEY XXxcv0101 XXxpv0101 SDICT
R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a System Management
O K
CANCEL
EXIT
iRC6870 SYSTEM USenv0112 >>> With no LANGUAGE XXenv0112 >>> Regist RUI XXenv0107 >>> Regist MEAPCONT XXxxv0105 >>> Regist BOOT XXxxv0103 >>> Regist BROWSER XXxxv0100 >>> Regist G3FAX XXxxv6102 >>> Regist DCON XXxxv0102 >>> Regist TTS XXxxv0111 >>> Regist iRCXXXX HDFormat XXxxv0002 >>> Regist KEY XXenv0111 OK!
F-18-12
18.2.2 Copying the System Software (SST -> USB)

0018-2577
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Here, you will be copying the system software from the SST to a USB device. [Preparatory Work] Requirements - PC to which the SST (version 3.34 or later) has been installed and the system software for the iR C6880/C5880 Series has been copied. - USB device *
*: USB Requirements Interface Capacity Format USB 1.1 or higher 1 GB or more recommended (A set of system software is in excess of 512 MB.) FAT (FAT16), FAT32 (It must not be NTFS or HFS.) single partition (There must not be multiple partitions.)
You will not be able to use a security-protected USB device. Be sure to remove the protection before use. [Copying the System Software] 1) Start up the PC. 2) Connect the USB device to the USB port of the PC. 3) Start up the SST.
18-14
Chapter 18 4) Click the USB icon on the Target Selection screen.

CONTROL C l i ck a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .
Export Firm Selection S e l e c t t h e d e s t i n a t e d r i ve .
E x p o r t F ir mwa re
MFP USB
Series Version
R e g is te r F ir mwa re D e le te F ir mwa re D e le te B a ck u p D a ta
Firmware registration status
USB
S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t
c:
Select the destinate drive.
START
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-13
5) Select the drive to which the USB device has been connected.
Export Firm Selection Select the series.
MFP USB
Series Version
USB
d:
Valid drive DriveType:1 FileSystem:FAT TotalSize:1,001MB FreeSpace:1,001MB
START
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-14
18-15
Chapter 18 6) Select the appropriate series and version of the system software you want to copy.
Export Firm Selection Click the <Star t> button to star t f i l e c o py.
E x p o r t F i r m wa r e
MFP USB
Series Version
iRC6870 USen0112(US)
Firmware registration status iRC6870 BOOT Y XXxxv0103 BROWSER Y XXxxv0100 DCON Y XXxxv0102 LANGUAGE Y XXenv0112 N XXjav0112 MEAPCONT Y XXxxv0105 RUI Y XXenv0107 N XXjav0107 SDICT N XXxxv0107 SYSTEM N JPenv0112
USB
System Management
d:
START
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-15
MEMO: The notations that appear in the column under "Firmware registration status" mean the following: Y: exists in the SST. N: does not exist in the SST. 7) Click [START] so that copying to the USB device starts.
MFP USB
Series Version
USB
System Management
d:
START
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-16
18-16
Chapter 18 8) When done, click [OK].

Export Firm Selection F i l e c o py h a s b e e n c o m p l e t e d .
MFP USB
Series Version
USB
System Management
d:
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-17
18.2.3 Registering the System software

0005-4852
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN Register the System software stored on the system CD to the SST. 1. Before starting the work Keep the following on hand: - PC to which SST v1.73 or later has been installed. - system CD for iRC6800 (if the machine supports the Netware, prepare the system CD for iRC6800N) 2. Registering the System software 1) Start up the PC. 2) Attach the system CD to the PC. 3) Start up the SST. 4) Press [next] under Controlling Data.
Service Support Tool Ver. 1.81E (DLM0) Main Menu
Service Support Tool Ver.1.81E (DLM0)
Controlling Data
If you want to work on any of the following operations, click its appropriate button.
Downloading/Uploading
To execute any of the following operations, click its appropriate button.
Registering and Removing Firmware Removing Stored Backup Data
Downloading Firmware Uploading Backup Data Downloading Backup Data
To Next
To Next
Ending the Service Support Tool

F-18-18
Ver. Info.
5) Press [Registering Firmware].
18-17
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool Ver. 1.81E (DLM0) Selecting Data Control Item
Controlling Firmware
To register firmware, click the button on the right.
Registering Firmware
To remove stored firmware, click the button on the right.
Removing Firmware
Controlling Buckup Data

To remove stored backup data, click the button on the right.
Controlling Backup Data
To Main Menu
F-18-19
6) Press [Register from selected folder].

Service Support Tool Ver. 1.81E (DLM0) Registering Firmware
Stored firmware
The list shows the firmware stored on the computer. iR XXXX BOOT
Drive
C:
XXxx.Ver.01.10 XXxx.Ver.02.01 XXxx.Ver.03.01 XXxx.Ver.20.02 DCON XXxx.Ver.01.16 XXxx.Ver.01.25 XXxx.Ver.01.28
Registering firmware
To register the firmware from the NewROM folder, click the button on the right. To register the firmware from the CD-ROM, click the button on the right.
Register from NewROM folder Register from selected folder To Previous Screen
F-18-20
7) Select the drive in which you have set the system CD, and press [Search].
18-18
Chapter 18
Registration from the Selected Folder
Firmware registration from the selected folder

Select the drive Select the folder q: q:\ iR XXXXXXXX iR XXXX-JPja iR XXXX-JPja iR XXXX-USen iR XXXX-XXen-LANG iR XXXX-XXen-RUISST iR XXXX-XXja-LANG q:\ iR XXXXXXXX
Searc h
Path to the selected folder Information file (*.ift) in the selected folder Could not find the information file (*.ift)
Register
To Previous Screen
F-18-21
8) When the list of system software items contained on the system CD has appeared, press [Register All] after it becomes enabled.

Select the drive Path to the selected folder Information file was found. Uncheck the items if it is no need to register. iR XXXX-SYSTEM-Japan(Japanese) v0128 iR XXXX-SYSTEM-USA(English) v0128 iR XXXX-Language-All(English) v0128 iR XXXX-RUI-All(English) v0128 iR XXXX-Language-All(Japanese) v0128 iR XXXX-RUI-All(Japanese) v0128 iR XXXX-DCON-All(Common) v0132 iR XXXX-SYSTEM-Japan(Japanese) v0128 q: q:\iR XXXXXXXX
Searc h
All checked items will be registered at once.
Register All
To Previous Screen
F-18-22
9) When the result of the registration have appeared, press [OK].
18-19
Chapter 18
Results....
iR XXXX-SYSTEM-Japan[Japanese] v0128 Registered, OK! iR XXXX-SYSTEM-USA[English] v0128 Registered, OK! iR XXXX-Language-All[English] v0128 Registered, OK! iR XXXX-RUI-All[English] v0128 Registered, OK! iR XXXX-Language-All[Japanese] v0128 Registered, OK! iR XXXX-RUI-All[Japanese] v0128 Registered, OK! iR XXXX-DCON-All[Common] v0132 Registered, OK! iR XXXX-SYSTEM-Japan[Japanese] v0128 Registered, OK!
Batch Registration finished.
OK
Register All
To Previous Screen
F-18-23
18.2.4 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST)

0011-6163
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C Here, you will be copying the system software found on the System CD to the SST. [Preparatory Work] Requirements - PC to which the SST (version 3.21 or later) has been installed - System CD of the iR C6870/C5870 Series [Installing the System Software] 1) Turn on the PC. 2) Set the System CD in the PC. 3) Start up the SST. 4) Click [Register Firmware].
CONNECT
MFP USB
USB
System Management
c:
START
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-24
18-20
Chapter 18 5) Select the drive in which the System CD has been set, and click [SEARCH].
Regist Firm S e l e c t a d r i ve a n d fo l d e r.
CONNECT
e:
R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e
e:
D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a System Management
iRC5870C-XXxx-BOOT iRC5870-USen iRC5870-XXen0107-RUI iRC5870-XXen0111-TTS iRC5870-XXen-LANG iRC5870-XXxx0100-BROWS
REGISTER
CANCEL
SEARCH
EXIT
F-18-25
6) A list of system software found on the System CD appears. Remove the check marks from the folders and software files you do not need, and click [REGISTER].
Found Firm T h e f i r m wa r e l i s t e d b e l ow i s fo u n d . U n c h e cke d f i r m wa r e i s r e g i s t e r e d .
CONNECT R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a System Management
iRC6870 SYSTEM USenv0112 LANGUAGE XXenv0112 RUI XXenv0107 MEAPCONT XXxxv0105 BOOT XXxxv0103 BROWSER XXxxv0100 G3FAX XXenv6102
REGISTER
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-26
18-21
Chapter 18 7) When a message has appeared to indicate that the system software has been installed, click [OK].
Found Firm F i r m wa r e r e g i s t ra t i o n c o m p l e t e d . > > > B a t c h R e g i s t ra t i o n R e s u l t s
CONNECT
TTS XXenv0111 iRCXXXX HDFormat XXxxv0002 KEY XXxcv0101 XXxpv0101 SDICT
R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a System Management
O K
CANCEL
EXIT
iRC6870 SYSTEM USenv0112 >>> With no LANGUAGE XXenv0112 >>> Regist RUI XXenv0107 >>> Regist MEAPCONT XXxxv0105 >>> Regist BOOT XXxxv0103 >>> Regist BROWSER XXxxv0100 >>> Regist G3FAX XXxxv6102 >>> Regist DCON XXxxv0102 >>> Regist TTS XXxxv0111 >>> Regist iRCXXXX HDFormat XXxxv0002 >>> Regist KEY XXenv0111 OK!
F-18-27
18.2.5 Making Connections

0005-4868
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN You will be connecting the PC to the machine. 1. Before starting the work Keep the following on hand: - PC to which SST v1.73 or later has been installed and iRC3100 system software has been registered. - Twisted pair Cross cable 10BASE-T: category 3 or 5 100BASE-T: category 5 2. Procedure 1) Start up the PC. 2) Check the network settings of the PC. 2-1) Type 'IPCONFIG' to the command prompt, and press the Enter key. 2-2) Check to see that the network settings are as follows: IP address: 172.16.1.160 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Default gateway: any
Do not use the following settings. -172.16.1.0 -172.16.1.100 -172.16.1.255 If the settings are not as indicatred, change the PC network settings:
C:\
Command Prompt
M i c r o s o f t W i n d o w s 2 0 0 0 [ Ve r s i o n 5 . 0 0 . 2 1 9 5 ] ( C ) C o py r i g h t 1 9 8 5 - 1 9 9 9 M i n c r o s o f t C o r p. C:\ ipconfig
Windows 2000 IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection: Connection-specific IP Address. . . . . Subnet Mask . . . . Default Gateway . . C:\ DNS Suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : : 172.16.1.160 : 255.255.255.0 :
F-18-28
3) Check to see that the Perform/Memory lamp on the control panel is OFF; then, turn off the main power switch of the machine. 4) Connect the PC and the machine with a cross cable.
18-22
Chapter 18
IP sddress: 172.16.1.160 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 IP address: 172.16.1.100 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Cross cable 10Base-T: category 3 or 5 100Base-TX: category 5

F-18-29
5) While holding down the keys suited to the download mode you are going to use, turn on the main power switch of the machine. -if Normal mode Turn on the main power switch in response to 1+7 on keypad. Enter sorce mode, make the following selection in service mode: COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DOWNLOAD -if Safe mode Turn on the main power switch in response to 2+8 on keypad. 6) Start up the SST. 7) Press [To next] under Downloading/Uploading.
Controlling Data
To Next
To Next

F-18-30
Ver. Info.
8) Select the model of the machine.
18-23
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool Ver. 1.81E (DLM0) Selecting Model/Unit
Available Model and Unit

The list shows models and units that may be connected. Select the PCB for the machine by clicking.
iRC3100N iRC3200 iRC3200_3220 iRC3200L iRC3200N iRC3200W iRC6500 iRC6800 iRC6800L iRC6800N
Selected Model and Unit

Model Unit Interface
Connect
Check the selected model/unit, and click the <Connect> button.
To Main Menu
F-18-31
9) Select the unit you want, and press [Connect].


iR XXXX
iR XXXX BOOT DCON G3FAX HDFormat Language RCON RUI SYSTEM

Model Unit Interface
Connect
To Main Menu
F-18-32
10) Press [Set host name].
18-24
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Language
"If the following preparations have been made, click [OK]." "" "Turn off the machine." "Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable." "Turn on the machine, and start the download mode."
To Unit Selection Screen
Set host name
OK
F-18-33
11) The machine's IP address is entered automatically; press [OK].

"If the following preparations have been made, click [OK]." "" "Turn off the machine." "Connect the PC and the machine using host namecable." The list indicates the last a network or IP address "Turn on the machine, and start the download mode." If you want to change, select an appropriate name from drop-down-list or input character directly. Click [Save] to save the name for reuse. Click [Delete] to delete the name from list.
172.16.1.100
Delete To Unit Selection Screen
Save
Cancel
OK OK
Set host name
F-18-34
12) Press [OK] so that the machine makes a connection.
18-25
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Language Connected to 172.16.1.100
Set host name
OK
F-18-35
13) When the machine has made a connection and brings up the following screen, press [OK].
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Connecting to the Machine Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Language Connected to 172.16.1.100
Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Language
List of System Software for the Target of Connection Language Japanese Country/Region Japan Version 01.25 State A
Language List for the Target of Connection Language English Country/Region All Version 01.25 State H
The information needed for the job has been obtained. Check the indicated descriptions, and press [OK].
OK
F-18-36
18.2.6 Copying the System Software (SST -> USB)

0011-6164
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C Here, you will be copying the system software from the SST to a USB device. [Preparatory Work] Requirements - PC to which the SST (version 3.21 or later) has been installed and the system software for the iR C6870/C5870 Series has been copied. - USB device *
*: USB Requirements Interface Capacity USB 1.1 or higher 1 GB or more recommended (A set of system software is in excess of 512 MB.)
18-26
Chapter 18
Format FAT (FAT16), FAT32 (It must not be NTFS or HFS.) single partition (There must not be multiple partitions.)
You will not be able to use a security-protected USB device. Be sure to remove the protection before use. [Copying the System Software] 1) Start up the PC. 2) Connect the USB device to the USB port of the PC. 3) Start up the SST.
18-27
Chapter 18 4) Click the USB icon on the Target Selection screen.

Export Firm Selection S e l e c t t h e d e s t i n a t e d r i ve .
MFP USB
Series Version
USB
c:
Select the destinate drive.
START
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-37
5) Select the drive to which the USB device has been connected.
Export Firm Selection Select the series.
MFP USB
Series Version
USB
d:
START
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-38
18-28
Chapter 18 6) Select the appropriate series and version of the system software you want to copy.
MFP USB
Series Version
USB
System Management
d:
START
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-39
MEMO: The notations that appear in the column under "Firmware registration status" mean the following: Y: exists in the SST. N: does not exist in the SST. 7) Click [START] so that copying to the USB device starts.
MFP USB
Series Version
USB
System Management
d:
START
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-40
18-29
Chapter 18 8) When done, click [OK].

Export Firm Selection F i l e c o py h a s b e e n c o m p l e t e d .
MFP USB
Series Version
USB
System Management
d:
CANCEL
EXIT
F-18-41
18.2.7 Making Connections (SST in use)

0018-2578
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [Requirements] - PC to which the SST (version 3.34 or later) has been installed and the system software for the iR C6880/C5880 Series has been copied - twisted-pair cross cable 10Base-T: Category 3 or 5 100Base-TX: Category 5 [Procedure] 1) Start up the PC. 2) Connect the PC to the machine with a cross cable. 3) Check the network settings of the PC. 3-1) Start the command prompt, and type in "IPCONFIG," and press the Return key. 3-2) Check to be sure that the network settings appearing on the screen are as follows; if not, change the PC network settings: IP address: 172.16.1.160 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Default gateway: any
Do not use the following IP addresses: - 172.16.1.0 - 172.16.1.100 - 172.16.1.255 4) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is off; then, turn off the main power switch. 4-1) Hold down the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. 4-2) Go through the shut-down instructions appearing on the control panel screen so that the main power switch may be turned off. 4-3) Turn off the main power switch.
18-30
Chapter 18

F-18-42
5) Set the machine to the appropriate mode: - Normal Mode Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 1 and 7. When the machine has started, make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; then, click [OK]. - Safe Mode Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 2 and 8. In response, the machine will start up in safe mode.
18-31
Chapter 18
18.2.8 Making Connections (SST in use)

0011-6165
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C [Requirements] - PC to which the SST (version 3.21 or later) has been installed and the system software for the iR C6870/C5870 Series has been copied - twisted-pair cross cable 10Base-T: Category 3 or 5 100Base-TX: Category 5 [Procedure] 1) Start up the PC. 2) Connect the PC to the machine with a cross cable. 3) Check the network settings of the PC. 3-1) Start the command prompt, and type in "IPCONFIG," and press the Return key. 3-2) Check to be sure that the network settings appearing on the screen are as follows; if not, change the PC network settings: IP address: 172.16.1.160 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Default gateway: any
Do not use the following IP addresses: - 172.16.1.0 - 172.16.1.100 - 172.16.1.255 4) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is off; then, turn off the main power switch. 4-1) Hold down the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. 4-2) Go through the shut-down instructions appearing on the control panel screen so that the main power switch may be turned off. 4-3) Turn off the main power switch.

F-18-43
5) Set the machine to the appropriate mode: - Normal Mode Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 1 and 7. When the machine has started, make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; then, click [OK]. - Safe Mode Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 2 and 8. In response, the machine will start up in safe mode.
18-32
Chapter 18
18.2.9 Making Connections (USB device in use)

0018-2579
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [Requirements] - USB device to which the system software for the iR C6880/C5880 Series has been copied. [Procedure] 1) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory on the control panel is off; then, turn off the main power switch as follows: 1-1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more. 1-2) Go through the shut-down instructions. 1-3) Turn off the main power switch. 2) Connect the USB device [2] to the USB port [1].
[1]
[2]
F-18-44
3) If a network cable is connected to the machine, disconnect it. 4) Set the machine to the appropriate download mode: - Normal Mode Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 1 and 7. When the machine has started up, make the following selections in service mode, and press [OK]: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD. - Safe Mode Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 2 and 8 so that the machine will start up in safe mode. 5) See the following menu appearing on the control panel screen, indicating that the machine has recognized the presence of a USB device.
F-18-45
The machine may not recognize certain types of USB device or USB device from certain manufacturers. The machine looks for a USB deivce for a maximum of 60 sec after its main power is turned on, not indicating the menu if it fails to detect one. (If such is the case, obtain an appropriate USB device.) The SST cannot be run while the USB device is in use. (The machine will not communicate with the SST when it detects the presence of a USB device.)
18.2.10 Making Connections (USB device in use)

0011-6166
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C [Requirements] - USB device to which the system software for the iR C6870/C5870 Series has been copied. [Procedure] 1) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory on the control panel is off; then, turn off the main power switch as follows: 1-1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more. 1-2) Go through the shut-down instructions. 1-3) Turn off the main power switch. 2) Connect the USB device [2] to the USB port [1].
18-33
Chapter 18
[1]
[2]
F-18-46
3) If a network cable is connected to the machine, disconnect it. 4) Set the machine to the appropriate download mode: - Normal Mode Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 1 and 7. When the machine has started up, make the following selections in service mode, and press [OK]: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD. - Safe Mode Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 2 and 8 so that the machine will start up in safe mode. 5) See the following menu appearing on the control panel screen, indicating that the machine has recognized the presence of a USB device.
F-18-47
The machine may not recognize certain types of USB device or USB device from certain manufacturers. The machine looks for a USB deivce for a maximum of 60 sec after its main power is turned on, not indicating the menu if it fails to detect one. (If such is the case, obtain an appropriate USB device.) The SST cannot be run while the USB device is in use. (The machine will not communicate with the SST when it detects the presence of a USB device.)
18.3 Formatting the HDD

18.3.1 Formatting All Partitions
0001-1640
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN You will be settin up partitions on the HDD and formatting (initializing) them for use by the main controller.
18-34
Chapter 18
HDD
DOSDEV FSTDEV Formatting All partitions (only if in safe mode) DOSDEV2 FSTPDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 BOOTDEV DOSDEV5 HDD offerd as service part (partitions are not set up) HDD after formatting
F-18-48
18.3.2 Formatting All Partitions

0011-6167
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When formatting the HDD for all partition, there will be partitions on the HDD and all these partitions will be formatted (initialized) and the main controller will be made ready for use. All the information needed to set up the partition is found in the partition settings file (on the SST, 'HDFormat' in the folder 'iRCXXXX').
18-35
Chapter 18
HDD
[4] iRCXXXX HDFormat

FSTDEV TMP_GEN TMP_PSS TMP_FAX APL_SEND
[2]
APL_MEAP APL_GEN IMG_MNG PDLDEV FSTCDEV THUMDEV BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2
[1]
F-18-49
[3]
[1] HDD (service part; without partitions) [2] Formatting for full partition (only in safe mode) [3] HDD after formatting [4] Partition settings information file
18.3.3 Formatting Selected Partitions

0001-1642
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN You will be formatting (initializing) partitions that you have selected.
18-36
Chapter 18
HDD
FSTPDEV FSTDEV DOSDEV2 DOSDEV DOSDEV3 PDLDEV DOSDEV4 BOOTDEV DOSDEV5 Partitions on HDD *After formatting,requires downloading of the following: System,Language,RUI May be formatted in safe mode* May be formatted in normal mode
F-18-50
Formatting Partitions Using the SST

T-18-5
Name of partition selected by the SST FSTDEV
Partition that is formatted FSTDEV, FSTPDEV, DOSDEV, DOSDEV2
DOSDEV3
DOSDEV3
PDLDEV
PDLDEV
DOSDEV4
DOSDEV4
DOSDEV5
DOSDEV5
BOOTDEV
BOOTDEV
Reference: -4 partitions (FSTDEV, FSTPDEV, DOSDEV, DOSDEV2) are formatted at the same time. -Formatting of DOSDEV4 requires the use of the SST. The actual formatting of FSTDEV and PDLDEV takes place when the machine is started up the next time, and it takes as long as the following: Formatting of FSTDEV: 2 min (approx.) Formatting of PDLDEV: 5 min (approx.) Formatting of All partitions: 7 min (approx.) -The times vary according to the state of the HDD, and the progress of formatting is indicated by means of a progress bar.
18.3.4 Formatting Selected Partitions

0011-6168
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci When formatting the HDD for selected partitions, only those selected partitions will be initialized.
18-37
Chapter 18
FSTDEV TMP_GEN TMP_PSS
HDD
TMP_FAX APL_SEND APL_MEAP APL_GEN IMG_MNG PDLDEV FSTCDEV THUMDEV BOOTDEV BOOTDEV2
[1]
[2] [1]
F-18-51
[1] Formatting not possible [2] Formatting possible in safe mode
MEMO: Partition-based formatting is possible in service mode ( COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > HD-CLEAR ), with the exception of BOOTDEV.
18-38
Chapter 18
18.3.5 Formatting the Procedure

0005-4901
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1) Press [To next] under Downloading/Uploading.

Controlling Data
To Next
To Next

F-18-52
Ver. Info.
2) Select [HDForamt], and press [Connect].


iR XXXX

Model iR XXXX Unit HDFormat Interface Network
Connect
To Main Menu
F-18-53
18-39
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit HDFormat
Set host name
OK
F-18-54
4) The machiine's IP address is entered automatically; press [OK].

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit HDFormat
172.16.1.100
Save
Cancel
OK OK
Set host name
F-18-55
5) Press [OK] to start connection.
18-40
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit HDFormat Connected to 172.16.1.100
Set host name
OK
F-18-56
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Connecting to the Machine Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit HDFormat Connected to 172.16.1.100
Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit HDFormat
List of Partition Names of the Hard Disk Drive Partition / DOSDEV5 / DOSDEV4 / PDLDEV / DOSDEV3 / FSTDEV
OK
F-18-57
7) Press [Format].
18-41
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting a Job Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit HDFormat Connected to 172.16.1.100
List of Partition Names of the Hard Disk Drive Partition / DOSDEV5 / DOSDEV4
Selecting a HDFormat Job Click the job key for HDFormat.
Format the hard disk.
Format

F-18-58
8) Select the partition you want to format from the list, and press [start].
When formatting all partitions, press [start] under All partitions (enabled if in safe mode). 1. If formatting in Normal Mode (Power ON in response to 1+7)
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting Disk Partision Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit HDFormat Connected to 172.16.1.100
List of Partition Names of the Hard Disk Drive Partition / DOSDEV3 / F S T DEV
Selected Partition Partition /FSTDEV All Partitions
Start
Start Previous Screen

F-18-59
2. If formatting in Safe Mode (Power ON in response to 2+8)
18-42
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting Disk Partition Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit HDFormat Connected to 172.16.1.100
List of Partition Names of the Hard Disk Drive Partition /BOOTDEV
Selected Partition Partition / BOOTDEV
Start
All Partitions

F-18-60
9) When the machine indicates the message for confirmation for the last time, press [Start].
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Formatting the disk Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit HDFormat Connected to 172.16.1.100
Selected Partition Partition / FSTDEV
Final Confirmation Formatting
Stop
Start
Previous Screen
F-18-61
10) After the machine indicates the message to the indicate the end of formatting, press [OK].
18-43
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Formatting the disk Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit HDFormat Connected to 172.16.1.100
Selected Partition Partition / FSTDEV
Result of Formatting Formatting has ended.
OK
Previous Screen
F-18-62
11) Press [To Unit Selectioin Screen].
- If you have formatted all partitions or BOOTDEV, you must download the following: System, Language, RUI (If you fail to download these, an error(E602) will occur when the main power switch is turned ON.) - The actual formattin of FSTDEV and PDLDEV takes place when the machine is started up the next time, and it takes as long as the following: Formatting of FSTDEV: 2 min (approx.) Formatting of PDLDEV: 5 min (approx.) - Formatting of All partitions: 7 min (approx.) - The times vary according to the state of the HDD, and the progress of formatting is indicated by means of a progress bar. - You must not turn off the machine's main power switch while the progress bar is shown.
18.3.6 Formatting the Partitions

0011-6169
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Start up the SST. 2) Select the model [1] ('iRC6870') and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E) Interface Network IP Address 172.16.1.100 Target Selection Select the target. MFP
REGISTER REMOVE
Export Firm Selection C l i c k t h e i n t e r fa c e a n d c l i c k t h e < S TA RT > b u t t o n .
iRC6870 CONNECT
MFP USB iRC6870 ALL ALL_HDF Single
[1] [2]
USB
System Management
c:
START
CANCEL EXIT
F-18-63
3) Click [Format HDD].
18-44
Chapter 18
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iRC6870 SAFE Clear SelectableFirmware S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n . SelectableFir mware iRC6870 BOOT BROWSER DCON G3FAX LANGUAGE MEAPCONT R-CON RUI TTS iRCXXXX HDFormat KEY SDICT Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .
Firmware Version SYSTEM Active USen01 02n Hold USen01 02i
Download Firmware Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD
RCON XXxx3003 DCON XXxx0101 RUI XXja0101 XXen0101 MEAPCONT XXxx0102 LANGUAGE XXja0102 XXen0102 BOOTROM XXxx0102C G3FAX
Start
Shutdown Return to Main Menu
XXxx6101
F-18-64
4) Specify BOOTDEV partition or full partition (ALL), and click [Start].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iRC6870 SAFE Clear Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d . HDDFormat S e l e c t t h e p a r t i t i o n . t h e n c l i ck [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n .
ALL: Safe Mode ALL BOOTDEV Normal Mode
Start
Cansel Return to Main Menu
F-18-65
5) Click [Execute Formatting].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iRC6870 SAFE Clear Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d . HDDFormat E xe c u t e fo r m a t t i n g ?
ALL: Safe Mode ALL BOOTDEV Normal Mode
Start
Cancel Return to Main Menu
Confirmation
E xe c u t e Fo r m a t t i n g
Cansel
F-18-66
6) When formatting has ended, click [OK] to return to the Menu screen. 7) Move on to download the system software.
Whenever you have executed HDD formatting, be sure to download the system software; otherwise, an error (E602) will occur when the main power is turned on. If the system software is not registered, HDD FORMAT cannot be executed.
18.4 Downloading System Software

18.4.1 Batch Downloading 18.4.1.1 Overview
0011-6170
18-45
Chapter 18 You can collectively download various system software files at one time. The groups of system software files that may be downloaded in a batch are identified in the batch download information file, which is found on the System CD. Copy the file to the SST to enable the batch downloading mechanism. <Batch Download Information File> ALL: for downloading in normal mode Use it to collectively download all system software files that are found. Use it as when upgrading the system software. ALL_HDF: for downloading in safe mode Use it to collectively download system software files other than the following: - BOOT - DCON - RCON Use it when reinstalling the system software as after formatting the HDD. The foregoing 3 system software files may be downloaded using different steps.
18.4.1.2 Overview
0005-9073
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN If you need to download multiple pieces of system software, you can do so automatically. To make use of batch downloading, you need to have the following: -SST v2.01 or later -information file for batch downloading Files to Register in the SST -information file for batch downloading (SST v2.01 or later) -system software
Collective downloading information file -ALL -ALL_HDF SST V2.01 or later
Various system software -Boot -System -Language -RUI -G3FAX -DCON -RCON
Register all files to SST

iR XXXX
SST iR XXXX ALL ALL_HDF BOOT DCON SST iR XXXX BOOT DCON F-18-67
Batch Download (SST V2.01 or later)
all fields associated with ALL/ALL_HDF
Download (before SST V2.01)
1 file 1 file
-
MEMO: An information file for batch downloading: It contains appropriate combinations of system software versions to download. Once it is registered in the SST, the relevant files will be identified by the notation "ALL" and "ALL_HDF".
18-46
Chapter 18
ALL/ALL_HDF does not include the various system software itself. To register ALL/ALL_HDF, be sure also to register the various system software at the same time. Clicking 'ALL' or 'ALL_HDF' will download the following system software pieces that have been registerd in SST in sequence: 1. to HDD - System (system software) - Language (language module) - RUI (Remote UI) 2. to each PCB - Boot (boot program) - DCON (DC controller) - RCON (reader controller)
18.4.1.3 Downloading Procedure

0011-6171
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci Here, the discussions are in reference to batch downloading in safe mode. 1) Start up the SST. 2) Select the model [1] ('iRC6870') and the batch download information file [2] ('ALL_HDF').
iRC6870
[1] [2]
CONNECT
MFP USB
iRC3170 ALL ALL_HDF Single
USB
System Management
c:
START
CANCEL EXIT
F-18-68
18-47
Chapter 18 3) Make sure of the network settings, and click [Start Batch Download].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E) Interface Network IP Address 172.16.1.100 Batch List iRC5870/6870v1.12 rev.0 (iRC6870) Copy/PDL-Boot HDFormat Job 1.Wait 2.iRC6870_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register 3.iRC6870_LANGUAGE_XXen0112 4.iRC6870_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi 5.iRC6870_RUI_XXen0107 6.iRC6870_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered 7.iRC6870_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105 8.iRC6870_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered 9.iRC6870_TTS_XXen0111 10.iRC6870_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered 11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxc0101 12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxp0101 13.Wait 14.Wait 15.Wait 16.iRC6870_BOOT_XXxx0103 17.iRC6870_DCON_XXxx0102
REGISTER REMOVE
Model List Check the interface and click the <START> button.
iRC6870 CONNECT R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a System Management

iRC6870 ALL ALL_HDF Single
Star t Batch Download

Confirm firmware versions Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm Confirm Overwrite
CANCEL EXIT
F-18-69
4) Click [Resume].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E) Interface Network IP Address 172.16.1.100 Batch List Batch download list BATCH CONTROL
REGISTER REMOVE
Batch Result Batch download results
Job 1.Wait 2.iRC6870_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register 3.iRC6870_LANGUAGE_XXen0112 4.iRC6870_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi 5.iRC6870_RUI_XXen0107 6.iRC6870_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered 7.iRC6870_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105 8.iRC6870_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered 9.iRC6870_TTS_XXen0111 10.iRC6870_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered 11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxc0101 12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxp0101 13.Wait 14.Wait 15.Wait 16.iRC6870_BOOT_XXxx0103 17.iRC6870_DCON_XXxx0102
i R C 5 8 7 0 / 6 8 7 0 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0 (iRC6870) Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat
Click < RESUME > button to restart batch download.
Resume
Pause Finish
F-18-70
18-48
Chapter 18
MEMO: Refer to the Batch Download Result List [1] for the progress of downloading.
Batch List Batch download list
BATCH CONTROL
[1]
Results 1. 3.iRC6870_LANGUAGE_XXen0112_XXenv0112 5.iRC6870_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK
Processing batch download... To pause or finish this process, Click < PAUSE > or < FINISH > button in 5 seconds.
Resume
Pause Finish
F-18-71
5) The Download End screen appears for the system software files to be stored on the HDD. To stop downloading, click [Finish]; if you want to download BOOT, DCON, and RCON, on the other hand, click [Resume], and go to the next step.
BATCH CONTROL
Results 1. 3.iRC6870_LANGUAGE_XXen0102_XXenv0112 5.iRC6870_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK 7.iRC6870_MEAPCONT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0105 9.iRC6870_TTS_XXenv0111 : OK 11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcv0101 : OK 12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpv0101 : OK
Resume
Pause Finish
F-18-72
6) Turn off the machine's main power switch, and start it up in normal mode (turn on the main power switch while holding down the 1 and 7 keys; then, start download mode in service mode). Click [Resume].
BATCH CONTROL
Results 1. 3.iRC6870_LANGUAGE_XXen0102_XXenv0112 5.iRC6870_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK 7.iRC6870_MEAPCONT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0105 9.iRC6870_TTS_XXenv0111 : OK 11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcv0101 : OK 12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpv0101 : OK 13.HDD
Resume
Pause Finish
F-18-73
7) Click [Resume] to start downloading BOOT, DCON, and RCON.
18-49
Chapter 18
BATCH CONTROL
Results 1. 3.iRC6870_LANGUAGE_XXen0102_XXenv0112 5.iRC6870_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK 7.iRC6870_MEAPCONT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0105 9.iRC6870_TTS_XXenv0111 : OK 11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcv0101 : OK 12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpv0101 : OK 13.HDD 14.OFF 1+7
Resume
Pause Finish
F-18-74
18-50
Chapter 18 8) Click [OK].

BATCH CONTROL
All of the batch download processes have been completed.
Results 1. 3.iRC6870_LANGUAGE_XXen0102_XXenv0112 5.iRC6870_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK 7.iRC6870_MEAPCONT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0105 9.iRC6870_TTS_XXenv0111 : OK 11.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxcv0101 : OK 12.iRCXXXX_KEY_XXxpv0101 : OK 13.HDD 14.OFF 1+7 15. 16.iRC6870_BOOT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0103 : OK 17.iRC6870_DCON_XXxx0101_XXxxv0102 : OK
OK
Pause Finish
F-18-75
Turning Off the Power Do not turn off the power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD formatting, and download the system software once gain.

0005-9074
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN MEMO: You can use either of the following two approaches for a downloading session as long as you have selected the appropriate "downloading information file": - normal mode (turn on the main power while holding down 1+7): ALL - safe mode (turn on the main power while holding down 2+8): ALL_HDF
1. Items to Prepare Check to be sure that you have the following on hand: - PC to which SST v2.01 or later has been installed - iR C6800 System CD 2. Prepare for the Batch Download (Registering the Information File) 1) Start up the PC. 2) Start up the Service Support Tool. 3) Press [next] under [Controlling Data].
Ser vice Suppor t Tool Ver.2.01E (DLM0)
Controlling Data
To Next
To Next

F-18-76
Ver. Info.
4) Press [Registering Firmware].
18-51
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool Ver. 2.01E (DLM0) Selecting Data Control Item
Controlling Firmware
To register firmware, click the button on the right.
R e g i s t e r i n g F i r m wa r e
To remove stored firmware, click the button on the right.
R e m ov i n g F i r m wa r e
Controlling Buckup Data

To remove stored backup data, click the button on the right.
Controlling Backup Data
To Main Menu
F-18-77
5) Press [register from selected folder].

Service Support Tool Ver. 2.01E (DLM0) Registering Firmware
Stored firmware
The list shows the firmware stored on the computer. iR XXXX BOOT
Drive
C:
XXxx.Ver.01.10 XXxx.Ver.02.01 XXxx.Ver.03.01 XXxx.Ver.20.02 DCON XXxx.Ver.01.16 XXxx.Ver.01.25 XXxx.Ver.01.28
Registering firmware
To register the firmware from the NewROM folder, click the button on the right. To register the firmware from the CD-ROM, click the button on the right.
Register from NewROM folder Register from selected folder To Previous Screen
F-18-78
6) Select the folder containing the collective download information file, and press [Register].
18-52
Chapter 18

Select the drive Select the folder c: C:\ Serv Tool iR XXXX ALL
Search
Path to the selected folder Information file (*.ift) in the selected folder Information file was found. Click <Register> button
C:\ServTool\iR XXXX\ALL iR XXXX-ALL-USen5401.ift
Register
To Previous Screen
F-18-79
7) When 'Batch object files registration status' has appeared, press [OK].

Select the drive Select the folder c: Registratiion has been completed. iR XXXX_ALL_USenv5402 C:\ Serv Tool Batch object files registration status iR XXXX <No check : Not registered> ALL iR XXXX_SYSTEM_USen5402
Search
iR XXXX_Language_XXja5402 iR XXXX_Language_XXen5402 iR XXXX_RUI_XXja5307 iR XXXX_RUI_XXen5307 iR XXXX_MEAPCONT_XXxx5402 Path to the selected folder C:\ServTool\iR XXXX\ALL Information file (*.ift) in the selected folder Copying files
O K iR XXXX-ALL-USen5401.ift Register
To Previous Screen
F-18-80
If you choose "Register All" using version 2.01 of the SST, ALL will not be indicated under "Batch object files registration status" and all the check boxes of the field remain blank. Although this seems to indicate that no system software has been registered, the system software you have selected has been registered. (In the case of version 2.02 or later of the SST, the appropriate check boxes will be checked.) Making Sure That the Appropriate System Software Has Been Registered 1) On the Models and Units screen, select 'ALL' or 'ALL_HDF'. 2) Press [Batch Download]. 3) Check to see that the Batch Download File List screen indicates the paths to the individual pieces of system software.
18-53
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool Ver. 2.01E (DLM0) Batch Download Control Screen
Batch download list

"iR XXXX Ver2.01" "Common to C-Boot and N-Boot"
Job Wait "Turn off the copier, then turn on... Download iR XXXX_SYSTEM_USen2101 Download iR XXXX_Language_XXja2101 Download iR XXXX_Language_XXen2101 Download iR XXXX_DCON_XXxx2007 Wait "Turn off the copier, then turn on... Download iR XXXX_RUI_XXja1011 Path C:\ServTool\iR XXXX\SYSTEM\USenv21.01\iR C:\ServTool\iR XXXX\Langugage\XXjav21.01\iR C:\ServTool\iR XXXX\Langugage\XXenv21.01\i C:\ServTool\iiR XXXX\DCON\XXjav21.01\iR XX C:\ServTool\iR XXXX\RUI\XXjav1011\iR XXXX
Interface
Network
Confirm firmware versions Same Ver:Skip/Ver down:Confirm Confirm Overwrite
Device IP: 172.16.1.100
Start Batch Download To Unit Selection Screen

F-18-81
MEMO: Any piece of system software that has not been registered is indicated by an appropriate notation for its path. Be sure to use [Registering Firmware] for the work.
Batch download list

Job Wait "Turn off the copier, then turn on... Download iR XXXX_SYSTEM_USen2101 Download iR XXXX_Language_XXja2101 Download iR XXXX_Language_XXen2101 Download iR XXXX_DCON_XXxx2007 Wait "Turn off the copier, then turn on... Download iR XXXX_RUI_XXja1011 Path Not registerd Not registerd Not registerd Not registerd Not registerd
Interface
Network
Device IP: 172.16.1.100

F-18-82
3. Executing Batch Downloading MEMO: Although it varies from one type of system software to another, a typical session is executed as follows according to the mode you select: Be sure to use safe mode, however, if you have formatted the HDD. Downloading in Normal mode 1) Start up the PC and the copier (by turning on the main power while holding down 1+7). 2) Start downloading (SYSTEM, Language, Boot, DCON). 3) Turn off the copier, and start it up again in normal mode. 4) Start downloading (RUI, RCON). Downloading in Safe Mode 1) Start up the PC and the copier (but turning on the main power while holding down 2+8). 2) Start downloading (SYSTEM, Language, RUI). If you have formatted the HDD, the HDD will be in its initial state at this point. 3) Start downloading (BOOT). 4) Turn off the copier, and start it up again in normal mode.
18-54
Chapter 18 5) Start downloading (DCON). 6) Turn off the copier, and start it up against in normal mode. 7) Start downloading (RCON). The steps are following in the case of normal mode. 1) On the Main Menu screen of the Service Support Tool, press [To Next] under [Downloading/Uploading].
Ser vice Suppor t Tool Ver.2.01E (DLM0)
Controlling Data
To Next
To Next

F-18-83
Ver. Info.
2) Select the file of the model name you have previously checked; then, press [all]. 3) Press [Batch Download].

iR XXXX
iR XXXX ALL ALL_HDF BOOT DCON G3FAX HDFormat Language RCON RUI

Model iR XXXX Unit ALL
Batch Download
Click <Batch Download> button to start batch download.
To Main Menu
F-18-84
4) See that the Batch Download File List screen has appeared.
18-55
Chapter 18
Batch download list

Job Path Wait "Turn off the copier, then turn on... Download iR XXXX_SYSTEM_USen2101 Download iR XXXX_Language_XXja2101 Download iR XXXX_Language_XXen2101 Download iR XXXX_DCON_XXxx2007 Wait "Turn off the copier, then turn on... C:\ServTool\iR XXXX\RUI\XXjav1011\iR XXXX Download iR XXXX_RUI_XXja1011
Interface
Network
Device IP: 172.16.1.100

F-18-85
Check firmware versions The System will check the following two items, and indicate the result, permitting you to check the progress of downloading: - system software that has been installed to the machine - system software that will be downloaded There are 3 patterns to check: - Same Ver:Skip/Ver down:check - check - Overwrite
T-18-6 SST indication same version:skip / ver down: confirm b is older (Downgrade) check and then download
confirm check and download
overwrite download
a and b of same version
do not download
check and download
download
b is new (Upgrade)
download
download
download
Confirmation Message for Downgrading You will not be able to select a different version even if you select 'Skip'. (The session will move to the confirmation of the next system software.) In the case of version 2.01 of the SST, the notation 'Skip' is replaced by the notation 'Select Again'. The response, however, will be the same.
18-56
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.2.01En) Selecting Disk Partition Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM 172.16.1.100
List of System Software for the Target of Connection Language English Countr y/Region USA Ve r s i o n 01.25 State A
The selected systen has alreadybeen saved
Skip
Start
Selected Version Language English Country/Region USA Version 01.25
F-18-86
5) Press [Start Batch Download].

Batch download list

Interface
Network
Device IP: 172.16.1.100

F-18-87
6) See that the download mode to be used is indicated.When the mode has started, press [Resume].
18-57
Chapter 18
Batch download list

Interface "Did you
Network turn on copier by holding down 2 and 8 keys,and is copier Same Ver:Skip/Ver down:Confirm in download mode " Device IP: 172.16.1.100 Confirm Overwrite Click <Resume> button to restart.
Confirm firmware versions H
Finish
Pause
Start Batch Resume Download

F-18-88
7) See that the system software that has been registered is downloaded one after another. The System will show the progress (results) of downloading.
As necessary, e.g., when re-start is needed, an appropriate message will be indicated during a downloading session. In response, follow the instructions, and press [resume].
Batch download list

Result Download iR XXXX RUI XXjav1011 : Skip Download iR XXXX RUI XXenv1011 : Skip Download iR XXXX Boot XXxxv2002 : Firm registered Download iR XXXX RCON XXxxv2101 : Firm registerd
Interfaceoff "Turn
Network the copier, then turn on it withSame Ver:Skip/Ver down:Confirm 1 and 7 keys holding down. EnterIP: download mode in the service mode." Device 172.16.1.100 Confirm Overwrite Click <Resume> button to restart.
Confirm firmware versions H
Finish
Pause
Start Batch Resume Download

F-18-89
8) Follow the instructions given by the SST to download the RUI and RCON files as done in the previous step. 9) See the results of downloading; then, press [return to unit selection screen].
18-58
Chapter 18
Batch download list

Result Download iR XXXX RUI XXjav1011 : Skip Download iR XXXX RUI XXenv1011 : Skip Download iR XXXX Boot XXxxv2002 : Firm registered Download iR XXXX RCON XXxxv2101 : Firm registerd
All processes have been completed.

F-18-90
18.4.2 Downloading the System Software 18.4.2.1 Outline

0005-4902

PC for service
iR XXXX
Main controller block SST HDD iR XXXX System (System-Main) (System-Sub) (ICC Profile) Download BOOTDEV (System-Main) (System-Sub) (ICC Profile)
F-18-91
The system software comes in 3 types.(2 types for Japan)
In the case of Japan, appropriate model must be selected with reference to the presence/absence of support for NetWare.
T-18-7
Country 100V
SST installation model iRC6800
NetWare Not supported
Remarks Installed at time of shipment to iRC6800 (100V)
18-59
Chapter 18
Country
SST installation model iRC6800N
NetWare Supported
Remarks Installed at time of shipment to iRC6800N(100V)
120/230V
iRC6800
Supported
Installed at time of shipment to iR6800 (120/230V)/6800N(120/230V)
The machine's System software consists of multiple files. The SST handles these files in group, and transfers them in succession at time of downloading.
T-18-8 Notation Function
System-Main
Program for main CPU
System-Sub
Program for sub CPU
ICC Profile
color correction information file for PDL functions
18.4.2.2 Outline
0011-6172
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The system software comes in 2 types (one for use inside Japan and the other, outside Japan).

0005-4918
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN Making a Check Work (Jpn only) Press the Counter Check key [1] on the control panel to check the model name [2] indicated on the LCD.
[1]
F-18-92
When checking the model name, see the indication in parentheses.
18-60
Chapter 18
[2]
F-18-93
1. Procedure 1) Press [To Next] under Downloading/Uploading.

Controlling Data
To Next
To Next

F-18-94
Ver. Info.
2) Select the SYSTEM of the iRC6800, and press [Connect].
18-61
Chapter 18

iR XXXX

Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM Interface Network
Connect
To Main Menu
F-18-95

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM
Set host name
OK
F-18-96
4) The machine's IP address is entered automatically, press [OK].
18-62
Chapter 18
172.16.1.100
Save
Cancel
OK OK
Set host name
F-18-97

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM Connected to 172.16.1.100
Set host name
OK
F-18-98
18-63
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Connecting to the Machine Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM Connected to 172.16.1.100
Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM
OK
F-18-99
7) Press [System Software Download].

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting a Job Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM Connected to 172.16.1.100
Selecting a SYSTEM Job Click the job key for SYSTEM.
Write the system software to the machine. Recover the system software that has been backed up. Save the backup data of the machine. Write the saved backup data to the machine.
System Software Download Recover the Backup system Upload the Backup Data Download the Backup Data To Unit Selection Screen
F-18-100
8) Select the version to download, and press [Start].
18-64
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting a Version Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM Connected to 172.16.1.100
System Software Versions Available for Selection Click the appropriate version to select from Language among the available system software English versions. English Japanese Information on the selected version will be Japanese indicated at the bottom.
Country/Region USA USA Japan Japan
Version 01.27 01.28 01.27 01.28
Selected Version Language English Country/Region USA Version 01.28
F-18-101
9) When the results of the downloading are indicated, and press [OK].
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Downloading the SYSTEM Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM Connected to 172.16.1.100
Selected System Software Language English Result of Downloading The check sums of all files have matched. File Name iR XXXX-USen0128-B4B0.PRG iR XXXX-XXxx0128-A641-Sub.... iR XXXX-XXxx0128-E7FD-ICC.... Nor... B4B0 A641 E7FD Obta... B4B0 A641 E7FD Eval... OK OK OK Country/Region USA Version 01.28
OK
F-18-102
10) Press [To Unit Selection Screen].
Never turn off the machine while the following screen is shown. Otherwise writing to the HDD will be suspended, preventing the machine to start up.
18-65
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Downloading the SYSTEM Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM Connected to 172.16.1.100
Selected System Software Language English Country/Region USA Version 01.28
Progress of Writing to the Hard Disk Data has been transferred, and is now been written to the hard disk.
"Now, data writing. Don't power off target"

Time Remaining 251 sec
Stop
F-18-103
If the machine fails to start up, perform foramtting BOOTDEV using HDForamt and download the following: System, Language, RUI

0011-6173
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C 1) Start up the SST. 2) Select the model [1] ('iRC6870') and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
REGISTER REMOVE
iRC6870 CONNECT
[1] [2]
USB
System Management
c:
START
CANCEL EXIT
F-18-104
3) Select the version of the System software you want to download, and click [Start].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iRC6870 NORMAL Clear SelectableFirmware S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n . SelectableFir mware iRC6870 BOOT BROWSER DCON G3FAX LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RCON RUI SYSTEM USenv0112 TTS iRCXXXX HDFormat KEY SDICT Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .
Start
XXxx6101
F-18-105
18-66
Chapter 18 4) When downloading has ended, click [OK] to go back to the previous screen.
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iRC6870 NORMAL Clear SelectableFirmware D ow n l o a d i n g c o m p l e t e Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .
SelectableFir mware iRC6870 BOOT BROWSER DCON G3FAX LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RCON RUI SYSTEM USenv0112 TTS iRCXXXX HDFormat KEY SDICT
XXxx6101
F-18-106
5) Start up the machine. The subsequent procedure differs depending on the download mode. If the machine is in normal mode, 5-1) Click [Shutdown].
Start
XXxx6101
F-18-107
5-2) Click [Start Shutdown] so that the machine starts the shut-down sequence.
Message
Have you finished downloading and want to star t shutdown sequence for restar ting machine ?
Start Shutdown Cancel
F-18-108
5-3) Click [OK], and turn off and then back on the machine's main power switch.
Message
Follow the instructions shown on the machine for shutdown process. Click [OK] button to return to Main Menu.
F-18-109
If the machine is in safe mode, 5-1) Turn off and then back on the machine's main power switch. 6) When the machine starts up, it will write the system software to its HDD and flash ROM while showing the progress of writing on the control panel screen. When done, it will indicate a message asking you to turn off and then back on the power. In response, turn off and then back on the main power.
Turning Off the Power Do not turn off the machine's power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD
18-67
Chapter 18 formatting, and download the system software once again.
18-68
Chapter 18
MEMO: You can remove the downloaded system software before it is written to the HDD or flash ROM when the system software of a wrong version is downloaded.Start the main body in a safe mode when you turn off the power supply after it downloads it. To do so, go through the following before restarting the machine: 1) Click [Clear] [1].
[1]
SelectableFir mware iRC6870 BOOT BROWSER DCON G3FAX LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RCON RUI SYSTEM TTS iRCXXXX HDFormat KEY SDICT
XXxx6101
F-18-110
2) Click [Execute Clear] so that the system software that has been stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD will be removed.
Message
Do you want to clear whole firmware downloaded to the machine?
Execute Clear Cancel
F-18-111
3) Click [OK].
Message
The downloaded firmware has been deleted.
F-18-112
MEMO: When a connection is made, the upper right area of the SST screen will indicate the following device information [1]: - IP address - product name - download mode
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iRC6870 NORMAL Clear SelectableFirmware Select the fir mware to be downloaded. then click the [Star t] button. SelectableFirmware iRC6870 BOOT BROWSER DCON G3FAX LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RCON RUI TTS iRCXXXX HDFormat KEY SDICT Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .
[1]
D ow n l o a d F i r m wa r e Upload Data D ow n l o a d D a t a R e s t o r e B a ck u p S y s t e m Fo r m a t H D D
RCON XXxx3003 DCON XXxx0101 RUI XXja0101 XXen0101 MEAPCONT XXxx0102 LANGUAGE XXja0102 XXen0102 BOOTROM XXxx0102C G3FAX XXxx6101
Star t
Shutdown Retur n to Main Menu
F-18-113

0018-2582
iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Start up the SST. 2) Select the model [1] ('iRC6880') and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
18-69
Chapter 18
REGISTER REMOVE
iRC6870 CONNECT
[1] [2]
USB
System Management
c:
START
CANCEL EXIT
F-18-114
3) Select the version of the System software you want to download, and click [Start].
Start
XXxx6101
F-18-115
18-70
Chapter 18 4) When downloading has ended, click [OK] to go back to the previous screen.
SelectableFir mware iRC6870 BOOT BROWSER DCON G3FAX LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RCON RUI SYSTEM USenv0112 TTS iRCXXXX HDFormat KEY SDICT
XXxx6101
F-18-116
5) Start up the machine. The subsequent procedure differs depending on the download mode. If the machine is in normal mode, 5-1) Click [Shutdown].
Start
XXxx6101
F-18-117
5-2) Click [Start Shutdown] so that the machine starts the shut-down sequence.
Message
Have you finished downloading and want to star t shutdown sequence for restar ting machine ?
Start Shutdown Cancel
F-18-118
5-3) Click [OK], and turn off and then back on the machine's main power switch.
Message
Follow the instructions shown on the machine for shutdown process. Click [OK] button to return to Main Menu.
F-18-119
If the machine is in safe mode, 5-1) Turn off and then back on the machine's main power switch. 6) When the machine starts up, it will write the system software to its HDD and flash ROM while showing the progress of writing on the control panel screen. When done, it will indicate a message asking you to turn off and then back on the power. In response, turn off and then back on the main power.
18-71
18-72
Chapter 18
MEMO: You can remove the downloaded system software before it is written to the HDD or flash ROM when the system software of a wrong version is downloaded.Start the main body in a safe mode when you turn off the power supply after it downloads it. To do so, go through the following before restarting the machine: 1) Click [Clear] [1].
[1]
SelectableFir mware iRC6870 BOOT BROWSER DCON G3FAX LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RCON RUI SYSTEM TTS iRCXXXX HDFormat KEY SDICT
XXxx6101
F-18-120
2) Click [Execute Clear] so that the system software that has been stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD will be removed.
Message
Do you want to clear whole firmware downloaded to the machine?
Execute Clear Cancel
F-18-121
3) Click [OK].
Message
The downloaded firmware has been deleted.
F-18-122
MEMO: When a connection is made, the upper right area of the SST screen will indicate the following device information [1]: - IP address - product name - download mode
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iRC6870 NORMAL Clear SelectableFirmware Select the fir mware to be downloaded. then click the [Star t] button. SelectableFirmware iRC6870 BOOT BROWSER DCON G3FAX LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RCON RUI TTS iRCXXXX HDFormat KEY SDICT Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .
[1]
D ow n l o a d F i r m wa r e Upload Data D ow n l o a d D a t a R e s t o r e B a ck u p S y s t e m Fo r m a t H D D
RCON XXxx3003 DCON XXxx0101 RUI XXja0101 XXen0101 MEAPCONT XXxx0102 LANGUAGE XXja0102 XXen0102 BOOTROM XXxx0102C G3FAX XXxx6101
Star t
Shutdown Retur n to Main Menu
F-18-123
18.4.3 Downloading the RUI, and Language Module 18.4.3.1 Outline

0001-1648
18-73
Chapter 18
iR XXXX
Network LCD
RUI(en)
Version check
System RUI(it)
System Language
Language-XXen Language-XXit Language-XXja
RUI-XXen RUI-XXit RUI-XXja
RUI(ja)
Language
RUI
F-18-124 T-18-9
Network PC
Language used on control panel LCD
Check the versions of system software and language files. 1) if the versions are correct Selections may be made in Additional Function; Common settings>Language Switch
2) if the versions are not correct 'E744' will be indicated. Turn off and then on the main power switch so that the system language will be used.
T-18-10 Language used in RUI Select on the RUI. A specific language may be selected for a specific PC.
<Language Code>
<Language>
de
German
en
English
fr it ja
French Italian Japanese
18-74
Chapter 18
PC for service
iR XXXX
SST iR XXXX Language XXen XXja Main controller block HDD Download BOOTDEV Language-XXen RUI XXen XXja Language-XXja RUI-XXen RUI-XXja
F-18-125
18.4.3.2 Outline
0011-6174

iRC ----
Network LCD
RUI(en)
Version check
System
System Language
RUI(it)
Language-XXen Language-XXit Language-XXja
RUI-XXen RUI-XXit RUI-XXja
RUI(ja)
Language
RUI
F-18-126
Network PC
Control Panel LCD Display Language Check the version of System and Language. 1. If correct, You can switch languages by making the following selections in user mode: common settings>display language change. 2. If not correct, 'E744' will be indicated, and System Language will be used when the main power is turned off and then on.
RUI Display Language Select using the RUI. You can select a different language for a different PC.
18-75
Chapter 18
RUI Display Language <Language Code> <Language>
de
German
en
English
fr it ja
French Italian Japanese
PC for service
iRC ----
SST iRC ---Language XXen XXja Main controller block HDD Download BOOTDEV Language-XXen RUI XXen XXja Language-XXja RUI-XXen RUI-XXja
F-18-127

0005-4924
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1. Procedure Downloading may take place when the machine is in normal or in safe mode. Both Language and RUI files mey be downloaded in common among models. (here,the iRC6800 is selected) 2. describes downloading of the Language 1) Press [To next] under Downloading/Uploading.
18-76
Chapter 18
Controlling Data
To Next
To Next

F-18-128
Ver. Info.
2) Select [Language] for the iRC6800, and Press [Connect].


iR XXXX

Model iR XXXX Unit Language Interface Network
Connect
To Main Menu
F-18-129
18-77
Chapter 18
Set host name
OK
F-18-130
4) The machiine's IP address is entered automatically; press [OK].

172.16.1.100
Save
Cancel
OK OK
Set host name
F-18-131
5) Press [OK] to start conncection.
18-78
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Language Connected to 172.16.1.100
Set host name
OK
F-18-132
6) When the machine has made a connection and bring up the following screen, press [OK].
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Connecting to the Machine Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Language Connected to 172.16.1.100
Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Language
OK
F-18-133
7) Press [Language Download].
18-79
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting a Job Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Language Connected to 172.16.1.100
Selecting a Language Job Click the job key for Language
Write the Languate to the machine.
Language Download

F-18-134

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting a Version Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Language Connected to 172.16.1.100
Language Versions Available for Selection Click the appropriate version to select from among the available Language versions. Information on the selected version will be indicated at the bottom. Selected Version Language English Country/Region All
Language English Japanese
Country/Region All All
Versio 01.28 01.25
Version 01.28
F-18-135
9) When the results of the downloading are indicated. press [OK].
18-80
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Downloading the Language Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Language Connected to 172.16.1.100
Language List for the Target of Connection Language English Selected Language Language English Result of Downloading The check sums of all files have matched. File Name iR XXXX-XXen0128-4428-LANG.... Nor... 4228 Obta... 4228 Eval... OK Country/Region All Version 01.28 Country/Region All Version 01.28 State H
OK
F-18-136
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Downloading the Language Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Language Connected to 172.16.1.100
Language List for the Target of Connection Language English Selected Language Language English Country/Region All Version 01.28 Country/Region All Version 01.28 State H

Stop
F-18-137
If the machine fails to start up, perform foramtting BOOTDEV using HDForamt and download the following: System, Language, RUI

0011-6175
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Select the Language file or the RUI version to download. 2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"
18-81
18-82
Chapter 18
18.4.4 Downloading the SDICT 18.4.4.1 Outline

0011-6176
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The file SDICT is a dictionary file used to convert image data read by the reader unit into appropriate character code (OCR processing). The SDICT data is used in common among all iR color controllers, and is stored under 'iRCXXXX' in the SST. Its functions are used by the PDF generation function extension kit.

0011-6177
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Select the version of the SDICT file to download. 2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"
Turning Off the Power Do not turn off the machine's power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD formatting, and download the system software once again.
18.4.5 Downloading the MEAPCONT 18.4.5.1 Outline

0011-6178
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci MEAPCONT is a standard library used in conjunction with a MEAP application.

0011-6179
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Select the version of MEAPCONT to download. 2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"
18.4.6 Downloading the KEY 18.4.6.1 Outline

0011-6180
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The file KEY is a certificate and a key used for encrypted communications over the network. The KEY data is used in common among new iR color controllers, and is stored in "iRCXXXX" on the SST.
The file KEY is either of 2 types: XXxc and XXxp. Be sure to download both types.

0011-6181
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Select the version of the KEY file to download. 2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"
18.4.7 Downloading the TTS 18.4.7.1 Outline

0011-6182
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci TTS is voice dictionary data when the voice guidance board is installed.

0011-6183
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Select the version of the TTS file to download. 2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"
18-83
Chapter 18
18.4.8 Downloading the BROWSER 18.4.8.1 Outline

0011-6184
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The file BROWSER contains data used for indications on the Web browser, which is an optional function.

0011-6185
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Select the version of the BROWSER file to download. 2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"
18-84
Chapter 18
18.4.9 Downloading the BOOT Software 18.4.9.1 Outline

0005-4925

iR XXXX PC for service
SST
Main controller block
iR XXXX Boot
Download
Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
Copy Boot
(Flash ROM DIMM)
LIPS Boot
(Flash ROM DIMM)
PSPCL Boot
(Flash ROM DIMM)
- may be upgraded by DIMM replacement

F-18-138
There are as many as three types of Boot: - COPY Boot (100/120/230V model) - LIPS Boot (100V model) - PAPCL Boot (120/230V model) If you are upgrading using a downloading function, be sure to select "iRC6800" as the model name regardless of the type of Boot that is installed. There is no need to change the model name to suit the type of Boot.
If you fail to downloading files, you must replace the boot ROM.
18.4.9.2 Outline
0011-6186
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The file BOOT is used in common among various types of boot ROMs, and it is not possible to change the type of a boot ROM through downloading.
18-85
Chapter 18
PC for service iRC ----
Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
may be upgraded by DIMM replacement
C Boot ROM
SST
(Flash ROM DIMM)
iRC ---Download Boot
P Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
(100V machine only)
N Boot ROM
(Flash ROM DIMM)
(other than 100V machine)

F-18-139

0005-4926
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN Downloading may take place in normal mode (1+7 on keypad) or in safe mode (2+8 on keypad). 1. Procedure 1) Press [To next] under Downloading/Uploading.
Controlling Data
To Next
To Next

F-18-140
Ver. Info.
2) Select [BOOT] for the iRC6800 Series, and press [Connect].
18-86
Chapter 18

iR XXXX

Model iR XXXX Unit BOOT Interface Network
Connect
To Main Menu
F-18-141

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Boot
Set host name
OK
F-18-142
18-87
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Boot
172.16.1.100
Save
Cancel
OK OK
Set host name
F-18-143

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Boot Connected to 172.16.1.100
Set host name
OK
F-18-144
18-88
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Connecting to the Machine Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Boot Connected to 172.16.1.100
Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Boot
BootROM of the Target of Connection Language Common Country/Re... All Version 03.01
OK
F-18-145
7) Press [BootROM Download].

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting a Job Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Boot Connected to 172.16.1.100
Selecting a BootROM Job Click the job key for BootROM.
Write the boot program to the machine.
BootROM Download To Unit Selection Screen

F-18-146
18-89
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting a Version Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit Boot Connected to 172.16.1.100
BootROM Versions Available for Selection Click the appropriate version to select from among the available BootROM versions. Information on the selected version will be indicated at the bottom. Langua... Common Common Common Common Country/Re... All All All All Versi... 01.10 02.01 03.01 20.02
Selected Version Language Common Country/Region All Version 20.02
F-18-147
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Downloading the BOOT Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Language Common Unit Boot Version 03.01 Connected to 172.16.1.100
BootROM of the Target of Connection Country/Re... All
Selected BootROM Language Commom Result of Downloading The check sums of all files have matched. File Name Nor... Obta... F510 Eval... OK Country/Region All Version 20.02
iR XXXX-XXxx2002-F510-BOOT.... F510
OK
F-18-148
10) Press [To Unit Selection Screen]. 2. after Downloading When you upgrade the boot ROM, be sure to turn off and then on the machine's main power switch so that the new version will be validated.
18-90
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Downloading the BOOT Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Language Common Unit Boot Version 03.01 Connected to 172.16.1.100
BootROM of the Target of Connection Country/Re... All
Selected BootROM Language Common Country/Region All Version 20.02

Time Remaining 376 s e c
Stop
F-18-149
If the machine fails to start up, replace the boot ROM.

0011-6187
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci 1) Select the version of the BOOT file to download. 2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"
Turning Off the Power Do not turn off the power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine can fail to start up. If such is the case, replace the DIMM ROM.
18-91
Chapter 18
18.4.10 Downloading the Dcon and Rcon Software 18.4.10.1 Outline

0001-1660
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The DC controller/Reader controller files are downloaded by way of the main controller block.
Both DC controller PCB and the Reader controller PCB are wquipped with booy ROMs, permitting retries if downloading fails.
iR XXXX PC for service
SST
iR XXXX Dcon Rcon Download Downloading possible only in normal mode
Printer unit
Signal cable Main controller block
Reader unit
Flash ROM
CPU
Boot ROM Reader controller PCB
Power cable Flash ROM
CPU
Boot ROM DC controller PCB Power supply controller signal
Power supply unit
F-18-150
Unless the DC controller has started up normally, not permitting downloading of Reader controller files. (Because the power supply control signal will not be validated, not supplying the reader unit with power.)
18.4.10.2 Outline
0011-6188
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The file DCON/RCON is downloaded by way of the main controller block.
The machine has a separate boot ROM so that downloading may be tried multiple times following a failed downloading attempt for the DC controller PCB/reader controller PCB.
18-92
Chapter 18
iRC ---PC for service
SST
iRC ---Dcon Rcon Download
Printer unit
Signal cable
Reader unit
Flash ROM
CPU
Boot ROM Reader controller PCB
Power cable Flash ROM
CPU
Boot ROM DC controller PCB Power supply control sugnal
Power supply unit
F-18-151
You will not be able to download the RCON file unless the DC controller has started up normally (as the power control signal would remain disabled, and the reader unit will not be supplied with power).
18-93
Chapter 18

0005-4927
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1. Making Checks in Advance
No error code must be indicated. In the case of downloading Rcon files, the version of DC-CON must be indicated in service mode.
F-18-152
2. Procedure The following describes downloading of DC controller files. Both DC controller and Reader controller files are common among models. 1) Press [To next] under Downloading/Uploading.
Controlling Data
To Next
To Next

F-18-153
Ver. Info.
2) Select [DCON], and press [Connect].
18-94
Chapter 18

iR XXXX

Model iR XXXX Unit DCON Interface Network
Connect
To Main Menu
F-18-154

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit DCON
Set host name
OK
F-18-155
18-95
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit DCON
"If the following preparations have been made, click [OK]." "" "Turn off the machine." "Connect the PC and the machine using host namecable." The list indicates the last a network or IP address "Turn on the machine, and start the download mode." If you want to change, select an appropriate name from drop-down-list or input character directly Click [Save] to save the name for reuse. Click [Delete] to delete the name from list.
172.16.1.100
Save
Cancel
OK OK
Set host name
F-18-156

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit DCON Connected to 172.16.1.100
Set host name
OK
F-18-157
18-96
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Connecting to the Machine Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit DCON Connected to 172.16.1.100
Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit DCON
DCON List for the Target of Connection Language Common Country/Region All Version 01.26 State A
OK
F-18-158
7) Press [DCON Download].

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting a Job Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit DCON Connected to 172.16.1.100
Selecting a DCON Job Click the job key for DCON
Write the DCON to the machine.
DCON Download To Unit Selection Screen

F-18-159
18-97
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting a Version Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit DCON Connected to 172.16.1.100
DCON Versions Available for Selection Click the appropriate version to select from among the available Language versions. Information on the selected version will be indicated at the bottom. Selected Version Language Common Country/Region All
Language Common
Country/Region All
Versio 01.32
Version 01.32
F-18-160
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Downloading the DCON Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit DCON Connected to 172.16.1.100
DCON List for the Target of Connection Language Common Selected DCON Language Common Result of Downloading The check sums of all files have matched. File Name iR XXXX-XXxx0132-5C64-DCON... iR XXXX-XXxx0132-A0A8-DCON... Nor... 5C64 A0A8 Obta... 5C64 A0A8 Eval... OK OK Country/Region All Version 01.32 Country/Region All Version 01.26 State A
OK
F-18-161
10) Press [To Unit Selection Screen]. 3. after Downloading When you have downloaded DC controller or Reader controller files, be sure to turn off and then on the machine's main power switch.
-You cannot download the DC controller and Reader controller files in succession. -Never turn off the machine while the following screen is shown. Otherwise, writing to `DCON/RCON' can fail, indicated by the error code. DCON: E733 RCON: E732
18-98
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Downloading the DCON Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit DCON Connected to 172.16.1.100
DCON List for the Target of Connection Language Common Selected DCON Language Common Country/Region All Version 01.32 Country/Region All Version 01.26 State A

Stop
F-18-162
If an error code is indicated, be sure to download the appropriate system software.

0011-6189
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C
Here, downloading may take place in either normal mode or safe mode. Safe mode, however, will not permit collection of version information so that the DCON/ RCON file installed to the SST will necessarily be overwritten, creating a possibility of downgrading. The use of normal mode, therefore, is recommended. 1) Select the version of the DCON or RCON file to download. (In the case of RCON, select the file in 'iRC3100'.) 2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"

0018-2586
Here, downloading may take place in either normal mode or safe mode. Safe mode, however, will not permit collection of version information so that the DCON/ RCON file installed to the SST will necessarily be overwritten, creating a possibility of downgrading. The use of normal mode, therefore, is recommended. 1) Select the version of the DCON or RCON file to download. (In the case of RCON, select the file in 'iRC6880'.) 2) Go through the steps in "Downloading the System"
18.4.11 Downloading the FAX Software 18.4.11.1 Outline

0001-1664
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The G3fax files are downloaded by way of the main controller block.
18-99
Chapter 18
PC for service
iR XXXX G3Fax
(Flash ROM DIMM)
Upgrading may be by DIMM replacement
SST Downloading CPU G3Fax Main controller block G3Fax Board
iR XXXX
G3Fax
(Flash ROM DIMM)
Downloading possible only in normal mode

F-18-163
If downloading fails, the flash ROM DIMM must be replaced.

0005-4934
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN 1. Procedure Use normal mode for downloading. 1) Press [To next] under Downloading/Uploading.
Controlling Data
To Next
To Next

F-18-164
Ver. Info.
2) Select [G3FAX], and press [Connect].
18-100
Chapter 18

iR XXXX

Model iR XXXX Unit G3FAX Interface Network
Connect
To Main Menu
F-18-165

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX U n i t G 3 FA X
"If the following preparations have been made, click [OK]." "" "Turn off the machine." "Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable." "Turn on the machine, and start the download made."
Set host name
OK
F-18-166
18-101
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX U n i t G 3 FA X
"If the following preparations have been made, click [OK]." "" "Turn off the machine." "Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable." The list indicates the last host name or IP address "Turn on the machine, and start the download made." If you want to change, select an appropriate name from drop-down-list or input character directly. Click [Save] to save the name for reuse. Click [Delete] to delete the name from list.
172.16.1.100
Save
Cancel
OK OK
Set host name
F-18-167

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Checking the Start Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX U n i t G 3 FA X Connected to 172.16.1.100
"If the following preparations have been made, click [OK]." "" "Turn off the machine." "Connect the PC and the machine using a network cable." "Turn on the machine, and start the download made."
Set host name
OK
F-18-168
18-102
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Connecting to the Machine Selected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX U n i t G 3 FA X Connected to 172.16.1.100
Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX U n i t G 3 FA X
G3FAX List for the Target of Connection Language Common Countr y/Region All Ve r s i o n 51.02 State A
The information needed for the job has been obtained. Check the indicated descriptions, snd press [OK].
OK
F-18-169
7) Press [G3FAX Download].

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting a Job Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit G 3 FA X Connected to 172.16.1.100
G3FAX List for the Target of Connection Language Common Countr y/Region All Ve r s i o n 51.02 State A
Selecting a G3FAX Job Click the job key for G3FAX
Write the G3FAX to the machine.
G3FAX Download

F-18-170
18-103
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Slecting a Version Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit G 3 FA X Connected to 172.16.1.100
G3FAX List for the Target of Connection Language Common Countr y/Region All Ve r s i o n State
51.02
G3FAX Versions Available for Selection Click the appropriate version to select from among the available G3FAX versions. Information on the selected version will be indicated at the bottom. Selected Version Language Common Country/Region All
Language Common
Countr y/Region All
Ve r s i o n 51.02
Version 51.02
F-18-171
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Downloading the G3FAX Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit G 3 FA X Connected to 172.16.1.100
G3FAX List for the Target of Connection Language Common Selected G3FAX Language Common Result of Downloading The check sums of all files have matched. File Name iR XXXX-XXxx5102-A73D-G3FA... Nor... A73D Obta... A73D Eval... OK Country/Region All Version 51.02 Countr y/Region All Ve r s i o n 51.02 State A
OK
F-18-172
10) Press [To Unit Selection Screen]. 2. after Downloading When you have downloaded G3FAX filess, be sure to turn off and then on the machine's main power switch.
You cannnot download G3FAX files twice in succession. (Once downloading ends, the G3FAX board will be reset, leaving download mode.) Never turn off the machine while the following screen is shown. Writing to the flash ROM DIMM of the G3 fax board will fail, preventing the G3FAX board functions from operating normally.
18-104
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Downloading the G3FAX Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit G 3 FA X Connected to 172.16.1.100
G3FAX List for the Target of Connection Language Common Selected G3FAX Language Common Country/Region All Version 51.02 Countr y/Region All Ve r s i o n 51.02 State A

Stop
F-18-173
If the G3fax board fails to operate, be sure to replace the flash ROM DIMM onthe G3fax board.
18.5 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data

18.5.1 Outline
0001-1666
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN The machine's backup data is stored on the SRAM, DC controller PCB, and Reader controller PCB. Any backup data is selected with reference to its file name used when uploading it.
T-18-11
Backup data DC controller PCB
File name selected at time of uploading SramDCON.bin
Reder controller PCB For R&D
SramRCON.bin Sublog.txt
- Be sure not to download or upload the [Sublog.txt] in the field. - When replacing the DC controller PCB or the Reder controller PCB, it is a good idea to upload its data in advance, and download it after replacement so that parts counter reading and the like may be retained.
18-105
Chapter 18
Reader unit
PC for service SST iR XXXX System Sublog.txt SramDCON SramRCON SRAM
SramDCON.bina
Reader controller PCB EEPROM

SramRCON.bin
CPU
Printer unit
Upload / download Possible only in normal mode Main controller PCB (main)
Sub controller PCB
CPU
CPU
DC controller PCB
F-18-174
18.5.2 Outline
0011-6193
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci The file MeapBack is a MEAP application and its data stored on the HDD. The file SramDCON is data stored in the SRAM of the DC controller PCB. The file SramRCON is data stored in the EEPROM of the reader controller PCB.
Backup data File to select for downloading
For R&D
SramImg.bin (do not select this file)
MEAP application For R&D
MeapBack.bin (may be uploaded/downloaded in safe mode) Sublog.txt (do not select this file)
Reader controller PCB backup DC controller PCB backup
SramRCON (may be uploaded/downloaded in normal mode) SramDCON (may be uploaded/downloaded in normal mode)
MEMO: - If you are planning to replace the HDD or execute ALL or APL_MEAP formatting, it will be a good idea to upload the MeapBack file in advance and then download after the work by way of temporarily keeping away the MEAP application. - If you are planning to replace the DC controller PCB, you can upload the SramDCON file in advance, and download it after replacement so that the service mode and other settings may be inherited. - If you are planning to replace the DC controller PCB, you can upload the SramDCON file in advance, and download it after replacement so that the service mode and other settings may be inherited.
18.5.3 Uploading Procedure

0005-4936
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN Use normal mode (Power ON 1+7 on keypad) for uploading. 1) Press the [To Next] under Downloading/Uploading.
18-106
Chapter 18
Controlling Data
To Next
To Next

F-18-175
Ver. Info.
2) Select [SYSTEM] under iRC6800, and press [Connect].


iR XXXX

Connect
To Main Menu
F-18-176
18-107
Chapter 18
Set host name
OK
F-18-177
172.16.1.100
Save
Cancel
OK OK
Set host name
F-18-178
18-108
Chapter 18
Set host name
OK
F-18-179
OK
F-18-180
7) Press [Upload the Backup Data].
18-109
Chapter 18
F-18-181
8) Select the data to upload, and press [Start Storing]. - DC controller PCB: SramDCON.bin - Reader controller PCB: SramRCON.bin
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting Backup Data Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM Connected to 172.16.1.100
Backup Data Avanilable for Selection The list indicates the data that may be saved, from among data saved on he hard disk of the selected unit. Click the appropriate data to save.The selected data will be indicated at the bottom. Selected Backup Data Data Type SramDCON.bin Language Japanese
Name Sublog.txt "Sublog Data"" SramRCON.bin "R-CON BackupData" SramDCON.bin "DC- CON BackupData"
Country/Region Japan
Version 01.28
Start Storing Previous Screen

F-18-182
9) When uploading has ended, enter a file name to use, and press [Save].
18-110
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Uploading Backup Data Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM Connected to 172.16.1.100
List of System Software for the Target of Connection Language Japanese Country/Region Japan Ve r s i o n 01.28 State A
Selected Backup Data Data Type SramDCON.b Language Japanese Country/Region Version Japan 01.28
State of Saving Select the drive, and enter the file name.
S ave
c: File name SramDCON-1
Discard
F-18-183
10) When the file has been saved, press [OK].

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Uploading Backup Data Connected Model and Unit Connected to 172.16.1.100
Model
iR XXXX
Unit
SYSTEM
Result of Uploading The backup data has been saved. c:
OK
File name SramDCON-1208-1
F-18-184
18.5.4 Uploading Procedure

0011-6196
- When uploading the data, do not select 'SramImg.bin' or 'Sublog.txt'. - The machine must be in normal mode for uploading/downloading SramDCON or SramRCON. - The machine must be in safe mode when uploading/downloading MeapBack. [In the Case of MeapBack] 1) Start up the SST. 2) Select the model [1] and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
18-111
Chapter 18
REGISTER REMOVE
iRC6870 CONNECT
[1] [2]
USB
System Management
c:
START
CANCEL EXIT
F-18-185
3) Click [Upload Data].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iRC6870 SAFE Clear SelectableFirmware S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n . SelectableFir mware iRC6870 BOOT BROWSER DCON G3FAX LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RCON RUI SYSTEM TTS iRCXXXX HDFormat KEY SDICT Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .
Start
XXxx6101
F-18-186
18-112
Chapter 18 4) Select 'MeapBack.bin', and click [Start].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iRC6870 SAFE Clear FileSave Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d . SelectableDate Select the data to be uploaded. then click the [Start] button.
File Name
Download Firmware
Memo
SramImg.bin MeapBack.bin Sublog.txt
Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD

backup of meap
c:
Start
F-18-187
5) Type in the name of the file to store and, as necessary, a brief description; then, click [Save].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iRC6870 SAFE Clear FileSave Enter desired file name. then click the [Save] button. Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d . SelectableDate Uploading complete
File Name MeapBack.bin Memo Memo
SramImg.bin MeapBack.bin Sublog.txt
backup of meap
c:
Save
Discard Return to Main Menu
F-18-188
6) Click [OK].
18-113
Chapter 18
The file SramRCON, SramDCON, or MeapBack may only be downloaded to their source machine.
Reader controller PCB Service PC SST iRC ---System

EEPROM
Printer unit
Uploading/Downloading Main controller PCB
Meapback (safe mode only) SramRCON (normal mode only) SramDCON (normal mode only)
DC controller PCB HDD SRAM

Meapback.bin
Main controller unit

F-18-189
18-114
Chapter 18
18.5.5 Downloading Procedure

0005-4937
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN Use normal mode (Power ON 1+7 on keypad) for downloading. 1) Press the [To Next] under Downloading/Uploading.
Controlling Data
To Next
To Next

F-18-190
Ver. Info.
2) Select [SYSTEM] under iRC6800, and press [Connect].


iR XXXX

Connect
To Main Menu
F-18-191
18-115
Chapter 18
Set host name
OK
F-18-192
172.16.1.100
Save
Cancel
OK OK
Set host name
F-18-193
18-116
Chapter 18
Set host name
OK
F-18-194
OK
F-18-195
7) Press [Download the Backup Data].
18-117
Chapter 18
F-18-196
8) Select the file to download, and press [Start Writing].

Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Selecting Backup Data Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM Connected to 172.16.1.100
Backup Data Avanilable for Selection The list shows data that may be downloaded. Click the data to download to select.infomartion on the selected data will be indicated at the bottom. Selected Backup Data Model Unit iR XXXX SYSTEM File Name SramDCON-1208-1.upd
c: Name S ra m D C O N - 1 2 0 8 . u p d S ra m D C O N - 1 2 0 8 - 1 . u p d
Language Japanese Data Type SramDCON.bin
Country/Region Version Japan 01.28 Data 12/8/2003 Time 4:39:02 PM
Start Wrinting Previous Screen

F-18-197
9) When uploading has ended, press [OK].
18-118
Chapter 18
Service Support Tool DLM4 (ver.1.81En) Downloading Backup Data Connected Model and Unit Model iR XXXX Unit SYSTEM Connected to 172.16.1.100
Result of Downloading The backup data has been transferred.
OK
F-18-198
18.5.6 Downloading Procedure

0011-6197
- The machine must be in normal mode for uploading/downloading the file SramDCON or SramRCON. - The machine must be in safe mode for uploading/downloading the file MeapBack. [In the Case of MeapBack] 1) Start up the SST. 2) Select the model [1] ('iRC3170') and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
REGISTER REMOVE
iRC6870 CONNECT
[1] [2]
USB
System Management
c:
START
CANCEL EXIT
F-18-199
3) Click [Download Data].
18-119
Chapter 18
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iRC6870 SAFE Clear SelectableFirmware S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n . SelectableFir mware iRC6870 BOOT BROWSER DCON G3FAX LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RCON RUI SYSTEM TTS iRCXXXX HDFormat KEY SDICT Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .
Start
XXxx6101
F-18-200
4) Select the data to download, and click [Start].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iRC6870 SAFE Clear SelectableFile S e l e c t t h e f i l e t o b e d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n . Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d . DownloadedFile
c:
MeapBack.bin.upd
Series:iRC5870 Serial No:F641G002 DataType:backup of meap Date:2005/ 04/ 18 20:13:33 Memo:Memo
Start
F-18-201
5) When downloading has ended, click [OK] to return to the previous screen.
18.6 Version Upgrade using USB

18.6.1 Overview of Menus and Functions
0011-6199
F-18-202
Downloading the System Software [1]: Upgrade (Auto) Use it to download/write the system software. (auto) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) Use it to download the system software. (Confirmation execution when version is downed the same version) [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) Use it to download the system software. (all overwrite) Formatting the HDD (only in safe mode) [4]: Format HDD (in the presence of BOOTDEV) Use it to format the HDD for BOOTDEV partition. [4]: Format HDD (ALL) (in the absence of BOOTDEV) Use it to format the HDD for full partition. Other Functions [5]: Backup Do not use it. (for use by R&D only) [6]: Restore former version (in the presence of a backup of the system software)
18-120
Chapter 18 Use it to restore the backup of the system software. [7]: Clear downloaded files Use it to remove the system software immediately before downloading (before writing). [Stop]: Shutdown (in normal mode) Use it to execute shut-down instructions. To select/execute a function, use the keys on the control panel.
18-121
Chapter 18
18.6.2 Downloading/Writing the System Software (auto)

0011-6200
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [1]: Upgrade (AUTO) The system software on the HDD and that in the USB device are compared. If the latter is new, it will be downloaded to the temporary storage area of the HDD. At the end of the downloading, the machine restarts on its own to write the downloaded system software to the system area of the HDD and the flash ROM. <Procedure> 1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power. 2) Connect the USB device to the sub port. 3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe). 4) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [1] -> [0]: execute download / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen
F-18-203
5) While downloading is under way, the control panel screen shows its progress. At the end of the downloading, the machine restarts on its own to start writing to the system area of the HDD or the flash ROM. - Screen Showing the Progress of Downloading
- Screen Showing the Progress of Writing to the HDD
F-18-204
6) At the end of writing to the HDD, a message will appear asking you to turn off and then back on the power. Turn off the power, remove the USB device, and turn the power back on.
F-18-205
18.6.3 Downloading the System Software (Confirmation execution when version is downed the same version)
0011-6201
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) The system software on the HDD is compared against that in the USB device. Those system files that are newer will then be downloaded to the temporary storage area of the HDD. If the system software in the USB is of the same or older version, a message will appear on the screen, offering a choice. Unlike menu item [1], the machine will not restart on its own. When you turn it off and then back on manually, it will start to write the system software when it starts up. <Procedure> 1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power. 2) Connect the USB device to the USB port. 3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe). 4) Go through the instructions indicated on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [2] -> [0]: execute download / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen
18-122
Chapter 18
F-18-206
MEMO: If the system software in the USB device is found to be of the same or older version, a message will appear asking you if you want to overwrite. Go though the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [0]: overwrite / other than [0]: do not overwrite
F-18-207
5) While downloading is under way, the control panel screen shows its progress. At the end of downloading, a message will appear asking you to press a key. Press the appropriate key. If the machine is in normal mode, it starts the shut-down instructions.
F-18-208
6) When a message appears asking you to turn off the power, turn off the main power switch, remove the USB device, and turn on the main power switch. 7) Upon start-up, the machine starts to write the system software to the system area of the HDD or the flash ROM. At the end of writing to the HDD, a message will appear asking you to turn off and then back on the power. Turn off and then back on the main power switch.
F-18-209
18.6.4 Downloading the System Software (all overwriting)

0011-6202
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) The system software in the USB device will overwrite the software on the HDD regardless of the version of the latter. Unlike menu item [1], however, the machine will not restart on its own at the end of downloading. When the power is turned off and then back on manually, the machine starts writing the system software. <Procedure> 1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power. 2) Connect the USB device to the USB port. 3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe). 4) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [3] -> [0]: execute download / other that [0]: go back to Menu screen
18-123
Chapter 18
F-18-210
5) While downloading is under way, the control panel screen shows its progress. At the end of downloading, a message will appear asking you to press a key. Press the appropriate key. If the machine is in normal mode, the shut-down sequence will start.
F-18-211
6) When a message appears asking you to turn off the power, turn off the main power, remove the USB device, and turn the main power switch back on. 7) Upon start-up, the machine starts writing the system software to the system area of the HDD or the flash ROM. At the end of writing, a message will appear asking you to turn off and then back on the power. Turn off and then on the main switch.
F-18-212
18-124
Chapter 18
18.6.5 Formatting the HDD

0011-6203
This function is available only when the machine is in safe mode. [4]: Format HDD (in the presence of BOOTDEV) Use it to format the HDD for BOOTDEV partition. [4]: Format HDD (ALL) (in the absence of BOOTDEV, as when replacing with new HDD) Use it to format the HDD for full partition. <Procedure> Go through the following to format the HDD for BOOTDEV partition:
1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power. 2) Connect the USB device to the USB port. 3) Start up the machine in safe mode. 4) Follow the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [4] -> [0]: go to Partition Selection screen / other that [0]: go back to Menu screen
F-18-213
5) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [1] -> [0]: execute BOOTDEV formatting / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen [C]: go back to Menu screen
F-18-214
6) At the end of formatting, a message will appear asking you to press a key. Press any key to go back to the Men screen.
F-18-215
7) Start downloading the system software. For instructions, see "Downloading the System Software."
18.6.6 Other Functions

0011-6204
iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci [5]: Backup
This function is for R&D purposes only. Do not use it. [6]: Restore former version (in the presence of backup of system software) Use it to restore the backup of the system software while saving the system software that is current as a backup.
18-125
Chapter 18
<Procedure> 1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power. 2) Connect the USB device to the USB port. 3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe). 4) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [6] -> [0]: initialize / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen After execution, a message will appear asking you to turn off and then on the power.
F-18-216
5) Turn off the main power switch, remove the USB memory, and turn on the main power switch. [7]: Clear downloaded files Use it to remove the system software files that have been saved in the temporary storage area of the HDD. Use it if you want to remove the files without writing them to the HDD after downloading (menu [2] and [3]). <Procedure> 1) The power supply is turned off after the download of the system software by menu 2 or 3 is completed, and it starts in a safe mode with the USB memory connected. 2) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press an appropriate key. [7] -> 10: execute / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen Upon execution, the Menu screen will return.
F-18-217
[Stop]: Shutdown (in normal mode only) Use it to start up the shut-down sequence. <Procedure> 1) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press an appropriate key. [Stop]->[0]: execute/ other than [0]: go to Menu screen The shut-down sequence will be executed, and a message will appear asking you to turn off the power.
F-18-218
2) Turn off the main power switch, and remove the USB device.
18-126
Chapter 19 Service Tools
Contents
Contents
19.1 Service Tools..............................................................................................................................................................19-1
19.1.1 Special Tools............................................................................................................................................................................ 19-1 19.1.2 Solvents and Oils ..................................................................................................................................................................... 19-2
Chapter 19
19.1 Service Tools

19.1.1 Special Tools
0003-9975
iR C6800C / iR C6800CN / iR 5800C / iR 5800CN / iR 5870Ci / iR 5870C / iR 6870Ci / iR 6870C / iR C5880 / iR C6880 / iR C6880Ci / iR C5880Ci In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine:
T-19-1 Tool name Digital multimeter Tool No. FY9-2002 Ctgr A Appearance Remarks Use for electrical checks; for adjustment of laser power in combination with the laser power checker.
Cover switch
TKN-0093
Tester extension pin
FY9-3038
Used as a probe extension when making electrical checks.
Tester extension pin (L-shaped)
FY9-3039
Used as a probe extension when making electrical checks.
CA1 test Sheet
FY9-9030
Used for adjusting/checking images.
Loupe
CK-0056
Used for checking images.
Mirror positioning tool
FY9-3009-040
Used for positioning mirror mounts.
19-1
Chapter 19
Tool name Routing mirror cleaning tool Tool No. FL2-2474 Ctgr Appearance Remarks Used for cleaning routing mirror
Reference: Ctgr A: Must be kept by each service engineer. B: Must be kept by each group of about five engineers. C: Must be kept by each warkshop.
19.1.2 Solvents and Oils

0003-9976
T-19-2 Item Alcohol Uses Composition -Do not bring near fire. -Procure locally. -Substitute: IPA(isopropy alcohol) Remarks
Cleaning; e.g., -Fluoride-family hydrocarbon glass, plastic, rubber; external -Alcohol covers. -Surface activating -Water
Solvent
Cleaning; e.g., metal; oil or toner stain.
-Fluoride-family hydrocarbon -Chlorine-family hydrocarbon -Alcohol
-Do not bring near fire. -Procure locally. -Substitute: MEK -MO-138S -Tool No: CK-0427 (500 g/can)
Heat-resisting grease
Lubrication; e.g., fixing drive -Mineral oil-family lithium soap areas. -Molybdenum disulfide
Lubricating oil
-Mineral oil (paraffin-family)
-Tool No: CK-0524 (100 cc)
Lubricating oil
Lubrication; e.g., drive areas, -Silicone oil friction areas.
-Tool No: CK-0551 (20 g)
Lubricating oil (EM-50L)
Lubrication; e.g., gears.
-Special oil -Special solid lubricating agent -Lithium soap
-Tool No: HY9-0007
Lubricating oil
Lubrication; e.g., scanner rail. -Silicone oil
-Tool No: FY9-6011 (50 cc)
Conducting grease
Lubrication; e.g., edge of secondary transfer roller, drum heater sliding area.
-Fluorine poly wthyl -Polytetra fluorune ethylene
-Tool No: FY9-6008 (75 g)
Lubricant
Lubricating:e.g., Fluorine graphite photosensitive drum cleaning blade.
-Tool No: TKN-0480
19-2
Sep 8 2007

Ir6800c Series SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ir6800c Series SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ir6800c Series SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

1.2 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................1- 9

1.2.2 Using the Machine................................................................................................................................................. 1- 11

1.2.3 User Mode Items ................................................................................................................................................... 1- 18

1.2.4 User Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 1- 27

1.2.5 Safety .................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 29

1.2.6 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 31

1.2.7 Function List .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 34

1.2.8 RDS Specification ..................................................................................................................................................1- 44

Chapter 2 Installation 2.1 Making Pre-Checks .................................................................................................................................... 2- 1

2.2 Unpacking and Installation ......................................................................................................................... 2- 7

2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ................................................................................................. 2- 36

2.4 Troubleshooting the Network ................................................................................................................... 2- 37

2.5 Relocating the Machine ............................................................................................................................ 2- 37

2.5.1 Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 2- 37

2.6 Installing the Card Reader ........................................................................................................................2- 38

2.7 Installing the NE Controller-A1 .................................................................................................................2- 41

2.8 Installing the Original Tray ........................................................................................................................2- 42

2.9 Installing the Key Switch Unit ...................................................................................................................2- 44

2.10 Installing the Reader Heater ...................................................................................................................2- 47

2.11 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit ............................................................................................................2- 52

Chapter 3 Basic Operation 3.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................3- 1

3.2 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................3- 5

Chapter 4 Main Controller 4.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................4- 1

4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry........................................................................................................4- 4

4.3 Start-Up Sequence ................................................................................................................................... 4- 10

4.4 Actions when HDD Error .......................................................................................................................... 4- 14

4.5 Image Processing..................................................................................................................................... 4- 21

4.6 Flow of Image Data .................................................................................................................................. 4- 29

4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................................. 4- 36

4.7.2 Main Controller PCB (main) ...................................................................................................................................4- 38

4.7.3 Main Controller PCB (sub) .....................................................................................................................................4- 41

4.7.4 Expansion Bus PCB...............................................................................................................................................4- 43

4.7.5 SRAM PCB ............................................................................................................................................................4- 44

4.7.5.2 Removing the SRAM Board................................................................................................................................................... 4- 44

4.7.6 UFR Board............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 44

4.7.7 Ethernet Board ...................................................................................................................................................... 4- 45

4.7.9 Controller Fan........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 48

Chapter 5 Original Exposure System 5.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................5- 1

5.2 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................5- 4

5.3 Various Control Mechanisms......................................................................................................................5- 6

5.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction ........................................................................................................................................... 5- 7

5.3.3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp ............................................................................................................................... 5- 7

5.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals ................................................................................................................................ 5- 8

5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control ................................................................................................................................................ 5- 11

5.3.6 Image Processing.................................................................................................................................................. 5- 13

5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................................5- 15

5.4.1 Copyboard Glass ...................................................................................................................................................5- 15

5.4.2 Exposure Lamp......................................................................................................................................................5- 16

5.4.3 Reader Controller PCB ..........................................................................................................................................5- 18

5.4.4 Interface PCB.........................................................................................................................................................5- 21

5.4.5 Inverter PCB ..........................................................................................................................................................5- 22